JM 


^ 


J«C»*'^ 


^i  iU  '^htoiofikat  ^ 


^ 


^'^ti.. 


PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


% 


% 


Presented    by  "X)r-.    ^  .  c^.~TV\-\-Vor^ 
Division  ....rJ...":i:.s)  ^^  \ 


Section  ...»..SJX... 


l-^.rt^W-*^     •. 


A  I        APR   9    1914 


GRAMMAK 


OF   THE 


HEBREW  LANGUAGE. 


BY 

WILLIAM   Hl^^NRY   GREEN, 

PROFESSOR  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY  AT  PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


iaeto  iStJition. 


CAREFULLY  REVISED  THROUGHOUT 
AND  THE  SYNTAX  GREATLY  ENLARGED. 


NEW   YORK: 

JOHN  WILEY  AND  SONS, 

53  East  Tenth  Street, 

1892. 


CoPTEiGHT,  1888,  by 
JOHN  WILEY  &  SONS. 


PREFACE. 


The  twenty-seven  years,  which  have  elapsed  since 
the  first  publication  of  this  Grammar,  have  been  exceed- 
ingly fruitful  in  the  philological  and  exegetical  study  of 
the  Old  Testament.  And  important  progress  has  been 
made  toward  a  more  thorough  and  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  grammatical  structure  of  the  Hebrew  language. 
This  edition  of  the  Grammar  has  been  carefully  revised 
throughout  that  it  may  better  represent  the  advanced 
state  of  scholarship  on  this  subject.  Nearly  every  page 
exhibits  corrections  or  additions  of  greater  or  less  conse- 
quence. And  the  Syntax  particularly,  which  was  not 
fully  elaborated  before,  has  been  greatly  enlarged,  and 
for  the  most  part  entirely  rewritten.  The  plan  of  the 
Grammar,  the  method  of  treatment,  and  in  general  the 
order  of  the  sections  are  unchanged.  And  little  occasion 
has  been  found  to  alter  the  more  general  and  comprehen- 
sive statements,  which  are  distinguished  by  being  printed 
in  large  type.  The  changes  are  chiefly  in  the  addition 
of  fuller  details  enlarging  and  multiplying  the  para- 
graphs in  small  type. 

The  principle  of  eschewing  all  supposititious  forms  and 
adducing  none  but  such  as  really  occur  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, has  been  steadfastly  adhered  to  as  heretofore,  with 
the  view  of  rigorously  conforming  all  rules  and  examples 
to  the  actual  phenomena  of  the  language.  The  text  of 
Baer  is  preferred  so  far  as  published,  the  disputed  ortbo- 
phonic  Daghesh-forte  excepted,  though  it  is  recog- 
nized and  its  rules  are  stated.     In  the  discussion  of  the 


IV  PREFACE. 

poetic  accents  free  use  lias  been  made  of  the  elaborate 
treatises  of  Baer  and  Wickes ;  and  the  names  wliicli  they 
employ  are  given  as  well  as  those  which  previously  were 
more  familiar.  The  intricate  rules  for  the  employment 
of  Methegh  are  also  drawn  from  Baer.  The  position  of 
the  accent  is  indicated  as  in  previous  editions  by  a  small 
vertical  stroke  above  all  Hebrew  words  except  mono- 
syllables. 

The  convenience  of  students  has  been  consulted  in 
removing  the  paradigms  of  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns 
from  the  body  of  the  volume  and  placing  thenj  together 
at  the  end.  A  new  paradigm  has  been  introduced,  afford- 
ing a  succinct  view  of  the  formation  of  nouns  of  different 
classes,  with  their  respective  significations.  The  declen- 
sions of  nouns  have  been  simplified  by  an  arrangement 
which  corresponds  at  once  with  their  etymological  struc- 
ture and  with  the  vowel  changes  to  which  they  are 
severally  liable.  While  every  part  of  the  Syntax  is 
much  more  fully  developed  than  before,  sj)ecial  atten- 
tion has  been  paid  to  the  use  of  the  tenses,  which  is  so 
thoroughly  discussed  in  the  admirable  treatise  of  Dr. 
Driver.  The  old  names  preterite  and  future  are,  for 
reasons  given  on  pp.  299-302,  preferred  to  perfect  and 
imperfect,  which  are  now  so  generally  adopted ;  but  the 
latter  are  used  in  conjunction  with  the  former  for  the 
convenience  of  those  who  like  them  better.  The  various 
kinds  of  compound  sentences,  involving  relative,  condi- 
tional, circumstantial,  and  co-ordinate  clauses,  receive  the 
attention  which  is  due  to  their  peculiar  character  and 
separate  importance.  The  different  rules  and  statements 
of  the  Grammar,  and  particularly  of  the  Syntax,  are 
illustrated  and  confirmed  by  a  copious  citation  of  pas- 
sages in  which  they  are  exemplified.  Full  indexes,  as 
before,  accompany  the  Grammar  to  facilitate  its  use. 

Pkinceton,  August  22,  1888. 


COK"TE]SrTS. 


PAKT  I.— ORTHOGRAPHY. 
Divisions  of  Grammar,  §1. 

OETHOGEAPHIO     SYMBOLS. 

The  Letters. — Alphabet,  §  2  ;    Sounds,  §  3  ;    Double  forms,  §  4 ;    Names, 
§  5  ;     Order,  §  6  ;     Classification,  §  7 ;     "Words  never  divided,  §  8 ; 
Abbreviations  and  Signs  of  Number,  §  9. 
The  Vowels. — Masoretic  Points,  §10;    Vowel  Letters,  §11;    Signs  for  the 
Vowels,  §12;    Mutual  Relation  of  this  twofold  Notation,  §§13,  14; 
Pure  and  Diphthongal  Vowels,  §  15. 
Sh'va,  silent  and  vocal,  simple  and  compound,  §  16. 
Pattahh  Furtive,  §17. 
Syllables,  §  18. 

Arnbiguous  Signs. — Hliirik,  Shurek,  and  Kibbuts,  §19.1;   Kamets  and 
Kamets-Hhatuph,  §  19.  2 ;    Silent  and  Vocal  Sh'va,  §20. 
Points  affecting  Consonants: — Daghesh-lene,  §§21,  22. 

Daghesh-forte,  §23;  ditferent  kinds,  §24;  omission  of,  §25. 
Mappik,  §26, 
Raphe,  §27. 
Points   attached    to   "Words. — Accents,   their   design,   §  28 ;    forms  and 
classes,  §29;    like  forms  distinguished,  §30;   poetic  accents,  §31; 
position  as  determined  by  the  character  of  the  syllables,  §  32. 1 ;  in 
uninflected  words,  §  32.  2.  3  ;  with  affixes,  suffixes  and  prefixes,  §  33 ; 
use  in  distinguishing  words,  §34;  shifted  in  special  cases,  §35. 
Consecution  of  the  Accents  in  Prose. — Clauses  and  their  subdivisions, 
§  36 ;  tabular  view,  §  37 ;  explnnation  of  the  table,  §  38 ;  adaptation  of 
the  trains  of  accents  to  sentences,  §  39. 


VI  CONTENTS. 

Poetic  Consecution. — Clauses  and  tlieir  subdivisions,  §40;  tabular  view 
and  explanation,  §41 ;  adaptation  of  the  trains  of  accents  to  sen- 
tences, §42. 

Makkeph,  §43. 

Methegh,  its  form  and  position,  §44;  special  rules,  §45;  K'ri  and 
K'thibh,  meaning  of  tlie  terms,  §4G ;  constant  K'ris  not  noted  in  the 
margin,  §  47  ;  their  design  and  value,  §  48. 

Accuracj  of  the  points,  §  49. 

ORTHOGEAPniO     CHANGES. 

Significant  mutations  belong  to  the  domain  of  the  lexicon,  §§  50,  51 ;  eu' 
phonic  mutations  to  the  domain  of  grammar,  §  52. 

Mutations  of  Consonants  at  the  beginning  of  syllables,  §  53 ;  at  the  close 
of  syllables,  §54;  at  the  end  of  words,  §55  ;  special  rules,  §56. 

Changes  of  Consonants  to  Vowels  in  reduplicated  syllables  and  letters 
and  in  quiescents,  §  57. 

Mutations  of  Vowels,  significant  and  euphonic,  §58;  due  to  syllabic 
changes,  §  59  ;  to  contiguous  gutturals,  §  60 ;  to  concurrent  conso- 
nants, §61;  concurring  vowels,  §62;  proximity  of  vowels,  §63;  the 
accent,  §  64 ;  pause  accents,  §  65 ;  shortening  or  lengthening  of 
words,  §66. 


PART  II.— ETYMOLOGY. 

RooT3  OF  "Words. — Design  of  Etymology,  three  stages  in  the  growth  of 

words,  §67;    pronominal  and  verbal  roots,  §68;    formation  and 

inflection  of  words  by  external  and  internal  changes,  §  69 ;  parts  of 

speech,  §70. 

Pronouns  personal,  §  71 ;    pronominal  suffixes,  §  72  ;    demonstrative,  §  73 ; 

relative,  §74  ;  interrogative  and  indefinite,  §  75  ;  paradigm  I. 
VsRBS,  the  species  and  their  signification,  §§  76-80. 

Perfect  Verbs,  §  81  ;  formation  of  the  species,  §§  82,  83 ;  their  inflection, 
§§  84,  85  ;  paradigm  II. 
Remarks  on   the   Perfect    Verbs. — Kal    preterite,   §86;    Infinitive,   87; 
Future,  §  88 ;  Imperative,  §  89 ;  Participles,  §  90  ;  Niphal,  §  91  ;  Piol, 
§93  ;  Pual,  §93;  Hiphil,  §94  ;  Hopbal,  §95  ;  Hithpael,  §96. 
Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future,  §97;  and  Imperative,  98. 
Vav  Consecutive  with  the  Future,  §  99  ;  with  the  Preterite,  §  100. 
Verbs  with  suffixes,  §§  101,  102  ;  Remarks  on  the  Perfect  Verbs  with  suf- 
fixes, Preterite,  §  104  ;  Future,  105  ;  Infinitive  and  Imperative,  §  106  ; 
paradigm  III. 
Imperfect  Verbs,  classified,  §107. 

Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§108,  109;  Remarks,  §§  111-115; 
paradigm  IV. 


CONTENTS.  vii 

Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §  116  ;  Remarks,  §§  118-122  ; 
paradigm  V. 

Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §123;  Remarks,  §§125-128; 
paradigm  VI. 

Pe  Nun  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §129  ;  Remarks,  §§131,  132  ;  paradigm 
VII. 

Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  g§  133-137;  Remarks,  §§139-142; 
paradigm  VIII. 

Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  144-146  ;  Remarks,  §§  148-153  ;  para- 
digm X. 

Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  154-156  ;  Remarks, 
§§  158-161  ;  paradigm  IX. 

Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §  164  ;  Remarks,  §§  166-169  ; 
paradigm  XI. 

Lamedh  He  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  170,  171  ;  shortened  future  and 
imperative,  §173;  Remarks,  §§174-179  ;  paradigm  XII. 

Doubly  Imperfect  Verbs,  §  180. 

Defective  Verbs,  §  181. 

Quadriliteral  Verbs,  §  182. 
Nouns,  their  formation,  §183;    Class  L  §§184-188;  Class  II.  §§189,    190; 
Class  III.  §§191-194;  Class  IV.  §^195,  196  ;  paradigm,  XIII. 

Multiliterals,  §  197. 

Gender  and  Number. — Feminine  endings,  §198  ;  anomalies  in  the  use  of, 
§199;  employment  in  the  formation  of  words,  §200;  plural  endings, 
§  201 ;  anomalies,  §  202  ;  nouns  confined  to  one  number,  §  203  ; 
Dual  ending,  204  ;  usage  of  the  dual,  205  ;  changes  consequent  upon 
affixing  the  endings  for  gender  and  number,  §§  206-213. 

The  Construct  State,  its  meaning  and  formation,  §§  214-218. 

Nouns  with  suffixes,  §  219,  220. 

Declensions  of  Nouns,  §221;  paradigms  XIV,  XV,  XVI. 

Paragogic  Vowels  added  to  Nouns,  §§222,  223. 
Numerals.— Cardinal  numbers.  §§224-227;  Ordinals,  etc.,  §228. 
Prefixed   Particles,    §  229 ;   the   Article,    §  230  ;    He  Interrogative,    §  281; 

Inseparable  prepositions,  §§  232-234 ;  Vav  Conjunctive.  §  235. 
Separate  Particles.— Adverbs,  §  236  ;   with  suffixes,  §  237  ;   Prepositions, 
§  238 ;    with  suffixes,    §§  239,  240  ;    Conjunctions,    §  241  ;    Interjec- 
tions, §242. 


PART  III.— SYNTAX. 


Simple  and  Compound  Sentences,  §  243.  2 ;  Office  of  Syntax,  248.  1  ;  Elements 
of  the  sentence,  §  243.  3. 

The  Subject,  a  noun  or  pronoun,  §244;  when  omitted,  245 ;  personal  pro- 
noun, §  246 ;  its  extension,  §  247. 

The  Article,  when  used,  §  248  ;  nouns  definite  without  it,  §  249  ;  omitted 
in  poetry,  §  250;  indefinite  nouns,  §  251. 

Attributive  adjectives  and  demonstratives,  §  253. 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

Numerals.— C&rdinfd  numbers,  §^253,  254;  Ordinals,  etc.,  §255.  1,  2;  frac- 
tional parts,  §  255.  3  ;  distributive  numbers  and  numeral  adverbs, 
§  255.  4. 

Apposition  or  subordination.  §  256. 

The  Construct  State  ami  Suffixes,  §§  257-259  ;  resolved  by  the  preposition  f) 
§  260. 

The  Predicate,  Copula,  §  261  ;  Nouns,  §  262  ;  Adjectives  and  demonstratives, 
§263. 

Comparison  of  adjectives,  §  264, 

Verbs. — Hebrew  conception  of  time,  §265.  1,  2  ;  subjective  use  of  the  tenses, 
§  265.  3  ;  different  names  applied  to  them,  ^  265.  3,  a  ;  the  primary 
tenses;  use  of  the  preterite  or  perfect,  §  266  ;  the  future  or  imperfect, 
§267  ;  the  preterite  and  future  in  combination,  ^§  258,  269;  the  modal 
forms,  §270  ;  the  intentional  or  paragogic  future,  §271 ;  the  jussive 
or  apocopated  future,  §  272  ;  the  imperative,  ^  273;  the  precative  parti- 
cle, §274  ;  the  primary  tenses  with  Vav  Conjunctive,  §  275;  the  second- 
ary tenses,  Vav  Consecutive  with  the  future,  §  276 ;  Vav  Consecutive 
with  the  preterite,  §  277  ;  participles,  §  278  ;  the  infinitive,  §  279  ;  ab- 
solute infinitive,  §  280  ;  its  emphatic  use,  §  281  ;  change  of  construc- 
tion to  finite  tenses,  §  282  ;  co-ordinate  instead  of  dependent  relation 
of  verbs,  §  283. 

Object  of  Verbs. — The  direct  object  of  transitive  verbs,  §284;  transitive  con- 
struction of  intransitive  verbs,  §  285  ;  indirect  object  of  verbs,  §  286  ; 
verbs  with  more  than  one  object,  §  287. 

Adverbs  and  adverbial  expressions,  §  288. 

Neglect  of  agreement,  §  289  ;  compound  subject,  §  290  ;  dual  nouns,  §  292  ; 
nouns  in  the  construct,  §  293  ;  changes  of  person,  §  294  ;  ellipsis, 
§295. 

Repetition  of  nouns,  §  296  ;  pronouns,  §  297. 

Interrogative,  §  298,  and  Negative  Sentences,  §  299. 

Compound  Sentences. — Relative  clauses,  §§300,  301;  the  relative  omitted, 
§  302  ;  poetic  use  of  the  demonstrative,  §  303  ;  indefinite  pronouns, 
§  304  ;  relative  conjunction,  §  305  ;  hypothetical  sentences,  §§  306-308 ; 
circumstantial  clauses,  §  309  ;  the  conjunction  Vav,  §§310-312. 


PART  FIRST. 

ORTHOaRAPHY, 

§  1.  Language  is  the  communication  of  thought  by 
means  of  spoken  or  written  sounds.  The  utterance  of  a 
single  thought  constitutes  a  sentence.  Each  sentence  is 
composed  of  words  expressing  individual  conceptions  or 
their  relations.  And  words  are  made  up  of  sounds  pro- 
duced by  the  organs  of  speech  and  represented  by  written 
signs.  It  is  the  province  of  grammar  as  the  science  of 
language  to  investigate  these  several  elements.  It  hence 
consists  of  three  parts.  First,  Orthography,  which  treats 
of  the  sounds  employed  and  the  mode  of  representing 
them.  Second,  Etymology,  which  treats  of  the  different 
kinds  of  words,  their  formation,  and  the  changes  which 
they  undergo.  Third,  Syntax,  which  treats  of  sentences, 
or  the  manner  in  which  words  are  joined  together  to  ex- 
press ideas.  The  task  of  the  Hebrew  grammarian  is  to 
furnish  a  complete  exhibition  of  the  phenomena  of  this 
particular  language,  carefully  digested  and  referred  as 
far  as  practicable  to  their  appropriate  causes  in  the 
organs  of  speech  and  the  operations  of  the  mind. 

The  Lettees. 

§  2.  The  Hebrew  being  no  longer  a  spoken  tongue,  is 
only  known  as  the  language  of  books,  and  particularly 
of  the  Old  Testament,  which  is  the  most  interesting  and 


2  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  3 

important  as  well  as  the  only  pure  monument  of  it.  The 
first  step  towards  its  investigation  must  accordingly  be 
to  ascertain  the  meaning  of  the  symbols  in  which  it  is 
recorded.  Then  having  learned  its  sounds,  as  they  are 
thus  represented,  it  will  be  possible  to  advance  one  step 
further,  and  inquire  into  the  laws  by  which  these  are 
governed  in  their  employment  and  mutations. 

The  symbols  used  in  writing  Hebrew  are  of  two  sorts, 
viz.  letters  (ni^riii)  and  points  (D^l^pp).  The  number  of 
the  letters  is  twenty-two ;  these  are  written  from  right  to 
left,  and  are  exclusively  consonants.  The  alphabetical 
table  upon  the  opposite  page  exhibits  their  forms,  Eng- 
lish equivalents,  names,  and  numerical  values,  together 
with  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  Rabbinical  character 
employed  to  a  considerable  extent  in  the  commentaries 
and  other  writings  of  the  modern  Jews. 

§  3.  There  is  always  more  or  less  difficulty  in  rep- 
resenting the  sounds  of  one  language  by  those  of  another. 
But  this  is  in  the  case  of  the  Hebrew  greatly  aggravated 
by  its  having  been  for  ages  a  dead  language,  so  that 
some  of  its  sounds  cannot  now  be  accurately  determined, 
and  also  by  its  belonging  to  a  different  family  or  group 
of  tongues  from  our  own,  possessing  sounds  entirely 
foreign  to  the  English,  for  which  it  consequently  affords 
no  equivalent,  and  wliich  are  in  fact  incapable  of  being 
pronounced  by  our  organs.  The  equivalents  of  the  follow- 
ing table  are  not  therefore  to  be  regarded  as  in  every 
instance  exact  representations  of  the  proper  powers  of 
the  letters.  They  are  simply  approximations  stifficiently 
near  the  truth  for  every  practical  purpose,  the  best  which 
can  now  be  proposed,  and  sanctioned  by  tradition  and 
the  conventional  usage  of  the  best  Hebraists. 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that  a  double  pronunciation  has 
been  assigned  to  seven  of  the  letters.    A  native  Hebrew 


§3 


LETTERS. 


Order. 

Forms 

and  Equivalents. 

Names. 

Eabljiiiical 
Alphabet. 

Numerical 

valufis. 

1 

5< 

ti^j^  Aleph 

h 

1 

2 

1 

Bh,  B 

n-n  Beth 

3 

2 

3 

^ 

Gh,  G 

b-J-3  G-imel 

Jl 

3 

4 

T 

Dh,  D 

nb-n  Daleth 

V  T 

1 

4 

5 

n 

H 

i^n  He 

0 

5 

6 

.1 

VorW 

i:i  Vav  (Waw) 

1 

6 

7 

T 

Z 

I";!  Zayin 

r 

7 

8 

n 

Hh 

n^n  Hheth 

n 

8 

9 

u 

T 

n-p  Teth 

i: 

9 

10 

■) 

T 

ir  Yodh 

•» 

10 

11 

^1 

Kh,  K 

"3  Kaph 

1^ 

20 

12 

b 

L 

I'^b  Lamedh 

VT 

h 

30 

13 

:aD 

M 

D?J  Mem 

DV) 

40 

14 

M 

N 

■j^D  Nun 

1^ 

50 

15 

D 

S 

T]'2b  Samekh 

D 

60 

16 

y 

I""?  Ayin 

^ 

70 

17 

sr 

Ph,P 

NS  Pe 

qD 

80 

18 

^r 

Ts 

^n^  Tsadhe 

T^ 

90 

19 

p 

K 

V|ip  Koph 

P 

100 

20 

n 

R 

U3^n  Resh 

-) 

200 

21 

IT 

Sh,  S 

-pir  Shin 

D 

300 

22 

n 

Th,  T 

in  Tav 

T 

D 

400 

would  readily  decide  without  assistance  which  of  these 
was  to  be  adopted  in  any  given  case,  just  as  we  are 
sensible  of  no  inconvenience  from  the  various  sounds  of 
the  English  letters  which  are  so  embarrassing  to  foreigners 
learning  our  language.    The  ambiguity  is  in  every  case 


4  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  3 

removed,  however,  by  the  addition  of  a  dot  or  point 
indicating  which  sound  they  are  to  receive.  Thus  ^  with 
a  point  in  its  bosom  has  the  sound  of  &,  1  unpointed  that 
of  the  corresponding  v,  or  as  it  is  commonly  represented 
for  the  sake  of  uniformity  in  notation,  hli;  5  is  pro- 
nounced as  g,  3  unpointed  had  an  aspirated  sound  which 
may  accordingly  be  represented  by  gli,  but  as  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  produce  it,  or  even  to  determine  with  exactness 
what  it  was,  and  as  there  is  no  corresponding  soimd  in 
English,  the  aspiration  is  mostly  neglected,  and  the  letter, 
whether  pointed  or  not,  sounded  indifferently  as  g;  m  is  d, 
T  unpointed  is  the  aspirate  dli,  equivalent  to  tli  in  the; 
3  is  A',  3  unpointed  its  aspirate  kh,  perhaps  resembling 
the  German  cli  in  ich,  though  its  aspiration,  like  that  of 
3,  is  commonly  neglected  in  modern  reading;  E  is^),  2  un- 
pointed 7;/^  or/;  r  is  ^,  n  unpointed  th  in  thin.  The  letter 
123  with  a  dot  over  its  right  arm  is  pronounced  like  sh,  and 
called  Sliin;  ID  with  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Sin, 
and  pronounced  like  s,  no  attempt  being  made  in  modern 
usage  to  discriminate  between  its  sound  and  that  of  D 
Samekh.  Although  there  may  anciently  have  been  a 
distinction  between  them,  this  can  no  longer  be  defined 
nor  even  positively  asserted;  it  has  therefore  been  tliought 
unnecessary  to  preserve  the  individuality  of  these  letters 
in  the  notation,  and  both  of  them  will  accordingly  be 
represented  by  s. 

a.  The  double  sound  of  the  first  six  of  the  letters  just  named  is  purely 
euphonic,  and  has  no  effect  whatever  upon  the  meaning  of  the  words  in 
which  they  stand.  The  case  of  iT  is  diflferent.  Its  primary  sound  was  that 
of  s/i,  as  is  evident  from  the  contrast  in  Judg.  12:6  of  PVi'J  shibboleth 
with  T'liD  sihbukth.  In  certain  words,  however,  and  sometimes  for  the 
sake  of  creating  a  distinction  between  different  words  of  like  orthography, 
it  received  the  sound  of  s,  thus  almost  assuming  the  character  of  a  distinct 
letter,  e.  g.  *i2"r  to  break,  15b  to  hope.  That  Sin  and  Samekh  were  dis- 
tinguishable to  the  ear,  appears  probable  from  the  fact  that  there  are  words 
of  separate  yignifications  which  differ  onlj'  in  the  use  of  one  or  the  other 
of  these  letters,  and  iu  which  they  are  never  interchanged,  e.  g.  b:lJ  to  be 


§3 


LETTERS. 


bereaved,  ViiU  to  he  iiise.  bio  to  he  foolish;  "liia  to  he  drunken,  "ib  to  hire, 
nso  to  shut  up;  "i^itJ  to  took,  "wa  to  rule,  "iTO  to  turn  back;  nso  a  lip,  nso 
to  destroy.  The  close  affinity  between  the  sounds  which  they  represent  is, 
however,  shown  by  the  equivalence  of  such  roots  as  "£0  and  ]^^,  PSO  and 
pS'J,  Dro  and  Cjrb,  and  by  the  fact  that  0  is  in  a  few  instances  written  for 
'■O,  e.  g.  no?  Ps.  4  :  7  from  HU:,  rfl3=b  Eccles.  1  :  17  for  fflprp;  nD^tl  Jer. 
19  :  2  from  in^n,  nncO  but  nS'::  Isa.  3 :  17.  The  original  identity  of  d  and  C 
is  apparent  from  their  being  used  interchangeably  in  the  alphabetic  psalms 
Ps.  119  :  161 — 168  and  other  biblical  acrostics  Lam.  3  :  61 — 63,  as  well  as 
from  the  etymological  connection  between  "ixip  leaven  and  rrixdo  a  vessel 
in  which  bread  is  leavened;  "lira  to  shudder,  "i^'n?^  horrible,  causing  a 
shudder;  'nib  to  hire,  libx  a  recompense.  In  Arabic  the  division  of  single 
letters  into  two  distinguished  by  diacritical  points  is  carried  to  a  much 
greater  length,  the  alphabet  of  that  language  being  by  this  means  enlarged 
from  twenty-two  to  twenty-eight  letters. 

b.  The  palatal  aspirate  gh  is  still  preserved  in  the  spelling  of  many 
English  words,  although  it  is  now  lost  in  pronunciation,  being  either  com- 
pensated by  lengthening  the  vowel,  e.  g.  light  (Ger.  licht),  knight  (Ger. 
knecht),  plough  (Ger.  pflug),  or  changed  to  a  labial,  e.  g.  laugh,  tough,  or  to 
an  unaspirated  surd,  e.  g.  hough. 

2.  In  their  original  power  t:  t  differed  from  Fl  t,  and 
3  k  from  p  k,  for  these  letters  are  not  confused  nor  liable 
to  interchange,  and  the  distinction  is  preserved  to  this 
day  in  the  cognate  Arabic;  yet  it  is  not  easy  to  state 
intelligibly  wherein  the  difference  consisted.  They  are 
currently  pronounced  precisely  alike. 

3.  The  letter  n  has  a  stronger  sound  than  t\  the 
simple  /i,  and  is  accordingly  represented  by  hh;  1  is  re- 
presented by  r,  although  it  had  some  peculiarity  of  sound 
which  we  cannot  at  this  day  attempt  to  reproduce,  by 
which  it  was  allied  to  the  gutturals. 

4.  For  two  letters,  !}5  and  3',  no  equivalent  has  been 
given  in  the  table,  and  they  are  commonly  altogether 
neglected  in  pronunciation.  J<  is  the  weakest  of  the  letters, 
and  was  probably  always  inaudible.  It  stands  for  the 
slight  and  involuntary  emission  of  breath  necessary  to 
the  utterance  of  a  vowel  unattended  by  a  more  distinct 
consonant  sound.  It  therefore  merely  serves  to  mark  the 
beginning  or  the  close  of  the  syllable  of  which  it  is  a 


b  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  4 

part,  while  to  the  ear  it  is  entirely  lost  in  the  accom- 
panying or  preceding  vowel.  Its  power  has  been  Ukened 
to  that  of  the  smooth  breathing  (')  of  the  Greeks  or  the 
English  silent  h  in  hour.  On  the  other  hand  ^  had  a  deep 
guttural  sound  wliich  was  always  heard,  but  hke  that 
of  the  corresponding  letter  among  the  Arabs  is  ver}'' 
difficult  of  utterance  by  occidental  organs;  consequently 
no  attempt  is  made  to  reproduce  it.  In  the  Septuagint 
it  is  sometimes  represented  by  7,  sometimes  by  the  rough 
and  sometimes  by  the  smooth  breathing;  thus  r^'CJ 
Tojuoppa,  ""by  'HX/,  p^'Cy  "kjJiaXyjic.  Some  of  the  modern 
Jews  give  it  the  sound  of  ng  or  of  the  French  gn  in 
cam}xigne,  either  wherever  it  occurs  or  only  at  the  end 
of  words,  e.  g.  T2'd^  Sh'^nang,  I'i::^  gndmodh. 

§  4.  The  forms  of  the  letters  exhibited  in  the  pre- 
ceding table,  though  found  without  important  variation 
in  all  existing  manuscripts,  are  not  the  original  ones.  An 
older  character  is  preserved  upon  the  Jewish  coins  struck 
in  the  age  of  the  Maccabees,  which  bears  a  considerable 
resemblance  to  the  Samaritan  and  still  more  to  the  Phe- 
nician.  Some  of  the  steps  in  the  transition  from  one  to 
the  other  can  still  be  traced  upon  extant  monuments. 
There  was  first  a  cursive  tendency,  disposing  to  unite  the 
different  letters  of  the  same  word,  which  is  the  established 
practice  in  Syriac  and  Arabic.  Tliis  was  followed  by  a 
predominance  of  the  calhgraphic  principle,  which  again 
separated  the  letters  and  reduced  them  to  their  present 
rectangular  forms  and  nearly  uniform  size.  The  cursive 
stage  has,  however,  left  its  traces  upon  the  five  letters 
which  appear  in  the  table  with  double  forms;  D  7J  D  3  :: 
when  standing  at  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words 
terminate  in  a  bottom  horizontal  stroke,  which  is  the 
remnant  of  the  connecting  link  with  the  following  letter; 
at  the  end  of  words  no  such  Hnk  was  needed,  and  the 


§  5  LETTEES.  7 

letter  was  continued  vertically  downward  in  a  sort  of 
terminal  flourish  thus,  "]  "j  t\  y,  or  closed  up  by  joining 
its  last  with  its  initial  stroke,  thus  D. 

a.  The  few  instances  in  which  final  letters  are  found  in  the  middle  of 
words,  as  n5")Db  Isa.  9:6,  or  their  ordinary  forms  at  the  end,  as  "O'n  Neh. 
2  :  13,  S^  Job  38  :  1,  are  probably  due  to  the  inadvertence  of  early  tran- 
scribers which  has  been  faithfully  perpetuated  since,  or  if  intentional  they 
may  have  had  a  connection  now  unknown  with  the  enumeration  of  letters 
or  the  signification  of  words.  The  same  may  be  said  of  letters  larger  than 
usual,  as  nsDl  Ps.  80:  16,  or  smaller,  as  QX'13'^3  Gen.  2:  4,  or  above  the 
line,  as  'n?''ri  Ps.  80  :  14,  or  inverted,  as  J"b;zi  Num.  10 :  35  (in  manuscripts 
and  the  older  editions,  e.g.  that  of  Stephanus  in  1541),  or  with  extraordinary 
points,  as  Jlfij^i'f  j  Gen.  83  :  4,  ^^i'i  Ps,  27  :  13,  in  all  which  the  Eabbins  find 
concealed  meanings  of  the  most  fanciful  and  absurd  character.  Thus  in 
their  opinion  the  suspended  3  in  nt;0  Judg.  18:  30  suggests  that  the  idola- 
ters described  were  descended  from  Moses  but  had  the  character  of  Ma- 
nasseh.  In  "ilns  Lev.  11 :42  the  Vav,  which  is  of  unusual  size,  is  the  middh; 
letter  of  the  Pentateuch;  ^■'3"'5^  Gen.  16:5  with  an  extraordinary  point 
3ver  the  second  Yodh,  is  the  only  instance  in  which  the  word  is  written 
with  that  letter  (the  correct  i-eading  1  Kin.  15:19  is  ^3"^2!l);  the  large  letters 
in  Deut.  6  :  4  emphasize  the  capital  article  of  the  Jewish  faith.  All  such 
anomalous  forms  or  marks,  with  the  conceits  of  the  Eabbins  respecting 
them,  are  reviewed  in  detail  in  Buxtorf's  Tiberias,  pp.  152  etc. 

§  5.  All  the  names  of  the  letters  were  probably  signi- 
ficant at  first,  although  the  meanings  of  some  of  them 
are  now  doubtful  or  obscure.  It  is  commonly  supposed 
that  these  describe  the  objects  to  which  their  forms 
originally  bore  a  rude  resemblance.  If  this  be  so,  how- 
ever, the  mutations  which  they  have  since  undergone  are 
such,  that  the  relation  is  no  longer  traceable,  unless  it 
be  faintly  in  a  few.  The  power  of  the  letter  is  in  every 
instance  the  initial  sound  of  its  name. 

a.  The  opinion  advocated  by  Schultens,  Fundamenta  Ling.  Heb.  p.  10, 
that  the  invention  of  the  letters  was  long  anterior  to  that  of  their  names, 
and  that  the  latter  was  a  pedagogical  expedient  to  facilitate  the  learning  of 
the  letters  by  associating  their  forms  and  sounds  with  familiar  objects,  has 
met  with  little  favour  and  possesses  little  intrinsic  probability.  An  interest- 
ing corroboration  of  the  antiquity  of  these  names  is  found  in  their  preserva- 
tion in  the  Greek  alphabet,  though  destitute  of  meaning  in  that  language, 
the  Greeks  having  borrowed  their  letters  at  an  eai'ly  period  from  the  Phe- 
nicians,  and  hence  the  appended  a  of  'A\(f)a,  etc.,  which  points  to  the  Ara- 
mseic  form  xsbx. 


8  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  6 

b.  The  Semitic  derivation  of  the  names  proves  incontestably  that  the 
alphabet  had  its  origin  among  a  people  speaking  a  language  kindred  to 
the  Hebrew.  Their  most  probable  meanings,  so  far  as  they  are  still  ex- 
plicable, are  as  follows,  viz:  Aleph,  an  ox;  Beth,  a  house;  Gimel,  a  camel; 
Daleth,  a  door;  He,  doubtful,  possibly  a  window;  Vav,  a  hook;  Zayin,  a 
weapon;  Hheth,  probably  a  fence;  Teth,  a  snake  or  a  hag;  Yodh,  a  hand; 
Kaph,  the  palm  of  the  hand;  Lamedh,  an  ox-goad;  Mem,  water;  Nun,  a 
fish;  Samekh,  a  prop;  Ayin,  an  eye;  Pe,  a  mouth;  Tsadhe,  a  fish-hook  or 
a  hunter's  dart;  Koph,  perhaps  an  axe-head;  Resh,  a  head;  Shin,  a  tooth; 
Tav,  a  cross  mark. 

Eusebius  (Praep.  Evang.  x.  5)  and  Jerome  give  a  mystical  explanation 
of  the  alphabet,  in  which  the  names  of  the  letters  are  read  as  a  continuous 
sentence.    See  Piirst's  Aramiiischei  Lehrgebaude,  p.  26. 

§  6.  The  order  of  the  letters  appears  to  be  enth^ely 
arbitrary,  though  it  has  been  remarked  that  the  three 
middle  mutes  3,  j  1  succeed  each  other,  as  in  hke  manner 
the  three  hquids  b  ')2  D.  The  juxtaposition  of  a  few  of 
the  letters  may  perhaps  be  owing  to  the  kindred  signifi- 
cation of  their  names,  e.  g.  Yodh  and  Kaph  the  handy 
Mem  water  and  Nun  a  fish,  Resh  the  head  and  Shin  a 
tooth.  The  antiquity  of  the  existing  arrangement  of  the 
alphabet  is  shown,  1.  by  psalms  and  other  portions  of 
the  Old  Testament  in  which  successive  clauses  or  verses 
begin  with  the  letters  disposed  in  regular  order,  viz. 
Ps.  25  (p  omitted),  34,  37  (alternate  verses,  3?  omitted), 
111  (every  clause),  112  (every  clause),  119  (each  letter 
eight  times),  145  (3  omitted),  Prov.  31  :  10 — 31,  Lam. 
ch.  1,  2,  3  (each  letter  three  times),4.  In  the  first  chapter 
of  Lamentations  the  order  is  exactly  preserved,  but  in 
the  remaining  three  chapters  V  and  3  are  transposed. 
2.  By  the  correspondence  of  the  G-reek  and  Roman 
alphabets,  which  have  sprung  from  the  same  origin  with 
the  Hebrew. 

a.  The  most  ingenious  attempt  to  discover  a  regular  structure  in  the 
Hebrew  alphabet  is  that  of  Lepsius,  in  an  essay  upon  this  subject  published 
in  1836.  Omitting  the  sibilants  and  Resh,  he  finds  the  following  triple 
correspondence  of  a  breathing  succeeded  by  the  same  three  mutes  carried 
through  each  of  the  three  orders,  the  second  rank  being  enlarged  hy  the 
addition  of  the  liquids. 


§7 


LETTEES. 


Breathings. 

Mutes. 

Liquids. 

Middle 

Smooth 

Rough 

1  n  C3 
s  p  n 

0=) 

b  a  3 

Curious  as  this  result  certainly  is,  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  alleged 
correspondence  is  in  part  imaginary,  and  the  method  by  which  it  is  reached 
is  too  arbitrary  to  warrant  the  conclusion  that  this  scheme  was  really  in 
the  mind  of  the  author  of  the  alphabet,  much  less  to  sustain  the  further 
speculations  built  upon  it,  reducing  the  original  number  and  modifying  the 
powers  of  the  letters. 

b.  It  is  curious  to  see  how,  in  the  adaptation  of  the  alphabet  to  different 
languages,  the  sounds  of  the  letters  have  been  moditied,  needless  ones 
dropped,  and  others  found  necessary  added  at  the  end,  without  disturbin':^ 
the  arrangement  of  the  original  stock.  Thus  the  Greeks  dropped  1  and  p, 
only  retaining  them  as  numerical  signs,  while  the  Eoman  alphabet  has  ¥ 
and  Q;  on  the  other  hand  the  Romans  found  13  and  0  superfluous,  while 
the  Gi-eeks  made  of  them  S  and  ^;  5  and  T,  in  Greek  y  and  C,  become  in 
Latin  C  and  G,  while  n,  in  Latin  H,  is  in  Greek  converted  like  the  rest  of 
the  gutturals  into  a  vowel  •>}. 

§  7.  The  letters  may  be  variously  divided: 
1.  First,  with  respect  to  the  organs  by  which  they  are 
pronounced. 


Gutturals 

i^ 

n 

n 

:? 

Palatals 

ji 

h 

D 

P 

Linguals 

1 

t2 

b 

3 

Dentals 

T 

D 

^ 

123 

Labials 

n 

1 

')2 

3 

*l  has  been  differently  classed,  but  as  its  pecuHarities 
are  those  of  the  gutturals  (ri^ai^Si  m'x)  it  is  usually 
reckoned  with  them. 

2.  Secondly,  according  to  their  respective  strength, 
into  three  classes,  which  may  be  denominated  weak, 
medium,  and  strong.  The  strong  consonants  offer  the 
greatest  resistance  to  change,  and  are  capable  of  entering 
into  any  combinations  which  the  formation  or  inflection 
of  words  may  require.  The  weak  have  not  this  capacity, 


10  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  7 

but  when  analogy  would  bring  tbem  into  combinations 
foreign  to  their  nature,  they  are  either  hable  to  mutation 
themselves  or  occasion  changes  in  the  rest  of  the  word. 
Those  of  medium  strength  have  neither  the  absolute 
stabihty  of  the  former  nor  the  feeble  and  fluctuating 
character  of  the  latter. 

-rxT    1         J  ^<  M  1   ^     Vowel-Letter3, 
^®^^'       1  «  n  n  3?     Gutturals. 

Medium    I   ^  '^    =  ^     Liquids, 
Meamm,  i    _  ^  Sibilants. 


Strong,     <    :«  D  p     \  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 


The  special  characteristics  of  these  several  classes  and 
the  influence  which  they  exert  upon  the  constitution  of 
words  will  be  considered  hereafter.  It  is  sufficient  to  re- 
mark here  that  vowel-letters  are  so  called  because  they 
sometimes  represent  not  consonant  but  vowel-sounds. 

a.  It  will  be  observed  that  while  the  p,  k,  and  ?-mutes  agree  in  having 
smooth  S  3  n  and  middle  forms  2  3  1,  which  may  be  either  aspirated  or 
unaspirated,  the  two  last  have  each  an  additional  representative  p  13  which 
is  lacking  to  the  first.  Thi?,  coupled  with  the  fact  that  two  of  the  alpha- 
betic Psalms,  Ps.  25,  34,  repeat  S  as  the  initial  of  the  closing  verse,  has 
given  rise  to  the  conjecture  that  the  missing  p  mute  was  supplied  by  this 
letter,  having  a  double  sound  and  a  double  place  in  the  alphabet.  In  curi- 
ous coincidence  with  this  ingenious  but  unsustained  hypothesis,  the  Ethiopic 
has  an  additional  jj,  as  the  Greek  alphabet  has  both  tt  and  <p. 

3.  Thirdly,  the  letters  may  be  divided,  with  respect 
to  their  function  in  the  formation  of  words,  into  radicals 
(ni^lE"^-i  ni^ris)  and  serviles  ('i'^ia'^n  ni"^nis).  The  former, 
which  comprise  just  one  half  of  the  alphabet,  are  never 
employed  except  in  the  roots  or  radical  portions  of  words. 
The  latter  may  also  enter  into  the  constitution  of  roots, 
but  they  are  likewise  put  to  the  less  independent  use  of 
the  formation  of  derivatives  and  inflections,  of  prefixes 
and  suffixes.  The  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial 


§  8  LETTEES.  11 

words  1^51  51^73  "jin^i^  (Ethan  Moses  and  Caleb);  of  these, 
besides  other  uses,  ■jr\"'U<  are  prefixed  to  form  the  future 
of  verbs,  and  the  remainder  are  prefixed  as  particles  to 
nouns.  The  letters  VI^D/JSH  are  used  in  the  formation  of 
nouns  from  their  roots.  The  only  exception  to  the  division 
now  stated  is  the  substitution  of  t2  for  servile  n  in  a 
certain  class  of  cases,  as  explained  §  54.  4. 

a.  Kimchi  in  his  Mikhlol  (^1^3^:)  fol.  46,  gives  several  additional  ana- 
grams of  the  serviles  made  out  by  different  grammarians  as  aids  to  the 
memory,  e.  g.  ns'^n  insKb^a;  for  his  ivork  is  uniJerstandirtg ;  fTa^T25  "^ait 
3niD  I  Solomon  am  writing;  ninn  -jX  "^^iViU  onli/  build  thou  my  peace, 
■p^n  ax  b'^n^ra  like  a  branch  of  the  father  of  multitude;  M'^bn  nnD  iT>!5n 
Moses  has  tvritten  to  us.  To  which  Elias  Levita  added  3n33  inibx  QlU  the 
name  of  Elias  is  written;  and  Nordheimer  "^nnD^  "iin  bxu:  consult  the  riches 
of  my  book. 

§  8.  In  Hebrew  writing  and  printing,  words  are  never 
divided.  Hence  various  expedients  are  resorted  to  upon 
occasion,  in  manuscripts  and  old  printed  editions,  to  fiU 
out  the  lines,  such  as  giving  a  broad  form  to  certain 
letters,  tvi  ri  S  a  J-i,  occupying  the  vacant  space  with 
some  letter,  as  p,  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary, 
or  with  the  first  letters  of  the  next  word,  which  were 
not,  however,  accounted  part  of  the  text,  as  they  were 
left  without  vowels,  and  the  word  was  written  in  full  at 
the  beginning  of  the  following  hne.  The  same  end  is 
accompHshed  more  neatly  in  modern  printing  by  judi- 
cious spacing. 

§  9.  1.  The  later  Jews  make  frequent  use  of  abbre- 
viations. "  There  are  none,  however,  in  the  text  of  the 
Hebrew  Bible;  those  which  are  found  in  the  margin  are 
explained  in  a  special  lexicon  at  the  back  of  the  editions 
in  most  common  use,  e.  g.  "1J1  for  *MT\j!)  et  completio=etc. 

2.  The  numerical  employment  of  the  letters,  common 
to  the  Hebrews  with  the  Greeks,  is  indicated  in  the  table 
of  the  alphabet.  The  hundreds  from  500  to  900  are  re- 
presented either  by  the  five  final  letters  or  by  the  combin- 


/ 


12  ORTHOGEAPHT.  §  10 

ation  of  T\  vnth  the  letters  immediately  preceding;  thus 
"I  or  pn  500,  D  or  nn  600,  "j  inn  or  pin  700,  t\  or  nn  800, 
Y  or  prn  900.  Thousands  are  represented  by  units  with 
two  dots  placed  over  them,  thus  5<  1000,  etc.  Compound 
numbers  are  formed  by  joining  the  appropriate  units  to 
the  tens  and  hundreds,  thus  S3ri  421.  Fifteen  is,  how- 
ever, made  not  by  H"',  which  are  the  initial  letters  of  the 
divine  name  Jehovah,  r^'^TT,  but  by  1l2  9  +  6. 

This  use  of  the  letters  is  found  in  the  accessories  of 
the  Hebrew  text,  e.  g.  in  the  numeration  of  the  chapters 
and  verses,  and  in  the  Massoretic  notes,  but  not  in  the 
text  itself  Whether  these  or  any  other  signs  of  number 
were  ever  employed  by  the  original  writers  of  Scripture, 
or  by  the  scribes  in  copying  it,  may  be  a  doubtful  matter. 
It  has  been  ingeniously  conjectured,  and  with  a  show  of 
plausibility,  that  some  of  the  discrepancies  of  numbers 
in  the  Old  Testament  may  be  accounted  for  by  assuming 
the  existence  of  such  a  system  of  symbols,  in  which  errors 
might  more  easily  arise  than  in  fully  written  words. 


aJy-ta 


J'he  Vowels. 


r-\ 


§  10.  The  letters  now  explained  constitute  the  body 
of  the  Hebrew  text.  These  are  all  that  belonged  to  it  in 
its  original  form,  and  so  long  as  the  language  was  a  Hv- 
ing  one  nothing  more  was  necessary,  for  the  reader  could 
mentally  supply  the  deficiencies  of  the  notation  from  his 
famiharity  with  his  native  tongue.  But  when  Hebrew 
ceased  to  be  spoken  the  case  was  different;  the  know- 
ledge of  the  true  pronunciation  could  no  longer  be  pre- 
sumed, and  difficulties  would  arise  from  the  ambiguity 
of  individual  words  and  their  doubtful  relation  to  one 
another.  It  is  the  design  of  the  Massoretic  points  (rTTiio'J 
tradition)  to  remedy  or  obviate  these  inconveniences  by 
supplying  what  was  lacking  ui  this  mode  of  writing.  The 


§   11  VOWELS.  13 

authors  of  this  system  did  not  venture  to  make  any 
change  in  tlie  letters  of  the  sacred  text.  The  signs  which 
they  introduced  were  entirely  supplementary,  consisting 
of  dots  and  marks  about  the  text  fixing  its  true  pronun- 
ciation and  auxiliary  to  its  proper  interpretation.  This 
has  been  done  with  the  utmost  nicety  and  minuteness, 
and  with  such  evident  accuracy  and  care  as  to  make 
them  rehable  and  efficient  if  not  indispensable  helps. 
These  points  or  signs  are  of  three  kinds,  1.  those  repre- 
senting the  vowels,  2.  those  affecting  the  consonants 
3.  those  attached  to  words. 

a.  As  illustrations  of  the  ambiguity  both  as  to  sound  and  sense  of  indi- 
vidual words,  wlien  written  by  the  letters  only,  it  may  be  stated  that  "iST 
is  in  Gen.  12:  4  "15"^  he  spake,  in  Ex.  6:  29  i^n  speak  and  "isn  speaking,  in 
Prov.  25:  11  ^b."^  spoken,  in  Gen.  37:  14  "ih'n  ivord,  in  1  Kin.  6:  16  "lan  the 
oracle  or  most  holy  place  of  the  temple,  in  Ex.  9:  3  ^3n  pestilence.  So 
'p1!i'^^  is  in  Gen.  29:  10  p'lS^i'l  and  he  ivatered,  and  in  the  next  verse  p'd'^j 
and  he  kissed;  NS'^I  occurs  twice  in  Gen.  29:  23,  the  first  time  it  is  xh^l  and 
he  bronffhf,  the  second  xh''!  and  he  came;  D'^rSttSm  is  in  Jer.  32:  37  first 
Dirb'lini  and  I  tvill  bring  them  again,  and  then  D'^pni^n'i  and  I  ivill  cause 
them  to  drrell;  D"^?3'a  is  in  Gen.  14:  19  Q'^rTU  heaven,  and  in  Isa.  5:  20  Qiiia 
putting.  This  ambiguity  is,  however,  in  most  cases  removed  by  the  con- 
nection in  which  the  words  are  found,  so  that  there  is  little  practical  diffi- 
culty for  one  who  is  well  acquainted  with  the  language.  Modern  Hebrew 
is  commonly  written  and  read  without  the  points:  and  the  same  is  true  of 
its  kindred  tongues  the  Syriac  and  Arabic,  though  each  of  these  has  a 
system  of  points  additional  to  the  letters. 

§  11.  1.  The  alphabet,  as  has  been  seen,  consisted 
exclusively  of  consonants,  since  these  were  regarded  as 
a  sufficiently  exact  representation  of  the  syllables  into 
which  in  Hebrew  they  invariably  enter.  And  the  omission 
of  the  vowels  occasioned  less  embarrassment,  because  in 
the  Semitic  family  of  languages  generally,  unHke  the 
Indo-European,  they  form  no  part,  properly  speaking,  of 
the  radical  structure  of  the  word,  and  consequently  do 
not  aid  in  expressmg  its  essential  meaning,  but  only  its 
nicer  shades  and  modifications.  Still  some  notation  of 
vowels  was  always  necessary,  and  this  was  furnished  in 


14  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  11 

a  scanty  measure  by  the  vowel-letters,  or,  as  they  are 
also  called,  quiescents,  or  matres  lectionis  (guides  in  read- 
ing). The  weakest  of  the  palatals  "^  was  taken  as  the  re- 
presentative of  the  vowels  ^  and  e  of  the  same  organ  to 
which  in  sound  it  bears  a  close  affinity;  the  weakest  of 
the  labials  1  was  in  like  manner  made  to  represent  its 
cognates  u  and  o;  and  the  two  weak  gutturals  t<  and  H 
were  written  for  the  guttural  vowel  a,  as  well  as  for  the 
compound  vowels  e  and  b  of  which  a  is  one  of  the  ele- 
ments. Letters  were  more  rarely  employed  to  represent 
short  vowels;  n  or  "^  for  e  is  the  most  frequent  case; 
others  are  exceptional. 

a.  Medial  a  when  written  at  all,  as  it  very  rarely  is,  is  denoted  by  N, 
e.  g.  ::Nb  Idt  Judg.  4:  21,  5XT  dag  Neh.  13:  16  K'thibh,  BXp  ham  Hos.  10:  14, 
btXT"  "zdzel  Lev.  16:  8,  ITXl  rash  Prov.  10:  4  and  in  a  few  other  passages, 
m^ax"!  sometimes  for  rdmoth,  "ixiri  tsavvdr,  "SDX^S  Hos.  4:  6  if  not  an 
error  in  the  text  perhaps  for  emdf^dk;  final  o,  which  is  much  more  frequently 
written,  is  denoted  by  n,  e.  g.  ribs  gdld,  n3b"3  malkd,  nnx  at^d,  rarely  and 
only  as  an  Araniaeism  by  X,  e.g.  NJn  hhoggd  Isa.  19:  17,  xnip  korhhd  Ezek. 
27:  31  K'thibh,  xnns  gdbh'hd  Ezek.  31:  5  K'thibh.  The  writing  of  e  and  7, 
0  and  u  is  optional  in  the  middle  of  words  but  necessary  at  the  end,  e.  g. 
nn'i'is  or  n\-i'i";:j  tsiwWnm,  ^niia  tsiwlthi;  12'::  or  'Qi'::  shilbbu.  In  the 
former  position  "^  stands  for  the  first  pair  of  vowels,  and  1  for  the  second, 
e.  g.  np'^a'^^  nienikdth,  "^nJIOS  nsughothl;  X  for  e  and  o  so  situated  is  rare 
and  exceptional,  e.  g.  ^'Xl  resh  Prov.  6:  11,  30:  8,  and  perhaps  "I'SJ"^  ydneta 
Eccles.  12:  5;  nST  zoth,  nN"i3  poroth  Ezek.  31:  8,  inx^ja  bitsfsdfhdv  Ezek. 
47:  11.  At  the  end  of  words  e  is  commonly  expressed  by  "i,  and  5  by  1, 
tiiough  n  is  frequently  and  X  rarely  employed  for  the  same  purpose,  e.  g. 
'Zih'O  malkhc,  irV":  malkd;  tT^n  Ji'i/e,  nriS  i^o.'t'o;  N^  lo.  Final  e  is  represented 
bj'  n,  medial  e  by  "',  though  this  is  only  written  in  a  few  particular  forms, 
e.  g.  nin*'  yih'ye,  nr'^nn  or  nrnn  tiJi'yend;  DTxb^  niillcthem  Ezek.  11:  6, 
if  not  a  textual  error,  is  at  least  quite  unusual. 

h.  The  employment  of  the  vowel-letters  in  conformity  with  the  scale 
just  given,  is  further  governed,  (1.)  By  usage,  which  is  in  many  words  and 
forms  almost  or  quite  invariable;  in  others  it  fluctuates,  thus  sobhchh  is 
commonly  330  or  2a",D,  only  once  3'>20  2  Kin.  8:  21;  ya'^kobh  is  Sp""'  ex- 
cept in  Jer.  33:  26  where  it  is  HlpS"^;  theme  is  nrrn,  but  in  Ex.  25:  31 
riT^'Ti;  ethdm  according  to  the  analogy  of  similar  grammatical  forms  would 
be  Onx,  but  in  Ps.  19:  14  it  is  Crr^X;  hemtr  is  in  Jer.  2:11  written  in  both 
the  usual  and  an  unusual  way,  *T^^!l  and  "I'^'D'^n;  m'ldkhim  is  Q^sb^  except 
in  2  Sam.  11:  1,  where  it  is  D''3Xb-2;  g'bhuloth  is  in  Deut.  32:  8  nb25,  in 
Isa.  10:  13  n^isa,  in  Ps.  74:  17  mViaa;  Id  meaning  not  is  nh,    meaning  to 


§  12  VOWELS.  .    15 

him  is  1^,  though  these  are  occasionally  interchanged;  zo  is  written  both 
m  and  n;  and  2^^  ^^2,  IS  and  XS.  (2.)  The  indisposition  to  multiply  the 
vowel-letters  unduly  in  the  same  word,  e.  g.  ^Wh  ii'ibn,  ^lohim  Diti^X; 
ndthun  "jirD,  nthunim  ff^sns  or  D3iro.  (3.)  The  increased  tendency  to  their 
employment  in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible,  e.  g.  niD  ko'^Iih  Dan.  11:  6, 
always  elsewhere  ns;  ^ainp  liodhesh  Dan.  11:  30,  for  li:"ip;  Tin  ildvWi  in 
the  books  of  Chronicles  Ezra,  Nehemiah  and  Zechariah,  elsewhere  com- 
monly Tl'l.  This  must,  however,  be  taken  with  considerable  abatement, 
as  is  shown  by  such  examples  as  adcUrtm  D^^'l^X  Ex.  15:  10,  omx  Ezek. 
32:  18. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  those  cases  in  which  X  is  used  to  record 
vowels  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  those  in  which  it  properly  be- 
longs to  the  consonantal  structure  of  the  word,  though  from  its  weakness 
it  may  have  lost  its  sound,  as  X3^  mdtsd,  "ICX"!  rishon,  §  57,  2. 

2.  When  used  to  represent  the  Hebrew  vowels,  d  is 
sounded  as  in  father,  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in 
met,  I  as  in  machine,  i  as  in  pin,  o  as  in  note,  o  as  in  7tot, 
u  as  in  rtde,  and  U  as  in  full.  The  quantity  will  be  marked 
when  the  vowels  are  long,  but  not  when  they  are  short. 

§  12.  There  are  nine  points  or  massoretic  signs  re- 
presenting vowels  (nii^^^ri  motions,  viz.,  by  which  con- 
sonants are  moved  or  pronounced);  of  these  three  are 
long,  three  short,  and  three  doubtful.  They  are  shown 
in  the  following  table,  the  horizontal  stroke  indicating 
their  position  with  reference  to  the  letters  of  the  text. 

Long  Vowels.  Short  Vowels. 

TTB  Pattahh  a  rr 

bijD  Seghol  e  -:7- 

:,^t2r;  y^^jb  Kamets  Hhatuph  o  ~ 

Doubtful  Vowels. 

pyh  Hhlrik        -;-       tort 

p'^Vlz:  Shurek     -•- 1  « 

\    tl  or  u 

yn]:  Kibbuts    --  J 

All  these  vowel-points  are  written  under  the  letter 
after  which  they  are  pronounced  except  two,  viz.,  Hholem 


yt:]^  Kamets     a  — 

^■^i  Tsere         e  -:r 

Dbin  Hholem    o  -^ 


16  ORTHOGEAPHT.  §  12 

and  Slmrek.  Hliolem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the 
letter  to  which  it  belongs,  and  is  thus  distinguished  from 
the  accent  R'blii*,  which  is  a  dot  over  its  centre.  When 
followed  by  'i  or  preceded  by  W  it  coincides  with  the  dia- 
critical point  over  the  letter,  e.  g.  fi^'Z  mbsJie,  UiDlT  sone; 
when  it  follows  'j:  or  precedes  ifl  it  is  written  over  its 
opposite  ami,  e.  g.  "^ab'  shumer,  zt'^ri  tnpds.  Its  presence 
in  these  cases  must  accordingly  be  determined  by  the 
circumstances.  Since  a  vowel-sign  (or  Sh'va  §  16)  is 
regularly  written  with  every  initial  or  medial  consonant, 
b  must  be  bsli  and  b  os,  whenever  it  is  preceded  by  a 
consonant  without  a  vowel-sign;  if  it  have  itself  no 
vowel-sign,  TT  will  be  so  and  b  slid,  except  at  the  end  of 
words.  If  Shin  be  preceded  by  a  letter  which  itself  repre- 
sents a  vowel  the  point  over  its  right  arm  will  not  be 
Hholem,  e.  g.  iT^i^  tsh  not  iybsh,  □"bS'i  rdslilm,  'pb^"^. 
r'lslibn,  but  ^NS  Vosh  where  N  is  a  consonant.  Sliurek  is 
a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Yav,  thus  ^.  It  will  be 
observed  that  there  is  a  double  notation  of  the  vowel  u. 
When  there  is  a  1  in  the  text  this  vowel,  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  1  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 

a.  The  division  of  the  vowels  given  above  differs  from  the  common 
one  into  five  long  and  five  short,  according  to  which  Hhirik  is  counted  as 
two,  viz.,  Hhirik  magnum  ^=^,  and  Hhirik  parvum  —  =i;  and  Shurek 
is  reckoned  a  distinct  vowel  from  Kibbuts,  the  former  being  u  and  the  latter 
u.  To  this  there  are  two  objections.  (1.)  It  confuses  tlie  massoretic  signs 
with  the  letters  of  the  text,  as  though  they  were  coeval  with  them  and 
formed  part  of  the  same  primitive  mode  of  writing,  instead  of  being  quite 
distinct  in  origin  and  character.  The  massoretic  vowel-sign  is  not  ^  but 
—  .  The  punctuators  never  introduced  the  letter  "^  into  the  text;  they  found 
it  alreadj'  written  precisely  where  it  is  at  present,  and  all  that  they  did 
was  to  add  the  point.  And  instead  of  using  two  signs  for  *,  as  they  had 
done  in  the  case  of  a,  e,  and  o,  they  usei  but  one,  viz.,  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  whether  i  was  long  or  short.  The  confusion  of  things  thus  separate 
in  their  nature  was  pardonable  at  a  time  when  the  points  were  supposed 


§13  VOWELS.  17 

to  be  an  original  constituent  of  the  sacred  text,  but  not  now  when  their 
more  recent  origin  is  iiniveisally  admitted.  (2.)  It  is  inaccurate.  The 
distinction  between  ^^  and  — ;-  ,  ^1  and  -^ ,  is  not  one  of  quantity,  for  i  and 
U  are  expressed  indifferently  with  or  witliout  Yodh  and  Vav. 

Gesenius,  in  his  Lehrgebiiude,  while  he  retains  the  division  of  the  vowels 
into  five  long  and  five  short,  admits  tliat  it  is  erroneous  and  calculated  to 
mislead;  and  it  has  been  discarded  in  the  latest  editions  of  his  smaller 
grammar.  That  which  Avas  propo.sed  b}'  Gesenius,  however,  as  a  substitute, 
is  perplexed  and  obscure,  and  for  this  reason,  if  there  were  no  others,  is 
unfitted  for  the  wants  of  pupils  in  the  early  stage  of  their  progress.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  triple  arrangement  here  adopted  after  the  example  of 
Ewald,  has  the  recommendation  not  only  of  clearness  and  correctness,  but  of 
being,  instead  of  an  innovation,  a  return  to  old  opinions.  The  scheme  of 
five  long  and  five  short  vowels  originated  with  Moses  and  David  Kimchi, 
who  were  led  to  it  by  a  comparison  of  the  Latin  and  its  derivatives.  From 
them  it  was  adopted  by  Reuchlin  in  his  Rudimenta  Hebraica  and  thus 
became  current  among  Christians.  The  Jewish  grammarians,  before  the 
Kimchis,  however,  reckoned  Kibbuts  and  Shurek  as  one  vowel,  Hhirik  as 
one,  and  even  Kamets  and  Kaniets  Ilhatuph  as  one  on  account  of  the 
identity  of  the  symbol  employed  to  represent  them.  They  thus  made  out 
seven  vowels,  the  same  number  as  in  Greek,  where  the  distinction  into  long, 
short  and  doubtful  also  prevails. 

b.  The  names  of  the  vowels,  with  the  exception  of  Kamets-Hhatuph, 
contain  the  sounds  of  the  vowels  wliich  they  are  intended  to  represent, 
Kibbuts  in  the  last,  the  others  in  their  first  syllable.  Their  signification 
is  indicative  either  of  the  figure  of  the  vowel  or  the  mode  of  pronouncing 
it.  Kamets  and  Kibbuts,  cfltitraction,  i.  e.  of  the  mouth;  Pattahh,  opening : 
Tsere,  bursting  forth;  Seghol,  cluster  of  grapes;  Hhirik,  gnafihivg;  Hholem, 
strength;  Kamets-Hhatuph,  hurried  K(.mets;  Shurek,  whistling.  It  is  a 
curious  circumstance  that  notwithstanding  the  diversity  of  the  vowel- 
systems  in  the  Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Hebrew,  the  name  Pattahh  is  common 
to  them  all. 

§  13.  This  later  and  more  complete  method  of  noting 
the  vowels  does  not  displace  but  is  superinduced  upon 
the  scanty  one  previously  described.  Hence  it  comes  to 
pass  that  such  vowels  as  were  indicated  by  letters  in  the 
first  instance  are  now  doubly  written,  i.  e.  both  by  letters 
and  points.  By  this  combination  each  of  the  two  methods 
serves  to  illustrate  and  explain  the  other.  Thus  the  added 
signs  determine  whether  the  letters  "^ins  (which  have 
been  formed  into  the  technical  word  '^T'i^Elfv'i)  are  in  any 
given  case  to  be  regarded  as  vowels  or  as  consonants.  If 
these  letters  are  themselves  followed  by  a  vowel  or  a 


18  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  14 

ShVa,  §  16,  or  have  a  Daghesh-forte,  §  23,  they  retain 
their  consonant  sound;  for  two  vowels  never  come 
together  in  Hebrew,  and  Sh'va  and  Daghesh-forte  belong 
only  to  consonants:  thus  ^')p  kovekci,  '("iJ  dvon,  ti\l'>2 
mitsvbth  (where  iS  being  provided  with  a  separate  point, 
the  Hholem  must  belong  after  l),  XWiV  edh'voth,  tTTTi 
v'hdyd,  D^p  kiyyam.  Otherwise  they  quiesce  in  a  preced- 
ing or  accompanying  vowel-sign,  that  is  to  say,  they  have 
the  sound  indicated  by  it,  the  vowel-sign  merely  inter- 
preting what  was  originally  denoted  by  the  letter.  At 
the  end  of  words,  where  Sh'va  and  Daghesh-forte  are 
rarely  written,  "'  is  a  vowel-letter  if  preceded  by  the  sign 
for  either  of  its  homogeneous  vowels  e  or  ^,  and  1  if  ac- 
companied by  the  sign  for  o  or  u;  otherwise  they  are 
consonants,  thus  "^ni  li,  '12  me,  i^'^S  9^^  'i^  ^^>  ^^  ^^>  but  '''iia 
sdray,  ^in  goy,  "^5^  gdluy,  137)  tdv,  ibd  sJudcv,  IT  sw;  the 
combination  V^  is  pronounced  dv,  Ti^  and  IDJ*  dndv,  Vlno 
and  ire  sHlidv.  In  consequence  of  its  extreme  weakness, 
ii  not  only  quiesces  when  it  is  properly  a  vowel-letter, 
but  may  give  up  its  consonant  character  after  any  vowel 
whatever,  e.  g.  U^bsp  t'd'e,  "piaS"]  r'tslwn,  rnsQ  p'lrd;  final 
&5  is  always  either  quiescent  or  otiant,  §  1 6.  1 ;  !l  is  never 
used  as  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  and 
there  it  always  quiesces  unless  it  receives  a  Mappik,  §  26. 

a.  As  a  letter  was  scarcely  ever  used  to  express  o,  the  quiescence  of  1 
in  Kamets-Hliatuph  is  very  rare,  and  where  it  does  occur  the  margin  al- 
ways substitutes  a  reading  without  the  ^,  e.  g.  >^!;?'12'^  Jer.  27:  20,  B'^SSIfi 
Ezek.  27:  15,  "lin-^l")"^^  Ps.  30  :  4,  'iVmjp-;  Isa/44:'l7,  "blD^  Jer.  33:  8, 
ni-Jinjl  Nah.  1:3.  In  ni'irx  2  Chron.  8:  18,  and  "^r"^^  Deut.  32:13,  1  rep- 
resents or  quiesces  in  the  still  briefer  S  of  Hhateph-Kamets,  §  16.  3. 

b.  In  a  few  proper  names  medial  n  quiesces  at  the  end  of  the  first 
member  of  the  compound,  e.  g.  "ilkms  Num.  1:  10,  ^xn'i";  2  Sam.  2:  19, 
also  written  bi<"ni3  1  Chron.  2:  16.  In  such  words  as  nmri:  Jer.  22:  6, 
MrEw  Dent.  21:  7,  n  does  not  quiesce  in  Kibbuts,  for  the  points  belong  to 
the  marginal  readings  la'DIS,  1DSUJ  §  46. 

§  14.  On  the  other  hand  the  vowel-letters  shed  light 
upon  the  stability  of  the  vowels  and  the  quantity  of  the 


§  15,  16  VOWELS.  19 

doubtful  signs.  1.  As  2  was  scarcely  ever  and  u  seldom 
represented  by  a  vowel-letter,  Hhirik  with  Yodli  (^.)  is 
almost  invariably  long  and  Sliurek  Q\)  commonly  so. 
2.  The  occasional  absence  in  individual  cases  of  the  vowel- 
letters,  does  not  determine  the  quantity  of  the  signs  for 
i  and  u;  but  their  uniform  absence  in  any  particular 
words  or  forms  makes  it  almost  certain  that  the  vowel 
is  short.  3.  The  occasional  presence  of  1  and  "^  to  repre- 
sent one  of  their  homogeneous  long  vowels  proves  no- 
thing as  to  its  character;  but  if  in  any  word  or  form  these 
letters  are  regularly  written,  the  vowel  is,  as  a  general 
rule,  immutable.  When  1  and  ^  stand  for  their  long 
homogeneous  vowels,  these  latter  are  said  to  be  written 
fuUy,  e.  g.  bip  kol,  n^D  nlr,  n^7j  miWi;  without  these  quies- 
cent letters  they  are  said  to  be  written  defectively,  e.  g. 
^ntpti  h^klmotlu,  cts  kdmus. 

a.  Hhirik  with  Yodh  is  short  in  I'^R'^P'!)!  vah°"mittw  1  Sam.  17:  35, 
r\-'bi'ip'-^^bikk'rdthekhd.'Ps.45:  10,  -rri\3-^h  likk'hath'Proy.30:17,  TiS'^b  lissodh 
2  Chron.  31:  7,  In  s'^p'^S  1  Chron.  12:  1,  20,  i  is  probably  long,  although 
the  word  is  always  elsewhere  written  without  the  Yodh;  as  it  sometimes 
has  a  secondary  accent  on  the  first  syllable  and  sometimes  not  (see  1  Sam. 
30:  1),  it  may  have  had  a  twofold  pronunciation  tslk'lag,  and  tsiklag. 
Shurek  as  u  is  of  much  more  frequent  occurrence,  e.  g.  "^j^in  hhukke,  d'^'a^ixb 
Vumnnm,  "^h'^  yulladh,  n^^n  hhukkd  Ps.  102:6,  diK^isbx  2  Chron.  2:  7,  ns^lT 
Ezek,  16:  34. 

§  15.  The  vowels  may  be  further  distinguished  into 
pure,  a,  i,  u,  and  diphthongal,  e,  o;  e  being  a  combination 
of  a  and  ^,  or  intermediate  between  them,  and  o  holding 
the  same  relation  to  a  and  u. 


Sh'va. 

§  16.  1.  The  absence  of  a  vowel  is  indicated  by  — 
Sh'va  (SjoJ  emptiness,  or  as  written  by  Chayug,  the  oldest 
of  Jewish  grammarians,  J^HTi:),  which  serves  to  assure  the 
reader  that  one  has  not  been  inadvertently  omitted.    It 

2* 


20  OflTHOGRAPHT.  §  IG 

is  accordingly  placed  under  all  vowelless  consonants  ex- 
cept at  the  end  of  words,  Avhere  it  is  regarded  as  un- 
necessary, the  absence  of  a  vowel  being  there  a  matter 
of  course.  If,  however,  the  last  letter  of  a  word  be  "j,  or 
if  it  be  immediately  preceded  by  another  vowelless  letter, 
or  be  doubled  by  the  point  called  Daghesh-forte,  §  23, 
ShVa  is  written  to  preclude  the  doubt  which  is  possible 
in  these  cases,  e.  g.  cb":'IU:-J,  r\'Db'2,  t:'ip,  T^^m,  rx,  rnD. 
ShVa  is  not  given  to  a  quiescent  letter,  since  it  repre- 
sents not  a  consonant  but  a  vowel,  e.  g.  nj^'^n,  nor  as  a 
general  rule  to  a  final  consonant  preceded  by  a  quiescent; 
thus  nsito",  nj^i^  Kuth  3:  4;  n-^u';  Isa.  62:  3,  though  in 
this  case  it  is  sometimes  written,  e.  g.  rsi^  2  Sam.  14:3; 
n^Vil  2  Sam.  14:  2;  n^nni  Judg.  13:' 3;  nsiiin  1  Kin. 
17:13.  N  at  the  end  of  a  word,  preceded  either  by  a 
vowelless  letter  or  a  quiescent,  is  termed  otiant,  and  is 
left  unpointed,  e.  g.  J^pn,  i^i'^l,  ^^'^3'^,  W";  so  hkewise  in 
the  middle  of  a  word,  when  followed  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  preceded  by  a  consonant  to  which  it  has  surrendered 
this  vowel,  its  own  consonant  character  being  lost,  §  57, 
2  (3),  e.  g.  ^>;'T;  y'nl  Josh.  24: 14,  b^^'yj:  s'mbl  Num.  20: 17, 
•^^rr^'^  rislidn  job  15:7,  !n:\sirn  tissena  Ezek.  23:  49. 

a.  Final  "[  may  receive  Sh'va  for  the  sake  of  distinction  not  onl^'  from 
T^,  as  already  suggested,  but  also  from  1  with  which  it  might  be  in  danger 
of  being  confounded  in  manusciMpts;  Freytag  conjectures  that  it  is  prop- 
erly a  part  of  the  letter,  like  the  stroke  in  the  corresponding  final  j)  in 
Arabic,  In  such  forms  as  I'^is'l  Sh'va  is  omitted  with  the  closing  letters 
because  the  "^  is  not  sounded. 

2.  Sh'va  may  be  either  silent  (n3  quiescens),  or  vocal 
(5D  mobile).  At  the  close  of  syllables  it  is  silent.  But  at 
the  beginning  of  a  syllable  the  Hebrews  always  facilitated 
the  pronunciation  of  concurrent  consonants  by  the  in- 
troduction of  a  hiatus  or  slight  breathing  between  them; 
a  Sh'va  so  situated  is  consequently  said  to  be  vocal,  and 
has  a  sound  approaching  that  of  a  hastily  uttered  e,  as 


§  16  "  VOWELS.  21 

in  given.  This  will  be  represented  by  an  apostrophe,  thus, 
*QTJS  Vmidlibar,  DFlipE  p^kadlitem. 

a.  According  to  Kimchi  (Mikhlol  fol.  189)  Sh'va  was  pronounced  in 
three  different  ways,  according  to  circumstances.  (1.)  Before  a  guttural 
it  inclined  to  the  sound  of  the  following  vowel,  e.  g,  ISX";  y^ahhedh,  nxb 
s'eth,  Jirn  rf"M,  and  if  accompanied  by  Methegb,  §  44,  it  had  the  full  sound 
of  that  vowel,  e.  g.  >lS'r  suu,  "^nn  i'lhlii,  Cisi"'^  looldm.  (2.)  Before  Yodh 
it  inclined  to  i,  e.  g.  np>"3  b^ya^kobh,  n'i'^3  k'yom,  and  with  Methegh  was 
sounded  as  Hhirik,  e.  g.  n^?  hiyadh.  (3.)  Before  any  other  letter  it  inclined 
to  a,  e.  g.  nb"i2  b'^rdkhd,  D"''i^?:.  ^"/IZm,  and  with  Methegh  was  pronounced 
as  Pattahh  e.  g.  ni'inp^a  bamakheloth. 

3.  Sh'va  may,  again,  be  simple  or  compound.  Some- 
times, particularly  when  the  first  consonant  is  a  guttural, 
which  from  its  weakness  is  in  danger  of  not  being  dis- 
tinctly heard,  the  hiatus  becomes  still  more  audible,  and 
is  assimilated  in  sound  to  the  short  guttural  vowel  a,  or 
the  diphthongal  e  or  o,  into  which  it  enters.  This  assi- 
milation is  represented  by  combining  the  sign  for  Sh'va 
with  those  for  the  short  vowels,  thus  forming  what  are 
called  the  compound  Sli'vas  in  distmction  from  the  simple 
Sh'va  previously  explained. 


;se  are. 

Hhateph-Pattahh  ^7; 

thus. 

^'^?  *mddh 

Hhateph-Seghol     -:^; 

thus. 

n'^5<  "mor. 

Hhateph-Kamets  — ; 

thus. 

"bn  hJiHl. 

*  t: 

a.  Hhateph  ("1:11  snatching)  denotes  the  rapidity  of  utterance  or  the 
hurried  character  of  the  sounds  represented  by  these  symbols. 

h.  The  compound  Sh'vas,  though  for  the  most  part  restricted  to  the 
gutturals,  are  occasionally  written  under  other  consonants  in  place  of  simple 
Sh'va,  to  indicate  more  distinctly  that  it  is  vocal.  Luzzatto  specifies  the 
following  cases:  Hhateph  Pattahh  is  found  under  the  first  of  two  similar 
letters,  e.  g.  niiinn  Num.  10:  36,  or  a  letter  from  which  Daghesh-forte  has 
been  omitted  i^=";?fl  Gen.  27:  38,  after  initial  ^l,  nnn  Gen.  2:  12,  'i"i2iy|l  Dan. 
9:  18,  nn'4.;|i  Lev.  25:  34,  "^i'pnni  Ezek.  26:  21,  after  a  vowel  which  has 
arisen  from  Sh'va  "^r^D,  and  in  certain  forms  of  bsX  to  eat  and  T|b?  t^  bless, 
«•  g-  f^??r^9  Gen.  3:  17,  ^^i^l^^  Gen.  12:  3.  Hhateph-Kamets  is  less  fre- 
quent, but  sometimes  occurs  where  Hholem  has  been  dropped  isbpfl  (from 
SpP)  Num.  23:  25,  ^^^^1.^  Job  2:  7,  d-^O'niT'ri  Ezek.  41:  4,  d^Bsiy  Gen.  41:  5, 
D-ins^  Ps.  104:  17,  tiiiax  Isa.  27:3,  nsiPisx  Jer.  31:33,  and  in  a  few  other 


22  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  17,  18 

instances  "f^^irV  Gen.  2:  23,  ni::?^N  Ruth  2:  2,  7,  ST^rS^  1  Kin.  13:  7,  "'P^S-l, 
Hhateph-Seghoi  occurs  but  once  C-'r^b^  2  Sam.  6 :  5  (edition  of  Stephanus). 
Manuscripts  and  editions  differ  greatly  in  this  use  of  the  compound  Sh'vas; 
and  the  same  word  is  differently  written  in  the  current  text,  e.  g.  »T^5Sa 
2  Kin.  2:  1,  iT';!502  ver.  11. 

Pattahh  Furtive. 

§  17.  A  similar  hiatus  or  slight  transition  sound  was 
used  at  the  end  of  words  in  connection  with  the  gutturals. 
When  ",  r,  or  the  consonantal  T\  at  the  end  of  words  is 
preceded  by  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  (i.  e.  another 
than  a),  or  is  followed  by  another  vowelless  consonant,  it 
receives  a  Pattahh  furtive  —  ,  wliich  resembles  in  sound 
an  extremel}^  short  a,  and  is  pronounced  before  the  letter 
imder  which  it  is  written,  e.  g.  n^i  riYhh,  fiy:^  shdmd", 
T^'^l"!  maghb'i''/i,  P^ijuj  slmmaH,  "^n";  yi^hhd. 

a.  Some  grammarians  deny  that  Pattahh  furtive  (SIJa  stolen)  can  be 
found  under  a  penultimate  guttural,  contending  that  the  vowel-sign  is  in 
such  cases  a  proper  Pattahh,  and  that  V}y^':i  should  accordingly  be  read 
shdmaat,  and  'nri";  yihhad.  But  both  the  Sh'va  under  the  final  letter,  §  16, 
and  the  Daghesh-lene  in  it,  §  21,  show  that  the  guttural  is  not  followed  by 
a  vowel.  The  sign  beneath  it  must  consequently  be  Pattahh  furtive,  and 
represent  an  antecedent  vowel-sound.  In  some  manuscripts  Pattalih  furtive 
is  written  as  Hhateph-Pattahh,  or  even  as  simple  Sh'va ;  thus,  S""!?"!  or  5'^p'^ 
for  ?ipn. 

Syllables. 

§  18.  1.  Syllables  are  formed  by  the  combination  of 
consonants  and  vowels.  As  two  vowels  never  come 
together  in  the  same  word  in  Hebrew  without  an  inter- 
vening consonant,  there  can  never  be  more  than  one 
vowel  in  the  same  syllable;  and  with  the  single  exception 
of  ^  occurring  at  the  beginning  of  words,  no  syllable  ever 
consists  of  a  vowel  alone.  Every  syllable,  with  the  ex- 
ception just  stated,  must  begin  with  a  consonant,  and 
may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more  than  two. 
Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel,  whether  represented  by 


u 


§18  SYLLABLES.  '  23 

a  quiescent  letter  or  not,  are  called  sinrgle,  e.  g.  Tjb  I'Jcha,  ^^-W  >j^w 
T^'^y  o-ld.    (The  first  syllable   of  this  second  example  |    ih  a. 
begins,  it  will  be  perceived,  with  the  consonant :?,  though    / 
this  disappears  in  the  notation  given  of  its  sound.)    Syl- 
lables ending  with  a  consonant,  or,  as  is  possible  at  the 
close  of  a  word,  with  two  consonants,  are  said  to  be 
mixed:  thus  Cri"^]^  kam-tem,  rit^n  hd-lakht    As  the  vocal 
Sh'vas,  whether  simple  or  compound,  are  not  vowels 
properly  speaking,   but   simply   involuntary  transition 
sounds,   they,   with  the   consonants  under  which  they 
stand,  cannot  form  distinct  syllables,  but  are  attached 
to  that  of  the  following  vowel.   Pattahh  furtive  in  like 
manner  belongs  to  the  syllable  formed  by  the  preceding 
vowel.  Thus  ?i^T  ^'ro",  "jS  °m  are  monosyllables. 

2.  Long  vowels  always  stand  in  simple  syllables,  and 
short  vowels  in  mixed  syllables,  unless  they  be  accented. 
But  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  long  or  a  short  vowel. 

a.  The  following  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  the  division  of  Hebrew 
words  into  their  proper  syllables;   thus, 

dix        D'^^'^x      i<''i3       era        tinx  n^^in  -isb      nt 

a-dham      *16-him      b'ro     b'yum      a-dham        to-l'dhoth      se-pher     ze 

Gen.  5:  1.     'ihk      ii&J      n''n^5<        nicr^ 

6-tho     a-sa      *16-him      bidh-muth 

b.  The  reason  of  the  rule  for  the  quantity  of  syllables  appears  to  be 
this.  In  consequence  of  their  brevity,  the  short  vowels  required  the  ad- 
dition of  a  following  consonant  to  make  the  utterance  full  and  complete, 
unless  the  want  of  this  was  compensated  by  the  greater  energy  of  pronun- 
ciation due  to  the  accent.  The  long  vowels  were  sufficiently  complete 
without  any  such  addition,  though  they  were  capable  of  receiving  it  under 
the  new  energy  imparted  by  the  accent.  This  pervading  regularity,  which 
is  so  striking  a  feature  of  the  Hebrew  language,  was  the  foundation  of  the 
systenia  ntorarum  advocated  by  some  of  the  older  grammarians  of  Holland 
and  Germany.  The  idea  of  this  was,  that  each  syllable  was  equal  to  three 
niorae,  that  is,  three  rests,  or  a  bar  of  three  beats;  a  long  vowel  being 
equivalent  to  two  morae,  or  tAvo  beats,  a  short  vowel  to  one,  and  tha 
initial  or  final  consonant  or  consonants  also  to  one:  thus  R^^l^  k  (1)  -+• 
c  (2)  =  3,  f  (1)  +  a  (1)  +  Zi  (1)  =  3.  An  accented  syllable  might  have  one 
mora  or  beat  either  more  or  less  than  tlie  normal  quantity.     This  system 


24  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  19 

was  rot  only  proposed  by  way  of  grammatical  explanation,  but  also  made 
the  basis  of  a  peculiar  theory  of  Hebrew  prosody.  See  Gesenius,  Geschichte 
d.  Heb.  Sprache,  p.  123. 

c.  The  cases  in  which  short  vowels  occur  in  unaccented  simple  sylla- 
bles, are  mostly  due  to  the  disturbing  influence  exerted  by  the  weak  letters 
upon  the  normal  forms  of  words;  thus,  Nw^^,  i<~'h,  N^E,  n^ti,  Ir^p  and  the 
like  are  formed  after  the  analogy  of  Tj^^.  A  long  vowel  in  an  unaccented 
mixed  syllable  is  found  in  but  one  word,  and  that  of  foreign  origin, 
"iSX'i^ipba  bel-Vshatstsar,  though  here,  the  syllable  receives,  if  not  the 
primary,  yet  the  secondary  accent.  The  same  is  the  case  when  a  long 
vowel  is  retained  before  Makkeph,  e.  g.  "^Vn'J;  so  also  in  the  proper  names 
irfz^a,  W^'aVj,  in  which  the  first  member  of  the  compound  preserves  its 
seghulate  form  as  though  it  were  a  separate  word.  In  the  Arabic,  which  is 
exceedingly  rich  in  vowels,  there  are  comi)aratively  few  mixed  syllables; 
nearly  every  consonant  has  its  own  vowel,  and  this  more  frequently  short 
than  long.  The  Chaldee,  which  is  more  sparing  in  its  use  of  vowels  than 
the  Hebrew,  observes  in  general  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  quantitj' 
of  syllables,  though  not  with  the  same  inflexible  consistency. 

woA-0  C^tS      ^'  ^^ti6n  the  consonant  which  concludes  one  syllable 

is  at  the  same  time  attached  to  that  which  follows,  the 

first  syllable  is  in  strictness  neither  simple  nor  mixed  but 

may  be   denominated  intermediate.     The  vowel  in  an 

1^    intermediate  syllable  is  short  as  though  the  following 

^wiU/  ,1        consonant  belonged  to  it  entirely,  while  yet  this  is  like- 

.  V'-L^^U"--  "^ise  hnked  to  a  succeeding  vowel  or  vocal  Sh'va,  thus 

\jSX--^  '-U<i'"  ni2"]n  hhar'bJwth. 

A   V'^vXa^  ?.  t>"        a.   Such  syllables  are  often  occasioned  by  the  special   characteristics  of 

j.^ (tv^i,  {:t^-vvi)fhe  guttural  letters,  thus  nrn  in  which  S  belongs  in  a  measure  to  both  sylla- 

r\      V,  ^  .     bles  is  for  n:'n,  x^fin  hahu  is   for  hah-hii,  §  23.  3.  a,  3nnj^  yah'^rdg  is  for 
j\     \      \    ytf^  t/ah-rog,   ^zSTiZ  neheph'khu  is  for  ^issn:  neh-p'khu.     See  also  §  20.  2 
^*^*^^(/^"^    'and§22.a. 

AivEBiGuous  Signs. 

§  19.  It  will  now  be  possible,  by  aid  of  the  principles 
already  recited,  to  determine  the  quantity  of  the  doubt- 
ful vowels,  and  to  remove  the  ambiguity  which  appears 
to  exist  in  certain  vowel-signs. 

1.  Hliirik,  Shurek,  and  Kibbuts,  in  unaccented  simple 
syllables,  must  be  long,  and  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables, 
short,  e.  g.  "CT";  or  uiV  yi-rash,  ^33^  yihh-nu,  ib^33  or  fi^S 


§  19  AMBIGUOUS  SIGNS.  25 

g^bhu-lo,  *i|^  or  ll^"^  yul-ladh,  D|3  or  D^^3  hul-lam,  ''k/\'$12 
or  "H'lD  mciuzzl.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or 
mixed,  they  are  always  long,  e.  g.  Dn'iS  or  D^n^ir  sl-hhnn, 
"b  Zz,  bis  or  b^ziB  g'bhul,  ^niij'^'n  or  ^n^izj'n'n  dWa-shu-hu,  the 
only  exception  being  that  Hhirik  is  short  in  the  mono- 
syllabic particles  □^?,  iTJi,  Q^,  ""2,  in  '^,  and  in  some  ab- 
breviated verbal  forms  of  the  class  called  Lamedh-He, 
e.  g.  7^,1,  ^'a3^,!l,  H^lt  The  only  cases  of  remaining  doubt 
are  those  in  which  these  vowels  are  followed  by  a  letter 
with  Sh'va,  either  simple  or  compound.  If  the  former,  it 
might  be  a  question  whether  it  was  silent  or  vocal,  and 
consequently  whether  the  syllable  was  simple  or  mixed. 
If  the  latter,  though  the  syllable  is  of  course  simple,  the 
weak  letter  which  follows  may  interfere  with  the  operation 
of  the  law.  Here  the  etymology  must  decide. 

a.  The  vowel  is  long  or  short  as  the  grammatical  form  may  require; 
thus  in  n^n;;,  ~?nn,  iii-nN-i;;  Gen.  22:  8,  which  follow  the  analogy  of  btip^ 
and  in  is^iD  Isa.  10:  34,  iijpp  the  first  vowel  is  short;  in  tD=33?,  rj-ab";  the 
first  vowel  is  long.  In  a  few  instances  the  grammatical  form  in  which 
Hhirik  is  employed  is  itself  doubtful;  the  distinction  is  then  made  by  means 
of  Methegh,  §  44,  which  is  added  to  the  vowel-sign  if  it  is  long,  but  not  if 
it  is  short;  thus,  !ix"i^  yl-r''u,  from  K^'^  to  fear,  and  >!D'IJ7  yl-sltnu  from  "|!:3"' 
to  sleep;  but  *ik'i"^  yir-u  from  nx'^  to  see,  and  ^liTIJ"^  yish-nu  from  ni'lj  to  do 
a  second  time. 

2.  Kamets  a  and  Kamets-Hhatuph  o  are  both  repre- 
sented by  the  same  sign  ( ^ ),  but  may  be  distinguished 
by  rules  similar  to  those  just  given.  In  an  unaccented 
simple  syllable  it  is  Kamets;  in  an  unaccented  mixed 
syllable  it  is  Kamets-Hhatuph ;  in  an  accented  syllable, 
whether  simple  or  mixed  it  is  Kamets,  e.  g.  "li"!  dd-bhdr, 
^izjsn  lihopli-sM.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  Sh'va,  the 
distinction  is  mostly  made  by  Methegh,  §  44;  without 
Methegh  it  is  always  Kamets-Hhatuph,  with  it  commonly 
Kan:ets  e.  g.  nibsn  hhokli-md,  nb^n  hhd-kh'ind.  Before  a 
guttural  with  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph  it 
is  frequently  o ,  though  standing  in  a  simple  syllable  and 


26  OBTHOGRArnY.  §  19 

accompanied  by  Metliegh,  e.  g.  ''l''^^  ^o-hJfrt,  Ci^^ri 
to-ohlidlmn.  The  surest  criterion,  however,  and  in  many 
cases  the  only  decisive  one,  is  found  in  the  etymology. 
If  the  vowel  be  derived  from  Hholem,  or  the  gramma- 
tical form  requires  an  o  or  a  sliort  vowel,  it  is  Kamets- 
Hhatuph;  but  if  it  be  derived  from  Pattahh,  or  the  form 
requires  an  a  or  a  long  vowel,  it  is  Kamets. 

a.  Thus  H'i'srNi  with  the  prefixed  conjunction  vo^niyycith,  t^^ixn  with 
the  article  hd'^myyd;  n^'f"'  in  the  Hophal  yo^mndh,  '^H'^xri  Isa.  44:  13  in 
the  Piel  y'fJid°-re/iU.  Tiie  first  vowel  is  o  in  D'^^'^'-i  from  "inii,  D""!:;"i;5  from 
u;-p,  C'"i"75  fi'om  cnib,  "^^-nir-rr  Isa.  38:  14,  "^"nzi^  Num.  22:  11,  "S-n^X 
Num.  23:  7  and  the  like,  and  the  first  two  vowels  in  such  words  as  Q?^?3 
from  ^"3,  CDpX-a  Isa.  30:  12  from  CSp,  nb::np^  Deut.  20:  2,  r\zz:'p^  kos. 
13:  14,  ""'"sp^  2  Chron.  10:  10,  ci;-?::p^  2  Kin.  15:  10,  because  they  are 
shortened  from  Hholem.  On  the  other  hand  the  first  vowel  is  d  in  "''ii^'*; 
Job  16:  19  from  irr,  Ci!:;"nr;  from  r^n,  -r^3  from  nis.  The  word  ir'^?'^ 
is  in  Ps.  86:  2  the  imperative  shomrd,  in  Job  10:  12  the  preterite  shdm'id. 
The  medial  vowel  is  o  in  the  infinitive  ^(T2"  Obad.  ver.  11,  and  the  future 
:ir.is-  Gen.  32:  18,  but  a  in  the  preterite  r,3r2  1  Sam.  24:  11.  Tlie  best 
authorities  decide  that  D^ri3  should  be  pronounced  bdtttm,  not  bottom,  as 
the  rule  would  seem  to  require. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Kamets-Hhatuph  is  found  in  a  .syllable 
bearing  a  conjunctive  accent,  viz.:  "Ei^  Ps.  38:  21  (in  some  editions),  b3 
Ps.  35:  10,  Prov.  19:  7,  and  in  the  judgment  of  Ewald  iro  Judg.  19:  5 
comp.  ver.  8,  and  35  Ezek.  41:  25;  in  Dan.  11:  12  nn'n";  the  points  belong  to 
the  marginal  reading  n~n,  and  the  vowel  is  consequently  Kamets.  There 
are  also  a  few  cases  in  Avhich  Kamets  remains  in  a  mixed  syllable,  deprived 
of  its  accent  by  Makkeph,  §  43,  without  receiving  Methegh,  viz.:  "PSri  Ps. 
16:  5  (in  some  editions),  -n-p  Ps.  55:  19.  22,  "30  Ps.  74:  5;  and  a  final 
unaccented  Kamets  is  not  affected  by  the  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte  con- 
junctive, §  24,  in  the  initial  letter  of  the  following  word,  e.  g.  C'i"  rinjis  Gen. 
31:  IH.  When  an  accent  takes  the  place  of  Methegh,  it  serves  equally  to 
distiiitjuish  a  from  S,  e.  g.  '3531  Ex.  21:  22  v'ndgWphu,  ^nDOl  Ex.  21:  35 
anidhlivu,  §  45.  5. 

c.  Inasmuch  as  nnri'O  is  derived  from  ^W^  mdhhdr,  its  first  vowel  might 
be  suspected  to  be  a;  but  as  it  is  so  constantly  written  with  Hhateph- 
Kameis,  the  preceding  vowel  is  probably  conformed  to  it.  It  is  consequently 
regarded  and  pronounced  as  d.  Kimchi  (Mikhlol,  fol.  188)  declares  that  the 
first  vowel  in  'ih-n  1  Sam.  13:  21,  rviih"^  Eccles.  12:  11  and  ilj^-i  Num.  24:  7 
was  universally  held  to  be  Kametss,  and  that  with  the  exception  of  Rabbi 
Jonah  ben  Gannach,  who  was  of  a  contrary  mind,  the  same  unanimity 
prevailed  in  regard  to  the  first  vowel  of  '^"^2  Ezek.  40:  43.  As,  however, 
this  last  word  is  in  every  other  place  written  without  the  Metliegh,  and 
tliere  is  no  analogy  for  such  words  as  those  mentioned  above  having  a  in 


§  20  AMBIGUOUS  SIGNS.  27 

their  initial  syllable,  the  best  autliorities  are  now  agreed  that  the  vowel  is 
0,  and  the  words  are  accordingly  read  dorbhdn,  etc.  In  f\z":i^  jasper,  and 
r^"i3  emerald,  Ezek.  28:  13,  which  are  mentioned  by  Kimchi  in  the  same 
connection,  the  first  vowel  is  Kamets. 

d.  In  some  manuscripts  and  a  few  of  the  older  printed  books,  e.  g. 
Stephanus'  Hebrew  Bible  and  Eeuchlin's  Rudimenta  Hebraica,  Kamets- 
Ilhatuph  is  denoted  by  (  ).  It  then  differs  from  Kamets,  but  is  liable  to 
be  confounded  with  Hhateph-Kamets.  It  can,  however,  be  distinguished 
from  it  by  the  cii'cumstance  that  Kamets-Hhatuph  is  always  followed  either 
by  simple  Sh'va,  Daghesh- forte,  or  Methegh  :  none  of  which  ever  immediately 
succeed  Hhateph-Kamets.  Such  a  form  as  "i^Sp  Ezek.  26 :  9  in  some  editions 
is  an  impossible  one  if  (  .)  have  its  ordinary  meaning. 

e.  It  is  surprising  that  in  so  minute  and  careful  a  system  of  ortho- 
graphy as  that  of  the  Massorites,  there  should  be  no  symbol  for  o  distinct 
from  that  for  a/  and  some  have  felt  constrained  in  consequence  to  suppose 
that  the  signs  for  these  two  vowels  were  originally  different,  but  became 
as.similated  in  the  course  of  transcription.  This  seems  unlikely,  however. 
The  probability  is  that  a,  and  o,  whose  resemblance  even  we  can  perceive, 
were  so  closelj'  allied  in  the  genuine  Hebrew  pronunciation,  that  one  sign 
was  thought  sufficient  to  represent  them,  especially  as  the  Massorites  were 
intent  simply  on  indicating  sounds  without  concerning  themselves  with 
grammatical  relations.  This  is  further  confirmed  by  the  occasional  selection 
of  Hhateph-Kamets  to  accompany  Kamets,  as  ^irrnxn'^,  n"i"&3,  '^pi'^1  Jer. 
22:  20,  nijrSN  Isa.27:4,  or  to  replace  it,  as  nidnn  from  nnn  Ezek.  36: 35, 38, 
and  by  the  fact  that  the  article  undergoes  the  same  euphonic  change  be- 
fore n  and  n,  §  231.  4. 

T  t:      " 

§  20.  1.  As  simple  Sh'va  is  vocal  at  the  beginning  of 
a  syllable  and  silent  at  its  close,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
as  to  its  character  when  it  stands  under  initial  or  final 
letters.  Preceding  the  first  vowel  of  a  word  it  must  of 
course  be  vocal,  and  following  the  last  vowel  it  must  be 
silent,  Dri"]lDT  ^'khartdm,  V\^b]  zakJiart.  In  the  middle  of  a 
word,  the  question  whether  it  belongs  to  the  syllable  of 
the  preceding  or  the  following  vowel  must  be  determined 
by  the  circumstances.  If  a  complete  syllable  precedes, 
that  is,  either  an  unaccented  long  vowel  or  a  vowelless 
consonant  serving  as  the  complement  of  a  previous  short 
vowel,  it  is  vocal.  If  it  be  preceded  by  a  short  vowel 
which  cannot  make  a  complete  syllable  without  the  aid 
of  a  following  consonant,  or  by  a  long  accented  vowel, 
it  is  silent:    ^"ipT  zo-khWe,   ^^3Tri  tiz-kWit,    ninb  libh-ne. 


28  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  21 

riDbtpr  fiktol-nd.  Sh'va  under  a  letter  doubled  by  Dagliesh- 
forte,  §  23,  is  vocal,  such  a  letter  being  equivalent  to 
two,  the  first  of  which  completes  the  previous  syllable, 
and  the  second  begins  the  syllable  which  follows:  Q^'H!:"*! 
=  D^"ij7in  liaz-z^klmrim.  Inasmuch  as  no  syllable  can 
begin  with  more  than  two  consonants,  §  18. 1,  two  vocal 
Sh'vas  can  never  come  together.  And  two  silent  ShVas 
can  never  come  together  except  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
since  none  but  final  syllables  can  close  with  two  conson- 
ants. When  two  simple  Sh'vas  concur  in  the  middle  of 
a  word,  therefore,  the  first  is  necessarily  silent  and  the 
second  vocal:  n^3TX  ez-kWa. 

2.  In  addition  to  this  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  Sh'va 
is  vocal  after  intermediate  syllables;  that  is  to  say,  when 
the  consonant  under  wliich  it  stands  performs  the  double 
office  of  completing  one  syllable  and  beginning  the  next. 
Thus,  when  it  follows  a  consonant  from  which  Daghesh- 
forte  has  been  omitted,  ^iiipB'^'l  vay'bJiak'shu  for  vay- 
y'bhak-k'shil,  or  the  first  of  two  similar  letters,  in  order 
that  the  reduplication  may  be  made  more  distinct,  ^bbn 
haVlu,  ri!ibp  kiVlath,  ibbl?  tsiVlo,  "'bbi^  aVlay,  "f/pn  hhik^ke, 
and  in  several  other  cases,  which  will  be  more  partic- 
ularly described  in  §  22. 

a.  Elias  Levita  ingeniously  represented  the  rules  for  vocal  Sh'va  hy 
the  first  five  letters  of  the  Hebrew  Alphabet,  thus  X  (=1)  when  it  stands 
under  the  first  letter  of  a  v?ord;  3  (=2)  after  another  Sh'va;  J  (=  nbinr.  fong) 
after  a  long  vowel;  T  (=iii}i'^)  after  Daghesh-forte;  il  (=D'^2^n  the  similar) 
ouder  the  first  of  two  similar  letters. 

Daghesh-Lenb. 

§  21.  The  second  class  of  signs  added  to  the  Hebrew 
text  are  those  which  are  designed  to  guide  in  the  pro- 
nunciation of  the  consonants.  These  are  the  diacritical 
point  over  Shin,  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte,  MappiJi, 


§21  DAGHESH-LENE.  29 

and  Eaphe.    The  use  of  the  first  of  these  has  abeady 
been  sufficiently  explained,  §  3.  1. 

1.  Daghesh-lene  (bp  'iTrn)  is  a  point  inserted  in  the  six 
letters  n  3  D  1  !i  1  (technically  called  B'ghadh  ICpJiath), 
to  indicate  the  loss  of  their  aspiration,  e.  g.  1  hh,  ^  b,  etc. 
As  these  letters  are  always  aspirated  after  a  vowel- 
,  sound,  however  shght,  and  never  as  an  initial  utterance 
®r  when  following  a  consonant,  they  invariably  require 
Daghesh-lene  whenever  they  are  not  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel  or  a  vocal  Sh'va.  It  is  consequently 
inserted  in  the  initial  aspirate  of  a  word  which  begins  a 
verse,  ri*il5>^"]2l  Gen.  1:1,  or  which  follows  a  word  bear- 
ing a  disjunctive  accent  (inasmuch  as  this  represents  a 
pauee  of  longer  or  shorter  duration),  ^U^^  'i'H'r^  E^-  1  •  1> 
"S  I  nn:^  Gren.  3:  22,  or  ending  in  a  consonant,  ""p.^^":]^, 
^S^'n  rrb'1'2  Gen.  24:  42;  but  not  if  it  follows  a  word 

•    :  -        -    J-  :    -  ' 

ending  in  a  vowel  and  having  a  conjunctive  accent, 
Dihri  "j'B,  ^n'n  nJn'n  Gen.  l:  2.  The  sacred  name  nin" 
is  followed  by  Daghesh-lene,  even  though  it  may  have  a 
conjunctive  accent.  Num.  10: 29,  Deut.  3: 26,  Josh.  10:  30, 
11:8,  Ps.  18:  21,  because  in  reading  the  Jews  always 
substitute  for  it  the  word  "^'li^,  wliich  ends  in  a  conson- 

T       —/ 

ant.  In  three  instances,  however,  e.g.  D!l  ''j''lS;  Ps.  68: 18, 
^nhnp  Isa.  34:  11,  nn  ib-^  Ezek.  23:  42,  Daghesh-lene  is 
not  inserted  after  a  vowel-letter,  which  retains  its  con- 
sonant sound. 

2.  Daghesh-lene  is  inserted  in  a  medial  or  final  aspi- 
rate preceded  by  a  vowelless  consonant,  whether  this 
be  accompanied  by  silent  Sh'va  or  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g. 
r}*ipp3,  r^bir;  but  not  if  it  be  preceded  by  a  vowel  or 
vocal  Sh'va,  whether  simple  or  compound,  e.  g.  ri^i^l, 

a.  Thft  primary  signification  of  the  name  Daghesh  is  commonly  ex- 
plained  from  the  Syriac    <-.*-,«?   (^?'^)>   to  which  Castellus  in  his  lexicon 


30  OETHOGKAPHT.  §  22 

gives  .the  seuse  of  piercing.  This  is  by  some  applied  to  the  puncture  or 
point  which  is  its  written  sign,  by  others  to  its  power  of  sharpening  the 
sound  of  letters  by  removing  their  aspiration  or  doubling  them.  Buxtorf, 
however,  in  his  Chaldee  Lexicon,  disputes  the  existence  of  such  a  root  in 
either  Syriac  or  Chaldee,  alleging  that  in  Prov.  12:  18,  the  passage  quoted 
to  prove  the  word,  the  true  reading  is  |-a»^»  (Xiaa"l).  The  six  letters  which 
receive  Daghesh-lene  in  Hebrew  have  the  same  twofold  pronunciation  in 
Syriac,  a  red  dot  called  Eukhokh  (.^oj  softness),  being  written  beneath 
them  wlien  they  were  to  be  aspirated,  and  another  called  Kushoi  (—  *■ «  " 
hardness),  being  written  above  them  when  they  were  not. 

b.  Grammarians  are  not  agreed  whether  the  aspirated  or  unaspirated 
sound  of  these  consonants  was  the  original  one.  There  being  no  data  for 
the  settlement  of  the  question,  each  decides  it  by  his  own  theory  of  pho- 
netic changes.  The  correctness  of  the  Massoretic  punctuation  has  some- 
times been  questioned  in  regard  to  this  matter,  on  the  ground  of  the  im- 
probability of  such  fluctuation  in  the  sound  of  these  letters  in  the  same 
word.  But  besides  the  Syriac  analogy  just  referred  to,  the  Sanskrit  lan- 
guage shows  the  almost  unlimited  extent  to  which  euphonic  changes  may 
be  carried  by  a  people  possessing  a  sensitive  and  discriminating  ear.  The 
Sanskrit  aspirates,  besides  being  subjected  to  other  mutations  which  can- 
not here  be  detailed,  regularly  lose  their  aspiration  when  finals,  and  under 
certain  conditions  when  medials,  throwing  it  back,  where  this  is  possible, 
upon  a  previous  letter.  Bopp  Kritische  Grammatik,  pp.  30.  42.  Similar  laws 
prevail  to  some  extent  in  Greek,  e.  g.  6pl^,  Tptfoc\  Tpe(f)Ci},  Sps\pa;  6-Jta, 
irvSyiv;  ovK  ex^y  °'^X  ^s^j   f^^^'  W/"'"- 

§  22.  The  absence  of  Daghesh-lene  in  an  aspirate 
sometimes  shows  a  preceding  simple  ShVa  to  be  vocal 
when  this  would  not  otherwise  have  been  known.  In 
most  of  the  cases  referred  to,  a  letter  origina%  belong- 
ing to  the  succeeding  syllable  is  by  the  prefixing  of  a 
short  vowel  drawn  back  to  complete  the  syllable  before 
it;  instead,  however,  of  giving  up  its  previous  connection 
altogether,  it  forms  an  intermediate  syllable,  §  20.  2,  the 
Sh'va  remaining  vocal  though  the  antecedent  vowel  is 
short;  thus,  nnb  VhliaWi  with  the  prefix  21  becomes  nib^ 
hiVbliahh,  not  Z^li  hil-bahh. 

a.  The  particular  in.stances  in  which  this  may  occur  are  the  following, 
viz.:  (1)  The  Kal  imperative  of  verbs  and  the  Kal  infinitive  with  suffixes, 

e.  g.  113",  iiii:?,  612^',  i:"ia:^'  from  ib?;  yet  with  occasional  exceptions,  as 
C3SCX3  Lev.  23:  39,  where  0  necessarily  closes  the  syllable,  otherwise  two 
successive  letters  would  have  vocal  Sh'va,  contrary  to  §  20.  1.     (2)  Those 


§22 


DAGHESH-LENE.  51 


forms  of  Pe  Guttural  verbs  in  which  the  first  radical  assumes  a  short  vowel 
in  place  of  the  silent  Sh'va  in  the  regular  inflexion,  e,  g.  ^T3?^,  di3"tn  for 
Jiisss;:,  0'i3"n.  (3)  The  construct  plural  of  nouns  "inns'  from  Q^\^'J,  risriS 
from  nikra,  riinn  from  ninnri,  though  with  occasional  exceptions,  as  "'Q'xiT 
Cant.  8:  6,  but  "^S'^-i  Ps.  76:  4;  '^k'2^  Isa.  5:  10,  niQ-in  Vs.  69:  10,  "^sna  Gen. 
50:  23,  but  Dri^?")3  Judg.  7:  6;  "^nJia,  inaa  from  nJS  are  peculiar  in  omit- 
ting Daghesh  in  the  singular  with  suffixes.  (4)  Three  feminine  nouns  ending 
in  ffl,  wibp  from  '7\\'0,  n*n^^  from  "ih"',  nni^  (only  occurring  with  suffixes) 
from  131^,  but  not  Wnip.  Also  a  few  other  nouns  of  different  forms,  viz.: 
D•:^^*l^  but  ''rs'i:',  f^=^'4  "'i;')?',  M''3"!T;J,  Q"''^?"i^,  '^^^^-  (5)  After  prefixes,  as 
He  interrogative,  e.g.  t3r}i"l"^ri  Gen.  29:  5  from  D^^"^■;,  and  inseparable  prep- 
ositions, e.  g.  T^hlb  from  "I'^S'i,  W"t3  from  ran,  "ihns  from  inn.  Usage  is 
not  uniform  in  the  case  of  Kal  infinitives  following  inseparable  prepositions, 
e.  g.  n'inp'b,  nir^a;  ^2:2,  bsJS,  Vai'b;  xirib  Isa.  31:  4,  iii^h  Num.4:  23,  8:24; 
rnS^,  13"3.  (6)  The  suffixes  of  the  second  person  ^,  DD,  "jD  never  receive 
Daghesh-lene,  ~|:2,  oinpS,  except  once  after  Nun  Epenthetic,  §  101,  2  (5), 
r^Spnx  Jer.  22 :  24. 

These  rules  are  sometimes  of  importance  in  etymology;  thus,  Ti''3'i^!S 
Ezek.  27:  12  must  have  as  its  ground  form  "pnT^",  not  'i'iaiS';  and  tD3lX  Hos. 
7;  6,  tsril  Ps.  90:  10  cannot  be  infinitives  with  suffixes,  but  must  be  from 
the  segbolates  niX,  Ifnn. 

b.  The  omission  of  Daghesh-lene  from  the  final  letter  of  piplPl  Prov. 
30:  6,  abbreviated  from  Cj'^Gin  or  "Oin,  and  from  the  aspirate  in  the  proper 
names  hktyp'^  Josh.  15:  38,  2  Kin.  14:  7,  and  t3i;np^  Josh.  15:  56  is  ex- 
ceptional. The  Daghesh  occasionally  occurring  in  initial  aspirates  after 
words  ending  in  a  vowel  and  having  a  conjunctive  accent,  is  for  the  most 
part  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive,  §  24,  e.  g.  "jS'IS  in".i"ix  Gen.  11 :  31  and  else- 
where, "ri  il^iiX  Gen.  46:  28,  nx5  nxs  Ex.  15:  1.  21,  tn^ka  !lj  Ex.  15:  13, 
rOE  Trp'-::"/.  Deut.  I6:  1  (eomp.  ^  n^r:^  Gen.  20  :  9),  Di  !TJ"'^'5<"!  Deut  31:28 
(comp.  -b  n7";i<l  Isa.  8:  2),  1'"iQ  Tyjb^V  Gen.  35:  29,  ia  nndi'lsa.  40:  7,  also 
Ex.  15:  11.  16,  Isa.  54:  12,  Jer.  20:  9.  But  Daghesh-lene  may  be  inserted 
in  the  first  of  two  similar  aspirates,  if  it  have  no  vowel,  for  greater  distinct- 
iiess  of  pronunciation;  viz.  in  3  followed  by  3  Gen.  39:  12,  Jer.  3 :  25  or  by 
E  Ex.  14:  4.  17,  Lev.  25:  53,  or  by  ^  (in  Baer's  text)  Gen.  32:  11,  40:  7; 
in  3  followed  by  D  Josh.  8:  24,  10:  20,  Isa.  10:  9;  also  in  biblical  Araniaeic 
in  n  followed  by  n  Dan.  3:  3  (in  some  copies)  and  in  3  followed  by  n  Dan. 
3:  3.  The  old  strife  as  to  the  Daghesh  in  the  word  D"P>;3  two  is  not  yet 
settled.  Kimchi  explained  it  as  Daijhesh-lene  upon  the  supposition  that  the 
word  was  abridged  from  D'^PCX;  Schultens  as  Daghesh-forte  arising  from 
an  assimilated  5,  contending  that  it  was  for  D'^ri'li  from  d"^n3d;  Nordheimer 
as  an  anomalous  Daghesh-lene,  introduced  as  a  euphonic  expedient  to  pre- 
vent the  combination  of  an  aspirated  n  with  a  sibilant,  such  as  is  obviated 
in  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  by  a  transposition  that  would  here  be  inadmissible. 
The  puzzle  is  still  further  perplexed  by  the  circumstance  that  it  once 
appears  with  the  preposition  )'q  without  the  Daghesh,  '^iPt"^  Judg.  16:  28, 
and  again  with  the  same  preposition  witli  it,  CPd^Q  Jon.  4:  11,  the  Methegh 
showing  the  Sh'va  to  be  vocal,  as  might  slso  be  inferred  from  the  fact  that 
Daghesh-forte  has  been  omitted. 


32  orthography.  §  23 

Daghesh-Forte. 

§  23.  1.  When  the  same  consonant  was  repeated  with 
a  vowel  or  even  the  sKghtest  hiatus  intervening,  so  that 
successive  movements  of  the  organs  of  speech  were  re- 
quired in  the  pronunciation,  the  Hebrews  invariably 
wrote  the  letter  twice.  When,  however,  there  was  no 
interval  between  the  reduplicated  consonants,  and  the 
only  audible  result  was  a  more  protracted  or  vehement 
utterance  of  the  same  sound  eifected  by  a  single  effort 
of  the  organs,  the  letter  was  wi^itten  but  once.  This  fact 
the  Massoretic  punctuators  have  indicated  by  placing  a 
point  called  Daghesh-forte  (pin  ir;n)  in  the  bosom  of  a 
letter  so  affected,  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled  in  the 
pronunciation;  thus,  bi3^1  vayyimmal.  Daghesh-forte  may 
be  found  in  any  letter  with  the  exception  of  the  gutturals 
i<  n  M  3?,  which  on  account  of  their  weakness  do  not 
admit  of  reduplication.  The  letter  "^j  partaking  of  tliis 
with  other  peculiarities  of  the  gutturals,  receives  it  only 
in  a  very  few  exceptional  cases,  e.  g.  "nL'i^'n'^r  Cant.  5:  2, 
n^?2  Prov.  14:  10. 

-     T 

a.  For  other  examples  of  Resh  with  Daghesh-forte  see  Prov.  11:  21,  15  :i, 
Jer.  39:  12,  Ezek.  16:  4,  also  §  24.  h. 

2.  The  aspirates,  when  doubled,  always  at  the  same 
time  lose  their  aspiration;  thus,  "pS"^  yipjKikedh.  Daghesh- 
forte  in  these  letters  is  readily  distinguishable  from 
Daghesh-lene  by  the  consideration  that  a  consonant  can- 
not be  pronounced  double  except  after  a  vowel.  A  point 
in  one  of  the  aspirates  is,  therefore,  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Daghesh-lene. 

3.  Daghesh-forte  in  1  may  be  distinguished  from 
Shurek  in  the  same  way.  Inasmuch  as  two  vowels  cannot 
come  together  m  the  same  word,  if  a  vowel  precedes  it 
is  Daghesh-forte,  if  not  it  is  Shurek. 


§  24  DAGHESH-FOETE.  S3 

a.  Some  Grammarians  speak  of  Daghesh-forte  impUcifum  in  the  gut- 
turals, by  wliicli  they  mean  that  these  letters  appear  in  certain  cases  to 
complete  a  foregoing  syllable  as  well  as  to  begin  that  in  which  they  prop- 
erly stand,  in  spite  of  the  omission  of  Daghesh,  which  analogy  would  re- 
quire them  to  receive. 

h.  The  Arabs  have  a  sign  of  reduplication,  Teshdid  («),  which  is 
written  above  the  doubled  letter.  The  Syrians  have  no  written  sign  for 
this  purpose,  and  it  is  disputed  whether  their  letters  were  ever  doubled  in 
pronunciation.  According  to  Asseman  Biblioth.  Orient.  III.  2.  p.  379,  the 
Western  differed  from  the  Eastern  Syrians  in  this  respect,  "Occidentales 
nuUibi  literas  geminant." 

§  24.  Different  epithets  have  been  apphed  to  Daghesh- 
forte  to  describe  its  various  uses  or  the  occasions  of  its 
employment.  1.  When  separate  letters,  whether  origin- 
ally ahke,  or  made  so  by  assimilation,  are  by  the  in- 
flection or  formation  of  words  brought  into  juxtaposition, 
the  Daghesh-forte  which  represents  such  a  doubling  is 
called  compensative;  e.g.  ^P^S,  formed  by  appending  the 
syllable  *37i  to  the  root  tT\l]  ^rih:  composed  of  the  same 
syllable  and  the  root  "PiD,  whose  last  letter  is  changed  to 
n  to  conform  with  that  which  follows;  "'Sb  from  lit. 
2.  When  the  reduplication  is  indicative  of  a  particular 
grammatical  form  the  Daghesh-forte  is  called  charac- 
teristic, e.  g.  in  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  of  verbs;  as, 
Tj'in,  Tj^nrn,  and  certain  forms  of  nouns,  as,  "liiaS.  3.  When 
it  has  arisen  from  the  necessity  of  converting  a  previous 
simple  syllable  into  a  mixed  one  in  order  to  preserve  the 
quantity  of  a  short  vowel  which  it  contains,  it  is  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative;  e.  g.  ;2D'  for  nb\  4.  When  the  initial 
letter  of  a  word  is  doubled  under  the  influence  of  the 
final  vowel  of  the  word  preceding,  it  is  Daghesh-forte 
conjunctive ;  e.  g.  T\T~12,  ^'""."r*!!?  ^^2S  ^^^p.  5.  When  the 
last  letter  of  an  intermediate  syllable  is  doubled  in  order 
to  make  the  following  hiatus  or  vocal  Sh'va  more  distinct, 
it  is  Daghesh-forte  dirimens  or  separative,  because  the 
letter  which  receives  it  is  thus  separated  in  part  from 
the  syllable  to  which  it  belongs;  e.  g.  "iSS?  inn'hlie  for 


34  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  24 

*ii:y  iu'lhe.  6.  When  the  first  letter  of  a  final  syllable  is 
doubled  under  the  influence  of  a  previous  vowel  bearing 
the  accent  (mostly  a  pause  accent,  §  36.  2.  a.),  for  the 
sake  of  increased  fullness  and  force  of  pronunciation,  it 
is  Daghesh-forte  emphatic;  e.g.  ^31"  for  ^b~n.  7.  A  letter 
following  a  guttural  with  silent  Sh'va  is  in  some  manu- 
scripts and  in  the  edition  of  Baer  and  Dehtzsch  regularly 
doubled  by  what  is  called  Daghesh-forte  orthophonic  to 
show  that  there  is  no  hiatus  after  the  guttural;  e.  g. 
na^n  rammd,  not  ra'ma  Gen.  10:  7,  i-T>;^  yazzer  Isa.  16:  9. 
In  the  first  three  uses  named  above  Daghesh-forte  is 
said  to   be    essential,   in  the  last  four  it  is  euphonic 

(nvV-ipn  rini^irb). 

a.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  occurs  regularly  after  the  pronouns  n^ 
and  MT  followed  by  Makkeph,  e.  g.  C^i'r-n-a^  ni::-!!?  Ps.  133:  1,  n;iri);-nT 
Num.  34:  6.  7.  9;  also  in  the  initial  letter  of  monosyllables  and  of  words 
accented  on  the  first  syllable  after  a  final  Kamets  or  Seghol  in  words 
followed  by  Makkeph  ri<7-nr;;rb  Gen.  2:  23,  r|D3-n:r^^  Gen.  43:  15,  or 
having  a  conjunctive  accent  on  tlie  penult,  TNT  ""■^"  Gen.  3:14,  T\-  n'zN  Gen. 
33:  5,  provided  this  was  originally  the  accented  syllable,  or,  if  the  accent 
has  been  shifted  from  the  ultimate,  was  the  place  of  the  secondary  accent 
Methegh  n*]?  HN-jJja  (for  ^S'^^)  Ps.  84:  4,  but  TO  N-.i^  Deut.  24:  1,  sia  Ti-vs: 
Ezek.  17:  8;  this  proviso  does  not  attach  to  the  futures  and  participles  of 
iT'b  verbs  "^np  nri  Gen.  1:  11,  "is  nry-^  Ex.  21:31.  Final  Kamets  before 
Makkeph  is  not  followed  by  Daghesh-foite  unless  the  syllable  containing 
the  Kamets  begins  with  two  consonants  NSTica  Gen.  27:  26  or  is  im- 
mediately preceded  by  Methegh  "''s-n::n  Gen.  30:  1,  but  P';]ij"n-:r'l  Ps.  45:5. 
Words  having  the  secondary  accent  iSletliegh  on  the  first  syllable  likewise 
admit  Daghesh  after  a  final  unaccented  Kamets  or  Seghol,  unless  they 
begin  with  an  aspirate  sin^i?  r^lZ'd  Gen.'49:  31,  but  ninbir  n^x  Gen.  2:  4. 
The  inseparable  particles  3,  p,  h,  1,  when  prefixed  without  a  vowel,  do  not 
admit  Day;hesh-forte  conjunctive,  except  T^  which  follows  the  ordinary 
rule  Tjs  r"^'i;:^"l  Deut.  10:  1,  and  one  additicnial  instance  ilV^'z  '^";""?1  Ps.  19:3. 
Sibilants  and  liquids  may  be  doubled  after  an  unaccented  final  ii  1SS  I'Sip 
Gen.  19:  14,  N2  ^TCX'il  Gen.  19:  2,  1  Sam.  8:  19.  Daghesh-forte  conjinictiva 
is  rarely  found  after  an  accented  vowel,  yet  N3  nsn  Gen.  19:  2,  "i^Nr  ^'^^ 
Ex.  6:  10,  29,  13:  1,  14:  1,  Num.  31:  26.  It  also  occurs  in  a  few  exceptional 
cases  not  embraced  in  the  rules  above  given.  See  the  preface  to  Baer's 
edition  of  Proverbs.  In  a  few  instances  words  thus  united  are  written  as 
one,  e.  g.  TO-?  Ex.  4:  2  for  W  n?,  so  C=sp  Isa.  3:  15,  f^i<;J^l?  Mai.  1:  13, 
nxsxoa  Isa.  27:  8. 


§25 


DAGHESH-FOETB. 


35 


b.  Daghesh-forte  separative  occurs  only  in  the  following  example*: 


n'HSX  Hos.  3:  2. 
tl-ini-ip-'^  Ps.  45:  10. 
D'^ra-n  Am.  5:  25. 
i'nn;^r^3n  Gen.  18:  21. 
'  n:n3n  Gen.  37 :  32. 
•jil^n  Gen.  17:  17. 
dnwn  1  Sam.  10:  24, 
\       17:25.  2  Kin, 
6:  32. 
Dninan  Job  17:  2. 
■irssn  Ex.  2:  3. 
VlSi'l'nn  (?)  Judg.  20: 
43. 

snias^n  i  Sam.  i :  6. 

-■'g^Dn  Isa.  57:6. 
n^i37  Gen.  49:  10. 


nnp'^b  Prov.  30:  17. 
TQjs-]  1  Sam.  28:  10. 
riDDininss  (?)  Ezek.  13: 
20. 
T\Tfb^'3  Isa.  33:  1. 
ninsap  Joel  1:  17. 
D"in-HO  Job  9:  18. 
"^lyj-q  Nah.  3:  17. 
Vi^i^'O  Ex.  15:  17. 
-rrnp'?  Deut.  23:  11. 
nns2  Ps.  141:  3. 
n'n:!?  Prov.  4:  13. 
^raijsn:  Judg.  20 :  32. 
1230  Jer.  4:  7. 
fed  Isa.  9:3,  10: 
27,  14:  25. 


-•^33?  Deut.  32:  32. 
"inh??  2  Sam,  23:  27. 
Jer.  29:  27. 
C -DISSS'  Isa.  58:  3. 
Di"'n'-is?  Am.  5:  21. 
-■ laiss-  Gen.  49:  17. 

Judg.  5:  22. 
nidp:?  Ps.  8y :  52. 
?]-ni3;3>'  Ps.  77 :  20. 
nid-is'  Prov.  27:  25. 

■^snnaij  Ps.  ii9:  139. 
•'Slrna:?  Ps.  88:  17. 
tsHnTSj^  (?)  Ps.  37:  15. 
Isa.  5:  28. 
b>lb3l23  Ps.  58:  9. 


This  list  is  corrected  and  enlarged  from  Gesen.  Lehrg.  pp.  86  flf.  Those 
words  which  are  followed  by  a  note  of  interrogation  (?)  are  found  in  some 
editions  but  not  in  others.  Daghesh  separative  may  be  found  after  He 
interrogative  in  some  instances  not  included  in  the  above  list. 

c.  Daghesh-forte  emphatic  occurs  only  in  ^h'ln  Judg.  5:  7.  1  Sam.  2:  5; 
sian  Job  22:  12  (Edit.  Baer);  ^^n^l  Job  29:  21;  ^inn-:  or  Wn';!  Job  21:  13; 
sins-]  Isa.  33:  12,  Jer.  51:  58;  iTJ^b  Ezek.  21:  15,  16;  "upD  Ezek.  6:  9;  nn'ii: 
Isa.  41:  17;  isrj  Ezek.  27:  19;  Ijpi^  (?)  Isa.  19:  6;  and  probably  =i3rnn  Job 
13:  9  (not  in  pause). 

d.  Daghesh-forte  orthophonic  also  occurs  according  to  the  Massora  in 
the  initial  letter  of  a  word,  when  the  preceding  word  ends  in  the  same 
letter;  accordingly  the  edition  of  Baer  and  Delitzsch  has  ::!iria~DX  Gen. 
14:  23,  dnW?-i?^  Gen.  31:  54,  and  some  manuscripts  have  t.'^^^  '^hn  Gen. 
5:  6.  Occasional  instances  also  occur  of  the  doubling  of  an  initial  liquid 
after  another  final  liquid,  e.  g.  xls  1  "i'ai<''1  (suggesting  the  pronunciation 
vayyomel-lo)  1  Kin.  11:  22  and  in  certain  manuscripts  N^  "itxb  Gen.  3:  17, 
iirX7l3"5~  Ex.  20:  10,  and  even  (in  manuscripts)  of  an  initial  sibilant  after 
a  final  n,  e.  g.  CT;Tr~nx  probably  esh-sh'mdm  Gen.  5:2,  "iixs  ni'n:30  Gen. 
4:  4,  inT"ri3=d  Lev.  15:  32.   See  Gesenius'  Lehrgebiiude  pp.  90.  91. 

§  25.  In  order  to  the  distinct  utterance  of  a  redupli- 
cated consonant,  it  must  be  followed  as  well  as  preceded 
by  a  vowel-sound.  Daghesh-forte  is  consequently  never 
written  in  a  final  vowelless  letter,  with  the  exception  of 
the  two  words  ri5<,  rir;,  both  of  which  end  in  aspirates 
whose  pronunciation  would  be  changed  by  the  removal 
of  the  Daghesh.   In  every  other  instance  the  doubling  is 


36  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  26 

neglected,  even  though  the  letter  be  an  aspirate,  which 
will  for  this  reason  resume  its  aspiration;  e.  g.  bp,  iif>) 
zb,  'S'::;  rr'l  abridged  from  mE"^";  t'-^^;^  from  rk;ii\  In 
a  medial  letter  with  Sh'va  Daghesh  may  be  written,  be- 
cause the  Sh'va  being  thus  rendered  vocal  the  reduph- 
cation  can  be  made  audible  by  means  of  the  hiatus 
which  it  represents ;  it  is,  however,  quite  as  frequently 
omitted,  the  Sh'va  commonly  remaining  vocal  as  if  it 
were  inserted,  and  compound  Sh'va  being  occasionally 
substituted  for  simple  to  indicate  this  fact,  §  16.  3.  b.] 
e.  g.  D-n^:'  for  D'n^y,  ixcs  for  i5<53,  ^np";  for  ^np:,  ^M^bxni 
Judg.  16:  16,  particularly  after  prefixes,  as  Vav  Con- 
versive,  the  article  and  prej)Osition  '2,  so  ""Jl'l,  uipl'^H, 
Drin^j:*?^.  It  is  seldom  omitted  from  a  medial  aspirate  on 
account  of  the  change  in  its  sound  involved:  yet  even 
this  is  done  occasionally,  e.g.  ^^2^7:3  Judg.  8:  2  for  TkS'^, 
^irn  Isa.  22:  10  for  ^krn,  "pniT  from  •ji^S".  In  a  few  rare 
instances  it  is  dropped  from  a  letter  followed  by  a  vowel, 
when  the  laws  of  syllables  will  permit  and  the  pronun- 
ciation will  not  be  materially  affected;  e.  g.  nri^JT]  Ruth 
1:  13  for  nsiyn,  so  :nr:sn  Isa.  60:  4. 

r  ••  T     ••'  T     I-    T    I" 

Mappik. 

§  26.  Mappik  (p'S^  bringing  out  or  uttering),  is  a 
point  in  one  of  the  letters  i<  H  1  ^,  showing  that  it  rep- 
resents a  consonant  and  not  a  vowel,  or  in  other  words 
that  it  does  not  quiesce  in  the  preceding  vowel-sign.  It 
is  unnecessary,  however,  to  employ  any  notation  for  this 
purpose  in  the  case  of  5<  1  and  "',  for  their  quiescence 
can  be  readily  determined  in  all  cases  by  the  rules  al- 
ready given,  §  13.  Although  it  is  much  more  extensively 
used  in  manuscripts,  therefore,  Mapj)ik  is  in  modern 
editions  of  the  Hebrew  Bible  only  inserted  in  final  H 


§  27,28  ACCENTS.  37 

when  it  retains  its  consonantal  power;  e.  g.  •^-S"]^  artsdh, 
r^^'^k  artsd,  t^rji^b  I'kclhhdh,  rinpb  Idk'hhd.  The  point  four 
times  found  in  «,  ^iS^n^^^  Gen.  43:  26,  Ezra  8:  18,  ^5<'nri 
Lev.  23:  17,  ^^^"^  Job  33:  21,  though  called  a  Daghesh  in 
the  Massoretic  notes  in  the  margin,  is  probably  to  be 
regarded  as  Mappik. 

a.  In  some  manuscripts   and  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  printed  at  Brescia 
in  1494  Mappik  is  placed  not  in  the  body  of  the  letter  He,  but  underneath  it. 

Raphe. 

§  27.  Raphe  (!~|'n  weak),  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke 
placed  over  a  letter,  and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh- 
lene,  Daghesh-forte,  or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be.  As 
no  inconvenience  can  arise  from  its  omission,  it  is  only 
occasionally  used  in  modern  Bibles,  and  not  with  entire 
uniformity  in  the  different  editions.  It  is  chiefly  found 
where  a  Mappik  has  been  omitted  in  in,  which  according 
to  analogy  might  be  expected  to  be  inserted,  e.  g.  j^nc^ri 
Ex.  9:18,  ri^Sir^  Lev.  13:4,  nkpnn  Num.  15:  28,  nb  Num. 
32:  42,  ri'^r^r  Job  31:  22  in  some  copies.  In  :jx-n'"ir?n 
Ex.  20:  4,  Deut.  5:  8,  it  is  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-forte, 
and  shows  that  b  may  either  be  doubled  agreeably  to 
the  point  in  its  bosom  or  not.  In  nil"iri  i^b  Ex.  20:  13, 
Deut.  5: 17,  it  is  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  and  shows 
that  the  T\  may  either  have  its  unaspirated  sound,  as  the 
Daghesh  indicates,  or  may  be  aspirated. 

Accents. 

§  28.  The  third  class  of  Massoretic  additions  to  the 
text  are  those  which  relate  to  the  words.  These  are  the 
accents,  Makkepb,  Methegh,  and  the  K'ri.  An  accent 
(D3?b)  is  written  upon  every  word  with  a  twofold  design, 
1st,  of  marking  its  tone-syllable,  and  2dly,  of  indicating 


38  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  28 

its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence.  The  great 
number  of  the  accents  has  respect  entirely  to  this  second 
function,  there  being  no  difference  in  the  quality  of  the 
stress  laid  upon  particular  syllables,  such  for  example  as 
is  marked  by  the  Greek  acute,  grave,  and  circumflex, 
but  only  that  difference  in  its  amount  wliich  arises  from 
the  unequal  emphasis  naturally  laid  upon  the  different 
members  of  a  clause  or  period.  The  pimctuators  have 
attempted  not  only  to  indicate  the  pauses  to  be  made 
in  reading,  as  is  done  by  the  stops  in  use  in  other  lan- 
guages, but  to  represent  to  the  eye  the  precise  position 
held  by  each  word  in  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  and 
the  various  grades  of  attraction  or  repulsion  arising 
from  the  relations  whether  co-ordinate  or  subordinate 
which  subsist  among  them.  Every  sentence  is  fancifully 
regarded  as  a  territory,  which,  partitioned  into  its  several 
clauses,  forms  empires,  kingdoms,  and  principalities, 
ruled  by  their  respective  sovereigns,  each  of  whom  has 
his  own  train  of  inferiors  and  dependants.  The  accents 
are  accordingly  divided  into  Disjunctives  or  Rulers 
(p'bb'2),  and  Conjunctives  or  Servants  (D"'!!?;).  The 
former  indicate  that  the  word  upon  which  they  are 
placed  is  more  or  less  separated  from  those  that  follow; 
they  mark  thus  the  end  of  a  clause  or  of  the  section  of 
a  clause  over  which  they  exert  control.  The  latter  indi- 
cate that  the  word  over  or  under  which  they  are  written 
is  connected  with  what  follows  and  belongs  to  the  clause 
or  section  ruled  by  the  next  succeeding  Disjunctive. 

a.  The  stress  of  voice  denoted  by  the  accent  must  not  be  confounded 
with  quantity.  An  accented  syllable  may  nevertheless  be  short,  the  energy 
with  which  it  is  pronounced  not  necessarily  affecting  its  length. 

b.  The  Jews  made  use  of  the  accents  as  musical  notes  in  the  cantilla- 
tion  of  the  synagogue,  whence  tliey  are  also  called  ni:^^?.  In  the  judgment 
of  some  this  is  a  part,  and  perhaps  a  leading  part,  of  their  original  design. 
Their  great  variety,  the  frequent  occurrence  of  accents  of  opposite  powers 
upon  the  same  word,  and  the  distinct  system  of  poetical  accents,    favor 


29 


ACCENTS. 


39 


this  opinion.  Such  as  are  curious  to  know  the  details  may  find  the  mode 
of  their  employment  for  this  purpose  explained  at  length  in  BartoloccLi 
Bibliotheca  Magna  Kabbinica,  vol.  iv.  pp.  427—444. 

§  29.  The  Disjunctive  accents  may  be  divided  into 
four  classes  of  various  rank  or  power,  as  follows,  viz: 


Class  I.  Emjpi 

erors. 

*1.  Siimk 

(,) 

Jpfl^O 

*2.  Athnahh 

U 

nans 

m  :  - 

Class  II.    Kings. 

8.  S'gholta 

C) 

kii^l'q  postp. 

4.   Zakeph  Katon 

(■) 

i; 

t^p  m 

5.  Zakeph  Gadhol 

() 

bin 5  Ci^i 

•6.  Tiphhha 

(,) 

w  >    • 

Class  III.    Di 

ikes. 

*7.  E'bhP 

O 

T%'} 

*8.   Shal.sheletli 

(') 

t^:h-^ 

♦9.  Zarka 

(") 

^i^"]]  postp. 

10.  Pashta 

(') 

&::03  postp. 

11.  Y'thibh 

o 

'2.''T\\   prep. 

12.  T'bhir 

o 

■r  t 

Class  IV.    Counts, 

*13.  Pazer 

( ) 

-  T 

14.  Karne  Phara 

(") 

"'^3  ''3'^i? 

15.  T'lisha  Gh'dhola 

(') 

nbins  X'ribri  prep. 

16.  Geresh 

(') 

'^'1^. 

17.  G'rashayim 

(•) 

d'^^'na 

*18.  P'sik 

0) 

lpiG«3 

The  Conjunctive 

accents,  or 

Servants,  are  the  fo 

ing,  viz: 

*19.  Merka 

(.) 

»ini 

*20.  Miinahh 

(.) 

naiia 

40  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  30 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

21. 

Merl<a  Kh'phula 

n 

']J5''B' 

?  ^^^ 

*22. 

IMahpakh 

^  ■*' 

TiEnq 

23. 

Darga 

^  1  '' 

"  «- 

*24. 

Kadhma 

/  '*\ 

^^^12 

*25. 

Yerahh  ben  Yomo 

(y) 

•iiaii-' 

1 ... 

26. 

T'llsha  K'tanna 

^ 

n'japs  N'^-'jn  ^osfp. 

a.  Merka  Kh'phula  has  sometimes  been  reckoned  among  the  Disjunc- 
tives, as  by  Geseiiius  in  his  Lehrgebaude;  but  the  absence  of  Daghesh-lene 
in  the  word  following  that  on  which  it  stands  in  Ex.  5:  15,  Ezek.  14:  4, 
proves  that  it  is  a  Conjunctive. 

h.  According  to  their  most  probable  significations,  the  names  of  the 
accents  appear  to  be  in  part  borrowed  from  their  forms  and  in  part  from 
their  uses.  Thus  the  Disjunctives:  Silluk,  end;  Athnahh,  rest;  Segbolta 
bunch  of  grapes;  Zakeph,  small  and  great,  causing  susj)ension ;  Tiphhha, 
palm  of  the  hand ;  IR'hh'i^,  square  or  reposing ;  Shalsheleth,  c/iaf»;  Zarka, 
dispersion;  Pashta,  expansion  or  letting  doion  (the  voice);  Y'thibh,  sitting 
still;  T'bhir,  interruption ;  Pazer,  separator;  Karne  Phara,  a  heifer^s  horns; 
T'lisha,  great  and  small,  shield;  Geresh,  expulsion;  G'rasliayim,  double 
Geresh  ;  P'sik,  cut  off.  Conjunctives:  Mevkn, pi'olonging;  Munahh,  (a  trumpet) 
at  rest,  i.  e.,  in  its  proper  position;  Merka  Kh'phula,  double  Merka;  Mah- 
pakh,  (a  trumpet)  inverted;  Daxga,,  progress ;  Kadhma,  beginning,  Yerahh 
ben-Yomo,  moon  a  day  old. 

§  30.  1.  Fourteen  of  the  accents  are  written  over,  and 
eleven  luider,  the  words  to  which  they  are  attached. 
P'sik,  whose  only  use  is  to  modify  the  power  of  other 
accents,  is  written  after  the  word  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  in  the  same  line  with  it.  The  place  of  the  accents 
is  either  over  or  under  the  letter  preceding  the  tone- 
vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the  prepositives  Y'thibh 
and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  which  always  accompany  the  initial 
letter  of  the  word,  and  the  postpositives  S'gholta,  Zarka, 
Pashta,  and  T'lisha  K'tanna,  which  stand  upon  the  final 
letter.  Y'thibh  is  only  used  when  the  first  is  the  tone- 
syllable.  Pashta  is  repeated  if  the  word  on  which  it 
stands  is  accented  on  the  penult,  e.  g.  \r\t\  Gen.  1 :  2,  or 
ends  with  two  vowelless  letters,  e.  g.  Fi'l'^l  Ruth  3:7,  or 
if  the  last  letter  has  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g.  ?T  Gen.  33: 13, 
and  in  some  manuscripts  and  editions  there  is  a  lil<:e  re- 


§31  ACCENTS.  41 

petition  of  S'gholta,  Zarka  and  T'lisha  K'tanna.  When 
this  is  not  the  case,  there  is  nothing  to  mark  the  tone- 
syllable  of  the  word  unless  this  may  chance  to  be  the 
one  upon  which  the  nature  of  the  accent  in  question 
requires  it  to  be  placed. 

2.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh,  §  44;  but 
the  former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the 
last  word  in  the  verse,  while  Methegh  is  never  written 
under  a  tone-syllable.    Pashta  is  hkewise  distinguished 
from  Kadhma  only  by  its  position  upon  the  last  letter 
of  the  word,  and  after  the  superscribed  vowel,  if  there 
be  one,   e.  g.  ^is  Gen.  1:  7,   "i^i^b"-?  Gren.  24:  7,  while 
Kadhma  is  placed  upon  the  letter  preceding  the  tone- 
vowel,  e.  g.  "ITS  Gi-en.  2:19,  where  this  chances  to  be  a 
final  letter  the  laws  of  consecution  only  can  decide;  thus, 
in  TjS;"]T  Gi-en.  26:4,  ^n^^j?  Deut.  16:3,  the  accent  is  Pashta, 
but  in  ^?^fi^  Gen.  17:8,  T^m'^  1  Sam.  29: 6,  it  is  Kadhma. 
Y'thibh  is  distinguished  from  Mahpakh  by  being  written 
under  the  first  letter  of  the  word  and  taking  precedence 
of  its  vowel  if  this  be  subscribed,  e.  g.  H'iT:?^  Gen.  1:11, 
%  Gen.  31:  6,  Deut.  10:  17;    Mahpakh  belongs  under 
the  consonant  which  precedes  the  tone-vowel,  and  after 
its  vowel-sign  if  this  be  subscribed,  e.  g.  *n2~  Gen.  2: 14, 
^3  Gen.  32:  33,  Deut,  4:  7.     When  the  initial   syllable 
bears  the  tone  and  there  is  no  subscribed  vowel,  the  laws 
of  consecution  must  decide;  thus,  in  Js^m  the  accent  is 
Y'thibh  in  Gen.  3: 15,  44: 17;  Deut.  10:  17^;  but  Mahpakh 
in  Josh.  17:  1. 

§  31.  The  accents  already  explained  are  called  the 
prosaic  accents,  and  are  found  in  all  the  books  of  the 
Old  Testament  with  the  exception  of  the  Psalms  (D^^nn), 
Proverbs  (^3'^"^),  and  the  poetic  portion  of  Job  (ni^ii), 
whose  initials  form  the  technical  word  T\''2^_.  Here  a 
different  system  of  accentuation  prevails.    Tliirteen  of 


42 


OETHOGRArny. 


§31 


the  prosaic  accents,  one-lialf  of  the  whole  nnmber,  no- 
where occur  in  the  books  just  named,  viz.:  S'gholta, 
Zakeph-Katon,  and  Zakeph-Gadhol  of  the  Kings,  Pashta, 
Y'thibh,  and  T'bhir  of  the  Dukes,  Karne  Phara,  T'hsha 
Gh'dhola,  Geresh,  and  G'rashayim,  of  the  Counts,  Merka 
Kh'phula,  Darga,  and  T'hsha  K'tanna  of  the  Conjunc- 
tives. Such  as  are  common  to  both  systems  are  in  the 
previous  table  distinguished  by  an  asterisk.  The  powers 
of  some  of  these,  however,  are  altered,  so  that  a  new 
arrangement  of  them  is  necessary;  and  they  are  supple- 
mented by  additional  signs  formed  by  combinmg  the 
prosaic  accents  or  assigning  them  unusual  positions.  The 
scale  of  the  poetical  or  metrical  accents  thus  constituted 
is  as  follows,  viz.: 


Disjunctive 

Accents. 

Class  I. 

1. 

Silluk 

(.) 

tp^^o 

2. 

Merka-Mahpalih 

or  Olev'yoredh 

(/) 

r 

8. 

Atbnahh 

Class 

II. 

li^'^ 

4. 

R'bhi* 

(■) 

r?"? 

5. 

E'bhP  Mugrash 

(•') 

ttSn; 

•?  ?''r~! 

6. 

Zarka  or  IVinnor 

o 

-•!::»  postp. 

7. 

Tiphhha  initial  or  D'bbI 

(>) 

T^^  ;)re/). 

8. 

Pazer 

(') 

-T3 

9. 

Great  Sbalsbeleth 

d') 

1 

r^^ 

10. 

Azla  L'gbarmeb 

d") 

•  ^b'}i 

'^  i<V^ 

11. 

M:ibpakb  L'gbarmeh 

(ij 

1  !^")i3  Tj^ri? 

12. 

P'sik 

(I) 

ip-'M 

§31  ACCENT3.  43 

CoNjuNCTivK  Accents. 

13.  Merka  (^)  K3'l^ 

14.  Munahh  (  )  nasia 

15.  Munahh  superior  or  Illuy  (   )  "'^llsS 

16.  Tiphhha  or  Tarhha  (^  )  NJin-J 

17.  Terahh  ben  Yomo  or  Galgal         (y)  ^i'^a 

18.  Mahpakh  (^)  ^3^? 

19.  Kadhma  or  Azla  (  )  ttVTX 

20.  Shalsheleth  (  )  fi^^'^Ty 

Tsinnorlth  (")  is  not  a  distinct  accent,  but  is  written 
over  a  simple  syllable  preceding  Merka  or  Mahpakh  in 
the  same  word,  D^^p,  WZ^.  or  in  an  antecedent  mono- 
syllable,  in  which  case  it  supplies  the  place  of  Makkeph 
rn'n  ^S,  b^  U^b^'for  n'ir-^3,  bs-t^b.  The  disjunctive  Tsinnor 
has  the  same  form  but  is  written  over  the  last  letter  of 
the  word  on  which  it  stands,  'ti'^1i\ 

a.  Olev'yoredh  has  a  compound  sign,  resembling  in  form  a  combina- 
tion of  Merka  and  Mahpakh,  the  former  written  under  the  tone  syllable, 
the  latter  over  the  syllable  next  preceding,  S'^s"B"i;  or  (if  the  tone  be  on 
the  initial  syllable)  over  the  last  syllable  or  letter  of  the  preceding  word, 
"pX  '^'ivb  (Wickes)  or  "("ix  ^brs  (Baer);  or  (if  this  word  be  accented  on  the 
ultimate)  over  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to  Avhich  it  properly  belongs  or 
between  the  two  words,  n!  a^ny  (Wickes)  or  S*,3'2'id  (Baer).  When  the  sign 
for  Olev'yoredh  is  divided  between  two  words,  which  should  be  united  by 
Makkeph,  Makkeph  is  not  written  pn  bx  or  pTj  hU  for  ph~bN.  The  sign 
for  B-'bhi*  Mugrash  resembles  a  combination  of  R'bhP  and  Geresh,  the 
former  on  the  tone  syllable,  the  latter  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word, 
jt''HTX'1,  bis'.  P'sik  is  occasionally  used  as  with  the  prose  accents,  §  38.  1.  a. 
to  indicate  a  slight  pause  without  affecting  the  consecution;  but  it  may 
likewise,  when  combined  with  three  of  the  Conjunctives  Shalsheleth,  Kadhma 
or  Azla,  and  Mahpakh,  convert  them  into  weak  Disjunctives,  capable  of 
governing  small  sections  of  their  own. 

6.  The  names  of  the  accents  occurring  in  prose  are  explained  §  29.  b. 
Olev'yoredh  means  ascending  and  descending ;  R'bhi*  Mugrash,  GeresJied- 
R'bhi"';  Tsinnor  and  Tsinnorith,  a  water-course;  D'hhi,  thrust  back ;  L'ghar- 
meh,  by  itself,  i.  e.  independent ;  Illuy,  high;  Tarhha,  toiling  along;  Galgal, 
wheel;  Azla,  going  on.  Tiphhha  and  Shalsheleth,  though  Disjunctives  in 
prose,  are  Conjunctives  in  poetry,  hence  the  absence  of  Daghesh-lene  after 
the  former  in  D'^nrS  X'i^p  Prov.  8:  3,  and  the  presence  of  Daghesh-forte 
Conjunctive  after  the  latter  in  "i^  nrnuj";  Pb.  3 :  3. 


44  ORTHOGRAPnT.  §  32 

Position  op  the  Accent. 

§  32.  The  accent  in  Hebrew  may  fall  either  upon  the 
ultimate  or  the  penultimate  syllable,  but  never  at  a 
greater  remove  from  the  end  of  the  word.  In  the  former 
case  words  are  technically  termed  Milra  (^'^b!a  from  he- 
low),  and  in  the  latter  Milel  (b'i/b w  from  above). 

1.  The  position  of  the  accent  may  be  considered  in 
relation  either  to  the  syllabic  or  to  the  etymological 
structure  of  a  word,  that  is  to  say,  as  effected  by  the 
nature  of  its  syllables  on  the  one  hand  or  of  the  elements 
of  which  it  is  composed  as  a  signiiicant  part  of  speech 
on  the  other.  It  is  so  far  determined  by  the  syUabic 
structure  of  words,  that  a  long  mixed  syllable  or  a  short 
simple  syllable,  whether  in  the  ultimate  or  the  penulti- 
mate, must  receive  the  accent,  §  18.2,  thus:  prj'.!"],  n3~'2>'r!l, 
Tri'^,  Z'y^.  But  the  accent  can  never  fall  upon  a  vocal 
Sh'va,  or  upon  a  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va. 

2.  Considered  in  reference  to  their  etymological 
structure,  words  exist  iq  two  conditions,  (1.)  their  primary 
uninflected  state,  by  which  their  essential  and  proper 
meaning  is  conveyed;  (2.)  with  added  af&xes  and  pre- 
fixes, by  which  that  meaning  is  variously  modified.  In 
their  nude  or  primary  state  all  words,  whether  primi- 
tives or  derivatives,  are  accented  upon  the  ultimate,  and 
so  continue  to  whatever  flexion,  involving  no  terminational 
appendages,  they  may  be  subjected.  Thus,  "{^D,  "jbD, 
ips,  TJiJE,  -p5,  njis-,  nj3?nn;  -ji-ST,  -,iSDT;  ^3tj,' ni^ia; 

I  T  r    ;  -  '  T       '         •  -:i-  : 

3.  The  only  exception  is  a  class  of  words  called  Se- 
gholates,  in  which  the  last  vowel  does  not  belong  origin- 
ally or  essentially  to  the  form,  but  is  introduced  for 
the  sake  of  softening  the  pronunciation,  §  61.  2;  these 


§  33  POSITION  OP  THE  ACCENT.  45 

are  accented  on  the  penultimate,  as  T]bb,  ISO,  niip,  Jn'S, 

a.  ni^ya  Is.  50:  8  is  said  to  be  the  only  instance  of  a  word  accented  on 
the  antepenult.  The  proper  tone-syllable  of  this  word  is  the  ultimate,  but 
upon  the  recession  of  the  accent  by  §  35,  the  vowel  next  preceding,  which 
has  arisen  from  Sh'va  and  is  unessential  to  the  form,  cannot  receive  it,  so 
that  it  necessarily  falls  upon  the  one  still  further  back.  In  "1^'^^!3.  Ex.  15:  8, 
a  word  of  the  same  formation  the  accent  takes  the  place  of  Methegh,  §  45 : 5, 
comp.  -^3";rri  Isa.  40: 18,  ">l3St^,:;1.  Job  12:  15;  ^i^!^:<rj  and  ITnyis  are  the  only 
words  in  which  the  principal  accent  is  followed  by  a  compound  Sh'va. 

§  33.  The  additions  which  words  may  receive  at  the 
beginning  or  end  affect  the  accent  in  proportion  to  thv"^ 
respective  weight  accorded  to  them.  Additions  to  the 
end  of  words  are  of  two  sorts,  which  may  be  distin- 
guished as  affixes  and  suffixes.  Affixes  are  so  welded  to 
the  word  or  merged  in  it  that  in  the  popular  conscious- 
ness they  have  become  an  integral  part  of  it,  and  their 
independent  existence  or  separate  origin  is  no  longer 
thought  of;  such  are  the  personal  inflections  of  verbs  and 
the  terminations  indicating  gender  and  number  in  nouns 
and  adjectives.  Suffixes  are  not  so  intimately  blended 
with  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached  as  to  have 
lost  their  individual  identity  and  independent  character, 
and  consequently  are  of  greater  weight  as  respects  the 
accent;  such  are  the  fragmentary  pronouns  appended  to 
verbs,  nouns,  and  prepositions. 

1.  If  the  appendage  consists  of  a  vowel  (as  H^,  ti,  ^, 
%  *".>  \)j  or  begins  with  one  (as  n^,  ^,  V^,  D^.,  t\\  1\^,  1]., 
D^,  "1^,  D''._,  I]";),  and  can  consequently  only  be  pronounced 
by  the  aid  of  the  final  consonant  of  the  word  to  which 
it  is  attached,  it  will  attract  the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its 
initial  vowel  from  a  noun,  adjective,  participle,  or  pre- 
position, as  ^nn"^^,  inn'i,  n-nn-n,  ^^21,  Tj;'^ni,  vni'n  from  ^i'n; 
D^ir"!]),  "^I'p^  from  ^ip.  Such  an  appendage  to  a  verb,  if 
a  suffix,  will  receive  the  accent,  unless  the  verb  be  in  the 
3  fem.  sing,  of  the  preterite,  when  the  accent  will  retain 


46  OBTHOGRAPHY.  §  33 

its  original  position  unchanged.  The  accent  will  also 
remain  in  its  original  position  on  the  verb,  if  the  appen- 
dage be  an  affix,  unless  it  is  either  dissyllabic  or  causes 
the  rejection  of  the  vowel  previously  accented;  D^'Snn 
with  a  suffix  ni"b^";.nri,  but  witli  an  affix  ^"^^ign;  ihy  with 
a  suffix  *iiny,  but  with  an  affix  when  the  vowel  is  re- 
tained  ^13^,  when  it  is  rejected  ^"T^y;  HC/l,  n^CH,  ^ICH;  5p 
with  affixes  n^jb,  ^VJ^,  ^riJp;  3  fern.  sing.  pret.  with  suf- 
fixes, Dr?b«S  from  n^pX  (primitive  form  H^t!??))  so  DnirpB, 
?|lnin!St.  It  is  to  be  observed,  however,  that  a  paragogic 
n^  or  n  ,  §  61.  6,  attached  to  nouns,  pronouns,  and  ad- 
verbs, and  occasionally  a  paragogic  "^  does  not  disturb 
the  position  of  the  accent,  e.  g.  V"^^?  •^-^"^'^j  ^^  *~*r-^j  so 
ni2h,  r^ik,  niaiz:,  ^nnt  Lam.  l:  l,  but  ^h^b"^  Isa.  i:  21; 
neither  does  the  feminine  ending  ln_,  which  is  a  Segholate 
formation,  §  185,  e.  g.  ^317^,  TThyi. 

a.  The  affix  receives  the  accent  in  '^'^l^rpl  Euth  2:8  from  ^irll,  hut 
not  in  the  corresponding  form  ^iir'iE.r"^  Ex.  18:26  from  i;Qw";>;  though  in  the 
latter  instance  a  ntonosyllable  follows,  in  consequence  of  which  the  accent 
would  have  been  shifted  to  the  penult  by  §  35.  1,  even  though  its  proper 
place  had  been  on  the  ultimate.  Paragogic  <!  receives  the  accent,  though 
the  preceding  vowel  remains,  in  the  verbal  form  HN'^pNT  1  Sam.  28:  5. 

2.  The  appending  of  a  simple  syllable,  such  as  the 
suffixes  ■*:,  ^D,  ^n,  n,  i*-,  or  the  verbal  suffixes  P,  "^ri,  ^D,  np. 
will  not  alter  the  position  of  the  accent  provided  it  ori- 
ginally stood  upon  the  ultimate;  if,  however,  its  original 
place  was  the  penult,  or  if  the  syllable  in  question  be 
attached  to  the  word  by  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  must 
be  carried  forward  one  syllable  to  prevent  its  standing 
on  the  antepenult,  which  is  never  admissible:  riDS,  ^t^DS, 

tos,  "r^s;  cikr,  ncs'j,  ^;nc5<";:;  bp,  r)ibp,^n'5p.  Suffixes 

appended  to  a  word  ending  with  a  consonant  mostly 
require  a  connecting  vowel,  and  consequently  shift  the 
position  of  the  accent.  Affixes,  by  reason  of  the  less 
weight  accorded  to  them,  commonly  do  not.    The  suf&x 


§  34  POSITION  OF  THE  ACCENT.  47 

^  follows  the  general  rule  when  preceded  by  a  union 
vowel,  but  draws  the  accent  upon  itself  when  it  is  not, 
e.  g.  1^,  ^y_^,  tj'l^,  ^"iij.  A  consonantal  appendage  to  a 
long  unaccented  vowel,  inasmuch  as  it  converts  the  ulti- 
mate into  a  mixed  syllable,  necessarily  draws  the  accent 
upon  it  from  the  penult,   §  32.  1,  e.  g.  "nck?^,  rrDi<i7J, 

3.  A  mixed  syllable,  whether  an  affix  as  Dri,  "jri,  or 
suffix  as  D5,  "ID,  Dil,  'H,  will  attract  the  accent  to  itself, 

Dn^bri  from  tj5rt;  nblb'Z,  ^b'jh-2  from  t]bb;  Drt-i-  from 
D^'hn.  In  the  unusual  form  Dn>i)  2  Sam.  23:  6,  the  accent 

■     ••  -AT    \  ' 

stands  upon  the  union  vowel. 

4.  The  only  prefixes  which  exercise  any  influence 
upon  the  position  of  the  accent,  are  the  Vav  conversive 
of  the  future,  which  draws  back  the  accent  from  a  mixed 
ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  ^i^-i^",  ^'r^%  I^Ui';,  H'^^.l;  and 
the  Vav  conversive  of  the  preterite,  wliich  throws  it  for- 
ward from  the  penult  to  a  simple  ultimate,  3n*^.iUJ,  rl^JJI, 

T  :    -t'      t  :    -  t  :'        •  !•  -:i- 

o.  Some  languages  invariably  accent  the  same  part  of  the  word;  thus, 
Bohemian  and  Lettish  the  initial  syllable,  Polish  and  Lazian,  one  of  the 
Caucasian  tongues,  the  penult  of  all  polysyllables.  Others,  in  which  more 
freedom  is  allowed,  have  no  respect  to  the  etymological  structure  of  words, 
but  are  guided  entirely  by  the  character  of  their  syllables.  Thus,  in  Arabic 
and  Latin  words  are  accented  according  to  the  quantity  of  the  penult;  the 
accent  is  given  to  the  penult  if  it  is  long,  to  the  antepenult  if  the  penult 
is  short.  In  others  still  the  etymological  principle  is  the  prevailing  one, 
and  this  often  has  a  wider  scope  than  in  Hebrew.  Thus,  in  Greek  the 
accent  has  the  range  of  the  last  three  syllables.  In  Sanscrit  it  may  stand 
upon  any  sjdlable  whatever  even  of  the  longest  words.  In  English  it  is 
almost  equally  free,  e.  g.  peremptorily,  incoiisideration,  its  removal  from 
its  primai-3'  position  upon  the  radical  portion  of  the  word  being  conditioned 
by  the  respective  weight  of  the  formative  syllables  appended,  e.  g.  person, 
personate,  personally,  personify,  personality,  personification. 

§  34.  The  location  of  the  accent  being  thus  influenced 
by  the  etymological  structure  of  words,  it  may  serve  to 
distinguish  words  of  like  appearance  but  different  for- 
mation. Thus,  Ttp2  Gen.  30:  1,  T'kz  Gen.  29:  6,  are  parti- 


43  ORTHOGRAPHT.  §  35 

ciples,  but  T'^tfz  Gen.  35:  18,  ns^in  Gen.  29:  9,  are  prete- 
rites, the  feminine  affix  receiving  the  accent  in  one  case 
but  not  in  the  other,  §  33.  1.  So  ^i^  tlieij  built,  from  r;:S, 
but  ^j^  in  us;  ^2"^  they  carried  captive  from  niiT,  but  ^niD 
they  returned  from  3^115 ;  7ri<  he  has  seized,  but  irii  Job 
23:  9  I  shall  see  from  nin;  y'h"'  it  shall  he  evil  from  "in, 

tt'-"  -t' 

yi?.  /iC  shall  feed  from  H^n ;  fn'2  he  was  rehcllious,  rn'h  it 
was  hitter  from  *i'J;  ""^^fj  an'se  ^/ww  (fem.),  "Jzip  my  ris- 
ing up. 

§  35.  The  position  of  the  accent  may  be  shifted  from 
the  following  causes,  viz: 

1.  A  Conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the 
ultimate  to  a  simple  penult  if  a  Disjunctive  immediately 
follows,  whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  a  dissyllable 
accented  on  the  penult,  in  order  to  prevent  the  un- 
pleasant concurrence  of  tw^o  accented  syllables  in  closely 
connected  words,  e.  g.  nb^b  S'lg  Gen.  1 :  5,  T>'  nrh  Gen. 
4:  17,  -^  rblii,  Deut.  32:  36,  rfi  ^"Gi^ril  Ps.  2:  12.'  In  a 
few  exceptional  cases  the  secondary  accent  Methegh 
remains  to  mark  the  original  tone-syllable,  after  the 
principal  accent  has  been  thrown  back,  '|"i^^  '^'J'2b  Num. 
24:  22,  Til  b^D  Isa.  40:  7,  hv  yrin  Deut.  4:  33. 

a.  But  the  accent  will  not  be  shifted  from  one  of  the  so-called  grave 
suffixes  Dn,  -n,  C3,  "3,  §  33.  3,  "^n  CZ'^'Zit.  Gen.  43:  7;  nor  to  a  penult  which 
is  a  mixed  syllable,  rtli  N'^p'.l  Num.  a2:  42;  nor  ordinarily  from  a  mixed 
ultimate  having  a  lonjj;  vowel,  §  32.  1,  ib  n-'nn  Judg.  6:  31,  "O  C-ip;'  Ps. 
94:  16.  A  mutable  Tsere  or  Hholem  may,  however,  be  shortened  and  the 
accent  removed  iV  :3i;;  (for  2n^)  Judg.  6:  31,  Isa.  36:  8.  In  the  preterite 
infinitive  and  participles  of  verbs  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  cannot  be  shortened 
to  Seghol,  but  the  accent  may  still  be  shifted  and  the  secondary  accent 
Methe^^h,  §  44,  be  placed  on  the  original  tone-syllable  '{"'J^  "j^'jls  Num.  24:  22, 
Vk  b-3  Isa.  40:  7.  8,   49:  7,  66:  3,  Ezek.  22:  25.     Methegh  will  also  stand 

f        ■        f-rt  III  o 

on  the  ultimate  after  the  removal  of  the  accent,  if  the  word  ends  with  the 
same  letter  with  which  the  next  begins,  in  order  that  the  stress  of  the 
voice  mav  keep  them  distinct  "."rn  nb-:3  Ps.  103:  28,  tv  r-:-rn  Deut.  4:  33, 
Num.  17:  23,  or  if  it  ends  with  the  weak  letter  5  preceded  by  Pattahb 
Sy  yr^a^l  Gen.  24:  9. 


§  36  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSB.  49 

2.  The  special  emphasis  given  to  the  last  word  of  a 
clause  or  section,  and  represented  by  what  are  called  the 
pause  accents,  §  36,  2,  a^  is  sometimes  rendered  more 
bistinct  by  a  change  of  the  accented  syllable  from  the 
ultimate  to  the  penult,  e.  g.  ^lbb5<,  ""pDSJj;  mPS,  T\V\)^\  nril?, 
T'iTp ;  ^bs,  ^b3 ;  or  from  the  penult  to  the  ultimate,  parti- 
cularly in  the  case  of  forms  with  Vav  conversive  of  the 
future  l^b^l,  ?]b;]V,  so  b'^y^l,  Dj^;;l,  n-^i<^l  The  accent  is  in 
a  few  instances  attracted  to  a  short  final  syllable  ending 
in  a  weak  letter,  e.  g.  i^'h.';  Gen.  41:  33  for  Jji"]^;  so  J^HP 
Zech.  9:  5,  Mic.  7:  10,  Tdn  Ps.  39:  14  for  :?^Jh;  or  to' a 
final  n^  followed  by  an  initial  guttural,  when  greater 
energy  of  voice  is  necessary  to  distinctness  of  utterance, 
thus  riiab  becames  Hlbb  before  &<  Gen.  27:  45,  before  H 
Num.  20:  4.  5,  21:  5,  before  3>  Judg.  12:  3,  15:  10;  rian 
becomes  rDT'y  before  ^  Ps.  74:  22:  so  nin  Gen.  29:  21, 

r       •  '  T    T  ' 

rrw  Judg.  4:  18,  uiVoJ  Isa.  44:  22. 

a.  iia^,  nrisip,  Ity^^,  navj  are  accented  on  the  ultimate  before  iTirr, 
which  the  Jews  read  "^^iN.  In  like  manner  "'S"'p'in  becames  "^E"'D'in  before  ^S<*ip' 
Isa.47:l,5,  to  prevent  the  confusion  of  similar  sounds  concurring  at  the  end 
of  one  word  and  the  beginning  of  the  next.  In  D"iJt  njTiQ  Gen.  28 :  2,  5,  6,  7 
the  accent  cannot  be  sbifted,  §  32.  1,  but  the  secondary  accent  Methegh  is 
given  to  the  final  syllable;  so  frequently  to  a  final  guttural  preceded  by 
Pattahh  \2JiX  nsi''  Hos.  4:  4,  or  Pattahh  furtive,  DDrn  i'^nj  Gen.  44:  2. 

Consecution  of  Accents  in  Peose. 

§  36.  1.  The  second  use  of  the  accents  is  to  point  out 
the  relation  of  words  to  one  another.  The  Disjunctives 
indicate  a  greater  or  less  separation  between  the  word 
on  which  they  stand  and  the  following  one;  the  Con- 
junctives indicate  a  connection.  The  greatest  separation 
of  aU  is  effected  by  Silluk,  which  is  written  under  the 
last  word  of  every  verse,  and  is  followed  invariably  by 
two  dots  vertically  placed  (:),  called  Soph  Pasiik  (p^CS  "pD 
end  of  the  verse).  The  next  in  power  are  Athnahh  and 
S'gholta.     When  a  verse  was  to  be  divided  into  twc 

4 


50  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  36 

clauses,  Athnalih  was  placed  under  the  last  word  of  the 
first  clause,  Silluk  maintaining  its  position  at  the  end  of 
the  verse.  If  it  was  to  be  divided  into  three  clauses, 
which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can  have, 
the  last  word  of  the  first  clause  receives  S'gholta,  the 
last  word  of  the  second  Athnahh,  and  the  last  of  all 
Silluk.  Verses  of  one  clause  range  from  Gen.  26:  6,  con- 
taining three  words,  to  such  as  Jer.  13:13  and  1  Chron. 
28:  1,  containing  more  than  twenty:  the  most  common 
division  is  into  two  clauses,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:1:  V"S" . . .  nTibi^: 

'  O  )    V  T   T  .     ^     v:' 

three  clauses  are  much  less  frequent.  Gen.  1:7  ...  T'i^y^ 
r;D .  Tj:-b  23 :  16,  24:  30,  2G:  28. 

a.  In  Job  1  :  8  (except  in  Baei"s  edition)  S'gholta  occurs  in  a  verse  of 
two  clauses  without  Athnahh,  probably  becau>e  the  accentuation  is  con- 
formed to  that  of  Job  2 :  3. 

2.  Each  of  these  clauses  is  capable  of  subdivision  to 
whatever  extent  its  length  or  character  may  seem  to 
demand  b}^  the  Disjunctives  Zakei^h  Katon,  Zakeph 
Gadhol,  R'bhi",  Pazer,  and  T'Hslia  Gh'dhola,  according 
to  the  number  of  sections  to  be  made  and  the  various 
degrees  of  their  completeness.  Thus,  in  Josh.  1 :  8 
the   clause    of  Athnahh   is   divided    into  five  sections, 

^n  .  rii-i:3;b  . .  nb*;!? . . .  Tj^sa  . . .  irv':;,  in  2  Kin.  i:  6  into 
six,  ")inp:^  . . .  ^r'^ib  rfit  .  bkiifl:^  .  .  rSrr  .  .  rbs.  The 
choice  of  the  accent  to  govern  a  particular  section  de- 
pends not  only  upon  its  power,  but  likewise  upon  its 
rank,  the  more  exalted  officer  standing  in  ordinary  cases 
nearer  the  sovereign.  Accordingly  toward  the  beginning 
of  a  clause  an  inferior  Disjunctive  will  be  used,  even 
though  the  separation  is  such  as  would  require  an  ac- 
cent of  much  higher  power  to  indicate  it  in  a  more 
advanced  portion  of  the  same  clause.  These  accents, 
moreover,  have  not  a  fiixed  value  hke  the  stops  in  other 
languages;  their  power  is  not  absolute  but  relative,  and 


§  37,  38         CONSECUTION  OP  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.  51 

varies  endlessly  with  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 
Athnahh  in  Gen.  1 :  1  marks  the  greatest  division  in  the 
verse,  but  that  is  not  sufficient  to  require  a  comma.  In  the 
next  verse  Zakeph  Katon  is  equal  to  a  semicolon  in  the 
first  clause  and  less  than  a  comma  in  the  second.  In 
Gen.  27:  16  the  separation  indicated  by  E'bhr  is  whoUy 
rhythmical. 

a.  Those  accents  which,  as  above  described,  mark  the  limits  of  clauseg 
and  sections,  are  denominated  pause  accents. 

§  37.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are 
disposed  relatively  to  the  Disjunctive  wliich  marks  its 
close.  Each  ruler  has  his  servant  and  subordinate  officer, 
whose  function  it  is  to  wait  upon  him.  In  other  words, 
each  Disjunctive  is  regularly  preceded  by  a  particular 
Conjunctive  and  inferior  Disjunctive;  and  the  train  of 
accents  in  each  section  is  formed  by  arranging  the  Dis- 
junctives in  their  fi:xed  order  of  succession  with  or  with- 
out their  regular  Conjunctives  untd.  all  its  words  are 
supplied.  The  trains  proper  to  the  different  sections  are 
shown  in  the  following  table  (p.  52). 

a.  Accents  of  like  forms  are  readily  distinguishable  in  the  table  by  the 
column  in  which  they  stand.  Where  perspicuity  requires  it  the  distinction 
will  hereafter  be  made  by  appending  their  initial  letters,  thus:  Kadhma  ' 
Pashta  '^,  Mahpakh  <m,  Y'thibh  <  v. 

§  38.  Explanation  of  the  Table. — The  trains  preceding 
the  three  principal  accents  are  exhibited  in  the  hori- 
zontal hues  of  the  uppermost  division;  those  of  the 
ordmary  dependent  sections  in  the  middle  division,  and 
those  of  rare  occurrence  at  the  bottom. 

1.  Train  of  Silluk. — If  SiUuk  be  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  a  Conjunctive,  it  wiU  be  Merka;  if  a  Disjunctive 
precede  it  in  the  same  section,  with  or  without  an  inter- 
vening Merka,  it  will  be  Tiphhha,  Gen.  1:1.  If  there  be 
a  Conjunctive  before  Tiphhha,  it  will  be  Merka,  Gen.  1:1; 
if  two  Conjunctives,  which  occurs  but  fourteen  times, 


52 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§38 


Phimauy 
Sections. 

Q 

H 
O 

H 
o 

►5 

V: 

O 

o 

H 

>  M 

O  m 

o 

o 

■ 
£; 
H 
O 

O 

o 

It 

ii 

u 

M 

p- 
o 

?! 

D 
►^ 
•A 

& 

• 

J 

I 

/„) 

y 

.(,)'(/ 

'(') 

\)'(X 

A 

J 

A 

..(.) 

(«• 

.(.)X)' 

srconda.ry 
Sections, 

J  J 

~(.) 

<(,)X)° 

:i 

• 

..(.)..U 

H 

■  JJJJ 

s> 

UwlIStTAIi 

Sections. 

1 
1 

v> 

Vj  J  J  1  J 

they  will  be  Merka  Kli'pbiila  and  Darga,  Gen.  27:  25, 
Lev.  10:  1,2  Cliron.  20:  30.  The  next  Disjunctive  before 
Tiphhha,  in  the  same  section,  will  be  T'bhir,  Gen.  1:4.  If 
T'bhir  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Darga, 


§  38  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSE.  53 

Gen.  1:  12,  or  Merka,  Gen.  1:  26;  if  by  two,  the  second 
will  be  Kadlima,  1  Sam.  15:  33,  or  Munahh,  Gen.  2:  4; 
and  if  by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'lisha  K'tanna,  Gen. 
2:19.  The  next  Disjunctive  before  T'bhir,  in  the  same 
section,  wiU  be  Geresh,  Gen.  26:11,  27:4,  or  G'rashayim, 
Ex.  23:  4.  If  Geresh  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive, 
it  will  be  Kadhma,  Gen.  24:  7,  or  Munahh,  Isa.  60:  17; 
if  by  a  second,  it  will  be  T'lisha  K'tanna,  Gen.  2:5,  or 
Munahh  with  P'sik,  Gen.  28:  9;  if  by  a  third,  it  will  be 
Munahh,  1  Sam.  14:  34;  if  by  a  fourth,  it  will  also  be 
Munahh,  Deut.  1:  19. 

a.  The  parentheses  of  the  table  contain  alternate  accents.  Thus,  Merka 
is  substituted  for  Darga  and  for  Mahpakh  (before  Pashta  in  the  clause  of 
Zakeph  Katon)  if  no  more  than  one  vowel  intervenes  between  the  Con- 
junctive and  the  king  which  it  precedes,  e.  g.  Gen.  1  :  22;  Gen.  1:  24,  26; 
Gen.  5:  17;  Deut.  1:  2,  35.  Munahh  is  also  regularly  substituted  for 
Kadhma,  whenever  the  accent  stands  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  Gen. 
25:  8;  Gen.  19:  35;  1  Kin.  19:  7;  Deut.  1:  28;  Gen.  19:  12;  Eccl,  5:  7,  un- 
less T'lisha  K'tanna  precedes  Gen.  2:  5.  G'rasha^'im  takes  the  place  of 
Geresh  provided  the  accent  is  on  the  ultimate  and  it  is  not  preceded  by 
Kadhma  either  on  the  same  or  the  previous  word,  Ex.  16:  23,  36:  3.  When 
two  accents  are  included  in  a  parenthesis  the  meaning  is  that  if  an  ad- 
ditional accent  is  required,  these  two  will  take  the  i^lace  of  the  one  before 
the  parenthesis.  P'sik  has  no  separate  place  in  the  consecution,  but  is 
joined  with  the  other  accents  to  modify  their  power.  It  is  constantly 
associated  with  the  Disjunctive  Shalsheleth  to  add  to  its  strength,  and 
occasionally  with  the  different  Conjunctives  to  reduce  their  strength,  but 
without  disturbing  the  order  of  their  consecution,  e.  g.  with  Merka  Ex.  16:5, 
Munahh  Gen.  22:  11,  Mahpakh  Ex.  30 :  34,  Kadhma  Lev.  11 :  32,  Darga  Gen. 
42:  13,  T'lisha  K'tanna  1  Sam.  12:  3,  It  is  frequently  used  to  indicate  a 
slight  pause  between  closely  related  words,  as  where  the  same  word  is 
repeated,  Gen.  22:  11,  46:  2,  Ex.  16:  5,  or  before  or  after  the  name  of  God 
Gen.  1:  5,  10,  27. 

2.  Train  of  Athnahh. — If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a 
Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:1;  if  by  a  Dis- 
junctive in  its  own  section,  it  will  be  Tiphhha,  Gen.  1:1. 
The  accents  which  precede  Tiphhha  have  already  been 
mentioned  in  explaining  the  train  of  Silluk. 

3.  T7'ai)i  of  S'ghoUa. — The  first  Conjunctive  before 
S'gholta  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  3 :  3 ;  if  there  be  two|  the 


54  ORTHOGEAPHT.  §  38 

second  will  be  Mimahh,  Lev.  8:  31,  or  Merka,  Gen.  3:  14. 
The  first  Disjunctive  in  its  section  will  be  Zarka,  Gen. 
1 :  28;  and  if  this  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  7,  or  Mcrka,  1  Cbron.  5:  18;  if  by 
two,  the  second  will  be  Kadhma,  Gen.  30:  16,  31:  32,  or 
Munahh  Ex.  20:  9;  if  by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'hsha 
K'tanna  Gen.  3:  14,  or  the  second  may  be  Munahh  and 
the  third  Kadhma,  Lev.  4:  35.  The  next  Disjunctive  be- 
fore Zarka  will  be  Geresh,  Gen.  24:  7,  or  G'rashayim, 
Ex.  39:  3.  The  accents  preceding  these  have  been  ex- 
plained in  1. 

4.  Train  of  ZakepJi  Katon. — The  first  Conjunctive 
before  Zakeph  Katon  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  2,  the 
second  hkewise  Munahh,  Gen.  3:  12,  27:  45.  The  first 
Disjunctive  will  be  Pashta,  Gen.  1:2;  or,  if  the  proper 
place  of  the  accent  be  the  first  letter  of  the  word,  Y'thibh, 
Gen.  1:  11,  2:  11.  The  first  Conjunctive  before  Pashta 
will  be  Mahpakh,  Gen.  1:9,  or  Merka,  Gen.  1:2;  the 
second,  Kadhma,  Gen.  39:  19,  or  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  12; 
the  third  will  be  T'hsha  K'tanna,  Ezr.  3:  11.  The  Dis- 
junctive before  Pashta  will  be  Geresh,  Gen.  1:  24,  or 
G'rashayim,  Gen.  1:  11;  the  further  consecution  is  ex- 
plained in  1. 

0.  In  some  instances  Tashta  is  found  not  in  the  train  of  Zakeph  Katon, 
bvit  seeming  to  govern  an  independent  section,  e.  g.  Gen.  27:  37,  Ex.  29:20, 
Deut.  9:  6,  Josh.  10:  11,  1  Sam.  14:  45,  2  Sam.  14:  7,  1  Kin.  18:  21,  2  Chron. 
18:  23. 

5.  Zakeph  Gadhol  is  mostly  used  instead  of  Zakeph 
Katon  when  no  other  accent  precedes  it  in  its  own 
section,  whether  upon  the  same  word  or  one  before  it. 

6.  Train  of  E^bhl". — The  first  Conjunctive  before 
R'bhi*  will  be  ^runahh,  Gen.  1:9;  the  second,  Munahh 
commonly  with  P'sik,  Gen.  2:  5,  or  Darga,  Gen,  6:  15; 
the  third,  Munahh  with  P'sik,  Gen.  7:  23,  19:  14,  31:  29, 
or  Merka,  Ex.  14:  10.  The  Disjunctive  before  E'bhl'  will 


§  38  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.  55 

be  Geresh,  Ex.  16:  3,  or  Gr'rasha3dm,  Deut.  1:11,  which 
are  preceded  as  m  1. 

7.  Train  of  Pazer. — Pazer  may  be  preceded  by  one 
Munahh,  1  Sam.  14:  34,  by  two,  Ezek.  9:  2,  by  three, 
1  Sam.  14:  34,  or  by  four,  Isa.  66:  20. 

8.  Tram  of  T'lisha  Gh'dhola.—Tlisha  Gh'dhola  is  the 
weakest  of  the  Disjunctives  which  are  ever  set  to  rule 
independent  sections.  Its  weakness  is  in  fact  such,  that 
it  is  sometimes  drawn  into  the  section  of  a  stronger  Dis- 
junctive; thus,  in  Gen.  1:  12,  Lev.  4:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  51, 
Isa.  9:  5,  Neh.  5:  18,  it  takes  the  place  of  T'lisha  K'tanna 
among  the  antecedents  of  Pashta,  standing  between  it 
and  Geresh  or  G'rashayim;  in  Gen.  13:  1,  21:  14,  Deut. 
26:  12,  it  stands  similarly  between  T'bhir  and  Geresh  or 
G'rashayim.  And  in  many  cases,  perhaps  in  most,  when 
it  rules  a  section  of  its  own,  this  is  a  mere  subsection, 
not  so  much  a  division  of  one  of  the  principal  clauses  as 
a  fragment  broken  off  from  one  of  the  larger  sections  at 
a  pomt  where  T'hsha  K'tanna  would  have  stood  had  the 
connection  been  sufficiently  close  to  require  a  Conjunc- 
tive, e.  g.  Gen.  19:  2,  1  Kin.  20:  28.  That  this  is  not 
always  so  appears,  however,  from  examples  like  Gen.  7: 7, 
37:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  51,  2  Sam.  14:  32,  Isa.  66:  19,  Jer. 
39:  5.  T'hsha  Gh'dhola  may  be  preceded  by  one  Munahh, 
Gen.  27:  46,  by  two.  Josh.  2:  1,  by  three,  or  by  four, 
1  Kin.  2:  5. 

9.  Shalsheleth  occurs  but  seven  times,  viz.,  Gen.l9: 1 6, 
24:  12,  39:  8,  Lev.  8:  23,  Isa.  13:  8,  Am.  1:2,  Ezr.  5:  12, 
and  in  every  instance  stands  upon  the  initial  word  of  the 
verse,  and  is  accompanied  by  P'silv.  It  has  consequently 
no  antecedents. 

10.  Kaine  Phara  is  only  used  sixteen  times.  Its  section 
never  contains  less  than  three  words:  its  immediate  prede- 
cessor is  always  Yerahh  ben  Yomo,  to  which  may  be 


56  ORTHOGRAPnY.  §  39 

added  oneMimahh,  Num.  35:  5,  Neh.  5: 13,  13:  5,  2  Cliron. 
24:  5;  two,  2  Kin.  10:  5,  Jer.  38:  25,  Est.  7:  9,  Neh.  1:6, 
2  Chron.  35:  7;  three,  Josh.  19:51,  2  Sam.4:  2,  Jer.  13: 13; 
four,  1  Chron.  28:  1;  or  five,  Ezek.  48:  21. 

§  39.  1.  The  complete  trains  of  the  several  accents  con- 
tain one  Disjunctive  from  each  of  the  inferior  orders,  dis- 
posed in  due  succession  of  rank,  with  one  Conjunctive 
immediately  preceding  the  first  class  of  Disjunctives,  two 
Conjunctives  preceding  the  second  class,  three  the  tliird 
class,  four  or  more  the  fourth  class.  These  trains  are 
adapted  to  sections  of  different  length  and  character  by 
omitting  such  of  the  Conjunctives,  and  more  rarely  by 
repeating  such  of  the  Disjunctives,  as  the  mutual  relations 
of  the  words  may  seem  to  require,  and  breaking  off  the 
series  as  soon  as  every  word  in  the  section  is  supplied. 
Thus,  while  the  general  order  of  consecution  is  fixed  and 
invariable,  there  is  the  utmost  liberty  and  variety  in 
particular  cases. 

a.  In  a  verj'  few  instances  the  Conjunctives  go  beyond  the  number 
here  assigned.  Tlius,  Athnahh  is  preceded  by  two  Munahhs  in  Gen.  40:  16, 
Ex.  3:  4,  1  Sam.  17:  39,  Isa.48:  11.  T'bliir  is  preceded  by  four  Conjunctives, 
.Jo.sh.  10:  11,  2  Chron.  22:  11,  Isa.  66;  20;  Pashta  by  four,  Ex.  5:  8,  1  Sam. 
15:  9,  2  Kin.  5:  1,  and  even  by  five,  Jos.  19:  51,  1  Sam.  7:  10, 

2.  If  a  section  consists  of  but  a  single  word,  this  will 
receive  the  appropriate  Disjunctive,  the  entire  antecedent 
series  of  the  table  being  then  omitted  as  unnecessary 
thus,  Silluk  \t\1T^  Gen.  5:5;  Athnahh  ^ri^-'l  Gen.  24:  34 
Zakeph  Katon  r;^:5^  Isa.  1:  30;  R'blii^  D"^"1  Gen.  7:19 
Pazer  n-:i<^1  Gen.' 22:  2;  T'lisha  Gh'dhola  p^  Gen.  19:8. 
This,  as  has  been  already  said,  is  the  regular  length  of 
the  sections  of  Zakeph  Gadhol  andShalsheleth;  but  those 
of  S'gholta  are  never  composed  of  less  than  two  words, 
and  those  of  Karne  Phara  never  of  less  than  three. 

3.  In  sections  of  greater  lengtli  there  is  a  disposition 
towards  a  regular  alternation  of  Disjunctives  and  Ccii- 


§  39  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSB.  57 

junctives  upon  successive  words,  e.  g.  Gen.  23:  11,  24:  7, 
and  consequently  though  two  or  more  Conjunctives  may 
he  allowed  before  a  particular  Disjunctive,  only  the  first 
of  these  is  in  the  majority  of  cases  employed.  The  actual 
relations  of  words  may,  however,  so  interfere  with  this 
regularity  as  on  the  one  hand  to  cause  the  intervening 
Conjunctives  to  be  dropped  entirely,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:  22, 
1  Chron.  15:  18,  or,  on  the  other,  to  introduce  as  many 
Conjunctives  as  the  table  will  admit,  e.  g.  Gen.  3:  14. 
But  if  either  of  the  three  primary  sections  consist  of  but 
two  words,  the  first  must  have  a  Disjunctive  accent, 
however  close  its  relation  may  be  to  the  second,  e.  g. 
:n^3  >-ti^1  Gen.  9:  20,  UTl'y  ^inpSD^  Gen.  3:  5,  '^2^:2^  B'ti 
Gen.  19:  4. 

a.  Sometimes  an  excluded  term  of  the  series  will  take  the  pl^ce  of  the 
secondary  accent  Methegli,  §  44.  Tiplihha  is  thus  five  times  written  upon 
the  same  word  with  Silluk,  e.  g.  Num.  15:  21,  and  eleven  times  with  Ath- 
nalih,  e.  g.  Num.  28:  26.  Munahh,  Gen.  21:  17,  often  stands  upon  the  same 
word  with  Zakeph  Katon;  if  the  accent  stands  upon  a  mixed  syllable  and 
upon  another  than  the  initial  letter  Kadhnia  will  take  its  place,  Gen.  18:  20, 
44:  24,  45:  14.  Kadhma  is  also  joined  in  this  manner  with  Darga,  Job  1 :  15, 
Munahh,  Lev.  10:  12,  Meika,  Judg.  21 :  21,  Neh.  12:  44,  Mahpakh,  Lev.  25:  46, 
and  Geresh,  Ex.  16:  15,  21:  22,  35.   Mahpakh  with  Munahh,  Lam.  4:  9. 

4.  Occasionally  a  subordinate  Disjunctive  or  its  alter- 
nate is  repeated  in  the  same  section  with  or  without  its 
antecedents.  Thus,  T'bhir,  Deut.  26:  2  ,^^,.,/^,,  '^  so 
Deut.  30:  20,  1  Sam.  20:  21,  2  Kin.  17:  36.' ZarkaV2  Kin. 
1:  16  ■■■//  "■/,  so  ver.  6,  Gen.  42:  21,  Jer.  21:  4,  Neh. 
2:  12.  '  Pashta,  Gen.  24:  14,  42,  48,  65;  1  Kin.  20:  9. 
Pashta,  Pashta  and  Y'tliibh,  2  Kin.  10:  30,  Ezr.  7:  25. 
Geresh  and  G'rashayim,  Gen.  28:  9. 

a.  There  is  a  double  accentuation  of  a  part  of  Gen.  35:  22,  and  of  the 
entire  decalogue,  both  in  Ex.  20:  2-17,  and  Deut.  5:  6-21,  which  involves 
a  double  vocalization  in  certain  words,  e.  g.  ^DQ  Ex.  20:  3,  i,  e.  either 
!^3S  or  "'js.  Single  words  also  occur  with  alternative  accents,  e.  g.  with 
G'rashayim  or  Geresh  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola  n'}'  Gen.  5:  29,  ^z'^f^  Lev.  10:  4, 
^h'  2  Kin.  17:  13,  n^sb^  Ezek.  48:  10,  TNt'  Zeph.  2:  15. 


58  orthography.  §  40 

Poetic  Consecution. 

§  40.  1.  The  principle  of  the  consecution  is  the  same 
in  the  poetic  as  in  the  prosaic  accents,  although  there  is 
considerable  diversity  in  the  details.  There  is  a  like 
division  of  verses  into  clauses  and  sections  ruled  by  a 
Disjunctive  at  the  end,  which  imposes  upon  them  its  own 
special  train  of  accents.  The  sections  are  fewer,  however, 
and  the  trains  shorter  than  in  prose,  on  account  of  the 
greater  brevity  of  the  sentences  in  poetry  for  the  most 
part.  But  this  reduction  is  more  than  compensated  by 
the  new  complexity  arising  from  the  latitude  allowed  in 
the  choice  of  Conjunctives. 

0.  The  numerous  errors  in  the  poetical  accents  as  found  in  ordinary 
Hebrew  Bibles  have  been  carefully  corrected  by  Baer  in  his  edition  of  Job, 
Psalms  and  Proverbs;  and  the  laws  of  their  consecution  are  elaborately 
stated  by  him  in  the  Appendix  to  Delitzscli's  Commentary  on  the  Psalter 
(1860)  and  by  Dr.  William  Wickes  in  his  Treatise  on  the  Accentuation  of 
the  three  so-called  Poetical  Books  of  the  Old  Testament  (leSl). 

2.  Verses  may  consist  of  one,  two,  or  three  clauses, 
distinguished  by  the  three  Disjunctives  of  the  first  class. 
If  the  verse  contain  but  one  clause,  Silluk  will  be  written 
upon  the  last  word,  Ps.  4:  1,  29:  7;  if  it  contain  two 
clauses,  the  division  will  be  made  by  Athnahh,  Ps.  1 :  4, 
5,  6,  or  by  Olev'yoredh,  Ps.  1  :  2,  3:  3,  upon  the  last 
word  of  the  first  clause;  if  it  contain  three,  the  last  word 
of  the  first  will  have  Olev'yoredh,  the  last  word  of 
the  second  Athnahh,  and  the  last  word  of  the  third 
Silluk,  Ps.  1 :  1,  2:  7,  3:  6.  Clauses  may  consist  of  a  single 
section  when  no  subdivision  of  them  is  necessary;  or 
they  may  consist  of  two  or  more  sections,  when  the  sub- 
division is  effected  by  R'blil*,  Pazer,  Great  Shalsheleth 
or  L'gharmeh. 

a.  Thus  the  Silluk  clause  is  subdivided  by  R'bhi'  and  L'gharmeh  in 
Ps.  18:  51,  and  by  Pazer  Ps.  18:  2;  the  Athnahh  clause  by  R'bhi^  (twice), 


41 


POETIC  CONSECUTION. 


59 


Pazer,  and  L'gharmeh  (3  times)  in  Prov.  30:  4;  the  Olev'yoredh  clause  by 
Pazer  Ps.  5:  10  and  by  R'bhi=*  and  L'gharmeh  Ps.  5:  11.  Great  Shalsbeleth 
is  rarely  used  and  only  to  subdivide  the  clause  of  Silluk,  Ps.  34:  8,  Job 
32:  6;  except  in  Job  11:  6  it  is  only  found  on  the  fourth  word  from  the 
end  of  the  verse. 

§  41.  The  order  of  the  accents  in  the  various  sections 
is  exhibited  in  the  following  table: 


So 

R 

CONJXnjCTIVBS. 

a 

CONJUHOTIVES. 

PBINCIPAIi 

Sections. 

♦ 

•1 

»    »   * 

iS 

J  J    ' 

<. 

■I:' 

< 
J 

.0 

fa 

:)■ 

*     * 

Secondary 
Sections. 

t 

• 

< 

f 

-{/ 

\ 
1 

J  ^ 

l< 

1 

60  OBTnOGRAPHT.  §  41 


Explanation  of  the  Table. 

The  accents,  which  are  disposed  horizontally,  exhibit  the  series  by  which 
any  given  Disjunctive  may  be  preceded.  Alternate  accents  are  disposed 
vertically  or  inclosed  in  pareutheses.  lUuy  is  represented  thus  ••*,  in  dis- 
tinction from  Munahh  y 

a.  (1)  Train  of  SilluJc.  If  Silluk  is  preceded  by  a  single  Conjunctive, 
this  is  almost  invariably  Munahh,  provided  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable, 
Ps.  1:  1,  2:  10;  otherwise  it  is  I\Ierka,  Ps.  2:  7,  12,  to  which  Tsinnorith  will 
be  added,  if  a  simple  syllable  precede  in  the  same  word  Ps.  3 :  2,  4,  or  in 
an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  18:  8,  20;  if  L'gharmeh  precede,  it  will  be 
lUuy,  Ps.  3:  1,  10:  14.  If  it  be  preceded  by  two  Conjunctives,  they  will  be 
Munahh,  Tarhha,  Ps.  2:  9,  3:6,  or,  (as  Baer  affirms,  but  Wickes,  p.  71  denies) 
if  they  aie  on  adjacent  syllables,  Merka,  Tarhha,  Ps.  12:  8,  Job  15:  22;  in 
the  inscriptions  to  eight  P.'^alms  (36,  44,  47,  49,  61,  69,  81,  85)  they  are  two 
lUuys,  and  in  three  exceptional  instances  they  are  Illuy  andAzla,  Ps.  109:  16, 
Prov.  8:  13  or  Illuy  and  Mahpakh  with  Zinnorith  Ps.  68:  20.  If  it  be 
preceded  by  three  Conjunctives,  the  first  two  will  be  Munahh  and  Tarhha, 
and  the  third  Mahi)akh,  if  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable,  Ps.  24: 10,  39: 12, 
or  Mahpakh  with  Tsinnorith,  if  the  tone  is  preceded  by  a  simple  syllable  in 
the  same  word,  Ps.  8:  5,  28:  8,  or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  25:  15; 
otherwise  it  will  be  Azla,  Ps.  25:  8,  Prov.  3:  27;  the  occurrence  of  Illuy, 
Ps.  4:  8  is  exceptional,  and  Wickes,  p.  72,  esteems  it  incorrect.  Four  Con- 
junctives only  occur  in  the  following  instances,  Ps.  3:  3,  32:  5,  42:  2,  47:5, 
and  in  some  editions  54:  5. 

(2)  It  bin"'  Mngrash.  If  Silluk  be  preceded  by  a  Disjunctive  in  its  own 
section,  it  will  be  R'bhP  Mugrash.  Silluk  sections  cannot  have  less  than 
two,  nor  more  than  five  words.  If  there  be  but  one  word  before  Silluk  in 
its  own  section,  this  must  have  Il'bhi'  Mugrash,  however  closely  it  may  be 
connected  with  that  which  follows  Ps.  4:6,  7:  11;  unless  it  have  three 
vowels  or  two  vowels  and  a  vocal  Sh'va,  in  which  case  it  may  have  Merka, 
Ps.  9:  17,  11 :  5,  19:  10,  21 :  10.  If  there  be  two  or  more  words  before  Silluk, 
these  may  according  to  the  nature  of  the  case  all  have  Conjunctives,  or 
R'bhi^  Mugrash  may  stand  on  the  next  before  Silluk  Ps.  5:  4.  8,  or  on  the 
second  with  Munahh  or  Merka  intervening  Ps.  3:7,  4:  4,  or  on  the  third 
with  Illuy  and  Mahpakh  L'garmeh  between  Ps.  3:1,  10:  14.  Two  Conjunc- 
tives never  come  between  Silluk  and  E.'bhi"  Mugrash;  Baer  excepts  only 
Ps.46:8,l2,  Wickes  admits  no  exception.  R'bl  i' Mugra.sh  may  be  preceded 
by  one  Conjunctive,  Merka  Ps.  5:  4,  with  Tsinnorith  on  a  previous  simple 
syllable  in  the  same  word,  P.s.  5:  7,  or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps. 
12:  2;  by  two  Conjunctives  Merka,  Tarhha  Ps.  5:  8,  18:  3;  or  by  three, 
Merka,  Tarhha,  Mahpakh,  Ps.  47 :  8,  66 :  20,  with  Tsinnorith  if  there  be  a 
simple  syllable  before  the  tone  Ps.  119:  52;  Ps.  18:  1,  34:  8,  08:  16,  137:  9 
are  excei)tional. 

h.  (1)  Train  of  Athnahh.  If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a  single  Conjunc- 
tive this  ia  commonly  Munahh,  if  it  come  after  D'hhi,  Ps.  2:  7,  3:  2,  other- 


§41 


POETIC  CONSECUTION.  61 


wise  it  is  commonly  Merka,  Ps.  3 :  9,  5:  9.  10.  If  it  be  preceded  by  tw.i 
Conjunctives,  these  will  both  be  Munahhs,  Ps.  2:4,  3:  8,  or  with  P'sik  they 
will  be  Merka,  Tarhha,  Ps.  5:  2,  18:  50.  If  by  three,  the  first  two  will  be 
as  before,  and  the  third  will  be  Mahpakh  Ps.  2 :  5,  with  Tsinnorith  if  there 
be  a  simple  syllable  before  the  tone,  whether  in  the  same  word,  Prov.  17: 12. 
or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  5:5;  if,  however,  there  be  two  vowels 
or  a  vowel  and  a  vocal  Sh'va  before  the  tone,  the  third  Conjunctive  will 
be  Illny,  Ps.  32:  2,  40:  9.  Ps.  72:  3,  Prov.  1:  9,  6:  27  are  exceptional. 
Athnahh  is  twice  preceded  by  four  Conjunctives,  Ps.  65:  2,  96:  4;  and  once 
by  five,  Prov.  3:  12. 

(2.)  niilii.  If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a  Disjunctive  in  its  own  section, 
this  will  be  D'hhi.  The  section  of  Athnahh  may  consist  of  but  a  single 
word,  if  Olev'yoredh  immediately  precede  Ps.  3:  6,  5:  13,  29:  9,  otherwise 
of  not  less  than  two.  In  a  section  of  two  words  Athnahh  is  sometimes 
preceded  by  D'hhi  Ps.  7:  11,  11:  3,  more  commonly  by  Merka  Ps.  4:  6, 
10:  10,  which  with  the  sole  exception  of  Job  33:  9  is  always  used  after 
Olev'yoredh  Ps.  10:  18,  14:  3.  In  sections  of  three  or  more  words  D'hhi 
may  stand  on  the  first  word  before  Athnahh,  Ps.  2:  8,  5:  11,  or  on  the 
second,  Ps.  2:  7,  3:  4,  but  never  at  a  greater  remove.  D'hhi  may  be  pre- 
ceded by  one  Conjunctive,  Munahh,  Ps.  4:  4,  5:  6;  or  by  two,  Avhen  the 
first  will  be  Munahh  and  the  second  will  follow  the  same  law  as  the  third 
Conjunctive  before  Athnahh,  thus  it  may  be  Mahpakh,  Ps.  4:  3,  5:  3,  with 
Tsinnorith,  Ps.  6:  11,  32:  5,  or  it  may  be  Illuy,  Ps.  35:  15,  78:  45  It  is 
once  preceded  by  three  Conjunctives,  Job  34:  37;  Baer  finds  two  other 
examples  Ps.  23:  6,  56:  1,  which  Wickes  disputes.  In  a  very  few  instances 
D'hhi  occurs  before  Silluk  in  place  of  E'bhia  Mugrasb,  Ps.  25:  4,  31:  17, 
109:  16,  Prov.  8:  13;  more  frequently  before  B'bhi'^  Mugrash  in  verses 
which  have  no  Athnahh  clause,  this  being  in  a  manner  thus  replaced,  Ps. 
4:  5,  6:  1,  7:  10,  11:  6,  22:  1. 

c.  (1.)  Train  of  Olev'yoredh.  Olev'yoredh  may  be  preceded  by  one  Con- 
junctive, and  one  only,  which  is  almost  always  Galgal,  Ps.  1:  1,  3:  3;  but 
three  times  before  P'sik  it  is  Mahpakh,  Ps.  68:  20,  85:  9,  Prov.  30:  15,  and 
three  times  Merka  after  Small  E'bhi^  Ps.  35:  10,  42:  5,  Prov.  30:  9.  The 
section  of  Olev'yoredh  never  has  less  than  two  words.  If  it  has  but  two, 
the  first  must  receive  the  Disjunctive  Small  E'bhi",  Ps.  4:  5,  9:  21.  If  it  has 
three  or  more,  and  a  Disjunctive  stand  on  the  word  next  preceding  Olev'- 
yoredh, it  will  be  Small  E'bhi%  Ps.  3:6,  35:  20;  if  one  stands  on  the  second 
word  before  Olev'yoredh,  whether  followed  by  R'bhi*  or  by  Galgal,  or  on 
any  previous  word  of  the  section,  it  will  be  Tsiimor  Ps.  3:  3,  22:  15,  28  :  7. 
Small  E'bhi*  is  in  but  three  instances  written  on  the  second  word  before 
Olev'yoredh  viz.  those  in  which,  as  above  stated,  it  is  followed  by  Merka. 
Tsinnor  is  with  like  infrequency  written  immediately  before  Olev'yoredh, 
Ps.  55:  22,   106:  47,  Prov.  8:  13. 

(2.)  Small  R^hhl'^.  B'bhi*,  when  it  immediately  precedes  Olev'yoredh 
and  is  included  in  its  section,  is  called  Small  E'bhi*  in  distinction  from 
Great  R'bhi*  or  E'bhi''  proper,  which,  though  it  has  the  same  sign,  fulfils 


62  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  42 

quite  a  different  fanction,  viz.  that  of  dividing  the  principal  clauses  of  a 
verse,  and  governing  a  section  of  its  own,  §  40.  2.  Small  R'bliP  may  be 
preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  Merka,  Ps.  9:  7,  15,  or  by  two,  Merka, 
Mahpakh,  Ps.  18  :  1,  Prov.  6 :  26,  to  which  Tsinnorith  may  be  added, 
Prov.  23:  5. 

(3.)  Tsinnor.  Tsinnor  may  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  which  will 
be  Merka,  if  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable,  Ps.  24:  8,  32:  9,  or  if  the 
letter  under  which  it  stands  has  Dagbesh  either  lene  or  forte,  Ps.  6:3, 
16:  4;  otherwise  it  isMunnhh,  Ps.  12:  7,  18:  7.  If  it  have  two  Conjunctives, 
the  second  will  be  Mahpakh,  Ps.  24:  10.  27:  4. 

d.  Train  of  R'bhl'*.  R'bhP,  when  governing  an  independent  section  of 
its  own,  i.  e.  Great  R'bhi'  may  be  without  any  antecedent,  its  section  con- 
siBting  of  but  a  single  word,  Ps.  4:  4,  5:4,  or  it  may  have  one  Conjunctive, 
which  is  commonly  Mahpakh,  Ps.  2:  8,  Prov.  7:  7,  unless  Pazer  or  L'gharmeh 
precede,  when  it  is  mostly  Illuy,  Ps.  2:  12,  17:  14,  though  if  a  simple  syllable 
stand  immediately  before  the  tone  it  will  be  Mahpakh  with  Tsinnorith, 
Ps.  4:  2,  15:  5;  the  Conjunctive,  however,  is  Merka,  when  another  R'bhi* 
precedes,  Ps.  17:  1,  Prov.  4:  4,  and  in  a  few  other  individual  cases,  Ps.  1 :  1, 
32:  2,  Job  14:  19.  It  has  two  Conjunctives  according  to  Baer  in  Ps.  55:  24, 
86:  14;  though  "Wickes  points  differently. 

e.  Train  of  Pazer.  The  section  of  Pazer  may  consist  of  but  a  single 
word,  when  it  will  have  no  antecedent,  Ps.  17;  14,  18:  2.  If  it  have  one  Con- 
junctive, this  will  be  Galp:al,  Prov.  23:  29,  except  in  a  very  few  instances 
with  P'sik,  where  it  is  Mahpakh,  Ps.  50:  1,  59:  6.  If  it  have  two  Con- 
junctives, the  first  will  be  as  before,  and  the  second  Mahpakh  if  its  place 
is  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  Ps.  11:  2,  31:  11,  otherwise  it  will  be 
Azla,  Ps.  13:  3,  31:  12.  If  it  have  three  Conjunctives,  the  second  and  third 
will  be  Azla  and  Mahpakh,  Ps.  22:  25,  23:  4,  Prov.  6:  3,  in  all  of  which 
Wickes  changes  the  pointing. 

f.  Train  of  Great  Shalsheleth.  Shalsheleth  is  preceded  by  Conjunctives 
in  but  three  passages;  it  has  Merka  Ps.  89:  2,  and  Merka,  Tarhha  Job  32:  6, 
37:  12. 

g.  Train  of  Vgharmeh.  The  section  of  Mahpakh  L'gharmeh  never 
consists  of  more  than  one  word.  The  Conjunctive  before  Azla  L'gharmeh 
follows  the  same  rule  as  the  third  Conjunctive  before  Athnahh,  see  h  (1); 
thus  it  maybe  Mahpakh,  Ps.  8:  3,  12:  5,  with  Tsinnorith,  Ps,  3:  8,  9:  21, 
or  it  may  be  Illuy,  Ps.  7:  10,  9:  14.  When  it  has  two  Conjunctives,  the 
second  is  Merka;  of  this  there  are  two  examples,  Ps.  117:  2,  143:  3. 

§  42.  The  trains  of  these  several  accents  are  adjusted 
to  sections  of  varying  length  by  expedients  similar  to 
those  employed  with  the  prose  accents,  viz.:  1.  Omitting 
the  Conjunctives  in  whole  or  in  part.  2.  Repeating  the 
Disjunctives,  e.  g.  "  Ps.  14:  1   (in  some  editions),      Ps. 


§  43  MAKKEPH.  63 

17:  14,  or  their  equivalents,  e.  g.  D'hhi  before  '  Ps. 
7:  10,  9:  1  §  41.  h  (2).  3.  Writing  two  accents  upon 
the  same  word,  ^rrhri'M'2  Ps.  5:  11,  ^3lin  Ps.  27:  11, 
^'^y'^  Ps.  18:  16.  4.  Uniting  two  or  more  words  by 
Makkeph,  so  that  they  require  but  a  single  accent. 
5.  Writing  the  different  parts  of  a  compound  accent 
upon  separate  words;  thus,  Olev'yoredh  "DH:  bb"I5<;  Ps. 
6:  3,  Merka-Tsinnorith  yin  ^3  Ps.  22:  9,"Mahpakli- 
Tsinnorith  nt^S  ^3  Prov.  6:  3. 


Makkeph. 

§  43.  Makkeph  (t^^  joining)  is  a  horizontal  stroke 
by  which  two,  three,  or  even  four  words  may  be  united. 
^"f:^.,  iTlT:;;.n.-DN  Gen.  30:  31,  br^b-C-:  Gen.  33:  11, 
ib-n-ii^-brnjil  Gen.  12 :  20,  25 :  5,  Ex.  20: 11,'  yzS-^nrbrb? 
Ex.  22:  8,  '^r^'^prbTVj  Job  41:  26.  It  belongs  properly 
to  the  accentual  system,  words  M^hich  are  closely  related 
being  often  connected  in  this  manner  in  order  to  obviate 
the  necessity  of  unduly  multijjlying  Conjunctive  accents. 
Thus,  the  first  fifteen  words  of  Ex.  22:  8  are  in  this 
manner  reduced  to  eight.  Monosyllables  are  frequently, 
and  some  almost  constantly,  linked  with  the  succeeding 
or  preceding  word,  to  which  they  are  closely  related. 
Examples  are  not  wanting,  however,  of  longer  words 
similarly  united,  e.  g.  D^l^TllbbiZ:  Deut.  19:  15,  "ibVr'aisp 
1  Kin.  17:  21,  riin^-T^i^  Isa.  31:  4.  This  use  of  Makkeph 
is  not  to  be  confounded  with  that  of  the  hyphen  in 
modern  languages  between  the  members  of  a  compound, 
as  self-same,  master-builder.  Words  united  by  Makkeph 
are  still  as  separate  as  ever  in  character  and  signification; 
but  they  are  pronounced  together  and  are  accented  as 
though  they  formed  but  one  word.  Hence,  whatever 
number  of  words  be  thus  joined,  the  last  only  will  receive 


G4  ORTnOGBAPHT.  §  44 

an  accent.  And,  as  a  further  consequence,  if  a  word  pre- 
ceding Makkepli  properly  ends  in  a  long  mixed  syllable, 
its  vowel,  if  mutable  will,  l)y  the  loss  of  the  accent,  be 
shortened,  'iwJTN,  v|i3'""b2,  "3"!]:^^",  otherwise  it  will 
commonly  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  qcV'Dr, 
nx^-rs,  nin~n3,  -irr^yn. 

"     :  •      I     I"  '  T    -  -T   ;   '  :■    -  IT    T 

a.  The  particles  bx,  ^x,  ex,  rx,  •)":,  b?,  *|e  are  almost  invariably  followed 
by  Makkeph,  so  are  the  nouns  13,  r2  and  Vs  when  in  the  construct  stat(  j 
the  particle  XD  is  commonly  preci'ded  by  it.  Before  monosyllables  or  dis- 
syllables accented  on  the  penult  Makkeph  is  inserted  after  the  particles  "ix, 
^"S,  xb  and  the  pronoun  '''0,  as  well  as  sometimes  after  larger  words  which 
do  not  admit  of  the  retrocession  of  the  accent,  e.g.  Cl^i'ix  Ex. 22:4,  nrx"'^"a 
Gen.  27:  32,  uix-^rinj'ri  Hos.  8:  14,  "ip-nip";]  Gen.  15:  io.  The  pronoun  n^ 
is  followed  by  Makkeph  before  words  whose  initial  letter  admits  Daghesh- 
forte  Conjunctive,  C^ii'I-np!)  n-i;-n^  Ps.  133:1.  nX"'3  are  joined  together  by 
Makkeph  in  Gen.  15:4,  Num.  35:  33,  Neh.  2:  2;  in  all  other  passages  CX  is 
followed  but  not  preceded  by  Makkeph,  r^"r3-=X  "^S  Ps.  1:  1.  "iP'^i'^-'X  aiP 
joined  by  Makkepli  but  never  xb  T^ix,  the  X~  being  always  linked  to  th'. 
following  word.  xb-^S  are  united  by  Makkeph  before  a  word  bearing  tin 
disjunctive  accent  Tiphhha,  provided  it  has  Sh'va  under  its  initial  letter* 
otherwise  the  Makkeph  follows  xb,  thus  nba  xb-i3  but  Drx3-xb  "-3. 

b.  Tsere  remains  before  Makkeph  in  TTX,  "3,  "i3,  "iV,  yv;  it  sometimes 
remains  and  is  sometimes  shortened  in  Sb,  C'i",  'd'C  six,  TV  e.  g.  Gen.  16:  13 
rtin*;"n::,  but  ver.  15  ":z"Q"r.  It  once  remains  according  to  some  editions  in 
~nx  Job  41 :  26,  a  word  which  is  three  times  written  rx  Avithout  Makkeph, 
Ps.  47:  5,  60:  2,  Prov.  3:  12.  Methegh  remains  in  the  place  of  the  accent 
on  r^i'  and  similar  Avords  ending  in  Pattahh  and  a  guttural,  when  they  are 
united  by  Makkeph  to  words  having  a  disjunctive  accent  on  the  first  syllable 
!l3b-n;35  Gen.  34:  16,  '"'b""?''^'!!  Gen.  24:  7. 

c.  Makkeph  is  occasionally  found  in  the  middle  of  a  long  word,  whicL 
has  been  erroneously  divided  into  two,  e.  g.  iTS"n2")  Jer.  46:  20,  and  per- 
haps ij'pTiTQ  Isa  61 :  1.  Sometimes  words  are  thus  divided  without  a 
Makkei)h  to  unite  the  sundered  parts,  e.  g.  n"23  "^D  Lam.  4:  3,  tnTh  "ina 
2  Chron.  34:  6,  and  probably  ^ihri  nzlnx  Hos.  4:  18,  H'.^s  "isnb  Isa.  2:  20. 
(See  Dr.  Alexander's  Commentarj-  on  this  passage.)  The  last  two  examples 
are  plainly  intended  by  the  punctuators  to  be  read  as  separate  words.  This 
might  likewise  be  done  in  the  preceding  examples  if  they  were  pointed 
Q^is  "^3  and  crTiFia  nna. 


Methegh. 

§  44.   Methegh  {^TT~  hridle),  a  small  pei'pendicular 
stroke  under  the  initial  letter  of  the  syllable  to  which  it 


§  45  METHEGH.  65 

belongs,  is  a  secondary  accent  denoting  a  stress  of  voice 
inferior  to  the  main  accent.  As  this  latter  always  has 
its  place  in  Hebrew  either  upon  the  ultimate  or  the 
penult,  distinctness  was  promoted  and  monotony  reheved, 
especially  in  long  words,  by  giving  prominence  to  one 
or  more  of  the  antecedent  syllables.  There  is  a  natural 
tendency  to  heighten  the  force  of  the  accent  by  passing 
hghtly  over  the  immediately  preceding  syllable,  this 
diminished  force  creating  in  its  turn  a  new  stress  upon 
that  next  beyond  it,  and  so  on  in  alternate  elevations 
and  depressions  to  the  beginning  of  the  word.  Agree- 
ably to  the  principle  just  stated,  Methegh  regularly 
stands  in  polysyllables  upon  the  second  syllable  before 
the  accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth  if  the  word  have 
so  many,  e.  g.  uyr^,  tt^^..,  '?J<'^v,  cin-^r^,  Dn^nin^D^-f 
niiiSTHp.^-  And  so  upon  two  or  more  words  connected 
by  Makkeph,  which  are  pronounced  as  one,  e.  g.  iSTIJ^^.* 
Gen.  22:  8,  DriVDi^-^S  1  Sam.  21:  7. 

a.  When  the  nature  of  the  syllables  requires  it,  §  32.  1,  Methegh  takes 
the  place  of  the  principal  accent  before  Makkeph  irrespective  of  the  position 
of  the  accent  upon  the  following  word,  iB'T^X-H  Num.  21:  35,  "L^atl'T^b^ 
Num.  21:  33,  ^ha-ri^^  Jer.  34:  1. 

b.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  position  of  Methegh  is  determined  by 
that  of  the  tone-syllable,  not  by  that  of  the  accentual  sign  when  these  are 
not  coincident,  as  frequently  happens  with  prepositives  and  postpositives, 
e.  g.  \h'^yfi  Deut.  4:  26,  Jirn'i'Ti'i  Josh.  22:  27,  where  the  tone  falls  on  the 
penult;  d'^p^'iiT'  Jer.  26:  21,  where  the  tone  is  upon  the  ultimate. 

§  45.  The  secondary  accent  is  liable  to  be  shifted 
from  its  normal  position  for  the  following  reasons,  viz.: 

1.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  mixed,  it 
may  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple 
syllable,  e.  g.  nn^niTJ^I  2  Sam.  22:  24,  l^^nn™  Job  1:  7, 
niinnrn".:  Ezek.  42:  5,  "ir^isrrbN-j;  Gen.  43:  7;  or  if  none 
such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  altogether,  e.  g.  DfaiJ'J^.I 
Jer.  33:  24,    ^lij^^J-^T^n  1  Kin.  21:  1,    ni^tirrbrn^^  i)eut. 


66  ORTHOGRAPHr.  §  45 

6:  25,  except  in   certain   cases  which  require  it,  e.  g. 
nrr-np.  Ex.  l:  lO,  TObnnril  Lev.  26:  12. 

a.  Methegh  regularly  stands  (see  Baer  in  Merx  Archiv  for  1868): 

(1)  On  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  (except  Kamets  Hhatuph)  in 
words  having  a  disjunctive  accent,  provided  it  be  separated  from  the  accent 
or  an  antecedent  Methegh  by  both  a  vowel  and  a  vocal  Sh'va  (other  than 
Hhplem  before  a  guttural  with  Hhateph  Pattahli),  'il'"2"r';'1  Gen.  3:  8,  r^T.^ST] 
Gen.  7:  2,  :  Bnv,--.:.oa^  Ps.  18:  46,  ricoijno  Zech.  9:  16,'  but  irhs^i-ri  Gen. 
24:  11. 

(2)  On  2,  t  or  u  in  the  first  of  two  mixed  syllables,  immediately  pre- 
ceding a  disjunctive  accent,  when  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  is  a  or 
i,  rztri-^ri  Gen.  3:  24,  'i'l^p^  Gen.  4:  26,  "^""(riN  Gen  30:  31.  Initial  1 
followed  by  simple  Sh'va  is  reckoned  a  short  mixed  syllable  in  the  appli- 
cation of  both  the  foregoing  rules  cr^pNbn  Gen.  47:  24,  =i:c;ri1  Jer.  3:  25. 

(3)  On  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future  sing,  of  perfect  verbs,  when 
the  second  vowel  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph  before  Makkeph, 
•■^^y"i3"rn  Job  3:  5,  but    Vhn-asJ-]  Ps.  9:  9. 

(4)  With  the  first  syllable  of  7\V~}}  and  Dr;?~iT,  when  they  have  a  dis- 
junctive accent,  as  Gen.  3:  15,  Lev.  26:  16;  but  'n"",!!^.  Gen.  17:  12,  Crsnrnxi 
Gen.  9:  9,  ~,"";!31  Deut.  28:  46  and  the  like  follow  rule  (1). 

A  very  few  isolated  instances  are  not  embraced  in  the  preceding  rules, 
e.  g. 'bxyri-^^  Gen.  17:  20,  nyv^n-'iO  Gen.  £0:  16,  Tj'p.TqTrb^  Ex.  29:  21. 

2.  It  is  always  given  to  a  long  vow^el  when  followed 
by  a  vocal  Sh'va,  whether  simple  or  compound;  also  to 
a  short  vowel  followed  by  compound  Sh'va  or  a  vowel 
which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  the  slight  pronunciation 
proper  to  the  Sh'va  or  its  derivative  giving  new  pro- 
minence to  the  preceding  vowel,  ^T^>5;',  'l^Jj^';,  ^uixb, 
n-^.r^-l'in  Gen.  30:  38,  'tzz  Isa.  9:  17,  lo":  34,  '^I'^Jl':,  some- 
times to  other  intermediate  s^dlables,  §  20.  2,  e.  g.  ^i'lJa 
Ex.  12:  21,  nin-i>:  Num.  31:  12  (but  T\^2y_12,  Deut.  34:  1, 
where  a  simple  syllable  precedes),  "'iCn  Isa.  63:  7,  "^T^? 
Obad.  ver.  11,  particularly  before  the  first  radical  of 
TTT\  to  be  and  njn  to  live  when  pointed  with  Sh'va  Trril, 
DVr^Ty),  rii^nb;  rarely  and  only  as  an  exception  to  a  mixed 
syllable  standing  in  the  first  place  before  the  principal 
accent,  e.  g.  i<^'^.  Gen.  1:  11,  D^ri^n  Ex.  12:  7,  ZecK 
14:  2,  r;3«  Jon.  1:  14,  4:  2. 

'  T    IT  ' 


§45 


METHEGH.  67 


a.  MonosyllaWes  ending  in  a  long  vowel,  ■when  followed  by  Makkeph, 
take  Methegh  in  the  first  place  befoie  the  accent,  provided  a  vocal  Sh'va 
intervenes,  f^b-^O  Gen.  19:  12,  Nn-^-iS  Gen.  22:  12,  D=d-^nN  Gen.  34:  6:  With 
dissyllables  this  is  rare  and  exceptional  "xk'TK'ilipn  1  Kin.  1:19,  '^in-nrVj 
1  Chron,  28:  9. 

b.  Methegh  is  regularly  attached  to  intermediate  syllables  in  the  follow- 
ing cases  (See  Baer  iu  Merx  Archiv  for  1868): 

(1)  To  the  ai-ticle  n  or  the  inseparable  prepositions  5,  3,  b  with  the 
vowel  of  the  article,  before  a  vowelless  consonant  (other  tlian  Yodh)  from 
which  Daghesh  forte  has  been  omitted,  provided  they  stand  in  the  second 
place  before  the  accent,  fiibsan  Lev.  3:  3,  Ijkirib  Ps.  4:  1,  but  D'^n^'^n  Gen. 
38:  5,  3^p>  Ps.  144:  1.         '     '^ 

(2)  To  He  Interrogative  pointed  with  Pattahh  (except  before  Yodh  or 
a  dagheshed  letter),  provided  it  stands  in  the  second  place  before  the  ac- 
cent, the  Methegh  in  this  case  preceding  the  vowel  for  the  sake  of  distinc- 
tion, nfe?'?}!  Gen.  18:  17,  T^lixn  Ex.  2:  7,  but  Drii'!i":n  Gen.  29:  5,  b'ij^an  Judg. 
9:  2.  In  the  books  of  Psalms,  Proverbs  and  Job  Methegh  follows  the  vowel, 
as  otherwise  it  might  be  confounded  with  D'hhi  D^is'bri  Ps.  85:6.  Before 
Daghesh- forte,  Avhich  sufficiently  shows  the  following  Sh'va  to  be  vocal, 
Methegh  is  omitted  as  unnecessary,  n2"23ii  Isa.  27 :  7, 

(3)  To  the  first  syllable  of  ''i-}-'^  or  "^nil  before  Makkeph  or  with  the 
accent  Pashta,  "i'iX""^n'i'l  Gen.  1:3,  ''^ti'>^_  Gen.  4:  8,  rii3"'r!'ni  Gen.  5:  6.  If 
a  simple  sj'llable  precedes  Methegh  will  in  all  cases  be  transferred  to  it, 
rj-ran-s^a  2  Kin.  9:  ll.  * 

c.  It  hence  appears  how  Methegh  comes  to  be  of  use  in  distinguishing 
the  doubtful  vowels,  §  19,  and  to  what  extent  it  can  be  relied  upon  for  this 
end.  As  it  invariably  accompanies  the  vowel  of  a  simple  syllable  when 
followed  by  vocal  Sh'va,  it  must  alwa3's  be  found  with  a,  i,  and  ii  preced- 
ing Sh'va,  inasmuch  as  this  will  necessarily  be  vocal.  Initial  ^  w,  the  un- 
emphatic  conjunction  is  an  exception  with  which  it  is  not  written,  e.  g. 
nb^;!)  Gen.  6:  19,  MnV;!!  Gen.  31:  4,  unless  the  Sh'va  be  compound,  e.g. 
^■'^3fi^n  Gen  1:18,  nhrn  Judg.  5:12,  or  it  be  required  by  the  rules  under  l.a. 
The  absence  of  Methegh  except  in  the  case  just  mentioned,  is  consequently 
conclusive  evidence  of  the  shortness  of  the  vowel.  As,  however,  short 
vowels  in  intermediate  syllables,  and  in  a  few  rare  instances  even  in  mixed 
syllables,  may  receive  Methegh,  the  presence  of  this  sign  does  not  of  itself 
determine  the  vowel  to  be  long;  the  ultimate  decision  must  in  this  case 
depend  on  other  considerations. 

3.  When  by  the  operation  of  the  preceding  rule  Me- 
thegh comes  to  stand  in  the  first  place  before  the  accent, 
another  Methegh  is  nevertheless  occasionally  found  in 
the  second  place,  the  two  thus  standing  in  immediate 
succession,  e.  g.  ninm  Gen.  32:  22,  ^!:?^;i  Gen.  45:  25; 
and  even  three   occur  upon  successive   syllables,   e.  g. 


68  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  45 

7iTZ'J'B'2^  Isa.  22:  19  in  some  editions.  But  commonly 
where  there  is  more  than  one  Methegh,  their  position 
relatively  to  each  other  is  governed  by  the  same  rules 
as  the  position  of  Methegh  generally  with  relation  to 
the  principal  accent,    e.  g.  TjP^Vi'b,    inhdni,    ?|ri "'']]" Si, 

4.  Methegh  is  sometimes  written  under  an  initial 
letter  with  Sh'va,  e.  g.  iss"^^"!  Job  19:  6,  n{:n:p  Ps.  2:  3, 
JnDSnrs  Jer.  49:  18. 

a.  A  Methegh  so  situated  is  called  Gaj'a  (i<''"5  bellowwg)  by  Jewish 
grammarians,  and,  according  to  Elias  Levita,  it  occurs  eight^'-four  times, 
the  number  yielded  by  its  name  arithmetically  reckoned.  The  traditional 
rule  was  that  the  Sh'va,  on  which  it  stands,  should  be  pronounced  as  a 
full  vowel.  Baer  and  others  give  the  name  of  Gaya  likewise  to  Methegh  in 
mixed  syllables.  Methegh  upon  a  short  vowel  before  a  compound  Sh'va  was 
called  Ma^iikh  (Ti''*.X^  prolonging),  with  a  short  Hhirik  it  was  called  Hhiriik 
(p!in"iri  gnashing), 

5.  The  place  of  Methegh  is  frequently  supplied  by 
an  accent  chosen  agreeably  to  the  laws  of  consecution, 
§  39.  3.  a.,  e.  g.  QD'^TCS;  Isa.  66:  13,  Dn-n'bsb  Deut.  12:  31, 
d'i:'C5^1  Zech.  7:  14"  's^ili-bi'l  Num.  10:  23,  ^bhp'^l  Josh. 
22:  12. 

a.  Methegh  with  Sh'va  occurs  chiefly  in  connection  with  the  poetic 
accents,  and  has  relation  to  the  intoning  which  it  is  one  of  their  functions 
to  direct.  It  indicates  that  the  vowelless  letter,  upon  which  it  stands,  is  to 
be  dwelt  upon  and  thus  additional  space  gained  for  the  various  modulations 
of  the  voice  that  are  prescribed.   Baer  gives  the  following  rules: 

(1)  When  Methegh  would  regularly  fall  upon  an  initial  simple  syllable 
beginning  with  two  consonants,  in  words  having  a  strong  disjunctive  accent 
not  preceded  by  a  Conjunctive,  it  is  transferred  from  the  vowel  to  the 
antecedent  vocal  Sh'va,  i:"^^>~nD3  Ps.  4:7.  If  the  Sh'va  is  compound, 
Methegh  is  interposed  between  its  two  constituents,  Dn'^ti'~X  Ps.  79:  10. 

(2)  The  divine  names  n'ini,  "ins,  n"'riVN,  "^n'^X,  when  accented  with 
R'bhi*  not  preceded  by  a  Conjunctive,  take  Methegh  on  the  initial  Sh'va, 
e.  g.  Ps.  2:  7,    25:  2,    68:  8,   90:  1. 

(3)  Words  accented  with  Olev'yoredh,  R'bhP  or  D'hhi  not  preceded 
by  a  Conjunctive  take  Methegh  on  initial  Sh'va,  provided  there  is  at  least 
one  vowel  between  it  and  the  accent,  and  this  is  without  Methegh  rnni 
Ps.  1;  3,  Dn-^brns  Ps.  106:  23.    The  Methegh  necessarily  due  to  a  following 


§46  k'bi  and  k'thibh.  69 

compound  Sh'va  is  not  reckoned  in  this  and  the  subsequent  rules,  ^k-">';;'nn3 
Ps.  36:  7,  >lH;5.W  Ps.  91:  !">. 

(4)  ^3X  with  Munahh  before  D'hhi  takes  Methegh  on  the  initial  Sh'va, 
Ps,  17:  6,  116:  16, 

Methegh  falls  on  initial  Sh'va  with  the  prose  accents 

(1)  "When  the  word  has  G'rashayim  or  Pazer  not  preceded  by  a  Con- 
junctive, provided  there  are  at  least  two  vowels  before  the  tonesyllable  and 
the  iirst  is  without  Methegh,  (see  rule  (3)  above),  D"'p'nns-nX'1  Gen,  10:  14, 
D-^nisr^  Ex,  25  :  33, 

(2)  When  the  word  has  Darga  as  the  second  Conjunctive  before  E'bhP, 
or  Kadhma  as  the  second  Conjunctive  before  Pashta  or  T'bhir,  or  Munahh 
as  the  third  Conjunctive  before  T'lisha,  provided  a  vov.  el  precedes  the  tone- 
syllable  and  is  without  Methegh,  (see  rule  (3)  above),  !i;nS  nn  n"'"3VJ  Gen, 
34:  21. 

Methegh  in  these  cases  requires  a  more  vigorous  pronunciation  of  the 
vowelless  letter,  which  if  slightly  uttered  might  be  inaudible. 


K'ei  and  K'thibh. 

§  46.  Various  notes  extracted  from  the  Massora 
(rriis'r  tradition),  a  collection  of  remarks  upon  the  text, 
are  found  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  wliich  are 
explained  in  the  glossary  at  the  end  of  most  editions. 
The  most  important  of  these  are  the  various  readings 
known  as  the  K'ri  ("ip  read),  and  K'thibh  (n'STiS  written). 
If  in  any  instance  traditional  usage  sanctioned  a  reading 
different  from  that  which  was  written  in  the  text  or  the 
K'thibh,  the  punctuators  did  not  venture  to  alter  the 
text  itself  for  the  sake  of  making  the  correction;  they 
went  no  further  than  to  connect  with  the  letters  of  the 
text  the  vowels  of  the  word  to  be  substituted  for  it  in 
reading  or  the  K'ri,  with  a  reference  to  the  margin  where 
the  letters  of  the  substitute  might  be  found.  Thus,  with 
the  word  1'^52Ji^^  Josh.  6:  7  is  connected  the  marginal  note 
■•^p  "i7Ji<"'l  The  vowels  here  attached  to  the  K'thibh  be- 
long not  to  it  but  to  the  unpointed  word  in  the  margin, 
which  is  accordingly  l52sH.  The  proper  vowels  foi'  the 
pronunciation  of  the  K'thibh  are  not  written,  but  must 


70  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  47 

be  supplied  from  a  knowledge  of  the  form  indicated  by 
the  letters,  which  in  this  case  is  ^^ttS^I.  Again,  in  ver.  9, 
yj'^T}  in  the  text  refers  to  'p  ^"pn  in  the  margin;  the  K'ri 
is  here  ";pr,  and  the  K'thibh,  whose  vowels  are  left  to 
be  determined  by  the  reader,  ^i?pP.  Jer.  42:  6  has  ^i^ 
where  the  marginal  note  is  "'ip  TjTuii^;  the  K'ri  is  accord- 
ingly ^jrDX,  and  the  K'thibh  ^Di<.  In  order  to  indicate 
that  a  given  w^ord  w^as  to  be  omitted  in  reading,  it  was 
left  unpointed,  and  the  note  ""^p  &<bl  ll'^nD,  ivritten  hut  not 
read,  placed  in  the  margin,  e.  g.  iC'^n  Ezek.  48:  16,  W 
2  Kin.  5:  18,  "jiT  Jer.  51:  3.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word  was  to  be  supplied,  its  vowels  were  inserted  in  the 
text  and  its  letters  placed  in  the  margin,  with  the  note 
nTiD  i<bl  ■'ip,  read  hut  not  written,  e.  g.  Judg.  20:  13  in 
the  text  ^  .  and  in  the  margin  ''Dn,  to  be  read  ^:3 ;  so 
Jer.  31:  38   D^^n.     In  1  Kin.  21:  8    the  first  letter  of 

'      T 

D*"£vM  is  left  unpointed  as  superfluous,  and  in  Job  2:  7 
1?.  is  explained  by  the  margm  to  stand  for  iTi:  so  Jer. 
18':  23  rn  1  for  ^^n"\ 

:  r  :  :  r  : 

a.  The  number  of  these  marginal  readings  differs  in  different  editions. 
Elias  Levita  states  that  there  are  848.  Others  have  computed  them  to  be 
1,000;  others  still,  1,200. 

§  47.  Sometimes  a  different  reading  from  that  of  the 
text  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone  without  a  marginal 
note  being  added  in  explanation,  as  when  a  particular 
word  or  orthography  is  regularly  substituted  for  another 
of  frequent  occurrence.  These  cases  are  presumed  to  be 
so  familiar  to  the  reader  as  to  require  no  other  index  of 
their  existence  than  the  presence  of  the  appropriate 
vowels.  Thus,  the  divine  name  mn"',  which  the  Jews  had 
a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  was  and  still  is 
read  by  them  as  if  it  were  ^ilN;  Lord,  whose  points  it 
accordingly  receives,  nirr;,  miless  these  tw^o  names  stand 
in  immediate  connection,  when,  to  avoid  repetition,  it  is 


§  48  K*EI  AND  k'tHIBH.  71 

read  U'tlb^  and  pointed  nVn;;  Gen.  15:  2,  Hab.  3:  19. 
The  antiquity  of  this  superstition  is  attested  by  the 
Kvpiog  of  the  Septuagint,  followed  in  the  English  as 
well  as  in  other  modern  versions  by  the  rendering 
Lord.  The  true  sound  of  the  name  never  having  been 
noted,  is  now  lost;  the  only  clue  that  is  left  being  its 
etymology  and  the  form  which  it  assumes  in  compo- 
sition, §  62.  1,  from  which  the  conclusion  has  been 
drawn  that  it  was  nitri;;  Yahve.  The  common  pronun- 
ciation Jehovah  is  manifestly  founded  upon  the  error 
of  combining  the  consonants  of  this  w^ord  with  the 
vowels  of  another  and  an  entirely  different  one. 
Other  standing  K'ris,  unnoted  in  the  margin,  are  iXTl, 
which  is  read  i^Tj,  though  the  sound  indicated  by  the 
letters  is  &<^n.     So  ^bzW  read  ■^Di25\  and  oVd^n^  read 

§  48.  In  the  absence  of  definite  information  respect- 
ing the  origin  and  sources  of  these  various  readings,  it  is 
difficult  to  determine  with  absolute  precision  the  weight 
to  which  they  are  respectively  entitled.  The  current 
opinion  of  the  ablest  Hebraists,  based  upon  a  careful 
scrutiny  of  their  internal  character  and  the  relation  which 
ordinarily  appears  to  subsist  between  them,  is  that  while 
the  K'ri  may  perhaps,  in  a  few  cases,  correct  errors  in 
the  K'thibh,  and  so  restore  the  original  reading,  it  is  in 
the  great  majority  of  instances  an  explanatory  gloss 
rather  than  an  emendation.  With  the  rare  exceptions 
already  suggested,  the  K'thibh  is  esteemed  the  true  read- 
ing, the  object  of  the  K'ri  being  to  remove  orthographical 
anomalies,  secure  grammatical  uniformity,  substitute 
usual  for  unusual,  prevailing  for  obsolete  words  and 
forms,  and  occasionally  to  introduce  euphemistic  ex- 
pressions. While  the  K'ri  is  probably  not  to  be  esteemed 
the  original  reading,  therefore,  it  deserves  attention  as 


72  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  49 

the  grammatical  or  exegetical  comment  of  a  steadfast 
tradition. 


Accuracy  of  the  Points. 

§  49.  1.  All  the  Massoretic  additions  to  the  text  de- 
signed to  faciUtate  its  reading  have  now  been  considered. 
The  correctness  of  the  pronunciation,  which  they  yield, 
is  vouched  for  not  only  by  the  esteem  in  which  they  are 
miiversally  held  by  the  Jews,  but  by  the  scrupulous 
minuteness  of  the  system,  its  consistency  with  itself  and 
with  the  vowel-letters  of  the  text,  its  affinity  with  and 
yet  independence  of  the  vocaUzation  of  the  kindred 
languages  the  Arabic  and  Syriac,  and  the  veneration  for 
the  akeady  established  text  which  evidently  characterized 
its  authors,  since  they  did  not  venture  to  change  the 
text  even  in  the  slightest  particular. 

2.  The  only  additional  information  which  has  come 
down  to  us  respecting  the  true  sound  of  Hebrew  words, 
is  furnished  by  the  mode  of  writing  proper  names  in  the 
Septuagint  version,  and  the  few  Hebrew  words  preserved 
by  ancient  authors,  particularly  Origen  and  Jerome. 
These  have  been  subjected  to  an  elaborate  comparison 
with  the  Massoretic  punctuation,  and  the  result  has  been 
to  estabhsh  their  substantial  agreement  in  the  main,  with, 
however,  not  a  few  remarkable  points  of  divergence.  In 
relation  to  this  subject  it  should  be  observed,  that  the 
Hebrew  pronunciation  of  the  Seventy  is  inferred  entirely 
from  their  mode  of  spelhng  proper  names,  not  from 
words  in  living  use  in  the  language.  The  chances  of  in- 
accuracy, on  the  part  of  the  translators,  are  here  pecuh- 
arly  great.  Many  names  were  not  familiar  and  were  of 
rare  occurrence;  and  as  no  system  of  vowel  notation  then 
existed,  they  were  left  entirely  to  their  independent  know- 


§  49  ACCURACY  OF  THE  POINTS.  73 

ledge  of  the  sound  of  each  individual  word.  These  words 
were  written  by  them  in  a  foreign  alphabet,  whose 
sounds  did  not  coincide  precisely  with  those  of  the 
Hebrew,  and  in  which  the  proper  equivalents  varied 
somewhat  according  to  their  combinations.  The  true 
sound  was  also  departed  from  sometimes  because  the 
laws  of  Greek  euphony  forbade  its  exact  reproduction. 
The  negligence  with  which  they  are  chargeable  else- 
where was  also  probably  aggravated  here,  and  in  fact 
there  are  many  instances  in  which  they  not  merely  de- 
viate from  the  vowels  but  transpose  or  change  the  let- 
ters. Leaving  out  of  view,  therefore,  such  incidental  dis- 
crepancies as  are  to  be  accounted  for  in  the  ways  now 
suggested,  a  thorough  and  extended  examination  of  the 
subject  reveals,  with  all  the  general  agreement,  a  number 
of  regular  and  systematic  deviations. 

a.  These  are  thus  stated  by  Ewald,  Lehrbuch,  p.  71.  (1)  An  e  or  ?  de- 
rived from  a  is  written  a,  as  rrnpi  Qapoc,  Uvhz  Haktxa/Ji,  "|'i"3ii  TajSauiv,  d'Ta 
MapiafL]  and  on  the  other  hand,  a  is  sometimes  written  e,  iT33"'^nN 
OXifisfia,  Wp  K£V£^,  ra  Ted,  especially  before  H  as  t\yp  Kops,  rrnt  Zaps. 
(2)  e  is  written  for  t  and  o  for  u,  d'RS  Xerraioi,  t'sri'^J  Tsevva,  'f'lVli,  Teheav, 
n•n^^o  Msapaip^,  r.ins  Oxo^ad,  ri-'JV  0^/a.  (3)  For  the  diphthongal  e  and  5 
their  constituents  ai  and  an  are  substituted,  "|;''i;;  Kaivav,  13:  'Na^au.  (4)  The 
vowel  letters  are  softened  into  their  homogeneous  vowels  l!<~ip'^1  oviKpa, 
"i3'i"'1  ovila^yjp.  (5)  Vocal  Sh'va  is  written  as  a  full  vowel,  commonly  a, 
or  if  an  o  follow,  o,  nixn-^  I,ajSiXaiS,  ^XW)  Vayovrjk,  d'^ailS  Xepov^ijj.,  Dnp 
HolofJLa;  the  final  vowel  of  Segholates  is  also  written  o  if  o  precedes,  Ti^to 
MoXox,  ipi"  yojxop. 

3.  The  regularity  of  these  deviations  seems  to  be  best 
accounted  for  by  the  assumption  that  the  pronunciation 
represented  in  the  Septuagint  is  that  which  prevailed 
among  the  Jews  in  Egypt,  which  would  naturally  be  less 
pure  than  that  of  Palestine  represented  in  the  vowel 
points,  and  which,  moreover,  betrays  in  the  particulars 
recited  above  a  strong  leaning  to  Aramaean  forms  and 
sounds.  Accordingly  the  view  now  commonly  entertained 
is  that  the  vowel  notation  of  the  Massorites  is  correct. 


74  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  50 

at  least  in  all  essential  particulars,  and  that  it  is  properly 
to  be  made  the  basis  of  all  investigations  into  the  phe- 
nomena of  the  language. 


Orthographic  Changes. 

§  50.  The  signs  thus  far  described  represent  all  the 
sounds  of  the  Hebrew  language.  Its  stock  of  words  is 
formed  by  combining  these  in  various  significant  ways. 
The  laws  of  such  combinations,  and  especially  the  mu- 
tations to  which  they  are  subject,  or  which  they  occasion, 
next  demand  attention.  When  a  particular  idea  has 
been  attached  to  a  certain  combination  of  sounds,  its 
different  modifications  may  naturally  be  expressed  by 
sUghtly  varying  those  sounds.  This  may  take  place, 

1.  By  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another 
of  hke  character,  and  for  the  most  part  of  the  same 
organ,  e.  g.: 

n^n  to  be,  exist,  ti^n  to  live;  S3D  to  pour  forth,  X22  the  same  idea  ap- 
plied to  words,  to  Tprophesy;  p::^  to  encircle  the  neck  ivith  an  ornament,  p5n 
to  strangle,  p3X  applied  to  sounds  uttered  in  strangulation,  to  groan;  ^5"i  to 
go  about  as  a  spy,  hz'-^  to  go  about  as  a  merchant;  033  to  collect,  D"'T3y 
treasures;  r"'2J  a  cup,  "ais  or  "nip  a  helmet  (of  similar  shape);  T^  tender, 
delicate,  p^  tJiin;  "ipn  to  make  straight,  'sn  to  straighten  the  beam  of  the 
balance,  to  tveigh;  "lija  first  born,  "i133  first  ripe,  *ip3  the  first  portion  of 
the  day,  the  morning;  nbn  to  suspend,  nbn  applied  to  a  bucket,  to  let  down; 
it;  to  cut,  "1^;^  to  reap;  3riT  gold,  "J^rfS  yellow;  ]yj  to  conceal,  "E'rand  ■|B:£ 
to  hide  aicay  as  treasures,  "SD  to  cover  ivith  boards;  "j'riD  to  destroy  by  tear- 
ing down,  irnD  to  destroy  by  uprooting;  r\^l2  to  slay,  HHT  to  sacrifice;  Van 
to  bind,  bas  to  bound;  JT^a  to  break  up,  flee,  n"S  to  break  out,  blos^^om,  p'^Q 
to  break  in  pieces;  a^p  to  cut  off",  a-^n  to  hew  stone,  a;:n  to  cut  tvood;  ins 
to  surround,  "i;:5  to  encircle  the  head  tvith  a  crown;  T^nj  to  pour  out,  ~p:  to 
pour  in  libation  or  in  casting  metals;  "iliri  to  shine,  iri::  to  be  pure;  rr\n  to 
engrave,  iT'^n  to  plough;  ",ria  to  prove,  "ilia  to  approve,  choose;  nnd  to  drink, 
its  causative  nprii;  "irn  to  break  throtigh,  ipn  to  investigate;  as3  to  place_ 
its  reflexive  S^l^rri. 

2.  By  the  transposition  of  letters,  e.  g.: 

f^'iQ  to  deal  violently,  "iSB  to  urge;  "iisp  to  cut  with  the  sickle,  reap,  y^ 


S  51  ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES.  75 

to  cut  with  the  teeth,  bite;  qiaD  to  bloiv,  1^53  breath;  &23  to  collect  035  riches, 
niDSpo  storehouses. 

3.  By  the  addition  of  a  letter: 

Thus,  from  the  letters  IS,  in  which  inheres  the  idea  of  compression 
are  formed  ^t*^  ^0  bind,  "ii:i  to  press  together,  ^:JX  to  heap  up,  -i^^  to  be 
straitened,  1^3  fo  guard,  besiege,  ^^r  ^o  restrain,  "^'Ji'n  an  enclosure;  from  T5 
are  formed  in  fo  cm^,  T^a  fo  cwi  o/f,  I'lS  to  cut  loose,  go  away,  in  to  shear, 
^Ta  to  plunder,  n'^'ta  /ie?«w  stone;  ^'^S  fo  unfold,  make  distinct,  T&r^  to  spread 
out;  W^s  a  vineyard,  bi?"}?  a  garden. 

§  51.  Such  hteral  changes  as  those  just  recited  not 
only  serve  to  express  new  sliades  of  meaning,  but  even 
where  the  meaning  remains  precisely  the  same,  they  may 
represent  diversities  of  other  sorts.  Thus,  the  distmction 
may  be, 

1.  In  point  of  currency  or  style:  One  form  of  the 
word  being  in  more  common  and  familiar  use,  the  other 
more  rare  and  savoring,  perhaps,  of  the  elevated  or  poetic 
style,  e.  g.: 

isa  to  guard,  laj  poetic;  ^'i"Gl  cypress,  rTi"i3  once  in  poetry;  "i3i5  to  shut, 
rare]y  "13«3;  fTiSp  storm,  ^I'S^^.  rare  and  poetic;  Tj?^  to  cover,  once  T(?'I3;  T\S'^ 
to  be  quenched,  once  T|";;  ^^'^  to  abhor,  once  3X0;  bpo  to  be  foolish,  onc^ 
bp3;  H^l?  iniquity,  once  <ii^?. 

2.  Of  antiquity:  The  pronunciation  of  a  word  or  its 
form  may  undergo  changes  in  the  lapse  of  time.  Of  the 
few  instances  of  this  sort,  which  our  imperfect  data 
enable  us  to  fix  upon  with  some  measure  of  confidence, 
the  following  may  be  taken  as  specimens,  e.  g.: 

To  laugh  in  the  Pentateuch  pH"^ ,  in  other  books  (Judg.  16:  25  ex- 
cepted) pti'iJ;  to  cry  out  in  the  Pentateuch  p?^,  only  once  (Ex.  2:  23)  pST 
which  is  the  more  frequent  form  in  other  books ;  3~3,  nais  a  lamb,  occur 
in  the  Pentateuch  interchangeably  with  b313,  ■^■.^l?^.  which  are  the  only 
forms  found  in  other  books;  a  sceptre  'O'y^,  but  in  the  book  of  Esther  :;""!'IJ; 
Damascus  p'y"5:'i,  in  Chronicles  pb'Q")^;  how  1  Chron.  13:  12,  Dan.  10:  17 
T^'^H,  in  earlier  books  T^'^X. 

3.  Of  Dialect:  The  same  word  may  come  to  be 
pronounced  differently  by  those  who  speak  distinct 
though  related  languages.  Thus,  the  cognate   dialects, 


76  ORTHOGEAPHT.  §  52 

particularly  the  Biblical  Aramaean  and  Syriac,  in  very 
many  words  regularly  substitute  X  for  the  Hebrew 
final  n,  and  the  corresponding  Unguals  for  the  Hebrew 
sibilants,  22  being  sometimes  still  further  weakened  by 
the  loss  even  of  the  lingual  sound  to  that  of  the  gut- 
tural 3-",  e.  g.: 

Heb.  nsin  to  wander,  Aram.  X?:?,  Syr.  ^L^  ;  Heb.  nnt  gold,  Aram. 
2'^'^,  Syr.  l^cJi?;  Heb.  11:!  a  rock,  Aram,  nrj,  Syr.  jia^ ;  Heb.  \yblB 
three,  Aram,  rtn,  Syr.  £JiIz,  Arab.  ^^'  i  Heb.  yn!*  <Ae  ear<A,  Arab. 
v»\,  Aram,  rnx,  Syr.  I^j).  Other  consonant  changes:  Heb.  '2  a  son, 
Arab.  ^^|,  Aram,  "la,  Syr.  j^L ;  Heb.  Vj;^  to  Ml,  Arab,  jj^ ;  Heb. 
bbp-),  Syr.  '^q-JloJ  ;  Heb.  KB3  a  throne,  Aram.  "'O'llS,  Syr.  U^c'is,  Arab. 
^*o^;  Heb.  n;r5n  a  ^eW,  Aram.  K^p^n,  Syr.  VLoI,  Eth.  /fi^^:. 

4.  Of  simple  euphony:  An  alternate  form  of  a  word 
may  be  produced  to  facihtate  its  pronunciation  or  make 
its  sound  more  pleasing,  e.  g.: 

1^5"ix,  ■|ia'iX|)ur/)/e;  nub,  "pb  <o  ^afe;  nsdb,  ns'::?  chamber;  i^s,  •cs 
Achan;  -laxnr^n?,  'sx"}"!:!!::?  Ntbuchadnezzar ;  5Nn,  a^in  Doeg;  d"^ap5X, 
Diaisbx  almuff  or  algum  trees;  nimb"?,  nir^ra  feefA. 

a.  Mei'e  varieties  of  orthographj'  must  not  be  mistaken  for  consonantal 
changes,  e.  g.  xb  occasionally  for  "ib  and  vice  versa,  probably  T'lbab  for 
robsp,  and  such  permutations  of  gntiurals  as  abound  in  the  manuscripts 
of  the  Samaritans,  who,  making  no  distinction  in  the  sounds  of  these  letters, 
perpetually  confounded  them  in  writing,  Gesen.  Sam.  Pent.  p.  52.  A  like 
faulty  pronunciation  has  been  attributed  to  the  Galileans,  to  which  there  is 
a  probable  allusion  in  Matt.  26 :  73.   Buxtorf  Lex.  Chald.  p.  434. 

§  52.  The  changes  thus  far  described  result  in  the 
production  of  distinct  words,  and  belong  to  the  domain 
of  the  lexicon  rather  than  of  the  grammar.  The  lexico- 
grapher regards  such  words  as  cognate,  and  traces  them 
back  to  their  common  source;  but,  in  the  view  of  the 
grammarian,  they  are  totally  distinct.  The  mutations 
with  which  the  latter  concerns  himself  are  such  as  take 
place  in  the  direct  derivation  and  inflection  of  words. 
These  are  altogether  euphonic,  are  more  restricted  in 


§  53  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  77 

their  character,  and  take  place  within  far  narrower  limits, 
than  those  heretofore  considered.  When  words  are  sub- 
jected to  grammatical  changes  their  sounds  are  brought 
into  new  connections,  attended,  it  may  be,  with  a  diffi- 
culty of  utterance  which  demands  some  measure  of  rehef, 
or  they  pass  readily  and  naturally  into  other  sounds, 
which  are  easier  of  pronunciation  or  more  agreeable  to 
the  ear.  The  mutations  thus  induced  are  of  three  sorts, 
viz.:  Consonant  Changes,  the  Conversion  of  Consonants 
into  Vowels,  and  Vowel  Changes.  These  will  require  to 
be  considered  separately. 

Consonant  Changes. 

§  53.  The  first  class  of  changes  embraces  those  which 
affect  the  consonants.  These  mostly  arise  from  the  con- 
currence of  two  consonants,  creating  a  difficulty  in  the 
pronunciation  or  yielding  a  sound  displeasing  to  the  ear. 
This  may  take  place  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  close 
of  a  syllable.  Syllables  in  Hebrew  may,  and  often  do, 
begin  with  two  consonants,  §  18.  1;  but  the  necessity  of 
this  is  avoided  in  certain  cases  by  the  following  ex- 
pedients: 

1.  In  the  beginning  of  words  the  weak  letter  H  is 
sometimes  prefixed  with  a  short  vowel,  thus  creating  a 
new  initial  syllable  to  which  the  first  consonant  may  be 
transferred. 

a.  The  only  instances  of  this  are  afforded  by  the  second  and  seventh 
conjugations  of  verbs,  the  Niphal  and  Hithpael,  e.  g.  h'Jt'^sf.^h'i^'piT)  for  '13)^3; 
^is;^^^  pi'obably  for  bui^R  comp.  Arab,  takattala.  In  d^'nx  Ezek.  14:3  N  is  pre- 
fixed instead  of  ti.  Prosthesis  is  more  common  in  the  domain  of  the  lexicon, 
where  !!<  is  always  the  letter  used,  e.  g.  sinT,  ^"inTXarm;  hihT},  h'^h'TiK  yester- 
day. A  prefixed  N  is  even  occasionally  employed  to  soften  the  pronunciation 
without  the  necessity  stated  above,  e.  g,  D'^nisnX,  tD"iEiJN,  d-iib-ifX.  tl'^pTX.  So 
in  Chaldee  nnx  blood,  Heb.  CiT;  "i^N  garden,  Heb.  "5.  In  Arabic  the  con- 
currence of  two  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  is  regularly  obviated 
by  prefixing  \,    Comp.  Greek  x^^V,  ^X^k- 


78  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  53 

2.  The  first  of  the  concurrent  consonants,  if  it  has  a 
comparatively  feeble  sound,  is  sometimes  dropped. 

a.  This  occurs  regularly  in  verbs  whose  first  radical  is  "^  or  D,  and  in 
nouns  derived  from  such  verbs,  e.g.  2";:  foraL'i,  ni?n  for  nH"^,  bl3  for  h^b."^, 
•,n  for  ')ri3,  ^r\  Ezek.  2:  10  for  'h:,  b^rn  Ezek.  I:  4  for  bipn:,  and  perhaps 
1X3  Am.  8 :  8  for  "IS-is. 

N  is  thus  diopped  in  T.n  for  i:n2X,  Ta  for  "il*X;  also  in  a  few  instances 
from  the  beginning  of  the  second  syllable  of  -words,  e.  g.  V|"!2X1  Ezek.  28:  16 
for  V^-iasxT;  ■,">Ti<  Job  32:  11  for  'pTXX;  D'^^^lSn  Eccl.  4:  14  for  D-iniOxn; 
n'^isnn  2  Chron.  22:  5  for  t2"^53nxn ;  rnv^  Ezek.  20:  37  for  n-^DX^ ;  nVs? 
1  Kin.  5:  25  with  Daghesh-foite  conservative  for  r5i;X"3;  2nx  Prov.  8:  17 
for  2nxx;  'pip  Prov.  17:  4  for  'fixx!;  T^rV^  1  Sam.  1:  Hfor  "Bxd.  The.se 
examples  likewise  admit  of  a  different  explanation;  X  may  give  up  its  con- 
sonantal power,  losing  its  sound  in  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  agreeably 
to  §  67.  2  (2),  after  which  it  may  readily  be  dropped  altogether. 

a  is  occasional!}'  dropped  from  the  participles  of  the  Pual  or  fourth 
conjugation,  as  tifss  for  nfrbia;  b  in  np  for  ri|55;  n  in  nhb  Ex.  3:  2  for  nhnb; 
cn^;:^  Ex.  7:  22  for  Dn-i^nb  Ex.  7:  11;  and  perhaps  3  in  nriTO  Gen.  49:  11, 
which  appears  to  be  for  nri1D3. 

b.  The  rejection  of  a  consonant  from  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  when 
not  immediately  followed  by  another  consonant,  is  exceptional;  as  '^S  Jiidg. 
9:  11  for  T^'J;  nr.n  2  Sam.  22:  41  for  nr,ri3;  in  Ezek.  33:  30  for  *inX; 
r^'fern  Neh.  3:  13  for  n-iis-rxri;  "n^-irin  Judg.  9:  9  for  "'nbnnnn,  and  per- 
haps 2TJ  Jer.  42:  10,  which  seems  to  be  for  2'iij\ 

3.  The  second  consonant  is  sometimes  dropped,  if  it 
is  a  letter  of  feeble  sound. 

a.  This  is  regularly  the  case  with  n  of  the  article  and  of  verbal  pre- 
fixes, and  "^  as  the  final  radical  of  verbs,  e.  g.  JT^S^  for  n'^?!!'^;  ^^15"  for 
b-jpn"  ;   6j  for  rV5. 

It  occurs  besides  in  a  few  sporadic  examples  with  these  same  letters, 
and  more  rarely  still  with  X,  \  and  r,  e.  g.  IT  for  IT}'',  "^3  Ezek.  2:10  fur 
•'ilJ,  :;S':3'i">  for  L:E'iin";,  ^s'ilip"^  and  >ir*'i-P  with  Daghesh-forte  conservative 
for  inDVjp"?  and  '^innp-jp;  !|ri?1  Lam.  3:  53  for  ni:*!,  T(3'i"in  Gen.  3:  16  for 
r^ii-.H;  n:B2T?  Job  35:  11  for  "rssxp,  d-^fen  Ex.  26:  24  for  D'^BXn,  brP  Isa. 
13:  20  for  ^nX"],  "^jhm  2  Sam  22:  40  for  ^ibl^^^f:'!';  "^^  Isa.  3:  24  for  "ilS,  ""S 
for  "'ly,  D"'Q"'  for  Q''^i";;  "3  as  a  particle  of  entreaty,  probably  for  "^r^,  nprJ 
Am.  8:8  (K'thibh)  for  nvprS;  Sa  the  name  of  a  Babylonish  deity  for  b?3 
is  a  foreign  contraction.  The  conjecture  that  iia  Mic.  1:  10  is  for  iss'Il  in 
Accho  is  ingenious  and  favoured  by  the  occurrence  of  nS3  in  Gath  in  the 
parallel  clause;  but  it  is  at  variance  with  the  points,  which,  upon  this  hypo- 
thesis, should  be  133. 

b.  In  rare  cases  this  rejection  occurs  even  after  a  mixed  syllable,  whosa 
final  consonant  is  thus  drawn  forward,   e.  g.  n^X  for  Mn":x,   nr:n  Job  29:  9 


§  54  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  79 

for  nx^n,  ^ann  Ex.  2 :  4  for  ak:'nn  and  probably  p6x  Ps.  139:  8  with  Daghesli- 
forte  conservative  for  p?CN. 

§  54.  When  the  concurrence  takes  place  at  the  close 
of  a  syllable,  whether  the  second  consonant  belongs  to 
the  same  syllable  with  the  first  as  at  the  end  of  words, 
or  to  a  different  syllable  as  in  the  middle  of  words,  the 
following  changes  may  be  produced. 

1.  An  aspirate  following  another  consonant  loses  its 
aspiration,  §  21;  or  if  it  be  brought  into  juxtaposition 
with  its  like  so  as  to  form  a  doubled  letter,  the  aspiration 
of  both  will  be  removed,  §  23.2,  unless  the  combination 
occurs  at  the  end  of  a  word,  where  the  reduphcation  is 
not  expressed,  §  25.  Thus,  irp2  for  rrib,  WhTiTl  for  Cbnriri, 
"|r-;nb  for  '^i'O^^,,  but  zn  from  ni'^,  n^irp  l  Kin.  1:  15  for 
r^D^t'Q  or  rin^^r'j,  Tcnq  Ezek.  4: 3  for  nnin;;,  nnup^a  Mai. 
1:  14  for  r,nn"j:*j. 

2.  The  first  of  two  concurring  consonants  is  in  certain 
cases  assimilated  to  the  second,  the  doubhng  thus  oc- 
casioned being  expressed  as  in  the  case  of  letters  origin- 
ally alike  by  Daghesh-forte,  except  at  the  end  of  words, 
§  25,  where  Daghesh  disappears  or  is  only  virtually  pre- 
sent, being  resumed  upon  the  addition  of  a  fresh  vowel 
or  syllable.  This  is  most  frequently  the  case  with  the 
liquid  D,  rarely  with  b  and  i  and  only  in  particular 
words;  so  n  of  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  before  l  and  t:, 
and  in  a  few  instances  before  sibilant  and  other  letters, 
and  1  at  the  end  of  a  few  words  before  r^.  Thus,  'ri^ 
for  •n;':,  t^r\'2  for  n:ri3^;  nj^-;  for  n^b-;,  nb  Ezek.  27:  23 
for  Mib3  Am.  6:  2 ;"  ^fii  for  ^b  n^S;';  ^k^T.  for  ^^53"^^:, 
xist?:  for  x^t:n';,  ^3-Tri"for  ^sinn,  obiTSn  for  Dbiirnr, 
^i^Sj"  for  "isn:nn,  riDsn  for  nosrin;  nb  for  nib,  nns 
for  nn-i^. 

a.  So  perhaps  3  in  life's  according  to  Gesenius  for  iiD30  and  DO  for 
pDp.  Compare  Greek  arjyysv/jc  for  awysvy/g,  TSTUfifiai  for  Tsrvir/xai,  and  Eng 
il-logical,  ir-religion,  im-niature  formed  by  the  negative  prefix  in. 


80  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  5r> 

3.  A  few  isolated  cases  occur  of  the  reverse  process 
Diore  common  in  Biblical  Aramseic  and  Syriac,  by  which  a 
doubled  letter  is  resolved  into  two  different  consonants  by 
the  change  of  the  first  or  the  second  member  of  the  redupli- 
cation to  a  liquid  "i  or  3,  e.  g.  -il*!:^-  for  ^^^2,  p'^'2'^:l  for 
p'i'iai,  rri'TZ  Isa.  23:  11  for  rrt'i2,  ±:p  Job  18:  2  in  the 
judgment  of  some  for  "-ip  euds,  though  others  make  the 
3  a  radical,  and  give  the  word  the  sense  of  snares.  The 
conjecture  that  ^D'ln  Ps.  64:  7,  Lam.  3:  22  is  for  ^^ri  is 
unnecessary  and  unwarranted. 

4.  When  n  of  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  would  stand  be- 
fore a  sibilant,  it  is  transposed  with  0  and  123,  and  with  2 
it  is  in  addition  changed  to  t:.    Thus,  ^t.PZ'Z  for  "^riwr^^, 

"iar.is:  for  "i3"dP':,  ^?r'^':  for  v-^n:,  pr^:::  for  pi::nD. 

a.  In  rtiwbviJrn  Jer.  49:  3  the  transposition  does  not  take  place  in  con- 
sequence of  the  number  of  similar  letters  •which  -would  thus  be  brough' 
into  proximity.  In  the  cognate  languages  n  is  likewise  transposed  with  t 
and  changed  to  T:  thus,  Aram.  "iSiTn  for  "*2Trri;  so,  also,  in  Sj-riac  and 
Arabic.  The  only  example  of  a  Hebrew  verb  Avhose  first  letter  is  7  appearing 
in  this  conjugation  is  IZTIi  Isa.  1:16,  where  n  is  assimilated  agreeably  to  2. 
Compare  with  these  transpositions  the  frequent  Doric  change  of  ^  (=  %7) 
into  ffS,  as  avpiahco  for  avpi'Qa. 

§  55.  The  occurrence  of  a  consonant  at  the  end  of  a 
word  may,  inasmuch  as  the  succeeding  word  must  ne- 
cessarily begin  with  one,  be  regarded  as  an  additional 
case  of  the  concurrence  of  consonants.  As  the  contact  is 
less  close,  however,  than  when  they  meet  in  the  same 
word,  it  is  less  fruitful  of  changes  than  in  the  cases  al- 
ready considered. 

1.  There  are  three  instances  in  which  it  has  been 
doubtfully  conjectured  that  a  final  "|  has  been  assimilated 
to  a  following  initial  "-;  viz.  C'T'^S']  Isa.  35:  1  presumed  to 
be  for  -Vi:-^-;  ur-p.  Num.  3:  49  for  "|V-D  Ex.  21:  30,  Ps. 
49:  9;  niz  Gen.  28:  12. 

a.  Final  consonants  are  in  Sanskrit  perpetually  modified  by  the  initial 
letter  of  the  following  word.    But  it  is  by  no  means  clear  that  this  is  so  in 


§  56  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  81 

Hebrew,  even  in  the  examples  alleged,  as  the  fcnns  admit  of  a  different 
explanation.  See  in  regard  to  the  first  passage,  Dr.  Alexander's  Com- 
mentary. 

2.  A  few  cases  occur  of  the  rejection  of  a  letter,  chiefly 
1  and  □,  from  the  end  of  a  word. 

a.  )  of  the  verbal  endings  'fl  and  "p.  is  almost  always  dropped,  being 
only  retained  as  an  archaic  or  emphatic  form,  and  chiefly  at  the  end  of  a 
clause,  e.  g.  '^rh^  Deut.  8:  16,  but  mostly  ^in^^;  "i^'iznri  Gen.  32:  20,  com- 
monly 'I'ia'iri;  'p'bvy^  Ruth  3:  4,  commonly  '''bvr\.  So,  too,  in  some  proper 
nouns,  "Ti^?  Zech.  12:  11,  'i^S'3  Josh.  12:21;  iBi'^y,  whose  original  "i  is  shown 
in  the  derivative  ■^3'ii''^3  and  is  perpetuated  in  the  modern  name  Seilun. 

h.  In  like  manner  d  is  rejected  from  the  dual  and  plural  terminations 
of  nouns  upon  their  entering  into  the  close  connection  of  the  construct 
state  with  the  following  word.  "DTX  from  D'^iTX,  "'riB  from  D'^ri3. 

c.  If  the  feminine  endings  n_  and  n  have,  as  is  probable,  a  common 
origin,  this  may  be  best  explained  by  the  assumption  that  r,  is  in  many 
cases  rejected  from  the  termination,  leaving  only  the  voAvel,  though  it  is 
always  retained  when  any  addition  is  made  to  the  word :  thus,  the  con- 
struct state  rirsri,  absolute  nisn,  but  Avith  a  suffix  ■'i-::n;  f^i^^  (comp. 
r^TX  Deut.  32:  36),  "'Jrpiip.  It  is  to  be  observed  here,  that  this  phenomenon 
does  not  establish  the  possibility  of  an  interchange  between  the  consonants 
n  and  n,  because  tl  in  this  case  represents  not  h  but  the  vowel  d. 

§  56.  A  few  other  changes  remain  to  be  mentioned 
which  are  due  to  special  causes. 

1.  ISTun  is  often  inserted  in  certain  forms  of  verbal 
suffixes  to  prevent  the  hiatus  between  two  vowels,  ^r»D^3>'_'^ 
Jer.  5:  22,  or  §  53.  3.  a  ^I^nr  Isa.  33:  21  for  ^rnn?,':, 
^n.b^hst  Ex.  15:  2  for  ^H'^^hj;!,.  Comp.  Gr.  dvoaiog  and 
the  EngHsh  indefinite  article  an. 

2.  Vav  at  the  beginning  of  words  is  changed  to  ■•, 
e.  g.  lii^  for  1?^,  -V  for  ibl,  bbp";  for  bbpl.  The  only  ex- 
ceptions are  the  four  words  11,  "^Tl  Prov.  21:  8,  "bl  Gen. 
11:  30,  -ibi  2  Sam.  6:  23  (K'ri),  and  the  prefixes  Vav 
Conjunctive  and  Vav  Conversive. 

3.  Vav,  though  capable  of  being  reduplicated,  e.  g 
li^li^  is  in  most  instances  relieved  from  this  necessity  by 
the  substitution  of  '^,  or  by  doubling  the  following  letter 
in  its  stead,  e.  g.  D^.p^5  or  Dbip5<  for  Dips;. 


82  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  57 

a.  In  one  instance  after  such  a  change  of  1  to  *',  a  following  "^  suffer? 
the  contrary  change  to  1  to  prevent  the  triple  recurrence  of  the  same 
letter,  Til'lJ*  Isa.  16:  9  for  Tiinx. 

4.  Yodh  before  the  plural  termination  D^_  is  in  a  few 
cases  changed  to  &<  to  prevent  the  conjunction  of  like 
sounds,  n-N^bn  Hos.  11:  7  for  D^^bn  Josh.  10:  26;  D^Jiii:: 
Hos.  11:  8  for  U^h^  Gen.  10:  19;  U'ir-.'^  from  --^"n;  D\SZS 
(also  mis:::)  for  0^^2'2;  "i^ibn  Jer.  38:  12  for  ^jbs  (or  as 
some  read,  "'ib^)  ver.  11. 

a.  In  like  manner  1  is  changed  to  X  before  ni  in  the  word  n'X3  for 
ril3  from  !Ti3;  it  is  consequently  unnecessary  to  assume,  as  Gesenius  does, 
a  singular  tiXJ  Avhich  never  occurs. 

Change  of  Consonants  to  Vowels. 

§  57.  The  second  class  of  changes  is  the  conversion 
of  consonants  into  vowels,  or  the  substitution  of  the 
latter  for  the  former.    This  occurs, 

1.  Occasionally  in  reduplicated  syllables  or  letters, 
-5i3  for  n32r;  niit^it:  for  nii-Jii:;  bns  for  biibui  Gen. 
11:  9;  n-inb:^'  2  Chron.  35:  13  from  nrb::  Prov.  19:  24. 

2.  Much  more  frequently  with  the  quiescents. 

(1)  A  prefixed  1  is  softened  to  its  homogeneous  vowel 
u  before  other  labials  or  vowelless  letters,  e.  g.  r\^b.\  "'i"^ ; 
the  softening  of  an  initial  "^  to  z  only  occurs  in  ""iJ'S! 
1  Chron.  2:  13  for  "ir:  ver.  12,  ^"X  2  Sam.  14:  19,  Mic. 
6:  10  for  iL\ 

(2)  Medial  or  final  quiescents  without  vowels  of  theii* 
own  often  lose  their  sound  in  that  of  a  preceding  vowel. 
This  is  invariably  the  case  with  1  and  "'  following  their 
homogeneous  vowels,  e.  g.  nn^in  for  Tiin  §  59,  Tn^n^Iifor 
ni^n'in,  unless  they  are  doubled,  as  "'i^'lt],  H-iJi,  and  oc- 
casionally even  then,  e.  g.  ^tj^7:]  for  ''t?'!'^.  Final  X  always, 
and  medial  J^  frequently,  gives  up  its  consonant  sound 
after  any  vowel  whatever,  e.  g.  si;"^,  ^22^5  l^^^^  for  f^ii^il^. 


§   57  CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS  TO  VOWELS.  83 

a.  Medial  S^  regxilarly  loses  its  consonantal  power  in  the  future  Kal  of 
Pe  Aleph  verlis,  e.  g.  ^r^"';  in  "itoX  preceded  by  b,  thus  "liix]?;  in  a"v'-!!< 
and  certain  forms  of  "p'lX  preceded  by  the  prefixes  ^  b  3  1,  thus,  U'^nbxb, 
'ri'bxb  but  ni'iN^;  '^inx?,  riSsb,  "linx?  but  Tiisb,  "^inxb,  ^iS'^nxK  The  follow- 
ing examples  are  of  a  more  individual  character,  e.  g.  msD  for  mX3,  tnij."Xl 
1  Kin.  11:  39  for  nb'XI,  ripSOxn  Num.  11:  4,  D"^iT)TX3  Jer.  40:  1,  n-n.x-L;x-J 
Isa.  14:  23.  In  a  few  cases  this  has  led  to  a  change  of  orthography,  the  X 
which  is  no  longer  heard  being  dropped,  or  another  vowel  letter  substituted 
for  it,  e.  g.  !l33'i"' Ezek.  42:  5,  and  birix  Hos.  11:  4  from  bjx,  vij''"?  Job  8 :  8 
for  'pCX"!,  ^Tt  Deut.  32 :  32  for  irx'i,  and  the  examples  cited  §  53.  2,  a. 

b.  The  consonant  n  never  loses  its  sound  in  that  of  a  preceding  vowel 
like  the  rest  of  the  quiescents.  The  letter  n  is  often  used  to  denote  a  vowel, 
but  if  in  any  word  it  properly  expresses  a  "consonant  this  is  never  converted 
into  a  vowel,  or  vice  versa.  The  exceptions  are  apparent  not  real,  as  in  the 
frequent  abbreviation  of  the  ending  >in^  in  proper  names  to  >T^,  thus  in'p'n, 
iTpiri.  The  change  here  does  not  consist  in  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  1 
and  the  softening  of  the  consonant  n,  but  the  syllable  'nil  is  dropped,  where- 
upon final  Kaniets  is  written  by  its  appropriate  vowel  letter,  §  11.  1,  a,  just 
as  ^ifi^Dia  after  the  reiection  of  IfT'  becomes  tiD'i'D.   So  in  those  rare  cases  in 

T  T        !■  *'  T  T         • 

which  n  is  substituted  for  the  suffix  M,  e.  g.  t^^"b  Lev.  13:  4  for  ft'iyj. 
The  proper  name  'Xrins  Num.  34:  28  is  derived  not  from  tin^  but  rriD,  a 
root  of  kindred  meaning,  of  whose  existence,  though  otherwise  unattested, 
this  word  is  itself  a  sufficient  voucher. 

(3)  Medial  &^  often  gives  its  vowel  to  a  preceding 
vowelless  letter  and  rests  in  its  sound;  "'  occasionally 
does  the  same  with  a  homogeneous  vowel,  w^hen  preceded 
by  a  vowelless  prefix.  , 

a.  Thus,  K:  Q-^t-XI  for  Ci"'i'X-i,  mhn  for  ri<-jn;  n'JXTiJ  Ezek.  25:  6  from 
i:5<^  ver.  1  ;  &i^'>y;  Ps.  139:  20  fur  !lXw3,  so  !:<!i::r  Jer.  10:  5;  ^Sn^lXI  from 
"ibx"!;  CJini:^  ^'eh.  6:  8  for  ck^in;  Nin  Isa.  51  :  20,  ixn  Deut.  14:  5;  D-iXan 
1  Sam.  14:  33  for  fX-JP;  "i"'25<3  Isa.  10:  13  for  "I'lSNSi;  "la^'XI  Zech.  11:  5 
for  "Tr"X1 ;  this  even  occurs  after  mixed  syllables,  e.  g.  nixbo  for  rtixlpo; 
■j"N3^  for  yx:^;  rxnplj  for  J^it'^i:?!?,  particularly  in  proper  nouns  bxr^C';;";  for 
bkyriii":,  K\|;-in  for  ^xr^r.  So,'i:'-|inn'^3  Eccles.  2:  13  for  Tinn-^S;  rilpil  Jer. 
25:  36  for  rB^-i;  rn^)"'?  Prov.  30:  17  for  rn:?^^  There  is  no  instance  of 
this  Avith  1,  on  the  contrary,  tri^lip  Cant.  5:  2,  12. 

(4)  At  the  end  of  words  1  and  '',  when  without  a 
vowel  of  their  own  and  preceded  by  a  vowelless  letter, 
invariably  quiesce  in  their  homogeneous  vowels,  1  in  an 
unaccented  «,  "  in  7,  which  draws  the  accent  upon  itself 
and  frequently  causes  the  dissolution  of  a  previous  syl- 
lable and  the  rejection  of  its  vowel,  ^nd  for  "IHS,  ^riFlU:^ 
for  "iriniT^;  ^f-r  for  "1^,  ^ns  for  "ns?,  ^b^,  for  '^^2'!. 


84  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  58 

(5)  When  preceded  or  accompanied  by  heterogeneous 
vowels,  1  and  "^  are  sometimes  dropped,  or  if  the  vowel 
be  a,  they  not  mifrequently  combine  with  it,  forming  the 
diphthongal  o  and  e,  §  62.  1,  e.  g.  pk^H  for  pii'H,  nbs 

for  ■'"b:',  rb^  for  ^53,  Dp  for  Dip,  D'l^n  for  D^ipn,  H'J  for 

nia;  n'iDin  for  u'irin,  trrrj  forui'^D,  r&a  construct  state 
of  ni!a,  n^3  const,  of  n';n,  b^b^-  for  b^Vn,  nb:  for  'yj\ 

a.  Vav  rarely  remains  with  a  lieterogeneoua  vowel  unless  accompanied 
by  weak  letters,  by  contrast  -with  which  it  becomes  comparatively  strong, 
e.  g.  nin,  -lb',  nin. 

YowEL  Changes. 

§  58.  1.  The  third  class  of  changes  embraces  those 
which  take  place  in  the  vowels.  The  primary  office  of 
the  vowels  is  to  aid  in  pronouncing  the  consonants,  to 
which  consequently  they  are  quite  subordinate,  merely 
occupying,  so  to  speak,  the  mterstices  between  them. 
Their  number  and  variety  being  greater,  however,  than 
is  demanded  for  this  single  purpose,  they  have  besides 
to  a  certain  extent  an  independent  value  and  meaning  of 
their  own  in  the  constitution  of  words.  (1)  Changes  of 
vowels,  while  they  cannot  like  a  difference  of  consonants 
create  distinct  verbal  roots,  are  yet  fruitful  of  those 
minor  modifications  of  which  etymology  takes  cognizance, 
such  as  the  formation  of  derivatives  and  grammatical  in- 
flexions, e.  g.  bi^  to  he  great,  b"-i  greatness,  bii3  great;  bbp 
he  killed,  bibp  to  kill,  blip  kill  thou,  bbp  killiug,  b^bp 
killed;  C^D  a  horse,  mC'O  a  mare.  (2)  They  may  indicate 
differences  in  the  forms  of  words  which  have  arisen  in 
the  lapse  of  time;  ^71:  in  the  Pentateuch  means  indifferently 
girl  or  hoy,  in  later  books  girl  is  rnyS;  Sin  in  the  Penta- 
teuch he  or  she,  in  other  books  she  is  always  iiTl;  the 
form  of  the  domonstrative  riTbri  is  found  only  in  Genesis, 
Tbn  in  writers  after  the  time  of  Moses,  iTbn  in  Pjzekiel; 


§  58  VOWEL  CHANGES.  85 

the  plural  of  the  demonstrative  in  the  Pentateuch  bi^  or 
f\hk,  elsewhere,  with  a  single  exception,  nVik.  The  im- 
perfect notation  of  the  vowels  in  the  original  mode  of 
writing  by  letters  alone  has,  however,  left  us  without 
the  means  of  ascertaining  to  what  extent  such  changes 
may  have  taken  place.  (3)  They  may  indicate  diversity 
of  dialect,  e.  g.  bb])  to  kill,  Aram.  bt:p,  Syr.  ^^4^,   Arab. 

JJg,  Ethiop.  *tA:. 

2.  The  vowel  changes  with  which  orthography  is 
concerned,  on  the  other  hand,  are  purely  euphonic,  being 
in  themselves  void  of  significance,  and  springing  solely 
from  the  natural  preference  for  what  is  easier  of  utter- 
ance or  more  agreeable  to  the  ear.  OrthographicaUy 
considered,  vowels  are  either  mutable  or  immutable,  the 
latter  being  unaffected  by  those  circumstances  which 
occasion  changes  in  the  former.  A  vowel  may  be  im- 
mutable by  nature,  or  made  so  by  position.  A  short 
vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  before  the  accent  is  ordinarily 
immutable  by  position,  being  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
common  causes  of  mutation,  e.  g.  "^i^Tr?  ^t^^">^r-  Long 
vowels  are  immutable  by  nature  in  certain  words  or 
classes  of  words;  but  they  are  only  distinguishable  as 
such  by  a  knowledge  of  the  etymological  forms  which 
require  them.  It  may,  however,  be  observed,  as  a  general 
though  -not  an  invariable  rule,  that  the  vowels  of  such 
words  and  forms  as  are  prevailingly  written  with  the 
vowel  letters  are  less  liable  to  mutation  than  those  which 
are  prevailingly  written  without  them.  Mutable  vowels 
are  hable  to  changes  both  of  quantity,  from  long  to  short, 
and  the  reverse,  and  of  quality  from  pure  to  mixed  (w  to 
0,  i  to  e,  a  to  e)  and  the  reverse,  these  changes  being 
confined,  except  in  rare  instances,  to  the  cognate  forms; 
thus,  i  never  passes  into  u  or  o,  nor  these  into  a.  Only 
as  e  stands  in  relation  to  both  i  and  a,  it  serves  to  mediate 


86  OKTHOGEAPHT.  §  59,  60 

the  interval  "between  them,  and  thus  accounts  for  the 
occasional  changes  of  i  to  a  or  the  reverse,  e.  g.  b't^pr:, 
nbiipH;  r3  for  n:in,  -ris;  D^,  dDwI  comp.  T,  niD■i^ 

a.  The  exceptional  change  from  u  or  o  to  e  occurs  only  in  the  pro- 
nouns, e.  t'.  CP}b:^p,  before  suffixes  ^rib:j;r;  and  in  the  particle  rx,  before 
suffixes  rx.  There  are  also  a  few  examples  of  the  change  of  short 
vowels  in  mixed  syllables  before  the  accent,  e.  g.  ""133")?,  construct  r?2-."2, 
plural  r.'hx-p. 

§  59.  The  mutations  of  vowels  are  due  to  one  or 
other  of  the  following  causes,  viz.:  1.  Syllabic  changes. 
2.  The  influence  of  consonants.  3.  The  influence  of  vowels. 
4.  The  accent.  5.  The  shortening  or  lengthening  of  words. 
As  the  vowel  of  unaccented  mixed  syllables  is  always 
short,  and  that  of  simple  syllables  long,  §  18.  2,  it  is 
evident  that  a  change  in  the  character  of  a  syllable  will 
involve  a  corresponding  change  in  its  vowel,  unless  the 
accent  interfere  to  prevent.  Accordingly,  when  for  any 
cause  a  mixed  syllable  becomes  simple,  its  short  vowel 
will  be  converted  into  a  long  one;  and  when  a  simple 
syllable  becomes  mixed,  the  reverse  change  will  take 
place,  e.  g.  ^T],  D"in;  M^jb,  7\'2p^.  In  the  case  of  the  vowels 
i  and  u  there  is  frequently  an  additional  change  of  quahty, 
viz.,  of  2  to  e  and  u  to  o,  e.  g.  D^jbn  for  D'^ipH;  "jiis  for  "lilS 
in  place  of  -,^3  §  56.  3. 

a.  Daghesh-forte  is  thus  resolved  by  the  prolongation  of  the  previous 
vowel  in  t',Tzp^,  "'^"i^^TT;  "^'k^,  ^'??'^3;  "'i'r'!],  "''^^-~;  c'^i-ii'3,  n"';i-i"-D;  ',pr, 
•ip^n;  C^i-1"'  Eccles.  9:  12  for  Q"'i';5;T3  §  53.  2.  a;  "'ipsrr'  f"i'  ^''^7'^'^F};  ^^T? 
Lam.  1:8,  if  this  is  for  iTi3  see  ver.  17;  and  if  the  conjecture  of  Gesenius 
(Thesaurus,  p.  483)  be  correct  as  to  the  true  reading  in  1  Chrou.  23:  6, 
24:  3  t|b;m  for  ti^rr-]. 

§  60.  Contiguous  consonants  may  give  rise  to  vowel 
changes  by  their  individual  peculiarities,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  gutturals,  or  by  their  concurrence.  The  peculi- 
arities of  the  gutturals  are  fourfold,  viz.: 

1.  A  preference  for  the  vowel  Pattahh  of  the  same 
organ,  into  which,  consequently,  a  preceding  or  accom- 


§  60  VOWEL  CHANGES.  87 

panying  vowel  is  frequently  converted,  e.  g.  nbiij  for 

nbir;  D?s  for  Dss;  nsj";  for  ri±sy,  yiair  for  >'i2^;  rjsp.ifl 
fi'om  siir. 

a.  The  instances  in  which  this  permutation  occurs  cannot  easily  be 
embraced  under  any  general  rules.  In  some  cases  it  was  optional;  in  others, 
usage  decides  for  it  or  against  it  •without,  however,  being  absolutely  uni- 
form. The  following  statements  embrace  what  is  of  most  importance. 
(1)  The  stability  of  the  vowel  often  depends  upon  the  weight  attached  to 
it  in  the  etymological  form;  thus,  "^'3  in  the  imperative  but  not  in  the  in- 
finitive for  yt'i;  V^-^-]  for  "h^l,  but  vb::  not  sh'JJ  for  S^m  (2)  The  vowel 
preceding  the  guttural  is  more  liable  to  change  than  that  which  succeeds 
it,  e.  g.  I'h'^l  always,  but  h'y-q']  and  VycT};  ntm  but  ontnl;  ^p"t  but  n'lp^. 
(3)  An  accented  vowel  is  sometimes  retained  where  one  unaccented  would 
suffer  change,  e.  g.  ^IDn"^  but  "Jj'Ji ;  iri'1;  tti^.  (4)  0  and  u  are  less  subject 
to  alteration  than  i  and  e,  e.  g.  ^?S  for  ^S'fi;  d  which  is  already  cognate 
with  the  gutturals  is  mostly  retained,  though  it  occasionally  becomes  a 
before  n,  e.  g.  D'^nX  from  tix,  "^H^^^  Job  31:24  (in  most  copies)  from  T'l^Z'Q, 
"nTZ"]  from  nri53\  (5)  X  in  many  cases  prefers  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  and 
0,  thus  ^tipX,  T'i^ilr?,  j^<i?'2r',  ^DX":  but  Wnpx;;;  xh^,  bp5<\  (6)  "i  partakes 
of  this  preference  for  a  to  a  Lmited  extent,  e.  g.  'lO'^l  for  "i&'^l  or  "it3''l; 
K'i:^1  from  flN-i\ 

2.  The  reception  of  Pattalih  furtive,  §  17,  at  the  end 
of  a  word  after  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  (i.  e.  any 
other  than  a),  or  before  a  vowelless  final  consonant,  e.  g. 

T\,  rt-ii::,  rib',  n^r,  rji;. 

a.  This  is  necessary  when  the  vowel  preceding  a  final  guttural  cannot 
be  converted  into  Pattahli.  Sometimes  the  form  with  Pattalih  and  that  with 
Pattahh  furtive  occur  interchangeably,  e.  g.  TJi'd'?  and  H^'IJ^,  or  with  a 
slight  distinction,  as  nri'X,  in  pause  tri^TaX;  r;sf?i  construct  HaTO.  In  a 
few  instances  a  guttural  preceding  a  final  vowelless  letter  takes  simple 
Sli'va  instead  of  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g.  Pr^b  1  Kin.  14:  3,  and  in  most 
editions  Ptis^U  Jer.  13:  25.  As  final  X  is  always  either  quiescent  or  otiant, 
it  never  receives  Pntfahh  furtive.  The  letter  1  never  takes  it  unless  it  be 
in  a  single  instance,  and  that  in  a  penultimate  syllable  tfi'l}^_  Ps,  7:  6,  which 
is  probably  to  be  read  yi'''rdnph;  though  it  might  be  ^vononnceA.  yiraddoph, 
which  some  conceive  to  be  an  anomalous  form  for  Cj'i^'],  after  the  analogy 
of  yT}-^.'^^  Oen.  21:  6,  the  compound  Sh'va  being  lengthened  into  a  vowel 
followed  by  euphonic  Daghesh,  as  in  the  related  words  IT^^iari  Isa.  1:  6, 
and  ilSan  Isa.  53:  5,  while  others  adopt  the  explanation  of  the  old  Jewish 
Grammarians,  that  it  is  a  peculiar  combination  of  the  Kal  vj'i'}'^  and  the 
Piel  Cl^^";. 

3.  A  preference  for  compound  rather  than  simple 
ShVa,  §  16.  3,  whether  silent  or  vocal,  inasmuch  as  the 


88  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  60 

gutturals  are  more  readily  made  audible  at  the  beginning 
than  at  the  close  of  a  syllable,  and  the  hiatus  accompany- 
ing them  assumes  more  of  the  complexion  of  a  vowel 
than  is  usual  with  stronger  consonants. 

a.  The  gutturals  occasionally  retain  simple  Sh'va  when  silent.  This 
is  regulaily  done  by  a  final  radical  H,  n  or  5,  followed  by  a  servile  letter, 
e.  g.  nnhj,  sijy'i'',  onrni,  trr'a-ra  "inns-j^ ,  with  few  exceptions  as  tmvi^ 
Hos.  8:  2,  ^^3?5?  Gen.  26:  29,  Mzyirin  2  Sam.  21  :  6.  Other  cases  have 
more  of  a  casual  or  sporadic  character,  and  occur  chiefly  with  the  stronger 
gutturals  n  and  n,  nin;;,  "fens,  T^'ir^,  ^i^nri,  T£-n^r>-i,  rih':::!^  bat  nirj-'a, 
xi'ZT'ri  but  ViTrn"^,  nlirs  a  passessmi,  but  n;ri  from  bni  (I  brook:  more 
rarely  with  N  and  r,  t?r3  Lev.  4:  13,  xJ"Z  1  Kin.  15:  16,  ^'VZ  Isa.  11:  15, 
n"^rr  Dent.  25:  7  but  in  pause  :iT;""^^  Isa.  28:  6,  "^n^XJ  Ex.  15:  6;  "i  has  for 
the  most  part  simple  Sh'va  nih"!,  C"1'73"',  though  iu  a  few  instances  it  has 
compound  'ib'^2,  inpTia'il. 

h.  (l)  Among  the  compound  Sh'vas  the  preference,  unless  there  is  some 
reason  for  choosing  another,  is  ordinarily  given  to  Hhateph  Pattahh,  as 
the  simplest  and  most  in  accordance  with  the  nature  of  the  gutturals,  and 
to  this  an  antecedent  Hhirik,  when  unessential  to  the  form,  is  commonly 
made  to  correspond,  e.  g.  lr",  "^hv^  for  "ibr\  Sometimes,  particulaily  with 
!!<  (see  1.  a.  6.)  Hhateph  Segliol  is  taken  r^3^X,  t^i'lOX,  iTiTN,  rix,  "lix, 
Dinx,  ^Tpy^,  t-lis,  wir,  -^n^;  Joel  2:  5,  "siinx-;  Jer.  13:  21,'^ which  not  in- 
frequently becomes  Hhateph  Pattahh  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  word 
Vt^'  """"^^  Prov.  25:  7,  I'nriX,  '■•b^^X,  ^nstrnxi  Judg.  lO:  2,  or  the  carrying 
forward  of  its  accent  ^n'laxn,  '^in'inxn'i,  "'H^'^nn,  "'n'a'^rni, 

(2)  If,  however,  t  or  o,  characteristic  of  the  form,  precede,  this  commonly 
determines  the  Sh'va  to  be  selected,  e.  g.  l^i^n  for  ^"'32"^,  I^V^  fo>'  "■■?""'» 
"ifce  for  ■'^ys;  though  sometimes  Hhateph  Pattahh  is  retained  and  the 
intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3,  resolved  into  a  simple  one  by  prolonging  the 
vowels,  e.  g.  P!"^^"!^  Josh.  7:  7,  n'i^H,  feb  Isa.  1:  31.  Hhirik  may,  how- 
ever, remain  short,  e.  g.  Tj^nPl,  yr^w;,  ^'iniy  Job  6:  22,  particularly  if  a 
Daghesh-forte  has  been  omitted  from  the  guttural,  e.  g.  rtEN3  Jer.  3:  8, 
though  even  in  this  case  the  assimilation  sometimes  takes  place,  e.  g. 
^iin-;  Gen.  30:  39  for  ^•2T\\  ^-.nx  Judg.  5:  28  for  ^nnx.  If  a  vowel  has  been 
rejected  from  the  form,  the  corresi)onding  Hhateph  is  generally  preferred, 
e.  g.  C3"^^£S  from  "lEr,  D'^t'"'^'  "'iC:''^^  Ezek.  16:  33,  \s:^  Gen.  16:  13;  ■ii:"'rn 
1  Kin.  13:  20  from  a"'irn;  'ir'^UJn  Gen.  37:  22  from  a-^i'n.  There  are  oc- 
casional instances  of  the  same  word  being  variously  written  in  this  lespect, 
e.  g.  ''i.r^J<  Ruth  3:  15,  ^ifrx  Cant.  2:  15;  ^innxn-i  and  innxn^  Isa.  44:  13; 
^-i::n-2n  Job  16  :  16  (K'ri  iu  some  copies),  ^"i^")?'^  Lam.  1 :  20,  insh  Isa.  52:  14, 
"-xn  1  Sam.  28:  14. 

c.  Before  another  guttural  the  compound  Sh'va  is  fiequently  replaced 
by  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  e.  g.  "ixli  for  ~]?Ni^,  "^nn'rn  for  Vn"'"ri, 
t5T^'!'  for  Br'^nxti;  and  occasionally  under  fi<  by  a  long  vi)wel  before 
other  letters  as  well  as  gutturals,  or  by  a  short  vowel  with  Daghesh,  e.  g. 


§  61         •  VOWEL  CHANGES.  89 

c'^Bnk  for  tD'^Bns,  I'^nh'nij,  wnx  for  djizs,  "litx  for  n-irx,  "sx  for  it3X.  This 
disposition  to  render  the  gutturals  more  audible  by  the  aid  of  a  vowel  is 
further  shown  by  their  attracting;  to  themselves  the  vowel  of  another  letter, 
particularly  in  triliteral  monosj'llables,  e.  g.  "'^'I  for  >n_T  (V^l),  ""4?'^  !?u33, 
-^V'2,  r.np  2  Kin.  12:  9,  UJsa  for  CS3,  1x3,  also  "k^ip  Ex.  2:  20  for  ^'Nnp 
Ruth  1:  20,  ^hnsn  Prov.  1:  22  for  -linXP,  ^!^3:xn  Job  20:  26  9ee§111.2.e", 
d^"0N1  Zech.  7:  14  for  Dnyox^,  and  b}'  their  sometimes  causing  an  ante- 
cedent or  accompaiij'ing  vowel  to  be  reta'ned  where  analogy  would  require 
its  rejection,  e.  g.  "'X'jl'io  for  '^x:ii'3  from  xiiio,  ''k'^n,  ''V'Ji^,  ^nxiJOi  Deut. 

32:  10;  v,yj-o,  ns^'ri. 

4.  An  incapacy  for  being  doubled,  whence  they  never 
receive  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  previous  syllable  thus 
becoming  a  simple  one,  its  vowel  is  generally  lengthened, 
§  59,  a  to  a,  ^  to  e,  w  to  o,  e.  g.  '^k'2  for  "jS/J,  '^k'2  for  '|5<^, 
Tj^i-;  for  Tj^n":,  ■^^J^?,  nim 

a.  Sometimes  an  intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3,  is  formed,  and  the  vowel 

remains  short,  (l)  This  is  commonly  the  case  before  n,  frequently  be- 
fore n,  less  often  before  S,  rarely  before  X,  never  before  1,  e.  g.  dfiS, 
•frj,  inp,  2!yri,  "X3.  (2)  It  is  more  likely  to  occur  in  the  body  of  a  word 
than  after  a  prefix,  e.  g.  "^riVn";  Ps.  119:  43  from  l:n;,  but  phh  Job  38:  24 
from  P^n.  (3)  When  the  guttural  comes  to  stand  at  the  end  of  the  word 
the  short  vowel  is  often  resumed,  e.  g.  "iriFi  Prov.  22:  24  from  fiyirtn,  lyn 
Ps.  141:  8  from  ni^n  but  "lypn  Deut.  2:  9.  There  are  a  very  few  in- 
stances in  which  Daghesh-forte  is  found  in  "i,  e.  g.  "'^^"J  niiS  Ezek.  16:  4, 
r^^  Prov.  14:  10,  "^'f^:;;^  Prov.  15:  1  (in  some  editions),  ''lax'^'j  Cant.  5:  2, 
fee  also  §  24.  b. 

§  61.  The  concurrence  of  consonants  gives  rise  to  the 
following  vowel  changes,  viz.: 

1.  When  two  vowelless  letters  come  together  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable  in  contravention  of  the  law  in 
§  18,  the  impossible  combination  is  relieved  by  giving  to 
the  first  of  them  a  short  vowel.  This,  if  there  be  no  reason 
for  preferring  another,  will  be  the  briefest  of  the  vowels, 
Hhirik,  e.  g.  ^tz'n  for  ^"JI'l,  ^2-3  for  '^2-S,  ^pt^  for  ^pir^. 
If  a  vowel  has  been  omitted  from  the  word,  the  correspond- 
ing short  vowel  is  frequently  employed,  e.  g.  ^ib"'^  for 
•yri  from  T|b:a  (^^^9);  ^i^^  fi^om  r(-:'2;  ^Bnn  from  bzn,  T^^T^I 
for  TjlTTJ  from  ■^^  Or  if  one  of  the  consonants  be  a  gut- 
tural, the  vowel  mostly  conforms  to  the  compound  Sh'va, 


90  OETHOGRArnr.  §  61 

which  it  has  or  might  have,  e.  g.  ^^2V  for  ""i!:?,  ^j^'j^]';'.  for 
^p7r%  •^'br^D  for  ^bnb,  -^bnb  for  isnb,  ?ib:"D  for  Trbrs.  ' 

a.  Vav  before  a  guttural  follows  the  rule  jnst  given;  before  ^,  and 
sometimes  before  n  or  n  followed  by  "i,  it  takes  Hhirik;  before  other 
vowelless  letters  it  gives  up  its  consonant  sound  and  quiesces  in  its  homo- 
geneous vowel  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (1),  thus  "iT^ri,  "^rni,  rm  and  T^,2r}^,  2^1?% 

b.  In  triliteral  monosyllables  or  final  syllables  with  the  vowel  Pattahh, 
the  first  letter  sometimes  receives  an  accented  Segliol,  to  which  the  fol- 
lowing Pattahh  is  then  assimilated,  e.  g.  rirs  for  rrs  construct  of  rps, 
rD5'2"a  for  r:b"20,  the  Seghols  being  liable  to  be  changed  to  Pattahhs  by 
the  presence  of  a  guttural  MiS'lJ'?  f^)'"  ^'j?'-r- 

c.  In  Q??"^^  Gen.  32:  20  for  DrNZi-a  the  vowelless  letters  belong  to 
different  syllables,  and  the  introduction  of  the  new  vowel  makes  it  neces- 
sary to  lengthen  the  one  before  it. 

2.  Although  two  vowelless  letters  are  admissible  at 
the  end  of  a  word,  §  18,  the  harshness  of  the  combination 
is  commonly  relieved  by  the  insertion  of  Seghol,  e.  g.  Z'^\ 
for  jiy^,  mijb  for  riib.  If  either  letter  is  a  guttural,  Pattahh 
is  mostly  used  instead,  e.  g.  r:Ji2,  b'JB,  ""^  If  either  letter 
is  ■',  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hhirik  is  used;  if  the  second 
letter  is  1,  it  will  rest  in  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (4.),  e.  g.  n"3, 
^bs,  ^nn,  but  n^'.b. 

a.  The  only  instances  in  which  two  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  the 
end  of  a  word  are  the  pron.  nx,  the  2  fem.  sing.  pret.  of  verbs  Hri^p,  certain 
jussive  and  Vav  Conversive  forms  of  ri"b  verbs  §§  174.  4,  177.  3,  ppin 
§  153.  2,  the  nouns  'n"i5,  ;:dp  and  forms  with  otiant  Aleph. 

b.  AVhen  the  penultimate  letter  is  <!  or  Ji,  it  in  a  few  instances  takes 
Seghol,  as  ^fj'x,  "fii,  Cr^,  tn'n.  When  the  final  letter  is  N,  it  either  remains 
otiant,  §  16.  I,  or  requires  Seghol,  HVC,  S"^:1,  N""',  N"C;  a  penultimate  N  either 
quiesces  in  the  antecedent  vowel  or  attracts  it  to  itself,  §  60.  3.  c,  PN''',  rxb 
or  rx"^',  '>l'X"i.  The  alternate  mode  of  facilitating  the  pronunciation  of  gut- 
turals before  a  vowelless  letter  at  the  end  of  a  word  by  means  of  Pattahh 
furtive,  has  been  explained  §  60.  2. 

3.  When  the  same  letter  is  repeated  with  or  without 
a  mutable  vowel  intervening,  there  is  often  a  contraction 
into  one  doubled  letter,  and  the  vowel  is  rejected  or 
thrown  back  upon  the  preceding  consonant,  e.  g.  ^SD";  for 

^hzS";,  jD^  for  2hp"  (Daghesh-forte  disappearing  at  the 
end  of  the  woid),  nb  for  2zb,  ^shs*;  Job  31:  15  for  ^l-rsia' 


§  61  VOWEL  CHANGES.  91 

(see  4.  below);  if  another  consonant  immediately  follow 
the  contracted  letters,  a  diphthongal  vowel  ^  or  i  may 
be  inserted  to  render  the  reduplication  more  audible 
and  prevent  the  concurrence  of  three  consonants,  ^iniilC, 

4.  In  accented  syllables  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  and 
0  are  employed  before  two  consonants  or  a  doubled  con- 
sonant in  preference  to  the  pure  i  and  u,  e.  g.  -"(Tin, 
roiirr;  D^p,  r>y2'p;  b't^-"^,  nrbt^pn,  so  ^scn,  xz'zp,  ?]nj;l. 
This  is  still  the  case  when  at  the  end  of  a  word  an 
auxiliary  Seghol  or  Pattahh  has  been  inserted  between 
the  letters  (according  to  2.),  e.  g.  'Sh,  ^20,  by'B.  t^i^.i''-? 
from  p''T'2,  or  the  reduplication  of  the  doubled  letter  is 
no  longer  heard  and  the  Daghesh-forte  does  not  appear, 
§  25,  e.  g.  net!  comp.  yhpr}. 

a.  The  vowel  e  is  in  like  circumstances  often  reduced  to  one  of  its  con- 
stituents a,  e.  g.  t^jsin  from  Tj^Pl,  i^:^iri,  in3'^?"ri,  ^l^bl^,  and  occasionally 
to  its  other  constituent  i,  e.  g.  trw^^rr"  from  ^^i?~f7.  ^^'''V'^'J  from  'ii^\ 
In  ■'Pi^tSp  from  h'^p  and  "'^irliiiin  from  ^"^i^pn,  a  is  the  original  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable,  of  which  e  and  I  are  modifications.  The  only  example 
of  Shurek  in  a  Seghol  ate  form  is  n^TJTi  Lev.  5:  21. 

5.  In  unaccented  syllables  ^  and  u  are  preferred  to  e 
and  0  before  doubled  letters,  Ti^i,  •'r^?;  "fiP,  "rir;  rMcri 

from  ncrj;  nc^i,  ^;iicv?  ^"f^  comp.  bbp/j,  yr,  "pn,  though 

such  forms  as  ^zin,  n-T5,  tt]^.  iri'h^  Hkewise  occur:  so  bik''T3> 
but  "^^^V. 

6.  A  vowel  is  occasionally  given  to  a  final  consonant 
to  soften  the  termination  of  the  word,  and  make  the 
transition  easier  to  the  initial  consonant  of  that  which 
follows;  thus,  b"5,  nb'b;  rilnbs  for  inbs;  DH,  r./^u;  b5<,  Ti'k', 

^55,  n^N;  r^k\i,  "bzrr,  r^"i:a,  "ji^sj^j;  n^n,  ih^n;  i-^DS  Ex. 
15:  10;  ^::j:C5':Ex.  15:  5'. 

a.  These  paragogic  vowels  have  established  themselves  in  the  current 
forms  of  certain  words,  as  tl^"^^,  Ti^h,  iiik,  13N,  "^rN,  "'B.  But,  with  these 
exceptions,  they  are  chiefly  found  in  poetry.  The  vowels  '^.  and  i  are 
mostly  attached  to  words  in  what  is  called  the  construct  state,  M    to  words 


92  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  62 

in  the  absolute;  and  all  of  them  to  the  feminine  ending  H.  Examples  of 
V.  "133  Num.  23:  18,  24:  3,  15,  'ir-n  several  times,  "ir""?  Ps.  114:  8.  Examples 
Of  "'.:  ■^n::nx  Hos,  lO:  ll,  ■^'^Cii  Gen.  49:  11,  "ija  ii)id.,  "^rnJ?  Gen.  31:  39, 
•'h'nrn  Ps.  110:  4,  "'i^H  Ps.  114-  8,  "^rr;  Ps.  123:  1,  ^rn:^:^^  PsriiS:  5,  ■^■i"^2-r? 
ver.  6,  ''h'^i^^  ver.  7,  "'h'^uiin  ver.  8»  "'ii'^CT^  ver.  9,  "'nxbp  Isa.  1:  21,  "^n-ititj 
Ex.  15:  6,  ^b.]'y  Zech.  11:  17,  -rs")  Lam.  1:  1,  -^rS^a  ibid'.,  •'iro  Deut.  33:  16. 
It  is  also  attached  to  the  first  member  of  the  compound  in  many  proper 
names,  e.  g.  I;k"''i35,  p'ni:""'2bp,  to'certain  particles,  as  "'Pba,  "^nb^T,  "^'i-q,  and 
perhaps  to  such  participial  forms  as  "^ra"!;"*  Jer.  22:  23.  Of  n  :  •"ir'b'^X  Ex. 
15:  16,  rT.j-!N  Isa.  8:  23,  Job  34:  13,  37:  12,  no-n  Judg.  14:  18,  nrvTr"^  Ps. 
3:  3,  80:  3,  Jon.  2:  10,  nb-B>  almost  constantly,  nr-m  Ps.  116:  15,  nbVii  Num. 
84:  5,  Ps.  124:  4,  iirb-;?  Ps.  92:  16  (K'ri),  125:  3,'Ezek.  28:  15,  Hos.  10:  13, 
ii,ris  Job  5:  16,  •'^^'^Tr  Ps.  44:  27,  63:  8,  94:  17,  nrs?  Job  10:  22,  nr::ri 
Josh.  19:  43,  Judg.  14:  1,  and  regularly  in  the  third  person  feminine  of  the 
preterite  of  tT'b  verbs.  In  modern  Persian  i  is  similarly  appended  to 
nouns  in  close  connection  with  a  following  word,  to  remove  the  obstruc- 
tion of  the  final  consonant  and  serve  as  a  uniting  link.  And  in  Hebrew 
they  seem  to  be  traces  of  forms  once  current  but  which  became  obso- 
lete §  201.  e. 

§  62.  The  changes  due  to  the  influence  of  vowels  may- 
arise  from  their  concurrence  or  proximity. 

1.  Concurring  vowels  may  coalesce;  a  uniting  with  a 
forms  a,  uniting  with  i  or  u  it  forms  the  diphthongal  e 
or  0,  e.  g.  niSTH  Neh.  3:  13  from  niSllJxn  after  the  re- 
jection  of  i5  by  §  53.  2.  6;  ri';^  after  the  softening  of  ^  to 
i  becomes  tT'Ii;  ^nbtip  by  the  rejection  of  Ti  becomes  i'it:p; 
in^  prefixed  to  proper  names  is  from  ^Tl^  for  Im^,  §  57. 2  (4), 
an  abbreviation  of  niri",  §  47. 

2.  One  of  them  may  be  hardened  into  its  correspond- 
ing semi-vowel;  t  ^^  with  f  ''.  may  form  f  "',,  or  the  first 
I  may  be  changed  to  ty,  which,  upon  the  redupHcation 
of  the  "^  to  preserve  the  brevity  of  the  antecedent  vowel, 
§  24.  3,  becomes  ''^,,  e.  g.  ^niJ  with  D^.  becomes  D"".2>  or 
D"^'"iZ7.  So,  "^  before  n  forms  T't'^  ,  and  before  i  forms  i*i  , 
e.  g.  t".J''^i:?,  r^i^l^^';  in  like  manner  ^  is  changed  before  i 
into  uv,  forming  i^i  ,  which,  by  §  56.  3,  becomes  i**  ,  e.  g. 
n^rb';?,  by  the  substitution  of  ni  for  n,  T\r^h'2.  I  \  fol- 
lowed by  2l  ^  forms  w,  ^ri"nbt:p,  Vnbpp;  T'rb,  VB;  rt'iri 
for  Vc'Jn  Josh.  14:  8.  E  ^    before  i  ^    or  «  ^  is  resolved 


§  63  VOWEL  CHANGES.  93 

into  ay,  whicl],  joined  with,  the  appropriate  semi-vowels, 
becomes  ''.  and  V^ ,  the  virtual  reduplication  of  the  final 
consonant  in  the  one  case  preserving  the  short  vowel, 
which  is  lengthened  in  the  other;  thus  "D^C  with  \  be- 
comes ''C^iD,  and  with  ^H,  VC^O.  The  same  resolution  of 
\  occurs  before  final  t],  formmg  Tj";,,  and  by  §  61.  2  !]']_, 
thus  "'1/13'3  with  t|  becomes  t]';n^5'D. 

a.  Grammarians  have  disputed  whether  in  such  words  as  D*^'"/i3S, 
ni'DVip  the  point  iu  "^  is  Daghesh-forte  or  Mappik,  §  26,  and  accordingly 
whetherthey  are  to  be  read  ibhriyyim,ynalkhuyydth,  ovibhriyim,malkhuydth. 
If  the  explanation  given  above  be  correct,  it  is  Daghesh-forte  Conserva- 
tive. Comp.  D^jT,  C'5- 

6.  Such  forms  as  "''^.'^3,  'i''"'3,  G^"!?  from  "^ns  are  only  apparent  excep- 
tions to  the  above  rules.  The  word  is  properly  ']'^Q,  and  to  this  the  addi- 
tions are  made,  the  auxiliary  Hhirik  being  dropped  with  the  cessation  of 
the  cause  from  wliich  it  originated,  §  57.  2.  (4).  In  D^XinnS  2  Chrou.  17:  11 
from  ■^;;')5  and  D'',  the  vowels  are  kept  separate  by  an  interposed  X 

c.  In  words  of  n"b  formation,  such  as  nis",  '6",  C^ii;:;  from  M'i;:?  and 
n  ,  "i,  Q'^.,  it  might  appear  as  though  one  vowel  were  rejected  before 
another.  But  the  correct  explanation  is  that  ^  is  the  true  final  radical,  and 
the  forms  above  given  are  for  n^'ia^',  'i"'lli3',  C'^'^i'i'  (like  C'li::^)  from  which 
"^  is  rejected  by  §  53.  3.  In  the  same  way  Vwii",  T^'^v,  etc.,  from  ii'::v  are  for 
I'^bs,  ^"^wS.  In  such  alternate  forms  as  iT'"}b  from  n")'D,  the  radical  "^  is 
retained  by  preserving  the  antecedent  vowel,  which,  before  Daghesh-forte 
Conservative,  becomes  Hhirik,  §  61.  5. 

§  63.  The  following  euphonic  changes  are  attribut- 
able to  the  proximity  of  vowels,  viz. : 

1.  Pattahh  before  a  guttural  is  often  changed  to  Seghol 
if  another  a  follows,  and  the  same  change  sometimes 
occurs  after  a  guttural  if  another  a  precedes. 

The  particular  cases  are  the  following: 

a.  When  (_)  stands  before  a  guttural  with  (  )  always  before  n,  e.  g. 
Jnri  for  ;nn,  nn-jno  Prov.  21 :  22,  Csnn,  'in'3n:n  (also  when  n  has  Hhateph 
Kamets,  e.  g.  D^annti,  "^ribnlin  Judg.  9:  9),  often  before  n  and  'J,  particul- 
arly if  it  receives  the  secondary  accent,  e.  g.  t'^'nnfn  for  t""}nn,  T^'Th  but 
rin^,  1">!^t:f7;  !^';=J'n,  Tfb-J  no,  rarely  before  X  and  I,  irnn  Gen.  14  10,  nikX3 
Neh,  9:  18,  26  but  ^"^ni^ix:  Ezek,  35:  12. 

b.  When  (_)  before  a  guttural  is  followed  by  another  consonant  with 
(-)  or  {_)  b'nn^  !ib^n;i  but  '^'^rr,  xsna  but  nxkna,  xun;;,  once  before  the 
liquid  b,  e.  g.  T^lsDX  Ex.  33:  3  for  ?ii2X,  and  once  before  3,  e,  g.  Wsnb 
for  nisnb. 


94  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  64,  65 

c.  In  MX"^ps^  1  Sam.  28:  15  and  the  combination  "IVI  cBi"  a  similar 
change  takes  place  after  a  guttural  to  prevent  the  repetition  of  the  vowel 
a;  80  in  iiiTi--!-;  Ps.  20:  4,  and  njXT  nsij  after  the  liquid  3. 

2.  Pattalih  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  a  following 
Seghol,  or  to  a  preceding  Kamets  or  Tsere. 

a.  The  assimilation  to  („)  takes  place  regularly  in  what  are  called 
Segholate  forms,  in  which  an  auxiliary  Seghol  has  by  §  61.  2  been  intro- 
duced between  two  vowellesa  letters,  T\?}^  for  "T^ba,  "yy^^  for  n'n;i,  yyt.  for 
Ty**i  but  JT^a,  CyD;  only  before  1,  which  can  combine  with  a  and  not 
with  «,  a  is  retained  and  lengthened  to  (^)  by  §  59,  "'ix,  Tjin.  Rarely  in 
other  cases  D^-i;^  for  nin^i,  where  the  change  is  facilitated  by  the  pre- 
ceding \ 

h.  The  assimilation  to  (  )  occurs  in  a  few  cases  after  a  guttural  with 
n  prefixed,  e.  g.  Din  for  C^n,  ^nrt  for  "inn;  and  in  yik  (from  y-ix)  uni- 
formly after  Kamets  yyCn,  ^"Xa,  "~i{^- 

c.  The  assimilation  to  („)  occurs  in  the  Kal  future  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs 
where  the  alternate  forms  are  ai"''  and  1'j?"'\ 

§  64.  The  following  vowel  changes  are  due  to  the 
accent,  viz.: 

1.  If  a  long  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  be  deprived  of 
its  accent,  it  will  be  shortened,  §  18,  e.  g.  '^t;^n,  '^'d^T'r, 
no"*,  nc^i;  Dir\  u-z^\  nf:?\  -2T5''^ 

a.  If  a  vowel  preceding  Makkeph  is  incapable  of  being  shortened,  it 
will  receive  the  secondary'  accent  Methegh,  agreeably  to  §  43. 

2.  The  accent  prefers  to  be  immediately  preceded  by 
a  simple  syllable  and  a  long  vowel.  Accordingly  an 
antecedent  vowelless  letter  often  receives  what  may  be 
called  a  pretonic  vowel.  This  is  commonly  the  simplest 
of  the  long  vowels  a,  e.  g.  bb;:,  ai^,  tirpb,  'j^bl~';,  occasion- 
ally e,  e.  g.  bp:,  nfj"4  -,^1^,  -j^i^sri,  rarely  o,  e.  g.  "jl^iirp:. 
Such  a  vowel  is  sometimes  inserted,  even  though  a  pre- 
existing mixed  syllable  is  thereby  destroyed,  e.  g.  in  the 
plurals  of  Segholates  and  of  feminine  nouns  derived  from 

them,  D^ib^j  from  -^b"^,  nibb-j  from  nbb:?. 

§  65.  The  special  emphasis,  with  wliich  the  last  word 
of  a  clause  is  dwelt  upon,  gives  rise  to  certain  vowel 
changes  in  connection  with  the  pause  accents,  §  3G.  2.  a. 


§  66  VOWEL  CHANGES.  95 

These  are  (1)  lengthening  short  vowels,  viz.,  (_)  and  not 
infrequently  (  )  which  has  arisen  from  (,)  to  (  ),  e.  g. 

-rji,  n-rs;  nnhS,  nnr^;  -nk,  "pS;  12i\  iny,  and  brino-in^ 

-   t'         at   t  '        T    :    -  t'       t   :   at  t  '       |    v  v'      J    vat  '  •■  v'  vat  '  ~         O 

back  Kamets  Hhatuph  shortened  from  Hholem  to  its 
original  length  tV2r^),  f^52^1.  (2)  Restoring  vowels  which 
have  been  dropped  in  the  course  of  inflection,  e.  g,  ^"lll^, 
^12:^;  ^n^*:!,  ^nn-l;  ^^'DV,  ^ib:?.  (3)  Changing  simple  Sh'va 
in  triliteral  syllables  and  before  the  suffix  ^Tj  to  Seghol, 
e.  g.  ^ri''3..,  "r?r^;  X^],  "^r..',  ^P'^,  Qr^^  (4)  Changing  com- 
pound Sh'va  to  the  corresponding  long  vowel,  e,  g.  "^5^, 

•  AT  '  ■   -:    ^      T  V  ' '         •  x- '  •  Tt'         '    f, 

a.  Pattahh  sometimes  remains  without  change,  IS  Ps.  132:  12,  FT13' 
2  Sam.  2:  27,  ^ilbSD  Jer.  7,  10,  '^03^3  5  Prov.  30:  9,  ^P^p^^  Job  34:  5,  !'^Pl?=N 
Neh.  5:  14,  and  once  restored  in  a  simple  syllable  ^I'^jfi  2  Sam.  3:  34. 
Seghol  more  frequently,  Tj^'O,  P'lll,  Q'^p_,  "~^[  and  T^"il.  Long  vowels  are 
mostl}^  unaltered;  only  Tsere  is  in  mixed  syllables  occasionally  changed 
to  Pattahh,  '.ITU  Isa.  18:  5  for  inn,  so  !3';:n  Isa.  42:  22,  ;"lSn  Gen.  17:  14, 
^^ii*1  Gen.  21:  8,  T^^'^l  Gen.  23:  34;  in  one  word  of  Segholate  formation  it 
is  converted  to  Seghol,  2?"j'^,  "'i^J"].,  and  in  another  to  Kamets,  ::rlj,  ::2d. 
Where  the  same  word  has  altei'nate  forms,  one  is  sometimes  selected  as  the 
ordinary  and  the  other  as  the  pausal  form,  thus  "j'SH^,  vsni ;  d^IT^,  irjani ; 
rn-J-^,  rjn-j-;;  ^t)^~'d,  :'^n^wi3  Gen.  43:  14;  p-i;!  Eecl.'l2:  H,  : -2"in  1  Sam. 
13:  21;  15,  ITS  Gen.  49:  3,  nadn,  nadn  Lev.  26:  34,  35;  •J^^'i,  >!-r3-.  Some- 
times, instead  of  changing  the  Sh'va  before  Tj  to  Seghol,  its  vowel  is  shiftef/, 
thus  t;2,  -3;  'T^b,  ~\^-J,  -nx,  and  in  Ex.  29:  35  t^zrk.  The  position  of  the 
pause  accent,  so  far  as  it  differs  from  that  of  the  ordinary  accent,  has  been 
explained  §  35.  2. 

b.  Of  the  pause  accents,  or  those  which  mark  the  limits  of  clauses 
and  sections,  the  first  class,  viz.,  Silluk,  Athnahh  and  Olev'yoredh  almost 
always  give  rise  to  the  vowel  changes  which  have  been  described;  the 
second  and  third  classes^,  S'gholta,  Zakeph  Katon,  Zakeph  Gadhol,  K'bhP 
and  Shalsheleth,  e.  g.  1?n3D'i  Isa.  13:  8,  do  so  frequently;  the  fourth 
class,  Pazer,  e.  g.  2  Kin.  3:  25,  Prov.  30:  4,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  e.  g. 
Ezek.  20:  21,  but  seldom.  Pausal  forms  are  occasionally  found  with  other 
Disjunctives,  thus,  Tiphhha  ^zibP\  Dent.  13:  5,  Pashta  ^nrin  ibid.,  Geresh 
vh'::  Ezek.  40:  4,  and  even  with  Conjunctives,  e.  g.  ''DX  Isa.  49:  18,  rtu'n 
Ezek.  17:  15,  ^'IJJ  2  Chron.  2\):  31. 

§  66.  1.  The  shortening  and  lengthening  of  words 
has  an  effect  upon  their  vowels.  The  shortening  may 
take  place 

(1)  At  the  end  of  a  word  by  the  rejection  of  a  voweJ. 


96  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  66 

This  occurs  only  with  (  )  or  (.)  in  certain  forms  of  n"b  verbs,  e.  g. 
^n  from  nBr,n,  'k^^  for  nv^'^i,  ir-in  l  Sam.  21 :  U  for  wn'^1,  n^rfn  fornpd'jv 
In  the  last  two  examples  the  short  vowel  is  lengthened  upon  its  receiving 
the  accent,  comp.  §  64.  1.  If  the  rejected  vowel  was  preceded  by  two  con- 
sonants, these  will  now  stand  together  at  the  end  of  the  word,  and  be  liable 
to  the  changes  described  §  61.  2,  e.  g.  ri~n  for  nciti. 

(2)  In  the  body  of  a  word  by  shortening  a  long  vowel 
in  a  mixed  syllable,  which  must,  of  course,  be  the  one 
bearing  the  accent,  §  32.  1,  or  rejecting  a  long  vowel  in 
a  simple  syllable  before  the  accent  (the  pretonic  vowel, 

§  64.  2),  -^n^,  ^3^;  p12,  p2;  ^2,  -ui^p?. 

a.  This  is  in  general  the  only  reduction  possible.  The  vowel  of  a 
mixed  syllable,  if  short  already,  is  capable  of  no  further  abbreviation, 
though  d  and  e  are  in  a  very  few  instances  attenuated  to  t,  VZ']^  const. 
yS-^-q,  nrs?  const.  ni^E-a,  bkpm-;  but  in^frm-;;  and  it  cannot  be  rejected, 
or  there  would  be  a  concurrence  of  vowelless  consonants  which  the' 
language  seeks  to  avoid  (CiP'M  Prov.30:  6  is  an  exception).  And  the  vowel 
of  a  simple  syllable,  if  short,  mast  have  the  accent,  §  32.  1,  which  pie- 
serves  it  from  rejection.  The  changes  above  recited  are  confined  to  the 
last  two,  or,  in  case  the  accent  is  upon  the  penult,  the  last  three  syllables 
of  the  word;  for  the  antecedent  portions  of  polysyllables  are  already  ab- 
breviated to  the  utmost.  Contractions  due  to  the  peculiai'ities  of  certain 
letters,  as  the  gutturals  and  quiescents,  which  have  been  before  ex- 
plained, are  not  here  taken  into  the  account,   e.  g.   Sb'd,  ^'po,   Pis,   ni'Q ; 

6.  Where  the  last  vowel  cannot  be  shortened,  it  sometimes  experiences 
a  change  of  a  quality  from  pure  to  diphtliongal,  such  as  is  produced  by  the 
pressure  of  two    following  consonants,    §  61.  4,   e.  g.  ^''^j^,  ^?3"T;   S'^UJin, 

acin;  n'^i;^  ^i'^;  -'l-^  --;;  b'^wd,  "h^o. 

2.  If  a  word  be  lengthened  by  additions  at  the  end, 
its  vowels  are  liable  to  changes  in  consequence. 

(1)  Such  additions  create  a  tendency  to  shorten  the 
previous  part  of  the  word  in  the  manner  just  described. 
For  the  normal  length  of  words  in  Hebrew  being  dis- 
syllabic, the  genius  of  the  language  is  opposed  to  trans- 
cending this  limit  any  further  than  is  absolutely  necessary. 
If  the  addition  is  not  of  sufficient  weight  to  affect  the 
position  of  the  accent,  no  abbreviation  results.  But  if  it 
is  of  weight  enough  to  remove  the  accent,  an  abbreviation 


§66  VOWEL  CHANGES,  97 

follows  if  it  is  possible  for  one  to  be  made,  e.  g.  ii^, 
D^^D'T,  Or'^n'n  for  DD"i2'n  by  §  61.  1. 

(2)  They  produce  changes  in  an  ultimate  mixed  syl- 
lable. If  the  appendage  begin  with  a  consonant,  the 
antecedent  vowel  will  now  be  succeeded  by  two  con- 
sonants and  be  liable  to  the  changes  consequent  upon 
such  a  position,  §  61.  4,  e.  g.  nDbpIDn  from  b^i:pri;  fiTCp 
from  D^lp;  "Pbppn  from  b"t:pn;  •pbtop  from  btsp.  If  the 
appendage  begin  with  a  vowel,  it  will  attach  itself  to  the 
final  consonant,  which  will  in  consequence  be  drawn  away 
from  its  own  syllable  to  begin  the  new  one.  This  may 
occasion  the  following  changes: 

(a)  If  the  preceding  vowel  is  an  auxiliary  Seghol  or 
Pattahh,  introduced  to  facilitate  the  pronunciation  of  the 
second  of  two  vowelless  consonants,  §  61.  2,  it  will  be 
rejected,  inasmuch  as  it  is  no  longer  required  for  this 
purpose,  e.  g.  isb^  from  l^b"^,  i'^rc  from  "irb. 

(b)  If  it  be  a  short  vowel,  it  must  either  be  lengthened 
to  adapt  it  to  the  simple  syllable  in  which  it  now  stands, 
or  rejected  on  account  of  the  disposition  to  abbreviate 
words  upon  their  receiving  accessions  at  the  end,  e.  g. 
nbrp  and  r;bu)D  from  bbp.  The  cases  are  very  rare  in 
which  a  short  vowel  remains  unchanged  in  consequence 
of  its  having  the  accent,  §  18.  2,  e.g.  ITT^^I'J  1  Kin.  19:15 
from  ^ST^,  rib:jtn  Ezek.  8:  2  from  bb'^n. 

(c)  If  it  be  a  long  vo.wel,  it  may  be  rejected,  as  ^btpir"; 
from  bti"';,  'h'O  from  DlT,  or  retained  either  unaltered,  as 
ri/J"pn  from  D^pJlj  *^|T2J?J  from  "JSIIJ^,  or  with  a  change 
of  quality  from  pure  to  diphthongal  or  the  reverse, 
n^T\'2  from  pin?^,  ^r'i^OD  from  :iOD,  sis'tpn  from  D^pH, 
D'bbs  from  t:^bs. 


98 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§C6 


TABLE     SHOWING    THE    CHARACTER    AND   AJj'FINITIES    OF   THE 
VOWELS  AND  THE    ORDINARY   LIMITS  OF  EUPHONIC  CHANGES. 


Long. 


Guttural,  .     . 
Palatal,     .     . 

Labial,      .     . 


pure  a 

( diphniongal  e 

\imre  i 

[  diplithongal  b 


a 


u 


PART  SECOND. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Roots  of  "Woeds. 

§  67.  'Etymology  treats  of  the  various  kinds  of  words, 
their  formation  and  inflections.  Three  successive  stages 
are  here  to  be  distinguished.  The  first  is  the  root  or 
radical  portion  of  words.  This  embraces  those  funda- 
mental sounds,  in  which  the  essential  idea  originally  in- 
heres. Roots  do  not  enter,  in  their  nude  or  primitive  form, 
into  the  current  use  of  language,  but  they  constitute  the 
basis  upon  which  all  actually  occurring  words,  with  the 
exception  of  the  inorganic  interjections,  are  constructed. 
The  second  stage  is  the  word  itself  in  its  simple  unin- 
flected  state;  this  is  formed,  if  a  primitive,  directly  from 
the  root,  if  a  derivative,  from  a  pre-existing  primitive,  by 
certain  changes  or  additions,  which  serve  to  convert  the 
radical  idea  into  the  precise  conception  intended,  which 
is  as  yet,  however,  expressed  absolutely.  The  third  and 
only  remaining  stage  is  the  word  as  it  appears  in  the  ac- 
tual utterances  of  speech,  so  modified  by  inflections  as  to 
suggest  the  definite  qualifications  of  the  idea,  such  as  the 
tense  of  verbs,  the  gender  and  number  of  nouns,  and  the 
degree  of  adjectives,  or  its  relations  whether  of  agree- 
ment or  subordination,  such  as  the  persons  and  modes 
of  verbs  and  the  cases  of  nouns. 

§  68.  There  are  in  Hebrew,  as  in  most  languages,  two 


100  ETYaiOLOGY.  §  68 

classes  of  roots,  which  may  be  denominated  respectively 
pronominal  and  verbal.  Pronominal  roots  form  the  basis 
of  such  words  as  express  the  relations  of  things  to  the 
speaker  or  to  one  another,  viz.,  pronouns  and  certain 
prepositions,  adverbs,  and  other  particles.  From  verbal 
roots,  wliich  are  by  far  the  more  numerous,  spring  words 
expressive  of  ideas,  viz.,  verbs,  nouns,  and  such  particles 
as  are  derived  from  them.  Verbal  roots  consist  exclusively 
of  consonants,  and  are  almost  invariably  triliteral.  The 
introduction  of  a  vowel  or  vowels,  even  for  the  sake  of 
pronouncing  them,  destroys  their  abstract  radical  cha- 
racter, and  converts  them  into  specific  words  of  this  or 
that  description.  Nevertheless,  for  reasons  of  convenience, 
the  letters  of  the  root  are  usually  pronounced  by  the  aid 
of  the  vowels  belonging  to  them  in  the  simplest  form  of 
the  corresponding  verb,  which  is  mostly  the  third  person 
singular  of  the  preterite,  e.  g.  bbj:,  T\t'2.  Tliis  must  not 
be  suffered,  however,  to  lead  to  the  confusion  of  identify- 
ing that  particular  verbal  form  with  the  proper  radical, 
nor  of  supposing  the  verb  to  be  the  radical  part  of  speech 
from  wliich  nouns  in  all  cases  are  derived:  verbs  and 
nouns  are  rather  to  be  regarded  as  co-ordinate  branches 
springing  from  a  common  root. 

a.  The  few  quadriliterals  and  qninqneliterals  which  occur  are  mostly 
formed  from  pre-existing  triliterals  by  tlie  addition  of  a  weak  letter,  or  a 
letter  similar  to  one  of  the  original  radicals,  e.  g.  np~3  to  lay  vasfe  comp. 
CDS;  rv'?!  to  burn  comp.  rv'T;  nc^""i3  a  branch  comp.  nrrp;  n"E;i;j 
thovghts  comp.  fi'E"':;;  I2'^i:l"^  a  sceptre,  comp.  '^"z'::;  'iN^'i:  tranquil  comp. 
"ixd;  Ti;"iQ  to  fiprcad  comp.  C'^S;  or  bj'  blending  two  different  roots,  e.  g. 
i:;bv."i  to  be  fresh  composed  of  ai;^  and  'l"?'J;  ""i^^S  a  certain  one  =  'p^ 
"iiabx;  ?^"1SS  a  frog  from  ""r.i  to  leap  rnn  (in  Arabic)  a  marsh.  Some, 
which  are  not  thus  reducible,  may  perhaps  be  of  foreign  origin. 

h.  Many  of  the  triliteral  roots  appear  to  be  based  upon  pre-existing 
biliterals.  Thus,  the  cognates  "ib,  bra,  th,  nij,  '^3,  M5,  have  in  common 
the  two  letters  13  with  the  associated  idea  of  cutting,  §  50.3.  The  freiuent 
examples  of  this  description,  together  with  the  fact  of  the  existence  of  a 
few  biliterals,  e.  g.  35*  father,  nx  brother,  CX  mother,  have  suggested  the 
thought  that  the  ultimate  roots  may  in  all  cases  have  been  biliterals,  and 


§  69  BOOTS  OF  WOEDS.  101 

that  the  triliterals  were  a  secondary  formation.  Various  ingenious  but  un- 
successful attempts  have  been  made  to  demonstrate  this  position  by  an 
actual  analysis,  and  to  effect  the  reduction  of  all  roots  to  two  primitive 
letters.  Still  more  extravagant  and  fanciful  is  the  endeavour,  which  hag 
actuaU}'  been  made,  to  explain  the  origin  of  roots  from  the  individual  letters 
of  which  they  are  composed,  and  to  deduce  their  meanings  from  the  names, 
the  shapes,  or  other  peculiarities  of  those  letters.  The  existence  of  roots 
and  the  meanings  attached  to  them  must  be  accepted  as  ultimate  facts. 
Some  have  arisen,  no  doubt,  from  the  imitation  of  sounds  in  nature;  but 
in  most  cases  no  satisfactory  reason  can  be  given  why  a  given  combination 
of  sounds  has  that  particular  sense,  which  is  in  fact  connected  with  it. 

§  69.  The  formation  of  words  and  their  inflection  are 
accompHshed  partly  by  internal  changes  and  partly  by 
external  additions.  The  internal  changes  are  the  insertion 
of  vowels  and  the  reduplication  of  consonants  in  various 
significant  ways,  e.  g.  bbp,  btp,  bt^p,  bt:p.  The  external 
additions  are  significant  syllables  welded  to  the  root  or 
to  the  word,  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end,  e.  g. 
bbp,  v\)b]),  blip:,  •iSbtoprn. 

a.  The  triliteral  and  exclusively  consonantal  character  of  Semitic  roots 
is  their  most  remarkable  peculiarity  in  distinction  from  those  of  the  Indo- 
European  languages  which  are  as  prevailingly  monosyllabic,  the  vowel 
being  an  essential  constituent,  while  the  number  of  consonants  is  variable. 
The  fact  of  the  vowel  being  an  integral  part  of  the  root  in  these  languages 
interferes  with  their  employment  of  internal  changes  for  purposes  of 
derivation  and  inflection,  and  confines  them  almost  entirely  to  external 
additions,  e.  g.  voco,  vocabam,  vocatio,  vocabuhim,  vocito,  etc.  The  compo- 
sition of  words  of  Avhich  such  large  use  is  made  in  the  Indo-European 
tongues,  e.  g.  ad-voco,  in-voco,  etc.,  is  almost  unknown  in  Hebrew  except  in 
the  formation  of  proper  names. 

b.  Different  languages  differ  greatly  in  their  flexibility,  that  is  to  say, 
in  the  variety  of  words  which  may  spring  from  a  common  root,  and  the 
number  of  forms  which  the  same  word  ni^y  assume  to  express  the  various  re- 
lations into  which  it  enters.  Belations,  which  in  some  languages  are  expressed 
by  flection,  as  the  cases  of  nouns,  tenses  of  verbs,  concord  of  adjectives,  are 
in  others  indicated  by  additional  words,  as  prepositions,  auxiliary  verbs,  etc., 
or  suggested  by  the  order  of  words  in  the  sentence. 

c.  Formative  syllables,  added  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end  of 
words  for  the  sake  of  inflection,  are,  in  the  ordinary  consciousness  of  those 
who  use  the  language,  completely  amalgamated  with  them,  so  that  their 
separate  origin  and  signification  is  never  thought  of.  They  are  thus  to 
be  distinguished  from  those  words  which,  by  reason  of  their  dependent 
chai'acter,  are  attached  to  others  as  prefixes  or  suffixes,  but  yet  preserve 


102  ETYMOLOGY.  §  70,  71 

Hieir  separate  identity  as  prefixed  conjunctions  and  prepositions  and  suf- 
fixed pronouns. 

§  70.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Hebrew  are  either  de- 
dinable  as  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns  (including  adjec- 
tives); or  indechnable,  as  the  article,  adverbs,  prepositions, 
conjunctions,  and  interjections.  As  most  if  not  all  of  the 
syllables  employed  in  the  formation  and  inflection  of 
verbs  and  nouns  are  of  pronominal  origin,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  consider  the  pronouns  first. 

a.  The  classification  usual  with  the  Jewish  grammarians  is  into  verbi 
(D*'3sQ  actions),  noung  (nialU  names),  aind  particles  (D'^sa  words). 


Pronouns. 

PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

§  71.  The  Hebrew  pronouns  are  personal,  demon- 
strative, relative,  and  interrogative  or  indefinite.  The 
personal  pronouns  are  the  following,  viz.: 


BINQULAB. 

PIiURA.Ii. 

1. 

I            ^rb^5,    ^i« 

•    IT  '          •  -: 

We 

WDS|,  ^;r;i,  ^iii$ 

2. 

1  Thou  m.  nn^ 

Ye  m. 

nnx 

1  Thou/,     rs^,  ^m 

Ye/. 

"pi^,  n;nx 

3 

He           ti^n 

They  m. 

en,   ^^k\ 

KJ» 

,  She           «"ri 

They/. 

in>     J^rH 

There  are,  it  will  be  perceived,  distinct  forms  for 
singular  and  plural  in  the  three  persons,  and  for  mascu- 
line and  feminine  in  the  second  and  third.  There  is  no 
form  for  the  neuter,  as  that  gender  is  not  recognized  in 
Hebrew. 

a.  (1)  The  alternate  forms  of  the  first  person  singular  "'six  (in  pause 
•'six  with  the  accent  on  the  penult  except  Job  33:  9),  and  "^rx  (in  pause 
"'JS)  are  used  interchangeably  and  with  perhaps  equal  frequency'.  It  has 
been  observed,  however,  that  while  the  former  is  the  more  common  in  the 
Pentateuch,  it  never  occurs  in  the  books  of  Chronicles,  and  but  once  in 
Ezetiel,  viz..  36:  28,  a  passage  borrowed  from  the  Pentateuch.     The  usual 


§71 


PRONOUNS.  103 


plural  of  this  person  is  15r^:X;  !13m3  occurs  but  six  times,  viz.,  Gen.  42:  11, 
Ex.  16:  7.  8,  Num.  32:  32,  2  Sam.  17:  12,  Lam.  S:  42;  ^liX  though  common 
in  later  Hebrew,  occurs  but  once  in  the  Old  Testament,  viz.,  Jer.  42:  6 
K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  substitutes  the  usual  form. 

(2)  The  second  person  masc.  sing.  <1PX  (in  pause  occasionally  iiP"X  Vs. 
2:  7,  25:  27,  40:  18,  70:  6,  but  mostly  npS)  is  in  five  instances  written  nx 
without  the  final  He,  which  is  however  restored  in  the  K'ri,  viz.,  1  Sam. 
24:  19,  Ps.  6:  4,  Job  1:  10,  Eccles.  7:  22,  Neh.  9:  6,  and  in  three  instances 
PX  without  the  final  vowel  Ntrm.  11:  15,  Deut.  5:  24,  Ezek.  28:  14.  The 
feminine  PiX  is  occasionally  written  "^IIN  Judg.  17:  2,  1  Kin.  14:2,  2  Kin. 
4:  16,  23,  8:  1,  Jer.  4:  30,  Ezek.  36:  13;  the  K'ri  invariably  retrenches  the 
superfluous  "•,  though  it  is  probable  that  the  original  pronunciation  proper 
to  this  orthography  was  "'nx.  The  feminine  jjlural  "(hx  occurs  only  Ezek. 
34:  31,  where  a  few  manuscripts  read  "iriX;  the  alternate  form  nariX  occurs 
Gen.  31:  6,  Ezek.  13:  11,  34:  17;  in  Ezek.  13:  20  most  editions  have  tisns;. 

(3)  The  third  person  fem.  sing.  X'^rt  occurs  but  eleven  times  in  the 
books  of  Moses,  viz.,  Gen.  14:  2,  20:  5,  38:  25,  Lev.  11:  30,  13:  10.  21, 
16:31,  20:  17,  21:  9,  Num.  5:  13,  14.  In  its  stead  is  found  Xirs  a  combination 
of  the  letters  of  the  masculine  with  the  vowel  of  the  feminine.  The  ex- 
planation of  this  is  that  Xin  hil  was  at  that  early  period  of  common  gender 
and  used  indifferently  for  both  masculine  and  feminine.  As  this  primitive 
usage  subsequently  became  obsolete,  the  word,  when  used  for  the  feminine, 
was  read  X""?!  hi  according  to  the  uniform  practice  of  the  later  books,  and 
the  punctuators  have  suggested  this  by  giving  it  the  corresponding  vowel, 
§  47.  According  to  Kimchi  'r.  Euth  1 :  13  and  tisn  2  Sam.  4:  6,  Jer.  50:  5, 
stand  for  the  masculine  plural;  this  assumption  is  unnecessary,  however,  as 
in  the  first  passage  the  feminine  may  have  the  sense  of  the  neuter  "these 
things,'"  and  in  the  last  two  it  is  an  adverb  of  place,  meaning  here. 

b.  Words  in  such  constant  and  familiar  use  as  the  pi'onouns  are  sub- 
ject to  more  or  less  irregularity  in  all  languages.  The  original  plural 
termination,  as  will  be  shown  more  fully  hereafter  in  the  case  of  verbs  and 
nouns,  is  Qil  or  "^  §§  85.  1.  a  (1),  201.  e.  In  the  first  person  the  nasal  is 
omitted  ^:n,  ^;r;;x.  The  plurals  of  the  second  and  third  persons  were  origin- 
ally CWN,  wn,  which  are  still  preserved  in  the  Arabic,  and  have  left  their 
traces  in  the  inflections  of  verbs,  e.  g.  'f^V^'^'],  "^i'^hy^p.  The  vowel  u  how- 
ever, which  in  the  plurals  of  masculine  nouns  has  been  converted  into  t, 
has  in  the  pronouns  undergone  a  still  further  modification  into  the  diph- 
thongal e  art  or  e  KlS:,  The  distinction  of  gender  is  indicated  in  the  plural 
not  by  affixing  the  characteristic  termination  of  that  gender  as  in  nouns, 
but  by  a  change  of  the  final  nasal.  An  unaccented  tl  is  often  added  by 
§  61.  6,  to  relieve  the  harshness  of  the  consonantal  ending. 

c.  In  the  technical  language  of  the  Jewish  grammarians  pronouns  are 
called  t!"''^."3  cognomina;  the  first  person  is  '^2'!^  the  speaker,  the  second 
xii'23  present,  the  third  "^npi  hidden  or  absent. 

§  72.  When  the  pronouns  are  used  in  their  separate 
form  as  distinct  words  they  have  the  forms  abeady  given, 


104  ETYMOLOGY.  §72,73 

When,  however,  they  stand  in  a  relation  of  dependence 
to  verbs,  nouns,  and  particles,  they  are  appended  to  them 
in  the  following  abbreviated  forms,  called  the  pronominal 
suffixes:  (See  Paradigm  I,  at  the  end  of  the  volume.) 


BIHOULAB. 

PliUBAIi. 

Com. 

^ 

"3 

SID 

Masc. 

^ 

DS 

Fern. 

^ 

1? 

Masc. 

^n 

D 

C^ 

Fern. 

n 

n 

T 

in 

M 

In  the  first  person  singular  ^.  is  attached  to  nouns, 
and  ■'D  to  verbs.  In  the  second  person  the  palatal  D  is 
substituted  for  the  lingual  T\  of  the  separate  pronoun. 
For  a  similar  change  in  the  first  person  see  §  85.  a.  (1). 
The  modifications  in  the  forms  of  the  suffixes,  occasioned 
by  the  endings  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  attached, 
will  be  considered  hereafter,  §§  101, 222.  The  third  plural 
forms  Dm,  ""  are  used  with  plural  nouns;  D,  "j  with  verbs 
and  singular  nouns. 

The  suffixes  of  the  second  and  third  persons  plural 
DD,  "D,  DJl,  "jr  are  called  grave,  the  rest  are  light.  The 
former  being  mixed  syllables,  always  receive  the  accent, 
§  33.  3,  and  tend  more  strongly  to  shorten  the  words  to 
which  they  are  attached  than  the  latter. , 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. 
§  73.  1.  The  ordinary  demonstrative  is — 

Masc.  Fern.  Common. 

Singular,    HT     nXT  this.     Plural,    bx     nVx  these. 

The  poetic  form  ^T  is  sometimes  a  demonstrative,  Ps. 
12:  8,  Hab.  1:  11,  but  more  frequently  a  relative  (Uke 
the  English  that),  in  which  case  it  is  used  without  change 


\ 


§   74  PRONOUNS.  lOf 

for  both  genders  and  numbers.  The  feminine  is  occasion- 
ally written  without  the  final  T\  and  with  a  different 
vowel  letter  nt  or  IT.  The  plural,  coming  from  a  different 
root,  is  sufficiently  distinguished  without  the  usual 
termination;  bi<  occurs  eight  times  in  the  books  of  Moses 
and  once  in  1  Chron.  20:  8;  in  all  other  places  the  con- 
sonantal termination  is  softened  by  an  appended  H  . 

2.  The  singular  of  this  pronoun  is  in  a  few  instances 
compounded  with  b  either  without  any  change  of  mean- 
ing, or,  as  Ewald  and  Nordheimer  follow  Jarchi  in  sup- 
posing, in  the  sense  of  the  remote  demonstrative  that.      y\^ 
Thus  (with  the  article  H  prefixed) —  v, 

Masc.  Fern.  Com, 

Sing,  this  or  that    nibn  "bn  Tbn 

V  T     -  ••     -  T     — 

a.  The  first  form  occurs  twice  in  Genesis  (24:  65,  37:  19),  the  third  six 
times  in  the  post-Mosaic  books  as  a  masei.line  (Judg.  6:  20,  1  Sam.  14:  1, 
17:  26,  2  Kin.  23:  17,  Dan.  8:  16,  Zech.  2:  8),  aad  once  as  a  feminine  (2  Kin 
4:  25),  the  second  once  in  Ezekiel  (36:  35),  „ — ' 

3.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  i^^H  is 
used  for  the  remote  demonstrative  tJiat. 


Eelative  Pronoun. 

§  74.  The  relative  who,  which  is  "iirs;,  which  may  be 
employed  as  a  separate  word,  or  may  be  shortened  to  a 
prefix  (T  with  Daghesh-forte  compensative  in  the  follow- 
ing letter,  unless  it  be  a  guttural  and  consequently  in- 
capable of  receiving  it,  §  23.  1.  In  a  few  instances  the 
prefix  W  takes  the  vowel  (_)  -followed  by  Daghesh-forte, 
Judg.  5:  7,  Cant.  1:  7,  Job  19:  29;  once  it  has  Q  before 
i5  Judg.  6:  17,  and  twice  (.)  Eccl.  2:  22  (in  some  copies), 
3:  18.  The  relative  suffers  no  change  for  gender  or 
number  either  in  its  separate  or  its  prefixed  state.  Its 
objective  relation  to  verbs  and  particles  and  its  possessive 
relation  to  nouns  are  expressed  without  changing  the 


106  ETYMOLOGY.  §  75 

relative  itself,  or  removing  it  from  its  position  at  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  by  appending  the  appropriate 
pronominal  suffix  to  the  governing  word,  e.  g.  in^lD  "iirx 
ivho  he  sent  him,  i.  e.  whom  he  sent,  ii?"!!  n'i;i<  which  its 
seed,  i.  e.  whose  seed.  It  may  also  receive  an  adverbial 
sense  from  being  followed  by  the  pronominal  adverb  D"® 
there,  e.  g.  D'^— nirx  where,  m'^ — "lujs  whither,  U^^ — nirx 
ivhence. 

a.  The  prefix  113  occurs  to  the  exclusion  of  the  full  form  of  the  relative 
in  the  Song  of  Solomon,  and  with  great  frequency  in  Ecclesiastes.  There 
are  besides  occasional  examples  of  it  in  other  books,  e.g.  Judg.  5:7,  6:  17, 
7:  12,  8:  26,  2  Kin.  6:  11,  1  Chron.  5:  20,  Job  19:  29,  Ps.  122—124,  129, 
133—137,  144,  Lam.  2:  15,  16.  The  word  Dad?.  Gen.  6:3  is  in  several 
ancient  versions  and  in  the  common  English  translation  rendered  as  though 
it  were  made  up  of  the  preposition  3,  the  relative  d  and  the  particle  cr. 
for  that  alfio;  but  the  most  recent  interpreters  derive  it  from  the  verb  iXS 
to  err,  and  translate  in  their  erring. 

b.  "ids  or  ttJ  is  also  used  for  the  conjunction  that.    Comp.  Lat.  quod. 


Interrogative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

§  75.  1.  The  pronouns  ^".3  who?  or  whoever  relating  to 
persons,  and  n'2  tvhat?  or  tvhatever  relating  to  things,  are 
employed  both  as  interrogatives  and  in  an  indefinite 
sense.  They  experience  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

The  vowel  of  TV2  is  regulated  by  the  initial  sounds  of 
the  succeeding  word.  Before  a  letter  capable  of  receiving 
Daghesh-forte  it  is  pointed  T\12  and  the  following  letter 
is  doubled,  e.  g.  ibl2"r:"^  Ex.  3:  13.  Before  the  stronger 
gutturals  n  and  n  it  also  commonly  receives  (.),  e.  g. 
KT-H'^  Ps.  39:  5,  ^n^<I2^  fCl  Gen.  31:  36.  Before  the 
weaker  gutturals  ii,  7  and  "i,  it  commonly  takes  (J,  e.  g. 
rts-M^  Zech.  1:9,  ^13:?  Hr  2  Kin.  8:  13,  on^S-^  nv  Judg. 
9:  48.  Before  H,  n  and  3?  with  Kamets  it  takes  (J,  §  63. 
1.  a,  e.  g.  ib  r'r-rV2  Ex.  32:  1,  xxbrrna  Gen.  20:  9, 

/  O  T     T  V  '  •  T     T  V 

r^'Tij^"""-  ib:",  and  occasionally  before  other  letters  especi- 

T  •      T  V  '  *^  _ 

ally  when  it  has  a  disjunctive  accent  bip  n'J  1  Sam.  4: 14, 


§  76  SPECIES  OP  VEEES.  107 

tiSiaia  JT^^  2  Kin.  1:7.  In  a  few  instances  the  final  vowel 
letter  is  omitted  and  the  interrogative  is  joined  with  the 
following  word,  e.  g.  firz  Ex.  4:  2,  nb^'2  Isa.  3:15,  fikbp^'^ 
Mai.  1:  13,  nri2  Ezek.  8:  6  K'thibh." ' 

2.  Another  interrogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
particle  "5<  to  the  pronoun  tlT,  ni<T,  thus  HT  ■'i>5  which?  or 
what?  1  Kin.  13: 12,  Eccles.  11: 6,  n.sib  ^i^,for  what?  luhij? 
Jer.  5:7. 

3.  The  words  ''Dbbx  ^D'bss  which  are  always  used  in 
combination,  or  contracted  into  one  ^Dbbs,  are  in  usaofe 
equivalent  to  an  indefinite  or  indeterminate  pronoun, 
Eng.  a  certain  one,  Lat.  quidam,  G-r.  6  o£/va;  they  are,  how- 
ever, derived  not  from  pronominal  but  verbal  roots. 

Verbs. 

THEIR   SPECIES. 

§  76.  1.  Hebrew  verbs  have  seven  different  forms 
which  have  been  denominated  species  or  conjugations 
(D^D^Din  huildings).  These  represent  as  many  modifications 
of  the  verbal  idea,  and  are  as  follows,  viz.: 


1. 

bfe 

Kal 

Simple  active. 

2. 

^?£? 

Niphal 

„      passive. 

3. 

^?s 

Piel 

Intensive  active. 

4. 

bb5 

Pual 

„       passive. 

5. 

^'^'^n 

Hiphil 

Causative  active. 

6. 

bi^'sn 

Hophal 

„           passive. 

7. 

bysnn 

Hithpael 

Reflexive. 

a.  The  term  conjugations  was  introduced  by  Reuchlin,  and  is  very 
generally  employed  in  Hebrew  grammars  and  in  those  of  the  cognate  lan- 
guages. It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  Hebrew  conjugations 
are  totally  unlike  the  conjugations  of  Latin  and  Greek.  The  latter  denote 
the  various  modes  of  inflection  adopted  by  different  roots.  The  former  are 
modifications  of  the  same  root,  which  differ  in  meaning  while  their  inflec- 
tions are  substantially  alike.  They  correspond  ratlier  with  voices  or  with 
derivative  verbs,  such  as  frequentatives   and  causatives,  although  they  not 


108  ETYMOLOGY.  §  77 

infrequenily  require  to  be  translated  by  words  radically  distiuut.  The 
term  species  proposed  by  Schulteus,  though  less  commonly  adopted,  is 
more  descriptive. 

2.  Kal  means  light,  and  denotes  that  species  in  which 
no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and  these 
only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  species  are  called 
heavy  (D'^'^zs),  because  burdened  by  the  reduplication  of 
the  radicals  or  the  addition  of  other  letters.  Their  names 
are  derived  from  bi'S  to  do,  which  was  the  model  for  in- 
flection, the  form  assumed  by  this  verb  in  each  species 
serving  as  its  designation.  Unusual  verbal  forms  are  in 
like  manner  denoted  by  the  corresponduig  forms  imposed 
upon  its  radicals. 

3.  Other  technical  expressions,  such  as  the  names  of 
the  various  classes  of  verbs,  are  also  to  be  traced  to  this 
source.  A  verb  whose  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  a  Nun, 
or  a  Yodh,  is  called  a  Pe  Guttural,  Pe  Nun  (""s),  or  Pe 
Yodh  (^"S)  verb,  Pe  as  the  initial  of  b'^B  becoming  the 
technical  designation  of  a  first  radical  generally.  So  a 
verb  whose  second  radical  is  Vav  is  called  an  Ayin  Vav 
(Y'3'');  one  in  which  He  takes  the  place  of  the  third  radical, 
a  Lamedh  He  (""b);  one  whose  second  and  third  radicals 
are  alilvc  an  Ayin  Doubled  (^"y),  etc. 

§  77.  The  general  idea  of  the  several  species  already 
stated  is  liable  to  certain  modifications  in  the  variety  of 
cases  to  whicL  it  is  applied. 

1.  The  Niplial  is  commonly  the  passive  of  Kal  or  of 
the  simple  idea  of  the  verb,  nis  to  steal,  Ni.  to  be  stolen; 
Zibl)  to  lurite,  Ni.  to  he  ivritten. 

2.  Sometimes,  like  the  Greek  middle  voice  which 
coincides  with  the  passive  in  certain  of  its  forms,  it  has 
a  reflexive  signification,  "j'llti  to  hide,  Ni.  to  hide  ojte^s  self; 
^'J"l'  to  keep,  Ni.  to  keep  one's  self,  (j)vkdTTS':Qat',  Dr.:  Ni.  to 
repent,  fit.  to  grieve  one's  self,  /xsToc/x^XsaOai:,  or  expresses 


§78  BPECIES  or  VEEBS.  109 

reciprocal  action,  y>*^  to  counsel,  M.  to  take  counsel  together; 
Dhb  M.  to  fight,  fjidxs'jQai,  lit.  to  devour  one  another.  In 
some  verbs  it  has  both  a  passive  and  a  reflexive  sense, 
^312  Ni.  to  he  sold  and  to  sell  one's  self;  t^k}  Ni.  to  he  seen 
and  to  let  one^s  self  he  seen,  to  appear. 

3.  Sometimes  when  the  Kal  is  intransitive  and  does 
not  admit  of  a  proper  passive,  the  Niphal  is  either  iden- 
tical with  it  in  signification,  zh^)  K.  and  Ni.  to  approach, 
or  retains  a  shade  of  its  original  force  by  representing 
the  state  or  condition  not  absolutely  as  in  Kal,  but  as 
something  effected  and  involving  a  change  from  another 
previous  condition,  i<5a  to  he  full,  Ni.  to  he  filled,  ThT\  to 
he,  Ni.  to  hecoyne. 

§  78.  1.  The  Piel  gives  new  intensity  to  the  simple 
idea  of  the  verb,  by  which  its  meaning  is  variously  modi- 
fied according  to  the  nature  of  the  case,  t:>'"^  to  he  few, 
Pi.  to  he  very  feiv;  t\1^  to  follow,  Pi.  to  follow  ardently,  to 
pursue;  "TJB  to  fear.  Pi.  to  fear  constantly,  to  he  timid;  bx^ 
to  ask,  Pi.  to  ask  repeatedly  and  earnestly,  to  heg;  !j5^2  to 
create,  as  God,  Pi.  to  form  with  pains  and  labour,  as  man; 
ins  to  write.  Pi.  to  write  much  with  the  implication  that 
it  is  to  httle  purpose,  to  scrihhle;  "^ij^  to  hury.  Pi.  to  hury 
great  numhers. 

2.  The  energy  resident  in  this  species  displays  itself 
by  signifying  the  producing  or  causing  of  that  which  is 
denoted  by  the  simple  idea  of  the  verb,  thus  quickening 
intransitive  verbs  into  transitives,  and  making  such  as 
were  transitive  before  to  be  doubly  so.  In  this,  which  is 
the  more  frequent  case,  it  becomes  virtually  equivalent 
to  a  causative,  li5<  to  perish,  Pi.  to  make  to  perish,  to 
destroy;  l/Jb  to  learn.  Pi.  to  teach,  i.  e.  cause  to  learn.  Both 
these  senses  are  occasionally  found  united  in  the  same 
verb,  nn)^  Pi.  to  he  very  near  and  to  hring  near;  T\fvL  Pi. 
to  he  very  corrupt  and  to  corrupt  or  destroy. 


no  ETYMOLOGY.  §79,80 

a.  If  the  action  be  directed  to  the  removal  of  its  object,  the  Piel  be- 
comes privative,  xbn  to  sin,  Pi.  to  free  from  sin^  expiate,  bgS  to  stone,  Fi- 
fe free  from  stoties. 

3.  Pual  is  the  passive  of  Piel,  and  therefore  can  only 
exist  when  the  sense  of  the  latter  is  such  that  a  passive 
is  possible. 

§  79.  1.  The  Hiphil  denotes  the  causing  or  producing 
of  that  which  is  signified  by  the  simple  form  of  the  verb, 
and,  as  in  the  corresponding  case  of  Piel,  intransitive 
verbs  become  transitive,  and  such  as  admitted  of  one  ob- 
ject before  are  now  capable  of  receiving  two:  HT  to 
descend,  Hi.  to  cause  to  descend,  bring  down;  iX)^  to  come, 
Hi.  to  hring;  nk"!  to  see,  Hi.  to  show. 

a.  The  causative  sense  in  both  Piel  and  Hiphil  is  sometimes  weakened 
into  a  simple  permissive,  Tf^n  permit  to  live  Ex.  22:  17,  Deut.  20:  16,  fnw 
perhaps  permit  to  suffer  Ex.  22 :  21,  n^Sti  permit  to  he  redeemed  Ex.  21 :  8. 

2.  In  some  verbs  Hiphil  has  an  intransitive  sense,  but 
in  most  of  these  cases  there  is  either  an  ellipsis  of  the 
object  or  the  idea  of  production  and  causation  can  still 
be  obscurely  traced,  zisj^  Hi.  to  he  attentive,  prop,  to  make 
{one^s  ear)  attend;  j:b'2  Hi.  to  he  sweet,  prop,  to  cause  sweet- 
ness; bbir  Hi.  to  he  wise,  prop,  to  act  wise! fj,  exhibit  ivisdom; 
Y'^^  Hi.  to  be  brave,  prop,  to  act  bravely;  "|pj  Hi.  to  grow 
old,  prop,  to  acquire  age.    In  a  few  instances  both  senses 

'  are  found  united  in  the  same  verb,  n^D  Hi.  to  cause  to 
bud  and  to  put  forth  buds;  T^^X  Hi.  to  prolong  and  to  he 
long;  ~ir>  Hi.  to  enrich  and  to  grozv  rich;  'pw  Hi.  to  make 

fat  and  to  become  fat  (comp.  Yjwg.  fatten). 

3.  Hophal  is  the  passive  of  Hiphil. 

a.  When  Kal  has  both  a  transitive  and  an  intransitive  sense,  Hiphil, 
as  the  causative  of  the  latter,  becomes  substantially  identical  with  the 
former,  !nu3  K,  to  extend  or  to  bend,  trans,  and  intrans.,  Hi.  id,  trans.  In 
Job  23:  11,  Ps.  125:  5,  Isa.  30:  11,  where  the  Hiphil  of  this  verb  appears  to 
be  used  intransitively  in  the  sense  of  turning  aside,  there  is  an  ellipsis  of 
its  proper  object,  to  bend  (the  steps). 

§  80.  1.  The  Hithpael  is  reflexive  or  reciprocal  of  the 
idea  of  the  verb,  mostly  as  this  is  expressed  in  the  Piel 


§  80  SPECIES  OF  VERBS.  Ill 

species  (from  which  it  is  formed,  §  82.  5),  the  particular 
shade  of  meaning  being  modified  according  to  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case.  (1)  It  indicates  that  the  subject  is 
Ukewise  the  direct  object  of  the  action,  t2522  Pi.  to  deliver^ 
Hith.  to  escape,  deliver  one^s  self  ;  p^iiZ  Y\.  to  justify,  Hith.  to 
justify  one's  self;  irsn  Pi.  to  seek,  Hith.  to  disguise  one's 
self,  prop,  to  let  one's  self  he  sought  for;  Jl^n  Pi.  to  make 
sick,  Hith.  to  make  one's  self  sick  whether  in  reahty  or  in 
the  esteem  of  others,  i.  e.  to  feign  sickness;  d5~  Hith.  to 
show  one's  self  tvise  whether  in  reahty  or  in  his  own  con- 
ceit. (2)  Or  that  he  is  the  indirect  object  of  the  action, 
which  is  for  his  benefit,  or  relates  entirely  to  him,  npE 
Pi.  to  open,  Hith.  to  open  for  one's  self;  b^'j:  Hith.  to  inherit 
{for  one's  self);  "in  Pi.  to  make  gracious,  Hith.  to  implore 
favour,  prop,  to  make  to  he  gracious  to  one's  self  (3)  Or 
that  the  action  is  mutual  between  two  or  more  parties, 
'n"(2p  Pi.  to  hind,  Hith.  to  conspire,  prop,  to  hand  together; 
nk"*!  to  see,  Hith.  to  look  upon  one  another. 

2.  This  species  is  sometimes  a  mere  passive  hke  the 
Niphal  ri^  to  forget,  Hith.  to  he  forgotten;  ^S3  Pi.  to  atone, 
Hith.  to  he  atoned;  in:?  Pi.  to  prepare,  Hith.  to  he  prepared. 
In  a  few  instances  the  reflexive  and  the  passive  senses 
are  found  in  the  same  verb,  ^57J  Hith.  to  sell  one's  self  and 
to  he  sold. 

a.  (1)  The  affinity  between  the  Piel  and  Hiphil  species  is  such  as  in 
very  many  verbs  to  render  it  unnecessary  to  retain  them  both,  and  one  or 
the  other  has  been  allowed  to  fall  into  disuse.  Where  both  exist,  they  are 
often  nearly  or  quite  synonj'mous,  and  are  used  indiscriminately,  TTn;^  Pi. 
and  Hi.  to  sanctify,  or  differ  only  in  the  frequency  of  their  employment, 
n3^  Pi.  and  Hi.  (rare)  to  send,  vh^:J  Pi.  (rare)  and  Hi.  to  cou!<e  to  hear.  In 
other  cases  they  are  distinguished  by  adhering  to  those  significations  of  th,; 
species  in  which  the}'  depart  palpably  from  one  another,  n^a  Pi.  (intens.) 
to  grow  luxuriaiitli/,  Hi.  (caus.)  to  make  to  grow,  ^zD  Pi.  (cans.)  to  make 
foolisJi,  Hi.  (intrans.)  to  act  fooUMy',  or  by  developing  them  from  different 
significations  of  the  root,  Viys  Pi.  to  cook  (food).  Hi.  to  ripen  (fruit);  ~b^ 
Pi.  to  bless  (prop,  to  kneel  in  worship),  Hi.  to  cause  to  kneel  (as  a  physical 
act),  cii'  Pi.  to  break  the  bones  (n*^y),  Hi.  to  render  strong ;  or  by  restricting 
them  to  special  applications,  "iipi^  Pi.  to  burn  incense  (to  idols),  Hi.  to  burn 


112  ETYMOLOGY.  g  80 

incense  (to  God);  t-^n  Hi.  to  cliavge,  Pi.  to  change  (the  clothes);   -i"S  Hi 
to  strip,  Pi.  to  strip  (the  slain  in  battle). 

(2)  It  is  still  less  common  to  find  both  Niphal  andHithpael  in  the  same 
Terb.  Where  this  does  occur  they  are  sometime.?  used  interchangeably,  at 
others  a  distinction  is  created  or  adhered  to,  "Ed  Ni.  and  Hith.  tn  be  poured 
out;  "'C'J  Ni.  and  Hith.  to  talk  with  one  another;  "na  Ki.  to  he  blessed,  Hith. 
to  bless  one's  self;  ri'nr!  Ni.  to  be  2>loughed,  Hith.  to  keep  (one's  self)  quiet; 
1w;;r  Ni.  to  be  bound,  Hitli.  to  conspire. 

(3)  When  in  particular  verbs  two  species  have  substantially  the  same 
sense,  it  sometimes  happens  that  parts  only  of  each  are  in  use,  one  supple- 
menting the  deficiencies  of  the  other,  or  that  one  of  the  active  species, 
losing  its  proper  passive,  is  supplied  by  another  whose  correspon'ling  active 
is  wanting.  Thus  bb^  to  be  able  has  a  Kal  preterite  and  infinitive;  but  its 
future  is  Hophal  (strictly,  to  be  made  able,  but  in  usa»e  the  equivalent  of 
Kal);  rc3  to  be  pale,  cii3  to  draw  near,  Tjns  to  be  poured  out,  have  their 
futures  in  the  Kal  but  their  preterites  in  the  Niphal;  Vi'S  to  stumble,  has  a 
Kal  preterite  but  future  Niphal  (Ni.  pret.  only  in  Daniel);  Tin  to  lead  has 
the  preterite  and  imperative  Kal,  but  future  and  infinitive  Hiphil  (Hi.  pret. 
twice);  rii;^  to  wait  for  is  used  in  the  Piel  except  the  participle  which  is 
Kal;  fb"^  to  add  has  both  a  Kal  and  a  Hiphil  preterite,  which  are  S3-nonymous, 
but  onl}'  a  Hiphil  futuie.  A<;ain,  in  bn3  to  separate  and  lid  to  destroy,  the 
Kal  has  yielded  to  the  Hiphil  (strictly,  to  cause  separation,  destruction)  but 
the  Niphal  is  retained  as  its  passive;  "j'ri'^  to  bathe  and  pnT  to  sprinkle,  have 
in  the  active  the  Kal  form  and  iu  the  passive  the  Pual. 

(4)  All  verbs  are  found  in  one  or  more  of  these  species  or  conjugations, 
but  very  few  in  the  whole  of  them.  Of  the  1,332  triliteral  verbs  in  the 
Hebrew  Bible,  530  appear  in  some  one  species  only,  360  in  two  species, 
235  in  three,  118  in  four,  70  in  five,  12  in  .six,  and  but  7  in  the  entire  num- 
ber, viz.:  i'pz  to  cleave  nswuler,  riB^  to  uncovt-r,  n'in  to  he  sick,  5ni  to 
know,  ip"  to  bring  forth,  TpE  to  visit,  d"'n  to  he  high.  The  number  of 
species  in  which  a  given  verb  appears,  is  sometimes  limited  by  the  ne- 
cessity of  the  case,  as  when  its  meaning  will  not  admit  of  the  modifications 
denoted  by  all  the  species;  or  by  usage,  as  when  certain  species  are  dropped 
as  unnecessar3',  the  ideas  which  they  would  convey  being  expressed  in 
another  manner;  or  by  the  circumstance  that  in  the  small  volume  of  the 
Old  Testament,  examples  may  not  occur  of  all  the  species  which  actuallj- 
were  in  use. 

b.  Instances  occur  in  which  the  active  species,  and  less  frequently  the 
passives,  derive  their  meanings  not  directly  from  the  root,  but  from  sume 
noun  which  has  spnmg  from  it.  These  are  called  Denominatives.  Thus, 
"ns  K.  to  break  the  neck  (r)";y);  ^rb'J  K.  to  tithe  (":rs  ten);  'ib  to  make 
bricks  (n:^^);  2rb3  Ni.  to  be  possessed  of  understanding,  or,  according  to 
others,  to  be  devoid  of  understamling  (S:;^  heart) ;  "ri2  Pi.  to  act  as  priest 
(■ri);  •^t'^  Pi.  to  build  a  nest  (*;;?);  -37"3  Pu.  part,  square  (I'Z'^  four);  "ifsd? 
Pu.  almond-shaped  Cird);  ~Jr^  Pu.  dged  scarlet  (r'i'.ri);  "^-^  Hi.  to  snow 
(sVr);  "nsn  Hi.  to  give  ear  ("Vx);  nkn  Hi.  to  snare  (na);  r'i:2r\  Ho.  to  be 
salted  (rhi);  'T\-rii  Hith.  to  make  0)ic's  self  a  Jew  C^n^tn*;);  i;^'j:£n  Hith.  to 


§   81.  82  PERFECT  VERBS.  113 

supply  one^s  self  with  provision  (t^S).  A  verbal  form  may  occasionally 
arise  even  from  an  adverb,  njtbns  Ni.  part,  removed  far  away  (nxbn),  or 
au  interjection,  DrPI  Hi.  and  he  stilled  (Dti  hush!). 


Perfect  Verbs. 

§  81.  There  is  one  normal  standard  for  the  formation 
of  these  several  species  and  their  further  inflection,  to 
whicli  all  verbs  conform  unless  prevented  by  the  character 
of  their  radicals.  There  are  no  anomalous  or  irregular 
deviations  from  this  standard,  such  as  are  found  in  other 
languages,  for  which  no  explanation  can  be  given  but 
the  fact  ot  their  occurrence.  Whatever  deviations  do 
occur  result  from  the  presence  of  letters  in  the  root  which 
do  not  admit  ot  certain  combmations  and  forms,  and 
compel  the  adoption  of  others  in  their  stead.  Verbs  are 
hence  distinguished  into  perfect  and  imperfect.  They  are 
styled  perfect  when  their  radical  letters  are  capable  of 
entering  into  all  those  combinations  and  exhibiting  all 
those  forms  which  conformity  with  the  standard  requires. 
They  are  imperfect  when  the  root  contains  a  weak  letter, 
§  7.  2,  or  is  otherwise  so  constituted  as  to  lead  to  a  de- 
parture from  the  standard  inflections. 

§  82.  1.  In  perfect  verbs  the  Kal  is  formed  by  giving 
Pattahh,  or  more  rarely  one  of  its  compounds,  Tsere  or 
Hbolem,  to  the  second  radical  as  its  essential  or  cha- 
racteristic vowel,  and  to  the  first  radical  a  pretonic 
Kamets,  §  64.  2,  thus:  bbj^,  123,  -itii:. 

a.  Tbe  number  of  verbs,  perfect  and  imperfect,  whose  second  radical 
has  Tsere  or  Hholem  or  as  they  are  technically  called  middle  e  and 
middle  o,  is  quite  inconsiderable.  They  are  mostly  of  an  intransitive 
signification. 

(1)  The  following  have  Tsere,  viz.: 

IlipT  to  be  old.  takn  to  hew.  spij  to  he  unclean. 

van  to  delight.  "ihii  to  be  clean.  ^1  to  be  dry. 

8 


114  ETYMOLOGY.  §82 

S--   io  fear.  X?!^   trans,  or  iritran8.(Esth.  VX^   to  thirst. 

■123   (Isa.  24:  20  1^'Z)  to  7:5  i6-2tra.n3.)  to fill  ^hp^    (Isa.  33:  9   ^pj?) 

be  heavy.  or  be  full.  to  tvither. 

"I12J3  to  Je  riqht.  Vrq   to  die.  xib   to  hate. 

'rr^  &nd  ^zh  to  put  on.    bij  to  fade.  ht'V  tobebroughilow. 

(2)  The  following  liave  Tsere  in  pause,  §  65,  or  as  a  pretonic  vowel, 
§  64.  2,  before  a  suffix,  but  Pattahh  in  other  cases.  Such  as  only  occur  in 
pause  or  with  suffixes  are  printed  with  Tsere. 

inx  to  love.  "ipn  Io  lack.  "inp  to  be  holy. 

r"i'X  to  be  guilty.  "iB^  to    blush    (distin-  aA;:?  to  come  near. 

pS3  to  su-ell.                                  guished  from  isn  ajr'i  to  be  hungry. 

■•rr«  to  prevail.                              to  dig).  rrr  to  be  sated. 

";-5  to  be  or  become  great,  ry^  to  be  weary.  tTcb  to  rejoice. 

pr'n  to  cleave  to.  U'^';   fo  pofisess.  ni'j  to  forget. 

Vi;"!  to  grow  fat.  di'D   fo  be  pleasnvt.  "rir  <o  du-ell. 

snn  fo  cease.  tss  to  ie  stro)>g.  Dp":3  fo  fee  desolate. 

"('in  fo  ie  leavened.  ri^:j  fo  towe  j^pow,  fo  soo  fo  Aear. 

rsn  to  be  profaned.  prosper. 

Several  others  are  marked  with  Tsere  in  the  lexicon  of  Gesenius,  in 
which  that  vowel  does  not  occur. 

(3)  The  following  have  Hholem: 

"I'N  to  shine.  bi^  to  be  able.  a*-i   (Ps.  18:  15  n;^)  to 

-••is  to  be  ashamed.  TL'p"  to  snare.  shoot. 

2'b  to  be  good.  Vi:  (see%8Q.a)to  flow.  bi^S  (Gen.4:J:  U'^nbsii:) 

"S"^  to  dread.  "i:;?  to  be  small.  to  be  bereaved. 

2.  The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  D  to  the  letters 
of  the  root;  thus,  btppj,  which  by  §  61.  1,  becomes  bbpD. 

3.  The  Piel  and  Pual  are  formed  by  doubling  the 
second  radical  and  attaching  the  appropriate  vowels; 
thus,  btsp,  btop. 

4.  The  Hiphil  and  Hophal  are  formed  by  prefixing 
Ti  with  the  proper  vowels ;  thus,  b'bpM ,  bbpH. 

5.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  by  prefixing  TH  to  the  con- 
struct infinitive  of  the  Piel;  thus,  btopriri.  If  the  first 
radical  be  one  of  the  sibilants  C,  '^  or  "IT,  the  T\  of  the  j^re- 
fixed  syllable  will  be  transposed  with  it,  b^rcr7,  "Eridr!, 
:.~r'j:r.  If  the  first  radical  be  ::,  the  n  will  be  transposed, 


§  82  PEEFECT  VEEBS.  115 

and  in  addition  changed  to  t:,  e.  g,  p^X^'l'T.  If  the  first 
radical  be  one  of  the  linguals  1,  t:  or  m,  the  m  will  be 
assimilated  or  united  to  it  by  Daghesh-forte,  pl^l'liM,  ^htCH, 

a.  In  one  instance  njuia'iOPIl  Jer.  49:  3  ?!  remains  before  lIJ  without 
transposition,  which  would  bring  three  linguals  in  close  connection,  and 
once  it  is  assimilated  to  'iT,  Eccl.  7:  16  cii'iTi;'^,  elsewhere  Dpn'r"];  ri  is  like- 
wise assimilated  to  the  sibilant  "  in  the  only  Hithpael  form  in  which  that 
letter  is  the  initial  of  the  root  ^irTln  Isa  1:  16;  in  the  Aramaean  ]h'^]^  the  n 
is  transposed  and  changed  to  1.  In  one  instance  D'^pS'iri^  Judg.  19:  22  n 
remains  without  assimilation  before  'I.  The  n  may  either  be  assimilated  or 
not  to  the  initial  3  of  two  verbs  xi:3,  SiuD,  and  the  initial  D  of  two  ')^3,  "iS3. 
It  is  assimilated  to  the  3  of  023,  which  occurs  but  twice  in  the  Hithpael, 
to  the  3  of  "I'x:,  which  only  occurs  once  and  in  one  instance  to  "i,  viz.  D^anx 
Isa.  33:  10  but  tri'iin';  Dan.  11:  36. 

b.  The  seven  species  may,  agreeably  to  their  formation,  be  reduced  to 
three  with  their  derivatives,  viz.: 

Active  1.  Kal  2.  Piel  3.  Hiphil 

Passive  Pual  Hophal 

Middle  Niphal  Hithpael 

(1)  The  prefixed  letters  of  the  Niphal  and  Hithpael  3  and  T\  (wdth  fl 
prosthetic,  §  53.  1.  a)  are  probably  in  their  origin  fragmentary  pronouns 
signifying  self.  The  idea  primarily  suggested  is  that  of  performing  an 
action  upon  one's  self;  but  in  the  Niphal  usually,  and  in  the  Hithpael 
occasionally,  the  reflexive  signification  has,  as  in  certain  tenses  of  the  Greek 
middle  and  in  the  reciprocal  verbs  of  some  modern  languages,  given  place 
to  the  passive.  In  the  Aramaean  the  forms  with  a  prefixed  rx  have  not 
only  quite  lost  their  original  character  as  reflexives,  but  have  superseded 
all  other  passives. 

(2)  The  idea  of  causation  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal,  is  not  due,  as  in 
the  Indo-European  causatives,  to  the  introduction  of  a  .syllable  directly 
suggesting  it.  It  appears  to  be  primarily  another  intensive  form,  with  which 
usage  has  ordinarily  connected,  as  it  frequently  has  with  the  Piel,  the  notion 
of  productive  energy  or  the  quickening  of  an  intransitive  into  a  transitive 
As  in  the  Piel  and  its  derivatives,  the  idea  of  intensity  is  suggested  by 
giving  a  doubled  and  consequently  more  intense  pronunciation  to  the  central 
radical;  so  in  the  Hiphil,  by  a  like  symbolism,  the  power  of  the  root  is 
augmented  by  the  accession  of  a  new  initial  syllable,  the  weak  letter  tl 
merely  supporting  the  vowel,  like  the  corresponding  N  in  Aramaean  and  Arabic. 

(3)  The  distinction  between  active  and  passive  in  the  intensive  and 
causative  species  is  made  by  the  vowels  alone.  In  Arabic  all  the  active 
forms  have  the  vowel  o,  kafala,  kattala  etc.,  and  the  passives  u  and  i,  kutila, 
kuttila  etc.  So  in  Hebrew,  as  is  obvious  from  their  inflections,  a  was  orig- 
inally the  vowel  not   of  Kal  only  but  of  all  the  active  species,   bl^J?  and 


116  ETYMOLOGY.  §  83 

b'apn  beinp:  morlifirrxtions  of  knffal  and  haldnl.  "When  in  AraMc  i  or  «,  as 
in  Hebrew  e  or  (7,  is  the  second  vowel  of  the  first  or  Kal  species,  it  has  an 
intransitive  signification. 

§  83.  If  bt:|5  to  kill  be  taken  as  the  representative  of 
the  regular  verb,  the  various  species  with  their  signifi- 
cations will  be  as  follows,  viz.: 


1. 

Kal        , 

bb^ 

to  kill. 

2. 

Niphal 

bPi:? 

to  he  killed. 

3. 

Piel 

^^:? 

to  kill  mamj  or  to  massacre. 

4. 

Pual 

^'^P 

to  he  massacred. 

5. 

lliphil 

^"^pn 

to  cause  to  kill. 

6. 

Hophal 

bbpn 

to  he  caused  to  kill. 

7. 

Ilithpael 

-^pr>" 

to  kill  one^s  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite 
which  is  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification  therefore  is  he  has  killed, 
etc.  These  being  the  simplest  forms  of  the  various  species,  however,  and 
destitute  of  anj'  sign  of  tense  or  person,  are  commonly  used  to  represent 
the  .species;  and  in  this  sense  the  proper  equivalent  is  the  infinitive,  which 
is  the  form  used  for  designating  verbs  in  English. 

h.  The  verb  h'Sp  is  well  fitted  for  a  model,  and  is  now  generally  so 
emploj'ed.  The  consonants,  which  compose  its  root,  have  no  peculiarities 
to  interfere  with  its  inflection,  it  has  a  signification  capable  of  being  car- 
ried through  all  the  species,  and  as  it  exists  likewise  in  the  cognate  lan- 
guages, it  ofTers  a  good  basis  for  their  comparison.  It  occurs,  indeed,  but 
three  times  in  the  Bible,  Job  13:  15,  24:  14,  Ps.  139:  19,  and  in  but  one 
species;  still  the  verj'  rarity  of  its  occurrence  onlj'  restricts  it  more  com- 
pletely to  its  use  as  a  representative  or  typical  verb.  The  old  Jewish  model 
bys,  §  76.  2,  is  objectioniible  on  account  of  its  weak  letter  ~,  and  on  ac- 
count of  the  twofold  sound  of  its  initial  radical  D,  which,  with  its  Daghesh- 
lene,  might  prove  perplexing  to  beginners. 

c.  (1)  The  existence  of  other  and  less  usual  species  is  a  needless  as- 
sumption. The  Poel,  Pilel,  Pilpel  and  the  like,  are  not  additional  species 
but  identical  in  character  and  signification  with  those  already  n mied.  The 
more  copious  Arabic,  with  its  nicer  .shades  of  distinction,  has  greatly  mul- 
tiplied the  number  of  its  species  or  conjugations,  incorporating  into  its 
standard  jiaradlgm  forms  corresponding  to  some  of  these  which  the  Hebrew 
only  occasionally  employs.  In  the  latter  language,  however,  they  are  at  the 
utmost  alternate  forms  substituted  in  place  of  the  ordinary  ones,  and 
found  for  the  most  part  in  the  imperfect  verbs,  to  the  nature  of  whose 
radicals  they  owe  their  peculiarities  of  structure.  When,  as  is  the  case  in 
a  ver}'  few  instances,  there  is  a  double  form  to  a  particular  species  in  the 
same  verb,  usage  has  mostly  created  an  arbitrary  distinction  between  them, 


§  84  PEKFECT  VEBES.  117 

e.  g.  Pi.  "oWs  to  uproot  and  ^Tci  to  take  root;  Pi.  fi'J^  to  causi  to  stand, 
applied  to  covenants  and  oaths,  to  ratify,  and  tpip,  in  a  physical  sense,  to 
raise  up;  Hi.  Ij'iirt  to  cause  to  rest,  to  set  down,  and  n^ili  to  leave,  to  let 
alone.  There  is  no  objection  to  the  employment  of  these  names  as  con- 
venient designations  of  particular  modes  of  formation,  provided  it  is  under- 
stood that  they  mean  nothing  more. 

(2)  There  are  very  few  instances  of  what  may  be  called  compound 
species:  thus,  Niphal  of  Pual  '3x:.D  Isa.  59:  3,  Lam.  4:  14,  to  he  exceed- 
ingly defiled,  stronger  tlian  the  ^mple  Niphal  bx;:;  Niphal  of  Hithpael 
!|n£)j;0  Ezek.  23:  48,  nS|5  Deut.  21:  8,  iMWr:  Prov.  27:  15. 

§  84.  To  each  of  these  species  belong  a  preterite  or 
perfect  and  future  or  imperfect,  two  forms  of  the  in- 
finitive, an  absohite  and  a  construct,  a  participle,  and, 
except  to  the  Pual  and  Hophal  which  as  pure  passives 
cannot  exj^ress  a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  has 
both  an  active  and  a  passive  participle,  one  more,  con- 
sequently, than  the  other  species.  The  preterite  or 
j)erfect  of  each  species  is  the  form  already  described, 
§  83.  The  remaining  parts  are  formed  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  formed  by  changing  the 
last  vowel  in  Hiphil  and  Hophal  to  Tsere,  and  m  each  of 
the  other  species  to  Hholem,  observing  hkewise  that 
Hliirik  in  the  penult  of  Piel  and  Hiphil  is  to  be  changed 
to  Pattahh.  (See  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect  Verb.)  This 
rule  gives  to  Niphal  the  infinitive  bi:pp,  wliich  form  actu- 
ally occurs,  §  91.  6.  If,  however,  the  original  Sh'va  be 
suffered  to  remain  after  the  prefixed  3,  §  82.  2,  thus, 
bbpp,  a  prosthetic  m  will  be  required  in  order  to  its  pro- 
nunciation, §  53.  1.  a,  after  wliich  D  will  be  assimilated 
to  the  following  letter,  §  54.  2,  and  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
§  64.  2,  added  to  the  p  in  order  to  give  full  effect  to  the 
reduplication;  thus  ^bpn,  which  is  the  form  written  in 
the  paradigm. 

2.  The  construct  infinitive  is  formed  from  the  absolute 
in  the  Kal  by  rejecting  the  pretonic  Kamets,  §  82.  1,  in 


118  ETYMOLOGY.  §  84 

Niphal  by  changing  the  last  vowel  to  Tsere,  and  in  the 
remaining  species  by  making  the  last  vowel  conform  to 
the  corresponding  vowel  of  the  preterite. 

3.  Tlie  future  or  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  con- 
struct infinitive  by  the  appropriate  personal  prefixes;  if 
the  first  letter  of  the  infinitive  be  H,  it  is  rejected,  §  53.  3, 
and  its  vowel  given  to  the  prefix. 

a.  As  the  preterite  tense  is  in  certain  cases  used  of  the  present  or  the 
future,  and  the  future  of  the  present  or  the  past,  it  has  been  supposed  that 
primarily  and  radically  they  denote  the  mode  of  an  action  as  complete  or 
incomplete  rather  than  the  time  of  its  occurrence.  It  has  hence  become 
customary  to  designate  them  as  the  Perfect  and  the  Imperfect. 

b.  (1)  Some  verbs  take  Pattahh  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  Kal  future 
instead  of  the  Hholem  of  the  construct  infinitive.  This  is  particularly  the 
case  with  intransitive  verbs.  Such  as  have  Tsere  in  the  preterite  regularly 
take  Pattahh  in  the  future;  of  the  list  given  §  82.  1.  a.  (1)  and  (2)  but  three 
-kn,  ^23,  )z'^  take  Hholem,  and  two  "|'Sn  and  cid  take  indifferently 
Hholem  or  Pattahh.  Of  verbs  with  middle  5  in  the  preterite  three  bw, 
"it:pr  and  by:i  take  Pattahh  in  the  future;  the  rest  either  do  not  occur  in 
the  future,  or  have  imperfect  letters  in  their  root  which  obscure  their  trut 
formation. 

(2)  The  following  verbs  with  Pattahh  in  the  preterite  have  Pattahh 
likewise  in  the  Kal  future.  Those  which  do  not  occur  in  the  Kal  preterite, 
or  occur  only  in  forms  which  do  not  reveal  the  character  of  the  vowel  fol- 
lowing the  second  radical,  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk.  Verbs  having 
a  Pattahh  in  the  future,  which  is  due  to  imperfect  letters  in  the  root, 
(e.  g.  Pe  Yodh,  Ayin  (Juttural,  Lamedh  Guttural),  are  not  included  in 
this  list. 

bix  to  mourn.  ttjii  to  come  near.  *3i?-(^  to  be  attentive. 

*ri^N  to  learn.  Vi;3  (intrans.)  to  fall  off.     yhr^  to  lie  down. 

*yh^  to  be  strong.  pijj  to  kiss.                           Tin  to  rage  or  tremble 

•qix  to  be  angry.  *'qp3  to  be  poured.  *2'b';  to  be  wet. 

*b?n  to  become  vain.  p^D  (§  86.  b.)  to  ascend.      sin  to  ride. 

pin  to  be  strong.  DJr  to  love.  *"iEn  to  spread, 

DDH  to  be  wise.  "jias  to  smoke.  *apn  to  rot. 

T^ijn  to  be  dark.  *pr^  to  be  removed.             Sa'a  to  lie  down. 

*bp3  to  be  foolish.  *pi^  to  be  righteous.            o^'J  to  rule. 

Tcb  to  learn.  bBpj  to  be  lightly  es-  *c^"^  to  be  complete. 

piy2  to  be  sweet,  teemed.  *'^'V  to  grow  fat. 

(3)  The  following  with  Pattahh  in  the  preterite  have  both  Pattahh  and 
Hholem  in  the  future. 


g  85  PERFECT  VERB3.  119 

-lia  to  deal  trencher-  ntn  to  be  Jiot.  "r^ija  to  bite. 

ously.  'iri  to  be  gracious.  bys  to  do. 

-in  fut.  0,  to  tear,  fut.  *irnn  fut.  o,  to  plough,  -J'iiQ  to  strip  off. 

a,  to  resolve.  int.  a,  to  be  silent.  Cp;?  to  use  divination. 

Ti^n  (mostly  fut.  e)fo^o.  ^^^  to  tear.  "1S)5  i\it.d,tocutoff,i\xt. 

CVI   to  curse.  "^kl  to  form.                               a,  to  be  short. 

*iah'n  to  bind.  hb'O  to  trespass.  niia  to  rest. 

*dpn  fut.  0,  to  subdue,  TiJ  to  /tee.  din  to  be  finished. 

fut.  a,  to  be  weak,  nij  to  vow. 

c.  Some  imperfect  verbs,  chiefly  Pe  Yodh,  take  Tsere  in  the  second 
syllable  of  the  Kal  future,  e.  g.  2'^:,  inr 

4.  The  imperative  has  the  same  form  with  the  con- 
struct infinitive  except  in  Hiphil,  where  the  last  vowel  is 
Tsere  as  in  the  infinitive  absolute. 

a.  Where  the  Kal  future  has  Pattahh  or  Tsere  the  imperative  takes 
the  same. 

5.  The  Kal  active  participle  takes  the  form  bpp  and 
the  passive  bibp.  The  participle  of  the  Niphal  lengthens 
the  last  vowel  of  the  preterite  from  Pattahh  to  Kamets; 
those  of  the  other  species  are  formed  by  prefixing  7J  to 
the  construct  infinitive,  rejectmg  H  where  this  is  the 
initial  letter,  §  53.  3,  and  lengthening  the  last  vowel  where 
this  is  short. 

§  85.  1.  The  preterite  and  future  are  inflected  througli 
three  ptirsons,  the  imperative  only  in  the  second  person, 
a  command  presupposing  the  form  of  direct  address. 
There  are  also  distinct  forms  for  the  singular  and  plural 
numbers  and  for  the  masculine  and  feminine  genders. 
Verbal  inflections  are  made  by  means  of  pronominal  frag- 
ments added  to  the  end  of  the  preterite  and  imperative, 
and  for  the  most  part  prefixed  to  the  future. 

a.  The  following  are  the  fragments  used  for  this  purpose  in  the  various 
parts  of  the  verb: 

Preterite  or  Perfect  (^i^). 

(1)  Singular,  drd  pers.  masc.  The  third  person  alone  has  no  per- 
sonal ending  in  any  of  its  forms;  as  each  of  the  others  has  such  a  termi- 


1 20  ETYMOLOGY.  §  85 

nation,  none  was  needed  for  the  sake  of  distinction.  Nothing  more  was 
required  than  to  indicate  the  gender  and  number.  The  masculir, e  singular 
is  expressed  by  the  simple  funn  of  the  species  with  no  appended  sign 
whatever. 

3  fern.  The  original  feminine  termination  is  n_ ,  which,  appended  to 
the  masculine,  would  give  r^J^p,  a  form  used  before  suffixes,  §  101.  1,  in 
Lamedh  He  verbs  and  occasionally  elsewhere,  §  86.  b.  Commonly,  how- 
ever, in  verbs  as  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  the  final  n  is  dropped,  §  55.  2.  c, 
and  the  previous  vowel,  which  thus  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  is 
lengthened,  nl3:;p. 

2  masc.     The  appended  Pi  is  derived  from  riPX. 

2  fern,     n  from  rx. 

1  com.  T\  changed  from  "^3  of  "^rix;  compare  the  similar  relation  of 
the  suffixes  ?],  C:  to  the  pronouns  nnx,  D.~X  §  72.  The  Ethiopic  retains  the 
k  unaltered,  kutulku. 

Plural.  2  com.  The  original  plural  termination  §  71.  6.  is  a  nasal  D 
or  ■)  preceded  by  the  vowel  1.  The  full  ending  'i^l  is  still  found  in  a  very 
few  instances,  §  86.  b,  generally  the  "]  is  dropped  §  55.  2.  a. 

2  masc.  Dn  from  Qnx. 
2  fern.    ')n  from  "(rs. 

1  com.     W  from  «X. 


Future  or  Imperfect  {Tr\y). 


(2)  In  the  inflections  of  this  tense  the  signs  for  person  are  prefixed, 
those  for  gender  and  number  are  mostly  affixed;  the  fragmentar}-  pronoun 
stands  first  as  the  subject  and  the  verbal  predicate  assumes  the  appropriate 
forms  of  gender  and  number  to  agree  with  it. 

SiNQULAB.  3rd  pers.  masc.  The  prefixed  "]  is  from  Nin;  the  vowel  u, 
which  distinguishes  the  masculine  pronoun,  is  changed  to  the  correspond- 
ing semivowel  1,  and  this  at  the  beginning  of  words  becomes  *',  §  56.  2. 

3  fem.     f},  the  sign  of  the  feminine,  is  here  prefixed. 

2  mafiC.  and  fem.  Tlie  prefixed  Pi  is  from  npx,  "^nx,  from  the  latter  of 
which  is  derived  the  appended  i,  of  the  feminine. 

1  com.    The  prefixed  X  is  from  "^iX. 

Plural.  3  masc.  and  2  masc.  The  same  plural  termination  as  in  the 
preterite  is  appended  to  the  corresponding  singular  forms. 

3  fem.  and  2  fem.  The  feminine  plural  is,  as  in  the  pronouns  nsn, 
nsnx,  denoted  by  riD  appended  to  the  singular,  the  2  fem.  sing,  termina- 
tion *^.  being  dropped  as  superfluous. 

1  com.    The  prefixed  3  is  from  ^lix. 


§8i 


PERFECT  VERBS.  121 


Imperative  i^i^),  etc. 


(3)  No  designation  of  tlie  person  is  here  necessary  as  the  second  is  the 
only  one  in  use.  Gender  and  number  are  indicated  by  the  same  termina- 
tions as  in  the  corresponding  person  of  the  future.  The  future  forms  will, 
in  fact,  in  every  case  directly  yield  those  of  the  imperative  by  rejecting 
the  prefixed  R,  the  sign  of  the  second  person,  and  restoring  the  tl  in  those 
cases  in  which  it  has  been  suppressed. 

(4)  The  Infinitive  (^'ipo  fountain,  whence  other  forms  are  derived)  is 
an  abstract  verbal  noun  commonly  masculine,  but  sometimes  with  a  femi- 
nine termination. 

(5)  The  Participle  ("^il'sia  intermediate  between  the  preterite  and  the 
future)  shares  the  inflections  of  nouns  and  adjectives.  The  a  prefixed  in 
several  of  the  species  is  from  the  indefinite  pronouns  '^^  or  rto. 

2.  The  inflections  of  the  perfect  verb  in  all  the  species 
are  shown  by  Paradigm  II  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

a.  In  order  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  paradigm,  it  should  be 
observed  that  certain  changes  result,  from  attaching  the  personal  inflections 
to  the  verb,  which  are  to  be  explained  by  the  general  laws  of  sounds  and 
syllables. 

(1)  The  prefixes  of  the  future  occasion  no  changes  unless  they  stand 
before  n  which  is  rejected,  and  its  vowel  given  to  the  prefix,  §  53.  3,  e.  g. 
l^lbip';  for  l^iiiSti"^,  or  stand  before  a  vowelless  letter  wlien  the  Sh'va  of  the 
prefix  becomes  Hhirik,  §  61.  1,  thus  forming  a  new  syllable  to  which  the 
initial  radical  is  attached,  e.  g.  ^tip";  for  bbp\  "Where  K  of  the  first  person 
singular  would  receive  Hhirik,  it  takes  the  diphthongal  Seghol  instead, 
§  60.  1.  a  (5),  e.  g.  btipx,  bl?!^!!?- 

(2)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  vowel,  viz.,  n^  and  ^  of  the  feminine 
singular  and  1  of  the  plural,  occasion  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  in  the 
ultimate,  §  66.  2,  which  is  no  longer  needed,  except  in  the  Hiphil  whose 
long  ^_  is  retained  in  the  preterite  and  future,  and  takes  the  place  of  (  ) 
in  the  imperative,  e.  g.  f^Vjj5,  ^^ippn  but  n^'^bpri.  In  the  Kal  imperative 
the  rejection  takes  place  although  it  creates  a  necessity  for  the  formation 
of  a  new  syllable,  "i^IJp,  ^^pp  for  "^bl^p,  ^bpp  from  btip,  §  61.  1. 

(3)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  consonant  ri  or  of  a  simple  syllable 
P,  'V\,  W,  ii3  occasion  no  change,  except  the  compression  of  the  antecedent 
vowel,  which  now  stands  before  two  consonants,  to  (_)  in  the  preterite,  and 
from  1.  to  (..)  in  the  future,  ^h'pT^,  tirViipPi,  §61.4.  But  verbs  with  middle 
0  retain  the  Hholem  in  the  Kal  preterite,  ■'P^i''. 

(4)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  mixed  syllable  dW,  'Fl  occasion  the 
same  compression  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate,  and  inasmuch  as  they 
always  receive  the  accent,  §  33.  3,  they  likewise  cause  the  rejection  from 
the  penult  of  the  Kal  preterite  of  the  pretonic  Kamets,  which  owes  its  ex- 
istence to  the  proximity  of  the  tone  syllable,  §  82.  1,  Dnlpup  from  Vap. 


122  ETYMOLOGY.  §  86 


Remarks  on  the  Perfect  Verbs. 

EATi. 

§  86.  a.  Preterite.  Verbs  with  middle  Tsere  exchange  this  for  Pattahh 
opon  tlie  accession  of  a  personal  affix  beginning  with  a  consonant.  Those 
•with  middle  Hholem  retain  this  vowel,  unless  it  be  deprived  of  the  accent 
•when  it  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  T'^ii"',  T^T,  "^rir-"'.  ^^'?-■^^  1"P}r'21. 
The  second  vowel,  whatever  it  be,  is  regularly  dropped  before  affixes 
beginning  with  a  vowel,  but  here,  as  elsewhere  thronghout  the  paradigm, 
is  restored  and  if  need  be  lengtliened  on  the  reception  of  a  pause  accent, 
e.  g.  'nip^Q,  ii^-fSn,  ^hb\  The  words  ^^i-J  Jndg.  5:  5,  :^rT2  Isa.  6:^:  19,  64:  2, 
are  bvKinichi,  Mikhlol  fol.  5  regarded  as  Kal  preterites  from  bi:  flowed,  in 
which  case  the  second  must  be  added  to  the  list  of  forms  with  Daghesh- 
forte  emphatic,  §  24.  c,  by  Gesenius  as  Niphal  preterites  from  ViT  shook, 
comp.  n^riJ  Gen.  11:  7,  ^iT'is  Am.  3:11  from  ^Ba,  tT3. 

b.  SiKG.  3  fern.  The  old  form  with  n  is  found  constantly  in  Lamedh 
He  verbs,  occasionally  in  Lamedh  Aleph,  and  in  two  instances  besides,  rtTX 
Deut.  32:  36  (with  the  accent  on  the  penult  because  of  a  following  mono- 
syllable, §  35.  1),  and  rr:3  Ezek.  46:  17  from  nri.  The  vowel  letter  X  is 
once  written  in  place  of  n,  xri3?.  Ezek.  31:  5  K'fhibh,  §  11.  1.  a. 

2  niasc.  The  vowel  letter  ti  is  sometimes  appended  as  in  the  pronoun 
iiPS  from  which  the  termination  is  taken,  npn52  Mai.  2:  14,  iir::;'!:'^  Jer. 
17:4;  so  in  other  species  besides  Kal,  nrsODJ  Gen.  31:30,  ?ir>'n';  Job 
38:  12  E'ihibh,  njnr:jri  Ps.  73:  27.  In  the  last  example  the  n  of  the  root 
is  united  by  Daghesh-forte  with  the  n  of  the  personal  affix;  this  union 
regularly  occurs  between  roots  ending  with  T\  and  affixes  beginning  with 
the  same  letter  'T\^'4^  Job  23:  17,  rii'^n  Ps.  89:  45,  ''Pr'^'n  Isa.  16:  10, 
Cnsdn  Ex.  5:  5,  nri  Ezek.  28:  8,  Tp  Gen.  19:  19,  "^fnpnrn  Jer.  49:  37. 

2  fem.  The  full  termination  'V)  of  "^nx  is  frequently  added  in  Jeremiah 
and  Ezekiel  and  occasionally  elsewhere,  ''TTirl  Ezek.  16:  22,  and  repeatedly 
in  the  same  chapter,  "^1"!^'^  Ruth  3:3;  so  in  other  species  '^n~i2'n  Jer.  3:  5, 
"n-i'bb  Jer.  13:  21.     See  also  Jer.  4:  19,  22:  23,  46:  11. 

1  com.  The  vowel  letter  "^  is,  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule,  §  11.  1.  a, 
omitted  in  four  instances  in  the  K'thibh,  though  it  is  supplied  b}'  the  K'ri, 
n?^';  Ps.  140:  13,  Job  42:  2,  n-^b  1  Kin.  8:  48,  prr  Ezek.  16:  59;  and  per- 
haps P;i"irN  Ps.  16:  2  may  in  like  manner  be  for  "'ri'i'bx. 

Plcr.  3  com.  The  full  ending  ',!|  only  occurs  in  ^V"}^  Deut.  8:3,  16, 
•jsifrs  Isa.  26:  16,  and  ',^'qpi  Isa.  29:  21  from  Cp;|,  the  restoration  of  the 
Hholem  before  the  pause  accent  causing  the  rejection  of  the  Kamets,  which 
is  a  pretonic  vowel  and  can  only  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the 
accent;  the  form  is  thus  sufficiently  explained  without  the  necessity  of 
assuming  it  to  be  the  future  of  a  verb  Cip  which  nowhere  else  occurs.  An 
otiant  N,  §  16.  1,  is  twice  added  to  this  person,  as  is  regularly  the  case 
in  Arabic,    ^'^zhri   Josh.  10:  24,    X^hx   Isa.  28:  12.     The   forms    of  similar 


§  87,  88  EEMAEKS  ON  THE  PERFECT  VERBS.  123 

appearance  xvi;  Ps.  139:  20,  N^ij-i  Jer.  10:  5,  are  in  reality  of  different 
character  as  the  X  is  in  these  a  radical,  whose  vowel  has  been  shifted  to 
the  preceding  letter,  §  57.  2.  (3).  The  occasional  omission  of  the  vowel 
letter  1  from  the  K'thibh,  e.  g.  n^X  1  Sam.  13:  1 9,  ^2p  Esth.  9:  27,  HrS'iJ 
Deut.  21:  7,  iT^n  Josh.  18:  12.  14.  19,  tr?^.'^  Ezek.  35:  12  indicates  a 
difference  of  reading.  The  words  of  the  text  are  in  the  singular,  and 
require  the  pointing  "irx  etc.  t^is'^j  etc.;  the  K'ri  has  sub.stituted  ^n^X, 
!';S':3  etc.  for  the  sake  of  a  more  exact  concord  of  the  verbs  with  their  sub- 
jects, §  48. 

2  masc.  and  fern.   There  is  no  example  of  a  verb  middle  o  in  the  second 
person  plural;   the  forms  in  the  paradigm  are  inferied  from  analogy,    to 
indicate  which  they  are  enclosed  in  parentheses.    In  nDrizVrn  Am.  4:  3,  M 
is  added  to  the  2  fern,  as  to  the  corresponding  pronoun. 

1  com.  "When  the  last  radical  is  "]  it  combines  with  the  3  of  this  person 
by  Daghesh-forte,  ^ISrJ  Gen.  34:  16,   !isy':33  2  Chron.  14:  10,  ^3^  Judg.  19:  13, 

§  87.  iNFmrriVE.  The  Hholem  of  the  construct  is  usually  written  with- 
out 1,  is'2  Isa.  33:  1,  though  not  invariably,  "{y^  and  'pi:^,  113^3  and  "di-S, 
and  before  Makkeph  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  64.  1,  "^3  Gen. 
36:  31,  -nop  Ezek.  21:  26.  28.  34,  — 112?  Nah.  2:  1.  The  Hholem'of  the 
absolute  infinitive  is  usually  though  not  invariably  written  with  1,  e.  g.  Ti^a 
Isa.  48:  8  but  3i':3  Lev.  15:  24,  and  is  immutable.  The  construct  infinitive 
has  Pattahh  in  place  of  Hholem  in  2ij  1  Kin.  1:  21  et  passim  and  bS'J 
Eccles.  12:4.  The  feminine  form  of  the  construct  infinitive  occurs  repeat- 
edly in  imperfect  though  it  is  of  rare  occurrence  in  perfect  verbs,  e.  g. 
n;i;a'n  Deat.  11:  22,  Hnr^  Ex.  29:  29,  nr-if?  Ex.  36:  2,  frj-i-a  Ezek.  21:  18, 
niji-i  Lev.  20:  16,  nxr::,  rii:rx,  nxn'^,  nix;!  Jer.  31:  12,  T\-yzr.  Ezek.  16:  5, 
nx'!;::  Lev.  15:  32.  The  prep,  b  is  invaiiably  prefixed  to  infinitives  of  thia 
description  with  the  exception  of  f^Uw'J  Hos.  5:  2.  In  Pe  Yodh  .and  Lamedh 
He  verbs  the  feminine  is  the  customary  form. 

§  88.  FuTUEE.  3  masc.  The  Hholem  is  commonly  written  without  Vav, 
though  often  with  it  Tj^O"^,  in'ri^"]  andnin:";,  and  before  Makkeph  is  shortened 
to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  64.  1,  ""^P";  Isa.  32:  1,  the  Vav  being  in  such  cases 
rejected  by  the  K'ri  if  found  in  the  K'thibh,  e.  g.  "mniX  Hos.  8:  12;  in 
-biaa*;  Josh.  18:  20  the  Hholem  remains.  The  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is 
rejected,  as  is  the  case  throughout  the  paradigm,  upon  the  reception  of  a 
vowel  affix,  §  66.  2,  unless  retained  or  restored  by  the  pause  accent,  §  65.  2, 
^sbp";  Prov.  8:  15,  ^"it'~n  Jer.  10:  2;  twice,  however,  instead  of  rejection 
Hholem  is  changed  to  Shurek  JiiiiS'IJ"]  Ex.  18:  26,  "'n^arn  Ruth  2:  8.  A  like 
form  appears  in  the  K'thibh,  Prov.  4:  16  ibldD"^. 

3  few.  Tbe  s'gn  of  the  feminine  is  in  two  instances  added  both  at  the 
beginning  and  the  end  of  the  verb,  viz.:  tirxiiin  Deut.  33:  16,  Tirxinn  Job 
22:  21,  paragogic  tl^  being  appended  to  the  former,  §  97.  1,  and  a  pro- 
nominal suffix  to  the  latter.  A  like  duplication  of  the  sign  of  the  second 
person  feminine  occurs  in  rxin  1  Sam.  25:  34  K'ri,  where  the  K'thibh  has 
the  fuller  ending  inxsn,  comp.  §§  168.  1,  171.  1. 


124  ETYMOLOGY.  §  88 

2  fern.  I  is  sometimes  added  to  the  lonj^  vowel  with  which  this  person 
ends  'Pn'2'^n  Ruth  2:  8,  fk^^  Ruth  3:  4,  I'^'iSWrFl  1  Sam.  1:  14,  ■'^^■^nn  Isa. 
45:  10.  Occasionally  the  feminine  ending  is  omitted  and  the  masculine 
form  used  instead,  e.  g.  Ti'^rP'  Is*.  57:  8. 

1  com.  pQX  Ps.  139:  8,  though  hy  some  grammarians  referred  to  pp:, 
is  probably  for  "BipX  from  pBo,  the  liquid  b  being  excluded,  and  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative  inserted  in  the  previous  letter,  §  53.  3. 

Pluk.  2  masc.  and  3  masc.  The  full  plural  termination  ll  is  of  more 
frequent  occurrence  here  than  in  the  preterite,  the  vowel  of  the  second 
radical  b.ing  either  retained  or  rejected,  '^Hlipl  Ruth  2:  9,  '|nh"n  Josh. 
24:  16,  'y\^^rr^,  Ex.  9:  29,  "Bs":;-;  Josh.  4:  6,  'ydpY.,  "I'i'S'^"!  Ps.  104:  28^  lasd"^ 
1  Sam.  2:  22,  Josh.  2:  8,  "^n'^rri  Dent.  11:  22,  "f'^'SXn  Jer.  21:  3;  so  in  oUier 
species,  'i^rrs"  Job  19:  23,  '|V.iS;5-;  Job  21 :  24,  "jinanri  Gen.  32:  20  and  l^nsTPl 
Ps.  58:  2,  ')Tr;5^n  2  Kin.  6:  19,  p'j'rsri  Mic.  2:  8,  I'jIlirQr'^  Job  9:  6.  It  is 
chiefly  found  at  the  end  of  a  clause  or  verse,  the  pausal  emphasis  delight- 
ing in  lengthened  forms,  or  before  words  beginning  with  a  weak  letter, 
to  separate  the  final  vowel  more  completely'  from  that  of  the  following 
initial  syllable.  In  the  judgment  of  Nordheimer  DVwi"^  Isa.  35 :  1  preserves 
this  ending  in  a  still  older  form;  Ewald  thinks  the  final  "j  has  been  assimil- 
ated to  the  initial  "O  of  the  following  word,  §  55.  1;  possibly  however, 
D  may  here  be,  as  it  usually  is,  the  3  plur.  suffix,  and  may  be  rendered  as 
in  the  common  English  version  shall  be  glad  for  them. 

3  fern.  In  a  very  few  cases  the  initial  "^  of  the  masculine  form  is  re- 
tained, the  distinction  of  gender  being  sufficiently  marked  by  the  termina- 
tion nnii";;  Dan.  8:  22,  nj-ani  Gen.  30:  38,  nj-it-i  1  Sam.  6:  12;  or,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  termination  "  of  the  masculine  is  retained,  the  gender  being 
sufficiently  indicated  by  the  prefixed  r\  ;  inusn  Jer.  49:  11,  ^ilpn  Ezek. 
37:  7;  sometimes  the  gender  is  neglected  entirely  and  the  masculine  form 
used  for  the  feminine,  e.  g.  Vil't:"!")  Hos.  14:  1.  The  assumption  that  the 
3  fern.  plur.  is  used  for  the  3  fern.  sing,  in  n:xnpri  Ex.  1:  10,  nii^n  Job 
17:  16,  '^^t^t'ri  Isa.  28:  3,  n5"iiTl"ri  Isa.  27:  11,  nrnrrn  Judg.  5:  26,  is  un- 
necessar}';  in  the  first  passage  ninlp'O,  the  subject  of  the  verb,  is  used  in 
a  collective  sense,  ivars  shall  occur.  Comp.  1  Kin  5:  17;  the  others  are  to 
be  similarly  explained  with  the  exception  of  the  last,  where  ii:  may  be  the 
suffix  with  Nun  epenthetic  in  place  of  the  more  usual  form  ninb'CJn  her 
hand — she  puts  it  forth.  Comp.  Obad.  ver.  13. 

2  atid  3  fern.  The  vowel  letter  n  is  occasionally  in  the  Pentateuch,  and 
more  rarely  in  other  books,  omitted  from  the  termination  nj,  particularly 
when  there  are  other  vowel  letters  in  the  vord,  ^T^nrtni  Gen.  27:  1,  ixan 
Gen.  30:  38,  ;i-"?n*  Gen.  33:  6,  ^'^zm  Ezek.  3:  20,  ^'p^HP.  nine  times  in  the 
Pentateuch,  three  times  in  Ezekiel,  and  once  in  1  SamueL 

When  the  root  of  the  verb  ends  with  *  this  is  united  by  Daghesh-forte 
with  the  affix  n:,  nrsrn  Ezek.  17:  23,  nsiipn  Ezek.  32: 16,  or  without  Da- 
ghesh,  §  25,  H:arn  Ruth  l :  13,  :!^:^Nri  Isa.  60:  4,  nihn  Ps.  71:  23  in  most 
editions.    So  in  the  fem.  plur.  imperative,  Hsixn  Gen.  4:  23. 


§  89, 90  EEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEEFECT  VEEBS.  125 

§  89.  Ijipekative.  Sing.  masc.  The  Hholem  of  the  last  sylljihle,  as  in 
the  future  and  infinitive  construct,  is  mostly  written  without  1,  e.  g.  1p3, 
j'et  not  always,  "S'iJ  and  TpSp;  before  Makkeph  it  is  shortened  to  Kamets 
Hhatuph  ~Tj^^  Judg.  9 :  14.  It  may  perhaps  be  similarly  shortened  without 
Makkeph  in  l^p  Judg.  19:  5,  comp.  ver.  8,  §  19.  2.  b,  or  the  vowel  may  be 
Kamets  lengthened  from  Pattahh  by  the  accent,  which  does  occur,  though 
rarely,  with  conjunctives,  §  65.  6. 

Fern.  sing,  and  masc.  plur.  The  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  commonly 
Hhirik,  but  under  the  influence  of  the  rejected  Hholem  it  is  occasionally 
Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  61.  1,  iib?3  Judg.  9:  10,  ^lir^  Ezek.  32:  20  (but  ^i-^ri 
Ex.  12:  21,  for  the  Methegh  see  §  45.  2),  ^fe  Zeph.  3:  14,  ^n");^  Mic.  1:  16, 
and  (with  1  retained  in  the  K'thibh)  ''^q^'op^  1  Sam.  28:  8,  Judg.  9:  12.  Upon 
the  restoration  of  the  original  vowel  by  the  pause  accent,  the  vowel  under 
the  first  radical  is  dropped  as  no  longer  necessary,  !i::s^  Zech.  7:  9,  ^nbS 
Nah.  2 :  9.  When  the  third  radical  is  an  aspirate  it  rarely  receives  Daghesh- 
lene  in  this  mood  though  preceded  b3'  Sh'va,  §  22.  a.  (1);  such  cases  as 
•^Bian  Isa.  47:  2,  ''BpX  Jer.  10:  17,  are  exceptional. 

Fern.  plur.  The  final  vowel  n^  is  dropped  in  '^vbd  Gen.  4:  23,  §  61.  2; 
occasionally  tl  is  not  written  though  the  vowel  remains,  ■jsi'a  Euth  1:  9, 
/iXnp  Euth  1 :  20. 

§  90.  Participles.  Active.  The  Hholem  of  the  first  syllable  is  written 
indifferently  with  or  without  Vav,  153  and  l.^'is,  mostly  without  when  addi- 
tions are  made  to  the  word.  In  HlS'si'S  Prov.  25:  19  Shurek  is  substituted 
for  Hholem,  unless,  as  Ewald  suggests,  it  is  a  Pual  participle  with  "O  omitted; 
or,  as  others  propose,  it  is  to  be  taken  as  an  abstract  noun.  The  Tsere  of 
the  second  syllable  is  written  without  "^  except  a'^sb  2  Kin.  8:  21;  it  is 
shortened  to  Seghol  in  Dbiji  Isa.  41 :  7,  upon  the  recession  of  the  accent, 
and  to  Pattahh  in  'lix  Deut.  32:  28.  fpri'in  Ps.  16:  5  and  Tipii  Isa.  29:  14, 
38 :  5,  Eccles.  1:18  have  been  improperly  regarded  as  participles  with  Hhirik 
in  place  of  Tsere.  The  former  is  the  Hiph.  fut.  of  the  verb  Ti"?^,  which  is 
found  in  Arabic  though  it  occurs  only  in  this  place  in  Hebrew,  and  means 
tliou  wilt  enlarge;  the  latter  is  the  ordinary  Hiphil  future  of  ^ip^ ,  and  the 
construction  is  elliptical,  I  {am  he  who)  will  add.  Participles  are  rarely 
formed  from  neuter  verbs,  yet  bi;  fading,  D'clli  desolate,  Qlil"  strong;  verbal 
adjectives  of  the  same  form  with  the  preterites  middle  e  and  0  being  mostly 
used  instead,  xlio  full,  "jg't  old,  "li'^  afraid. 

Passive.  This,  in  the  few  cases  in  which  it  is  in  use  in  intransitive 
verbs,  has  the  sense  of  the  active,  UJiib  and  ili^zh  wearing,  )z'i^  and  "^DTIJ 
dtvelling,  ffiaa  trusting ;  there  are  occasional  instances  of  the  same  thing 
in  transitive  verbs,  "ilDT  remembering,  l^lfix  holding.  The  last  vowel  is  with 
few  exceptions  as  Dps  Deut.  32:  34,  Qn'IJ,  CXJ  written  with  Vav. 

There  are  a  very  few  instances  in  which  participles  appear  to  be  in- 
flected in  the  different  persons  by  means  of  the  terminations  proper  to  the 
preterite.  This,  although  common  in  Syriac  and  Palestine  Aramseic,  occurs 
in  Hebrew  only  in  the  following  examples. 


126  ETYMOLOGY.  §  91 

2  fem.  sing.  Fi'iB''  Gen.  16:  11,  Judg.  13:  5.  7;  and  with  the  fuller  end- 
ing '^ri3i">,  "iPJIi^n  Jer.  22:  23,  ''W:riu  Jer.  51:  13.  The  punctuators  must 
have  regarded  these  terininatiou.s  as  i)ersonal  inflections,  because  the  simple 
form  of  the  feminine  participle  and  that  which  it  always  has  when  joined 
with  a  noun  of  the  third  person,  is  nVi"  Gen.  17:  19,  and  with  ">  paragogic 
'V\'zry».  Hos.  10:  11  or  in  the  K'thibh  Vriji  Ezek.  27:  3. 

2  htasc.  plur.  dn'^''.nn"j"3  Ezek.  8:  16,  the  Hithpael  participle  of  nti'ij. 
The  prophet  instead  of  simply  describing  their  act,  maj'  be  supposed  to 
repeat  the  language  of  the  idolaters  themselves  regarding  it,  thus  indicating 
their  complacency  in  their  iniquitous  worship,  and  they  (said  to  one  an- 
other) ?/e  are  ivorshipping ',  the  anomalous  word,  which  is  less  surprising  in 
Ezekiel  than  it  would  be  elsewhere,  being  indicative,  as  Lightfoot  and 
others  suggest,  of  the  anomalous  character  of  the  transaction.  Such; 
however,  is  the  abruptness  and  the  difficulty  of  the  construction  that  the 
greater  number  of  interpreters  assume  an  error  of  the  text  for  D"'inr)':3o  the 
proper  plural  of  the  participle. 

3  plur.  !'^31.^^;2'?  i^^^y  «^c  cursing  me,  Jer.  15:  10.  Kimchi  explains  this 
word  as  a  compound  of  the  roots  bip?  to  curse,  and  T'^jp  to  treat  as  vile; 
Gesenius,  as  a  confusing  of  two  distinct  readings,  the  participle  "^^l^Vi?^  and 
the  preterite  "^S^iVsp;  and  Ewald  changes  the  text  to  ■^;?^ri?p,  though  his 
conjecture  is  unsustained  by  a  single  manuscript,  and  Nun  epenthetic  never 
occurs  with  participles.  The  word  maj'  be  regarded  as  the  plural  of  the 
participle  inflected  after  the  manner  of  the  preterite,  with  the  added  suffix, 
so  that'the  proper  pointing  would  be  '':ipbj?"3.  It  has  been  plausibly  suggested 
that  the  initial  "Q  belongs  to  the  preceding  word,  comp.  2  Sam.  23:  6,  and 
that  the  verb  is  a  preterite. 

NIPHAL. 

§  91.  a.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  Some  copies  have  S'haJ  Jer.  50:  23 
with  Seghol  under  the  prefixed  Nun  for  "tiSJ. 

h.  Infinitive.  The  following  may  be  mentioned  as  examples  of  the 
shorter  form  of  the  absolute  w|B;?  Gen.  31 :  30,  Cn33  Judg.  11 :  25,  ri5a3  1  Sam. 
2:  27,  ii"^"?  2  Sam.  1:6;  of  the  longer  form  given  in  the  paradigm  'pji} 
Jer.  32:  4,  which  once  appears  with  prosthetic  X  in  place  of  n  Ezek.  14:  3 
ttj'.nx,  §  53.  1.  a.  The  construct  infinitive  usually  has  Tsere  "E'i'n  Ezek. 
16:  36,  but  is  in  one  instance  Cl^in  Ps.  68:  3,  formed  as  in  Kal  by  rejecting 
the  pretonic  Kameta  from  the  absolute.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  the 
construct  form  used  for  the  absolute  ij^Qri  1  Kin.  20:  39,  "i^"i"n  Deut.  4:  26. 
The  prosthetic  n  is  commonly  retained  after  prefixed  prepositions  "'ijari? 
which  are  less  closely  connected  with  the  word  than  the  formative  prefixes 
of  the  future;  it  is,  however,  rejected  in  "iS'^ra  Prov.  24:  17,  comp.  C^rsna 
Dan.  11  :  34,  three  times  in  nix'ib  Ex.  34:  24,  Deut.  31:  11,  Isa.  1:  12 
(where  some  suspect  that  the  infinitive  is  Kal  and  propose  to  point  n"ix"ib) 
but  nisnnb  2  Sam.  17: 17,  and  in  nbVV  Ex.  10:  3.  The  Tsere  of  the  last  svl- 
lable  of  the  construct  infinitive,  as  well  as  of  the  future  and  imperative 
which  are  firmed   from  it,  is  shortened  to  Seghol  upon  losing  it«  accent. 


§  92  REMARKS  ON  THE  PERFECT  VERBS.  127 

-irsn  Job  34:  22,  nr|ri  Judg.  9:  38,  l;^-]  Eccles.  7:  26,  rarely  to  Pattahh, 
2jrn  Job  18:  4.  In  the  Imperative  "lotfl  tlie  form  with  Seghol  is  the  usual 
one,  that  with  Tsere  only  occurring  in  Isa.  7:  4.  The  pretonic  Kamets  of 
this  species  is  singular  in  not  being  liable  to  rejection  on  the  shifting  of  the 
tone,  e.  g.  ci-iiin  Ezek.  21:  29,  "(Wnsi  Ps.  37:  9. 

c.  Future  Sing.  1  com.  The  prefixed  K  occasionally  has  Hhirik,  uS^'S 
Ezek.  20:  36,  1  Sam.  12:  7,  dn^S  Ezek.  14:  3,  riip3X,  MniSX  but  "n^sx. 

Plur.  fern.  Tsere  rarely  remains  in  the  second  syllable  n:;."Pi  Ruth 
1  :  13,  being,  as  in  the  Piel  preterite,  commonly  changed  to  Pattahh  before 
the  concurring  consonants,  na^sNFl  Jer.  24:  2,  so  with  a  pause  accent, 
nDa:v^-n  Isa.  13:  16  K'ri,  Zech.  14:  2  K'ri,  ^IJO^'^O  Isa.  28:  3;  the  first,  as 
the  original  form,  is,  however,  placed  in  the  paradigm. 

d.  Imperative.  Ewald  regards  ^lispJ  Isa.  43:  9,  Joel  4:  11,  Jll^S  Jer. 
50:  5,  as  imperatives  without  the  usual  f\  prosthetic;  Bottcher  as  preterites 
used  in  a  precative  sense;  both  assumptions  appear  to  be  needless  and  un- 
warranted. 

e.  Participle.  In  1  Sam.  15:  9  rtTap?  contemptible,  is  in  form  a  Niphal 
participle  from  the  noun  Mj.H'g  contempt. 


PIEL. 

§  92.  a.  The  intensive  species  is  usually  formed  by  doubling  the  second 
radical;  in  Vp33  Ezek.  28:  23,  and  the  passive  form  ^^^X  the  third  radical 
is  doubled  instead,  an  expedient  resorted  to  repeatedly  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs 
and  occasionally  in  Ayin  guttural.  In  ^D^irrm  Ps.  88:  17  both  radicals  are 
doubled;  the  entire  second  syllable  is  repeated  in  ifl'lHp  Ps.  38:  11,  "n^Tari 
Lam.  2:11,  1 :  20  a  passive  form,  as  shown  by  the  Hhateph-Kamets,  §  82. 
5.  b  (3),  and  in  ^laffl^rix  Hos.  4:  18,  which  is  probably  to  be  read  as  one 
word,  §  43.  &;  according  to  the  division  in  the  Massoretic  text,  ^liri  is  a 
separate  word,  and  is  the  imperative  of  ^ih^  to  give,  though  this  is  always 
elsewhere  pointed  ^dti.  In  rj'^S'S^  Ps.  45:  3,  the  first  syllable  might  seem 
to  be  repeated;  but  as  such  a  formation  would  be  unexampled,  it  is  more 
probably  a  passive  (hence  o  under  the  first  letter)  of  Hs'^S";,  which  redupli- 
cates the  last  syllable  of  n 3^  =  131  §  170. 

b.  Intensity  may  likewise  be  denoted  without  a  reduplication  by  insert- 
ing the  long  vowel  Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  root.  This  is  often 
done  in  Ayin  doubled  verbs,  but  only  in  the  following  instances  in  others, 
pret.  'inr'i'ii  1  Sam.  21:  3,  •Q^'d  Isa.  40:  24,  ^hrh  Ps.  77:  18,  iniiiy  Isa. 
10:  13  fut.  ^sb-;  Hos.  13:  3  inf.  abs.  iih  and  inh  Isa.  59:  13,  inf.  const. 
nio-^ia  Am.  5:  11,  ^ar^  "^'"^^^1  Job  9:  15,  ''D^lb^  Ps.  101:  5  K'thibh.  These 
are  called  Poel  forms,  and  those  in  the  preceding  paragraph  Pilel,  Pulal, 
Pealal,  etc.  to  denote  their  peculiar  formation.  They  are  in  reality,  however, 
only  modified  forms  of  the  Piel,  whose  signification  they  share. 

c.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  The  original  Pattahh  of  the  first  syllable 
§  82.  5.  b  (3)  is  preserved  in  "^Ji-i  Gen.  41:  51.     The   second  syllable   has 


128  ETYMOLOGY.  §  93 

Seghol  in  lij'i  (in  pause  "'2'n),  '^B2,  D-3  (twice  023),  Pattahh  in  "lix,  brj 
(b'na  in  pause),  pTPi,  ;'^D,  "dtip,  0?p,  BSJ  (in  pause  n^asi'  Isa.  19:  21),  yjs'::, 
and  before  Makkeph  in  "1H^,  "^2?3  (J^?.^  in  pause);  a  appears  likewise  in 
the  pausal  form  Mriap  Mic.  1 :  7.  The  Tsere  is  always  retained  in  the  infini- 
tive construct  and  future,  and  with  the  exception  of  a^Q  Ps.  65:  10,  in  the 
imperative;  though  throughout  the  species  it  is  shortened  to  Seghol  upon 
losing  the  accent,  r,-i3p  Deut.  30:  3,  "d-ip  Ex.  13:  2,  'Cr::^  Deut.  7:  10. 

d.  Infinitive.  The  primitive  form  of  the  infinitive  absolute  is  of  rare 
occurrence,  e.  g.  "iS:  Ps.  118:  18,  XSp  1  Kin.  19:  10,  XS".  Ex.  21:  19,  r\''i'^^ 
Josh.  24:  10.  Most  commonly  it  has  Tsere  in  the  second  syllable  like  the 
infinitive  construct,  nsx  Jer.  12:  17,  lab  Jer.  32:  33,  •Si-2  Jer.  39:  18,  ysp 
Mic.  2:  12,  n|'j  Ex.  21:  36;  and  in  one  instance  it  has  Hhirik  in  the  first 
syllable  like  the  preterite  "j'SD  2  Sam.  12:  14.  There  is  no  need  of  assum- 
ing a  i^imilar  form  for  the  infinitive  construct  in  ylf}  Lev.  14:43,  which  can 
readily  be  explained  as  a  preterite.  Tsere  of  the  construct  is  shortened  to 
Seghol  before  Makkeph,  ~"i3'n  Isa.  59:  13,  or  on  the  recession  of  the  accent 
pns  Gen.  39:  14,  17,  and  in  one  instance  besides,  Crh  Jude.  5:  8.  There 
are  a  few  examples  of  the  construct  infinitive  with  a  feminine  termination, 
n'-^'Q^  Lev.  26:  18,  nnxiT  Ps.  147:  1,  r=|'r  Isa.  6:  13,  Tiinp'n^  Ezek.  16:  52. 

e.  Future  Sing.  1  com.  X  is  commonly  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh; 
it  has,  however,  the  diphthongal  Hhateph-Seghol  in  JT^JX  Lev.  2t>:  33, 
§  60.  3.  b,  and  draws  to  itself  the  full  vowel  which  has  hence  arisen  to  a 
preceding  1,  in  Clb?DX1  Zech.  7:  14  for  DSrDx;i,  §  60.  3.  c. 

Plur.  2  and  3  fern.  Tsere  under  the  second  radical  is  sometimes  changed 
to  Pattahh,  thoui;h  not  with  the  same  frequency  as  in  the  Niphal,  rtjwli^n 
Isa.  13:  18,  but  ■^3"l2^n  Job  27:  4,  and  in  pause  Prov.  24:  2. 

PUAIi. 

§  93.  a.  Of  the  vowels  proper  to  the  first  syllable  of  the  passive,  §  82. 
5.  b  (3),  Pual  ordinarily  has  «,  which  is  preferred  before  a  doubled  con- 
sonant ci^',  §  61.  5,  and  Hophal  o  before  concurrent  consonants  ir^n.  Tliis 
distinction  is  not  steadfastly  adhered  to,  however,  and  Pual  occasionally 
appears  with  Kamets  Hhatuph,  irns  Ezek.  16:  4,  ^rnnr  Nab.  3:  7,  ^i'Z  Ps. 
72:  20,  !153  Ps.  80:  11,  Prov.  24:  31,  ^"ISfJ":  Ps.  94:  20,  B'iXTa  pai^sim.  This 
seems  to  furnish  the  best  explanation  of  the  disputed  words  TlS'^n  or  in^~n 
Ps.  62:  4,  "^irbo  Ps.  101:  5  K'ri,  ^S^brxn  Job  20:  26.  Gesen'us  regards  these 
as  Piel  forms  with  (.)  lengthened  to  (^)  on  tiie  omission  of  Daghesh  forte, 
§  59.  a;  but  the  absence  of  Methegh,  whicij  Gesenius  inserts  Avithout 
authority,  shows  the  vowel  to  be  S  not  a.  Others  think  that  nniisn  is  the 
Kal  future  for  !in3=Nri,  the  vowel  being  attracted  to  the  guttural  from  the 
previous  letter,  §  60.  3.  c.  There  is  no  difficulty,  however,  in  regarding 
them  all  as  Pual  forms,  and  translating  severally  tuai/  you  be  slain,  armed 
with  the  tongue  (of  a  slanderer),  shall  be  made  to  consume  him.  In  Ps.  62:  4 
the  reading  of  Ben  Naphtali  ^insnp  is  probably  to  be  preferred  to  that  of 
Ben  Asher,  which  is  found  in  the  common  text;    the  former  is  a  Piel  and 


§94  EEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEEFECT  VEEBS.  129 

has  an  active  sense:  (how  long)  will  ye  slay  or  murder?  In  Ps,  101:  5  the 
K'thibh  is  "^JTUib^a  an  active  Poel  form,  slandering. 

h.  The  vowel  it  of  the  first  syllable  is  occasionally  written  with  Vav, 
nS!lT  Ezek.  16:  34,  n^^^in  Ps.  78:  63,  ^ir^  Judg.  18:  29,  13:  8,  Job  5:  7,  bmr' 
Ezek.  27:  19,  but  mostly  without  it, 

c.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  An  instance  of  paragogic  tt  appended  to 
the  preterite  is  found  in  nc^?  Ezek.  31: 15,  unless  it  may  better  be  regarded 
as  a  verbal  adjective. 

d.  Infinitive.  The  absolute  form  occurs  in  asa  Gen.  40:  15;  there  is 
no  example  of  the  construct. 

e.  Participle.  As  'iy'a,  "t^s^a,  ^f?'^"'^;  in  a  few  instances  the  initial  33 
is  omitted,  bisx  Ex.  3:  2  for  ^KO,  r';?V2  Kin.  2:  10  for  ri-?y2,  niinb  (with 
Daghesh-forte  euphonic)  Ezek.'21:  15,  16,  U^^^r'  Eccles.  9:  12  for  t:->i-;3^?3, 
§  59.  a.  Some  of  the  forms  in  which  this  has  been  alleged  may  however  be 
better  explained  as  preterites. 

HIPHIL. 

§  94.  a.  Preterite.  The  first  vowel  is  usually  Hhirik  but  occasionally 
Seghol,  e.  g.  Cli^abpn  1  Sam.  25:  7,  particulai-ly  in  Pe  guttural  and  a  few 
Lamedh  He  verbs.  Once  S<  is  prefixed  instead  of  tl,  jinlpNJX  Isa.  63:  3;  in 
Isa.  19:  6  ^ItT^iTNti  is  not  a  double  Hiphil  with  both  X  and  n  prefixed,  but 
is  a  denominative  from  WTX,  a  derivative  of  riJt,  which  does  not  indeed 
occur  in  its  simple  form  but  is  justified  by  the  analogy  of  27DX  from  ^JS. 
n  takes  the  place  of  M  in  ■^ri^s'^ri  Hos.  11:  3;  so  likewise  the  future  ir^ni^n 
Jer.  12:5,  and  participle  ninn^  Jer.  22  :  15,  though  the  corresponding 
preterite  is  riVn  Neh.  3:  20. 

Sing.  3  masc.  The  «  of  the  second  syllable  is  almost  always  written 
with  Yodh,  rarely  without  it,  e.  g.  bnr^ri  1  Sam.  12:  24,  but  in  every  other 
place  ^'^^:<ri.  So  inf.  const,  "ir'nn  1  Sam.  1:6;  fut.  dnp^  Lev.  27:  14,  Ti^riJ 
2  Kin.  10:  5,  nsorDn  1  Sam.  1:7;  part,  'bn^p  Ps.  18:  51,  tihzro  Job  11:  3. 

h.  Infinitive.  Absolute.  The  Tsere  of  the  second  syllable  which  before 
Makkeph  is  shortened  to  Seghol  ""isn  Prov.  24:  23,  28:  21,  is  mostly  written 
without  ■>,  thus  b^nri,  "i?3ri,  T:3zibn,  bd-sri,  isprr,  i23^pn,  nrrn,  r^::ir^^  though 

sometimes  with  it  "I'^irtl  Am.  9:  8  but  -ifr''!'  Isa-  14:  23,  b"'3rn  and  h^'Ct}, 
twice  d'^rrn,  nine  times  CS'^r;,  "I'^i?-?!,  T'rrn.  Hhirik  in  this  syllable  is 
rare  and  exceptional,  Vcrn  Ezek.  21:  31,  "i''i:>!^  Josh.  7:7.  X  is  prefixed 
instead  of  n  in  QiS'^X  Jer.  25:  3  and  Tj^^^f!  Gen.  41:  43,  provided  the  latter 
is  a  Hebrew  and  not  a  Coptic  word. 

Confifriict.  The  second  vowel  is  commonly  Hhirik  written  with  '', 
\l3"i^)rri,  TfV^''f  rarely  and  as  an  exception  without  ",  li"^^  Isa.  23:  11,  or 
with' Tsere  bihin  Deut.  32:  8,  ^byb  Deut.  26:  12,  Neh.  10:  39,  "sn  Jer.44: 19, 
"l^bb  Dan.  11:  35.  In  a  few  instances  the  first  vowel  is  Hhirik  as  in  the 
preterite  rp,-^-d;ri  Deut.  7:  24,  28:  48,  Joh.  11:  14,  1  Kin.  15:  29,  T^'^n  Jer- 
50:  34,  fl3""}"!n  Jer.  51:  33,  nikpn  Lev.  14:  43.  The  initial  It  is  mostly 
retained  after  prefixed  prepositions,    though    it  is  sometimes  rejected,   as 

9 


130  ETYMOLOGY.  §95,96 

ni2Ui^  Am.  8:  4  but  n-3l'n^  Ps.  8:  3,  li-3  once  but  Ticrnls  fifteen  times, 
n'nab  Isa.  3:8. 

c.  Future  Sinq.  Tsere  is  substituted  forHhirik  in  T^jri  Ex.  19:3,  b"^np;} 
2  Chion.  h:  2,  and  without  Yodh  br\p^-^  1  Kin.  8:  1,  tip^  Num.  22:  19,  1X1^3 
1  Sam.  14:  36,  pjnx  Isa.  42:  6. 

Plur.  In  a  very  few  instances  Hhirik  is  rejected  upon  the  addition  of 
the  masculine  pUiral  termination  lp3"!?l  1  Sam.  14:  22,  31:  2,  'l-"^!"}  Jer. 
9:  2.  There  is  no  example  of  this  without  the  presence  of  Vav  conversive 
unless  it  be  ~l"isnn  Job  19:  3,  which  may  be  regarded  as  Kal. 

d.  Imperative  Sing.  masc.  The  second  syllable  usually  has  Tsere  with- 
out Yodh  I^iT'lin,  T|^rn,  and  before  Makkeph,  Segliol  "Dpn  Job  22:  21,  -nan, 

1  Sam.  23:  11,  "Mri  Isa.  64:  8.  There  are  a  very  few  examples  with  Hhirik 
in  pause,  t^'^S'in  Ps.  94:  1,  to  which  some  would  add  K^iiin  Isa.  43:  8,  but 
see  Alexander,  H'r'in  Prov.  19:  25,  X"^ in  Jer.  17:  18. 

e.  Participle.  In  N^ii  Ps.  135:  7,  Tsere  is  taken  in  place  of  Hhirik 
upon  the  recession  of  the  accent;  ^^D^  Isa.  53:  3  is  not  a  participle  but  a 
noun,  Alexander  in  loc.  Hhirik  is,  in  a  few  exceptional  cases  occurring  in 
the  later  books,  rejected  in  the  plural,  D^^r^np  Zech.  3:  7  for  C"'2"'^ri-a, 
n-'iiVin-a  Jer.  29:  8,    W^yv-g  2  Chron.  28:  23,    d'^'Hrinp  1  Chron.  15:  24   K'ri, 

2  Chron.  7 :  6  K'ri.     Comp.  Chald.  "i??i-i?  Dan.  3 :  25. 

HOPHAL. 

§  95.  a.  The  first  vowel,  though  mostly  Kamets  Hhatuph  Ti^"2fn,  ^"a^SfJ, 
nrViTn,  is  occasionally  Kibbuts,  both  vowels  even  appearing  in  the  same 
verb,  n?rn  Ezek.  32:  32,  SniS-^f;  ver.  19,  SSro  2  Kin.  4:  32;  TiS^'v'  Dan. 
8:  11,  Twirn  Isa.  14:  19,  '^zV'V'^  Ezek.  16:  5,  Ti^ro  2  Sam.  20:  21;  Il'jpn 
Lev.  6:  15,  "ii;p'3  Mai.  1:11,  ^iirsn,  QiipS^;  D''?-:;=-3,  paT3,  n'^^p-a  Ezek. 
29:  18. 

b.  Preterite.  In  "'tn^'iintn  am  1  obliged  to  leave?  Judg.  9:  9.  11.  13,  the 
characteristic  n  is  rejected  after  n  interrogative. 

e.  Infinitive.  The  absolute  has  T-sere  in  the  second  syllable,  'Pnn  Ezek. 
16:  4,  nan  Josh.  9:  24.   The  construct  has  Pattahh,  "ipm  Ezr.  a:  11. 

d.  Iju'erative.  This  mood  occurs  twice,  ni3dn  Ezek.  32  :  19,  135n 
Jer.  49 :  8, 

e.  Participle.  In  nij'itpnp  Ezek.  46:  22  M  remains  after  the  preforma- 
tive  a. 

HITHPAEIi. 

§  96.  a.  Preterite.  In  two  instances  ns  is  prefixed  instead  of  rn,  viz., 
-lanrx  2  Chron.  20:  35,  ^ibp-indx  Ps.  76:  6.  In  the  verb  np3  Daghesh-forte 
is  omitted  in  the  second  radical  and  the  previous  vowel  lengthened  §  59.  a, 
^■I'p^riri,  'inpjjn-  Judg.  20:  15.  17,  niTSn"^  Judg.  21:  9,  in  addition  to  which 
the  vowel  of  the  prefixed  syllable  is  o  in  'inpB^n  Num.  1 ;  47,  2:  33,  26:  62, 
1  Kin.  20:  27.  In  three  verbs  upon  the  assimilation  of  n  to  the  first  radical, 


§  97  PAEAGOGIC  FUTUEE,  ETC.  131 

the  prefix  takes  u,  §  61.  5,  fliiT'iri'tthe  accentuation  is  unusual)  Isa.  34:  G, 
fiXt'jn  Deut.24:  4  (but  in  tlie  future  always  HX-^I  Lev.  21:1  and  repeatedly 
elsewhere),  tJ^sri  (ivf.  const.)  Lev,  13:  55.  56.  These  are  sometimes  called 
Hothpaal  and  regarded  as  passives  of  Hithpael.  Where  both  forms  exist 
in  the  same  verb,  hovs^ever,  as  in  "ipa  and  Np:j,  there  appears  to  be  no 
distinction  in  their  meaning;  they  seem  rather  to  have  arisen  from  a  dis- 
position to  give  to  the  Hithpael,  where  it  has  a  passive  signification,  §  80.2, 
the  vowels  of  a  proper  passive  species,  §  82.  5.  h.  (3).  In  Vw;."5rf7  Jer.  25:  16, 
ilC^ir";  Jer.  46:  8  (elsewhere  >l'i;r:n"]),  and  JI'Nbo  Isa.  52:  5,  o  prolonged  from 
M  on  account  of  the  absence  of  Daghesh-forte,  is  for  a  like  reason  given  to 
the  first  radical. 

h.  The  last  vowel  of  the  preterite,  infinitive  construct,  future,  impera- 
tive and  participle,  is  Tsere  written  without  Yodh,  which  before  Makkeph 
is  shortened  to  Seghol,  "iT'iprr!  Isa.  30:  29,  ""^!^^!r^  Gen.  6:  9,  "D^^n'^  Job 
6:  16.  Frequently,  however,  Pattahh  is  used,  or,  with  a  pause  accent, 
Kamets,  ^2"^^  ^Jrff.,  p^nrri  pret.  and  imper.  (but  inf.  const,  and  part,  with 
e,  fut.  a  and  e),  -B:r.S,  p~;r^?,  "''^"Ijirr''! ,  i"^-"?  ^^^-  ^^-  ^'  ^^ttahh  is  also 
sometimes  found  in  the  feminine  plural  of  the  future,  nijiiirri  Zech.  6:  7 
but  nirsn'^ri  Lam.  4:  1,  where  some  copies  have  ii5r2ri";:ri.  Hhirik  occurs 
instead  of  Pattahh  in  the  preterites,  "^fnb'ijnril ,  '^t^a^gnrii.  Ezek.  38:  23, 
cri'r'nirrri'i  Lev.  ll:  44,  20:  7,  each  of  which  has  Vav  conversive,  throwing 
the  accent  more  strongly  on  the  final  syllable. 

c.  There  is  no  example  of  the  infinitive  absolute.  The  infinitive  con- 
struct once  has  a  feminine  ending  nil^nrri  Dan.  11:  23,  comp.  §  128. 


Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Futuee  and  Imperative. 

§  97.  The  paucity  of  moods  in  Hebrew  is  partially 
compensated  by  modifications  of  the  future,  known  as  the 
paragogic  and  apocopated  futures. 

1.  The  paragogic  or  intentional  is  formed  from  the 
ordinary  future  by  appendmg  the  termination  H^  to  the 
first  person  singular  or  plural,  and  in  a  very  few  instances 
to  the  third  person  singular,  thus  converting  it  from  a 
simple  declaration  of  futurity  to  an  expression  of  desire 
or  determination,  "^lici^  I  shall  keej),  n^a"i:^5 1  will  surely 
keep  or  let  me  keep,  Ps.  39:  2 ;  HJ^rivD  let  us  break,  r;^"'';i'i;:  let 
us  cast  aivay,  Ps.  2:  3;  T]'Z'f]1  let  Mm  hasteii,  Isa.  5:  19. 

a.  The  name  "intentional"  proposed  by  Bottcher  seems  more  appro- 
priate than  "cohortative",  which  tliough  commonly  adopted  is  only  applic- 
able to  the  plural  forms.    The  third  person  of  the  paragogic  future  occurs 

9* 


132  ETYMOLOGY.  §  97 

besides  the  example  just  given,  in  nsjisn  let  it  come  Isa.  5:19,  nsiin  be  it 
dark  (by  some  explained  as  a  noun,  darkness)  Job  11:  17,  ni'i'T^  may  he 
accept  (as  fat),  or,  according  to  Kimchi,  may  he  reduce  to  ashes,  Ps.  20:  4, 
MiSr.  Prov.  1:  20,  8:  3,  and  after  Vav  conversive  nijrni  Ezek.  23:  20,  and 
ver.  16  K'ri.  It  has  also  been  suspected  in  nn'ip'i  Lev.  21:  5  K'thibb. 

b.  Instead  of  n^,  n  is  appended  in  nit";pxi  1  Sam.  28:  15,  iii'i"^"^  Ps. 
20:  4,  §  63.  1.  c;  so  in  the  imperative  Hr'n  or  n"^  Prov.  24:  14. 

2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  an  abbreviation 
of  the  second  or  third  person  singular  and  expresses  a 
wish  or  command,  or  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  or  pro- 
hibition. In  the  perfect  verb  it  has  a  separate  form  only 
in  theHipliil  species,  the  '',  of  the  ultimate  being  changed 
to  (.,),  or  before  Makkeph  to  (..),  p''!^T,  he  tvill  cause  to 
cleave,  p:hi;'  may  he  or  let  him  cause  to  cleave;  b''3"i"r)  thou 
wilt  understand^  b?'^P  thou  mayest  Understand  or  under- 
stand thou,  Dan.  9:  25,  ■Db'iTrbx  may  it  not  or  let  it  not 
rule,  Ps.  119:  133.  In  some  classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  as 
in  the  Ayin-Vav  and  particularly  the  Lamedh-He,  it  is 
used  in  other  species  still. 

a.  The  2nd.  pers.  of  the  Jussive  is  rare  except  with  Vx.  The  1st.  pers. 
of  the  future  is  abbreviated  in  a  very  few  instances,  1  Sam.  14:  36,  2  Sam. 
17:  12,  Job  23:  9.  11,  Isa.  41:  23  K'thibh,  28. 

b.  The  paragogic  and  apocopated  futures,  which  have  been  aptly  de- 
nominated voluntatives,  may  be  regarded  as  mutually  supplementary,  and 
as  forming  together  something  like  a  complete  Optative  or  Subjunctive 
mood.  The  apocopated  future  has,  it  is  true,  no  separate  form  for  the 
second  fern.  sing,  or  the  second  and  third  pers.  plur.,  in  which  the  verb  has 
terminal  inflections,  but  it  may  be  regarded  as  coinciding  in  these  with  the 
ordinary  future,  except  that  it  never  has  the  final  *).  See  Ruth  2:  8  and 
comp.  Deut.  20:  3  with  1 :  29.  So  in  those  species  in  which  it  is  indistinguish- 
able from  the  ordinary  future,  it  may  yet  be  regarded  as  included  under  it. 
Neither  the  apocopated  nor  the  paragogic  futures  occur  in  the  strictly 
passive  species,  viz.,  the  Pual  and  Hophal,  self-determination  and  command 
both  implying  that  the  subject  is  the  originator  of  the  action.  The  more 
flexible  Arabic  has  three  varieties  of  the  future  in  addition  to  the  ordinary 
one,  to  express  as  many  modifications  or  moods. 

c.  The  apocopated  future  derives  its  name  from  the  apocopation  of  the 
final  letter  by  which  it  is  characterized  in  ii"b  verbs;  the  brevity  of  its 
form  is  adapted  to  the  energy  and  rapid  utterance  of  a  command.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  speaker  dwells  upon  the  word  expivssive  of  his  own 
desire  or  determination,  thus  giving  rise  to  the  prolonged  form  of  the 
paragogic  future.     The  appended  ti     may  perhaps  be  identical  with  a  like 


§  98  PAEAGOGIC  rUTUEE,  ETC.  133 

termination  added  to  nouns  to  indicate  motion  or  direction,  denoting  as  it 
does  the  direction  of  the  speaker's  will  or  wishes  towards  that  which  the 
verb  expresses. 

§  98.  1.  Paragogic  n^  is  sometimes  appended  to  the 
masculine  singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  com- 
mand into  an  earnest  entreaty  or  expression  of  strong 
desire,  yi2'^  hear  (thou),  n^'p'lJ  oh,  hear!  or  pray,  heart 
llispn  listen,  nTizJpn  pray,  listen!  The  addition  of  this 
vowel  to  the  imperative  and  to  the  future  causes,  as  in 
the  regular  inflections  of  the  paradigm,  §  85.  2.  a.  (2), 
the  rejection  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  syllable,  except 
in  the  Hiphil  where  "^^  remains  in  the  future  and  is 
restored  in  the  imperative.  Li  the  Kal  imperative  this 
rejection  occasions  the  concurrence  of  two  vowelless  con- 
sonants, the  first  of  which  must  accordingly  take  a  short 
vowel,  §  61.  1;  if  the  rejected  vowel  was  Hholem  this 
will  be  Kamets-Hhatuph,  otherwise  it  will  be  the  briefest 
of  the  vowels,  Hhirik,  nf?,  rq'V^  Jer.  49:  11;  'O],  nn^T 
2  Chron.  6:  42,  :ibt,  rtz^  Gen.  39:  7.  12.  When  the 
vowel  of  the  second  radical  is  restored  by  a  pause  ac- 
cent the  inserted  vowel  falls  away  Jri'^TV  Deut.  33:  23, 
Tm^D  1  Kin.  13:  7;  so  in  the  S"b  form  nxsn  Ps.  41:  5.  In 

T  AT  T:  '  T    T     : 

the  Hiphil  bbpH  becomes  nb'^Dpn. 

a.  In  a  few  instances  the  vowel-letter  remains  in  the  K'thibh  though 
invariably  thrown  out  in  the  K'ri,  e.  g.,  n£1"i:J  K'thibh,  nsi.rj  K'ri  Ps.  26;  2, 
rc^h^  K'thibh,  nrb-a  K'ri  Judg.  9:  8;  nlsipfflXT  K'thibh,  n^j^dxi  K'ri  Ezr. 
8:  25;  n::ip;UX  K'thibh,  !iD;?dN  K'ri  Isa.  18:  4.  This  may  not  indicate, 
however,  the  retention  of  the  full  vowel  but  only  of  an  audible  remnant  of 
it,  §  13.  a,  which  is  likewise  attested  by  the  occasional  appearance  of  Hha- 
teph  Kamets,  ""li^'^X  1  Kin.  19:  20,  tii^'O'rX'i  Dan.  8:  13  (in  some  copies)  or 
Hhateph  Pattahh  n^pJXl  Ezr.  8:  26,  Jer.  32:  9,  and  by  the  fact  that  the 
resulting  Sh'va,  even  when  simple,  is  al\vay»  vocal,  §  22.  a.  (1).  Occasion- 
ally Kamets-Hhatuph  is  found  in  the  paragogic  imperative  when  the  yowel 
of  the  ordinary  imperative  is  Pattahh;  thus,  ^Sp  Lev.  9:  7,  nii")|5  Ps.  69:  19, 
and  on  the  contrary,  rrSw^  Gen.  25:  31,  fut.  Vipi  Ex.  21:  7,  iTnSS  (with 
Daghesh  separative)  Ps.  141:  3,  though  Delitzsch  regards  it  as  a  noun. 

2.  As  the  imperative  is  itself  a  shortened  form  there 
is  little  room  for  further  abbreviation;  it  sometimes,  how- 


134  ETYMOLOGY.  §  99 

ev(jr,  suffers  apocopation  of  the  final  Sl^  of  the  feminine 
plural,  -rri  Gen.  4:  23  for  Tuf^'J:,  §  Gl.  2,  "(N-p  Ex.  2:  20 
for  rili^'hp,  §  60.  3.  c,  and  in  Lameclh  He  verbs  of  final  n 
of  the  mascuUne  singular,  "T^n  2  Kin.  6:18  for  mSm  Ezek. 
6:  11,  bs  Ps.  110:  18  for  r^'^;  qTJ  Deut.  9:  14  for  nsnn 
Judg.  11 :  37,  but  without  any  evident  change  of  meaning. 


Vav  Conversive  or  Consecutive. 

§  99.  1.  The  primary  tenses/ the  preterite  and  the 
future  are  supplemented  by  two  secondary  tenses,  formed 
in  a  peculiar  manner  by  what  is  called  Vav  Conversive 
("Tj^sn  ll)  or  Vav  Consecutive.  This  prefix  has  the  remark- 
able effect,  from  which  its  name  is  derived,  of  converting 
the  ordinary  future  into  a  preterite  and  the  ordinary 
preterite  into  a  future.  The  following  appear  to  be  the 
reasons  of  this  singular  phenomenon.  -  Past  and  future 
are  relative  and  depend  for  their  signification  in  any 
given  case  upon  the  point  of  time  from  which  they  are 
reckoned.  1'his  may  be  the  moment  of  speaking,  when 
all  anterior  to  that  moment  will  be  past,  and  all  posterior 
to  it  future.  Or  by  some  conventional  method  under- 
stood between  the  speaker  and  his  hearers,  an  ideal  pre- 
sent may  be  fixed  distinct  from  the  real  present  and  the 
measurements  of  past  and  future  made  from  the  former. 
Now  Vav  Consecutive  placed  before  a  future  indicates 
that  its  tense  is  to  be  reckoned  not  from  the  actual  pre- 
sent but  from  the  time  denoted  by  some  previous  word, 
whether  verb,  noun,  or  adverb.  And  when  the  stand- 
point is  thus  taken  in  the  past,  events  may  be  described 
as  future  with  reference  to  it,  though  they  have  -actually 
taken  place  at  the  time  of  narration.  Vav  is  properly 
the  copula  and;  when  this  is  prefixed  to  the  future  for 
the  purpose  already  designated,  it  is  followed  by  Pattahh 


§  99  VAV  CONSECUTIVE.  135 

and  Dngliesli-forte,  whicli  give  to  it  the  force  of  and  then 
or  and  so,  indicating  that  what  follows  is  the  sequel  of 
what  precedes.  Consequently  a  narration  begun  in  the 
preterite  may  be  continued  in  the  future  with  Vav  Con- 
secutive, the  opening  words  fixing  the  initial  point  from 
which  all  that  come  after  proceed  in  regular  succession; 
and  the  future  so  employed  is  converted  into  what  may 
be  called  a  continuative  preterite.  Thus,  in  the  account 
of  the  creation  in  Glen.  1,  the  original  condition  of  things 
is  described  in  the  preterite,  ver.  2,  the  earth  tuas  T't\'tj 
without  form  and  void.  The  subsequent  scene  is  then  sur- 
veyed from  this  point.  The  next  statement  is  accordingly 
made  by  a  future  with  Vav  Consecutive,  ver.  3,  ^'^^n^^! 
and  God  said,  in  its  primitive  import,  and  then  God  says 
or  will  say,  his  speaking  being  future  to  the  state  of 
things  previously  described.  This  fixes  a  new  stand- 
point from  which  the  next  step  in  the  process  is  a  fresh 
advance;  it  is  hence  followed  by  another  future  with  Vav 
Consecutive,  ver.  4,  U^'^^l  and  he  saio;  and  so  on,  bv[2^1  and 
he  divided,  ver.  5,  5<'ip^.!i  and  he  called,  etc. 

a.  The  nature  of  this  prefix  is  more  precisely  expressed  by  calling  it 
Vav  Consecutive,  as  Ewald  and  others  propose.  But  as  Vav  Conversive  is 
the  name  in  common  use,  and  as  this  sufficiently  characterizes  its  most 
striking  effect,  there  is  no  impropriety  in  retaining  it.  There  have  been 
various  conjectures  respecting  its  origin.  Some  have  fancied  that  ^  is  an 
abbreviation  of  the  verb  T^^T\  teas,  hence  "i"2N'^  he  was  or  it  ivas  (so  that) 
he  ivill  say  i.  e.  he  ivas  about  to  say  or  loas  saying,  which  is  then  likened 
to  the  Arabic  combination  of  the  preterite  of  the  substantive  verb  with  the 
future  tense  to  express  past  action;  but  1  evidently  has  the  sense  of  the  con- 
junction and,  '^pK'^l  does  not  mean  he  said,  but  and  he  said.  Others  have  re- 
garded it  as  an  abbreviation  of  •T^'7'i  and  he  teas;  Ewald  of  TS^I  and  then. 
Schultens,  Insfit.  p.  424,  conjectured  that  'I'iX'l  may  be  for  "i"oi<"ri1,  by 
§  53.  3;  (1  prefixed  to  a  noun  is  the  definite  article,  and  points  it  out  as 
one  previously  known;  its  use  in  this  particular  case  might  be  to  define 
the  time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  before  which  it  stands  by  pointing  it  out 
as  known  from  what  preceded.  The  vowel  of  this  prefix  would  upon  this 
hypothesis  be  analogous  both  in  its  origin  and  its  effects  to  the  augment  e 
in  Greek,  or  a  in  Sanskrit,  by  which  a  preterite  is  formed  from  a  present 
or  a  future,  rvTrna,  Itvittov;  rvipca,  ervipa,  and  which  is  traced  by  Bopp  to 


136  ETIIIOLOGY.  §  99 

a  pronominal  root  having  a  demonstrative  sense,  Vergleichende  Grammatik 
pp.  786  ff.  The  fact  that  the  Samaritan  Pentateuch  sometimes  substitutes 
n  for  "1  consecutive  might  seem  to  lend  confirmation  to  this  theory  of  its 
dei-ivation.  But  as  Si  stands  with  equal  frequency  for  1  copulative,  and  1 
for  the  article  n,  it  is  probable  that  these  commutations  are  to  be  classed 
with  the  other  numerous  inaccuracies  of  this  edition.  Perhaps  the  best 
suggestion  is  that  of  Rodiger,  who  attributed  no  inherent  significance  to 
the  vowel,  but  thought  that  it  was  attached  to  Vav  Consecutive  on  account 
of  the  emphasia  of  its  peculiar  use. 

2.  Vav  Consecutive,  it  has  already  been  stated,  is  pre- 
fixed to  the  future  with  Pattalih  and  Daghesh-forte  in  the 
following  letter,  "pi^-l,  ^I^Vr^l^  '^'  If  the  first  letter 
of  the  future  be  Yodh  with  Sh'va,  Daghesh  is  commonly 
omitted,  §  25,  but  rarely  if  it  be  p,  and  never  if  it  be  Fl, 
since  its  removal  in  this  case  would  change  the  sound  of 
the  letter  by  restoring  its  aspiration,  "liill'l,  "S:C"1  but 
"il'P'l,  "Siwi'l.  Before  5<  of  the  first  person  singular,  which 
cannot  receive  Daghesh,  §  23.  1,  Pattahh  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets,  §  60.  4,  T]?JSl,  ^ii'JStl.  In  the  Hiphil  ■•.  is,  mth 
few  exceptions,  e.  g.  T]"i'r.:;i  Ps.  105:  28,  compressed  to  (^) 
as  in  the  apocopated  future,  lli^p^'l,  b'^Ij'I^I,  and  before 
Makkeph  it  is  shortened  to  (  )  ""^31.  In  the  first  person 
singular,  however,  "'.  remains  in  the  Hiphil,  and  a 
paragogic  n^  is  not  infrequently  appended  in  all  the 

species,  e.  g.  TV^'^Tv  '^i^^^.l  ^^  i^^'V^'^,;!  "^■?^,!3  or  "^'^,3; 
-I-■^U:^^V,    nbb^b^V.   ^int^l  or  n^mj<^;    paragogic  n    also 

■     :   -■T '  T  :    IT  -IT  '  • :t  t    ;  -  -.mt  '       i-  o     o  t 

occurs  though  more  rarely  in  the  first  pers.  plur.  n'^brijl] 
Gen.  41:  11,  r'Z'^ll\  ri'lipiBI  Ezr.  8:  23,  ni?S31  ver.  31." 

a.  The  tendency  to  abbreviation  produced  by  Vav  Consecutive  is  much 
more  apparent  in  some  classes  of  imperfect  verbs.  Thus,  final  n  is  re- 
jected from  n"b  verbs  as  in  the  apocopated  future  n^.""^,  ^i*],  i^??"!,  '^^^j 
The  accent  is  drawn  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult  in  the 
Kal  and  Hiphil  of  Ayin  doubled  verbs  and  of  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
for  their  first  or  second  radical,  in  consequence  of  which  the  vowel  of  the 
last  syllable,  if  long,  is  shortened,  §  64.  1,  sb^,  no^:);  bix"^,  ^=X'T;  n'iri, 
rr^;;;  S"::'^  a^'i'!';  Sip';,  t:;^;Jl;  Cp^,  Cp'^\  The  same  drawing  back  of  the 
accent  and  shortening  of  the  ultimate  syllable  occurs  in  the  Piel  of  the 
following  verbs,  whose  middle  radical  is  1,  ~"]:j^]i  ^''!?;'^^»  ^^T*?")?  ^"^  "''*'  ^^ 
rnn'^n;   so  in  "^'^}yo''^  Hab.  3:  6,  and  the  Hithpael  ni;crni  Dan.  2:1.    It  oc- 


§  100  VAV  CONSECUTIVE.  137 

curs  also  in  the  Niphal  of  a  few  verbs,  which  form  the  exception,  however, 
not  the  rule,  C]::'^!,  Urfh^,  ClDN^I  or  vlCiXf.^  B"Eni  but  nnstl,  li^''l,  T|l?53'^i, 
"'51?*'^  >  "n?"^*^'  ^^^'  '^^®  ^^'^*'  person  singular  is  mostly  exempted  from 
shortening  or  change  of  accent,  ^3X1,  2irN1,  d^lpXI  or  CpXI,  B'^pXI,  though 
it  sometimes  suffers  apocopation  in  fT'^  verbs  X'^N;1,  "^pXI.  The  prolonged 
plural  ending  "|1  is  very  rai'ely  used  after  Vav  Consecutive;  it  does,  how- 
ever, occur,  e.  g.  l>in"ipni  Deut.  1:  22,  'i^in^rni  Deut.  4:  11,  ]'^^ri'^_'\  Judg. 
11:  18. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Vav  Consecutive  takes  Pattahh  before  X,  its 
vowel  being  conformed  to  the  compound  Sli'va,  which  follows,  e.  g.  ^'^5?'' 
Judg.  6:  9,  iinnrtxi  2  Sam,  1:  10,  TiOSXI  Ezek.  16:  10  but  nS2X1  ver.  8, 
^\^^^^  Job  30:  26,'nri-r:N1  Ps.  73:  16.     ' 

§  100.  1.  Vav  Consecutive  prefixed  to  the  preterite 
makes  of  it  a  continuative  future  or  imperative,  by  con- 
necting with,  it  the  idea  of  futurity  or  command  ex- 
pressed in  a  preceding  verb.  It  is  properly  the  conjunc- 
tion 1  and,  whose  pointing  it  takes,  its  pecuhar  force 
being  derived  from  its  connecting  power.  Accordingly, 
in  speaking  of  coming  events,  the  stand-point  is  first 
fixed  in  the  future  by  the  opening  words,  and  the  de- 
scription is  then  continued  by  the  preterite  with  Vav 
Consecutive.  Thus,  in  Samuel's  recital,  1  Sam.  10:  1- — 8, 
of  what  was  to  happen  to  Saul,  he  first  refers  the  whole 
to  the  future  by  the  word,  ver.  2,  ^Pp^!^  upon  thy  dejMrt- 
ing,  and  then  proceeds  with  preterites  with  Vav  prefixed, 
r)5<kl2^  thou  shalt  find,  ^'H'JNI  and  they  shall  say,  ver.  3, 
risbr'l  and  thou  shalt  pass  on,  etc.  etc.  In  Uke  manner  in- 
junctions begun  in  the  imperative  are  continued  in  the 
preterite  with  Vav  Consecutive.  Thus  the  Lord  directed 
Elijah,  1  Kin.  17:  3  t]b  (imper.)  go,  Try>A  (pret.)  and  turn, 
TpT\ZT\,_  (pret.)  and  hide,  fpn'^  (pret.)  and  it  shall  he. 

2.  This  prefix  commonly  has  the  effect  of  removing 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate  in  those  forms  in  which  it 
ordinarily  stands  upon  the  penult;  and  if  the  penult  be 
a  long  mixed  syllable,  as  in  the  Kal  preterite  of  verbs 
with  Hholem,  it  wiU  in  consequence  be  shortened,  ribb^, 


138  ETYMOLOGY.  §  101 

a.  Tlie  shifting  of  the  accent,  which  served  in  some  measure  to  indicate 
to  the  ear  the  alteration  in  the  sense,  takes  place  chiefly  in  the  following 
cases,  viz.: 

(1)  It  occurs  with  great  regularity  in  the  first  and  second  persons  sin- 
gular of  every  species,  Tp^Ti  thou  hast  gone,  Prr''^'^  ^"'^  thmi  shnlt  go, 
•'nzbrt'i  and  I  will  go,  so  F!l?11 '  "'r- v>"'^ .  "'n=i'-'!'r!71 .  thouf,di  ''T'^'-i^'),  Zeph. 
1:  17,  except  in  6{"b  and  n"P  verbs,  where  the  accent  usually  remains  in 
its  original  position  although  the  usage  is  not  uniform,  "^""^E^  Lev.  26:  9, 
•'nxil  1  Kin.  18:  12,  ""lanm  l  Chron.  4:  10,  ''n*'.'intnrn'l  1  Sam.  15:  30,  ""rr^r;^. 
Isa.  8:17  but  P'^SX'i  Lev.  24:  5,  PXS^l  Gen.  6:  18,  ■ninsni  '^n-'2"in'i  Lev.  26:  9J 
f^aii']  Ex.  26:  33.  In  the  first  person  plural  of  all  verbs  the  accent  generally 
remains  upon  the  penult,  ^itnin  Ex.  8:  23,  :=i22bni,  ^iSPii^b"!  Gen.  34:  17. 

(2)  It  occurs,  though  less  constantly,  in  the  third  feminine  singular  and 
third  plural  of  the  Hiphil  of  perfect  verbs,  and  of  the  various  species  of 
Ayin-Vav  and  Ayin-doubled  verbs,  nB^^::!-)-:  Ex.  26:  33,  flX'^Stl'l  Lev.  15:  29. 
npiDI  Isa.  11:  2,  fl'ini,  ^'^m  Hab.  1:  8  but  ^D^'irm  Ezek.  43:  24,  r:3Bl  Hab.  1:  8, 


Verbs  with  Suffixes. 

§  101.  Pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to  the  verbs 
of  which  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of  the  suffixes 
have  already  been  given  §  72.  It  only  remams  to  con- 
sider the  changes  resulting  from  their  combination  with 
the  various  parts  of  the  verb. 

1.  ^J'he  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  undergo 
the  following  changes: 

Preterite. 
Sing.    3 /em.   The  old  endmg  n_,  §  85.  1.  a  (1),  takes 
the  place  of  n^ . 
2  masc.    T\  sometimes  shortens  its  final  vowel 

T 

before  the  suffix  "'D  of  the  first  person. 
2  fern.  The  old  ending  ^n,  §  86.  6,  instead  of  T. 
Plur.  2  masc.  ^r  from  the  old  pronominal  ending 
D^n,  §  71.  &,  takes  the  place  oJt  Dn.  The 
feminine  of  this  person  does  not  occur 
with  suffixes. 


§  101  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  139 

Future. 
Plue.  2  and  3  fem.    The  distinctive  feminine  termina- 
tion is  dropped,  and  that  of  the  mascuhne 
assumed,  fepFl  for  rijbtpri. 

a.  In  several  of  these  cases  it  would  be  more  correct  to  say  that  it  is 
the  uncompounded  state  of  the  verb  in  which  the  change  has  taken  place, 
and  that  before  suffixes  the  original  form  has  been  preserved,  the  added 
syllable  having  as  it  were  protected  it  from  mutation. 

2.  (1)  Changes  in  the  suffixes:  The  suffixes  are  joined 
directly  to  those  verbal  forms  which  end  in  a  vowel; 
those  forms  which  end  in  a  consonant  insert  before  the 
suffixes  of  the  second  pers.  plur.  D^,  '(5?  and  the  second 
masc.  sing.  Tj,  a  vocal  Sh'va,  and  before  remaining  suf- 
fixes a  full  vowel,  which  in  the  preterite  is  mostly  a  and 
in  the  future  and  imperative  mostly  e. 

(2)  The  3  fern.  sing,  preterite  inserts  a  before  the  suf- 
fixes of  the  third  pers.  plural,  and  e  before  the  second 
fem.  singular;  when  it  stands  before  the  third  sing,  suf- 
fixes ^Sl,  »1,  there  is  frequently  an  ehsion  of  H,  requiring 
Daghesh-forte  conservative  in  the  verbal  ending  n  to 
preserve  the  quantity  of  the  previous  short  vowel,  'in^t2p 
for  ^nrbt:p,  nnbtsp  for  rnbt:p,  see  S  57.  2.  &. 

;  -    T<:'  t-t':  t.-t':'  O 

(3)  When  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix  ^Jl  is  preceded 
by  (J,  the  Si  may  be  elided  and  the  vowels  coalesce  into 
\  i5t:p  for  ^n5t2p;  when  it  is  preceded  by  ''.,  Shurek  may 
be  hardened  to  its  corresponding  semi-vowel  1,  Vrbup 
for  ^M^nbpp  §  62.  2. 

(4)  When  the  third  fem.  suffix  t]  is  preceded  by  (J, 
final  Kamets  is  omitted  to  prevent  the  recurrence  of  the 
same  sound,  vbxip  for  nbtip. 

(5)  When  Ti,  H  of  the  third  pers.  singular  are  pre- 
ceded by  (..),  the  vowel  of  union  for  the  future,  a  3,  called 
Nun  Epenthetic,  is  sometimes  inserted,  particularly  in 
emphatic  and  pausal  forms,  to  prevent  the  hiatus  between 
the  two  vowels,  (,)  being  at  the  same  time  shortened  to 


140  ETYMOLOGY.  §  101 

(  );  n  is  then  commonly  elided  and  a  euphonic  Daghesh- 
forte  inserted  in  the  Nun,  ^sbpp";  for  ^nbl^p";.  The  same 
shortening  of  the  {J  and  insertion  of  Daghesh  may  occur 
in  the  first  person  singular  and  plural  and  the  second 
masculine  singular;  this,  hke  the  preceding,  takes  place 
chiefly  at  the  end  of  clauses. 

a.  The  Nun  Epenthetic  of  the  future  and  the  Preterite  vowel  of  union 
a,  which  is  abbreviated  to  Sh'va  before  ?],  CD,  "iD,  may  be  relics  of  old 
forms  of  the  verb  still  represented  in  the  Arabic,  where  the  pi  eterite  ends 
in  a,  and  one  mode  of  the  future  has  an  appended  Nun.  Daghesh-forte  in 
the  suffixes  of  the  first  and  second  persons  may  be  explained,  as  is  usually 
done,  by  assuming  the  insertion  and  assimilation  of  Nun  Ei)enthetic,  "I'^VP^ 
for  rj:?:;^"^;  or  it  may  be  Daghesh-forte  emphatic,  §  24.  6,  and  the  few 
cases  in  which  Nun  appears  in  these  persons  may  be  accounted  for  by  the 
resolution  of  Daghesh,  §54.3,  instead  of  the  Daghesh  having  arisen  from  the 
assimilation  of  Nun,  so  that  TjS^pp'i  may  be  for  "I'lsp"^  instead  of  the  reverse. 

b.  The  suffixes,  since  they  do  not  in  strictness  form  a  part  of  the  word 
with  which  they  are  connected,  are  more  loosely  attached  to  it  than  the 
pronominal  fragments  which  make  up  the  inflections;  hence  vowels  of 
union  are  employed  with  the  former  which  serve  to  separate  as  well  as  to 
unite.  Hence  too  the  vocal  Sh'va,  inserted  before  the  suffixes  of  the  second 
person,  does  not  so  completely  draw  the  final  consonant  of  the  verb  to  the 
appended  syllable  as  to  detach  it  from  that  to  which  it  formerly  belonged ; 
this  latter  becomes,  therefore,  not  a  simple  but  an  intermediate  syllable, 
§  20.  2.  A  like  distinction  exists  between  prefixed  prepositions,  etc.,  and  the 
personal  prefixes  of  the  future.  The  latter  form  part  and  parcel  of  the  word, 
while  the  former  preserve  a  measure  of  their  original  separateness.  Hence 
when  they  form  a  new  initial  syllable  by  the  aid  of  the  first  consonant  of 
the  word,  this  is  properly  a  mixed  syllable  after  a  personal  prefix  but  inter- 
mediate after  a  prepo.sition,  SiVi:"]  but  Sinzs,  §  22.  a.  Hence,  too,  a  liability 
to  contraction  in  one  case  which  does  not  exist  in  the  other,  hbpl  but 
bh'i^rio,  b'Q-1  but  Ve?3. 

3.  Changes  in  the  body  of  the  verb: 

(1)  Except  in  the  Eiil  preterite  those  forms  which 
have  personal  terminations  experience  no  further  change 
from  the  addition  of  suffixes;  those  which  are  without 
such  termmations  reject  the  vowel  of  the  last  syllable 
before  suffixes  requiring  a  vowel  of  union  and  shorten  it 
before  the  remainder,  ^3pp^,  ^:^!:pp:,  btip^  "r^t^p-;,  qbtpp";; 
but  "'^  of  the  Hipliil  species  is  almost  always  preserved, 


§  102  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  141 

(2)  In  the  Kal  imperative  and  infinitive  the  rejection 
of  the  vowel  occasions  the  concurrence  of  two  vowelless 
letters  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  impossible 
combination  is  obviated  by  the  insertion  of  Hhirik  to 
form  a  new  syllable;  or,  if  the  rejected  vowel  was  Hho- 
lem,  by  the  insertion  of  Kamets  Hhatuph. 

(3)  In  the  Kal  preterite,  where  both  vowels  are  hable 
to  mutation,  a  distinction  is  made  by  rejecting  the  first 
before  suffixes  and  the  second  before  personal  inflections 
where  this  is  possible,  e.  g.  bbj^,  M>t:jj>,  '^^^2-  ^^^^  *^?^Pj 
ibt:p.  Accordingly  upon  the  reception  of  a  suffix  the 
vowel  of  the  second  radical,  whether  it  be  a,  e,  or  o,  must 
be  restored,  and  if  need  be  lengthened,  whenever,  in  the 
course  of  regular  inflection,  it  has  been  dropped,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  first  radical,  wherever  it  remains  in  the 
regular  inflection,  must  be  rejected. 

a.  Final  mixed  syllables,  as  shown  in  2  b,  ordinarily  become  interme- 
diate upon  appending  DD,  "jD,  ?],  and  consequently  take  a  short  vowel  not- 
withstanding the  following  vocal  Sh'va.  This  is  invariably  the  case  before 
D2  and  'p,  unless  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached  has  a  long  im- 
mutable vowel  in  the  ultimate  which  is  of  course  incapable  of  being  short- 
ened; it  is  also  usually  the  case  before  T],  the  principal  exception,  so  far  as 
verbal  forms  are  concerned,  being  the  a  and  e  of  the  Kal  preterite,  a  of  the 
Kal  future,  and  i  of  the  Hiphil,  T^in,  Tjlp^sri,  ^aSlS,  T^lsxrx,  T^SHSX,  ipT'^ri,  but 

§  102.  1.  The  first  and  second  persons  of  the  verb  do 
not  receive  suffixes  of  the  same  person  with  themselves, 
for  when  the  subject  is  at  the  same  time  the  object  of 
the  action  the  Hithpael  species  is  employed  or  a  reci- 
procal pronoun  is  formed  from  the  noun  TlJip  soul,  self, 
as  ^irSj  myself.  Suffixes  of  the  third  person  may,  how- 
ever, be  attached  to  the  third  person  of  verbs,  provided 
the  subject  and  object  be  distinct. 

a.  There  is  a  single  example  of  a  verb  in  the  first  person  with  a  suffix 
of  the  first  person,  but  in  this  case  the  pronoun  expresses  the  indirect  ob^ 
ject  of  the  verb,  '^sr'^'iry  I  have  made  for  me,  Ezek.  29:  3. 


142  ETYMOLOGY.  §   103 

2.  Neuter  verbs  and  passive  species,  whose  significa- 
tion does  not  admit  of  a  direct  object,  may  yet  receive 
suffixes  expressive  of  indirect  relations,  such  as  would 
be  denoted  by  the  dative  or  ablative  in  occidental  lan- 
guages, "ri'r^  7je  fasted  for  me  Zech.  7:  5,  ^'^IT\  thou  shalt 
be  forgotten  hy  me,  Isa.  44:  21. 

3.  The  infinitive  may  be  viewed  as  a  noun,  in  which 
case  its  suffix  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  possessive,  and  re- 
presents the  subject  of  the  action;  or  it  may  be  viewed 
as  a  verb  when  its  suffix  represents  the  object,  "iS'n  my 
speaking,  "nbiD  my  sending,  "j^nri  to  kill  me,  "j"^"?  to  com- 
fort me.  The  participle  may  also  receive  the  suffix  either 
of  a  verb  or  a  noun,  the  pronoun  in  either  case  denoting 
the  object,  "li^h  seeing  me  Isa.  47:  10,  ''i<3i2J  hating  me,  lit. 
my  haters,  Ps.  35:  19. 

a.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  a  verbal  suffix  with  the  infinitive  repre- 
sents the  subject  "^J^Vra  at  my  returning  Ezek.  47:  7,  or  a  nominal  suffix 
the  object  "^nn  to  permit  me  Num.  22: 13,  "'ra^  Deut.  25:  7,  ''Z'lV  1  Chron.4: 10. 

§  103.  Paradigm  III.  exhibits  certain  portions  of  the 
regular  verb  bbj^  with  aU  the  suffixes. 

a.  The  parts  of  the  verb  selected  are  sufficient  representatives  of  all 
the  rest,  and  by  the  aid  of  the  rules  ah'eady  given  will  enable  the  student 
to  determine  any  other  required  form  for  himself.  The  third  person  sin- 
gular of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  which  undergoes  no  change  in  the  body  of 
the  verb,  will  answer  mutatis  mutandis  for  all  the  forms  in  that  species 
ending  with  the  final  radical.  The  third  singular  of  the  Piel  preterite, 
Avhich  sutlers  a  change  in  its  last  syllable  only,  will  in  like  manner  answer 
for  all  tlie  forms  in  that  species  ending  with  the  final  radical.  The  Kal 
preterite  is  given  in  all  the  persons,  both  on  account  of  the  peculiarity 
of  that  tense,  which  suffers  changes  in  both  its  vowels,  and  in  order  to 
exhibit  the  changes  in  the  personal  terminations  which  apply  equally  to 
the  preterites  of  the  other  species.  The  Kal  infinitive  and  imperative  are 
peculiar  in  forming  a  new  initial  syllable  which  echoes  the  rejected  vowel. 
The  third  person  singular  of  the  Kal  future  affords  a  type  of  all  tlie  forms 
in  that  tense  which  end  with  the  final  radical;  and  the  third  plural  of  the 
same  tense  is  a  tj'pe  of  all  the  future  forms  in  this  and  in  the  other  species 
which  have  personal  terminations  appended.  The  participles  undergo  the 
same  changes  in  receiving  suffixes  with  nouns  of  like  formation  and  ar« 
therefore  not  included  in  this  table. 


§  104 


PERFECT  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  143 


Remarks  on  the  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes. 

PEETEBITB. 

§  104.  a.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  (_)  as  the  union  vowel  of  the 
preterite,  "'S^S']  Isa.  8:11,  "^xd  4:  20,  1  Sam.  25:  32,  Ezek.  27:  26,  Daghesh- 
forte  euijhonic  is  twice  inserted  in  the  suffix  of  the  first  pers.  sing.,  ■^?t'Q^ 
Ps.  118:  18,  ^Sn  Gen.  30:  6. 

b.  Tlie  suffix  of  the  second  masc.  sing,  is  occasionally  Tj  in  pause  lT]^!!?Q 
Isa.  55:  5,  so  with  the  infinitive,  Til^^'H  Deut.  28 :  24.  45;  and  a  similar 
form  with  the  future  may  perhaps  be  indicated  by  the  K'thibh  in  Hos.  4:  6 
-[NDS*ax,  §  11.  1.  a,  where  the  K'ri  has  ^|pxpx.  With  6<"b  and  IT'^  verbs 
this  form  of  the  suffix  is  of  frequent  occurrence,  '-'^'iV  Isa.  30:  19,  Jer.  23 :  37, 
TjN"i2!7  Ezek.  28:  15.  In  a  few  instances  with  the  future  and  infinitive  the 
final  a  is  represented  by  the  vowel  letter  tl,  and  the  suffix  is  written  flD, 
nsx^l^ai,   ni-i^jS""!  l  Kin.  is  :  lO.  44,    Prov.  2:11,    Ps.  145  :  10,   Jer.  7  :  27, 

T  V  T   :  •  '  T   :  T-;r  '  'if 

Ezek.  40:  4. 

c.  The  suffix  of  the  second  fern.  sing,  is  commonly  ^  ,  "^"ip  Isa.  54:  6, 
TpXE  Isa.  60:  9,  except  after  the  thii-d  fern.  sing,  of  the  verb,  when  it  is 
"..,  "ribviX  Ruth  4:  15,  ~rS2Td  Isa.  47:  10;  sometimes,  especially  in  the 
later  Psalms,  it  has  the  form  "^z  coriesponding  to  the  pronoun  ip.X,  "'^''iSTX 
Ps.  137:  6,  '^3b'^?'?n  Ps.  103:  4. 

d.  The  suftix  of  the  third  masc.  sing,  is  written  with  the  vowel  letter 
H  instead  of  1  in  tiins  Ex.  32:  25,  najj  Num.  28:  8,  and  in  some  copies  Itt^dx 
1  Sam.  1:  9,  where  it  would  be  feminine;  this  form  is  more  frequently  ap- 
pended to  nouns  than  to  verbs. 

e.  In  a  few  instances  the  n  of  the  third  fem.  suffix  is  not  pointed  Avith 
Mappik,  and  consequently  represents  a  vowel  instead  of  a  consonant,  tliia 
(with  the  accent  on  the  penult  because  followed  by  an  accented  syllable) 
Am.  1:  11,  so  with  the  infinitive,  friojl  Ex.  9:  18,  !^3^^n  Jer.  44:  19,  and 
the  future,  n^^nm  Ex.  2:  3. 

f.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  plur.  receives  a  paragogic  "i  once  in  prose, 
iawins  Ex.  23:  31,  and  repeatedly  in  poetry,  i^akb^pPl,  •iouiinin  Ex.  15:  9; 
once  !l  is  appended,  l^'^O?";  Ex.  15:  5;  cn  is  used  but  once  as  a  verbal  suffix, 
oriiXSX  Deut.  32:  26.    '      ' 

g.  The  suffix  of  the  third  fem.  plur.  "]  is  seldom  used,  '"'h^^T,  Isa.  48 :  7, 
34: 16,  Hab.  2 :  17,  Zech.  11:5;  more  frequently  the  masculine  D  is  substituted 
for  it,  Wirip  Gen.  26:  15,  18,  tvii'i:')'!  Ex.  2:  17,  Ql'^px;:;::  1  Sam.  6:  10,  so 
Num.  17:  3,  4,  Josh.  4:  8,  2  Kin.  18: 13,  Hos.  2:  14,  Prov.  6:  21;  "jn  is  never 
used  with  verbs.  When  attached  to  infinitives  a  paragogic  it  is  sometimes 
added  to  "i,  !^;5<'i2  Ruth  1:  19,  njnnb  Job  39:  2. 

h.  Verbs,  which  have  Tsere  for  the  second  vowel  in  the  Kal  preterite, 
retain  it  before  suffixes,  r,iriX  Deut.  7:  13,  D'j;33b  Lev.  16:  4,  ni<:p  Deut, 
24:  3,  siTOx-n  Job  37:  24.  The  only  example  of  a  suffix  appended  to  a 
preterite  whose  second  vowel  is  Hholem,  is  T'nlss'i  Ps.  13:  5  from  "^nlsii^ 


144  ETYMOLOGY.  §   105 

the  Uliolem  being  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph  by  the  shifting  of  the 
accent.  Tsere  of  the  Piel  species  is  mostly  shortened  to  Seghol  before  ~, 
D3,  "D,  'fi'-iSp  Deut.  30:  3,  iyiZ^:"]  ver.  4,  but  occasionally  to  Hhirik,  D=:a:rSi< 
(the  Methegh  in  most  editions  is  explained  by  §  45.  2)  Job  16:  5,  ?j'3'2'i"iX 
Isa.  25:  1,  Cr:J7;r'3  Ex.  31:  13,  Cr^P'S  Isa.  1:  15;  before  the  Seghol  in- 
troduced by  a  pause  accent  it  is  rejected,  "it^-?"^  Gen.  49:  25,  T^ns'rx  2  Sam. 
11:  12.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  species  is  retained  before  all  suflixes  with  very 
few  exceptions,  irVrr^  1  Sam.  17:  25,  Ps.  65:  10;  in  Tpi"^  Deut.  32:  7,  the 
verb  lias  the  form  of  the  apocopated  future. 

i.  The  third  fem.  preterite  sometimes  takes  the  third  masc,  sing,  suffix 
in  its  full  form,  ^nr^rj  Prov.  31:  12,  Ezek.  15:  5,  so  in  pause  :!inr>^nx 
1  Sam.  18:  28,  1i^^^^=^?  Gen.  37:  20,  :!inr:-:3  Isa.  59:  16,  and  sometimes  con- 
tracted by  the  exclusion  of  n,  ^iPl'i-ay  1  Sam.  1:  24,  ^irnlsi  Ruth  4:  15,  inbJS 
Job  21:  18.  The  third  fem.  suffix  is  always  contracted,  S^PJf^X  Jer.  49:  24, 
nrifrsn  isa.  34:  17,  nppvs  1  Sam.  1:  6,  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  plural 
is  D_,  notQ  ,  with  this  person  of  the  verb,  the  accent  falling  on  the  penult, 
Ciri::J  Gen.  31:  32,  Cirwy.i-2  Ex.  18:  8,  Oryj?  Ps.  119:  129,  Crb'^J  Isa.  47:  14. 
In  the  intermediate  syllable  before  T^  the  vowel  is  usually  short  in  this 
person,  "rnb";  Jer.  22:  26,  ^r?=^?  Ezek.  28:  18,  though  it  is  sometimes  long, 
Tirtin  Cant.  8:5,  as  it  regularly  is  in  pause  i^P^;?  ibid.;  so  before  "^3  and 
«  of  the  first  person,  "'SrtDX  Ps.  69:  10,  !i:r>t^r!  Num.  20:  14. 

j.  The  second  masc.  sing,  preterite  usually  takes  Pattahh  before  "'S  ex- 
cept in  pause,  "^rriirr;  Ps.  139:  1,  "^rnnn  Job  7:  14,  ■':rirTr  Ps.  22:  2.  It 
takes  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix  either  in  its  full  form,  :inri"i23  Ezek. 
43:  20,  or  contracted,  "insox  2  Kin.  5:  6,  "in-sb  Hab.  1:  12,  'ins;?  (accent 
thrown  back  by  §  85.  1)  Num.  23:  27,  ^rt';^:^  Ps.  89:  44. 

Jc.  The  second  fem.  sing,  preterite  assumes  (  ),  commonly  without  Yodh, 
§  11.  1.  a,  before  suffixes,  and  is  accordingly  indistinguishable  from  the  first 
person  except  by  the  suffix  which  it  receives,  §  102.  1,  or  by  the  connection 
in  which  it  is  found,  ''}b\ib']  Jer.  15:  10,  'nni'j-a  Ex.  2:  10,  Judg.  11:  35, 
1  Sam.  19:  17,  Cant.  4:  9,  Jer.  2:  34,  Ezek.  16:  19.  58;  once  it  takes  (  . ), 
i:n"i  j'.n  Josh.  2:  18,  and  in  a  few  instances  the  masculine  form  is  adopted 
in  its  stead,  i^irWrdn  Josh.  2:  17,  20,  Cant.  5:  9,  Hih-ib"'  Jer.  2:  27  K'ri, 
•inxsn  2  Sam.  14:  10. 

I.  The  plural  endings  of  the  verb  may  be  written  fully  1  or  defectively 
(  ),  thus,  in  the  third  person,  "'j^dnp  Ps.  18:  6,  "'3330  Hos.  12:  1;  the 
second  ^ir\-2'S  Zech.  7:  5,  «n"'^:",n  Num.  20:  5,  21:  5;  and  the  first  'inilU'ii 
1  Chron.  13:  3. 

FUTUBE. 

§  105.  a.  The  imion  vowel  a  is  sometimes  attached  to  the  future,  thus 
■'?. ,  "':k^"!^>  Gen.  19:  19,  ''ipnx;;;  Gen.  29:  32,  Ex.  33:  20,  Num.  22:  33,  Isa. 
56:  3,  Job  9:  18;  W^,  i:^"'?:  Isa.  63:  16;  i  (for  ^nj,  •kf:':  Hos.  8:  3,  Pa 
35:  8,  Eccles.  4:  12,  1  Sam.  21:  14,  so  in  the  K'thibh,  1  Sam.  18:  1  "anxii, 
where  the  K'ri  has  'inrnx;'i;  rt^  (for  n),  nn-^s;"!  Gen.  37:  33,  2  Chron. 
20:  7,  Isa.  26:  5;  D^ ,  crr^":  Ex.  Jd:  30,  Deut.  7:  15,  Num.  21:  SO,  Ps.  74:  8. 


§  ios 


PEEFECT  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  145 


Ps.  118:  10;  1^,  'ii?-:3r  Ex.  2:  17.  In  1  Kin.  2:24  the  K'ri  has  '^?h'^':3'i^  while 
the  K'thibh  has  the  vowel  letter  ^  representing  the  ordinary  e,  '^J'^Il'^u:'"'. 
The  union  vowel  a  is  also  occasionally  found  with  the  imperative,  W5>J5 
Ps.  69:  19,  Deut.  31:  19,  Isa.  30:  8,  Am.  9:  1. 

b.  The  suffixes  with  Daghesh  inserted  occur  chiefly  in  pause;  thus  ''S  , 
i2^?ii  Jer.  50:  44;  "^S. ,  "^sinnPl  Gen.  27:  19,  Job  7:  14,  9:  34;  S|3..  (1st  plur.), 
siJSID-i  Job  31:  15;  ;^.,  i^f^^irx  Isa.  43:  5,  44:  2,  Ps.  30;  13;  il3..  (3  masc. 
sing.j,  >lSnpEn  Job  7:'  18,'  41:  2  K'ri,  Hos.  12:  5;  ns..,  !n37i'sn  Ps.  65:  10, 
(once  with  an  infinitive  MSpH'^  Gen.  30:  41),  or  without  Daghesh,  rtrnr^n 
Judg.  5:  26,  Obad.  ver.  13;  the  unemphatic  form  of  the  suffix  and  that 
with  Daghesh  occur  in  conjunction,  n^"^?';."^  '^f?"'?"'^-  !**»•  26:  5.  There  are 
a  very  few  examples,  found  only  in  poetry  of  3  inserted  between  the  verb 
and  the  suffix  without  further  change,  '^?2;723":  Ps.  50:  23,  :"(3;7.I\i><  Jer. 
22:  24,  If^?;^^",:  Jer.  5:  22,  JtinSD'ia'i  Ps.  72:  15,'^13^,21  Deut.  32:  10,  i^inD^^nx 
Ex.  15:  2.  "'  '  ' 

c.  The  plural  ending  "1  is  in  a  few  instances  found  before  suffixes,  chiefly 
in  pause,  ^::5<";p':,  "^?3?n-j-i,  !-':2X:Jri"i  Prov.  1  :  28,  jrjl^na'^ji  Ps.  63:  4,  ^f^X'i'l 
Ps.  91:  12,  Tirin^'w:-;  Isa.  60:  7,  10,  :!innn^-;]  Jer.  5:  22,  : nr^ix-.i^'i  Jer.  2:  24: 
twice  it  has  the  union  vowel  a,  ''liiiXS'in  Job  19:  2,  "iiisbi.  Prov.  5:  22. 

d.  When  the  second  vowel  of  the  Kal  future  is  0,  it  is  rejected  before 
suffixes  requiring  a  union  vowel,  compound  Sh'va  being  occasionally  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  the  place  of  simple,  ti-SX  Hos.  10:  10,  ISS-n,':  Num.  35:20, 
:n3'l^X  Isa.  27:  3,  '.'^^^^^'.  Isa.  62:  2,  "S^-";'  Ezek.  35:  6,  i^S^^l^X  Jer.  31:  33; 
once  the  vowel  remains,  but  is  changed  to  Shurek,  !D"i^'3dn  Prov.  14:  3;  a, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  retained  as  a  pretonic  vowel,  §  64.  2,  "^I'wSb^.  Job 
29:  14,  Cii-2>  Ex.  29:  30,  Cant.  5:  3,  Gen.  19:  19;  and  even  restored,  where 
it  is  dropped  in  the  regular  inflection,  ~^'?^'j"^  Isa.  62:  5,  Itin;?";  Gen.  37:  24, 
Job  3:  5,  Jer.  13:  17;  so  in  the  Imperative  "'IV'^p  Gen.  23:  11,  Ps.  6:  3, 
^'i^Vi:-::^  Gen.  23:  8,  1  Chron.  28:  2.  Hholem  is  shortened  before  T],  dD,  p, 
though  the  vowel  letter  1  is  occasionally  written  in  the  K'thibh,  ^j'^lSX 
Jer.  1:5. 

e.  The  following  are  examples  of  feminine  pluralf  with  suffixes:  2  fern, 
plur.  ^^M""!^  Cant.  1 :  6,  3  fern.  plur.  ■':i'rTO  Job  19:  15,  "nzin  Jer.  2:19. 
The  masculine  form  is  sometimes  substituted  for  the  feminine,  iTnTaS"^,  t^^^^ln"^ 
Cant.  6:  9. 

INPINITIVB  AND   IMPEEATIVE. 

§  106.  a.  Knl  infinitive.  Before  'r^,  Q2,  'n,  Hholem  is  shortened  to  Ka- 
mets  Hhatuph,  t^^dX  Gen.  2:  17,  rip;a'J  (Methegh.by  §  45.  2)  Obad.  ver,  11, 
d:l32i<  Gen.  3:  5,  DD~i0X  Mai.  1:  7.  Pattahh  remains  in  the  single  example, 
dD3Dn  Isa.  30:  18;  sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  is  rejected 
before  these  as  it  is  before  the  other  suffixes,  and  a  short  vowel  given  to 
the  first  radical,  commonly  Kamets  Hhatuph,  7j"i35  Deut.  29:  11,  T]SO"J 
2  Kin.  22:  19,  dij-iaiy  Deut.  27:  4,  rarely  Kibbuts,  db-i:Jp  Lev.  19:  9,  23:  22, 
sometimes  Hhirik,  P^bp-d  Gen.  19:  33.  35  but  'ii:Di;3  Ruth  3:  4,  ^rd'ii  Zech. 
3:  1,   13S2  2  Sam.  1:  10,    inns  Neh.  8:  5,    and  occasionally  Pattahh,  T^>:pn 

10 


146  ETYMOLOGY.  §  107 

Ezek.  25:  6.  In  the  feminine  form  of  tlie  infinitive,  as  in  nouns  the  old 
feminine  ending  Pi  is  substituted  for  n,  ''.rV'2'::  Isa.  HO:  19,  'ir^:i';n  Hos.  7:  4, 
Ex.  30:  32.  The  Niphal  infinitive  retains  its  pretonic  Kamets  before  suffixes, 
ni-]2»n  Ezek.  21 :  29,  Dent.  28:  20,  Ps.  37:  33.  Hhirik  oTF  the  Hiphil  Infinitive 
becomes  Tattahh  before  Resh  in  t:?"!?!^  Ezek.  21:  29. 

b.  Kal  Imperative.  The  first  radical  commonly  receives  Kamets  Hhatuph 
upon  the  rejection  of  Hholem,  "^?  jri'  '^r'^P^  Jer.  15:  15,  but  occasionally  it 
takes  Hhirik,  rj^SJ  (with  Daghesh-forte  euphonic)  Prov.  4:  13.  In  the  Hiph. 
imp.  2  masc.  sing.  Hhirik  is  restored  before  sufrixes  "^sV?!"?  ^^a.  43:26. 


IfiiPERFECT  Verbs. 

§  107.  Imperfect  verbs  depart  more  or  less  from  the 
standard  already  given,  as  the  nature  of  their  radicals 
may  require.    They  are  of  three  classes,  viz. : 

I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttural 
letter  in  the  root. 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

in.  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel  letter  in  the  root. 

These  classes  may  again  be  subdivided  according  to 
the  particular  radical  affected.  Thus  there  are  three 
kinds  of  guttural  verbs: 

1.  Pe  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is 
a  guttural. 

2.  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

3.  Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs: 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun, 
and  is  liable  to  be  contracted  by  assimilation  with  the 
second. 

2.  Ayin  doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and  tlilrd 
radicals  are  alike,  and  are  liable  to  be  contracted  into  one. 


§  108  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  147 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs : 

1.  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is 
Yodh. 

2.  Ayin  Yav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Vav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Ijamedh  He  verbs,  or  those  in  which  a  quiescent 
He  takes  the  place  of  the  third  radical. 

The  guttural_differ_from_the,-pjerf&ct  vorbo  iti-ih^ 
vowels  only;  the  first  division  of  the  contracted  verbs 
differ  only  in  the  consonants;  the  quiescent  and  the 
second  division  of  the  contracted  verbs  differ  from  the 
perfect  verbs  in  both  vowels  and  consonants. 

a.  The  third  class  of  imperfect  verbs  may  either  be  regarded  as  hav- 
ing a  quiescent  letter  in  the  root,  which  in  certain  forms  is  changed  into 
a  vowel,  or  as  having  a  vowel  in  the  root,  which  in  certain  forms  is 
changed  into  a  quiescent  letter.  As  the  settlement  of  this  question  is  purely 
a  matter  of  theory,  the  usual  name  of  quiescent  verbs  has  been  retained 
as  sufficiently  descriptive. 

b.  The  origin  of  these  various  technical  names  for  the  different  kinds 
of  imperfect  verbs  is  explained  §  76.  3. 

Pe  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  108.  Gutturals  have  the  four  following  pecuHarities, 
§60,  viz.: 

1.  They  often  cause  a  preceding  or  accompanying 
vowel  to  be  converted  into  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh  furtive  at  the  end  of  a  word 
after  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  or  before  a  vowelless 
final  consonant. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  preference  to  simple  Sh'va. 

4.  They  are  incapable  of  being  doubled,  and  conse- 
quently do  not  receive  Daghesh-forte. 

10* 


148  ETYJIOLOGY.  §  109 

§  109.  Pe  guttural  verbs  are  affected  by  these  pe- 
culiarities as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  The  Hhirik  of  the  preformatives  is  changed  to  Pat- 
tahh  before  the  guttural  in  the  Kal  future,  if  the  second 
vowel  be  Hholem,  I'D?'  for  ix^'y,  but  if  the  second  radical 
has  Pattahh  this  change  does  not  occur,  because  it  would 
occasion  a  repetition  of  the  same  vowel  in  successive 
syllables,  §  63.  1.  Z?.  In  the  Kal  future  a,  therefore,  in 
the  Kiphal  preterite  and  participle,  wiiere  the  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable  is  likewise  a,  and  in  the  Hiphil  prete- 
rite, where  7  is  characteristic  and  therefore  less  subject 
to  change,  Hhirik  is  compounded  with  Pattahh,  or,  in 
other  words,  is  changed  to  the  diphthongal  Seghol,  'i:^\T'r_j 
Tb^;" ,  "*i2?ri.  Seghol  accompanying  i<  of  the  first  person 
singular  of  the  Kal  future,  §  GO.  1.  a  (5),  and  Kamets 
Hhatuph,  characteristic  of  the  Hophal  species,  suffer  no 
?hange.  The  same  is  true  of  Hholem  in  the  first  syllable 
of  the  Kal  participle,  Hhirik  of  the  Piel  preterite,  and 
Kibbuts  of  the  Pual  species,  for  the  double  reason  that 
these  vowels  are  characteristic  of  those  forms,  and  that 
their  position  after  the  guttural  renders  them  less  Hable 
to  mutation,  §  60.  I.  a  (2);  the  second  reason  applies 
likewise  to  the  Hhirik  of  the  feminine  singular  and 
masculine  plural  of  the  Kal  imperative,  which,  as  the 
briefest  of  the  short  vowels,  is  besides  best  adapted  to 
the  quick  utterance  of  a  command,  ^i'^^,  ^i'r^^ 

2.  As  the  guttural  does  not  stand  at  the  end  of  the 
word,  there  is  no  occasion  for  applying  the  rule  respect- 
ing Pattahh  furtive;  this  consequently  does  not  ajapear 
except  in  "in';,  apocopated  future  of  rnn,  and  in  one  other 
doubtful  example,  §  1 1 4. 

3.  Wherever  the  first  radical  should  receive  simple 
Sh'va  the  guttural  takes  compound  Sli'va  instead;  tliis, 
if  til  ere  be  no  reason  for  preferring  another,  and  especi- 


§  110  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  149 

ally  if  it  be  preceded  by  the  vowel  Pattahh,  will  be  Hha- 
tepli  Pattahh,  whose  sound  is  most  consonant  with  that 
of  the  gutturals;  this  is  the  case  in  the  Kal  second  plural 
preterite,  construct  infinitive,  future  and  imperative  with 
Hholem,  and  in  the  Hiphil,  infinitives,  future,  imperative, 
and  participle,  DtTl'2y,  n23>'\  If,  however,  the  guttural  be 
preceded  by  another  vowel  than  Pattahh  the  compound 
Sh'va  will  generally  be  conformed  to  it;  thus,  after  Seghol 
it  becomes  Hhateph  Seghol  as  in  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative  a,  the  JSTij^hal  preterite  and  participle,  and 
the  Hiphil  preterite,  pin;',  l^bj^ri,  and  after  Kamets  Hha- 
tuph  it  becomes  Hhateph  Kamets  as  in  the  Hophal 
species,  "TQ^Tl.  If  this  compound  Sh'va  in  the  course  of 
inflection  comes  to  be  followed  by  a  vowelless  letter,  it 
is  changed  to  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  §  61.  1, 
thus,  (..)  becomes  (_)  in  the  second  feminine  singular  and 
the  second  and  third  masculine  plural  of  the  Kal  future ; 
(,)  becomes  (  )  in  the  third  feminine  singuL'  •  and  the 
third  plural  of  the  Niphal  preterite;  and  (^)  becomes  (^) 
in  the  corresponding  persons  of  the  preterite  and  future 
Hophal,  ^T::?r,  ^n'2X,  t-nC^^ri. 

a.  The  simple  Sh'va  following  a  short  vowel  thus  formed,  remains 
vocal  as  in  the  conesponding  forms  of  the  perfect  verb,  the  new  syllable 
being  not  mixed  but  intermediate,  and  hence  a  succeeding  aspirate  will 
retain  its  aspiration,  thus  In^^s";;  yaamhlhu,  not  ^'"^^""^  yaamdii,  §  22.  a.  In 
like  manner  the  Kal  imperative  has  '''i^j',  I'l^S'  not  "'^•Oj',  ^'^'O'J,  showing 
that  even  in  the  perfect  verb  "^'ilip,  l5::p  were  pronounced  kWll,  kiVlu,  not 
kitll,  kitlu. 

4.  The  reduplication  of  the  first  radical  being  im- 
possible in  the  infinitive,  future  and  imperative  Niphal, 
the  preceding  vowel,  which  now  stands  iu  a  simple  syl- 
lable, is  lengthened  in  consequence  from  Hhirik  to  Tsere, 

S  60.  4,  -'layn  for  itvn. 

O  '  T     I"  T       • 

§  110.  1.  The  verb  Tj;?  to  stand,  whose  inflections  are 
shown  in  Paradigm  IV,  may  serve  as  a  representative  of 


150  ETYMOLOGY.  §111 

Pe  guttural  verbs.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hitlipael  are  omit- 
ted, as  they  present  no  deviation  from  the  regular  verbs. 
The  Niplial  of  Tj;^  is  not  in  use,  but  is  here  formed 
from  analogy  for  the  sake  of  giving  completeness  to  the 
paradigm. 

2.  The  Kal  imperative  and  future  of  those  verbs  which 
have  Pattahh  in  the  second  syllable  may  be  represented 
by  PI^  io  ^6  strong  in  the  same  Paradigm. 

3.  Certain  verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  X,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future  after  the 

'"^^l  following,  which  is  distinctively  called  the  Pe  Aleph(i<"S) 
\   mode. 

Future  op  Pe  Aleph  Verbs. 

3  masc.  3  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sma.         ^Q^-^  ^ii^jn  ^ij;p  ^5p5^n  V^j^ 

Plub.    ^5^^-.     nDbi^in       ^!:D5<n     n:bbxn        bbi^D 

Five  verbs  uniformly  adopt  this  mode  of  inflection, 
viz.:  lis  to  j)erish,  nis  to  be  willing,  bis  to  eat,  ^"IS  to 
say,  r£i<  to  hake;  a  few  others  indifferently  follow  this  or 
the  ordinary  Pe  guttural  mode,  nihs  to  love,  THUJ  to  take 
hold,  r,CS  to  gather.  .  " 

Kemarks  on  Pe  Guttural  Yerbs. 

§  111.  1.  The  preforniative  of  the  Kal  future  a  has  (_)  in  one  instance, 
::bn]  Ezek.  23:  5.  That  of  the  Kal  future  0  has  ( .)  in  ri^n7  Prov.  10:  3, 
rjin;;  Ps.  29:  9.  Three  verbs  with  future  o,  oBn,  cSn,  "ipn  have  Pattalih 
in  the  first  syllable  vhen  the  Hholem  appears,  but  Stghol  in  those  forms 
in  winch  tlie  Hholem  is  dropped,  C'i'n-'^  Job  12:  14,  13'in"'  2  Kin.  3:  25  but 
'b-in-;  Ex.  19:  21,  24;  so  with  suffi.\es,  "^ribn;;;  Ps.  141:  5,  r^byy^^.  L'ia.  22:  19, 
irriuns  Isa.  53:  2.    "isn  has  Ji-isni  but  insni. 

••    I    :  T  ••   T  :    :  -  at  :  v 

2.  a.  If  the  first  radical  be  N,  the  prefmmative  takes  Seghol  in  most 
verle  in  the  Kal  future,  whether  a  or  o,  ^i^2.i  "'^S^,  *i5V<r),  "Hxr)  as  well  aa 
I^CiSt;:.  rix;;',  b:;xr),  r3xn;  in  a  few  with  future  a,  §  110.  3,  it  takes  Hliolem, 
the  (.)  of  the  second  syllable  usually  becoming  (  )  in  pause,  and  in  a  few 


§111  EEMAEKS  ON  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  151 

instances  without  a  pause  accent,  ihx"^,  I^X"^,  ^'^^.5<*',  fri^'^>  ^ut  ^ox"!;  in  two 
verbs  it  becomes  (.)  after  Vav  conversive,  "ipX'l,  TrtX'l,  but  with  a  pause 
accent  bDX''1,  "i^si'^l  or  in  the  first  verses  of  several  chapters  of  Job  !">^X''T. 
Hholem  in  these  verbs  is  probably  modified  from  d,  so  that  ^?X''  is  for 
bbx';  from  b?x;i,  §  201.  e. 

b.  As  X  is  always  quiescent  after  Hholem  in  this  latter  form  of  the 
future,  §  57.  2.  (2)  a,  Pe  Aleph  verbs  might  be  classed  among  quiescent 
verbs,  and  this  is  in  fact  done  by  some  grammarians.  But  as  K  has  the 
double  character  of  a  guttural  and  a  quiescent  in  different  forms  sprung 
from  the  same  root,  and  as  its  quiescence  is  confined  almost  entirely  to  a 
single  tense  of  a  single  species,  it  seems  better  to  avoid  sundering  what 
really  belongs  together,  by  considering  the  Pe  Aleph  as  a  variety  of  the 
Pe  guttural  verbs.  In  a  few  instances  X  gives  up  its  consonantal  character 
after  ( .),  which  is  then  lengthened  to  (..),  tinXPl  Mic.  4:  8.  When  thus 
quiescent  after  either  Tsere  or  Hholem,  !!<  is  always  omitted  in  the  first 
person  singular  after  the  preformative  X,  ihs;  Gen.  32:  5  for  "irxx,  nflX 
Prov.  8:  17  for  =llrjXX,  bsN  Gen.  24:  33  for  bixx,  and  occasionally  in  other 
persons,  ibm  Jer.  2:  36  for  "ibTwyn;  so  Xni  Deut.  33:  21,  xhh  Prov.  1:  10, 
rjbh  Ps.  104:  29,  si-i^n  2  Sam.  19:  14,  tnn.l  2  Sam.  20:  9,  ^insni  1  Sam.  28:  24; 
in  a  few  instances  the  vowel  letter  T  is  substituted  for  it,  ^llia'i"'  Ezek.  42:  5 
for  ibaxp,  ^iix  Neh.  2  :  7,  Ps.  42:  10. 

e.  A  like  quiescence  or  omission  of  X  occurs  in  bsX'^T  Num.  11:  25  Hi- 
fut.  for  bix|si,  b-^bn  Ezek.  21:  33  Hi.  inf.  for  b-^ixilj  'j'^ix  Job  32:  11  Hi. 
fut.  for  "rixx,  'pT^  Prov.  17:  4  Hi.  part,  for  '("'tx^,  §  53.  2.  a,  -ISB^p  Job 
35:  11  Pi.  part,  for  !l3sbx?3,  §  53.  3,  ^?nin  2  Sam.  22:  40  Pi.  fut.  for  "^DnTXri, 
n-1'jl  1  Sam.  15:  5  Hi.  fut.  for  2nx^1,  rflii  Isa.  21:  14  Hi.  pret.  for  1"'nxn, 
bfn  Isa.  13:  20  Pi.  fat.  for  brX"),  and  after  prefixes  nibxb  for  "I'ixb,  the 
Kal  infinitive  of  "irX  with  the  preposition  b,  ^13X1  Ezek.  28:  16. Pi.  fut. 
with  Vav  conversive  for  T^'i^XXI ,  "I'l'^XI  Zech.  1 1 :  5  Hi.  fut.  with  Vav  con- 
junctive for  "I'Ci-'X'l,  d'^nion  Eccles.  4:  14  Kal  pass.  part,  with  the  article 
for  Qi'nilOxti, 

d.  Hholem  is  further  assumed  by  Pe  Aleph  roots  once  in  the  Niphal 
preterite,  ^Tnx3  Num.  32:  30  for  lTnX3,  and  five  times  in  the  Hiphil  future, 
rTi"ihx  Jer.  46:  8  for  STn'^nxx,  b^iix  Hos.  11 : 4  for  b'lixx,  ti^^'ix  Neh.  13:  13 
for  nv-J?XX,  bx'l  1  Sam.  14:  24  abbreviated  from  nsx'^T  for  nbx^l,  inia^ 
2  Sam.  20:  5  K'ri  for  "irtXIiil. 

e.  X  draAVs  the  vowel  to  itself  from  the  preformative  in  linxPl  Prov. 
1:  22  Kal  fut.  for  >ianxn  in  pause  wnxFi  Zech.  8:  17,  Ps.  4:  3,  §  60.  3.  c. 
Some  so  explain  ^iribsXPl  Job  20:  26,  regarding  it  as  a  Kal  future  for  sinbaxn 
with  the  vowel  attracted  to  the  X  from  the  preformative;  it  is  simpler, 
however,  to  regard  it  as  a  Pual  future  with  Kamets  Hhatuph  insteiad  of 
Kibbuts,  §  93.  a,  as  drix??  Nah.  2  :  4,  T^^nn-;  Ps.  94:  20. 

3.  a.  Kamets  Hhatuph  for  the  most  part  remains  in  the  Kal  infinitive 
and  imperative  with  suffixes  or  added  vowels,  as  t^T^S,  "i^?!^.  "^I'^S,  being 
rarely  changed  to  Pattahh,  as  in  ^nbnn  Prov.  20:  16,  or  Seghol,  as  "JlSDX 
Num.  11:  16,    Sls'^S  Job  33:  5.     In  the  inflected  imperative  Seghol  occurs 


162  ETYMOLOGY.  §   112 

once  instead  of  Hhirik,  ""^D^'n  Isa.  47:  2,  and  Kamets  Hhatuph  twice  in 
compensation  for  tlje  omitted  Hholeni,  ""[hv  Zeph.  '^:  14  but  ilibs  Is.  68:  5, 
ld"in  Jer.  2:  12  but  niipi  Jer.  50:  27,  thoutrh  the  o  sound  is  once  retained 
in  the  compound  Sh'va  of  a  pausal  form,  "'S^n  Isa.  44:  27.  Ewald  explains 
Dnnrn  Ex.  20:  5,  23:  24,  Dent.  5:  9,  and  t:nzv:  Deut.  13:  3  as  Kal  futures, 
the  excluded  Hliolem  giving  character  to  the  preceding  vowels;  the  forms, 
however,  are  properly  Hoplial  futures,  and  there  is  no  reason  why  the 
words  ma}-  not  be  translated  accordingly  be  induced  to  serve.  In  a  few  Kal 
infinitives  with  a  feminine  termination  n  has  (  ),  ti'i'an  Ezek.  16:  5,  inS'an 
•Hos.  7:  4. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Pattahh  is  found  in  the  first  syllable  of  the 
Niphal  preterite  and  participle  and  of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  fl-?;,  1ili?3, 
nii?3  but  nnrr:,  •j-nr:  Ps.  89:  8,  cn-^rn  Judg.  8:  19. 

§  112.  1.  The  guttural  invariably  receives  compound  Sh'va  in  place  of 
simple,  where  this  is  vocal  in  the  perfect  verb;  and  as  in  these  cases  it 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  it  is  more  at  liberty  to  follow  its  na- 
tive preferences,  and  therefore  usually'  takes  (_ ).  In  Cri"'"n  2  plur.  pret., 
ri"^ri  inf.,  n_"n  imper.  of  n^n,  the  initial  n  has  (_)  under  the  influence  of 
the  following  "';  !!<  receives  (_  )  in  the  second  plural  of  the  Kal  preterite, 
and  in  the  feminine  and  plural  of  the  passive  participle,  C!h"iSX,  Dnbzx, 
D'^p^iax,  but  commonly  (^)  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive,  §  60.  3.  b,  bix 
imper.,  VbS  and  bbX  inf.,  THX  and  ihx  inf.,  yh^.  imper.,  I^X  inf.  and  imper. 
(but  "i^J^n  Job  34:  18  with  «l  interrogative),  p-X,  C|bJ<  (with  il  paragogic 
nspX),  and  in  a  very  few  instances  the  long  vowel  (_),  §  60.  3.  c,  ^EX  Ex. 
16:  23  for  ^ISX,  ^l-'nx  Isa.  21:  12. 

2.  Where  the  first  radical  in  perfect  verbs  stands  after  a  short  vowel 
and  completes  its  syllable,  the  guttural  does  the  same,  but  mostly  admits 
an  echo  of  the  preceding  vowel  after  it,  inclining  it  likewise  to  begin  the 
syllable  which  follows.  In  the  intermediate  syllable  thus  formed,  §  20.  2, 
the  vowel  remains  short,  only  being  modified  agreeably  to  the  rules 
already  given  by  the  proximity  of  the  guttural,  which  itself  receives  the 
corresponding  Hhateph.  The  succession  is,  therefore,  usually  (  ),  (_  )  or 
(^.  ).  In  a  very  few  instances  this  correspondence  is  neglected;  thus,  in 
~^nr}  3  fem.  fut.  of  T|^ti  to  go  (comp.  priJ-']!  from  pnii  to  laugh)  the  Hhirik 
of  the  preformative  remains  and  the  guttural  takes  Hhateph  Pattahh;  in 
n"i"fi  (once,  viz.,  Hab.  1:  15  for  n^;;"n)  a>'d  n"^^!!7  Hiphil  and  Hophal  prete- 
rites of  Tt'iv  to  go  up,  and  Pi")b>n  (once,  viz..  Josh  7:  7  for  ri"irj."n)  Hi.  pret. 
of  "123?  to  pass  over,  the  guttural  is  entirely  transferred  to  the  second  syl- 
lable, and  the  preceding  vowel  is  lengthened.  The  forms  ri'^ns,  rr^n^, 
cn"i">iTi ,  IT'ns  from  iT^n  to  be,  and  like  forms  from  iTTi  to  live,  are  peculiar 
in  having  simple  vocal  Sh'va. 

3.  Where  (._)  or  (^  )  are  proper  to  the  form  these  are  frequently 
changed  to  (_  )  or  (  )  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  word  or  the  removal 
of  its  accent  forward.  Thus,  in  the  Kal  future,  rpX";  2  Kin.  5:  3,  lEDS;^  Ex. 
4:  29,  "^rEpST  Ps.  27:  10,  "'Bpxn  Josh.  2:  18;  ilsHx";  Isa.  59:  5,  "'inxn  Judg. 
16:  13;   the  Niphal,  B3?3  1  Kin.  10:  3,  iiT^b?.).  Nah.  3:11,  ti''hhv^  Ps.  26:  4; 


§  152 


EEMAEKS  ON  PE  GUTTUEAL  VEEBS.  153 


and  especially  in  the  Hiphil  preterite  with  Vav  conversive,  Pjl^Xfl  Job 
14:  19,  rjinsm.  Deut.  7:  24,  Dn-inxn"!  Deut.  9:  3  (comp.  00??^^!  Ps.  80:  6), 
•'n'lnxn'l^  Lev!  23:  30;  '^Fi^^Ntll  Isa.  49  :  26;  •^Pi^ir'v!  Neh.  5:  16,  '^nptnn'! 
Ezek.  '36:  25;  Tj^nin^n  Isa.  43:  23,  ri^n-l^STm  Jer.  17:  4;  'pixn  Deut.  1:  45, 
tnpTXm  Ex.  15:  26,  "'rir^nni  Jer.  49:  37;  after  Vav  conjunctive,  however, 
the  vowels  remain  unchanged,  ■'Pipinri'l  1  Sam.  17:  35,  '^n^a'nnn'l  Ps.  50:  21, 
Neh.  10:  33,  Ezek.  37:  2.  Tlie  change  from  (,__  J  to  (..  _)  after  Vav  con- 
versive occurs  once  in  the  third  person  of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  "i^l^^rt'l  Ps. 
77:  2,  but  is  not  usual,  e.  g.  "'^''^"n'l  .  .  .  'i'l''^V!^"!  Lev.  27:  8.  Tiiere  is  one 
instance  of  ( )  instead  of  (..  .)  in  the  Hiphil  infinitive,  '^|b'^t.r|'^  Jer.  31 :  32. 

4.  A  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va  in  consequence  of  the  rejec- 
tion of  the  vowel  of  a  following  consonant,  will  be  dropped  in  guttural  as 
in  perfect  verbs  upon  the  latter  vowel  being  restored  by  a  pause  accent, 

5.  Sometimes  the  silent  Sh'va  of  the  perfect  verb  is  retained  by  the 
guttural  instead  of  being  replaced  by  a  compound  Sh'va  or  a  subsidiary 
vowel  which  has  arisen  from  it.  This  is  most  frequent  in  the  Kal  future, 
though  it  occurs  likewise  in  the  Kal  infinitive  after  inseparable  preposi- 
tions, in  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  in  the  Hiphil  species,  and  also 
though  rarely  in  the  Huphal.  There  are  examples  of  it  with  all  the  gut- 
turals, though  these  are  most  numerous  in  the  case  of  ti ,  which  is  the 
strongest  of  that  class  of  letters.  In  the  majority  of  roots  and  forms  there 
is  a  fixed  or  at  least  a  prevailing  usage  in  favour  either  of  the  simple  or 
of  the  compound  Sh'va;  in  some,  however,  the  use  of  one  or  the  other  ap- 
pears to  be  discretionary. 

a.  The  following  verbs  always  take  simple  Sh'va  under  the  first  radical 
in  the  species  whose  initial  letters  are  annexed  to  the  root,  viz. : 

onx  Hi.  to  be  red.  *'^k^  K.to  ivjiire, wound,  ^rti  K.  to  spare. 

^•ix  Ni.  Hi.  to  be  illus-  Nan  Ni.  Hi.  Ho.  to  hide,  'oh'n  K.  Ni.  to  do  vio- 

trious.  t:^n  K.  to  beat  off.  lence  to. 

CUK  Hi.  to  close.  "ihn  Hi.  to  join  together,  yxirt  K.  to  he  leavened. 

*ni:x  K.  to  shut.  ^in  K.  to  gird.  nan  K.  to  ferment. 

Cl^N  K.  to  learn.  ^"in  K,  (not  Ho.)    to  ~3n  K.  to  dedicate. 

nsx  K.  to  gird  on.                     cease.  ''^b'n  K.  to  devour. 

CiiJiJ  K.  Ni.  (not  Hi.)  n-jn  K.  to  cut.  Cibn  K.  to  muzzle. 

to  be  guiltg.  TOn  K.    (not   Hi.)    to  "ip'7  K.  Hi.  to  lack. 

hb.'n  K.  Hi.  to  be  vain.               live.  nsn  Ni.  to  cover. 

nan  K.  Hi.  to  meditate,  uin  K.  Hi.  to  be  tcise.  isn  K,  Ni.  to  be  panic- 

t^inn  K.  to  thrust.  *^^n  K.  meaning  doubt-  struck. 

-inn  K.  Ni.  to  honour.               ful.  yhn  K.  to  delight. 

njn  K.  Ni.  to  be.  ihn  K.  Ni.  to  desire.  'isn  K.  to  dig. 

*    «K»(  \3yinsvOV. 


154  ETYMOLOGY.  §   113 

"sn  K.  Hi.  to  blush.        cnn  K.  Ni.  Hi.  to  seal.  ^S7  Hi.  to  be  presnnip- 

ben  K.  Ni.  to  search.      t]hr\  K.  to  seize.  tnous. 

ran  K.  (r\otll\.)fo  hew.  "inn  K.  to  break  through,  ir]^?  K.  "i^iL  to  pervert. 

f^i^n  K.  Ni.  to   investi-    "ziv  K.  to  love,  dote.  "^'CV  K.  Hi.  to  tithe. 

gate.  n"i>  K.  to  put  on  as  an  *Dnr  Ni.  to  be  burvt  up. 

*5nn  K.  to  tremble.                      ornament.  pre  K.    Hi.    to   be   re' 

nnn  K.  to  take  up.  t}rs^  Hi.  to  gather  much.  moved. 

~rn  Ni.  to  be  destined,     "tnj  Ni.  to  be  wanting,  "in?  K,   Ni.   Hi.  to  en. 

Vrn  Ho  to  be  swaddled,    "z.v  K.  Ni.  to  trouble.  treat. 

b.  The  following  are  nsed  with  both  .simple  and  compound  Sh'va,  either 
in  the  same  form  or  in  diflferent  forms,  viz.: 

•^OX  to  bind.  r^bT)  to  trust.  no?  to  wear. 

"En  to  turn.  '^\'^^  '^  withhold.  "li?  to  encircle. 

;rn  to  take  in  pledge.        C]wn  to  uncover.  C^>   to  conceal. 

w"zn  to  bind.  sin  to  think.  "li?  to  shut  up,  restrain. 

pin  to  be  strong.  T\'^'n  to  be  dark.  2pr  to  supplant. 

npn  to  be  sick.  nh?  to  pass  over.  'i:v  to  s7noke. 

p3n  to  divide.  "it3  to  help.  "li"?  to  be  rich. 

c.  The  following  have  simple  Sh'va  only  in  the  passages  or  parts  al- 
leged, but  elsewhere  always  compound  Sh'va,  viz.: 

nrx  2  Chr.  19:2,  Pr.  15:  9,  to  love,  n^"  Ezek.  26:  18,  to  tremble. 

"lis  Ps.  65:  7,  to  gird.  nrn  Hi.  part,  to  be  silent. 

rbx  Ps.  47:  10,  to  gather.  nfin  Jer.  49:  37,  to  be  dismayed. 

•r^sn  Ps.  109:  23,  to  go.  Th?  Eccl.  5:  8,  to  serve. 

jnn  2  Kin.  10:  9,  to  slay.  t^r  Jer.  15:  17,  Ps.  149:  5,  and 

n^n  Job  39:  4,  Jer.  29:  8,  to  dream.  yVj  Ps.  5:  12,  to  exult. 

r3n  Job  20:  24,  to  change,  pierce.       'T\~S  Isa.  44:  7,  to  set  in  order. 

All  other  Pe  guttural  verbs,  if  they  occur  in  forms  requiring  a  Sh'va 
under  the  first  radical,  have  invariably  compound  Sh'va. 

The  use  or  disuse  of  simple  Sh'va  is  so  uniform  and  pervading  in  cer- 
tain verbs,  that  it  must  in  all  probability  be  traced  to  the  fixed  usage  of 
actual  speech.  This  need  not  be  so  in  all  cases,  however,  as  in  other  and 
less  common  words  its  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  may  be  fortuitous; 
additional  examples  might  have  been  pointed  differently. 

§  113.  1.  The  Hhirik  of  the  prefix  is  in  the  Niphal  future,  imperative 
and  participle,  almost  invariably  lengthened  to  T.sere  upon  the  omission  of 
Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical,  "lOn";.,  ^iij"^.,  Isa.  23:  18,  iJ^ni  (the  retro- 
cession of  the  accent  by  §  35.  1)   Isa.  28:  27,  p^n"'  Job  38:  24,  y}rj^  Num. 

*  ajraf  "ksyofisvov.  f  Except  Ps.  44 :  22. 


§114-116  AYIN  GDTTURAL  VERBS.  155 


32; 


17,   ftsn's'l   2  Sam.  17:  23,    which  is  in  one    instance  expressed  by  the 

'       '  A-    Tl—  , 

vowel  letter  "^j  Ht^in  Ex.  25:  31.  The  only  exception  is  5"n3  (two  accents 
explained  by  §  42.  a)  Ezek.  26:  15  for  Jprnri;  Baer's  edition  lias  ^^^1^^. 
According  to  some  copies,  which  differ  in  this  from  the  received  text,  Seghol 
likewise  occurs  in  tirrx  Job  19:  7,  'ij;^'!-^'"  l^-zek.  43:  18,  tjrbp;;^^  1  Chron. 
24:  3,  vi2"3  Lam.  2:  11.  In  Job  34:  31  ^t^\!!  is  neither  the  infin.  nor  the 
imper.  Niph.,  as  it  has  sometimes  been  explained,  but  the  Kal  pret.  TON  with 
He  Interrogative,  §  232.  4. 

2.  The  initial  n  of  the  Hiphil  infinitive  is,  as  in  perfect  verbs,  rarely 
rejected  after  prefixed  prepositions,  as  pW'^  Jer.  87:  12  for  p3nri^,  iJt'^anb 
Eccles.  5  :  5,  "I'^brb  2  Sam.  19:  19,  "iO>"b  Deut.  26:  12,  1ir"3  Neh.  10:  39, 
'n*i7"b  2  Sam.  Is:  ,h  K'thibh;  and  still  more  rarely  that  of  the  Niphal  infin- 
itive, C^b^'a  Lam.  2:  11  for  ~i?^!n.3,  5'nna  Ezek.  26:  15. 

§  114.  The  letter  "i  re.«embles  the  other  gutturals  in  not  admitting 
Daghesh-forte,  and  in  reqiiiring  the  previous  vowel  to  be  lengthened  in- 
stead, t3'T""1  Jon.  1:5,  iliSTT  Ps.  106:  25.  In  other  cases,  however,  it  causes 

'        ITTr-  »  :iT"-  .,  '         ,  ' 

no  change  in  an  antecedent  Hhirik,  v]1"i'^  Deut.  19:  6,  T^"!"^  2  Sam.  7:  10, 
Pi35"t7  Ps.  66:  12,  except  in  certain  forms  of  the  verb  rtx'n  to  see,  viz.,  X'^^1 
Kal  future  with  Vav  conversive,  shortened  from  MX'i'^,  •^N'nn  which  alter- 
nates with  i^X"^!!  as  Hiphil  preterite,  and  once  with  Vav  conversive  prete- 
rite, "^ri''N''ti'l  Nah.  3:5.  It  is  in  two  instances  preceded  by  Hhirik  in  the 
Hiphil  infinitive,  S'^^T},  t"^?'^'!  Jer.  50:  34.  In  the  Hophal  species  the 
participles  "'r.'ip  Isa.  14:  6,  n?3"ip  Lev.  6:  14  take  Kibbuts  in  the  first  syl- 
lable, but  i^X"^,  'i"^  have  the  ordinary KametsHhatuph.  Resh  always  retains 
the  simple  Sh'va  of  perfect  verbs  whether  silent  or  vocal  v)"i~i  Gen.  44:  4, 
"^S^S"!"!  Ps.  129:  86,  except  in  one  instance,  ti^f?  P^.  7:  6,  where  it  appears 
to  receive  Pattahh  furtive  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule  which  restricts  it 
to  the  end  of  the  word  §  60.  2.  a. 

§  115.  The  verb  bbx  reduplicates  its  last  instead  of  its  second  radical 
in  the  Pual,  h'^'Oii;  l^n  reduplicates  its  last  syllable,  'l'i?"it)n  Lam.  2:  11, 
§  92.  a. 

iinti  is  a  secondary  root,  based  upon  the  Hiphil  of  bSn.    See  S"?  verbs. 

For  the  peculiar  forms  of  tjbx  and  T^T^  see  the  ''"S  verbs,  ^b"^  and  T^^i. 


Atin  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  116.  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a 
guttural  for  their  second  radical,  are  affected  by  the 
pecuharities  of  these  letters,  §  108,  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  influence  of  the  guttural  upon  a  following 
vowel  being  comparatively  shght,  this  latter  is  only  con- 
verted into  Pattahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal, 


156  ETYMOLOGY.  §117,118 

and  the  feminine  plural  of  the  future  and  imperative 
Niplial,  Piel,  and  Hithpael,  where  the  like  change  some- 
times occurs  even  without  the  presence  of  a  guttural 

bkT  for  bbirr;  n'^ssn  for  n^bssp. 

2.  No  forms  occur  which  could  give  rise  to  Pattahh 
furtive. 

3.  When  the  second  radical  should  receive  simple 
Sh'va,  it  takes  Hhateph  Pattahh  instead  as  the  compound 
Sh'va  best  suited  to  its  nature;  and  to  this  the  new  vowel, 
formed  from  Sh'va  in  the  feminine  singular  and  maS' 
culine  plural  of  the  Kal  imperative,  is  assimilated,  ^bsi3 
for  ^bs-1. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  vowel  may  either  remain  short  as  in  an  inter* 
mediate  syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere, 
Pattahh  to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts  to  Hholem,  §  60.  4, 

§  117.  The  inflections  of  Ayin  guttural  verbs  may  be 
shown  by  the  example  of  blks,  (Paradigm  V.)  which  in 
some  species  means  to  redeem,  and  in  others  to  pollute. 
The  Hiphil  and  Hophal  are  omitted,  as  the  former  agrees 
precisely  with  that  of  perfect  verbs,  and  the  latter  differs 
only  in  the  substitution  of  compound  for  simple  Sh'va  in 
a  manner  sufficiently  illustrated  by  the  foregoing  species. 

a.  The  Pual  infinitive  is  omitted  from  the  paradigm  as  it  is  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  there  is  no  example  of  it  in  this  class  of  verbs.  As  the 
absolute  infinitive  Piel  mostly  gives  up  its  distinctive  form  and  adopts  that 
of  the  construct,  §  92.  d,  it  is  printed  with  Tsere  in  this  and  the  following 
paradigms. 

Remarks  on  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  118.  1.  If  the  second  radical  is  1,  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  com- 
monly have  Hholem;  but  the  following  take  Pattahh,  "jnx  to  be  long,  "T^bs 
to  kneel,  n^n  to  he  dried  or  desolate,   Tnn  to  tremble^  rj^n  to  reproach,  to 


§119 


BEMAKKS  ON  AYIN  GUTTURAL  VEEBS.  157 


winter,  ynti  to  sharpen,  i'n^  (3"^?)  f<^  ^^  sweet,  inj^  to  come  near,  Qnj?  to 
cover;  tiyji  to  tear  in  pieces,  has  either  Hholem  or  Pattahh;  ©Sn  to  plough 
has  fut.  0,  to  be  silent  has  fut.  a. 

2.  With  any  other  guttural  for  the  second  radical  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative  have  Pattahh;  only  nna  to  roar,  and  fin"^  to  love,  have  Hholem, 
D^T  to  curse,  hv'^  to  trespass,  and  b^s  to  do,  have  either  Pattahh  or  Hho- 
lem ;  the  future  of  inx  to  grasp,  is  iHx'];  or  lr\^\ 

3.  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  is  as  in  perfect  verbs  commonly  prolonged 
to  Kamets  before  suffixes,  where  Hholem  would  be  rejected,  rjilf^X  ProA . 
4:  6,  Drjn'^j";  2  Kin.  10:  14,  djbni^JX  2  Sam.  22:  43,  "iSSl^X^D  Isa.  45:  11,  "'Sar;^' 
Gen.  29:  32. 

4.  The  feminine  plurals  of  the  Niphal  and  Piel  futures  have  Pattahh 
with  the  second  radical  whether  this  be  ^or  another  guttural,  njbriSin  Ezek. 
7:  27,  n3S'i->ari  Prov.  6:  27,  nsjnnri  Ezek.  16:  6,  !!^:SX3rl  Hos.  4:  13,  but 
Tsere  occasionally  in  pause,  nD"in^n  Jer.  9:  17. 

§  119.  1.  With  these  exceptions  the  vowel  accompanying  the  guttural 
is  the  same  as  in  the  perfect  verb;  thus  the  Kal  preterite  mid.  e  '>'^^i< 
Gen.  27:  9,  r(3riN  Deut.  15:  16;  infinitive  pi']  1  Sam.  7:  8,  llinp  Jer.  15:  3, 
with  Makkeph,'  -rn^^  1  Kin.  5:  20;  Niphal  infinitive,  cfibri  Ex.  17:  10,  with 
suffixes,  ^'■^.'^^  2  Chron.  16:  7,  8,  with  prefixed  3,  dHpD  Judg.  11:  25,  Vmii 
1  Sam.  20:  6,  28,  and  once  anomalously  with  prefixed  X,  T^'inx  Ezek.  14:  3 
(a  like  substitution  of  X  for  tl  occurring  once  in  the  Hiphil  preterite  t'^ribsSJt 
Isa.  63:  3);  future  dn^";  Ex.  14:  14,  with  Vav  conversive,  :Di<.53''1  Job  7:  5, 
Vnp^l  Ex.  32:  1,  py-T'il  Judg.  6:  34,  th^m  Ex.  9:  15,  yrkjn^  Num.  22:  25, 
or  with  the  accent  on  the  penult,  Dn|'?^  Ex.  17:  8,  &"BPi1  Gen.  41:  8; 
imperative,  Oriiiri  1  Sam.  18:  17,  or  with  the  accent  thrown  back,  'i";^Qf7 
Gen.  13:  9;  Hiphil  infinitive,  irxnn  1  Sam.  27:  12,  pn'^n  Gen.  21:  16,  Dnqn 
Deut.  7:  2,  apocopated  future,  QJfi:!  1  Sam.  2:  10,  rrirtn  Deut.  9:  26,  D^D^  Ps. 
12:  4,  with  Vav  conversive,  'c'siz'^^  1  Kin.  22:  64,  IHDX^  Zech.  11:8;  impera- 
tive, 'J^pri  Ex.  28:  1,  with  Makkeph,  "annn  Ps.  81:  11,  -p^^T}  2  Sam.  20:  4, 
-brtpri  Deut.  4:  10,  with  a  pause  accent  the  last  vowel  sometimes  becomes 
Pattahh,  pT^y^}  Job  13:  21,  ','i^_^'r\  Ps.  69:  24,  though  not  always,  bnpti  Lev. 
8:  3.  Hophal  infinitive,  a'nnn  2  Kin.  3:  23.  Tsere  is  commonly  retained  in 
the  last  syllable  of  the  Piel  and  Hithpael,  which  upon  the  retrocession  or 
loss  of  the  accent  is  shortened  to  Seghol,  T^ns  Lev.  5:  22,  ^n?";  Hos.  9:  2, 
pnkb  Gen.  39:  14,  "pnab  Ps.  104:  26,  ti'^rr  74:  10,  rr)^^^  Gen.  39:  4,  tD^cnW 
Dan.  2:  1,  2'i'yrin  2  Kin.  18:  23,  and  occasionally  befoi'e  suffixes  to  Hhirik, 
Cibb-iQ  Isa.  1:  15,  :^nsar)  (fem.  form  for  ^^nns'^o,  §  61.  5)  1  Sam.  16:  15  but 
DD^arrnb  Isa.  30:  18,  DDnnilJ  Ezek.  5:  16;  in  a  few  instances,  however,  as  in 
the  perfect  verb,  Pattahh  is  taken  instead,  thus  in  the  preterite,  l:^^  Mai. 
3:  19,  tinn  Ps.  103:  13,  ph-}  Isa.  6:  12,  ili'hx  Deut.  20:  7,  T^'ia  Gen.  24:  1 
(Titi?  rarely  occurs  except  in  pause),  la'nQ  Isa.  25:  11,  and  more  rarely  still 
in  the  imperative,  a'nl^  Ezek.  37:  17,  and  future  anyn";  Prov.  14:  10,  hk^ni, 
ibxan'n  Dan.  1:  8. 

2.  bxi::,  which  has  Kamets  in  pause,  ^^"ii,  ^''^^'^i  ^^^  most  commonly 
Tsere  before  suffixes,   ?|l?Nil3,   ^3^?i<Ty,    exhibits  the  peculiar   forms,   SP}bX'J^ 


158  ETYMOLOGY.  §  120,  121 

1  Sam.   12:   13    J^Fi^NTy    1   Sam.  1:  20,    ^fT^P^Nld   Judg.   13:  6,    !in"in>!<rn 
1  Sam.  1  :  23. 

3.  Kamets  Hhatuph  sometimes  remains  before  the  guttural  in  the  Kal 
imperative  and  infinitive  with  suffixes  or  appended  n,  D^nx  Hos.  9:  10, 
■qsxa  Ruth  3:  13,  tDbs^  Am.  2:  4,  Di:p5<^  (by  §  61.  1)  Isa.  Vo"  12,  oban;? 
Deut.  20:  2  (the  alternate  form  being  oiinp  Josh.  22:  16),  nijnn  Ex.  30: 18, 
n;rnT  Ezek.  8:  6,  and  sometimes  is  changed  to  Pattahh,  ~^e!!  Isa.  57»  13, 
Uly-g  Ezek.  20:  27,  nhn:J  Hos.  5:  2,  iinnx  Deut.  10:  15,  .ihx-i  Jer.  31:  12, 
or  with  simple  Sh'va  under  the  guttural,  ^i^"^  Ps.  68:  8,  "153^7  2  Chron. 
26:  19.  In  nrri  Num.  23:  7,  Kamets  Ilhatuph  is  lengthened  to  Hholem  in 
the  simple  syllable.  Once  the  paragogic  imperative  takes  the  form  flbxr 
Isa.  7:  11,  comp.  nnlio,  nsria  Dan.  9:  19,  nSB"i  Ps.  41:  5. 

4.  Hhirik  of  the  inflected  Kal  imperative  is  retained  before  "i,  !in"iS 
Josh.  9:  6,  and  once  before  n,  ^innwi  Job  6:  22;  when  the  first  radical  is  i< 
it  becomes  Seghol,  dnx  Ps.  31:  24,  "^tnx  Cant.  2:  15;  in  other  cases  it  is 
changed  to  Pattahh,  ""'pn  Isa.  14:  31,  ^p;!  Judg.  10:  14. 

§  120.  1.  The  compound  Sh'va  after  Kamets  Hhatuph  is  (  ),  after 
Seghol  (...),  in  other  cases  (  ),  as  is  sufficiently  shown  by  the  examples  al- 
ready adduced.  Exceptions  are  rare,  "^friN  Ruth  3:  15,  "^nnrn  Ezek.  16:  33, 
^nnsn"!  i/HJid°rehu  Isa.  44:  13. 

2.  The  letter  before  the  guttural  receives  compound  Sh'va  in  ph'^;^ 
Gen.  21:  6;    in   "iStrx?  Ezek.  9:  8,    this   leads   to   the    prolongation   of   the 

•  preceding  vowel  and  its  expression  by  the  vowel  letter  X,  §  11,  1.  a.  This 
latter  form,  though  witliout  an  exact  parallel,  is  thus  susceptible  of  ready 
explanation,  and  there  is  no  need  of  resorting  to  the  hypothesis  of  an  error 
in  the  text  or  a  confusion  of  two  distinct  readings,  "iX"J3  and  "iX'JX. 

3.  Resh  commonly  receives  simple  Sh'va,  though  it  has  compound  in 
some  forms  of  "^3,  e.  g.  12^30  Num.  6:  23,  iins  Gen.  27:  27. 

§  121.  1.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  from  the  second  radical 
the  previous  vowel  is  always  lengthened  before  "1,  almost  always  before 
K,  and  prevailingly  before  S,  but  rarely  before  il  or  M.  The  previous  vowel 
remains  short  in  ni.'3  to  terrify,  0^3  to  provoke,  Lsy-a  to  be  few,  "irj  to 
shake,  and  p2.':i  to  cry.  It  is  sometimes  lengthened,  though  not  always,  in 
"1X3  to  make  plain,  C]X3  to  commit  adultery,  ]'X3  to  despise,  "iX3  to  reject, 
hk'O  to  ask;  ~i'3  to  consume,  "lyr  to  sweep  away  by  a  tempest,  ZVr\  to  abhor; 
bna  to  affright,  tinS  to  be  dim,  bn3  to  lead.  It  is  also  lengthened  in  i^Tt^ 
to  be  dull,  which  only  occurs  Eccl.  10:  10.  The  only  instances  of  the  pro- 
longation of  the  vowel  before  n  are  Dn^  Pi.  inf.  Judg.  5:  8,  "jnia  Pu.  pret. 
Ezek.  21:  18,  ^irii  Pu.  pret.  Ps.  36:  13,  "^n^h'nnn  Job  9:  30,  the  first  two  oi 
which  may,  however,  be  regai-ded  as  nouns.  Daghesh-forte  is  retained  and 
the  vowel  consequently  remains  short  in  n^iS  Ezek.  16:  4,  :'iX"i  Job  33:  21, 
unless  the  point  in  the  latter  example  is  to  be  regarded  as  Mappik,  §  26. 

2.  When  not  lengthened,  Hhirik  of  the  Piel  preterite  commonly  re- 
mains unaltered  before   the  guttural,    ^'Hh3  Job  15:  18,    irHJ  Jer.  12:  10, 


§122,123  LAMEDH  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  159 

though  it  is  in  two  instances  changed  to  Seghol,  ^iHi<  Judg.  5:  28,   '^5t??'j|!l 
Ps.  51:  7. 

3.  "When  under  the  influence  of  a  pause  accent  the  guttural  receives 
Kamets,  a  preceding  Pattahb  is  converted  to  Seghol,  §  63.  I.  a,  "^P^nsn 
Ezek.  5:  13,  BTOH'^  Num.  23:  19,  :^"in-^n  Num.  8:  7. 

§  122.  1.  'i;5"i  and  "lixiy  are  Piel  forms  with  the  third  radical  redupli- 
cated in  place  of  the  second;  "ir")tjP  doubles  the  second  syllable;  and  l^iDN 
sQln  Hos.  4:  18,  is  by  the  ablest  Hebraists  regarded  as  one  woi"d,  the  last 
two  radicals  being  reduplicated  together  with  the  personal  ending,  §  92.  a.j 

2.  •si''y:J  and  "li'O  have  two  forms  of  the  Piel,  ^^^  and  UJ'n'ii:,  "i^p  and 
nj>b,  §  92.  I.;  and  d'ja  two  forms  of  the  Hithpael,  1'w?;n^  ^'■^?^^']  Jer-  46; 
7.  8;  !fi<"3-2  Isa.  52:  6,  follows  the  analogy  of  the  latter;  yup^  Eccl.  12:  5, 
is  souietime-i  derived  from  "j'XJ  to  despise,  as  if  it  were  for  yx:^;  such  a 
form  would  however  be  unexampled.  The  vowels  show  it  to  be  the  Hiphil 
future  of  1'^;  or  rather  "^3  to  flourish  or  blossom,  the  K  being  inserted  as 
a  vowel  lettei-,  §  11.  1.  a,  15N53  Isa.  69:  3,  Lam.  4:  14  is  a  Niphal  formed 
upon  the  basis  of  a  Pual,  §  8o.  c.  (2).  OT'fl  Ezra  10:  16  is  an  anomalous 
infinitive  from  ttJ'Sn,  which  some  regard  as  Kal,  others  as  Piel. 


Lamedh  Guttural  Yerbs. 

§  123.  Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have 
a  guttural  for  their  third  radical,  are  affected  by  the 
pecuharities  of  these  letters,  §  108,  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes 
Pattahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal,  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  Piel,  Hiphil, 
and  Hithpael,  r^t\ 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical,  as  in  the  Piel 
and  Hithpael  and  in  some  forms  of  the  other  species, 
may  either  be  changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the 
latter  case  the  guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive,  §  1 7,  after 
the  long  heterogeneous  vowel,  e.  g.  rij'i''  or  t}by:\ 

3.  Hliirik  of  the  Hiphil  species,  Hholem  of  the  Kal 
and  Niphal  infinitives,  and  Shurek  of  the  Kal  passive 
participle,  suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural, 
which  receives  a  Pattahh-furtive,  n^^Trr,  n'blT. 


160  ETYMOLOGY.  §  124,  125 

4.  The  guttural  retains  the  simple  ShVa  of  the  per- 
fect verb  beibre  all  afformatives  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, though  compound  Sh'va  is  substituted  for  it  be- 
fore suffixes,  which  are  less  closely  attached  to  the  verb, 

T   :  -   t'      I  -:iT    : 

5.  When,  however,  a  personal  afformative  consists  of 
a  single  vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  sin- 
gular of  the  preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh- 
furtive  to  aid  in  its  pronunciation  wdthout  sundering  it 
from  the  affixed  termination,  Pinli'd 

a.  Some  grammarians  regard  this  as  a  Pattahh  inserted  between  the 
guttural  and  the  final  vowelless  consonant  b}'  §  61.  2,  and  accordingly 
pronounce  Rlj^'j  shdlahhat  instead  of  shdla°']iht.  But  as  these  verbs  do 
not  suffer  even  a  compound  Sh'va  to  be  inserted  before  the  affixed  per- 
sonal termination,  it  is  scarcely  probable  that  a  full  vowel  would  be  ad- 
mitted. And  the  Daghesh-lene  in  the  final  Tav  and  the  Sh'va  under  it 
show  that  the  preceding  vowel  sign  is  not  Pattahh  but  Pattahh-furtive, 
§  17.  a. 

6.  There  is  no  occasion  in  these  verbs  for  the  appHca- 
tion  of  the  rule  requiring  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte 
from  the  gutturals. 

§  1 24.  The  inflections  of  Lamedh  guttural  verbs  may 
be  represented  by  flV^  to  send  (Paradigm  VI).  The  Pual 
and  Hophal,  which  agree  wath  perfect  verbs  except  in 
the  Pattahh-furtive  of  the  second  feminine  preterite  and 
of  the  absolute  infinitive,  are  omitted  from  the  paradigm. 
The  Hithpael  of  this  verb  does  not  occur,  but  is  here 
formed  from  analogy,  the  initial  sibilant  being  transposed 
with  T\  of  the  prefix,  according  to  §  82.  5. 

a.  Instead  of  the  Niphal  infinitive  absolute  with  prefixed  tn,  which  does 
not  happen  to  occur  in  any  verb  of  this  class,  the  alternate  form  with  pre- 
fixed 3,  §  91.  6,  is  given  in  the  paradigm,  Hid?  being  in  actual  use. 

Remarks  on  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  125.  1.  The  Kal  future  and  imperative  have  Pattahh  except  Kap  Gen. 
43:  16;  in  one  instance  the  K'thibh  inserts  1,  mbOX  Jer.  5:  7,  where  the 


§  126    KEMAEKS  ON  LAMEDH  GUTTURAIi  VERBS.      161 

K'ri  is  "nVpX.  The  vowel  a  is  retained  before  suffixes,  remaining  sliort 
in  cvkz  Am.  9:1,  but  usually  lengthened  to  Kamets,  fflii;rj"^  2  Chron.  21 :  17, 
'i:y"3d  Gen.  23:  11.  It  is  also  retained  in  pause  before  paragogic  !n^,  "^TJ^^SS 
Ps.  77:  2,  nnVp,  reo'j  Dan.  9:  19;  elsewhere  it  is  rejected  S^nydx  2  Sam. 
14:  32,  and  in  the  imperative  Hhirik  is  given  to  the  first  radical,  "n^''2iy 
Job  32:  10,  nnlpiu  Gen.  43:  8.  Hhirik  appears  in  frnD?;  Gen.  25:  31,  but 
verbs  whose  last  radical  is  "i  commonly  take  Kamets  Hhatuph  like  perfect 
verbs  both  before  paragogic  M^,  and  suffixes,  ""T^^'^  1  Chron.  29:  18,  Q^^I^ 
ProY.  3 :  3. 

2.  The  Kal  infinitive  construct  mostly  has  o,  323^  Jon.  2:  1,  '.'j'':}h  Num. 
17:  28,  -is;  Isa.  54:  9,  rarely  a,  ti^'d  Isa.  58:  9,  3.'ia  Num.  20:  3,  V^ra^  1  Sam. 
15:  1.  With  a  feminine  ending,  the  first  .syllable  takes  Kamets  Hhatuph, 
nnns  Zeph.  3:  11;  so  sometimes  before  suffixes,  irinT  2  Sam.  15:  12,  '^V^'^ 
Neh.  1:  4,  t-rSO'^  Josh.  6:  5,  but  more  commonly  Hhirik,  DVpa  Am.  1:  13, 
is:;?  Num.  35:  19,  irirQ  Neh.  8:  5,  rarely  Pattahh,  T\"p-^  Ezek.  25:  6. 

3.  Most  verbs  with  final  1  have  Hholem  in  the  Kal  future  and  impera- 
tive. But  such  as  have  middle  e  in  the  preterite  take  Pattahh,  §  82.  1.  a; 
and  in  addition  the  following,  viz. :  ibx  to  shut,  IMX  to  say,  Tin  to  honour, 
"i;;n  to  grow  pale,  "iHD  to  shake,  "irr  to  be  rich,  "nns  to  entreat,  -ii:r  to  slip 
aioay,  "ika  to  press,  "lii::  to  drink  or  be  drunken.  The  folloAving  have 
Pattahh  or  Hholem,  "ija  to  decree,  inj  to  vow,  lis;^  fut.  0,  to  reap,  fut.  a, 
to  be  short. 

§  126.  1.  Tsere  is  almost  always  changed  to  Pattahh  before  the  guttural 
in  the  preterite,  infinitive  construct,  future  and  imperative;  but  it  is  re- 
tained and  Pattahh- furtive  given  to  the  guttural  in  pause,  and  in  the  in- 
finitive absolute  and  participle  which  partake  of  the  character  of  nouns 
and  prefer  lengthened  forms.  Thus,  Niphal:  infin.  constr.,  st'i'n  Esth. 
2:  8,  rrxin  isa.  51:  14,  future,  Plbli-i  Ps.  9:  19,  :Spni  Job  17:  3,  impera- 
tive,  even  in  pause,  ri?5$ri.  Piel:  preterite,  rt^  Lev.  14:  8,  S^S  2  Chron. 
34:  4,  infin.  constr.,  viz  Hab.  1 :  13,  ?|a  Lam.  2:  8,  future,  nss-;  Job  16:  13, 
:?isrri  2  Kin.  8:  12,  "iy^OT  Deut.  7:  5,  imperative,  n^ia  Ex.  4:  23.  Hiphil: 
apocopated  .future,  nin;!  2  Kin.  18:30,  fut.  with  Vav  consecutive,  S^:i}^ 
Judg.  4:  23,  fern,  plur.,  njsbn  Ps.  119:  171,  imperative,  Sirin  Ps.  86:  2, 
and  even  in  pause,  n^:in  1  Kin.  22:  12.  Hithpael:  S-'|?nri  Prov.  17:  14, 
m^n"^  Dan.  11:  40,  JiiPliJn  Ps.  106:  47;  this  species  sometimes  has  Kamets 
in  its  pausal  forms,  'iSlssrri  Josh.  9:  13,  tsrann  Ps.  107:  27.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  absolute  infinitives:  Piel,  ri|'J  Deut.  22:  7,  Hiphil,  !!l??!!i  Isa. 
7:  11,  Huphal,  Ij^-^n  Ezek.  16:  4.  Participles:  Kal,  r:i:n  Deut.  28:  52,  but 
occasional!}-  in  the  construct  state  with  Pattahh,  Su:  Ps.  94:  9,  S^H  Isa. 
51:  15,  r^'-i  Isa.  42:  5,  sfac  Lev.  11:  7,  Piel,  T^z}^  1  Kin.  3:  3,  Hithpael, 
"aWl'TQ  1  Sam.  21 :  15.  Tsere  is  retained  before  suffixes  of  the  second  person 
instead  of  being  either  changed  to  Pattahh  or  as  in  perfect  verbs  short- 
ened to  Seghol,  Pi.  inf.  const.  f|n2;j  Deut.  15:  18,  fut.  i\rkp^.  Gen.  31:  27. 
There  is  one  instance  of  Pattahh  in  the  Hiphil  inf.  const.,  niin  Job  6:  26, 
and  one  before  a  grave  suffix  DDlSTri  Ezek.  21:  29,  comp.  fut.  oisi^"'  Isa. 
35:  4;   "i^En   1  Sam.  15:  23  Hiph.  abs.  inf.  in  pause  is  by  §  65.  a. 

11 


162  ETYMOLOGY.  §  127-129 

2.  In  verbs  with  final  "i  Pattahh  takes  the  place  of  Tsere  for  the  most 
part  in  the  Piel  preterite  (in  pause  Tsere),  and  frequently  in  tlie  Hithpael 
(in  pause  Kainets);  but  Tsere  (in  pause  Tsere  or  Pattahh,  §  65.  a)  is  com- 
monly retained  elsewhere,  "i?ir  Ps.  76:  4,  !"i2;j  Ex.  9:  25,  It'r!'"^'  Piov.  25:  6, 
•Ttxrn  Ps.  93:  1,  "i^X^  Gen.  22:  14,  ".^X^  Gen.  10:  19,  :T.?^n  Zeph.  2:  4. 
Two  verbs  have  Segliol  in  the  Piel  preterite,  "iZ"!  (in  pause,  "iz^)  and  "iE3. 

§  127.  1.  The  gutiiiral  ahnost  always  lias  Pattahh-furtive  in  the  second 
feni.  siiifj;.  of  the  preteiite,  Pri'j  Ruth  2:  8,  :l^?3b  Ezek.  16:  28,  nrin  Ksth. 
4:  14,  r'lj'?";n  Ezek.  16:  4,  scarcely  ever  simple  Sh'va,  rnp?  1  Kin.  14:  3, 
Fins'j  Jer.  13:  5,  and  never  Pattahh  (which  might  arise  from  the  concur- 
rence of  consonants  at  the  end  of  a  word,  §  61.  2),  unle.^s  in  T"n';:o  Gen. 
30:  15,  and  srrrj  Gen.  20:  16,  the  former  of  which  admits  of  ready  ex- 
planation as  a  construct  infinitive,  and  the  latter  may  be  aNiphal  participle 
in  the  feminine  singular,  whether  it  be  understood  it  is  rectified  or  thou 
art  lighted,  i.  e.  justice  is  done  thee  by  this  indemnification.  Pattahh  is 
once  inserted  before  the  abbreviated  termination  of  the  feminine  plural 
imperative,  'i^i'J  Gen.  4:  23  for  n:i"t">13. 

2.  The  guttural  takes  compound  instead  of  simple  Sh'va  before  suffixes, 
not  only  when  it  stands  at  the  end  of  the  verb,  rj"D'2  Num.  24:  11,  Ti"2"r'; 
Prov.  25:  17,  but  also  in  the  first  plural  of  the  preterite,  "'lirrj  Ps.  44:  18 
(!l:r^=\U  ver.  21),  Isa.  59:  12,  Ps.  35:  25,  2  Sam.  21:  6,  Ps.  i:;2':  6;  n  retains 
simple  Sh'va  before  all  personal  terminations  and  suffixes,  ri~bx  Judg.  4:  20, 
Db-ii25<  Mai.  1:  7,  niinr  Josh.  4:  23. 

3.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  the  letter  before  the  guttural  receives 
compound  Sh'va,  fii'^^SN  Isa.  27:  4,  "i^rjl^.?  Gen.  2:  23. 

§  128.  The  Hiphil  infinitive  construct  once  has  the  feminine  ending  r^l, 
nw^rn  Ezek.  24:  26;  nrnSSFin  Ezek.  16:  50  for  HDribni  perhaps  owes 
its  anomalous  form  to  its  being  assimilated  in  termination  to  the  following 
word,  which  is  a  Lamedh  He  verb.  In  r^p'Ci  Am.  8:  8  K'thibh  for  T^vp^Vi 
the  guttural  5  is  ehded,  §  53.  3. 


Pe  Nun  (i"3)  Verbs. 

§  129.  Nun,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs,  has  two 
peculiarities,  viz.: 

1.  At  the  end  of  a  syllable  it  is  assimilated  to  the 
following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written  as  one, 
and  the  doubhng  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  This  oc- 
curs in  the  Kal  future,  Nij^hal  preterite  and  participle, 
and  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species  throughout;  thus, 
ira?"'.  becomes  ty.r,  written  Uir,  so  "ID3D  for  12^:3,  'i'^^ri  for 
■jj^itpn.  In  the  Hophal,  Kainets  Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuta 
before  the  doubled  letter,  §  61.  5,  thri  for  ira:n. 


§  130,  131  REMAKKS  ON  PE  NUN  VERBS.  163 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
dropped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  from  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable  when  it  is  without  a  vowel,  llis  for  iri",  §53.2. 
A  like  rejection  occurs  in  the  Kal  infinitive  construct  of 
a  few  verbs,  the  abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compens- 
ated by  adding  the  feminine  termination  n;  thus,  n^3 
for  riiTS  (by  §  63.  2.  a),  the  primary  form  being  ojro. 

a.  In  the  Indo-European  languages  likewise,  n  is  frequently  conformed 
to  or  affected  by  a  following  consonant,  and  in  certain  circumstances  it  is 
liable  to  rejection,  e.  g.  iyypafpx,   iix^cdCkco,   av<7Tpi(pai. 

§  130.  1.  The  inflections  of  Pe  Nun  verbs  may  be 
represented  by  llifo  to  apjjroach  (Paradigm  VII).  In  the 
Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  they  do  not  differ  from  perfect 
verbs.  The  last  column  of  the  paradigm  is  occupied  by 
the  Kal  species  of  'jrij  t^  9^^^:  which  is  pecuhar  in  assi- 
milating its  last  as  well  as  its  first  radical,  and  in  having 
Tsere  m  the  future. 

a.  The  Kal  of  liJ^J  is  used  only  in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative, 
the  preterite  and  participle  being  supplied  by  the  Niphal,  which  has  sub- 
stantially the  same  sense:  the  missing  parts  are  in  the  paradigm  supplied 
from  analogy. 

b.  The  future  of  ")P3  has  Pattahh  in  one  instance  before  Makkeph,  ""jSna 
Judg.  16:  5. 

Remarks  on  Pe  Nun  Verbs. 

§  131.  1.  If  the  second  radical  be  a  guttural  or  a  vowel  letter,  Nun  be- 
comes strong  by  contrast  and  is  not  liable  to  rejection  or  assimilation, 
Vri3  Num.  34:  18,  JHD  2  Kin.  4:  24,  "iDnjri  Gen.  24:  48,  sinlSX  Ex.  15:  2.  It 
is,  however,  always  assimilated  in  CTO  the  Niphal  preterite  of  Dri3  to  repent, 
and  occasionally  in  nn3  to  descend,  e.  g.  Trr-^  Jer.  21:  13,  T\hv\  Prov.  17:  10, 
sirina  Ps.  38:  3  but  nnin  ibid.,  nnsn  Joel  4:  ll. 

2,  Before  other  consonants  the  rule  for  assimilation  is  observed  with 
rare  exceptions,  viz.:  :Trii3ri  Isa.  58:  3,  ri^Stn  Ps.  68:  3,  ^iii?"]  Jer.  3:  .% 
:^"iiSD'^  Deut.  33:  9  (and  occasionally  elsewhere),  "Hi^?-!  Job  40:  24,  :^S'i:?:'J 
Isa.  29:  1,  Ti"r;.?n  Ezek.  22:  20,  bsf?  (for  bSDnb)  Num.  5:  22,  ri-'^S?  (for 
TjrTljsra  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  5)  Isa.  33:  1,  Ip^lDn  Judg.  20:  31. 

8.  Nun  is  commonly  rejected  from  the  Kal  imperative  with  a,  Ua  2  Sam. 
1:  15  (once  before  Makkeph,  -Q}.  Gen.  19:9,  in  plural  siira  1  Kin.  18:  30  and 
in  order  to  permit  the  retrocession  of  the  accent,  §  35.  1,   >i^a  Josh.  3:  •, 

11* 


164  ETYMOLOGY.  §  13S 

1  Sam.  14:  38),  "VlT  Ex.  3:  5,  n  Job  1 :  11,  ^iro  Deut.  2:  24,  ■'ra  Ezek.  37:  9, 
-nprn  Gen.  27:  26,  though  it  is  occasionally  retained,  ^i"Ji  2  Kin.  19:  29, 
K'lb?  Ps.  10:  12,  or  by  a  variant  orthography,  noj  Ps.  4:  7  but  ahvaj's  else- 
where XtJ.  In  imperatives  with  0,  and  in  Lamedh  He  verbs  which  have  e 
in  the  imperative,  Nun  is  invariably  retained,  w1l;3  Prov.  17:  14,  'n:j:  Ps. 
24:  14,  Dp  Num.  31:  2,  yn?  Ps.  58:  7,  n^p:  Gen.  30:  27,  nb}  Ex.  8:  1. 

4.  The  rejection  of  Nun  from  the  Kal  construct  infinitive  occurs  in  but 
few  verbs;  viz.:  T-'a  (with  suffix,  "iriiy;')  from  TI-'JJ,  rns  from  r:E3,  rrs  (twice) 
and  ra?  from  si:,  rri  (once)  and  ?li3  from  vhi,  X':::  has  ritb  (by  §  60.  3.  c), 
with  the  preposition  b,  TX^ib  by  §  57.  2.  (3),  once  nb  (§  53.  3)  Job  41:  17, 
once  without  the  feminine  ending,  XTJ  Ps.  89:  10,  and  twice  N'^'';  'nj  has 
commonly  rri  (for  P.3^),  with  suffixes  "'PiCT,  but  "|'n3  Num.  20:  21,  and  "'iPa 
Gen.  38:  9. 

5.  The  absolute  infinitive  Niphal  appears  in  the  two  forms  "jrsfi  Jer. 
32:  4,  and  t^^i:  Judg.  20:  39. 

6.  The  ri  of  the  prefix  in  the  Hithpael  species  is  in  a  few  instances 
assimilated  to  the  first  radical,  §  82.  5.  o,  ^n^arsn  Ezek.  5:  13,  T^^ir"  Ezek. 
37:  10,  Jer.  23:  13,  xii-^n  Num.  24:  7,  Dan.  11:  14,  :"|'X3'a  Isa.  52:  5. 

§  132.  1.  The  last  radical  of  "inj  is  assimilated  in  the  Niphal  as  well  as 
in  the  Kal  species,  GnPD  Lev.  26:  25.  The  final  Nun  of  other  verbs  remains 
without  assimilation,  P:S".i,  P??"^',  PP'?-  In  2  Sam.  22:  41  PPP  is  for  npP3 
which  is  found  in  the  parallel  passage  Ps.  18:  41.  'PP  1  Kin.  6:  19.  17:  14 
K'thibh,  is  probabl}',  as  explained  by  Ewald,  the  Kal  construct  infinitive 
without  the  feminine  ending  ("jP)  prolonged  by  reduplication,  which  is  the 
case  with  some  other  short  words,  e.  g.  ^iTZ'O  from  "'a,  '^p'^p  for  "^p;  others 
regard  it  as  the  infinitive  PP  with  the  3  fem.  plur.  suffix  or  with  ")  paragogic; 
Gesenius  takes  it  to  be,  as  always  elsewhere,  the  2  masc.  sing,  of  the  Kal 
future,  pip  is  the  imper.  with  parag.  P^  except  in  Ps.  8:  2,  where  it  is  the 
Kal  const,  inf.  with  the  fem.  ending  P^  instead  of  P,  comp.  PTi  Gen.  46:  3. 

2.  The  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs  are  shared  by  P;^''  to  take,  whose 
first  radical  is  assimilated  or  rejected  in  the  same  manner  as  3,  Kal  inf. 
const.  PPilr  (with  prep,  b,  PPpb,  to  be  distinguished  from  Pr^s  2  fem.  sing, 
pret.),  once  "PPp  (by  §  60.  3.  c)  2  Kin.  12:  9,  with  suffixes  ■^PP^',  fut.  P;?'^, 
imper.  P|^,  "^pp  rarely  P^b,  "^r'p^,  Hoph.  fut.  Pjs^  but  Niph.  pret.  Ppb?.  In 
Hos.  11:  3  BPp  is  the  masculine  infinitive  with  the  suffix  for  fiPnp;  the 
same  form  occurs  without  a  suffix,  Pp  Ezek.  17:  5,  or  this  may  be  explained 
with  Gesenius  as  a  preterite  for  Ppb. 

3.  In  Isa.  64:  5  b^r^  has  the  form  of  a  Hiphil  future  from  bb2,  but  the 
sense  shows  it  to  be  from  ^23  for  bisi,  Daghesh-forte  being  omitted  and 
the  previous  vowel  lengthened  in  consequence,  §  59.  O. 

Ayin  Doubled  (3''"3?)  Verbs. 

§  133.  The  imperfect  verbs,  thus  far  considered,  differ 
from  the  perfect  verbs  either  in  the  vowels  alone  or  in 


§134,135  ATIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  165 

the  consonants  alone;  those  which  follow,  differ  in  both 
vowels  and  consonants,  §  107,  and  consequently  depart 
much  more  seriously  from  the  standard  paradigm.  The 
widest  divergence  of  all  is  found  in  the  Ayin  doubled 
and  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  in  both  of  which  the  root  gives  up 
its  dissyllabic  character  and  is  converted  into  a  mono- 
syllable; a  common  feature,  which  gives  rise  to  many 
striking  resemblances  and  even  to  an  occasional  inter- 
change of  forms. 

§  1 34.  1.  In  explaining  the  inflections  peculiar  to  Ayin 
doubled  verbs,  it  will  be  most  convenient  to  separate  the 
intensive  species  Piel  and  Pual  with  their  derivative  the 
Hithpael  from  the  other  four.  That  which  gives  rise  to 
all  their  peculiar  forms  in  the  Kal,  Niphal,  HIphil,  and 
Hophal  species,  is  the  disposition  to  avoid  the  repetition 
of  the  same  sound  by  uniting  the  two  similar  radicals 
and  giving  the  intervening  vowel  to  the  previous  letter, 
thus,  np  for  niw,  ZO  for  nip  §  61.  3. 

2.  In  the  Kal  species  this  contraction  is  optional  in 
the  preterite;  it  is  rare  in  the  infim'tive  absolute  though 
usual  in  the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  parti- 
ciples. With  these  exceptions,  it  is  universal  in  the  spe- 
cies already  named. 

§  135.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both 
in  the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the 
preceding  syllable. 

1.  When  the  first  radical  has  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
§  82. 1,  as  in  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitive  absolute,  and 
in  the  Niphal  infinitive,  future  and  imperative,  this  is 
simply  displaced  by  the  vowel  thrown  back  from  the 
second  radical,  thus  330,  3p,  3130,   3b;    33311?  ^"i^ni 

33on,  35n. 

2.  When  the  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable  as  in 
the  Kal  future,  the  Niphal  preterite,  and  throughout  the 


16G  ETYMOLOGY.  §  135 

Hiphil  and  Hophal,  this  will  be  converted  into  a  simple 
syllable  by  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  whence  arise  the  following  mutations: 

In  the  Kal  future  u^ZI  becomes  ^C";  with  2  in  a  simple 
syllable,  contrary  to  §  18.  2.  This  may,  however,  be  con- 
verted into  a  mixed  syllable  by  means  of  Daghesh-forte, 
and  the  short  vowel  be  retained,  thus  -D]';  or  the  syllable 
may  remain  simple  and  the  vowel  be  lengthened  from 
Hhirik  to  Tsere,  §  59,  thus,  in  verbs  fut.  a,  '^'2'"_  for  I'S^V, 
or  as  the  Hhirik  of  this  tense  is  not  an  original  vowel 
but  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  §  85.  2.  a(l),  it  may  be 
neglected  and  a,  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  given 
to  the  preformative,  which  is  the  most  common  expedient, 
thus  no*.  The  three  possible  forms  of  this  tense  are  con- 
sequently l6^,  D.hl  and  '^^2\ 

In  the  Niphal  preterite  nzCD  becomes  by  contraction 
no?.  In  a  few  verbs  beginning  with  n  the  short  vowel  is 
retained  in  an  intermediate  syllable,  thus  ^llD  for  "i^ri^l 
in  other  cases  Hhirik  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  'h:  for  "jDHD, 
or  as  the  Hhirik  is  not  essential  to  the  form  but  has 
arisen  from  Sh'va,  §82.2,  it  is  more  frequently  neglected, 
and  Kamets,  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  substituted 
in  its  place,  thus  ZDD.  The  forms  of  this  tense  are,  there- 
fore, nc:,  *|n:,  ^n?. 

In  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species  the  vowels  of  the 
prefixed  Tl  are  characteristic  and  essential.  They  must, 
therefore,  either  be  retained  by  inserting  Daghesh-forte 
in  the  first  radical,  or  be  simply  lengthened;  no  other 
vowel  can  be  substituted  for  them,  nbn  for  l^'SCri,  id;;'  or 
ao;  for  Z'%L^,  2bri  (Kibbuts  before  the  doubled  letter  by 
§  61.  5)  or  IC^n  for  nscH. 

3.  The  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  stands  no  longer  before  a  single  con- 
sonant, but  before  one  which,  though  single  in  appear- 


§  136,  137  AYIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  167 

ance,  is  in  reality  equivalent  to  two.  It  is  consequently 
subjected  to  the  compression  which  affects  vowels  so 
situated,  §  61.  4.  Thus,  in  the  Nijihal  future  and  impera- 
tive Tsere  is  compressed  to  Pattahh,  -iS';',  zby,  nisri? 
ion  (comp.  b'bp,  ribtop)  though  it  remains  in  the  infini- 
tive which,  partaking  of  the  character  of  a  noun,  prefers 
longer  forms.  So  in  the  Hiphil  long  Hhirik  is  compressed 
to  Tsere,  I^^iCm,  ZwH  (comp.  b^pp^,  r;:bi:pri). 

§  136.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second 
and  third  radicals  have  been  contracted,  represents  two 
consonants,  the  doubling  camiot  be  made  to  appear  at 
the  end  of  the  w^ord.  But 

1.  When  in  the  course  of  inflection  a  vowel  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  preceding  vowel, 
even  where  it  would  be  dropped  in  perfect  verbs,  is  re- 
tained to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre- 
serves its  accent,  §  33.  1,  H^p,  ^1l6\ 

2.  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
begins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is  aided  by  inserting  one  of  the  diphthongal  vowels, 
0  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e  (*•  )  in  the  future.  By  the 
dissyllabic  appendage  thus  formed  the  accent  is  carried 
forward,  §  32,  and  the  previous  part  of  the  word  is 
shortened  in  consequence  as  much   as  possible,    iCPi, 

nincn;  no-,  nrscn. 

T  •    -:  '  T'  T      V  •..    : 

3.  When  by  the  operation  of  the  rules  already  given, 
§  135. 2,  the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplica- 
tion of  the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to 
relieve  the  word  of  too  many  doubled  letters.  In  this  case 
the  retention  of  the  vowel  before  the  last  radical,  con- 
trary to  the  analogy  of  perfect  verbs,  and  the  insertion 
of  a  vowel  after  it,  are  ahke  unnecessary,  and  the  accent 
takes  its  accustomed  position,  ^nD";,  Mjlferi. 

§  137.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  pre- 


168  ETYMOLOGY.  §  138,  139 

serve  tlie  regular  form,  as  b>n,  b^tl,  bbnrin.  The  triple 
repetition  of  the  same  letter  thus  caused  is  in  a  few 
instances  avoided,  however,  by  reduplicating  the  con- 
tracted root  with  appropriate  vowels,  as  1]ytC,  blbbprn. 
Or  more  commonly,  the  reduplication  is  given  up  and 
the  idea  of  intensity  conveyed  by  the  simple  prolongation 
of  the  root,  the  long  vowel  Hholem  being  inserted  after 
the  first  radical  for  this  purpose,  as  Siic,  bb^rn. 

§  138.  In  Paradigm  YIII  the  inflections  of  Ayin 
doubled  verbs  are  shown  by  the  example  of  -ic  to  su7~- 
round.  The  Pual  is  omitted,  as  this  species  almost  in- 
variably follows  the  inflections  of  the  perfect  verb;  certain 
persons  of  the  Hophal,  of  which  there  is  no  example,  are 
likewise  omitted.  An  instance  of  Piel,  with  the  radical 
syllable  reduplicated,  is  given  in  T]v.pp  to  excite. 

a.  The  Hitbpael  of  3n5  does  not  actually  occur;  but  it  is  in  the  para- 
digm formed  from  analogy,  the  initial  sibilant  being  transposed  with  the  n 
of  the  prefix,  agreeably  to  §  82.  5. 

Remaeks  on  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs. 

S  139.  1.  The  uncontracted  and  the  contracted  forms  of  the  Kal  preterite 
are  used  with  perhaps  equal  frequency  in  the  third  person;  the  former  is 
rare  in  the  first  person,  T'^t;  Zech.  8:  14.  15,  Wtb  Deut.  2:  35,  and  there 
are  no  examples  of  it  in  the  second;  13"i  Gen.  49:  23  and  la^  Job  24:  24 
are  preterites  with  Hholem,  §  82.  1.  In  Ps.  118:  11,  "^SI^ap-DJ  -^rip  the 
uncontracted  is  added  to  the  contracted  form  for  the  sake  of  greater  em- 
phasis. Compound  Sh'va  is  sometimes  used  with  these  verbs  instead  of 
simple  to  make  its  vocal  character  more  distinct,  §  16. 1.  h,  1p^5  Gen.  29:  3,  8, 
f^li^^  Ex.  15:  10,  r,^!iibn  Isa.  64:  10,  ''irj  Gen.  9:  14,  ilsjjsn.Num.  23:  25. 

2.   The  following  are  examples  of  the  contracted    infinitive  absolute, 

n'p  Num.  23:  25.  VvU  Ruth  2:  16,  "I'Q  Isa.  24:  19,  TOT  (with  a  paragogic 
termination)  ibid.;  of  the  uncontracted,  "I'ins,  "iia,  Tiin,  Cl'isij,  rins,  niriQ, 
"iinia;  of  the  infinitive  construct,  tV?  and  Th,  230  and  30,  ofc-a,  nn'J,  13,  Dn, 
once  with  m  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  "i^3  Eccles.  9:  1,  and  occasionally  with 
a,  -nn  Isa.  45:  1,  "ip  Jer.  5:  26,  nn3  (with  3  plur.  suf.)  Eccl.  3:  18,  D^wn 
Isa.  30:  18  (rii:n  Ps.  102:  14);  C^np  Isa.  17:  14,  though  sometimes  explained 
as  tlie  noun  cn^  with  the  suffix  their  bread,  is  the  infinitive  of  Crn  to  grow 
uarm;  c;dz  Gen.  6:  3  En<^.  ver.  for  that  also,  as  if  compounded  of  the 
prep.  3,  the  abbreviated  relative  and  05,  is  by  the  latest  authorities  regarded 


§140 


KEMARKS  ON  AYIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  169 


as  the  infinitive  of  551:3  in  their  erring;  i'sii  Job  29:  3  has  Hhirik  before  the 
suffix.  The  feminine  termination  ni  is  appended  to  the  following  infinitives, 
niiin  Ps.  77:  lO.  Job  19:  17,  mi^  Ezek.  36:  3,  '^fib't  Ps.  17:  3.  The  impera- 
tive, which  is  always  contracted,  has  mostly  Hholem,  SO,  tsi^  and  Q'n  but 
sometimes  Pattahh,  b?  Ps.  119:  22  (elsewhere  bJ),  n33  Ps.  80:  16.  Fiirst 
regards  nn  as  a  contracted  participle  from  nnn,  analogous  to  the  Ayin  Vav 
form  Dp. 

3.  The  following  uncontracted  forms  occur  in  the  Kal  future,  "iH^  Am. 
5:  15,  TitTi  and  ni:,ri  from  Ti3;  in  the  Niplial,  ::^bl  Job  11:  12;  Hiphil,  niiilJn 
Mic.  6:  13,  D"'ir-Q  Ezek.  3:  15,  "^nnnni  Jer.  49:  37,  and  constantly  in  "lin  and 
b^';  Hophal,  'J'n7  Job  20:  8  from  Ti3.  In  a  few  instances  the  repetition  of 
the  same  letter  is  avoided  by  the  substitution  of  X  for  the  second  radical, 
Jlbxa";  =  ^CpB-;  Ps.  58:  8  and  perhaps  also  Job  7:  5,  "i^X^p  =  "i^'^.^p  Ezek. 
28:  24,  Lev.  13 :  51,  52,  -^DX'::  =  "IP^tlJ  Jer.  30:  16  K'thibh.  Comp.  in  Syriac 
1.^1?  part,  of  *-o».  According  to  the  Rabbins  ^Xia  =  ^TT3  Isa.  18:  2,  but  see 
Alexander  in  loc. 

§  140.  1.  Examples  of  different  forms  of  the  Kal  future:  (1)  With 
Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical,  D'H"),  nsx,  3S"i,  ^p";,  Dik'^,  QFl'^;  or  with  a 
as  the  second  vowel,  ba"^,  ^J"^,  rsi^ri";.  (2)  With  Tsere  under  the  personal 
prefix,  Gn";,  rifii,  "1^7,  Tpr,  'p?»  '"^n';')  ^  being  once  written  by  means  of  the 
vowel  letter  ^,  DI^^X.  (3)  With  Kamets  under  the  personal  prefix,  'n^,  sb^, 
tyi,  li'i.  p'^'^,  yni,  n-iji;  this  occurs  once  with  fut.  a,  Trv  Prov.  27:  17.  With 
Vav  Consecutive  the  accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult  syllabe  in 
this  form  of  the  future,  and  Hholem  is  consequently  shortened,  §  64.  1,  15'^', 
"i^'l ,  trri^ ,  tnil ,  "ri'^  There  are  a  few  examples  of  il  in  the  future  as  in 
Ayin  Vav  verbs,  "i^n;  Prov.  29:  6,  jnn';  Isa.  42:  4,  Eccles.  12:  6,  Dnri  Ezek. 
24:  11  and  perhaps  li^  Gen.  49:  19,  Hab.  3:  16,  iv!:;;;  Ps.  91:  6,' though 
Gesenius  assumes  the  existence  of  'TIS  and  1^^  as  distinct  roots  from  Ti» 
and  "rid. 

2.  The  Niphal  preterite  and  participle:  (1)  With  Hhirik  under  the 
prefixed  3,  ninSS  Job  20:  28,  hn,  "ini,  nn3.  (2)  With  Tsere  under  the  prefix, 
•iri:n:  Jer.  22:  23,  D'^'^SJ?.  Mai.  3:  9,  D^iinj  Isa.  57:  5.  (3)  With  Kamets 
under  the  prefix,  Sp3,  "in3,  "i33;  sometimes  the  repetition  of  like  vowels  in 
successive  syllables  is  avoided  by  exchanging  a  of  the  last  syllable  for  Tsere, 
b;r3  and  br:,  Cr3  and  D":3,  ilZC3  Ezek.  26:  2,  or  for  Hholem  as  in  Ayin  Vav 
verbs,  ins  Eccl.  12:  6,  ^7n3  Am.  3:  11,  il-tii;  Nah.  1:  12,  ^!d;3  Isa.  34:  4. 

3.  The  Niphal  future  preserves  the  Tsere  of  perfect  verbs  in  one  ex- 
ample, bnri.  Lev.  21:  9,  but  mostly  compresses  it  to  Pattahh,  b^"],  b^i"^.,  W^, 
"''?'?>  "-!"]>  ^^?i  ^'4''.^  ^t^;  like  the  preterite  it  sometimes  has  Hholem,  Tian 
Isa.  24:  3,  p'^ZT}  ibid.  If  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural  and  incapable  of 
receiving  Dagliesh,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  ^n^,  bnx, 
Dii^,  "p'^ri,  ^53"'i7,.  The  Kal  and  Niphal  futures,  it  will  be  perceived,  coincide 
in  some  of  their  forms;  and  as  the  signification  of  these  species  is  not 
always  clearly  distinguishable  in  intransitive  verbs,  it  is  often  a  matter  of 
doubt  or  of  indifference  to  which  a  given  form  should  be  referred.     Thus, 


170  ETYMOLOGY.  §  1^1 

bn%  Tjfe^  T'\'^t  are  in  the  Niphal  according  to  Gesenius,  while  Ewald  makes 
them  to  be  Kal,  and  Furst  the  first  two  Niplial  and  the  third  Kal. 

4.  Tlie  Niphal  infinitive  absolute:  tisn  Isa.  24:  3,  pikn  ibid,  or  with 
Tsere  in  the  last  syllable,  cb"  2  Sam.  17:  10.  The  infinitive  construct; 
DiQn  Ps.  68:  3,  bnn  Ezek.  20:  9,  and  once  with  Pattahh  before  a  suffix, 
•i'inn  Lev.  21:  4.    The  imperative:  nsn  Isa.  52:  11,  !is'-^n  Num.  17:  10. 

5.  In  the  Hiphil  preterite  the  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is  compressed 
to  Tsere,  "^br^,  "lEH  (in  pause  "EH,  so  :la"l'n,  :"::rn),  or  even  to  Pattahh, 
Pin.  ^I?vl.  "irr".  "^'4^}}  "'^v'.  ^'jvl)  ^'~^j  *2?!^,  ^^b\}-  Both  infinitives  have 
Tsere,  thus  the  absolute:  pi,^!,  Tbri,  nen,  nsn,  b;':n;  the  construct:  t^n, 
"on,  "En  (TEH  Zech.  ll:  10),  "i^n,  bfrn,  nrn,  in  pause  J-j^n,  P'lv?,  with 
a  final  guttural,  2rnn,  r^n.  The  imperative:  zbr\,  nsn,  bjbn,  hhri,  rrn; 
iau:n  Job  21:  5  is  a  Hiphil  and  not  a  Hophal  form  as  stated  by  Gesenius, 
the  first  vowel  being  Kamets  and  not  Kamets  Hhatuph.  Futures  with  a 
short  vowel  before  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical:  lS3;;i,  CP^,  "i^ri,  TS;^; 
with  a  long  vowel,  ",.';,  'cb'^,  'nk';,  hh"^  or  hn^,  bn^,  rnn  and  V':1,  "cn,  yajil 
(e  expressed  by  the  vowel  letter  X,  §  11.  1.  a)  Eccles.  12:  5.  When  in  this 
latter  class  of  futures  the  accent  is  removed  from  the  ultimate,  whether  by 
Vav  Consecutive  or  any  other  cause,  Tsere  is  shortened  to  Seuhol,  b^']? 
P"!'].  '^^t^'  "'-t-'  M^T '  '^y^^'  ^"'^  i"  °"^  instance  to  Hhirik,  ""ri  Judg.  9  :  53 
(",nni  would  be  from  YT\)  before  a  guttural  it  becomes  Pattahh,  syj^,  irri, 
-"1^1.  Participles:  ab^,  "iso,  bnp,  bkp  Ezek.  31:  3,  >'^p  Prov.  17:  4.  In  a 
very  few  instances  the  Hhirik  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  retained  in  the 
last  syllable  of  this  species  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  T\^b'g  Judg.  3:  21,  fi'^s! 
Jer.  49:  20,  D">t-|1   Num.  21:  30. 

6.  Hophal  preterites:  "bmTl,  STiron,  siiari;  futures:  Drr,  -X!l"',  p'lli,  ',n^ 
nsFl,  Itr,  nsr,  rb'^',  TiS?;  participles:  tSIO,  li'a  or  in  some  copies  n:"2 
2  skm.  23:  6;  infinitive  with  suffix,  ^'^^^  Lev.  26:  34,  with  prep.,  i^V^'f^^ 
ver.  43. 

§  141.  1.  Upon  the  addition  of  a  vowel  affix  and  the  consequent  inser- 
tion of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  last  radical,  the  preceding  vowel  and  the  posi- 
tion of  the  accent  continue  unchanged,  !l~T,  ^l-'i^,  na"i"3  (distinguished  from 
the  fem.  part,  nirj),  'ilrni;  if  the  last  radical  does  not  admit  Daghesh-forte 
a  preceding  Pattahh  sometimes  remains  short  before  D,  but  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  bef<  Te  other  gutturals,  rr^i,  ^i'-y^  (100.  2),  ^iiirn,  nni"  and  wr. 
"When  the  first  radical  is  doubled,  Dagbesh  is  omitted  from  the  last  in  the 
Kal  fut.  0  ^•bn'i,  >1T|5";,  irn"!,  and  occasionally  elsewhere  WS;^  Hi.  fut.  !lian 
Ho.  pret.  Other  cases  are  exceptional,  whether  of  the  shifting  of  the 
accent,  IS"^  Ps.  3:  2,  IS"]  Ps.  55:  22,  ^ilp  Jer.  4:  13,  and  consequent  short- 
ening of  the  vowel,  ''•Tj  Jer.  7:  29  for  "^Ta,  ■'h,  !lH  for  "^Sn,  ^S"i,  sinTJ  Jer. 
49:  28  (with  the  letter  repeated  instead  of  being  simply  doubled  by  Daghesh, 
so  hkewise  in  n"H"ili";  Jer.  5:  6,  "':.i:n  Ps.  9:  14)  for  'IT-;  the  omission  of 
Daghesh,  nii:  1  Sam.  14:  36,  nji'n  Prov.  7:  13,  ^:i:r}  Cant.  6:  11,  7:  13, 
i^prv  Job  19:  23,  "J^aj?  Num.  22:  11,  17  (Kal  imper.  with  n^  parag.  for 
-n3p3,  shortened  by  Makkeph  from  iisp,  so  -nnx  ord  Num.  23:  7),  or  in 
addition,  the  r?jection  of  the  vowel,  ibn  K.  fut.  Gen.  11:  6  for  isr,  nlzi 


§142 


BEMAEKS  ON  A  YIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  171 


Gen.  11:  7  K.  fut.  for  nVn3,  tipjni  Isa.  19:  3  Ni.  pret.  for  n;533  or  np'i;, 
n:hD3  Ezek.  41:  7  Ni.  fut. 'for  HSCD;  ^^T3  Judg.  5:  5  according  to  Gesenius 
for  =lbt3  Ni.  pret.  of  V^l  to  shake,  according  to  others  K.  pret.  of  hh  to  flow ; 
^Stnl  Ezek.  36 :  3  for  ^si^Pl  (Ewald)  from  hVj  to  enter,  or  for  siBrm  Ni.  fut. 
of  nljy  to  go  up,  ^n:  Ezek.  7:  24-  Ni.  pret.  for  ilVna ,  -^l^ns  Cant.  1:6  Ni. 
pret.  for  "I"";?.-  Once  instead  of  doubling  the  last  radical  "^  is  inserted,  ^^h"^ 
Prov.  26:  7  for  ^2^,  comp.  lar^'i  Ezr.  10:  16  for  ^W;  or  it  may  be  for  !l">S^ 
from  nli'n  §  174.  1. 

2.  Upon  the  insertion  of  a  vowel  before  affixes  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, the  accent  is  shifted  and  the  previous  part  of  the  word  shortened 
if  possible;  thus,  with  o  in  the  preterite,  Tf^"^,  ^ihi-iXI  (Kamets  before  "1 
which  cannot  be  doubled),  dniss,  !lDiT3,  "'r'SjrS,  cfljzi^S,  tTip-in,  V.'^^jn  (the 
vowel  remaining  long  before  "i),  rnnri  (Pattahh  instead  of  compound  Sh'va 
on  account  of  the  following  guttural,  §  60.  3.  c),  Viinfi,  once  with  u,  !13'hir3 
Mic.  2:4;  with  e  in  the  future,  nripri,  nr|:jn,  n3''|nPl.  If  the  first  radical 
be  doubled,  Daghesh  is  omitted  from  the  last,  and  the  customary  vowel  is 
in  consequence  not  inserted,  i^Jp^n,  tijlikin;  other  cases  are  rare  and  ex- 
ceptional, tin-iEri,  T'^n?,  T?n3,  tarib??,  Jirrin  which  is  first  plur.  pret.  for 
wrn  not  third  plur.  for  isn  (Ewald),  §  54,  3;  ^hirj  Deut.  32:  41,  ^nian 
Isa.  44:  16,  ■'tniiin  Ps.  116:  6  have  the  accent  upon  the  ultimate  instead  of 
the  penult. 

8.  Before  suffixes  the  accent  is  always  shifted,  and  if  possible  the  vowels 
shortened,  ■^siO'^,  llnaO'^  from  ^U^,  ^120^,  ^^^isd";  from  ^^ta^,  >l3531tl  from  D^n, 
nnan  from  ^sn;  inV^in^  Gen.  43:  29,  Isa.  30:  19,  from  'pr^,  ci-tsri  Lev.  26:  15 
from  ^Eti,  the  original  vowels  have  been  not  only  abbreviated  but  rejected, 
and  the  requisite  short  vowel  given  to  the  first  of  the  concurring  conso- 
nants, §  61.  1.  In  a  very  few  instances  a  form  resembling  that  of  Ayin  Vav 
verbs  is  assumed,  Daghesh  being  omitted  from  the  last  radical  and  the 
preceding  vowel  lengthened  in  consequence,  ipn  Prov.  8 :  29  for  'ipn  ver.  27, 
T^o'^nn  Isa.  33:  1  for  r^TSry^,  iinVii-^m  Ezek.  14:  8  for  ^ilT^nijadn',  ra■i^Jrl 
Lam.  1:  8  for  TV^lVn  Hi.  pret.  of  b^T,  "(rini  Hab.  2:  17  for  ',nn'^  Hi.  /ut.  of 
nnn  with  3  fem.  plur.  suf.,  Bib-iN  2  Sam.  22:  43  in  a  few  editions  for  Qjsnx. 
Nun  is  once  inserted  before  the  suffix  in  place  of  doubling  the  radical,  "iJDp 
Num.  23:  13  for  "isp. 

§  142.   1.  Of  the  verbs  which  occur  in  Piel,  Pual,  or  Hithpael,  the  fol- 
lowing adopt  the  forms  of  perfect  verbs,  viz.: 
"insj  to  curse.  ah'^  to  cry.  ']yp^  to  make  a  nest. 

173  to  plunder.  PPQ  to  smite,  break.  Y'4'^  to  cut  off. 

"ina  to  purify.  anb  to  take  away  the  ahn  to  he  many. 

iri'J  to  grope.  heart.  T(='7  to  he  tender. 

pp_\  to  refine.  pibb  to  lick.  ^nir  to  harrow. 

ntii  to  warm.  ilJiL'^  to  feel,  to  grope,  nn^  to  rule.  \ 

ykn  to  divide.  ttb  to  leap.  'liiij  to  sharpen. 

nnn  to  he  hroken.  bbe  to  judge,  to  inter-  tin  to  be  perfect. 

b^u  to  cover.  cede. 


172  ETYilOLOGT.  §  143 

2.  The  following,  which  are  mostly  suggestive  of  a  short,  quick,  re- 
peated motion,  reduplicate  the  radical  syllable,  viz.: 

"inn  to  bur-n.  i^h^  to  linger.  2?sia  to  sport,  delight, 

1^3  to  dance.  ^?0  to  excite.  pJ5"J  to  run. 

i^n^  to  be  mad.  C|ES  to  chirp.  y?n  to  mock, 

3.  The  following  insert  Hholem  after  the  first  radical,  viz.: 

"lix  to  complain.  lij  to  fly.  ss'n  to  break, 

^^3  to  mix.  Go3  to  lift  up.  nnu  to  sink. 

P23  to  empty.  CiBD  to  occupy  the  thres-        ^^j  to  spoil. 

Tna  to  cut.  hold.  n-buj  to  be  desolate  or 

tHj  to  sweep  away.  T^s  to  bind.  amazed. 

B'b'i  to  be  still.  Boi;?  to  cut  o/f.  tisn  to  beat. 

rnn  to  ftreafc  loose.  '\ii'^]:>  to  gather. 

4.  The  following  employ  two  forms,  commonly  in  different  senses,  viz. : 

Vshi  and  ^l?ia  to  roll.  "jSS  to  gather  clouds,  "jiis  to  prac- 

blfi  <o  praise,  ^liin  fo  ma/re  mad.  tise  sorcery. 

)&r\  to  profane,  ^Ipin  to  ivound.  I^IQ  <o  burst,  "i5"!Q  fo  sAai:*?  to  pieces. 
•jln  <o  ma/ce  gracious^    'liin   fo   6«       Vi|p  fo  cwrse,  ^P^l?  to  wAef. 

gracious.  ys")  and  j'i'ii  to  crush. 

bl'Q  to  speak,  h'^'^'o  to  mow.  ^nui  and  ^y<D  to  treat  with  violence. 
aao  to  change,  siiD  to  swrroitw^i. 

6.  The  following  use  different  forms  in  different  species,  viz.: 

p^h  Pi.  to  decree,  Pu.  ppn,  ").3"!  Pi.  to  sAo«^,  Hith.  'liinnn.* 

I^a  Pi.  to  measure,  Hith.  l^rinsi.  iri"i  Pi.  to  irea^,  Pu.  llJTi""!. 

nno  Pi.  to  maA:e6i^ tor,  Hith.  "li'ionn.  1*^  Pi.  to  inculcate,   Hith.  iginrn 

VdViD  Pi.  to  ea;a/f,  Hith.  bBinpn.  to  pierce. 
b^is  Pi.   to   maltreat,   Hith.   b|?nn 
and  ^^iynn, 

6.  The  following  examples  exhibit  the  effect  of  gutturals  upon  redupli- 
cated forms:  Preterite,  i'ir::  Isa.  11:  8;  Infinitive,  "in-irb  Prov.  26:  21, 
P^nprn  Ex.  12:  39;  Future,  ri'^n'JX  Ps.  119:  47,  rj':iv'^']  Ps.  94:  19;  Impe- 
rative, !|i"\y?n"4n  Isa.  29:  9;  Participle,  rm'nia  Gen.  27:  12,  nsnbn??  Prov.  26:  18. 

§  143.  1.  The  Pual  species  adheres  to  the  analogy  of  perfect  verbs  with 
the  exception  of  tlie  preterites,  Tii3  Nah.  H:  17,  b^iy  Lam.  1  :  12,  the  future 
tWUJSCJn  Isa.  66:  12,  and  the  participles,  i^^^i^'S  Isa.  9:  4,  Vin-3  Isa.  53:  5. 


in  loc. 


♦  "jiinno  Ps.  78 :  65  is  not  from  )T\  (QeseniuB)  but  from  "Q"),  see  Alexandei 


g  144  PE  YODH  VERBS.  173 

2.  ^3Pin  2  Sam.  22:  7  is  contracted  for  ^11^3!?'^'  Ps.  18:  27;  in  regard  to 
;ViE3Pin  in  the  same  verse,  Nordheinier  adopts  the  explanation  of  Alting  that 
it  is  a  similar  contraction  of  the  Hitlipael  of  ^^Q  thou  tcilt  show  thyself  a 
judge,  hut  as  it  answers  1o  ;bFl3r.n  Ps.  18:  27,  the  hest  autliorities  are  almost 
unanimous  in  su])posing  a  transposition  of  the  second  radical  with  the  first 
and  its  union  with  n  of  the  prefix. 

3.  brTi  and  b3n.  The  prefixed  M  remains  in  the  Hiphil  future  of  V?7), 
e-  g.  ^i!)C?»  'l^r'^'^j  ^'^riir^  and  in  the  derivative  nouns  D'^|rn,  riiirriTa, 
whence  these  forms  are  in  the  lexicons  referred  to  the  secondary  root  bnrj. 


Pe  Yodh  (^"S)  Verbs. 

§  144.  In  quiescent  verbs  one  of  the  original  radicals 
is  !5<,  1  or  ■",  which  in  certain  forms  is  converted  into  or 
exchanged  for  a  vowel.  As  5<  preserves  its  consonantal 
character  when  occupying  the  second  place  in  the  root, 
and  also  (with  the  exception  of  the  Pe  Aleph  future, 
§  110.  3,  and  a  few  occasional  forms,  §  111.  2)  when  it 
stands  in  the  first  place,  verbs  having  this  letter  as  a 
first  or  second  radical  belong  to  the  guttural  class;  those 
only  in  which  it  is  the  third  radical  (Lamedh  Aleph)  are 
properly  reckoned  quiescent.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the 
first,  second,  or  third  radical  be  either  Yodh  or  Vav,  the 
verb  is  classed  as  quiescent.  All  verbs  into  which  either 
*1  or  ^  enter  as  a  first  radical  are  promiscuously  called  Pe 
Yodh,  as  the  modes  of  inflection  arising  from  these  two 
letters  have  been  blended,  and  Yodh  in  either  case  ap- 
pears in  the  Kal  preterite  from  which  roots  are  ordinarily 
named,  §  83.  a.  In  the  second  radical  the  Vav  forms 
(Ayin  Vav)  preponderate  greatly  over  those  with  Yodh 
(Ayin  Yodh).  In  the  third  radical  the  Yodh  forms  have 
almost  entirely  superseded  those  with  Vav,  though  the 
current  denomination  of  the  verbs  is  derived  from  neither 
of  these  letters  but  from  He  (Lamedh  He),  which  is  used 
to  express  the  final  vowel  of  the  root  in  the  Kal  preterite 
after  the  proper  radical  has  been  rejected. 


174  ETYMOLOGY.  §  145,   146 

a.  Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  the  consonant  tl  belong  to  the  guttural 
class,  e.  g.  f^iJ ,  nbn  and  are  quite  distinct  from  the  quiescent  verbs  iT'b  in 
which  n  always  represents  a  vowel,  e.  g.  !^^J,  i^JQ- 

§  1 45.  1.  In  Pe  Yodh  verbs  the  first  radical  is  mostly 
Yodh  at  the  beginning,  §  50.  2,  and  Vav  at  the  close  of 
a  syllable.  It  is  accordingly  Yodh  in  the  Kal,  Piel,  and 
Pual  species,  and  commonly  in  the  Hithpael,  1"!?^,  -■©■;, 
zt?;;,  2'i;"rin.  It  is  Vav  in  the  Niphal  and  commonly  in 
the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species,  li^iD,  n^izjin,  D.'bTi. 

2.  In  the  Kal  future,  if  Yodh  be  retained,  it  will 
quiesce  in  and  prolong  the  previous  Hhirik,  and  the 
second  radical  will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  UJi"'^;  if  the  first 
radical  be  rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly 
lengthened  to  Tsere,  "jb;;,  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syl- 
lable being  sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond 
with  it,  §  63.  2.  c,  e.  g.  ziz';  in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is 
preserved  by  giving  Daghesh-forte  to  the  second  radical 
as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs,  the  following  vowel  being  either 
Pattahh  or  Hholem,  nk^,  p^-;. 

3.  Those  verbs  which  reject  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con- 
struct, where  it  would  be  accompanied  by  Sh'va  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable,  §  53.  2.  a,  the  infinitive  being 
prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs  by  the  feminine  termina- 
tion, z'^,,  nri:. 

§  146.  1.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle  Vav 
quiesces  in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hholem,  riJi],  ZTTiS; 
in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled 
by  Daghesh-forte,  it  retains  its  consonantal  character, 

2.  In  the  Hiphil  Vav  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Z^'oin,  Z^iLT; 
a  few  verbs  have  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  -"bTj,  Z*b^y, 
more  rarely  still,  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the 


§   147,  148  PE  YODH  VERBS.  175 

preceding  short  vowel  is  preserved,  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs, 

by  doubling  the  second  radical,  yilT\,  Tk\ 

3.  In  the  Hophal  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek,  nir'^n,  llZJV; 
occasionally  the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh- 
forte  inserted  in  the  second  radical,  3k% 

a.  The  Hholem  or  Tsere  of  the  Hiphil  arises  from  the  combination  of 
a,  the  primary  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  in  this  species,  §  82.  5.  b.  (3),  with 
u  or  i,  into  which  the  letters  1  and  "'  are  readily  softened,  §  57.  2.  (5).  The 
Hholem  of  the  Niplial  is  to  be  similary  explained:  the  Hhirik  of  this  species, 
which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va  and  cannot  combine  with  Vav,  is  exchanged 
for  the  simplest  of  the  vowels  a  (comp.  203 ,  D'ip3),  and  the  union  of  this 
with  1  forms  o.  The  Hophal  retains  the  passive  vowel  u,  which  is  occasio- 
nally found  in  perfect  verbs,  §  95.  a. 

§  147.  The  inflections  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs  may  be  re- 
presented by  those  of  -iz|^  to  sit  or  dwell,  (Paradigm  X).  The 
Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  are  omitted  as  they  do  not 
differ  from  perfect  verbs.  The  alternate  form  of  the  Kal 
future  is  shown  by  the  example  of  izJii^  to  be  dry. 


Remarks  on  Pe  Yodh  Verbs. 

§  148.   1.  The  following  verbs  retain  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future,  viz.: 

vb."^  to  be  dry,  T(0^  to  be  potired.  H^"^  to  fear. 

yi^  to  toil.  li''  to  appoint.  rin''  to  cast. 

"im  to  delay.  C]y^  to  be  iveary.  "^^"^  to  possess, 

ni'^  to  oppress.  yy;;  to  counsel.  tiiii  to  put. 

py^  to  suck.  tis^  to  be  beautiful.  i^^  to  sleep. 

The  concurrence  of  Yodhs  in  the  third  person  of  the  future  is  some- 
times prevented  by  omitting  the  quiescent  ci"^,  "^T>  ^'^^''.i  the  long  vowel 
receiving  Methegli  before  vocal  Sh'va,  and  thus  distinguishing  the  last  two 
words  from  the  Lamedli  He  forms,   ^IXI"^   from   nx"!  and  IDttJ''    from  il3;a, 

'  :  •  T  T  ;  •  T    t' 

§  45.  2. 

2.  The  following  have  Tsere  under  the  preformative ;  those  in  which 
the  second  vowel  is  likewise  Tsere  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk: 

's'r^  to  know.  *  i^^  to  bear.  Sjb^  to  he  dislocated. 

^^^  to  be  joined.  *  xii^  to  go  out.  *  in;  to  go  down. 

cni  to  conceive.O  "i^^  to  be  straitened.       *  "D^"^  to  sit,  dwell. 


176  ETYMOLOGY.  §  149 

The  second  syllable  has  Pattahh  in  nir,  Jer.  13:  17,  Lam.  3:  48,  and 
in  the  feminine  plurals,  njn^ri,  n:n~.n;  firxiin  has  Seghol  after  the  analogy 
of  Lamedli  Alepli  verbs;  n:jl""n  (with  the  vowel-letter  "^  for  e)  occurs  only 
in  tlie  K'thibh,  Ezek.  35:  9,  and  of  course  has  not  its  proper  vowels.  In 
jj-iljn  Pb.  138:  6  the  radical  Yodh  remains  and  has  attracted  to  itself  the 
Tsere  of  the  pre  formative.    Com  p.  §  60.  3.  c. 

3.  The  following  insert  Daghesh-forte  in  the  second  radical,  viz.:  1D^ 
to  chastise,  instruct,  nk^  to  burn.  In  irrnn  Isa.  44:  8  short  Hhirik  remains 
before  a  letter  with  Sh'va;  "^"-i^l  Job  16:  11  is  explained  by  some  as  a  Kal 
future,  by  others  as  a  Piel  preterite. 

4.  The  following  have  more  than  one  form:  3^'^  to  be  good  fut.  2i:"^";, 
once  ""i-J-n  Nah.  3:  8;  p^^  to  pour  p'^-],  once  pli^T  1  Kin.  22:  35;  "i->  to 
form,  '^'k'_  and  "i:i'^'.1;  ip;  to  burn,  np^.  Isa.  10:  16,  and  "•p^P  Deut.  32:  22; 
vp^  to  awake,  y^'^l  once  y^"]  1  Kin.  3:  15;  "ip^  to  be  precious,  'ipi*;  and 
"ip';',  or  with  a  vowel  letter  for  e,  "ip"^."";  Dr'j  to  be  desolate,  Drn  once  n3p'r"<ri 
Ezek.  6:6;  ^rii^  to  be  right,  ^Ci"^ ,  once  tr^'Ul  (3  fem.  plur.,  §  88)  1  Sam. 
6:  12.    Some  copies  have  WJ"^  Isa.  40:  30  for  *l"a\ 

5.  In  futures  having  Tsere  under  the  preformative,  the  accent  is  shifted 
to  the  penult  after  Vav  Consecutive  in  the  persons  liable  to  such  a  change, 
viz.:  3  sing.,  2  masc.  sing.,  and  1  plur.,  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  being  in  con- 
sequence shortened  to  Seghol,  V^J^,  "i'"n};i,  "I"".?!)-  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate 
becomes  Seghol  in  "i".i^l,  "'S"^]!  (with  a  postpositive  accent)  Gen.  2:  7,  19, 
DiU'^';^  Gen.  50:  26;  but  3^'^'^;!,  TTT'^.I,  "i"''';!',  "i;"^!"!  only  once  before  a  mono- 
syllable, §  35.  1,  "P"^'.!!  Gen.  9:  24.  The  accent  remains  on  the  ultimate  in 
the  Lamedh  Aleph  form  xi?];'!],  unless  the  following  word  begins  with  an 
accented  syllable,  e,  g.  N^*1  Gen.  4:  16,  8:  18.  The  pause  restores  the  accent 
in  all  these  cases  to  its  original  position,  :2'4'"^  Euth  4:  1,  '>^'2\}'^  Ps.  139:  1, 
-n*^  Ps.  18:  10,  §  35.  2. 

§  149.  1.  Kal  construct  infinitives  with  Yodh:  ^ZJl"^  and  with  a  feminine 
endinii:  rri"^,  rtil,  10"^  with  suf  "^^p^,  once  with  prep.  l^b'O  2  Chron. 
31:  7,  Daghesh  conservative  after  t,  §  14.  a;  nx"}"^,  §  87,  once  XT^  Josh. 
22:  25  and  with  prep.  Nl]?  1  Sam.  18:  29  from  Nn;|;  ni-i";  once  X"in-  2  Chron. 
26:  15  from  nn-;,  "iTri. 

2.  Infinitives  without  Yodh:  P2."H  (with  suf.  *'riS'^),  nin  Ex.  2:  4,  and 
without  the  feminine  termination  V^,  r"!^  (with  suf.  "^ri"!?)  and  (rib,  once 
r?  1  Sam.  4:  19,  §  54.  2.  TwS^  (with  suf.  "'pX^),  rpk,  n'ln  (with  suf.  "^n-J-i), 
once  rrin  Gen.  46:  3,  Prn  (with  suf.  "ri'r-;).  Pni;  (r^^S  w-ith  suf.  "p-r  once 
"^nn'j  Ps.  23:  6).  Yodh  is  perhaps  dropped  from  the  absolute  infinitive  3T>:} 
Jer.  42:  10,  which  is  usually  explained  to  be  for  3Ti""';  it  may,  however,  be 
derived  from  the  Ayin  Vav  verb  2TJ. 

3.  Imperatives  with  Yodh:  ^in'^,  xn"',  nn\  Without  Yodh:  rn  (with 
n  parag.  ni."n  Prov.  24:  14),  nn  (with  h  parag.  n^H;  for  ^dp  Iloa.  4:  18, 
see  §  92.  fl),  N^  (nxk,  fem.  plur.  nrx-.i  Cant.  sVll),  2r  ("3"^,  M3123). 
With  both  forms:  p^'and  pij";  (ipS";),  "i"?  (nnn),  twice  "in";  Judg.  5:  13,  \an 

ttjn  and  n^ljn"'. 


§   150-152  REMARKS  ON  PE  YODH  VEEBS.  177 

§  150.  1.  The  NipLal  of  ni^  has  u  instead  of  0,  '^i'iia  Zeph.  3:  18,  n"iil!i3 
Lam.  1:4;  inlr^D  1  Chron.  3:  6,  20:  8  has  u  followed  by  Daghesh.  na:, 
■which  according  to  Gesenius  is  from  r^"^,  has  ?;  Ewald  assumes  the  root 
to  be  r\r:J,  and  refers  to  it  likewise  the  Kal  future  and  the  Hiphil  ascribed 
to  nk;,  §  148.  3.  and  §  151.  4.  In  that  case  the  Daghesh  in  iri^-;  Isa.  33: 12, 
Jer.  51:  58,  will  not  require  the  explanation  suggested  in  §  24.  c,  but  the 
K'thibh  rr^nil^Jin  2  Sam.  14:  30  will  be  unexplained.  irJibii  Ps.  9:  17  is  not 
the  Niphal  preterite  or  participle  of  W^ll,  but  the  Kal  participle  of  U5;ri3. 

2.  Yodh  appears  in  the  Niphal  future  of  two  verbs  instead  of  Vav, 
brfij^^  Gen.  8:  12,  1  Sam.  13:  8  K'ri,  nn^'i  Ex.  19:  13.  In  the  first  person 
singular  X  always  has  Hhirik,  rijN,  nV^X,  "IDIX,  TTJ^JX,  ?i'5><,  ^t?;5<- 

§  151.  1.  In  the  Hiphil  the  following  verbs  have  Yodh  preceded  by 
Tsere,  viz.:  ^b^  to  be  good,  b^^  to  howl,  '^h"^  to  go  to  the  right,  li^  to 
change,  pr  to  suck.  Yodh  is  likewise  found  in  1:lao^'^  Judg.  16:  26  K'thibh, 
and  in  the  following  instances  in  which  the  prefix  has  Pattahh  as  in  ppr- 
fect  verbs,  D^'^p"]X  Hos.  7:  12,  IT':;"^!'  Prov.  4:  25,  "n!a"]ri  Ps.  5:  9  K'ri  (K'thibli 
"idin,  comp.  Isa.  45:  2  K'thibh  ^'vTlX,  K'ri  ^T^>^),  xk";!?  Gen.  8:  17  K'ri 
(K'thibh  X::in),  D'>r:;";:a  l  Chron.  12:  2. 

2.  In  '^'■'^T.  Job  24:  21  (elsewhere  2'^6v.  and  b'^^ii  (once  n^i^X  Mic. 
1:8),  the  radical  Yodh  attracts  to  itself  the  vowel  of  the  preformative, 
comp.  §  148.  2.  He  remains  after  the  preformative  in  1^'^i?"'!^'^  Isa.  52:  5, 
nnin'l  Neh.  ll:  17,  Ps.  28,  7,  T^h'^ii-'^  1  Sam.  17:  47,  Ps.  116:  6.  Both  Yodh 
and  "Vav,  quiescing  in  their  appropriate  vowels,  are  liable  to  omission, 
*{^'C'n,  Ip*'?'!})  'I'^^J^j  lilJ'sn,  and  once  the  vowel  Tsere  is  dropped  before  a 
suffix,  !inp:n  Ex.  2:  9  for  ^np^?"n. 

3.  Vav  consecutive  draws  the  accent  back  to  the  penultimate  Tsere  or 
Hholem  of  the  Hiphil  future  in  the  persons  liable  to  be  affected  by  it, 
§  148.  5,  and  shortens  the  final  vowel,  3'J"^.^1,  Prr?^.  ^'^y'l,  ^'^l^,  "•^t^'^]  l>ut 
with  a  pause  accent  {"innl  Ruth  2:  14. 

4.  The  following  verbs  insert  Daghesh  in  the  second  radical  in  the 
Hiphil,  viz.:  3"k^  to  Set,  place,  ru^  to  spread,  pki  to  pour,  except  inpjji^ 
2  Kin.  4:  5  K'ri  (K'thibh  rpliin),  ri^  to  burn,  except  ninisin  2  Sam.  14:  30 
K'thibh,  see  §  150.  1. 

5.  In  the  Hophal  a  few  examples  occur  of  u  followed  by  Daghesh,  JS"^ 
Ex.  10:  24,  rs-i  Isa.   14:  11,  Esth.  4:  3,  "iri-3  Isa.  28:  16,   pil3  Job  11:  15 
and  a  few  of  Hholem,  jnin  Lev.  4:  23,  28,  N-;!""  Prov.  11:  25  for  n";',i  from 
Jri^.    The  construct  infinitive:   "i^in  Ezr.  3:11,  and  with  the  feminine  ter- 
mination nniin  Ezek.  16:  4,  nnsn  Gen.  40:  20,  Ezek.  16:  5. 

§  152.  1.  In  the  Kal  preterite  Yodh  is  once  dropped,  Ti  Judg.  19:  11 
for  T^iiV  Hhirik  occurs  with  the  second  radical  of  lBi">  and  ^'^-'  in  the  first 
and  second  persons  singular  with  suffixes,  and  in  the  second  person  plural, 
which  is  perhaps  due  to  the  assimilating  power  of  the  antecedent  Yodh, 

e.  g.  •':nib"i,  np'iiii,  Dnr-ii. 

2.  In  the  Piel  future  the  prefix  Yodh  of  the  third  person  is  contracted 

12 


178  ETYl^IOLOGY.  §  153,  154 

with  the  radical  after  Vav  consecutive,  ^lirrz"  Nah.  1:  4  for  1!t1"2^ii  ,  rta^^ 
Lam.  3:  33,  ^^*T  Lam.  3:  53,  0^?^!.^  2  Chron.  32:  30  K'ri  (K'thibh  Did"'''!). 

3.  Three  verbs  have  Vav  in  the  Hithpael,  H^^rn,  r^iirn,  nzirri;  n 
is  assimilated  to  the  following  1  and  contracted  with  it  in  'I'^^S^J  Ezek. 
23:  48  for  1~&"r?  a  peculiar  Niphal  formed  on  the  basis  of  a  Hithpael, 
§  83.  c.  (2).  la  -il~n  Ex.  2:  4  for  sil^nr)  Yodh  is  rejected  and  its  vowel 
given  to  the  preceding  letter,  §  53.  3.  b. 

§  153.  1.  Tj^n  and  "q^V  ~^n  to  go  in  the  Hipliil  and  for  the  most  part 
in  the  infinitive  construct,  future  and  imperative  Kil  fallows  (lie  analogy 
of  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  as  though  the  root  were  T\^'^.  Thus,  Kal  inf.  const. 
rsB  (r;b,  with  snf  "^ns^)  rarely  "'-^1;  fut.  "V  (once  with  the  vowel  letter 
■^  for  e,  '"liVx  Mic.  1 :  8,  fem.  pi.  n:r3r.),  occasionally  in  poetry  "'•"i"'  (3  fem. 
sing.  ~'?~^);  iniper.  "3  (with  n^  parag.  n:b,  or  without  the  vowel  letter 
r,5,  fem.  pi.  njrli  and  l^'p)  once  ^^bn  Jer.  51;  50.  Iliphil:  """i"*^  once  in 
the  imper.  ''w''^"'!^  Ex.  2:  9,  and  once  in  the  participle  D''i:'~rip  Zech.  3:  7 
for  ci-'bn-a,  §  94.  e. 

2.  CJOX  to  gather  and  ClD)"  te  add  are  liable  to  be  confounded  in  certain 
firms.  In  the  Hipliil  future  of  TC^,  o  is  twice  represented  by  the  vowel 
letter  N,  rit:X'1  l  Sam.  18:  29.  "lisaxn  Ex.  5:  7;  r)CS  drops  its  N  in  the 
Kal  future,  when  it  follows  the  Pe  Aleph  iiiflection,  §  110.  3,  which  it  does 
only  in  the  following  instances,  rjO^'l  2  Sam.  6:  1,  C]b'n  Ps.  104:  29,  riEpit . 
Mic.  4:  6,  "|5Ci<  1  Sam.  15:  6,  where  the  Hhirik,  being  abbreviated  from 
Tsere,  is  short,  notwithstanding  the  Methegh  in  the  intermediate  syllable, 
§  45.  2.  The  apoc.  Hiph.  fut.  of  C]6^  when  joined  with  the  negative 
particle  bx  is  accented  on  the  penult,  wDin"bi<  Deut.  3 :  26,  and  in  one  in- 
stance the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  dropped  entirelj',   p]pin"bx  Prov.  30:  6. 

3.  DV"3rin  Zech.  10:6  is  probablj',  as  explained  by  Gesenius  and 
Hengstenberj^,  for  criTriri  from  3r^  to  dwell,  though  Ewald  derives  it 
from  Md  to  return,  as  if  for  E'^r'iZwn,  and  Kimchi  supposes  it  to  be  a 
combination  of  both  words  suggesting  the  sense  of  both,  in  which  he  is 
followed  by  the  English  translators,  I  icill  bring  them  again  to  place  them. 

Ui'^X^H  Isa.  30:  5  "is  regarded  by  Gesenms  as  an  incorrect  orthography 
for  U'^h'in ;   but  Maurer  and  Knobel  read  it  d"xari  and  assume  a  root  )ast3 

. .  •   ;    •  -T 

synonymous  with  UJia".    Alexander  in  loc. 
Tj'ip'in  Ps.  16 :  5,  see  §  90. 

Ayin  Vav  (Y':?)  and  Ayin  Yodh  (""?)  Verbs. 

§  154.  Yodh  and  Vav,  as  the  second  radical  of  verbs, 
have  the  following  peculiarities,  viz  : 

1.  They  may  be  converted  into  their  homogeneous 
vowels  i  and  u. 

2.  They  may  be  rejected  wlien   accompanied  b}'  a 


§155  AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.  179 

heterogeneous  vowel,  which  is  characteristic  of  the  form. 
Yodh  forms  are  confined  to  the  Kal  of  a  few  verbs;  in 
the  other  species  Vav  forms  are  universal. 

a.  Yodh  is  never  found  as  a  quiescent  middle  radical  in  any  species 
but  Kal:  it  enters  as  a  consonant  into  the  Piel  of  two  verbs,  and  the  Hith- 
pael  of  two,  §  163.  1,  the  Niphal  of  r\\ri  to  be,  and  the  Hiphil  of  n^^n  to  live. 

§  155.  1.  In  the  Kal  preterite  and  active  participle 
and  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species,  the  quiescent  is 
rejected  and  its  vowel  given  to  the  preceding  radical. 
Thus, 

Kal  preterite:  D|^  for  d]])  where  a,  which  arises  from 
blending  a  with  the  pretonic  Kamets,  §62.1,  is  in  partial 
compensation  for  the  contraction,  T\'2  for  W!2,  "6^  for 'oJIS, 
2'1  for  2l\   For  an  exceptional  formation,  see  §  160.  1. 

Active  participle:  U]^  for  DIJD,  TCQ  for  lr\)'2,  ITS  for  iL^'Z, 
I'l  for  nj"^,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  super- 
seded by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative,  as  is  the  case 
in  some  perfect  verbs  of  a  neuter  signification,  §  90. 

Hiphil  and  Hophal:  D'pn  for  DipM?  ^T.r  ^^^  °^"^^I?-' 
Dp^n  for  Dijrn,  the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  pro- 
longed in  a  simple  syllable,  §  59. 

2.  In  the  Kal  construct  infinitive,  future,  imperative 
and  passive  participle,  the  quiescent  is  softened  into  its 
homogeneous  vowel,  D^p,  S^"];  in  the  future  the  preforma- 
tive  commonly  takes  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a, 
D^p^,  ^"i^,  comp.  nb\ 

3.  In  the  Kal  absolute  infinitive  and  in  the  Niphal 
species  a  similar  softening  of  1  occurs,  which,  with  the 
accompanying  or  preceding  a,  forms  6,  §  57.  2.  (5),  Dip 
(kom  =  kaum)  for  Diip;  Dip]  for  Dlp2,  the  prefix  usually 
taking  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a;  Dip*;  for  Cl'p';. 

4.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Niphal  and 
Hiphil  preterites  o  (i)  is  inserted  before  tlier  affixed  ter- 
mination in  order  to  preserve  the  long  vowel  of  the  root 

12» 


180  ETYMOLOGY.  §  156,  157 

from  the  compression  incident  to  standing  before  two 
consonants,  §  61.  4;  in  the  feminine  plurals  of  the  Kal 
future  e  (■•..)  is  sometimes  inserted  for  a  similar  reason, 
tliis  prolongation  of  the  word  being  attended  by  a  shift- 
ing of  the  accent  and  a  consequent  rejection  of  the  pre- 
tonic  vowel  of  the  first  syllable,  Dri"jip3,  lnii3"'):r;,  nr^^pP. 
In  the  Niphal  preterite,  when  the  inserted  i  receives  the 
accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  euphony  changed  to  \  e.  g. 

5.  In  the  Kal  and  Hipliil  species  the  apocopated 
future  takes  the  diphthongal  vowels  o  and  e  in  distinc- 
tion from  the  ordinary  future,  which  has  the  pure  vowels 
u  and  2,  §  66. 1.  (2)  h,  thus  niij;,  DiL'^  With  Vav  Conversive 
the  accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is  shortened,  H'^dJi,  3"C^1. 

§  156.  1.  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  the  form  of 
perfect  verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  ap- 
pearing as  1,  e.  g.  l-i:^,  or  as  "',  e.  g.  D^p. 

2.  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  reduplicated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Pi.  D*i:ip, 

Pu.  D'lzip,  Hith.  D'^iprn. 

a.  In  the  Piial  o  is  the  passive  vowel  here  adopted  in  preference  to  u: 
in  the  Piel  and  Hithpael  it  arises  from  the  combination  of  u,  to  which  1  is 
softened,  with  the  antecedent  a,  B'b'ip  for  Brii? ,  §  82.  6.  b  (3). 

3.  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the 
root,  and  the  resulting  bihteral  is  reduphcated,  Pi.  bsbs, 
Pu.  bsbs. 

'    .     T 

fl.  The  two  forms  of  the  intensive  species,  which  depart  from  the  regu- 
lar paradigm,  precisely  resemble  in  appearance  those  of  Ayin  doubled  verbs, 
though  constructed  upon  a  different  principle,  as  already  explained. 

§  157.  The  inflections  of  Ayin  Vav  verbs  are  shown 
in  those  of  Cp  to  stand  or  rise,  in  Paradigm  IX;  the 
divergent  forms  of  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  in  the  Kal  species 
are  exhibited  by  l"*!  to  contend. 


§158,159      AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.  181 

a.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  are  named  not  from  the  Kal  pre- 
terite, in  which  the  quiescent  is  rejected,  but  from  the  construct  infinitive, 
the  simplest  form  in  whicli  all  the  radicals  appear. 

b.  No  Hophal  forms  occur  in  those  persons  in  which  the  inflective  ter- 
minations begin  with  a  consonant.  The  same  i«  true  of  the  Ayin  Yodh 
imperative. 

Eemaeks  on  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs. 

§  158.  1.  Medial  Yodh  and  Vav  remain  without  quiescence  or  rejection 
in  a  few  verbs,  whose  root  contains  another  feeble  consonant  by  contrast 
with  which  these  letters  acquire  new  strength.  This  is  always  the  case  in 
Lamedh  He  verbs,  e.  g.  M^n  ,  Jiis;  so  likewise  in  the  following  guttural 
verbs  and  forms,  SIS  to  expire,  '^'^^^T}!^.  Isa.  29:  22,  i^^^^l  Isa.  42:  11,  :ni'5< 
to  be  ai  enemy,  ■).i'i35  1  Sam.  18:  9  K'ri  (K'thibh  ^ly),  Tik^-J  Jer.  4:  31,  which 
are  confined  to  the  Kal  species,  and  in  nil  to  be  airy  or  refreshing,  which 
is  besides  found  in  the  Pual  participle. 

2.  The  Kal  preterite  has  Pattahh  in  two  instances  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs, 
13  Zech.  4:  10,  rr^  Isa.  44:  18  but  na  Lev.  14:  42.  It  has  Tsere  in  np 
to  die,  ID  Isa.  17:  11  (unless  this  is  a  noun  as  explained  by  Delitzsch  and  in 
the  common  English  version)  but  >1"I3  Jer.  50:  3,  and  Hholem  in  "lii*  to  shine, 
la'ia  to  be  ashamed,  Sia  to  be  good,  §  82.  1.  a,  and  in  ^ix'i  Jer.  27:  18,  elsewhere 
1X3,  !l"iT  Isa.  1 :  6,  Ps.  58 :  4,  elsewhere  1"iT .  Hhirik  once  occurs  instead  of 
Pattahh  in  the  second  person  plural,  fiH'CJD  Mai.  3:  20.  The  following  par- 
ticiples have  Tsere,  D"^?^,  "j^b,  yp,  tvz,  "iss;  the  following  have  Hholem, 
D-ipis,  n^tis,  d'li'ip  2  Kin.  16:  7  (comp.  Dn-^^p  Ex.  32:  25  in  the  Sama- 
ritan copy),  elsewhere  D"'^rv>  ^"^"^  Jer-  4:  31  if  from  bin  and  not  from  n^n. 

3.  The  vowel  letter  it  is  written  for  o,  §  11.  1.  a,  once  in  the  preterite, 
D!!<|:5  Hos.  10:  14,  and  occasionally  in  the  participle,  t2Xb  Judg  4:  21,  triixi 
Prov.  24:  7,  UJNT  2  Sam.  12:  1,  4,  Prov.  10:  4,  13:  23,  D^i;N'J  despising 
Ezek.  16:  57,  28:  24,  26,  to  be  distinguished  from  Di^lU  rowing  Ezek.  27:  8, 
26.  The  consonant  X  is  once  introduced  in  place  of  the  omitted  1,  n?OX"i 
Zech.  14:  10  for  n'D'i ;  the  ancient  versions  favour  the  assumption,  that 
•'^iSS  Ps.  22:  17  is  in  like  manner  for  Qins  piercing,  tlionsh  the  most  recent 
and  ablest  exjjositors  take  it  to  be  a  preposition  and  noun  like  the  lion. 

4.  The  accent  regularly  remains  upon  the  radical  syllable  before  affixes 
consisting  of  a  vowel  or  a  simple  S3'llable,  th(jugh  with  occasional  exceptions, 
e.  g.  r\it.p^  Lev.  18:  28,  I3n  Gen.  26:  22,  lib  Gen.  40;  15,  inn  Num.  13:  32. 
In  a  few  instances  it  is  shifted  by  Vav  conversive  preterite,  §  100.  2,  libl 
Obad.  ver.  16,  lisDI  Am.  3;  15,  njiDI.  Isa.  11:  2,  Ipai  Isa.  7:  19  but  1X31  ibid., 
nx31  Zech.  5:  4,  nilil  ibid.,  where  the  feminine  ending  is  fi  instead  of  n  ; 
so  in  the  passive  participle,  nniT  Isa.  59:  5  for  nnlT. 

§  159.  1.  Hholem  is  in  a  few  instances  found  instead  of  Shurek  in  the 
construct  infinitive,  xia,  TUis  Judg.  3:  25,  ai^a,  nii  and  ni3,  sii  Isa.  7:  2, 
elsewhere  ?13,  W  Isa.  SO:  2,  which  is  not  from  lh,  3ia  Josh.  2:  16,  else- 


v/ 


182  ETYMOLOGY.  §  160 

where  3^C,  and  with  suf.  ti:'i"i  Ezek.  10:  17,  ''|'a  Ps.  71:  6,  which  is  not 
the  participle  from  ftJ  (Gesenius),  "^ni  my  breaking  forth,  i.  e.  the  cause 
of  it  Ps.  22;  10,  see  Alexauder  in  loc. ;  Gesenius  explains  this  form  as  a 
participle,  hut  is  obliged  in  consequence  to  assume  a  transitive  sense  which 
nowhere  else  belongs  to  the  verb. 

2.  The  following  imperatives  have  Hholem,  '^'I'ix  Isa.  60;  1,  KJa,  lyia, 
"■r^i  Mic.  4:  10,  "^di^  Mic.  4:  13.  With  paragogic  n,  irap  or  Tvo^p,  naVJ 
or  n^su:.    Examples  of  the  feminine  plural,  n3"3p,  il3:;"ij 

3.  The  following  futures  have  Hholem,  Xii^,  'pi^  Gen.  6;  3,  elsewhere 
'j'<n';,  a-iis  Ps.  80:  19,  Din-  and  C?in^,  uiii^  where  the  Hhirik  of  the  perfect 
paradigm  is  lengthened  to  Tsere  under  the  preformative.  Examples  of  the 
feminine  plural:  nj'^xbri  and  M^ttin,  n:''i:!l-:n,  nriiiisn  and  Zech.  1:  17 
nsiisn  (in  Baer's  edition  without  Daghesh),  nrhrrn  and  nsai'n,  nsniin, 
iiiH^ri  Ezek.  13;  19  (Baer  no  Daghesh).  The  accent  is  shifted  and  Kamets 
rejected  from  the  preformative  upon  the  addition  of  a  suffix  or  paragogic 
Nun,  the  latter  of  which  is  particularly  frequent  in  this  class  of  verbs  both 
in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  future.  "':!;"r'^,  T;"r":S ,  n*:'TO,  t":^"^,  'I'bp^,  "jfinil'sn, 
riiwrri  Ezek.  4:  12,  with  Daghesh  euphonic  in  the  J  and  D  which  Baer.  omits. 
Apocopated  future;  rii^,  -r^  and  "3"^'^,  "1-1^,  "P^.  ^"r^,  Cp^  with  the  ac- 
cent thrown  back  to  the  penult  cp^.  Future  with  Vav  consecutive:  t\^0'^^ 
(in  pause  r^-jX  ^^''T  (S'iJ',:),  b^*],  BI^^l ,  l^p'^,  tai^"!!;  the  last  vowel  is 
changed  to  Pattahh  before  a  final  guttural,  3.':^1 ,  n:^1,  and  sometimes  be- 
fore "I  or  after  an  initial  guttural  ^]^1  but  "i5^?,  ?"^!)  he  teas  tceary,  C^S^T 
he  fletv,  cnni;  the  vowel  of  the  preformative  is  likewise  changed  to  Pattahh 
in  trr^  Job  31;  5,  cr^;]  1  Sam.  14:  32,  as'Fil  1  Sam.  15:  19  but  -Ji'JT  1  Sam. 
25:  14. 

§  160.  1.  The  verbs  which  exhibit  peculiar  A3'in  Yodh  fonns  in  Kal 
with  unimportant  exceptions,  either  do  not  occur  in  the  Hiphil  or  retain 
the  same  signification  in  both  these  species.  This  has  led  some  gram- 
marians to  entertain  the  opinion  that  these  are  not  Kal  but  abbreviated 
Hiphil  forms,  while  others  suppose  that  the  Hiphil  in  these  verbs  is  a 
secondary  formation,  and  has  arisen  from  the  Kal  future  having  the  form 
of  the  Hiphil.  Only  three  examples  occur  of  quiescent  Yodh  in  the  Kal 
preterite,  rihi")  Job  33:  13  {7pr\  Lam.  3:  58),  "^ri-'a  Dan.  9;  2  (nn:3  Ps. 
139:  2)  tX.'^'^  Jer.  16:  16;  '("^a  Dan.  10:  1  has  been  variously  explained  as 
3  pers.  preterite,  imperative  or  infinitive. 

2.  The  following  verbs  have  "^  in  the  Kal  future  and  imperative,  "p3 
to  understand,  xri  (once  "^rii.  Mic.  4:  10)  to  break  forth,  b^a  (once  bia"^  Prov. 
23;  24  K'thibh)  to  exult,  ',in  (once  y\^'^  Gen.  6:  3)  to  judge,  '"'^  to  lodge, 
a"*"!  to  contend,  Tp'b  to  muse,  D''b  (once  n>ir^  Ex.  4:  11)  to  put,  b'^b  (once 
Cl-rb'i  Isa.  35:  1)  to  rejoice,  "i"^'j  (once  "li';'  Job  33:  27)  to  sing,  rr^'a  to 
place;  V^in  or  b'^n  to  twist,  ivrithe,  has  both  Y'odh  and  Vav.  To  these  are 
to  be  added  ^ilii  Jer.  4:  3,  Hos.  10:  12,  nr"in  Ps.  71;  12  K'thibh,  K'ri  ndnr 
as  always  elsewhere;  "|"^i<^  to  urge,  7"'^'^  to  flourish,  1'^'^^  to  wander,  are  in 
the  Hipliil  according  to  Gesenius:  but  as  tlie  corresponding  preterites  are 
Dot  Hiphil  but  Kal,  and  there  are  no  other  forms  of  the  Kal  future,  the> 


g  161,  162   AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.         183 

might  Avith  equal  propriety  be  regarded  as  Kal  futures  of  Ayin  Yodh  roots ; 
the  second  of  them  is  so  regarded  by  Ewald.  Apocopated  futures:  'i^"", 
hifl  and  b;';,  Ian";,  Cii;;,  ri"';,  ■bn  and  :"|br!.  With  Vav  consecutive:  W] , 
■,b'1,  C'^"^^,  'i^PjD,  'U-^llj  l^?P^.  "'■'^J^V  With  paragogic  Nun  and  suf3fixes: 
•,^i-i:i,  T'Vn'f?!  ti^"''^1'   Feminine  plural:  iilbin. 

3.  The  infinitives  show  a  stronger  disposition  to  adopt  Vav  forms. 
Yodh  is  only  retained  in  the  following  absolute  infinitives;  'p3  Prov.  23;  1, 
n-l  and  ns,  bi5  Prov.  23:  24  K'ri  (^13  K'thibh),  ^i-)  Jer.  50:  34,  elsewhere 
21.  Construct  infinitives:  'P'n,  "pb  Gen.  24;  2',  elsewhere  "'tb,  3'^")  once  yn 
Judg.  21:  12  K'thibh,  rr^^  and  nvj,  n^b  Job  20:  4,  2  Sara.  14:  7  K'ri,  else- 
where CTJ,  ^^d  1  Sam,  18:  6  K'ri  (K'thibh  "iTiIJ),  n"iiy,  also  with  suf.  tI'I^ 
Deut.  25:  4,  elsewhere  'r^ll .  In  the  difficult  verse  Hos.  7:  4  "^"^'""O  has  been 
variously  explained,  as  the  Kal  infinitive  preceded  by  the  preposition  "iP  or 
as  the  Hipliil  participle.  The  only  certain  instance  of  a  Kal  passive  par- 
ticiple of  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  is  n^VO  2  Sam.  13:  32  K'ri  ^  (K'thibh  ri'S'iir); 
some  explain  D''b  Num.  24:  21,  Obad.  ver.  4,  as  a  passive  participle,  others 
as  an  infinitive. 

4.  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  adopt  the  Vav  forms  in  all  the  derivative  species, 
e.  g.  "^n-iins,  ',133,  *in::'i3'^,  I^:'i2r^f7.  ^^^""^  ^''U  <^ooked,  i.  e.  pottage,  is  the 
only  instance  of  a  Niphal  participle  with  Yodh. 

§  161.  1.  Examples  of  the  Niphal  preterite:  Siis,  5103,  '('"ib,  ^1X3;  the 
accidental  Hhirik  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  preserved  in  bi:2D  by  means 
of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical;  in  "liss  it  is  lengthened  to  Tsere  be- 
fore the  guttural;  in  :"ip:  Jer.  48:  11  the  radical  1  is  rejected,  which  gives 
it  the  appearance  of  an  Ayin  doubled  verb.  Inflected  forms:  nsisD  (part, 
fem.  rii'i:3),  ^r'i:,  !i:ri3,  ^i-ji^jS,  ^Va?,  "^niios,  "'risis;,  Dn'i:j'is3,  drb'p?. 

2.  Infinitive  absolute:  Vijan.  Construct:  biali,  riilin,  with  n  rejected 
after  the  preposition  "lixb  Job  33:  30,  §  91.  b;  once  it  has  Shurek,  d^'nn 
Isa.  25:  10.    Imperative,  "isri,  "bari. 

3.  Future:  )'^i':,  -jir"^,  h^'sn,  "{ill  Vs.  72:  17  K'ri  (K'thibh  "pS^),  ^:^h, 
•j^t\  "'itr,  fir'ir,  -lis;:.    Participle:  ■pi;,  libj,  D-^ijiss,  c^iio:,  tD^in?,  d'^Sia;. 

§  162.  1.  The  short  vowel  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  in  a  few  in- 
stances preserved  in  the  Hiphil  by  doubling  the  first  radical,  thus  V^l^. 
and  r.-iin.  r-^cn  and  n-'pn,  r^-},  )-'h,  and  -p3;:,  ^"^n^  and  in.^l  2  Sam.  22:  33. 

2.  Hiphil    preterite   inflected:    n^ikn,    ^S'^rrt,    ^'J'^'^X}   and    sirnii;    with 

syllabic  affixes:  nir^n,  nv^inri,  ni'i^in  and  niann,  c:rsJ"'';;r)  and  nrsnn, 

Brb'^w;rt,  •'Hri^sni,  or  when  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  "'ni'i'Sn,  ri'ry- 
and  nnnrti,  or  without  the  inserted  Hholem,  ri£3n,  "^Firilfi  and  '^nin'^;!!, 
!i3=ri  and  ^irir^n,  crxnn  and  Qnk"'3rT,  -^nbri  and  tth-qti,  §  61.  4.  a.  With 
suffixes,  irsn,  •■n^'^pn,  r|r,"i"ain,  '^?5"''JC!,  'iriJ^hH- 

3.  Hiphil  future  inflected:  li'^i?^,  1i:3"'p!n,  feminine  plural  M32i'n,  njo'^pri, 
ni^"iriri.  with  Nun  paragogic  and  suffixes:  "|VC"^07,  Dni^"!.  Apocopated 
future:  "|'B^,  3w^,  ns^ ,  n-A .  With  Vav  consecutive:  T^^^,  rri,  Dj^^l,  1^X1 
and   "l"'^'i<l,  if  the  last  radical  be  a  guttural,  S>^jl,  n^^T,  nf^l,  or  X,   ttb'^" 


184  ETYMOLOGY.  §  163 

once  N"^?^?  and  once  X"^^*!);  upon  the  reception  of  a  suffix  the  Towel  is 
restored  to  its  original  length,  ci;"'^')!,  'inB'^3''1. 

4.  Hiphil  infinitive  absolute:  ni'n,  niln ,  cf^n  once  D"'pn  Jer.  44:  25; 
construct,  b"^3r:,  n"'rin,  a-ii-n,  G^pn,  with  suffix  "^^"'"in,  fp-'cn,  ci-ainn, 
CrS''3^  and  once  with  a  feminine  termination  i^E:!^  Isa.  30:  28. 

5.  In  a  few  instances  ii  is  found  in  the  Huplial  before  Daghesh-forte 
or  Sh'va,  J'ir\'tri  Zecli.  5:  11,  n:o  Ezek.  41:  9,  11  but  ninn  Laui.  5:  5,  and 
in  some  editions  cjsn  2  Sam.  23:  1,  ;bu7  Job  41;  1,  iin'in  2  Sam.  21:  9, 
though  others  read  npn,  ','b'^'^,  ^iri^ati, 

§  163.  1.  The  following  verbs,  which  are  only  found  in  one  or  more 
of  the  three  reduplicated  species,  double  the  middle  radical  either  as  Vav 
or  as  Yodh,  viz.:  IS'n  to  render  liable,  ^b*  to  do  wickedly,  "ib  to  blind,  rsi" 
to  pervert,  i'VJ  to  cry  for  help,  i:-\^-^':ir}  Josh.  9:  12,  !l"i-L::i'i  Josh.  9:4;  so 
also  t,'^^  fut.  n^;?")  and  D"c"ip"),  "I'S"  fut.  Tii.'",  which  have  quiescent  Vav  in 
other  sijecies,  and  n^l,  which  has  consonantal  Vav  likewise  in  the  Kal. 

2.  The  following  omit  the  quiescent  in  the  Piel  and  double  the  result- 
ing biliteral,  ^^53  to  sustain,  fi"^rN^X::  Isa.  14:  23,  r|bu3V?  Isa.  22:  17, 
r|-^i.;-:-j-3  Hab.  2;  7,  "^lilC-^S-;  Job  16:  12  but  yk'p^  Jer.  23:  29,  -ip--  Num. 
24:  17  and  "ip"}~p  I.'^a.  22;  5,  "'^cvrn  Isa.  17:  11;  •.^'Vp'',  Isa.  15:  5  is  for 
;>n5-:.":,  §  57.  1;  ^i'n";  Job  39:  3  is  perhaps  for  ^iBrb;";  from  biiy,  comp. 
p3N  Ps.  139:  8  for  p^DN,  §  88,  though  Gesenius  conjectures  that  it  is  an 
eironeous  reading  for  ^"5"?  from  S^lS.  The  only  Hithpael  formed  by  a  like 
reduplication  is  bnlprirri  Esth.  4:  4,  elsewhere  b^innn. 

3.  Other  verbs  double  the  third  radical  in  the  Piel  and  Hithpael.  Ex- 
amples of  the  feminine  plural:  tiJ'ii'iriri,  riiiipri,  :n:;;'i':rri,  Jn:i;^ri"rr. 
Hholem  is  changed  to  U  before  the  doubled  letter  in  the  contracted  form, 
^3:^1211  Job  31:  15  for  'is::'i=":^  §  61.  3.  Fiirst  explains  r.';:*.'2-^  Isa.  64;  6  as 
in  like  manner  fur  !i:^5"i"cril ,  while  Gesenius  makes  it  a  Kal  future,  used  in 
this  single  instance  in  a  transitive  sense.  D^pwia  Am.  6;  11  is  probably  a 
variant  orthography  for  ci:CC"2,  §  92.  b. 

4.  The  following  are  the  only  examples  of  the  Pual  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs, 
viz.:  With  1  doubled,  n-ir-a  Eccles.  1:  15,  Q'^ni'nti  Jer.  22:  14.  Eeduplicated 
biliteral,  ^3^  1  Kin.  20:  27.  The  third  radical  reduplicated,  bV'n  to  be 
born,  ;!i::-3  Ezek.  28:  13,  Ps.  37:  23,  ri3^fi"^n  Ps.  75:  11  and  D'^'il'3  Neh. 
9;  5,  rr-i-^  Isa.  16:  10,  'l£Si-i'i  Job  26:  11,  ninid^  Ezek.  38:  8. 

5.  ni'n'iri'isn  Jer.  25:  34  is  an  anomalous  preterite  from  yia  to  scatter, 
with  n  prefixed  and  inflected  after  the  analogy  of  Niphal;  some  copies  have 
the  noun  Dr'n'riiER  your  dispersions. 

In  T-'-;?D'|  E/.ek.  36:  11  for  Th::ni  from  nia,  Tsere  is  retained  under 
the  prefix  as  though  the  "word  were  from  the  related  Pe  Yodh  verb  si:"^, 
e.  g.  "^nraTi'.  On  the  other  hand,  in  inp-^rni  Ex.  2;  9  from  pr,  Tsere  is 
lejecied  as  though  it  were  from  an  Ayin  Vav  verb. 


§  164,  165  LAMEDH  ALEPH  VEBB3.  185 

Lamedh  Aleph  (i<"b)  Verbs. 

§  164.  1,  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains 
its  consonantal  character  only  when  it  stands  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable,  r;JJ-I'2 ,  ^J^'k^H. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in 
the  preceding  vowel,  §  57.  2.  (2),  i^kl2,  i/^k'Z,  i^'tcn.  If 
this  vowel  be  Pattahh,  as  in  the  Kal  and  Niphal  prete- 
rites and  in  the  Pual  and  Hophal  species,  it  is  in  the 
simple  syllable  lengthened  into  Kamets,  §  59,  ix!l'2  for 
5^"^,  ^ii'^:  for  ^'k'rTj  so  likewise  in  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative,  where  i^  as  a  guttural  requires  a,  i^i^'O^,  for 
tX^'^Z',  ^^'2  for  5^;:.  A  hke  prolongation  of  Pattahh  to 
Kamets  occurs  before  medial  5<  in  the  first  and  second 
persons  of  the  Kal  preterite,  I^i^k"^,  Dr)^5:i"J. 

3.  With  the  single  exception  just  stated,  medial  i^ 
quiesces  in  the  diphthongal  vowel  e  before  syllabic  affixes; 
thus,  in  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  in  Tsere,  ni^k';::?,  "riJ^ii'^M,  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  all  the  futures  and  imperatives  in 

Seghol,  n:^5i^';ri,  r;:«i53. 

a.  This  e  may  arise  from  the  diphthongal  preferences  of  N,  §  60.  1.  a  (5), 
or  it  may  be  borrowed  from  the  corresponding  forms  of  il"b  verbs,  between 
which  and  X  b  verbs  there  is  a  close  affinity  and  a  strong  tendency  to 
mutual  assimilation.  In  Palestine  Aramaeic  and  Syriac  no  distinction  is 
made  between  them. 

§  165.  This  class  of  verbs  is  represented  in  Para- 
digm XI  by  !^i:"J  to  find;  the  Piel  and  Hithpael,  though 
wanting  in  this  verb,  are  supplied  from  analogy.  The 
Pual  and  Hophal  are  omitted  because  they  are  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  they  present  no  peculiarities  but  such 
as  are  common  to  the  other  species. 

a.  In  their  ordinary  inflection  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  differ  from  the 
perfect  paradigm  in  the  vowels  only. 


186  ETYMOLOGY.  §  16G,  167 


Eemarks  on  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs. 

§  166.  1.  Verbs  having  Tsere  as  their  second  vowel,  §  82.  1.  a,  retain 
it  in  the  fir.^t  and  second  persons  of  the  Kal  preterite,  rXj^  (but  Drx^i 
Josh.  4:  24),  rx-?::,  "^rsij. 

2.  Quiescent  N  is  occasionally  omitted  from  the  body  of  the  word, 
e.  g.  Kal  pret.  "^ri^  Job  1:  21  for  ■'J:ii<il';,  vii-a  Num.  11:  11,  "•rh'S  Jiidg. 
4:  19,  "^-"io  Job  32:  18,  !133  1  Sam.  25:  8  for  !;:N3:  fat,  nrrri  and  n:xrn; 
rk^  Deut.  28:  57  part.  fem.  sing,  for  rxk^;  '•^'^'^  Job  41:  17  for  inX'i)'? 
const,  inf.  Avith  prep,  and  suf.  from  xrj.  Niph.  pret.  Dr;^3ri3  Josh.  2:  16, 
zn^::J  Lev.  ll:  43.  Otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  may  in  like  manner  be  dropped  from 
the  end  of  the  word  after  quiescent  Vav  or  Yodh,  e.  g.  "i-n  Gen.  20:  6  for 
^i-t^,  "i-*!!  1  Kin.  12:  12  for  xid^:,  •'■jnn  2  Kin.  13:  6,  "'-jnn  Jer.  32:  35, 
■'r  Ps.  141:  5,  "^i;;!  Ps.  55:  16,  "^ix  1  Kin.  21:  29,  Mic.  1:  15,  "r^  2  Sam.  5:  2, 
and  in  three  other  passages;  ^rn  Ruth  3:  15  is  Hiph.  imper.  fem.  for  "'it'^?!!, 
§  62.  2. 

3.  The  vowel  following  X  is  in  a  few  instances  given  to  a  preceding 
vowelless  consonant,  and  the  X  becomes  otiant  or  quiescent,  §  57.  2  (3), 
XVrj  Ps.  139:  20  for  !ixr3,  XTrp  Jer.  10:  5  for  IXij^  ixn")  imp.  for  iiX"!';, 
X^-  Eccles.  10:5  Kal  part.  fem.  for  nx:*";,  n"^X-jn  1  Sam.  14:  33  for  ="X-jn, 
nxnia  Neh.  6:  8  Kal  part,  with  suf.  for  CXlis,  ^XD"]?  Ezek.  47:  8  for  IXE'^3; 
and,  on  the  contrary,  quiescent  X  attracts  to  itself  the  vowel  of  the  pre- 
ceding consonant  in  'k'-\p  Ex.  2:  20  Kal  imp.  for  njX'np  and  tii'ii'S  Cant. 
3:  11  for  riDxii  from  xii^. 

4.  Final  X  resumes  its  consonantal  character  upon  the  addition  of 
suffixes  ixrj,  receiving  (_)  before  T],  C3  and  's,  in  consequence  of  which 
a  previous  Tsere  or  Sh'va  is  converted  into  Pattahh,  §  60.  1,  TjXr?,  fjXra, 
r|Xn3,  r,x;nri-i,  r^^^rro  Pi.  inf.,  nixr-j,  eix^b  Kal  inf.  for  c;x'4"2,  §  6i.  i.  c. 

5.  Kamets  in  the  ultimate  is  most)}'  retained  before  suffixes  and  para- 
gogic  n,  TiX^-?-;,  nxs-i  Ps.  41:  5,  MX-^PXI  1  Sam.  28:  15,  but  nxip?  Isa. 
56r  12.  Tsere  is  rejected  rix:iX  Neh.  2:  13,  2  Chron.  1:  10,  or  retained  only 
in  pause  :nxs  Judg,  9:  29. 

§  167.  1.  He  is,  in  a  few  instances,  substituted  fqr  X,  n£"i  Ps.  60:  4  for 
X0"7,  nb-ri  Jer.  19:  11  for  XE'in,  ni:  Ps.  4:  7  for  xr:,  §  3.  1.  a,  nzn  Jer. 
49:10  for  xzns,  nbnn  l  Kin!  22:^25,  2  Kin.  7:  12^  for  xhrn,  nH'-;  Job 
8:  21  for  x'i-?-;. 

2.  Sometimes  X  remains,  but  the  vowels  are  those  of  n"b  forms.  "rx^3 
Vs.  119:  101    for  "TX^^.   ^'^"   Eccl.  8:  12,  9:  18,  Isa.  65:  20  for  X'jn,   X"i;3 

1  Sam.  22:  2,  Isa.  24:  2,  xki-S  Eccl.  7:  26,  xi'i  1  Kin.  9:  11,  Am.  4:  2  Pi. 
pret.  for   X">aD,   XS^i  Ps.  143:  3   for   x|-t,   x|-3  Jer.  51:  34   for   xH,   TXEl 

2  Kin.  2:  21  for  T^CI,  !i:XE-  Jer.  51:  9  for  "XC"!,  ~i<'^p.  Job  39:  24  for 
-XB;-i,  X^En  Deut.  28:  59  Hiph.  pret.  for  X'^livn,  xii"!::  Ps.  135:  7  Hiph. 
part,  const,  for  X'^'i'i'a  from  xii^;  to  Avhich  may  be  added  ii;^X'«:ir\  Ezek. 
23:  49,  n:-x:iBri  Jer.  50:  20,  with  ■<  inserted  as  in  n'b  verbs. 


§168-170  LAMEDH  HE  VEEBS.  187 

3.  Sometimes  the  M  b  form  is  adopted  both  in  consonants  and  vowels, 
iy?->2  Ezek.  28:  16  for  !1N>^,  llis  1  Sam.  6:  10,  !ir3  Ezek.  39:  26,  "^in^S  1  Sam. 
25:  33  for  "^Srsbs,  ni:!  Ruth  2:9  for  nxi^ ,  tl^:'^  Gen.  23:  6  for  X^D"? , 
nrQ"iri  Job  5:  18  for  nsxsnn  comp.  Jer.  8:  11,  61  :  9,  2  Kin.  2:  22,'rp 
Jer.  25:  27  is  2  pi.  imp.  of  Nip,  "^ri:?  Ps.  32:  1  for  xri?,  r^b  Jer.  26:  9  for 
riX33,  rissnn  l  Sam.  lO:  6,  niisrin  l  Sam.  lO:  13,  ^r"':?-?^  2  Sam.  3:  8, 
rp'^'^  Isa.  29:  7  for  fl'^xai:;  !^ip?  Ezek.  8:  3  is  by  some  interpreters  thought 
to  be  for  X^?P^  provoking  to  jealousy,  and  by  others  explained  in  the  sense 
of  the  il"b  verb  selling  (Israel  to  their  foes). 

§  168.  1.  The  3  fern,  preterite  has  the  old  ending  n^,  §  86.  b.  in  f^N^jH 
Ex.  5:  16  for  nx-jn,  r.Nnp  Deut.  31:  29,  Isa.  7:  14,  Jer.  44:  23,  r,i(.zn  Gen. 
33:  11  Hopb.  from'  xia,  PN^SS  Ps.  118:  23  (nxBs;  Deut.  30:  11  is  \he  fe- 
minine participle),  to  which  the  customary  ending  n  is  further  added  in 
nnxVs?  2  Sam.  1:  26,  nnxann  Josh.  6:  17  for  nxiznn. 

2.  A  feminine  termination  f1  ,  H,  or  as  in  n  b  verbs  ni,  is  occasionally 
added  to  the  construct  infinitive,  e.  g  Kal,  "^i$"2::,  i^X"l"),  «^5<5iy,  nN"bp  from 
xip  to  meet,  distinguished  from  X"ip  and  mi<"ip  Judg.  8 :  1  from  xnp  to 
call,  rVil-0  and  n^siB^  never  K^ip,  rxi'a  Prov.  8:  13,  with  suf.  inNi:n  Ezek. 
33:  12.  Niphal,  inxarn  Zech.  13:  4.  Piel,  mx^^  and  n|-3,  inN2p  2  Sam. 
21:  2;  nix^p  Ezek.  17:  9  is  a  Kal  inf.  const.,  formed  as  in  Chaldee  by  pre- 
fixing 'O. 

3.  There  are  two  examples  of  the  Niphal  infinitive  absolute,  K'^p? 
2  Sam.  1:  6  and  xkaii  Ex.  22:  3:  the  analogy  of  the  former  has  been  re- 
tained in  the  paradi^'m  for  the  sake  of  distinction  from  the  construct.  Piel 
infinitive  absolute:  NSp,  Xsn,  X713.    Hiphil  inf.  abs.:  N^sn,  X'i'n. 

4.  The  Hiphil  future  with  Vav  consecutive  commonly  has  Tsere  in  the 
ultimate,  though  Hhirik  also  occurs  K'^pn;) ,  5<p';;i ,  xoni^il ,  xanw ,  nk^'f^  and 
S<ki'»:i,  si^:),  once  SfZl^l  Ezek.  40:  3,  and  once  !!<"^3*1  Neh.  8:  2. 

5.  Kamets  sometimes  occurs  in  the  ultimate  of  the  Hithpael  future, 
K^jni  Num.  23:  24  but  N-i':rn  Ezek.  29:  15,  so  KLjnni,  Hiaii"',  N^enn, 
;'*iX^OPi'^;  more  rarely  in  the  preterite,  nxs^jri. 

§  169.  1.  The  following  are  the  only  Pual  forms  which  occur.  Pret.: 
^Ksn,  iiwsan,  xn'p.  Fut.:  xsn-i.  Part.:  X3'7^,  !^i<'|'^^,  ti'^xb^p,  dixfeo^, 
nis<^Bia,  with  suf.  •'it'iM. 

2.  The  following  are  the  only  Hophal  forms:  Pret.  ^><ar'i7.  Hxi^in, 
■xisin,  ni<i:n,  nrsan,  Jixatin.    Fut.:  xh^i"',  !ixii!i'i.    Part.:  Nan's,  rnk^-o. 

3.  For  the  anomalous  forms,  nnxian  Deut.  33:  16,  'i^nx'iatn  Job  22:  21, 
nNan  l  Sam.  25 :  34  (K'thibh  "^nNan),  see  §  88  (sing.  3  fem.). 

Lamedh  He  (»l"b)  Verbs. 

§  170.  In  these  verbs  the  third  radical,  which  is  Yodh 
or  Vav,  does  not  appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  except 


188  ETYMOLOGY.  §  171 

in  the  Kal  passive  participle,  e.  g.  ''^!i>3;  in  all  other  cases 
it  is  rejected  or  softened,  the  resulting  vowel  termination 
being  usually  expressed  by  the  letter  n,  §  11.  1.  a. 

In  the  various  preterites  H  stands  for  the  vowel  a, 
and  is  hence  pointed  n^ . 

In  the  futures  and  participles  it  stands  for  e,  and  is 
pomted  n  . 

In  the  imperatives  it  stands  for  e,  and  is  pointed  Jl... 

In  the  absolute  infinitives  it  stands  for  o  or  e;  in  the 
Kal  it  is  pointed  n',  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  T\  ~  in  the 
x'^iphal  and  Piel  H '  or  Jl,..  There  are  no  examples  in  Pual 
and  Hithpael. 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  ending  T\\ 

a.  In  this  class  of  verbs  the  Yodh  forms  have  almost  eutirely  super- 
seded those  with  Vav.  The  latter  are  confined  to  the  construct  infinitive 
where  iri,  occurring;  in  all  the  species,  is  best  explained  by  assuming  1  to 
be  radical  (comp.  nixn  Ezek.  28:  17  as  an  alternate  of  nix"i)  and  to  a  few 
other  sporadic  cases,  viz.:  a  single  Kal  pi-eterite,  ^nV?'^  Job  3:  25,  the  re- 
duplicated forms  of  thi-ee  verbs,  njxj,  "'in::"?,  ninrirri,  and  the  peculiar 
form,  T^'l';■^^?  Isa.  16:  9. 

b.  In  the  Kal  preterite,  Yodh  is  rejected  after  the  heterogeneous  vowel 
Pattahh,  §  57.  2.  (5),  which  is  then  prolonged  to  Kamets  in  the  simple 
syllable,  i^'ij  for  "'^J.  As  Pattahh  is  likewise  the  regular  vowel  of  the  ulti- 
mate in  the  preterites  of  Niphal  and  Hophal,  and  besides  was  so  originally 
in  all  the  active  species,  as  is  shown  by  the  Arabic  §  82.  5-  h  (3),  the  final 
Kamets  of  these  species  may  be  similarly  explained.  Yodh  is  in  like  manner 
rejected  after  the  heterogeneous  Hholem  of  certain  infinitives,  while  it 
leaves  the  homogeneous  Tsere  of  others  unmodified. 

c.  The  futures,  imperatives,  and  participles  of  certain  of  the  species, 
(including  the  Hiphil  as  shown  by  some  cf  its  inflections)  have  e  (Arabic  t) 
as  the  normal  vowel  of  their  ultimate;  in  this  Yodh  can  quiesce,  leaving 
it  unchanged.  Those  of  the  other  species  have  or  may  have  a  in  the  ulti- 
mate; this,  combined  with  the  i  latent  in  '',  will  again  form  e.  In  the 
future  this  becomes  S  (..)  in  distinction  from  the  ending  e  (_)  of  the  more 
energetic  imperative ;  and  the  absolute  is  distinguished  from  the  construct 
state  of  the  participle  in  the  same  way. 

§  171.  1.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a 
vowel  the  last  radical  is  occasionally  retained  as ",  particu- 
larly in  prolonged  or  pausal  forms,  '^'^'^i  ^'v">  •'P"^"V?  i* 
is,  however,  commonly  rejected  and  its  vowel  given  to 


§  172,  173         LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.  189 

the  antecedent  consonant,  ^^3  for  ^^bs,  *'''t>jr\  for  *'^bDn;  so 
in  the  preterite  3  fern.,  which  in  these  verbs  retains  the 
primary  characteristic  T\^,  §  86.  &,  fibs  for  ri^bs,  to  which 
is  further  appended  the  softened  ending  H^,  thus  Hnb^, 
in  pause  HP" 3. 

a.  The  M  of  the  3  fem.  pret.  is  frequently  explained  as  a  second  fem- 
inine ending  added  after  the  first  had  lost  its  significance  in  the  popular 
consciousness.  It  might,  perhaps  with  equal  propriety,  he  regarded  as 
paragogically  appended,  §  61.  6,  comp.  such  nouns  as  Hni^^d"],  i^t^^l?, 
nni'^X,  in  order  to  produce  a  softer  termination  and  one  more  conformed 
to  that  which  obtains  in  the  generality  of  verbs.  Nordheimer's  explanation 
of  the  ri  as  hardened  from  n,  tirh^  for  nn?5,  labours  under  the  double 
difficulty  that  there  is  neither  proof  nor  probability  for  the  assumption  that 
the  consonant  n  could  be  exchanged  for  n,  and  that  n  in  the  preterite  of 
these  verbs  is  not  a  radical  nor  even  a  consonant,  but  simply  the  represen- 
tative of  the  vowel  a. 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  third  radical  ''  remains  but  is  softened  to  a  vowel,  so 
that  in  the  Kal  preterite  it  quiesces  in  Hhirik,  in  the 
Pual  and  Hophal  preterites  in  Tsere,  in  the  Niphal,  Piel, 
Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  preterites  in  either  Hhirik  or  Tsere, 
and  in  the  futures  and  imperatives  of  all  the  species  in 
Seghol,  n^bs,  ^n^bro,  HD^bn. 

3.  Forms  not  augmented  by  personal  endings  lose 
their  final  vowel  before  suffixes,  e.  g,  "wby,  Tjbs,  from  rd^, 
^b:*";  from  nb:>'^,  ?|b3n  from  T'ibjri.  The  preterite  3  fem. 
takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  ^Sinba  or  ^nb^,  and  in  pause 


§  172.  The  Lamedh  He  verbs  will  be  represented  in 
Paradigm  XII  by  nbs  to  uncover t  reveal,  which  is  used  in 
all  the  species. 

SHORTENED  FUTURE  AND  IMPERATIVE. 

§  173.  1.  The  final  vowel  n_,  is  rejected  from  the 
futures  when  apocopated  or  when  preceded  by  Vav  con- 
secutive. The  concurrence  of  final  consonants  thence  re- 


190  ETYMOLOGY.  §  174 

suiting  in  the  Kal  and  Hipliil  is  commonly  relieved  by 
inserting  an  miaccented  Seghol  between  them,  §  61.  2, 
to  which  the  preceding  Pattahh  is  assimilated  in  the 
Iliphil,  §  63.  2.  a,  the  Hhirik  of  the  Kal  either  remain- 
ing unchanged  or  being  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple 
syllable. 


KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

riEL. 

HIPHIL. 

HITHPAEIi 

Future. 

^T-C. 

rbT 

nb:^ 

nb:^ 

!^>.501 

Apoc.  Fut. 

b:r  or  b^l; 

b^ 

Vt 

b3^ 

'^r;: 

Vav  Consec. 

h:^^  or  VM 

bi>^^ 

by^ 

b:^i 

bin^i 

2.  The  final  vowel  n..  is  sometimes  rejected  from  the 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g. 

Pi  bs  for  nbis  Hiph.  b:jn  for  nb^n,  Hith.  bann  for  nbst^n. 
Remarks  on  Lamedh  He  Verbs. 

I  174.  1.  Kal  preterite:  The  third  person  feminine  rarely  occun  with 
the  simple  ending  n^,  tibs  Lev.  25:  21,  vrn  2  Kin.  9:  37  K'thibh;  so  in 
the  Hiphil,  Tsbn  Ezek.  24:  12,  r'sr^T)  Lev.  26:  34,  and  Hophal,  Pixn  Jer. 
13:  19.  Yodh  is  occasionally  retained  before  asyllabic  affixes,  H^bn  Ps. 
57:  2,  the  onlj'  instance  in  which  the  feminine  has  the  ending  usual  in 
other  verbs,  rfen  Deut.  32:  37,  rij3  Ps.  73:  2  K'ri,  and  perhaps  Thr\  Prov. 
26:  7,  see  §  141.  1;  so  in  the  imperative,  rPX,  r^'v^  Isa.  21:  12;  future, 
"^sn;,  i^^bs-:,  "ii^Trr,  ycxsr^,  ?^n^:,  ■ii^^n;:,_V^^n,'^iJan':,  •t^;y^^,,  =1^3^:, 
!|-'rx':;,  Niphal  preterite,  1"i33 ,  Piel  future,  ')>l''ann,  1^^^p=7,  Hiphil  future, 
'l^^JB,  imperative,  r^TTi  for  I'^nXH. 

2.  Infinitive:  Vav  is  sometimes  written  for  the  final  vowel  of  the  in- 
finitive absolute  instead  of  n,  iDa,  ira,  Sin,  "inn,  i-i-a,  irr,  "iir?,  ix^,  "in^:, 
and  in  a  few  instances  the  feminine  termination  is  added,  riBx,  P'X^,  rin'i'. 
There  are  also  examples  of  the  omission  of  this  termination  from  the  con- 
struct infinitive,  iliir  and  \C'J  (with  suf.  inb?  Ex.  18:  18),  X^ip,  nXT,  vrtO; 
once  it  has  the  form  nix;i  Ezek.  28:  17. 

3.  Future:  There  are  a  very  few  examples  of  Tsere  as  the  last  vowel 
of  the  future,  nx'^r,  Dan.  1:  13,  nirn  Josh.  7:  9,  9:  24,  2  Sam.  13:  12, 
-r^y)T\  Jer.  17:  17;  io  in  the  Piel,  n^5P  Lev.  18:  7  flf.,  Nah.  1:3;  and,  on  the 
other  liHiid,  there  is  one  instance  of  an  imperative  ending  in  Seghol,  viz., 
the  Piel,  nz'^  Judg.  9:  29.  The  radical  "^  remains  and  rests  in  Hhirik  in 
■'hni  (3  fem.)  Jer.  3:6,  in  the  Hiphil,  "^nrn  (2  masc.)  Jer.  18:  23,  and  in 
th«  Kal  imperative,  ''iin  (2  ma^c.)  Isa.  26:  20.  Yodh  appears  once  as  a 
consonant  before  a  suffix,  "''Tk''*  Job  3:  25,  and  once  before  n  paragogic, 


§   175,  176  EEMARKS  ON  LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.  191 

iTi^nx  Ps.  77:  4,  which  is  very  rare  in  these  verbs,  but  perhaps  displaces 
the  final  vowel  in  tiyrs  Ps.  119:  117,  and  the  Hithpael,  nrnd?  Isa.  41:  23 
In  a  few  instances  ^  is  restored  as  a  quiescent  before  suffixes,  ^3"^.^n'^  Hos 
6:  2,   "ip^n   1  Kin.  20:   35,   i^'^O?'^   Ps.    140:   10   K'ri,   Dn">XSX  Deut.   32:  26. 

Examples  of  the  feminine  plural:  nrsnn,  nj^-in,  ;)''nnr)i,  nrB^w,  nrbn 
and  nsirn,  nsixnn  Mic.  7:  10. 

4.  The  future  of  a  few  verbs  when  apocopated  or  preceded  by  Vav 
consecutive  simply  drops  its  last  vowel,  either  retaining  Hhirik  under  the 
personal  prefix  or  lengthening  it  to  Tsere,  riS'T,  S'^'.l,  r\rl.!^.  '^"}!j>  '4'^?.', 
n^.^?;  so  in  the  Pe  Nun  forms,  t^l  and  r^ ,  D'^,  and  Pe  Yodh  'Cpl'^,  with 
Pattahh-furtive  under  the  first  radical  of  the  Pe  guttural,  ^H^,  §  17.  1,  or 
the  vowel  of  the  personal  prefix  changed  to  Pattahh,  §  60.  1,  riX]'],  X"!^^ 
but  X'n"),  Xi^ni^.  Most  commonly  Segliol  is  inserted  between  the  concurring 
consonants,  iS';!,  '2^.,  'bi,\,  "ipi,  hz^  and  bon,  fp'.T,  )'s\^  and  "Dni,  qs^_,  -jj^il, 
i;5«5,  UiiT^I,  n-i^_  and  ^'^:'n^,  Ciy^,  y^h^,  Xl^:;,  X^ni,  bir.'i,  or  Pattahh  if  one 
of  the  consonants  is  a  guttural,  §  61.  2;  thus,  in  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  jJ'^J'I, 
<^?ri]i  5'!'!!,  3'nn,  in  Pe  guttural  ]rv^  from  nin;^,  §  60.  1.  a.  (3),  -in^.  from 
iTnni,  or  Avith  the  additional  change  of  the  vowel  of  the  prefix  to  Pattahh, 
"iDPL  'CP  from  nrnn,  yrfi^  from  nicr;;,  "i?rj,  ^?!'5  Isa.  59:  17  (in  1  Sam. 
15:  19,  14:  32  K'ri,  this  same  form  is  from  "JW  or  -J-iSi,  §  159.  3),  bvl^,  ]^i^, 
'.ay^l.  The  rejection  of  the  final  vowel  takes  place  frequently  even  in  the 
first  person  singular,  which  in  other  verbs  is  commonly  exempt  from  short- 
ening, §  99.  3.  a,  -iSNi,  N^N,  n':ixi,  mx,  :2X  (from  n-j;),  brxi,  'v^),  bs'kn 
and  n;r"X1 .  In  a  few  instances  the  final  vowel  is  retained  in  other  persons 
after  Vav  consecutive,  e.  g.  nib;;_!1  1  Kin.  16:  25,  nir^  2  Km.  1:  10,  nin^] 
Josh.  19:  50,  nrnn;;  l  Sam.  1:  9,  n^r^l  1  Kin.  16:  17,  rik-i';i  1  Sam.  17:  42, 
ni3*1  2  Kin.  6:  23,  "'lyn  Deut.  32:' 18  is  fut.  apoc.  of  ri^O  as  "TV;  or  ^■^■; 
ofn^n. 

5.  The  passive  paiticiple  drops  the  final  "^  in  13:f  Job  15:  22  for  ^'^^^S . 
*iW  Job  41:  25  for  "^Trs' ,  and  fem.  plur.  pniliS  Isa.  3:  16  K'thibh  (K'ri  nr-jD), 
rmay  l  Sam.  25:  18  K'thibh. 

§  175.  1.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  Yodh  may  quiesce  in  either  Tsere  or 
Hhirik,  though  the  former  is  more  frequent,  r"")?;  and  '^ri''|33,  r^'r'??  ^^^ 
ir^i?,  nro-J?  and  ^3iii-J3,  ''n"'3s3  and  12"'3s3. 

2.  Examples  of  the  infinitive  absolute:  nSjJ,  ni3"i3,  nfesfi-  Construct; 
niSjn  and  mp:;3,  niian,  nixnn  and  nx'^rt;  with  suffixes,  ir^^O.  "i^'i'^i^'C 
once  as  though  it  were  a  plural  noun,  Db'^rii'njri  Ezek.  6  :  8,  so  the  Kal 
infill.,  Ti':r'i:3  Ezek.  16:  31. 

3.  Future  apocopated  and  with  Vav  consecutive:  ban,  n^jni,  f^isxi, 
ynn,  iui'n,  N''i-1,  "if?."!!,  and  in  one  verb  with  Pattahh  before  ri,  n^^l  Gen. 
7:  23,  Ps.  109:  13,  though  Baer's  edition  omits  the  Daghesh-forte  in  the 
former  passage,  thus  making  it  a  Kal  future. 

§  176.  1.  Piel:  Two  verbs,  nx3  to  be  becoming  and  Hna  to  draw  (the 
bow),  having  a  guttural  for  their  second  radical,  double  the  third  instead, 
which  in  the  reduplication  appears  as  Vav,  though  the  genera',  law  is  ad- 


192  ETYMOLOGY.  §  177 

hered  to  requiring  its  rejection  from  the  end  of  the  word  and  the  substitu- 
tion of  the  vowel  letter  n.  The  only  forms  which  occur  are,  of  the  former, 
the  preterite  niX3  Ps.  93:  5,  rs3  Cant.  1:  10,  Isa.  62:  7,  and  of  the  latter 
the  participle  plur.  constr.  "^irjwO  Gen.  21:  16.  There  are  three  examples 
of  Ilholem  inserted  after  the  first  radical,  §  92.  h,  T^''^"^  Isa.  10:  13  from 
nc'::,  the  b  being  an  orthographic  equivalent  for  D,  §  3.  1.  a,  and  in  the 
infinitive,  "iih,  'inh  Isa.  69:  13. 

2.  In  the  first  person  singular  of  the  Piel  preterite  "^  sometimes  quiesces 
in  Tsere;  in  all  the  other  persons,  however,  and  even  in  tlie  first  singular, 
■when  a  suffix  is  added,  it  invariably  quiesces  in  Hhirik,  *'n"^2ii  and  ■'n"'25, 
inif.p,  once  T".-^P>  ''^''??  and  T^H,  ~p^^"'?3,  Ci"^n"^33. 

3.  Infinitive  absolute:  ri^p  and  mj?,  M|3,  n^3,  nb,  iih,  i-ih,  nin?. 
The  construct  always  ends  in  m  with  the  exception  of  ns2  also  n'is,  and 
•lin  Hos.  6:  9. 

4.  Future:  in  T^!!*"'?  Isa.  16:  9  from  Snl'i,  the  second  radical  is  doubled 
as  '',  §  156.  1,  and  the  third  appears  as  1,  §  170.  a;  r,5:x  Ex.  33:  3  is  for 

mV=>?,  §  63.  1.  6.  "With  Vav  consecutive:  hhr'^,  bb-^l,  Cz-^r,  ik"*!,  CpW, 
"li'riT,  so  in  the  first  person  singular,  'r?,;i  "'SNl;  once  Paltahh  is  lengthened 
to  kamets,  ir"1  1  Sam.  21:  14;  so  in  pause,  :b;r\  Prov.  25:  9. 

5.  The  imperative  has  Seghol  in  a  single  instance,  rt3'n  Judg.  9:  29 
and  sometimes  drops  its  final  vowel  bs,  bn,  '(^,  G3,  IS  and  n)i^. 

6.  Pual  infinitive  construct  with  suffix:  "inii?  Ps.  132:  1. 

§  177.  1.  Hiphil  preterite:  The  prefixed  n  has  occasionally  Seghol, 
r\V^X^  and  n'isn,  rkVn,  n'nsn,  ns^n,  rppx-in.  Yodh  may  quiesce  in 
Hhirik  or  Tsere,  H'^'ijn,  T""i^n,  J^^.i^i?,  ''Tp^r}.  Yodh  once  remains  as  a 
quiescent  in  the  3  masc.  sing.,  "^linn  Isa.  63:  10,  and  once  in  the  3  masc. 
plur.,  rb-qr\  josh.  14:  8  for  ^"^tfor},  §  62.  2. 

2.  The  infinitive  absolute  has  Kamets  in  '^^'p  by  way  of  distinction 
from  ni-n  and  <i3"in  Jer.  42:  2,  which  are  always  used  adverbially.  Con- 
struct: The  prefixed  n  has  Hhirik  in  one  instance,  nilipn  Lev.  14:  43; 
niii;n>  2  Kin.  19:  25  K'thibh  is  for  niiionb. 

3.  The  future,  when  apocopated  or  preceded  by  Vav  consecutive,  some- 
times simply  rejects  its  final  vowel,  nE^  xn^l,  "^rv,  pb^!! ,  "li'l  f>"Oin  ^y,, 
ri  from  ni;,  i;^l  from  nuD ,  "!?  from  fii:3;  commonly,  however,  Seghol  is 
inserted  between  the  concurring  consonants,  bx''i  fiom  HSN,  §  111.  2.  a, 
bsilDi  "i^'.^i  ^^^r}!).  ""^ri!).  ■'?'.!'.  ^'^'1!!>  ^T^i  o""  Pattahh  if  one  of  the  consonants 
is  a  guttural,  "in^'l,  n^n,  ??jl,  Sn^^V  Occasionally  the  final  vowel  remains, 
nx'^n  1  Kin.  16:  17,  18:  42,  n3~n]  Ezek.  23:  19,  once  the  radical  ■>  appears 
quiescing  in  Hhirik,  ''npn  (2  masc.  apoc.  for  nor)  Jer.  18:  23.  The  reten- 
tion or  rejection  of  the  vowel  is  optional  in  the  first  person  singular, 
nz-ixi,  np-;:x;,  nix;;  and  r,i!;i  from  n=5,  b?k^,  as  from  nbj. 

4.  The  imperative  is  sometimes  abbreviated,  ti2*n  and  2";n ,  nts";!!  and 
tl'rr!.    ^^^b    foi"    '^??vJi    "^'^O  ^^^   ^'^i    ^'^'^  *"^    M^"}    ^'^^O    (accent  on  the 


§  178,  179   EEMAEKS  ON  LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.  193 

ultimate)  Ps,  39:  14  is  for  H^t^rt,  the  same  word  Isa.  6:  9  is  from  25S123, 
§  140.  5. 

5,  Hophal  infinitive  absolute:  M^Sn  Lev.  19:  20. 

§  178.  1.  Hithpael:  One  verb  MniU  reduplicates  its  third  radical,  vehich 
appears  as  1,  <^^IJ^!^:^l  to  tvorship,  fut.  n|i.H^'^1>  with  Vav  conv.  ^nf|TJ''1  for 
•inr'^ii'i,  §  61.  2,  plur.  ^inn;y^_i,  infin.  n'l'nrrri,  and  once  with  suf.  "^r^^wniijr^ 

2  Kin.  5:  18,  the  accent  being  thrown  back  by  a  following  monosyllable. 
For  the  inflected  participle,  Dr"iinn^"-9  Ezek.  8:  16,  see  §  90,  page  126. 

2.  In  the  preterite  "^  mostly  quiesces  in  Tsere  in  the  first  person  singu- 
lar, and  in  Hhirik  in  the  other  persons,  ''t^''.ili<rif7,  "'in'^lliri'::?!,  ri'^'ilnPi^'ii, 
^'b'^l'n^">P''7 >  C'^??^'^'I  ^'^k'^^'^l,  ^^''l^nn,  n'^sn^n. 

3.  The  future  apocopated  and  with  Vav  consecutive:  ^sri'^l,  Gsr.'^i, 
"innPi,  h'vTyi,  snrPi,  Sridri,  or  with  Kamets  in  the  accented  syllable,  li<r\''.', 
^srin,  so  always  in  pause,  ^nn'^T,  tDSnril  Gen.  24:  65. 

4.  The  shortened  imperative:  ^arirt,  ^nnrt. 

§  179.  1.  n^rt  to  be,  fut.  in^lri^,  Hhirik  being  retained  before  the  guttural 
under  the  influence  of  the  following  Yodh,  whence  the  Sli'va,  though  vocal, 
remains  simple;  so  in  the  inf.  const,  with  prep,  riili^ ,  ni'^nb,  W'^tio,  though 
without  a  prefix  it  is  t^Vii,,  once  JT'ti  Ezek.  21:  15.  The  apocopated  future 
Ti'i  (in  pause  "^fi'])  and  with  Vav  consecutive  '^n''1,  is  for  ifi"^,  and  "^fip  Nah. 
3:  11  is  apoc.  2  fem.  sing,  for  "'"firi,  the  vowel  of  the  prefix  returning  to 
the  Sh'va  from  which  it  arose,  §  85.  2.  a  (1),  when  the  quiescence  of  the 
middle  radical  gives  a  vowel  to  the  first.  The  same  thing  occurs  in  the 
peculiar  form  of  the  future  X^in"'  Eccl.  11:  3,  where  the  second  radical  ap- 
pears as  1,  which  it  sometimes  does  in  the  imperative,  fi^Xl  ^^^  '^.1'!!!  Gen. 
27:  29  or  N.'in  Job  37:  6,  and  in  the  participle  riin  Neh.  6:  6,  Eccl.  2:  22, 
fem.  njin  Ex.  9:3. 

2.  iTin  to  live.    The  root  "iTi  is  usually  inflected  as  a  Lamedh  He  verb 

,        T     T  ,  -     T  •' 

pret.  tn^n,  fat.  f^]^l|;,  apoc.  T}"],  with  Vav  consecutive  '^n'^1,  though  in  the 
preterite  3  masc.  it  occasionally  takes  an  Aj'in  doubled  form,  "^n,  e.  g.  Gen. 
3:  22,  5:  5,  and  once  in  the  3  fem.  an  Ayin  Yodh  form  '.ii'^'n  Ex.  1:  16,  or  it 
may  be  explained  as  an  Ayin  doubled  form  with  Daghesh-forte  omitted,  §  25. 

3.  In  a  few  instances  ^{  is  substituted  for  the  third  radical  in  Lamedh 
He  verbs,  VX^n  Ezek.  43:  27,  Xrx  Isa.  21:  12,  X^r3  Jer.  23:  39,  si"''" 
2  Chron.  26:  15,  xbh  Prov.  1:  10  from  ni:X,  xn""]  Deut.  33:  21  from  iinx, 
^^ril!!!)  2  Chron.  Id:  12,  xid";  Lam.  4:  1,  X2-J  2  Kin.  25:  29,  XSd'^  Eccl.  8:  1, 
tJSiNbn  2  Sara  21:  12  K'ri  for  Q^lpn,  D-'xVpn  Hos.  11:  7,  Deut.  28:  66  for 
D-'^^lbn,  §  56.  4.  d^xnian  sixn*;!  2  Sam.  ll:  24  from  tl^y,  the  vowels  are 
those  of  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  in  ^l^rx  Jer.  3:  22  for  ^irnx,  <lli=n  1  Kin. 
17:  14  for  n^=n,  nnp"^  Dan.  10:  14  foViinp-];  and  the  full  Lamedh  Aleph 
form  is  adopted  in  St'^'h?!?  Hos.  13:  15  for  !ins^ 


13 


194  ETYMOLOGY.  §  180,  181 

Doubly  Imperfect  "Verbs. 

§  180.  Verbs  which  have  two  weak  letters  in  the 
root,  or  which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belong  to  two 
different  classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exhibit 
the  peculiarities  of  both,  unless  they  interfere  with  or 
limit  one  another.  Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  i<"S)  and 
n"b  will  follow  the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former 
in  its  initial  and  the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in 
verbs  which  are  both  Y'^''  and  n"b  the  1  is  invariably 
treated  as  a  perfect  consonant,  and  the  r;"b  pecuUarities 
alone  preserved.  All  such  cases  have  been  remarked  upon 
individually  under  the  several  classes  of  verbs  to  which 
they  respectively  belong. 

Defective  A^rb8. 

§  181.  1.  It  has  been  seen  in  repeated  instances  in  the 
foregoing  pages  that  verbs  belonging  to  one  class  of  im- 
perfect verbs  may  occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another 
and  closely  related  class.  Thus  a  i<"b  verb  may  appear 
with  a  T\"b  form,  or  an  i'^  verb  with  an  V"7  form  or  vice 
versa.  The  occurrence  of  an  individual  example,  or  of  a 
few  examples  of  such  divergent  forms,  may  be  explained 
in  the  manner  just  suggested  without  the  assumption  of 
an  additional  verb  as  their  source.  Sometimes,  however, 
the  number  of  divergent  forms  is  so  considerable,  or  the 
divergence  itself  so  wide,  that  it  is  simpler  to  assume  two 
co-existent  roots  of  the  same  signification,  and  differing 
only  in  the  weak  letter  which  they  contain,  than  to  refer 
all  to  a  single  root. 

a.  Thus,  N53  means  to  shut  up  or  restrain,  and  rii'S  to  be  finished:  yet 
a  few  n"b  forms  occur  in  the  sense  not  of  the  latter  but  of  the  former  verb. 
They  are  accordingly  held  to  be  from  N^s,  but  assimilated  in  inflection  to 
the  n"b  paradigm.  On  the  other  hand,  x'^;5  means  to  call,  and  nn;5  to 
meet;   but  so  many  x'b  forms  are  found  with  this  latter  signification  tha» 


§182  QUADEILITEEAL  VEEBS.  195 

it  seems  necessary  to  assume  a  second  root  X'^j?  having  that  meaning.  The 
verb  to  run  is  ordinarily  "j^^T;  but  xis'^  Ezek.  1:  14  is  too  remote  from  an 
1  S  form  to  be  referred  to  that  root;  hence  it  is  traced  to  another  verb 
SSI  of  the  same  sense.  No  clear  line  of  distinction  can  be  drawn  between 
the  cases  in  which  divergent  forms  are  to  be  traced  to  a  single  root,  and 
those  in  which  the  assumption  of  a  second  is  admissible  or  necessary.  This 
must  be  decided  in  detail,  and  the  best  authorities  not  infrequently  differ 
iu  their  judgment  of  particular  examples. 

2.  Where  two  verbs  exist  which  are  thus  radically 
connected  and  identical  in  signification,  it  not  infrequently 
happens  that  they  are  defective  or  mutually  supple- 
mentary, that  is  to  say,  that  one  of  them  is  in  usage  re- 
stricted to  certain  parts  or  species,  the  remainder  being 
supplied  by  the  other. 

a.  The  following  are  examples  of  defective  verbs:  aio  to  he  good,  used 
in  the  Kal  species  only  in  the  preterite,  the  corresponding  future  is  from 
ai:^;  "i5^  Kal  pret.  to  fear,  the  fut.  and  imper.  from  "ilJ;  p'-^"^  Kal  pret.  and 
inf.  to  spit,  fut.  from  pfe"!;  yS3  Kal  pret.  and  inf.  to  break  or  disperse,  fut. 
and  imp.  from  ps;  ypj  Kal  pret.  to  be  alienated,  fut.  from  Sjb^;  nnb  Kal 
pret.  to  be  a  prince,  fut.  from  *fcO;  sh'n  Kal  pret.  and  inf.  to  he  many,  fut. 
from  n~l  which  is  used  throughout  the  species;  tiVp  Kal  fut.  to  be  hot, 
pret.  and  inf.  from  Qpn,  which  is  also  used  in  the  future;  ^5'^  to  counsel, 
borrows  its  Kal  imper.  from  "J'lS?;  Yh")  Kal  fut.  to  awake,  pret.  from  the 
Hiphil  of  yp,  which  is  also  used  in  inf.  imper.  and  fut.;  3^3  to  place,  the 
reflexive  is  expressed  by  sil^nri  from  2k^;  iiniy  to  drink,  the  causative  is 
rii^ian  from  nfjiy;  la'^hin  from  Tah;j  is  used  as  the  causative  of  cia  to  he 
ashamed,  as  well  as  lU'^hl^;  Tj^^^  to  go,  derives  many  of  its  forms  from  T^l', 
^hl  ^0  9^^'^}  is  only  used  in  the  Kal  imperative,  it  is  supplemented  by  'jHS 
of  totally  distinct  radicals. 

QUADRILITEEAL  YeEBS. 

§  182.  Quadriliteral  verbs  are  either  primitives  formed 
from  quadriliteral  roots,  whose  origin  is  explained,  §  68. «, 
or  denominatives,  the  formative  letter  of  the  noun  or  ad- 
jective being  admitted  into  the  stem  along  with  the  three 
original  radicals.  The  former  class  adopt  the  vowels  and 
inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual  species,  while  the  latter 
follow  the  Hiphil. 

a.  The  only  examples  of  quadriliteral  verbs  are  the  following,  viz.. 
Piel  pret.  T\y'nQ  he  spread.  Job  26:  9,    where  the  original  Pattahh  of  the 

13* 


196  ETYMOLOGY.  §  183 

initial  syllable  of  the  Piel,  §  82.  5,  h  (3),  is  preserved;  fut.  with  suf.  nstp")?"^ 
he  shall  waste  it,  Ps.  80:  14.  Pual  pret.  u;e;:"i  it  freshened,  Job  33:  25,  the 
Methegh  and  the  Hliateph  Pattahh  being  used  to  indicate  that  the  Sh'va 
is  vocal,  and  that  the  form  is  equivalent  to  CEIal;  part.  CCDPi^D  scaled  off 
or  resembling  scales^  Ex.  16:  14,  i>i:"ir'a  clothed,  1  Chron.  15:  27.  Hiphil 
pret.  sin-iixn  they  stank,  Isa.  19:  6  for  ^n"^:Txn  as  ^^'arq  for  1'i^>3,  derived 
from  TiDTN  putrescent,  which  is  simpler  than  to  make  it  with  Gesenius  a 
double  or  anomalous  Hiphil  from  r;3T ,  §  94.  a,  comp.  Alexander  in  loc; 
fut.  nj-'xyi-X  I  will  turn  to  the  left,  Gen.  13:  9;  sib\v:-2rri  Isa.  30:  21,  part. 
n"'?iX'at"p  1  Chron.  12:  2  from  bxi:':;  the  left  hand,  elsewhere  reduced  to  a 
triliteral  by  the  rejection  of  N,  b^r'-n^  2  Sam.  14:  19,  "'^"^iin  Ezek.  21:  21. 
To  these  may  be  added  the  form,  which  occurs  several  times  in  the  K'thibh 
di-iliun^  1  Chron.  15:  24,  etc.,  and  D^-n^ino  2  Chron.  5:  12,  for  which  the 
K'ri  substitutes  d'^^^nt)  or  din^np.  As  it  is  a  denominative  from  tr'^'^^"  a 
trumpet,  it  has  been  suspected  that  the  form  first  mentioned  should  be 
pointed  d'^niJ^TOj   the  other,  if  a  genuine  reading,  is  probably  to  be  read 


Nouns. 

THEIR  FORMATION  (See  Paradigm  XIII). 

§  183.  Nouns,  embracing  adjectives  and  participles 
as  well  as  substantives,  may  be  primitive,  i.  e.  formed 
directly  from  their  ultimate  roots,  or  derivative,  i.  e.  formed 
from  preexisting  words.  Those  which  are  derived  from 
verbs  are  called  verbals;  those  which  are  derived  from 
nouns  are  called  denominatives.  The  vast  multiplicity  of 
objects  to  which  names  were  to  be  applied  and  the  di- 
versity of  aspects  under  which  they  are  capable  of  being 
contemplated,  have  led  to  a  variety  in  the  constitution 
of  nouns  greatly  exceeding  that  of  verbs,  and  also  to  con- 
siderable laxit}^  in  the  significations  attached  to  indivi- 
dual forms.  But  whatever  complexity  may  beset  the  de- 
tails of  this  subject,  its  main  outlines  are  sufficiently  plain. 
All  nouns  are,  in  respect  to  their  formation,  reducible  to 
certain  leading  types  or  classes  of  forms,  each  having  a 
primary  and  proper  import  of  its  own.  The  derivation 
of  nouns,  as  of  the  verbal  species,  from  their  respective 
roots  and  themes  calls  into  requisition  all  the  expedients, 


§  184  FOEMATION  OF  NOUNS.  197 

whether  of  internal  or  external  changes,  known  to  the 
language,  §  69.  Hence  arise  four  classes  of  nouns  accord- 
ing as  they  are  formed  bj  internal  changes,  viz.: 

1.  The  introduction  of  one  or  more  vowels. 

2.  The  reduplication  of  one  or  more  of  the  letters  of 
the  root.    Or  by  external  changes,  viz.: 

3.  The  prefixing  of  vowels  or  consonants  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  root. 

4.  The  affixing  of  vowels  or  consonants  ^t  the  end. 

a.  The  mass  of  nouns  are  to  be  regarded  as  primitives  and  not  as  de- 
rived from  their  cognate  verbs.  Many  roots  are  represented  by  nouns 
alone,  without  any  verbs  from  -which  they  could  have  sprung,  e.  g.  2X 
father,  y  jk  earth.  And  where  verbs  of  kindred  meaning  do  exist,  it  is 
probable  that  they  are  not  the  source  or  theme  of  the  nouns,  but  that 
both  spring  alike  directly  from  their  common  root,  as  T(^"a  to  rtign,  and 
~^b  king  from  the  root  ~^'Ci.  Since,  however,  these  roots  or  elemental 
themes  are  destitute  of  vowels,  and  consequently  are  incapable  of  being 
pronounced  in  their  primitive  or  abstract  state,  it  is  customary  and  con- 
venient in  referring  to  them  to  name  the  verb  which  though  a  derivative 
form  has  the  advantage  of  simplicity  and  regularity  of  structure,  and  is 
often  the  best  representative  of  the  radical  signification.  Accordingly,  T^bb 
king  may  be  said  to  be  derived  from  the  root  T|^o  to  reign,  that  is,  it  is 
derived  from  the  root  ^b^  of  which  that  verbal  form  is  the  conventional 
designation,  §  68. 

b.  Infinitives,  participles,  nouns  which  follow  the  forms  of  the  secon- 
dary or  derived  species,  §  189.  2.  a,  and  some  others,  are  evidently  verbals. 
Most  nouns  of  the  fourth  class,  as  well  as  some  others,  are  denominatives. 

Class  I. — Nouns  formed  hy  the  insertion  of  vowels. 

§  184.  The  first  class  of  nouns,  or  those  which  are 
formed  by  means  of  vowels  given  to  the  root,  embraces 
three  distinct  forms,  viz.: 

1.  Monosyllables,  or  those  in  which  the  trihteral  root 
receives  but  one  vowel. 

2.  Dissyllables,  in  which  the  second  is  the  principal 
vowel  and  the  first  a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere. 

3.  Dissyllables,  in  which  the  first  is  the  prmcipal 
vowel  and  iie  second  a  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere. 


198  ETYMOLOGY.  §  185,  186 

1.  Triliteral  Mononyllables. 

§.  185.  The  formative  vowel  may  be  given  either  to 
the  second  radical  bi:p,  b"i:p,  bibp,  b^t2p,  or  to  the  first, 
l:t:p,  bi:p,  bpp;  in  the  latter  case  an  unaccented  Seghol 
is  commonly  interposed  between  the  concuning  con- 
sonants, §  61.2,  to  which  a  preceding  Pattahh  assimilated, 
§  63.  2.  a,  btsj:.,  btsp,  bt:p.  Forms  thus  augmented  by  the 
introduction  of  an  auxiliary  vowel  are  termed  Segholates. 

a.  In  this  and  the  following  sections  ^::p  is  used  as  a  representative 
root  in  order  more  conveniently  to  indicate  to  the  eye  the  formation  of  the 
ditferent  classes  of  nouns.  No  root  could  be  selected  which  would  afford 
examples  in  actual  use  of  the  entire  series  of  derivative  forms;  b-p  has  but 
one  derivative  b::p  slaughter,  and  this  only  occurs  in  Obad.  ver.  9. 

h.  As  ?,  0  and  u  rarelj'  or  never  occur  in  mixed  accented  syllables, 
>;  19,  they  are  excluded  from  monosyllabic  nouns.  Every  other  vowel  is, 
however,  found  with  the  second  radical,  thus  a,  'S'TL  a  little  prop,  paucity, 
■rs'n  hotiey,  "iha  man;  a,  b^x  strength,  Srs  writing,  ixJ  residue;  2,  nrJ 
shoulder,  T\ityi)ush;  e,  b'i"^  hoivling,  3X3  grief,  3XT  a  icolf;  especially  I,  5, 
and  u,  which  occur  with  greater  frequency  than  anj-  others.  When  the 
first  radical  receives  the  vowel,  i  and  it  are  likewise  excluded,  in  as  much 
as  they  rarely  or  never  stand  before  concurrent  consonants,  §  61.  4.  Few 
of  these  nouns  remain  without  the  auxiliary  Seghol  5<";5  a  valley,  xvj 
vanity,  Xi:ri'8f«,  "n"!:  spikenard,  i:"rp  truth.  Kamets  is  only  found  before 
Vav,  §  63.  2.  o,  r.^h,  and  in  pause,  §  65,  '|3X,  DIS. 

c.  When  the  second  radical  receives  the  vowel,  there  is  a  concurrence 
of  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  is  sometimes  relieved 
by  prefixing  X,  §  53.  1.  a,  with  a  short  vowel,  mostly  e,  §  60.  1.  a  (5),  but 
occasionally  a,  y3-.iX  finger  for  s'z'l,  ajpx  lattice,  'cjiZH  belt,  SintX  and  si"lT 
arm,  bi^rx  and  bi'on  yesterday. 

§  186.  These  nouns,  standing  at  the  first  remove  from 
the  root,  express  as  nearly  as  possible  its  simple  idea 
either  abstractly,  e.  g.  b^bs  em;ptiness,  biiifl  bereavement, 
T^t:?  strength,  p"ii:  righteoushess,  "iT?  help,  bii  greatness,  or 
as  it  is  realized  in  some  person  or  object  which  may  be 
regarded  as  its  embodiment  or  representative,  Tis  lord 
from  "^is  to  he  mighty,  TTiiyi  man  from  iris  to  he  sick,  b^za 
houndary,  TjCi  libation  prop,  pouring  out,  pici?  valley  prop. 
depth,  Y'ln  vinegar  prop,  sourness. 

a.   That  the  position  of  the  formative  vowel  before  or  after  the  second 


§186 


FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  199 


radical  does  not  materially  affect  the  charactei"  of  the  form,  appears  from 
the  following  considerations:  (1.)  The  sameness  of  signification  already 
exhibited,  and  which  may  be  verified  in  detail.  (2.)  The  occasional  ap- 
pearance of  the  same  word  in  both  forms,  e.  g.  "iS?  and  "155  man,  T^i  and 
"hi  plant,  xbs  and  N"'!?3  prison,  "(rta  and  "pna  thumb,  TOa  and  nniji  bright- 
ness. (3.)  The  concurrence  of  both  forms  in  the  Kal  construct  infinitive 
b'6p  and  n?>:;p,  §  87,  "'Vj;^  and  ci:-::;p.  (4.)  The  fact  that  Segholates  may 
arise  alike  from  bi:p  and  b::J5,  §  61.  1.  6.  (5.)  The  cognate  languages; 
monosyllables  in  Arabic,  whose  vowel  precedes  the  second  radical,  answer 
to  those  whose  vowel  succeeds  the  same  radical  in  Aramaean,  and  both  to 
the  Hebrew  Segholates,  e.  g.  12?  servant,  Aram,  is?,  Arab.  js-^. 

b.  The  presence  of  imperfect  letters  in  the  root  may  occasion  the  fol- 
lowing modifications: 

k"s  roots.  Aleph,  as  a  first  radical,  sometimes  receives  a  long  vowel 
(J  instead  of  Sh'va  (J,  §  60.  3.  c,  •,>!^S  fideliti/  for  'i^lix,  liTX  girdle  for  -liTX. 

5"  Guttural  and  V  Guttural.  If  the  third  radical  be  a  guttural,  Pattahh 
is  substituted  for  the  auxiliary  Seghol,  §  61.  2,  nail  confidence,  Vz'V  hear- 
ing, naj  height;  if  the  second  radical  be  a  guttural,  the  preceding  vowel  if 
Hholem  remains  unchanged,  otherwise  it  also  commonly  becomes  Pattahh 
"isi  young  man,  "i?il  youth,  'inc  fear  but  btix  tent,  uvh  bread. 

"'"s  and  )"s  roots.  A  vowelless  "^  or  3  is  in  a  few  instances  rejected  from 
the  beginning  of  a  word,  §  53.  2.  a,  biS  produce  for  b^il",  T^D  familiarity 
for  lib";,  N^'ii  elevation  for  X'^'i'D,  ^n  lamentation  for  "^riD,  particularly  in 
feminines  and  secondary  derivatives;  thus,  n^ri,  tTn?,  niiS,  r"^n  drop  an 
initial  Yodh,  and  nhp,  '^'•^  an  initial  Nun.  Nun  may  also  experience  as- 
similation when  it  is  a  second  radical,  ?)5<  anger  for  i:]3X,  513  cup  for  G33. 

l"5)  anrZ  ''"s  roois.  In  Segholates  *i  is  preceded  by  Kamets  bl:J  (accord- 
ing to  Baer  b^ii?  in  Ezek.  28:  18)  ivickedness,  ""fn  midst,  unless  the  last 
radical  is  a  guttural,  n^n  space;  "i  is  preceded  by  Pattahh  and  folloAved  by 
Hhirik,  b"^^  night,  "■;?  eye.  These  letters  frequently  give  up  their  conso- 
nantal character  and  become  quiescent,  §  67.  2.  Vav  is  rejected  in  a  few 
words  as  "^3  brand  for  ^\'S,  ''X  island  for  ^".X,  "^  watering  for  "^in,  §  53.  3. 

ii'^  roots.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  proper  final  radical  is  rejected, 
as  it  is  in  verbs,  and  the  final  vowel  written  if,  as  !i3p  bush,  nrs  weeping, 
M5n  thought.  When  '^  appears  as  the  radical,  it  prefers  the  form  "^32  weep- 
ing, ''IB  fruit,  ^bs  vessel;  1  retains  its  consonantal  character  in  inp  winter, 
ibia  quail,  or  it  may  be  changed  to  its  cognate  vowel  H,  which  combines 
with  the  preceding  a,  to  form  0,  §  62.  1,  i^'n  (for  d'yaH)  ink,  ixn  antelope. 
In  Segholates  1  quiesces  in  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (4),  ina  swimming  for  iri^J, 
inia  emptiness;  the  lexicon  of  Gesenius  contains  the  forms  TiTS  garment, 
ISp  end,  ibia  security,  but  these  words  only  occur  in  the  plural  or  with 
suffixes,  and  the  absolute  singular  is  quite  as  likely  to  have  been  1la ,  lUp , 
^bliJ,  and  "^311  may  similarly  be  referred  to  lan  cleft. 


200  ETYMOLOGY.  §  187 

2.   The  main  vmvel  in  the  ultimate. 

§  187.  1.  The  second  form  of  this  class  is  a  dissyl- 
lable with  one  of  the  long  vowels  in  the  second  which  is 
its  principal  syllable,  and  in  the  first  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
for  wdiich  Tsere  is  occasionally  substituted  when  the 
second  vowel  is  Kamets,  thus  bt:]^  or  bbp,  btJ)^,  b^bp, 
bib;:,  b-t:;:. 

2.  These  are  properly  adjectives,  and  have  for  the 
most  part  an  intransitive  signification  when  the  vowel  of 
the  tfltimate  is  a,  e,  or  o,  and  a  passive  signification  when 
it  is  I  or  u,  "jbi^  and  *t:j5  small,  '^^  fat,  ^^n:  made  of  brass, 
"^ns  chosen.  Those  with  a  and  ^  in  the  ultimate  are,  how- 
ever,  prevaihngly  and  the  others  occasionally  used  as 
substantives,  and  designate  objects  distinguished  by  the 
quality  which  they  primarily  denote,  pV  herbs  prop. 
green,  '^b'C_  strong  drink  prop,  intoxicating,  "i^D  leopard 
prop,  spotted,  wpjlS  and  "^D^  turban  prop,  ivound  around, 
liilD  glory,  that  which  is  glorious. 

a.  The  intransitive  adjectives  supply  the  place  of  Kal  active  participles 
to  neuter  verbs,  §  90,  and  in  IS  verbs  they  have  superseded  the  regular 
formation,  §  155.  1,  D|5  for  Di;^.  Kal  passive  participles  are  verbals  with  u. 
''bis  formation  with  I  in  the  ultimate  is  adopted  in  several  names  of  sea- 
sons, ^"'iis  Ahib^  tlie  time  of  ears  of  corn,  r"CX  ingathering  prop,  the  being 
gathered,  "I'^ii^  vintage,  "T^i)!  pruning-time,  'd"'^n  ploughing-time,  "fij;?  har- 
vest, Comp.  §  203.  1.  b. 

b.  Adjectives  with  o  commonly  express  permanent  qualities,  those  with 
e  variable  ones,  'b'\Ht  great,  ^nj  growing  great;  pin  strong,  pTn  becoming 
strong;  Si^i^  near,  -np  approaching;  pirT^  remote,  prn  receding.  Hence 
the  former  are  used  of  those  physical  and  moral  conditions  which  are  fixed 
and  constant,  such  as  figure,  colour,  character,  etc.,  "^Sx  long,  ^jrj  round., 
"^'■iv  deep,  ri'ij  high;  DiX  red,  l""^2  spoftel,  ipj  speckled,  p'i^'^  green,  ips 
striped,  "ir:i  u-Jtite,  p~'w  bay,  "i'ri':J  black;  pin's  sweet,  '^^i^^:i  pure,  '-"^15  holt/. 
And  the  latter  are  employed  of  shifting  and  evanescent  states  of  body  and 
of  mind,  X^".i  thirsty,  '2.b'\  hungry,  "r::  sated,  Tii.;*'  weary,  bhx  grieving, 
■j'kn  desiring,  l^n  fearing,  "C^'J  exulting. 

c.  The  active  signification  asserted  for  the  form  b'i::p  in  a  few  instances 
cannot  be  certainl}'  established;  ""rx  architect,  prop,  reliable  (in  building) 
is  intransitive  in  Hebrew  conception;  so  perhaps  is  w"ip^  or  'i""p^  fowler, 
comp.  Lat.  aucupari,  aucupatus.     Other  alleged  cases  are  probably  not 


§188 


FORMAIION  OF  NOUNS.  201 


nouns  but  absolute  infinitives  of  Kal,  'ina  Jer.  6:  27  may  as  well  be 
rendered  Z  have  set  thee  to  try  as  for  a  trier  (of  metals);  "J^i^n  Isa.  1  :  17  is 
not  oppressor  nor  oppressed  but  wrong-doiiig,  to  doixetv,  see  Alexander  in 
loc;  and  even  piuiS  Jer.  22:  3  may  in  like  manner  be  oppression  instead 
of  oppressor. 

d.  n?  roots  are  restricted  to  forms  with  i,  in  which  the  radical  "> 
quiesces,  ^Vj  fresh,  "^i^  afflicted,  "^pD  or  X'lpj  with  otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  pure, 
or  with  a  whii^h  combines  with  it  to  form  e,  Ti  ,  '^'Hb  and  iTiiU  field,  tis'j 
fair,  nxj  high;  in  a  few  nouns  this  final  vowel  is  dropped,  51  fish  for  n^^, 
in  mar/c  for  nin,  "|^si  free  for  (Iks',  *|a  son  for  nia,  ns  wowi/i  for  n^s,  un- 
less, indeed,  these  and  the  like  are  to  be  regarded  as  primitive  biliterals. 
Vav,  as  a  final  radical,  may  be  preceded  by  a,  MiV  meek,  or  e,  l3'b  secure. 

3.   The  main  vowel  in  the  penult. 

§  188.  1.  The  third  form  of  this  class  is  a  dissyllable 
having  an  immutable  vowel,  mostly  Hholem,  though  oc- 
casionally Shurek  or  Tsere  in  the  first,  which  is  its  prin- 
cipal syllable,  and  a  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the 
second,  thus  b^ip,  bbip,  bbp,  bb^p,  bb^p. 

2.  These  indicate  the  agent,  and  are  either  active  par- 
ticiples, bbip  killing,  or  substantives,  DShin  signet-ring  prop. 
sealer,  2^^^  enemy,  one  practising  hostility,  bi'^ir/o^' prop. 
digger,  Cj^S  hammer  prop,  pounder,  bVn  morning  star 
prop,  shining  one. 

a.  A  number  of  nouns,  indicative  of  occupation,  follow  the  participial 
form,  which  thus  serves  to  express  permanent  and  professional  activity, 
"ipia  herdsman,  bah  sailor  prop,  rope-handler,  'cy\X^  ploughman,  ^"JJ'i"'  potter 
prop,  former,  Oaia  fuller,  "n'a  priest,  D"i'3  vine-dresser,  '^n'io  merchant,  ^sio 
scribe,  Vri"!  trafficker,  iib~\  shepherd,  i<s~>  phgsician,  TibH  dealer  in  unguents, 
Cph  embroiderer,  ^'biu  watchman,  "^V'^v  porter  prop,  gate-keeper,  'ck'\':i  judge. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  u  in  the  first  syllable  is  shortened  and  fol- 
lowed by  Daghesh-forte  conservative,  ailS"  and  aj:s'  pipe,  yh'l  pit. 

c.  2?S  roots.  The  contraction  of  y"  and  the  quiescence  of  1"  roots,  by 
rtr-ducing  them  to  biliteral  monosjilables,  obliterates  to  a  considerable  ex- 
tent the  distinctions  which  have  been  described  and  which  are  possible 
only  in  triliterals.  The  contracted  forms  which  arise  from  "3?  roots  ari», 
30,  ao,  ap,  ab,  §  185.  b.  Of  these  ab  =  aab  belongs  to  the  monosyllabic 
formation,  and  is  chiefly  used  of  abstracts,  13  purity,  ai  multitude,  DPI  in- 
tegrity, h^  yoke;  and  ao  =  aa&  to  the  first  species  of  dissyllables,  embracing 
adjectives  and  concrete  nouns,  Dtl  perfect,  Sn  feast',  while  ap  and  ap 
may  arise  indifferently  from  eithei-,  pp  rottenness  is  an  abstract  noun  for 
J3f3p,  but  "^  tender  is  an  adjective  for  "i^"*,  Kamets  being  compressed  to 


202  ETYMOLOGY.  §  18D 

Pattahb  before  the  doubled  letter,  comp.  §  185.  3;  3b  heart  is  for  the  dii- 
syllable  22V1,  and  Tjh  fat  for  nno,  but  "jn  favour  for  tbe  monosyllable  'fit}, 
IS  and  "^S  roots.  Nouns  from  quiescent  l"s  and  "^'s  roots  may  be  divided 
into  three  pairs  of  forms,  n;^,  =n;  nip,  a-^-);  cp,  a'^n.  Of  these  the  last 
pair  (wiili  the  exception  of  Kal  passive  participles)  belong  to  the  primitive 
monosyllabic  formation,  '2^~i  strife,  2113  goodness;  the  first  pair  to  the  first 
species  of  dissyllables,  "Ji  poor,  IT  proud,  bx  God  prop,  the  mighty  one;  and 
the  second  pair  may  belong  to  either,  d"'n  =  ^p^  poverty,  p'^n  —  p^"^  empty 
•pS  =  jjix  strength,  nia  =  3i;b  good. 

Class  II.— iVbuns  wifA  reduplicated  radicals. 

§  189.  1.  The  simple  form  proper  to  adjectives  is  ex- 
plained §  187;  it  may  be  converted  into  an  intensive  by 
doubling  the  middle  radical,  retaining  the  long  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable  and  giving  a  short  ^  or  a  to  the  first. 
This  reduplicated  or  intensive  form  denotes  what  is 
characteristic,  habitual,  or  possessed  in  a  high  degree. 
Adjectives  of  this  nature  are  sometimes  used  as  de- 
scriptive epithets  of  persons  or  things  distinguished  by 
the  quality,  which  they  denote,  ir|ri  very  weak,  mjvD  seeing 
prop,  (having  eyes)  ivide  open,  p""!!!  righteous,  "i"Hri  mighty 
man,  'yiin  full  of  grace,  C^h^  merciful. 

a.  As  a  general  though  not  an  invariable  rule,  the  first  syllable  has 
Pattahb  when  a  pure  vowel  a,  i,  or  u  stands  in  the  ultimate,  but  Hhirik 
when  the  ultimate  has  one  of  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  or  0.  Several  nouns 
with  o  in  the  second  syllable  are  descriptive  of  occupations  or  modes  of 
life,  comp.  §  188.  2.  a,  nsx  husbandman,  5^^  fisherman,  "i^'n  judge,  \^'''jn 
(=  c'nn)  tvorknian,  n'z'J  cook,  n'io  seaman  (from  nbp  salt),  b'z'O  bearer  of 
burdens,  T'^  hunter,  ntp  bowman,  23^  thief,  not  a  mere  equivalent  to  aifia 
one  who  steals,  but  one  who  steals  habitually,  who  makes  stealing  bis  oc- 
cupation. 

b.  Since  the  idea  of  intensity  easily  passes  into  that  of  excess,  the  form 
blip  is  aj)plied  to  deformities  and  defects,  physical  or  moral,  CSX  dumb,  "iZJ 
hump-bached,  t'^n  (=  TT^n)  deaf,  "ib  blind,  nsQ  lame,  n-ip  bald,  irp? 
perverse. 

c.  In  a  few  instances  instead  of  doubling  tbe  second  radical,  the  pre- 
vious Hhirik  is  prolonyed,  §  59.  a,  ^iJap  and  C'i'b'^p  nettle  prop,  badly  prick- 
ing, "'ii'P  smoke,  nSn^r  the  Nile  prop,  very  black,  pii'^S  prison,  TiT"'3  spark, 
-lin-'S  battle,  ]nk-^  spark. 

d.  The  following  double  the  third  radical  in  jlace  of  tbe  second,  nrrig 
brood,  '{iV^  green,  "jixd  quiet,  nix;  comely  from  nx3,   tlie  last  radical  ap« 


§  190  FOEMATION  OF  NOUNS.  203 

pearing  as  1,  §  170,  bli'OX  feeble,  where  the  long  vo-wel  Tsere  is  inserted  to 
prevent  the  concurrence  of  consonants. 

e.  "s'v  and  more  rarely  '12'  roots  reduplicate  the  biliteral  formed  by  their 
contraction,  bJba  and  bJVa  icheel  prop,  roller,  nnnn  frightful,  1"'T"i]  girt, 
Ip-ip  crown  of  the  head  prop,  dividing  (the  hair) ;  so  fem.  t^^nbri  severe  pain, 
nVJb^  casting  down,  rhih'j.  skull,  and  plur.  nispsp  baskets,  'O'^bl^  turning 
upside  down  from  nb  =  "■]:;,  r»N^^  (sing,  "ipib)  loops  and  G'^'inb  (sing, 
probably  rib^b  =  liilb)  winding  stairs  from  tiVa  =  1]^ ;  a  root  bnb  is  need- 
lessly assumed  by  Gesenius.  Sometimes  the  harsh  concurrence  of  consonants 
is  prevented  by  the  insertion  of  a  long  vowel,  bk^2  (const,  bkb^i)  cymbal 
prop,  tinkling,  "i25'nS'  and  "li^'ii?  stark  naked,  totally  destitute,  bp'^p  despicable, 
or  the  softening  of  the  former  of  the  two  consonants  to  a  vowel,  §  57.  1, 
aiis  star  for  ^333,  nisiJ'iii  bands  worn  on  the  forehead  for  nistjs:;:,  ■|'il=p"'p 
(with  the  ending  'p  added)  ignominy  for  "ji^p^p,  1=33  Babylon  for  ^3^3,  or 
its  assimilation  to  the  succeeding  consonant,  "i33  something  circular,  a  cir- 
cuit for  ■i3"i3.  The  second  member  of  the  reduplication  suffers  contraction 
or  change  in  nt^d  chain  for  n'l'j")"^  and  S'p'ip  floor  for  "ip"}i2' 

2.  Abstracts  are  formed  with  a  doubled  middle  radical 
by  giving  a  to  the  second  syllable  and  ^  to  the  first,  p:nn 
folding  the  hands,  D^3T23  retribution,  y^p'ip  abomination,  and 
in  the  plural  D^is?  atonement,  D^i^pS  conmiandments, 
cn^^jilj  divorce, 

a.  These  may  be  regarded  as  verbals  formed  from  the  Piel.  A  like 
formation  is  in  a  few  instances  based  upon  other  species,  e.  g.  Hiphil  T^^hT} 
melting  from  T^r3 ,  niiErt  cessation  fi-om  the  l":?  root  S^iss,  Niphal  Q^Bnnsa 
wrestlings;  d'^i'ins  when  derived  from  the  Niphal  means  repentings,  when 
from  the  Piel  consolations. 

b.  3?"  roots  reduplicate  the  biliteral  to  which  they  are  contr^ted,  "in"in 
inflammation,  d'^ri^^r  delight. 

c.  A  few  roots,  which  are  either  IS  or  S  guttural,  or  have  a  liquid  for 
their  third  letter,  double  the  last  radical  with  u  in  the  final  syllable,  ]'^^"3 
thorn-hedge,  'i^l'^Na  (=^^"iNQ)  ruddy  glow,  d"i-.!iion  upright  columns  designed 
for  way-marks,  fr^^lSJtJ  horror,  D'^S'iEND  adulteries,  ^"^3333  ridges,  also  with 
0  or  ?  in  the  last  syllable,  JjH'^S  acquiescence,  V^«i3  pasture,  ^'^''i^O  shower, 
ni'nSiS  obscuration,  ^"^'nS'i  (K'thibh  m-iSTT)  tapestry,  b'^'iirn  whence  ^l?"^^:!! 
darA;.  The  concurrence  of  consonants  is  relieved  in  bl33"c:  (in  some  editions) 
snail  by  Daghesh-forte  separative. 

§  1 90.  A  few  words  reduplicate  the  two  last  radicals. 
These  may  express  intensity  in  general,  nipTli^S  complete 
opening,  nJsTlS'^  very  beautiful,  or  more  particularly  re- 
petition, "^iBpSn  twisted  prop,  turning  again  and  again, 
p^pbn  slippery,  bjbbp?  crooked,  bPibPQ perverse,  r,fc2C!S;  mixed 


204  ETYMOLOGY.  §  191 

multitude  prop,  gathered  here  and  there,  tninS'niu  spots  or 
stripes,  ninE"]£n  moles  prop,  incessant  diggers.  As  energy 
is  consumed  by  repeated  acts  or  exhibitions  and  so  gradu- 
ally weakened,  this  form  becomes  a  diminutive  when 
appHed  to  adjectives  of  colour,  D^^^^?  reddish,  p'^'py. 
greenish,  Wnu?  blackish. 

a.  The  first  of  two  concurring  consonants  is  softened  to  a  vowel  in 
nnsb:n  trumpet  for  irnit-l^r;,  and  probably  hjaty  Lev.  16:  8  for  M^T^. 

b.  i"s  roots  drop  tiieir  initial  radical,  ti^zr\zr\  gifts  from  an'j,  t3i6f;:iX^ 
offspring,  issue  from  xki. 

Class  IIL- — Nouns  formed  hy  prefixes. 

§  191.  The  third  class  of  nouns  is  formed  by  pre- 
fixing either  a  vowel  or  a  consonant  to  the  root.  In  the 
following  instances  the  vowel  a  is  prefixed  with  a  in  the 
ultimate  to  form  adjectives  of  an  intensive  signification, 
nTpi$  utterly  deceitful,  "iT ps  violent,  '|ln■'^^  (=  ■ri";Ni)  perennial, 
ni'S  (only  represented  by  a  derivative,  §  94.  a)  very  foul, 
fetid,  "^'4^  exceedingly  gross  or  thick  (appHed  to  dark- 
ness, Isa.  59:  10),  or  verbal  nouns  borrowing  their  mean- 
ing from  the  Hiphil  species,  rP3T5<  memorial,  r.lri5<  de- 
claration. 

a.  This  form  corresponds  with  (J^  \  the  Arabic  comparative  or  super- 
lative. Its  adoption  for  Hiphil  derivatives  corroborates  the  suggestion, 
§  82.  5.  6  (2),  respecting  the  formation  of  the  Hiphil  species  and  the  origin 
of  its  causal  idea. 

h.  The  letter  K  is  merely  the  bearer  of  the  initial  vowel  and  has  no 
significance  of  its  own  in  these  forms;  ti  is  substituted  for  it  in  ^S"n 
(=  ^^"^N)  palace,  temple  prop,  very  capacious  from  hz"^  in  the  sense  of  its 
cognate  bw  to  contain.  So,  likewise,  in  a  few  voi  bals  with  feminine  ter- 
minations, r!ir*2.l'r;  Ezek.  24:  26  causing  to  hear  used  for  the  Hiph.  infin., 
§  128,  n^lin  deliverance  from  bij ,  nnsn  grant  of  rest  (=  nnijn)  from  rvh, 
M"i3n  aspect  from  "152 ;  riTTi  p)raises  from  HT^  may  perhaps  be  regarded  as 
a  like  formation  with  the  passive  vowel  «,  corresponding  to  the  Hopbal, 
§  95.  a,  and  with  Dagbesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  In  some  rare  instances  a 
Bibilant  is  prefixed  instead  of  X  or  n,  as  in  the  Shaphel  species  in  Aramaeic, 
P^nVr  fldme  fiom  -rib,  bn'iz'J  snail  from  b^3,  nimirp"::  depressions  from  "ly;^. 

c.  The  short  vowel  prefixed  with  X  to  monosyllables  of  the  first  spe- 
cies, as  explained  §  185.  e,  has  no  effect  upon  the  meaning,  and  does  not 
properly  enter  into  the  constitution  of  the  form. 


§192 


FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  205 


§  192.  The  consonants  prefixed  in  the  formation  of 
nouns  are  7J,  n,  and  "'.  They  are  sometimes  prefixed  with- 
out a  vowel,  the  stem  letters  constituting  a  dissyllable  of 
themselves,  ^toP'J,  3Ilio52,  Vi^ri,  ^^iDNP;  more  commonly 
they  receive  a  ov  t  followed  by  a  long  vowel  in  the  ulti- 
mate, e.  g.  bbjp'J,  bhp'Q. 

a.  Pattahh  commonly  stands  before  e,  I  and  u,  and  Hhirik  before  a  and 
0,  unless  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural  or  an  assimilated  Nun  when  Pattahh 
is  again  preferred,  bixo  food,  "b'O  plantivg,  IVviip  smc,  oinpi  a  species  of 
bird,  tiirvi  a  kind  of  gem.  Seghol  is  occasionally  employed  before  a  gut- 
tural or  liquid  followed  by  a,  §  63.  1.  b,  ""^p^'O  depth,  Hsn-O  chariot,  D';n;^'!3ia 
pair  of  tongs.  These  rules  are  not  invariable,  however,  as  will  appear  from 
such  forms  as  H?'!^,  '30^,  "!2p^,  lyp^?,  ^ip"^?-  -A.  few  words  have  a  in 
the  ultimate,  r3n^  harp,  pSHo  strangling.  The  insertion  of  Dagliesh-forte 
separative  in  the  first  radical  is  exceptional,  UJTp"?  Ex.  15:  17,  D"'n~53p  Job 
9:  18,  ninJap  Joel  1:  17. 

b.  "^S  roofs.    The  first  radical  appears  as  "^  resting  in  Hhirik  or  Tsere, 

"i'iTr'^53  and  ~i'b"'p  rectitude,  uiin'^tn  neio  wine,  "i^ain  south,  or  as  n  resting  in 
Hholem  or  Shurek,  lii^  appointed  time,  "iD^'D  correction,  2rin  sojourner, 
niin  sorrow.  In  a  few  instances  it  is  rejected,  b^Pi  world,  or  assimilated  to 
the  following  radical,  ykp  bed,  SJip  knowledge. 

l"S'  and  '^'S  roots.  The  root  is  reduced  to  a  monosyllabic  biliteral  by  the 
quiescence  or  rejection  of  the  second  radical,  the  prefix  receiving  Sh'va, 
ik^a  citadel,  dno  sound  place,  oinri  ocean,  b^p"}  living  thing,  or  more  com- 
monly a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere,  lix'o  luminary,  "pn^,  "{p^i  and  '^yi 
strife,  ^i^p  race,  S^'^^  a'hersary.  The  feminine  form  is  almost  always  ad- 
opted after  n,  nsiTiiri  salvation,  t\hT\7\  oblation. 

555  roots.  The  root  is  mostly  contracted  to  a  biliteral  and  the  vowel 
compressed  to  a,  a,  e  or  0,  §  61.  4,  the  prefix  sometimes  receiving  Sh'va 
which  gives  rise  to  a  Segholate  form,  §  61.  1.  b,  O^b  tribute  for  obp,  ipb 
bitterness  for  Tap,  ^iin  defilement  for  bhn,  '^".'6  fear  for  ~^p,  '".^  mast  for 
'pri ;  more  frequently  it  receives  a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere,  T\'0^  covering, 
•jio  shield,  t'ii''a  fortress,  "ikp  anguish.  In  p'y'O  running,  the  short  vowel  of 
the  perfect  root  is  preserved  bj'  means  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  i-adical. 
n  is  almost  always  followed  by  the  feminine  ending,  n^rin  folly,  ninri  be- 
ginning, f&^7\  prayer, 

fi'^  roots.  The  ultimate  has  n  ,  HTip  disease,  itb^'O  pasture,  which  i« 
apocopated  in  a  few  words,  hVT2  lifting  tcp,  h^h  higher  part,  'vh  and  )V'2  on 
account  of,  and  always  disappears  before  the  feminine  ending  n^,  §  62,  2.  c, 
nBiy^a  ascent,  ni^p  commandment,  nipn  hope,  ns^n  weariness.  Before  the 
feminine  termination  T\  the  final  radical  appears  as  quiescent  "^  or  1,  ri"'3'^Sit 
interest,  wifn  whoredom,  niJnn  encamping,  n'^b'^'g pasture.  Yodh  is  retained 
as  a  consonant  after  w,  D''";bn^  diseases. 


20G  ETYMOLOGY.  §   193 

§  193.  The  letter  "^2  is  a  frag-ment  of  the  pronoun  "''D 
who  or  Ti'D  what  Nouns,  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  denote 

1.  The  agent  who  does  what  is  indicated  by  the  root, 
as  the  participles,  §  84.  5,  formed  by  an  initial  ?J,  and  a 
few  substantives,  b"3lC'J  didactic  psalm  prop,  instructor, 
bb'2  (from  bl j)  cJiaff  prop,  tvhat  falls  off. 

2.  The  instrument  by  which  it  is  done,  "rii"^  key  from 
rhs  to  open,  nbb^J  goad  from  ibb  to  learn,  "liUD'J  saw  from 

—   T 

3.  The  place  or  time  in  which  it  is  done,  Hinta  a?^ar 

from  n^T  to  sacrifice,  '^%!^2  lair,  niri:j  period  of  residence. 

a.  Several  denominatives  are  formed  by  prefixing  ^  in  a  local  sense, 
ncN"]'? ,  rvl"N^*2  place  at  the  head  from  il'Xi ,  r\'i?n'g  place  at  the  feet  from 
ban,  nip"!?  duvghill  from  "JpH,  "jib?  brickkiln  from  niab,  fTnsa'a  storehouse 
from  iTn«i?3,  bjy?  wagon  rampart  from  i^i^jJ,  "^"p  ^/ace  of  fountains  from 
•|';y,  nip"?  /?eW  o/"  cucumbers  from  KTiip,  "lir*?  ''^^i'  of  straw  from  "inn. 

4.  The  action  or  the  quality  which  is  expressed  by 
the  root,  H^P  r  slaughter,  lbC'2  mourning,  ni"^  sickness, 
T\3^'2  error,  '^^'"'2  straightness.  Verbals  of  this  nature 
sometimes  approximate  the  infinitive  in  signification  and 
construction,  as  TQBT''i2  overturning,  riiJiiS^  Ezek.  17:  9, 
§  168.  2.  In  Palestinian  Aramaeic  the  infinitive  reg- 
ularly takes  this  form,  e.  g.  bpjp'j  to  kill, 

5.  The  object  upon  which  the  action  is  directed  or 
the  subject  in  which  the  quality  inheres,  bllN"^  food  from 
bis  to  eat,  ^Ti27".:  psalm  from  ""ibj  to  sing,  nipb^Q  booty  from 
nf^b  to  take,  U'X2'^'2  fat  things  from  '^'^^  to  be  fat,  'yyi'q 
tJmt  which  is  small,  \^Tzy2  that  which  is  remote. 

a.  These  different  sip^iifications  blend  into  one  another  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  is  not  always  easy  to  distinguish  the  precise  shade  of  meaning 
originallj'  attached  to  a  word:  and  not  infrequently  more  than  one  of  these 
senses  co-exist  in  the  same  word.  Thus,  "liitp  luminary,  may  suggest  the 
idea  of  agency,  dispenser  of  light,  or  of  place,  reservoir  of  light;  rbixia 
knife,  may  be  so  called  as  an  agent,  a  devourer,  or  as  an  instrument,  used 
in  eating;  l^J^pp  means  botli  a  holg  thing  and  a  holy  j)loce;  "li-p  sale  and 
something  sold  or  for  sale;  nibpp  royal  atithority  and  kingdom;  xki^  tht 


§  194,  195        FOBMATION  OF  NOUNS.  207 

act,  place,  and  time  of  going  forth  and  that  ii  huh  goes  forth]  Sci^  the  place 
and  time  of  sH ting  or  diceUing  as  well  as  theg  tvho  sit  or  dwell. 

§  194.  Nouns  formed  by  prefixing  "  or  r\  denote  per- 
sons or  things  to  which  the  idea  of  the  root  is  attached. 

1.  "^  is  identical  in  origin  with  the  prefix  of  the  3  masc. 
future  in  verbs,  and  is  largely  used  in  the  formation  of 
names  of  persons,  p^^";  Isaac,  "FiS'  Jeplitliah,  but  rarely 
in  forming  appellatives,  "2"^^^  adversary  prop,  contender, 
n^b"  apostate  prop,  departer,  t:^py  bag  prop,  gatherer.  Dip. 
living  thing  prop,  that  (which)  stands,  "h'll  fresh  oil  prop. 
that  (which)  shines. 

2.  ri,  probably  the  same  with  the  prefix  of  the  3  fern, 
future  of  verbs,  which  is  here  used  in  a  neuter  sense,  is 
employed  in  the  formation  of  a  few  concrete  nouns,  "mIP 
oak  prop,  that  (tvhich)  e?idures,  ^"^^-7]  cloak  prop,  that 
(tvhich)  wraps  up,  "^"^IT]  fiirnace  prop,  that  (which)  hums, 
n^sri  apple  prop,  that  (which)  exhales  fragrance.  But  it 
more  frequently  appears  in  abstract  terms  like  the  femi- 
nine ending  in  other  forms,  "ytiT]  understanding,  ^i^'27\ 
bitterness,  ^^D^P  delight  It  is  very  rarely  found  in  de- 
signations of  persons,  and  only  when  they  occupy  a 
relation  of  dependence  and  subordination,  and  may  con- 
sequently be  viewed  as  tilings j  T'bbri  learner ^  SilJin  one 
dwelli^ig  on  another's  lands,  tenant,  vassal. 

a.  The  great  majority  of  nouns  with  H  prefixed  have  likewise  a  femi- 
nine ending,  ni^i^iPi  deep  sleep,  ni;Trn  salvation,  '^\:^^'^  beautg,  T\'''h'yn  fraud. 

b.  The  few  nouns  formed  by  prefixing  Nun  are  originally  Niphal  parti- 
ciples, 3^3  handle  of  a  dagger  from  n^:,  tii:  excrement  from  the  crop  of  a 
bird  from  i<k'^,  ^30?  turn,  course  of  things  from  230. 

Class  IV. — Nouns  formed  hy  affixes. 

§  195.  The  nouns  formed  by  means  of  an  affixed 
letter  or  vowel  are  cliiefly  denominatives.  The  consonant 
•j  appended  by  means  of  the  vowel  o,  or  less  frequently 
a,  forms 


208  ETYMOLOGY.  §  19G 

1.  Adjectives,  "i'^Mi^  last  from  "ns  after,  "i"!rX*^.  fist 
from  "CSn  /ieff(?,  ]*b"r\  middle  from  Tj^n  ??i?(Zs^,  "rirv?  brazen 
from  r.'inp  Jrass.  A  very  few  are  formed  directly  from 
the  root,  ■|i^ZS^;oor,  *vV>?  mos^  /r/^/i,  "bbs  ividotved. 

2.  Abstract  substantives,  the  most  common  form  ol 
which  is  *pb^p,  e.  g.  '(i'n^^  Uindness,  "pritsn  conjidence,  "pitl? 
|}«w,  "pp"^!]  paleness,  though  various  other  forms  hkewise 
occur,  e.  g.  "piziS!  and  "liix  destruction,  "pT'^D  dominion, 
"|in"i"3  success,  "liip  offering. 

a.  In  a  few  words  the  termination  "p  has  been  thought  to  be  intensive, 
niir  sabbath,  "|'in2d  a  ^reaf  sabbath,  IT  proud,  Tin^T  exceedivgly  proud,  and 
once  diminutive  TT'X  twrtn,  "jTr'^X  /t7f/e  wow,  i.  e.  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  so 
called  from  the  image  reflected  in  it.  The  word  p''^"^"]  Jeshurun  from  "it"" 
upriylit,  is  bj'  some  explained  as  a  diminutive  or  t  rm  of  endearment,  wliile 
others  think  that  the  termination  "^  has  no  further  meaning  than  to  make 
of  the  word  a  proper  name,  comp.  v'??!-    See  Alexander  on  Isaiah  44:  2. 

b.  "i  is  occasionally  affixed  with  the  vowel  e,  'iHs  axe,  "I'HQ"^  nail, 

c.  A  few  words  are  formed  by  appending  d,  e.  g.  Di"'"]5l  and  ■|"'"13  ran- 
som, c|o  ladder  from  b^o  to  lift  up,  Dt;"iri  sacred  scribe  from  ::""n  stylus, 
D'in'n  south  from  l^'n  fo  shive;  or  b,  e.  g.  bi"^?  garden  from  C^s  vineyard, 
bija?  c.'//?ya?  or  c«|)  o/"  a  flou-er  from  i'^2J  cmj9,  bt>");t'  ankle  from  D^p  JO'wf, 
bi^in  locust  from  Jf^!  indicative  of  tremulous  motion,  hti'^V  thick  darkness 
from  rp^S  cZowd,  bHa  iron  probably  from  T^a  fo  pierce. 

§  196.  The  vowel "',  forms  adjectives  indicating  rela- 
tion or  derivation. 

1.  It  is  added  to  proper  names  to  denote  nationality 
or  family  descent,  "HlS'  Hebretv,  "C^^")  Jebusite,  "Fiirbs  Fhi- 
listine,  "B")^.  Aramcean,  ^~>:a  Egyptian,  ^b^l'tT^  Israelitish, 
an  Israelite,  "i^  Danite,  "nnp  Kohatliite,  ^i'^^S  Gerslionite. 

'        •  T  '  •    T I ;  •     \    ;  I" 

2.  It  is  also  added  to  other  substantives,  "iis^  no7't1i- 
erner,  ^'Zj  foreigner,  ""["^D  villager,  'brn  footman,  "I^y  timely, 
^T^^IB  inner  from  the  plural  D'iS;  to  a  few  adjectives, 
"nT^S;  and  "^jps  violent,  ^bix  and  b'lS  foolish,  and  even  to 
prepositions,  "rMSTl  lowest  from  nnn,  "DSb  /ro«#  from 
^isb  +  \,  §  62.  2.' 

a.  The  feminine  ending  n  is  dropped  before  this  ending,  """iliT^  Jew 
from  nn^in-;,  ■^i;"'")2  Beriite  from  nH"i3,  or  the  old  ending  P^  takes  its 
place,  "^rcro  Maachathite  from  •ibr'a,  or  3  is  inserted  between  the  voweU, 


§   197,  198       GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  209 

"^5^^  Shelanite  from  M^'iJ.    Final  "'.  combines  with  the  appended  ">  _  into  i, 
§  62.  2,  "^ib  Levife  and  Levi,  "^i'^r  Shiinite  and  SJinni. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  \  takes  the  place  of  "^.j  e.  g.  ''hin  Wttfe 
stuffs,  •^T'n  basket,  "'^"b  Zoo;?,  and  perhaps  ''J'i^ri,  in  a  collective  sense  wind- 
ows,  "^bcn  uncovered,  "'^is  (for  ""^"s?)  crafty. 

MULTILITERALS. 

§  197.  1.  Quadriliteral  nouns  are  for  the  most  part 
evenly  divided  into  two  syllables,  H^p?  sco^yion,  'n^TS 
treasurer,  irbin  sickle,  l^!bb3  barren.  Sometimes  the  second 
radical  receives  a  vowel,  that  of  the  first  radical  being 
either  rejected,  p^tl'l  damask,  b'ZVn  frost,  ^T^P  vine  Uossom, 
or  preserved  by  the  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte,  I2i'''-3br; 
flint,  'Z'h,lp_  spider,  'irj^^  and  "iTjVb  concubine.  Occasionally 
the  third  radical  has  Daghesh-forte,  vi^py  bat,  "^^230  fin. 

2.  Words  of  five  or  more  letters  are  of  rare  occurrence 
and  appear  to  be  chiefly  of  foreign  origin,  "j'^y'iS!  purple, 
yi'^l'^frog,  Tipyii:  cloth,  "i^niiJ-X  mule,  ]tf\T^T\i^^  satrap. 

3.  Compound  words  are  few  and  of  doubtful  cha- 
racter, r^1!bb:2  shadow  of  death,  tli^^S'J  anything  prop,  what 
and  ivhat,  Tv2fo^  jwthing  prop,  no  what,  b?^b^  tvorthless- 
ness  prop,  no  j^rofit,  njbs:^'^  darkness  of  Jehovah,  n^r^ribo: 
flame  of  Jehovah,  except  in  proper  names,  piii'^sb";^  Melchi- 
zedek,  king  of  righteousness,  ^nJ"Db?  Obadiah,  serving  Je- 
hovah, D'^p^in^  Jehoiakim,  Jehovah  shall  establish. 

Gender  and  Number. 

§  198.  There  are  in  Hebrew,  as  in  the  other  Semitic 
languages,  but  two  genders,  the  mascuhne  (^ij)  and  the 
feminine  (nipj).  The  masculine,  as  the  primary  form,  has 
no  characteristic  termination;  the  feminine  ends  in  H   or 

'  T 

ri,  e.  g.  bbp  masc,  nbtpp  or  inbbp  fern. 

a.  The  only  trace  of  the  neuter  in  Hebrew  is  in  the  interrogative,  M?3 
ivhnt  being  used  of  things  as  "^^  roho  of  persons.  The  function  assigned  to 
the  neuter  in  other  languages  is  divided  between  the  masculine  and  the 
feminine,  being  principally  committed  to  the  latter. 

14 


210  ETYMOLOGY.  §   199 

b.  The  original  feminine  ending  in  nouns  as  in  verbs,  §  85.  1.  a  (1),  ap- 
pears to  have  been  H,  which  was  either  attached  directly  to  the  word, 
rtip  which,  by  §  61.  2,  becomes  ribisp,  or  added  by  means  of  the  vowel  a, 
T^izip  or  ri'3::p,  which  by  the  rejection  of  the  consonant  from  the  end  of 
the  word,  §  5.").  2.  c,  becomes  ii5L:p.  The  termination  P  or  r  is  still  found 
in  a  very  few  words,  rp~3  emerald,  T'^p  pelican,  nrs'j  company  2  Kin. 
9:  17,  rrn^  morrow,  ri-a  portion,  riip  end,  ri:""?  Josli.  13:  13,  and  the 
poetic  forms,  T^"-]  song,  ri^^i  inheritance,  r^"?  help,  r^E  fruitful,  r:':3  sleep. 
Two  other  words,  r'n  Ps.  74:  19  and  Ti'^JS  Ps.  61:  1,  have  been  cited  as 
additional  examples,  but  these  are  in  the  construct  state,  which  always 
preserves  the  original  r  final;  it  is  likewise  alwaj-s  retained  before  suffixes 
and  paragogic  letters,  §  61.  6.  a,  ^rr^r"],  nr-Jid"!,  'in'^ri. 

c.  The  feminine  ending  ft  receives  the  accent  and  is  thus  readily  dis- 
tinguished from  the  unaccented  paragogic  ii  .  In  a  few  instances  gram- 
marians have  suspected  that  forms  may  perhaps  be  feminine,  tliough  the 
punctuators  have  decided  otherwise  by  placing  the  accent  on  the  penult, 
e.  g.  ST^iin  burning  Hos.  7:  4,  ^\'^\  Galilee  2  Kin.  15:  29,  msp  destruction 
Ezek.  7:  25,  riTsrn  vulture  Deut.  14:  17,  rted  loio  Ezek.  21:  31. 

d.  The  vowel  letter  X,  which  is  the  usual  sign  of  the  feminine  in 
Aramaeic  takes  the  place  of  n  in  X'i"^  threshing  Jer.  50:  11,  NJ"  terror 
Isa.  19:  17,  N-bn  ^vrath  Dan.  11:  44,  N'^;ib  lioness  Ezek.  19:  2,  N'^::^  mark 
Lam.  3:  12,  Si'^^i'i  bitter  Ruth  1:  20,  Nnnj^  baldfiess  Ezek.  27:  31,  xi'J  sleep 
Ps.  127:  2.  No  such  form  is  found  in  the  Pentateuch  unless  it  be  X^T 
loathing  Num.  11:  20,  where,  however,  as  Ewald  suggests,  N  may  be  a 
radical  since  it  is  easy  to  assume  a  root  N^T  cognate  to  "ill.  The  feminine 
ending  in  pronouns  of  the  second  and  third  persons,  and  in  verbal  futures 
is  i  "^j  an  intermediate  form  in  e  appears  in  rtn^lT  Isa.  59:  5  and  tT^'wS  the 
numeral  ten,  or  ratlier  teen,  as  it  only  occurs  in  numbers  compounded  with 
the  units.  For  like  unusual  forms  in  verbs  see  §  86.  b,  and  §  158.  4. 

e.  The  sign  of  the  feminine  in  the  Indo-European  languages  is  a  final 
vowel,  corresponding  to  the  vowel-ending  in  Hebrew;  the  Latia  has  a,  the 
Greek  a  or  rj,  the  Sanskrit  I.  And  inasmuch  as  the  feminine  in  Hebrew 
covers,  in  part  at  least,  the  territory  of  the  neuter,  its  consonantal  ending 
r  may  be  compared  with  t,  the  sign  of  the  neuter  in  certain  Sanskrit  pro- 
nouns, represented  by  d  in  Latin,  id,  illud,  istud,  quid;  in  English  it, 
uhat,  that. 

§  199.  It  is  obvious  that  this  transfer  to  all  existing 
things,  and  even  to  abstract  ideas,  of  the  distinction  of 
sex  found  in  living  beings,  must  often  be  purely  arbitrar3^ 
For  although  some  things  have  marked  characteristics 
or  associations  in  virtue  of  which  they  might  readily  be 
classed  with  a  particular  sex,  a  far  greater  number  hold 
an  indeterminate  position,  and  might  with  quite  as  much 
or  quite  as  little  reason  be  assigned  to  either.    It  hence 


§  199 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS. 


211 


happens  that  there  is  no  general  rule  other  than  usage 
for  the  gender  of  Hebrew  words,  and  that  there  is  a 
great  want  of  uniformity  in  usage  itself. 

a.  Tlie  following  names  of  females  are  without  the  proper  distinctive 
feminine  termination: 

ds  mother.  ""inij  she-ass.  ^?^"^Q  concubine.         Vxo  queen. 

So  the  names  of  double  members  of  the  body,  whether  of  men  or  ani- 
mals, which  are  feminine  with  rare  exceptions: 

'l.TN  ear.  Ti^l  arm.                  C]?  palm.  T^f?  horn. 

S3:jx  finger.  Tj  hand.  Pins  shoulder,  b'^h  foot. 

"ina  thumb.  T^n;'  thigh.  )lb  eye.                    '^:q  tooth. 

T^na  knee.  C|i3  wing.  i'^s  side.  piia  leg. 

The  following  nouns  ai'e  also  feminine: 

nx  brazier.        S'nn  sword.               "i''2>  cift/.  MJ  morsel. 

^>nrx  footstep.         Dis  cup.                 Ili']?    Great  Bear,  ^T}^  light. 

"1X2  well.               rob'  brightness.      ir'n?   couch.  xib";  myriad. 

"jaa  belly.             b?i   shoe.               nia?  tvorkmanship.  Van  world. 

b.  The  following  nouns  are  of  doubtful  gender,  being  sometimes  con- 
strued as  masculine  and  sometimes  as  feminine.  Those  which  are  com- 
monly masculine  are  distinguished  thus  (*);  those  which  ar«  ixVMmonly 
feminine  are  distinguished  thus  (f). 

*"ik3ia  fortress. 
*n3t^  altar. 
SiiTO  camp. 
*T:b;-o  rod. 
*  dip's  place. 


tl^K  stone. 
*-ii6<  light. 
riix  sign. 
■^ix  fleet. 
"I'i'ix  ark. 
n'nx  path. 
fjnx  earth. 
t^X  fire. 
*n53  garment. 
*r>''k  house. 
"ina  tcall. 
X"]?.  valley. 
1^  garden. 
t'lSa  rme. 
*")'nj  threshing 
floor. 
trt^   door. 


T(';^'n  ivay. 

*bb"'n  temple. 

**|iilri  multitude. 

■pT  beard. 

"jilri  ivindow. 

"ikri  court. 

bri"'  jubilee. 

f-pb'^  ri^/if  Aanc?. 

*ii33  ^?orjr. 

13  ^aiZ. 
■{■"liss  circuit. 
'd'ns  vineyard. 

dKi   bread. 
\''{\^:S'i  tongue. 
*?DX^  /boi. 


mrn:  brass. 
t;2:s3  somZ. 

"|1Q  JJOf. 

frtb  ^ottr. 
2^  cloud. 
*Tbs_  cord. 

*'a3  people. 
fdsy  6oMe. 
a"i3;  evening. 
fro  <ime  (dttra- 
<ion). 
*d''3Q  face. 


jasjj  //me  (rep«- 

tition). 
♦"xbrj  Aosf. 
■jibri  woriA. 
r^'^ib  tow. 
■j-nn  spirit. 
fdni  street. 
*dnn  womb. 
*ti'rn  juniper. 
Vixia  S/jeo?. 
*B5ii3  sceptre. 
na^  sabbath. 

isiij  ^afe. 
dinin  ocean. 
*')i'^n  soMfA. 
*"isin  ra^or. 

14* 


21?  ETYMOLOGY.  §  200 

Gesenins  ascribes  only  one  gender  to  a  few  of  these  words,  but  2b  is 
once  fem.  Prov.  12:  25;  so  bi:X"2  fern.  Hnb.  1:  16,  "lifSO  fem.  Hab.  1:  10, 
nzip  fem.  Ezek.  43:  13,  ^'sb  niasc.  Ezek.  24:  10.  The  list  might  be  re- 
duced by  referring  the  vacillation  in  gender,  wherever  it  is  possible,  to  the 
syntax  rather  than  the  noun.  Verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  wliich  be- 
long to  feminine  nouns  may  in  certain  cases,  as  will  be  shown  hereafter, 
be  put  in  the  masculine  as  the  more  indefinite  and  primury  form.  While, 
on  the  other  hand,  those  which  belong  to  masculine  names  of  innnimate 
objects  are  sometimes  put  in  the  feminine  as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter. 

c.  Some  species  of  animals  exhibit  a  distinct  name  for  each  sex,  the 
feminine  being  formed  from  the  masculine  by  the  appropriate  termination, 
"13  IniUock,  nns  heifer,  bsl;  calf,  fem.  n^-y,  ir23  lamb,  fem.  ni^^,  or  being 
represented  by  a  word  of  different  radicals,  Ti^n  ass,  fem.  "("rx.  When 
this  is  not  the  case,  the  name  of  the  species  may  be  construed  in  either 
gender  according  to  the  sex  of  the  individual  spoken  of,  as  b'b^  camel,  1^33 
caftle,  ITE^  bird,  or  it  n)ay  have  a  fixed  gender  of  its  own  irrespective  of 
the  sex  of  the  individual;  thus,  sBs  doff,  2X1  mjo//,  ^"io  ox,  are  masculine, 
rains;  hare,  nii^  dove,  Vnn  sheep,  are  feminine. 

d.  The  names  of  nations,  rivers,  and  mountains  are  commonly  mascu- 
line, those  of  countries  and  cities  feminine.  Accordingly,  sm  h  words  as 
ciTN  Edam,  2X10  Moab,  nniitr;  Judah,  d-;^:i'3  Egypt,  D-'Tir?  Chaldees,  are 
construed  in  the  masculine  when  the  people  is  meant,  and  in  the  feminine 
when  the  country  is  meant. 

§  200.  The  feminine  ending  is  frequently  employed 
in  the  formation  of  abstract  nouns,  and  is  sometimes  ex- 
tended to  the  formation  of  official  designations  (comp. 
his  Honour,  his  Excellency,  his  Reverence),  nns  governor, 
T\y^  colleague,  ribhp  preacher,  and  of  collectives  (comp. 
humanity  for  manldnd),  y^  a  fish,  ni^  fish,  "ji:?  a  cloud, 
ni:?  clouds,  y:?  a  tree,  tXlV  timber,  Tr'ji^  a  traveller,  ^i^■'^J^ 
caravan,  ^i^'^ii  Zeph.  3:  10  the  halting,  »T2"bSii  the  escaped. 

a.  (1)  The  feminine  ending  a.ded  to  Segholates  gives  new  prominence 

to  the  originally  abstract  character  of  this  formation,  Vc'"^^  and  rir"i"i 
inclcedyiesft,  distinguished  by  Ewald  as  ro  altKov  and  dhiKi'a,  nE"]n  shame, 
n!i:j>i  slothfuJness. 

(2)  So  to  monosyllables  whose  second  radical  receives  the  vowel,  fipl^j 
righteousness,  which  is  more  abstract  and  at  the  same  time  used  more  ex- 
clusively in  a  moral  sense  than  the  Segholate,  p"ii:  rightness,  nsEX  dark- 
ness, equivalent  to  bsx,  nn'ro  (=  n;b)  brightness,  n-rTJ"^  (=  rr^)  salcation. 
Or  nouns  of  this  description  nright  be  supposed  to  have  sprung  from  the 
adjectives  belonging  to  the  second  form  of  Class  I.,  the  pretonic  vowel  fall- 
ing away  upon  the  addition  of  the  feminine  ending,  bcx  dark,  in^iss  the 
dark,  to  axoTeivov,  fi'vr:j^^  the  being  saved  from  ?lil"^,  M^"'^B  justice  from 


§  201  GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  213 

b'^^Q  judge.  The  following  nouns,  descriptive  of  the  station  or  functions  of 
a  particular  class,  follow  this  form,  ~^?:  kivg,  ti^^lP^  kingly  office  or  sway, 
K'^h:  prophet,  nij^a:  prophecy,  ''f\'2  priest,  nrris  priesthood  or  priestly  duty, 
^31  merchant,  hIddT  traffic. 

(3)  The  feminine  ending  occasionally  gives  an  abstract  signification  to 
reduplicated  forms,  ^^IS"  blind,  rrn'y  blindness,  li33  having  a  bald  forehead, 
nrisa  baldness  in  front,  nb'n  sinner,  nsiiPi  and  tiNt^ri  sin,  "^Hia  terror, 
ilC^l2  scoffing,  nBrtn  anguish,  or  to  those  which  have  a  prefixed  letter  "Q, 
iiisinp  overthrow .1  T^^'2'Ct  dominion,  n^^n^  confusion,  or  particularly  n, 
ni'Vin  salvation,  T\H'rJV\  testimony,  nipn  Aojje,  nxbtn  weariness. 

(4)  It  is  likewise  added  to  forms  in  i_,  ST'^'^Vq  jHrf^mewf,  H^l?''^??  ivork- 
ing,  fT^irJNt!'  beginning,  n'^^nx  ewd,  n^^Xp  remnant,  the  termination  r^  being 
often  found  in  place  of  n-^.,  n-^^Sin  2  Chron.  26:  21  K'ri,  maen  K'thibh, 
disease  prop,  freedom  from  duty,  ""wSri  /Vee;  n^^brti  redness,  '^^''^sn  »"ecZ; 
raS''"i'2  bitterness,  ■^^'^*i^  bitter;  r\n33  heaviness,  rfli"a^S<;  widoivhood.  In  a 
very  few  instances  the  termination  M  is  superimposed  upon  "'^  viz.:  r^'lfiX, 
M^rns'p.  The  termination  H"^.  or  W  in  abstracts  derived  from  tl'b  roots  is 
of  a  different  origin  from  that  just  explained  and  must  not  be  confounded 
with  it;  "1.  or  >!  is  there  the  final  radical  softened  to  a  vowel,  §  170,  as 
IT^hp  or  r\l3"j  captivity  from  "^^'^  to  lead  captive. 

b.  In  Arabic,  nouns  of  unity,  or  those  which  designate  an  individual, 
are  often  formed  by  appending  the  feminine  termination  to  masculines 
which  have  a  generic  or  collective  signification.  This  has  been  thought  to 
be  the  case  in  a  few  words  in  Hebrew,  ""SN  fleet,  i^l^^,  ship,  "lijb  hair,  <l^3;il3 
a  hair,  ^>  swarm,  n^il'n  a  bee. 

c.  Some  names  of  inanimate  objects  are  formed  from  those  of  animated 
beings  or  parts  of  living  bodies,  which  they  were  conceived  to  resemble, 
by  means  of  the  feminine  ending,  taken  in  a  neuter  sense,  OX  mother,  n^ax 
metropolis,  Tp"]  thigh,  nb"i^  hinder  part,  extremity,  t]'3  palm  of  the  hand, 
nfes  palm-branch,  M"^^  forehead,  tinjio  greave,  iis  mouth,  n^Q  edge. 

§  201.  There  are  three  numbers  in  Hebrew,  the 
smgular  ("l^n;  -pilib),  dual  (p-TJ:  '(^^"b),  and  plural  (C^ia^  ]%% 
The  plural  of  mascuhne  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  D"'.. 
or  defectively  written  D.,  to  the  singular,  C^w  Jiorse,  D^i^D 
horseSf  p'^:?  righteous  {man),  Q^p^'H^  or  U\)^T1  righteous 
(inen).  The  plural  of  feminine  nouns  is  formed  by  the 
addition  of  r\i,  also  written  in*,  the  feminine  ending  of 
the  singular,  if  it  has  one,  being  dropped  as  superfluous, 
since  the  plural  termination  of  itself  distinguishes  the 
gender,  Ci3  acp,  nicb  cuj)S,  nb^nin  virgin,  riib'^ri:^  and  rib^ns 
virgins,  riston  sin,  mikton  sins;  in  two  instances  the  vowel- 


214  ETYMOLOGY.  §  202 

letter  5<  takes  the  place  of  1,  §  11. 1.  a,  nj^'is  Ezek.  31:  8, 
n.sin  Ezek.  47:  11. 

a.  The  masculine  plural  sometimes  has  "''_  instead  of  D''  ,  e.  g.  'pl^a 
ofteiier  than  C'^S'S  in  the  book  of  Job,  'pi:^^  Prov.  31:  3,  '^'l'\  2  Kin.  11:  13, 
'C'h  Mic.  3:  12,  'p^-prj  Lam.  1:  4,  "i:n  Ezek.  4:  9,  "p^^  Dan.  12:  13.  This 
ending,  Avhicli  is  the  common  one  in  Aiamaeic,  is  chiefly  found  in  poetry  or 
in  the  later  hooks  of  the  Bible. 

h.  Some  grammarians  have  contended  for  the  existence  of  a  few  plurals 
in  •',  without  the  final  D,  but  the  instances  alleged  are  capable  of  another 
and  more  satisfactory  explanation.  Thus,  i-s  2  Kin.  11:  4,  "^r^^^is,  "^rps 
2  Sam.  8:  18,  I'lr-iV^  2  Sam.  23:  8,  and  ^'in  i  Sam.  20:  38  K'thib'h  (K'ri 
D'^kn),  are  singulars  used  collectively;  "hr:  2  Sam.  22:  44,  Ps.  144:  2,  Lam. 
3:  14,  and  "^iisn  Cant.  8:  2,  are  in  the  singular  with  the  sut'tix  of  the  first 
person;  ■'i'2  Ps.  45:  9  is  not  for  d'^i'2  strivged  instruments,  but  is  the  poetic 
form  of  the  pi-eposition  ''0  from;  "'"NS  Ps.  22:  17  is  not  for  Q"in3  piercing, 
but  is  the  noun  "^nx  with  the  preposition  3  like  the  lion,  §  158.  3. 

c.  There  are  also  a  few  words  which  have  been  regarded  as  plurals  in 
^  .  But  "i^n  Zech.  14:  5  and  "^^b  Judg.  5:  15,  are  plurals  with  the  suffix 
of  the  first  person.  In  !'^,J'iri  2  Chron.  33:  19,  which  is  probably  a  proper 
name,  and  "'hi  Am.  7:  1,  Nah.  3:17,  which  is  a  singular  used  collectively, 
final  "i  is  a  radical  as  in  "^nb  =  Sinb.  plin  Isa.  19:  9  is  a  singular  with 
the  formative  ending  "i.,  §  196.  b;  "'i'l'sn  Jer.  22:  14  and  "^brn  Isa.  20:  4, 
might  be  explained  in  the  same  way,  though  Ewald  prefers  to  regard  the 
former  as  an  abbreviated  dual  for  C^Dirn  double  (i.  e.  large  mid  shnivy) 
windoivs,  and  the  latter  as  a  construct  plural  for  "^ET:;!!;  the  diphthongal  e 
being  resolved  into  ay,  comp.  §  57.  2  (5).  "^n^  Ezek.  13:  18  is  commonly 
regarded  as  an  absolute  dual  for  C^n"^,  though  it  is  always  elsewhere  my 
hands  with  1  pers.  suf.,  and  may  be  so  explained  here.  The  divine  name 
■''Hj  Abnighly  is  best  explained  as  a  singular;  the  name  "'inN  Lord  is  a 
plural  of  excellence,  §  203.  2,  with  the  suffix  of  the  first  person,  the  original 
signification  being  my  Lord. 

d.  In  a  few  words  the  sign  of  the  feminine  singular  is  retained  before 
the  plural  termination,  as  though  it  were  one  of  the  radicals,  in>tead  of 
being  dropped  agreeably  to  the  ordinary  rule,  r;n  door  pi.  T'r'?^.  So,  rOS 
pillow,  r/r;b  loiv,  r;r'ij  trough,  H'^in  spear,  V'i'Z'^  widowhood,  r^rr-'^Z  divorce, 
r":"?i  whoredom,  f^ri^  lip  pi.  rirsb.  To  these  must  be  added  T'^hr,  pro- 
vided it  be  derived  from  iir-'  in  the  sense  oi pit;  it  may,  however,  signify 
destruction,  from  the  root  nri'i,  when  the  final  n  will  be  a  radical. 

e.  The  Arabic  noun  has  three  case-endings,  nom.  ttn,  gen.  in,  ace.  an, 
which  drop  their  nasal  in  the  construct  nom.  M,  gen.  i,  ace.  a.  Although 
these  have  become  obsolete  in  Hebrew,  there  are  traces  of  their  existence 
in  "i  and  ''.  occasionally  added  to  the  construct,  §  222,  and  in  H^  or  D^  ad- 
ded to  nouns  in  an  accusative  sense  to  indicate  direction,  §  223,  or  to  form 
adverbs,  §  236.  2  (1).  The  plural  endings  are  formed  by  lengthening  those 
of  the  singular,  nom.  U)ia,  gen.  ina.  The  former  is  identical  with  the 
plural  ending  in  verbs,  in  Heb,  "i^;  the  latter  corresponds  to  the  Hebrew 


§  202 


GENDEE  AND  NUMBER  OP  NOUNS. 


215 


plural  in  13"^..  In  Arabic  the  fern.  sing,  ending  is  af,  plur.  at  =  H,  a  as  in 
the  Kal  part,  (kdtil  =  h'Jp),  the  Piel  of  Vii  verbs  (ahio  =  Arab.  3  conj.  kd- 
tala)  and  the  XS  fut.  {yakul  =  bbx"i)  answering  to  3  in  Heb. 

§  202.  The  gender  of  adjectives  and  participles  is 
carefully  discriminated,  both  in  the  singular  and  in  the 
plural,  by  means  of  the  appropriate  terminations.  But 
the  same  want  of  precision  or  uniformity  which  has  been 
remaiked  in  the  singular,  §  199,  characterizes  hkewise 
the  use  of  the  plural  terminations  of  substantives.  Some 
mascuhne  substantives  take  Sni  in  the  plural,  some  femi- 
nines  take  D\,  and  some  of  each  gender  take  indifferently 
D\  or  ni. 

a.  The  following  masculine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  Tf\:  those 
which  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk  are  sometimes  construed  as  feminine. 


•   asj  father. 

isst  botol. 

^ix  familiar 
spirit, 
isi'x  treasure. 
*n'ix  sign. 
*n'nx  path. 
"j'io'ix  palace. 
bs^iis  cluster. 

"lia  pit. 
5a  roof. 

T  ' 

^snia  lot. 


*'Qi  threshing' 

floor. 
*b"i|n  goad. 
aJT  tail. 
Y^T\  street. 
nin  breast. 
"p^Tn  vision. 
Bi^n  dream. 
'pscn  invention. 
nsij  hand- 
breadth. 
KSS  throne. 
rfl3  tablet. 


h''^  night. 

'nafa  altar. 

"liso  rain. 

liro  tithe. 

*T!i'3  summit. 

*Dipo  place. 

't^.?  staff. 

1XD  bottle. 

"13  lamp. 

"liS"  skin. 

"iS^  dust. 

*a"i!y  evening. 


2J"iQ  leader. 

nina  bundle. 

"I'll!?  tcaW. 

a^p  war. 

♦aifri  sireei. 

pirri  chain. 

*{rh'd  table. 

diy  name. 

"ibiilj  trumpet. 

ni^  pillar. 

*Dir:ri  deep. 


6.   The  following  feminine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  d''.:  those 
marked  thus  (f)  are  sometimes  masculine: 


t'l^k  stone.  \T\y^.  way. 

n3x  terebinth.  rrn  law. 

r^iD^bx  widoichood,  iTTi^t   branch. 


•irx  woman, 

nbha  coaZ. 

nba^  fig-cake. 

nnian  tee. 


niST  whoredom. 
iiiirt  ivheat. 
n:i;jn  darkness. 
rtii'i  (fo«e. 
fis  pitcher. 


n?233  S2?e?i. 
niab  brick. 

ii"i'2  word. 
n^-a?  awf. 

iiNp  measure. 
1S5  she-goat. 

tisls  concubine. 


nnuia  /?aa7. 
Jns  morsel. 
bnn  sAeep. 
nnjj':;  barley. 
th^'d  ear  of  corn 
Mii'ij  acacia. 


Also  f^if?  e^^s  which  is  not  found  in  the  singular. 


216  ETYMOLOGY.  §  203 

c.  The  following  no\in$'  form  their  plural  by  adding  either  C^_  or  Pi; 

MASCULINE   NOnXS. 

cVx  porch.  nh^  heart.             'n,"."-^  delicacy.  y"ic  breach. 

■^nx  lion.  "lix-a  light.               )^V-g  fountain.  "ix^.ii  neck. 

"I'i'n  generation,  b^ao  tower.         .  23^0  feed.  "laf?  grave. 

nnf  sacrifice.  ib'i'S  foundation.  '(Sd^  dwelling.         nip?  reed. 

"I'ins't  memorial,  "ipi^  Jowd.               "in3  rirer.  B^")I?  oice. 

"ly^  forest.  p'^T'?  tou>/.  "j'r  iniquity.        'S^'Z'd  u-eeTt. 

li'S  /«ver.  ^'ixi^  jwin,  S^^  ''^«''  ^^lirn  delight. 

Tiss  /wrp.  "ipPP  «ai^- 

FEMININE   NOUNS. 

ri7:"^x  ferror.        nt'^rx  grape-cake,      ^r:  s/joe.  i^o"?  ^oo/". 

nrrx  s/zert/".  !^7r^  Astarte.        ^^yj  heap.  did  year. 

iTSX  people.  n"'in  spear. 

NOUNS    CONSTRUED   IN   EITHER    GENDER. 

D"3fix,  r.'ipinx  aloes,   "piin  window.  iii:p  rotZ.  D^ci.;  6owe. 

152  garment.         "liin  court.  C£3  .soi</.  rir  <ime. 

35  riw.                 "1Z2  circle.  I'^O  thorn.  C"Q  /bof. 

bb^^  temple.         "'ii^'?  fortress.  ay  c/o«(Z.  xb*^  7jos^. 

jini  arm.             '^in'^  camp.  P'i?  cortZ.  y^'^:  sitfe. 

d.  The  two  forms  of  tl>e  plural,  though  mostly  synonymous,  occasion- 
ally differ  in  sense  as  in  Latin  loci  and  loca.  Thus  d'^^ps  is  used  of  round 
masses  of  money,  talents,  ni'nss  of  bread,  round  loaves;  D"^^."^©  thorns,  n'i'n"'D 
hooks;  cbps  heels,  Tnb.]^_V  fool-prints;  D"'rrp  footsteps  of  men,  niirs  feet 
of  articles  of  furnituie.  Comp.  §  200.  c.  Sometimes  ihey  differ  in  usage 
or  frequency  of  employment:  tlius  T'"'^  dngs,  nij'ij  gears,  are  poetical  and 
rare,  the  customary  forms  being  D"'"2"',  Q"'3C 

e.  Nouns  mostly  preserve  their  proper  gender  in  the  plural  irrespective 
of  the  termination  which  they  adopt;  though  there  are  occasional  excep- 
tions, in  which  feminine  nouns  in  B"^.  are  construed  as  masculines,  e.  g. 
Q"^t'3  women  Gen.  7:  13,  0*^10  words  Job  4:  4,  cB-aS  ants  Prov.  30:  25,  and 
masculine  nouns  in  ni  are  construed  as  feminines,  e.  g.  ri'ijS'O'D  dtvellings 
Ps.  84:  2. 

§  203.  1.  Some  substantives  are,  by  their  signification 
or  by  usage,  limited  to  the  singular,  such  as  material 
nouns  taken  in  a  universal  or  indefinite  sense,  dx/re, 
ihj  gold,  T^'Zi^^  ground;  collectives,  "|p  children,  r,i"  fowl, 
X:i''p_  birds  ofj^rey,  "'j:^  large  cattle  (noun  of  unity  ni'd  an 
ox),  '|S*.I  small  cattle  (noun  of  unity  n'lC  a  sheep  or  goat); 


§  204  GENDER  AND  NUMBEE  OF  NOUNS.  217 

many  abstracts,  3^^?^.  salvation,  TT'h^  blindness.  On  the  other 
hand  some  are  found  only  in  the  phiral,  such  as  nouns, 
whose  singular,  if  it  ever  existed,  is  obsolete,  D;b  ivater, 
D^is  face  or  faces,  D'iQ'^  heaven,  D'^'53  bowels,  D^ni]  mew, 
ni'"i23lS5'n'J  adjacent  to  the  head,  and  abstracts,  which  have  a 
plural  form,  W^'n  life,  D^itlJ^  love,  D^bnn  mercy,  rii^^sriri 
government. 

a.  The  intimate  connection  between  a  collective  and  an  abstract  is 
shown  by  the  use  of  the  feminine  singular  to  express  both,  §  200.  In  like 
manner  the  plural,  whose  office  it  is  to  gather  separate  units  into  one  ex- 
pression, is  used  to  denote  in  its  totality  or  abstract  form  that  common 
quality  which  pervades  them  all  and  renders  such  a  summation  possible, 
comp.  TO.  hl/caia  right,  to.  abiKa  ivrovg.  Some  abstracts  adopt  indifferently 
the  feminine  or  the  plural  form,  ni^'OX  and  Q'^i^'SN  fidelity,  n|5<5  and  D-ili^lsa 
redemption,  iT^n  and  Di*n  life,  ^isdn  and  D'^irn  darkness,  nkiS^  and  D''kii"9 
setting  of  gems. 

h.  The  form  D''^^::p  is  adopted  by  certain  words  which  denote  periods 
of  human  life,  D'^^.^:.'?  childhood,  tT'yz^Vj  gouth,  D'^nria  adolescence,  Ci"'"i^n3 
virginity,  ni^^il^S  period  of  espousals,  D^^DpT  old  age. 

c.  Abstracts,  which  are  properly  singular,  are  sometimes  used  in  the 
plural  to  denote  a  high  degree  of  the  quality  Avhich  they  represent,  or  re- 
peated exhibitions  and  embodiments  of  it,  nni2a  might,  r''i"i13J  deeds  of 
might,  rii^s^n  exalted  wisdom,  niBpin  intense  folly. 

2.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  the  employment  ol 
the  plural  form  when  a  single  individual  is  spoken  of,  to 
suggest  the  idea  of  exaltation  or  greatness.  It  is  thus 
intimated  that  the  individual  embraces  a  plurality,  or 
contains  within  itself  what  is  elsewhere  divided  amongst 
many.  Such  plurals  of  majesty  are  D^ITibj*}  God,  the  supreme 
object  of  worship,  ''D""15<  Supreme  Lord  prop,  mij  Lord., 
§  201.  c,  and  some  other  terms  referring  to  the  divine 
being,  ^"Snin  Eccles.  12:  1,  D'hinB  Eccles.  5:  7,  ri^y^  Isa. 
54:  5,  D^ii^iip  Hos.  12:  1;  also,  D'ilSS?  (rarely  with  a  plural 
sense)  lord,  D""^^^  (when  followed  by  a  singular  suffix) 
master,  r\i"in3  Behemoth,  great  beast,  and  possibly  D'2'^ri 
Teraphim,  which  seems  to  be  used  of  a  single  image, 
1  Sam.  19:  13,  16. 

§  204.  The  dual  is  formed  by  adding  D^_  to  the  sing- 


218  ETYMOLOGY.  §  205 

nlar  of  both  genders,  T\  as  the  sign  of  the  feminine  re- 
mauiing  unchanged,  and  H^  reverting  to  its  original  form 
n^,  §  198.  b,  T  ha)2d  du.  n:i;,  Ttl  door  du.  D^nbi^,  nsT  Up 

du.  n^ns'j:. 

'  -  T    : 

fl.  The  dual  ending  in  Hebrew,  as  in  the  Indo-European  languages, 
Bopp  Vergleich.  Gramm.  §  206,  is  a  modified  and  strengthened  form  of  the 
plural  eiidinLT.  The  Arabic  goes  beyond  the  Hebrew  in  extending  the  dual 
to  verbs  and  pronouns.  The  Aramaeic  scarcely  retains  a  trace  of  it  except 
in  the  numeral  two  and  its  compounds. 

§  205.  The  dual  in  Hebrew  expresses  not  merely  two, 
but  a  couple  or  a  pair.  Hence  it  is  not  employed  with 
the  same  latitude  as  in  Grreek  of  any  two  objects  of  the 
same  kind,  but  only  of  two  which  belong  together  and 
complete  each  other.    It  is  hence  restricted  to 

1.  Double  oro^ans  of  men  or  animals,  wili^  ears,  W'b^ 
nostrils,  D'i"p  horns,  t]';iD:3  tvings. 

2.  Objects  of  art  which  are  made  double  or  which 
consist  of  two  corresponding  parts,  ^'^'3)_  pair  of  shoes, 
D'iTi^r  pair  of  scales,  D'^nj^b'J  pair  of  tongs,  U^Tb^,  folding 
doors. 

3.  Objects  which  are  conceived  of  as  constituting  to- 
gether a  complete  whole,  particularly  measures  of  time 
)r  quantity,  D'izi''  period  of  tivo  days,  biduum,  C^i'H'd  two 
weeks,  fortnight,  D'nJiZJ  ttvo  years,  biennium,  D"riJ<D  tivo 
measures,  D'^ss  two  talents,  D'-"!"!  Prov.  28:  6,  18  double 

7.-..  /._.,..  / 

way  (comp.  in  English  double  dealing),  D'!^ri3  pair  of  rivers, 
i.  e.  the  Tigris  and  Euphrates  viewed  in  combination. 

4.  The  numerals  uyo  tivo,  D';^I3  double,  D^P^5"^  two 
hundred,  D^Dbj^  two  thousand,  D'^iS"}  two  myriads,  U'bTZfL 
sevenfold,  t:";sb3  of  tivo  sorts. 

5.  A  few  abstracts,  in  which  it  expresses  intensity, 
Wr\':'4^_  double-slothfulness,  U'py^  double-rebellion,  D^in*^ 
double-light,  i.  e.  noon,  W'hy^t')  double-ivickedness. 

a.  Names  of  objects  occurring  in  pairs  take  the  dual  form  even  when  a 
higher  number  than  two  is  spoken  of,   tri^T}  tl^^    1  Sam.  2:  13  the  three 


5  206,  207       GENDEB  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  219 

teeth,  Q"E33  S'?'!*?;  Ezek.  1:  6  four  loings,  D-£33  'rd  Isa.  6:  2  six  wings, 
u'^l'^'J  ni'^a  Zech.  3:  9  seven  eyes,  D'^3"i3"^'i  n"]Vn-b3  all  the  havds  and 
all  knees  Ezek.  7:  17.  Several  names  of  double  organs  of  the  human  or 
animal  body  have  a  plural  form  likewise,  which  is  used  of  artificial  imita- 
tions or  of  inanimate  objects,  to  which  these  names  are  applied  by  a  figure 
of  speech,  §  200.  c,  D";i"i|5  horns,  nii-^p  horns  of  the  altar,  C!";E33  wings, 
tribiS  extremities,  Q";£ri3  shoulders,  niknls  shoulder-pieces  of  a  garment, 
Cj-i'ijr  eyes,  niii^J  fountains,  Ci'3j'n  feet,  B''Ba~i  times  prop,  beats  of  the  foot. 
In  a  few  instances  this  distinction  is  neglected,  D'^^nsiu  and  nirS'i?  lips, 
D'^'i"'  and  nini  sides,  d'^TO'^r  extremities. 

b.  The  dual  ending  is  In  a  very  few  words  superadded  to  that  of  the 
plural,  niriin  tvalls  of  a  city,  D";rtn  double  tvalls,  nih^b  boards,  n'X\hh 
double  boardii'g  of  a  ship,  D'^m^a  name  of  a  town  in  Judah,  Josh.  15:  36. 

c.  The  words  B"^??  icater  and  D";p"^  heaven  have  the  appearance  of  dual 
forms;  they  are,  however,  commonly  regarded  as  plurals,  and  compared 
with  such  pharal  forms  in  Aramaeic  as  '"'i'Ci  Dan.  5:  9  from  the  singular  NS'IJ. 
In  d'^'i^l"!"'  Jeruf<alem,  or  as  it  is  commonly  written  without  the  Yodh 
Ci^^sn";,  the  final  Mem  is  not  a  dual  ending  but  a  radical,  and  the  pronun- 
ciation is  simply  prolonged  from  c'i'jn"!";,  comp.  Gen.  14:  18,  Ps.  76:  8, 
though  in  this  assimilation  to  a  dual  form  some  have  suspected  an  allusion 
to  the  current  division  into  the  upper  and  the  lower  city. 

§  206.  It  remains  to  consider  the  changes  in  the  nouns 
themselves,  which  result  from  attaching  to  them  the 
various  endings  for  gender  and  number  that  have  now 
been  recited.  These  depend  upon  the  structure  of  the 
nouns,  that  is  to  say,  upon  the  character  of  their  letters 
and  syllables,  and  are  governed  by  the  laws  of  Hebrew 
orthography  already  unfolded.  These  endings  may  be 
divided  into  two  classes,  viz.: 

1.  The  feminine  ri,  which,  consisting  of  a  single  con- 
sonant, causes  no  removal  of  the  accent  and  produces 
changes  in  the  ultimate  only. 

2.  The  feminine  H^,  the  plural  D''.  and  r\i,  and  the 
dual  D";,,  which  remove  the  accent  to  their  own  initial 
vowel,  and  may  occasion  changes  in  both  the  ultimate 
and  the  penult. 

§  207.  Nouns  which  terminate  in  a  vowel  undergo  no 
change  on  receiving  the  feminine  characteristic  n,  ''ti'^'2 
Moabite,  trtl'^^'^  Modbitess,  ^1^2  finding,  fern.  n«ib,  Xian 


220  ETYMOLOGY.  §  208 

sinner,  inii'bM  sin,  §  200.  Nouns  wliicli  terminate  in  a  con- 
sonant experience  a  compression  of  their  final  syllable, 
which  upon  the  addition  of  T\,  ends  in  two  consonants  in- 
stead of  one,  §  G6. 2,  and  an  auxihary  Seghol  is  introduced 
to  relieve  the  harshness  of  the  combination,  §  61.  2.  In 
consequence  of  this  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  changed 
from  a  or  a  to  e,  §  63.  2.  a,  from  e  or  t  to  e,  or  in  a  few 
words  to  e,  and  from  o  or  u  to  d,  §  61.  4.  ^in^:  hroken 
fem.  n";iL'ip:,  DT^"N  reddish  fem.  n"^TI"S,  '':\yr\  going  fem. 
tdth,  ^'iii  master,  1^133  mistress,  Ztrifive  fem.  ntt]",  ir^S! 
ma7i,  r'CS^  woman,  §  216.  1.  &,  yii:  scattered  fem.  ri^iSD, 
rrc^n:  and  noin]  brass.  When  the  final  consonant  is  a 
guttural,  there  is  the  usual  substitution  of  Pattahh  for 
Seghol,  ^ti'd  hearing  fem.  T\'SJyii,  Tj:2  touching  fem.  nj;i!a. 

a.  In  many  cases  the  feminine  is  formed  indifferently  b}'  n  or  by  n  ;  in 
others  usage  inclines  in  favor  of  one  or  of  the  other  ending,  though  no  ab 
solute  rule  can  be  given  upon  the  subject.  It  may  be  said,  however,  that  ad- 
jectives in  "^^  almost  always  receive  H;  active  participles,  except  those  of  ~", 
■f:?  and  rt  b  verbs,  oftener  take  r  than  n  ;  r\  is  also  found,  though  less  frequently', 
with  the  passive  participles  except  that  of  Kal,  from  which  it  is  excluded, 

h.  A  final "],  1  or  n  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  the  feminine  characteristic 
n  and  contracted  with  it,  §  54,  ra  for  r3a  dnvgJiter,  rn^  for  rrrp^t/if,  nibx 
for  n:rx  irufh,  TiriX  for  r"iriX  one,  rnr-;  i  Kin.  1: 15  for  rry::'Q  viinisterivg, 
nnu;^  Mai.  l:  14  for  TTrrd'^  corrupt,  ran'3  for  rrbn'2  pan.  The  changes  of 
the  ultimate  vowel  are  due  to  its  compression  before  concurring  consonants. 

c.  The  vowel  u  remains  in  r";li'ri  Lev.  5:  21  deposit,  and  the  proper 
name  P^an^ri  TanJmmeth.  From  nx  brother,  cn  father-in-law  are  formed 
ninx  sister,  nibn  mother-in-laio,  the  radical  ^,  which  has  been  dropped 
from  the  masculine,  retaining  its  place  before  the  sign  of  the  feminine, 
comp.  §  101.  1.  a;  rxlis?  difficult  Deut.  30:  11  is  for  rssEJ  from  nBs3. 

§  208.  The  changes  which  result  from  appending  the 
feminine  termination  H  ,  the  plural  terminations  D"*.  and 
mi,  and  the  dual  termination  D"_,  are  of  three  sorts,  viz.: 

1.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  ultimate,  when  it  is 
a  mixed  syllable. 

2.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  ultimate,  when  it  ia 
a  simple  syllable. 

3.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  penult. 


§  209 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.         221 


§  209.  When  the  ultimate  is  a  mixed  syllable  bearing 
the  accent,  it  is  affected  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  Tsere  remains  unchanged,  if  the  word  is  a  mono- 
syllable or  the  preceding  vowel  is  Kamets,  otherwise  it 
is  rejected;  other  vowels  suffer  no  change,  mx?  dead  fem. 
nhr,  pi.  U'tp2\  I^V  thigh  du.D';D";]':,  Db"^  complete  fem.  r^y^, 
pi.  D-iDbu:,  f.  pi.  nitb"*^;  tj^h  going  fem.  niVH}  pl-  o^^Vn^ 
f.  pi.  niibh. 

a.  The  rejection  of  Tsere  is  due  to  the  tendency  to  abbreviate  words 
which  are  increased  by  additions  at  the  end,  §  66.  1.  It  is  only  retained 
as  a  pretonic  vowel,  §  64.  2,  when  the  word  is  otherwise  sufficiently  abbre- 
viated, or  its  rejection  would  shorten  the  word  unduly.  Tsere  is  retained 
contrary  to  the  rule  by  ct^d,  D-ira*}  children  of  the  third  and  fourth 
generations,  by  a  few  exceptional  forms,  e.  g.  'T]?^  Jer.  3:  8.  11,  nis'ljc 
Ex.  23:  26,  nVji  Cant.  1:  6,  H'b'a'i"::  Isa.  54:  1,  and  frequently  with  the 
pause  accents,' §' 65,  e.  g.  nnbi';'' Isa.  21:  3,  tDibprd  Lam.  1:  16,  :ni'2-2'iia 
Isa.  49:  8,  tD-^'^inx  Ex.  28:  40,  Ciini;D  Gen.  19:  11,  2  Kin.  6:  18  (once  with 
Tiphhha),  !t3iE2V?  Isa.  2:  20,  ti'^O^-E  Eccles.  2:  5,  ninpTp  Isa.  2:  4.  It  also 
appears  in  several  feminine  substantives,  both  singular  and  plural,  e.  g. 
nban:?  overthrow,  nik^'in  counsels,  ■nijS'iri  abomination,  ni""^?  staff,  ns^ij^ 
witch.  On  the  other  hand,  the  following  feminines  reject  it  though  pre- 
ceded by  Kamets,  hv"^  wild-goat,  fem.  n^?!'.  1?^  ostrich,  fem.  tr:v2,  T\yi 
thigh,  fem.  iii:~i;;i.  It  Is  also  dropped  from  the  plural  of  the  monosyllable 
"jS  son,  and  its  place  supplied  by  a  pretonic  Kamets,  C^sa  sows,  DIDa  daugh- 
ters, the  singular  of  the  feminine  being  ri2  for  ^33,  §  207.  6;  so  i^Tp  fork 
pl.  triibin. 

h.  Kamets  in  the  ultimate  is  retained  as  a  pretonic  vowel,  "Jla^  ivhite, 
fem.  ninb,  pl.  n"^in>,  f.  pl.  niiab;  -ikn^a  fortress,  pl.  n''n^3p  and  mnri:;^, 
only  disappearing  in  a  few  exceptional  cases,  ^>ilJ  hair,  fem.  fr^?^,  '^V 
quail,  pl.  D"*!!?!^,  mna^o  and  ninsSJp  fords,  nss  talent  du.  Q'^'b??  but  in 
pause  ^'^7123,  "ins  river  du.  D"^nns,  UJnJ-a  pasture,  pl.  C'^'i^'a  once  niiij"!!^ 
(with  Hholem).  So  in  the  i<"b  participles  X33  prophesying  pl.  Q-^xaD ,  N^05 
polluted  pl.  d'^K'crJ,  xkrii  found  pl.  D'^klS'aD;  but  with  the  pause  accents 
Kamets  returns,  n-ixa:  Ezek.  13:  2,  id^sri-aD  Ezr.  8:  25.  The  foreign  word 
13*10  suljgnrhs  forms  its  plural  irregularly  D^il'^Q. 

c.  Hholem  and  Hhirik  commonly  suffer  no  change;  but  in  a  few  words 
Shurek  takes  the  place  of  the  former,  and  in  one  Tsere  is  substituted  for 
the  latter,  §  66.  2  (c),  "lii^  terror  pl.  d"'^i5^,  'pj^  habitation  pl.  D-iin^a, 
pW^a  sweet  fem.  nfT'ina  pl.  C^ji^'in^,  pxi  distress  fem.  nf^Ji:!,  )'^^-q  lodging 
fem.  niib^a,  O'li'S  flight  fem.  ricr;^,  nii^  rest  fem.  rini:o,  niii'O  fortification 
fem.  nni:j-3,  pii^'  deep  fem.  nj^^-o^  Prov.  23:  27  and  n^sps,  pin^i  cAain  pl. 
nipiinn  1  Kin.  6:  21  K'ri;  B-^Q  escaped  pl.  trh'b^  or  D-ii^b?  fem.  M-j^'bs  or 
nbbs. 


222  ETYMOLOGY.  §  209 

d.  Hholem  is  dropped  from  the  plural  of  "lica  bird  pi.  B'^'nc:i,  as  well 
as  frjm  the  plural  of  nouns  having  the  feminine  characteristic  n  in  the 
singular;  thus  nbi'lpS  skull,  by  the  substitution  of  the  plural  ending  ni  for 
n.,  §  201,  becomes  r'^ijbj,  rpsn'a  course,  pi.  nip^np,  or  with  Hliateph- 
Kamets  under  a  doubled  letter,  §  16.  3.  b,  r:n3  coat  pi.  n:n3,  r::ind  ear  of 
corn,  pi.  n"^330;  in  two  instances  a  pretonic  Kamets  is  inserted,  tTl^S 
droughl  pi.  nina?,  nnnd?  Astarte  pi.  ninn-:;?, 

e.  Seghol  in  nouns  with  the  feminine  characteristic  n  affixed  mostly 
follows  the  law  of  the  vowel  from  which  it  has  sprung,  §  207;  if  it  has 
been  derived  from  Tsere  it  is  rejected,  if  from  any  other  vowel  it  is  still  in 
some  instances  rejected,  though  more  commonly  it  reverts  to  its  original 
form  and  is  retained,  rpiii  sucker  (from  p:r)  pi.  nipii-^,  n"^ix  epistle  (from 
"lax)  pi.  ninJX,  nbix'c  knife  (from  ^i:No)  pi.  ni^K^a,  np^-anx  reddish  (from 
c^'?!'^)  pi.  niati'anN,  r^,p-o  nurse  (from  p'^rp)  pi.  nip^rp,  nrpip  scale  pi. 
Q""vi'Pwp  and  niirprp .  Pattahh,  which  has  arisen  from  a  Seghol  so  situated 
under  the  influence  of  a  guttural,  follows  the  same  rule,  r^"k^  ring  pi. 
nijjsa,  rrJ:  (from  rib)  touching  pi.  ri:^'':. 

f.  A  few  nouns  with  quiescents  in  the  ultimate  present  apparent  ex- 
ceptions which  are,  however,  readily  explained  by  the  contractions  which 
they  have  undergone.  Thus  nih  for  nin,  §  57.  2  (5),  thorn,  has  its  plural 
D'^inin  or  D"'n;jn;  dii  (m^)  day,  pi.  Q-'p';  (nirn-i);  "(ii^  (■,1-i'a)  strife,  pi.  n"'3n'i^; 
-lili:  (nir)  ox,  pi.  D"'nia;  IW  for  ni.^  or  ^^yi,  §  188.  2.  c,  pot,  pi.  ti'^nil  or 
0*^13^.  §  210.  3;  piid  (p^D  or  "p^'^)' street,  pi.  ts-^prr;  *T^r  ("."^r  or  "^-^V)  city, 
pi.  once  Qin^S  Judg.  10:  4  usually  contracted  to  ^''^V;  irxi  (rxS)  head, 
pi.  fli'N'n  (f^'iJN";).  So  nxp  measure  becomes  in  the  dual  C^nxt)  for  D'nxp 
and  nxp  one  hundred,  du.  ti-^nx^  for  D';'nN-2;  nzsb-o  (n=N3-2,  §  57.  2  (3)), 
work,  probably  had  in  the  absolute  plural  riixsp,  whence  the  construct  is 

2.  The  final  consonant  sometimes  receives  Dagliesh- 
forte  before  the  added  termination,  causing  the  preced- 
ing vowel  to  be  sliortened  from  a  to  a,  from  e  or  «  to  t, 
and  from  o  or  u  to  ii,  §  61.  5.  This  takes  place  regularly 
in  nouns  which  are  derived  from  contracted  ::"^'  roots, 
DP^?er/ec^  fern,  f.^iari,  D^  sea  pi.  Q"^;';  'j'U  (from  "i^)  shield, 
pL  D"3:".2  and  riih.^;  ph  statute  pi.  D"!??!,  fem.  ^j^",  pl.ripn, 
or  in  whose  linal  letter  two  consonants  have  coalesced, 
r|i<  for  jTiIi^  du.  D'E5<  7iose;  T3?  for  7D3;  she-goat  pi.  D'T:^;  ny 
for  n-i?  time  pi.  D'r>"  and  mn^;  t'iH,  for  ^3S  ma;z,  rriSK 
woman,  and  it  not  infrequently  occurs  in  other  cases. 

a.  Nouns  with  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  with  few  exceptions  double 
their  final  letter  being  either  contracted  forms,  b^  weak  pi.  E'^ln  fem.  (n^;^ 
1)1.  rii;^,  or  receiving  Daghesh-forte  conservative  in  order  to  preserve  the 


§209 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  225 


short  vowel,  ois  pool  pi.  a"^^5i<;  so  "js-ix  wheel,  cirt  myrtle,  ai'^  few,  Mnnr 
frightful,  pbpTi";  greenish,  '^iN'Q  desire.  Before  n  Pattahh  may  be  retained 
in  an  intermediate  syllable,  nb  fresh  pi.  Q'^fib;  before  other  gutturals  it  is 
lengthened  to  Kamets,  §  60.  4,  "ib  prince  pi.  D'^TIJ  fern,  trni;  so  ni^^SX 
fingers,  ni'S^N  /owr,  D"'";2'i3  helmets,  D'^^l^J^a  straits  and  D"'N"t>i'n  baskets,  rbiVs 
loops,  which  do  not  occur  in  the  singular,  but  are  commonly  referred  to 
•'n^l'n,  'ipnb,  §  196.  fe,  1  being  changed  to  K  as  in  §  210.  3.  d;  also  "id  breast, 
which  omits  Daghesh  du.  tS'^n'li.  Pattahh  is  in  the  following  examples 
changed  to  Hhirik  before  the  doubled  letter,  §  58.  2,  '2  prey  fem.  iiT3,  PJl 
fear  fem.  tipn,  na  wine-press  pi.  nina,  "i^  garment  pi.  tsi^.^  and  C^.^,  D? 
tribute,  r|D  ftasin,  ns  morsel,  Tl  side,  ^ip^i  ivheel,  "n^idbo  baskets,  C^ipSO 
palm-branches,  anio  threshing-sledge  pi.  D"'5'niTa  or  by  the  resolution  of 
Dagbesh-forte,  §  69.  a,  t]"'ii"''i'i"a .  It  is  rejected  from  h'sh'^  cymbal  pi.  ti"^'i:jVs, 
']  sort  pi.  Q'^?1,  t:''nr>")3i  berries,  probably  from  "iJ"}?.  and  D^nri  men,  from  the 
obsolete  singular,  np.  The  plural  of  GI?  people  is  D"^3:?  and  in  a  very  few 
instances  with  the  doubled  letter  repeated,  d"'br;>;  so  "irt  mountain  pi.  n'^'Sn 
and  G'l'n^r!  Deut.  8:9,  bs  shadow  pi.  D'^Bb::,  p'n  statute  pi.  Q'^pn,  and  twice 
in  the  construct,  ""^PpH  Judg.  5:  15,  Isa.  10:  1,  which  implies  the  absolute 
form  C^ibjrn. 

b.  The  final  letter  is  doubled  after  Kamets  in  the  following  words  be- 
sides those  from  ^'s  roots,  t^'X  porch  pi.  C^lk^X;  so  'irx  hire,  h^z^  camel, 
'■bT  time,  T^'^'H'?  darkness,  pn'ip  distance,  )hp  small,  'i^'i  green,  'ix'r  quiet, 
"|i!;:"d  lily,  'k'V  coney,  to  which  should  perhaps  be  added  l^np?  Deut.  8:  15 
scorpion,  though  as  it  has  a  pause  accent  in  this  place  which  is  the  only 
one  where  it  is  found  with  Kamets,  its  proper  form  may  perhaps  have  been 
^^P5i  §  65.  The  Niphal  participle  "1233  honored  has  in  the  plural  both 
C^lSDJ  and  d'^'narJ .  Several  other  words,  which  only  occur  in  the  plural, 
are  in  the  lexicons  referi'sd  to  singulars  with  Kamets  in  the  ultimate;  but 
the  vowel  may,  with  equal  if  not  greater  probability,  be  supposed  to  have 
been  Pattahh.  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh  before  n,  which  does  not 
admit  Daghesh-forte,  in  the  plurals  of  nj<  brother  pi.  d'^nx,  nn  hook,  rtsn^ 
confidence,  §  60.  4.  a. 

c.  The  following  nouns  with  Hholem  in  the  ultimate  fall  under  this 
rule,  in  addition  to  those  derived  from  VV  roots,  "faa  peak  pi.  Q'^jipnii,  dti'nn 
sacred  scribe,  Si:"in  band,  nisb  nation,  D"i''?  naked,  and  several  adjectives 
of  the  form  h'Jp^,  which  are  mostly  written  without  the  vowel-letter  ^, 
§  14.  3,  e.  g.  d^x  red  fem.  rifens,  d"^:2ix,  d'-'x  terrible^  tpS  long,  etcj  nsim 
dunghill  takes  the  form  ninsdx  in  the  plural. 

d.  There  are  only  two  examples  of  doubling  when  the  vowel  of  the 
ultimate  is  Shurek,  d"'3'7ri  Prov.  24:  31  nettles  or  brambles  from  bl~n,  ni'^xn 
Esth.  2:  9  from  "i^ifi  Kal  pass.  part,  of  nx'n. 

e.  uJ'^X  C^'SN)  man  is  not  contracted  in  the  plural  d""'l":x  men;  in  the 
feminine,  for  the  sake  of  distinction,  the  initial  weak  letter  is  dropped, 
d'l'O  ivomen,  which  is  used  as  the  plural  of  tiiix  ivoman;  c"i'd"^i<  meyi  and 
riix  ivomen  are  rare  and  poetic.  HN  ploughshare  ba«  either  D'^HiS;  or  d'^nx 
in  the  plural. 


'224  ETYMOLOGY.  §  210 

§  210.  1.  Scgholate  nouns,  or  those  which  have  an 
unaccented  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  drop  it  when  any 
addition  is  made  to  them,  §  66.  2.  (a).  As  this  vowel 
arose  from  the  concurrence  of  voweUess  consonants  at 
the  end  of  the  word,  the  necessity  for  its  presence  ceases 
when  that  condition  no  longer  exists.  Segholates  thus 
revert  to  their  original  form  of  a  monosyllable  ending  in 
concurrent  consonants,  §  185. 

2.  Monosyllables  of  this  description  receive  the  femi- 
nine ending  with  no  further  change  than  the  shortening 
due  to  the  removal  of  the  accent,  in  consequence  of  which 
0  becomes  o  or  more  rarely  w,  e  becomes  ^  or  more 
rarely  e;  e  may  be  restored  to  a  from  which  it  has  com- 
monly arisen,  §  185,  or  like  e  it  may  become  i  or  e, 
n:!"^  (p^'y)  strength  fem.  r^t'iy,  ir£n  (u^i'n)  fern.  ""CI"  free- 
dom, ^'^S  (y^^)  saying  fem.  rhl)^  and  "T^X,  T]:i3  (T]b*-3) 
king,  T\'^'2  queen,  nitJ  slaughter  fem.  nnnt:. 

a.  Nouns  having  either  of  the  forms  ^^^^|?,  "^^^n?,  "^^^i?,  "^'^^i^i  "^^^Pj 
are  consequently  to  be  regarded  as  sprung  from  monosyllables  with  the 
vowel  given  to  the  first  radical. 

3.  Before  the  plural  terminations  a  pretonic  Kamets 
is  inserted,  and  the  original  vowel  of  the  monosyllable 
falls  away,  T^b'b  ("i^b'^)  Idng  pi.  D^ib'J,  nsb"-?  queen  pi.  nibb^, 
-lr^5  (1"^i<)  saying  pi.  D^n./fs,  HT^s  id.  pi.  niiSN,  bys  (b>E) 
work,  pi.  D"b:?s,  spn  sin  pi.  D-Nt:-. 

a.  Pretonic  Kamets  is  not  admitted  by  the  numerals  D'^TyS  twenfy 
from  IwV  ten,  ^'^'v'2'::  sevenfy  from  i'a'i:  seven,  D"'i-"l'n  ninety  from  rrp  w/mc. 
The  words  ti'^i::^  pistachio-nuts,  0*^320  eto???/.  Q^lix^  Job  40:  21.  22,  O^vrn 
mercies,  D"^rpil'  and  ni'ap'j  sycamores,  which  do  not  occur  in  the  singular, 
have  been  regarded  as  examples  of  a  like  omission;  though  the  first  is 
derived  by  Fiirst  from  ii3a3,  and  the  second  by  Gesenius  from  "^isn.  The 
plural  of  fT23n  tvisdom  is  not  ni^Dn  but  nvbrn.  Quadriliteral  Segholates 
also  receive  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural  "fS'JS  pi.  B"^3S'33  merchants,  un- 
less the  new  letter  creates  an  additional  syllable,  in  whicli  case  the  intro- 
duction of  Kamets  would  prolong  the  word  too  much,  t'SSS  commhine  pi. 
ciVrB.  'i''2:i  nail  Ci3"iD:i. 

b.  The  superior  tenacity   of  Hholem,  §  60.  1.  a  (4),  is  shown  by  the 


§211 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  225 


occasional  retention  of  0,  not  only  as  a  compound  Sh'va  under  gutturals 

nnii  ivay  pi.  minis,  so  d^ri  month,  a';in  thicket,  i^r  sheaf,  isi  fatvn;  but 
as  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph  in  '|'ij'  threshivg-floor  pi.  with  art. 
ninsn,  ":i-T'p  holiness  pi.  D"'-!7i;^  and  with  art.  D'ii''i|5n ,  dniy  root  pi.  Dipnir, 
§  19!  2.  a,  or  as  a  long  vowel  in  hrvk  tent  pi.  Ci''?!^5<,  •^i"]S  stall  pi.  Hl'-^x, 
§  60.  3.  c,  or  shifted  to  the  following  letter  so  as  to  take  the  place  of  the 
pretonic  Kamets  in  '{rii.  thumb  pi.  niiina,  ra'3  brightness  pi.  ninjj,  §  186.  a. 
Comp.  bOQ  (bCD)  graven  image  pi.  D";vi"^GD.  In  the  other  nouns  it  is  rejected, 
-1153  morning  pi.  D"^i|:53;  so  '{"yi  threshing-floor,  "iSib  cypress,  yap  handful, 
np'n  spear,  UT)^  juniper,  byib  hollow  of  the  hand. 

c.  Middle  Vav  quiesces  in  the  plural  of  the  following  nouns:  n;in  death 
pi.  d'n'i'a,  n^l?  iniquity  pi.  r3'i3'.  Gesenius  regards  D'^D'iN  Prov.  11 :  7, 
Hos.  9:  4,  as  the  plural  of  "ilS,  while  others  derive  it  from  "pX,  translating 
it  richf'S  in  the  former  passage  and  sorrow  in  the  latter,  the  primary  idea 
out  of  which  both  senses  spring  being  that  of  toil.  Middle  Yodh  quiesces 
in  the  plui-al  of  h->k  ram  pi.  ni>X,  n*;]  olive  pi.  din'^j,  h'O  night  pi.  n'3"^p, 
but  not  in  h-h  strength  pi.  t3"i5^n,  "i'^^'  fountain  pi.  niry,  ^^b  ass-colt  pi. 
D"'n"i5,  'iJ"]ri  goat  pi.  ni'C-Fi.  The  plural  of  iS"3i  valley  is  r'i'''N?i  by  trans- 
position from  the  regular  form  niX"^5  which  is  twice  found  in  the  K'thibh 
2  Kin.  2:16,  Ezek.  6  :  3;  H";?  house  has  as  its  plural  D^na  IdMhn  §  19.  2.  a, 
whether  this  be  explained  as  for  D'^nin  from  nia  to  build  or  for  D'^rinS  from 

^  .  :  T  T  T  .    :   T 

ras  to  lodge  Middle  Yodh  always  quiesces  before  the  feminine  and  dual 
endings,  "i";^  provision  fem.  •in"'^,  '']b  eye  da.  Q'^5'^?. 

d.  Monosyllables  in  "'.  from  H'b  roots  belong  properly  to  this  forma- 
tion, §  57.  2  (4)  and  §  186.  b,  and  follow  the  rules  given  above  both  in  the 
fem  nine  "^lin  O^n)  necklace  fem.  n^bn,  and  the  plural  "^nx  ("^"i^)  lion  pi. 
Di^nx  and  ni'i'JX,  "^na  kid  pi.  Q-'^.'iJ  ,  or  with  the  change  of  ">  to  S,  §  56.  4, 
which  also  occurs  in  verbs,  §  179.  3,  "'Bn  necklace  pi.  d"^X3n,  "rs  simple  pi. 
Qi-.rs,  dVq  and  a^.xrs,  •'Z^  gazelle  pi.  a">^.3:J,  d'^ND-.i  and  r'ii<:^-.i;  in  like 
manner  C"5<2"  brunches,  cxab  lions  are  referred  to  ^B<  and  "^bb  though 
these  singulars  do  not  occur;  "^bs  ("^bs)  utensil  does  not  receive  Kamets  in 
the  plural  D'bs.  No  absolute  plurals  occur  of  Segholates  with  final  Vav, 
only  the  construct  forms  "^isn,  "'J^p. 

4.  The  dual  sometimes  takes  a  pretonic  Kamets  like 
the  plural,  but  more  frequently  follows  the  feminine  in 
not  requiring  its  insertion,  t^b'"!  (rb"n)  door  du.  D'^rib'n,  1\'y^ 
(1^")^)  way  du.  D'i'^"^,  '{^l  (;|")|^)  horn  du.  D^rp  and  Dtinp, 
•^nb  c/?ee^  du.  D^:-b,  "r]"^4  (^"121.)  A;wee  du.  D^^-^n,  so  U'^'r'Z, 
cb::,  D-.n";:^,  t::irj:^. 

§  211.  When  the  ultimate  is  a  simple  syllable,  the 
following  cases  occur,  viz: 

1.  Final  n_  is  rejected  before  the  feminine  and  plural 

15 


226  ETYBIOLOGY.  §  211 

endings,  m£^  beautiful  fern.  ITS^  f.  pi.  nit",  !~.Tir2  work  pi. 
D"ibj'J;  so  rii""^  mmj?  du.  D^.?""^. 

a.  The  last  radical  in  words  of  this  description  is  properly  *',  whicli  is 
rejected  after  a  vowelless  letter,  §  62.  2.  c,  so  that  ns^  is  for  n^Ei  and 
D"''il"""2  for  D"^yi""'2.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  radical  "^  remains,  e.  g. 
n^wj'  Cant.  1 :  7  from  ni;i?  (■'i;i?)  C'^n'i'S  Isa.  25 :  6  from  nn*2'3  C^P'O':)  and  is 
even  strengthened  by  Daj^hesh-forte,  §  209.  2,  n'Z"2  Lam.  1:  16  from  na'ia, 
ns-)B  and  rVs,  §  i96.  h,  fem.  of  nVs,  rvnn  Hos.  U:  1,  elsewhere  ni^n, 
no  mouth,  edge  pi.  D"^D,  nrc  and  n'i'^a,  or  changed  to  N,  §  56.  4,  n'ii:  ("'^O) 
young  lamb  n"'X^::  (n"';3p),  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  assume  a  singular 
"'^a  which  no  where  occurs;  na'bn  Ps.  10:  8  has  as  its  plural  D"^NDbn  ver.  10. 

2.  Final ".  may  combine  with  the  feminine  and  plural 
endings,  so  as  to  form  n^ , ,  D"^ . ,  ni" . ,  or  it  may  in  the 
masculine  plural  be  contracted  to  □"'. ,  §  62.  2,  '''"ll'J  Hebrew 

pi.  D^nz:;?  and  Di"^n>'  fem.  TT^ZiV  f.  pi.  t\'\^'^Z'J;  ^'1  ship  pi. 
D*:2  and  D"^.^,  "irs"  free  pi.  Q"iA?£r!,  y:  pure  pi.  D'^.pD.  So 
nomis  in  ri"*.  upon  the  exchange  of  the  feminine  singular 
for  the  plural  termmation  ^"3152?  Ammonitess  pi.  ni'^ji:!!:?, 
r'^ritj  Hittitess  K^pn. 

a.  In  D"5<"'::;'n5i  2  Chron.  17:  11  Arabians  from  '^S'lS  an  X  is  interposed, 
elsewhere  D^r"]?;  ri'bT  branches,  ri'lT  corners  and  ni';?:^  bowls,  which  do 
not  occur  in  the  singular,  are  assumed  to  be  from  ri"'^^,  n'^IT  and  n'"ii>3'a. 

6.  A  few  monosyllables  in  "^^  form  their  feminines  in  this  manner, 
though  in  the  masculine  plural  they  follow  the  rule  before  given,  §  210.  3.d, 
•^ns  lid  fem.  n^na,  i^b  lion,  ah:}}  liotiess,  §  198.  d,  "^h::  gazelle  fem.  n^niJ 
(rT'D'^  and  N"':;".i  are  used  as  proper  names),  ''f^'j  drinking  fem.  frn'r. 

3.  There  are  few  examples  of  final  ^  or  i  with  added 
endings.  The  following  are  the  forms  wliich  they  assume : 
^p"^  drink  pi.  U'^-^'Z,  n^iba  kingdom  pi.  ni^^b';',  §  62.  2, 
M'h:?  testimtmy  pi.  T\\yj,  nin5<  sister  pi.  nirs  and  rrrx  for 
ni-rs,  yzTi  and  ^^ii•^  myriad  pi.  nin^,  r.ixi'i  and  nixin"^;  the 
dual  D'.nizi"  inserts  the  sign  of  the  feminine,  or  as  others 
thmk  of  the  plural  §  20b.  b. 

a.  ri'Sn  or  rrrn  Jer.  37:  16  cells  is  referred  to  the  assumed  singular 
r^iin;  n-j:  Isa.  3:  'l6  K'fhibh  and  rifrr  1  Sam.  25:  18  K'thibh  are  funned 
from  la:,  'hv  abbreviated  Kal  passive  participles,  §  174.  5,  but  in  the  ab- 
sence of  the  appropriate  vowel  points  their  precise  pronuuciatiou  cannot 
be  determined. 

b.  Nouns  ending  in  a  quiescent  radical  X  may  be  regarded  as  terminating 


§  212  GENDEB  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  227 

in  a  consonant,  since  this  letter  resumes  its  consonantal  power  upon  au 
addition  being  made  to  the  word.  Comp.  §  164.  nk'0'2  found  fern.  tlk^Oi, 
X'nb  wild  ass  pi.  ts'^i^ns. 

§  212.  The  changes,  which  occur  in  the  penult,  arise 
from  the  disposition  to  shorten  the  former  part  of  a  word, 
when  its  accent  has  been  carried  forward  by  accessions 
at  the  end,  §  66.  2.  They  consist  in  the  rejection  of 
Kamets  or  Tsere,  bil3  great  fem.  n>i"iji  pi.  D^SiiS  f.  pi. 
nibilS,  ^i'n  word  pi.  D^'12'n,  "jinST  memorial  pi.  Hiih^T,  "is 
wing  du.  D'SDS,  l^tl'J  restoriyig  pi.  D^n^tlla  fem.  Hl^^ia,  '^^'2 
distress  pi.  D''",-2"J,  ''ib  Levite  pi.  D^^.lb,  except  from  nouns 
in  n..  in  which  the  place  of  the  accent  is  not  changed  bjJ 
the  addition  of  the  terminations  for  gender  and  number, 
§  211. 1,  r^i^  beautifuliem.  nS^pl.  ni£^,  rn;^  field  pi.  inilb, 
Tlir^  hard  pi.  D^'iJp,  "i^'J  pi.  D"3;53  and  ni2?52  boivels,  PiiD 
smitten  pi.  D^'i:.  Other  penultimate  vowels  are  mostly 
exempt  from  change. 

a.  Kamets,  which  has  arisen  from  Pattahh  in  consequence  of  the  suc- 
ceeding letter  not  being  able  to  receive  Daghesh-forte,  as  the  form  pro- 
perly requires,  is  incapable  of  rejection.  Such  a  Kamets  is  accordingly 
retained  without  change  before  ^,  e.  g.  Uintl  for  Tli^H,  §  189.  1,  workman 
pi.  ^"'b'lr!,  so  ^"Q  horseman,  ri'^^s  fugitive,  O'^So  (const.  C^^.p)  eunuch, 
y^niS  terrible^  'K'^i?  violent,  j'^^ri  diligent,  or  shortened  to  Pattahh  before 
n,  §  60.  1.  a  (4),  "i^ina  young  man  pi.  D'^n^ns.  Kamets  is  also  retained  in 
certain  ysJ,  13?  and  nb  derivatives  as  a  sort  of  compensation  for  the  reduction 
of  the  root  by  contraction  or  quiescence,  e.  g.  'ri'3  shield  pi.  tD^iJ"3  and  niSS^, 
•jiipo  fortress  pi.  Q^I"^,  ri^^T  branch  pi.  ni'^i,  JT'i't  corner  pi.  ni'lt,  nin 
(from  D!l"i)  height,  du.  C^r^l ,  Other  instances  of  its  retention  are  rare  and 
exceptional,  *ii:i3  treacherous  fem.  friija,  ?^i"i3  (const.  ?3d)  M;eeA:  pi.  D'^sna 
and  T^yj-y^  but  du.  Q-i^nd,  TUilid  ivarrior  pi.  n"'i:3"'bd. 

6.  When  Kamets  following  a  doubled  letter  is  rejected,  and  Daghesh- 
forte  is  omitted  in  consequence,  §  25,  the  antepenultimate  vowel  is  in  a  few 
instances  changed  from  Hhirik  to  Seghol,  §  61.  5,  "|'i"'jn  vision  pi.  n'i3i"''tn, 
•jiT^Si  a  tenth  pi.  Ci"'3'i'r" ,  but  'pnST  memorial  pi.  nii'nsT . 

c.  Tsere  is  not  rejected  if  it  has  arisen  from  Hhirik  before  a  guttural 
in  a  form  which  properly  requires  Daghesh-forte,  HJ^n  for  ^^n,  §  189.  1.  b, 
deaf  pi.  n"ii3"^ri,  or  if  it  is  commonly  represented  by  "^j  §  14.  3,  vi^'^3  or  Cl^"^?, 
§  188,  hammer  pi.  nisb'^S,  or  a  radical  "^  quiesces  in  it,  "P'^X  or  "iPX  (from 
"hi,  §  191)  perennial  pi.  d'^iri'^x  or  d"iinx,  bb-^n  temple  pi.  Q-^Bia^n  and  nibs-in, 
a-in;a"'p  and  0"'^*."'?  rectitude,  D^siT'f  (from  "W  or  T^T)  proud.  Other  cases 
are  rare  and  exceptional,  e.  g.  D'lBboX  Neb   3 :  34  feeble, 

15* 


228  ETYMOLOGY.  §  213 

d.  Hliolem  is  almost  invariably  retained  in  the  penult,  yet  it  yields  to 
the  strong  tendency  to  abbreviation  in  the  following  trisyllabk-s:  nii/i^TUX 
Ashdoditess  pi.  ris-iTrx  Neh.  13:  23  K'ri  (K'thibh  nrTTrx),  r-iijs?  Am- 
monitess  pi.  nv:ar  id.  (K'thibh  ri"i3iT33i,  i  Kin.  11:1  rvfia;."),  "z-r:!  Sido- 
iiian  f.  pi.  r*p^  where  long  Hhirik  becomes  Tsere  before  concurrent  con- 
sonants, §  61.  4. 

e.  When  the  penult  is  a  mixed  syllable  containing  a  short  vowel,  it  i.i 
ordinarily  not  subject  to  change,  §  58.  2.  The  tendency  to  the  greatest 
possible  abbreviation  is  betrayed,  however,  in  a  few  examples  by  the  re- 
duction of  the  diphthongal  Seghol  to  Pattahh,  comp.  §  60.  3.  b.  ^sm 
cluster  pi.  ni'iirx  Cant.  7:  8,  nz-io  chariot  fern.  n22~o  pi.  r'hs-i-?,  pfrnp 
distance  pi.  t"i?n";p  and  D"^fi>n-ip,  or  of  Pattahh  to  the  briefest  of  the  short 
vowels  Hhirik,  cump.  §  209.  2  a,  nsrsT  fury  pi.  risi-pT ,  s'iT-a  fork  pi.  r'ibT^, 
§  192.  a,  rn'i^  dish  pi.  ninVj;  by  the  resolution  of  Daghesh-forte  for  ninr:!, 
§  59.  a;  nrx  for  "ins  other  has  in  the  plural  D'^^.riN,  ninnx  as  if  from  "inx, 
nVm  coal  has  pi.  fi"^ir:a  by  §  63.  l. 

§  213.  As  precisely  the  same  changes  result  from  ap- 
pending the  feminine  T\^  and  the  plural  endings,  except 
in  the  single  case  of  Segholate  nouns  or  monosyllables 
terminating  in  concurrent  consonants,  §  210,  nouns  in  H^ 
become  plural  with  no  further  change  than  that  of  their 
termination  nib'^^  kingdom  pi.  niib^?^;  only  in  the  excep- 
tional case  referred  to  a  pretonic  Kamets  must  be  inserted 
nsb?^  qiieen  from  "qV;,  pi.  by  §  210.  3.  tr\b)')2.  Nouns  in  n, 
after  omitting  the  feminine  ending,  are  liable  to  the  re- 
jection or  modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  in 
forming  the  plural,  as  explained  §  209.  1.  d.  and  e,  vrhni, 
epistle  (from  "i3X)  pi.  rii-^SS',  I^";"^ v't]  observance  (from  ^/ilw"-.) 
pi.  niT»li""::.  As  the  dual  ending  is  not  substituted  for  that 
of  the  feminine  singular,  but  added  to  it,  it  is  simply 
necessary  in  applying  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  the 
dual,  to  observe  that  the  old  ending  T\^  takes  the  place 
of  n^,  §  204.  Thus  ~yc  (TQZ)  year,  by  §  212,  becomes  in 
-jhe  dual  U'nyj:,  nb"!  door  by  §  210.  4,  du.  □"nb'n,  n-uin: 
brass  du.  D^'nuir:. 

a.  In  the  following  examples  a  radical,  which  has  been  rejected  from 
the  singular  is  restored   in   the   plural,   iiis   (fur  Jin^X)   maid-servant  pU 

nihisx,  ri-2  (for  r^Jia  from  n^)  portion  pi.  rvj'S  and  n^kj'?,  comp.  §  210.  3.  d. 


§  214-216       THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  229 

nkp  (for  ni:2p  from  nkp)  pi.  n'lap;  in  like  manner  nnrs  colleagues  is  re- 
ferred to  the  assumed  singular  ni^.  nfjQ  (nirjQ)  governor  has  in  the  plural 
both  niins  (const,  niinp)  and  nina. 

The  Construct  State. 

§  214.  When  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  depend- 
ence on  another,  the  second  or  specifying  noun  is,  in  occi- 
dental languages,  put  in  the  genitive  case ;  in  Hebrew,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  second  noun  undergoes  no  change, 
but  the  first  is  put  into  what  is  commonly  called  the 
construct  state  (T]^'-D  or  T^'bCD  supported).  A  noun  which 
is  not  so  related  to  a  following  one  is  said  to  be  in  the 
absolute  state  (l^^l:^'J  cut  off).  Thus,  '^i'n  word  is  in  the 
absolute  state;  but  in  the  expression  T\b^yl  in'n  verhum 
regis,  the  word  of  the  king,  ^Z"!  is  in  the  construct  state. 
By  the  juxtaposition  of  the  two  nouns  a  sort  of  compound 
expression  is  formed,  and  the  speaker  hastens  forward 
from  the  first  noun  to  the  second,  which  is  necessary  to 
complete  the  idea.  Hence  results  the  abbreviation,  which 
characterizes  the  construct  state. 

a.  The  term  absolute  state  ■was  introduced  by  Reuchlin;  he  called  the 
construct  the  state  of  regimen. 

§  215.  The  changes,  which  take  place  in  the  formation 
of  the  construct,  affect 

1.  The  endings  for  gender  and  number. 

2.  The  final  syllable  of  nouns,  which  are  without  these 
endings. 

3.  The  syllable  preceding  the  accent. 

§  216.  The  following  changes  occur  in  the  endings  for 
gender  and  number,  viz : 

1.  The  feminine  ending  tl^  is  changed  to  t\_,  nhSlIJ 
handmaid  const.  rinSaJ;  the  ending  V\  remains  unchanged, 
ri  jb^TlS  ohservance  const.  n';]y9"^7j. 

a.  The  explanation  of  this  appears  to  be  that  the  construct  state  re- 
tains the  old  consonantal  ending  ri_ ,  the  close  connection  with  the  following 


230  ETYMOLOGY.  §  217 

noun  preserving  it  as  if  in  the  centre  of  a  compound  word,  §  55.  2.  o; 
•whereas  in  the  isolation  of  tlie  absolute  state,  the  end  of  the  word  is  more 
liable  to  attrition  and  the  consonant  falls  away. 

b.  Some  nouns  in  if  preceded  by  Kamets  adopt  a  Segholate  form  in 
the  construct,  nbb'D^  kingdom  const,  rri":*?  instead  of  r;5':'a  §  61.  1.  b, 
n'fd*2"2  dominion  const.  nbii'aTa,  M^^X^"?  irork  const.  ri:xb"a,  nhs'-a  chariot 
const.  nir~0,  iT^w?  crown  const.  n~i:",  T^''y!'l'^_  flame  const,  snsnb,  n~'w™  ten 
const.  r\"iw?;  or  with  the  Seghols  changed  to  Pattahhs  under  the  influence 
of  a  guttural,  Mn2"r"2  family  const,  nnsr^,  <ii;3~S  four  const.  r?k"iX;  sa 
nlr^'n  fig-cuke  const,  nbr'n;  r>r!*?  icoman,  though  it  occurs  in  the  absolute, 
Dent.  21:11,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  Ps.  58:  9,  is  mostly  used  as  the  construct  of  ntx. 
On  the  other  hand,  Tc^n  bottle  has  in  the  construct  T^'zh  Gen.  21:  14  (the 
accent  thrown  back  b}'  §  35.  1)  as  if  from  n^H;  ritil'p  portion  const,  rki^. 

2.  The  ending  D^.  of  the  mascuHne  pkiral  and  D\  of 
the  dual  are  ahke  changed  to  "'.. ,  D"53^  nations  const.  "Jay, 
Q*5"p  horns  const.  ^i"lp;  T\^  of  the  feminine  plural  suffers 
no  change  mibp  voices  const,  rii'ip. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  vowel  ending  of  the  masculine  plural 
construct  is  added  to  feminine  nouns  ^^.3  (the  accent  invariablj"  thrown 
back  by  §  35.  1),  commonly  in  the  K'thib  "rTTaa  const,  of  T'i'bs  high-places, 
•^rrN'p  1  Sam.  26:  12;  this  takes  place  regularly  before  suffixes,  §  219.  2. 

§  217.  1.  In  a  mixed  final  syllable  Kamets  is  com- 
monly shortened  to  Pattahh:  so  is  Tsere  when  preceded 
by  Kamets;  other  vowels  remain  without  change,  "* 
hai2d  const.  T,  ZZXZ  seat  const.  nb'TJ,  ^i^^iiS  neck  const. 

-'  T  -  '  T    - 

"iJ^-iS,  "ifej  old  const.  "|pT,  nb  heart  const,  sb,  "ni^S  mighty 
man  const,  ^iiiy. 

a.  Kamets  remains  in  the  construct  of  t^lX  porch,  DPS  writing,  *|pg 
gift,  'ZV  cloud  (once  const.  2?  Ex.  19:  9),  tiirc  decree  and  D^  sea,  e.  g. 
nbisrrn"^  sea  of  salt,  except  in  the  phrase  CilD  c^  sea  of  iceed,  i.  e.  Red  Sea; 
so  too  in  ri'O  portion,  and  rkp  end,  which  are  contracted  froniH'b  roots, 
§213. a;  sl^nwaZ^  becomes  D^n,  and  "hb  tvhite"{2)>  Gen.  49:  12  in  the  construct. 

b.  Tsere  remains  in  Tzirn  five  const.  u;pn,  ','1^  mire  const.  ".')■;,  nfc"; 
breathing  const.  TB^,  ~fr"  heel  const.  -i^V. ,  in  the  SV  derivative  "SC  shield 
const.  li"a  and  in  bhx  found  in  several  proper  names.  It  is  occasionally 
shortened  to  Seghol  before  Makkeph  in  Vhx  mourning  const.  "V^N,  TV  time 
const,  ry,  ~rr  and  Tq,  tC  name  const,  fid,  "DC  and  ~cr;  "3  son,  Avhich  in 
the  absolute  retains  Tsere  before  Makkeph,  Gen.  30:  19,  Ezek.  18:  10,  has 
in  the  construct  "3,  "'2  or  "S.  Tsere  is  shortened  to  Tattahh  in  a  few 
cases  not  embraced  in  tlie  rule,  viz.:  '"  nest  const.  "'|I^,  Vfrr  rod  const.  bf?"3 
and  ^i?p,  "I3X  Deut.  32:  28  perishing  const,  of  T3X,  the  Kal  participles  of 
Lamedh  gtittural  verbs,  §  126.  1,  and  the  following  nouns  with  prefixed  a 


§218 


THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  231 


in  several  of  which  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  likewise  changed  to  Hhirik, 
§  192.  a,  "i'l"?"2  tithe  const.  "liL"^;^,  li?P'2  mourning  const.  "iQO^,  rins"?  key  cDnst. 
nriSp  and  nnsp,  yi'^?  lair  const.  ""3"io,  np-?  clamour  const,  nj-i-a,  "3''^? 
matrix  const.  ~i3':3^,  HTO^  corruption  const,  rindo,  list'a  oZ^flr  const.  ri2't^. 
C.  Hholem  is  shortened  to  Kamets-Hhatuph  before  Makkepli  in  the 
construct  of  monosyllables  from  'SV  roots,  ph  statute  const,  pn  and  ~pn, 
rarely  in  other  words  "'b'la  Prov.  19:  19,  Ps.  145:  8,  Nah.  1:3  (in  the  last 
two  passages  the  K'thibh  has  bnlS),  -"in'J  Job  17:  9,  Prov.  22:  11,  -,-32p 
Ex.  30:  23,  "Cbo  Ex.  21:  11;  this  becomes  Pattahh  before  the  guttural  in 
"naa  for  i^bj  construct  of  ni^  Jiiffh.  b'S  kol  construct  of  bs  all  occurs  twice, 
viz.:  Ps.  35:  10,  Prov.  19:  7,  without  a  Makkeph  following,  §  19.  2.  6;  it 
must  not  be  confounded  Avith  bs  kdl  Isa.  40:  12  he  comprehended  pret.  of  b>l3. 

d.  The  termination  "^  becomes  \  in  the  construct,  §  57.  2  (5),  "^'i 
enough  const.  ^'^,  "^ri  life  const.  ""Ii. 

e.  Three  monosyllabic  nouns  form  the  construct  by  adding  a  vowel, 
3X  father  const.  3X  Gen.  17:  4,  5,  elsewhere  13s,  MX  brother  const,  '^nx, 
571  friend  const.  ni;-i  2  Sam.  15:  37,  1  Kin.  4:  5,  or  nin.  2  Sam.  16:  16, 
Prov.  27:  10  K'thibh.  These  may  be  relics  of  the  archaic  form  of  the 
construct,  §  222,  or  the  monosyllables  may  be  abridged  from  nb  roots, 
§  187.  2.  d. 

2.  In  a  simple  final  syllable  n,_  is  changed  to  11,,  n^ 
sheep  const,  nir,  ti$'^  shepherd  const.  Jli'l,  Tn'^  field  const. 
H'lip;  other  vowels  remain  unchanged. 

a.  This  is  an  exception  to  the  general  law  of  shortening,  which  obtains 
in  the  construct.  It  has,  perhaps,  arisen  from  the  increased  emphasis  throAvn 
upon  the  end  of  the  word,  as  the  voice  hastens  forward  to  that  which  is 
to  follow.  In  like  manner  the  brief  and  energetic  imperative  ends  in  Tsere 
in  nb  verbs,  while  the  fatiire  has  Seghol,  §  170.  c.  An  analogous  fact  is 
found  in  the  Sanskrit  vocative.  The  language  of  address  calls  for  a  quick 
and  emphatic  utterance;  and  this  end  is  sometimes  attained  by  shortening 
the  final  vowel,  and  sometimes  by  the  directly  opposite  method  of  length- 
ening it.     Bopp  Vergleich.  Gramm.  §  205. 

6.  ilQ  mouth  has  '^Q  in  the  construct. 

c.  Nouns  ending  in  quiescent  X  preserve  their  final  vowel  unchanged 
in  the  construct,  N^^  fearing  const,  xn^,  xh::  host  const.  KS'^. 

§  218.  1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  commonly  rejected 
from  the  syllable  preceding  the  accent,  U\p'2  p)lace  const. 
Dij:!^^,  niir  year  const,  fii'^r,  D'i'iT  years  const,  "pip,  ni'hliis 
treasures  const,  rii^^ij^,  D^i^  hands  const.  ''T,  jib  heart 
const.  3ib,  nibn  wrath  const,  nbn. 

a.  Kamets  preceding  the  accented  syllable  is  retained  (1)  when  it  has 
arisen  from  Pattahh  before  a  guttural  in  consequence  of  the  omission  of 
Daghesh-forte,  irnn  (for  UJ^n)  tvorkman  const.  'Si^'n,  ttjns  (ffi^Q)  horseman 


232  ETYMOLOGY.  §  218 

const.  ir^Q,  r>r"'i9  (rc^Q)  vail  const.  nzSo,  nns  ((i^S)  distress  const.  n^S; 
(2)  in  words  from  i"r  and  "^V  roots,  C"'^"  (from  i^~)  cities  const.  "-^V ,  D"X3 
(from  X*2)  coming  const.  "^i<;2;  so  likewise  where  Kamets  quiesces  in  X, 
a'rX"^  heads  const.  ''irS'i ;  (;0  under  a  prefixed  to  ST  roots,  ~fe^  (from 
~:D)  covering  const.  Tib's,  "i'3  (from  '_::.)  s/ii>W  const.  '|i"3,  Tir^  (from  TTr) 
fortress  const.  t'ii."2;  (4)  in  rib  derivatives  of  the  form  r.iiby  (from  ri33)  exi/e 
const,  r.'ij,  ri;n  meditation  const,  n^in.  (5)  in  the  construct  dual  and 
plural  of  triliteral  monosyllables  or  Segholates  from  xb  and  rib  roots,  ff^^nb 
(from  "^nb)  cheelxS  const,  ^nb,  D"''';"!?  (from  "^n;)  iirfs  const,  "^.^na,  C^X'jn  (from 
x::r!)  sins  const.  "X::)!;  (6)  in  the  following  nouns  in  most  of  which  it  stands 
immediatelj^  before  or  after  a  guttural,  §  60.  3.  c,  nbx  curse,  i^'^^'P  cave, 
nbrn  conduit,  and  the  plurals,  "Nn^n,  '^^'^'n,  "'isij?  Lev.  7:  38,  "'SliN'J;,  ''V^J.yCi, 
•^i'-^Sri,  "^i'^p,  "^nro  2  Kin.  12:  8,  ^r50  Ezek.  27:  9,  "^nS^p  Job  34:  25,  '^X'^P'S, 
■nrr  Eccles.  9:  1,  ''t:".^"'i:^. 

6.  Tsere  is  retained  in  words  in  which  it  quiesces  in  the  vowel-letters 
X  or  "^j  n'l'rX"!  beginning  const.  r.'^"!rx"i,  bb'ri  temple  const,  bs'^ri,  and  in  ad- 
dition in  the  following,  Ciibx  crib,  "liix  girdle,  "lisx  thread,  "ibj  foreign 
land  const.  "^=3,  <Ti2X  loss  const.  rin^X,  so  iibsx  Isa.  58:  10  darkness, 
ni-12  pool,  nbn  robbery,  nisa  Ex.  22:  2  theft,  nsap  plague,  iibsnp  orer- 
//iroMJ,  iinrti  Gen.  49:  5  sword,  HrSp  molten-image,  nn';i-a  Job  16:  13  gall, 
!Ti:~5  ^ca;),  "k"^  excrement,  tiixFi  fig-tree,  i^h'i'T}  deep  sleep,  and  the  plurals 
'b^N  mourning  from  t;"'b3N  (bhx),  so  ^??sn  desiring,  "^io";  sleeping,  "^n^iJ  and 
"■^ri":':j  rejoicing,  "^nrd  forgetting,  "^ixi  icolves  from  C^hsT  (SXT);  D'^rS";  weary 
becomes  '^i?"'^"^  in  the  construct,  and  C'iiba  escaped  "^ii^bs.  Tsere  also  re- 
mains in  the  const,  r'vi  stveat,  "^np  from  np  dead,  "''Hr  from  n?  itifness, 
which  are  from  12?  roots,  and  iis"),  '•■b'^^  from  rn  friend,  root  nyn. 

e.  Hholem  is  rejected  from  the  syllable  before  the  accent  in  ri'iJ'S'iX 
const,  pi.  of  V^'JX  palace,  ni'irirx  and  r'rrw'X  const,  pi.  of  brrs  cluster, 
-pxn  Cant.  4:  5  and  "'pNn  Cant.  7:  4  ticins,  "^rps  from  nira  high-places, 
see  §  216.  2.  a;  it  is  changed  to  H  in  '\i'2i:p  from  n'^it::p  treasures,  comp.  §  88. 

d.  Medial  Vav  and  Yodh,  though  they  may  retain  their  consonantal 
power  in  the  absolute,  quiesce  in  Hholem  and  Tsere  in  the  construct,  T\^7\ 
midst  const,  ""in,  nirriT  cups  const,  niirp,  r"3  house  const,  n^a,  01:;^^  foun- 
tains const,  nirr,  x-^a  valley  const.  x"^a,  pi.  rvNa,  §  210.  3.  c,  const,  r'x'^a 
Ezek.  35:  8.  Exceptions  are  rare,  bli  (according  to  Kimchi  and  Baer  h'V) 
Ezek.  28:  18  iniquity,  "'i"]"!'?  Prov.  19:  13  contentions,  ^XJ^  neck  const,  "ix-i^ 
and  '^^Xr.i,  y.V  iniquity  const.  '|"1jJ. 

e.  A  few  nouns  of  the  forms  biji?,  bb;^,  hbp^  have  b;;^  or  b^;?  in  the 
construct  instead  of  bi;p,  §  61.  1.  b,  nna  wall  const,  "i-ia,  bia  robbery  const, 
bta,  T\t'';  '/'?^A  const.  Tj";;!^ ,  123  Aeary  const.  123  and  123,  rifns  shoulder 
const.  Cirs,  bn?  uncircumcised  const,  bis  and  bis,  "liys  smoke  const.  '(wS 
and  "I'rr,  rbk  side  const,  rbk  and  rbk;  ~~X  long  is  only  found  in  the  con- 
struct, the  corresponding  absolute  was  probably  T|~X;  ~2"3  helmet  simply 
shifts  its  accent  in  the  construct,  tnis.  On  the  olher  hand,  wiiile  most 
Segholate  nouns  suffer  no  change  in  the  construct,  a  few  adopt  the  form 
'Vpi   "in  chomber  const.  lin,  yii  seed  const,  once  "riT  Num.  11:7  else- 


§  218  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  233 

-where  3>"iT,  2>^.3  plant  const.  S^3,  "nJii:  foetus  const,  "liita,  5Ja'!r  seren  const. 
SatU,  ydn  ni«e  const,  siarn;   in  like  manner  bnn  vanity  const,  ^rn. 

2.  When  this  rejection  occasions  an  inadmissible  con- 
currence of  vowelless  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a 
S3^11able,  §  61.  1,  it  is  remedied  by  inserting  a  short  vowel 
between  them,  commonly  Hhirik,  unless  it  is  modified  by 
the  presence  of  gutturals,  bkb:i  tinkling  const,  b'^t'^  for  blibil. 
D^n^"1  words  const,  '"nn'l  for  ^^Il"1,  rij>i:2  righteousness  const. 

!n]^'722,  pi.  riipn:!  const.  Mp"^,  ri'^riz  &eas^  const,  r^'-nii, 

D^blDH  wise  const,  ^bjll.  In  the  construct  plural  and  dual 
of  Segholates,  however,  the  vowel  is  frequently  regulated 
by  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  singular  which  has 
been  dropped,  comp.  §  210.  2,  n^bbl2  from  t^bi:  ("bi^)  kings 
const,  ^bb'2,  n'b2-o  (i2n-ii)  tribes  const.  ^liri,  nii-^j  (•,■^3) 
threshing-floors  const.  riiD"]3,  riis'iil  (nS"]?])  reproaches  const. 
nife'in,  D;nb'n  (T\bM  or  rib'i)  folding  doors  const.  ^Inb'n;  yet 
not  invariably  Q"'b:^'a3  (bl^'i;)  handfuls  const,  ^bs^d,  ripiij 
trough  (pi.  riiripr)  const.  riinpiT. 

a.  When  in  the  construct  plural  the  introduction  of  a  new  vowel  is 
demanded  by  the  concurrence  of  consonants,  the  syllable  so  formed  is  an 
intermediate  one,  so  that  the  following  Sh'va  is  vocal,  and  the  next  letter, 
if  an  aspirate,  does  not  receive  Daghesh-lene,  thus,  "^"ib"^,  "^^^p,  ri'ih?^, 
rii3")n  not  "i^b"]  etc.  §  22.  a.  3.  Exceptions  are  infrequent  as  dH-'X  Deut.  3:  17, 
"tpl;?  Lam.  3:  22  (in  some  editions)  but  "^npn  Ps.  89:  2,  niE-n  Ps.  69:  10, 
^B"1l2  Ezek.  17:  9,  -'■'^■0^  Isa.  5:  10,  "lEd"!  Cant.  8:  6  but  " 'S'JT  Ps.  76:  4; 
so  with  grave  suff.  tn"^Qp3  Gen.  42:  25,  35,  Ciri"^3p3  Lev.  23:  18  and  in  some 
editions  Cnvh-^i^  Neh.  4:  7.  In  a  few  in.stances  Daghesh-forte  separative 
is  inserted  to  indicate  more  distinctly  the  vocal  nature  of  the  Sh'va,  §  24.  5, 
"•^hn  Isa.  57:  6,  ^h^y  Lev.  25:  5,  '''z^V  Isa.  58:  3,  ''b.\p-J  Gen.  49:  17,  nii;?:? 
Ps.  89:  52,  rS^'ii'SJ  Prov.  27:  25,  or  compound  Sh'va  is  taken  instead  of  simple 
for  the  same  reason,  nihl^TZ:  Gen.  30:  38.  The  presence  or  absence  of 
Daghesh-lene  in  the  dual  construct  depends  upon  the  form  of  the  absolute, 
thus  "^nsb  from  Q'^riS'^  lip'^  but  '^S'la  from  tJ';i)"i2  knees.  When  the  con- 
curring consonants  belong  to  different  syllables  a  new  vowel  is  not  needed 
between  them;  one  is  sometimes  inserted,  however,  after  a  guttural,  '^i"'?'"?, 
niD"!?^  but  nihrno.  In  the  opinion  of  Ewald  "'C'lir'TD  Ezek.  7 :  24  is  for' 
''•ii^pa  from  D"i-i3^p:^,  and  ni'Iipr;  Ex.  26:  2:-i,  36:  28  for  ni;::p-2;  they  may 
be  better  explained,  however,  as  Piel  and  Pual  participles. 

6.  The  second  syllable  before  the  accent  rarely  undergoes  any  change. 
In  a  very  few  instances  Seghol  becomes  Hhirik  or  Pattahh,  the  pure  vowels 


234  ETYSIOLOGY.  §  219 

being  reckoned  shorter  than  the  diphthongal,  comp,  §  212.  e.  f^^^";."2  cha- 
riot const.  r\33")'Q.  The  changes  in  i^in^  flame  const,  nanb  pi.  P^'i^n?  const. 
niin^,  D'^Bn^  coaU  const,  '^^ra  are  due  to  the  influence  of  the  proximate 
vowel.s,  §  63.  1;  those  in  "irjn  vision  const.  'p^TH,  n'ira  coats  const.  r:'rr 
are  consequent  upon  the  dropping  of  Daghesh-forte,  §  61.  5;  that  in  C"'bns 
(from  bliN)  tents  const,  "^nx  arises  from  the  couversiou  of  a  simple  into  an 
intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3. 


Nouns  with  Suffixes. 

§  219.  The  pronominal  suffixes,  whose  forms  are  given 
§  72 ,  are  appended  to  nouns  in  the  sense  of  possessive 
pronouns,  ""  /umd,  ^T  7ny  hand,  etc.  They  suffer,  in 
consequence,  the  following  changes,  viz : 

1.  Of  the  suffixes,  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  ?J, 
D^j  '|5  of  the  second  person  are  connected  with  nouns  in 
the  singular  by  a  vocal  Sh'va,  ^D  of  the  first  person  plural 
and  7]  of  the  second  fem.  singular  by  Tsere,  and  ^n,  ",  C, 
"  of  the  third  person  by  Kamets;  ^n^  is  invariably  con- 
tracted to  i,  rarely  written  n',  §  62.  1,  and  H^  to  »n  , 
§  101.  2. 

a.  Thei-e  is  one  example  of  a  noun  in  the  construct  before  the  full  form 
3f  the  pronoun,  X^fl  '•h-'^  her  days  Nab.  2:9;  but  this  is  best  t-xplained  a- 
in  abbreviated  relative  clause  the  days  that  she  has  existed. 

b.  First  person:  ^13  is  in  a  few  instances  preceded  by  Kamets,  i:r."~- 
Ruth  3:  2,  ^i:^"';?  Job  22:  20. 

Second  person.  The  final  vowel  of  ~  is  occasionally  expressed  by  the 
vowel  letter  n,  T^'p''^  Ex.  13:  16,  nz-ir;;  Jer.  29:  25.  In  pause  the  Sh'va 
before  T^  becomes  Seghol,  §  65,  '.'^^z.v  Gen.  33:  5,  :n:El  Ps.  139:  5,  or 
Kamets  may  be  inserted  as  a  connecting  vowel,  particularly  after  nouns 
in  ri  ,  whereupon  the  final  Kamets  is  dropped  to  prevent  the  recurrence 
of  like  sounds.  "iH  Ps.  53:  6.  In  the  feminine  the  connecting  vowel  e  is 
rarely  written  ^,  ""'ri'^w^  Ezek.  5:  12;  '^.,  which  belongs  to  the  full  form 
of  the  pronoun,  §  71.  a  (2),  is  sometimes  added  to  the  sufiix,  "^rv^i^  J*^'- 
11:  15,  ''rir'ina  Ps.  116:  19,  "Z'^O  2  Kin.  4:  7  K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  has 
~i;r3.  Sometimes  the  distinction  of  gender  is  neglected  in  the  plural  and 
C=  is  used  in  place  of  the  feminine  ",=  ,  ni:"^3X  Gen.  31:  9,  C^:^*<,  cbX-^ 
Jer.  9:  19;  n  is  sometimes  added  to  the  feminine  suffix  as  to  the  full  pro- 
noun, n::rET  Ezek.  23:  49. 

Third  person.  The  connecting  vowel  before  in  and  fi  is  occasionally  e, 
^nr^5  G<:-n.  1:  12,  in'i-;^"^Q  Judg.  19:  24,  W^'^'c  Kah.  1  :  13,  innix  Job  25:  3, 
so  iini:':.   from  ?n  and  ^'rh—2  from  ?-p  and  frequently  with  nouns  in  n^.- 


§219 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  235 


init'ia  and  nx'iri  from  rt^"ip,  llTiiU  from  STib,  ^Hin'Q,  1(1^1^;  e  does  not 
occur  before  the  plural  D  unless  it  is  represented  by  the  vowel-letter  "^  in 
C^mnaiD  2  Chron.  34:  5  K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  has  Dninaf^;  it  is  once 
found  in  the  fem.  plural  MJS'ip  Gen.  41 ;  21.  The  form  n  in  the  masc.  sing, 
is  commonly  reckoned  an  archaism,  i^''!^5<  Gen.  12:  8,  iTT^ir  Ps.  42:  9,  riSs 
Jer.  2:  21,  so  several  times  in  the  K'thibh  n^'^S',  nniD  Gen.  49:  11,  Tn^'J^i 
Ex.  22:4,  nn-DD  Ex.  22:  26,  nD03  Lev.  23:  13,  n^libtt:  2  Kin.  9:  25,  nni<'',nn 
Ezek.  48:  18,  where  the  K'ri  in  each  instance  substitutes  i.  In  a  few  in- 
stances the  consonant  is  rejected  from  the  feminine,  ti  being  retained  simply 
as  a  vowel-letter;  where  this  occurs  it  is  commonly  indicated  in  modern 
editions  of  the  Bible  by  Haphe,  n^riZJ  Lev.  13:  4,  nx-uifi  Kum.  15:  28,  or  by 
a  Massoretic  note  in  the  margin,  ii3:rx  Isa.  23:  17.  18  for  i^i^rx;  once  S  is 
substituted  for  n,  N53  Ezek.  36:  5.  The  longer  forms  of  the  plural  suffixes 
Dii,  "irt  are  rarely  affixed  to  nouns  in  the  singular,  IH'na^  Gen.  21:  28,  "1^220 
Ezek.  13:  M,  'i^T\'^'y:i  Ezek.  16:  53,  or  with  the  connecting  vowel  Kaniets, 
nri|3  2  Sam.  23:  6,  or  with  n^  appended,  fi:ri|3  1  Kin.  7:  37,  f^;f7=■i^l  Ezek. 
16:  53.  The  vowel  ii  is  also  sometimes  added  to  the  briefer  form  of  the 
fem.  plural,  f^J^^'b  Gen.  21 :  29,  ni'is  Gen.  42:  36.  The  distinction  of  gender 
is  sometimes  neglected  in  the  plural,  Q  or  fiH  being  used  for  the  feminine, 
d|3  Cant.  4:  2,  6:  6  for  lis,  th^T.  Job  1:  u'for  'fT'T.- 

c.  The  nouns  ^X  father,  rtN  brother,  ilQ  mouth  take  the  ending  ">,  be- 
fore suffixes,  as  they  do  likewise  in  the  construct  state,  ^"^ilX ,  Q5"iDX;  so 
too  Dtl  father-in-law  T\''^'^,  ii'^^U;  "^^  of  the  first  person  coalesces  witti  this 
vowel,  "^bx,  '^riN,  ''B  and  in  of  the  third  person,  commonly  becomes  1  §  62.  2, 
rhs,  rnx,  Iiq  more  frequent  than  lili^X,  IH^HX,  niTiQ .  In  ^."15  Zeph.  2:  9 
the  vowel-letter  "^  of  the  first  person  suffix  is  dropped  after  the  final  "^  of 
the  noun. 

2.  The  masculine  plural  termination  D*',  and  the  dual 
ni_  are  changed  to  "' _  before  suffixes  as  in  the  construct 
state;  the  same  vowel  is  likewise  inserted  as  a  connective 
between  suffixes  and  feminine  plural  nouns  §  216.  2.  a. 
This  ''..  remains  unchanged  before  the  plural  suffixes; 
but  before  ^  the  second  masc.  singular  and  m  third  fem. 
singular  it  becomes  "'  ,  and  before  the  remaining  suffixes 
the  diphthongal  vowel  is  resolved  into  ^.,  which  combined 
with  ■',  the  first  singular  forms  "'.,  with  7]  the  second 
feminine  tT"  ,  and  with  ^n  the  third  masculine  T  ,  8  62.  2. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  suffixes  are  appended  to  feminine  plurals 
without   the   vowel   \    or  its   modifications,   "^rrnn    2  Kin.  6:  8   for  "hinp, 

•>n^';  Ps.  132: 12  for  inSs;,  rf}ii^  Dent.  28 :  59  for  r|-nb:^,  "nrr?  Ezek.  16  :  52 
for  T^'ni'^rix,  taHax  and  tri^risx,  onrix  Ps.  74:4,  crxiin,  crnn-in,  Drr2-p, 
Onhap.     On  the  other  hand,  suffixes  proper  to  plural  nouns  are  occasionally 


236  ETYMOLOGY.  §  220 

appended  to  feminine  nouns  in  the  singular,  perhaps  to  indicate  that  they 
are  used  in  a  plural  or  collective  sense,  "lipui^n  Lev.  5 :  24,  ?|"'n|f7ri  Ps.  9 :  J  5, 
V]'^nX3b  Ezek.  35:  11,  T]':r;:f5  Isa.  47:  13. 

b.  The  vowel-letter  i  is  not  infrequently  omitted  after  plural  and  dual 
nouns,  rjbn-l  Ex.  33:  13  for  ^■'='^'n,  nb^•^  Ps.  134:  2  for  Dr-^n-^,  n^^J  Ex.  32: 19 
K'thibh  (K'ri  T^n^p),  nas  1  Sam.  18:  22  K'thibh  (K'ri  I'^'i^r),  ch^i^  Gen. 
10:  5  for  t:ni';i'i5,  )r\^hr\  Gen.  4:  4  for  "in'^abn. 

c.  Second  person.  The  vowel  "^^  remains  unchanged  before  the  fem. 
sing.  Tj  in  T|"b''V^  Keel.  10:  17  and  with  n  appended  inirxbp  Nah.  2:  14. 
8ometiu)es,  as  in  the  full  pronoun,  '' ^  is  appended  to  the  fem.  sing,  suffix 
and  n^  to  the  plural,  tii-^xsibnn  Ps.  103:  3,  I'^^^^jri  ver.  4,  n;i:"irirp3  Ezek. 
13:  20^ 

Third  person.  The  uncontracted  form  of  the  masc.  sing.  !in'i_  occurs  in 
Jirr^^ias  Nah,  2:  4  for  I'^HaSt,  iinin;;  Hab.  3:  10,  >in-r?  Job  24:  23;  ehu  = 
aihu  by  transposition  of  the  vowels  becomes  aula  =  olii  "^rii  wliich  is  found 
once  '^ni3^"2;ri  Ps.  116:  12,  and  is  the  ordinary  form  of  this  suftix  in  Palestine 
Aramaeic.  The  final  a  of  the  fem,  sing,  is  once  represented  by  N,  5<lT'p"'r\ij; 
Ezek.41 :  15.  In  a  few  instances  n  is  appended  to  the  plural  of  either  gender, 
n^jn^bx  Ezek.  40:  16,  nrn-^r^is  Ezek.  1:11,  and  i  to  the  abbreviated  masc, 
D,  'i^"'n?N  Deut.  32:  37,  i^'^n^T  ver,  38,  •i'2'^Q3  Job  27:  23,  'io"':3  Ps,  11:  7. 

3.  The  suffixes  thus  modified  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

Appended  to  smGULAB.  PLURAL. 

\c.   2m.    If.  Zm.  Zf. 

Sing.  Nouns      "^ .     tI  _      TT        *1       T\ 

Dual  and   |    ^      ^,      ^^      ^^      p., 
Plur,  Nounsj      -     'I  •••     'V-        t      t  •,• 

§  220.  Certain  changes  likewise  take  place  in  nouns 
receiving  suffixes,  which  arise  from  the  disposition  to 
shorten  words,  which  are  increased  at  the  end,  §  66.  2. 
These  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  The  grave  suffixes,  §  72,  05,  "5,  Dn,  "jH  shorten  the 
nouns,  to  which  they  are  attached,  to  the  greatest  possible 
extent.  Before  them,  therefore,  nouns  of  both  genders 
and  all  numbers  take  the  form  of  the  construct,  125  heart, 
Dbnnb  your  heart,  "(iriZlb  tlieir  hearts;  nS'ir  lip  du.  Dn'rE'iZJ 
pi.  Dn'ririS'^r  their  lips. 

a.  on  blood  becomes  Dd^^  and  i";  hand  ^^"-i^,  §§  58.  2,  63,  2.  a. 

2.  Feminine  nouns,  both  singular  and  plural,  take  the 
construct  form  before  the  light  suffixes  likewise,  with 


1  c.     2  m. 

2f. 

3  m. 

3/: 

^2..     C3?, 

)?: 

D 

T 

I 

^2'..  ^T- 

l?^. 

°~'.. 

rr.. 

§  220  NOUNS  WITH  SUTFIXES.  237 

the  exception  that  in  the  singular  the  ending  r\_ becomes 
ri^  in  consequence  of  the  change  from  a  mixed  to  a  simple 
syllable,   §   59,  HS^  lip,  ihsic  his  lip,   D^SiT  their  lip, 

^j^ninzir  thy  lips,  VhinEb  his  lips. 

a.  If  the  construct  has  a  Segholate  form  it  will  experience  the  change 
indicated  in  5,  M^^^'a  const.  riVii'3'5  suf.  iri^^yri'a.  If  two  consonants  have 
coalesced  in  the  final  letter,  it  will  receive  Daghesh-forte  agreeably  to  6, 
■ina  from  na,  in^X  from  nix,  :~|Wa^  l  Sam.  16: 15  from  the  fem.  of  nvM, 
§  207.  b. 

h.  In  a  few  exceptional  instances  the  absolute  form  is  preserved  before 
suffixes,   ■'^33  Isa.  26:  19  from  n^as  but  r,nba3,   isn^aJ ;   ''VS^  Cant.  2:   10 

from  ns;  const,  ns'^;  so  "'obN,  i^'H"!'!?,  rnnn"],  Di^nyaiy  but  const,  njjaia, 
comp.  dn^y-a  const.  ">i?3. 

3.  Masculine  nouns,  both  singular  and  plural,  on 
receiving  light  suffixes  take  the  form  which  they  assume 
before  the  absolute  plural  termination,  lib  heart,  "QZib 
my  heart,  ^^^b  thy  heart,  ^!3^i^b  our  hearts. 

a.  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  is  shortened  to  Hhirik  or  Seghol  before  T^, 
na,  15,  e.  g.  r;3a,  tirjnpia,  dblp^sp,  or  with  a  guttural  to  Pattahh,  T^anx, 
DD^xh,  though  with  occasional  exceptions,  ^(l?:ax  Isa.  22:  21,  '^^-p  1  Sam. 
21:  3,  TjXpa  from  XS3.  Before  other  suffixes  it  is  rejected  from  some  mono- 
syllables, which  retain  it  in  the  plural,  *>h^  from  d'j  plur.  niiiu,  isa  from  "ja 
plur.  Ci'^ia  but  "^b,  V^ia,  "ir"!  ,  t^^;"i.   QDJ-ari  Ezek.  5:  7  from  '•iiin  is  exceptional. 

4.  Dual  nouns  retain  before  light  suffixes  the  form 
which  they  have  before  the  absolute  dual  termination, 
"ihiir  my  lips,  '^TT\t'^  our  lips,  ""iT^  my  ears,  ^ri)T!!j  our  ears', 
Q^tlp  '"i^tI  "^"kl?  horns,  TT^J^  and  vb'^p  his  horns. 

5.  Segholate  nouns  in  the  dual  and  plural  follow  the 
preceding  rules,  but  in  the  singular  they  assume  before 
all  suffixes,  whether  light  or  grave,  their  original  mono- 
syllabic form  as  before  the  feminine  ending  H^,  §  210, 
T]bb  king,  ^i^b'2  my  king,  D!b3b/.3  your  king]  'T^5  ear,  ^DTi<  my 
ear;  in  like  manner  T\p^^''  sucker,  inpDi^  his  sucker. 

a.  Tsere  in  the  first  syllable  of  Segholates  is  commonly  shortened  to 
Hhirik  before  suffixes,  §  210.  2,  but  if  the  first  radical  be  H  or  S?  it  usually 
becomes  Seghol  e.  g.  Is'bfl,  ia^tl;  153  and  123  retain  the  Seghol  of  the  first 
syllable.  Hholem  is  commonly  shortened  to  0,  but  in  a  few  instances  to  w, 
■iiipp,  "iBia  and  i^ia  ;  "lOa,  'Scrt  and  nab'  irregularly  take  Hhirik  before  i 
3  pers.  suf.  iiriri  but  "^S'^n.     When  the  middle  radical  is  a  guttural  it  takes 


238  ETYMOLOGY.  §  220 

compound  instead  of  simple  Sh'va  before  suffixes,  which  before  ^  and  Q3  is 
changed  into  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  "i^-i,  ^"^>3.  When  the  first 
radical  has  Hholem  in  the  absolute,  Hhateph-Kaniets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph 
is  sometimes  given  to  the  second  radical  before  suffixes,  ili^^S  and  "Oi'h  from 
b?B,  'i'fl'^p^  Hos.  13:  14,  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  'izp  Ezek.  26:  9, 
"bl?  1  Kill.  12,  10,  •iBizC  Isa.  9:  3,  ^bzQ  Jer.  4:  7;  X3  garment  has  "iisa, 
■1133  instead  of  ">n53,  "1^33. 

b.  Middle  Yodh  and  Vav  mostly  quiesce  in  e  and  o  before  suffixes,  ''i'^V 
from  'i*;?  f-y^*,  "^ni^  from  TTtb  death;  but  nn'^^"  Gen.  49:  11  from  *^lb  young 
ass,  ■ir'^d  Isa.  10:  17  from  n-^iy  f/«orn,  'iBi.?  Ezek.  18:  26,  33:  13  from  bi3 
iniquUy.  Final  Yodh,  which  quiesces  in  the  abs.  sing,  resumes  its  con- 
sonant character  before  suffixes  "'"'"iS  from  ''"Q,  vbn  from  "'bin;  so  Vav  "^iV't?? 

c.  Triliteral  monosyllables  sometimes  shift  their  vowel  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  thus  assuming  the  same  form  with  Segholates,  comp. 
§  186.  a,  "ir^'n  from  dan,  "iirr  from  Drj,  but  vi^3  from  cSs;  r^h^  from 
■'lis;  "i^nc,  fps,  0="^"Q,  D^ns  but  Cn-i-iQ  from  i^Q;  rn'i',  T^'^nd  but  a="^3'a 
from  ''bp.  By  a  like  transposition  SsSDS'  Ezek.  36:  8  is  for  oi:E:;[  from  ra?. 

d.  Tlie  noim  1'w;n  blessedness,  which  only  occurs  in  the  plural  construct 
and  with  suffixes,  preserves  before  all  suffixes  the  construct  form,  rp^^X, 
liyw'X  not  "pniax,  '^"''y^'^f 

6.  Nouns  in  whose  final  letter  two  consonants  have 
coalesced,  or  which  double  their  final  letter  in  the  plural, 
§  209.  2,  receive  Daghesh-forte  likewise  before  suffixes, 
the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  being  modified  accordingly, 

^ky  and  ^b  from  TS"  (root  TT^) ,  Dinn  from  ns  (ri?^),  ^2:n^^ 
from  "jir.N  (pi.  D^|;^^5). 

a.  -;'^"5<  lattice,  b'b'^S  garden,  33'r'2  refuge,  which  do  not  occur  in  the 
plural,  take  Daghesh-forte  before  suffixes;  nsd  has  in  the  plural  rinsC 
but  before  suffixes  inS'r,  CrnsU;  '3  (root  "|33)  base  has  ^12,  "23.  Pattahh 
becomes  Hhirik  before  the  doubled  letter  as  in  the  fern,  and  plur.,  §  209.  2.  o, 
in  the  following  from  VS  roots,  nil  fear,  1p  garment  Ci^"?  and  i^p),  CIO  6a» 
f^in,  ra  morsel,  la  side. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  a  final  liquid  is  repeated  instead  of  being 
doubled  by  Daghesh,  comp.  §  209.  2.  a,  ^nnn  Jer.  17:  3,  '■n'^n  Ps.  30:  8, 
on-in  Gen.  14:  6  from  in;  iBbri  Job  40:  22  and  ir:!  from  b^;  "^''^  Ezek. 
16:  4  and  T\^'^'C  Cant,  7:  3.  Once  Daghesh-forte  is  resolved  by  the  insertion 
of  5,  ri''rV{'^  Isa.  23:  11  for  f^'^h^O,  §  54.  3. 

7.  Nouns  ending  in  n^  drop  this  vowel  before  suffixes 
as  before  the  plural  terminations,  §  211.  1,  rn'iSjield  ""fJDf 

tj-TD,  r^Y^;  ^W^  <^«^^^6  ^^T<^' 

a.  The   vowel  e  commonly  remains  as  a  connecting  vowel  before  suf' 


§  221  NOUi^S  WITH  SUFFIXES.  239 

fixes  of  the  third  person  singular,  §  219.  1.  b;  and  in  a  few  instances  the 
radical  "^  is  restored,  giving  to  singular  nouns  the  appearance  of  being 
])lural,  n-iiriJ  Isa.  22:  11,  vJ'^S^?^  Hos,  2:  16,  Cn'^V'i?  Isa.  42:  5,  fl'^  sheep  be- 
comes V^  or  ^n^b. 

§  221.  As  the  changes  produced  by  the  terminations 
for  gender  and  number,  the  construct  state  and  suffixes 
are  thus  dependent  upon  the  character  of  the  syllables, 
of  which  the  nouns  so  affected  severally  consist,  the  de- 
clension of  nouns  may  be  best  represented  by  dividing 
them  according  to  their  syllabic  structure.  Hence  results 
the  following  scheme. 

A.  Masculine  Nouns. 

Declension  1.  Segholates. 

Segholates  drop  their  unessential  vowel  and  revert 
to  their  primary  monosyllabic  form  in  the  singular  be- 
fore suffixes;  if  the  second  radical  is  a  guttural,  it  will 
take  compound  Sh'va,  which  before  ^ .  D^ .  becomes  a 
short  vowel  §  220.  5;  in  the  plur.  (as  other  nouns  in  both 
numbers)  they  take  with  light  suffixes  the  same  form  as 
before  the  abs.  plur.  ending,  with  grave  suffixes  the  form 
of  the  construct,  §  220.  1  and  3.  In  the  plur.  abs.  they 
drop  their  principal  vowel  and  take  pretonic  Kamets 
§  210.  3;  this  too  is  dropped  in  the  plur.  const.,  which 
gives  rise  to  a  new  syllable  §  218.  1  and  2.  Medial  Yav 
and  Yodh  quiesce  except  in  the  sing.  abs.  §  210.  3.  c, 
218.  1.  d,  220.  5.  b. 

Declension  2.  Mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  may  be  dissyllables  or  poly- 
syllables whose  first  vowels  are  unchangeable  as  "ji^ST. 

These  vowels  are  dropped  in  the  const.  §  218,  before 
fem.  and  plur.  endings,  §  212,  and  suffixes.  Kamets  in 
the  ultimate  and  Tsere  preceded  by  Kamets  are  in  the 
const,  sing,  changed  to  Pattahh,  §  217. 1,  and  in  the  const. 


240  ETYMOLOGY.  §  221 

plur.  rejected,  thus  giving  rise  to  a  new  syllable  §  218. 
1  and  2. 

Declension  3.  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  and 
no  other  mutable  vowel. 

Nouns  belonging  to  this  declension  may  be  mono- 
syllables or  may  have  in  the  penult  either  a  long  un- 
changeable vowel  as  ^ilX  or  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed 
syllable  as  T]%"2.  The  few  words  in  which  Kamets  in 
the  ultimate  is  unchangeable  as  ihs,  nir,  rip  §  217.  1.  a 
do  not  belong  to  tliis  declension. 

Kamets  becomes  Pattahh  in  the  const,  sine:.  S  217.  1. 
and  is  dropped  in  the  const,  plur.  §  218.  1.  Tsere  com- 
monly becomes  —  or  —  before  ",  CD  and  "D,  §  220.  3.  a; 
it  is  dropped  in  the  plur.  and  before  light  suffixes  except 
from  monosyllables,  which  retain  it  in  the  abs.  plur., 
§  209. 1,  and  sometimes  also  before  light  suffixes,  §  220  3. a. 

Declension  4.  With  final  n    (accented). 

These  nouns  are  from  r/'b  roots;  H..  becomes  n_  in 
the  const,  sing.,  §  217.  2,  and  is  dropped  before  fem.  and 
plur.  endings,  §  211,  and  before  hght  suffixes.  Kamets 
or  Tsere  in  the  penult,  though  rejected  in  the  const., 
§  218.  1,  is  retained  before  fem.  and  plur.  endings,  §  212. 

Declension  5.  Nouns  which  double  their  final  con- 
sonant. 

These  are  mostly  from  •"y  roots  and  shorten  their  last 
vowel  (if  long)  before  the  doubled  letter. 

a.  The  fiist  three  declensions,  as  above  given,  correspond  remarkably  with 
the  three  divisions  of  Class  I  of  nouns  according  to  their  formation,  §  184. 
Declension  1  is  identical  with  the  first  division.  Declension  2  embraces  the 
second  division  and  in  addition  all  other  nouns,  of  whatever  class  they  may 
be,  which  have  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult.  Declension  3  em- 
braces the  third  division  and  in  addition  all  otlier  nouns  which  have  but 
one  mutable  vowel  and  that  a  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  ultimate.  The  two 
remaining  declensions  include  peculiar  forms  arising  from  imperfect  roots. 
Those  belonging  to  4  are  from  H'b,  and  a  large  proportion  of  5  are  from  I'b 
roots.  Declension  1  in  feminine  nouns  answers  to  masc.  declension  1 ;  fem.  3 
and  3  embrace  to  a  certain  extent  forms  derived  from  masc.  2  and  3. 


§  222  PAEAGOGIC  VOWELS.  241 

B.  Feminine  Nouns. 

Declension  1.   The  feminines  of  Segholates. 

This  embraces  the  forms  "btop,  VibW,  ribt:p,  fbx:p, 
n!it:p,  which  reject  their  first  vow^el  in  the  plur.  abs.  and 
insert  pretonic  Kamets  §§  210.  3,  213,  which  in  its  turn 
is  rejected  in  the  construct  thus  causing  the  return  of 
the  original  vowel,  §  218.  1  and  2.  Nouns  in  H^  have  T\_ 
in  the  const,  sing.,  §  216.  1,  and  T\i  in  the  plur.  §  201; 
before  suffixes  they  take  the  form  of  the  const,  ex- 
cept that  they  have  D^  in  the  sing,  before  hght  suffixes 
§  220.  2. 

Declension  2.  Nouns  in  Ti^  with  pretonic  Kamets 
or  Tsere. 

These  are  rejected  in  the  const,  and  before  suffixes, 
thus  giving  rise  to  a  new  syllable,  if  an  initial  vowelless 
consonant  precedes  §  218.  1  and  2. 

Declension  3.  Nouns  with  the  fem.  ending  n. 

See  §§  213,  209.  1.  c?  and  e. 

These  declensions  are  shown  in  Paradigms  XIV,  XV 
and  XVI.  Nouns  not  embraced  in  these  declensions 
undergo  no  change  in  the  body  of  the  word,  whether  in 
the  construct  or  on  receiving  fem.  and  plur.  endings  or 
suffixes;  they  may  be  represented  by  C^D  and  JIC^O,  which 
are  shown  in  aU  the  forms  that  they  assume  in  both  num- 
bers and  with  suffixes  in  Paradigm  XV. 

Paeagogig  Vowels. 

§  222.  The  termination  ^^  or  i  is  sometimes  added  to 
nouns  in  the  construct  singular,  §  61.  6,  "Din  Gen.  49 :  11 
for  -jn,  'nsb'^  Isa.  1:21  for  nxblD,  ^nnn  Lam.  1:1  for 
nran,  "Vst:?  Ps.  113:6  for  b'B'j:i2,  ih";?!  Gen.  1:24  for 
n^n.    This  occurs  chiefly  in  poetry  and  is  regarded  as  an 

16 


242  ETYMOLOGY.  §  223,  224 

archaism,  §  201.  e.  These  vowels  for  the  most  part  receive 
the  accent,  and  commonly  occasion  the  rejection  of 
Pattahh  or  Tsere  from  the  ultunate. 

a.  Examples  of  this  antique  formation  of  the  construct  are  likewise 
preserved  in  proper  names,  as  pys-'^'sh-o  Melchizedek,  nbiriPTa  Methuselah. 

§  223.  1.  The  unaccented  vowel  H^  added  to  nouns 
indicates  motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  §  201.  e, 
fzit'^  northward,   HSro  soufhivard,   ri'jrli'd  heavemvard. 

TT  't:v  t;-t  ' 

nr'ian  to  the  house,  oiKo-Jbe  nnrin  to  the  mountain,  whence 

t:--  '  TTT  ' 

it  is  called  He  directive  or  He  local.  The  subsidiary 
vowel  of  Segholates  is  rejected  before  this  ending,  §  66. 
2  (2)  a,  but  other  vowels  are  mostly  unaffected,  nD";^  from 
"p3,  ns^nk  from  v^s,  rr7r'2  from  liiTj,  n^nn:a  1  Kin.  19: 15 
from  the  construct  state  "li^'ia. 

a.  He  directive  is  appended  to  the  adverb  0^5  there,  'iVB'^  thither,  and 
to  the  adjective  ^"^Bn  profane  in  the  peculiar  phrase  rib"^Bn  ad  profanum 
i.  e.  be  it  far  f?-om,  etc.  It  is  rarely  used  to  indicate  relations  of  time, 
fraio'i  t3"'5:^^  1  Sam.  1 :  3  from  days  to  days  i.  e.  yearly,  nnijilpiy  Ezek. 
21:  19  for  the  third  time,  nn?  now  prop,  at  (this)  time.  For  the  sake  of 
greater  force  and  definiteness  a  preposition  denoting  direction  is  sometimes 
prefixed  to  words,  which  receive  this  ending,  so  that  the  latter  becomes  in 
a  measure  superfluous,  n?"::"?  npirards,  niiib  dorvnica7-ds,  nr;~"'2*p  2  Chron. 
31:  14  to  the  eai^t,  ns'si'rp  Ps.  9:  18  fo  Sheol,  comp.  d'!r6  [j.aKpo~^sv. 

h.  The  ending  n^  rarely  receives  the  accent  innnTri  Deut.  4:  41;  in 
B~iX  nD~Q  it  receives  in  some  editions  an  alternate  accent,  §  39.  4.  o,  in  others 
the  secuiidary  accent  Methe^h,  §  35.  1,  In  nnn  Gen.  14:  10  and  nrr.p  a 
is  changed  to  e  before  this  ending,  §  63.  1,  in  nr^n  Ezek.  25:  13,  nni  1  Sam. 
21:2  the  vowel  of  the  ending  is  itself  changed  to  e. 

2.  Paragogic  H^  is  sometimes  appended  to  nouns, 
particularly  in  poetry,  for  the  purpose  of  softening  the 
';ermination  without  affecting  the  sense,  §  61.  6. 

Numerals. 

§  224.  1.  The  Hebrew  numerals  (•SCian  XSht)  are 
)f  two  kinds,  cardinals  and  ordinals.  The  cardinals  from 
Dae  to  ten  are  as  follows,  viz.: 


224 

NUMERALS. 

Masculine. 

Ahf^ol. 

Consfr. 

One 

ir^ 

Two 

W'y^ 

'5^ 

Three 

nbb-d 

ri'jjb^ 

Pour 

T    T  :  - 

n^i^'^5 

Five 

nis";n 

^"4?t?n 

Six 

nis'i 

ri'iTiij 

Seven 

T   :     • 

n?2i23 

Eight 

T           ; 

nitiD 

Nine 

n^irn 

Ten 

nn'^y 

mh^ 

243 


Feminine. 

^feso?. 

Constr. 

nh5< 

nns 

trT^_ 

^ri'^ 

irbizi 

r 

12:3"^ 

yn-is 

>'^";« 

••    T 

^^n 

tt 

125^ 

3?ni2: 

yniij 

nibizj 

niaii 

vtr\ 

yirn 

^■^3? 

nici? 

o.  ins  is  for  inx,  §  63.  1.  a;  the  Seghol  returns  to  Pattahh  from  which 
it  has  arisen,  upon  the  shortening  of  the  following  Kamets  in  the  construct 
and  in  the  feminine,  nnx  for  ri-inS;,  §  54.  2,  hut  in  pause  J^nX;  ^nx  occurs 
in  the  absolute  in  Gen.  48:  22,  2  Sam.  17:  22,  Isa.  27:  12,  Ezek.  33:  30, 
Zech.  11:7,  and  once  nn  Ezek.  33:  30.  The  plural  D'^inx  is  also  in  use  in 
the  sense  of  one  or  the  same,  Gen.  11:  1,  joined  in  one  Ezek.  37:  17,  or 
some,  Gen.  27:  44,  29:  20.  Comp.  Span.  unos. 

d'^ri'^  is  for  DTO'ci;  for  the  Daghesh  in  r  see  §  22.  6;  this  ia  once 
omitted  after  Daghesh- forte,  "'Pir^  Judg.  16:  28. 

A  dual  form  is  given  to  some  of  the  units  to  denote  repetition,  Q'^n"3'lX 
fourfold,  d']ri>3'r  sevenfold. 

h^ad  occurs  once  with  a  paragogic  syllable,  I^D^aTlJ  Job  42:  13,  and 
once  with  a  suffix  in  the  form  Qtn^nd  2  Sam.  21:9  K'ri. 

2-  In  all  the  Semitic  languages  the  cardinals  from 
three  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the  singular  number,  and  have 
a  feminine  termination  when  joined  to  masculine  nouns, 
but  omit  it  when  joined  to  feminine  nouns.  The  expla- 
nation of  this  curious  phenomenon  appears  to  be  that 
they  are  properly  collective  nouns  like  triad,  clecad,  and 
as  such  of  the  feminine  gender.  With  masculine  nouns 
they  appear  in  their  primary  form,  with  feminine  nouns, 
for  the  sake  of  distinction,  they  u  idergo  a  change  of 
termination. 

a.  An  analogous  anomaly  meets  us  in  this  same  class  of  words  in  Indo- 

16* 


244 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  225,  226 


European  tongues.  Tlie  Sanskrit  cardinals  from  -five  to  ten,  though  they 
agree  in  case  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong,  are  in  form  of  the 
neuter  gender  and  in  the  nominative,  accusative  and  vocative  they  are  of 
the  singular  number.    In  Greek  and  Latin  they  are  not  declined. 

§  225.  The  cardinals  from  elemn  to  nineteen  are 
formed  by  combining  "liby  or  nV^>;  modifications  of  the 
numeral  ten  with  the  several  units,  those  which  end  in 
n^  preserving  the  absolute  form  and  the  remainder  the 
construct.   Thus, 


MASCULINE. 

FEMININE. 

Eleven 

1                                      T    T                 

\.                    XT            ••     ;  " 

Twelve 

Thirteen 

^v  nirb^ 

n^ir>;  tlm 

Fourteen 

nib:?  ny^^it^ 

T    r               T    T    1  - 

ti^t'j  yz"^ 

Fifteen 

•n-b^"  r^'2n 

nt'i":  Hit?" 

Sixteen 

T    T                    T      • 

ri-T>;  iL'q 

Seventeen 

^ir:^'  r;>^"^ 

rn-^^'y  yi'oj 

Eighteen 

nib:^'  nib'^ 

n^^"  r^ 

Nineteen 

*"b>'  ni'^n 

n^'iLs  T!zr\ 

a.  There  have  been  many  vain  conjectures  as  to  the  origin  of  ''riwy, 
the  alternate  of  IriX  in  the  number  eleven.  R.  Jona  thought  it  to  be  an 
abbreviation  for  "i*j?  iwj  IS  next  to  twelve.  Comp.  Lat.  undeviffinti,  nine- 
teen. Kimchi  derived  it  from  nl"?  to  think,  ten  being  reckoned  upon  the 
finger,  and  eleven  the  first  number  which  is  mentally  conceived  beyond.  It 
has  how  been  discovered  to  be  another  form  of  the  numeral  one,  of  which 
this  is  the  only  trace  in  Hebrew,  but  which  has  been  preserved  in  the  As- 
!<yrian  istin  =  one. 

nrr  n-rrn  fifteen  occurs  Judg.  8:  10,  2  Sam.  19: 18,  and  I'iJS  nibp  eigh- 
teen Judg.  20:  25. 

§  226.  1.  The  tens  are  lormed  by  adding  the  mascuhne 
plural  termination  to  the  units,  D^'^i'ir:^  twenty  being,  how- 
ever, derived  not  from  two  but  from  ten  ^'"©3;. 

Twenty  C]^nb>'  Forty  D^i'n^S 


Thirty 


D-Ui^oj 


Forty 
Fifty 


D^^'^n 


227,  228 

NUMEEALS. 

2' 

Sixty 

u^^^ 

Eighty 

0^53^ 

Seventy 

n^i?2'j2 

Ninety 

D^>'zn 

245 


a.  These  numbers  have  no  distinct  form  for  the  feminine,  and  are  used 
indifferently  with  nouns  of  either  gender,  ri'-i^r  Ex.  18:  21,  25,  Deul.  1:  15 
means  not  hventy  but  tens. 

2.  The  units  are  added  to  the  tens  by  means  of  the 
conjunction  1  ancl\  the  order  of  the  precedence  is  not  in- 
variable, though  it  has  been  remarked  that  the  earhest 
writers  of  the  Old  Testament  commonly  place  the  units 
first,  e.  g.  D^l23'u:l  D':np  hvo  and  sixty  Gen.  5:18,  while  the 
latest  writers  as  commonly  place  the  tens  first,  □".Dir^  □^'©11) 
sixty  and  two  Dan.  9:  25. 

§  227.  Numerals  of  a  higher  grade  are  mJ^"^  one  hun- 
dred, vibij?  one  thousand,  uin"],  iil")  or  U^iia"]  ten  thousand. 
These  are  duphcated  by  affixing  the  dual  termination 
D'r)>5"J  two  hund^'ed,  Disbu^  tivo  thousand,  D'lnilll"]  or  "^ri'ja 
tlilil"]  twenty  thousand.  Higher  multiples  are  formed  by 
prefixing  the  appropriate  units  ri'^jk"'0  '(db'^  three  hundred, 
D"£b^^  iTuib'^^  three  thousand,  M5<i'i  UJU:  sixty  thousand,  !^|b^^ 
D'ab>5  one  million. 

•  T  -: 

§  228.  1.  The  ordinals  are  formed  by  adding  ""^  to 
the  corresponding  cardinals,  the  same  vowel  being  like- 
wise inserted  in  several  instances  before  the  final  con- 
sonant; "^'^^"^^  first  is  derived  from  uiu^^  head. 


First 

•jlUJi^n 

Sixth 

^•J3 

Second 

i^ 

Seventh 

^rnd 

Third 

^u:"^bT23 

Eighth 

^T'2t 

Fourth 

^r^i 

Ninth 

^r"in 

Fifth 

^TT^/in  or  "i23'^n 

Tenth 

^TTS| 

The   feminine   commonly 

ends 

in  n\, 

occasionally 

in  M^  . 

a.  There  are  two  examples  of  the  orthography  ','ic'^X"]  Josh.  21:  10, 
Job  15:  7,  and  one  of  'ivijin  Job  8:8,  in  all  of  which  the  K'ri  restores  the 
customarv  form. 


240  ETYMOLOGY.  §229,230 

2.  There  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  numbers  being  used  instead. 

3.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine 
ordinals,  n'ir^b'vT  one  thinly  n^i^^n")  one  fourth,  etc.,  and  by 
the  follo\ving  additional  terms,  ^i"  one  half  yir}^  and  J^uT 
one  quarter^  'cbiih  one  fifth,  "p"^:?  one  tenth. 

Prefixed  Particles. 

§  229.  The  remaining  parts  of  speech  are  indeclin- 
able, and  may  be  comprehended  under  the  general  name 
of  parti(;les.    These  may  be  divided  into 

1.  Prefixed  particles,  which  are  only  found  in  com- 
bination with  a  following  word,  viz.  the  article,  He  inter- 
rogative, the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Yav  con- 
junctive. 

2.  Those  particles,  which  are  written  as  separate 
words,  and  which  comprise  the  great  majority  of  adverbs, 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections. 

a.  No  word  in  Hebrew  has  less  tlian  two  letters;  all  particles  of  one 
letter  are  consequently  jrefixes.  There  is  one  example  of  two  prefixes  com- 
bined constituting  a  word  bn  Deut.  32:  6,  though  editions  vary;  three  are 
combined  in  bwa  Eccles.  8:  17. 

The  Article. 

§  230.  1.  The  Definite  Article  (nr^'r;  ^^M)  consists 
of  n  with  Pattahh  followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first 
letter  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  "^yz  a  kinij, 
Tjb^an  the  Icing. 

*i 

a.  As  the  Arabic  article   (Jl    is  in   certain   cases  followed  by  a  like 

doubling  of  the  initial  letter,  it  has  been  iniHgined  that  the  oritjinal  f.um 
of  the  Hebrew  article  was  hT\  and  that  the  Dayhesh-forte  has  arisen  from 
the  assimilation  of  h  and  its  contraction  with  the  succeeding  letter.  Since, 
however,  there  is  no  trace  of  sucli  a  form,  it  seems  better  to  acquiesce  in 
the  old  opinion,  which  has  in  its  favour  the  analog}'  of  other  languages, 
that  the  article  ti  is  related  to  the  personal  pronoun  Nin,  whose  principal 
consonant  it  retains,  and  that  the  following  Daghesh  is  conservative,  §  24.3. 


§  230  THE  ABTICLE.  247 

The  Arabic  article  is  supposed  to  be  found  in  the  proper  name  in'i'slsx 
Gen.  10:  26,  ^"'isbx  hail,  the  equivalent  of  Tli'^ij,  and  possibly  in  Wp^N 
Prov.  30:  3L 

b.  There  is,  properly  speaking,  no  indefinite  article  in  Hebrew,  although 
the  numeral  inx  one  is  so  employed  in  a  few  instances,  as  llnx  X'^ij  a  pro- 
phet  1  Kin.  20:  13. 

2.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  ShVa,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  tlie  aspirates,  §  25, 

^k'^'n,  nziTjn  but  nbnnn,  nrhsn. 

:  - '         ••  -   :    I-  T  T   :    - '        v       :    ~ 

a.  Daghesh-forte  though  usually  omitted  in  this  case  is  occasionally 
retained  e.  g.  rv^ati  2  Kin.  9:11,  nis^'^r"  Jer.  6:  2,  S'^V-'^S-jr]  Ex.  8:  1  but 
S^^sari  ver.  2,  n^SS"rt  Judg.  8:  15,  C-?^"*;!  1  Sam.  24:  3,  and  it  is  always 
•written  in  "^^.^n'ri  the  Jeio  and  D'^'isin'ri  the  Jews. 

3.  Before  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 
forte,  §  60.  4,  Pattahh  is  lengthened  to  Kamets;  the  short 
vowel  Pattahh  is,  however,  commonly  retained  before  n 
and  n,  and  sometimes  before  y,  the  syllable  being  con- 
verted into  an  intermediate,  §  18.  3,  instead  of  a  simple 
one,  brixn,  nhn,  t^'yTi  Gen.  15:11,  yir'^H  but  T^inn,  i^'TlTi, 

'  V  T  '  T     T  '  •  -     T  '  T  T    IT  1     V  -  '  -  ' 

t::?M  Jer.  12:  9. 

a.  The  article  very  rarely  has  Kamets  before  tl,  "^nti  Gen.  6:19,  D'OHPin 
Isa.  17:  8;  in  a  very  few  instances  initial  S  quiesces  in  the  vowel  of  the 
article,  ripSOxn  Num.  11:  4. 

4.  Before  n  with  Kamets  or  Hhateph-Kamets,  Pattahh 
is  changed  to  Seghol:  before  H  or  3?  with  Kamets,  it  is 
likewise  changed  to  Seghol  if  it  stands  in  the  second  syl- 
lable before  the  accent,  and  consequently  receives  the 
secondary  accent  Methegh,  3nn,  Di"n,  D^ic'irin,  D"''irin, 

•  r  IV 

a.  This  change  very  rarely  occurs  before  X,  ^^^2X11  Mic.  2:  7.  When 
n  is  followed  by  Kamets-Hhatuph,  Pattahh  remains  nODnti. 

b.  The  article  does  not  usually  affect  the  vowels  of  the  word  before 
which  it  stands;  in  lii  mountain  and  C^"  people,  however,  Pattahh  is  changed 
to  Kamets  to  correspond  with  the  vowel  of  the  article  "'nn,  Qrn,  so  j'"ij< 
earth  but  y'"xri.  The  plurals  of  bnx  tent  and  ^np  holiness  without  the 
article  are  Ci'^^vj'x  Gen.  25:  27,  C"^{l-'1|?  Ex.  29:37,  but  with  the  article  n-^r^^? 
(for  D'^^nxna)  Judg.  8:  11,  C^cniTin  Ex.  26:  33,  (?  210.  3.  b.  rxp?  pelican 
Isa.  34:  11,   Zeph.  2:  14,   is  pointed  nx^n  Lev.  11-,  18,   Deut.   14:  17   upon 


248  ETYMOLOGY.  §  231 

receiving  the  article;  so  ^Q  Num.  7:  15,  but  "in  Judg.  6:  26.  28.  The  em- 
phasis due  to  the  article  has  in  these  few  instances  an  effect  analogous  to 
that  of  the  pause  accent  in  prolonging  the  principal  vowel  of  the  word. 

5.  When  preceded  by  the  inseparable  prepositions 
the  letter  n  of  the  article  is  mostly  rejected,  and  its  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition,  §  53.  3,  D:"!:"i^2  for  D^;!:\2nn,  see 
§  232.  5. 

He  Interrogative. 

§  231.  1.  The  letter  H  (n^ij^r;  XH)  may  also  be  pre 
fixed  to  words  to  indicate  an  interrogation;  it  is  then 
pointed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh,  l]5:ri  shall  we  go?  iX^rr^btl^ 
is  he  not? 

2.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  becomes  Pattahli, 
§  61.  1,  r;:iT:-  Gen.  34:  31,  terbn  Job  18:  4,  -niir;  Jer. 
8:  22, 

a.  The  new  syllable  thus  formed  is  an  intermediate  one,  §  22,  and  the 
succeeding  Sh'va  remains  vocal,  as  is  shown  by  the  absence  of  Daghesh- 
lene  in  such  forms  as  criyn";n  Gen.  29 :  5.  In  order  to  render  this  still  more 
evident  i-ecourse  is  frequently  had  to  Daghe.»h-forte  separative,  §24.  5,  '^Ztn 
Gen.  17:  17,  .':ir;r"-.i2n  i8:  21,  Methe:j;h.  §  45.  2,  bi'^n  Judg.  9:  2,  nrrrn 
Job  38:  35,  or  compound  Sh'va,  §  16.  3.  b,  J^i"^?"  Gen.  27:  38. 

b.  He  interrogative  has  Pattahli  and  Daghesh-forte  in  one  instance  be- 
fore a  letter  with  a  vowel  of  its  own,  -i3"^"n  Lev.  10:  19. 

3.  Before  gutturals  it  likewise  usually  becomes  Pat- 
tahh,  'q'isn  Ex.  2:  7,  nirSH  2  Kin.  6:  22,  T^rryi  Jer.  2:11, 
n:^;n  Hag.  1:  4,  ysnn  Job  22:  3. 

a.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  He  interrogative  with  Kamets  before  S, 
la-'kn  Num.  16:  22,  Neli.  6:  11,  srsr!  Judg.  6:  31,  ■'P";i2Sn  12:  5,  ri'irrri  Jer. 
8:  19  (in  some  editions)  pointed  as  if  before  "'J'lX:  so  too  most  probably 
Dn^n  Deut.  2U:  19. 

4.  Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to 
Seghol,  nbsr.  Ezek.  28:  9,  rt^^rT}  Joel  1:  2,  Dirn  Eccles. 
2:  19;  see  also  Num.  11:  12,' 13:  18,  2  Sam.  19:  43,  Job 
13:  25,  21:  4. 

a.  This  rule  does  not  apply  to  Resb,  nE"in  Num.  13:  18,  l^'^N'^n  1  Kin 
20:  13. 


§  232  msepaeable  peepositions.  249 

Insepabable  Prepositions. 

§  232.  1.  The  prepositions  i  in,  5  according  to,  b  to, 
are  regularly  prefixed  with  ShVa,  m^TDt^^^l  in  the  beginning, 
b-i)  according  to  all,  Dlh'in^b  to  Abraham, 

2.  Before  vowelless  letters  this  Sh'va  is  changed  to 
Hhirik,  Tf)yi  for  Tti^^,  bfe'^Jb  for  bib'sb,  ni^S  for  1213,  in 
which  Yodh  quiesces  nn^JT'l,  nijb^3. 

3.  Before  gutturals  with  compound  ShVa  it  is  chan- 
ged to  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  "'lJit3,  bisb,  "''^n^. 

a.  Occasionally  b  takes  Pattahh  or  Seghol  before  an  infinitive,  whose  first 
letter  is  a  guttural  with  simple  Sh'va,  n'rix^  Ps.  105:  22,  niinb  Deut.  19:  5. 
Initial  Jt  quiesces  in  the  following  words  after  the  inseparable  prepositions, 
§  57.  2.  (2)  a,  "jiiN  master  when  connected  with  singular  suffixes,  ''3'IX  Lord, 
n'^Hh^.  God,  and  also  in  the  inf.  const,  ^ax  to  say  after  h,  "^i^NS,  'I'^iSxS, 
n-'iHx^,  ""i^X^,  B-^n'^xa  for  D'^n'lJNa  the  Seghol  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the 
simple  syllable,  "ili'^Nb  but  firi^JXb,  liixb  but  "iriX3,  "inxs.  Before  the  divine 
name  rtini  the  inseparable  prepositions  are  pointed  as  they  would  be  be- 
fore •'iSx  or  C^ribx ,  whose  vowels  it  receives,  §  47,  Hlhib  Gen.  4 :  3,  nVlT'b 
Ps.  68^:  21. 

h.  In  a  very  few  instances  X  with  Pattahh  and  "^  with  Hhirik  give  up 
their  vowel  to  the  preposition  and  become  quiescent,  '^'^^XS  Isa.  10:  13  for 
-I13N3,  linn^S  Eccles.  2:  13  for  Ti^n-^S,  §  57.  2.  (3). 

4.  Before  monosyllables  and  before  dissyllables,  ac- 
cented upon  the  penult,  these  prepositions  frequently  re- 
ceive a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  64.  2,  nbj<n,  rii^T3,  iTSib. 

a.  This  regularly  occurs  with  the  Kal  construct  infinitive  of  "J  S3,  "^S, 
"SV,  "I'S"  and  "135  verbs  when  preceded  by  b,  e.  g.  noib,  nnb,  H'l'lb,  anb,  S'^^b; 
also  with  different  forms  of  the  demonstrative  <TI  and  with  personal  suf- 
fixes; and  with  monosyllabic  or  Segholate  nouns  when  accompanied  by 
disjunctive  and  especially  pause  accents.  Before  the  pronoun  tvz  what  they 
are  commonly  pointed  Maa,  fias,  nab  or  followed  by  a  guttural,  irbb;  nab 
occurs  three  times,  all  in  the  same  verse  1  Sam.  1 :  8. 

5.  Before  the  article  its  n  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition,  "li^S  for  *ii'^n3,  yixb  for  yi^nb, 

Q^nnn  for  D^nnnn. 

•   T  iv  •  T  IV  : 

a.  n  remains  eight  times  in  di^fiB  e.  g.  Gen.  39:  11;  also  in  such  indi- 
vidual instances  as  D";^il"ri3  Ps.  36:  6,  T^'i^na  Neh.  9:  19,  Q=rjn3  Eccles.  8:  1, 
nii'fenns  Ezek,  40:  25,  D^a'nlpnb  1  Sam.  13:' 21,   na'innb  Neh.  12:  38,  QVnb 

-r:  '  \  • :  'ti-:  'tt: 


250  ETYMOLOGY.  §  233,  234 

2  Chron.  10:  7,  "i^in^til?  25:  10,  nbanb  29:  27,  Ci'^'^jn^  Ezek.  47:  22,  tinb 
Dan.  8;  16.  The  initial  ti  of  tlieHiphil  and  Niplial  infinitives  is  occasionally 
rejected  in  like  manner,  tr^arpb  Am.  8:  4  for  nisirnb,  'Bdra  Prov.  24:  17 
for  "ilirsvia. 

§  233.  The  preposition  '^  from,  though  used  in  its 
separate  form,  may  also  be  abbreviated  to  a  prefix  by  the 
assimilation  and  contraction  of  its  final  Nun  with  the 
initial  letter  of  the  following  word,  which  accordingly 
receives  Daghesh-forte,  ?["]T2  for  '?|")'^  y2.  Before  n  Hhirik 
is  commonly  retained  in  an  intermediate  syllable,  but  be- 
fore other  gutturals  it  is  for  the  most  part  lengthened  to 
Tsere,  "pu^j  for  y^n  "i?;:,  but  ^tlTiZ,  bin*^  1  Sam.  12:  23; 

V^j<'^,  Tiiyn^J,  D>"/J,  but  nvn*-,  ui^^. 

a.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  ShVa,  Daghesh-forte  may  be 
omitted.  This  is  occasionally  the  case  even  when  it  is  an  aspirate  "i"':*^'? 
Judg.  8:  2,  Dr"iO;T2  Ezek.  32:  30.  Daghesh-forte  is  twice  retained  in  an 
initial  vowelless  Yodh,  'rf^y^-q  2  Chron.  20:  11,  ■^3"^*'?  Dan.  12:  2,  but  com- 
monly it  is  dropped  and  the  Jodh  quiesces  W'iSi'a,  '^^■'3,  ""i'"? ,  "^"^^  •  "^ 
is  sometimes  poetically  lengthened  to  ^32,  and  once  has  the  form  of  a  con- 
struct plural,  •'SO  Isa.  30:  11. 

§  234.  These  prepositions  are  combined  with  the  pro- 
nominal suffixes  in  the  following  manner: 

SiNGULAB. 

"21  ''^  "Sits      "bj,    ^i^,  ^ihri 


p 


if.       PI3                 vh          rribs  "          rsa'i 

'                                      T                                                                        T                                           T              T  TV* 

Plueal. 

ift       ^±                !iDb          rj\iyz  «iri3-j 

2  m.     Dia                nib  Di3,  DDTjs  uira 

3  m.      d:i,  Dnn  ii^b,  Dhb  Dn2,  nnto  ons^j,  Dfi?^ 

a.  The  syllable  "io  inserted  between  3  and  the  suffixes,  and  which  is  in 


§235  VAV  CONJUNCTIVE.  251 

poetrj''  sometimes  added  to  13,  3  and  b  without  suffixes  to  convei't  them 
into  independent  words,  ■i"33,  i^S,  iia^i,  is  commonly  thought  to  be  related 
in  its  origin  to  the  pronoun  iio  ivhat,  so  that  "^siibs  would  in  strictness  de- 
note like  tchat  I  am,  i.  e.  like  me.  The  preposition  "|^,  with  the  exception 
of  some  poetical  forms,  reduplicates  itself  before  the  light  suffixes,  "^ii^'Q  = 
"3135^ .  Comp.  a  similar  reduplication  of  a  short  word,  "^pia  or  ^a  construct 
of  nih  water. 

Vav  Conjunctive. 

§  235.  The  conjunction  and  is  expressed  by  1  pre- 
fixed with  Sh'va,  1\tir\,  y^i^^l.  Before  one  of  the  labials 
S,  '2,  S,  §  57.  2  (1),  or  before  a  vowelless  letter  Vav 
quiesces  in  Shurek,  ^i^  1\bh^,  D^DS^,  b^'^^nb^.  Before  a 
vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in  which  the  Yodh 
quiesces,  DripD^l!,  "h'^).  Before  a  guttural  with  compound 
Sh'va  it  receives  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  ^D!S;1, 
T^b/l.,  '^V.'l.  Before  a  monosyllable  or  a  dissyllable  ac- 
cented on  the  penult  it  frequently  receives  a  pretonic 
Kamets,  particularly  if  it  be  the  second  of  two  closely 
connected  words,  Tib,)  ^Hin  Gen.  1:  2,  ^))  lit:  2:  9,  -^p) 
nY^)  DV1-q':]n3  Y:j?"l  Uh)  8:  22.  See  also  12:  19,  41:  11, 
Num.  16-  16,  beut.  32:  7,  Job  4:  16,  Ps.  55:  18,  63:  6, 
Eccles.  4:  8;  and  Pro  v.  24:  21,  25:  3,  Isa.  65:  17,  where 
a  word  is  interposed. 

a.  After  Vav  with  Shurek,  compound  Sh'va  is  sometimes  substituted 
for  simple  Sh'va  in  order  to  indicate  more  distinctly  its  vocal  character, 
a;it!|  Gen.  2:  12,  "^iupan?!  Ezek.  26:  21,  iTjSOsi  1  Kin.  13:  7,  T^??  Jer.  22:  20. 

6.  Vav  receives  Hhirik  before  He  or  Hheth  followed  by  Yodh  in  the 
forms  Dn'i'^rn,  ^"^ni,  Dni'^ni,  l^rn  2  plur.  preterite  and  imperative  of  the 
verbs  iT^ri  to  be  and  tT^n  to  live;  before  the  2  masc.  sing,  imperative  of  the 
same  verbs  it  has  Seghol,  •^.'^^l^.,  <^!^nTl.  for  fT^r!||i.,  n.'l'nv 

c  The  short  vowel  appropriate  to  the  guttural  is  taken  in  a  very  few 
instances,  even  when  the  latter  has  simple  Sh'va,  DI'^S'1  Gen.  32:  16,  "iiJ5^ 
Job  4:2.  X  quiesces  after  Vav  conjunctive  as  after  the  inseparable  prepo- 
sitions, §  232.  3.  a,  in  "liix  master  when  connected  with  singular  suffixes, 
lins  Lord  and  Diribx  God,  "^i^XI,  "j^Xl,  "'i^'^X,!'.,  ''3''6'^S<1  the  Seghol  being 
lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable.  Hence  also  nihil  when  nm^ 
has  the  vowels  of  ''3'iX.  A  very  few  instances  occur  in  which  X  with  Pat- 
tahh  and  "^  with  Hhirik  give  up  their  vowel  to  Vav  conjunctive  and  become 
quiescent,  "itoxi  Zech.  11 :  5  for  l^ySX"!,  n^^l  Jer.  25:  36  for  n^V"!. 


252  ETYMOLOGY.  §  236 

d.  The  rule  for  pretonic  Kamets  is  sometimes  extended  to  the  last  of 
three  connected  words,  tsj  a'abl  niiy  Lev.  7:  23,  C^l  nni  bina  Deut.  2:  10. 
21,  and  even  the  last  two  i"iil  ',■D•::^  UJhl  Ezek.  27:  17;  and  to  Vav  con- 
versive  of  the  Preterite  at  or  near  the  end  of  a  clause  n^l  Gen.  44 :  9.  22.  31, 
n^ni  Ex.  1:  16,  Lev.  18:  5,  2  Kin.  7:4,  Prov.  24:  16,  Isa.  6:  10.  Other  cases 
are  rare  and  exceptional  e.  g.  y^.i^l  Isa.  26:  19,  the  first  vowel  of  y^k  being 
as  usual  assimilated  to  a  preceding  Kamets,  §  63.  2.  b. 


Separate  Particles. 

ADVEBBS. 

§  236.  1.  A  few  adverbs  of  negation,  place  and  time, 
are  commonly  classed  as  primitive,  although  they  are 
probably  related  to  pronominal  roots,  as  b&5  and  i^b  not, 
DID  there,  Ti<  then. 

T  '  T 

a.  It  is  natural  to  suspect  that  the  pronominal  root  h,  which  gave  rise 
to  the  near  demonstrative  bx,  tibx  these  and  to  the  prepositions  indicative 
of  nearness  or  approach,  b  to,  bx  unto,  and  which  has  a  remote  demonstra- 
tive force  in  Mxbn  yonder,  beyond,  may  also  be  the  basis  of  xb  and  bx  the 
idea  of  remoteness  taken  absolutely  forming  a  negation.  The  same  idea,  in 
a  less  absolute  sense,  may  be  traced  in  the  conditional  conjunction  ^ib  if. 
The  pronoun  nt,  of  which  probably  u3  is  originally  only  a  modification 
(comp.  the  relative  use  of  ^rt,  §  73.  1),  is  plainly  connected  with  15*  at  that 
time  and  D";3  in  that  place. 

2.  Derivative  adverbs  are  formed 

(1.)  By  affixing  the  terminations  D^  or  D*,  §  201.  e, 

D313S  and  D^'riJ  truly  from  "-IS  truth,  Din  gratuitously  from 
1"  P'dce,  W^IT  by  day  from  Di"'  day,  Djb"*"]  in  vain  from  p"*"] 
empty,  DbirB  suddenly  from  >"rB  moment,  Dirbi^  the  day  he- 
fore  yesterday  from  ^bU3  three. 

(2.)  By  abbreviation,  as  !]!^  surely,  only  from  "Di<. 

(3.)  By  composition,  as  y^TJ  why?  from  Tr,";^  TT2  quid 
edodus,  'nby'hb'^2  from  above  from  ":?,  b  and  Tib^h. 

3.  Besides  those  adverbs,  which  are  such  originally 
and  properly,  other  parts  of  speech  are  sometimes  used 
as  adverbs.   Thus 

(1.)  Nouns,  'ik'2  mightily,  exceedingly  iproip.  might,  S'iD 
around  prop,  circuit,  li?  again  prop,  repetition,  CSX  no 


§  237  SEPAEATE  PARTICLES.  2i>3 

more  prop,  cessation;  with  a  preposition,  ^i</^^  exceedingly, 
"ihh  apart  prop,  to  separation,  or  a  suffix  Tnn^  together  prop, 
m  zYs  union.  Compare  the  adverbial  accusative  and  ad- 
verbial phrases  of  Greek  and  other  languages. 

(2.)  Absolute  infinitives,  which  are  really  verbal  nouns, 
Sti^fl  well  prop,  recte  faciendo,  MlkL"]!!  much,  ih"J  quickly. 

(3.)  Adjectiv.es,  particularly  in  the  feminine,  which  is 
used  as  a  neuter,  nit:  well,  ^'2  fully,  ni'iTi^"]  at  first,  fi'DTa 
the  second  time,  T&T^  and  mil"!  much,  fi'^i^n'^  m  Jewish  i.  e. 
Hebrew,  T\'^'j2'lt^_  in  Aramceic,  nisbSD  wonderfully. 

(4.)  Pronouns,  flT  /2ere,  now  prop.  if7i2S  ^Zace,  ^/ifs  time, 
n2n  hither  prop,  ^o  these  places,  with  a  preposition  Jib  ^/ms 
prop,  according  to  it,  i^^  so  perhaps  for  "jhs  according  to 
these  things,  though  others  explain  it  as  an  adverbial  of 
the  participle  "jS  right,  true,  TiB  here  probably  for  i^l  in 
this  (place). 

§  237.  A  few  adverbs  are  capable  of  receiving  pro- 
nominal suffixes,  as  "jJl  or  tihtl  behold,  *li:?  yet,  ^i<  where, 
to  which  may  be  added  "j'^X  there  is  not  prop,  non  existence 
and  IT";  there  is  prop,  existence.  As  the  idea  of  action  or 
of  existence  is  suggested  by  them,  they  take  the  verbal 
suffixes,  frequently  with  D  epenthetic.   Thus 

1.  nsn.  First  person  "DDH,  "Sbn  and  "SSn;  ^i:n,  ^iin  and 
*132n.   Second  person  masc.  ^2n  once  nDBH;  DDin,  fem.  tjin 
Third  person  isn  and  ^nsjl;  DSH. 

2.  li:?.  First  person  ^liys  and  ''li:?;  once  with  ^/wr 
^^''liy  Lam.  4:17  K'ri.  Second  person  masc.  tjii:?  fem.  'n'hiy. 
Third  person  masc.  ^Bli?,  Dli:?  fem.  t^fiys. 

3.  ''i?,  Second  person  T\^^)^.    Third  person  i^H^,  U^^. 

4.  I'^i?.  First  person ''^T^.  Second  person -masc. '7iTi!f>, 
t3Dp';x,  fem.  'q^^5.  2%^Vc?  person  masc.  ^I'il'i?,  Drs  and  i'J^rj? 
fem.  n^Ti<. 

5.  '0\  Second  person  ^tt.^,  DbTS,';  and  I^D^^  Third  per^ 
son  i3T2J\ 


2'i4  ETYMOLOGY.  §  238,  239 


Prepositions. 

§  238.  1.  The  simple  prepositions  in  most  common 
use,  besides  the  inseparable  prefixes,  §  232,  are  chiefly 
^ni<  behind,  after  'b^  to,  wzto,  b'lif,  beside,  riX  with,  'j-SL 
between,  "nb^  without,  "?:i  through,  T&ii  except,  "|5j;  on  ac- 
count of,  bi"^  or  b^7J  over  against,  133  in  j^resence  of,  nip3  in 
front  of,  before,  1?  unto,  bs  upon,  D5  with,  TTji]  under. 
Most  of  these  appear  to  have  been  originally  nouns ;  and 
some  of  them  are  still  used  both  as  nomis  and  as  prepo- 
sitions. 

2.  Other  prepositions  are  compound,  and  consist  of 

(1.)  Two  prepositions,  as  ^^jj^l2from  after,  T\k^2  and 
D3?/J  from  with,  bTC  from  upon,  nriFi'J  from  under,  '^2b 
from,  i;;ilb  and  MjHb  before,  b^ia'bx  toward. 

(2.)  A  preposition  and  a  noun  lib  and  ihb'D  besides 
from  1^  separation,  'p£b  before  and  "iS'J,  "psb"'?  from  be- 
fore from  W'^Qface,  b3:a  and  "^i^.la/or  the  sake  of,  TS  by 
prop,  by  the  hand  of,  "ilii^'bi^  beyond,  b  "'Zii';'-^  fiom  beyond, 
r53^b  in  conjunction  with,  l^/ib  and  Spj/'b?  o?z  account  of, 
"23,  "3b  and  'D'b?  according  to  prop,  a^  ^/^e  mouth  of. 

(3.)  A  preposition  and  an  infinitive,  riX^ypb  toward 
prop.  ^0  meet. 

(4.)  A  preposition  and  an  adverb,  ""l^bs  and  ""l^ba"^ 
without  from  b^  wo^  1?  unto,  b  Hi^bn'^.  beyond,  "'blS  without. 

§  239.  The  prepositions  take  suffixes  in  the  same 
manner  as  singular  nouns,  e.  g.  ^bliX  feesz^e  me,  "inb^T,  "'■^3:, 
'is?',  except  "ins  o/ifer,  "bs  to,  i?  w^^o,  b?  upon  and  rinn 
under,  which  before  suffixes  assume  the  form  of  nouns  in 
the  mascuhne  plural,  e.  g.  ^iny,  'J^^^HN,  V'^JHS;  "n  between 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine  plu- 
ral, and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  e.  g.  "D^a,  ira 

and  vrn,  ^rrn  and  ^rhiD^a. 


§  240,  241  CONJUNCTIONS.  255 

a.  The  plural  form  "innx  occurs  without  suffixes  more  frequently  than 
^"ij^;  '']?5<,  "^i?-:,  ''3?>  also  occur  in  poetry;  iias  from  the  absolute  nbs,  which 
appears  only  in  this  single  form,  is  used  as  an  alternate  of  laS  from  dS 
with  and  the  1  pers.  sing,  suffix. 

b.  nijn  in  a  very  few  instances  takes  a  verbal  suffix,  "^rririn  2  Sam.  22 : 
37,  40,  48,  and  once  has  Nun  Epenthetic  before  the  suffix  nsnPin  Gen.  2:  21 ; 
with  the  3  masc.  plur.  suffix  it  is  Dnnn  oftener  than  ofiinnn . 

§  240.  The  preposition  nx  with  is  to  be  distinguished 
from  nx  the  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  is  prefixed 
to  a  pronoun  or  definite  noun,  to  indicate  that  it  is  the 
object  of  an  active  verb.  With  pronominal  suffixes  the 
n  of  the  preposition  is  doubled  and  its  vowel  shortened 
to  Hhirik,  thus  ^n.S,  r^njs;,  Tjm  (once  1]nS!  Isa.  54:  10), 
Din5<;  the  sign  of  the  accusative  becomes  ni5<  before 
suffixes  or  before  grave  suffixes  commonly  nj5,  thus  ^r«, 
^ns,  nbX)y<  rarely  D5ni«,  Dni<  (rarely  ^hxm)  and  Dhrx. 

a.  Sometimes,  particularly  in  the  books  of  Kings,  Jeremiah,  and  Eze- 
kiel,  the  preposition  takes  the  form  ■'hix,  nnix. 

Conjunctions. 

§  241.  1.  In  addition  to  the  prefixed  copulative  1, 
§  235,  the  following  are  the  srniple  conjunctions  in  most 
common  use,  i5<  or,  V\^  also,  Di<  and  ^b  ifj  nizJ.N;  and  ^3  that, 
because,  "jS  lest. 

2.  Compound  conjunctions  are  formed  by  combining 
(1.)  Two  conjunctions  Di<  ^3  but,  ^3  qx  how  much  more 
prop,  also  that. 

(2.)  The  conjunction  ^3  or  nibS  with  a  preposition,  as 

^i23S3  as,  ')m  ^Tq)  in  order  that,  TiJwS  ")?:  and  nu;N  zj^i?  be- 
cause, "3  i:?  until,  ^3  nnri  because. 

(3.)  An  adverb  wath  a  preposition  or  conjunction, 
D-^bn  before^  'ph  or  -p'bl  therefore^  ^b^lb  unless  from  ^ib  ij 
fc<b  not. 


256  etymology.  §  242 

Interjections. 

§  242.  The  Hebrew  interjections,  like  those  of  other 
languages,  are  of  two  sorts,  viz.: 

1.  Natural  sounds  expressive  of  various  emotions,  as 

rii^,  nn,  nnx  ah!  oh!  Tkr\  aha!  ^in  ho!  woe!  "n^,  nHs, 

T  '  T  '  T   -:  TV  '  T  ' 

^ins,  •'i^  woe!  ^bbi?  alas!  DH  hush! 

2.  Words  originally  belonging  to  other  parts  of  speech, 
w^hich  by  frequent  use  were  converted  into  interjections, 
T\2h  come!  prop,  give,  tlDb  come!  prop,  go,  nrn  behold! 
prop,  a  demonstrative  adverb,  nb''!?n  far  he  it!  ""^  2^ay: 
from  ""i?^  entreaty,  5<3  now!  I  pray  thee! 


PART  THIRD. 

SYNTAX 

§  243.  1.  Syntax  treats  of  sentences  or  of  fhe  manner 
in  which  words  are  employed  in  the  utterance  of  thought. 
Its  office,  therefore,  is  to  exhibit  the  several  functions  of 
the  different  parts  of  speech  in  the  mechanism  of  the 
sentence,  the  relations  which  they  sustain  to  each  other, 
and  how  those  relations  are  outwardly  expressed. 

2.  Sentences  may  be  simple  or  compound.  A  simple 
sentence  is  the  expression  of  an  individual  mental  judg- 
ment. Two  or  more  such  judgments  united  in  one  con- 
nected utterance  form  a  compound  sentence,  the  several 
clauses  of  which  accordingly  consist  of  or  may  be  re- 
solved into  as  many  separate  simple  sentences. 

3.  Every  simple  sentence  must  embrace  first  a  sub- 
ject or  the  thing  spoken  of,  and  secondly,  a  predicate  or 
that  which  is  said  about  it.  Upon  these  two  elements  is 
built  the  entire  structure  of  human  speech. 

The  Subject. 
§  244.  The  subject  of  every  sentence  must  be  either 
a  noun,  as  D^hbs  i<)^  God  created  Gen.  1 :  1,  or  a  pronoun, 
as  "^DiJ  irii^  J(am)  hohj  Lev.  11:  44.  This  includes  infini- 
tives, which  are  verbal  nouns,  nia  5<b  p'ri^b  ms  to  punish 
the  just  is  not  good  Prov.  17:  26,  and  adjectives  and  par- 
ticiples when  used  substantively,  ^qx:  Kin^-j^b  an  unclean 

17 


258  BYNTAX,  §  245 

(person)  sJiall  not  enter  2  Chron.  23:19,  n^'lbbr;''  D*n^M  sb 
the  dead  shall  not  praise  the  Lord  Ps.  115:  17. 

a.  Tiie  subject  of  a  sentence  may  be  a  noun  preceded  by  a  preposition 
e.  g.  p  in  a  partitive  sense,  crrt""|r!  IN!!^  there  went  out  (some)  of  the  people 
Ex.  Ifi:  27.  2  Kin.  10:  10,  Ezr.  2:  68,  Neli.  5:  5,  Dan.  11:5;  or  in  a  local 
sense  ^yZ~2  li^^i  those  2>rocec(Uv(]  from  thee  shall  build  Isa.  58:  12;  or  the  par- 
ticle of  comparison  MX"?  "J33  (sometliing)  like  a  plague  has  apipcared 
Lev.  14:  35,  Ps.  74:  5.  snisD  f^;^!"^^  "i"^"??  the  like  of  which  has  not  been 
Ex.  9:  18,  11:  6,  2  Kin.  7:  19,  Dan.  10:  16,  18;  or  tSI  . . .  "O  in  the  sense 
of  both  . . .  and  ^nn:  n^n2-i?i  trnr±r\  qivg  both  the  fowl  of  heaven  and  the 
beasts  have  fled  Jer.  9 :  9. 

b.  Wlien  the  subject  is  an  infinitive,  it  is  sometimes  as  in  Eni^lisli.  pre- 
ceded by  the  preposition  h  to,  PiiniJib  iiu  (it  is)  good  to  giie  tluitiks  Ps. 
92:  2,  2  Chron.  26:  18,  Eccies.  7:  5,  Mic.  3:1  or  it  may  be  without  a  pre- 
position nnS]  ^rj  (it  is)  good  to  male  melody  Ps.  147:  1,  Prov.  25:  7,  28:  21, 
Ezek.  11:  3,  18:  3;  the  latter  is  necessarily  the  case  when  the  infinitive  is 
in  the  construct  before  a  following  noun  'i'^^b  DTXt^  TiVr!  I-i-'Sib  nian^s 
being  alone  (is)  not  good  Gen.  2:  18,  Ps.  133:  1.  Eoth  constructions  occur  in 
successive  clauses  1  Sam.  15:  22,  Prov.  17:  26,  18:  5,  and  even  in  the  same 
phrase  Prov.  2l:  9,  19. 

c.  The  subject  is  very  rarely  an  adverb,  ti:""",^  b?:  ^'"T^  many  (prop, 
much)  of  the  people  have  fallen  2  Sam.  l :  4. 

§  245.  The  subject  may  be  omitted  iii  the  following 
cases,  viz.: 

1.  When  it  is  sufficiently  plain  from  the  connection, 
?|i3^  lii-'n  is  there  yet  with  thee  (a  corpse)?  Am.  6:  10,  or 
is  obvious  in  itself,  rnb^  irij^  (his  mother)  ba^'e  him  1  Kin. 
1:  6,  Num.  26:  59,  1  bhron.  7:  14. 

a.  When  the  subject  of  a  sentence  or  clause  is  continued  from  the  pre- 
ceding it  is  ordinarily  not  repeated  Joel  2:  1  unless  in  passages  of  more 
than  usual  solemnitj'  and  emphasi.s  e.  g.  STi'SN  in  Gen.  1 :  3  ff .  Sometimes 
the  subject  is  suggested  by  a  prect-ding  object  either  direct  Gen.  15:  13, 
16:  6,  19:  11,  37:  15,  ;i9:  4,  44:  22,  Deut.  4:  9,  1  Sam.  17:  25,  Ps.  16:  8,  34:  1 
or  indirect  2  Chron.  19:  6,  Job  21:  19,  Ps.  22:  29,  Isa.  40:  14,  Am.  6:  2,  or 
by  a  noun  in  a  genitive  relation  Gen.  9:  6,  14:  2,  2  Sam.  20:  10.  Sometimes 
it  can  onlj'  be  generally  inferred  from  tlie  preceding  context  he  put  forth 
i.  e.  one  of  the  children  Gen.  38:  28;  they  brought  him  hastily  i.  e.  those 
sent  by  Pharaoh  41:  14;  it  is  turned  unto  me  i.  e.  what  formerly  passed 
through  the  t:ate  of  the  nations  Ezek.  26:  2,  Judg.  13:  19;  or  is  evident 
from  the  nature  of  the  case  as  in  the  frequent  ellipsis  of  God  as  the  sub- 
ject in  poetic  pas.-iiges  Isa.  38:  12,  13  and  particularly  in  the  book  of  Job 
17:  6,  20:  23,  21:  17,  23:  3  and  occasionally  even  in  prose;  or  is  first  ex- 
pressed in  a  subsequent  clause  or  sentence  Isa.  23:  1.  A  change  of  subject, 


§245 


THE  SUBJECT.  259 


where  the  sense  plainly  requires  it  is  often  left  to  be  infei-red  by  the  in« 
telligence  of  the  reader  or  hearer  Gen.  24:  32,  29:  3,  Ex.  10;  5,  34:  28, 
Deut.  33:  12,  2  Sam.  11:  13,  1  Kin.  9:  8,  9,  Mic.  2:6;  or  it  may  be  inti- 
mated by  the  insertion  of  a  personal  pronoun  Num.  35:  23,  Job  21:  22.    In 

1  Sam.  24:  11  the  subject  is  dropped  from  a  familiar  phrase,  Dnni  sell.  '^3"'?. 
Conip.  Deut.  7:  16,  13:  9,  Ezek.  20:  17. 

2.  When  it  is  indefinite;  thus,  if  an  action  is  spoken 
of  and  it  is  not  known  or  is  not  stated  by  whom  it  is 
performed.  The  third  person  plural  may  be  so  employed, 
b^S^'db  ^'h^'y  and  they  told  Saul  1  Sam.  18:  20,  or  third  per- 
son singular,  comp.  the  French  on  and  German  man,  tX^^ 
bna  TuZ'^  one  called  its  name  Bahel,  i.  e.  its  name  ivas  called 
Bahel  Gen.  11:  9,  or  the  second  person  singular,  particu- 
larly in  laws  or  in  proverbs,  the  language  of  direct  ad- 
dress being  employed  while  every  one  who  hears  is  in- 
tended, bCi  ^b"n'ir^ri"^b  thou  shalt  not  make  unto  thee  a 
graven  image  Ex.  20:  4,  23:  1,  Deut.  16:  1  if.,  28:  1  ff., 
!r|2b  '^Zr\i2b  HS^Zm  apply  thine  heart  unto  instruction  Prov. 
23:  12,  2:  Iff.,  Eccles.  11:  1. 

a.  Sometimes  ^iN  man  is  used  as  an  indefinite  subject,  d'^X  bz>|i"dX 
riirib  if  a  man  (i.  e.  any  one)  can  count  Gen.  13:  16,  23:  6,  41 :  44,  Ex.  21:7, 
34:  24,  Deut.  11 :  25,  1  Sam.  24:  20,  2  Sam.  16:  23  K'ri  (but  not  in  K'thibh), 
Ps.  49:  8,  17,  Prov.  6:  27,  28,  Eccles.  1:  8,  Cant.  8:  7,  Isa.  36:  6,  or  the  pro- 
noun of  the  third  person,  Job  28:  3,  Eccles.  7:1,  10:  10,  or  the  participle 
of  the  accompanying  verb  ?iii.i7  SJ'b^l  (I'nd  the  hearer  shall  hear  2  Sam. 
17:  9,  n-^Trin  vii-in  ploughers  ploughed  Ps.  129:  3,  Gen.  7:  16,  Deut.  22:  8, 
Isa.  28:  4,  Jer.  9:  23,  31:  5,  Ezek.  33:  4,  39:  15,  or  a  cognate  noun  T\r'^.  "^^^ 
and  a  king  shall  reign  Jer,  23:  5,  Am.  9:1,  comp.  nan  ni^  the  death  of 
him  that  dieth  Ezek.  18:  32.  By  a  like  idiom  the  indefinite  object  may  be 
expressed  in  terms  of  the  governing  verb  "13^  "I3'^>?  "irx  5^?<  "i^HX  I  shall 
speak  ivhutever  icord  I  shall  speak  Ezek.  12:  25,  Ex.  16:  23,   1  Sam.  23;  15, 

2  Sam.  15:  20,  2  Kin.  8:  1,  or  with  the  accessory  idea  of  the  sovereignty  of 
the  actor  Ex.  4:  13,  33:  19,  or  of  his  self  consistency  Ex,  3:  14,  comp. 
Deut.  9 :  25. 

b.  The  plural  is  used  where  the  action  is  one  in  which  several  are  en- 
gaged Gen.  41:  14,  43:  32,  Lev.  14:  40,  20:  27,  Num.  10:  3,  4,  17  :  3,  Deut. 
25:  1,  Josh.  10:  27,  24:  30,  Judg.  16:  7,  11,  2  Sam.  5:  17,  11:  20,  or  which 
may  be  predicated  of  people  generally,  where  we  would  say  men  or  use  a 
pas-sive  construction  Lev.  27:  9,  11,  2  Sam.  23:  6,  Isa.  1:  29,  64:  3,  Jer.  51:  28, 
Ezek.  12:  23,  Hos.  12:  9,  Mai.  2:  7.  The  3d  sing,  is  used  of  an  action  which 
is  regarded  as  the  work  of  a  single  agent  Lev.  16:  32,  27:  8,  Num.  6:  13, 

17* 


2G0  SYNTAX.  §  245 

19:3,5,  35:  25,30,  2  Kin.  9:  21,  21:  26,  Prov.  22:27;  and  likewise  of  action*, 
in  which  many  are  really  engaged,  but  attention  is  directed  to  some  repre- 
sentative actor  or  to  each  individual  agent,  as  we  might  use  the  indefinite 
one  or  a7ii/  one  Ex.  10:  5,  21,  34:  15,  Lev.  7:  11,  Num.  35:  23,  2  Sam.  15:  32, 
Job  27:  23,  28:  3,  Isa.  7:  24,  Jer.  51:  33,  Am.  6:  12,  Mic.  7:  12;  so  as  the 
subject  of  an  infinitive  Eccles.  7:1.  In  recording  the  name  given  to  a  place 
or  person  it  is  usual  to  employ  the  singular  6<np,  H'^'i^'',^  one  called,  respect 
being  had  to  its  original  imposition  or  to  subsequent  individual  utterances 
of  it  Gen.  19:  22,  21:  31,  33:  17,  Ex.  17:  7,  Num.  11:  3,  34,  although  the 
plural  li<^|5,  IX"}?*!!  thei/  called  also  occurs  Judg.  18:  12,  1  Sam.  23:  28, 
1  Chron.  11:7,  14:  11  (the  parallel  2  Sam.  5:  20  has  the  sing.).  The  singular 
is  often  used  in  comparisons,  whose  vividness  is  increased  b}'  individualizing  • 
tinn-i  "i"i;N3  as  one  hunts  the  partridge  l  Sam.  26:  20,  2  Sam.  16:  23  K'thibh, 
1  Kin.  14:  10,  2  Kin.  21:  13,  Jer.  19:  11;  but  the  plural  in  such  passages  as 
Isa.  9:  2  where  joint  action  is  involved.  The  indefinite  singular  and  plural 
are  sometimes  interchanged  as  equivalents  Gen.  25 :  25,  26,  Lev.  4 :  24  comp. 
7:  2,  1  Kin.  18:  23,  26,  Job  28:  4,  Jer.  8:  4,  9:  7,  Ezek.  48:  14,  and  some- 
times suggest  distinct  agents  Gen.  18:  10,  19:  17,  Lev.  7:  2,  3,  16:  27.  Suc- 
cessive plurals  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  some others  Job  24:  2  ff . 

c.  The  indefinite  construction  is  often  employed  in  Hebrew  from  a 
preference  for  the  active  form,  where  the  passive  would  be  used  in  English; 
and  in  some  cases,  as  it  would  seem,  without  any  thought  of  the  real  agency 
concerned.  So  3  plur.  Prov.  9:  11,  and  with  special  frequency  in  the  book 
of  Job,  '^li'lip  'b'tv  niiib  ivearisome  nights  are  appointed  to  me  lit.  they  have 
appointed  7:3,  4:  19,  18:  18,  19:  26,  20:  8,  34:  20;  3  sing.  1  Sam.  2:  20, 
Isa.  6:  10,  8:  4,  53:  9.  Sometimes  the  indefinite  form  alternates  with  the 
passive  Job  6:  2,  Isa.  29:  11,  12,  Jer.  16:  6,  7,  Ezek.  15:  3,  Neh.  7:  3. 

d.  The  2  pers.  sing,  indefinite  is  most  frequent  in  precepts  and  apho- 
risms, but  is  also  found  in  topographical  descriptions  in  the  current  phrase 
inbxa  as  thou  earnest  to  Gen.  10:  19,  30,  13:  10,  25:  18,  1  Sam.  15:  7,  27:  8, 
or  Tjxin  nr  Judg.  6:  4,  11:  33,  1  Sam.  17:  52,  1  Kin.  18:  46,  and  in  the  tech- 
nical expression  of  the  Levitical  law  T]31~  thy  valuation  i.  e.  that  of  the 
officiating  priest  Lev.  5:  15,  27:  2  flf.  It  is  comparatively  rare  in  other  con- 
nections siipi  Isa.  7:  25.  It  is  sometimes  used  collectively,  the  whole  people 
being  addressed  as  a  unit  Deut.  19:  1 — 3,  22:  21;  or  the  2  plur.  may  be  used 
instead  E.x.  22:  21,  30,  Lev.  19:  2  ff.,  20:  7,  8,  or  the  2  sing,  and  plural  may 
be  interchanged  in  the  same  context  Ex.  13:  4,  5,  22:  20,  23:  9,  25,  Lev. 
19:  15,  19,  Deut.  6:  1,  2,  9:  7,  18:  15,  27:  4.  The  2  sing,  indefinite  inter- 
changes with  the  3d  sing.  Prov.  19:  25;  the  2d  plur.  with  3d  plural  Num. 
10:  3 — 6;   2d  plur.  with  3d  sing.  Mai.  2:  15. 

3.  When  the  construction  is  impersonal;  in  this  case 
the  third  person  singular  masculine  is  the  form  commonly 
adopted,  ?j''r^:2  3'^';"b5<  let  it  not  he  grievous  in  thy  sight 
Gen.  21:  12,  bn^n  TS  then  it  was  begun  i.  e.  men  began, 
Gen.  4:  26,  though  the  feminine  is  also  employed  on  ac- 


§  246  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN  AS  SUBJECT.  261 

count  of  its  special  affinity  with  the  neuter,  bi^'^ifl'^b  "i^ini 
and  Israel  was  distressed  lit.  it  was  strait  to  Israel  Judg 
10:  9. 

a.  The  masculine  as  the  more  indefinite  and  primary  form  is  commonly 
employed  when  the  subject  is  altogether  indeterminate,  as  when  a  state  or 
condition  is  affirmed  to  exist  with  no  thought  of  any  particular  subject  in 
which  it  inheres  n^fil  and  it  shall  be  or  come  to  pass  Gen.  4:  14,  ''h'',^  Gen. 
12:  11,  n"!  it  is  enough  Deut.  3:  26,  SriilT'i  it  is  hard  Deut.  15:  18,  "ii<;'^  and 
it  was  light  2  Sam.  2:  32,  ~3  f\'yi  it  burned  to  thee,  i.  e.  thou  wert  angry 
Gen.  4:  6,  the  person  affected  being  preceded  by  ))  to,  so,  T(^  "^'^'1  Gen. 
40:  14,  1^  ^-a  Ruth  1 :  13,  ib  2101  b^XTy>  mS  1  Sam.  16:  23,  ^b  dn  1  Kin.  1: 1,  2, 
i>  Wr  Job  3:  13,  b  Q??-!  Prov.  24:  25.  So  in  passive  verbs  ^an*;  Cant.  8:  8, 
n^nj  it  is  done,  all  is  over  Mic.  2:  4,  siS"^  if  is  sifted,  one  sifts  Am.  9:  9, 
13^  S<Q"}3  i^  is  healed  to  us,  we  are  healed  Isa.  53 : 5,  "^'3?  i'^3"^  the  king  shall 
be  stvallowed  up  2  Sam.  17:  16;  when  the  object  of  the  action  is  expressed, 
it  is  regarded  as  not  the  subject  but  the  object  of  the  impersonal  passive 
§  283.  4.  a,  hence  ^i^  ^^I?"?  Mai.  1:  11  (though  followed  by  nniri),  and  so 
when  the  object  is  a  clause  "ipx^.  Gen.  22:  14,  siii  41:  21,  asfi  Nah.  2:  8, 
Esth.  1:  19.  Once  the  impersonal  it  is  represented  by  a  suffix  "isria  when  it 
is  hot  Job  6:  17. 

6.  "When  the  subject,  though  not  distinctly  expressed,  is  something 
vaguely  suggested  in  the  context  or  by  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  the 
impersonal  verb  takes  the  feminine  form  in  the  sense  of  the  neuter.  Thus 
ib  "iSt*;;  there  was  distress  to  him  Gen.  32:  8  simply  declares  the  existence  of 
the  distress,  while  "istni  it  was  distressing  Judg.  10:  9  contains  an  implied 
reference  to  its  cause  previously  stated;  fTlllnri  it  shall  be  viz.  the  act  just 
mentioned  Gen.  21:  30;  pH"'^t7Pi1  and  it  became  a  custom  viz.  what  is  im- 
mediately added  Judg.  11:  39;  hbm  2  Sam.  13:  39,  whether  b  be  supplied 
it  ceased  to  David  viz.  his  hostility  to  Absalom,  or  nlis  be  taken  in  the 
sense  of  xis  it  withheld  David  from  his  hostility  that  he  was  comforted  etc.; 
so  n-jip  Ps.  69:  32,  '^rh'J  Jer.  7:  31,  nnx^  10:  7,  "t^an  Ezek.  12:  25,  which 
in  ver.  28  takes  as  its  object  ^nn'n;  Job  4:  5,  18:  14,  Ps.  69:  11.  In  the 
following  verbs  relating  to  natural  phenomena  the  feminine  form  occurs 
n^sir:  it  is  tempestuous  Ps.  50:  3,  slirn  it  snows  68:  15,  "I'^a'an  it  rains 
Am.  4:  7. 

The  Personal  Pronoun  as  Subject. 

§  246.  1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  rarely  used  be- 
fore verbal  forms,  which  of  themselves  indicate  the  per- 
son, ^n"ibN  I  said,  tT02^  thou  saidst,  unless  with  the  view 
of  expressing  emphasis  or  opposition,  ^bSDl.  ^T!^  n^tl 
*i:^p  ^3^2X1  they  are  brought  down  and  fallen,  but  we  are 
risen  Ps.  20:  9. 


202  SYNTAX.  §  246 

a.  Except  in  circumstantial  clauses  as  1  Kin.  1:  41,  the  personal  pro- 
noun as  an  emphatic  suhject  always  implies  a  tacit  contrast  even  when 
this  is  not  directly  expressed,  as  it  mostly  is,  in  the  context  P""']*'  nnx  thou 
hnoicest  (whether  others  do  or  not)  Ps  69:  6,  20,  "''px  "'ix  t  will  he  king 
(and  not  some  other  aspirant  to  the  throne)  1  Kin.  1 :  5,  ''PriS  "'brx  /  my- 
self  gave  (it  was  my  own  act  not  that  of  others)  Gen.  16:5.  It  may  be 
made  still  more  emphatic  b}-  a  periphrasis  comp.  "^rxiin  "^irx  I  have  sinned 
2  Sam.  24:  17  with  "^rx-jn-irx  Xiri-'SX  it  is  I  that  have  sinned  1  Chron. 
21:  17,  or  by  inserting  the  particle  Ba  also  Gen.  20:  6,  21:  26,  44:  9,  48:  19, 
Num.  18:  28,  Hos.  4:  6,  TiN  too  Lev.  26:  24,  or  pi  only  Job  1:  15  ff.  The 
emphatic  pronoun  regularly  pu^'-edes  the  verb  Gen.  15:  15,  19:  19,  21:  26, 
24:  45,   28:  16,   33:  14,   Ex.  18:  21,   Num.   22:  32,   Jiidg.   11:  35,   Ruth  4:  4, 

1  Sim.  1:  28,  10:  18,  19,  2  Sam.  2:  6,  17:  8,  1  Kin.  1:  17,  8:  32,  18:  12,  21:  7, 

2  Chron.  13:  11,  Neh.  1:  8,  Ps.  2:6,  7,  Isa.  37:  16,  49:  15,  53:  4,  Ezek.  16:  33, 
Hos.  8:4,  12:  11,  Am.  7:  17,  Mic.  6:  13-15.  If  special  emphasis  is  to  be 
thrown  upon  tlie  verb  or  its  adjuncts,  it  may  precede  the  pronoun  Judg. 
15:  12,  so  particularly,  when  it  is  accompanied  by  an  absolute  infinitive 
Ex.  4:  14,  or  is  in  an  energetic  modal  form,  such  as  the  imperative  Ex. 
18:  19,  Deut.  5:  24,  1  Sam.  28:  22,  jussive  or  future  with  hi<  Jer.  17:  18, 
Obad.  ver.  13,  (but  see  2  Chron.  20:  15),  intentional  (paragogic  future) 
2  Sam.  18:  22  or  has  Vav  Consecutive,  to  which  the  verb  must  be  imme- 
diately attached  Ezek.  17:  22  (comp.  ver.  3),  or  stress  is  laid  upon  its  suffix 
Judg.  9:  28.  No  emphasis  is  involved  in  the  use  of  a  pronoun,  wht^n  per- 
spicuity requires  it,  as  when  it  is  joined  with  a  participle  Gen.  15:  14, 
2  Chron.  13:  11  or  with  any  other  predicate  than  a  verb  2  Sam.  17:  8,  Jer. 
1 :  6,  7,  17:  17.  The  unemphatic  use  of  the  pronoun  with  the  persons  of 
the  verb  is  rare  except  in  Ecclesiastes,  where  it  occurs  with  remarkable 
frequency  and  generally  follows  the  verb  e.  g.  1 :  16,  2:  1,  11  ff. ;  see  also 
Cant.  5:  5,  Ps.  41  :  5,  116:  10,  11,  Isa.  38:  10. 

2.  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  may  be  added  to 
the  subject  to  render  it  emphatic,  D^ribSM  S^H  Ti'jrr  Je- 
hovah, he  is  the  God  1  Kin.  18:  39,  i^^n  ^DliJ;  the  Lord  him- 
self willgive  Isa.  7:  14,  1  Sam.  17:  14,  Gen.  25:  IC,  34:  21, 
Mai.  1 :  7,  12,  and  this  even  when  it  is  a  pronoun  of  the 
first  or  second  person,  rin'J2  N^n  "ibs  /,  this  person  and  no 
other,  equivalent  to  I  myself  am  blotting  out  Isa.  43:  25, 
51:  12;  H):  tr  r:p]  ^<^^  nrt^  shalt  thou,  such  an  one  as  thou 
art,  bo  altoq-'tJicr  uiqmnished?  Jer.  49:  12,  14:  22,  2  Sam. 
7:  28,  Neh.  9:  6,  Ps.  44:  5,  Isa.  37: 16,  Zeph.  2:  12.  Comp. 
in  Chald.  Ezr.  5:  11. 

a.  This  seems  to  be  a  better  explanation  than  to  regard  Sin  as  a  co' 
pula,  §  261.  2,   or  such  construction.s  as  abbreviated  relative  clauses  e.  g 


§  247  THE  EEESONAIi  PKONOUN  AS  SUBJECT.  262 

I  am  he  who  blotteth  out  etc.  after  the  analogy  of  1  Chron.  21:  17.  The 
pronoun  so  used  may  stand  before  the  predicate  as  in  most  of  the  instances 
adduced  above,  or  after  it  Gen.  41:  25,  26,  Job  3:  19,  Ps.  50:  6,  Ezek.  18:  4. 
and  even  before  the  subject  when  the  predicate  is  emphatically  prefixed 
Ex.  12:  42,  or  after  the  subject  Num.  18:  23.  In  any  case  it  commonly 
agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  subject,  nSSil  Xin  D'nrt  the  blood,  it 
is  the  life  Deut.  12:  23,  Ex.  3:5;  though  sometimes  it  agrees  in  preference 
with  the  predicate,  D)njnx  Kill  D'^llin  "^ny  "^na  the  houses  of  the  cities  of  the 
Lexites,  this  is  their  possession  Lev.  25:  33,  Jer.  10:  3. 

h.  Various  pronominal  ideas  for  which  no  distinct  pronoun  exists  in 
Hebrew,  are  expressed  by  substantives  or  other  appropriate  words;  thus  the 
indefinite  pronoun  one  or  avy  one  by  ^"SD  a  soul  or  person,  d^N  a  man,  D"iN 
or  DTSn  a  man;  the  reflexive  self  hy  liisi  with  the  proper  suffix  "^il'S?  tnt/- 
self  etc.  or  by  an  emphatic  use  of  the  personal  pronoun  Hos.  4:  14  or  suffix 
Lev.  19:  18,  Ps.  49:  19,  Isa.  45:  23,  Jer.  7:  19;  the  reciprocal  one  another 
by  Y^nx  d"is;  a  man  his  brother  or  IJii'l  d^X  a  man  his  friend;  correlatives, 
one...the  other  by  W...iiT  Ex.  17:  12,  1  Kin.  3:  23,  Eccles.  6:5,  or  inx...lr;x 
Ex.  18:  3,  4,  1  Kin.  3:  25,  comp.  2  Kin.  4:  35;  the  same  by  ^'s'"  bone  or  sub- 
stance iiTri  Di'ti  d:^y  the  very  same  day  Lev.  23:  14,  and  in  a  very  few  pas- 
sages as  some  suppose  by  an  emphatic  Xin  Deut.  32:  39,  Ps.  102:28,  though 
even  here  as  in  Isa.  41:  4,  43:  10,  the  pronoun  may  retain  its  ordinar}'  sense 
he,  i.  e.  the  being  or  person  referred  to;  others,  as  introducing  a  new  class 
in  an  enumeration,  is  in  Job  24:  16  expressed  by  ti^an  lit.  they  or  those 
distinguished  from  such  as  had  been  previously  mentioned. 

§  247.  1.  The  subject  may  be  extended  by  connect- 
ing two  or  more  nouns  or  pronouns  and  thus  forming 
what  is  called  a  compound  subject  Y"]J<ri1  D'.b'^L^r]  "^j^^, 
Di<2^"b^']  and  the  heavens  and  the  earth  and  all  their  host 
were  finished  Gen.  2:  1,  nbbD  "^viTi^  ^isi  and  I  and  the  lad 
will  go  Gen.  22:  5. 

2.  Or  it  may  be  extended  by  adding  to  the  noun  an 
article,  adjective,  demonstrative  pronoun,  pronominal 
suffix,  or  another  noun  with  which  it  may  be  either  in 
apposition  or  in  construction.  When  thus  united  with 
other  qualifying  words  the  noun  alone  is  called  the  gram- 
matical subject,  the  noun,  together  with  its  adjuncts,  ie 
called  the  logical  subject. 


264  SYNTAX.  §  248 

The  Article. 

§  248.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  Hebrew  as  in 
other  languages  to  particularize  the  object  spoken  of, 
and  distinguish  it  from  all  others.  It  may  either  specify 
individual  objects  in  distinction  from  others  of  like  char- 
acter, or  designate  a  particular  class  in  distinction  from 
other  classes  of  objects.  In  the  latter  case  it  is  called 
the  generic  article.  Thus  ri.^"^Si  a  lion,  one  of  the  species. 
Gen.  49:  9;  »li;"|Nn  the  particular  lion,  singled  out  from 
the  rest  of  his  kind,  Judg.  14:  8,  or  the  lion  in  general, 
distinguished  from  other  species  of  animals  Isa.  31:  4. 
It  is  accordingly  prefixed  in  the  following  cases,  viz.: 

1.  When  the  thing  referred  to  is  one  which  has  been 
mentioned  before,  and  God  said,  Let  there  he  Tp^  a  fir- 
mament, etc.,  and  God  made  TV!y}  the  firmament  Gen. 
1 :  6,  7,  11 :  4,  5,  TjillBn  the  altar  Gen.  13:4  with  allusion 
to  T3,V2  an  altar  12:8;  m...";;^  Ex.  13:  21,  but  TrNri....-)]:^^ 
ver.  22,  first  brk  then  bn^H  Num.  19:14;  t'Vs  Judg.  1: 24, 
but  t^\Xr\  ver.  25. 

•      T 

2.  When  it  is  defined  by  accompanying  words,  as  a 
relative  clause,  '31  "qbn  5<b  n-ijs:  t^^Ti  ^"I'lTX  Messed  is  the 
man  who  has  not  ivalked,  etc.,  Ps.  1:  1,  an  adjective  ^i5^^rj 
"^lyr]  the  greater  light,  "tij^n  lii^^n  the  lesser  light  Gen. 
1 :  1 6,  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  nri  a  mountain,  n-Tn  "mH 
this  moimtain,  S^Mn  ^7'\T\  that  mountain,  or  any  descrip- 
tive phrase  D';i")>n  bjia  b'XH  the  two-ho7'ned  ram  Dan. 
8:  6,  vr^T]  bi"n  "iiB'b?  obixn  the  jjorch  before  the  temple 
1  Kin.  6:  3. 

a.  In  this  case  the  article  is  sometimes  generic,  as  is  shown  in  the  first 
of  the  examples  above  given;  "the  man  who  has  not  walked  in  the  comisel 
of  ic'icked  persons"  does  not  denote  an  individual  but  represents  a  class  and 
the  affirniation  is  made  of  every  one  included  in  that  class.  The  article  in 
I  Sam.  9:9  is  best  explained  by  supposing  tliat  the  noun  is  limited  by  the 
following  words  'i^  inzba  and   is  hence  conceived   definitely  as  the  man. 


§  248 


THE  AETICLE.  265 


wlioever  he  might  be,  who  went  to  consult  God,  comp.  Deut.  18:  19,  1  Sam, 
17 :  25.  Ewald  is  of  the  opinion  that  the  second  word  defines  the  first  in 
the  plirase  1n"3  nss  Ex.  9:  18  and  elsewhere,  and  that  it  means  about  the 
time  to-morrow  i.  e.  when  it  is  to-morrow;  the  true  sense,  however,  appears 
to  be  about  this  time  to-morrow,  see  3.  c  below. 

3.  When  it  is  obviously  suggested  by  the  circum- 
stances, or  may  be  presumed  to  be  well  known:  she  emp- 
tied her  ;pitcJier  into  T\]Mr}  the  trough  Gen.  24:  20,  viz.,  the 
one  which  must  have  been  by  a  well  used  for  watering 
cattle;  Ahimelech  looked  through  liirin  the  window  Gen. 
26:  8,  i.  e.  of  the  house  in  which  it  is  taken  for  granted 
that  he  was;  let  us  go  to  T^^y^  the  (well  known)  seer 
1  Sam.  9:  9. 

a.  The  article  thus  used  adds  to  the  vividness  of  a  description  and  often 
affords  incidental  evidence  of  the  writer's  familiarity  with  the  features  of 
the  locality  or  the  circumstances  of  his  narrative.  Thus  nn^"J22...^n3  in  the 
(not  a)  mountain  ...in  the  (not  a)  cave  Gen.  19:  30,  y"'5rli  the  interpreter 
necessary  for  Hebrews  in  Egypt  Gen.  42:  23,  "iXSti  the  tvell,  known  to  have 
been  there,  or  characteristic  of  every  inhabited  place  Ex.  2:  15,  ii3Sn  the 
thorn-hush  such  as  grew  in  the  desert  Ex.  3:  2,  l^rixfi  the  tent,  viz.  the  one 
used  for  the  purpose  Ex.  33 :  7,  "ir:?i  the  young  man  present  to  the  writer's 
mind  as  the  one  who  brought  the  message  Num.  11:  27,  though  some  judge 
the  article  to  be  generic  and  take  the  noun  in  a  collective  sense  as  equi- 
valent to  young  men;  n^asri  the  Cushite  woman,  whom  Moses  had  married, 
as  is  explained  in  the  next  clause  Num.  12:  1;  nnSi'i'n  the  maid  of  the  high 
priest  2  Sam.  17:  17,  and  ver.  19  ni;;5<ti  the  tcoman  who  belonged  in  the 
house,  T|OSln  the  cover  which  she  had  or  which  was  commonly  used  for  the 
purpose;  "■^^r}  d"xn  the  well  known  Egyptian  1  Chron.  11:  23.  Certain 
names  of  diseases  may  receive  the  article,  being  well  known  physical  con- 
ditions, as  we  saj'  the  cholera  or  the p)lague;  thus  the  leprosy  rs'^:!  Lev.  13:  2 
or  rri^n  ver.  12,  with  blindness  D'^\'13&3  Gen.  19:  11,  'i'i^;r^  Zech.  12:  4, 
and  various  other  ailments  Lev.  14:  54-56,  Deut.  28:  27;  so  mental  states 
'liijrd  and  'lis'a^'Li  madness,  TinaPi  and  fnarin  astonishment. 

h.  The  article  is  accordingly  used  as  in  Greek  and  in  some  modern 
languages  in  place  of  an  unemphatic  possessive  pronoun:  she  took  Cl'^S^iin 
the  veil  Gen.  24:  65,  i.  e.  the  one  which  she  had,  or,  according  to  the  Eng- 
lish idiom,  her  veil;  David  took  "iliSn  the  harp  i.  e.  his  harp  1  Sam.  16:  23, 
so  the  LXX.   eXccft-^avs  Aav)l  Tvjv  Kivjpav.    See  also  Num.  22:  32,  1  Kin.  1:  47. 

c.  With  words  denoting  time  it  expresses  the  present  as  that  which 
would  most  readily  occur  to  the  mind,  di'ti  the  day  i.  e.  that  which  is  now 
passing,  to-day  Gen.  4:  14,  mVIii  the  night  i.  e.  to-night  Gen.  30:  15,  nit'ti 
the  year  i.  e.  this  year  Jer.  28:  16,  fii'QH  the  time  i.  e.  this  time  Gen.  29:  35, 
so  in  the  fuller  phrase  tystn  npl^"  Gen.  29:  34;   unless  another  idea  is  more 


266  SYNTAX.  §  248 

naturally  suggested  by  the  context,  e.  g.  r?3  at  this  time,  now  Judg.  13:  23, 
but  at  the  time  of  the  action  here  supposed  i.  e.  then,  in  that  case  Judg. 
21:  22,  at  the  proper  tim£  Num.  23:  23,  the  article  having  its  distributive 
sense,  see  No.  4. 

4.  When  it  is  referred  to  as  a  specimen  of  its  class, 
so  that  the  article  has  a  distributive  sense  and  is  equi- 
valent to  each,  he  offered  a  bullock  and  a  ram  •jii''^^  on 
the  altar  i.  e.  on  each  of  the  seven  altars  Num.  23:  2, 

1  liid  a  hundred  men  fifty  by  fifty  rrn^^ain  in  the  cave 
i.  e.  in  each  cave  1  Kin.  18:  13,  TT^^b  to  the  man  i.  e.  each 
man  Gen.  45:  22,  tr^ilb  for  the  house  i.  e.  each  house  Ex. 
12:  3,  Di^b /or  the  day  i.  e.  every  day  Ezek.  4G:  13;  see 
also  45:  15,  24,  Num.  28:  14,  20,  2  Chron.  8:  13. 

a.  Occasionally  indefinite  nouns  are  used  distributively,  -"kb  to  a  man 
i.  e.  each  man  2  Sam.  6:  19. 

5.  When  it  is  distinguished  above  all  others  of  like 
kind  or  is  the  only  one  of  its  class,  n*;!?"  the  Jiouse  viz. 
of  God,  the  temple  Mic.  3:  12,  or  of  the  king,  the  palace 

2  Kin.  10:  5,  liij^"  the  Lord  Isa.  1:  24,  Q-ribsn  the  (true) 

'        I  T    IT  '  •        V:    IT  ^ 

God,  Drrosn  the  heavens,  V^ktl  the  earth  Gen.  1:1,  ti12\Dn 
the  sun  Gen.  15:  12. 

6.  When  it  is  an  appellative  noun  used  in  a  generic 
or  universal  sense,  in'^nn  the  sword  devoureth  one  as  well 
as  another  2  Sam.  11:  25;  they  shall  mount  np  ivith  ivings 
0^7^:3  as  the  eagles  Isa.  40:  31,  Ex.  22:  1,  Ps.  147:  10, 
and  sometimes  when  it  is  a  material  or  abstract  noun,  in 
which  case  the  English  idiom  does  not  admit  the  article, 
where  there  is  -ri-jn  gold.  Gen.  2:  11  LXX.  to  yj^'jdor^  the 
king  made  ^C^^^1^^^  silver  like  stones  1  Kin.  10:  27;  sioal- 
lowcd  uj)  "^_,TT"2  of  ivine,  led  astray  ''t'3r;"'D  by  strong 
drink  Isa.  28:  7;  where  shall  rcztrri  ivisdom  be  found? 
Job  28:  12  LXX.  ij  oi  ooijua;  titer e  is  a  superiority  T'Z'^Th 
n^bljorr*)"^  io  wisdom  above  folly  like  the  superiority  "ii5<^ 
l^dnn""::  ofligld  above  darkness  Eccles.  2:  13. 


§248 


THE  ARTICLE.  267 


a.  The  article  is  used  with  abstracts  as  with  other  nouns  both  in  a 
particular  and  generic  sense.  Thus  ^"CZTi  denotes  wisdom  in  any  relation, 
multitude  of  years  shall  teach  Horn  wisdom  Job  32:  7,  38:  36,  niDrn  is 
either  wisdom  in  some  particular  relation  e.  g.  2  Chron.  1:  12  the  icindom 
which  Solomon  had  asked  for  vs.  10:  11;  1  Kin.  7:  14  the  tvisdom  to  do  all 
work;  or  wisdom  in  general,  as  an  attribute  distinguished  from  other  attri- 
butes e.  g.  trbsrir!  wisdom  giveih  life  to  its  possessor  Eccles.  7:  12,  19.  More 
frequently,  however,  the  article  is  dropped  with  this  class  of  words  as  un- 
necessary, e.  g.  i^^r'^  wisdom  to  do  all  work  Ex.  36:  1,  H^zH  wisdom,  the 
attribute  in  general,  shall  die  ivith  you  Job  12:  2,  15:  8,  28:  18. 

6.  The  article  is  used  with  adjectives  and  participles  to  denote  the  class, 
which  they  describe,  either  in  the  plural  D'^^nn  the  livitig,  Q'^PBti  the  dead 
Isa.  8:19,  Eccles.  9:  5,  or  in  the  singular  in  a  collective  sense,  God  shall 
judge  2?'i!:;"ln"rx'i  p"i^ijri~nN  the  righteous  and  the  wicked  Eccl.  3:  17;  the 
proverb  of  '^it";i5ri  the  ancients  1  Sam.  24:  14,  wBiDn  the  escaped  Gen.  14:  13, 
Snixtn  the  Hers  in  wait  Josh.  8:  19;  so  with  Gentile  nouns,  which  are 
properly  adjectives,  §  196.  1,  '^'ntixfi  the  Amorite,  ''i^JSti  the  Canaanite, 
Gen.  15:  21.  Sometimes  a  singular  noun  with  the  generic  article  is  equi- 
valent to  an  indefinite  plural,  stress  being  laid  upon  the  species,  though 
some  only  of  those  included  under  it  are  intended,  i:";i"ri  the  bird  of  prey 
i.  e.  birds  of  prey  came  down  Gen.  15:  11;  as  one  pursues  X^pin  the  part- 
ridge i.  e.  partridges  in  the  mountains  1  Sam.  26:  20;  rTinrTsri  the  one  de- 
stroying i.  e.  destro3'ers  1  Sam.  13:  17;  'T'"?"3  like  the  sheaf  i.  e.  sheaves 
Mic.  4:  12;  D^Birixl  ...  lionni  ...  C^lSn  2  Kin.  7:  10;  p'^'n^tl  is  contrasted  with 
d'^i'ir'i  Ps.  37:  16.  So  some  explain  "'Jlt^  Num.  11:  27  as  equivalent  to  D'>'n353 
but  it  may  more  naturally  be  the  young  man  present  to  the  writer's  mind 
as  the  one  who  brought  the  message. 

c.  The  Hebrew  infinitive  does  not  receive  the  article;  !n"'iri  Gen.  2:  9 
and  elsewhere,  natn  1  Kin.  10:  19,  2  Chron.  9:  18  and  ?ipna  Ezek.  7:  14 
may  be  regarded  as  nouns.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  article  is  prefixed 
to  finite  tenses  of  the  verb  with  the  force  of  a  relative  pronoun,  N^lbbfin 
who  went  Josh.  10:  24,  'i|^''n  that  shall  be  born  Judg.  13:  8,  i:3"'^_pnri  ivhich 
he  sanctified  1  Chron.  26:  28,  >ik::^3ti  loho  are  present  i  Chron.  29:  17,  ■|"'3n3 
into  (the  place)  which  he  prepared  2  Chron.  1:  4,  i^f-n^isn  Gen.  21 :  3,  'n^'nT] 
Gen.  18:  21,  46:  27,  Job  2:  11,  nntn  Ruth  1:  22,  2:  6,  4:  3,  nj<'i|ri  1  Kin. 
11:9,  ri:>lrxn  Ezek.  26:  17;  so  also  2  Chron,  29:  36,  Ezr.  8:  25,^0:  14,  17, 
Isa.  56:  3.  Jer.  5:  13,  Dan.  8:1.  It  is  once  prefixed  to  a  preposition,  iT^^jJii 
lohat  (was)  upon  it  1  Sam.  9:  24. 

d.  Nouns  in  the  vocative  are  governed  by  the  same  rules  in  the  re- 
ception of  the  article,  as  when  not  the  object  of  address;  thus  with  the 
article,  n-icr^n  0  heavens,  "fiNf^  0  earth  Deut.  32:  1,  f^inxn  O  priests  Mai. 
1 :  6,  ^2:^0  0  queen  Esth.  5:  3,  Dii'inii  ye  deaf,  Qin'-sn  ye  blind  Isa.  42;  18, 
nn'b''i"^ri  thou  that  dwellest  Cant.  8:  13;  so  Ps.  123:  1,  Ezek.  34:  9,  37:  4,  9; 
or  without  the  article,  when  indefinite,  ^33  0  man  Isa.  22:  12,  (or  it  may 
stand  absolutely  and  qualify  the  preceding  word  a  manly  cast)  r\'ii3X'w3  D'^11^3 
O  careless  women  Isa.  32;  9,   d'^nsx   0  ye  husbandmen  Joel    1:  11,  D^ia 


208  SYNTAX.  §  249 

ye  children  Prov.  4:  1,  "inx   0  land  Eccles.  10;  16,  17,  "TJi^?   0  barren 
Isa.  54:  1. 

e.  Like  the  Gre>?k  vdg,  when  followed  hy  a  definite  noun  Vs  means  the 
whole  or  all  |'ni<ri-;3  the  whole  earth,  ci;n"P2  all  the  people,  u^Vj.ry-'b'Z  all 
the  nations,  so  with  sini,nilar  nouns  in  a  collective  sense  d"'i<ti"b3  all  the 
men  Deut.  4:  3,  "i^rn-ps  all  the  cities  Jer.  4:  29,  Ex.  1:  22,  1  Sam.  3:  17, 
Ts.  150:  6,  Prov.  19:  6  or  participles  used  collectively  Isa.  4:  3,  43:  7; 
followed  by  an  indefinite  noun  it  means  every  or  any  T\'^z~h'2  every  house 
Isa.  24:  10,  ^^-^3  any  blood  Lev.  17:  10,  or  every  sort  of,  "f'?"^  every  sort 
of  a  tree  Gen.  2:9,  7:  14;  though  here  as  elsewhere  the  poets  may  omit 
the  article  §  250  ;rX"i~b3  the  ichole  head  Isa.  1 :  5  and  it  is  occasionally 
dropped  even  in  pi-ose  Jer.  52:  30.  Connected  with  a  negative  adverb  it 
forms  a  universal  negation  no,  or  if  the  words  be  rendered  separately  our 
idiom  requires  us  to  translate  bs  by  any,  ri'^f?  *^^  '^^^^"3"''3  *'0  tvork  shall 
be  done  Ex.  12:  16,  C^rj'bs  "px  there  is  no  neiv  thing  Eccles.  1:  9,  hz'-'  iib 
^^^■bs  neither  can  any  god  2  Chron.  32;  15.  Comp.  ov  hKccicii'hyiasTai  vdia 
aapi  Rom.  3:  20. 

f.  The  Hebrew  article  is  sometimes  found  where  the  English  requires 
the  indefinite  article  or  none  at  all;  but  it  must  not  on  that  account  be 
supposed  that  it  ever  loses  its  proper  force  or  becomes  equivalent  to  an 
indefinite  article.  The  difference  of  idiom  is  due  to  a  difference  in  the 
mode  of  conception.  Thus  in  comparisons  the  Hebrew  commonly  conceived 
of  the  whole  class  of  objects  of  which  he  spoke,  while  we  mostly'  think  of 
one  or  more  individuals  belonging  to  the  class,  'i;55  as  (the)  a  nest,  Isa.  10: 
14,  "iSSS  as  (the)  a  scroll  Isa.  34:  4,  like  rending  '^\l^  (the)  a  kid  Judg. 
14:  6,  as  Ci^hnn  (the)  bees  do  Deut.  1:  44,  ti'^iii-?  as  (the)  scarlet,  ;rli;s  as 
(the)  snow,  v'i','r\'2  as  (the)  crimson,  'r^iis  as  (the)  icool  Isa.  1:  18;  so  Gen. 
19:  28,  2  Sam.  17:  10,  Isa.  24:  2  but  tliis  is  not  invariably  the  case  ciirrs 
like  foxes  Ezek.  13:  4,  C";i<:^:|3  as  roes  1  Chron.  12:  8.  Cases  also  not  in- 
frequently occur  in  which  the  article  may  either  be  inserted  or  omitted 
with  equal  propriety  and  without  any  material  change  of  sense,  according 
as  the  nuun  is  to  the  mind  of  the  speaker  definite  or  indefinite.  In  speak- 
ing of  the  invasion  of  his  father's  flocks,  David  sa3's,  "^^.xri  the  lion  and 
Si^ri  the  bear  came  1  Sam.  17:  34,  because  he  thinks  of  these  as  the  enemies 
to  be  expected  under  the  circumstances,  comjj.  Am.  5:  19;  had  he  thought 
of  them  indefinitely  as  beasts  of  prey  he  Avould  have  said,  without  the 
article,  a  lion  and  a  bear.  It  is  said,  Gen.  13:  2,  that  Abram  was  very  rich 
rn-T^!!  W|Di2  "^ips?  *'*  (tbe)  cattle,  in  (the)  silver,  and  in  (the)  gold,  since 
these  are  viewed  as  definite  and  wellknown  species  of  property;  but  in 
Gen.  24:  35  he  hath  given  him  3nn  "obl  l;b^!i  -xic  flocks  and  herds  and 
silver  and  gold,  these  are  viewed  indefinitely  in  Hebrew  as  in  English.  In 
the  phrase  DVn  "fi"']  a7id  it  came  to  pass  on  a  day  1  Sam.  1:4,  14:  l,  2  Kin. 
4:  8,  11:  18  the  article  is  used  to  distinguish  it  as  the  day  in  which  the 
event  occurred,  comp.  "''jn  Jer.  49:  36. 

§  249.  Nouns  are  definite  without  the  article  in  the 
follo"\viiiof  cases,  viz.: 


§  249 


THE  AETICLE.  269 


1.  Proper  nouns,  which  are  definite  by  signification, 
Dr;'^S>^  Ahraliam,  13-"D3  Canaan,  tib^^T  Jerusalem. 

T  T   ;   -  I ~"  :  •       T         : 

a.  Proper  names,  originally  applied  in  an  appellative  sense,  sometimes 
retain  the  definite  article,  b?2ri  ihe  lord,  Baal,  '{-^'ijr}  the  adversary,  Satan, 
"insn  the  river,  the  Euphrates,  '(^'^:ii  the  descending  (stream),  the  Jordan, 
once  poetically  '^^"^  Ps.  42:  7,  §  250,  and  once  indefinitely  a  Jordan,  a 
stream  like  the  Jordan  Job  40:  23,  ''\^^'ctr\  the  plain,  Sharon,  liia^t!!  the 
white  (mountain),  Lebanon,  so  always  in  prose,  but  in  poetry  with  or  with- 
out the  article,  V'^'^i!!  always  in  prose,  and  sometimes  in  poetry,  Bashan, 
^vh'!r\  and  ^i'lsi^  Gilead,  bi'isri  the  garden,  Carmel,  'n:2vi  the  circuit  of  the 
Jordan,  ticriiari  the  watch-toicer,  Mizpah,  Qt^vJ  and  tix  the  (first)  man, 
Adam,  d'^n^Nn  and  f^tiriX  the  (true)  God.  In  iit35:lri  •c'nb  ^in  the  half  tribe 
of  Manasseh  Deut.  3:  13  and  often  elsewhere,  the  article  makes  more  pro- 
minent the  definiteness  of  the  entire  expression:  it  also  occurs  without  tlie 
article,  e.  g.  Num.  o2:  33.  Pi'oper  names  of  nations  rarely  admit  the  article 
SiVrs  the  Chaldeans,  but  a"''n -?■'!'  Jer.  37:  8,  9,  S-^r-r^Q  the  Philistines,  hut 
d^nrbsn  l  Sam.  17:  52;  D"'i?'nx  is  used  as  a  proper  name  2  Kin.  8:  28,  but 
in  2  Chron.  22:  5  has  the  article  as  a  Gentile  noun  t'^'is^ri,  §  53.  2.  a.  Sym- 
bolical like  real  names  do  not  receive  the  article,  f^'^'i^S  Treacherous  Jer. 
3:  7,  nhTAJ"?  Apostate  ver.  6,  nn';'  "Vb  Hos.  5:  13. 

2.  Nouns  with  suffixes,  which  are  rendered  definite 
by  the  appended  pronoun,  ^T2i^  our  father,  i/blp  his  name, 
but  in  Greek  6  Trariip  yj/xcHv,  to  ovO/Uoc,  avrov. 

a.  There  are  a  few  instances  in  which  the  article  is  prefixed  to  nouns 
having  suffixes.  It  is  emphatic  in  i^iftj^i  the  (other)  half  of  them,  Josh.  8:  33, 
opposed  to  a  preceding  V^ti  one  half  of  them;  see  also  ~rn"2J3  Isa.  24:  2, 
f(3-::n  Lev.  27:  23,  ^^'•yj^,  (in  some  editions)  Ezra  10:  14;  '}r^i<\}  TOra  in 
the  midst  of  mg  tent  Josh.  7:  21,  'i^^'nti  Tpra  in  the  midst  of  its  fold  Mic. 
2  :  12,  tr^niinri-bs  the  u-hnle  of  its  women  with  child  2  Kin.  15:  16;  in  'nh'52^ 

'      T      v        IT  V         T  '  ,  '  •■-:    -I- 

Prov.  16:  4  it  distinguishes  the  noun  nV'C  from  the  preposition  '?p?.  In 
tiix'^as  Num.  12:  6  the  suffix  is  to  be  taken  objectively  and  the  expression 
is  indefinite  a  prophet  to  you. 

b.  A  suffix  which  is  the  direct  object  of  a  participle  does  not  supersede 
the  necessity  of  the  article,  ^ni^^ti  the  (one)  smiting  him  Isa.  9:  12,  ^|''3?52t^ 
the  (one)  bringing  thee  up  Ps.  81:  11,  'i2'i;c^""2n  the  (one)  crowning  thee  Ps. 
103:  4,  Deut.  13:  6,  Dan.  11:  6. 

3.  Nouns  in  the  construct  state  before  a  definite  noun, 
whether  this  has  the  article  D"]'^^!!  ^ili?i3  the  stars  oj 
heaven  Gen.  26:  4,  D'iljisn  ""bro  the  feet  of  the  priests  Josh. 
3 :  13;  is  a  proper  name,  b^Jl'^^iS';  ^bn'^T  the  U  ibes  of  Israel 
Ex.  24:  4,  nih":  "^ni  the  word  of  Jehovah  Gen.  15:  1;  has 
a  pronominal  suffix,  ^''^y^^,  ^?.^3^  the  first-fruits  of  thy  la- 


270  SYNTAX.  §  249 

hours,  Ty2'^'ZZ  the  wives  of  Ms  sons  Gen.  7:13;  or  is  itself 
definite  by  construction,  JlbE^^n  "^'j:  t\^_y'2  the  cave  oj 
the  field  of  Machpelah  Gen.  23:  19,  niM-n^-^Z  "li-ys  the  ark 
of  the  covenant  of  Jehovah  Josh.  3 :  3,  niia?  ^5^53:J  Tibys 
nVn'T'n  the  doer  of  the  work  of  the  service  of  the  house  of 
Jehovah  2  Cliron.  24:  12. 

a.  When  the  governed  noun  is  indefinite,  the  whole  expression  will  be 
indefinite,  IT'^XT)?  a  man's  hand  1  Kin.  18:  44,  ;i""Xn  r;3  the  hand  of  the 
man  2  Sam.  14:  16;  rt^hl  Mar's  an  altar  of  brass  2  Chron.  4:  1,  nrnrn  ni^ia 
the  altar  of  brass  2  Chron.  7:7.  So  ninbx  tt^n  a  man  of  God  1  Kin,  13:  1, 
Cinrxn  "w'-^x  the  man  of  God  ver.  4;  ti-nsx  r^xb^  an  angel  of  God  1  Sam. 
29:  9,  C^■^■^l^  T^k)"?  Ji«lg-  6:  20,  n'm'^^  T^n?^  ver.'  21  the  angel  of  God  or  of 
Jehovah.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  expression  is  commonly  reckoned  in- 
definite notwithstanding  the  definiteness  of  the  governed  noun,  but  most, 
if  not  all  of  these  can  be  otherwise  explained;  thus  in  Gen.  9:  20  the  article 
is  generic,  as  we  might  say  began  to  play  the  husbandman,  comp.  also  Lev. 
14:  34,  Deut.  22:  19,  1  Sam.  4:  12,  Jer.  13:  4. 

b.  Nouns  in  the  construct  are  occasionally  found  with  the  article.  There 
is  but  one  example  of  this  in  which  the  construct  differs  in  its  letters  from 
the  absolute,  and  in  this  instance  the  governed  noun  is  preceded  by  a  pre- 
position so  that  the  expression  could  be  made  definite  in  no  other  way, 
n'^snxn  "^i'-'i'n  ~"in  the  way  of  the  dtvellers  in  te?its  Judg.  8:11.  In  the 
remaining  instances  the  sense  is  sometimes  complete  without  the  governed 
word,  which  is  added  as  if  hy  an  afterthought,  nib  n;nsn  to  the  tent  viz. 
Sarah's  Gen.  24:  67,  5~Nri  Ipin  the  pin  viz.  of  the  web  Judg.  16:  14,  2  Kin. 
16:  17,  2  Chron.  15:  8  (if  the  text  is  correct),  Ps.  123:  4,  or  maj'  have  been 
coordinated  by  a  loose  sort  of  apposition,  §  256.  2,  w'd  PlrSJi  the  coat  of 
limn  Ex.  28:  39,  39:  27,  n'rnsn  nSTrn  the  altar  of  brass  2  Kin.  16:  14, 
Zech.  4:  7,  or  subordinated  in  a  general  way,  §  256.  3,  bk~n"'3  r!2"Xiri  the 
altar  of  (or  at)  Bethel  2  Kin.  23:  17,  Gen.  31:  13,  1  Chron.  15:  27,  Isa.  36:  8, 
Jer.  48:  32,  Ezek.  47:  15.  Sometimes  the  definiteness  of  the  entire  ex- 
pression is  thus  more  clearly  marked,  as  when  several  nouns  in  the  con- 
struct occur  together  C^n^xii  w:"'i<  "i^l^n  the  grave  of  the  man  of  God  2  Kin. 
23:  17,  2  Chron.  8:  16,  Ezr.  8:  29,  Ezek.  46:  19,  particularly  when  one  com- 
pound phrase  precedes  another  "|''"ii<ri"b3  'inx  ri'^nali  'p^X  Josh.  3:  11,  Esth. 
6:  1;  so  after  Vs  Josh.  8:  11,  1  Kin.  14:  24,  jer.  25:  26,  JSzek.  45:  16,  Zeph. 
3:  19,  and  before  an  infinitive  which  is  equivalent  to  a  relative  clause 
2  Sam.  19:  25,  Ex.  9:  18.  See  also  1  Sam.  26:  22  K'thibh,  2  Kin.  7:  13 
K'lhibh,  wliere  the  K'ri  omits  the  article.  It  is  once  found  with  a  parti- 
ciple ill  the  construct  state  before  its  object,  Ezek.  17:  15;  the  article  in 
ni;ran  "issri  the  bill  of  the  purchase  Jer.  32:  12  identifies  it  with  the  one 
spoken  of  in  the  preceding  verse, 

C.  Gentile  nouns,  derived  from  a  compound  proper  name,  receive  the 
article  before  the  second  member  of  the  compound,  '^3"^'0'^ti""|a  the  Benjamite 


§250  THE  ARTICLE.  271 

Judg.  3:  15,  "^ii^xitn  n*iSi  the  Bethshewite  1  Sam.  6:  14,  ''tiri^n  ^"3  the  Beth' 
lehemite  1  Sam.  16;  18,  ''yX\l  ^?^  the  Abiezrite  Judg.  6:  11,  though  this  word 
also  appears  in  the  ahbreviated  form  "^ilS'^XvJ  Num.  26:  30;  "^lisn  TP'^  the 
Bethelite  1  Kin.  16;  34,  ^nnian  "^^sn  1  Chron.  2:  54. 

§  250.  The  article  is  frequently  omitted  in  the  brief 
and  emphatic  language  of  poetry,  where  it  would  be  re- 
quired in  prose,  y^J^^'^Db'j  kings  0/ (the)  earth  Ps.  2:  2, 
v:'2^_  ^isb  in  the  presence  o/(the)  sun  Ps.  72:  17,  n/iin'  ^'2^ 
npn  J^rJ^  (the)  ivatchman  says,  (the)  morning  comes  Isa. 
2i:  12;  to  give  si^l.  ^ipl.  hoth  sanctuary  and  host  to  he 
tr atnpled  Dsiii.  8:  13. 

a.  Thus  the  article  is  almost  entirely  wanting  in  Ps.  72.  It  is  also 
omitted  from  certain  poetical  or  archaic  phrases  D'^p'ri  "j^nst  Gen,  2 :  4, 
Ps.  148:  13,  :-|'-iNi  D-^id  nip  Gen.  14:  19,  22,  }'-)J<  'ir'^n  but  y^ijn  n^n, 

r"S  lisx  except  Ps.  59:  14;  or  words  "^ib  but  nV^^ri;  several  of  these 
seem  to  have  assumed  almost  the  character  of  proper  names  "^v'i'O  htiit.  the 
Tent  of  meeting,  '{\b-Q  the  Divelling-place  1  Sam.  2:  29,  32,  Ri^x  God,  )Vh'J 
the  most  High,  -c^np^  the  Holy  One  Job  6:  10,  Isa.  40:  25,  Hab.  3:  3,  "^^i^ 
the  Almighttj,  rixi:?" -^n^x ,  only  four  times  Tiixnan  "^n^s  the  God  of  hosts, 
bixb  the  region  of  the  dead,  bin  the  world,  Dinri  the  abyss,  f'S^  and  "I'is^n 
the  north,  'h'^'n  only  once  ■(■b"'rin  Zech.  6:  6  the  south.  In  the  parallels  of 
poetry  the  article  is  sometimes  omitted  in  one  clause  and  retained  in  the 
other  Nab.  1:  5,  Zeph.  1;  3,  Ps.  148:  9,  10. 

b.  The  article  is  often  dropped  from  familiar  and  frequently  repeated 
expressions  in  prose,  2"id!  fyh  at  evening-time  Gen.  24:  11,  :b?3b  nniTD  sun- 
rise Deut.  4:  47,  nil:;:  n-innx  "i?  to  (the)  year's  end  Deut.  11:  12,  NDS  ib 
(the)  captain  of  (the)  host  1  Kin.  16:  16,  and  such  phrases  as  shake  C5<"i 
(the)  head  Isa.  37:  22,  put  forth  1^  the  hand  Gen.  37:  22,  lay  na-b?  T;  the 
hand  upon  the  mouth  Mic.  7:  16,  '!;;'2  with  the  ha^td  1  Sam.  19:  9,  pounce 
rir23  tipon  the  shoulder  i.  e.  assail  the  Philistines  Isa.  11:  14,  turn  CTis'  tlie 
back  and  not  D"^is  the  face  Jer.  2:  27,  W/^  mj?  T^p  the  horn  1  Chron.  25:  5, 
irx^~"i?'i  V^^.-rrr;  /rom  the  sole  of  the  /bof  fo  the  head  Isa.  1 :  6,  Gen.  3:  15, 
Lev.  11:  3,  Ps.  119:  2,  Ezek.  25:  6,  nilTX'iSl  in  the  beginning  Gen.  1:  1, 
LXX  sv  dpxYJ,  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  assume  that  this  is  in  the  con- 
struct before  the  following  clause,  ni"i;s^^  from  the  beginning  Isa.  46:  10; 
also  in  geographical  and  architectural  details,  from  such  technical  terms  as 
b^i:5!i  and  the  border  Josh.  13:  23,  linn  the  breadth,  tiiip  the  height  Ex. 
27:  18,  2  Chron.  3:  3;  likewise  in  adverbial  phrases  '.n:i-ix  D"^bx  with  the 
face  to  the  ground  Gen.  19:  1.  Comp.  in  English  from  head  to  foot,  arm- 
in-arm,  etc.   So  ff^is'-N  Ci'^is  Gen.  32:  31,   rtfbii  ns  Num.  12:  8  etc. 

c.  In  enumerations,  where  attention  is  exclusively  directed  to  the  pro- 
per meaning  of  the  words  irrespective  of  their  particular  relations,  the 
thought  may  be  generalized  by  omitting  the  article  and  putting  each  noun 
in  the  singular,   thus  giving  both  conciseness  and  vigour  to  the  expression, 


272  SYNTAX.  §  251,  252 

-I'rn^  ni^  Tia  "iri  "if;;!"!?"!  ^'A"^  tr^X""!?"]  d^kp  twaw  awii  toowan,  youvg  anA 
old,  and  ox  and  sheep  and  ass  Josh.  6:  21,  Isa.  9:  13,  Jer.  44:  7,  E/ek.  39:  9. 
Iq  this  and  other  cases  the  indefinite  sinj^ular  in  a  collective  sense  is  used 
instead  of  the  plural  •'^i;'!  C'^X  footmen  Judg.  20;  2,  b'^n-d'S  men  of  strength 
1  Chron.  26:  8,  Ex.  35:  22,  Deut.  3:  5,  1  Sam.  21:  5,  2  Chron.  14:  7,  Ezek. 
6:7,  11:  6,  Prov.  11:  14,  and  interchanging  with  it  Ps.  12:2,  Prov.  16:  12-15. 
In  Gen.  19;  12  'jrn  Son-in-law  is  indef.  sing,  because  the  speaker  was  un- 
certain whether  there  was  one  or  more  or  none  at  all. 

d.  "When  two  definite  nouns  are  connected  hy  and  the  article  is  com- 
monly repeated  Deut.  7:  19;  it  may  however,  particulai-ly  in  poetry,  stand 
only  before  the  first  and  be  understood  with  the  second  ivoe  unto  D'^ppntl 
the  (persons)  decreeing  unrighteous  decrees  D''bn3"a!i  and  ivriting,  etc.  Isa. 
10:  1,  lib"!  b2:ri  0  psaltery  and  harp  Ps.  67:  9,  IDn^  n"'n2n  Neh.  1:  5 
comp.  Deut.  7:  9,  12,  rn^l  i^'l?^"'!'  (though  in  different  clauses)  Josh.  10:  13, 
Ps.  19:  11,  34:  13;  in  Jer.  40:  4  it  is  omitted  from  the  former  of  two  words 

§  251.  There  is  no  indefinite  article  in  Hebrew;  in- 
definite nouns  are  sufficiently  characterized  as  such  by 
the  absence  of  the  article.  Thus,  ^n3  a  river  Gen.  2:  10, 
D''ir'^B"Dy  jljn"DB  hoth  chariots  and  Jiorsemen  Gen.  50:  9, 
iri"!^  -^"  milk  and  homy  Ex.  3:  8,  D"'b^  b^?  ay%  infant  of 
days  Isa.  65:  20. 

a.  The  numeral  *inx  one  is  occasionally  employed  in  the  sense  of  an 
indefinite  article,  "inx  bo  a  basket  Ex.  29:  3,  Inx  d"^X  a  man  Judg.  13:  2, 
1  Sam.  1 :  1,  1  Kin.  22:  9,  Dan.  8:  13,  or  in  the  construct  before  a  plural 
noun,  r'i"i:::n  rnx  one  of  the  foolish  women  i.  e,  a  foolish  rvoman  Job  2:  10, 
Gen.  21:  15,  22:  2,  37:  20,  Judg.  19:  13.  In  some  passages,  however,  which 
are  commonly  explained  in  this  manner,  "inx  may  retain  its  proper  nu- 
meral force,  as  "inx  X"^h3  one  prophet  1  Kin.  13:  11,  alone  remaining  in 
Bethel,  inx  onn  1  kin.  19:  4,  5,  not  a  cluster  but  a  solitary  shrub,  dS*iB 
"inx  a  single  flea  1  Sam.  24:  15,  26:  20. 

Adjectives  and  Demonstratives. 

§  252.  1.  Attributive  adjectives  and  participles  are 
commonly  placed  after  the  noun  to  which  they  belong 
and  agree  with  it  not  only  in  gender  and  number  but  in 
definiteness,  that  is  to  say,  if  the  noun  is  indefinite  they 
remain  without  the  article,  but  if  the  noun  is  made  de- 
finite, whether  by  the  article  or  in  any  of  the  ways  spe- 
cified in  §  2  i9,  they  receive  the  article,  Din  'f3.  a  ivise  son 


§  252  ADJECTIVES  AND  DEMONSTRATIVES.  273 

Prov.  10:  11,  Slk'"'  "rin  a  hridegroom  going  out  Ps.  19:  6, 
niilDn  "n^ri  the  good  land  Deut.  1:  35,  D^n"^"  ""'^n;^  thy 
manifold  ynercies  Neh.  9:19,  nitan  fhT]\  2  Chron.  30:  18. 
If  more  than  one  adjective  accompany  a  definite  noun, 
the  article  is  repeated  before  each  of  them,  "IBp^lri  DiDn 
j^nisni.  the  glorious  and  fearful  name  Deut.  28:  58,  10:  17. 

a.  The  adjective  CS"!!  many  is  in  a  few  instances,  for  the  sake  of 
greater  emphasis,  prefixed  to  the  noun  which  it  qualifies,  D"32  n"2l  many 
sons  1  Chron.  28:  5,  d"<P^'  nian  «mw7/  times  Neh.  9:  28,  so  Ps.  32:  10,  89:  51, 
Jer.  16:  16,  Other  instances  are  lare,  IH'ci^'Q  "iT  his  strange  tvork,  f^^"]22 
■inibs  his  strange  task  Isa.  28:  21,  "^is^J  p'^'h?  mz/  righteous  servant  Isa. 
53:  11,  and  are  mostly  susceptible  of  a  different  explanation;  thus  each  of 
the  examples  above  given  may  be  regarded  as  forming  a  brief  clause  his 
ivork  is  strange,  my  servant  as  a  righteous  person. 

6.  Some  exceptional  cases  occur,  in  which  an  adjective  qualifying  a 
definite  noun  does  not  receive  the  article,  the  whole  expression  being  made 
definite  by  the  article  which  precedes  the  noun,  rni3"iri  <^^^r!vJ  ^^^^  ^^^'^  ^^^^ 
2  Sam.  6:  3,  ti'lpj  'Eilri  the  strange  vine  Jer.  2:  21,  Ezek.  39:  27,  Dan.  8:13, 
11:  31,  or  when  the  noun  is  made  definite  by  a  suffix,  ^nx  fii'^riX  your 
other  brother  Gen.  43:  14,  Ezek.  34:  12,  Hag.  1 :  4,  or  is  a  proper  name 
^■^s::  "l^"^??  Ps.  68 :  28.  In  ni?"!  crs'n  an  evil  report  respecting  them  Gen. 
37 :  2,  the  suffix  denotes'  the  object  and  the  noun  is  really  indefinite.  Comp. 
§  249.  2.  a.  In  biis  C^rt  Ps.  104:  25  the  adjective  does  not  directly  qualify 
the  noun,  but  is  in  apposition  with  it,  or  it  may  even  be  viewed  as  a  pre- 
dicate, not  the  great  sea  but  the  sea,  great  and  ivide,  equivalent  to  which  is 
great  etc.  So  ciji  HTD^s  nixbstn  the  property  that  was  despicable  and  re- 
fuse 1  Sam.  15:  9,  n';}nX  Y'}^'!^  the  land,  another  than  this,  where  etc.  Jer. 
22:  26. 

c.  On  the  other  hand  the  article  is  sometimes  dropped  from  the  noun, 
but  retained  before  the  adjective,  fl^iiJil  "li^n  the  great  court  1  Kin.  7:  12, 
-|iO'n  diS  the  rich  man  2  Sam.  12:  4,  binsn  -I'ik  the  great  well  1  Sam.  19:  22, 
GenVi:  21,  41:  26,  Num.  11:  25,  2  Kin.  20:  4  K'ri,  Neh.  9:  35,  Ps.  104:  18, 
Isa.  46:  12,  Jer.  6:  20,  32:  14,  Ezek.  9:  2,  21:  19,  40:  31,  47:  16,  Zech.  4:  7. 

d.  A  participle  with  the  article  thus  joined  to  a  definite  noun  is  equi- 
valent to  a  relative  clause  "liiyn  d'^S^J  the  man  ivho  stood  Zech.  1:  10,  Ex. 
36:  4,  Num.  5:8;  so  with  proper  nouns  iii<"iiri  nViT]  Jehovah,  ivho  appeared 
Gen.  12:  7,  13:  5,  16:  13,  Ex.  11:  5,  Esth.  7:  6,  Ps.  103:  3-5,  Isa.  45:  3,  Jer. 
37:  10;  so  sometimes  even  with  indefinite  nouns  nCTiin  ii^r!~?3  every  beast 
that  moves  Gen.  1:  28,  1  Sam.  25:  10,  Ps.  62:  4,  Jer.  27:3,  Dan.  9:  26,  while 
on  the  other  hand  the  participle  without  the  article  may  be  used  in  the 
same  sense  with  definite  nouns  Ti^lo  ni'^Nfi  the  man  ivho  made  the  earth 
tremble  Isa.  14:  16,  1  Kin.  11:8,  2  Kin.  10:  6.  In  ~b'i«^  '^^^JT}  ^ie  who  walk- 
f,Ui  uprightly  Mic.  2:  7  the  article  properlj^  belonging  to  the  participle  ia 

18 


074  SYNTAX.  §  252 

attached  to  a  closely  related  word  which  forms  with  it  one  compound  ex- 
pression. 

e.  In  a  few  instances  a  participle  belongs  to  a  preceding  suffix  f^"^?'^ 
nx-  pedes  ejus  introeuntis,  her  feet  as  she  came  in  1  Kin.  14:  6,  2  Kin.  11:5, 
Ps.  69:  4;   so  an  adjective  Eccles.  4:  10. 

f.  Adverbs  are  sometimes  used  as  attributive  adjectives  T^'on  nflJ^ 
a  continual  meat-offering  Lev.  6:  13  (but  in  the  construct  Num.  4:  16, 
§  257.  6.  c),  C:n  T'b'j  hurnt-offerivgs  that  cost  nothing  2  Sam.  24:  24,  Ps. 
69:  5,  Lam.  3:  52,  'iN^  '^3"iSi  nittV::  very  many  garments  Josh.  22:  8,  Deut. 
3:  5,  2  Sam.  8:  8,  12:  2;  so  asp  Isa.  10:  7,  Eccles.  9:  14,  which  twice  as- 
sumes a  plural  form,  Ps.  109:  8,  Eccles.  5:  1;  they  also  occur  as  predicate 
adjectives  Gen.  15:  1,  47:  9,  Jer.  42:  2.  A  phrase  may  also  be  joined  to 
nouns  as  an  attributive  'C'St'2  "^h'^k  my  enemies  in  soul  i.  e.  cordial  haters 
Ps.  17:  9,  ")"^i$!n""iP  ^iiis;  man  of  the  earth  Ps.  10:  18,  D^?3  tin-'Sp:  their 
drink  offerings  of  blood  Ps.  16:  4,  7:  9,  Prov.  26:  1. 

2.  Demonstrative  pronouns  follow  the  same  rule  of 
position  and  agreement,  only  the  nouns  which  they  qua- 
lify are  invariably  definite,  §  248.  2,  niri  Di^ll  this  day 
Gen.  7:  13,  ribkri  D^'^.Il'^ri  tliese  things  Gen.  15:  1,  D"^':s^n 
Ti'Bhtl  those  men  Num.  9:7.  If  both  an  adjective  and  a 
demonstrative  qualify  the  same  noun,  the  demonstrative 
is  placed  last,  t^^kV]  niil^ri  "^sr;  Deut.  9:  6,  nizbn  D^i^S" 
Thk~  rb<^rj  these  good  years  that  (are)  coming  Gen.  41:  35, 
1  Sam.  17:  25,  2  Chron.  20:  15. 

a.  The  demonstrative  rij  occasionally  stands  emphaticall}'  before  its 
noun,  ni-i  riT  tJtis  Moses  Ex.  32:  1,  where  it  is  probably  contemptuous  like 
the  latin  iste,  '^'.hrh  riT  this  our  bread  Josh.  9:  12,  Judg.  5:  5,  1  Sam.  17: 
55,  f»6,  Ps.  34:  7,  48:  15,  104:  25,  ti;n  riT  this  people  Isa.  23:  13,  Hab.  l:  11; 
80  S^-i  e.  g.  T\?h.r\  X^in  that  king  Ahaz  2  Chron.  28:  22,  ntri  Th-'hn  x^n  this 
same  night  Ex.  12;  42.  The  demonstrative  both  follows  the  noun  and  is 
repeated  after  the  adjective  in  n^Nfi  ninxiTin  T^'zkn  D'^ijtn  these  nations 
these  that  remain  Josh.  23:  7,  12;  it  precedes  attributives  linked  with  fol- 
lowing words  in  S^t^  nin  ayn  this  peoj^le  that  is  evil,  that  refuse  etc.  Jer. 
13:  10. 

b.  The  article  is  sometimes  omitted  from  the  demonstrative,  It  "Ti'itl 
this  generation  Ps.  12:  8,  X^n  tibila  in  that  night  Gen.  19:  33,  30:  16,  32:  23, 
1  Sam.  19:  10,  particularly  if  the  noun  is  made  definite  by  means  of  a 
suffix  rii'  *r:?nr  this  my  oath  Gen.  24:  8,  n'rx  "^rrk  these  my  signs  Ex. 
10:  1,  U:  i,  Deut.  11:  18,  Josh.  2:  14,  20,  Judg.  6:  14,  1  Kin.  22:  23,  2  Chron. 
18:  22,  24.  .J8,  Jer.  31:  21. 

c.  Th«.-    article   is   still  more  rarely  dropped  from  the  noun,   123 hn  asifl 


§  253 


KUMEEALS.  275 


wn  this  small  quaniity  of  honey  1  Sam.  14:  29,  niti  ''fi'nax  ^\v:  that  Ephra- 
thite  17:  12,  17,  Jer.  40:  3  K'thibh,  fi}  ^Bn  this  sickness  2  Kin.  1:  2,  8:  8, 
Ps.  80:  15,  xnn  oil  Mic.  7:  12,  see  ver.  11. 

Numerals. 

Cardinal  Numbers.  - 

§  253.  1.  The  numeral  ihif,  one  is  treated  like  other 
adjectives,  and  follows  the  rules  of  position  and  agree- 
ment already  given,  "fji^s  Dijb'J  07ie  place  Gen.  1 :  9,  m^^"]";!! 
tTit^r^  the  one  curtain  Ex.  26:  2. 

-    -    IT 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  noun  is  in  the  construct  before  the  nu- 
meral one,  "irs  CQ-ro  one  law  Lev.  24:  22,  nnx  -linN  a  chest  2  Kiu.  12:  10, 
■'iSx  '^T3>  "rx  rna  one  prefect  of  the  servants  of  my  master  Isa.  36:  9, 
comp.  §  257.  6.  c;  :  r5X"^"i"!n  Ps.  50:  10  in  like  manner  may  mean  a  thou- 
wnd  mountains  or  it  may  mean  mountains  of  a  thousand  i.  e.  where  cattle 
rove  by  thousands.  Jer.  52:  20  K'ri,  2  Chron.  4:  15  omit  the  article  from 
■inx  though  joined  to  a  definite  noun,  after  the  analogy  of  other  numerals. 
In  other  cases  the  article  is  omitted  because  the  numeral  is  really  indefinite, 
inx  Bbinx  one  brother  of  yours  Gen.  42:  19,  the  particular  person  not 
being  determined;  bur  Avhen  the  fact  is  reported  to  Jacob  ver.  33,  the 
selection  had  been  made,  and  the  article  is  accordingly  employed;  so  t-^rrt 
inx  Num.  28:  4,  nrx  CNnn  l  Sam.  13:  17,  18,  Jer.  24:  2,  Ezek.  10:  9.  In 
inx  ^■'Nrj  Num.  16:  22,  the  numeral  is  a  predicate,  not  the  one  man  but 
the  man  Korali  alone  (lit.  being  one);  or  He  may  be  interrogative  §  231,  3.  o. 

h.  The  article  may  be  attached  to  ins  in  various  senses;  thus  'inxn 
means  tlie  one  Gen.  19:  9  i.  e.  this  one  man  in  implied  contrast  with  the 
entire  community;  the  first  in  a  series  Gen.  2:  11,  42:  27;  the  remaining 
one  Gen.  42:  13,  the  other  one  Lev.  14:  22,  15:  15;  the  well  known  one 
Gen.  42:  32,  44:  28;  the  one,  who  performed  the  action  referred  to,  defini- 
tely conceived,  2  Kin.  6:  3,  5;  with  the  generic  article  one  considei'ed  in 
relation  to  other  numbers  Eccles.  4:9,  or  it  may  be  the  one  spoken  of  in 
ver.  8. 

c,  Inx  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  the  partitive  yc,  which  appears 
to  be  r«>dundant  T^"nx  ■in><p  ■|'i"'?!^?  «  poor  man  of  one  of  thy  brethren  Deut. 
15:  7,  Lev.  4:   2  (see  vs.  13,  22,  27),  5:  13,  Ezek.  18:  10. 

2.  The  other  cardinal  numbers  are  joined  to  nouns 
as  follows,  viz.: 

(1.)  They  commonly  stand  before  the  noun  to  which 
they  belong  and  in  the  absolute  state,  D^bb^J  T\V^'^^four 
kings  Gen.  14:  9,  n">'  D^'lD'i  sixtij  cities  Deut.  3:  4,  T\k2 

18* 


276  SYNTAX.  .  §  254 

D*{:^^!i  a  hundred  cakes  of  raisins  2  Sam.  16:1,  P'Sbi^  n'iilj 
D'iiJ^D  six  thousand  horsemen  1  Sam.  13:5. 

■    T    IT 

(2.)  Such  as  have  a  distinct  form  for  the  construct 
(viz.  2-10,  ^i<'.3  hundred,  ''sbs  thousands)  may  also  stand 
before  the  noun  in  the  construct  state,  C'iz  'Z'\D  tivo  sons, 
prop,  ttvo  of  sons  Gen.  10:  25,  Wb"^  T\y%'\)^  four  days  Judg. 
1 1 :  40,  D'i-vS;  ni<-^  a  hundred  sockets  Ex.  38:27,  ^kbi^  T\tl^ 
U'^TCj  three  thousand  caynels  Job  1:  3. 

a.  It  should  be  observed  that  the  partitive  relation  is  expressed  not  by 
the  construct  form  of  the  numeral  mxriri  "^Sia  not  tico  of  the  lights  but  the 
tico  lights  Gen.  1:  16,  D"^i;?n  n'i'i:  the  six  branches  Ex.  25:  33,  but  by  the 
preposition  '("3,  e.  g.  D"'"'i^"in"'2  InX  one  of  the  young  men  2  Kin.  4:  22,  iri".:: 
Drb'i"?3  six  of  their  names  Ex.  28:  10. 

h.  The  numbers  two,  three,  four,  and  Seven,  occur  with  the  suffixes  of 
pronouns  which  are  in  apposition  with  them,  'IJrox  ^y^yd  loe,  both  of  us 
1  Sam.  20:  42,  also  Wnix-a-^hij  ive  two  1  Kin.  3:  18,  "iHind  fhei/  two  or  both 
of  them  1  Sam.  25:  43,  cbn'rVJ  t/e  three,  tin'JVj  they  three  Num.  12:  4, 
Cm'S-ix  they  four  Dan.  1:  17,  cmnilj  they  seven  2  Sam.  21:  9  K'ri.  The 
foUowinf^  numerals  occur  with  pronominal  suffixes  having  a  possessive  sense, 
tj'^t^n  thy  fifty,  T'i^'cn  his  fifty  2  Kin.  1:  10,  Cn-e-sn  their  fifties  ver.  14, 
''Qbx  my  thousand  Judg.  6:  15,  Ds'^S^X  your  thousands  1  Sam.  10:  19,  "'"'vj-^';} 
his  ten  thousands  1  Sam.  18:  7. 

(3.)  Less  frequently  the  numerals  stand  after  the  noun 
in  the  absolute  state,  y^ili  T\i^T2  seven  steps  Ezek.  10:  22, 
D'^V'1227  niins;  tiventy  she-asses  Gen.  32:  16,  t|b5<-n5<'^  Dn33  a 
hundred  thousand  talents  1  Chron.  22:  14. 

§  254.  1.  The  units  (including  ten),  whether  they  stand 
singly  or  are  compounded  with  other  numbers,  agree  with 
their  nouns  in  gender,  r\inbl  irbiij  three  leaves  Jer.  36:  23, 
^^'n  ^bc  nizib^  three  baskets  of  bread  Gen.  40:  16,  Pi^'S'^.S 
D'ibnS  "ilby  fourteen  lambs  Num.  29: 15;  the  other  numerals 
observe  no  distinction  of  gender. 

a.  When  the  units  quahfy  nisp  hundreds  or  ti'^S^X  thousands,  their 
gender  is  determined  by  that  of  these  words  respectively.  In  VD2~"'"r;  rri'j 
the  three  wives  of  his  sons  Gen.  7:  13,  the  masculine  adjective  is  probably 
to  be  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  noun,  though  in  reality  feminine  has 
a  masculine  termination. 

2.  Nouns  accompanied  by  the  units  (2-10)  are  almost 


§  254  NUMERALS.  277 

invariably  plural,  while  those  which  are  preceded  by  the 
tens  (20-90)  or  numbers  compounded  with  them  (21,  etc.), 
are  commonly  put  in  the  singular,  nb'^b  D'^yS'^iJ^']  UT  D^i?^"^!^ 
forty  days  andforiy  nights  Gen.  7 : 4,  "3  iT  D^irbTZJ^  3'la'^X  four 
and  thirty  years  Gen.  11: 16,  D^DU:  :!^2,^^  ni"^  D^niry  twenty 
years  and  seven  years  Gen.  23:  1;  1  Kin.  14:  20,  16:  29. 

a.  This  phenomenon  is  probably  to  be  accounted  for  upon  a  principle 
analogous  to  that  by  which  the  anomalous  terminations  for  gender  in  the 
numerals  has  been  explained,  §  224.  2.  When  the  numeral  has  itself  a 
plural  form,  as  it  has  in  the  tens,  the  plurality  of  the  entire  expression  is 
sufficiently  indicated  without  giving  a  plural  ending  to  the  noun  likewise. 
But  with  the  units  which  have  a  singular  termination,  the  noun  must  take 
a  plural  form.  It  may  be  observed,  however,  that  this  peculiarity  chiefly 
affects  a  certain  class  of  nouns,  viz.  those  which  are  most  frequently  num- 
bered, and  in  which,  consequently,  the  tendency  to  abbreviate  the  expres- 
sion by  retrenching  the  plural  ending  is  most  strongly  manifested,  and  in 
which,  moreover,  each  unit  is  like  every  other,  so  that  plurality  is  but  the 
repetition  of  the  same  thing.  These  are  such  as  d'^X  man,  dS3  soul,  "^"^V^ 
footman  and  various  measures  of  time,  space,  weight,  etc.,  e.  g.  tiJ'J  year, 
Di"!  day,  n^!:5<  cubit,  b;r"ij  shekel.  These  nouns  are  also  found,  though  less 
constantly,  in  the  singular  with  hundreds  and  thousands,  T\T:i  J^'ix?  3?'l"n 
nine  hundred  years  Gen.  5:  5,  tiiax  Cibx  a  thousand  cubits  Num.  35:  4,  and 
with  the  numbers  from  11  to  19,  b|^B  "yb'J  i^t^n  fifteen  shekels  Lev.  27:  7. 
Comp.  in  German  hundert  Fuss  lang,  fxmfz'ig  Pfund  schiver,  and  in  English 
tiventy  head  of  cattle,  a  ten  foot  pole.  Other  nouns  are  similarly  affected, 
but  with  less  regularity  tj~;b  Q^^br  twenty  ]}lanks  Ex.  26:  18,  19  but  C^^i? 
ni^-np  Ex.  36:  23-25,  "i^S"  n 7il'>;-i::bi:3  thirteen  cities  Josh.  21:  33,  "i^sn  rjbx 
Cant.  4:  4,  nvj,  D"]!?!!*^  2  Chron.  9:  15. 

b.  Tlie  numbers  from  2  to  10  are  very  rarely  found  with  singular  nouns, 
ni"^  nifj  eight  years  2  Kin.  22:  1,  n?D5<  dba  three  cubits  25:  17  K'thibh 
where  the  K'ri  has  niBN,  "I'ai'n  ''Z^  Ex.  16:  22,  qbx  ^^':J?_  Ezek.  45:  1.  The 
tens  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  plural  Q'^i;'"!'?  ~"^3"j  thirty  companions 
Judg.  14:  11,  ^'?r]"^.?3  O^ii^'i::  eighty  sons  of  valour  2  Chron.  26:  17,  C!''r3"i5< 
°''i^7  '^i':;i  forty-two  children  2  Kin.  2:  24,  CjOi-i^'iX  t3"ii"3"ix  Ex.  26:  19; 
see  also  (3en.  18:  24,  26,  28,  Ex.  15:  27,  Josh.  7:  21,  Judg!  1:7,  12:  14, 
2  Sam.  9:  10,  1  Kin.  4:  13,  2  Kin.  10:  1,  13:  7,  15:  20;  in  Ezra  8:  6-14 
fi'^i.SI'il  is  in  explanatory  apposition  with  the  numerals.  When  the  noun 
precedes  the  numeral  it  is  always  put  in  the  plural,  t'si  excepted  Gen. 
46:  26,  27,  Num.  31:  40,  46,  Jer.  52:  29,  30. 

c.  In  enumerations  of  familiar  objects  the  noun  is  sometimes  omitted, 
when  the  meaning  is  sufficiently  plain  from  the  connection,  isn't  trnis  ten 
(shekels)  of  gold  Gen.  24:  22,  rD?  niNp  Tl'5':3  three  hundred  (shekels)  of 
silver  Gen.  45:  22,  Cn'i-^ria  tioo  (loaves)  of  bread  1  Sam.  10:  4,  Di^.i'b-a"^. 
six  (ephahs)  of  barley  Euth  3:  15.     In  measurements,  the  word  nkx  cubit 


278  SYNTAX.  §  254 

is  occasionally  preceded  by  the  preposition  3,  thus  •TSJfS  2J3'iX  four  by  the 
cubit  i.  e.  four  cubits. 

d.  The  attributive  with  a  noun  in  the  singular  after  the  tens  or  higher 
numerals  may  be  in  the  singular  Judg.  18:  17,  20 :  2,  1  Sam.  22:  18,  1  Kin 
20:  16,  Cant.  4:  4,  or  in  the  plural  Judg.  18:  16,  1  Kin.  1:  5,  20:  30. 

3.  Compound  numbers  may  either  proceed  from  the 
higher  to  the  lower  denomination,  D'TS":?!!  DX'S'7  ^i?.^ 
ni?^*S1  a  thousand  two  hundred  fifty  and  four  Neli.  7:  34, 
or  the  reverse,  HD^  lnJ<r^  D^irbiT^  V':^q  seven  and  tldrty  and 
a  hundred  years  Ex.  6:16.  The  noun  sometimes  stands 
at  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  entire  series  as  in  pre- 
ceding examples,  and  sometimes  it  is  repeated  after  each 
numeral,  D^DUJ  yn^Dl  rh'^D  Q-^n'^Z^I  nr^T  I1N"2  a  hundred  years 
and  twenty  years  and  seven  years  Gen.  23;  1. 

4.  Numeral  adjectives  may  receive  the  article  when 
they  represent  an  absolute  number,  or  the  noun  is  not 
expressed;  but  when  they  are  joined  to  a  definite  noun 
the  latter  alone  receives  the  article,  D^iTSr;  {tlie)  two  are 
better  than  "M^^r:  {tJie)  one  Eccles.  4:  9,  □■>;zisn  the  forty 
Gen.  18:  29,  Dlb-^^Sn  D-^iv^n  the  fifty  rigldeoiis  ver.  28, 
Vnbn  ^nir  Ms  tiuo  daughters  19:  30,  Di^n  D"i:ni")i<  the  forty 
days  Deut.  9:  25;  Judg.  ^:  7,  22,  18:  17,  1  Sam.  17:  14. 
2  Sam.  23:  22,  23,  1  Kin.  7:  41-44,  2  Cliron.  25:  9. 

a.  The  rule  is  the  same  when  the  noun  is  made  definite  by  a  suffix 
"K-r:  dpn  her  five  damsels  1  Sam.  25:  42,  Job  42:  7  or  by  being  in  the 
construct  state,  Gen.  49:  28,  1  Sam.  17:  18,  Job  2:  II.  The  article  may  be 
attached  to  a  noun  in  apposition  C|p2n  C"3':J  the  thirty  shekels  of  silver 
Zech,  11:  13,  nrxn  D-^nrrn  -d-d  these  six  ephalis  of  barley  Euth  3:  17.  It 
is  joined  both  to  the  numeral  and  to  an  accompanying  participle  in  iTJ'i"!! 
D'^nniitn  Ex.  28:  10.  In  a  few  instances  it  is  given  to  the  numeral  and  not 
to  the  noun  ;r"'i<;  D'^rx's^  Qiii-ann  the  tico  hundred  and  fifty  men  Num.  16:  35, 
tvyd  C">i"*r'!:!v!  "^'-'^  ^^'<^  J'^^*'  of  fifty  years  i.  e.  the  fiftieth  year  Lev.  25:  10,  11, 
where  the  article  is  used  to  give  definiteness  to  the  preceding  noun  in  the 
construct.  In  Cn"2~X  ii"?X?i  D'^^^'^O  these  four  children  Dan.  1:  17,  the  nu- 
meral following  a  definite  noun  receives  a  pronominal  sulfix  referring  to  it. 
When  numerals  are  joined  to  demoiistiative  pronouns  both  may  receive  the 
article  n~xn  r;3"i;i  Deut.  19:  9,  but  more  commonly  it  is  given  to  neither 
n'^N-cVj  Ex.  21:  11,  Gen.  22:  23,  Zech.  4:  10.    In  E.x.  38:  28  the  article  it 


§  255 


NUMERALS.  279 


attached  to  the  thousands  and  hundreds  of  a  compound  number,  but  not  to 
the  tens  and  units  D'^yn":3l  f^'i'^ni  niiian  sblj^  C)bkn. 

b.  When  compound  numbers  11,  12,  etc.,  receive  tlie  article,  it  may  be 
given  to  the  first  member  of  the  compound,  "lO^  S"^3ii'ri  the  ttvelve  1  Chron. 
25:  19,  27:  15,  1  Kin.  6:  38,  QiVci;-!  inxti  Ex.  12:  18;  or  to  the  second, 
d'^k  ^w^'n  w'yd  the  twelve  men  Josh.  4:  4,  1  Kin.  19:  19.  In  the  example 
just  cited  the  article  is  given  to  the  numeral  instead  of  to  the  noun,  but 
in  'nb>-D'i:':J  "'f^^v?  '^*^  twelve  oxen  1  Kin.  7:  44,  2  Chron.  4:  15  the  general 
rule  is  observed. 

Ordinal  Numbers,  etc. 

§  255.  1.  The  ordinal  numbers  follow  the  general 
law  of  adjectives  in  position  and  agreement  with  the 
substantive,  to  which  they  belong,  "Dir  "i^  a  second  son 
Gen.  30:  7,  n^Tli^b'^o  ^^5^5  in  the  third  year  1  Kin.  18:1. 

a.  Instances  occur  of  expressions  rendered  definite  by  the  article  be- 
fore the  adjective  only  'ir"'V:i-n  xihiD  the  third  entry  Jer.  38:  14,  Judg.  6:  25, 
Zech.  14:  10,  or  before  the  noun  only  ^'^  Q'^titi  n""?  Esth.  2:  14.  The  de- 
nominations of  time  often  stand  in  the  construct  before  the  ordinal ;  thus 
nid  year,  n-^^^n-in  nrj  the  fourth  year  Jer.  46:  2,  51:  59,  28:  1  K'thibh, 
32:  1  K'thibh,  2  Kin.  17:  6,  25:  1,  Ezr.  7:  8;  d'ln  month,  Ezr.  10:  9;  ai"i 
day,  Gen.  1:  31,  2:  3,  Ex.  12:  15,  20:  10,  Lev.  19:  6,  22:  27,  Deut.  5:  14. 
Ordinals  are  in  a  few  instances  used  in  the  plural  with  plural  nmns  ex- 
pressed 1  Sam.  19:  21,  or  understood  Gen.  6:  16,  Num.  2:  16,  24,  or  pre- 
ceding them  in  the  construct  state  2  Kin.  10:  30,  15:  12,  or  with  cardinal 
numbers  2  Kin.  1:13. 

b.  In  enumerations  the  cardinal  Inx  is  sometimes  used  for  first,  Gen. 
1;  5,  2:  11,  Ex.  28:  17,  39:  10.  If  only  two  pei'sons  or  things  are  spoken  of 
the  next  may  be  called  "^rrn  the  second,  Ex.  25:  12,  32,  2  Sam.  4:  2,  1  Kin. 
6:  26.  27,  34;  "inX  or  "inxn  the  renmiiiing  one  Ex.  17:  12,  Lev.  14:  22,  15:  15, 
2  Sam.  12:  1,  14:  6;  or  nnxn  the  other  1  Kin.  3:  17,  22,  2  Chron.  3:  11,  12, 
Ezek.  41:  24. 

2.  The  lack  of  ordinals  above  ten  is  supplied  by  using 
the  cardinals  instead,  which  are  then  commonly  preceded 
by  the  noun  in  the  construct  state,  yn'i'l  D^Hit^r?  ^t"^  the 
twenty-seventh  year  1  Kin.  16:  10,  D^>'n"]Nri  niir  the  fortieth 
year  Num.  33:  3S,  although  this  order  is  not  always  ob- 
served, niiT  nVo"tb"j:  thirteenth  year  Gen.  14:  4,  ^rc^t 
^nnn  ^ir:?  the  eleventh  month  1  Chron.  27:  14,  15. 

V  ~  T  T  .  ' 

a.  A  fuUer  form  of  expression  is  sometimes  employed,  e.  g.  Cjibd  nSlIJa 


280  SYNTAX.  §  255 

nir  nitpn  in  the  ihirfy-eighih  year  prop,  in  the  year  of  thirty-eight  years 
1  Kin.  16:  29,  2  Kin.  9:  29,  15:  1. 

b.  In  dates  the  cardinals  are  used  for  the  day  of  the  month  and  some- 
times for  the  year,  even  though  the  number  is  below  ten;  the  words  day 
and  month  are  also  frequently  omitted;  TZ'dl  r;d  the  seventh  year  2  Kin. 
12:  1,  Est]).  2:  16,  rrx  nio  Ezr.  1:  1,  Dan.  9:  1,  2,  C^nd  rrj  Hag.  1:  1,  15, 
diB'a  rrcJ  Dan.  8:  l,  but  with  the  article  ^ntti  rrj  the  regularly  recurring 
seventh  year  Deut.  15:  9;  "^is'^nri  O^ri?  •li.'a'nx  the  fourth  (day)  of  the  ninth 
month  Zech.  7:1,  ''iy"i::ir2  in  the  seventh  (month)  ver.  5. 

3.  Fractional  parts,  whether  expressed  by  the  femi- 
nine ordinals  or  by  special  terms,  §  228.  3,  may  either 
stand  alone  or  in  the  construct  before  the  noun  to  which 
they  are  joined,  which  then  receives  the  article  unless 
otherwise  made  definite  ^krini..Di^ri  "iir!  the  half  of  the 
people...cmd  the  other  half  1  Kin.  16:  21;  they  read  in'if^nn 
DTn  the  fourth  2Mrt  of  the  day,  n'i?"'!";^  and  a  fourth  pa^^t 
they  were  confessing  Neh,  9:3;  the  hundredth  part  is  de- 
noted by  the  use  of  the  cardinal  number  ",C5n  riN'J  tlie 
liundredth  part  of  the  silver  Neh.  5:11. 

a.  Measures  of  distance,  capacity  and  weight  regularly  take  the  article 
when  preceded  by  fractional  parts,  though  not  requiring  it  otherwise  rii:X 
'^'sxn  iiir;|i  a  cubit  and  the  half  of  a  cubit  Ex.  26:  16,  1  Kin.  7:  31,  32, 
Num.  28:  14,  2  Kin.  6:  25,  Neh.  10:  33,  Ezek.  45:  13,  46:  14;  exceptioijs  are 
rare  1  Kin.  9:  8,  comp.  1  Sam.  14:  14.  The  only  examples  of  the  plural 
form  of  fractional  parts  are  U'Diir  "^rr  tioo  tenths,  C"'?^"!";  ni'br  three  tenths 
and  T^rd'cn  the  fifth  parts  thereof  Lev.  5:  24. 

4.  Distributive  numbers  are  formed  by  repeating  the 
cardinals,  WW  D'DiT  two  by  two  G-en.  7:  9,  t'\i'Zi'J  ni^'j'^S  by 
sevens  ver.  2.  The  numeral  adverbs  once,  tivice,  etc.,  are 
expressed  by  the  feminine  of  the  carchnals,  Pihi^  once,  D^FIUJ 
twice  2  Kin.  6:  10,  Job  40:  5,  yn'i:  seven  times  Lev.  26:  18, 
21  or  by  means  of  the  noun  WJB  stroke  or  beat,  D^'^JD 
twice  Gen.  27:  36,  D^".:^"2  T^i?  ten  times  Job  19:  3  or  D'lijn 
steps,  D"'3j"i  ibV^  three  times  Ex.  23:  14,  a  form  of  speech 
which  has  arisen  from  the  method  of  counting  by  beats 
or  taps  with  the  hand  or  foot. 

a.  The  article  may  be  attached  to  numerals  in  a  distributive  sense, 
§  248.  4,  C'Ni'in  "ijo  the  two  princes  i.  e.  ever}'^  two  princes  Num.  7 :  3, 


§  256  APPOSITION  OE  SUBORDINATION.  281 

•Jnsn  'ili'lhh  for  the  one  lamb  i.  e.  each  lamb  Num.  15:  5;  or  the  same  idea 
may  be  expressed  without  the  article  when  the  connection  requires  it, 
fcii^  nopirb  every  three  days  Am.  4:  4,  inx  ^■^kh  for  each  man  2  Kin. 
15:  20.  In  1  Kin.  4:  7  K'thibh  ^nx  means  each,  where  the  K'ri  inserts  the 
article.  Fractional  numbers  may  also  be  used  distributively  TiT^a-?  Tl"i">^?  « 
tenth  part  severally  for  each  lamb  Num.  29:  10.  Alternative  numbers  are 
put  together  without  a  connective  tlijbiy  n"^3T2J  two  or  three  HTi'^n  •^^JS'iX 
four  or  five  Isa.  17:  6,  Am.  4;  8. 

b.  The  feminine  ordinals  are  also  used  adverbially  tlD'iilJX'n  first  or  in 
the  first  place  Lev.  5:  8,  nijia  in  the  second  place  2  Sam,  16:  19,  or  a  second 
time  Gen.  41:  5,  Num.  10;  6,  tvb^h^  a  third  time  1  Sam.  3:  8,  Ezek.  21:  19. 

Apposition  or  Subordination. 

§  256.  Nouns  may  be  joined  to  the  subject  either  in 
the  coordinate  relation  of  apposition,  or  in  a  subordinate 
relation  whether  absolutely  or  in  the  close  connection  of 
the  construct  state.  When  one  noun  serves  to  define  or 
to  describe  another  it  may  be  put  in  apposition  with  it. 
This  construction,  of  which  a  more  extended  use  is  made 
in  Hebrew  than  in  occidental  languages,  may  be  em- 
ployed in  the  following  cases,  viz.: 

1.  When  both  nouns  denote  the  same  person  or  thing; 
Dbi2  T|b"J  p"iii"^3b7j  Melchizedek  the  king  of  Salem  G-en.  14: 
18,  D^hVn  m  r\W2  Moses  the  man  of  God  Deut.  33:  1, 
»^5"9<^  "^^^  ^  '^oman  (who  was)  a  widow  1  Kin.  7:  14, 
Tjrizu:  "pD'^  D';'r''^n  heaven  thy  dwelling-place  1  Kin.  8:  49, 
D^Ji^iiBn  ■'i»S'  my  servants  the  prophets  2  Kin.  9 :  7,  5j^']S  t;? 
Job  11:  12V 

a.  Where  proper  are  in  apposition  with  common  nouns,  either  may 
precede  according  as  prominence  is  given  to  the  individual  or  to  the  class 
""i^  'n^'??!'  2  Sam.  3:  31,  1  Sam.  8:  1,  more  rarely  T^bin  11  ri  13:  39  hing 
David,  and  only  exceptionally  "yyi  "^p  Hos.  5:  13,  10:  6,  and  T(^"b  bsi^b 
Prov.  31:  1;  such  combinations  as  Inn  "in  mount  Hor  Num.  20:  22,  "insn 
S^inx  the  river  Ahava  Ezr.  8;  21,  Vitib"^  oijn  the  people  Israel  Ezr.  9:  1  are 
mostly  replaced  by  the  construct  relation  §  257.  3.  A  noun  may  also  be  in 
apposition  with  a  pronoun  nirr^  "^SX  I  Jehovah  Isa.  45:  19,  ^Z'J  i:n3X  we 
thy  people  Ps,  79:  13,  Tj^'bn  X^n  he  the  king  2  Chron.  28:  22,  Ezr.  7:  6,  or  a 
pronominal  suffix  UJ"'Kn  "ixina  when  he,  the  man  ivent  in  Ezek.  10:  3,  Lev. 
27:  12,  Jer.  27:  8,  or  a  pronoun  with  a  noun  Jthovah  thy  God,  "1335  Stin  he 
is  going  over  before  thee  Deut.  31:  3. 


282  SYNTAX.  §  256 

2.  When  the  second  specifies  the  first  by  stating  the 
material  of  which  it  consists,  its  quantity,  character  or 
the  hke,  riUJriin  "ij^sn  the  oxen  the  brass  i.  e.  the  brfdoi 
oxen  2  Kin.  1*6:  17,  1  Chron.  15:  19,  Dent.  16:  21,  'ztz 
rr^lp  D"JJ;D  three  measures  (consisting  of)  meal  Gen.  18:  G, 
Ruth  2:  17,  2  Kin.  4:  2,  7:  1,  ni^n  D'Dir-Z.'niD  seven  years 
{oi)  famine  2  Sam.  24:  13,  1  Chron.  21:  12,  "ZS  Dn^j 
rows  (of)  stones  Ex.  28:  17,  1  Kin.  7:  42,  2  Chron.  4:  3,  13, 
^BC^  D^"::'  days  (which  are)  a  number,  i.  e.  such  as  can  be 
readily  numbered,  a  few  Num.  9:  20,  r"J5<  □■'Y7^?  tuords 
(which  are)  truth  Pro  v.  22:  21,  Zech.  1:13,  Lam.  4:  17, 
Esth.  9:  30. 

a.  Kimchi  thinks  that  there  is  a  partial  assimilation  to  the  construct 

in  tph  n-nss  (instead  of  t2"^^a3)  tivo  talents  (of)  silrer  1  Kin.  16:  24,  2  Kin. 
5:23;  other  examples  of  apposition  are  such  as  D'^i"'  Cjryr  two  years  days 
i.  e.  two  full  years,  embracing  all  the  days  which  constitute  that  period 
Gen.  41:  1,  so  D-iii^  ^'^^J^a  nr^'::  three  full  loeeks  Dan.  10:  3;  -ij?3  nip-Q 
possession  consisting  in  cattle  Eccles.  2:  7;  J^^^X  Di'i'^Q~T2"^  ii'h-o  a  pair  of 
mules'  lurden  (of)  earth  2  Kin.  5:  17;  "bhy  t:"]:-:n  x^a  double  handful  (oO 
toil  Eccles.  4:  6,  nib  'rak  fiis^  a  phving  strip  (of)  an  acre  of  land  1  Sam. 
14:  14.  So  probably  the  much  d  sputed  passage  the  destined  possessor  of 
my  house  is  "^.'^l^'^X  pw''??  Damascus  (in  the  person  of  its  citizen)  Eliezcr 
Gen.  15:  2.  A  noun  may  be  separated  from  that  with  which  it  is  in  appo- 
sition by  intervening  words  tl'^JZX  "ihx  Nk"2:n  that  ichich  ivas  found  with 
each  (of)  stones  i.  e.  whatever  precious  stones  each  had  1  Chron.  29:  8, 
D-B...bl3-an  Gen,  7:  6,  14:  12,  Ex.  22:  30,  n'iin  •''nn^  . . . -inn  Deut.  17:  8, 
28:  64,  Jer.  41:  8.  Sometimes  the  added  noun  agrees  in  definiteness,  with 
that  which  it  specifies  Sntri  niharin  the  golden  cords  Ex.  39:  17  (the  parallel 
passage  Ex.  28:  24  has  the  construct  ::ri^r}  rrhr),  n-bnn  -p^n  Jer,  25:  15, 
^■'"Hin  "iljixn  Zech,  4:  10,  but  this  is  not  always  the  case  ^a  i'h'Q  his  linen 
garment  Lev.  6:  3  (where  as  in  Prov,  22:  21  the  construct  relation  and  that 
of  appt^sition  both  occur  in  the  same  verse),  roz  npsn  iTi"p~  the  one  silver 
dish  Num.  7:  85,  2nT  Dn^n'-ij  their  golden  lamps,  1  Chron.  2m:  15.  Preposi- 
tions may  be  repeated  before  nouns  and  pronouns  in  apposition  Gen.  40:  1, 
43:  28,  Lev.  7:  8,  Josh.  1:  2,  1  Sam.  2:  34,  15:  1,  2  Sam.  6:  21,  18:  32, 
1  Kin,  2:  5,  8:  30,  1  Chron.  4:  42,  2  Chron.  26:  14,  Ps.  18:  51,  74:  14,  or  not 
Gen.  2:  19,  9:  4,  10:  21,  44:  24. 

6.  Vs  is  sometimes  made  more  emphatic  by  being  placed  after  a  noun  and 
in  apposition  with  it  instead  of  before  it  in  the  construct  033  Dn"'bn35  your 
idols,  all  of  them  Ezek.  14:  5,  Mic.  1 :  2,  hut  probably  not  Eccles.  12:  13,  which 
may  be  read  ''the  end  of  the  matter,  after  the  whole  has  been  heard,  is  etc., 
nor  Ezra  10:  17  they  finished  in  all  i.  e,  entirely,  in  toto,  the  men  icho  etc 


§  256 


APPOSITION  OB  SUBOBDINATION.  283 


3.  A  noun,  which  stands  in  some  general  relation  to 
another,  may  by  a  loose  kind  of  subordination  be  added 
to  it  to  modify  its  meaning,  the  first  noun  remaining  in 
the  absolute  state,  D"'2i"^S  W^2  ivater  reachino^  the  knees 
Ezek.  47;  4,  l^briH  "p^'v'-  ^^*^  vision  concerning  the  con- 
tinual service  Dan.  8:  13,  ~|Cb  D^i'D  dross  (of)  silver  Ezek. 
22:  18,  3^D!a  M^JblC  "jn!^  whole  stone  (from  the)  quarry 
1  Kin.  6:  7,  D^ST^n  irbir  ^bj^Qn  the  fork  (with)  ^/^ree  /iwes 
1  Sam.  2:13. 

a.  This  subordination  is  a  free  sort  of  substitute  for  the  closer  con* 
nection  of  the  construct  state  l^^^'^  "li'i"^  tongue  (of)  fraud  Ps.  120:  2  (where 
the  parallel  clause  has  the  construct),  "^JJ"!  "ipa  pastured  cattle  1  Kin.  5:  3, 
bread  of  affliction  and  yn'i  D";i  water  (of)  affliction  i.  e.  prison  fare  1  Kiu. 
22 :  27,  "i^".!  c'p"'N  rams  (of)  ?fOoZ  1.  e.  wool-bearing  rams  or,  as  others  sup- 
pose, the  first  word  may  denote  the  quantity  and  the  second  the  material, 
as  much  wool  as  rams  have,  fleeces  2  Kin,  3:  4,  ri3>'^Pi  )'i2  Ps.  60:  5,  Q^nbx 
tibx  Jer.  10:  10;  especially  where  the  first  noun  has  the  article  for  the 
sake  of  emphasizing  the  definiteness  of  the  expression  'p^nx  t"3n3fi  the 
streams  (of)  the  Arnon  Num.  21:  14,  2  Sam.  24:  5,  n-^^an  "pTXri  the  ark  (of) 
the  covenant  Josh.  3:  14,  Qia^iirrt  nnsTari  the  chariot  (of)  tlie  cherubim 

1  Chron.  28:  18,  Tiy  lni<«:ri  the  propheci/  (of)  Oded  2  Cliron.  15:  y,  Neh. 
3:  19,  Jer.  38;  6,  Ezek.  45:  16;  or  has  a  suffix,  "ijT'iJ  ""X:'::  my  false  enemies 
Ps.  38:  20,  Dl'ii  '^ni'13  my  covenant  concerning  the  day  Jer.  33:  20,  Lev. 
26:  42,  Num.  25:  12,  2  Sam.  22:  33,  Ps.  71 :  7,  Ezek,  16:  27,  18:  7,  Hab.  3:  8, 
but  not  Ps.  45:  7;  or  is  a  proper  noun  ti*^"?  '|?bi  Zoan  (in)  Egypt  Num. 
13:  22,  Gen.  35:  27,  Deut.  23:  5,  Judg.  17:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  12,  2  Chron.  32:  5, 
Mic.  1;  14,  compare  in  English  Princeton,  New  Jersey,  n'iX3^  ri"!T;  Jehovah 
(of)  hosts  1  Sam.  1:  3.  nik3:j  Q^n^XPs.  59:  6,  80:  5,  8,  15,  20,  84:  9.  In 
some  instances  like  those  above  given,  the  first  noun  is  repeated  in  the 
construct  HT^'n  "|3':3^  "i^^^'Z'  the  tabernacle,  the  tabernacle  of  the  testimony 
Ex.  38:  21,  (Gen.  15:  18,  Deut.  11:  24,  2  Kin.  18:  19,  28,  or  a  common  is 
inserted  after  the  proper  noun  nix:^^  "^ij^^  niir^  Jehovah  the  God  of  hosts 

2  Sam.  5:  10,  Ps.  72:  18;  and  ^his  may  be  mentally  done  in  other  cases.  In 
D^fi  T^llvi!  2  Kin.  11:  13  a  conjunction  should  be  supplied,  the  guards  and 
the  people;  this  may  also  oe  done  in  DS?  D^n'''^S;  Judg.  5:  13,  though  more 
probably  it  means  noblef>  (of)  the  people;  in  Q"^ir^r3ri  nbns  Ezr.  2:  62, 
Neh.  7:  64  the  relation  may  be  that  of  subordination  their  book  (of)  the 
registered  or  of  apposition  their  book  entitled  "the  regintered". 

b.  This  subordination  likewise  occurs  when  a  familiar  phrase  is  ab- 
breviated S^D'j  fi'd!  "^iii'n  "ID  the  second  bullock  seven  years  (old)  for  rl5'i3"l3 
fi"^?':;:  Judg.  6;  25,  or  where  a  series  of  nouns  in  the  construct  is  interrupted 
by  the  insertion  of  one  in  the  absolute,  expressing  some  quality  of  the 
preceding  r:N^^  b'^n  '^'^^^i.  men  of  strength  (for)  the  work  of  the  service  of 


284  SYNTAX.  §  257 

the  house  of  Ood  1  Chron.  9:  13,  2  Chron.  8:  5,  Ti|nnt?  "nrlu  "ffn^i  the  hairy 
crown  (of)  him  that  goeth  etc.,  or  the  verb  may  have  a  double  object  smite 
on  his  hairy  crown  him  etc.  Ps.  68;  22,  Isa.  28:  1,  32:  13;  or  by  the  intro- 
duction of  some  other  word  b!ij<T:J""|3  l^fi  D^'i!n5"'^";b  ttvo  men  captains  of 
bands  there  were  (of)  the  son  of  Saul  2  Sam.  4:  2,  bri'ba  f,2nb-sr  inn  a  base 
thought  in  thy  heart  though  it  might  be  a  thought  in  thy  base  heart  Deut. 
15:9,  rpin^i  nisin  r"3na  C'^ns  great  cities  (with)  tvalls  and  bars  l  Kin.  4:  13, 
Deut.  3:  5,  C^rni";  tim  Dsn  this  people  (of)  Jerusalem  Jer.  8:  5. 

c.  The  word  nrilip,  as  Ewald  suggests,  affords  a  good  illustration  of 
the  various  constructions  possible  in  Hebrew  in  the  relation  of  nouns  to 
nouns;  thus  it  may  stand  after  a  noun  in  the  construct  JiJ^'ari  "^JtiS  the 
priests  of  the  second  rank  2  Kin.  23 :  4,  or  itself  in  the  construct  before  a 
noun  "^"an  ^?.'^^  the  second  in  rank  to  the  king  i.  e.  next  to  him  2  Chron. 
28:  7,  or  in  apposition  with  a  preceding  noun  Hido  T^i'lrbs  over  the  se- 
cond division  of  the  city  Neh.  11:9  (or  it  may  mean  second  over  the  city), 
or  assuming  almost  the  character  of  an  attributive,  agreeing  in  number 
and  defiuiteness  D'^i\aJ2n  Dninx  their  brethren  of  the  second  rank  1  Chron. 
15:  18. 


The  Consteuct  State  and  Suffixes. 

§  257.  When  one  noun  is  limited  or  restricted  in  its 
meaning  by  another,  the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state; 
if  the  hmiting  word  be  a  personal  pronoun  it  is  suffixed 
to  the  noun.  The  relation  thus  expressed  corresponds, 
for  the  most  part,  to  the  occidental  genitive  or  to  that 
denoted  in  English  by  the  preposition  of.  The  primary 
notion  of  the  grammatical  form  is  simply  the  juxtaposi- 
tion of  two  nouns,  or  the  union  of  a  noun  and  a  pronoun, 
to  represent  the  subordination  of  one  to  the  other  in  the 
exi)ression  of  a  single  idea,  §  214.  The  particular  rela- 
tion, which  it  suggests,  is  consequently  dependent  on  the 
meanings  of  the  words  themselves,  and  is  in  each  case 
that  which  is  most  naturally  suggested  by  their  combi- 
nation. Thus,  the  second  noun  or  the  pronominal  suffix 
may  denote 

1 .  The  possessor  of  that  which  is  represented  by  the 
preceding  noun,  nVrr;  bb"."]  tJie  temple  of  Jehovah  1  Sam. 
1:  9,  VQM"^  their  substance  Gen.  12:  5.  This  embraces  the 

'  T  : 


§  257  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.  285 

various  degrees  of  relationship,  dtl'^nji"]^  the  son  of  Alra^ 
ham  Gen.  25:  12,  ^TVZt^  thy  ivife  Gen.  12:  5. 

a.  So  a  few  proper  names,  as  Gibeah  of  Saul  1  Sam.  11:  4,  Gath  of  tkt 
Philistines  Am.  6:  2,  Zion  of  the  Holy  One  of  Israel  Isa.  60:  14. 

2.  The  ivhole,  of  which  the  preceding  word  denotes 
apart,  "^:?  ^i'^^nb^  the  poor  of  thy  people  Ex.  23:  11,  1  Sam. 
17:  40,  •pt^'^'nnDD  the  honourable  of  the  earth  Isa.  23:  9, 

,  '       I    Vat        ••  -  :  •  u 

Ty^  r\3n  a  cake  of  unleavened  tread  Lev.  8:  26,  Isa.  11:  12. 

a.  So  "lies  a'^S'  birds  of  prey  lit.  preying  of  birds  Ezek.  39:  4,  six  b'^DS 
fool  of  man  i.  e.  foolish  man  Prov.  15:  20,  dnx  Nnfe  ivild  ass  of  man  Gen. 
16:  12,  DTN  "^na'T  sacrificers  of  men  i.  e.  the  men  that  sacrifice,  not  as 
others  explain  according  to  96  they  that  sacrifice  men  Hos.  13:  2.  A  few 
instances  occur  of  adjectives  used  substantively  in  the  construct  before  the 
nouns  to  which  they  belong  VjSill  ^"1?  the  greatness  of  thy  arm  or  thy  great 
arm  Ex.  15:  16,  Ps.  46:  5,  65:  5,  145:  7;  so  the  adverb  lii^a  for  the  most 
part  with  inanimate  or  irrational  objects  D"^^  Ui'TS  a  little  water  Gen.  18:  4, 
43:  2,  11,  1  Kin.  17:  12,  Prov.  6:  10,  iKSn  '^byz  the  feiv  sheep  1  Sam.  17:  28, 
while  with  men  except  Dan.  11:  23  it  follows  6.  c  or  §  252.  1.  f.  Abstract 
nouns  may  be  thus  used  2'>r2J  p^^;  greenness  of  herb  i.  e.  green  herb.  Gen. 
1:  30,  3:  24,  Job  15:  26,  T'l'non  3'"i  abundance  of  thy  mercy  i.  e.  thy  abundant 
mercy  Ps.  5:  8,  37:  2,  Jer.'22:  7,  23:  22,  Obad.  vs.  3.  20,  Zech.  11:  13,  and 
sometimes  in  an  emphatic  sense  indicating  that  the  part  singled  out  from 
the  whole  possesses  the  quality  referred  to  in  an  eminent  degree  npip 
vHs  the  height  of  his  cedars  i.  e.  his  highest  cedars  2  Kin.  19:  23.  Here 
too  belong  the  superlative  expressions,  D'^C'ip  C'lp  holy  of  holies,  d'^n'^li'ri  ^""d 
the  song  of  songs,  U^^ys_  "i^i]  servant  of  servants,  one  that  is  a  servant  by 
way  of  eminence  when  compared  with  all  others;   see  besides  Deut.  10:  17, 

1  Kin.  8:  27,  Eccles.  1:  2,  Ezek.  16:  7,  26:  7,  Dan.  8:  25;  or  cognate  in- 
stead of  identical  words  may  be  thus  combined  Q'^n'i'iD  "^no  most  rebellious 
Jer.  6:  28. 

3.  An  individual  of  the  class  denoted  by  the  pre- 
ceding noun,  thus  serving  the  purpose  of  a  more  exact 
designation,  D'^'liS'^  y]i<  the  land  of  Egypt  Gen.  41:  19, 
nns-nna  the  river  (of)  Euphrates  Gen.  15:  18,  Ex.  19:  11, 

2  Sam.  19:  41,  D^n^?  ^TJ  cedar  trees,  2  Chron.  2:  7,  n^bin 
3|b5'^;i  woryn  (of)  Jacob  Isa.  41:  14,  D^'.rin  "TIJ:5<  men  (who 
are)  merchants  1  Kin.  10:  15. 

a.  So  'i'i':i"n?  n3^n3  virgin  daughter  Zion  Isa.  37:  22,  47:  1,  Jer.  14: 17, 
ctj^a  "^5^  children  of  the  third  generation  (not  according  to  1  those  des- 
cended from  them)  Gen.  50:  23,  Judg.  19:  22,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  2  Kin.  10:  6, 
Jer.  24:  2.     It  is   unusual   to  find  such  constructions  as  "jSIS  V'l'jn!  Num. 


286  SYNTAX.  §  257 

84:  2,   cBri-i'i  nzn  Lam.  2:  13;   "inn  lh  is  the  standing;  phrase  for  mount 
Hor,  but  this  is  exceptional,  §  256,  1.  a. 

4.  The  material  of  which  the  preceduig  noun  is  com- 
posed, zryi  DTD  a  ring  of  gold  Gen.  24:  22,  Y?""b3  ves.seZ  0/ 
li^oof?  Lev,  11:  32,  Q"T5m  Tli/  the  flock  of  goats  Cant.  4:  1, 
",2N  n^D  roe<;s  of  stones  Ex.  39:  10,  1  Kin.  6:  36. 

5.  The  measure  of  its  extent,  value,  ruration,  etc., 
D'^lb^  n'l'bcJ  T|^ria  a  journey  of  three  clays  Jon.  3 :  3,  bp "d'J 
"1S3  ^/^(;  iveigJit  of  a  talent  1  Chron.  20:  2,  "£y"r  ''ri'r  ^^^^ 
of  number  i.  e.  readily  numbered,  few,  Gen.  34:  30,  n-Tntf; 
Dbi>"  a  possession  of  perpetuity  Gen.  17:8. 

6.  An  attribute,  by  which  it  is  characterized,  b";!]  *Tna 
mighty  man  of  valour  Judg.  11:  1,  ''^B  Y<  ^^'^e  of  fruit 
Gen.  1:11,  "V-Tr  55"a  valley  of  vision  i.  e.  distinguished  as 
the  one  where  visions  are  received  Isa.  22:  1,  "iinn  "|S*J: 
the  flock  of  slaughter  i  e.  which  is  to  be  slaughtered  Zech. 
11:  4. 

a.  So  •'H'l::  "n'^X  God  (who  is)  w??y  rock  2  Sam.  22:  3,  'S^w";  tii-io  "iti  f^e 
/ii^/t  mouriinin  of  Israd  E/ek.  17:  23,  Ps.  59:  6,  Cant.  7:  3,  Isa.  5:  7,  6:  13, 
17 :  10.  A  period  of  time  may  be  characterized  by  what  occurs  in  it  rS'fl 
Tj^an  P"'^  the  year  of  the  death  of  the  king  Isa.  6:  1,  "lik'n  ns  a  time  of 
favour  Ps.  69:  14,  Isa.  49:  8,  61:  2. 

h.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  Hebrew  uses  nouns  to  express  many  of 
the  ideas  for  which  adjectives  are  employed  in  other  languages;  thus,  in 
the  examples  under  Nos.  4,  5,  and  6,  vessel  of  tcood  for  icooden  vessel,  pos- 
session of  perj^etiiity  for  perpetual  possession,  mighty  man  of  valour  for 
valiant  mighty  man,  flock  of  slaughter  for  grex  mactanda;  see  also  2.  a, 
§  256.  2  and  2.  a.  This  both  arises  from  and  explains  the  comparative 
paucity  of  adjectives  in  Hebrew:  though  even  where  corresponding  ad- 
jectives e.\ist  the  otl"*r  construction  is  frequently  preferred,  ^"ip  "'i^S  gar- 
ments of  holiness  Lx.  28:  2,  p'lk—naT  sacrifices  of  rigJifeonsness  Ps.  4:  6, 
Tliinp  holy  and  p'^^.^  righteous  being  used  with  less  latitude  and  with  a 
stricter  regard  to  the  ethical  idea  which  they  involve.  Abstract  nouns  may 
even  be  linked  with  attributives  by  the  conjunction  aiid  apii^l  T]ib3  D'J 
thy  name  gloriuMS  (lit.  of  glory)  and  exalted  Neh.  9:  5,  Isa.  57:  15.  Attri- 
butives are  lVe(iuently  formed  by  prefixing  such  words  as  '-"'N  man,  bi*3 
lard,  "2  soyi,  rz  daughter,  to  abstract  nouns  or  other  substantives,  thus, 
-i>;n  ^"x  a  man  of  form  i.  e.  comely  1  Sam.  16:  18,  C^nan  c'^X  man  of  words 
i.  e.  eloquent  Ex.  4:  10,  ni-b'-nn  bvz  the  possessor  of  dreams  i.  e.  dreamer 
Gen.  37:  19,  n^-qi  rit'^"",?  S07i  of  eight  days  i.  e.  eight  days  old  Gen.  17:  12, 


§  257  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.  287 

n2'b"")3  son  of  death  i.  e.  deserving  to  die  1  Sam.  20:  31,  b"^^3— ^Da  S07is  of 
icorf}iIess7icss  i.  e.  rciclced  Deut.  13:  14,  riy>y  D'ij'dn-na  daughter  of  ninety 
years  i.  e.  ninety  years  old  Gen.  17:  17;  and  in  application  to  an  inanimate 
object  :"|"5"i;""3  •|"ip  a  fertile  hill  lit.  a  peak  a  son  of  fatness  Isa.  5:  1. 

e.  In  the  following  examples  the  noun  is  in  the  construct  before  its 
adjective  D"^T3n  "^p  the  bitter  waters  Num.  5:  18,  19,  23,  24,  n-ii"!  '■hiih^  evil 
i.  e.  destructive  angels  Ps.  78:  49,  ihs  h''T\  a  strong  force  Isa.  36:  2,  nnTa 
ni^a'n  a  sqiiare  doorpost  Ezek.  41:  21,  but  not,  as  Kimchi  adds,  D^sp':3  '^.3'ibn 
□"''b^i-N  1  Kin.  6:  4.  Occasionally  and  for  the  most  part  in  poetry'  the  ad- 
jective instead  of  agreeing  with  its  substantive  is  treated  as  though  it  were 
an  abstract  noun,  "tJlSLi  "^l??  vessels  of  small  (capacity)  Isa.  22 :  24,  N^^  ''p 
tvaters  of  fulness  Ps.  73:  10,  biisti  n'^a'bs  perhaps  every  house  of  great 
(size),  though  others  render  every  great  (man's)  house  Jer.  52:  13,  Deut. 
19:  13  (but  see  21:  8,  9),  Ps.  74:  15,  Prov.  6:  24,  Cant.  7:  10,  Eccles.  1:  13 
(in  the  common  text),  Ezek.  23:  14.  So  sometimes  an  adverb,  ::^p  "^np  few 
men  Deut.  26 :  5,  "i^pn  r^'s  continual  burnt-offering  Num.  28 :  6,  crn  "^OT 
blood  (shed)  causelessly  1  Kin.  2:31,  dii"'  in^  enemies  in  the  day  time  Ezek. 
30:  16,  d'b^l'n  '{zit.  dumb  stone  Hab.  2:  19,  Jer.  1:  15,  or  adverbial  phrase, 
a^jsp  "^irfbN  «  God  nigh  at  hand,  pHinp  "'n'^X  a  God  afar  off  Jer.  23:  23,  Isa. 
14:^6,  Neh.  13:  4. 

7.  The  source  from  which  the  preceding  noun  is  de- 
rived, nirr;  ri"in  the  laiv  of  Jehovah  Ex.  13:9,  rrq'Q  iSiO 
the  hook  of  Moses  2  Chron.  25:  4,  niuS  n^in  sick  from 
love  Cant.  2:  5,  Isa.  22:  2. 

8.  The  subject  by  which  an  action  is  performed,  or  in 
which  an  attribute  inheres,  nin"  riinu?  the  love  of  Jehovah 
i.  e.  exercised  by  him  1  Kin.  10:  9,  nb'bTz:  JH/bprt  the  luisdom 
of  Solomon  1  Kin.  5:10. 

9.  The  ohject,  upon  which  an  action  is  directed,  IT^'I'^^ 
□"rib5<  the  fear  of  God  Gen.  20:  11,  Di^n  tb^;2)2  the  rule 
of  the  day  Gen.  1:16,  "is  bl5<  the  mourning  for  my  father 
Gen.  27:  41;  or  the  purpose  for  which  any  thing  is  in- 
tended T'n^r,  ",C3  the  silver  for  the  field  Gen.  23:  13,  "^uizj 
Db'ril.  '{p.y'y  grain  for  the  famine  of  your  houses  Gen.  42: 19, 
Tjj"]T  "ib'J  ^Ae  rain  for  thy  seed  Isa.  30:  23. 

a.  After  nouns,  which  express  or  imply  action,  the  following  noun  or 
suffix  denotes  the  subject  or  the  object  as  the  sense  or  the  connection  may 
demand,  niiT^  I^^<^p  the  zeal  of  Jehovah,  which  he  feels  Isa.  37:  32,  oi.— nx2p 
zeal  of  the  people,  which  is  felt  for  them  Isa.  26:  11;  Dnp  'T.^V.  ^^*^  ^^^ 
against  Sodom  Gen.  18:  20,  b'n-nirs'T  the  cry  of  the  poor  Prov.  21:  13;  Cl^"~";!'^' 


288  SYNTAX.  §  257 

the  u-nf/  of  the  sea  i.  e.  leading  to  it  1  Kin.  18:  43,  Ct'2'n''  T'"!!  the  n-ay  of 
Jeroboam  i.  e.  in  which  he  walked  1  Kin.  16:  26;  'ic'in  his  icrovg  i.  e.  done 
by  him  Ps.  7:  17,  "^C"3n  my  wrong  i.  e.  done  to  me  Gen.  16:  5;  "^250  my 
king  established  by  me  Ps.  2:  6,  ruling  over  me  Ps.  5:3;  so  nhnrp  with 
the  suffix  of  the  subject  Jer.  2:  19,  of  the  object  Hos.  11:  7;  5^3  subj. 
Ps.  39:  11,  obj.  Ps.  38:  12;  ^'li  subj.  Ps.  116:  14,  obj.  Ps.  56:  13;  rnzin 
subj.  Prov,  3:  11,  obj.  Ps.  73:  14;  ir^  (in  the  figurative  sense  of  a  divine 
infliction)  subj.  Ps.  32:  4,  obj.  Job  23:  2.  In  "^Hsn  n^2  Isa.  56:  7  the  suffix 
denotes  not  the  object  the  house  of  prayer  to  me,  but  the  possessor  my 
hottse  of  prayer,  §  259. 

b.  Active  participles  are  frequently  put  in  the  construct  state  before 
their  object,  irSJ  ri3'^"ii"0  restoring  the  soul  Ps.  19:  8,  t^'b'J  "'ifviX  loving  thy 
name  Ps.  5:  12,  "i?r  ''ka  entering  the  gate  Gen.  23:  10,  Ex.  3:  8,  1  Chron. 
12:  1,  Isa.  1:  28,  Ezek.  13:  11,  19,  Am.  5;  12,  Hab.  2:  15,  Mai.  1:  6;  so 
even  before  a  pronoun  "'rx  "^ini'i"^  serving  me  Jer.  33:  22,  or  an  infinitive 
which  they  govern,  d^ip  ip'^Sy'p  being  early  to  rise  Ps.  127:  2.  They  very 
rarelj"  in  the  construct  indicate  possession  ?]3n5Ta  "'"pax  the  eaters  at  (be- 
longing to)  thy  table  1  Kin.  2:  7,  or  apposition  Cj^X  "^n^'T  Hos.  13:  2  (2  a); 
but  niiiri'i  ■'^"i:j  Isa.  11:  13  means  the  adversaries  of  Jiidah,  not  those  of 
Judah  who  are  adversaries  to  Ephraim.  Participles  of  intransitive  verbs 
may  be  put  in  the  construct  or  receive  a  suffix  in  the  vivid  language  of 
poetry,  which  conceives  of  the  indirect  as  though  it  were  the  direct  object 
">£>  ""^^i)  Deut.  32:  24,  Mic.  7:  17,  Ps.  40:  5,  88:  5,  6,  nrn>72  -^hrr  Mic.  2:  8, 
•^ti^  Ps.  18:  40,  "'roiirn'S  Ps.  59:  2.  Passive  participles  may  be  in  the  con- 
struct before  the  subject  of  the  action,  Ci'^iibx  ns^  smitten  of  God  Isa.  53:  4, 
nts  n^!!)"i  bom  of  a  woman  Job  14:  1,  t^V^  "^inb  devoured  by  pestilence 
Deut.  32:  24,  or  before  the  secondary  object,  if  the  verb  is  capable  in  the 
active  of  having  a  double  object,  piT.'nin  girded  with  sacl'cloth  Joel  1 :  8, 
D">^3r!  d^hb  the  man  clothed  with  linen  Ezek.  9:  11,  rrbnb^a  """i"  arrayed 
for  battle  Joel  2:  5.  When  a  noun  follows  the  infinitive  it  may  be  in  con- 
struction with  it  as  its  subject,  ""^"3  5<'^pa  on  the  king''s  reading  2  Kin.  5:  7, 
'ii;'i"i'ili  his  driving  out  Num.  32:  21,  Ezra  10:  1,  or  be  governed  by  it  as  its 
object,  bxvsd-xnp  to  call  Samuel  1  Sam.  3:8,  Br'^'i'in  to  drive  them  out 
Deut.  7:  17;  or  both  subject  and  object  may  be  expressed  i^P'st  "in'^3  his 
destroying  thee  2  Sam.  24:  17. 

10.  The  respect  in  which  a  preceding  attribute  holds, 
so  that  it  answers  the  purpose  of  specification,  Wpt'^'^'l^ 
unclean  as  to  lips  Isa.  6 :  5,  2'^"'"4;p  hard  hearted  Ezek.  3 :  7, 
D'lrc  '•"ip  rent  as  to  garments  2  Sam.  13:  31,  Dt^j"!  nDD 
2  Sam.  9V3,  Ps.  7:  11,  32:  1,  Isa.  1:  80,  3:  3,  33:  24. 

a.  This  answers  to  what  is  known  as  the  Greek  accusative,  troSac  wvJ?; 
the  English  has  in  certain  cases  adopted  the  Hebrew  idiom,  so  that  we  can 
say  swift  of  foot,  blind  of  an  eye,  etc. 

h.  When  an  idea  is  expressed  by  two  words  in  the  construct  state,  it« 


§  258  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.  289 

plural  is  commonly  denoted  by  giving  a  plural  form  to  the  first  noun;  this 
is  sometimes  the  case  even  with  compound  proper  nouns  "'3"'^';  "^33  Benja- 
mites  1  Sam.  22:  7,     In  a  few  instances  both  nouns  are  put  in  the  plural 

■isps-iiis t]n"'5p3  nin'-i::  Gen.  42:  35,  t]"^xbD  ''pa  Isa.  42:  22,  ^niaa 

D'^Biin  1  Chron.  7:  5,  Josh.  6:6;  or  the  second  noun  only  oHl^X  JT^a  their 
claus  or  fathers'  houses  1  Chron.  7:  4,  niisari  n'^a  the  highplace-houses  2  Kin. 
17:  29,  1  Sam.  31:  9,  10,  Ex.  29:  20;  so  nouns,  particularly  such  as  denote 
members  of  the  body  may  be  in  the  singular  with  plural  suffixes,  B5"l|^ 
your  hand  Gen.  43:  12,  d^:"!  their  foot  Ps.  9:  16,  wiiy^  our  tongue  Ps.  12:  5, 
Josh.  2:  19,  Judg.  7:  6,  Ps.  5:  10. 

§  258.  1.  When  the  relation  between  two  nouns  is 
expressed  by  an  intervening  preposition,  the  first  com- 
monly remains  in  the  absolute  state:  it  may,  however, 
particularly  in  poetry,  be  put  in  the  construct,  ?inb32  "in 
mountains  in  Gilboa  2  Sam.  1:21,  01^^53  "JJi^ZiS  prophets  out 
of  their  oion  heart  Ezek.  13:2,  ^Dn  '"'13  according  to  the  abil- 
ity in  us  Neh.  5 :  8. 

a.  The  most  frequent  examples  in  prose  are  iriX  one,  which  is  often 
found  before  the  partitive  "o.  Gen.  3:  22,  2  Sam.  1:  15,  and  words  denoting 
direction  such  as  "I'^'O^  right,  "ps^  north,  nk|^  end  before^  Josb.  8:  11,  15:  21, 
Judg.  2:  9,  2  Kin.  23:  13,  Ezek.  10:  3.  The  combination  of  the  construct 
with  h  in  other  instances  also  is  facilitated  by  their  close  relationship,  §  260, 

1  Chron.  6:  55,  23:  28,  Job  18:  2,  Ps.  58:  5,  Prov.  24:  9,  Lam.  2:  18,  Hos. 
9:  6,  Mic.  4:  8.  With  other  prepositions  the  construct  occurs  more  rarely 
Isa.  9:  2,   Hos.  7:  5,   except  in  the   case  of  participles  Judg.  5:  10,  8;  11, 

2  Sam.  10:  9  K'thibh,  Neb.  9:  5,  Job  24:  5,  Ps.  2:  12,  84:  7,  Isa.  5:  11, 
9:  1,  14:  19,  28:  9,  56:  10,  Jer.  8:  16,  Nab.  1:  5. 

2.  A  noun  is  sometimes  put  in  the  construct  before 
a  succeeding  clause  with  which  it  is  closely  connected: 
thus,  before  a  relative  clause,  liziiJ;  Dip'J  the  place  where, 
etc..  Gen.  39:  20,  nir^Jt  ^n^'b?  for  the  reason  that  Deut. 
22:  24,  particularly  when  the  relative  is  itself  omitted, 
nbllir}""i^ni  hy  the  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou  wilt  send  Ex. 
4:  13,  nVn'i'i^'n  nbnn  the  beginning  of  (what)  Jehovah 
spake  Hos.  1:  2,  or  before  the  conjunction  1.  and,  tl/JDr; 
n?n^  ivisdom  and  knotvledge  Isa.  33:  6,  35:  2,  Ezek.  26:  10, 
y^^lQ  ik'b']  Tny^  drunken  and  not  with  ivine  Isa.  51:  21. 

a.  So  before  tiT  used  as  a  relative,  TO~"ifl  the  mountain  that  his  right 
hand  has  acquired  Ps.  78:  54,  nt  Dlpri  Ps.  104:  8.    Words  denoting  time  and 

19 


290  SYNTAX.  §  258 

place  often  stand  in  the  construct  before  a  clause  with  the  relative  under- 
stood; thus  or  Deut.  4:  15,  Job  29:  2,  Ps.  56:  4,  10,  88:  2,  102:  3;  D? 
2  Chron.  29:  27;   Cip52  Job  18:  21.     Some   would  so   explain   r-cxnri  Gen. 

1  :  1,  in  the  beginning  when  God  created  etc.  ver.  2  parenthetic,  ver.  3  then 
God  said  etc.  But  this  assumes  a  complexity  foreign  to  Hebrew  construc- 
tion, §  250.  b.  Other  examples  are  infrequent  and  exceptional  Ps.  16:  3, 
B5:  5,  81 :  6,  Isa.  29:  1,  Jer.  23:  26,  48:  :-'6.  The  construct  is  once  used  where 
a  noun  is  repeated  n^r  rad  eve^-y  sabbath  1  Chron.  9:  32. 

3.  Three,  four,  or  even  five  nouns  are  sometimes  joined 
toofether  in  the  relation  of  the  construct  state,  'VTD,  'icJ^i 

O  '  I"  ••  T 

□rhi<  the  heads  of  the  houses  of  their  fathers  Ex.  6:  14, 
bs^'a:";""'.:^  "til'd  '^BC*^  the  number  of  the  tribes  of  the  children 
oflsraeUosh.  4:  5,  Gen.  41 :  10,  47:  9,  Lev.  10:  14,  Num. 
6:  13,  2  Kin.  10:  6,  Job  12:  24,  Eccles.  G:  12,  2tlb  b'l'i-'-^sp 
■^^iZJS'^b"::  the  fruit  of  the  greatness  of  heart  of  the  king  of 
Assyria  Isa.  10:  12,  2  Chron.  24:  12,  Jer.  34:  1. 

a.  "When  one  noun  of  the  series  is  an  attribute  of  that  which  precedes  it 
the  two  together  stand  in  joint  relation  to  the  noun  that  follows  Oiiri  ^'y^ 
;k'"i";  the  high  mountains  of  Israel  Ezek.  34:  14,  Gen.  14:  13,  Deut.  31:  16, 

2  Sam.  8:  10,  23:  1,  2  Chron.  36:  16,  Ezek.  28:  14. 

b.  A  noun  limited  by  two  or  more  nouns  may  be  repeated  in  the  con- 
struct before  each  of  them,  when  these  are  regarded  separately  or  are 
distinctly  emphasized  tisp'^  "^hxi  tiz^-s-^nx  Haran  the  father  of  Milcah  and 
the  father  of  Iscah  Gen.  11 :  29,  14:  13,  24:  3,  "^ribs  an-n:;??;  -^n^  cb-^rhx  "^nrx 
zp'J-  ^ri''bx''  "ph'Si  the  God  of  your  fathers,  the  God  of  Abraham,  the  God  of 
Isaac  and  the' God  of  Jacob  Ex.  3:  6,  15,  Jer.  8:  1,  19:  13,  1  Chron.  28:  1.  If, 
however,  they  together  constitute  one  idea  or  are  viewed  in  combination  the 
first  noun  will  not  be  repeated  :3p?;:'i  pr}'S':  nnn:;x  -n'bx  the  God  of  Abra- 
ham, Isaac  and  Jacob  Ex.  3:  16,  Gen.  14:  ll,'l9,  18:  20,  19:  28,  Ex.  3:  8, 
32:  2,  Lev.  6:  13,  Num.  26:  64,  Judg.  1 :  6,  7,  1  Sam.  17:  52,  1  Chron.  28:  21, 
29:  2,  18,  2  Chron.  30:  6,  Neh.  5:  11,  Job  28:  3,  Ps.  72:  10,  107:  10,  Isa. 
11:2,  36:  19,  37:  13,  Ezek.  38:  2,  39:  1 :  so  a  constnict  infinitive  Jer.  29:  2, 
2  Chron.  7:  3.  This  is  sometimes  the  case  even  where  the  construct  must 
be  repeated  mentally  before  the  second  noun  -it'i!!  U^i'  rxl  the  head  of 
Oreb  and  the  head  of  Zeeb  Judg.  7:  25,  comp.  Gen.  40:  20,  n^b"l  c'nD  r(Vb 
the  king  of  Sodom  and  the  king  of  Gomorrah  Gen.  14:  10,  comp.  ver.  8. 
When  one  of  the  limiting  terms  is  a  pronominal  suffix  the  noun  is  neces- 
sarily repeated  ^'\■Z  "^isil  ria  Gen.  46:  7,  19:  16,  Ex.  10:  6. 

c.  If  two  or  more  nouns  are  limited  by  the  same  nouu,  the  latter  is 
usually  expressed  with  the  first  and  an  appropriate  suffix  attached  to  the 
rtst  "Vri  v!:;"iE!i  ni— c  yz^,  the  chariots  of  Pharaoh  and  his  horsemen  and 
his  army  Ex.  14:  9,  39:  40,  1  Kin.  16:  26,  27,  2  Kin.  2:  12,  though  the  saffix 
i«  occasionally   '>mitted  Gen.  40:  1.     If  the  limiting  word  be  a  pronoun,  the 


§  259 


THE  CONSTEUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.  291 


suffix  must  be  repeated  with  each  of  the  nouns  Gen.  7:  7,  31:  28,  36:  6, 
Ex.  32:  2,  Deut.  12:6  with  only  rare  exceptions  Ex.  15:  2,  Isa.  12:2,  Ps. 
US:  14,  2  Sam.  23:  5.  In  a  very  few  instances  two  words  are  in  construct 
relation  to  the  same  noun  ^xna^.  ''i^^X  "^'C'lb^  the  peaceable,  the  faithful  of 
Israel  2  Sam.  20:  19,  Ezek,  31:  16,  Dan.  1:  4,  uibn  ^pW  inlii  rivers,  brooks 
of  honey  Job  20:  17,  n'iii^-^pin  Ti^'^?  Ps.  78:  9,  if  rendered  as  it  is  by  some 
armed  with,  shooting  the  bow,  though  '^P":3i3  may  be  in  construction  not 
with  njp  but  with  '^^ii  armed  ones  of  those  who  shoot  the  how,  armed  boiv- 
men.  This  assumption  is  unnecessary  in  Isa.  53:  3,  4,  53:  4,  where  the  first 
noun  is  agreeably  to  the  vowels  in  the  absolute  state. 

§  259.  When  two  or  more  words  are  in  the  construct 
relation  they  must  stand  in  immediate  conjunction,  and 
no  other  word  can  be  suffered  to  come  between  them  as 
it  would  obscure  the  sense.  Hence  an  adjective,  parti- 
ciple or  demonstrative,  qualifying  a  noun  in  the  construct 
state,  cannot  stand  immediately  after  it,  but  must  be 
placed  after  the  governed  noun,  biisri  nin";  Ti^7j2  the 
great  work  of  Jehovah  Judg.  2:  7,  nbil^  17]]  Trbp_^  a  great 
croivn  of  gold  Esth.  8:  15.  So  an  article  or  suffix,  be- 
longing to  a  noun  in  the  construct,  must  be  attached  not 
to  it  but  to  the  governed  noun,  b-nri  "niZ3  tlie  mighty  men 
of  valour  Josh.  1:14,  iirjT  "^bj^t  his  idols  of  gold  Isa.  2:  20, 
"iriiD  QTIJ  7ny  name  of  holiness  i.  e.  my  holy  name  Lev.  20:3. 

a.  When  an  attributive  thus  follows  a  series  of  nouns  in  the  construct 
relation  its  particular  reference  will  be  indicated  by  its  gender  and  number; 
nnsn  3^"i3ii  rii3  2  Chron.  3:  11,  since  Cjis  is  fern.,  means  the  wing  of  the 
other  cherub,  not  the  other  tving  of  the  cherub,  Vni^y}  "|3d2li-"b^  ■'■i^li?  ''*^ 
boards  of  the  second  side  of  the  tabernacle  Ex.  26:  27,  Deut.  28:  58,  Josh. 
1:  8,  1  Sam.  17:  18,  2  Chron.  32:  30,  31,  Jer,  25:  26.  When  the  governing 
and  the  governed  noun  are  of  the  same  gender  and  number  it  may  be 
doubtful  to  which  of  them  the  following  ailjective  is  to  be  referred,  thus 
biijii  rs^  "ns  Gen.  10:  21  may  either  mean  the  elder  brother  of  Japheth  or 
the  brother  of  Japheth  the  elder.  In  Jer.  25:  15  an  attributive  stands  after 
a  noun  in  apposition  with  the  governed  noun.  In  a  very  few  instances  an 
adjective  is  inserted  in  a  series  of  constructs  to  prevent  it  from  being  too 
widely  separated  from  its  noun  Ezek.  6:11,  Jer.  4:  11.  In  the  following 
passages  a  brief  Avord  intervenes  between  b^,  which,  though  properly  a 
noun  signifying  totality,  is  in  usage  equival -nt  to  a  pronominal  adjective 
all,  every,  and  the  noun  which  ir,  governs,  ■|l':'  Xtri-'bs  take  aioay  all  ini- 
quity Hos.  14:  3,  so  2  Sam.  1:  9,  Job  27:  3,  and  perhaps  Isa.  38:  16;  but 
sne  A.'exander  in  he.      Other  exceptions  are  extremely  rare  as  when  the 

19* 


292  SYNTAX.  §  260 

direct  object  of  a  ravticiple  is  preceded  by  the  indirect  fisri  'I'ix'^a  '^i'^V:^^ 
Isa.  19:  8,  or  the  construct  infinitive  is  separated  from  its  subject  by  its  ob- 
ject Jer.  34:  9,  mostly  a  pronominal  suffix  Gen.  4:  15,  Isa.  5:  24  or  by  an 
adverb  Job  34:  22. 

b.  There  are  two  principal  cases,  in  which  an  article  or  a  suffix  at- 
tached to  a  noun  properly  belongs  not  to  it  but  to  the  preceding  construct. 
1.  When  the  governed  noun  simply  qualifies  tliat  wliich  stands  before  it\ 
denoting  an  attribute,  its  material  or  after  fractional  numbers  a  measure 
of  quantity,  §  255.  3.  a,  "innnb^  "^bs  his  tceapons  of  war  Deut.  1:  41,  Judg. 
18:  16,  Ezek.  9:  2,  ""nlNJ  "^p^S  mi/  proud  exuUers  Isa.  13:  3,  Ps.  2:  6,  Obad. 
ver.  16,  Eccles.  12:  5,  ^:H:J'.n-^33  the  sons  of  oil  i.  e.  the  anointed  ones  Zech. 
4:  14,  Gen.  37:  19,  rinjn  nzfti  the  golden  altar  Ex.  40:  26,  f^E^xn  r'-pt^,  the 
tenth-part  of  an  ephah  Num.  5:  15;  "ip^a  inbx  Ps.  4:  2  may  mean  either 
the  God  of  my  right,  who  defends  my  righteous  cause,  or  my  righteous  God; 
comp.  Ps.  59:  18.  2.  When  an  attributive  in  the  construct  belongs  to  a 
definite  noun  expressed  or  understood  and  consequently  requires  the  ar- 
ticle, thus  nx"!-?  nns";  ni-is  but  nN"iari  nie";  nn-nsn  Gen.  4i:  2-4,  Lev.  ii:  4, 
Num.  35:  19,  Deut.  20:  8,  Neh.  1:  5,  Jer.  23:  26,  Ezek.  9:  11,  Dan.  9:  4, 
12:  6,  7;  if  it  is  in  the  construct  before  a  proper  noun  the  article  is  of 
course  unnecessary,  §  249.  3,  Ps,  25:  12.  For  exceptional  examples  of  con- 
struct nouns  with  the  article,  see  §  249.  3.  b,  and  of  subordination  to  nouns 
with  suffixes  as  a  substitute  for  the  construct  relation  §  256.  3.  a. 

c.  He  paragogic  may  be  attached  to  a  noun  in  the  construct  state, 
'd-0'6  nnnfi;  toward  the  rising  of  the  sun  Deut.  4:  41,  Gen.  24:  67,  47:  14, 

1  Kin.  19:  15;  even  in  compound  proper  names  SSTjJ  <T^X3  to  Beersheba 
Gen.  46:  1. 

§  200.  The  preposition  b  to,  belonging  to,  with  or  with- 
out a  preceding  relative  pronoun,  may  be  substituted  for 
the  construct  relation  in  its  possessive  sense,  ^'iis  "iXkn 
Ti'^ilSib  her  father's  sheej)  prop,  the  sheep  tuhich  belonged  to 
iier  father  Gen.  29:  9,  40:  5,  1  Sam.  17:  40,  21:  8,  1  Kin. 
15:  20,  comp.  D^^n^^;  -,&<•::  Gen.  37:  12,  TC^bsjib  n:zn  the 
house  ofElisha  2Kin.  5:  9, 1  Sam.  14: 16,  2'Chron.  19: 11, 
comp.  Latin  pater  mihi.   This  is  particularly  the  case 

1.  When  the  first  noun  is  omitted  Tinb  (a  psalm)  of 
David  Ps.  11:  1,  Dyrnsib  "pD^aSi  Amnon  (son)  of  Ahinoam 

2  Sam.  3:  2,  Gen.  8:  5,  Ex.  12:  2,  their  letters  n^liDb  n\bxi 
and  those  of  Tobiah  Neh.  6:  17,  or  is  remote  Lev.  7:  26, 
Am.  5:  3. 

a.  In  1  Sam.  2 :  29  a  noun  in  apposition  with  one  preceded  by  a  con- 
struct receives  b  to  suggest  more  distinctly  its  relation  to  the  governing 


§  261  THE  PEEDICATE.  293 

noun,  the  offerings  of  Israel  ''b?!?  viz.  of  my  people  so  1  Kin.  6:5;  and 
after  a  suffix  Esra  9:1. 

2.  When  the  first  noun  is  indefinite  and  the  second 

definite,  't'^'b  "jS  a  son  of  Jesse  1  Sam.  16:18  {^"^T]^.  2  Sam. 
20:  1  is  the  son  of  Jesse,  §  249.  3),  D^nntDri  "libb  133?  a  ser- 
vant of  the  cai^tain  of  the  guard  Gen.  41:  12. 

o.  Hence  the  frequent  use  of  b  (Lamedh  audoris)  in  the  titles  of  the 
Psalms  and  other  compositions  11/ib  ^i^fa  a  psalm  of  David  i.  e.  belonging 
to  him  as  its  author,  p^pDriV  nlsri  a  prayer  of  Habakkuk. 

3.  When  the  first  noun  is  accompanied  by  a  numeral 
adjective,  especially  in  dates,  llJinb  Di"'  T^:^"ni^"^n  the  fif- 
teenth dmj  of  the  month  1  Kin.  12:  32,  "ribiab  n^ip^^^nri  Typi 
in  the  fifth  year  of  the  king  1  Kin.  14:  25,  5<Ci<b  t'it  ri'i"^ 
in  the  third  year  of  Asa  1  Kin.  15:  33. 

4.  When  several  genitives  are  connected  together, 
nn^rr:  ^bb"^b  U'byj  ^ini.  "So  the  book  of  the  Chronicles  of 
the  kings  of  Judah  iKin.'  15:  23,  Num.  16:  22,  32:  28, 
36:  1,  Josh.  19:  51,  21:  1,  1  Chron.  26:  26,  Ezra  1:  5. 

5.  When  for  any  reason  the  construct  could  not  be 
employed,  as  with  a  negative  Dnb  ;j<b  V'^k  a  land  not  theirs 
Gen.  15:  13,  or  a  suffix  bnj^rrbsb  ^riiT  our  princes  of  the 
whole  congregation  Ezra  10:  14,  1  Chron.  7:  5. 

The  Peedicate. 

§  261.  1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence,  if  a  substan- 
tive, adjective,  or  pronoun,  may  be  connected  with  its 
subject  without  an  intervening  copula,  their  mutual  re- 
lation being  sufficiently  suggested  by  simply  placing  them 
together,  DiblT  n''ri3''r)D"b3  all  her  paths  (are)  peace  Prov. 
3:  17,  yi'iri  niD  the  tree  (was)  good  Gen.  3:  6,  T|"!in  HT  this 
(is)  the  way  Isa.  30:  21. 

2.  Or  the  pronoun  I^^Jl  of  the  third  person  may  be 
used  as  a  copula,  Trs  i<^n  "ib^^'in  in?*!  the  fourth  river  is 
Euphrates  prop,  it  (is)  Euphrates  Gen.  2:  14,  Jer.  50:  25, 


294  SYNTAX.  §  261 

nbx  r>12rrri'2  what  are  these?  Zech.  4:  5,  ^b\p2  i<'^rr~r}i!< 
thou  art  my  king  Ps.  44:  5,  Dn  n^tbt  T'^ikri  Q'tZi^ri  these 
men  are  peaceable  Gen.  34:  21. 

a.  In  all  the  instances,  in  which  it  is  commonU"  explained  as  a  copula, 
the  pronoun  may  with  greater  propriety  he  regarded  as  an  emphatic  repe- 
tition of  the  subject,  §  246.  2. 

3.  Or  the  verb  rrn  to  be  may  be  employed  for  a  like 
purpose,  particularly  if  the  idea  of  past  or  future  time 
is  mvolved,  ^rp  nh'n  V"'i^~  the  earth  teas  desolate  Gen. 

'  T    ;    IT  I      V    T     T 

1:  2,  ni"d"'n  Tn  ^i^^n  the  oxen  were  i)loHghiug  Job  1:  14, 
Ex.  9:  3;  though  rarely  in  a  circumstantial  clause,  as 
Judg.  8:  11,  since  the  time  is  sufficiently  indicated  by 
the  connection. 

a.  Verbs  which  denote  some  modification  of  being  are  sometimes  em- 
ployed in  the  same  way;  thus,  his  eyes  niriw  'inn  began  (to  be)  dim  1  Sam. 
3:2;  "^^■J?<r|'  ■'iJ"'i<  ni  l:n^l  and  Noah  began  (to  be)  a  husbandman  Gen.  9:  20; 
inrJ  rj-"rn2  when  thou  ceasest  spoiling  Isa.  33:  1,  the  hair  )zh  "2^  has 
turned  tchiie  Lev.  13:  3,  Gen.  38:  11,  Isa.  47:  8;  so  to  be  called,  to  be 
esteemed,  etc. 

b.  Simple  existence  is  predicated  by  means  of  the  particle  UJ]),  bxs  T^ 
there  is  a  kinsman  Bulh  3:  12,  Gen.  18:  24,  and  non-existence  by  "j'^x, 
which  rt-tains  its  absolute  form  at  the  end  of  a  clause  ^'^N  ~"i"i  there  is  no 
one  pursuing  Lev.  26:  37,  1  Sam.  9:  4,  10:  14,  1  Kin.  18:  10,  Prov,  17:  16, 
or  section  of  a  clause  "X  nix  there  was  not  a  man  to  till  the  ground  Gen. 
2:  5,  Num.  20:  5,  Isa.  37:  3;  otherwise  it  takes  the  construct  form  "pX, 
whether  it  precedes  the  subject  I'in  rh  "fS  Gen.  11 :  30,  7,11  "px  Lev.  26:  36, 
Judg.  21 :  25,  1  Sam.  9:  2,  Ps.  38:  8,  Ezek.  13:  10,  15,  16,  or  follows  it  "ins 
"irx  "X  there  was  no  one  interpreting  it  Gen.  40:  8,  19:  31,  Judg.  13:  9, 
1  Sam.  9:  7,  Ezek,  37:  8.  These  particles  may  also  be  used  as  copulas 
Gen.  31:  29,  Ex.  5:  16,  Judg.  6:  13,  especially  with  the  personal  pronouns, 
when  the  predicate  is  a  participle,  Tji'V"^  ~\r^^  thou  art  not  letting  go  Ex. 
8:  17,  r'^"i:i'2  i\':i'^  thou  art  saving  Judg.  6:  ;i6.  In  a  few  instances  in  the 
later  books  "X  degenerates  into  a  mere  auxiliary  verb  Dan.  8;  5,  Once  V3^ 
is  doubled  for  a  strong  affirmation  2  Kin.  10:  15,  and  \l'|^  "px  occurs  twice 
as  a  strong  negation  Ps.  135:  17,  1  Sam.  21:  9.  "I'^X  is  not  is  never  equi- 
valent to  the  simple  negative  xb  not;  in  the  few  instances  in  which  it 
stands  before  a  verb,  a  conjunctive  or  relative  must  be  supplied  1|'^Q  ""X 
it  is  not  so,  that  his  wrath  has  visited  Job  35:  15,  bin"*  Tib-ia^  ")''X  the  king 
is  not  he  that  can  etc.  Jer.  38:  5j  in  Ex.  3:  2  :^2X  is  a  participle  with  a 
omitted  §  93.  e. 


§  262  PEEDICATE  NOUN.  295 


Peedicate  Koun. 

§  262.  1.  The  prominence  due  to  the  predicate  as  the 
af&rmation  to  be  made,  and  to  which  therefore  attention 
is  to  be  strongly  directed  is  in  Enghsh  indicated  for  the 
most  part  simply  by  the  stress  of  the  voice;  but  in  Hebrew 
it  is  further  suggested  by  the  position  of  the  words.  Ac- 
cordingly as  a  rule  the  predicate,  if  a  verb  or  adjective, 
precedes  its  subject.  If,  however,  the  predicate  be  a  noun 
or  personal  pronoun,  in  which  case  there  might  be  a 
doubt  which  is  the  subject  and  which  the  predicate,  the 
logical  order  is  observed  and  the  subject  precedes,  nih"; 
DV.bi^ri  J^^n  Jehovah  is  the  God  1  Kin.  18:  39,  "d-jj;  ?]"ns: 
rrbribw  thy  father  is  a  man  of  war  2  Sam.  17:  8,  Dent. 
10Vl7,  1  Sam.  1:  26,  Isa.  1:  7,  23,  7:  8,  9,  8:  13,  48:  12. 

o.  Sometimes  for  the  sake  of  special  emphasis  the  predicate  noun  pre- 
cedes the  subject  noun,  Deut.  26:  5,  Isa.  6:  3,  13,  or  jironoun  Gen.  43:  12, 
Isa.  6:  5,  Jer.  1 :  6,  7.  Or  while  the  subject  is  prefixed,  the  predicate  noun 
ma}'  emphatically  precede  a  pronoun  which  repeats  the  subject,  nhyin  IT^tip 
t<"'i7  incense,  it  is  cm  ahomination  Isa.  1:  13,  or  the  order  may  be  reversed 
in  successive  clauses  Isa.  5:  7.  Participles  in  general  follow  the  order  of 
nouns  Gen.  7:  4,  37:  19,  Num.  22:  34,  1  Sam.  14:  8,  Prov.  22:  15,  Isa.  3:  1, 
5:  28,  Ezek.  37:  28,  though  liable  to  the  changes  due  to  emphasis  Gen.  3:  5, 
14,  17,  41:  32,  42:  9,  23,  Num.  35:  16,  Judg.  15:  11,  Isa.  2:  22,  3:  13,  48:  13, 
Jo.  4:  4,  Am.  6:  8,  7:  4.  In  Gen.  41:  2,  18  the  order  of  the  words  graphi- 
cally depicts  the  successive  impressions  made  upon  the  eye  of  the  beholder, 
from  the  river  coming  up  seven  kine  fair  etc. :  the  place  and  movement  first 
attract  attention,  then  the  number  of  moving  objects,  then  the  objects  them- 
selves are  recognized  and  their  qualities  perceived.  Predicate  participles 
belonging  to  definite  nouns  are  distinguished  from  attributives,  by  not  re- 
ceiving the  article  Deut.  2:  4,  Jer.  44:  15. 

2.  Material  and  abstract  nouns  are  used  in  the  pre- 
dicate to  denote  qualities,  which  in  other  languages  would 
be  expressed  by  adjectives  y:^  Vni"p  its  walls  ivere  wood 
i.  e.  made  of  wood  Ezek.  4:1:  22]  the  vale  of  Siddim  nisn 
was  pits,  full  of  pits,  as  it  were,  composed  of  them,  Gen. 
14:  10;  thy  shoes  shall  he  txtpz^  binn  iron  and  hror'is  Deut. 


296  SYNTAX.  §  2G3 

33:  25,  Ps.  Vs6:  15;  the  camp  was  H^^  security  i,  e.  se- 
cure Judg.  8:11. 

a.  A  like  use  of  nouns  for  adjectives  occurs  in  apposition  §  256.  2,  and 
in  the  construct  state  §  257.  2.  a  and  6.  h.  Other  examples  of  material 
nouns  so  employed:  Gen.  11: 1,  Ex.  9:  31,  Ezra  10:  13,  Cant.  2:  15,  Isa.  5:  12, 
7:  24,  Jer.  2:  28,  24:  2.  Abstracts  often  convey  the  idea  more  strongly, 
than  would  be  done  by  an  adjective,  thy  judgments  are  p'ys,  rigldeousness 
Ps.  119:  75,  more  expressive  than  "righteous";  they  not  merely  possess  the 
quality  but  are  so  to  speak  identical  with  it;  Gen.  12:  2,  Job  19:  29,  23:  1, 
26:  13,  Ps.  109:4,  110:3,  Eccles.  10:  12,  Isa.  11:  10,  Jer.  44:2,  Ezek.  27:36, 
Dan.  9:  23.  An  adverb  is  similarly  used  as  a  predicate  Job  8:  9  ^3nix  bitiri 
we  are  yesterday  i.  e.  of  yesterday.  Sometimes  these  brief  and  emphatic  ex- 
pressions alternate  with  other  forms  of  speech,  I  am  Di'i'j  peace,  they  are 
ninbiab  for  ivar  Ps.  120:  7;  is  your  father  health?  i.  e.  well  Gen.  43:  27, 
2  Sam.  20:  9  but  is  health  ib  to  him?  Gen.  29:  6,  2  Sam.  18:  32;  thou  art 
nil^l^n  delights  1.  e.  much  delighted  in  Dan.  9:  23^  equivalent  to  rii^n  TJ"^S 
Dan.  10:  11,  19. 

3.  A  noun  in  the  predicate  may  receive  the  same  ad- 
juncts as  in  the  subject,  §  247. 


Predicate  Adjectives  and  Demonstratives. 

§  263.  Adjectives  and  demonstrative  pronouns  in  the 
predicate  agree  with  the  nouns  to  wliich  they  relate  in 
gender  and  number,  but  differ  from  attributive  adjectives 
and  demonstratives,  §  252,  in  standing  before  the  noun 
and  in  not  receiving  the  article,  though  the  noun  be  de- 
iinite,  "•h'ljn  ^it:  the  word  is  good  Deut.  1:  14,  V'-Znn  D'il'] 
his  mercies  are  great  1  Chron.  21:  13,  D'?^-2'i2n  tniibin  n>5< 
these  are  the  generations  of  the  heavens  Gen.  2:4. 

a.  In  circumstantial  clauses,  the  predicate  adjective  stands  regularly 
after  the  noun;  it  may  also  take  this  position  in  other  cases  when  the  em- 
phasis requires  it  Pn^i  shVbs  the  whole  heart  is  faint  Isa.  1:  5. 

b.  If  the  sense  require  the  predicate  to  be  made  definite,  it  will  re- 
ceive the  article,  "i2'^53n  "^S  my  mouth  is  the  (one)  speaking  Gen.  45:  12, 
piTian  nVri"^  Jehovah  is  the  righteous  one  i.  e.  is  in  the  right,  and  I  and  my 
people  are  D'^yrnn  in  the  tvrong  Ex.  9:  27,  Gen.  2:  11,  1  Kin.  18:  25,  Ps. 
19:  11,  Isa.  14:'27,  Zech.  7:  6;  but  in  1  Kin.  3;  22,  23  ''nn  and  n§n  are 
subjectg. 


§264  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  297 


COMPABISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  264.  1.  Adjectives  have  no  distinct  form  for  tlie 
comparative  or  superlative.  Comparison  is  expressed  by 
means  of  the  preposition  "j?^  from  placed  after  the  ad- 
jective, D^rDS3"J  T021jT\  nnit:  wisdom  is  better  than  rubies 
prop,  is  good  from  rubies,  differs  from  them  and  by  im- 
plication is  superior  to  them  in  point  of  goodness,  Prov. 
8:  11;   ^3^"^  nns^  p^^.:?  tJiou  art  more  righteous  than  I, 

1  Sam.  24i  17,  Lev.  13:  4,  2  Sam.  13:  16,  2  Chron.  29;  34, 
Eccles.  4:  9. 

2.  The  superlative  degree  may  be  expressed 

(1.)  By  adding  bs  all  to  the  comparative  particle  ]'C, 

n'lp"^5:a"b3!a  biis  great  from  all  the  sons  of  the  east  i.  e.  the 

greatest  of  all,  etc.,  Job  1:  3,  2  Sam.  19:  8. 

(2.)  By  an  emphatic  use  of  the  positive,  so  as  to  imply 

the  possession  of  the  attribute  in  an  eminent  degree,  'I2p 

vis  the  least  of  his  sons  prop,  the  little  (one)  2  Chron. 

21:  17,  D"Tl/'3^  ns^M   0  fairest  among  women  Cant.  1:  8, 

•)bpri  the  least,  bilSH  the  greatest  1  Chron.  12:  14,  Dnia 

the  best  of  them  Mic.  7:  4. 

a.  When  the  predicate  is  a  verb  instead  of  an  adjective,  comparison 
may  be  expi-essed  in  the  same  manner,  ^^a'D  h^'>^  I  icill  be  greater  thati 
thou  prop,  great  from  thee  Gen.  41:  40,  19:  9,  32:  11,  Ex.  36:  5,  Judg.  2:  19, 

2  Sam.  6:  21,  22,  20:  6,  1  Kin.  5:  10,  Job  3:  21,  6:  3,  Ps.  69:  32,  "^^  03^1 
nnsri  and  he  teas  the  tvisest  of  allmen  1  Kin.  5:  11,  Gen.  37:  3,  1  Sam.  18:  30, 
1  Kin.  14:  9.  So  after  adverbs  2  Chron.  25:  9,  Deut.  7:7.  In  a  few  pas- 
sages, chiefly  occurring  in  the  book  of  Ecclesiastes,  comparison  is  made  by 
means  of  the  adverb  "ini'i  more,  "ini  tSJ  "^ix  "^^'2311  I  ivas  then  more  tvise 
Eccl.  2:  15. 

b.  The  construction  with  "a  may  also  be  used  to  denote  excess,  piia 
xii^so  '^i'w  mt/  iniquity  is  too  great  to  be  forgiven  prop,  greater  than  (it  is 
possible)  to  forgive  Gen.  4:  13,  ?(52^  uJi"^  too  little  for  thee  Job  15:  11,  Gen. 
18:  14,  Num.  16:  9,  Ruth  1:  12,  Isa.  7:  13;  and  this  usage  once  established 
was  extended  to  cases,  which  seem  incapable  of  being  logically  resolved 
Isa.  49:  6,  Ezek.  8:  17. 

c.  A  comparative  sense  is  commonly  ascribed  to  "i^  in  the  following 
passages,  in  which  an  adjective,  suggested  by  the  context,  must  be  supplied. 


298  SYNTAX.  §  265 

nzWao  tI'"  the  upriffht  (is  sharper)  than  a  thorn-hedge  Mic.  7:  4,  CSX"2 
less  than  nothing  Isa.  40:  17,  41:  24,  Ps.  62:  10,  Isa.  10:  10,  Job  11:  17;  in 
some  of  these  cases,  however,  "jO  may  have  the  sense  of  from  or  of,  and 
denote  that  from  which  any  thing  is  derived  or  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

d.  The  name  of  God  has  been  supposed  to  be  used  in  certain  passages 
simply  to  enhance  the  ii  agnitude  of  that  with  which  it  is  connected  and 
thus  to  form  a  sort  of  superlative.  But  in  all  such  cases  there  is  a  dire<  t 
reference  to  the  divine  Being,  niji";  "^izh  T^k  "lisj  Gen.  10:  9  is  not  merely 
a  very  valiant  hunter,  one  so  to  speak  upon  a  .superhunmn  scale  or  in  the 
divine  estmation,  but  with  the  superadded  thought  of  attracting  the  notice 
and  displeasure  of  Jehovah;  Q'^H'^x  H'h'^n  1  Sam.  14:  15  is  not  merely  avert/ 
great  trembling  but  a  trembling  sent  of  God;  D'^n'bx^  nsinj-n-r  Jon.  3:  3  is 
not  simply  an  exceed! up  I  ij  great  city,  but  one  which  in  its  gi-eatness  is  an 
object  of  the  divine  regard,  comp.  4:  11, 

e.  Comparisons  are  sometimes  made  with  objects  in  a  general  way, 
without  stating  the  particular  aspect  compared,  when  this  is  sufficiently  ob- 
vious, joy  in  my  heart  ri'p  more  than  their  joy  at  the  time  when  etc.  Ps. 
4:  8,  mokivg  my  feet  ni^^xs  like  the  feet  of  the  hinds  Vs.  18:  34,  Job  35:  2, 
Isa.  5:  29,  10:  10.  Cant.  1:  15,  Ps.  45:  7  are  not,  as  some  have  alleged,  to 
be  explained  after  this  analogy.  The  comparison  is  fully  statel  in  Prov. 
3:  14  TjOS'iriS^  Prij^O  ^"i*^  ^'*e  gain  of  it  is  better  than  the  gain  of  silver. 

Verbs. 

§  265.  1.  The  doctrine  of  the  Hebrew  tenses  rests 
upon  a  conception  of  time  radically  different  from  that 
which  prevails  in  our  own  and  in  other  Indo-European 
languages.  Time  is  conceived  of,  not  as  distributed  into 
three  portions,  viz.:  past,  present,  and  future,  but  as  con- 
sisting of  the  past  and  future  only.  The  present  is,  in 
this  view,  an  inappreciable  moment,  without  extension 
or  cognizable  existence,  the  mere  point  of  contact  between 
two  boundless  periods  of  duration,  or  the  ever  shifting 
instant  of  transition  from  one  to  the  other,  and,  as  such, 
not  entitled  to  be  represented  by  a  distinct  verbal  form. 
Every  action  or  state  of  being  is  accordingly  viewed  as 
belonging  to  the  past  or  to  the  future;  and  such  as  do 
not  belong  exclusively  to  one,  may  be  referred  indififer- 
ently  to  either. 

2.  Witliin  these  two  grand  divisions  of  time  no  ac- 


§  265  VERBS.  299 

count  is  made  of  those  minuter  distinctions,  in  the  ex- 
pression of  which  we  are  accustomed  to  employ  such  a 
variety  of  tenses,  nor  of  those  modal  differences  which 
are  with  us  indicated  by  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  and 
potential,  except  to  that  limited  extent  to  which  these 
may  be  regarded  as  covered  by  the  paragogic  and  apo- 
copated futures,  §  270.  Whatever  is,  or  is  conceived  of 
as  past,  must  be  put  in  the  preterite;  the  future  is  used 
for  all  that  is,  or  is  conceived  of  as  future,  while  all  sub- 
ordinate modifications  or  shades  of  meaning  are  either 
suggested  by  accompanying  particles,  or,  without  being 
precisely  indicated,  are  left  to  be  inferred  from  the  con- 
nection. 

3.  Another  peculiarity  still  more  foreign  to  our  us- 
ages and  modes  of  thought  is  that  the  time  denoted  by 
the  Hebrew  tenses  is  frequently  to  be  estimated  not  from 
the  actual  position  of  the  speaker  but  from  some  ideal 
position  in  the  past  or  in  the  future  to  which  he  men- 
tally transports  himself.  This  subjective  use  of  the  tenses 
may  be  quite  at  variance  with  their  objective  employ- 
ment. Thus  the  preterite  tense  may  be  used  of  that  which 
is  in  reality  future  to  the  moment  of  speaking,  because 
the  speaker  has  in  thought  taken  his  station  at  a  point 
yet  more  remotely  future,  from  which  he  looks  back  upon 
that  which  he  describes  as  though  it  had  already  taken 
place.  In  like  manner  the  future  tense  may  be  used  of 
events  in  the  past,  because  the  speaker  transports  him- 
self in  thought  to  a  period  prior  to  their  occurrence  and 
surveys  them  from  that  point. 

a.  No  part  of  Hebrew  Grammar  has  occasioned  more  perplexity  than 
the  seemingly  arbitrary  and  promiscuous  use  of  the  tenses,  and  the  dif- 
hcult}'  of  establishing  for  them  any  fixed  and  clearly  defined  temporal  mean- 
ing. The  denominations  Preterite  and  Future  appear  to  hi  incongruous, 
when  so  far  from  being  limited  respectively  to  the  division  indicated  by 
the  name,  either  tense  may  upon  occasion  be  employed  of  the  past,  pre- 


300  SYNTAX.  §  2G5 

sent  or  future  and  both  may  occur  in  application  to  the  same  period  of 
time  and  even  be  intermingled  in  the  same  description,  Hence  other  names 
have  been  proposed  as  Present  (Lee)  or  Aorist  (De  Sacy)  instead  of  Future. 
And  it  has  been  seriously  questioned  whether  the  so  called  tenses  are  really 
such,  and  should  not  rather  be  considered  modes.  Ewald  at  one  time  called 
them  the  First  and  Second  Mode.  And  the  most  eminent  grammarians  at 
present  incline  to  call  them  the  Perfect  and  Imperfect  on  the  assumption 
that  primarily  and  properly  they  have  no  relation  to  succession  in  time  at 
all,  but  only  to  the  quality  of  an  action  or  state  of  being;  the  Perfect  being 
assigned  to  that  which  is  regarded  as  complete,  and  the  Imperfect  to  that 
which  is  regarded  as  incomplete,  irrespective  of  the  period  of  time  to  which 
they  may  severally  belong.  These  names  properly  defined  and  understood 
corresjiond  in  a  striking  manner  with  certain  marked  uses  of  these  tenses, 
and  their  emploj'ment  has  much  to  recommend  it.  But  with  all  deference 
to  the  weight  of  authority  arrayed  in  their  favour,  they  seem  on  the 
whole  less  simple  and  less  appropriate  than  the  old  debi,'nati<)ns  Preterite 
and  Future,  and  appear  to  indicate  derived  and  secondary  qualities  rather 
than  such  as  are  original  and  fundamental.    For 

(1)  It  is  very  improbable  a  priori  that  a  language  should  have  no 
method  of  denoting  time  except  the  indirect  one  which  this  new  theory 
supposes,  and  no  forms  which  in  their  original  and  native  import  are  in- 
tended for  its  expression.  The  time  of  an  action  is  and  must  always  have 
been  regarded  as  so  important  a  part  of  what  is  to  be  stated  about  it,  that 
the  strong  antecedent  presumption  is  that  some  direct  provision  must  have 
been  made  for  its  notation.  If  any  equally  satisfactory  explanation  can  be 
made  of  the  facts  on  the  assumption  that  the  Hebrew  tenses  are  properly 
such  and  that  they  denote  the  time  and  not  merely  the  mode  of  an  action, 
this  is  clearly  entitled  to  the  preference. 

(2)  That  such  a  satisfactory  explanation  exists  will  be  shown  hereafter 
in  detail.  The  whole  mystery  of  the  matter  disappears,  as  soon  as  it  is 
perceived,  that  the  tenses  have  a  subjective  as  well  as  an  objective  use; 
that  is  to  say,  the  time  which  they  denote  is  not  invariably  measured  from 
the  moment  of  speaking,  but  quite  frequently  from  some  ideal  position 
taken  in  thought  by  the  speaker  and  suggested  by  the  context.  This  sub- 
jective employment  of  the  tenses,  which  must  necessarily  be  assumed  to  an 
equal  extent  in  the  modal  hypothesis,  really  renders  that  hypothesis  alto- 
gether unnecessary.  The  notion  that  the  elemental  ideas  of  past  and  future 
are  only  expressed  in  Hebrew  indirectly  through  the  medium  of  the  ideas 
of  the  complete  and  the  incomplete,  is  not  only  a  philosophical  abstraction, 
which  it  is  not  easy  to  verify,  but  it  imposes  upon  the  student  a  most 
serious  difficulty  at  the  outset  by  requiring  of  him  an  exceedingly  abstruse 
process  of  thought  to  attain  a  very  simple  result,  which  can  be  made  per- 
fectly perspicuous  in  a  far  readier  and  more  natural  manner.  For  purposes 
of  instruction  the  time-theory  Df  the  tenses  has  the  great  advantage  of 
clearness  and  simplicity  over  the  modal  theory,  even  were  the  latter  to  be 
considered  the  more  profound  and  philosophical. 

(3)  In  the  most  common  use  of  the  tenses  and  esprcially  when  they 


§265 


VEEBS.  301 


are  contrasted  in  the  same  sentence,  the  distinction  i«  not  one  of  mode  but 
of  time.  The  like  n^rt  were  not  before  them  and  n;;ni;  shall  not  be  after 
them  Ex.  10:  14;  the  covenant  which  "^nns  I  made  with  your  fathers  Jer. 
31:  32,  ivhich  nnzX  I  will  make  after  those  days  ver.  33;  what  n^n  has  been 
is  that  ivhich  'rhyy'_  shall  be,  and  what  n'i?,?  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^  **  ^^^^^  which 
niur;;  shall  be  done,  Eccles.  1:  9,  Cant.  5:  3,  1  Kin.  21:  19.  In  the  absence 
of  decisive  reasons  to  the  contrary,  this  may  fairly  be  regarded  as  an  index 
to  the  real  nature  of  the  radical  and  primal  distinction  between  them. 

(4)  When  a  series  of  verbs  occurs,  whose  tenses  are  apparently  used 
promiscuously  e.  g.  Ps.  18:  5  ff.,  Hab.  3:  3flf.,  the  first  verb  is  ordinarily 
regulative  of  the  rest,  being  used  in  its  proper  tense  signification,  and  the 
time  of  the  others  is  determined  by  it;  which  shows  that  the  apparent 
fluctuation  of  meaning  in  the  tense  is  due  to  the  connection  in  which  it 
Btands  and  not  to  the  inherent  signification  of  the  form;  in  other  words  it 
grows  out  of  its  subjective  use  as  indicated  by  its  surroundings  and  not  out 
of  modal  distinctions  attaching  to  the  form  itself.  And  in  general  when- 
ever there  is  a  departure  from  the  strict  objective  meaning  of  the  tense  as 
measured  from  the  time  of  speaking,  the  explanation  is  found  in  some  sug- 
gestion of  the  context  fixing  a  new  point  from  which  the  measurement  is 
to  be  made.  All  which  tends  to  show  not  that  these  tenses  have  a  meaning 
independent  of  time,  but  that  the  time  which  they  denote  is  often  reckoned 
from  a  subjective  standpoint. 

(5)  This  is  further  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  the  seeming  fluctuation 
in  the  use  of  the  tenses  is  much  more  marked  in  poetry  than  in  prose,  the 
fancy  of  the  poet  leading  him  to  transport  himself  to  ideal  positions  other 
than  that  which  he  actually  occupies  and  thus  making  the  use  of  the  tenses 
more  than  ordinarily  subjective.  We  are  thus  again  led  to  look  for  the 
cause  of  the  phenomenon  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker  himself,  rather  than 
in  some  modal  distinction  inherent  in  the  form. 

(6)  The  names  Perfect  and  Imperfect  do  not  adequately  describe  the 
functions  of  the  tenses  to  which  they  are  applied.  Imperfect  is  inapplicable 
to  a  tense  which  is  predominantly  used  to  denote  future  action,  not  as  of 
this  or  that  quality  but  simply  and  solely  as  future;  it  is  an  abuse  of  lan- 
guage to  call  that  incomplete  which  has  as  yet  no  existence  but  is  to  come 
to  pass  hereafter.  The  unsuitableness  of  the  name  "Imperfect"  is  confessed 
and  urged  by  Bottcher,  who  proposes  instead  "Piens"  (becoming);  in  which 
he  is  followed  by  Driver,  who  suggests  "Inchoate"  or  "Incipient".  Bottcher 
fancifully  enough  claims  that  the  one  tense  denotes  the  termination  of  an 
action,  and  the  other  the  beginning  of  it,  while  the  participle  represents  it 
as  in  progress.  All  that  is  correct  in  this  is  that  the  preterite  looks  back 
upon  an  action  as  belonging  to  the  past  and  the  future  looks  forward  to  it, 
from  the  assumed  point  of  observation,  whether  the  actual  present  or  some 
ideal  position  in  which  the  speaker  in  thought  places  himself;  the  parti- 
ciple, as  a  verbal  noun,  simply  sets  forth  the  active  performance  or  passive 
endurance  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  vei'b  or  the  possession  of  the  quality 
which  it  expresses,  out  of  all  relation  to  time  except  as  this  is  inferred 
from  the  connection.     In  /  Kin.  1:  11,  13,  18,  22:  41,  52,  2  Kin.  9:  13  and 


302  SYNTAX.  §  266 

many  similar  passages  the  preterite  Tj^^  indicates  the  beginning  of  a  reign, 
and  in  1  Kin.  22:  42  the  term  of  its  continuance.  In  Gen.  14:  4  the  term 
during  which  the  king  of  Sodom  continued  to  serve  Chedorlaomer  as  well 
as  the  initial  point  of  the  rebellion  are  expressed  by  preterites  ^nn?,  ''^"i'9. 
In  1  Kin.  1 :  46  D'l"^  represents  an  action  not  at  its  termination  but  its  com- 
mencement; so  H^ir  Ruth  1:  15,  S<3  Dan.  1:1.  In  Gen.  11:  5  !I32  does  not 
imply  that  the  children  of  men  had  completed  their  work  of  building  when 
Jehovah  went  down  to  see  their  city  and  tower.  It  is  plain  from  number- 
less examples,  that  the  tense  form  has  nothing  to  do  with  suggesting  whether 
the  beginning,  middle  or  end  of  an  action  but  simply  the  action  as  a  whole; 
and  it  is  not  limited  to  one  quality  of  the  action  whether  as  complete  or 
incomplete.  These  modifications  may  be  suggested  by  tlie  nature  of  the 
cahe  or  by  attendant  circumstances  but  not  by  the  tense  form  as  such. 

(7)  Add  to  this  the  remarkable  manner  in  which  the  Preterite  under 
any  of  its  aspects  may  be  continued  by  the  Future  with  Vav  consecutive, 
and  the  Future  by  the  Preterite  with  Vav  consecutive,  shewing  the  sub- 
stantial equivalence  between  the  two  tenses  in  all  varieties  of  their  em- 
ployment, when  subjected  to  the  modifying  influence  of  Vav  consecutive. 
The  effect  of  this  particle  is  simply  to  mark  the  close  connection  between 
two  acts  so  that  the  second  is  not  conceived  independently  but  as  the  se- 
quence of  the  first.  The  standpoint  of  measurement  is  mentally  shifted  so 
tliat  events  actually  past  become  future  from  this  new  post  of  observation 
and  vire  versa.  There  is  no  change  in  the  modality  of  the  act,  but  only 
in  the  point  of  time  from  which  it  is  subjectively  regarded. 


The  Peimary  Tenses. 
The  Preterite  (Perfect). 

§  266.  1.  The  preterite  or  perfect  is  accordingly  used 
of  the  past,  whether  our  idiom  would  require  the  abso- 
lute past,  i.  e.  the  historical  tense,  in  the  beginning  God 
^"^jl  created,  etc.,  Gen.  1:  1,  God  HD?  tempted  Abraham 
Gen.  22:  1;  or  one  of  the  relative  tenses,  viz.  the  past 
view^ed  in  relation  to  the  present,  i.  e.  the  perfect,  ivhat 
is  this  that  t>''^y^  thou  hast  done  Gen.  3:13,  thee  "H'-Si'^  have 
I  seen  righteous  Gen.  7:1;  the  past  in  relation  to  another 
past,  i.  6.  the  pluperfect,  God  ended  his  work  which  Hu:? 
he  had  made  Gen.  2-2;  and  they  did  so  as  Jehovah  n^S 
had  commanded  Ex.  7:  10;  or  the  past  in  relation  to  a 
future,  i.  e.  the  future  perfect,  tvJien  Jehovah  vh"}  shall 
have  ivashed  aicay,  etc.,  Isa.  4:  4,  until  the  time  that  she 


§  266  THE  PKIMARY  TENSES.  303 

which  travaileth  rrib^  shall  have  brought  forth  Mic.  5:  2; 
or  a  conditional  mood,  except  Jehovah  of' hosts  had  left 
unto  us  a  very  small  remnant  ^r^H  ^6  should  have  been  as 
Sodom  Isa.  1 :  9,  J  would  there  were  a  sword  in  mine  hand, 
for  now  '^^'FirOn  I  would  have  killed  thee  Num.  22:  29;  or 
an  optative,  denoting  something  which  was  to  have  been 
desired  but  which  nevertheless  did  not  occur,  ^Dn^"lb  0 
that  we  had  died  Num.  14:  2,  ^/-pn  ^b  0  that  they  had  been 
ivise  Deut.  32:  29,  or  a  subjunctive  (the  Jordan  was  dried 
up),  that  drpT^,  ye  might  fear  the  Lord,  at  that  tune  and 
thenceforward /or ever  Josh.  4:  24. 

a.  In  all  these  cases  the  verbal  form  merely  expresses  in  the  general 
that  the  action  belongs  to  the  past,  but  -whether  this  is  to  be  taken  abso- 
liktely,  relativelj',  or  conditionally,  must  be  learned  from  the  circumstances 
of  the  case  or  from  accompanying  words.  The  Hebrew  preterite  may  cor- 
respond to  the  historical  tense  whether  this  is  used  of  an  act  performed  or 
a  condition  existing  at  some  specified  time  in  the  past,  in  that  day  all  the 
fountains  etc.  ^rp23  were  hurst  open  Gen.  7:  11,  so  8:  5,  14,  14:  5,  15:  18, 
17:  26,  19:  5,  34,  35,  44:  3,  Ps.  27:  2;  or  at  some  particular  time  not  spe- 
cified, Esau  npb  took  his  wives  Gen.  36:  2,  so  Gen.  3:  19,  14:  18,  15:  7,  19: 
11,  21:  1,  26:  28,  Judg.  10:  12,  Job  1:  21,  Ps.  8:  4,  57:  7,  Cant.  5:  4-7;  or 
at  any  time  indefinitely,  blessed  is  the  man,  who  Tj^n  xb  has  not  walked  etc. 
Ps.  1:  1,  so  14:  1,  26:4,  27:  9,  Prov.  23:35,  30:4,  Job  12:  9,  38:  12,  41:  3,  5, 
Isa.  1:  12,  40:  12-14,  Num.  12:  2,  23:  10;  or  repeated  acts  at  various  times 
!i::T!y  went  about  (day  after  day)  Num.  11:  8;  ^"i^a  they  kept  (habitually) 
Num.  9:  23,  a  summation  of  numerous  particulars  previously  recited;  so 
Jlilis  Deut.  12:  31  (illustrated  by  the  following  frequentative  ^iS'ii::'^),  Judg. 
2:  15,  17,  18,  Euth  4:  7,  1  Kin.  11:  8,  2  Kin.  13:  25,  17:  7  (^X'JO  embraces 
the  whole  series  of  acts  in  the  verses  that  follow),  ver.  13  inn^'::,  ver.  23 
"lan,  2  Chron.  12:  11,  t£-S  24:  11,  Job  7:  13,  Ps.  88:  10,  129:  1-3,  Isa.  1:  1, 
Jer.  5:  31,  32:  29,  44:  17,  Mic.  6:  12;  or  a  continued  action  or  state,  Noah 
n^ti  teas  perfect  in  his  generations;  Noah  ""^nr^ri  tvalked  with  God  Gen. 
6:9;  Solomon  (133  icas  building  his  house  thirteen  years  1  Kin.  7:  1,  so 
Ex.  12:  40,  Deut.  2:  10,  Josh.  11;  18,  2  Sam.  5:  4,  Ps.  22:  5,  90:  1. 

b.  The  preterite  may  correspond  to  the  English  perfect,  whether  this 
is  used  to  describe  an  action  just  performed  and  belonging  to  the  imme- 
diate past  lo,  now  hpb  he  hath  taken  my  blessing  Gen.  27;  36;  mine  eyes 
!ixn  have  seen  the  king  Isa.  6:  5,  so  Gen.  14:  20,  1«:  11,  46;  31,  Judg.  11:  7, 
1  Sam.  14:  29;  or  an  action  performed  in  the  past  but  whose  effects  still 
continue,  Jacob  npb  hath  taken  all  that  was  our  father^s  Gen,  31 :  1,  so 
14:  23,  24,  15:  3,  16:  2,  19:  19,  Judg.  10:  10,  Ps.  2:  6,  22:  2,  44:  10,  Isa. 
1:  2,  4,  2:  6,  3:  14,  5:  4,  24;   or  an  action  performed  at  any  time  in  the  in- 


304  SYNTAX.  §  26G 

definite  past,  considered  as  extending  up  to  the  present  (see  examples  under  a). 
It  is  often  difficult  to  decide  particularly  in  the  Psalms  and  in  other. poe- 
tical passages,  where  the  precise  situation  is  uncertain,  whether  the  pie- 
terite  may  be  more  properly  rendered  by  the  absolute  past  (English  im- 
perfect) or  by  the  perfect  tense.  Ps.  3;  8  T'^ijn  thou  smotest  all  my  enemien 
(on  some  well  remembered  occasion),  or  thou  hast  smitten  them  (with  a 
more  general  and  vague  allusion  to  the  indefinite  past);  so  4;  2,  9:  5,  6; 
•.■'5r''2r  Ps.  22:  22,  not  thou  anstceredst  me,  as  though  an  argument  were 
drawn  from  former  deliverances,  but  thou  hast  answered  me  expressing  a 
confident  assurance  that  his  prayer  is  now  granted. 

c.  When  the  connection  suggests  priority  to  another  event  in  the  past, 
the  preterite  has  the  sense  of  the  pluperfect,  thus  very  frequently  in  rela- 
tive clauses,  he  placed  there  the  man  ;"i:i"i  "lUJx  whom  he  had  formed,  Gen. 
2:  8,  so  3:  17,  23,  7:  5,  8:  6,  12:  5,  13:  4,  16:  15,  18:  8,  26:  15,  Ex.  5:  14, 
1  Kin.  11;  10;  after  1"i;M  Gen.  12:  4,  17:  23,  18:  33;  after  "^3  Gen.  2:  5, 
6:  6,  8:  11,  14:  14,  1  Sam.  6:  19,  1  Kin.  5:  15,  11;  9,  12 :  1;  after  nrni  Deut. 
9:  16,  Judg,  6:  28,  Jer.  13:  7;  in  circumstantial  or  explanatory  clauses  Gen. 
24:  1,  31:  34,  1  Sam.  3:  2,  2  Sam.  18:  18,  1  Kin.  1:  41,  2  Kin.  9:  16,  Job  32:  4, 
Jon.  1:5;  and  in  other  combinations  1  Sam.  1:  5,  4:  18,  1  Kin.  1:  6.  Some- 
times the  preterite  as  a  pluperfect  stands  before  the  verb  to  which  it  is 
related,  the  sun  xk';  had  risen  and  Lot  K3  had  entered  Zoar,  ivhen  Jehovah 
rained  etc.  Gen.  19:  23,  so  27:  30,  1  Sam.  9:  15.  The  connection  may  be 
such  as  to  imply  that  one  past  action  was  contemporaneous  with  another, 
he  looked  and  lo,  the  smoke  of  the  land  tiiv  tcent  up  i.  e.  whs  then  going  up 
Gen.  19:  28;  133  Gen.  11:  5  not  had  built  but  icere  building,  comp.  ver.  8. 
The  preterite  may  be  used  in  this  case,  where  no  stress  is  laid  upon  the 
conjunction  in  time  or  it  is  sufficiently  obvious  in  itself.  But  the  proper 
form  to  express  contemporaneous  action  is  the  participle,  which  then  an- 
swers to  the  English  progressive  imperfect,  Jehovah  appeared  to  him,  Kiri"; 
niyi  while  he  was  sitting  Gen.  18:  1,  2  Kin.  8:  29,  Job  1:16. 

d.  When  the  connection  is  such  as  to  suggest  the  relation  of  priority 
to  some  future  action,  the  preterite  answers  to  our  future  perfect;  thus 
after  "!>'  until,  I  icill  drato  until  ^lirs  theg  shall  have  finished  dritiking  Gen. 
24:  19,  so  ver.  33,  Num.  32:  17,  Euth  2:  21,  2  Sam.  17:  13,  Isa.  6:  11;  "''SnJ? 
after  Lev.  25:  48;  CX  if,  if  "'iP'i:'!  thou  rememberest  me  (lit.  shalt  have 
remembered),  as  I  trust  thou  wilt  Gen.  40:  14,  Ruth  3:  18,  Job  11:  13;  in 
a  relative  clause  Gen.  48:  6,  rn  Num.  19:  18,  Deut.  31:  18,  2  Sam.  17:  12; 
after  "^"lIX^  irhen  Gen.  43:  14,  Esth.  4:  16;  and  in  other  constructions  2  Sam. 
5:  24,  1  Chron.  17:  11,  Isa.  16:  12.  In  most  of  these  passages  the  English 
perfect  could  be  similarly  used.  The  Hebrew  may  substitute  the  future 
for  the  preterite  in  such  connections,  when  it  is  not  important  to  expre.»^s 
the  relation  of  priority',  comp.  T^ns'^^r)  Gen.  43:  9  with  liS'^nx  44:  32;  also 
ntrs  and  IX"^  in  successive  clauses  of  Job  19:  27,  yiy^  and  ty^\l  Isa.  4:  4, 
ixd  and  nx-rn  6:11,  "pi'in  and  nss  Ruth  3:  18. 

e.  After  a  conditional  clause  the  preterite  is  used  in  a  conditional  sense, 
except  we  had  lingered,  surely  note  i:~"l'  we  icould  have  returned  Gen.  43: 10, 
Num.  22:  3;l,  Judg.  13:  23,  14:  18,   1  Sam.  13:  13,  14;  30,   2  Kin.  13:  19;  or 


§  266  THE  PEIMAEY  TENSES.  305 

the  condition  may  be  suggested  by  the  context,  thus  (assuming  the  promise 
to  be  fulfilled)  Hr!";n  there  ivould  have  been  pleasure  to  me  Gen.  18:  12,  Vs^  '•n 
not  merely  ivho  ever  said  but  who  would  have  said  (in  any  supposable  case) 
Gen.  21:  7,  l^bia  t:?^3  almost  lay  i.  e.  might  easily  have  lain  Gen.  26  :  10. 

f.  Ewald,  Bottcher  and  others  have  maintained  that  the  preterite  in 
Hebrew  as  in  Arabic  is  occasionally  used  as  a  precative  i.  e.  in  the  sense 
of  a  prayer  or  entreaty.  This  assumption,  however,  finds  no  support  from 
the  Arabic  analogy  in  the  passages  alleged,  and  is  moreover  needless  since 
the  proper  meaning  of  the  preterite  invariably  yields  a  good  sense.  Thus 
Jnirpri  N^b  Isa.  48:  18  has  been  rendered  Oh,  hearken  and  in^'ip-Kiib  63:  19 
Oh,  rend  the  heavens,  whereas  they  should  be  read  Oh  that  thou  hadst 
hearkened.  Oh  that  thou  hadst  rent  etc.;  ''SfnnDT  Gen.  40:  14  has  not  the 
sense  of  an  imperative  but  fut.  perf.  see  d;  the  counsel  of  wicked  men 
iifrnn  Job  21;  16,  22:  18  not  be  far,  but  has  been  and  is  far  from  me; 
rnnnn  Ps.  4:  2,  Finns  116:  16  and  the  preterites  in  Lam.  3:  56-61  are  not 
petitions  but  reminiscences  of  former  benefits,  while  "^3^1:^  Ps.  22:  22  ex- 
presses a  confident  assurance  of  present  favour,  see  under  b. 

g.  It  is  not  necessary  to  substitute  the  conjectural  reading  dPX'n']  (inf. 
and  suf.)  for  DnX'^']  Josh.  4:  24;  for,  though  this  is  the  only  instance  in 
which  a  preterite  follows  "|?^b,  the  language  is  retrospective  to  be  used 
subsequently  by  fathers  to  their  sons,  and  the  combination  of  tD^i"!?  with  a 
preterite  has  analogies  in  Ps  10:  11,  37:  28.  The  preterite  also  occurs  as 
a  subjunctive  after  other  particles  such  as  'iSi  e.  g.  X^'S'^jQ  lest  he  may  have 
found  2  Sam.  20:  6,  ixan??  2  Kin.  2:  16. 

2.  The  preterite  (perfect)  is  further  used  of  the  pre- 
sent, regarded  as  the  continuation  or  natural  sequence 
of  a  pre-existing  action  or  condition.  Anything  begun 
in  the  past  and  continued  in  the  present  may  be  con- 
sidered to  belong  to  the  past  and  accordingly  spoken  of 
in  the  preterite,  give  me,  a  little  ivaterfor  ""h'Z:!  lam  thirsty 
Judg.  4:  19  prop.  I  have  been  thirsty  and  (it  is  implied) 
I  am  so  still;  tJie  earth  HJjb'^  is  full  of  violence  prop,  has 
been  and  still  is  full  Glen.  6:13;  now  "T}^!'^  I  know  that 
Jehovah  is  the  greatest  of  all  the  gods  Ex.  18:  11,  prop. 
I  have  knoiun,  the  knowledge  being  in  fact  contempora- 
neous with  the  information  upon  which  it  was  based. 
Comp.  in  Latin  novi,  memini,  odi. 

a.  The  preterite  is  accordingly  used  in  a  present  sense  of  acts  begun 
in  the  past  and  continued  in  the  present,  Nn;?  they  call  (have  called  and 
still  call)  Gen.  19:  22,  Jerusalem  fi^rs  totters  and  Judah  bS3  falls  Isa.  3:  8, 
VT^'^n  they  have  declared  and  still  declare  ver.  9,  ^^^^2  they  have  ruled  and 

20 


306  SYNTAX.  §  2G6 

still  rule  ver.  12,  'i^l^irii  fAey  have  been  and  are  reckoned  5:  28,  Ps.  38:  9. 
102:  8-10.  This  is  particularly  the  case  with  acts  begun  in  the  immediate 
past,  thus  Jehovah  "i2"i  speaks,  Isa.  1 :  2  with  reference  to  the  utteiance  just 
begun  ami  still  proceeding;  "irx  .13  fhiis  saith  Jehovah  Isa.  7:  7  and  re- 
peatedly, but  in  Gen.  3:  1  God  luiih  said  at  some  former  time.  Jehovah 
saith  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  future  "i^N'^  Isa.  1:  11,  40:  1  when  in 
the  action  now  going  forward  respect  is  had  to  its  continuance  in  the  fu- 
ture rather  than  to  its  beginning  in  the  past.  So  with  filT},  lo  this  sis 
toucheth  (lit.  hath  touched)  thy  lips  Isa.  6:7;  and  rtnr  now  mine  eye  Vj^N"! 
seeth  (ht.  hath  seen)  thee  Job  42:  5,  2  Chron.  2:  12;  T'^"}?!  1  lift  my  hand 
to  Jehovah  Gen.  14:  22  in  the  act  of  swearing  what  then  follows;  i:-t'3  we 
bless  yon  Vs.  129:  8,  "^P:^?;  I  counsel  2  Sam.  17:  11  (Ex.  18:  19  has  the  fut. 
in  a  like  connection),  '^H'li.ri  J  hereby  amwunce  Dent.  26:  3,  30:  18,  ^r'irvn 
I  call  to  witness  Deut.  4:  26;  "^ris'TrD  I  swear  Gen.  22:  16;  r^'io  reigneth 
1  Kin.  1:  13;   Job  33:  2,  3. 

h.  This  use  of  the  preterite  is  especially  frequent  with  neuter  verbs, 
which  describe  a  state  or  condition  and  which  Bottcher  for  this  reason 
proposes  to  call  stative  verbs,  when  the  connection  implies  that  the  con- 
dition still  continues.  These  are  such  as  (1)  express  some  quality-  of  being, 
thus  ITTl  is  (prop,  has  become)  Gen.  3:  22,  Judg.  11:  35,  l"^!!  have  been  and 
are  Gen.  46:  32,  Ezek.  13:  4,  but  Gen.  1:2,  6:4  ivas,  were,  and  the  fut.  ri^"iX 
am  Euth  2:  13;  n-:'n  is  like  Ps.  102:  7,  Ezek.  31:  2,  18  but  ver.  8  loas  like; 
bnn  ceases  Job  3:  17;  V3;||  is  able,  can  Ps.  36:  13,  40:  13,  more  commonly 
in  the  future  as  contemplating  an  action  yet  to  be  performed  Gen.  31:  35, 
Deut.  1:  9,  31:  2;  hj^i^  it  is  a  light  thing  2  Kin.  20:  10,  Isa.  49:  6;  ^in  are 
many  Ps.  3:  2.  (2)  Denote  a  physical  condition,  Vinx  languishes  Isa.  19:  8, 
nbs  is  high  Isa.  55:  9,  bnj  is  great  Gen.  19:  13,  "ifrT  is  old  (has  become  old) 
Gen.  18:  13,  Josh.  13:  1,  7\'~^^  is  dark  (has  become  dark)  Isa.  5:  30,  ^i^i:  are 
goodly  Num.  24:  5,  ~in:j  is  clean  Prov.  20:  9,  uh^  is  (has  become)  dry  Joel 
1:12,  20,  ns^  is  fair  Cant.  7:  2,  lbs  has  been  and  is  grievous  Gen.  18:  20, 
N?iO  is  full  Gen.  6:  13  (but  past  1  Sam.  18:  26,  fut.  perf.  1  Chron.  17:  11), 
pte  is  deep  Ps.  92:  6,  ^r^"  is  rich  Hos.  12:  9,  "lij?  has  soiled  clothing  as  a 
mourner  Jer.  8:  21,  "iip?  is  small  Gen.  32:  11,  t3^-i  Deut.  32:  27.  (3)  Mental 
states  or  affections,  including  even  those  of  an  active  nature  bbx  mourns 
Joel  1:  9,  ::riS  loves  Gen.  22:  2  (but  past  Deut.  4:  37,  fut.  as  present  Piov. 
3:  12),  CIS  is  ashamed  Ezr.  9:  6  (but  past  Ezr.  8:  22,  fut.  as  present  Job 
19:3),  nia  trusts  2  Kin.  18:  19  (but  past  ver.  5,  fut.  as  present  Jer.  17:  5,  7), 
"ibt  remembers  Num.  11:5  (but  past  Judg.  8:  34,  fut.  as  present  Jer.  31:  20), 
nbn  ivaits  P.s.  33:  20,  Tbn  desires  Prov.  1:  22,  n^n  (anger)  burns  Gen.  4:  6, 
n6n  confides  Ps.  7:  2,  •J'sn  delights  in  Isa.  1:  11,  bn;  Hi.  hopes  Ps.  38:  16, 
Sn';  knows  Gen.  4:  9,  12:  11  (but  past  Gen.  28:  16,  Hos.  8:  4,  fut.  as  pre- 
sent  but  alwaj's  with  a  suggestion  nuire  or  less  distinct  of  futurity  or  pos- 
sibility Ex.  10:  26,  2  Sam.  3:  38,  1  Kin.  8:  39,  Jol)  8:9,  15:  9,  42:  3,  Isa. 
40:  21),  nxbi  is  treary  Isa.  1:  14,  Os*3  loathes  Job  7:  16,  y'hy  exults  1  Sam. 
2:  1,  pi:i  is  righteous  Job  34:  5,  "ba  has  enough  Isa.  1:11,  rib  rejoicet 
1  Sam.  2:  1,  N:r  hates  Isa.  1:  14,  "jisd  is  at  rest  Job  3:  18. 

c.  In  speaking  of  what  is  already  resolved  upon,  though  not  yet  per- 


§266 


THE  PEIMABY  TENSES.  307 


formed,  the  preterite  is  sometimes  employed,  because  regard  is  had  to  the 
mental  act  or  purpose  rather  than  its  outward  execution ;  so  frequently  in 
promises,  contracts  etc.  unto  thy  seed  iriri3  I  do  noio  give  (lit.  have  given) 
this  land  Gen.  15:  18,  the  grant  was  made,  though  they  had  not  yet  been 
put  in  possession ;  accordingly  when  the  latter  idea  is  prominent,  the  future 
is  used  of  the  same  transaction,  unto  thy  seed  "jriN  I  tvill  give  this  land 
Gen.  12:  7,  26:  3.  Comp.  Gen.  23:  11,  13,  1  Kin.  3:  12,  13,  1  Chron.  21:  23, 
2  Chron.  2:  9,  Jer.  31:  33;  ria~.5  thou  drivest  me  out  (lit.  hast  driven)  Gen. 
4:  14,  "^njiirn  I  establish  9:  17,  "^nxizi;  I  accept  19:  21,  "Tirr::  I  put  forth 
Ex.  9:  15,  ii'-\0'0  selleth,  is  resolved  to  sell  Ruth  4:  3,  ""Pifip^  7  am  determined 
to  take  it  1  Sam.  2:  16. 

d.  It  is  comparatively  a  matter  of  indifference  whether  the  preterite 
or  the  future  be  used  to  designate  the  present.  That  which  now  exists 
may  either  be  regarded  as  continued  from  the  past  or  as  perpetuated  in  the 
future;  and  as  it  is  contemplated  under  one  or  the  other  of  these  aspects, 
will  the  tense  be  determined  accordingly.  Thus,  the  question  whence  come 
ye  is  in  Gen.  42:  7  DHxa  "("^kp  lohence  have  ye  come,  but  in  Josh.  9:  8  "pkp 
sixin  tvhence  are  ye  coming  or  ivill  ye  come;  because,  in  the  former  in- 
stance, the  past  action  of  coming  is  uppermost  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker, 
and  in  the  latter  this  action  is  regarded  as  having  not  yet  ceased.  Comp. 
Isa.  39:  3.  The  questions  whither  goest  thou?  Gen.  16:  8,  ivhat  seekest  thou? 
Gen.  37:  15  are  expressed  in  the  futui-e  T|^ri,  lt"]53ln,  for  to  the  questioner 
the  action  of  vs'hich  he  has  just  become  aware  extends  indefinitely  onward, 
comp.  Gen.  32:  18,  Judg.  19:  17,  Isa.  40:  27.  To  the  person  addressed, 
however,  the  action  is  a  continuous  one,  both  preceding  and  following  the 
question;  accordingly  it  is  the  participle,  which  is  used  in  the  reply,  I  am 
fleeing  tinna,  I  am  seeking  il"|3,?^,  comp.  Judg.  19:  18.  WJiy  doest  thou  so? 
is  Ex.  5:  15  expressed  in  the  future  (liiy."^,  because  it  was  feared  that  this 
new  course  of  treatment  would  continue,  so  1  Sam.  2:  23;  but  2  Sam.  16:  10 
in  the  preterite  nir^irS'  because  regard  is  had  to  what  was  already  done. 
Hazael  asks,  why  weepest  thou?  using  the  part.  <^33  2  Kin.  8:  12,  since  he 
is  curious  as  to  the  cause  of  the  spectacle;  Elkanah  who  is  concerned 
about  its  continuance  uses  the  fut.  ■'2:?Pi  1  Sam.  1 :  8,  comp.  11:5.  Dr.  Driver 
(Use  of  the  Tenses  in  Hebrew,  2nd  Edit.  p.  52)  thinks  that  the  future  as 
more  indefinite  was  often  prefen-ed  in  questions  on  the  score  of  courtesy  to 
the  categorical  preterite  Whence  may  you  be  coming?  i-ather  than  WJience 
have  you  come? 

3.  The  preterite  (perfect)  is  likewise  used  in  the  state- 
ment of  permanent  facts  or  general  truths ;  these,  though 
true  for  all  time,  are  gathered  from  experience  and  ob- 
servation, and  hence  may  be  appropriately  referred  to 
the  past,  an  ox  sV  knoweth  his  owner  Isa.  1 :  3,  oxen  al- 
ways have  done  so  and  it  is  implied  that  they  always 
will;  Jehovah  Dn"i  ])itieth  them  that  fear  him  Ps.  103:  13. 

20* 


308  SYNTAX.  §  267 

a.  The  future  is  used  in  this  case  with  the  same  frequency  and  pro- 
priety as  the  preterite.  An  ox  will  knotv  his  oroner  expresses  the  same 
general  truth  as  an  ox  has  known  his  owner;  only  in  the  former  case  at- 
tention is  chiefly  drawn  to  its  future,  and  in  the  latter  to  its  past  realiza- 
tions, !:;  267.  3.  As  illustrations  of  the  gnomic  preterite,  as  it  has  been  appro- 
priately called  when  so  used,  see  1  Sam.  2:  3-5,  Ps.  10:  11,  14:  1,  3,  33:  13, 
14,  34:  11,  69:34,  103:  11,  13,  Prov.  6:8  (fut.  in  parallel  clause),  13:  1,8,  14:  6, 
19,  21:22,  22:  12,  26:  13,  15,  27:  12,  28:1  (fut.  in  parallel  clause),  29:9,  13. 

4.  The  preterite  (perfect)  may  also  be  used  of  the 
future,  when  ^dewed  as  past;  that  which  is  imminent  and 
certain  is  sometimes  spoken  of  as  though  it  had  already 
taken  place,  being  the  sure  result  of  existing  causes  and 
as  irreversible  as  that  which  has  actually  occurred  "O'^biD 
I  am  destroyed  meaning  my  ruin  is  accomphshed,  I  shall 
certainly  perish  Isa.  6:5;  and  particularly  the  prophets, 
in  their  inspired  descrijotions  of  events  which  had  not 
yet  come  to  pass^  often  transport  themselves  to  the  time 
when  they  shall  have  been  accomplished:  and,  surveying 
the  future  from  this  ideal  point  of  view,  they  give  to 
their  predictions  the  form  of  a  recital  of  what  has  al- 
ready taken  place,  BahyIo)i  nbs:  Juts  fallen  Isa.  21:  9,  he 
^Zj  hath  home  our  griefs  Isa.  53:  4,  for  I  "rii'bri  have 
made  Esau  hare  Jer.  49:  10. 

a.  The  counterpart  of  this  preterite  of  certainty  or  prophetic  preterite 
is  the  use  of  the  future  in  vivid  descri])tions  of  the  past,  in  which  the 
writer  appears,  in  imagination,  to  live  over  again  what  has  already  taken 
place,  §  267.  5.  The  preterite  is  thus  used  of  the  certain  and  inevitable 
future  in  Gen.  30:  13,  Judg.  4:  14,  r|nQ  Job  5:  20  (which  is  preceded  and 
followed  by  futures),  11:  20,  18:  6,  Ps.'lO:  16,  20:  7,  110:  5,  6.  So  by  the 
prophets  Isa.  2:  11,  5:  13,  9:  1-5,  19:  7,  28:  2,  32:  14,  53:  4-10,  Ezek.  31: 
15-18,  Hos.  10:  15,  Joel  4:  15,  Mic.  1:  16,  2:  13. 

The  Futube  (Imperfect). 

§  267.  1.  The  future  or  imperfect  is  used  in  speaking 
of  the  future,  whether  absolutely,  ^"^Tl^X  I  will  make  of 
tliee  a  great  nation  Gen.  12:  2,  or  relatively  to  something 
in  the  past,  he  took  his  eldest  son  who  !]>":]■;  ivas  to  have 
reigned  2  Kin.  3:  27,  Elisha  was  fallen  sick  of  his  sickness 


§  267  THE  PEIMARY  TENSES.  309 

tvJiey'eof  T^h"^  he  ivas  to  die  2  Kin.  13:  14;  or  conditionally, 
(would  that  I  had  died) /or  t:ip'j;5<  I  ivould  he  at  rest  Job 
3:  13;  hut  (if  it  were  my  case)  l2:n■]^5  I  would  seek  unto 
God  Job  5 :  8 ;  or  optatively  in  the  various  grades  of  de- 
sire, determination,  permission,  or  command,  so  ^IZJ^"* 
may  all  tliine  enemies  j)erish  Judg.  5:  31;  0  that  my  grief 
bplS";  miylit  he  weighed  Job  6:  2;  all  that  thou  commandest 
us  ni^j  ive  ivill  do  Josh.  1:  16;  deeds  that  '^tcT  ought  not 
to  he  done  Gen.  20:  9;  of  the  fruit  of  the  trees  of  the  gar- 
den bixb  tve  may  eat  Gi-en.  3:  2,  ^t'z^'n  i^b  ye  shall  not  eat 
ver.  3,  mine  ordinances  ^^'r^'P  ye  shall  keep  Lev.  18:  4; 
or  as  expressing  what  is  possible  or  necessary  and  con- 
sequently limits  or  determines  what  shall  actually  take 
place,  "'ian*;  he  can  speak  (prop,  he  will  do  so,  if  he  wishes, 
there  is  nothing  to  hinder  him)  Ex.  4:  J 4,  nTJj  toe  must 
die  (prop,  we  shall,  it  is  inevitable)  2  Sam.  14:  14;  or 
subjunctively,  especially  after  conjunctions  signifjdng 
that,  in  order  that,  lest,  etc.,  (bring  the  venison)  "^P'^n  ^rbb 
in  order  that  my  soul  may  hless  thee  Gen.  27:  25,  against 
thee  I  sinned  that  pT^P  thou  mightest  he  justified  Ps.  51:  6. 

a.  The  future  may  be  used  of  an  action  or  state  belonging  to  some 
specified  time  in  the  future  Gen.  18:  14,  Ex.  9:  5,  Josh.  3:  5,  Ps.  2:  5,  Isa. 
1 :  1.^,  2:  20,  3:  18,  7:  8,  18,  20,  22:  13;  or  at  some  particular  time  not  spe- 
cified Gen.  2:  18,  6  :  17,  Ex.  6:  1,  Isa.  2 :  3,  6 :  8,  7:  17 ;  or  to  any  time  in- 
definitely Gen.  4:  7,  9:  5,  Ex.  13:  14,  22:  1,  Lev.  1:  2,  Deut.  18:  18,  31:  29, 
Ps.  23:  1,  4;  or  repeated  acts  at  various  times  Gen.  3:  14,  16,  18,  Ps.  1:  2, 
3,  4:  9,  6:  4,  23:  2-6,  Isa.  7:  15;  or  a  continuous  action  or  state  Gen.  1:  29, 
5:  29,  8:  22,  1  Kin.  1:  13,  Isa.  1:  29,  30,  3:  4.  These  various  applications 
are  not  different  senses  denoted  by  the  tense,  but  grow  out  of  the  signifi- 
cation of  the  verb,  or  accompanying  words  or  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 

b.  Or  it  may  express  that  which  was  future  not  to  the  time  of  speaking 
but  to  something  in  the  past,  ofs^  tvas  to  be  avenged  Gen.  4:  24,  as  had 
been  promised  ver.  15,  fiS'^spri  subsequently  stood  around  Gen.  37:  7,  "i^x"^ 
tvas  going  to  say  Gen.  43:  7,  ^'Z)h  ivere  to  eat  ver.  25,  Pi'^ij''  was  about  to 
place  48:  17,  T^j^  would  tell  1  Sam.  22:  22,  xin^  was  then  coming  or  sub- 
aequently  came  2  Sam.  15:  37,  1  Kin.  7:  7,  8,  Neh.  3:  14,  15  (comp.  ver.  13), 
Esth.  4:  3,  Ps.  73:  17,  Prov.  24:  32  (the  reflection  was  subsequent  to  the 
sight),  Eccles.  4:  15.  Or  it  may  denote  an  act  which  was  in  the  course  of 
Hccomplishment  contemporaneously  with  something  in  the  past,  I-'STii^   xb 


310  SYNTAX.  §  2G7 

irafi  not  heard  1  Sam.  1:  13,  where  f^^.n^tO"]  he  was  worshipping  or  icas  on 
the  point  of  worshippinrj  or  indefinitely  and  in  a  habitual  sense,  §  267.  4, 
uhere  men  used  to  tcovi^hip  2  Sam.  15:  32,  lii'n?"^  they  were  watching  for  an 
omen  1  Kin.  20:  33,  rvrp_  was  repairing  I  Chron.  11:  8,  Job  32:  11,  12  CpTS 
and  "ij'iirix  denote  his  attitude  of  body  and  mind  while  waiting),  Isa.  42:  14, 
he  fell  info  the  pit  which  brS";  he  loas  making  Ps.  7:16,  nx*ix  when  I  saw 
73:  3,  nCD";  he  was  covering  (as  seen  in  vision)  Isa.  6:  2,  the  house  N^JS"^ 
was  filling  with  smoke  ver.  4,  1'i"p"^  whilst  the?/  ivere  rushing  on  as  a  tem- 
pest Hab.  3:  14.  The  participle  might  have  been  nsed  in  these  and  similar 
passages  with  equal  propriety  and  with  only  this  slight  shade  of  ditference 
in  conception  that  the  participle  is  suggestive  of  continuit}',  a  present 
existence  with  the  implication  of  both  past  and  future,  whereas  in  the 
future  tense  all  ^priority  to  the  time  specificallj'  referred  to  is  lost  from 
sight  and  the  attention  is  directed  solely  to  that  point  of  time  and  an  in- 
definite extension  onward.  Hence  the  futures  above  cited  from  Isa.  6:  2,  4, 
where  the  prophet  is  des  Tibing  a  vision  just  as  it  had  burst  upon  his  sight, 
and  which  consequently  had  no  past. 

e.  It  has  been  already  remarked  §  266.  1.  d,  that  the  future  tense  is 
sometimes  used  of  an  event  prior  to  another  event  in  the  future,  where  the 
preterite  might  have  been  employed  instead  in  the  sense  of  the  future  per- 
fect;  so   ^-6'^  Gen.  11:  6,   Nii^.    15:  4,   135X;]  29:  8,   nk-i-;   Deut.  4:  42,   ^^-JiT}"] 

1  Kin.  8:  33,  35,  c'i'-n'^n;;  Isa.  7:  23,  D'^O';  42:  4,  d'^bn  53:  10.  In  such  cases 
the  preterite  explicitly  expresses  the  priority  of  the  one  event  to  the  other, 
though  a  doubt  might  sometimes  arise  whether  it  was  used  absolutely  of 
what  was  past  at  the  time  of  speaking  or  relatively  of  what  preceded  the 
other  verb.  The  future  simply  refers  both  events  alike  to  the  time  to  come, 
leaving  the  question  of  the  relative  priority  of  either  out  of  the  account. 

d.  The  future  may  have  a  conditional  sense  where  doubt  or  contingency 
is  expres-i^ed  or  implied,  i:"b::'i"^  lb  if  Joseph  should  hate  us.'  Gen.  50:  15,  if 
pEX  I  should  ascend  Ps.  139:  8:   so  after  no,  Vr]?";  n:3^  whg  should  he  curse 

2  Sam.  16:  9,  what  is  man  that  lS"]~'iri  thou  shouldest  remeniher  him  Ps.  8:5, 
Job  21:  15,  or  ?>1^"?,  why  "I'^HD']  should  my  father  hide  1  Sam.  20:  2,  Judg. 
9:  28;  in  the  apodosis  after  conditional  particles  Vz^H  Num.  22:  18,  24:  13, 
Buth  1:  13,  Job  9:  16,  20,  16:  4,  5,  Ps.  44:  22,  50:  12,  66:  18,  Jer.  22:  24, 
Am.  9:  2-4,  or  where  the  condition  is  suppressed  Job  3:  16,  6:  27,  14:  14,  15, 
32:  22. 

e.  Simple  futurity,  as  denoted  by  the  future  tense,  is  liable  to  various 
subjective  modifications  from  the  feelings  of  the  speaker  or  actor.  These 
are  more  distinctly  expressed  by  the  modal  forms  viz.  the  paragogic  and 
apocopated  futures  and  imperative,  but  they  are  likewise  to  a  certain  ex- 
tent represented  by  the  ordinary  form  of  the  future.  When  the  action  re- 
ferred to  is  dependent  on  the  will  of  the  speaker,  this  naturally  affects  the 
sense  of  tlie  words,  and  the  future,  while  not  so  emphatic  a  declaration  of 
purpose  as  its  paragogic  form  would  be,  would  nevertheless  be  rendered  in 
P^nglish  by  will,  rather  than  shall,  n^?X  I  will  inform  thee  Ruth  4:  4,  5TS 
I  will  not  know  Job  9:  21,  Ps.  101:  4,  Dipx  I  will  arise  Isa.  33:  10.    Or  the 


§267 


THE  PEIMAET  TENSES.  311 


future  may  express  the  wishes  and  hopes  of  the  speaker  rather  than  the 
objective  certainty  of  the  event,  N"^*::X  I  shall  find  (I  hope)  i.  e.  ma?/  I  find 
Gen.  34:  11,  'i^'^lip'^  let  them  burn  1  Sam.  2:  16,  !ii>;^_  20:  13,  Jer.  28:  6, 
'shi  (joined  with  imperatives)  1  Kin.  21 :  7,  iliii'^  shall  it  return,  equivalent 
to  do  you  wish  it  to  return  2  Kin.  20:  9,  -"Pi";  1  Chron.  22:  12,  Isa.  5:  19 
(joined  Avith  paragog.  fut.),  so  after  >l^  0  if  i^'^,Tl'^_  he  might  live  Gen.  17:  18, 
Deut.  32:  29,  Job  6:  2.  "When  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb  is  to  be  per- 
formed by  the  party  addressed,  a  declaration  of  what  he  shall  do  or  shall 
not  do  readily  becomes  a  command  Gen.  6:  14-16,  7:  2,  17:  9,  24:  4,  Ex. 
21:  15,  Prov.  22:  17  (joined  with  imperatives),  Isa.  8:  13,  38:  21  or  a  pro- 
hibition Gen.  2:  17,  3:  1,  3,  17,  9:4,  17:  15,  Ex.  20:  4,  5,  7,  Deut.  22:  4,  5, 
Isa.  1 :  13,  8:  12.  Or  if  it  be  less  urgently  expressed  and  regard  be  had  to 
the  pleasure  of  the  actor,  it  will  be  permissive,  bbxn  thou  mayest  eat  Gen. 
2:  16,  14:  24,  42:  37,  3^p5'i  Ex.  12:  48,  Lev.  21 :  22,  22:  23,  Deut.  12:  20,  22, 
Tjl?!?  20:  5,  or  with  reference  to  a  past  transaction  l3>^^  xb  might  not  go  iij) 
i.  e.  were  not  allowed  to  do  so  2  Kin.  23:  9,  Ps.  24:  3.  Or  regard  may  be 
had  to  duty  or  propriety,  when  shall  becomes  equivalent  to  should  or  ought, 
therefore  a  man  "Sir"!  shall  leave  Gen.  2 :  24,  9:  6,  nii"'^  xb  it  ought  not  to 
be  done  34:  7,  Lev.  4:  2,  Num.  23:  8,  1\^X  Judg.  14;  16,  1  Sam.  20:  5,  mi; 
should  Abher  die  2  Sam.  3:  33,  13:  12,  1  Kin.  22:  6,  TUn^'i  Isa.  8:19,  n^n;; 
Ezek.  16:  16,  Mic.  6:  6.  Or  to  possibility,  when  shall  or  shall  not  means 
can  or  cannot^  ni^a";  shall  be  numbered,  will  be  capable  of  being  numbered 
Gen.  13:  16,  '$'-[\  could  toe  knoio  43:  7,  Num.  23:  13,  ^OXn  thou  canst  he 
bound  Judg.  16:  6,  13,  1  Sam.  13:  19,  ilSps;;  2  Sam.  14:  14,  1  Kin.  7:  15,  26, 
8:  5,  27,  18:  10,  Ps.  91:  7,  119:  9,  137:  4,  Prov.  20:  9,  Eccles.  11:  2,  Isa. 
49:  15,  Jer.  24:  2,  8,  29:  17,  Lam.  3:  7,  Ezek.  47:  5.  Or  to  inevitable  ne- 
cessity, Avhen  shall  means  must,  tllii'n  thou  shalt  return  Gen.  3:  19,  "jriin  tho^c 
must  give  1  Sam.  2:  16,  3"^il"X  I  had  to  restore  Ps.  69:  5,  x^h;  had  to  bring 
Cant.  8:  11. 

f.  The  future  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  the  subjunctive  present  or 
imperfect  (according  as  it  is  referred  by  its  connection  to  the  future  or  the 
past)  after  such  conjunctions  as  '\^hh,  subj.  pres.  in  order  that  3^2"^"]  it  may 
be  well  Gen.  12:  13,  18:  19,  Ex.  4:  5,  Num.  17:  5,  Dent.  4:  1,  Josh.  3:  4, 
1  Kin.  2:  3,  4,  Isa.  5:  19,  Ezek.  14:  11,  36:  30,  Zech.  12:  7;  imperf.  in  order 
that  ^li'in  ye  might  knoio  Deut.  29:  5,  Neh.  6:  13,  Ps.  78:  6,  Ezek.  20:  26. 
After  "i^i^;3,  pres.  in  order  that  'r\\'n7\  it  may  be  Gen.  21:  30,  27:  4,  Ex.  9:  14; 
imperf.  Ps.  105:45.  After  "Q,  pres.  Gen.  3:  22,  Ex.  5:  3,  34:  15,  Lev.  10:  7, 
Ps.  2:  12,  38:  17;  imperf.  Gen.  31:  31.  After  I?  imperf.  Josh.  10:  13,  Jon. 
4:  5.  After  "^S  pres.  Gen.  38:  16,  imperf.  1  Sam.  22:  22,  Job  36:  10.  After 
"iffiX  as  a  conjunction  pres.  Gen.  11:7,  Deut.  4:  40,  imperf.  Esth.  2:  10;  or 
as  a  relative  used  in  an  indefinite  sense  Judg.  17:  8;  or  after  "irX3  as  if 
it  M[;fi|;  were  Ezek.  1:  16.  So  in  clauses  preceded  by  the  simple  copulative 
Vav,  where  the  connection  of  thought  suggests  the  idea  of  the  design  or 
result,  pres.  what  shall  we  do  to  thee  pnp*'i  that  the  sea  may  be  quiet  (lit. 
and  the  sea  will  be  quiet)  Jon.  1:  11,  Ex.  28:  35,  43,  Deut.  17:  17,  Neh.  6:  9, 
Jer.  10:  4;  imperf.  I  took  a  bribe  Q'^liS'XI  that  I  might  hide  my  eyes  (lit. 
and  I  shall  hide)  1  Sam.  12:  3,  2  Chron.  23:  19,  I  called  him  ^ini'iaxl  that 


312  SYNTAX.  §  2G7 

I  might  bless  him  (or  atul  I  subsequently  blessed  him,  see  note  b  above) 
Isa.  51:  2,  53:  2,  Lam.  1:  19,  Dan.  1:5;  also  vhere  the  imperf.  subjunctive 
would  be  used  in  English  to  indicate  not  past  time  but  contingency,  Ood 
is  not  man  S":"'!  that  he  should  lie  (lit.  and  he  will  perhaps  lie)  Num.  23:  19, 
1  Kin.  12:  9.  Also  in  a  like  connection  with  no  preceding  conjunction,  pres. 
it  shall  have  a  margin  etc.  ?^|3"^  i<b  i/iat  it  be  not  rent  Ex.  28:  32,  Ps.  10:  18, 
Isa.  41:  7;  imperf.  Neh.  13:  19,  Job  9:  32. 

g.  When  employed  in  requests,  the  future  is  frequently  accompanied 
by  the  particle  n;,  thus,  n: — ^2n"j  let  thy  servant  spcah,  I  pray  thee  Gen. 
44:  18,  Ni'^'jj";  let  the  tvicledness  of  the  wicked  cease,  I  pray  Ps.  7:  10. 

h.  The  future  is  idiomatically  used  with  D'nis  and  d^ii??  not  yet,  before, 
whether  the  period  referred  to  is  past,  present  or  future  the  time  denoted 
by  the  particle  being  antecedent  to  the  action  of  the  verb.  Thus,  referring 
to  the  past,  I  ate  of  all  siin  D~i:3  before  thou  earnest  Gen.  27:  33,  the  lamp 
of  God  Ti'zz'i  cnb  had  not  yet  gone  out  1  Sam.  3:4;  to  the  present  D"ii;n 
rnn  dost  thou  not  yet  know  Ex.  10:  7;  to  the  future,  that  my  soul  may  bless 
thee  r>i^X  Q'i'Ja  before  I  die  Gen.  27:  4,  ixnp'^  cnij  before  they  call,  I  will 
anstver  Isa.  65 :  24.  There  are  four  examples  of  the  use  of  the  preterite 
with  these  particles,  the  reference  being  to  past  time.  Gen.  24:  15,  1  Sam. 
3:  7,  Ps.  90:  2,  Prov.  8:  25;  in  the  last  two  passages  the  verb  is  removed 
from  the  influence  of  the  particle  by  the  interposition  of  the  subject.  In 
every  other  instance  the  verb  follows  this  particle  immediately,  except  Isa. 
28:  4  where  there  is  an  ellipsis  of  the  verb,  and  Zeph.  2:  2  where  xb  is 
added  to  strengthen  the  particle.  The  infinitive  is  once  used  with  D';ii:3 
Zeph.  2:  2  and  once  with  ti'b^  Hag.  2:  15. 

2.  The  future  (imperfect)  may  be  used  of  the  present, 
when  it  is  conceived  of  as  extending  into  the  future,  com- 
fort my  i^eojjle  "ifex"'  saith  your  God  Isa.  40:  1,  the  divine 
utterance  though  begun  is  not  yet  finished;  ^>'"r\  i^'in  do 
ye  not  knoiv?  ver.  21,  are  you  ignorant,  and  is  this  igno- 
rance to  continue?  tvliy  ""SZiri  iveepest  thou?  1  Sam.  1:  8. 

a.  The  future  is  chiefly  used  to  represent  the  present  when  the  action 
referred  to  has  just  begun,  or  has  just  come  to  the  notice  of  the  speaker 
and  consequently  has  no  past;  or  when  for  &ny  reason  his  attention  is 
particularly  dii'ected  to  it  as  then  going  forward  and  likely  to  continue, 
lather  than  to  any  previous  occurrence  of  it,  Gen.  44:  7,  Num.  11,  13, 
1  Sam.  17:8,  !\i<"iFi  you  see  (now,  if  never  before)  . ..  why  IX'^bn  do  you  per- 
sist in  bringing  1  Sam.  21:  15,  2  Sam.  3:  8,  1  Chron.  21:  3,  Job  3:  20,  32:  19, 
Ps.  3:  5,  7,  7:  14,  15,  59:  5,  8,  88:  15,  Isa.  3:  15. 

3.  The  future  (imperfect)  is  used  in  the  statement  of 
general  truths  or  permanent  facts,  when  the  attention  is 
directed  to  their  vahdity  for  all  time  to  come,  righteous' 


§267  THE  PRIMARY  TENSES.  313 

ness  Dbi"^ri  exalteth  a  nation  Prov.  14:  34,  it  does  so  now 
and  always  will;  a  son  1%'^^  honour  etli  Ms  father  Mai.  1:  6. 

a.  See  Deut.  32:  11,  1  Sam.  2:8,  16:  7,  Job  4:  17-20,  6:5,  32:  9,  Ps.  1:4, 
42:  2,  104:  15,  Prov.  10:  1  ff.,  26:  14,  20,  Eccles.  7:  7,  8:  1,  10:  8,  Ezek.  18:  2 
(comp,  Jer.  31:  29),  Hos.  4:  11,  Mai.  1:  6. 

4.  The  future  (imperfect)  is  likewise  used  of  that 
which  is  customary  or  often  repeated.  That  which  will 
occur  may  be  regarded  as  liable  to  occur  and  hence  as 
occurring  frequently.  A  single  event  in  the  past  is  na- 
turally described  in  the  preterite;  but  if  the  speaker  con- 
templates a  series  of  events,  stretching  indefinitely  for- 
ward from  an  initial  point  at  which  in  imagination  he 
places  himself,  he  employs  the  future;  a  mist  roT  used 
to  go  upfront  the  earth  Gen.  2:  6,  i.  e.  not  only  at  the 
moment  of  time  previously  referred  to  but  from  that  on- 
ward; thiis  Job  rtirytl  did  continually  Job  1:5;  the  daugh- 
ters of  Israel  nipbJTl  were  in  the  habit  of  going  from  time  to 
to  time  Judg.  11:  40;  so  Gen.  29:  2,  Ex.  13:  22,  Num. 
11:  5,  9,  iSam.  2:  19. 

a.  In  this  remarkable  use  of  the  future  as  a  frequentative  past  it  cor- 
responds to  one  of  the  senses  of  the  Greek  and  Latin  imperfect,  a  circum- 
stance which  first  suggested  the  name  "imperfect"  for  this  tense,  though 
the  term  is  now  used  by  grammarians  in  a  much  wider  application.  For 
additional  examples,  see  Gen.  6:  4,  Ex.  40:  36  ff..  Num.  9:  15-23,  10:  36, 
Deut.  11:  10,  Judg.  14:  10,  17:  6,  1  Sam.  1 :  5,  7,  2:  22,  9:  9,  14:  47,  21:  12, 
2  Sam.  4:  2,  12:  3,  31,  13:  18,  1  Kin.  3:  4,  4:  7,  5:  25,  28,  6:  8,  10:  5,  28,  29, 
21:  6,  2  Kin.  3:  25,  4:  8,  12:  14,  13:  20,  1  Chron.  12:  22,  2  Chron.  24:  11, 
25:  14,  Esth.  2:  12,  13,  Job  5:  14,  22:  6,  7,  29:  2,  3,  Pa.  78:  40,  95:  10,  Isa. 
1:  21,  Jer.  36:  8,  Am.  4:  7. 

h.  The  future  is  similarly  used  of  customary  action  in  the  present. 
Gen.  6:  21,  10:  9,  29:  26,  44:  5,  Ex.  33:  11,  Num.  11:  12,  Deut.  1:  31,  44, 
3:  9,  28:  29,  32:  11,  1  Sam.  5:  5,  2  Kin.  21:  13,  Job  33:  29,  Ps.  3:  6,  6:  7, 
104:  26,  Eccles.  10:  16,  Isa.  1:  23,  2:  6,  8,  3:  16,  5:  8,  7:  25,  31:  4,  55:  10, 
Jer.  9:  3,  13:  11,  12,  Hos.  4:  12,  13.  That  it  may  be  used  of  that  which 
will  be  often  repeated  in  the  future  was  stated  under  1.  a. 

5.  The  future  (imperfect)  may  be  used  of  the  past, 
when  the  speaker  or  writer  assumes  an  ideal  point  of 
vision  prior  to  its  occurrence,  and  so  regards  it  as  future. 


314  SYNTAX.  §  268 

Thus,  a  historian  in  animated  description,  as  we  might 
use  the  present,  niiJ^"i"'i2:^  TSJ  then  sings  Moses  Ex.  15:1; 
or  a  poet,  who  lives  in  the  midst  of  that  of  whicli  he 
sings,  Balak  "'inr  brings  me  from  Aram  Num.  23:  7,  lis^"' 
is  ib^^  UY  let  the  day  perish  on  tchich  I  am  to  be  born 
Job  3:  3,  where  the  speaker,  by  a  bold  figure,  places 
himself  before  his  birth,  and  prays  that  the  day  which 
was  to  give  him  existence  might  be  annihilated,  so  that 
he  might  be  saved  from  the  misery  of  Hving;  ^b  nsb 
nT!;x  nrna  why  may  I  not  die  from  the  womb?  ver.  11, 
where  his  position  is  shifted  to  the  time  immediately 
after  his  birth;  TTO'db  Tby\,  ^''IT  he  makes  known  his  ways 
unto  Moses  Ps.  103:  7. 

a.  This  use  of  the  future  to  represent  the  past  vividly  conceived  as 
though  it  were  passing  now  or  were  just  on  the  point  of  occurring  belongs 
chiefly  to  poetry  and  to  the  elevated  style  Deut.  32:  10,  12,  Judg.  5:  8, 
Job  4:  12,  15,  16,  10:  10,  11,  "l^W  15:  7,  38:  21,  Ps.  18:  7,  78:  15,  29,  45, 
80:  9,  106:  18,  19,  126:  2,  Isa.  51:  2,  63:  3,  Hos.  8:  12,  13;  when  occurring 
in  continuous  passages  it  is  very  commonly  joined  with  or  passes  into  pre- 
terites in  the  proper  sense  Ps.  44:  3,  10-16. 

b.  In  ordinary  prose  it  occurs  repeatedly  after  TX  then,  Num.  21:  17, 
Deut.  4:  41,  Josh.  8:  30,  10:  12,  22:  1,  1  Kin.  3:  16,  9:  11,  11:  7,  16:  21, 
2  Kin.  12:  18,  15:  16,  16:  5,  2  Chron.  5:  2;  other  instances  are  rare  Ex. 
33:  7,  Judg.  2:  1. 

The  Peeterite  and  Future  in  Combination. 

§  268.  There  is  considerable  variety  in  the  employ- 
ment of  the  tenses,  when  both  are  combined  in  the  same 
passages  according  as  they  are  used  in  a  simple  objective 
manner  and  their  time  estimated  from  the  moment  of 
speaking,  or  are  used  subjectively  and  estimated  from 
some  other  point  of  time  to  which  the  speaker  is  in 
thought  transported,  and  which  is  either  suggested  by  the 
context  or  readily  inferred  from  the  nature  of  the  case. 

a.  Jnd^'ed  by  an  occidental  standard  the  employment  uf  the  Hebrew 
tenses  seems  bewildering  and  capricious  in  the  extreme;  but  it  is  in  fact 
governed  bv  fixed  and  easily  intelligible  principles.    There  is  less  definiteness 


§269      THE  PRETERITE  AND  FUTURE  IN  COMBINATION.        315 

and  precision  in  the  notation  of  time  than  in  Indo-European  topgues,  which 
possess  a  much  greater  number  of  tenses,  each  having  its  own  specific  value. 
More  is  left  to  be  supplied  by  the  imagination  or  knowledge  of  the  hearer 
or  reader.  But  there  is  for  the  most  part  no  indistinctness  in  the  impres- 
sion left  on  the  native  mind,  and  no  failure  to  convey  the  shade  of  thought 
intended.  A  certain  amount  of  ambiguity  in  some  instances,  mostly  occur- 
ring in  poetry,  arises  from  our  imperfect  knowledge  of  the  situation  of  the 
writer:  but  this  can  be  reduced  by  the  general  usage  of  the  language  within 
clearly  defined  limits.  The  principal  difficulty  arises  when  the  attempt  is 
made  to  transfer  the  statement  to  another  language,  which  proceeds  upon 
a  different  conception  and  introduces  into  the  relations  of  time  distinctions 
which  the  Hebrew  does  not  recognize.  The  Hebrew  tenses  are  never  em- 
ployed at  random  nor  treated  as  equivalents.  Their  proper  sense  is  never 
capriciously  disregarded.  There  is  always  a  reason  why  one  tense  is  used 
rather  than  the  other,  which  the  original  hearers  must  have  felt,  and  which 
in  the  vast  majority  of  cases  there  is  little  difficulty  in  ascertaining  now. 
The  interpreter  is  not  at  liberty  to  confuse  the  distinction  between  the 
tenses  or  arbitrarily  to  substitute  one  for  the  other  or  to  impose  upon  them 
whatever  rendering  may  suit  his  fancy  in  place  of  their  own  genuine  signi- 
fication, thus  attributing  to  the  writer  what  the  interpreter  thinks  that  he 
should  have  said  instead  of  what  he  actually  did  say.  Thus  hv^'it^  Ps. 
11:  3  means  not  tvhat  can  the  righfeous  do,  but  what  has  he  done,  he  has 
thus  far  accomplished  nothing,  implying  indeed  but  not  directly  saying  that 
there  is  no  prospect  of  his  doing  any  better  in  the  future.  '^n'^')5  np  39 :  8 
not  what  can  I  hope  for,  but  ichat  have  I  hoped  and  do  I  hope  for.  "^jfiD  "^^ 
60:  11  not  who  shall  lead  me  but  who  has  led  me  as  an  ah-eady  accomplished 
fact  or  one  which  is  so  certain  that  it  is  spoken  of  as  though  it  were  ac- 
complished. ■'Pibnnn  Judg.  9:  9,  11,  13  not  should  I  cease  but  have  I  been 
made  by  this  choice  of  me  as  king  to  cease.  All  the  days  that  iT^fi  1  Sam. 
1 :  28  not  he  shall  live  but  he  has  been  i.  e.  from  his  birth  he  has  been  in 
the  intention  of  his  parents  surrendered  to  Jehovah.  h'S.'n  Tj^ri  2  Kin.  20:  9 
not  shall  the  shadow  go  but  the  shadow  has  gone  ten  degrees;  shall  it  return 
ten  degrees?  (comp.  Isa.  38:  8).  The  king's  answer  ver.  10  does  not  juatify 
an  impossible  rendering  of  the  question;  it  is  directed  to  the  alternative 
involved  though  not  expressed  "or  shaU  it  go  forward?" 

§  269.  1.  When  the  preterite  and  the  future  stand  in 
contiguous  or  related  clauses,  both  may  be  used  abso- 
lutely to  denote  respectively  past  and  future  time,  ^""li^'.r! 
ye  shall  pass  ...  Dri":^?'.  ye  have  passed  Gen.  18:  5,  ^'-J'p^'^ 
shall  cover  theyn  in  all  time  to  come  ...  '^1')'^^  they  ivent 
doivn  Ex.  15:  5,  ^bin  have  ceased  (past)  ...  ^ffii^  shall  rest 
(continuous  future)  Job  3:  ^7,  Ps.  9:  8,  J^iC"]  he  founded 
it  (original  creation)  ...  nipS";  he  shall  make  it  firm  (per* 


516  SYNTAX.  §  269 

manent  preservation)  Ps.  24: 2,  26: 4,  88: 14  (have  prayed 
and  will  continue  to  do  so),  Isa.  6:7,  26:  9,  Eccles.  5: 14, 
15,  6:  4. 

a.  Thus  in  the  parallelisms  of  poetry  greater  emphasis  and  compass 
are  often  given  to  the  statement  made  by  asserting  it  successively  of  both 
the  grand  divisions  of  time,  ihe  tvork  of  Jehovah  l-'^i|^  sib  thet/  will  not 
consider  and  the  deed  of  his  hands  ixn  t<b  they  have  not  regarded,  Isa.  5:  12, 
26:  9,  Ps.  1:  1,  2,  17:  9,  44:  9,  59:  4,  Prov.  1:  22,  14:  18  (inheriting  without 
effort  as  past,  the  result  of  prudent  conduct  as  future),  28:  1,  Ezek.  18:  6,  9, 
Joel  2:  3.  Much  of  the  force  and  beauty  of  such  passages  is  lost  if  the 
distinction  of  tenses  is  disregarded  or  both  are  merged  in  the  vague  and 
colorless  present.  In  this  combination  of  tenses  each  may  of  course  have 
the  various  shades  of  meaning  properly  belonging  to  it  §§  266,  267.  Thus 
the  preterite  in  the  sense  of  the  present  with  the  future  ilPh"!  xbl  sijT'  X3 
they  do  not  know  and  will  not  understand  Isa.  44:  18,  Am.  5:  21;  or  the 
future  as  a  frequentative  or  as  a  vivid  past  with  the  preterite  Job  24:  2, 
28:  24,  25.  The  participle  in  the  sense  of  a  continuous  present  is  sometimes 
joined  with  the  preterite  and  future  Ps.  119:  2,  3,  Jer.  5:  6. 

2.  Or  one  of  these  tenses  may  be  used  relatively  to 
the  time  denoted  by  the  other,  at  which  the  speaker 
mentally  takes  his  stand,  and  looks  forward  or  backward 
from  this  ideal  position. 

a.  Following  a  future  the  preterite  may  denote  (1)  an  act  prior  not  to 
the  time  of  speaking  but  to  the  event  before  spoken  of,  if  a  thief  shall  be 

found if  the  sun  iin"iT  has  risen  (before  he  is  found)  Ex.  22:  1,  2,  Lev. 

6:  1,  Ps.  54:  9,  Prov.  21:  7,  Isa.  11:  9,  Lam.  3:  8  (his  ear  is  closed  against 
my  prayer  before  it  is  offered);  bo  with  a  noun  indicating  time,  in  the 
harvest  n^5S  she  has  gathered  her  food  Prov.  6 :  8.  (2)  Or  one  involved  in 
the  preceding  statement  his  spirit  shall  go  forth  ...  his  thoughts  1"i2X  have 
consequently  perished  Ps.  146:  4,  so  after  a  participle  "t"?  V4^  making  un- 
just gain  he  has  thereby  taken  leave  of  Jehovah  Ps.  10:  3,  Prov.  14:  31, 
17 :  5.  (3)  Or  an  act  that  is  either  identical  or  contemporaneous  with  that 
expressed  by  the  future,  the  narrator  now  looking  back  upon  that  as  ac- 
comjilished  which  he  before  regarded  as  future  expectation  Thxn  sha^ perish, 
yes  hope  "^-r^  ^"^^  perished  Prov.  11:  7;  is  i^  good  that  pr;;n  thou  shouldest 
oppress  etc.  and  that  r"Ein  thou  hast  meanwhile  shined  upon  the  counsel 
of  the  wicked  Job  10:  3,  Ps.  37:  20,  Isa.  43:  17  ^nrs  ...  hv'Z^  44:  15,  -?n 
. . .  C|r-^  Ezek.  33:  15,  Joel  2:  6,  n^  , . .  jt-i":  Mic.  2^4,  Hab.  3:  3,  4,  12,  13. 
(4)  Or  a  later  stage  in  the  same  transaction,  an  interval  being  assumed, 
•,fli-i  -;  they  are  bending  the  bow,  and  now  lii'ia  they  have  fitted  the  arrow 
Ps.  11:  2,  22:  22,  Job  20:  25,  Isa.  18:  5;  so  after  a  noun  clause  'r\i::n  Isa. 
5:  SO.  (5)  Or  a  sequence  from  it  !lX2n  they  hatr  hidden  themselves  (in  con- 
sequence of  the  deeds  of  violence  before  described)  Job  24:  4;   'n;'  favour 


§  269   THE  PRETERITE  AND  FUTURE  IN  COMBINATION.    317 

•may  he  shown  to  the  ivicked,  ^hh-h^  he  has  not  learned  righfeo^isness  thereby 
Isa.  26:  10. 

b.  Following;  a  preterite  or  any  reference  to  past  time  the  future  may 
denote  (1)  an  act  which  though  past  at  the  time  of  speaking  was  subsequent 
to  or  a  consequence  of  the  event  before  spoken  of,  the  Horites  formerly 
ilid'^  dii-elt  in  Seir,  and  the  children  of  Esau  UVC-r^l  subsequently  dis- 
possessed them  Deut.  2:  12;  they  were  both  naked  Vlidan"]  xbl  and  ivere  not 
ashamed  in  consequence  Gen.  2:  25;  so  Ex.  8:  20,  13:  22,  ^V'y:il  1  Sam. 
2:  25,  3:2  (so  that  he  could  not  see),  13:  17,  18,  20:  2  K'thibh,  27:  4  K'thibh, 
2  Sam.  2:  28,  23:  10,  1  Kin.  1:  1,  5:  7,  8:  8,  2  Kin.  12:  13-16,  Ezr.  9:  4, 
Jer.  13:  7  (so  as  to  be  good  for  nothing),  52:  7  (consequently  fled).  This  is 
very  frequent  in  poetry  Ex,  15:  12,  Job  28:  11,  Ps.  66:  6,  69:  33,  73:  22, 
77:  17,  78:  44,  90:  5,  103:  16,  104:  5-9,  105:  44,  107:  6,  13,  14,  Isa.  44:  13, 
48:  3,  Hab.  3:  10.  So  after  participles  and  nouns  Gen.  2:  10,  Ex.  39:  23, 
Judg.  17:  6,  1  Sam.  1:  13,  Esth,  4:  3,  Ps.  107:  5.  Or  (2)  an  act  contempo- 
raneous with  that  expressed  by  the  preceding  preterite,  the  future  being 
used  in  the  sense  of  a  progi'essive  present.     See  examples  under  §  267.  1.  b. 

c.  The  tenses  are  often  intermingled  in  the  vivid  descriptions  of  poetry. 
The  poet  places  himself  in  the  midst  of  that  which  he  describes,  shifting 
his  position  as  successive  scenes  pass  before  his  mind,  part  being  conceived 
as  having  already  taken  place,  and  part  as  yet  to  come;  thus  in  Ex.  15: 
14,  15,  the  nations  'ii">z^^  have  heard,  'i^b"!"^  they  will  be  afraid;  pangs  tnx 
have  seized  upon  the  inhabitants  of  Philistia;  then  the  dukes  of  Edom 
!|3n^3  were  troubled,  the  mighty  men  of  Moab  trembling  'i"2Tr;x'i  shall  seize 
them,  all  the  inhabitants  of  Canaan  ^15733  have  melted.  So  Ezek.  13:  11,  12 
(the  fall  is  first  viewed  as  impending;  the  storm  which  is  to  effect  it  has 
already  come,  with  its  promise  of  hail  and  of  wind;  then  the  wall  is  re- 
garded as  having  fallen  whereupon  the  reproaches  of  the  spectators  will 
follow).  Job  19:  6-16,  30:  12  ff.,  Ps.  7:  13,  14,  Isa.  10:  28-32,  44:  14,  16,  17, 
Hab.  8 :  3,  7  ff. 

d.  The  subjective  use  of  the  tenses  is  not  infrequently  associated  with 
their  objective  use  in  the  same  passage.  After  viewing  an  event  from  an 
ideal  standpoint  a  writer  may  indicate  his  actual  position  by  employing  the 
tenses  either  occasionally  or  continuousl}'  with  strict  reference  to  the  mo- 
ment of  speaking.  Thus  the  pi'eterite  may  be  used  in  its  proper  sense  in 
connection  with  futures  relating  to  the  past,  whether  they  are  so  employed 
in  the  way  of  vivid  description  Job  31:  7,  16-18,  Ps.  18:  9,  12,  13,  32:  5, 
80:  9-14,  106:  12,  13,  or  of  customary  action  2  Kin.  23:  9,  Job  24:  9-16.  In 
like  manner  the  future  may  be  used  in  its  proper  sense  in  connection  with 
preterites  referring  to  the  future  Job  5:  19,  20,  11:  20,  18:  5,  6,  27:  19,  20, 
Ps.  49:  15,  110:  5-7,  Isa.  13:  10  Sometimes  it  is  doubtful  which  tense  is  to 
be  understood  objectively,  and  consequently  whether  the  passage  relates  ta 
the  past  or  the  future  e.  g.  Ps.  18:  37-46 


318  SYNTAX.  §  270 


The  Modal  Forms. 

§  270.  1.  Of  tlie  two  divisions  of  time  recognized  by 
Hebrew  conception  the  past  is  unalterably  determined; 
no  volition  can  change  what  has  already  taken  place. 
But  the  future  is  contingent  and  is  the  only  domain 
within  which  the  will  of  free  agents  can  operate  or  over 
which  it  can  exert  any  influence.  Hence  while  the  pre- 
terite has  but  one  invariable  form,  there  are  certain  mod- 
ified forms  of  the  future  viz.  the  paragogic  or  intentional, 
§  97.  1,  the  apocopated  or  jussive,  §  97.  2,  and  the  im- 
perative, §  84.  4,  which  are  employed  to  express  not 
simple  futurity  but  the  desire  or  will  of  the  speaker. 
There  is  no  special  form  for  the  expression  of  other  re- 
lations than  those  which  arise  out  of  the  feelinG:  of  the 
speaker,  the  simple  future  being  used,  as  has  been  al- 
ready stated,  to  denote  contingency,  possibihty,  obliga- 
tion, dependence  etc.  as  well  as  futurity;  and  in  such 
cases  the  precise  modification  of  the  thought  is  either 
suggested  by  accompanying  particles  or  left  to  be  in- 
ferred by  the  hearer  or  reader  from  the  circumstances 
and  the  nature  of  the  case. 

a.  Accordingly  the  law,  which  is  not  the  utterance  of  personal  feeling 
but  the  declaration  of  what  is  required  as  a  matter  of  g:eneral  and  abiding 
obligation,  for  the  most  part  uses  the  future  rather  than  the  imperative  or 
jussive,  "tirn  thou  shalt  keep  the  feast  of  utdeavened  bread  Ex.  23:  15;  sb 
■,!ibn  ye  shall  not  afflict  atiy  widoiv  22:  21;  X'^h';  he  shall  bring  his  offering 
Lev.  7:  29.  The  commandment  with  promise  is  the  only  one  in  the  de- 
calogue, which  departs  from  the  strictly  objective  form  and  adopts  the 
imperative,  nz3  Ex.  20:  12,  Deut.  5:  16.  Compare  the  mandate  of  the  law 
with  the  creative  fiat  n;;n|;  there  shall  be  a  holy  convocation  Lev.  23:  7,  but 
'^Tp_  let  there  be  light  Gen.  1:3;  or  with  the  exhortation  of  the  prophet 
r-hrr^  Lev.  19:  36  but  "^n-i  Ezt^k.  45:  10;  or  with  the  counsel  of  the  sa-e 
rfen  5<b  Deut.  19:  14,  but  Ssri-^N:  Prov.  22:  28;  or  with  the  injunction  ad* 
dressed  particularly  to  an  individual  nn'r"^  xb  Num.  6:  3  but  nrri-bx  Lev. 
10:  9.  The  imperatives  of  the  book  of  Deuteronomy  are  chiefiy  due  to  itf 
hortatory  character,  see  Deut.  4:  1,  9,  23,  5:  1.     The  jussive  is  almost  uii« 


§  271  THE  MODAL  F0EM3.  319 

exam  pled  in  strictly  legal  sections  with  the  exception  of  ^oi'^  in  one  standing 
phrase  Lev,  5:  16,  24,  27:  31,  Num.  5:  7;  but  see  Ex.  23:  1. 

2.  While  the  fundamental  meaning  expressed  alike 
by  all  these  modal  forms  is  desire  on  the  part  of  the 
speaker,  this  is  susceptible  of  indefinite  variation  in  parti- 
cular cases,  arising  out  of  the  relation  of  the  speaker  to 
the  party  addressed  or  to  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
of,  out  of  the  substance  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb 
or  out  of  attendant  circumstances.  Furthermore  in  the 
intentional,  which  is  with  few  exceptions,  §  97.  1.  a,  lim- 
ited to  the  first  person,  this  desire  is  directed  to  some- 
thing in  which  the  speaker  is  the  actor.  In  the  impera- 
tive, which  is  limited  to  the  second  person  and  an  affirma- 
tive sense,  the  desire  is  directed  to  something  to  be  done 
by  the  person  or  persons  addressed.  The  use  of  the  jus- 
sive is  confined  almost  entirely  to  the  third  person,  or 
to  the  second  person  in  a  negative  sense;  in  the  few  in- 
stances in  which  it  is  employed  affirmatively  in  the  se- 
cond person,  it  diff'ers  little  from  the  imperative,  except 
that  the  latter  is  briefer  and  was  uttered  in  a  more  ex- 
clamatory tone. 

§  271.  The  intentional  or  paragogic  future  may  ex- 
press a  determination,  n^^TS!  I  will  celebrate,  I  am  resolved 
to  do  so,  Ps.  7:  18,  Jlbbp.  we  will  go  with  you  Zech.  8:  23; 
or  (in  the  plural  only)  an  exhortation  to  carry  into  eft'ect 
a  common  purpose,  niri?  let  us  appoint  a  head,  and  "Z^izJD 
let  us  return  to  Egypt  Num.  14:  4;  or  a  request  or  en- 
treaty more  or  less  earnest  Hnpli^  let  me  fetch  a  morsel  oj 
bread  Gen.  18:  5,  n^S^i^  let  me  pass  through  thy  land 
Num.  21:  22;  or  an  inward  desire  T'b'^^  I  ivould  like  to 
eat  Deut.  12:  20;  or  simply  consent  now  f\T\''2^  let  me 
die,  I  am  willing  to  die,  since  I  have  seen  thy  face  Gen. 
46:  30,  Isa.  36:  8,  and  even  in  a  few  instances  that  re- 
luctant consent,  which  is  bom  of  necessity,  HIj^^s  /  must 


320  SYNTAX.  §  272 

go  info  the  gates  of  Slieol  Isa.  38:  10,  r;'i''^;i3  we  have  to 
grope  like  the  blind  Isa.  59:  10. 

a.  Tlius  Isa.  1  :  24  proceeds  from  a  declarntion  of  futurity  tnjx  7  shall 
he  eased  of  my  adversaries  to  one  of  purpose  n'bpix  I  tcill  be  avenged  of 
my  eneviies;  ^sriVi  "'ix  I  shall  speak  to  my  father  myself  1  Sam.  19:  3  as 
soniethiiio;  tliat  will  certainly  take  place,  but  NJ-n^a-iX  come  note,  I  will 
speak  to  tlie  king  2  Sam.  14:  15  as  something  res  )lved  upon  if,  as  the  particle 
of  entreaty  politel}'  suggests,  she  were  permitted  to  do  soj  rr^i^Ti^rJ  we 
shall  viake  a  covenant  Ezr.  10:  3  simply  declarative,  but  r"^"^  f^ri"?  with 
urgency  come!  let  us  make  a  covenant  Gen.  31:  44;  n::"i>"iS~n~  until  I  can 
wi7ik  as  a  voluntary  act  Prov.  12:  19.  Examples  of  the  paiagogic  future  to 
express  a  determination  Gen.  13:  9,  22:  6,  27:  4,  41,  Ex.  14:  4,  20:  19, 
Deut.  17:  14,  Job  7:  11,  Isa.  18:  4,  55:  3  occasionally  with  N3  as  a  particle 
of  self  incitement  Gen.  18:  21,  Ex.  3:3;  exhortation  to  combined  action, 
commonly  with  particles  of  incitement  as  i^2n,  iizb  etc.  Gen.  11:  3,  37:  17, 
Ex.  1:  10,  Judg.  19:  11,  13,  1  Sam.  9:  9,  10,  Ps.  2:  3,  95:  1,  2,  6;  request, 
very  frequently  with  tt3  I  pray  thee  Gen.  19:  20,  Ex.  3:  18,  4:  IS,  Jndg. 
11:  19,  Num.  21:  22,  1  Sam.  28:  22,  2  Sam.  16:  9;  desire,  perhaps  n^EDX  1 
may  atone  as  I  would  like  to  do  Ex.  32:  30;  yielding  to  constraint  Ps.  42: 
5,  57:  5,  88:  16,  Jer.  3:  25,  4:  19,  21,  Mic.  1:  8. 

b.  Negatives  rarely  occur  with  tVie  paragogic  future;  Vs  is  once  found 
in  an  exhortation  Jer.  18:  18,  and  a  few  times  in  petitions  2  Sam.  24:  14, 
Ps,  25:  2,  31:  2,  18,  69:  15,  71:  1,  Jer.  17:  18,  Jon.  1:  14;  the  use  of  S<b 
neces.sitates  a  return  to  the  simple  form  of  the  future  Gen.  43:  4,  5,  8,  Job 
7:  11,  Ps.  101:  2,  3,  119:  46. 

c.  The  paragogic  future  does  not  occur  in  the  books  of  Leviticus, 
Joshua,  Esther  or  Ezra  and  but  once  in  Ezekiel,  Ezek.  26:  2. 

§  272.  The  jussive  or  apocopated  future  may  accord- 
ing to  circumstances  express  a  command,  let  the  earth 
itUJin  hrhig  forth  grass  Gen.  1:11,  bnin  do  thou  wait  or 
thou  shalt  wait  1  Sam.  10:  8;  or  advice  let  Fharaoh  i^T 
look  out  a  man,  ^]bErl  (^'^d  let  him  ajipoint  Gen.  41:  33,  34; 
or  entreaty,  let  thy  loving -kindness  "n";  he  upon  us  Ps.  33: 
22,  -"n  do  thou  increase  Ps.  71:  21;  or  a  wish  may  Je- 
hovah Cjb^  establish  his  word  1  Sam.  1:  23;  or  permission 
b?]  let  him  go  up  or  he  may  go  up,  "l^/l  and  build  Ezra  1:  3. 

a.  Examples  of  the  jussive  in  the  sense  of  a  command.  Gen.  1 :  3,  6  etc., 
Deut.  15:  3,  2  Sam.  5:  24,  1  Chron.  14:  15,  Isa.  55:  7,  61:  10,  2nd  pers. 
Ezek.  3:3;  such  jussives  occurring  in  the  course  of  a  prediction,  where 
God  is  the  speaker,  indicate  the  divine  will  that  such  results  should  follow, 
Lev.  26:  43,  Ps.  81:  16,  Isa.  27:  6,  50:  2,  Jer.  13:  10,  Hos.  14:  6.  Advice 
or  exhortation   Judg.   15:  2,   1  Kin.   1:  2,   22:  13,  2  Chron.  18:   12,   19:  7. 


§•273 


THE  MODAL  FORMS.  321 


Request  or  entreaty  Gen.  26:  28,  44:  33,  Judg.  6:  39,  2  Sam.  19:  38,  1  Kin 
17:  21,  20:  32,  2  Kin.  2:  9,  Neh.  1:  6,  11,  Ps.  80:  18,  90:  17,  119:  76,  Dan. 
9:  16.  Wish,  Gen.  30:  24,  31:  49,  Ex.  6:  21,  Num.  23:  10,  1  Sam.  24:  16, 
26:  19,  1  Kin.  8:  57,  1  Chron.  12:  17,  16:  31,  2  Chron.  24:  22,  Job  6:  9,  9:  34, 
Ps.  13:  6,  14:  7,  27:  14,  31:  25,  96:  11,  97:  1,  104:  31,  119:  80,  172,  Jer.  43:  5, 
2nd  pers.  Dan.  9:  25;  jussives  introduced  in  predictions  whether  of  good 
or  evil  indicate  the  concurrence  of  the  speaker  and  his  approval  of  the  event 
foretold  Gen.  9:  26,  27,  49:  17,  Deut.  28:  8,  21,  36,  1  Sam.  2:  10,  Job  15:  33, 
18:  9,  12,  36:  14,  15,  Ps.  9:  10,  11:  6,  25:  9,  69:  33,  72:8,  15,  17,  Prov.  1:5, 
15:  25,  Isa.  35:  1,  Mic.  3:4,  5:8,  7:  10,  Zeph.  2:  13,  Zech.  9:5,  10:  7. 
Permission,  Gen.  30:  34,  33:  9,  Deut.  20:  5,  8,  32:  38,  Judg.  6:  31,  7:  3, 
16:  30,  2  Sam.  18:  22,  24:  17,  2  Kin.  2:  10,  1  Chron.  21:  17,  23,  2  Chron. 
36:  23. 

b.  The  poet  blends  his  personal  feeling  with  what  he  utters  and  also 
prefers  briefer  forms;  for  both  these  reasons  the  jussive  is  often  employed 
in  poetry,  where  prose  would  require  the  unabbreviated  future.  Thus  there 
is  no  umpire  bettveen  ns,  rb^  toho  may  lay  his  hand  as  I  wish  he  might 
Job  9:  33,  my  eye  '|3ri  shall  rest  or  must  rest,  a  volition  determined  by  con- 
straint 17:  2,  who  is  tvise  'h'^l  and  can  consequently  understand  as  I  would 
have  him  do  Hos.  14:  10,  Jer.  9:11,  Lam.  3:  50;  in  some  instances  in  which 
the  desire  of  the  speaker  does  not  seem  to  enter,  the  jussive  becomes  a 
mere  substitute  for  the  simple  future  Job  13:  27,  24:  14,  25,  27:  8,  22, 
33:  11,  34:  37,  39:  26.  This  use  of  the  jussive  is  exceedingly  rare  in  prose 
1  Sam.  10:  5;  though  repeated  instances  of  it  are  found  in  the  book  of 
Daniel  8:  12,  11:  4,  10,  16-19,  25,  28. 

c.  The  negative  bx  is  prefixed  to  the  jussive  in  deprecation  or  dis- 
suasion; thus  with  the  second  person  Gen.  45:  5,  Ex.  10:  28,  23:  1,  Deut.  2:  9, 
Josh.  7:  3,  Judg.  19:  20,  Ps.  22:  12,  27:  9,  Prov.  7:  25,  24:  17,  Isa.  41:  10, 
Jer.  40:  16  K'thibh;  with  the  third  person  Gen.  31:  35,  37:  27,  45:  20, 
Ex.  8:  25,  16:  19,  32:  22,  1  Sam.  18:  17,  2  Sam.  13:  33,  Job  15:  31,  Isa. 
36:  15,  Hos.  4:  4.  Kb  is  rarely  found  with  the  jussive  Gen.  24:  8,  1  Kin, 
2:6;  and  bx  but  rarely  with  the  simple  future  Gen.  19:  17,  Josh.  1:  7, 
Job  3:  9,  Ps.  141:  5,  Jer.  46:  6,  except  in  those  species  and  forms  in  which 
the  jussive  is  not  distinguished  from  the  simple  future  and  accordingh- 
may  be  considered  as  embraced  in  it  or  identical  with  it,  §  97.  2.  b,  "bs 
nb"rn  Gen.  22:  12,  xki-PX  Ex  16:  29.  The  future  with  S<b  and  the  jussive 
with  bx  are  sometimes  used  in  successive  clauses,  friendly  dissuasion  or 
remonstrance  being  added  to  legal  prohibition,  Ex.  23:  1,  34:  3,  Lev.  10:  6, 
11:  43,  Judg.  13:  14;  comp.  Prov.  27:  2.  In  the  vivid  language  of  poetry 
prediction  may  assume  the  form  of  exhortation,  and  bs  with  the  jussive 
may  stand,  where  the  thought  might  have  been  prosaically  expressed  by 
xb  with  the  simple  future,  1"iSri;;"bi<  let  not  their  faces  blush  (i.  e.  they  shall 
have  no  occasion  to  do  so)  Ps.  34:  6;  Nn^ri-bx  fear  not  (thou  needst  not 
fear)  Prov.  3:  25;  Nirn-bx  forgive  them  not  (thou  wilt  not  forgive  them) 
Isa.  2:  9;  Job  20:  17,  40:  32,  Ps.  41:  3,  50:  3. 

§  273.  The  imperative  may  denote  a  command,  ^3/\ 

21 


322  SYNTAX.  §  273 

sjpeak  unto  the  children  of  Israel  Lev.  1 :  2,  )<i'2  fill  the 
men's  sacks  Gen.  44:  1 ;  exhortation  or  advice  'ril^^  forget 
thy  people  Ps.  45:  10,  '^t'X  divell  in  the  land,  ^in^l  and  serve 
the  king  of  Babylon  2  Kin.  25:  24;  a  wish  or  entreaty 
^:ri  give  me  a  possession  of  a  biiryiiig-place  Gen.  23:  4, 
nufi  incline  thine  ear  to  me  "'???"'iin  deliver  me  Ps.  31:  3; 
permission,  where  it  is  good  in  thine  eyes  HIT  dwell  Gen. 
20:  15,  Tib^D  drink,  my  lord  Gen.  24:  18;  or  assurance, 
where  a  person  is  directed  to  do  what  it  is  thereby  in- 
timated that  he  will  certainly  do,  'p^T]  make  fat  the  heart 
of  this  people  i.  e.  this  would  be  the  inevitable  result  of 
the  prophet's  ministry  among  them  Isa.  6:  10,  "t'^^  ^'i^ 
come  doivn  and  sit  in  the  dust,  0  virgin  daughter  of  Ba- 
bylon i.  e.  she  shall  assuredly  do  so  Isa.  47: 1,  Mic.  1 :  11-lG. 
Increased  urgency  of  desire  is  expressed  by  the  para- 
gogic  form  of  the  imperative,  §  98. 1,  in  which  the  vowel 
n^  is  appended  to  the  2  masc.  sing.  n'^DSI.  nn'I?  pray,  sit, 
or  do  sit  and  eat  Gen.  27:  19,  »"»''!l"r^  0  keep  my  soul  Ps. 
25:  20,  0  Lord  M>ia"i2:  do  hear,  0  Lord  fr'ic  do  forgive, 
0  Lord  Ml^ilipn  do  hearken  Dan.  9:  19.  The  imperative 
is  never  used  with  negatives,  as  a  command  implies  some 
positive  action  to  be  performed.  A  substitute  for  the 
negative  imperative  is  found  in  the  jussive  with  the  ne- 
gative particle  bs  prefixed,  "jhcn  hide...Thl2  blot  out..'i^^'^ 
create. ...^^n  renew ....^Zb^b'^rrbi^  cast  me  not  away...r>^r\'bi^ 
take  not  Vs.  51:  11-13. 

a.  The  imperative  expressing  a  wish  is  once  preceded  by  l^  Gen.  23:  13 
and  once  b}-  CX  Job  34:  16,  unless  n5"'2  notwithstanding  the  accent  is  to 
be  considered  a  noun.  Examples  of  the  permissive  imperative  2  Shhi.  18:  23, 
Jer.  26:  14,  49:  11;  with  an  ironical  sense  1  Kin.  2:  22,  Judg.  9:  19,  Job 
40:  10,  Isa.  47:  12,  Joel  4:  11.  The  imperative  convej-ing  assurance  2  Kin. 
18:  32,  I's.  110:  2,  Isa.  10:  30,  13:  6,  23:  1,  4,  37:  30,  60:  1,  65:  18. 

b.  A  few  verbs,  whose  meaning  naturally  leads  to  urgent  expression 
invariably  adopt  the  paragogic  form  in  the  masc.  sing,  of  the  imperative 
e.  g.  ni'-n  make  haste,  n^i;",  ^''^'vf^  atcale,  nian  lift  ihyself,  >^-;^i^ri  i^tcear, 
nr-in  bring  near,  n3"^:;)rn  attend,  only  once  3'i'pn  Job  33:  31  iu  a  quieter 


§274 


THE  MODAL  FOEMS.  323 


tone,  asking  not  so  miicli  for  instant  as  patient  attention;  some  other  verbs, 
which  occur  less  frequently,  adopt  when  they  do  occur  the  paragogic  form 
rtD'^ixn  hearken,  nwn  spare,  nk^sn,  iiUi^'a,  n-:25  deliver,  nnn',^'  rome;  T^"^^, 
iibh  when  used  as  particles  of  incitement  come!  invariablj^  have  tlie  jKira- 
gogic  if  ;  3ri,  Tj^  always  have  their  proper  verbal  force,  which  may  how- 
ever be  expressed  by  the  prolonged  form  likewise. 

c.  The  difference  of  tone  Jind  feeling  between  the  paragogic  and  the 
simple  imperative  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  examples:  Isaac  re- 
questing his  son  Esau  says  <^!?J"'i;f7  Gen.  27:  7,  but  Joseph  giving  direction 
to  his  steward  xhrj  Gen.:  43:  16;  God  said  to  Moses  under  the  provocation 
of  Israel's  great  otTence  nn"^:n  let  me  alone,  that  my  anger  may  hum  against 
them  Ex.  o2:  10,  but  Moses  to  Aaron,  rrn  lay  up  the  pot  of  manna  before 
Jehovah  Ex.  16:  33;  the  trees  said  to  the  olive  ^'zh-o  do  thou  reign  over  us 
Judg.  9:  8,  but  with  less  urgency  to  the  bramble  "'P'a  reign  thou  ver.  14; 
Joel  persuasively  to  Sisera  n"i!l6  do  turn  aside  Judg.  4:18,  Abntr  to  Asahel 
"!*lt3  turn  thee  nmle  from  following  me  2  Sam.  2:22;  the  people  earnestly 
to  Samuel  iT3"'i  set  a  king  over  us  1  Sam.  8:  5,  Samuel  courteously  to  the 
cook  nin  give,  please,  the  portion  tvhich  I  bid  you  W'li  set  aside  (author- 
itative direction)  1  Sam.  9:  23;  Samuel  courteously  to  Jesse  !^n';w  send, 
please,  and  fetch  David  1  Sam.  16:  11,  Saul  authoritatively  to  Jonathan 
nSlIJ  1  Sam.  20:  31;  a  messenger  to  Saul  reportmg  an  invasion  fiz^i"!  n~in^ 
make  haste  and  go  1  Sam.  23:  27,  direction  to  a  stranger  inquiring  his  way 
"ITO  1  Sam.  9:  12;  the  captain  of  fifty  to  Elijah  peremptorily  fTin  come 
down!  2  Kin.  1:  »,  11,  the  angel  calmly  1"}^  go  doivn  ver.  15;  Abner  to  David 
nn")3  make  a  covenant,  which  he  desired  2  Sam.  3:  12,  but  the  men  of 
Jabesh  to  Nahash  Ti'^S  make  a  covenant  distasteful  to  them  1  Sam,  11:  1; 
the  people  in  distress  appeal  to  God  <T2>ip  arise  and  save  us  Ps.  44:  26, 
Jehovah  directs  Jeremiah  D'p  arise  and  take  thy  girdle  to  the  Euphrates 
Jer.  13:  4;  Elihu  summons  Job  to  immediate  action  nss".!  sta^id  vp,  if 
thou  canst  ansiver  me  Job  33:  5,  Balaam  directs  Balak  sk^rfi  stand  patiently 
and  quietly  by  thy  burnt-offering  Num.  23:  3,  15;  Nehemiah  in  uri^ent 
petition  nn'Vjti  prosper  thy  servant  Neh.  1:  11,  Micaiah  ironicallj'  to  Ahab, 
go  up  n'ir^ni  and  prosper  1  Kin.  22:  15. 

d.  As  the  simple  future  may  express  a  command,  X?  with  the  future  is 
used  in  like  cases  to  denote  prohibition;  so  generally  in  the  law  Ex  20:  3ff., 
and  elsewhere  ^sip.ri  xb  thou  shall  not  curse  him  Num.  23:  25,  np;;r  5<b 
thou  shall  not  go  tip  2  Sam.  6:  23;  but  the  proper  negative  imperative  is 
formed  as  above  stated  by  bx  with  the  jussive  W^'iJ  2  Kin.  18:  28  but 
siipirn-Vx  do  not  hear  ver.  31,  Gen.  47:  29,  Ps.  4:  5,  Prov.  1:  15,  4:  5,  13,  27, 
Job  10:  2. 

§  274.  To  express  a  still  greater  urgency  of  desire 
the  "precative  particle  !}<!  is  employed  in  connection  ^Yith 
the  various  modal  forms  or  with  the  simple  future  espe- 
cially though  not  exclusively  in  those  species  or  inflec- 
tions which  have  no  separate  forms  for  the  intentional 

21* 


324  SYNTAX.  §  275 

or  the  jussive  §  97.  2.  &;  U^D  follows  the  verb,  oxcept  in 
negative  clauses  when  it  is  prefixed  with  bs,  NS  nyilfi^  1 
tvould  like  to  sing,  please  Isa.  5:1,  so  ver.  5;  let  this  child's 
soul  5<i"-i'r)  return,  I  p'ciy  thee  1  Kin.  17:  21,  ^Tp^  ^y^^ 
pray  let  not  my  lord  he  anyry  Gen.  18:  30,  s:"::liri  look,  1 
pray  thee  Isa.  64:  8.  Or  a  still  higher  intensity  of  feeling 
may  be  denoted  by  the  additional  particle  i<is  or  nii^ 
prefixed  to  the  verb  or  to  the  person  addressed  i^'^D  NIX 
W  ah!  forgive,  I pi^dy  thee  Gen.  50:  17,  t^""^^"  t"nh^.  ni5< 
ah!  Jehovah,  rememher,  I  pray  thee  2  Kin.  20:  3. 

a.  Hi  is  used  both  with  the  paragogic  Gen.  27:  26,  1  Sam.  25:  8,  2  Kin. 
8:  4  and  with  the  simple  imperative  Josh.  7:  19,  1  Kin.  22:  5,  Job  1:  11. 
In  Nmn.  12:  13  N2  both  precedes  and  follows  the  imperative,  s:  with  the 
simple  future,  xrnis'i  Gen.  18:  4,  Tjli.?  xrbs  2  Sam.  13:  25,  N2-n;;n;]  2  Sam. 
14:  17,  N3  np''"'  Jer.'sS:  4,  !!<p"'ri;]  Cant.  7:  9,  Gen.  44:  18,  Judg.  6:  39, 
2  Kin.  5:  17,  Ps.  7:  10. 

6.  Examples  of  the  use  of  NiN  or  !i3N;  Isa.  38:  3,  Jon.  1:  14,  4:  2,  Ps. 
118:  25,  Neh.  1:5.  In  Ps.  116:  4  it  occurs  without  N3,  but  Avith  tlie  para- 
gogic form  of  the  imperative.  In  Ps.  116:  16,  Dan.  9:  4  it  stands  before  a 
vocative  with  no  verb  following;  in  Ex.  32:  31  there  is  an  ellipsis  both  of 
the  petition  and  of  the  person  addressed. 

The  Primary  Tenses  with  Vav  Conjunctive. 

§  275.  1.  When  the  same  relation  of  time  is  expressed 
in  successive  clauses,  this  may  be  either  in  the  way  of 
coordination  by  repeating  the  same  primary  tense,  whe- 
ther preterite  or  future,  and  connecting  the  clauses  some- 
what loosely  by  Vav  Conjunctive,  the  simple  copulative 
and]  or  in  the  way  of  subordination  by  means  of  the 
secondary  tenses,  §  99.  ],  which  are  attached  to  the 
preceding  by  the  closer  connection  of  Vav  Consecu- 
tive, which  is  equivalent  to  and  so  or  a7id  then,  and 
indicates  a  dependence  upon  or  a  sequence  from  the 
statement  previously  made.  As  Vav  Consecutive  must 
always  be  joined  immediately  to  the  following  verb,  the 
subordination  resulting  from  the  use  of  the  secondary 


§  275     THE  PBIMABY  TENSES  WITH  VAV  CONJUNCTIVE.         325 

tenses  can  only  occur  when  the  verb  is  the  first  word  in 
its  clause.  When  for  any  reason  this  is  not  the  case,  Vav 
Conjunctive  only  can  be  employed,  and  a  coordination 
rendered  necessary  by  the  collocation  of  words  may  have 
no  special  significance.  When,  however,  the  verb  imme- 
diately follows  the  conjunction,  either  construction  is 
possible;  and  then  the  employment  of  Vav  Conjunctive 
and  the  primary  tense  in  preference  to  the  other  and 
closer  combination  allows  each  statement  to  stand  as  it 
were  by  itself,  as  a  distinct  and  separate  item,  whereas 
the  use  of  Vav  Consecutive  and  the  secondary  tense  in- 
dicates a  more  intimate  relationship  and  links  all  that 
are  thus  joined  together  into  one  gradually  developing 
series.  Accordingly  preterites  may  be  coordinated,  "^"bn 
he  removed. ..^%"^^  and  he  brake... XT] j]  and  he  cut  doivn.., 
nrijl.  and  he  crushed  2  Kin.  18:  4;  so  futures  and  volun- 
tatives,  DM3^5  I  shall  comfort  myself ....  M^prsi  and  will 
avenge  myself  ....tl^''^'^^  and  will  bring  back....rjl'4^^  and 
shall  i^urge  ....  Hn^CSI  and  will  take  away  ....  Jll'^irsi  and 
will  restore,  Isa.  1:  24-26;  (the  individualizing  efi'ect  of 
this  construction  is  represented  in  the  translation  by  re- 
peating the  pronoun  before  each  preterite  and  the  auxi- 
liary before  each  future).  So  too  imperatives,  ^IQ  be 
fruitful,  ^i^^  ayid  multiply,  ^!J<b^^  and  fill ....  rj^^!?1  and 
subdue  it,  ^1")^  ayid  rule,  Gen.  1:28. 

a.  This  use  of  the  preterite  with  Vav  Conjunctive  Is  comparatively  rare, 
particularly  in  the  earlier  books  of  the  Bible.  It  is  emploj'ed  to  give 
distinctness  to  (1)  separate  particulars  in  the  same  transaction,  Gen.  21:  25, 
28:  6,  Ex.  36:  38,  38:  28,  Deut.  33:  2,  1  Sam.  17:  34,  35,  1  Kin.  6:  32,  35, 
2  Kin.  14:  7,  2  Chron.  29:  19,  Jer.  37:  15,  Ezek.  9:  7;  (2)  an  emphatic  ac- 
cumulation of  identical  or  equivalent  expressions,  Judg.  6:  3,  1  Sam.  12:  2, 
Isa.  1:  2,  9:  7,  41:  4,  44:  8,  Jer.  10:  25,  Ezek.  37:  11,  Dan.  9:  5,  Esth.  9:  27, 
Eccles.  1:  16  or  an  enumeration  of  various  acts  of  like  character  2  Sam. 
7:  9—11,  2  Kin.  21:  6,  Ps.  37:  14,  Isa.  43:  12,  Jer.  19:  4,  5;  (3)  a  clause  or 
paragraph  introduced  by  the  formula  M^ni  and  it  came  to  pass,  1  Sam. 
25:  20,  2  Sam.  6:  16,  Jer.  3:  9,  37:  11.  (4)  This  loose  coordination  is  espe- 
cially  found,  where  reference  is  had  not  to  a  definite  and  specific  act  but 


326  SYNTAX.  §  275 

more  indefinitely  to  that  which  may  take  place  at  any  time,  IT'rTi  and  it 
came  to  paxs,  if  (i.  e.  whenever)  the  serpents  bit  a  man,  a"^2ni  and  he  looked 
...  •'ni  then  he  lived,  Num.  21:  9,  Gen.  30:  41,  Ex.  17:  11,  Judg.  12:  5, 
19:  30,  Ruth  4:  7,  1  Sam.  13:  22,  26:  9,  Ps.  27:  2,  34:  11,  78:  34.  Isa.  40:  12, 
Mic.  5:  7;  or  which  lias  occurred  repeatedly  at  various  times,  they  gathered 
it  niorni»ff  by  morning  cni  and  the  sun  grew  hot  Cs:"!  and  it  melted,  Ex. 
16:  21,  vinni  Ex.  40:  31  (see  the  frequentative  future  ^^^'I'l  ver.  32),  Num. 
11:8,  irpri"!  CO' tinned  to  bloiv  Josh.  6:  8,  Judg.  2:18,  n^^"".  used  to  go  up  ... 
'^^i^  used  to  give  l  Sam.  1:  3,  4,  7:  16,  16:  23,  2  Sam.  12:  16,  15:  2,  1  Kin. 
4:  7,  18:  10,  2  Kin.  6:  10,  12:  10,  12,  Job  1 :  4,  5,  Isa.  5:  14,  St^j^-i  kept 
calling  . . .  ^bi<^  6:  3,  8:  11,  Ez-k.  37:  2,  7,  8,  10.  Dr.  Driver  (Hebrew 
Tenses,  2d  Ed.  p.  172)  explains  in  like  manner  the  numerous  preterites  with 
Vav  Conjunctive  employe  I  in  tracing  the  limits  of  the  tribes  Josh.  15:  3-11 
and  elsewliere,  as  "descriptive  of  the  course  which  the  boundary  used  to 
iake'\  In  a  few  instances  occurring  especially  in  the  later  books  of  the 
Bible  the  loose  construction  appears  to  be  used  indiscriminately  along  with 
the  more  usual  and  stricter  construction  with  Vav  Consecutive,  2  Kin.  23: 
4,  5,  8,  10,  12,  14,  15,  Jer.  18:  4. 

6.  Futures  united  by  Vav  Cotijunctive  may  give  distinctness  to  the 
recital  of  separate  particulars,  cnj'rN"!  and  I  tcill  send  them  "'ip'^"  and  tht-y 
shall  arise  '^ztrirr^  and  shall  go  ...  'idris'^'!  and  shall  describe  .. .  ixd'^'i  and 
shall  come  to  me,  the  issue  which  is  the  proper  sequel  to  all  these  prelimi- 
naries being  then  expressed  by  Vav  Consecutive  with  the  pi'eterite  ^piHTVi'l 
and  divi'Ie  it  Josh.  18:  4;  b^'^p"'l  ^"r;p;^"i  ^I'^n^  he  shall  intervene  and  shall 
imprison  and  shall  bring  to  trial  Job  11:  10,  13:  26,  'J7,  38:  14,  15,  Ps.  5:  12, 
22:  28,  69:  36  (the  issue  added  by  Vav  Consec.  pret),  107:  20-22,  Eccles. 
12:  6,  Isa.  41:  20,  42:  6,  21,  44:  7,  17,  2  Chron.  7:  14;  or  to  the  emphatic 
combination  of  substantially  equivalent  expressions,  why  ivilt  thou  Say 
nznrfl  and  wilt  thou  speak  Isa.  40:  27,  41:  11,  Ps.  37:  29.  A  like  effect  may 
be  produced  by  a  series  of  futures  without  Vav  Ps.  72:  2-7,  I- a.  14:  13,  14, 
16,  42:  14,  44:  11.  The  modified  forms  of  the  future  may  be  similarly 
united  by  Vav  Conjunctive;  thus  the  intentional  2  Sam.  3:  21,  17:  1-3  (issue 
added  by  Vav  Consec.  pret.),  2  Kin.  7:  13,  Job  16:  4,  Ps.  2:  3,  50:  21,  77:  4, 
145:  2;   Cant.  1:  4;  the  ju.ssive,  1  Sam.  2:  10,  Ps.  81:  16,  Prov.  15:  25. 

c.  Imperatives  may  be  continued  by  imperatives  with  Vav  Conjunctive 
in  order  to  give  greater  distinctness  to  each  separate  particular,  ^:;:;TJ  .... 
"irpnsi  siin  , .  SIX-)!)  run  . .  and  see  . .  and  know  and  seek  Jer.  5:  1,  Gen.  24: 
51,  27:  13,  19,  26,  Deut.  32:  49,  50,  Josh.  18:  8,  1  Sam.  20:  31,  23:  22,  23, 
2  Sam.  13:  7,  17:  16,  Ps.  25:  5,  16,  18,  28:  9,  34:  15,  Prov.  9:  5,  Jer.  15:  15, 
Kzek.  9:  5,  7;  or  to  add  emphasis  to  equivalent  expressions,  Deut.  4:  9, 
31:  6,  Josh.  1:  7,  24:  14,  2  Kin.  5:  7,  Ps.  37 :  3,  8,  45:  11,  Isa.  1:  2,  Ezek. 
17:2,  Am.  5:  15.  For  greater  brevity  and  force  Vav  is  sometimes  omitted, 
Judg.  9:  15,  2  Sam.  13:  15,  2  Kin.  9:  25,  Neh.  9:  5,  Isa.  21:  12,  Jer.  49:  8, 
51  :  27,  28. 

2.  When  successive  clauses  are  thus  coordinated,  a 
relation  of  subordination  or  dependence  may  neverthe* 


§275 


THE  PEIMABY  TENSES  WITH  VAV  CONJUNCTIVE.         327 


less  be  established  by  the  connection  of  the  thought. 
Thus  a  second  clause  frequently  states  the  result  of  the 
first,  Israel  loved  Joseph  fi^i^l  and  consequently  he  made 
for  him  a  coat  Gen.  37:  3;  or  if  its  verb  be  a  voluntative 
(either  a  paragogic  or  apocopated  future),  it  will  indi- 
cate the  design,  let  the  counsel  of  the  Holy  one  of  Israel 
come  ribiDI,  that  we  ynay  know  it  Isa.  5:  19,  (lit.  and  let 
us  knoiv),  )  is  here  parallel  to  ]jp2b  in  order  that  in  the 
previous  clause. 

O.  The  preterite  with  Vav  Conjunctive  denotes  the  result  of  a  pre- 
ceding action  in  1  Sam.  27:  12,  1  Kin.  9:  25,  2  Kin.  18:  7,  2  Chron.  7:  12, 
25:  19,  Ps.  22:  6,  28:  7,  34:  5,  6,  80:  13,  Prov.  22:  3,  Isa.  6:  7,  49:  6,  Jer. 
40:  3;  and  sometimes  a  result  different  from  that  wliich  might  have  been 
expected,  thou  didst  these  tilings  "'n^^nni  and  yet  I  teas  silent  Ps.  50:  21. 
The  same  relation  may  be  suggested  by  simple  juxtaposition  without  a 
conjunction,  Ps.  57:  7,  Hab.  3:2;  or  '{2  so  may  be  inserted  to  intimate  that 
the  effect  is  instantaneous  ^troP  "S  ^x"!  as  soon  as  they  saiv,  they  loondered 
Ps.  48:  6,  or  invariably  repeated  tobin  ",3  Dn^  lN"!p  as  often  as  they  called 
them,  they  ivent  from  them  Hos.  11:  2. 

b.  The  future  with  Vav  Conjunctive  may  likewise  indicate  the  result 
of  a  preceding  action,  they  shall  hear  ^H'y]'',  and  shall  fear  in  consequence 
Deut.  17:  13,  19:  20,  2  Kin.  7:  12,  Neh.  g":  13  (the  further  consequences  in- 
volved being  expressed  by  preterites  with  Vav  Consecutive),  Ps.  2:  12, 
68:  12,  104:  32,  Isa.  41:  15,  58:  9,  Jer.  6:  10,  20:  10,  Zech.  9:  5.  So  after 
an  imperative,  delight  thyself  in  Jehovah  V]V'|n";'i  and  he  will  give  thee  etc. 
Ps.  37:  4,  Prov.  3:  9,  10,  4:  6,  8,  10,  16:  3,  Isa.  8:  10.  The  result  may  be 
suspended  on  a  condition  not  fulfilled,  God  is  not  man  ^TD^l  that  he  should 
lie  Num.  23:  19;  Thou  desirest  not  sacrifice  niON"!  else  I  ivould  give  it 
Vs.  b\:  19,]  It  is  not  an  enemy  that  reproached  me  Nitsi  else  I  would  bear  it 
Ps.  55:  13. 

c.  The  voluntative  forms  of  the  future  with  Vav  Conjunctive  commonly 
express  the  design;  thus  the  intentional,  I  shall  go  up  fTf^ixi  ^o  tell  or  that 
I  may  tell  Pharaoh  (lit.  and  I  tvill  tell)  Gen.  46:  31,  18:  30,  Judg.  6:  39; 
and  the  jussive  let  me  escape  thither  "^nr^i  that  my  soul  may  livr.  (lit.  and 
let  my  soul  live)  Gen.  19:  20,  24:  51,  Ex.  7:  9  (without  Vav),  9:  22,  1  Sam. 
18:  21,  2  Chron.  18:  19,  Ps.  85:  14,  Isa.  63:  3,  Ezek.  14:  7.  So  very  fre- 
quently after  an  imperative:  the  intentional,  ^ive  me  etc.  rT^apNI  that  I  may 
bury  Gen.  23:  4,  27:  4,  Judg.  11:  37,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  2  Kin.  4:  22,'  Ps.  41:  11, 
90:  14,  Isa.  41:  22;  the  jussive,  entreat  Jehovah  'np^l  to  remove  or  that  he 
may  remove  Ex.  8:  4,  Num.  17:  2,  25,  21:  7,  25:  4,  Judg.  14:  15,  1  Sam, 
5:  II,  29:  4,  1  Kin.  13:  6,  21:  2,  10,  2  Chron.  30:  6,  8,  Isa.  30:  8.  Those 
forms  of  the  future  which  are  not  liable  to  be  apocopated,  may  yet  be  used 
in  a  jussive  sense,  §  97.  2.  b,  and  hence  may  also  upon  occasion  be  employed 


328  SYNTAX.  §  2 70 

with  Vav  Conjunctive  to  indicate  the  design,  hearken  to  the  voice  of  Je- 
hovah si:"'";'!  that  it  may  be  well  with  thee  (that  this  is  intended  as  a  jussive 
in  fact  though  not  in  form,  appears  from  the  jussive  in  the  next  clause) 
•^nn  and  that  ihy  soul  may  live,  Jer.  38:  20,  Ex.  5:  1,  8:  16,  14:  2,  Num. 
19:  2,  2  Kin.  2:  16,  5:  8,  Job  32:  20.  So  even  unabbreviated  forms  of  the 
future,  -which  might  have  been  apocopated,  inasmuch  as  the  simple  future 
may  have  an  optative  signification,  §  267.  1,  shall  I  call  thee  a  nurse  pi^nn 
that  she  may  nurse  Ex.  2:7;  particularly  in  a  negative  clause,  as  S<b  is  the 
only  negative  that  can  be  used  in  this  construction  and  it  requires  the 
simple  future,  §  272.  c,  send  away  the  ark  ni'^i  that  it  may  return,  "xbl 
n"'^''  and  that  it  may  not  slay  1  Sam.  5:  11;  so  forms  with  suffixes,  which 
are  precluded  from  taking  the  paragogic  termination  put  thy  hand  etc. 
?i>"'2mi  that  I  may  make  thee  swear  Gen.  24:  3,  1  Kin.  18:  44.  If  there  be 
a  reference  to  past  time  or  contingency  be  implied,  the  English  idiom  re- 
quires the  imperfect  instead  of  the  present  subjunctive,  he  used  to  conseirate 
whoever  would  '■rr'^  that  they  might  be  priests  1  Kin.  13:  33,  0  that  my  head 
were  waters  nisnxl  that  I  might  weep  Jei*.  8:  23,  9:  1,  Job  6:  9,  Ps.  49:  10. 
This  subjunctive  use  of  the  future  with  Vav  Conjunctive  to  indicate  design 
may  further  occur  after  an  infinitive  1  Sam.  7:  8,  2  Chron.  29:  10,  or  after 
a  preterite,  2  Kin.  19:  25,  Isa,  37:  26,  Jer.  23:  18,  Job  16:  21.  When  the 
event  is  certain  or  the  obligation  imperative  the  thought  cannot  be  fully 
expressed  in  English  by  a  dependent  construction,  and  we  are  obliyed  to 
surrender  the  statement  of  the  design  which  still  lies  in  the  Hebrew  for  the 
sake  of  making  a  positive  and  unconditioned  affirmation.  Thus,  bathe  in 
the  Jordan  y^l']  not  merely  that  thy  flesh  may  return,  which  would  leave 
the  issue  in  doubt,  but  and  thy  flesh  shall  return  2  Kin.  5:  10;  the  full  sense 
of  the  Hebrew  is  that  the  bathing  is  to  be  performed  with  this  design  and 
the  design  shall  be  accomplished.  Plead  tvith  your  mother  "ibri  not  merely 
that  she  should  put  atvay,  as  though  the  pleading  might  prove  ineft'ectual,  but 
and  let  her  put  away  Hos.  2:  4.     So  Lev.  9:  6,  Deut.  32:  1,  7,   1  Sam.  7:  3, 

1  Kin.  18:  1,  2  Kin.  6:  19,  Job  12:  7,  Ps.  26:  6,  50:  7,  66:  16,  119:  146, 
Prov.  9:  9,  Isa.  55:  3,  Hos.  14:  3,  Mai.  3:  7. 

d.  An  imperative  joined  to  a  preceding  imperative  by  Vav  Conjunctive 
may  denote  the  assured  result  of  that  action,  do  this  ^i^n^i  and  live  i.  e.  then 
you  shall  live  Gen.  42:  18,  Ex.  14:  13,  2  Kin.  5:  13,  2  Chron.  20:  20,  Job 
22:  21,  Ps.  34:  9,  Prov.  4:  4,  9:6,  20:  13  (without  Vav),  Isa.  8:  9,  37:  30, 
45:  22,  Am.  5:  6.  Less  frequently  after  a  future,  Jehovah  grant  you  ^"iXii"?" 
that  ye  may  find  (Ut.  arid  find  ye)  lluth  1:  9,  Geu.  12:  2,  20:  7,  2  Sam.  21;  3, 

2  Kin.  5:  10, 


The  Secondary  Tenses. 

§  276.  ^lien  successive  acts  are  not  viewed  separately 
but  as  closely  linked  each  to  its  immediate  predecessor 
from  first  to  last,  this  relation  is  indicated  by  means  of 


§  276  THE  SECOND AKT  TENSES.  329 

Vav  Consecutive  and  the  secondary  tenses.  The  entire 
series  is  regarded  as  unfolding  from  its  initial  act,  which 
is  accordingly  expressed  in  its  appropriate  primary  tense; 
the  succeeding  members  of  the  series  are  then  viewed 
not  from  the  point  of  time  occupied  by  the  speaker  but 
from  that  of  this  initial  act,  from  which  all  the  others 
proceed  step  by  step  in  regular  order.  Thus  in  narrating 
that  which  has  already  taken  place,  the  first  verb  is  put 
in  the  preterite  or  perfect,  thereby  assigning  the  whole 
to  the  domain  of  the  past.  Then  as  viewed  from  this 
starting  point  all  that  follows  lies  in  the  future.  The  se- 
cond verb,  representing  the  direct  sequence  of  the  first 
is  accordingly  expressed  in  the  future  or  imperfect  with 
Vav  Consecutive,  §  99.  1,  which  thus  forms  a  secondary 
or  continuative  preterite;  this  establishes  a  new  stand- 
point, from  which  the  next  act  is  surveyed  and  so  on  to 
the  end.  It  is  essential  to  this  construction  that  each  verb 
should  stand  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause  and  in  im- 
mediate connexion  with  Vav  Consecutive;  if  any  word 
or  particle  is  interposed  between  Vav  and  the  verb,  the 
latter  must  revert  to  the  primary  tense.  Thus,  Gen.  39:1, 
Joseph  "li^M  was  brought  doivn  . . .  ^Hip^.^  and  Potiphar 
bought  him  (lit.  according  to  the  original  sense  of  this 
tense  form  and  then  he  buys  or  will  buy  him)  . . .  "H'^l  and 

Jehovah  was  ..  ^h''^  and  he  was i^n^l  and  his  master 

saw  . . .  i^kW  and  Joseph  found  . . .  V^\^'^^  and  served 

^rr^pS'l  and  he  made  him  overseer ".riD  ib"UJ"'"b!j1  and  all 

that  he  had  he  gave  (pret.)  into  his  hand. 

a.  The  Vav  Consecutive  future  or  imperfect  is  the  ordinary  historical 
tense,  and  is  used  in  narratives  almost  to  the  exclusion  of  the  pretf  rite  or 
perfect,  which  is  only  occasionally  introduced,  when  the  collocation  of  words 
requires  it.  Being  thus  a  substitute  for  the  preterite  it  has  the  same  range 
of  signification  that  is  inherent  in  the  primary  tense.  Thus  following  a 
preterite,  it  will  ordinarily  conform  to  the  sense  of  that  preterite,  whether 
as  a  definite  act  in  the  absolute  past,  David  returned  . .  nd^l  owcZ  dtvelt 
2  Sam.  1 :  1 ;  or  repeated  acts  at  various  times,  lohithersoever  they  tvent 


330  SYNTAX.  §  276 

otd  . .  ^an  the!/  were  distressed  . .  Qp^T  and  Jehovah  raised  ttp  judges  Judg. 
2:  15, 16;  a  perfect,  I  have  hearkened  :>h'6^^  and  heard  Jer.  8:6;  pluiieifect, 
had  gone  down  m"'*!  -?-''.!)  and  lain  and  slept  soundly,  Jon.  1:5;  1  Sam. 
25:  34,  Job  9:16;  future  perfect,  he  shall  not  have  taJien  reaming  . . .  KisPil 
!inn7>ri^  and  the  sword  shall  have  come  and  taken  him  away  Ezek.  33:  4; 
optative,  0  that  we  had  been  content  aujh  and  dwelt  Josh.  7:7;  subjunctive, 
lest  the  spirit  may  have  taken  him  up  flizV:3j^l  and  cast  him  2  Kin.  2:  16;  a 
general  statement  that  may  be  verified  at  any  time,  thou  chasfisest  man 
OoH  and  dissolvest  Ps.  39:  12,  Prov.  21:  22,  22:  12;  prophetic  preterite, 
Isa.  5:  14-16  (alternatinji:  with  the  fut.  in  ver.  15  and  changing  to  the  fut. 
ver.  17),  9:  5  (see  fut.  ver.  6),  Joel  2:  23,  Mic.  2:  13,  Ps.  22:  30  (fut.  in 
second  clause).  It  may  even  have  this  prophetic  sense  when  attached  to  a 
preterite  referring  to  the  past;  thus  the  prediction  in  Isa.  2:  9  is  linked  to 
the  historical  statements  in  vs.  6-8  as  though  it  were  already  accomplished; 
in  9:  7-13  the  series  passes  imperceptibly  from  the  historical  to  the  pro- 
phetic, the  latter  in  its  assured  certainty  being  classed  with  the  former. 
Or  a  Vav  consec.  fut.  thus  connected  may  reach  from  the  past  into  the 
present,  TI(OU  didst  establish  the  earth  IT:"?}!!  a^d  it  stood  then  and  still 
stands  Ps.  119:  90,  or  into  the  future,  Jehovah  sat  enthroned  at  the  flood 
a^T  and  he  has  sat  and  sits  king  for  ever  Ps.  29:  10. 

b.  In  like  manner  the  Vav  Consecutive  future  or  imperfect  may  carry 
forward  a  narrative  of  the  past,  whatever  be  the  verbal  form  with  which  it 
began,  or  in  whatever  way  the  initial  reference  to  the  past  may  have  been 
made.  Thus  it  may  be  attached  to  a  future  or  imperfect,  when  it  is  used 
in  the  vivid  description  of  what  has  already  taken  place  T^Tl"^  tl<  then  sang 
(lit.  sivgs)  Moses  ....  I'^riS'l  and  they  said  Ex.  15:  1,  Gen.  37:  7,  1  Kin. 
20:  33  (§  267.  1.  b),  2  Kin.  16:  5,  Job  31:  27,  Ps.  18:  19,  24,  52:  9,  78:  15, 
26,  45,  95:  10,  106:  17,  19,  or  as  a  frequentative  past  ns^PI  S^i^^r^l  she 
used  to  provoke  her  so  that  she  ivept  1  Sam.  1 :  7,  Judg.  12:  5,  "i^f"!?  I  have 
rej'cafedly  spoken  . .  "ib  "ipiii  and  said  to  him  1  Kin.  21:  6,  Ps.  78:  40,  41, 
which  ma}'  continue  into  the  present  1  Sam.  2:  29,  Ps.  3:  5.  Or  it  may  be 
attaclied  to  an  infinitive  referring  to  the  past,  tj-pa  when  Jehovah  setd  . . . 
iin-sni  ye  rebelled  Dent.  9:  23;  or  to  a  participle  the  Philistines  Q^^nh^  were 
fighting  ...  ID:'!  and  Israel  fled  1  Sam.  31:  1;  or  to  a  noun  clause  Shem 
(was)  one  hundred  years  old  l?'i''1  and  he  begat  Gen.  11:  10;  or  a  statement 
of  time  on  the  third  day  xib*1  then  Abraham  lifted  Gen.  22:  4. 

c.  As  the  Vav  Consecutive  future  indicates  a  sequence,  its  time  is 
regulated  by  that  wh  ch  precedes  and  upon  which  it  is  dependent.  Ac- 
cordingly if  it  be  attached  to  what  is  present,  it  must  itself  be  rendered  as 
a  present.  Thus  when  linked  to  a  future  or  imperfect  with  a  present  signifi- 
cation. no^c  Sfidn  it  comes  to  thee  i<^ri!!  and  thou  faintest  Job  4:  6,  Ps.  60:  6 
(connecting  with  ver.  4),  64:  8,  77:  7,  or  denoting  what  is  true  at  all  times, 
for  which  we  likewise  use  the  present,  "ri'"^  he  prayeth  to  G'd  1!t^")^?  and 
he  accepieth  hitn  Job  33:  26,  34:  24,  39:  15,  Ps.  49:  15,  107:  28-30;  or  to 
a  particii)le  bzxr"';)  nr"2  the  king  is  weeping  and  mourning  2  Sam.  19:  2, 
Tr'i"2  He  brings  doicn  ...  IsyTi  and  brings  up  1  Sam.  2:  6,  Job  12:  22-24, 
14:  20,  Ps.  18:  33,  34:  8,   104:  32,  Prov.  20:  26;   or  to  an  infinitive  Sl^Ua 


§276 


THE  SECONDARY  TENSES.  331 


when  a  wicked  man  returns  ...  irs^l  and  does  Ezek.  18:  27;  or  any  phrase 
or  exprei»sion  that  is  suggestive  of  present  time,  icho  (art)  thou  "'X^'^ril  that 
thou  art  afraid  Isa.  51 :  12,  Gen.  49:  14,  15,  a  land  of  gloom  . . .  ysni  and 
when  it  shines  it  is  like  darkness  Job  10:  22,  7:  18,  Ps.  8:  5,  6,  144:  3. 
This  departure  from  the  ordinary  historical  use  of  this  tense  is  chiefly  to 
be  found  in  poetry.  So  is  also  a  still  rarer  construction  in  which  it  is  linked 
to  a  future  having  a  future  signification,  ph".^'^  he  shall  deride  every  strong- 
hold "lii'.i'^l  a7id  shall  heap  up  earth  l^^^ib''^  and  take  it  Hab.  1:  10,  Job 
24:  20,  Ps.  55:  18;  Deut.  17:  2,  3  occurring  in  simple  prose  must  be  differ- 
enfy  explained;  if  i<k53";  there  shall  be  found  a  man  who  ^'^?,'^  shall  do 
that  which  is  evil,  the  doing  is  not  future  to  the  finding  but  antedates  it 
and  might  with  equal  propriety  have  been  expressed  by  the  pret.  tibs  in 
the  sense  of  the  future  perfect,  shall  have  done,  §  267.  1.  c.  The  act  being 
thus  conceived  of  as  already  performed  at  the  time  supposed  is  further 
described  by  the  secondary  preterites  "a^'p  T(b;^1  and  has  gone  and  served 
other  go'ls;  while  the  sequel  to  the  finding  is  expressed  in  ver.  4  by  the 
secondary  future  lin'l  and  it  shall  be  told  thee.  In  Hab.  2:  1,  2  a  panse 
intervenes,  in  which  a  preterite  is  to  be  supplied,  I  will  watch  to  see  tvhat 
he  ivill  speak  ....  "^si?^;!  and  (after  I  had  thus  watched)  Jehovah  an- 
swered me. 

d.  The  sequence  indicated  by  Vav  Consecutive  is  not  always  that  of 
time,  but  may  simply  represent  the  order  of  thought  in  the  mind  of 
the  writer  or  speaker;  thus  the  second  verb  may  be  explanatory  of  the 
preceding  God  tempted  Abraham  "I'CN'I  and  said  i.  e.  tempted  him  by  say- 
ing etc.  Gen.  22:  1,  they  did  so  l^i^ir;?;!  that  is  to  say  they  cast  (lit.  and  they 
cast)  Ex.  7:11,  12,  Josh.  7:  20,  21  ;  or  synonymous  with  it  they  were  fruit- 
ful ^i'4"l'}  1Si'i'=;l  1l£"}P"!i  and  increased  and  multiplied  and  greiv  strong  Ex. 
1:  7,  1  Sam.  15:  17,  '2  Sam.  14:  5,  Job  14:  10,  Ps.  16:  9.  18:  8;  or  an  iden- 
tical repetition  whether  for  emphasis  Vi'^l  Gen.  2:  2,  :S'r^1  Ezek.  18:  2S,  by 
way  of  resumption  *i=b*:;  Josh.  18:  8,  9,  'y•S'^  Judg.  17:  3,  4.  N'id'^;)  1  Sam. 
4:  12,  13,  T\t'}  6:  19,  tl^EpNT  Ezr.  8:  25,  26,  T^^^;i  10:  6,  or  for  the  sake  of 
adding  further  particulars  D^liia^*!  2  Chron.  28:  15;  or  a  contrasted  thought 
there  is  a  snare  for  the  tvicked  t<"k*1  but  the  righteous  comes  out  Prov.  12:  13, 
Job  3:  2*i;  or  the  positive  alternative  answering  to  a  preceding  negative 
Ihey  walked  not  in  his  ways  1:2'1  but  turned  aside  1  Sam.  8;  3,  13:  22, 
Ex.  33:  4,  6,  Judg.  19:  10;  or  the  summing  up  of  an  antecedent  paragraph 
ii^Dil  thus  were  finished  Gen.  2:  1,  "'n'^l  so  it  teas  19:  29,  D;r^1  so  was  con- 
firmed 23:  17,  20;  or  a  particular  in  a  preceding  more  general  statement  these 
are  the  kings  ivho  reigned  . . .  Tj'3^*1  viz.  there  reigned  Gen.  36:31,  32,  2  Kin. 
1:  12,  13  {answered  and  spake,  besought  him  and  spitke),  18:  28,  Job  10:  8, 
Jer.  39:  4;  or  the  ord^r  of  time  may  be  disregarded,  the  succession  of  ideas 
being  determined  by  some  other  principle  of  association  Gen.  2:  7-9,  15, 
6:  10,  11,  8:1-3,  11:  32-12:  1,  Ex.  32:  29  (prior  to  ver  28),  Josh.  2:  3,  4, 
2:  22,  18:  8,  1  Sam.  17:  16,  17,  23:  1  (prior  to  22:  20  ff.,  see  23:  6),  Jon. 
2:  4,  Zech.  7:2;  or  the  proper  sequence  may  lie  in  a  remoter  term,  that 
which  is  first  stated  being  preliminary  and  subordinate  the  peop)le  believed 
!|'i]3'^1  ...  ^S^T2J*1   and  heard  ...  and  boived  themselves  Ex.  4:  31,  where  of 


332  SYNTAX.  §  276 

course  the  hearing  preceded  the  believing,  and  the  meaning  is  inasmuch  as 
they  l)ad  heard  they  bowed;  so  Gen.  2:  19  he  formed  ...  and  brought  ia 
equivalent  to  he  brought  . . .  which  he  had  formed;  Deut.  31:  9. 

e.  Vav  Consecutive  future  may  indicate  the  result  of  a  preceding  action 
Jofhua  commanded  Cln-^'i*!  and  ihey  took  them  down  Josh.  10:  27,  t^^^'^T 

1  Sam.  19:  5,  "1:^"*  and  each  one  burned  incense  not  expressive  of  design 
as  though  it  were  "liipl,  §  275.  2.  c,  that  he  might  burn  incense  2  Kin.  23:  5, 

2  Chron.  24:  8,  Keh.  13:  19  (where  design  is  expressed  by  following  futures), 
Job  11:  3,  Ps.  33:  9,  69:  11,  12,  78:  20,  97:  4,  109:  17,  Prov.  11:2,  Isa.  2:  9, 
40:  14,  51:  15,  T'S'i  and  he  is  dead  i.  e.  is  as  good  as  dead,  certain  to  die 
Jer.  38:  9,  Am.  9:  5,  Nah.  1:  4,  Hab.  3:  16;  so  also  a  result  different  from 
that  which  might  have  been  expected  "'ipcni  and  yet  thou  incitedst  me 
Job  2:3,  10:  8,  32:  3,  Deut.  4:  33,  Ps.  73:  14,  or  suspended  upon  a  con- 
dition that  was  not  fulfilled  thou  didst  not  tell  me  ^\^kj::i<^  or  I  would  have 
sent  thee  away  Gen.  31:  27. 

f.  As  the  fundamental  idea  of  the  secondary  tenses  is  that  of  sequence, 
and  as  the  combination  of  Vav  with  the  verbal  form  is  an  essential  el- 
ement of  their  formation,  a  return  to  the  primary  tense  may  be  rendered 
necessary  by  either  of  two  reasons,  viz.:  if  the  thought  to  be  stated  is  not 
regarded  by  the  writer  or  speaker  as  the  sequel  of  that  which  precedes,  or 
if  the  verb  is  not  immediately  attached  to  Vav.  Thus  at  the  beginning  of 
a  narrative  Gen.  1:  1,  Job  1:1,  or  when  a  new  subject  is  introduced  Gen. 
15:  1,  21:  1,  37:  2,  1  Sam.  2:  22,  or  a  subject  is  resumed  after  a  longer  or 
shorter  interruption  Gen.  13:  14,  39:  1,  1  Sam.  5:1,  or  an  explanatory  state- 
ment is  made  1  Sam.  5:  7  (comp.  without  Vav  Judg.  20:  5,  43,  Ps.  78:  19), 
or  a  parenthesis  inserted  1  Sam.  13:  21,  22,  2  Chron.  12:  10,  or  after  a 
parenthesis  1  Sam.  1:  3,  4:  13,  or  when  the  action  does  not  continue  the 
preceding  but  belongs  before  it  1  Sam.  4:  18,  6:  15.  So  also  when  there  is 
no  Vav  in  the  clause  Hab.  3:6,  or  when  any  word  or  particle  comes  be- 
tween Vav  and  the  verb  Gen.  1:  2,  5,  10,  27,  26:  22,  27:  23.  Vav  Consecu- 
tive future  occurs  in  a  preterite  sense  at  the  beginning  of  certain  books, 
because  they  were  regarded  by  their  authors  as  supplements  or  continua- 
tions of  preceding  histories,  '^r^*^^  And  it  came  to  pass  Josh.  1:  1,  Judg.  1:  1, 
1  Sam.  1:  1  etc.  etc. 

g.  In  a  verj'  few  instances  only  occurring  in  elevated  poetry  the  apoc- 
opated future  is  used  in  the  recital  of  what  is  past.  These  are  sometimes 
explained  on  the  assumption  that  Vav  Consecutive  has  been  omitted  by 
poetic  license,  thus  ::k:  Deut.  32:  8,  "'Cn  ver.  18,  ni-:"!;:  2  Sam.  22:  14  (where 
Ps.  18:  14  has  n?-i»1),  ^y]  Job  33:  21,  fir^  Ps.  18:  12  (where  2  Sam.  22:  12 
has  rdh),  Ps.  68:  15,  78:  26,  90:  3,  107:  29,  33,  Hos.  6:  1,  or  that  the  Vav 
is  still  operative  though  separated  by  an  intervening  word  Job  23:  11,  12. 
But  it  may  quite  as  readily  be  supposed  that  the  apocopated  is  poetically 
used  for  the  siinjjle  future,  §  272.  b,  which  is  here  employed  in  the  vivid 
description  of  the  past,  §  267.  5,  particularly  when  this  is  conceived  of  as 
contemporaneous  with  or  continuous  from  that  which  had  previously  been 
spoken  of,  comp.  a  like  use  of  the  simple  future  Ps.  69:  13,  22,  78:  15,  29, 
72.  81  :  7,  8,  13,  and  of  the  paragogic  future  Ps.  73:  16,  17,  Prov.  7:  7.     In 


§  277  THE  SECOND AEY  TENSES.  333 

Ezek.  16:15  J"*!!";  may  have  its  proper  jussive  force,  as  the  language  of  the 
person  referred  to,  let  it  be  his. 

h.  It  is  difficult  to  explain  satisfactorily  the  singular  fact  that  the  first 
person  of  the  future  with  Vav  Consecutive  in  many  instances  adopts  the 
paragogic  form,  §  99.  2.  It  has  with  some  plausibility  been  suggested  that 
it  may  express  the  voluntary  nature  of  the  act,  nnbrST  and  I  sent  of  my 
own  accord  Gen.  32:  6,  fri'aripx'j  and  I  kept  myself  carefully  and  of  set 
purpose  2  Sam.  22:  24,  Judg.  6:  9,  10,  !^3"'i;X'l  and  I  carefully  insj)ected 
Ezr.  8:  15,  ni:"iON1  and  I  plucked  out  violently,  with  hearty  good  will  9:  3, 
Neh.  1:  4,  5:  7,  8,  13,  13:  7-13,  21,  Ps.  7:  5,  119:  55,  and  even  a  quasi  sort 
of  unconscious  spontaneity  and  self  abandon  may  be  suspected  in  such 
cases  as  nsi'^NI  Ps.  3:  6,  ti^bnsi  Gen.  41:  11,  which  Dr.  Driver  not  inaptly 
proposes  to  render  I  slept  away,  we  dreamed  away,  «^'-yi2Nl  I  was  heartily 
sick  Ps,  69:  21. 

§  277.  In  like  manner  wlien  a  succession  of  acts, 
either  announced  or  enjoined  in  the  future,  is  conceived 
of  as  closely  related  throughout,  the  first  verb  is  put  in 
the  future  (imperfect)  or  in  the  imperative,  as  the  case 
may  be,  to  fix  the  starting  point  as  well  as  the  modal 
aspect  of  the  series;  the  verbs  that  follow,  provided  they 
stand  each  at  the  beginning  of  its  own  clause,  are  put 
in  the  preterite  (perfect)  with  Vav  Consecutive,  the 
writer  or  speaker  passing  successively  forward  in  thought 
to  the  time  when  they  shall  have  been  performed  and 
viewing  each  as  accomplished  in  its  turn.  But  if  any 
word  or  particle  comes  between  Vav  and  the  verb,  the 
secondary  tense  must  give  place  to  the  appropriate  pri- 
mary. Thus  Lev.  4:  13-21  If  Israel  ^.-tTT^  shall  err,  D^^D'] 
and  it  be  hid  (strictly  'shall  have  been  hid'  at  the  time) . . . 
^hTi  and  they  do  ..,.  ^'2iL^i^]  and  shall  be  guilty  . . .  nyniDI. 
and  it  shall  become  known  ....  ^nnpHl    then  they  shall 

offer  ....  ^^^^■'ini  ^^^^  shall  bring ^^P^l  ^^^^  shall  lay 

tirUJI.  and  one  shall  slay ^^ini  '^^^f^  ^^^^  priest  shall 

bring bhtil  and  shall  dip  ....  n-tMl  and  sJiall  sprinkle  .... 

■jn";  D^r;'*j!2^  fut.  and  shall  put  of  the  blood;  1  Sam.  15:  3 
lib  go  thou  tirC'^iT})  and  smite  (strictly  'thou  shalt  have 
smitten'  i.  e.  I  require  and  expect  this  to  be  done)  ... 


334  byntajc  §  277 

Dni2'^nrj')  and  devote  ye  ....  b^rn  i^bl.  fut.  and  thou  shall 
not  spare  . . .  T]Pi'2rp_  pret.  hut  shalt  slay  etc. 

a.  The  secondary  tenses  have  precisely  the  same  variety  of  usage  as 
their  respective  primaries  and  are  substitutes  for  them  in  any  sense  in 
which  they  can  be  employed.  Thus  the  preterite  with  Vav  Consecutive  may 
be  conformed  in  its  meaning  to  a  preceding  future  used  in  a  future  sense 
God  ni;ni  tcill  he  with  me  "'3b"9''yi  and  keep  me  etc.  etc.  Gen.  28:  20,  21, 
Lev.  7:  2^0,  21,  1  Sam.  1:  22,  9:  16,  2  Kin.  5:  11,  Ps.  37:  5,  6,  Isa.  2:  4, 
Jer.  18:  7-10,  Ezek.  11:  8-10,  14:  13-15,  33:  2,  3,  36:  27-31  (with  occasional 
futures  in  the  series),  Zech.  13;  1-6,  Dan.  11:  29,  30;  in  a  conditional  sense, 
every  man  N'ii";  should  come  to  me  . . .  l"'np!}^ri"!  o"<^  ^  tcoald  do  him  justice 
2  Sam.  15:  4,  Jer.  37:  10,  Am.  9:3;  in  a  subjunctive  sense  after  "jQ  lest 
Gen.  3:  22,  32:  12,  Ex.  1:  10,  or  '"t^  in  order  that  Gen.  12:  13,  18:  19, 
Deut.  4:  1,  Neh.  6:  13;  or  in  the  sense  of  a  command  ^p^^n-in-bx  go  not  far 
away  ...  cn''"rn  and  be  ye  all  ready  Josh.  8:  4,  Ex.  12;  5-8,  Num.  19:  2-7, 
16-19,  Deut.  5:  13,  15,  so  when  the  fiitui-e  has  the  jussive  form  Gen.  1:  14, 
Deut.  28 :  8,  1  Kin.  1 ;  2,  the  following  preterite  if  in  the  2d  person  becoming 
equivalent  to  an  imperative  1  Chron.  22:  11,  2  Chron.  18;  12,  or  when  the 
future  has  the  cohortative  form  Judg.  19:  13,  comp.  ver.  11;  or  expressing 
desire  K3  '"^N"'  n\ay  tly  word  be  verified  . . .  n"'?S!i  and  do  thou  turn  . . . 
nrr-ri.  and'  hearken  1  Kin.  8;  26,  28,  30,  permission  nisXT^  !^?:"n  thou 
mayest  give  it  and  he  may  eat  it  Deut.  14:  20,  or  necessity  'i'-'::^"',  "^^^ 
they  must  go  and  get  straw  Ex.  5:  7;  or  denoiing  a  general  fact  irrespective 
of  time  !i52ir";  they  have  enough  . . .  sirr^sri'i  and  leave  their  abundance  Ps. 
17:  14,  Eccles.  3:  13,  Jer.  3:  1,  18:  7-10,  Am.  5;  19,  Nah.  3;  12;  or  custo- 
mary action  in  the  past  vapour  n^?"i  used  to  ascend  . . .  npii'n"!  and  watered 
Gen.  2:  6,  6:  4,  29:  2,  3,  Ex.  33:  8-11,  Num.  9:  21,  Deut.  11:  10,  Judg.  2:  19, 
1  Sam.  1:6,  2:  15,  19,  20,  2  Sam.  17:  17,  2  Kin.  3:  25,  or  in  the  present 
Jer.  20:  9.  In  1  Kin.  18:  23  the  future  is  continued  in  one  clause  by  futures 
and  in  the  other  by  Vav  Consec.  pret.  in  precisely  the  same  sense,  except 
that  in  the  former  case  greater  stress  is  laid  upon  each  separate  item, 
§  27o.  1. 

b.  Vav  Consecutive  Preterite  may  also  be  used  after  the  preterite  when 
this  .su^'gests  what  is  future;  thus  wlien  it  has  the  sense  of  the  future 
perfect.  •'irrcTDX  if  thou  remember  me  (lit.  shalt  have  remembered)  .  .  . 
NS-n-^rrn  then  pray  shew  kindness  Gen.  40:  14  43:  9,  Lev.  13:  56,  2  Sam. 
15:  33,  20:  6,  2  Kin.  5:  20,  1  Chron.  17:  11,  Job  11:  13,  Isa.  16:  12,  Ezek. 
14:  9;  or  denotes  the  cortainty  of  that  which  has  not  yet  taken  place,  the 
80  calli'd  prophetic  preterite,  1::^:;?  fheir  judges  have  been  thrown  down 
(i.  e.  shall  .v-nrely  be  thrown  down)  . . .  1?^w*i  and  they  shall  hear  Ps.  141:  6, 
Isa.  2:  11,  5:  17,  Joel  2:  23-27;  or  expresses  a  purpose  already  formed  to 
be  carried  into  elVect  hereafter,  so  frequently  T't": .  I  have  set  my  bow  in 
the  cloH'l  (i.  e.  I  intend  to  do  so)  "n-^ni  and  it  shall  be  Gen.  9:  13,  17:  5,  6, 
16,  Ex.  31:  6,  Josh.  8:  1,  2,  E/:ek.  15:  6,  7,  and  other  verbs  which  are 
similarly  prospective  Gen.  17:  20,  Deut.  15:  6,  7,  Isa.  43:  14,  Zech.  8:  3;  or 
belongs  to   the   present,   and   its   sequences  in  the  future  are  added  by  VaT 


§  278  PARTICIPLES.  335 

Consecutive  with  the  preterite  j'^n'iri  nn?  Jehovah  has  now  made  room  fot 
us  WnSI  and  we  shall  be  fruitful  Gen.  26:  22,  Deut.  4:  5,  6,  39,  30:  19, 
Judg.  11:8,  who  is  David  . . .  "^Pinjrbi  that  I  should  take,  or  interrogatively 
and  shall  I  take  1  Sam.  25:  11,  1  Kin.  2:  6  (n''ia:^"i.  connects  with  O"!^  ver.  5^ 
ipin^'yU  I  heretvith  send  . . .  "iriSOSI  and  thou  wilt  recover  him  or  that  thou 
mayest  recover  him  2  Kin.  5:  6,  Ezek.  3:  17,  Amos  6:  8,  9;  or  involves  the 
idea  of  contingency  which  is  closely  allied  to  that  of  futurity  i3':3  ^?'33 
might  easily  have  lain  (lit.  almost  lay)  . . .  PN^n.l  and  thus  thou  mighfest 
have  brought  Gen.  26:  10.  Sometimes  futurity  is  only  suggested  by  the 
circumstances  or  by  the  general  context  d!n"np'IJ3'i  and  ye  shall  take  heed 
(as  determined  by  the  hortatory  aim  of  the  whole  passage,  comp.  "lok'fi 
ver.  9)  Deut.  4:  15,  29:  8,  nipXT  Jer.  13:  12,  13,  Ezek.  13:  13-15,  17:  19,20, 
Zech.  1:  3,  Mai.  2:  15,  16;  so  n^fil  Isa.  2:  2  links  itself  in  a  general  way 
with  antecedent  prophecies;  and  it  must  often  be  determined  by  the  drift 
of  the  eonnection  ratlier  than  by  the  immediate  consecution  whether  •T'JiT 
means  and  it  will  come  to  pass  Gen.  12:  12,  Deut.  26:  1,  or  and  it  came  to 
pass  §  275.  1.  a.  (3). 

c.  Vav  Consecutive  of  the  preterite  has  the  same  pointing  with  Vav 
Conjunctive,  but  a  distinction  is  made  in  certain  forms,  chiefly  in  the  first 
and  second  persons  singular  by  the  shifting  of  the  accent  from  the  penult 
to  the  ultimate,  §  100.  "When  this  is  not  the  case  it  is  only  the  connection 
that  can  decide.  If  it  is  linked  to  a  future  or  to  any  expression  referring 
to  the  future,  it  is  Vav  Consecutive;  otherwise  it  is  almost  invariably  Vav 
Conjunctive. 

Participles. 

§  278.  The  participles  being  properly  verbal  nouns, 
do  not  in  strictness  involve  any  definite  notion  of  time, 
and  the  connection  must  decide  whether  they  are  to  be 
referred  to  the  past,  present,  or  future,  thus  bsb  means 
falling  Num.  24:  4,  fallen  Judg.  4:  22,  or  about  to  fall 
Jer.  37:  14.    Their  principal  uses  are  the  following,  viz.: 

1.  They  may  express  what  is  permanent  or  habitual, 
as  general  truths  valid  for  all  time,  (Jehovah)  2r;s  loveth 
rigldeousness  Ps.  33:  5;  a  generation  Tjbh  goeth,  and  a  gen- 
eration U53  Cometh  and  the  earth  Tr[d^  abideth  for  ever 
Eccles.  1:4,  1  Sam.  2:  6-8,  Job  5:  9-13,  20:  27,  Ps.  22: 
29,  Prov.  8:  9,  21:  23;  also  a  condition  which  is  con- 
tinuous or  a  course  of  action  which  is  customary  for  a 
longer  or  shorter  period,  he  ^.^bpH^  rj^.!'^  sacrificed  and 


336  SYNTAX.  §  278 

burned  incense  liahitnally  1  Kin.  3:3,  4:  20,  Gen.  39:  23, 
Ex.  18:  14,  2  Chron.  17:  11,  Ps.  19:  2,  Jer.  37:  4.  Passive 
participles  so  used  suggest  not  only  a  constant  experience 
of  what  is  denoted  by  tlie  verb,  but  in  addition  a  per- 
manent quality  as  the  ground  of  it,  like  the  Latin  fut. 
pass.  part,  in  dus,  i^niD  not  only  feared  but  worthj  to  be 
feared,  V^"^^  ivorthy  to  be  praised,  "ibn;  desirable,  '^Z'^)^fit 
to  he  eateVhey.  11:  47,  Prov.  16:  16^  Isa.  2:  22. 

2.  Where  a  particular  time  is  intended  the  active 
participles  most  commonly  relate  to  the  present  nn^'nu 
nsn  tchat  seest  thou  Jer.  1:  11,  Gen.  4:  10,  27:  42,  Ex. 
18: 14,  Judg.  9:  37  (with  nin),  2  Sam.  3: 13,  1  Km.  6: 12, 
or  to  the  proximate  future,  in  which  sense  it  is  frequently 
preceded  by  Mi",  K^i'^  ^iDH  behold,  I  am  about  to  bring 
the  flood  Gen.  6:  17,  7:  4,  19:  13,  48:  21,  Ex.  10:  8,  Isa. 
3:  1,  5:  5,  Jer.  28:  16;  and  passive  participles  to  the  past, 
"j^j  given,  li^VJ  restored^  T02^'i2  slain,  "i^-"d  kept,  ^TX:?  done, 

a.  The  active  participles  of  neuter  verbs,  which  have  no  passive  forms, 
are  used  in  a  past  as  well  as  in  a  present  or  future  sense,  rp  dead  more 
frequently  than  dying  or  about  to  die,  t!-x::yn  th  t  tvevt  forth  Gen.  9:  18, 
citan  that  came  Josh.  2:  3.  This  is  occasionally  the  case  with  active 
verbs,  when  it  is  demanded  by  the  connection  who  then  is  he  T^k-n^n  that 
hath  hunted  venison  Gen.  27:  33;  these  are  the  gods  D"iran  that  smote  Egypt 
1  Sam.  4:  8,  Gen.  48:  16,  2  Kin.  22:  18.  Interpreters  are  not  agreed  whether 
•^n^:)  Gen.  19:  14  means  u^ho  were  to  marry  or  who  had  married  Lot's 
daughters.  Participles  of  i)assive  form  but  active  sense  may  be  used  of  the 
present  or  proximate  future,  nrJ3  trusting,  §  90,  Cr;3  fiyhting  or  about  to 
fight,  but  rarely  those  which  are  strictly  passives,  Gen.  19:  15,  Ex.  5:  16, 
1  Chron.  22  :  19. 

3.  In  narrations  and  predictions  the  time  of  the  par- 
ticiple is  reckoned  not  from  the  moment  of  speaking  but 
from  the  period  spoken  of.  They  very  commonly  denote 
that  which  is  contemporaneous  with  the  event  described, 
particularly  in  circumstantial  clauses,  the  two  angels  came 
...  'Z'O''  Lib"!  and  Lot  (was)  sitti){g  in  the  gate  of  Sodom 
Gen.  19:  1;  he  came  to  Shiloh  ...  D^y"^p  VV;^  tvith  his 
clotJies  rent  1  Sam.  4:  12;  thou  shalt  meet  a  company  of 


§  278  PAETIC1PLE8.  337 

prophets  D'^^T  coming  dotvn  1  Sam.  10:  5;  theij  shall  de- 
clare his  righteousness  unto  a  peoijle  ibiD  (who  shall  then 
be)  horn  Ps.  22:  32,  Gen.  29:  9,  41:  17,  42:  23,  Deut.  4: 
11,  Josh.  6:  1,  Judg.  13:  9,  Ps.  102:  19;  though  they  may 
upon  occasion  denote  the  relatively  past,  David  said  to 
the  young  man  "''3^^  'i^ho  had  told  him  2  Sam.  1 :  13  or 
the  relatively  future  he  did  not  tell  him  that  he  Hnh  was 
about  to  flee  Gen.  31:  20. 

4.  The  verb  TTT]  to  he  is  connected  with  active  parti- 
ciples to  form  progressive  tenses,  which  are  more  fre- 
quently employed  in  the  later  than  in  the  earlier  books 
of  the  Old  Testament,  Moses  ni^h  n\"l  was  keeping  the 
flock  Ex.  3:1;  it  is  also  occasionally  connected  with  pas- 
sive participles  to  indicate  the  time  to  which  they  are  to 
be  referred  or  the  aspect  under  which  they  are  to  be 
conceived,  his  throne  "iip  fCTr  shall  he  estahlished  for  ever, 

1  Chron.  17:  4,  %^ri  let  tJieir  habitation  be  nia'JJp  desolated 
Ps.  69:  26.  * 

a.  Other  examples  with  active  participles,  Gen.  37:  2,  42:  11,  Ex.  37:  9, 
Judg.  1:  7,   1  Sam.  2:  11,   2  Sam.  3:  6,   1  Kin.  5:  15,   20:  40,   2  Kin.  17:  28, 

2  Chron.  24:  12,  Esth.  9:  21,  Job  1:  14,  Ps.  122:  2,  Isa.  3:  7.  The  passive 
participle  with  iiTi  indicates  a  condition  as  existing  rather  than  an  act  as 
performed  at  the  tiiije  referred  to,  differing  thus  from  the  meaning  of  the 
primary  tenses  in  the  passive  s-pecies,  all  the  people  that  came  out  ^'^Tt  Q'^B'a 
were  ah-eady  circumcised  Josh.  6:5;  this  distinction  which  cannot  be  re- 
presented in  English  on  account  of  the  peculiar  formation  of  the  passive 
voice,  is  famihar  in  German,  sie  waren  beschnitten,  not  sie  icurden  be- 
schriitfen,  comp.  Ex.  19:  11,  15,  Deut.  28:  29,  Josh.  8:4,  Ps.  73:  14,  Isa.  2:  2. 
In  Esth.  6 :  1  this  combination  has  lost  its  proper  force  and  has  become 
simp!}'  a  compound  tense  C"iN"ip3  VT}'''\  and  they  tcere  read  before  the  king. 
The  jussive  "^ri^,  which  is  sometimes  connected  with  participles  Deut.  33:  24, 
Job  1:  21,  is  to  be  understood  with  "^13,  "imx  and  in  a  few  other  cases. 
Jer.  2:  17  "^bi^  n?2  seems  best  explained  by  the  ellipsis  of  the  relative  in 
the  time  that  he  icas  leading  thee,  so  Ezek.  27:  34,  Gen.  38:  29,  40:  10. 

h.  The  negative  ')"X,  which  includes  in  its  signification  the  substantive 
verb,  is  constantly  used  with  participles,  ^ris  "pX  there  was  no  one  inter- 
pretivg  Gen.  41:  8,  'jni  "SpN:  /  am  not  giving  Ex.  5:  10,  "jriD  "pX  "jnn  straw 
is  not  given  \er.  16.  The  simple  negative  5<b  not  is  very  rarely  found  with 
them  "liirxb  Job  29:  12;  where  it  would  be  required,  the  preterite  or  fu- 

22 


338  BTNTAX.  §  279 

ture  tense,  as  the  case  rnay  be,  must  ordinarily  be  employed,  all  going 
down  to  the  (luat  and  Jn'ri  x^  not  saving  alive  P«.  22:  30, 

Infinitive, 

§  279.  The  infinitive  is  an  abstract  verbal  noun,  and, 
like  the  participles,  partakes  of  the  character  both  of  a 
noun  and  a  verb.  As  a  noun  it  may  be  the  subject  or 
the  predicate  of  a  proposition,  or  it  may  be  governed  by 
a  verb,  and  in  its  construct  form  by  a  noun,  or  preposi- 
tion; it  may  also  be  put  in  the  construct  state  before  a 
noun  denoting  either  its  subject  or  its  object. 

a.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  in  a  very  few  instances  used  as  a  subject, 
030  nbin  n'^iv-na  nhat  doth  your  reproof  reprove?  Job  6:  25,  ^ix  to  eat 
fnuch  hotiet/  is  not  good  Pi-ov,  25:  27,  Eccles.  4:  17,  or  a  predicate  the  effect 
of  righteousness  shall  be  HMJ  ^(^'■r'T'  quietness  and  confidence  Isa.  32:  17; 
the  construct  more  frequently,  either  without  b,  :;e\:;j  ^^'^?.  to  do  justice 
is  a  jot/  to  the  righteous  Prov.  21:  15,  13:  19,  Gen.  2:  18,  or  with  it,  Esth. 
5:  8,  Ps.  92:  2,  Prov.  21 :  9  comp.  25:  24;  Esth.  1:  7,  the  words  of  the  tvicked 
are  D^rnnx  fo  lie  in  ivait  for  blood  Prov.  12:  6.  In  apposition  with  the  sub- 
ject 2  S;un.  13:  16.  Pronouns  and  predicates  leferring  to  an  infinitive  may 
be  in  the  masc.  as  the  more  primary  form,  §  198,  Jer.  2:  19,  or  in  the  fern. 
as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter,  §  198.  a,  1  Sam.  18:  23,  25:  31,  2  Sam.  3:  37, 
Isa.  1:  12,  Jer.  2:  17,  9:  23,  23:  14. 

h.  The  mfinitive  re'ains  its  absolute  form,  when  separate  and  uncon- 
nected, but  the  construct  form  is  assumed  when  it  is  in  close  relation  with 
other  words.  The  latter  is  accordiiit^ly  used  not  only  as  in  nouns,  which 
may  be  in  the  construct  relation  wiih  following  nouns,  but  commonly  also 
when  governed  by  a  verb,  noun  or  preposition.  The  absolute  infinitive  is 
rarely  governed  by  a  verb,  3i3"in  ITob  learn  to  do  ivell,  ^iin  ^Ti'X  redress 
wrong  Isa.  1 :  17,  utitil  he  knorcs  O'tk'O  to  refuse  the  evil,  "lin^l  and  to  choose 
the  goo  I,  7:  15,  ~'i"in  l"^^'^"!^  !i!:ix-N5l  and  they  would  not  walk  in  his  wags, 
42:  24,  thou  wilt  make  us  off.scouring  Dlk-'l  and  refuse  Lam.  3:  45,  Job  13:  3, 
Isa.  57:  20,  Jer.  9:  4;  still  more  rarely  by  a  noun  b3rn  T^ni  the  way  of 
understanding  Prov.  21:  16,  1:  3,  and  almost  never  by  a  preposition  1  Sam. 
1:  9.  The  construct  infinitive  when  governed  by  a  verb  or  noun  is  usually 
though  not,  invariably  precedt^d  as  in  English  b}-  the  preposition  5  to,  3:nit 
■ia  cn'rns  I  shall  be  able  to  fir/ht  with  him  Num.  22:  11,  but  see  Gen.  37:  4, 
Ex.  2:  3,  etc.;  r^iib  nv"!  nnib  nr  a  time  to  be  born  and  a  time  to  die  Eccl. 
3:  2ff.;  h  is  less  frequently  omitted  in  prose  than  in  poetry,  I  know  not 
(how)  xh^  nx^i  to  go  out  and  to  come  in  1  Kin.  3:  7,  D^zn  T\:k-Q  thou  hast 
refused  to  be  ashamed  Jer.  3:  3,  Mai.  2:  16,  Job  33:  32,  "ns  D'^n'^r:?  ready 
to  rouse  leviathan  Job  3:  8.  h  is  not  prefixed  to  an  infinitive,  which  is  pre- 
ceded  by  a  noun  in   the  construct  !-'*->t.e  X2  r^i"i"2  in  the  year  of  Tat  tan's 


§279 


INFINITIVR  339 


combig  Isa.  20:  1,  Tip"!  ml;"!  lisp  r?  a  time  of  moiirnwg  and  a  time  of 
dancing  Eccl.  3:  4.  Such  verbs  as  n|3  to  finish,  xn^  to  fear,  "iss  to  hinder, 
and  PImIJ  used  negatively  <o  command  not  to  do  anything,  may  be  followed 
by  "i^  from  with  the  infinitive.  Thus  Moses  finished  "iZ"!}^  speaking  lit.  from 
speaking  Ex.  34:  33,  so  Lev.  16:  20,  Josh.  19:  51  (but  h  ver.  49),  1  Sam. 
10:  13,  2  Sam.  6:  18,  1  Chron.  16:  2,  Ezek.  43:  23,  but  "I2^b  n';3  he  finished 
speaking  lit.  to  speak  Gen.  18:  33,  which  is  the  more  usual  construction. 
rnir^  Nn;;  he  feared  to  dwell.  Gen.  19:  30,  but  nnip  xn'^n-'bs;  fear  not  to  go 
down  Gen.  46:  3,  Ex.  3:  6,  34:  30;  he  hath  restrained  me  mnra  from  bearing 
Gen.  16:2;  I  shall  command  "I'^ii'arip  not  to  rain  lit.  from  raining  Isa.  5:  6, 
though  the  more  usual  construction  would  be  '^'^'^^T}  "'P'??^  not  to  rain 
Gen.  3:  11,  Euth  2:  9,  1  Kin.  11:  10,  2  Kin.  17:  15,  Jer.  35:  14.  -,ri  is  also 
used  with  the  infinitive  in  other  connections  in  a  negative  sense  his  eyes 
were  dim  rxTa  so  as  not  to  see  lit.  from  seeing  Gen.  27:  1,  nT::s'p  not  doing 
thy  zvoys  H'k'a^,  not  finding  thy  pleasure  Isa.  58  :  13,  56 :  6,  Job  54 :  30,  2  Kin. 
23:  33  K'ri  (once  even  before  a  future  ■|liip";-'|'3  Deut.  3:i:  11);  or  to  in- 
dicate comparison,  §  264,  to  trust  in  Jehovah  is  better  ria^^'Q  than  to  confide 
in  man  Ps.  118:  8,  9,  Eccles.  4:  17,  though  ^  may  likewise  be  retained  be- 
fore the  infinitive  and  comparison  be  suggested  by  the  connection  rather 
than  expressed,  T\V'rf?_  I'^ris  too  little  to  be  fiOc.  5:  1. 

C.  The  preposition  h  is  used  with  the  infinitive  to  express  (1)  design  or 
purpose,  he  icent  up  riisT^I  ninnrrib  to  worship  and  to  sacrifire  1  Sam.  1  :  3, 
Ex.  21:  14,  32:  29,  Lev.  10:  10,  ll',  Deut.  4:  38,  Job  5:  11,  33:  30,  Ezek. 
17:  14.  (2)  the  result,  thou  shdt  keep  the  charge  of  Jehovah  nrV^  so  as  to 
walk  in  his  ways  "iT^rb  to  keep  his  statutes  1  Kin.  2:  3,  4,  14:  8,  1  Sam. 
19:  5,  Ezek.  17:  15,  18;  this  may  be  practically  equivalent  to  a  Hmit  of 
time  he  shall  eat  butter  and  honey  'ip"'i?  urdil  he  knows  Isa.  7:  15;  or  to 
the  Latin  gerund  in  do  ^iix?  "i?"^  spoke  saying  lit.  so  as  to  say,  Lev.  10:  3 
(but  Num.  6:  23  "liix  by  §  280.  2),  niirls  X^S  created  so  as  to  make,  made 
by  a  creative  act  Gen.  2:  3,  34:  7,  Lev.  21:  9,  Deut.  11:  19,  1  Chron.  10:  13, 
Ps.  103:  20,  Jer.  11:  17,  44:  17,  Ezek.  14:  13.  (3)  the  time  of  an  action 
niab  at  JoaVs  sending  1.  e.  ivhen  Joab  sent  2  Sam.  18:  29,  Gen.  24:  63, 
Ex.  14:  27,  Deut.  23:  12.  (4)  a  periphrastic  future,  ni^nb  irx  that  rvhich  is 
to  be  Eccles.  3:  15,  nii^'rTra  what  is  there  to  do  i.  e.  tvhat  shall  I  do  Isa. 
5:  4,  5,  37:  26,  38:  20,  2  Chron.  12:  12,  36:  19,  Prov.  18:  24,  V-^'yT}  •'h•>^ 
xizb  the  sun  ivas  about  to  set  Gen.  15:  12,  Josh.  2:  5,  ViVrh  tj:2h  they  came 
to  be  1  Sam.  14:  21.  This  form  of  expression  may  be  suggestive  of  an  in- 
tended action,  "n"t2b  one  is  to  cut,  intends  to  cut  Isa.  44:  14,  2  Sam.  14:  16, 
2  Chron.  11:  22,  Esth.  7:  8,  Prov.  20:  25,  Hos.  12:  3;  or  of  possibilitj',  "jiSt 
^I'^p'in'b  it  is  not  possible  to  add  to  it  and  'S'Hjh  "''X  the7-e  cannot  be  taken 
from  it  Eccles.  3:  14,  2  Chron.  20:  6;  necessity,  Ephraim  X'^i'inb  is  to  bring 
out  i.  e.  must  bring  out  Hos.  9:  13,  T^iin?  xb  one  must  not  make  mention 
Am.  6:  10,  Job  30:  6;  propriety  or  duty  "Cn^pn?  ^^  i^  '>^oi  to  be  registered 
1  Chron.  5:  1,  9:  25,  "itV?  should  one  help  the  ivicked  2  Chron.  19:  2,  nisnb 
you  ought  to  smite  2  Kin.  13:  19.  In  some  instances  it  is  doubtful  whether 
b  with  the  inf.  is  a  periphrastic  future  or  is  to  be  otherwise  explained 
Eccles.  9:1,  Jer.  17:  10,  Hab.  1:  17,  Job  36:  20.    Various  other  prepositions 

22* 


340  SYNTAX.  §  280 

may  precede  the  infinitive,  as  a  in,  3  like,  at,  T?  until,  V?  upon,  I'shh  in 
order  to,  '(?^  because  of,  "^icb  before,  etc.  Their  occurrence  before  finite 
forms  of  the  verb  in  lieu  of  conjunctions  is  rare  and  exceptional,  Gen.  31: 
20.  There  is  an  occasional  ellipsis  of  the  infin.  n-'n  to  be  after  a  preposi- 
tion, he  removed  Iter  ii^'^Zti^'^  from  being  quee7i  1  Kin.  15:  13,  Isa.  7:8,  17: 1, 
25:  2,  Jer.  48:  2,  Job  34:  30. 

d.  The  infinitive  in  the  construct  before  its  subject.  dx'"2t73  in  their 
being  created  i.  e.  when  they  were  created;  in  the  day  C"riix  T^l^^"!  T^''^'?. 
of  Jehovah  God's  making  earth  and  heaven  Gen.  2:  4;  there  was  no  water 
cvn  nnr?  for  the  drinking  of  the  people  Ex.  17:  1,  2  Kin.  14:  22;  compound 
subject  Jer.  29:  2;  pronominal  suffix  as  subject,  Lev.  16:  1,  Num.  30:  16, 
Deut.  12:  30,  2  Sam.  5:  13;  the  infin.  and  suffix  instead  of  a  finite  tense, 
'ira'*;:']  and  my  dwelling  (shall  be)  i.  e.  I  shall  drcell  Ps.  23:  6,  so  Job  9:  27, 
Zeph.  3:  20,  Dan.  11:1.  Before  its  object,  yc'n"":Q  rxr  the  accepting  of  the 
person  of  the  wicked  Prov.  18:  5,  nhSTn  to  yield  its  strength  Gen.  4:  12, 
1  Kin.  16:  21.  Construct  before  its  subject  and  governing  an  object,  Gen. 
5:  4,  13:  10,  41  :  39,  46:  30,  50:  14,  Ex.  7:  25,  Deut.  1:  4,  4:  14,  2  Sam.  14:  13, 

1  Kin.  13:  31,  2  Kin.  5:  7,  2  Chrun.  34:  19,  Isa.  29:  13,  Jer.  24:  1,  28:  12, 
32:   16,   34:  8,   36:  27,   40:  1.      The   object  interposed   before   the  subject, 

2  Sam.  18:  29;  a  particle  so  interposed  Job  34:  22.  The  infitiitive  preceded 
by  a  noun  in  the  construct  state  receives  the  article  properly  belonging  to 
the  noun  in  Gen.  2:  9,  Num.  4:  12,  §§  248.  6.  c,  259. 

e.  The  nejjative  adverb  ordinarily  used  with  the  infinitive  is  "^ri^a  ,  1 
commanded  thee  "bzs  "'Pb'lh  not  to  eat  Gen.  3:11,  Deut.  4:  21,  12:  23,  17 :  20, 
1  Kin.  11:  10,  Jer.'35:  8,  38:  26,  Ezek.  13:  22,  17:  14,  Dan.  9:  11;  once 
b  ^hh'2\>  2  Kin.  23:  10;  vi^ith  the  prep,  "i"?,  "^nVao  Num.  14:  16,  Ezek.  16:  28, 
■^nbsb  occurs  before  the  pret.  or  fut.  Ex.  20:  20,  2  Sam.  14:  14,  Jer.  23:  14, 
27:  18,  Ezek.  13:  3;  "^nba'n?  four  times  before  a  pret.  in  the  same  phrase. 
Num.  21:  35,  Deut.  3:  3,  Josh.  8:  22,  11:  8. 

§  280.  1.  The  absolute  infinitive,  expressing  simply 
the  essential  idea  of  the  verb  apart  from  all  modifica- 
tions of  tense,  number  and  person,  may  be  introduced 
without  logical  connection  as  an  exclamation,  jSti  niri 
]':2  Viih^)  nm  bbs  -i^:!  x:h'0)  nj^n  lo!  slaying  oxen!  aud 
Idlling  sheep!  eating  flesh!  and  drinJdng  tvine!  Isa.  22:  13, 
21:  5,  59:  4,  13,  Jer.  7:  9,  Hos.  4:  2,  2  Chron.  31:  10, 
Job  15:  35,  or  in  apposition  to  some  preceding  word  by 
which  attention  is  dii'ected  to  it,  I  ivill  teil  you  what  I 
will  do  "cn  take  away  the  hedge,  y'lS  break  down  the  fence 
Isa.  5:  5,  58:  6,  7,  Jer.  9:  23,  23:  14. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  construct  infinitive  is  similarly  used, 
Ezek.  21:  31,  Mai.  2:  13. 


§  280  INFINITIVE.  341 

2.  Or  it  may  be  used  in  an  explanatory  clause,  de- 
fining the  mode  of  a  preceding  action  or  the  circum- 
stances attending  it,  as  the  Latin  gerund  in  do  or  the 
English  participle,  they  tare  me  piri  gnashing  their  teeth 
at  me  Ps.  35:  15,  16,  I  will  ;perform  all  Hs^l  blHri  he- 
ginning  and  ending  1  Sam.  3:  12,  Gen.  30:  32,  Ex.  30:  36, 
Deut.  9:  21,  13:  16,  27:  8,  2  Sam.  8:  2,  Job  15:  3,  Isa. 
30:  14,  57:  17,  Hab.  3:  13,  Zech.  7:  3.  The  principal 
verb  may  be  thus  repeated  for  the  sake  of  a  fuller  state- 
ment, ive  devoted  them  . . .  oV^ri  devoting  every  city,  men, 
women  a?id  children  Deut.  3:  6,  which  is  commonly  made 
by  adding  another  verb  in  the  absolute  infinitive,  Jeho- 
vah will  smite  Egypt  ^^'i^'^'l  ^\j>}  smiting  and  healing  Isa. 
19:  22,  1  Kin.  20:  37,  2  Kin.  4:  43,  2  Chron.  36:  15,  Jer. 
11:  7,  12:  17,  Joel  2:  26. 

a.  Infinitives  are  thus  used  as  explanatory  of  a  preceding  absolute  in- 
finitive, Jer.  32:  33,  or  imperative  Isa.  7:11.  A  finite  verb  is  added  to  each 
infinitive,  Isa.  31:  5.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  differs  from  that  of  the 
principal  verb,  Jer.  22:  19,  31 :  2.  Some  absolute  infinitives  are  so  frequently 
employed  in  this  subsidiary  manner,  that  they  are  practically  reduced  to 
adverbs,  e.  g.  pn-n  Josh.  3:  16,  l^'ryn,  n-j-^n,  §  236.  3  (2). 

3.  Continuing  a  principal  clause  it  may  be  used  in- 
stead of  the  finite  form  represented  in  the  preceding 
verb,  and  borrow  its  complexion  as  to  tense  and  other 
relations  from  it,  ^bpr^^l  and  they  blew  with  trumjjets  ViSDl, 
and  brake  the  pitchers  prop,  there  was  breaking  intchers 
Judg.  7:  19;  all  this  ''3b"ri>5  ■ph:'!  T"Nl'^  /  have  seen  and 
applied  my  heart  Eccl.  8:  9;  ^Dp";  they  shall  buy  fields  for 
money  lir^^l  and  write  the  p)apers  Dirin*]  and  seal  (them) 
li'TTi  and  take  witnesses  Jer.  32:  44. 

••  T  : 

a.  It  may  thus  continue  a  past  tense,  Gen.  41:  43,  Ex.  8:  11,  1  Sara, 
2:  28,  1  Kin.  9:  25,  1  Chron.  5:  20  (change  of  subject),  2  Chron.  28:  19, 
Neh.  8:  8,  9:  8,  13,  Esth.  3:  13,  9:  6,  12,  16-18,  Eccl.  9:  11  (but  see  4:  1,  7), 
Jer.  14:  5,  19:  13,  37:  21,  Zech.  3:  4,  7:  5,  Dan,  9:  5,  11;  or  a  future,  Lev. 
25:  14,  Num.  30:  3,  Deut.  14:  21,  Josh.  9:  20,  Zech.  12:  10;  a  jussive  fu- 
ture, Esth.  2:  3,  6:  9;  imperative  Am.  4:  5;  present  Ezek.  11:  7;  participle, 
Hab.  2:   15;   construct   infinitive  Ex.  32:  6,   1  Sam.  22:  13,   25:  26,  33.     A 


342  SYNTAX.  §  281 

verbal  nonn  is  «imilarly  used,  Isa.  8:6;  and  occasionally  a  construct  infini« 
live  e.  g.  for  the  pret.  2  Cliron.  7:  3,  fut.  1  Chron.  21:  24,  2  Chron.  7:  17, 
Obad.  ver.  4,  part.  Jer.  44:  19. 

b.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  for  a  finite  form,  \vhen  no 
verb  precedes  in  the  same  sentence,  "ris";  "^TJ-D?  Snn  (shall)  the  fault-finder 
contend  irith  the  Almighty  Job  40:  2.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  ex- 
pressed in  this  instance,  as  in  others  when  perspicuity  requires  it,  so  tni'nri 
2v!:l  Niii"!  the  living  creatures  rati  and  returned  Ezek.  1 :  14,  "^JX  ri2TU  1 
praised  Eccl.  4:  2,  Gen.  17:  10,  Lev.  6:  7,  Num.  15:  35,  Esth.  9:  1,  Ps.  17:  5, 
Trov.  17:  12. 

4.  At  the  boginning  of  a  clause  it  may  be  a  substi- 
tute for  the  imperative,  "liDT  rememher  the  sahhafh-day 
Ex.  20:  8,  T^ibn  go  and  say  2  Sam.  24:  12,  Ex.  13:  3,  Deut. 
1:  16,  5:  12,  16:  1,  31:  26,  2  Kin.  3:  16,  5:  10,  Neh.  7:3, 
Isa.  37:  30,  Jer.  2:  2,  19:  1. 

§  281.  1.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  often  joined  with 
the  finite  forms  to  add  emphasis  or  intensity  to  the  idea, 
which  may  be  variously  expressed  in  English,  n^'-n  Hi'a 
thou  shalt  surely  die,  Gen.  2:  17,  ^rxn  W  we  plainly  saw 
Gen.  26:  28,  the  man  bi^iT  biJ^T  asked  very  strictly  Gen. 
43:  7,  ^r^ii^'i^n  ^.^y]  I  have  done  very  ivickedly  1  Chron.  21: 
17,  Tb'i^S  TiyiT}  i<b  Iivill  not  utterly  destroy  Am.  9:  8. 

a.  Ewald  distinguishes  the  following  cases;  when  there  is  (1)  a  con- 
trast -with  what  precedes,  thoxi,  shalt  not  conceal  him  but  "ii~nn  jSn  shalt 
surely  hill  him  Deut.  13:  10,  Judg.  1:  28,  2  Sam.  24:  24,  Lam.  5:  22,  Ezek. 
16:  4,  or  follows  Gen.  2:  16,  Deut.  30:  18,  Ps.  118:  13,  18,  or  both  the  con- 
trasted acts  are  emphasized,  Num.  30:  15,  16,  Ps.  126:  6.  (2)  Implied  con- 
trast, as  when  something  is  not  what  might  have  been  expected.  Am.  8:  5, 
or  a  conditional  suggestion  is  tacitly  opposed  to  its  opposite,  Ex.  19:  5, 
Num.  12:  14,  Judg.  14:  12,  1  Sam.  12:  25,  or  a  particle  of  limitation  as  p^ 
or  T^X  only  sets  an  act  over  against  every  thing  beside.  Gen.  27:  30,  44:  28, 
Judg.  7:  19.  (3)  A  question,  which  involves  its  own  answer,  and  is  rhetori- 
cally 8troni,'er  than  a  direct  statement  Gen.  37:  8,  Judg.  11:  25,  1  Sam.  2:  27, 
Isa.  50:  2,  Ezek.  14:  3,  Zech.  7:  5.  (4)  An  act  regarded  as  absolutely  cer- 
tain or  an  possessing  a  high  degree  of  intensity  or  completeness,  Deut.  31: 
29,  Judg.  15:  2,  1  Sam.  14:  28,  22:  22,  24:  21,  25:  28,  2  Kin.  5:  11,  18:  30, 
Job  27:  22,  Jer.  20:  15,  37:  9,  Hos.  4:  17,  Joel  1:  7,  Am.  5:  5.  (5)  An 
earnest  asseveration,  remonstrance,  command  or  threatening.  Gen.  15:  13 
Ex.  19:  12,  13,  Kuth  2:  16,  Job  13:  5,  Am.  7:  17,  Zech.  11:  17. 

6.  The  infinitive  is  mostly  of  the  same  species  with  the  finite  verb  to 
which  it  is  added,  Num.  16:   13,   22:   17,  Josh.  24:  10,  2  Sam.  17;  10,  11, 


§281 


INFINITIVE.  343 


2  Kin.  18:  S3,  although  this  is  not  always  the  case.  Thus,  the  Kal,  on 
account  of  its  greater  simplicity  of  form,  may  be  joined  with  a  derivative 
species,  e.  g.  Niphal  ^ipS";  bipo  Ex.  19:  13,  21:  22,  22:  11,  12,  2  Sam.  23:  7, 
Job  6:  2,  PielJosh.  24:  10(?),  Pualrinb  r)'-^-J  Gen.  37:  33,  Hphil  n-.:?;!  Dns  1  Sam. 
23  :  22,  Hophal  no^"'  ni^  Ex.  19  :  12,  Hithpael  niilji^rri  i:"!^  Isa.  24:  19;  or  one 
derivative  species  with  another  of  like  signification,  inriSD  xb  n^sn  Lev. 
19:  20,  PiVnn  i<^  brinn  Ezek.  16:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  16,  2  Kin.  3:  23.  Occasionally 
the  infinitive  is  borrowed  from  a  cognate  verb,  CJOX  Cjbx  Zeph.  1 ;  2,  Jer. 
8:  13  (qox  and  t^W),  ^rr^T  T^'i"^!?  Isa.  28:  28  C:;'iX  and  Tr^l^),  Jer.  48:  9. 
For  the  sake  of  greater  emphasis  the  prolonged  form  of  the  plural  ending 
in  the  future  "1  is  sometimes  adopted  in  verbs  joined  with  the  abs.  inf. 
"il'^rnyn  ^iao  Deut.  6;  17,  ll:  22,  1  Sam.  2:  16.  The  negative  adverb  com- 
monly stands  before  the  finite  form  of  the  verb  ^SD'nsn  sib  7^"ia  Num.23:  25, 
Jer.  13:  12,  rarely  before  the  infinitive  and  only  when  special  emphasis  is 
laid  upon  the  negative,  'iWori  nia-silji  Gen.  3:  4,  2  Kin.  8:  10  K'thibh,  Ps. 
49:  8,  Jer.  3:  1,  Am.  9:8. 

c.  The  construct  infinitive  is  very  rarely  used  in  such  combinations  in- 
stead of  the  absolute,  ^wbin  bin  Neh.  1:  7,  IT^nx-rriin  Ps.  50:  21  :  once  it 
is  added  in  a  varied  form  to  a  preceding  construct  infin  tive,  mPSS  mSMns 
2  l?am.  6:  20.  The  finite  verb  is  repeated,  i??'::'?  a"^il';;  2  Sam.  15:  8  K'thibh, 
Gen.  48:  19,  Judg.  5:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  13,  to  which  another  verb  is  added 
Jei'.  10:25,  Obad.  ver.  1 6.  Imperatives  of  the  same  species  Judg.  4:18,  1  Sam. 
24:  12,  2  Sam.  20:  16  or  of  difiPerent  species  are  combined,  Isa.  29:  9,  Hab. 
1:  5,  Zeph.  2:1.  A  verbal  noun  takes  the  place  of  the  infinitive,  ^isn  iT^"!? 
Hab.  3:  9,  or  is  added  to  it  Isa.  22:  18. 

2.  When  the  absolute  infinitive  follows  the  verb  it 
sometimes  expresses  continuance  or  repetition  partic- 
ularly with  verbs  of  motion  and  when  two  infinitives  are 
connected  together,  liilJI  5<ii2^  ^5i:);1  and  it  tvent  out  going 
and  returning  i.  e.  it  kept  going  to  and  fro  Gen.  8:  7,  so 
ver.  3,  12:  9,  ii^jl.  ifttl  ^bbtl  theg  went  on  lowing  as  they 
tvent  1  Sam.  6:12,  lill.  bsu:"  oi^bx  '^^'^^^  and  I  spake 
to  you  acting  early  and  speaking  i.  e.  continuously  and 
earnestly  Jer.  7:  13. 

a.  Thus,  Ljisia  ::BT!:3*1  he  judges,  judges  i.  e.  is  always  judging  Gen.  19:  9, 
blDN'DJ  brl!<''!!  /'e  is  also  forever  devourivg  Gen.  31:  15,  r|in:i  ^jn:!  he  has 
gone  on  refiniyig  Jer.  6:  29,  xin  K^^l  and  he  shall  come  re'peaiedhj  Dan.  11:10, 
Num.  11:  32,  16:  13,  Judg.  14:  9^  2  Kin.  2:  11,  Jer.  23:  17,  29:  19,  This 
order  of  the  words,  however,  quite  frequently  has  the  same  signification  as 
when  the  infinitive  precedes  the  verb,  and  simply  expresses  certainty  or 
intensity.  Thus  I  tvill  go  down  with  thee  to  Egypt  and  I  n'Bs'-DS  'r^'^rx  tvill 
also  surely  bring  thee  up  Gen.  46:  4,  so  Josh.  7:  7,  2  Kin.  5:  11.  In  Num. 
24:  10,  Josh.  24:  10  Tj'i"'i2  T^i'Z'^!]  might  mean  kept  on  blessing  these  three 


344  SYNTAX.  §  282,  283 

times,  but  not  Num.  23:  11  when  it  liad  been  done  but  once.  When  used 
with  the  imperative,  the  abs,  infin.  ahva^s  follows:  r*i"r  irrr  may  mean 
hear  attentively  Job  13:  17,  37:  2,  or  hear  on,  continue  to  hear,  Isa.  6:  9, 
Num.  11:  15,  Judg.  5:  23,  Jer.  22:  10.  The  absolute  infinitives  denoting 
continuous  action  in  a  few  instances  precede  the  finite  verb  TilStjl  Tp'H 
niilin  they  walk,  mincing  as  they  walk  Isa.  3:  16,  Jer.  50:  4. 

6.  When  two  verbs  are  connected  together  to  express  continuous  ac- 
tion, a  participle,  §  278.  1,  is  sometimes  substituted  for  the  absolute  infini- 
tive in  the  case  of  one  or  both,  n^in^  riis  ...  n3s  li'n  2  Sam.  15:  30,  r|^h 
ni'l^  ~'?n  Jer.  41:  6,  2  Sam.  16:  5;  an  adjective  may  even  take  the  place 
of  the  second,  VtS";  ""i^n  T\?h  Gen.  26:  13,  2  Sam.  5:  10,  1  Chron.  11:  9, 
ni"pi  ~'3n  ...  T\'ii}'^  Judg.  4:  24;  the  finite  verb  is  omitted  in  ~^n  '^b'n")"a 
r*^;i  Esth.  9:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  26,  Jon.  1:  11;  the  substantive  verb  takes  its 
place,  "".in"!  rp^n  rn  Gen.  8:  5,  ^isi.  T^'r^  '^'%'^V''.  'n"]l!  2  Chron.  17:  12. 
The  second  verb  may  also  be  put  in  one  of  the  finite  tenses,  rp'in  n">=bn 
■i"prn  Josh.  6:  13,  bllJ"]]  Tjilin  . .  .  r|?n  2  Sara.  16:  13,  13:  19,  or  even  both 
verbs  2  Kin.  21:  13. 

§  282.  Constructions  begun  with  a  participle  or  in- 
finitive are  not  infrequently  continued  in  the  preterite 
or  future,  since  these  tenses  are  the  fundamental  forms 
of  the  verb  and  include  within  their  scope  all  the  rela- 
tions of  time  and  mode,  ni^nb  in  order  to  tvidows'  being 
their  2orey  and  ^Tii^  that  they  may  plunder  orphans  Isa.  10: 
2,  Tf^'^y-2  leading  counsellors  away  spoiled  and  bbirr;  he 
maketh  judges  fools  Job  12:  17. 

a.  The  absohite  infinitive  may  thus  b«  continued  by  the  preterite. 
Josh.  6:  13,  Jer.  2;i :  14,  or  the  future  Job  15:  35,  Isa.  58:  5-7.  The  con- 
struct infinitive  hy  the  preterite  1  Sam.  4:  19,  2  Chron.  16:  7,  £zek.  13:  8, 
16:  31;  Vav  consec.  pret.  Gen.  9:  14,  Josh.  23:  16,  1  Kin.  2:  37,  2  Kin. 
18:  32;  future,  1  Kin.  8:  35,  Job  11:  5,  33:  17,  Isa.  1:  15;  Vav  consec.  fut. 
Ps.  50:  16,  92:  8,  Isa.  30:  12,  Ezek.  25:  15.  Participles  by  the  preterite, 
2  Sam.  3:  34,  Ps.  15:  2,  3,  22:  30,  Am.  5:  7,  8;  future  Ps.  49:  7,  104:  32, 
Isa.  5:  8,  31:  1;  Vav  consec.  fut.  Gen.  27:  33,  1  Sam.  2:  6,  Job  3:  21, 
Jer.  13:  10. 

§  283.  The  dependence  of  one  verb  upon  another  is 
most  distinctly  expressed  by  putting  the  second  verb  in 
the  infinitive.  The  second  verb  may,  however,  be  in  form 
coordinated  with  the  first  by  being  put  in  the  pame  or 
an  equivalent  tense  with  or  Avithout  a  copulative,  the 
true  relation  between  the  verbs  being  left  to  be  inferred 


§  284  OBJECT  OF  VEEBS.  345 

from  tlieir  obvious  signification,  l^tl  b'^kin  he  was  ivilling^ 
walked  i.  e.  he  was  willing  to  walk  or  walked  willingly 
Hos.  5:  11,  D^"^^?.  W  rp6ii<  5<b  I  will  no  more  add  to  pity 
i.  e.  will  not  again  pity  Hos.  1:  6,  "qbh  D^3'i:7j  heing  early 
to  go  or  going  early  Hos.  6:  4,  /iO«i;  "T}*^"^!!  bi^i^  shall  1 
endure  and  see  i.  e.  endure  to  see  Esth.  8:  6,  if  ye  have  dealt 
truly  ^j"'b';i:r}1  and  made  AUmelech  king  i.  e.  in  making 
tim  king  judg.  9:  16,  Deut.  1:5,  31:  12,  Job  6:  9,  19:  3, 
?rov.  23:  35,  Cant.  2:  3,  Isa.  42:  21,  52:  1,  Lam.  4:  14, 
Zeph.  3:  7,  Zech.  4:  10. 

a.  This  coordination  most  frequently  occurs,  when  the  second  verb  ex- 
presses the  principal  idea  and  the  first  simply  qualifies  it,  and  might  con- 
sequently be  rendered  by  an  adverb,  'na'in  ^''S'Ti  bx  do  not  multiply  speak 
i.  e.  speak  much  1  Sam.  2:  3,  Ps.  51:  4,  1lnrii:J  !ip"'o>'ri  they  have  deepened 
irrupted  i.  e.  deeply  corrupted  Hos.  9 :  9,  'j^'i^l  'XPT'!)  ^^^  he  hastened  and 
ran,  ran  hastily  1  Sam.  17:  48,  16:  16,  Ps.  37:  7,  Isa.  3:  26.  In  other  in- 
stances of  this  sort  the  second  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive  t\\'d  rjS^I  Gen. 
8:  10  and  he  added  to  send  or  nBip^l  Cja^n  1  Sam.  19:  21  and  he  added  and 
sent,  for  he  sent  once  more;  MS")!?  'y^'c7\  Job  7:  7  return  to  see  or  "Tiaia 
nk"iN^  Eccl.  4:  7  return  and  see  for  see  again;  J^inb  ^"''^pri  brought  near 
to  come,  came  near  Gen.  12:  11,  riSnV  rxzTO  didst  hide  thyself  to  flee,  flee 
secretly  31 :  27,  bik^b  tn^lZJpin  thou  hast  been  hard  in  asking,  asked  what  is 
hard  2  Kin.  2:  10,  i  Kin.  14:  9,  Ps.  33:  3,  126:  2,  127:  2,  Joel  2:  20,  Am. 
4:  4,  Jon.  4:  2,  Mic.  6:  8,  13.  This  order  is  sometimes  revei'sed  and  the 
qualifying  verb  put  in  the  infinitive,  thus  we  find  both  "^p'^V  ^"''S'l  he 
was  wonderfully  helped  2  Chron.  26:  15  and  6<'^^srf?  niys  he  did  wonderfully 
Joel  2:  26. 

b.  In  the  following  instances  the  verbs  thus  co-ordinated  have  different 
■objects,  ik-tiSJ  bi^X  I  shall  he  able,  we  shall  smite  him  i.  e.  I  shall  Avith 

our  aid  be  able  to  smite  him,  Num.  22:  6,  T^Vsix-ip";  is^p-n  xb  thou  shalt 
not  add  iliey  shall  call  thee  i.  e.  thou  shult  no  more  be  called  by  them,  Isa. 
47:  1,  5;  or  are  in  different  tenses,  nSDX  "'ri^'i';  xb  I  knoio  not  (how)  I  shall 
flatter  i.  e.  how  to  flatter.  Job  32:  22:  0  that  ^nxri'SX''.  Tisn-^  I  knew  and 
might  find  him  i.  e.  how  to  find  him,  Job  23:  3. 

Object  of  Verbs. 

§  284.  When  the  predicate  is  a  verb  it  may  be  ex- 
tended by  the  addition  of  a  direct  or  indirect  object,  an 
adverb  or  some  other  quahfying  expression.  The  object 
of  a  transitive  verb  ordinarily  stands  after  both  the  verb 


346  BYNTAX.  §  284 

and  its  subject,  and  if  it  is  an  indefinite  noun  is  distin- 
guished simply  by  its  position  or  by  its  relation  to  the 
verb  as  determined  by  its  meaning;  if  a  definite  noun, 
or  a  demonstrative,  relative,  or  interrogative  pronoun, 
it  may,  at  the  ])leasure  of  the  Avriter,  be  further  distin- 
guislied  by  prefixing  to  it  TN;  the  sign  of  the  definite  ob- 
ject; if  a  personal  pronoun,  it  is  sufiixed  either  to  IIN;  or 
to  the  governing  verb. 

a.  The  usual  order  of  words  in  Hebrew  is  verb,  subject,  object,  Gen. 
1:  1,  21;  but  in  a  circumstantial  clause,  §  309,  the  subject,  to  which  atten- 
tion is  specially  drawn,  precedes  the  verb  1:  2,  2:  5,  6.  Of  two  objects  the 
near  will  precede  the  remote  3:  20,  5:  2,  and  the  direct  the  indirect  2:  20, 
21;  and  subsidiary  expressions  follow  1:  24,  26,  2:  8,  3:  8.  If  the  object, 
whether  direct  or  indirect,  be  a  pronoun,  it  will  immediately  follow  the 
■verb  1:  17,  22,  29,  2:  19,  4:  15,  25.  The  order  is,  however,  liable  to  such 
modifications  as  emphasis  may  require.  Thus,  if  stress  be  laid  upon  the 
subject,  it  may  precede  the  verb  3:  13,  4:  15,  Ps.  3:  6,  fr  »m  emphasis  of 
contrast  Ps.  1:6  or  of  parallelism  Ps.  2:  1,  2.  10.  So  the  object  maj-  pre- 
cede the  verb,  whether  direct,  Gen.  3:  10,  15,  18,  (emphasis  of  parallelism) 
Ps.  3:  8,  or  indirect  (emphasis  of  contrast)  Gen.  1:  5,  3:  16,  17  comp.  ver. 
14  4:  5  comp.  ver.  4;  the  remote  object  may  precede  the  near  (emphasis 
of.parallvlism)  Ps.  2:8,  or  the  indirect  may  precede  the  direct  Gen.  1:  5, 
8,  10,  3:  21.  The  time,  place  and  manner  of  an  action  belong  properly  at 
the  end  of  a  clause  Gen.  1 :  9,  20,  3:  8,  14;  though  they  may  be  placed  at 
the  beginning  1:  1,  3:  19,  or  wherever  perspicuity  or  emphasis  may  seem 
to  demand  3:  24,  4:  24.  The  removal  of  a  word  from  its  natural  position 
to  the  end  of  a  clause  is  also  sometimes  emphatic,  thus  the  subject 
Ps.  34:  22,  the  indirect  pronominal  object  Ps.  4:  4,  and  the  vocative  n'lT' 
ver.  7. 

b.  A  noun,  which  is  the  direct  object  of  a  verb,  may  receive  rs, 
whether  it  is  definite,  §  249,  by  signification,  as  a  proper  noun,  God  tempted 
Bn~~N-rN  Alraham  Gen.  22:  1,  or  is  made  so  hy  the  article,  God  saw 
^'iir\-rii  the  light  Gen.  1:  4,  a  pronominal  suffix,  take,  71011;  •^rr'^STX  nit/ 
llefisiyig  Gen.  33:  11,  or  construction  with  a  definite  noun,  Jacob  called 
^'i:"^^  -"^^"^  »'ie  name  of  the  place  Gen.  35:  15.  The  particle  rx  is  not 
essential  in  anj'  of  these  cases  and  is  often  omitted,  particularly  in  poetry. 
If  several  definite  nouns  are  connected  together  as  the  object  of  a  verb  or 
if  a  verb  has  more  than  one  definite  object,  rx  may  be  repeated  before  each 
of  them,  I  hare  giren  nxTn  y";^Nn-nx  this  land...  "3"'i?n-rx  the  Kenite 
''T?""*"^!  "'"(^  '^'^  Ketiizzite,  etc.,  etc..  Gen.  15:  18-21  ;  iheg  stripped  TN 
rb""'  Joseph  "irirnr-px  ()f  his  coat  0"^B3n  rsrsTX  the  full-length  coat  Gen. 
37:  23,  Ex.  35:  11-19,  Lev.  7:  3,  4,  2  Cliiou.  29:  18,  19;  <t  it  may  stand 
before  a  part  of  then\  only,  Ex.  33:  2,  Deut  12:  6,  1  Kin.  1:  44,  or  it  may 
be  omitted  altogether,  Deut.  11:  14.     In  a  very  few  instances  the  article  is 


§284 


OBJECT  OP  VEUBS.  34' 


dropped  after  PX,  which  of  itself  indicates  the  definiteness  of  the  noun,  he 
reared  up  for  himself  r'zil-g-n^  the  pillar  2  Sam.  18:  18;  and  carver 
strengthened  Vi^iTit  gilder  Isa.  41:  7,  where  the  omission  of  the  article  is 
poetic,  §  250;  "irx  'ii;~S"rx  1  Sam.  26:  20  is  definite  in  thought,  if  not  in 
form,  as  David  meant  himself;  Lev.  20:  14,  Judg.  7:  8,  2  Sam.  4:  11,  Job 
13:  25,  EccL  7:  7,  Ezek.  16:  32, 

c.  Pronouns  with  TX:  nTTX  this  ye  shall  eat  Lev.  11:  9;  put  nTTN 
this  (fellow)  in  the  prison  1  Kin.  22:  27,  Gen.  44:  29,  Ps.  92:  7;  — I'^'X  nx 
whom  they  have  cast  info  the  prison  Jer.  38 :  9 ;  he  knew  nii'— irx  rx  lohat 
his  youngest  son  had  done  to  him  Gen.  9:  24;  T\tHn  •^•a-nx  whom  hast  thou 
reproached?  Isa.  37:  23.  It  does  not  occur  before  the  neuter  rra;  Jer. 
23:  33  is  only  an  apparent  exception,  since  it  stands  before  the  entire  ex- 
pression quoted  from  the  words  of  the  people.  It  is  also  extended  some- 
times to  the  following  words,  which  partake  to  a  certain  degree  of  the 
pronominal  character,  Vs  all,  every.  Gen.  1:  29,  8:  21,  9:  3,  41:  48,  56,  d-'X 
any  one,  each  Ex.  21:  28,  Num.  21:  9,  "inx  one  1  Sam.  9:  3.  With  personal 
pronouns,  tnrs  ~\'yy^^  Gen.  32:  1,  or  Di?!;;^"!?  Gen.  48:  20  and  he  blessed  them. 

d.  A  noun,  about  which  a  statement  is  to  be  made,  sometimes  stands 
absolutely  and  is  preceded  by  the  sign  of  the  object,  ^e;  bnariTX  as  for 
the  iron,  it  fell  2  Kin.  6:5;  h'Ti  ii-;x  nsX-^3-rx  as  for  all  these  (they 
were)  men  of  valour  Judg.  20:  44;  inipn-nx  as  for  my  statutes  they  did 
not  walk  in  them  Ezek.  20:  16,  17:  21,  35:'  10,  43:  7,  44:  3,  Dan.  9:  13,  Hag. 
2:  5,  Zech.  8:  17;  so  also  in  a  sort  of  loose  apposition  to  preceding  state- 
ments Ex.  1:  14,  1  Kin.  6:  5,  Ezek.  14:  22.  b  occasionally  stands  in  a  similar 
manner  before  a  noun  placed  absolutely,  C^i/i"^  Isa.  32:  1,  Ex.  27:  3,  19, 
2  Chron.  7:  21,  Eccl.  9:  4.  Some  regard  rx  as  the  sign  of  the  object  in 
such  passages  as  ni'in-rx'l  "'".xn  X3  1  Sam.  17:  34,  and  refer  to  the  fact 
that  the  Arabic  conjunction  is  followed  by  the  accu>;ative  when  it  is  used 
in  the  sense  of  together  with;  more  probably,  however,  rx  is  the  preposi- 
tion with,  §  240,  and  the  passage  is  to  be  rendered  the  lion  came  and 
(that  too)  ivith  the  bear,  so  Gen.  49:  25,  Num.  3:  26,  Josh.  17:  11,  1  Sam. 
26:  16,  1  Kin.  11:  25,  etc. 

e.  By  an  impersonal  construction  of  passive  verbs  their  subject  is  some- 
times converted  into  the  object,  which  in  fact  it  logically  is,  "~xn-rx  'n';' 
dandum  est  terram,  let  the  land  he  given  Num.  32:  5,  "'t^'^TiJ^  "^R?"!?  ""i"!^ 
lir?  and  there  was  told  to  Rebekah  (i.  e.  some  one  told  her)  the  words  of  Esau 
Gen.  27:42,  so  Gen.  4:  18,  17:5,  Ex.  10:  8,  21:  28,  25:  28,  27:  7,  Lev.  10;  18, 
13:  56,  14:  48,  16:  27,  Num.  14:  21,  26:  55  (but  see  ver.  53),  Deut.  12:  22, 
20:  8,  Josh.  7:  15,  2  Sam.  21:  11,  22,  1  Kin.  2:  21,  Esth.  2:  13,  Ps.  72:  19, 
Prov.  16;  33,  Jer.  35:  14  (but  active  construction  ver.  16),  38:  4,  50:  20, 
Ezek.  16:  4,  Hos.  10:  6,  Am.  4:  2.  This  construction  is  sometimes  extended 
to  neuter  verbs  in  familiar  phrases,  which  have  become  associated  with  an 
active  idea,  "i'nn-px  ^"i"?2  r'^^  bx  let  not  be  evil  in  thine  eyes  (i.  e.  do  not 
regard  as  evil)  the  thing  2  Sam.  11:  25,  b  "^H"^?  «^'^  there  was  to  him  (he  had) 
•^rr-i-PX  Josh.  17:  11,  1  Sam.  20,  13,  Josh.  22:  17,  Neh.  9:  32,  so  with  "pX 
Hag.  2:  17.  In  2  Kin.  18:  30  T'in-rx  "ifzn  the  city  shall  be  given,  the  verb 
agrees  with  T*?  notwithstanding  its  reception  of  the  sign  of  the  object   (HX 


348  BYNTAX.  §  285 

ia  omitted  in  the  parallel  passage,  Isa.  36:  15),  so  Num.  5:  10.  This  im- 
personal construction  is  often  indicated  without  nx  by  the  lack  of  agree- 
ment between  the  verb  and  the  noun,  which  shows  that  the  latter  ia 
regarded  not  as  the  subject  but  as  the  object.  So  with  passives  Gen.  2:  23, 
10:  25,  35:  26,  Ex.  12:  16,  13:  7,  31:  15,  Lev.  2:  8,  Num.  26:  62,  28:  17, 
Job  22:  9,  Ps.  87:  3,  Isa.  21 :  2,  Dan.  9:  24.  With  n^n  there  was,  "'g'^-bs  ^7;^ 
Gen.  5:  23,  31  (but  VIT^^'y  vs.  14,  17,  27),  15:  17,  Ex.  12:  49,  28:  32,  Num. 
9:  6,  Deut.  21:  3,  Josh.  18:  12  K'thibh,  19:  33  (but  see  ver.  29),  Eccl.  2:  7, 
Isa.  8:  8. 

f.  The  object  of  a  verb  is  often  omitted  when  it  can  be  easily  supplied 
fi'om  the  context,  tt;:'^1  and  he  brought  (them)  Gen.  2:  19.  Sometimes  the 
object  is  a  pronoun  referring  to  something  not  j'et  mentioned,  1i5<'^^(  I  shall 
see  him,  viz.  the  star  spoken  of  afterwards  Num.  24:  17,  or  which  is  em- 
phatically suppressed  altogether  iiS^^w'X  xb  I  toill  not  turn  it  hack  Am.  1:  4, 
leaving  the  imagination  to  supply  what  it  is.  In  the  language  of  the 
Hebrew  grammarians  an  intransitive  verb  is  IpW  bi'S  a  verb  that  stands 
still;  a  transitive  is  xki"'  b?Q  a  verb  that  goes  out;  if  it  has  one  object,  it  is 
"^;'3  Nki"i  going  out  to  a  second,  another  than  its  subject;  if  it  has  two 
objects,  it  is  '^ui"'b'rb  xsi"i  going  out  to  a  third, 

g.  Derivatives  from  verbs  that  govern  a  direct  object,  may  do  the 
same,  d^pTX  D'n'bx  rzpritis  like  God's  overthroio  of  Sodom  Isa.  13:  19, 
^n"^ir-:-rx  vc'h  for  the  salvutioti  of  thine  anointed  Hab.  3:  13,  Gen.  2:  9, 
Ex.  9:  20,  1  Kin.  1:  40,  Isa.  22:  2,  Ezek.  34:  12. 

§  285.  Many  verbs,  which  are  not  properly  transi- 
tive, are  nevertheless  capable  of  a  transitive  construc- 
tion; thus 

1.  Verbs  signifying  plenty  or  want:  Cizj^NH  ^'2  T^^^T^ 
the  house  was  full  (of)  men  Judg.  16:27,  trh;^  niS':?  ^ri>i'^ 
I  am  sated  (with)  burnt-offerings  of  rams  Isa.  1:11,  ^T^tri 
b'h  ive  lacked  every  thing  Jer.  44:  18,  Gen.  27:  45,  Prov. 
3:  10.  Here  belongs  that  peculiar  Hebrew  idiom,  which 
expresses  abundance  by  such  jDlirases  as  the  following: 
the  hills  n^r  TZ'zb_r\  shall  run  (with)  milk  Joel  4:18,  Ezek. 
7:  17,  Ex.  3:  8,  mine  eye  D^B  TTTp  runneth  down  (with) 
water  Lam.  1:  16;  D^ii'i'^p  i^3  Titv  it  had  all  come  up 
(with)  tliODis  i.  e.  was  overgrown  with  them,  Prov.  24:  31, 
Gen.  40:  10,  Isa.  5:  6. 

a.  In  these  and  similar  phrases  the  result  of  an  action  is  regarded  as 
its  ol>jpct;  so,  a  forest  C"ii?  r,i":i  growing  up  with  trees  i.  e.  producing 
tr.es  Eccles.  2:6;  a  righteous  man's  mouth  Jr^rn  a^i""  buddeth  forth  wis- 


§  285  OBJECT  OP  VEEBS.  349 

dom  Prov.  10:  31;    »*J"^^'i  ^in^y  they  overflow  with  deeds  of  u-icl-edness 
Jer.  5:  28;   dii"'n")S:^  Y^^'-  ^'*^  ^^  shall  creep  i.  e.  swarm  with  frogs  Ex.  7:  28. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  motion  may  have  for  their  object 
the  place  which  it  immediately  concerns,  whether  it  be 
directed  upon  it,  to  it,  or  from  it,  ^^IIZTyb^  ni<  Tjbsil  and 
we  went  (through)  all  the  wilderness  Deut.  1:  19,  and 
figuratively,  riipllS  T|5n  walking  (in)  righteousness  Isa.  33: 
15,  T'i'ri  ^si^^  and  they  came  into  the  city  Josh.  8:  19, 
n^i'riTiS?  ^j^:;,;!  they  went  out  (of)  the  city  Gen.  44:  4,  ^"S 
■ffi.^"!  they  ivent  up  (to)  the  top  of  the  mountain  Ex.  17:  10, 
bixip  -n");;.  they  shall  go  down  (to)  Sheol,  Ps.  55:  16,  ^^n53': 
r^ln'Cin  they  hasten  (to)  7ier  wall  Nah.  2:  6,  Gen.  13:  10, 
Deut.'2:  27,  Judg.  19:  18,  Job  29:  3,  Isa.  57:  2,  Jer.  16: 
8,  18:  2,  3,44:  14,  Ezek.  17:  12. 

3.  Intransitive  verbs  may,  as  in  other  languages, 
govern  their  cognate  noun,  Dibn  ^ri/jbn  I  have  dreamed 
a  dream  Gen.  37:  9;  ^SD'J  Dtl'^"EC'=;1  and  they  lamented 
there  a  lamentation  Gen.  50:  10;  ^bi^nJTi  bnri  ye  will  he 
vain  a  vanity  i.  e.  utterly  vain  Job  27:  12;  or  even  one 
from  a  different  root  if  it  be  related  or  analogous  in 
signification,  ^ti^^bp  nbil3  M"bn  I  have  been  zealous  a  great 
fury  Zech.  8:  2,  ^"^n  y^L^Hi,  I  shall  sleep  death  i.  e.  the 
sleep  of  death,  Pa.  13:4,  Isa.  6:11. 

a.  For  additional  examples  see  Gen.  1:  11,  27:  34,  43:  16,  Lev.  26:  36, 
Josh.  22:  20,  Judg.  8:  24,  2  Sam.  12:  16,  1  Kin.  1:  12,  40,  Ps.  14:  5,  144:  6, 
Prov.  1:  19,  17:  27,  Isa.  1:  13,  5:  1,  6,  8:  10,  42:  17,  Jer.  17:  18,  23:  20, 
Ezek.  18:  3,  21:  5,  22:  29,  27:  35,  Hos.  10:  4,  Jon.  1:  10,  16,  4:  1,  6,  Zech. 
1 :  2.  Sometimes  the  expression  is  made  more  emphatic  by  placing  the 
noun  hefore  the  verb,  1  Kin.  2:  16,  20,  Ps.  139:  22,  Jer.  30:  14.  In  several 
instances  the  verb  governs  a  relative  which  has  a  cognate  noun  as  its  ante- 
cedent, Gen.  27:  41,  Deut.  28:  53,  1  Kin.  3:  28,  Ps.  89:  61,  52,  Zech.  13:  6. 

4.  Any  verb  may  take  as  its  object  a  noun  which 
defines  the  extent  of  its  application,  vbrOTif?  nbn  he  ivas 
diseased  in  his  feet  1  Kin.  15:  23;  only  b'^:^{  ^^S^H  «^  the 
throne  will  I  he  greater  than  thoii  Gen.  41 :  40;  let  us  look 
one  another  D^DQ  in  the  face  2  Kin.  14:  8,  11. 


350  SYNTAX.  §  286 

a.  This  like  the  Greek  accusative  of  specification  applies  to  any  part 
or  possession  of  the  subject,  which  is  particularly  concerned  in  the  action 
of  the  verb,  N^px  "''i'ip  1  cry  as  to  my  voice,  with  my  voice  Ps.  3:  5.  Thu 
f,-!-^  as  to  thy  hand,  by  thy  hand,  didst  cast  out  nations  Ps.  44:  3,  which  is 
butter  than  to  regard  these  as  cases  of  explanatory  apposition,  I  viz.  n^y 
voice,  than  viz.  fiiy  hand;  thou  didst  tread  in  the  sea  "pc^O  as  to  thy  horses, 
with  thy  horses,  Hab.  3:  15,  Ex.  6:  3,  1  Sam.  25:  26,  33,  Ps.  17:  10,  13, 
"i"^?  32:  8,  60:  7,  Isa.  10:  30,  26:  9;  or  to  any  circumstance  which  stands  in 
general  relation  to  it,  ye  perish  7\T}.  as  to  the  way  Ps.  2:  12,  impoverish rd 
niiinn  in  respect  to  oblation  Isa.  40:  20.  Comp,  after  adjectives  Job  11:  '.», 
15:  10.  Sometimes  this  limitation  or  specification  is  made  by  the  preposi- 
tion >  1  Kin.  10:  23,  Jer.  30:  12,  or  3  2  Chron.  16:  12, 

§  286.  1.  When  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  regarded  as 
the  indirect  object  of  a  verb,  the  relation  is  indicated  by 
means  of  the  appropriate  preposition. 

a.  The  various  prepositions  with  which  different  verts  may  be  con- 
strued and  the  consequent  effect  upon  the  meaning  of  the  latter  can  be 
learned  in  detail  from  the  lexicon.  A  few  peculiar  usages  may  here  be 
noted:  e.  g.  the  use  of  3  in  (1)  after  such  verbs  as  tnx  (also  direct  object) 
to  seize  or  hold,  P'^Tnti  (also  direct  object)  to  lay  hohl  of  or  hold  fast,  pz"^ 
(also  with  b  or  bx)  to  cleave  to,  "in3  (also  direct  object)  to  choose,  "pi^S^ 
(with  h  to  believe)  to  believe  in,  nus  (with  bx  to  trust  to)  to  trust  in;  the 
preposition  in  all  these  cases  suggesting  peneti'ation  of  the  object  and  ad- 
hering to  it.  (2)  After  certain  verbs  of  sense  ^'53  (also  with  direct  object, 
bx,  b?  or  ny)  to  touch,  vb::  (also  with  direct  object,  b,  bs  or  b?)  to  hear, 
hearhen  to;  with  IT'T)  fo  smell,  ni<"i  or  nrn  to  see  it  sug<jests  that  the 
sense  is  delight erlly  fixed  upon  its  object,  to  smell  with  pleasure,  to  gaze 
U})on  with  dclii/ht.  (3)  After  verbs  of  motion  it  may  have  the  sense  of 
association  tvifh,  3  SIS  to  come  rcilh  i.  e.  to  bring,  Ps.  66:  13,  3  "bf^  to  go 
with  i.  e.  to  take,  Ex.  10:  9,  so  3  irir  to  perform  service  with  or  by  means 
of  any  one  i.  e.  to  impose  service  upon  him  Ex.  1:  14.  (4)  In  a  partitive 
sense  (ihe  part  being  contained  in  the  whole)  after  bsx  to  eat,  Ex.  12:  43-45, 
Lev.  22:  11,  Judg.  13:  16,  chb  to  eat  Ps.  141:  4,  nrj  to  drink  Prov.  9:  5, 
np'w'n  to  give  to  drink  Ps.  80:  6  and  the  like;  '^  may  be  similarly  used 
(the  part  taken  from  the  whole)  Lev.  7:  21,  Deut.  26:  14,  Ezr,  2:  63. 
(5)  After  verbs  denoting  hostility  (violent  collision  and  penetration),  3  ^33 
to  deal  treacherously  with,  3  nhb?  to  fight  with,  3  hiyo  to  trespass  against, 
3  n~."D  (also  with  direct  object)  to  rebel  against,  3  nnn  (also  with  bx  or  b?; 
anger  burned  against. 

b.  Verbs  denoting  fear  or  shame  are  followed  by  "ip  from,  since  one 
instinclively  turns  away  from  that  which  excites  these  emotions,  so  "15, 
^'i"^,  JNT,  t<n^,  y^y,  which  also  take  a  direct  object,  and  ^"iZ,  ^kT\, 
ibz:  etc. 

e.  Any  verb  may  be  followed  by  b  to  indicate  the  indirect  object  to 
whth  soniething  is  done,  he  said  crb  to  them  Gen.  1:  28,  2  have  given  cib 


§  286  OBJECT  OF  VEEB3,  351 

fo  you,  ver.  29,  or  for  which  something  is  done  (dative  of  advantage)  e.  g. 
"fl;  to  fear  for  or  on  lehalf  of  Hos.  10:  5,  XJi?  to  he  zealous  for,  cnb?  tc 
fght  for,  *T^P?n  to  pray  for,  a'^'i  plead  for  etc.  It  is  thus  used  pleonastic- 
ally  with  suffixes  referring  to  the  subject  of  the  verb  T^'b  "1?  go  for  thee 
i.  6.  go  thou,  fjb  H'na  flee  thou,  K'b  ^D"ih5  we  are  cut  off  for  us  i.  e.  so  far  as 
we  are  concerned  Ezek.  37:  11.  The  verb  (T^n  to  be  with  h  may  mean 
(1)  to  be  or  belong  to  any  person  T^^  njjn;;  ii  s/mW  be  or  5e/o??^  fo  f/iee  i.  e. 
thou  Shalt  have  it  Josh.  17:  18.  (2)  to  be  for  or  serve  as  any  thing  ti^ril 
nittb  and  it  shall  be  for  a  sign  Ex.  13:  16,  or  with  h  both  of  the  persun 
and  the  thing,  it  shall  be  nisb  r^  to  thee  for  a  sign  ver.  9,  Gen.  1:  29, 
47:  24,  Ex.  4:  16,  10:  7.  (3)  to  be  unto  or  to  become  ''^■>h  n^n^  he  shall  he- 
come  a  nation,  Gen.  18:  18,  2:  7,  10,  24,  Ex.  4:  3,  4,  Isa.       21. 

d.  Pronominal  suffixes  attached  to  verbs  ordinary  represent  the  direct 
object,  but  are  occasionally  used  when  the  objective  relation  is  indirect, 
"^inna  thou  hast  given  me  the  land  of  the  south  Judg.  1:15  for  "^b  '^^^^  i^^ou 
hast  given  to  me,  which  occurs  in  the  same  verse;  Drix  ii;^:n  grant  them 
to  us  Judg.  21:  22;  ^Sl'^JX  I  would  declare  to  him  Job  31:  37.  So  in  a  few 
instances  after  intransitive  verbs,  "'53^5  he  grew  up  to  me  as  to  a  father 
Job  31:  18,  'i]'^:^']  shall  divell  with  thee  Ps.  5:5,  13:  5,  -:'n  encamping  against 
thee  53:  6,  perhaps  Isa.  35:  1,  see  §  55.  1,  Isa.  65:  5,  Jer.  20:  7,  comp.  §  102.  2. 

2.  Many  verbs  vary  their  construction  without  any 
material  difference  of  meaning  according  to  the  form  of 
the  conception  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker  or  writer, 
being  followed  by  one  preposition  or  by  another  or  by 
none  at  all,  as  he  views  the  relation  as  direct  or  indirect, 
and  if  the  latter,  under  one  aspect  or  another:  thus,  they 
loent  out  from  the  city  may  be  expressed  by  the  direct 
relation,  n^irrnj^  ^^:;^  Gen.  44:  4,  or  by  the  indirect, 
n-yr;r-,-2  •i>i^;  Josh.  8:  22;  Dnb:  to  fight  is  followed  by  D^ 
icith  Josh.  10:  29,  by  S  in  (r:^  in  earn)  ver.  31,  by  b? 
against  ver.  38,  by  ri!j5  Judg.  12:4. 

a.  A  number  of  verbs  may  be  construed  either  with  a  direct  object  or 
with  h  to,  in  reference  to,  thus,  3nx  to  love  any  one  and  to  have  love  to  any 
one,  !^S"i  to  cure  and  to  p)erform  a  cure  for  any  one,  >"'"ij'n  to  save  and  to 
grant  salvation  to  any  one,  rrn::  to  destroy  and  to  bring  destruction  to  any 
one,  'pTXlri  to  hear  and  to  give  ear  to;  '^'''■y^  to  tell  with  or  without  b;  P"'T-in 
to  justify  takes  a  direct  object  except  Isa.  53:  11  where  it  has  b;  b^Sln  to 
deliver  has  b  once  Jon.  4:  6;  so  'lis  to  honour  Ps.  86:  9,  Dan.  11:  38.  Both 
constructions  occur  with  the  same  verb  in  the  same  sentence  1  Kin.  1 :  9, 
Ps.  21:  9,  47:  7;  see  also  2  Chron.  16:  12.  By  a  usage  which  belongs  for 
the  most  part  to  the  later  books  b  is  sometimes  prefixed  to  novins  explana- 
tory of  a  direct  object  1  Chron.  5:  26,  29:  20,  2  Chron.  25:  10,  Ezr.  8:  24, 


352  BYNTA.X.  §  287 

Nob.  9:  32,  and   sometimes  to  the  direct  object  itself,  Ps.  R9 :  6,    116:  1«, 
Isji.  11:9,  Jer.  40:  2,  Lam.  4:  5,  Ezek.  26:  3,  1  Chron.  16:  37,  29:  12,  22. 

b.  As  tbe  object  of  an  action  may,  in  certain  cases,  be  regarded  as  the 
instrument  with  wbich  it  is  performed,  some  transitive  verbs  also  admit  a 
con.<truction  with  2  tcifh,  thus  "^Ei'i  ^i"pn  blow  the  trumpet  Hos.  5:  8,  "P"*;; 
"•■E'lrz  and  he  blew  icith  the  trumpet  Judg.  3:  27;  Q"]'3'«!i  t-'ns  to  spread  forth 
the  hands  Ps.  143:  6,  but  followed  by  3  to  spread  forth  with  the  hands  Lam. 
1:  17;   see  also  2  Chron.  26:  15,  Prov.  25:  20. 

3.  By  a  condensed  style  of  expression  (constructio 
praegnans)  prepositions  are  sometimes  connected  with 
verbs,  to  whose  meaning  they  are  not  strictly  conformed; 
thus,  motion  may  be  suggested  by  the  preposition  though 
the  verb  of  itself  implies  no  such  idea,  y?i<^  ^Vt~  i^^oii 
hast  profaned,  to  the  ground  i.  e.  profaned  by  casting  to 
the  ground,  Ps.  89:  40,  74:  7,  Ezr.  2:  62,  -b^^  -c-Si  ^lins 
^nb"^  they  trembled  one  unto  another  i.  e.  one  turned 
tremblingly  to  another,  Jer.  36:  16  "^r^;?  D^"4"}  "P.")]?":? 
thou  hast  anstvered  (by  saving)  me  from  the  horns  of  the 
wild-oxen  Ps.  22:  22.  Different  objects  may  also  be  at- 
tached to  a  verb,  whose  meaning  is  in  strictness  adapted 
only  to  one  (zeugma)  thou  hast  shown  me  {life  and)  favour 
Job  10:  12. 

a.  Zeugma  may  also  occur  in  the  case  of  subjects  of  a  verb,  the  roar- 
ing of  the  lion,  the  voice  of  the  fierce  lion  and  the  teeth  of  the  young  lions 
are  broken  Job  4 :  10. 

§  287.  Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  object,  viz.: 
1.  The  causatives  of  transitive  verbs:  "nji^  "nbrSMl. 
D'^^bHiTi^  T]*Di*J  and  I  ivill  make  thy  oppressors  eat  their 
oivn  flesh  Isa.  49:  26;  H^.^-brns  ^:ipri  5<b  he  would  not 
have  caused  us  to  see  all  these  things  Judg.  13:  23;  nrbna^ 
bs^ii'Tb^  he  shall  cause  Israel  to  inherit  it  Deut.  1:  38, 
3:  24,  Num.  20:  26,  Judg.  1:  24,  Ps.  25:  4,  45:  5,  Jer. 
23:  22. 

a.  This  applies  to  the  causatives  of  verbs  of  plenty  or  want,  Gen.  42: 
25,  Ps.  8:  6,  Jer.  13:  13,  Ezek.  9:  7,  or  of  luot  on  §  285,  Deut.  1:  22,  2  Sam. 
15:  25,  Job  28:  11,  Cant.  1:  4. 


§  287  OBJECT  OF  VEEB3.  353 

2.  Verbs  whose  action  may  be  regarded  under  differ- 
ent aspects  as  terminating  upon  different  objects,  or 
which,  under  the  rules  already  given,  may  take  a  direct 
object  of  more  than  one  kind,  all  ini<  T'fi'l  "i^^^  ivJiich  God 
commanded  him  Gen.  6:  22;  "b!)  nj^  bJ^HTT^  "DS-nj^  ri'ninb 
D*J3~n  to  teach  the  children  of  Israel  all  the  statutes  Lev. 
10:  11;  ^nb  ^i"j<~b3'nj<  n^sn  thou  hast  smitten  all  mi/  ene- 
mies  on  the  cheek  Ps.  3 :  8 ;  TiJip  Dj"";"^i<ir  lift  up  your  hands 
to  the  sanctuary  Ps.  134:  2;  niD""-  D'iiri'l  and  he  shall  dis- 
comfit them  a  discomfiture  Deut.  7:  23. 

a.  Some  verbs  take  a  direct  object  of  both  person  and  thing  as  ^S<iy 
to  ask  Deut.  14:  26,  Isa.  45:  11,  Hag.  2:  11,  iD-i  to  instruct  Prov.  31:  1, 
n^s  to  command  Ex.  4:  28,  Deut.  1:  18,  T^yj  to  answer  1  Sam.  20:  10,  Job 
9^3,  V^l  to  treat  well  or  ill.  Gen.  50:  15,  1  Sam.  24:  18  (comp.  =7i;r  Ps.  21:  4, 
"iri':3  Prov.  13:24),  and  the  like.  Or  the  second  object  may  be  that  of  place 
after  verbs  implying  motion  2  Chron.  6:  38,  Nah,  1 :  8;  or  of  a  noun  cognate 
to  the  verb,  Gen.  49:  25,  Ex.  3:  9,  1  Sam.  1 :  6,  1  Kin.  12:  8,  Isa.  14:  6,  22:  17; 
or  of  specification,  Gen.  3:  15,  37:  21,  Deut.  22:  26,  33:  11,  1  Kin.  19:  21, 
Ps.  17:  11,  perhaps  68:  22,  §  256.  3.  b,  Jer.  2:  16,  40:  14.  A  verb  may  even 
have  three  objects  of  different  kinds  Judg.  15:  8. 

3.  The  instrument  of  an  action,  the  material  used  in 
its  performance,  its  product,  or  its  result,  is  often  re- 
garded as  its  secondary  or  remote  object,  "ZiJ  iri<  ^"-B";^'! 
and  they  overwhelmed  him  ivith  stones  Lev.  24:  23;  tpyr\'[ 
t:plii<  Dnji  and  thou  shalt  gird  them  ivith  a  belt  Ex.  29:  9; 

%seed  ri/bnNn"n>5  y^Tn"na;j:<  ivith  tvhich  thou  shalt  sotv 
the  ground  Isa.  30:  23;  ^£1?  niSnTiX  ^"T^^  and  he  formed 
the  man  of  dust  Gen.  2:  7;  Vn"bT23  ^"iis /or  which  I  have 
sent  it  Isa.  55:  11;  M^T^a  D■i2^Jsri-n^5  nin^^  and  he  huilt  the 
stones  into  an  altar  1  Kin.  18:  32. 

a.  The  instrument  of  an  action  regarded  as  its  remote  object:  Num. 
24:  8,  2  Chron.  14:  6,  Ps.  5:  13,  18:  33,  32:  7,  104:  6,  Isa.  37:  6,  41:  2,  Ezek. 
13:  22,  18:  7,  Mai.  2:  13.  The  material:  Ex.  24:  5,  25:  39,  26:  .SI,  37:  10, 
38:  3,  39:  30,  1  Kin.  6:  21,  22,  7:  48-50,  Ezek.  13:  10.  The  product:  Gen. 
27:  37,  nirpri  Num.  10:  2,  lijjsn  17:  3,  TrX  Deut.  15:  14,  pix  28:  24,  C^i"X"l 
Judg.  7:  16,  niina  Ps.  21:  7,  oaii  74:  2,  Isa.  37:  26,  Vp  IDzek.  4:  3.  The 
result:  I  will  make  all  thine  enemies  'y^'J  back,  oblige  them  to  turn  their 
backs  in  flight  Ex.  23:  27,  Ps.  18:  41,  21:  13;  I  will  not  make  you  nSs 

23 


354  SYNTAX.  §  287 

desf ruction,  destroy  you  Jer,  5:  18,  46:  28,  Ezek.  11:  13,  20:  17.  The  in- 
strument may  likewise  be  indicated  by  the  preposition  2  hi/  or  uith  Lev.  8 :  32, 
Josh.  10:  11;  the  material  by  '(0  from  or  out  of  Gen.  2:  19,  Ex.  39:  1;  the 
product  by  h  to,  Mo  Isa.  41;  15,  Jer.  1:  18. 

4.  Some  verbs  may  govern  the  subject  and  predicate 

of  a  subordinate  clause,  bC3  yiT^  firib  to  knoiv  tvickedness 
(to  be)  foUy  Eccl.  7:  25,  the  latter,  if  it  be  an  adjective 
or  participle,  will  remain  without  the  article,  §  203, 
T'iizini:  Dt^SX  "Py-^is  I  have  heard  Ephraim  bemoaning 
hmselfJev.  31:  18,  p^Tl  "n^ii*  ^ri<  thee  have  I  seen  right- 
eous Gen.  7:1.  Or  they  may  govern  two  nouns  in  appo- 
sition, the  second  of  which  suggests  a  comparison  or  is 
explanatory  of  the  aspect  under  which  the  first  is  viewed, 
they  bend  CP'Jip  oiiirbins  tlieir  tongue  as  their  bow  Jer. 
9:  2,  1  Kin.  11:  19,  Isa.  42:  25,  Hos.  14:  3,  Am.  5:  1. 

a.  The  predicate  object  frequently  indicates  a  state  or  condition,  eat  it 
T^k"^  unleavened  Lev.  10:  12,  tahe  the  king  ^n  alive  Josh.  8:  23,  9:  12, 
I  Sam.  8:  1,  2  Kin.  8:  13,  Prov.  1:  12.  The  presence  of  the  article  in  such 
cases  would  show  that  the  word  was  not  a  predicate,  when  he  saiv  TX 
nisn  "X^BH  the  angel  that  smote  2  Sam.  24:  17;  nsp  would  njenn  that  he 
sate  the  angel  smiting,  in  the  act  of  so  doing.  Gen.  21:  9,  27:  6,  37:  17, 
Ex.  14:  30,  Num.  7:  89,  It:  10,  22:  6,  23,  31,  2  Kin.  2:  10,  8:  12,  19:  8, 
1  Chron.  15:  29,  Esth.  5:  13.  Li  2  Kin.  9:  25  c^^dH  nx  noxl  ■'ix  -^z]  re- 
member vie  and  thee  riding  the  pronouns  are  in  their  separate  form  and 
rx  is  attached  to  the  predicate  participle.  Such  a  clause  may  be  sub- 
ordinated to  bip  uttered  as  an  exclamation  or  to  b'^p-rx  V^':i  as  well  as  to 
rrr  itself,  psin  ■'^i'^  bp  the  sound  of  my  beloved  knocking!  equivalent  to 
hark!  or  I  hear  my  beloved  knocking  Cant.  5:  2,  Gen.  4:  10,  1  Kin.  1:  41; 
T,"f  n-^  ^-in'Sx  n'rr;  bip-rx  ii'^";;"i  and  they  heard  the  souttd  of  Jehovah  God 
u-alking  Gen.  3:  8,  Deut.  4:  33,  5:  23,  Isa.  6:  8.  nx";i  to  see,  when  the  pre- 
dicate is  an  adjective,  admits  a  twofold  construction,  either  he  saio  TX 
2VJ--3  "."ixn  the  light  that  it  was  good  Gen.  1:  4,  12:  14,  13:  10,  or  saio 
y'-jp  irsi  -^2  that  the  tree  was  good  3:  6. 

5.  If  an  active  verb  is  capable  of  governing  a  double 
object,  its  passive  may  govern  the  more  remote  of  them, 

zbr:";^  ~i"^  rx  Dnb:Q:!i  and  ye  shall  be  circumcised  in  the 
Jlesh  of  your  foreskin  Gen.  17:  11,  QrX  y^xn  sbrni  and 
fJir  land  teas  filed  ivith  them  Ex.  1:  7,  rrj]^  nbd  sent  (or 
charged)  with  a  painful  message  1  Kin.  14:  6. 


§  288  ADVEEBIAL  EXPKES SIGNS.  355 

o.  Thus  the  passive  of  a  causative,  Job  7:3;  of  a  verb  implyiiig;  mo- 
tion, Gen.  12:  15;  of  a  verb  of  plenty  or  want,  Isa.  2:  7,  8;  a  passive  hav- 
ing as  its  object  a  thing,  Ex.  34:  34;  a  cognate  noun,  Jer.  14:  17;  object 
of  specification,  2  Sam.  15:  32,  Dan.  9:  25;  instrument,  1  Sam.  17:  5,  1  Kin. 
22:  10,  Isa.  1:  20;  material,  1  Kin.  6:  7,  Hab.  2:  19;  product,  Ex.  25:  31, 
npn  Lev.  10:  14,  Isa.  24:  12,  Mic.  3:  12;  a  predicate,  it  shall  be  eaten  r"JS'3 
'xnleavened  Lev.  6 :  9.  Sometimes  the  more  remote  object  is  made  the  sub- 
ject of  the  passive  verb  which  then  governs  the  nearer  object,  "."~X  ~j<"m1 
'inin  and  it  shall  he  shown  the  priest  Lev.  13:  49,  but  on  the  other  hand 
ni^nn  "irs  which  thou  wast  shown  Ex.  26 :  30. 

b.  The  agent  of  a  passive  verb  may  be  indicated  by  h  as  the  one  to 
whom  the  action  belongs,  ib  "Snirns  we  are  accounted  by  him  strangers 
Gen.  31:  15,  14:  19,  Ex.  12:  16,  1  Sam,  2:  3  K'ri,  15:  13,  23:  21,  Neh.  lo:  26, 
lb  bt^tr;'.  probably  shall  be  held  under  pledge  by  it  as  its  debtor  Prov.  13:  13, 
14:  20,  T^bs'iib  -i^'ad  kept  by  its  owner,  Eccl.  5:  12  (but  rib-"i!n3'ij  kept  for 
thee  1  Sam. '^:  24),  Jei-.  8:  3;  or  less  frequently  by  '{q  as  the  one  from 
whom  the  action  proceeds,  why  are  times  >i3Q'i3"5<^  '^^iwa'a  not  reserved  by 
the  Almighty?  Job  24:  1,  28:  4,  Ps.  37:  23,  Eccies.  12:  11,  Dan.  8:  II  K'ri. 
It  is  only  in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible  that  the  passive  construction  is 
adopted  to  any  extent  as  a  substitute  for  the  active,  Neh.  6:  1,7,  Esth.  4:  3. 


Adverbial  Expressions. 

§  288.  The  predicate  of  a  proposition  may  be  further 
quahfied 

1.  By  adverbs,  which  commonly  stand  after  the  words 
to  which  they  refer,  'ik'2  ni^TIsni.  and  behold  (it  was) 
very  good  Gen.  1:31;  nZ'in  ci'p^l  a72d  he  was  greatly  pro- 
voked Neh.  3:  33;  I  am  lif'2  nil'in  "^l^il?  thy  exceeding 
great  reward  prop,  thy  reward  very  much  Gen.  15:1. 

a.  Adverbs  may  for  emphasis  precede  the  words,  to  which  they  be- 
long, Ps.  47:  10.  Adjectives  belonging  to  the  subject  may  of  course  be 
qualified  in  the  same  manner  as  though  they  were  found  in  the  predicate. 

2.  By  nouns  used  absolutely  to  express  the  relations 
of  time,  place,  measure,  number,  or  manner. 

a.  Thus  time  when:  d'j'^ina'i  "ipil  3";i3^  evening  and  morning  and  noon 
will  I  pray  Ps.  55:  18;  tarry  here  inV^ri  to-night  Num.  22:  8;  Gideon  came 
n'n^irsn  CXT  at  the  beginning  of  the  watch  Judg.  7:  19,  Ex.  34:  22,  Deut. 
4:  10,  1  Kin.  19:  8,  Ps.  74:  2,  Jer.  18:  7,  9,  28:  16,  Hos.  7:  5,  Zech.  1:  8; 
once  in  the  phrase  from  generation  "h  to  generation  Ex.  17:  16.  Time  how 
lung:  and  he  shall  shut  up  the  house  Q"'72i  nbs'i  seven  days  Lev.  14:  38:  the 
land  rested  nr::  C-r-^r  eighty  years  Judg.  3:  30,  Gen.  5:  3,   14:  4,  Lev, 

23* 


356  BYNTAX.  §  289 

26:  84,  35,  Pent,  4:  9,   2  Pam.  20:  4,  Ps.  45:  7,  iometimes  with  TX  when 
definite  Kx.  13:  7  conip.  ver.  6,  Dent.  9:  25. 

b.  The  place  where:  the  absolute  use  of  nouns  in  this  sense  is  most 
frequent  in  the  familiar  words,  nr.Q  at  the  door  o/"  Gen.  18:  1,  Judg.  9:  35, 
r-a  at  the  house  of  Gen.  38:  11,  Num.  30:  11,  1  Kin.  IB:  32,  and  a  few 
proper  names  compounded  with  the  latter,  nnVr-a  at  Bethlehem  2  Sam. 
2:  32,  bk'n'^S  at  Bethel  Ilos.  12:  4;  other  examples  are  more  sporadic 
Josh.  1:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  29,  1  Kin.  8:  43,  Job  22:  12,  C":y.i?p  Lam.  5:  6,  appear 
is-nx  at  the  face  of  the  Lord  Ex.  34:  23  (comp.  23:  17  -:3-3S).  The  place 
whither:  Gen.  31:  21,  mostly  after  verbs  of  motion,  §  2»5.  2,  Gen.  43:  18, 
1  Sam.  5:  12,  Ps.  139:  8. 

c.  Measures  of  space:  ri'is  T'ias;  ui^"^  three  cubits  high  Ezek.  41:  22; 
Ti';;iX  n"i53X  rin  five  cubits  as  to  (in)  Icvgfh  Ex.  27:1;  he  tcent  cii  -ni  a 
day's  journey  1  Kin.  19:  4.    Weight:   2  Sam.  14:  26. 

d.  Number:  C"^"???  Ssi  2'l^  return  seven  times  1  Kin.  18:  43;  he  offered 
sacrifices  cirs  "Ep'2  according  to  the  number  of  them  all  Job  1:  5. 

c.  Manner,  answering  to  the  Greek  adverbial  accusative:  ye  shall  dwell 
n^2  in  security  Dent.  12:  10;  ye  shall  not  go  n^-n  loftily  Mic.  2:  3;  the 
tribes  went  up  VJ?~w"^Vi  Mns  according  to  a  law  of  Israel,  or  this  may  be  in 
apposition  with  what  precedes,  it  is  a  law  of  Israel  Ps.  122:  4;  thou  shall 
not  go  there  ^"br  rx"}"^  for  fear  of  briers  Isa.  7 :  25;  to  serve  him  inx  nrj 
u-ith  one  consent  prop,  shoulder  Zeph.  3:  9,  2  Sam.  23:  3,  2  Kin.  5:  2,  Ps. 
144:  12,  Prov.  10:  4,  Jer.  31:  7,  32:  11,  Lam.  1:  9,  Hos.  12:  15,  14:  5, 
Zech.  2:  8. 

3.  By  nouns  preceded  by  a  preposition  forming  a 
qualifying  phrase. 

a.  "When  successive  nouns  are  governed  by  the  same  preposition,  the 
preposition  will  be  repeated  before  each,  if  the  particulars  are  regarded 
separately,  Ex.  7:  28,  29,  9:  3,  33:  1  (hence  the  sing,  suff.),  Num.  19:  16, 
18,  19,  1  Sam.  14:  15,  2  Sam.  6:  5,  2  Kin.  23:  4,  5,  2  Chron.  8:  13,  Jer. 
9:  24,  25,  29:  18,  but  not  if  they  are  viewed  together  in  the  mass,  1  Sam. 
27:  8,  2  Chron.  8:  7,  Ezr.  3:  12,  Job  19:  24,  Dan.  9:  6.  The  preposition 
may  be  repeated  before  nouns  in  apposition  ci^raxb  "lysb  2  Sam.  18:5,  or 
not  l^ri  .  .  C^3  Hab.  3:  15;  and  in  poetry  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied  from 
a  parallel  clause.  Job  34:  10,  Isa.  15:  8,  61:  7,  Mic.  7:  12. 

Neglect  op  Agreement. 

§  289.  The  general  rule  that  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to 
which  they  respectively  relate,  is  subject  to  some  re- 
markable exceptions.  These  are  for  the  most  part  due 
to  two  principal  reasons.    First,  regard  is  had  to  the 


§  289  NEGLECT  OP  AGEEEMENT.  357 

sense  rather  than  to  the  form.  And  secondly,  when  the 
predicate  precedes  its  noun  or  is  separated  from  it  by 
intervening  words,  the  accidents  of  gender  and  number 
in  the  subject  may  not  have  engaged  the  thoughts  be- 
fore it  is  uttered,  or  attention  may  have  been  diverted 
from  them  by  words  spoken  since;  in  this  case  there  is 
a  natural  tendency  to  adopt  a  primary  in  preference  to 
a  secondary  form,  that  is  to  say,  the  singular  may  be 
used  where  strict  conformity  to  the  subject  would  re- 
quire the  plural,  and  the  masculine  may  in  hke  manner 
take  the  place  of  the  feminine. 

1.  When  a  plural  subject  is  viewed  in  its  totality, 
rather  than  in  its  several  parts,  related  words  may  be 
put  in  the  singular. 

a.  Thus,  ^■^■^3'!  Nn;'  let  thy  words  come  to  pass  Judg.  13:  12,  i^ij^ 
tj'^as'r'?  uprigJd  are  thy  judgments  Ps.  119:  137,  n-^nisp  n{ri:x  her  wounds 
are  incurable  Mic.  1:  9,  1  Kin.  10:  12,  Isa.  32:  11,  59:  12,  Jer.  4:  14,  12:  4, 
51:  48,  Zech.  6:  14.  When  a  predicate  consists  of  several  verbs  or  ad- 
jectives, one  of  which  precedes  and  the  rest  follow  the  noun,  the  latter 
commonly  agree  with  it  in  number,  while  the  first  may  be  put  in  the 
singular,  IT^I^I  tiins;l:;r!  xnp^l  and  the  porters  called  and  told  2  Kin.  7:  11, 
Esth.  9:  23,  Ezek.  14:  1. 

2.  Or  if  a  plural  subject  is  viewed  distributively  and 
regard  is  had  to  each  particular  included  in  it,  related 
words  may  be  put  in  the  singular. 

a.  Thus,  ~>ina  "i"'?'!!^^  ^'«ey  that  bless  thee  shall  each  be  blessed  Num. 
24:  9,  n^r  ni^  'T'^^n'2  they  who  profane  it  shall  every  one  be  put  to  death 
Ex.  31:  14,  !i353ia  ^"iife^  t2"'p"^^^  5^91^  ^^^^U  i^^^  away  the  righteousness  of  the 
righteous  from  each  of  them  Isa.  5:  23.  Examples  in  verbs,  "ihi  Deut.  18:  3, 
Job  6:  20,  Pro  v.  14:  1,  Isa.  34:  13,  Jer.  48:  41,  Ezek.  39:  15,  Nah.  3:  7, 
Hab.  2:  6,  Zech.  11:  5.  Pronouns,  Josh.  2:  4,  1  Chron.  29:  8,  Ps.  62;  5, 
Jer.  44:  9,  Zech.  14:  12. 

3.  Nouns,  which  are  plural  in  form  but  singular  in 
signification,  commonly  have  verbs,  adjectives  and  pro- 
nouns agreeing  with  them  in  the  singular. 

a.  Thus,  D^nl^x  sn3  God  created  Gen.  1:1,  n^sii  1"'^S3  its  owner  shall 
be  put  to  death  Ex.  21:  29,  Ti'^^p^  n"^hx  a  hard  master  Isa.  19:  4,  ^-rnnn 
'iD'^l!i553  thy  youth  is  renewed  Ps.  103:  5.     When  the  word  Q%'i'^X  refers  to 


353  SYNTAX.  §  289 

false  deities,  the  sense  is  plural  and  it  is  construed  accordingly,  '^iry'T.'a 
C^n^X  so  may  the  gods  do  1  Kin.  19:  2.  This  polytheistic  plural  is  used 
even  where  a  single  idol  is  referred  to  Ex.  32:  4,  8;  but  see  Neh.  9:  18. 
But  where  it  refers  to  the  true  God,  it  is  with  few  exceptions  construed  in 
the  singular.  Yet  see  Gen.  20;  13,  35:  7,  Ex.  22:  8,  Deut.  5:  23,  Josh.  24: 
19,  1  Sam.  17:  26,  36,  2  Sam.  7:  23,  Jer.  10:  10,  23:  36;  here  and  in  some 
similar  pas.vages  there  is  a  formal  agreement  in  the  plural,  perhaps  because 
attention  is  directed  to  the  supreme  Being  in  general  and  to  tlie  fulness 
and  variety  of  the  divine  perfections  without  specific  reference  to  the  di- 
vine unity.    Comp.  Gen.  1:  26,  11:  7,  Ps.  11:  7,  58:  12,  Isa.  6:  8. 

4.  Plural  names  of  irrational  objects  of  either  gender 
ma}'  be  joined  "with  the  feminine  singular. 

a.  Thus,  Si-irn  nyr  T'-b}Z  the  beasts  of  the  field  pant  Joel  1 :  20,  P-^"?? 
i'i"'n''Sp  its  floods  wash  aicat/  Job  14:  19,  nninx  n^'s^n  jjrt»5f.s  have  seized 
her  Jer.  49:  24,  t^ii'Z.'-i  ^'ZT)  jackals,  their  lair  Isa.  35:  7,  Gen.  49:  22,  1  Sam. 
4:  15,  Job  12:  7,  27:  20,  Ps.  18:  35,  37:  31,  44:  19,  73:  2  K'thibh.  In  ob- 
jects devoid  of  personality  the  individual  is  of  small  account  and  may  be 
easily  sunk  in  the  mass.  A  phiralis  vihumnnus  may  conse(]nently  be  re- 
garded as  equivalent  to  a  collective  and  construed  with  the  singular,  the 
feminine  being  adopted  as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter,  §  Uis.  a.  The  same 
principle    prevails    in    the    construction    of   neuter    plurals    in    Greek,    Trt 

5.  Collective  nouns  may  have  verbs,  adjectives  and 
pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

a.  Thus,  M~br""  crn  inrio")!  and  the  people  hasted  and  passed  over  Josh. 
4:  10,  niirx  "xia  lost  sheep  Jer.  50:  6,  C^iipT  c|2  '^i?';;!'^  ''''^  ^^te  congrega- 
tion, all  0/  them  are  holy  Num.  16:  3,  27:  3,  35:  25,  1  Sam.  17:  28,  2  Sam. 
24:  17,  Jer.  8:  3,  13:  10,  48:  36.  Where  a  collective  is  regarded  as  one 
body,  it  is  construed  as  a  singular;  when  it  is  contemplated  with  reference 
to  the  individuals  embraced  within  it,  all  related  words  are  put  in  the 
plural,  Qrri  !ixzrr'_V  srn  cb  tlie  people  was  oppressed  and  the  people  hid 
themselves  1  Sam.  13:  6,  Ezek.  14:  22.  Nouns  not  properly  collectives,  used 
in  a  collective  sense,  are  similarly  construed,  Ex.  1:  10,  Judg.  7:  7,  1  Sam. 
12:  21,  1  Kin,  5:  17,  2  Kin.  7:  10,  Job  39:  19,  21,  Ps.  119:  103,  Prov.  28:  1, 
Isa.  14:  11,  28:  3,  Ezek.  17:  23. 

h.  When  a  predicate  consists  of  mure  than  one  verb  or  adjective,  the 
first  sometimes  agrees  with  it  formally  in  the  singular  and  the  rest  logic- 
ally in  the  plural,  clip-nx  siin'^;)  ni;-n-b3  Vi^7}^  and  all  the  congregation 
lifted  lip  and  uttered  their  voice  Num.  14:  1;  IJJ'ip"]  z'vr\  "i^X""  and  the 
people  believed  and  they  heard  Ex.  4:  31,  Gen.  46:  26,  Judg.  1:  4,  1  Kin. 
16:   16. 

C.  The  noun  yi<  land,  earth,  which  is  properly  a  feminine  singular, 
may,  wlien  it  is  put  fur  its  inliabitants,  be  construed  with  the  masculine 
plural,  Gea.  41:  57,  1  Sam.  14:  25,  2  Sam.  15:  23,  Ps.  66:  4.    Names  of  na- 


§  290 


NEGLECT  OP  AGKEEMENT.  359 


tions  borrowed  from  those  of  their  progenitors,  as  Israel,  Edom,  Ainalek, 
may  be  strictly  construed  in  the  masculine  singular,  Ex.  17:  11,  Am.  1:  11, 
or  as  a  collective  in  the  masculine  plural,  Hos.  8:  2,  Ob.  ver.  6,  2  Sam. 
10:  17,  or  again  in  the  feminine  singular,  whether  this  arises  fiom  a 
prominent  reference  to  the  land  or  from  the  frequent  personification  of  a 
people  as  a  maiden,  2  Sam.  10:  11,  Jer.  13:  19,  49:  17,  Nah.  2:  1,  comp. 
1  Sam.  27:8;  so  'c^  people  in  the  following  examples,  ^MS"  nxi:n  thy  people 
has  done  icrong  Ex.  5:  16,  rniij'i''  di^n  the  people  divelling  Judg.  18:  7,  Jer. 
8:  5.  Different  constructions  may  be  united  in  the  same  passage,  Jer.  48: 
15,  Hos.  14:  1.  In  1  Sam.  17:  21  the  verb  agrees  not  with  bwS"iw7  but  with 
n-1>g,  which  is  in  apposition  with  it. 

6.  Masculine  verbs,  adjectives  and  pronouns  are 
sometimes  used  when  females  are  spoken  of,  or  when 
the  nouns  to  which  they  refer  are  feminine,  from  a  neg- 
lect to  note  the  gender  where  no  stress  is  laid  upon  it. 

O.  Thus,  n^lB^fi"'!  and  they  (queens  and  concubines)  praised  her  Cant. 
8:  9;  Jehovah  deal  kiwUy  ni^HS'  ivith  you  (Kuth  and  Orpah)  as  sHrr  ye 
have  dealt  Euth  1:8;  ^h^  my  dead  (Sarah)  Gen.  23:  4.  This  neglect  of 
gender  is  most  frequent  in  pronouns  both  as  referring  to  females,  Ex.  1:  21, 
2:  17,  Num.  36:  6,  Judg.  11:  34,  19:  24,  21:  12,  22,  1  Sam.  6:  7,  2  Sam.  6:  22, 
and  to  feminine  nouns,  Ex.  11:  6,  22:  25,  Lev.  6:  8,  27:  9,  Num.  3:  27,  33, 
Deut.  27:  2,  5,  1  Sam.  10:  18,  Isa.  34:  17.  It  is  comparatively  rare  in  verbs, 
(many  apparent  instances  are  impersonal  constructions,  §284.e),  bx^  1  Sam. 
2:  20,  25:  27,  1  Chron.  2:  48,  "rn=ni  Isa.  57:  8,  brWI  Jer.  3:  5,  Niiril  Ezek. 
22:  4,  Job  3:  24,  16:  22,  unless  they  precede  the  subject,  ■j'"^\!  °^^  Ni:-xb 
the  land  could  not  bear  them  Gen.  13:6,  riiiSxd  ^iTin  tremble  ye  careless 
women  Isa.  32:  11,  1  Kin.  8:  31,  22:  36,  2  Kin.  3:  26,  13:  20,  Eccl.  7:  7,  Isa. 
14:  11,  47:  11,  Jer.  51:  46.  In  Isa.  14:  9,  33:  9  the  nearer  verb  agrees  with 
its  noun,  while  the  more  remote  does  not;  so  in  adjectives  1  Kin.  19:  11, 
but  the  reverse  Dan.  1:  15.  Both  gender  and  number  neglected,  2  Kin. 
12:  14,  Job  42:  15,  Ps.  57:  2,  Mic.  2:  6.  Lack  of  agreement  in  adjectives 
and  participles,  1  Kin.  22:  13,  Ps.  119:  137,  2  Chron.  3:  11.  A  feminine  pre- 
dicate attached  to  a  masculine  noun  Eccl.  8:  11,  10:  15  is  anomalous. 

§  290.  1.  When  a  compound  subject,  §  247.  1,  is  re- 
garded as  forming  one  whole  the  predicate  is  put  in  the 
singular;  otherwise  it  may  be  put  in  the  plural  referring 
to  them  all,  or  it  may  agree  with  the  nearest  noun  or 
with  the  principal  word  to  which  the  rest  are  sub- 
ordinate. 

a.  Singular  predicate:  nn")"^  '^hl'^_  t^OS  silver  and  gold  is  ni'iltiplicd 
Deut.  8:  13,  Gen.  9:  2,  1  Sam.'20:  31,  n.-n;)  1  Kin.  5:  8,  6:  7,  Neh.  6:  12, 
Esth.  4:  3,  Jer.  14:  15,  49:  24,  Hos.  4:  11,  so  attributive  Josh.  11:  4  and 


3G0  BYNTAX.  §  291-293 

pronoun  Gen.  10:  12.  Plural  predicate:  Ex.  5:  1,  7:  20,  17:  10,  Judj,'.  8:  12, 
^rb  1  Sain.  31:  7,  even  after  nouns  connected  by  "iS  or  Deut.  22:  1,  4,  so 
pronouns  Lev.  13:  38.  Agreement  with  nearest  noun:  t/e  and  your  wives 
r»3-i3nri1  have  spolicn  Jer.  44:  25,  Num.  12:  1,  Deut.  13:  7,  Job  19:  15,  28:  18. 
"With  principal  word:  cniiX  "'r"?:'!  "'t^  I  and  my  maidens  will  fast  Esth. 
4:  16,  N3  2X'i">'!  np  "^ns?  the  servants  of  David  and  Joab  came  2  Sam.  :^:  22, 
16:  18,  20:  10,  Gen.  3:  8,  7;  7,  14:  15,  Ex.  1:  6,  21:  4,  1  Sam.  25:42,  1  Kin. 
1:  41,  2  Kin.  4:  7,  2  Chron.  11:  14,  Jer.  41:  16.  Singular  predicate  before 
a  compound  subject  and  plural  after:  Gen.  9:  23,  14:  8,  33:  7,  Ex.  4:  29, 
7:  10,  10:  3,  1  Sam.  27:  8,  Jer.  39:  1,4,  43:2,  conip.  Gen.  11:29,  Num.  3:4. 

2.  If  a  predicate  refers  equally  to  two  words  of  differ- 
ent genders,  it  will  be  put  in  the  masculine  in  preference 
to  the  feminine,  D^DpT  H^'iTI  Dm'^^N  Abraham  and  Sarah 
were  old  Gen.  18:  ll,'24r55,  Ex.' 9:  19,  Lev.  3:  1,  Esth. 
4:  14,  Ps.  55:  G,  Prov.  27:  9,  Jer.  22:  26,  30:  19,  Joel 
1:  9,  13;  if  they  are  of  different  persons,  the  predicate 
will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to  the  third,  and 
in  the  first  in  preference  to  either  of  the  others,  "i^^ 
'rrT't'2  *in  "liiDi^l  I  and  JonatJum  my  son  tvill  he  1  Sam.  14: 
40,  20:  23,  Drnnni.  ^^ns  'p"i5l  nnx  thou  and  Aaron  thy 
brother  and  ye  shall  sj)eak  Num.  20:  8. 

§  291.  The  plural  is  sometimes  used  indefinitely, 
where  only  one  is  intended. 

a.  Thus,  they  hated  him  for  'i^r'c':>ri  his  dreams,  though  he  had  told 
them  but  one  Gen.  37:  8,  riips?  with  staves,  a  staff  1  Sam.  17:  43,  Gen. 
8:  4,  13:  12,  19:  29,  21:  7,  1"'H:2  46:  15,  r^^''^-  ^^-  21:  22,  Num.  26:  8, 
Judg.  12:  7,  TT-^X  14:  5,  2  Chron.  16:  14,  Job  19:  1,  21:  32,  Zecli.  9:  9. 
The  singular  may  also  be  used  distributively,  where  the  plural  is  intended, 
they  two  dreamed  oilin  a  dream,  Gen.  40:  5. 

§  292.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns,  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural,  riisn  "sb  "3'? 
the  eyes  of  Leah  were  tender  Gen.  29:  17. 

§  293.  If  two  or  more  nouns  are  united  in  the  con- 
struct state  the  predicate  ordinarily  agrees  with  the  first 
as  the  leading  word  in  such  combinations:  it  may,  how- 
ever, agree  with  the  second,  if  that  is  the  more  impor- 
tant, or  the  predicate  might  with  propriety  bs  referred 


§  294,  295      NEGLECT  OP  AGREEMENT.  361 

directly  to  it,  b5l35<  "jiairn  t\hy^  the  fields  of  Heshhon  lan- 
guish Isa.  16:8,  D^i'^i^  nife  D^  ^kl'2^  is  found  the  blood 
of  the  souls  of  the  poor  Jer.  2:  34,  1  Kin.  17:  16,  Job  21: 
21,29:10,38:21. 

a.  The  predicate  agrees  generally  though  not  invariably  with  the  se- 
cond noun  when  the  first  is  Vs,  or  an  abstract  expressing  a  quality  of  that 
which  follows,  ma-ip'^-b3  l^n^l  and  all  the  days  of  Seth  were  Gen.  5:  8, 
D'^tsn-bD  ^si^ril  and  all  the  women  tvent  out  Ex.  15:  20,  13)3^  I'^'i^V^  ""b^? 
the  choice  of  his  captains  were  droivned  ver.  4,  Job  32:  7,  33:  21  K'thibh, 
Isa.  22:  7,  Hab.  2:  8. 

§  294.  The  abrupt  changes  of  the  person  from  the 
third  to  the  first  or  second,  and  vice  versa,  which  are 
especially  frequent  with  the  prophets  and  psalmists,  Isa. 
1:  29,  Ps,  81:  15-17,  are  due  to  the  boldness  and  vivid- 
ness of  their  conceptions,  in  virtue  of  which  they  often 
pass  in  the  course  of  the  same  sentence  from  speaking 
of  God  to  speaking  in  his  name,  and  from  describing 
men  to  directly  addressing  them. 

a.  Examples  of  change  of  person  referring  to  God,  Ps.  18:  48,  49,  Isa. 
44:  24,  25;  to  men,  Euth  4:  4,  1  Sam.  6:  4,  Ps.  49:  19,  20,  91:  13,  14,  Isa. 
5:  8,  31:  7,  33:  2,  Jer.  12:  13,  Ezek.  13:  4-7,  Hab.  2:  15;  the  same  person 
used  successively  of  God  and  man,  Ex.  7:  17,  Zech.  2:  13-15.  The  lan- 
guage of  address  may  be  continued  in  the  third  person,  when  a  noun  or 
participle  is  introduced  as  a  vocative,  take  you  censers,  'in'i>~^3''.  H'np  Korah 
and  all  his  company  Num.  16:  6,  1  Kin.  22:  28,  Job  17:  10,  18:  4,  Ps. 
18:  51,  65:  7,  Isa.  10:  5,  22:  16,  48:  1,  54:  1,  Dan.  9:  4,  Obad.  ver.  3,  Mic. 
1:  2;  a  superior  may  be  respectfully  addressed  in  the  third  person  2  Sam. 
14:  17.  So  a  person  may  speak  of  himself  in  the  third  person  Job  12:  4, 
13:  28,  especially  in  polite  phrase  as  'thy  servant',  'thy  handmaid'  2  Sam. 
17:  38,  1  Kin,  1:  17,27.  Change  of  person  may  also  be  occasioned  by  intro- 
ducing the  language  of  others  with  no  formula  of  citation  Job  21:  19,  or 
by  passing  from  direct  to  indirect  quotation  Job  19:  28,  22:  17,  35:  3. 
The  occasional  combination  of  the  pronoun  of  the  first  person  with  a  verb 
in  the  third  is  to  be  explained  by  an  ellipsis,  ife";  "'i^n  behold  I  (am  he  who) 
has  laid  Isa.  28:  16,  Cipii  ""iiri  behold  I  (am  he  who)  will  add  29:  14,  38:  5, 
Ps.  6:  3. 

b.  A  diff'erent  turn  is  sometimes  given  to  a  sentence  from  that  which 
•was  apparently  intended  at  first,  so  that  there  is  a  lack  formal  correspon- 
dence between  one  part  and  another  (anacoluthrm),  Gen.  3:  22,  23,  23:  13, 
Num.  15:  29,  35:  23,  Job  11:  13. 

§  295.  In  Hebrew  as  in  other  languages  there  is  the 


oG2  BTNTAX.  §  296 

occnsionnl  ellipsis  of  a  word  Avhich  can  be  roadily  sup- 
plied from  the  context,  bxV-p  ^'Jii^  "yi^b/or  tlie  appoutk'd 
time  which  Samuel  appointed  1  Sam.  13:  8,  Deut.  11:2, 

1  Kin.  11:  25,  2  Kin.  25:  10  comp.  Jer.  52:  14,  2  Chron. 
34:  22,  Zech.  7:  7. 

a.  In  poetry  one  parallel  clause  is  frequently  to  be  supplied  from  an- 
other, Job  20:  2,  22:  23,  27:  U,  39:  27,  42:  3,  Ps.  18:  42,  20:  8,  113:  5.  6, 
127:  3,  Prov.  23:  17,  Isa.  48:  11  (or  supply  D'^  from  ver.  9),  63:  18  (or  ■f'';i<H), 
Dau.  12:  3,  Zech.  9:  17. 

Repetition  of  Words. 

§  296.  The  repetition  of  nouns  may  denote 

1.  Distribution,  ni'd  ni'i  year  hy  year  Deut.  14:  22, 
Ipiiljl  "'pins  in  the  morning,  in  the  morning  i.  e.  every  morn- 
ing 2  Sam.  13:  4,  2  Chiton.  13:  11,  Isa.  28:  19,  "rs-JJ^X 
tJZTBb  "l^J^^"d■^^;  one  man  for  each  tribe  Josh.  3:  12,  4:  2; 
so  with  numeral  adjectives,  §  255.  4,  nyz'C  H^'ZIT  by 
sevois  Gen.  7:  2,  Num.  3:  47,  Zech.  4:  2,  and  adverbs, 
t:i?-2  t:r::  little  by  little  Ex.  23:  30. 

a.  So  also  ri3T3n  nid  t/ear  by  year  1  Sam.  1 :  7,  Tvt'd  ^nnx  nrr  year 
a/"/fr  j^ear  2  Sam.  21:  1;  D'i'i  Cr  Gen.  39:  10,  ni^3  ttT'  1  Chron.'  12:  22,  Oi"' 
CV"  Esth.  2:  11,  and  once  without  repetition  cr  Jer.  7:  25  daily,  day  by 
day  the  breadth  (of  tlie  court)  ct-iana  C^i'^n  fifty  (cubits)  at  each  end 
and  so  on  throughout  Ex.  27:  18;  CJ"'X  ■«:i"'5<  any  one  or  every  one  Ex.  36:  4, 
Lev.  18:  6,  20:  2,  22:  4,  18,  24:  15,  Num.  1:  4,  4:  19,  49,  Ezek.  14:  4.  Ad- 
ditional examples,  Num.  13:2,  17:  17,  Josh.  21:  40,  22:  14,    1  Chron.  9:  27. 

2.  Plurality,  ni1"n'^  generation  and  generation  i.  e. 
many  generations  Dout.  32:  7,  1]bb  1p  Ijbb  1p  iib  1::  ^ib  12? 
precept  vpon  precept,  precept  upon  precept,  line  upon  line, 
line  upon  line  Isa.  28:  10,  13,  n~S!li  t^"^?^  pits  on  pits 
Gen.  14:  10;  or  with  the  implication  of  diversity,  "|ns 
"IN^  a  weight  and  a  weight  i.  e.  tveigJits  of  two  sorts  Deut. 
25:  13,  nbl  nb  a  double  heart  Ps.  12:  3. 

o.  So  also  "n  "ih  generation,  generation  Ex.  3:  15,  Prov.  27:  24  K'thibh, 
C"7^'n  "yu  generation,  generations  i.  e.  many  generations  Ps.  72:  5,  102:  25, 
Isa.  51:  8.     Additional   examples,   Gen.  25:  23,  Judg.   5:  22,    1  Kin.  9:  27, 

2  Kin.  3:  16,  21:  16,  1  Chron.  28:  14-17,  2  Chron.  11:  12,  Ezr.  10:  14,  Esth. 


§  297  EEPETITION  OF  W0KD3.  363 

1:7,  3:  12,  4:  13,  8:  17,  Eccl.  1:  4,  Ezek.  40:  41,  Joel  4:  14;  ""h)  ^-q  who 
and  icho  i.  e.  what  different  persons  Ex.  10:  8.  Phrase  repeated  to  indicate 
repetition,  Ex.  26:  21,  25,  28:  34,  Num.  7:  11,  17:  21,  Jer.  51:  46. 

3.  Emphasis  or  intensity,  p^ll  p'XZ  justice,  jmtice  i.  e. 
nothing  hit  justice  Deut.  16:  20,  xh"^^  pTiS  exceeding  deep 
Eccl.  7:  24;  so  with  adverbs,  Ib^'J  ib^'^  mightily,  mightily 
Gen.  7:  19,  and  even  a  conjunction,  1?:^^  "^T  becaicse  even 
because  Lev.  26:  43. 

a.  The  name  repeated  in  xirgent  calling.  Gen.  22:  11,  46:  2,  Ex.  3:  4. 
Emphatic  repetitions.  Dent.  2:  27,  28:  43,  Judg.  11:  25,  2  Sam.  13:  25  (Kx), 
20:  20,  2  Chron.  4:  3,  Jer,  44:  9,  Lam.  1:  16,  Ezek.  40:  5,  with  the  sug- 
gestion of  inevitable  certainty.  Gen.  43:  14,  Esth.  4:  16,  Isa.  8:  9.  Plirase 
repeated,  2  Sam.  16:  16,  1  Kin.  18:  39,  Ps.  92:  10,  93:  3,  130:  6,  Eccl.  4:  1, 
Isa.  27:  1,  5,  28:  1,  3,  4,  53:  7,  Ezek.  14:  22,  16:  6,  Zech.  12:  12-14,  by  way 
of  resumption  after  a  parenthesis  or  interruption,  Judg.  9:  16,  19,  Ps.  56:  5, 
11,  12.  Eefrain  in  po-try,  Ps.  42:  6,  12,  43:  5;  Cant.  2:  7,  3:  5  etc.;  Isa. 
2:  11,  17;  9:  11,  16,  20,  10:  4;  48:  22,  57:  21.  Sometimes  a  word  is  repeated 
without  special  emphasis  for  the  sake  of  adding  a  farther  description  rr^Svl 
nih";  n"^a  the  house  viz.  the  house  of  Jehovah  2  Chron.  5:  13,  Gen.  35:  14, 
2  Sam.  6:  2,  Ezek.  44:  19. 

6.  Sometimes  the  second  word  is  put  in  a  different  gender  from  the 
first,  ii3??'^^l  l^p?  all  kinds  of  support  Isa.  3:  1,  comp.  Jer.  48:  19,  or  a 
different  number,  D";nnbn  "i-iin  a  heap,  tivo  heaps  Judg,  15:  16,  niTJI  nV:: 
Eccl.  2:  8,  Judg.  5:  30,  Ps.  19:  7.  Or  a  cognate  word  may  be  employed, 
nbdrisi  nrop  waste  and  desolate  Ezek.  6:  14,  33:  29,  '("inaTy  nno  Lev.  23:  3, 
Job  30:  3,  Nah.  3:  17.  Words  of  like  sound  may  be  thus  emphatically 
joined  together  (paronomasia)  iin'il  ^inn  Gen.  1:  2,  18:  27,  Isa.  24:  1,  3,  4, 
29:  2,  6,  Zeph.  1:  15;  three  words  Nah.  2:  11;  in  successive  clauses  and 
opposed  in  sense  Isa.  5:  7. 

c.  Instances  occur  of  triple  repetition,  T^ii;?  Cini^  ainir  holi/,  holt/,  holy, 
Isa.  6:  3,  y^k  y^Vi  yik  0  earth,  earth,  earth,  Jer.  22:  29,  Jer,  7:  4,  Ezek. 
21:  32,  Ex,  25:  35^ 

§  297.  A  separate  pronoun  may  be  added  to  a  pro- 
nominal suffix  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  ''DX  'P^'J  my 
dying,  mine  2  Sam.  19:  1,  "TyiiT  nriiJ^  thee,  thee  shall  they 
■praise  Gen.  49:  8,  or  to  a  noun  to  which  it  refers,  nisb 
i^^n-D3  to  Seth,  to  him  also  Gen.  4:  26,  10:  21;  and  in 
various  other  ways  beside,  which  are  more  or  less  signi- 
ficant, pronouns  may  be  repeated,  or  may  stand  in  the 
same  clause  with  the  nouns  which  they  represent. 

a.  Pronoun  added  to  a  suffix.   Num.  14:  32,  Deut.  5:  3,   1  Sam.  25:  24, 


364  SYNTAX.  §  298 

1  Kin.  1:  26,  2  Chron.  35:  21,  Ps.  9:  7,  Dan.  8:  1,  Hag.  1:  4,  Zech.  7:  5; 
with  D5  before  the  pronoun,  Gen.  27:  34,  1  Sam.  19:  23,  2  Sam.  17:  5, 
1  Kin.  21:  19,  Prov.  23:  15,  Eccl.  2:  15,  Jer.  25:  14,  27:  7,  with  :;X  Prov. 
22:  19.  Sei)iirate  pronoun  as  a  subject  repeated,  Gen.  20:  5,  Ps.  76:  8,  Isa. 
43:  11,  or  followed  by  n'tr\  with  a  suffix,  Gen.  9:  9,  Ex.  14:  17.  Pronoun 
emphatically   prefixed   and   resumed  by  a  suffix,    Gen.   17:  4,  Deut.  4:  4, 

1  Chron.  9:  22,  22:  7,  28:  2,  2  Chron.  28:  10,  Ps.  35:  13,  41:  13,  69:  14, 
Zech.  9:11.  Pronoun  as  an  object  emphatically  prefixed  to  the  verb  and 
repeated  after  it,  1  Sam.  9:  13,  2  Kin.  9:  27. 

b.  Noun  as  a  subject  emphatically  prefixed  resumed  by  a  pronoun, 
Gen.  3:  12,  42:  11,  Num.  15:  30,  Prov.  10:  22,  24,  28:  10,  Jer.  12:  6,  Mic. 
7:  3.  Noun  as  an  object  emphatically  prefixed  resumed  by  a  suffix,  1  Sam. 
25:  29,  Isa.  8: '13,  or  by  the  noun  repeated.  Lev.  7:  8,  19,  27,  or  by  a  noun 
in  api)0.sition  Lev.  7:  25,  Num.  35:  30.  Noun  governed  by  a  preposition 
resumed  by  a  suffix.  Gen.  2:  17,  2  Sam.  6:  22,  Neh.  9:  29,  Eccl.  1 :  11.  Noun 
emphatically  prefixed  standing  absolutely  and  resumed  by  a  suffix,  Num. 
14:  24,   Deut.  4:  3,  28:  54,   1  Sara.  2:  10,   2  Sam.  4:  10,   2  Kin.    10:  24,  29, 

2  Chron.  16:  9,  Ps.  11:  4,  46:  5,  Eccl.  2:  14,  Jer.  10:  3,  Nah.  1:3.  Or  a 
pronoun  may  be  followed  by  a  noun  in  apposition  with  it  by  way  of  ex- 
planation, Ex.  7:  11,  1  Sam.  20:  29,  2  Sam.  17:  10,  2  Chron.  32,  30,  §256.  1.  a. 

c.  The  pleonastic  use  of  the  suffix  followed  by  the  noun  to  which  it 
refers  is  very  common  in  Syriac  and  in  Palestinian  Aramaeic,  but  occurs 
with  less  frequency  in  Hebrew,  *ib"iT~ns;  sifixini  and  she  saw  if,  the  child 
Ex.  2:  6,  35:  5,  Lev.  13:  57,  Josh.  1:  2,  18:  19  K'thibh,  1  Sam.  21:  14, 
2  Sam.  14:  6,  1' Chron.  16:  42  (?),  2  Chron.  26:  14,  Ezr.  3:  12  (?),  9:  1,  Esth. 
3:  8,  Job  29:  3,  Ps.  83:  12,  Prov.  5:  22,  13:  4,  14:  13,  Cant.  1:  6,  3:  7,  Isa. 
17:  6,  Jer.  9:  14,  31:  2,  41:  3,  48:  44,  52:  20,  Ezek.  3:  21. 

d.  A  pronoun  may  be  added  in  apposition  to  a  personal  subject  or  ob- 
ject in  order  to  attach  other  associated  persons;  thus  to  a  subject,  the 
handmciids  came  near  ')n'^|}^^i.  •^i^  they  a7id  their  children,  Gen.  33:  6,  43:  8, 
50:  14,  Ex.  12:  4,  24:  1,  Deut.  2:  32,  3:  1,  5:  14,  6:  2,  12:  7,  12,  18,  Judg. 
19:  9,  Jer.  19:  4,  Zh:  8 ;  to  a  direct  object.  Gen.  41  :  10;  to  an  indirect  ob- 
ject, 1  Kin.  2:  22,  Ps.  115:  14;  though  the  addition  of  a  pronoun  is  not 
necessary  in  such  cases  Ex.  18:  5,  6,  Num.  16:  18,  27,  Judg.  7:  19,  Jer.  19:  1. 

Interrogative  and  Negative  Sentences. 

§  298.  1.  A  direct  question  is  indicated  by  the  inter- 
rogative particle  H,  ^ibn"  ivilt  thou  go?  Gen.  24:  58, 
■•wJi  D'^bx  rirnn  am  I  in  the  place  of  God?  Gen.  50:  19; 
an  indirect  question  by  H  or  DSi  if,  to  knoiv  D"'ini<  DDlT'n 
ivhetlwr  you  love  Deut.  13:  4,  inquire  M^nj^'Di^  whether  I 
shall  recover  prop,  if  I  shall  2  Kin.  1 :  2. 

a.  The  interrogative  particle  properly  stands  at  the  beginning  of  its 
clause,  and   may  precede  a  hypothetical  clause  on  which  the  quest  on  de- 


§  298      INTEEEOGATIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  SENTENCES.  365 

pends  Gen.  4:  7,  Job  4:2;  in  Ps.  94:  9,  10  it  is  for  greater  efifect  repeated 
before  tbe  principal  word.  It  is  added  to  strengthen  another  interrogative 
Jer.  23:  26.  It  is  disputed,  whether  CiXli  in  Num.  17:  28,  Job  6:  13  is  equi- 
valent to  an  emphatic  n  or  to  xbn  (DX  as  in  oaths  §  305.  a).  The  force  of 
the  particle  In  may  extend  to  subsequent  clauses  Ezek.  17:  15;  so  other 
words  of  interrogation  1  Sam.  15:  19,  Ps.  73:  11,  74:  1,  Hos.  11:  8.  n  asks 
a  question,  whose  answer  is  uncertain,  tiijinx  tt'^'^'^if?,  is  your  father  well? 
Gen.  43 :  27 ;  also  when  a  negative  answer  is  obviously  expected :  "^nx  ''^^'^\}, 
"'DJX  am  I  my  brothers  keeper?  Gen.  4:  9,  2  Sam.  7:5,  as  on  the  other 
hand  xbn  expects  an  affirmative  answer,  '^V'l^X  X^lrt  i<btl  did  he  not  him- 
self say  to  me  Gen.  20:  5,  2  Kin.  20:  19;  sometimes  n  demands  an  affirma- 
tive answer,  wliere  any  other  is  obviously  inadmissible  PH^'^tn  hast  thou 
murdered?  as  thou  certainly  hast  1  Kin.  21:  19,  b;^;n  teas  it  a  light  thing 
i.  e.  since  it  was  in  his  estimation  a  light  thing  1  Kin.  16:  31,  1  Sam.  2:  27, 
Job  20:  4.  In  a  few  instances  H  introduces  an  indirect  question,  Gen. 
8:  8,  Ex.  4:  18,  Esth.  3:  4. 

2.  In  a  disjunctive  question  whether  direct  or  in- 
direct the  first  member  is  commonly  introduced  by  H 
and  the  second  by  Dij!  or  Dskl;  thus  direct  Tj^.i<n  sJiall  1 
go  b^n^^  DN!  or  shall  I  forbear?  1  Kin.  22:  6,  '^ifT}  ^s  it 
any  pleasure  '$'13r'n^\  or  is  it  gain?  Job  22:  3,  Num.  11: 
12,  Judg.  20:  28,  Job  7:  12,  40:  8,  9,  Isa.  10:  9,  Jer.  18: 
14,  Am.  3:  5,  6,  6:2,  Hab.  3:8;  indirect,  to  kuoiv  r/t'ir\T] 
whether  Jehovah  had  prosx)ered  his  way  ^^b'DS;  or  not  Gen. 
24:  21,  27:  21,  37:  32,  Num.  11:  23,  Judg.  2:  22. 

a.  The  second  member  is  more  rarely  introduced  by  is  or,  who  knotveth 
bbs  "ist  n^ri"^  Q^^H  whether  he  shall  be  a  tvise  man  or  a  fool  Eccl.  2:  19,  or 
by  n  repeated  nE"iti  X'lri  pTnri  ivhether  they  be  strong  or  tveak  Num.  13:  18, 
jilin  ^'i'b  Qrsip  i;'i3"i"'Vii  have  ye  called  us  to  impoverish  us  or  not?  Judg. 
14:  15  or  by  H  is,  ti^nsn  hath  there  been  the  like  i't'-^?^!  '^!><  or  hath  the 
like  been  heard?  Deut.  4:  32.  The  construction  of  the  second  clause  is 
interrupted  and  resumed  again  in  Gen.  17:  17. 

b.  If  a  question  stand  in  a  disjunctive  relation  to  something  pi'eviously 
expressed  or  implied,  it  may  begin  with  dX,  "i^J'n  "TonS'DX  Q335'7  your  per- 
versity! or  is  the  potter  to  be  reckoned  as  the  clay?  Isa.  29:  16,  "'JiX  rxp  CS 
or  is  this  thing  from  my  lord?  1  Kin.  1:  27,  2  Kin.  20:  9,  Prov.  27:  24,  Jer. 
48:  27.  Occasionally  in  poetry  GS  is  used  in  questions  which  are  neithei 
disjunctive  nor  indirect  Hos.  12:  12. 

3.  A  question  may  also  be  asked  by  means  of  the 
interrogative  pronouns  or  interrogative  adverbs.  Or  it 
may,  without  any  particle  of  interrogation,  be  indicated 


366  SYNTAX.  §  299 

simply  by  the  tone  of  voice  in  wliicli  it  is  uttered,  DJ'd 
?{Sizi  thy  coming  is  peaceful?  1  Sam.  16:  4,  1?ib  DiblT  the 
young  man  is  safe?  2  Sam.  18:  29,  comp.  ver.  32. 

o.  "^12  who  is  sometimes  stieni,'thened  by  the  addition  of  a  demonstra- 
tive, thus  ni  -^72  who  then?  Job  38:  2,  Pa.  24:  8,  25:  12,  Jer.  46:  7;  Kin  -^a 
Job  13:  19;  SiT  K^H  "^-a  Esth.  7:  6,  Ps.  24:  10,  Jer.  30:  21.  "'a  is  so  invari- 
ably used  substantively  that  it  is  probably  to  be  so  construed  even  in  such 
combinations  as  n^ri")  "133  "^^  who  is  a  man  that  shall  live  Ps.  89:  49,  so 
Deut.  3:  24,  Judg.  21:  8,  2  Sam.  7:  23;  tio  what  on  the  other  hand  is  often 
used  attributively,  ^^S-np  tvhat  gain?  Gen.  37:  26,  Job  26:  14,  Ps.  89:  48, 
Prov.  16:  16,  Mai.  1:  13.  ""3  always  stands  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause 
unless  preceded  by  a  noun  in  the  construct  state,  "^p  ",3  whose  son?  1  Sam. 
17:  56,  58  or  by  a  preposition  "''3  I'^nx  after  whom?  1  Sam.  24:  15;  the 
subject  may  emphatically  precede  rir'i  for  what?  why?  1  Sam.  24:  3.  n  is 
in  a  few  instances  dropped  before  a  guttural  letter,  1  Sam.  22:  15,  2  Sam. 
15:  20,  19:  23,  1  Kin.  1:  24;  or  omitted  from  a  question  when  another  pre- 
cedes introduced  by  n  Job  37:  18,  38:  18,  39:  2,  40:  30,  Question  with  no 
sign  of  interrogation,  Ex.  8:  22,  Judg.  14:  16,  1  Sam.  22:  7,  27:  10,  Job 
40:  25,  Jer.  25:  29,  Zech.  8:  6,  Mai.  2:  15.  * 

§  299.  A  negative  prefixed  to  a  clause  negatives  like- 
wise those  that  follow,  if  they  are  regarded  as  continuous 
^:nb5^^n  sb  thou  hast  not  brought  us  '^':^"^r\"'\  nor  given  us 
Num.  IG:  14,  ^rn'^irrbs^  rebuke  me  not  "j^.^T}  ^ri"^n»!i  7ior 
in  tliy  wrath  cliastise  me  Ps.  38:  2,  1  Sam.  2:  3,  Job  4:  6, 
23:  17,  30:  25,  32:  9,  Ps.  44:  19,  75:  6,  Prov.  30:  3,  Isa. 
14:  21;  but  if  the  latter  are  considered  as  separate  and 
distinct,  they  are  unaffected  by  an  antecedent  negative, 
if  ^i'acn  t<b  ye  will  not  hearken  dr\'^'2^  hut  rebel  1  Sam. 
12:  15,  ^n^cri"bs  turn  not  aside  Drn23?1  but  serve  Jehovah 
ver.  20,  15:  9,  18:  17,  2  Sam.  14:  14.  which  must  be  re- 
peated, if  its  force  is  to  be  extended,  ~T«"&^b  he  hath  not 
despised  yp'i'  &^bl  and  hatli  not  abhorred  TriCrr^ib'l  CDid 
hath  not  hidden  ?rtj  ii'V^i^^  ct^nd  hath  heard  him  when  he 
cried  Ps.  22:  25,  Josh.  1:  5^  9,  1  Sam.  12:  21,  Isa.  23:  4' 
38:  18,  40:  24. 

a.  When  a  condition  is  negatived,  whatever  was  suspended  upon  it  is 
negatived  as  to  actual  performance,  though  its  conditional  relation  remains, 
ninxi  nhT  I'snr-NS  thou  desircst  not  sacrifice,  but  if  thou  didst  desire  it, 
i  would  ijivc  it  Ps.  51:  18,  55:  13.  UO:  9,  Jer  5:  28,  Ezek.  11:  11,  §  275.  2.  b. 


§300  BELATIVE  CLAUSES.  3G7 

In  a  few  instances  interpreters  are  not  agreed  whether  the  force  of  the 
negative  extends  to  the  second  clause  or  not,  e.  g.  Deut,  33 :  6,  Job  32 :  3. 

b.  Negative  adverbs  precede  the  verbs  and  adjectives  which  they  qual- 
ify Gen.  2:  5,  18  and  commonly  stand  at  the  beginning  of  their  clause. 
X^  is  in  poetry  sometimes  prefixed  to  nouns  forming  a  sort  of  negative 
compound,  bs<;~S<b  a  not- God,  incapable  of  being  regarded  as  God,  of  a  na- 
ture opposite  to  his,  Db'Xb  a  not-people  Deut.  32:  21,  Job  10:  22,  26:  2, 
Isa.  10:  15,  31:  8,  55:  2,  Jer.  5:  7;  K^  and  bs  are  exceptionally  used  as 
nouns  in  Job  6:  21,  24:  25. 

c.  There  is  an  ambiguity  in  certain  cases  in  the  use  of  negatives,  ac- 
cording as  they  qualify  the  verb  or  some  other  word  in  the  sentence.  Thus 
']iil  ys  b^'O  Ji^^sn'Xb  Gen.  3 :  1  may  negative  the  act  of  eating  with  respect 
to  all  the  trees  of  the  garden,  as  though  they  were  to  eat  of  none,  comp. 
Gen.  11:  6,  1  Sam.  14:  24,  Isa.  54;  17,  Ezek.  18:  22,  §  248.  6.  e;  or  the  ne- 
gative may  terminate  upon  "all"  and  indicate  that  the  eating  may  be  of 
some  but  not  of  all  the  trees,  comp.  Lev.  16:  2,  Num.  23;  13,  Josh.  7:  3, 
1  Kin.  11 ;  13.  So  in  Ci^isb  I^iiai.  K^  Ps.  15:  5  the  verb  is  negatived,  he  shall 
not  be  moved  for  ever,  he  shall  never  be  moved,  comp.  Ps.  10;  11,  30;  7, 
49:  20,  55:  23,  Jer.  50;  39,  Joel  2:  26;  but  in  Ci^ii'l?  "i'ii:X  xb  Jer.  3:  12  the 
negative  qualifies  D^iS"^  it  is  not  for  ever  but  only  for  a  season  that  God 
retains  his  anger.  Conip.  Job  7:  16,  Ps.  9:  19,  44;  24,  103;  9,  Prov.  27:  24, 
Isa.  28:  28,  Lam.  3:  31.  For  the  use  of  bx  and  xb  with  the  different  forms 
of  the  future,  see  §§  271.  b,  111.  c,  273,  273.  d,  'i.lb.  2.  c,  for  "i-^X  with  the 
participle  see  §  278.  4.  b,  for  ""n^S  with  the  infinitive  see  §  279.  e,  for  xb 
with  the  emphatic  infinitive  absolute,  see  §  281.  1.  6, 


Relative  Clauses. 

§  300.  From  simple  sentences,  or  those  whicli  con- 
tain a  single  proposition,  we  now  pass  to  compound  sen- 
tences in  whicli  two  or  more  propositions  are  linked 
together.  These  several  propositions  constitute  as  many 
distinct  clauses,  which  are  for  the  most  part  united  by 
the  relative  pronoun  or  by  conjunctions.  As  the  relative 
regularly  occupies  the  first  place  in  its  own  clause,  and 
as  the  Hebrew  admits  of  no  inflections  to  represent  case, 
some  special  device  was  necessary  to  indicate  its  relation 
to  the  following  words.  Accordingly,  when  the  relative 
^ib'yt  is  governed  by  a  verb,  noun,  or  preposition,  this  is 
shown  by  appending  an  appropriate  pronominal  suffix 
to  the  governing  word,  §  74;  lionises  of  clay  ^2:^3  ^^'i< 


368  BTNTZX  §  300 

Diic^  u'Jiose  fouudafion  is  in  the  dust  Job  4:  19;  the 2Jl((ce 
V3>"  ...  nirs  iqwn  tuhich  Ex.  3:5;  thou  ?)'ri";"3  ^'Ci?>  ivhom 
I  have  chosen  Isa.  41:  8;  thou  T\L^11V  whose  king  Eccl.  10: 
17.  The  personal  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  added,  when 
the  relotive  is  the  subject  of  its  clause,  §  24G.  2,  t<in"n"yrs; 
rzrz  2cho  is  saving  you  1  Sam.  10:  19,  «^~  ^\''^"X^  ^^  ^%^ 
who  is  not  of  thy  seed  Gen.  17:  12,  7:  2,  9:  3,  Num.  17:  5, 
35:  31,  Deut.  20:  15,  2  Chron.  8:  7,  Ps.  16:  3,  but  never 
if  the  clause  contain  a  verb,  since  its  inflections  suf&- 
cientl}^  indicate  the  antecedent. 

a.  The  relative  naturally  refers  to  the  nearest  noun,  whose  sense  will 
admit  of  such  a  reference,  or  to  one  in  the  nearest  group  of  nouns.  In  Isa. 
29:  22  the  remoter  noun  is  manifestly  the  antecedent,  but  such  instances 
are  rare.  In  a  few  cases  the  antecedent  is  a  pronominal  suffix  I^X  'nx  6y 
it  (the  altar)  irhich  ivos  1  Kin.  9:  25;  Ps.  31:  8  (where  some  regard  "riix  as 
a  conjunction),  Eccles.  10:  15,  Zech.  12:  10.  The  antecedent  is  transferred 
to  the  relative  clause  in  Jer.  14:  1  n^H";  "irn  n'n  li"S  lit.  that  which  icas 
the  u-ord  etc.  for  the  tvord  of  Jehovah  tvhich  was  etc.;  so  46:  1,  47:  1,  49:  34, 
Ezek.  12:  25;  but  not  Lev.  4:  22,  Num.  5:  29  where  ^"I'l*  is  a  conjunction, 
conip.  1  Kin.  8:  31.  In  Ps.  69:  27  the  relative  j'ieids  the  first  place  in  its 
clause  to  a  word  emphatically  prefixed;  so  in  all  probability  2  Chron.  8:  9, 
where  "rx  bx"^^"^  "32  'la  must  mean  those  tvJio  u^ere  of  the  children  of  Israel 
(in  the  parallel  passage  1  Kin.  9:  22  I'l'X  does  not  occur).  In  Kccles.  7:  24 
pin"!  does  not  belong  to  the  relative  but  to  the  principal  clause. 

6.  The  suffix  emploj'ed  to  indicate  the  government  of  the  relative  may 
be  in  the  first  or  second  person  corresponding  with  the  subject  of  the  prin- 
cj|)al  clause,  even  though  the  relative  refers  more  directly  to  an  antecedent 
in  the  third  person,  I  am  Joseph  "^rx  .  . .  "irx  u-hom  ye  sold  Gen.  45:  4, 
Num.  22:  30,  Isa.  49:  3,  23,  Jer.  32:  19,  Ezek.  11:  12.  The  verb  attachec* 
to  the  relative  follows  the  person  of  its  antecedent  2  Sam.  3:8,  or  it  maj 
in  like  manner  be  attracted  to  the  first  or  second  person  occurring  in  the 
principal  clause  I  am  Jehovah  who  T^'T^'4."r\  have  hroiujht  thee  out  Ex.  20:  2, 
1  Chron.  21:  17.  In  Deut.  30:  16  "^bix  li"X  is  not  the  relative  with  the 
first  person  pronoun  added  after  the  analogy  of  tt"n  in  other  places,  §  300, 
I  who,  but  is  a  conjunctive  for,  inaftmuch  as,  but  not  Ex.  3:  14.  The  ar- 
ticle, when  used  for  the  relative  S  248.  6.  c  is  in  like  manner  followed  by 
a  suffix  to  represent  the  oblique  cases  1  Chron.  29:  8.  Occasionally  for 
greater  perspicuiiy  or  emphasis  the  noun  itself  may  be  repeated  after  the 
lelative  instead  of  a  suflix  Gen.  13:  16  (or  "I'l'X  a  conjunction  .so  that)  49:  30, 
50:  13,  Jer.  31:  32.  In  Ps.  8:2  a  noun  explanatory  of  the  antecedent  is  in 
apposition  with  the  relative,  if  n:r\  is  imper.  which  jjut  viz.  thy  glory,  but 
not  if  it  is  infin.  thoxif  the  jndting  of  whose  glory  i.  e.  who  hast  put  thy 
glory,   §  132.  1.     -'"'X  when  used  as  an  indefinite  pronoun,  §  246.  2.  b,  and 


§301 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES.  369 


standing  in  a  possessive  relation  to  nouns  often  follows  the  analogy  of  the 
relative,  in  being  prefixed  absolutely  and  then  represented  in  the  course  of 
the  sentence  by  a  pronominal  suffix,  comp.  §  297.  b,  "i^ibnis  U3'>X  according 
to  the  dream  of  each,  Gen.  41 :  12,  rns  iy"'5<  1^^  from  the  hand  of  each  one's 
brother  Gen.  9:  5,  15:  10,  42:  25,  35,  Ex.  12:  4,  28:  21,  Num.  5:  10,  12, 
17:  17,  26:  54,  Judg.  21:  22,  2  Chron.  23:  10,  Cant.  3:  8;  though  it  may 
also  follow  the  usual  construction  of  nouns,  the  silver  of  each  may  be  C]D3 
ia'^i<  Gen.  43:  21,  44:  1  as  well  as  'ibp?  IZiiX  42:  35,  Prov.  12:  14,  13:  2, 
comp.  Zech.  7:  10  with  8:  17. 

c.  The  suffix  is  never  omitted  when  the  relative  is  govei-ned  by  a  pre- 
position, and  only  once  when  governed  by  a  noun  Nah.  3:  8:  "but  though 
often  added  after  transitive  verbs  Isa.  29:  11,  Jer.  19:  4,  it  is  quite  as  fre- 
quently omitted  when  not  required  by  perspicuity  or  emphasis  Gen.  6:7; 
so  also  when  it  is  a  secondary  object  §  287.  3  ashes  "it^N  to  which  the  fire 
shall  consume  the  burnt-offering  Lev.  6:3;  and  sometimes  after  verbs  which 
usually  take  an  indirect  object,  thus  after  "ina,  §  286.  1.  a.  Num.  16:  7  (but 
see  ver.  5),  Gen.  6:  2,  Deut.  12:  5,  after  "ihs  Deut.  29:  15.  It  may  also 
stand  absolutely  §  288.  2  to  denote  general  relation,  where  precision  would 
have  required  a  preposition  Gen.  22:  14  {in  respect  to  which  it  is  said,  or 
"itx  may  be  a  conjunction  so  that),  Ex.  4:  28,  2  Sam.  11:  22,  Isa.  8;  12, 
31:  6,  Jer.  42:  5;  or  the  relations  of  time  {in  tvhich,  when)  Gen.  6:  4,  Lev. 
4:  22,  2  Sam.  19:  25,  1  Kin.  8:  9,  Ps.  139:  15;  place  {tvhere  which  might 
be  more  fully  expressed  by  Ci'j  .  .  .  "itx,  §  74)  Gen.  35:  13,  14,  39:  20, 
Deut.  1:  31,  or  {to  which,  whither  after  verbs  of  motion,  equivalent  to 
nala  ....  itx)  Gen.  28:  15,  Num.  13:  27,  Josh.  1:  7,  1  Kin.  12:  2,  Jer.  22:  12; 
manner  {in  which,  according  to  which,  as,  how)  Gen.  30:  29,  Ex.  14:  13, 
1  Kin.  14:  19,  1  Chron.  13:  6  as  he  is  called  by  name;  or  cause  {for  which, 
lohy)  1  Kin.  11:  27  or  means  {by  which,  with  which)  Deut.  7:  19,  2  Kin. 
19:  6. 

§  301.  When  the  antecedent  is  expressed,  the  rela- 
tive clause  has  the  force  of  an  attributive,  the  man  whom 
the  Lord  loveth  being  equivalent  to  the  man  beloved  of  the 
Lord.  When  the  antecedent  is  not  expressed,  it  is  in- 
cluded in  "iry»,  which  then  resembles  the  Enghsh  com- 
pound relative  tvhat,  and  must  be  rendered  he  who  or 
that  which  jih'^lL'b?  mi;!S;"nij5  lil'^l  and  he  commanded  him 
who  was  over  his  house  Gen.  44:  1,  Jer.  15:2,  to  mahe 
thee  understand  "iljy;  n^5  that  which  shall  befall  thy  people 
Dan.  10:  14,  nirsb  to  those  who  Gen.  47:  24,  Ruth  2:  2, 
r^iiir  ^ips  n^n  into  the  hand  of  them  whom  thou  hatest 
Ezek.  23:28.' 

a.  Eelative  clauses  may  accordingly  interchange  with  attributive  parti- 

24 


370  8TKTAX.  §  302 

ciples,  Isa.  48:  1,  or  with  participles  used  substantively  Ps.  15:  3-5.    So  the 
indefinite  pronoun  ""aS  Eccles.  5:  9. 

b.  For  the  compound  relative  as  a  subject,  the  personal  pronoun  may 
be  expressed,  and  the  relative  omitted,  (instead  of  the  reverse)  "inTD  Kim 
Ezek.  33:  6  (better  explained  §309.  2.  a),  or  both  may  be  expressed  itx  Xin 
1  Chron.  21 :  17.  The  personal  pronoun  may  be  introduced  before  the  verb 
to  give  emphasis  to  a  relative  clause,  which  is  its  subject  "•■^"N  he  that  shall 
come  forth  etc.  xin  he  shall  be  thine  heir  Gen.  15:  4,  Deut.  18:  22,  Eccl.  3: 
14,  Job  6:  7  where  "I'ls  is  understood  in  the  first  clause.  The  sign  of  the 
definite  object  rx  or  a  preposition  preceding  a  relative  clause,  belongs  not 
to  the  relative  but  to  the  antecedent  understood  or  to  the  entire  clause 
ni;x  by  not  u7ifo  tvhom,  but  unto  him  tvho  etc.  Isa.  29:  12,  I  make  thee  to 
know  irs  rx  that  which  shall  be  Dan.  8:  19,  we  have  heard  "irx  rx  how  etc.. 
Josh.  2:  10.  Exceptions  are  extremely  rare  ^"1"X  D"  tvifh  whom  Gen.  31:  32, 
">il"X  rx  whom  Jer.  38:  9,  Zech.  12:  10;  Geseuius  finds  another  in  "i"i;X3 
Isa.  47:  12,  but  this  can  be  otherwise  explained. 

§  302.  The  relative  is  frequently  omitted,  not  only 
as  in  English,  when  it  is  the  object  of  an  attributive 
clause,  ^zy  inriir^  into  the  pit  (which)  they  have  made  Ps. 
9:  16;  but  also  when  it  is  the  subject,  he  forsook  rii^N 
^r:cs  God  (who)  made  him  Deut.  32:  15;  and  even  where 
it  would  stand  for  the  compound  relative  and  include 
its  antecedent  nVoiri'l'ia  hj  the  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou 
wilt  send  Ex.  4:  13;  (so  doth)  ^^51:^  bi^^"i  Sheol  (those  who) 
have  simied  Job  24:  19. 

a.  Additional  examples  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  relative  in  an  attributive 
clause,  when  it  is  the  direct  object  Ex.  13:  8,  1  Chron.  29:  3,  Ps.  7:  16, 
25:  12,  51:  10,  80:  18,  Isa.  10:  1,  42:  16,  rarely  when  the  antecedent  has 
the  article  Job  28:  1;  occasionall}'  the  pronominal  suffix  is  added  to  the 
governing  word  Deut.  32:  17,  Job  4:  19,  13:  28,  28:  7,  Ps.  109:  19.  When 
the  relative  is  an  indirect  object  Ex.  18:  20,  Deut.  32:  37,  Isa.  48:  21.  When 
it  is  the  subject,  with  no  verb  expressed  Gen.  15:  13,  Deut.  7:  25,  Ptov. 
26:  17,  Hab.  1:  6,  with  "Ql  Gen.  39:  4  (but  see  ver.  5);  with  a  verb  Job 
13:  19,  20:  26,  Ps.  17:  12,  78:  6,  91 :  5,  6,  Isa.  30:  6,  in  a  very  few  instances 
when  the  antecedent  is  definite  Ps.  49:  13,  21.  When  the  relative  is  gov- 
erned by  a  noun  Ezr.  1:  5,  Isa.  43:  14.  When  the  relative  would  stand 
absolutely,  as  expressing  the  manner  or  means  Job  21:  27,  place  Job 
38:  19,  24,  or  time  Ps.  49:  6.  In  designations  of  time  the  antecedent  is 
usually  in  the  construct,  §  258.  2,  1  Sam.  25:  15,  2  Chron.  24:  11,  Job  6:  17, 
29:  2,  Ps.  4:  8,  56:  4,  88:  2,  90:  15,  Lam.  3:  57,  less  frequently  when  it  de- 
notes place  Isa.  29:  1.  Still  more  rarely  other  antecedents  m;<y  b}'  poetic 
license  be  put  in  the  construct  before  an  attributive  clause  with  the  rela- 
tive  omitted,  Ps.   16:  3,   58:  5,  81:  6,  Jer.  43;  36   TiirJ  nnn*;   (but  in  the 


§303 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES.  371 


parallel  Isa.  15:  7  niis  nnn*;),  Hos.  1:  2  -13^  n|niri  at  first  ivhen  Jehovah 
spake;  a  like  construction  has  been  needlessly  assumed  Gen.  1:  1,  §  250.  h. 
Some  have  fancied  an  anomalous  ellipsis  of  the  relative  before  the  infinitive 
Jer.  10:  13  "ipin  'b'\ph  at  the  voice  of  his  uttering  i.  e.  which  he  utters;  it 
may,  however,  be  read  at  the  sound  of  his  giving  abundance  ofivater.  The 
nouns  D"ip^  place  and  di"!  dag  are  in  ordinary  prose  repeatedly  put  in  the 
construct  before  the  relative  clause  even  when  ^rx  is  expressed  Gen.  39 :  20, 
40:  3,  Num.  9:  17,  1  Kin,  21:  19,  Eccles.  1:  7,  Ps.'l04:  8  (where  nt  is  used 
as  a  relative);  Deut.  4:  10,  Jer.  20:  14,  38:  28;  so  in  the  phrase  "irx  "^^T^? 
for  the  reason  that,  because  Deut.  22:  24,  23:  6,  2  Sam.  13:  22.  There  are 
occasional  examples  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  relative  after  the  adverbs  of  place 
and  time,  dt"^  from  the  place  where  Gen.  49:  24,  tX^  from  the  time  when 
Ex.  4:  10,  5:^23,  Kuth  2:  7,  Ps.  76:  8,  Jer.  44:  18. 

b.  When  the  antecedent  is  not  expressed,  there  may  be  an  ellipsis  of 
the  relative  in  a  clause  which  is  governed  by  a  noun  in  the  construct  state, 
Job  18:  21,  Ps.  65:  5,  Lam.  1:  14  whei'e  there  is  great  brevity  of  expres- 
sion, Prov.  8:  32  where  the  verb  is  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  Ezek.  11:  21 
where  the  relative  clause  is  prefixed  absolutely  and  a  suffix  attached  to  the 
governing  noun,  Isa.  57:  3  where  it  is  connected  with  a  preceding  part'c'ple 
by  Vav  Consec.  tii^m  r]S;5T3  35'n7  seed  of  an  adulterer  and  of  one  who  played  the 
harlot;  or  governed  by  a  preposition  Job  34:  32,  Isa.  65:  1,  Jer.  2:  8,  11, 
51:  3,  Ezek.  13:  3,  Obad.  ver.  16,  Prov.  14:  14  where  T^^^'p  means  from  that 
which  is  incumbent  on  him  i.  e.  the  result  of  his  faithful  discharge  of  duty; 
this  construction  is  in  prose  almost  entirely  confined  to  Chronicles  1  Chron. 
15:  12,  2  Chron.  1:  4,  16:  9,  30:  18,  19,  Neh.  8:  10.  Or  when  the  relative 
clause  is  the  object  of  a  verb,  I  give  to  them  D^in^^i  those  who  shall  pass 
through  them  Jer.  8:  13,  Hab.  2:  6,  possibly  Job  24:  9  where  some  render 
'lar"^?  that  which  is  upon  the  poor  i.  e.  his  clothing;  oi-  the  subject  Judg. 
5:  14,  Job  18:  15,  Ps,  22:  30,  Isa.  41:  24,  and  perhaps  48:  14  and  63:  19; 
in  Hab.  3:  16  it  is  the  subject  of  a  preceding  construct  infinitive. 

c.  Where  there  is  a  conscious  ellipsis  of  the  relative,  it  must  of  course 
be  supplied  in  thought.  But  there  is  a  strong  disposition  in  the  Hebi-ew  to 
coordinate  simple  sentences,  rather  than  to  build  up  compound  sentences 
by  means  of  dependent  clauses.  Relative  clauses  are  accordingly  in  many 
instances  resolved  into  or  exchanged  for  separate  sentences  whose  connec- 
tion with  the  preceding  is  merely  suggested  by  juxtaposition  1  Kin.  11:  14, 
Isa.  42:  1,  Jer.  5:  15,  49:  31,  or  by  the  loose  connection  of  the  copulative 
and,  nt-r^i  and  her  name  for  tvhose  name  teas  Gen.  16:  1,  2  Sam.  12:  30,  Job 
42:  3,  Isa.  41:  9,  Jer.  17:  5,  Ezek  13:  22.  It  mars  this  venerable  simplicity 
of  the  language  to  assume  relative  constructions  or  complicated  sentences, 
where  this  is  unnecessary:  Ps.  45:  6,  for  example,  is  not  to  be  relieved  of 
its  apparently  disjointed  character  by  giving  a  relative  force  to  the  paren- 
thesis 0  thou,  under  tvhom  nations  fall. 

§  303.  The  demonstrative  JlT  or  ^T  is  frequently  used 
in  poetry  with  the  force  of  a  relative,  and  it  then,  like 
the  EngUsh  tJiat,  suffers  no  change  for  gender  or  number, 

24* 


372  SYNTAX.  §  304,  305 

Tpt"^  mT  Dip 53  the  place  that  thou  Jmst  founded  Ps.  104:  8, 
^irn  ^T  rii3T53  devices,  that  they  have  contrived  Ps.  10:  2. 

a.  n\  as  a  relative  Ps.  78:  54,  104:  26,  Prov.  23:  22;  plur.  Job  19:  19; 
governed  by  prep,  as  shown  by  a  following  suf.  Ps.  74:  2  ;  If  Ex.  15:  13,  16, 
Ps.  32:  8,  68:  29,  142:  4,  143:  8;  feni.  Ps.  9:  16,  31:  5;  piur.  Ps.  17:  9; 
gov.  by  prep.  Isa.  42:  24;   M  fem.  plur.  Ps.  132:  12. 

§  304.  The  indefinite  pronoun  ivhoever,  whatever  may- 
be expressed  by  "licx  with  no  antecedent  nj<r)  I'iJS  he 
whom  i.  e.  ivhomsoever  thou  cursest  Num.  22:  6  or  pre- 
ceded by  biD  Gen.  6:  2,  7:  22,  19:  12,  Isa.  19:  17  (when 
used  of  place  ivherever  2  Sam.  7:7,  or  absolutely  to  de- 
note manner  hoivever,  Zeph.  3:7)  or  by  some  other  in- 
definite antecedent  as  ^'£3  Lev.  5:  2  or  Tr"i*  Ex.  35:  21, 
23,  24;  ^32  Gen.  19: 12,  Ex.  24: 14  and  TTq  2  Sam.  18:  22, 
Job  13:  13  are  used  both  as  indefinite  and  interrogative 
pronouns  §  75.  1.  Ti"X  "d";  ht.  there  were  those  who  is  re- 
peated Neh.  5:  2-4  in  the  sense  of  some others,  and 

Num.  9:  20.  21  in  application  to  various  times  and  cir- 
cumstances sometimes  ....  at  other  times. 

a.  As  the  iudefiiiite  pronoun  often  introduces  what  is  equivalent  to  a 
conditional  clause ;  it  may  in  like  manner  be  followed  by  an  apodosis  with 
1,  §  306;  thus  "lix  with  whomsoever  of  thy  servants  it  shall  he  found  (i.  e. 
if  it  be  found  with  any  one)  Tx^  he  shall  die  Gen.  44:  9,  Ex.  30:  33,  38, 
Lev.  22:  6,  Num.  5:  30,  31  (where  in  a  series  of  Vav  consec.  preterites  the 
beginning  of  the  apodosis  is  determined  by  the  sense  alone),  Josh.  15:  16, 
Ex.  9:  21  (with  Vav  consec.  future);  "^ri  Hos.  14:  10,  no  1  Sam.  20:  4,  and 
the  combination  iip  "I3n  which  only  occurs  in  this  one  instance.  Num.  23:  3. 

h.  How  the  interrogative  comes  to  be  used  as  an  indefinite  pronoun 
may  be  seen  in  such  passages  as  Ex.  32:  26,  Prov.  9:  4,  Isa.  50:  8  where 
either  rendering  is  admissible,  and  from  a  comparison  of  Judg.  7 :  3  (indef ) 
with  Deut.  20:  8  (interrog.).  The  indefinite  pronoun  is  rendered  somewhat 
more  emphatic  by  the  addition  of  the  relative,  "I'l'X  "'•3  whoevh'  there  is  that 
Ex.  32:  33,  2  Sam.  20:  11,  Eccles.  9:  4;  the  corresponding  V;;  H"?  is  only 
found  in  Ecclesiastes,  see  1:  9,  3:  15  etc.  "^'2  is  once  found  in  apposition  to 
a  vocative  ■'b~^i"30  whoever  ye  be,  care  for  the  young  man  Absalom  2  Sam. 
18:  12. 

§  305.  When  the  relative  does  not  refer  to  a  pre- 
ceding noun  or  pronoun  expressed  or  understood,  but 
simply  marks  the  relation  between  clauses,  it  ceases  to 


§  305  EELATIVE  CLAUSES.  373 

be  a  pronoun  and  becomes  a  relative  conjunction  as  the 
Lat.  quod  and  Gr.  on.  This  is  the  case  to  a  limited  ex- 
tent with  ^irJi,  while  ^3  has  entirely  lost  its  original  pro- 
nominal character  and  is  only  used  as  a  conjunction. 

a.  After  "^3  or  "nilx  that  with  verbs  of  speaking  the  language  of  direct 
quotation  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  indirect,  she  said  ns<'l""^3  that 
Jehovah  hath  seen  my  affliction  Gen.  29:  32,  20:  11,  26:  22,  Ex.  4:  25,  Josh. 
2:  24,  Buth  1:  10,  1  Sam.  10:  19,  15:  20.  After  the  formula  of  an  oath  its 
language  may   be  introduced  by  "^3,  as  Jehovah  liveth  "^3  (I  swear)   that 

1  Sam.  20.' 3,  25:  34   (repeated  after  a  parenthetical  clause),   26:  16,  29:  6. 

2  Sam.  4:  9,  10;  so  after  ""ix  "^H  as  I  live,  Isa.  49:  18,  comp.  Gen.  42:  16, 
and  after  God  do  so  to  me  and  more  also  Euth  1:  17,  1  Sam.  14:  44,  1  Kin. 
2:  23.  In  other  connexions- also  "^3  may  have  the  sense  of  a  strong  affirma- 
tion equivalent  to  'it  is  so  thaV,  'I  affirm  that',  surely,  verily  Job  12:  2.  In 
oaths  and  protestations  DX  if  has  the  force  of  a  negative,  and  N^  QX  if  not 
that  of  an  affirmative,  God  do  so  to  me  if  I  do  is  the  same  as  saying  'I 
swear  that  I  will  not  do'  2  Sam.  3:  35.  So  when  the  penalty  invoked  is 
not  expressed,  QX-l  Sam.  14:  45,  24:  7,  2  Sam.  11:  11,  20:  20,  2  Kin.  3:  14, 
Ps.  95:  11,  Cant.  2:  7,  Isa.  22:  14;  xb  tDX  Num.  14:  28,  Job  1:  11,  17:  2, 
22:  20,  31:  36,  Isa.  5:  9,  14:  24,  Ezek.  17:  16;  probably  it  is  to  be  similarly 
explained  Gen.  24:  38,  Ps.  131:  2,  Ezek.  3:6,  where  the  affirmation  follow- 
ing a  negative  can  best  be  expressed  by  but.  ^h  is  substituted  for  DX  in 
an  oath  Ezek.  14:  18,  comp.  vs.  16,  20. 

b.  After  a  negative  clause  "^3  for  has  the  sense  of  but,  whether  the 
contrast  suggested  affects  a  particular  word,  a  noun  or  adjective,  ye  did 
not  send  me  hilher  D'^nbxn  13  but  God  lit.  for  God  did  Gen.  45:  8,  17:  15, 
19:  2,  Ex.  16:  8,  Deut.  8:^3,  1  Kin.  21:  15,  2  Chron.  20:  15,  26:  18,  Ezek. 
14:  18;  or  an  entire  clause  his  heart  doth  not  think  so  but  (lit.  for)  to  de- 
stroy is  in  his  heart  Isa.  10:  7,  Gen.  42:  12,  Jer.  2:  20.  The  Hebrew  regards 
the  affirmative  proposition  as  confirming  the  previous  denial  of  one  that 
is  inconsistent  with  it.  Occidental  usage  sets  the  two  propositions  in  ad- 
••ersative  relation.  Frequently  QX  is  added,  when  the  relation  becomes  re- 
ptvictive  instead  of  adversative,  he  hath  not  withheld  any  thing  from  me 
r^^i'x-DX  •'3  except  (lit.  but  when  he  withheld)  thee  Gen.  39 :  9,  thy  name 
shall  no  more  be  called  Jacob  CX  ""S  but  Israel  32 :  29  (if  it  is  called,  or 
when  it  is  called,  this  shall  be  the  appellation),  28:  17,  Lev.  21:  14,  Deut. 
12:  14,  Esth.  2:  15,  Ps.  1 :  2,  4,  Jer.  7:  23.  The  signification  is  the  same 
after  a  question  requiring  a  negative  answer.  Can  a  man  benefit  God? 
",'3p"~"'3  no!  but  a  wise  man  benefits  himself  Job  22:  2;  who  is  blind  "^S 
'i^rS~QX  but  my  servant?  i.  e.  no  one  is  but  he  Isa.  42:  19.  Or  the  nega- 
tive may  be  suggested  by  other  constructions,  I  have  sent  to  thee  saying 
Thou  shalt  give  me  thy  silver  etc.  and  not  this  only,  dx  "^3  but  to  morrow 
I  will  send  etc.  1  Kin.  20:  5,  6;  Job  shall  pray  for  you  in  contrast  with 
the  offerings  which  they  were  to  present  T'DQ~DX  "^3  not  you  but  him  tctll 
I  accept  Job  42:  8.     Sometimes  a  missing  thought  must  be  supplied  to 


374  SYNTAX.  §  306 

malce  the  antithesisi  obvious,  we  will  not  hide  from  vny  lord  dPi-GX  '^  hu% 
the  silrer  is  spent  Gen.  47:  18  i.  e.  not  conceal  but  confess  the  fact  that 
their  money  was  all  gone;  I  -will  not  return  CX  "2  biit  2  Sam.  15:21  K'thibh; 
all  are  not  dead  CX  "^S  btit  2  Sam.  13:  33  K'thibh.  In  the  last  two  ex- 
amples DX  is  omitted  from  the  K'ri  to  obtain  what  at  first  sight  seems  an 
easier  reading,  since  it  requires  nothing  to  be  supplied.  In  a  few  instances 
a  strong  conti  ast  is  expressed  by  CX  "'S  without  a  negative  Num.  24 :  22, 
Lam.  5 :  22.  When  the  particles  CX  "^3  belong  to  distinct  clauses,  each  re- 
tains its  own  proper  signification.  Thus  for,  if  Ex.  8:  17,  Josh.  23:  12, 
Prov,  19:  19,  Isa.  10:  22;  but,  if  Gen.  40:  14,  1  Sam.  20:  9,  2  Kin.  5:  20, 
Lam.  3:  32;  that,  i/"  Judg.  15:  7,  Jer.  26:  15,  51:  14;  that,  not  (in  an  oath) 
2  Sam.  3-35;   surely,  if  (\t  is  so  that,  if)  Ex.  22:  22,  Prov.  2:  3. 

c.  Tho  meaning  and  usage  of  other  conjunctions  can  best  be  learned 
from  the  lexicon.  Several  prepositions  are  converted  into  conjunctions  by 
the  addition  of  "lirx  or  "'3,  thus  "i'^:X2,  "I'ifXS,  ntx  "'is'3,  -.irx  3§,  "^3  bs, 

■^  nnh. 


Hypothetical  Sentences. 

g  306.  As  the  condition  is  from  the  nature  of  tho 
case  prior  to  that  which  is  suspended  upon  it,  the  pre- 
terite tense  is  frequently  employed  in  conditional  clauses, 
not  only  where  they  refer  to  the  past  Ps.  7:  4,  5,  44:  21, 
73'  15,  but  to  the  future  or  to  what  is  valid  at  all  times 
or  may  happen  at  any  time.  The  apodosis  may  or  may 
not  be  introduced  by  Vav;  in  the  latter  case  its  verb,  if 
referring  to  the  future  and  standing  first  in  its  clause 
will  be  put  in  the  preterite  wdth  Vav  Consecutive,  §  277. 6, 
Vrs"^2ri  ^ib"a^{!  if  I  shall  not  bring  him  (lit.  'shall  not  have 
brought  him'  prior  to  the  time  contemplated  in  the  apo- 
dosis) Tt^bni  I  shall  be  a  sinner  Gen.  43:  9,  comp.  44:  32; 
"nr'DSi  if  a  lion  2^'^ss  through  a  flock  "ilti']  cb'l'l  he  will 
trample  and  rend  Mic.  5:  7. 

o.  The  future  may  be  used  in  a  conditional  clause  instead  of  the  pre- 
terite, when  the  thought  is  turned  to  its  actual  futurity  rather  than  to  its 
priority  to  what  follows  Ex.  22:  1,  Lev.  13:  35,  Judg.  6:  37,  13:  16,  Neh. 
2:  5,  Job  16:  6,  Ps.  132;  12,  Nah.  3:  12,  and  even  as  a  frequentative  past, 
§  267.  4,  Gen.  31:  8  (but  see  pret.  for  acts  often  repeated,  Ps.  63:  8,  Isa. 
58:  25,  Jer.  14.  18).  Participles  are  also  used  of  the  present  or  proximate 
future  Judg.  9:  15,  11:  9,  1  Sam.  7:  3,  with  ^■;'  Gen.  24:  42,  49,  Judg.  6:  36, 


§307 


HYPOTHETICAL  SENTENCES.  375 


•with  •';!<  Ex.  8:  17,  1  Sam.  19:  11.  An  Infinitive  with  a  suffix,  Job  9:  27. 
If  there  is  more  than  one  verb  in  the  conditional  clause,  those  that  follow 
a  preterite  may  be  in  the  Vav  consec.  fut.  ^^p,":^'  "^nN^fT'DX  even  if  I  called 
and  he  answered  me,  equivalent  to  'if  I  were  to  call  and  he  to  answer  me' 
at  any  time  hereafter  Job  9:  16,  Num.  35:  16-23  (one  future  ver.  20),  Job 
33:  23,  24,  Ps.  7:  5  (past  time),  or  with  a  more  distinct  e.xpression  of 
futurity  in  the  Vav  consec.  pret.  T'is'^riri'nx  if  thou  direct  (lit.  shalt  have 
directed)  thine  heart  r!"y'^3!l  and  spread  forth  thine  hands  to  him  Job  11:  13, 
or  in  the  future  tense  Deut.  32:  41,  Isa.  4:  4. 

h.  The  apodosis  is  commonly  introduced  by  Vav,  Gen.  28:  20-22,  Ex. 
4:  8,  9,  18:  23,  Lev.  4:  13,  14  (the  sense  only  determines  where  the  apo- 
dosis begins),  5:  1,  Num.  30:  16,  Judg.  14:  12,  13,  Job  10:  14,  21:  6;  though 
often  it  is  not  Gen.  30:  31,  1  Kin.  21:  6,  Job  9:  20,  23,  14:  8,  9,  Ps.  66:  18, 
Isa.  1:  20,  53:  10.  It  may  also  be  inti'oduced  by  i3  surely,  §  305.  a.  Gen. 
31:  42,  43:  10,  Num.  22:  29,  2  Sam.  2:  27,  Job  8:  6,  Isa.  7:  9.  Occasionally 
it  precedes  the  conditional  clause,  Gen.  42:  37,  1  Sam.  14:  30  C^S  rjX),  Isa. 
4:  3,  4,  and  possibly  Ps.  63:  6,  7.  When  the  apodosis  relates  to  the  past, 
its  verb  may  be  in  the  preterite  without  Vav,  Prov.  9:  12,  or  with  Vav 
Conjunctive  Num.  21:  9,  ''ri'irX'l  (observe  the  position  of  the  accent)  Job 
7:  4,  Ps.  78:  34,  or  in  Vav  consec.  future  Job  8:  4,  Ps.  50:  18;  though  the 
preterite  may  also  occur  of  an  act  already  resolved  upon  though  not  yet 
performed  1  Sam.  2:  16,  §  266.  2.  c,  and  in  the  sense  of  a  future  perfect, 
Ps.  127: 1.  The  apodosis  relating  to  the  future  and  the  verb  in  Vav  consec. 
preterite  Ex.  1:  16,  12:  4,  Lev.  13:  36,  Num.  35:  24,  Judg.  21:  21,  2  Sam. 
14:  32,  15:  25,  17:  13,  1  Kin.  3:  14,  Hoa.  9:  12,  Am.  6:  9,  but  very  rarely 
in  the  future  with  Vav  conjunctive  Jer.  5:  1,  23:  22;  of  course  if  the  verb 
does  not  stand  first  in  its  clause,  it  must  be  put  in  the  future  tense,  §  277, 
Ex.  22:  2,  Judg.  4:  8.  The  apodosis  an  imperative  Job  11:  14,  Isa.  21:  12, 
Jer.  14:  7;  in  the  form  of  a  question,  1  Sam.  2:  25,  Job  9:  19,  11:  10, 
14:  14,  31:  13,  14,  35:  6,  7,  Ps.  44:  21,  22,  Eccl.  6:  6,  Je'r.  3:1.  In  the  brief 
language  of  poetry  the  apodosis  is  sometimes  elliptical,  if  his  children  be 
multiplied,  (it  is)  for  the  sword  Job  27:  14,  Ps.  92:  8. 

C.  Successive  conditions  are  expressed  by  DX  . . , .  dX,  or  DX1  . . . .  t2X 
Judg.  13:  16,  Ps.  7:  4,  5,  Am.  9:  2-4;  and  likewise  alternative  conditions, 
iihi;?5-dX  'nrt-dx  whether  male  or  female  Lev.  3:  1,  Ex.  19:  13,  Deut.  18:  3, 
Josh.  24:  15,  2  Sam.  15:  21,  Ezek.  2:  5.  In  alternative  conditions  the  apo- 
dosis of  the  first  is  sometimes  omitted  as  sufficiently  obvious  from  the  tenor 
of  the  whole,  Ex.  32:  32,  1  Sam.  12:  14. 

§  307.  In  ordinary  usage  ''S  when  regards  a  case  as 
actual,  Di^  ^/  as  contingent  and  uncertain,  ^b  if  as  un- 
likely or  untrue,  where  in  English  the  imperfect  or  plu- 
perfect subjunctive  would  be  required;  ^5izlr)  '3  when  thou 
comest  (as  thou  surely  wilt)  ^in^  ^<rn5<1^  and  if  they  will 
not  give  (as  they  may  not)  Gen.  24:  41,  Num.  5:  19,  20; 


376  SYNTAX.  §  308 

2ri".'j.»T!  ^^  ^fyou  had  saved  them  alive  (wLicli  yoii  did  not 
do)  Jndg.  8:  19. 

o.  Hence  in  Ex.  21  classes  of  cases  are  introduced  by  "^3  vs.  2,  7,  18  etc. 
and  the  subordinate  posgibilities  occurring  under  each  of  them  by  CN  vs.  3, 
4,  5  etc.  So  Lev.  1:  2,  3,  10,  2:  1,  4,  5,  7.  Very  unUkely  and  even  im- 
possible conditions  are  sometimes  joined  with  tX  and  are  thus  represented 
as  sujiposable,  3i'~N"CX  if  I  rvere  hungry,  which  I  never  can  be  indeed,  but 
suppose  me  to  be  so  Ps.  50:  12,  139:  8,  Job  20:  6,  34:  14,  Cant.  8:  7,  Jer. 
15:  1,  22:  24,  Am.  9:  2,  3  (linked  with  ver.  4  and  thus  put  on  a  par  with 
what  is  quite  possible  and  probable),  Obad.  ver.  4.  In  all  these  cases  the 
verb  is  future;  to  have  employed  the  preterite  (in  the  sense  of  a  future 
perfect)  would  have  been  to  suppose  the  impossible  actually  accomplished 
at  the  time  referred  to,  which  is  more  violent  than  to  assign  it  to  the  in- 
definite future.  tSIS!  may  also  be  used  with  the  preterite  of  something  sup- 
posed in  the  past,  which  did  not  take  place,  !ino^'-nx  if  they  had  stood,  as 
they  did  not  Jer.  23:  22,  37:  10;  so  ibx  (lb  DX)  Esth.  7:  4,  Eccl.  6:  6;  sib 
Num.  22:  29,  Judg.  13:  23,  2  Sam.  18:  12,  Ps.  81:  14,  Mic.  2:  11.  These 
particles  retain  their  proper  force,  when  combined  with  xb;  xb  ax  leaves 
the  matter  in  doubt  Gen.  43:  9,  xb^lb  implies  the  reverse  of  the  negative 
supposition  that  is  made,  IJfi^Ii^rri  xb^b  if  we  had  not  lingered,  as  we 
actually  did  ver.  10,  31:  42,  Deut.  32:  27,  Judg.  14:  18,  1  Sam.  25:  34,  2  Sam. 
2:  27,  2  Kin.  3:  14,  Isa.  1:9. 

b.  When  the  apodosis  is  different  from  what  might  have  been  expected, 
fix  is  equivalent  to  even  if,  although;  vr\'^-ni<  though  your  sins  be  as  scarlet, 
they  shall  become  tvhife  as  snow  Isa.  1:  18,  10:  22,  Jer.  14:  7,  51:  14,  Hos. 
9:  12,  Job  9:  20.  When  the  apodosis  is  suppressed,  it  may  become  an  ex- 
pression of  desire  0  if!  Ps.  139:  19,  Prov.  24:  11  and  in  the  judgment  of 
the  majority  of  interpreters  Ps.  81:  9,  95:  7,  though  the  necessity  is  not  so 
obvious.  So  !ib  Gen.  17:  18,  23:  13,  Num.  14:  2,  20:3,  Job  6:  2,  Isa.  63:  19; 
in  Gen.  50:  15  it  expresses  apprehension  ivhat  iff 

§  308.  Conditional  clauses  occur,  in  which  the  con- 
ditional particle  is  not  expressed,  but  it  is  plain  from 
the  meaning  and  the  connection  that  the  statement  was 
meant  to  be  understood  hypothetically,  D"pi"i^  and  if 
they  overdrive  them  ^fi'bl  all  the  flock  will  die  Gen.  33:  13; 
2,iT[_  and  if  he  leave  his  father  ir\h)  he  will  die  44:  22; 
^j-FirVo?  had  I  sent  thee  to  them,  they  would  hearken 
Ezek.  3:  6. 

a.  Additional  examples:  Ex.  33:  5,  Ruth  1  :  12,  2  Sam.  19:  8,  2  Kin. 
5:  l:',,  7:  2,  Neh.  1:  8,  Job  7:  20,  10:  16,  19:  4,  20:  24,  perhaps  23:  10,  Ps. 
69:  33,  139:  18,  Prov.  18:  22,  22:  29,  24:  10,  25:  16,  Isa.  26:  10,  Ezek.  14:  17 
(comp.  ver.  15).     The   modal   forms  of  the  verb,   §  270.  1,  may  sometimes 


§  309  CIECUMSTANTIAL  CLAUSES.  377 

suggest  a  condition;  thus  the  intentional,  UlS'^kx  let  me  make  my  bed  in 
Sheol  (i.  e.  if  I  make  etc.)  lo!  thou  art  there  Ps.  139:  8,  73:  16,  Job  11:  17, 
16:  6  6,  19:  18,  30:  26;  the  jussive,  'iPip;^  let  him  hide  his  face  and  who  can 
behold  him?  Job  34:  29,  2  Kin.  6:  27;   the  imperative,  Ps.  22:  9. 

b.  A  hypothetical  sense  should  not  be  gratuitously  given  to  a  passage, 
•which  is  not  hypothetical  in  form.  Interpreters  have  frequently  gone  to 
unwarrantable  lengths  in  this  respect.  A  clause  is  nut  necessarily  condi- 
tional in  the  intention  of  the  writer,  because  a  conditional  clause  might  be 
substituted  for  it  without  a  material  change  of  sense.  Num.  23 :  20  is  not 
a  general  truth  'when  he  has  blessed,  I  cannot  reverse  it'  but  a  particular 
affirmation  'he  has  blessed  in  this  instance  etc'  Such  passages  as  1  Sam. 
25:  29,  31,  Ps.  104:  20,  22,  28,  146:  4,  Hos.  8:  12  are  declarative,  not  hypo- 
thetical. 

Circumstantial  Clauses. 

§  309.  1.  Circumstantial  clauses  describe  the  situa- 
tion attendant  upon  the  action  of  the  principal  clause. 
In  such  clauses,  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule,  §  284.  ^j, 
the  subject  usually  stands  first,  inasmuch  as  attention  is 
particularly  directed  to  it,  and  even  though  it  has  been 
mentioned  before  it  must  be  repeated,  or  a  pronoun 
must  take  its  place,  and  he  smote  the  camp  Trh  ninrri'; 
npii  while  (lit.  and)  the  camp  was  secure  Judg.  8:  11, 
Gen.  1:  2,  1  Sam.  18:  17,  nxiiz:  Hnj^l  whereas  thou  hatest 
Ps.  50: 17,  Gen.  18: 13,  HSS^'iSn  5<b  rilG^  without  his  clothes 
heing  burned  (lit.  and  his  clothes  shall  not  be  burned) 
Prov.  6:  27,  28,  Jer.  14:  15. 

a.  The  contents  of  this  section  are  adopted  with  some  unessential  mod- 
ifications from  the  very  thorough  tr^atment  of  this  subject  in  Ewald's 
Lehrbuch.  The  participle  as  suggestive  of  a  contemporaneous  action  or 
state  is  particularly  suited  to  circumstantial  clauses  and  is  very  commonly 
employed  in  them,  Jehovah  appeared  to  him  i'ij"'  wrri  while  he  was  sitting 
at  the  door  Gen.  18:  1,  13:  7,  15:  2,  24:  21,  Num.  10:  33,  Josh.  6:  1,  Judg. 
13:  9,  1  Sam.  4:  12,  2  Sam.  1 :  2,  2  Kin.  2:  12,  Ps.  35:  .%  6.  Clauses  with- 
out a  verb,  ri'iHriX  Qn">5S1  with  their  faces  bachvard  Gen.  9:  23,  12:  6, 
Prov.  16:  16,  17:  1;  with  V^  Isa.  43 :  8 ;  with  "i-^N  Prov.  17:  16.  Other 
words  may  occasionally  precede  the  subject,  rnj?";  "ibl  Gen.  49:  10,  "^H  ^STI? 
2  Sam.  18:  14,  2  Kin.  10,  2,  Isa.  6:  6,  Am.  7:  7,  Zech.  2:  6;  or  the  subject 
itself  may  not  be  expressed,  I  have  uttered  'j'^hx  xbi  loithout  understanding 
Job  42:  3,  nispiril  2  Sam.  13:  20,  nia-'l.  Ps.  55:  20,  nh^m  Hab.  2:  10,  even 
when  it  differs  from  that  of  the  pi'incipal  clause  Judg.  13:  19. 


378  SYNTAX.  §  309 

b.  Circumstantial  clauses  may  be  attached  without  Vav,  Jehovah  spake 
with  you  ~ihs  ""bix  while  I  stood  Deut.  5:  5,  Ex.  26:  5;  he  pitched  his  tent 
n^-2  ^k-n"'3  having  Bethel  on  the  west  Gen,  12:  8,  Ex.  12:  11,  1  Sam.  26:  13, 
Ps.  45:  14,  Jer.  30:  6,  virgins  "iBp?  "px  tcithout  number  Cant.  6:  8,  Jer.  2:  32; 
why  tvill  ye  be  stricken  further  n^D  !is''p'in  continuing  to  revolt  Isa.  1 :  5, 
n^-^bn^  T.-  ^f^'i^e  inflaming  them  5:  11,  Ps.  4:  3,  62:  5. 

2.  A  participle  agreeing  with  the  principal  subject, 
to  which  it  stands  in  a  sort  of  predicate  relation,  may 
serve  the  purpose  of  a  circumstantial  clause,  they  came 
out  D"iiI3  stationing  themselves  at  the  door  Num.  16:  27, 
Judg.  8:  4,  Ezr.  10:  1,  Ps.  7:  3,  Jer.  41:  5,  6,  Hab.  2:  15, 
Mai.  1 :  7 ;  for  which  with  a  negative  a  finite  tense  must 
be  substituted,  §  278.  4.  h,  either  the  preterite,  he  went 
there  bbX"^  Urh  not  eating  bread  Ezr.  10:  6,  Deut.  21:  1, 
Job  9:  25,  or  the  future,  they  planned  a  device  J^bjivbs 
without  heing  able  to  perform  it  Ps.  21:  12,  35:  8,  56:  5, 
12,  140:  11. 

a.  Such  a  circumstantial  participle  or  adjective  in  a  very  few  instances 
precedes  the  verb  b'ia'^  ^?'i!""'>!i  «  mountain  falling  wastes  aivay  Job  14:  18, 
Prov.  20:  14;  or  is  included  in  a  larger  circumstantial  clause,  "in]?  Nim 
while  he,  if  he  had  taken  warning,  would  have  saved  his  life  Ezek.  33:  5. 
It  may  agree  with  the  object  of  the  principal  clause,  I  used  to  deliver  "^zy 
yrr'2  the  poor  when  he  cried  Job  29:  12,  or  with  a  noun  governed  by  a 
preposition,  "'n  "is'ti  "1=13^3  for  the  child  while  living  2  Sam.  12:  21,  I  Chron. 
12:  1,  Jer.  14:  4,  or  with  a  suffixed  pionoun  Ps.  69:  4. 

3.  The  circumstantial  may  precede  the  principal 
clause  D"N2  ^:^i^^  nin  lo,  wJien  tve  come  into  the  land,  thou 
shalt  bind  Josh.  2:  18,  Num.  12:  14,  particularly  when 
something  unexpected  supervenes  upon  the  condition 
previously  described,  which  is  introduced  commonly  by 
a  preterite  with  the  subject  prefixed,  ^ilTJ  HT  liy  ivhile 
one  ic as  still  speaking,  ^"2  r.T"]  another  came  Job  1:  16;  !!<in 
ni<iT^  while  she  was  being  led  forth,  nhbTIj  S^ni.  she  sent 
Gen.  38:  25,  1  Sam.  9:  11,  1  Kin.  14:'l7,  2  Kin.  2:  23, 
6:  5,  26,  9:  25,  Isa.  37:  38. 

a.   The  circumstantial  clause  in  such  a  combination  may  not  onlj'  have 
a  participle  as  in  the  examples  already  given,  but  a  preterite  N:J^  s:i^  "X 


§  310,  311  THE  CONJUNCTION  VAV.  379 

Jacob  had  only  just  gone  out,  X3  iBi'l.  ichen  Emu  came  Gen.  27:  30,  Jndg. 
3:  24,  or  a  future  with  Q^i:,  §  267.  1.  h,  Gen.  19:  4,  Josh.  2:  8,  or  a  Vav 
consec.  future  2  Sam.  24:  11,  or  an  infinitive  2  Kin.  4:  40,  2  Cliron.  13:  15, 
26:  19,  or  it  may  be  without  a  verb,  Gen.  7:  6,  22:  1,  2  Kin.  10:  12,  13,  Ps. 
78:  30,  31,  Jon.  3:  4.  The  unexpected  event  may  also  be  expressed  by  the 
use  of  a  participle,  2  Kin.  8:  5,  Dan.  9:  21,  or  if  its  time  require  it  by  the 
future  tense,  1  Kin.  1:  14.  Or  if  there  is  no  suggestion  of  a  sudden  occur- 
rence, the  principal  clause  may  be  simply  linked  with  the  preceding  by 
Vav  consec.  future  Gen.  24:  1,  2,  Deut.  26:  5,  Judg.  4:  5,  2  Sam.  11:  4, 
1  Kin.  13:  11,  or,  if  it  belong  to  the  future,  by  Vav  consec.  preterite  Ex. 
3:  13j  or  Vav  may  be  omitted  altogether  Gen.  49:  29, 


The  Conjunction  Yav. 

§  310.  The  connective  in  most  common  use  is  Yav 
Conjunctive,  §  235,  which  hnks  together  words  and 
clauses  in  a  coordinate  relation,  and  of  which  Yav  Con- 
secutive, §  99,  is  a  modification,  which  while  attached 
to  a  verb  to  form  a  secondary  tense  lilvcwise  hnks  it  or 
its  clause  to  a  preceding  verb  or  clause  in  a  relation  of 
dependence  or  subordination.  The  particular  relations 
indicated  by  Yav  Conjunctive  in  different  connections 
are  exceedingly  various.  This  is  not  due  strictly  speak- 
ing to  any  diversity  of  meaning  in  the  particle  itself. 
Instead  of  employing  a  variety  of  conjunctions  to  ex- 
press the  several  relations,  which  one  clause  may  sustain 
to  another,  it  better  accords  with  the  venerable  simpli- 
city of  Hebrew  style,  merely  to  place  successive  clauses 
side  by  side,  allowing  the  relation  intended  in  any  given 
case  to  be  inferred  from  that  of  the  thoughts  themselves. 
Yav  is  a  sign  of  connection;  but  the  precise  nature  of 
the  connection  which  it  marks,  must  be  learned  not  from 
the  uniting  particle,  but  from  the  mutual  bearings  of  the 
conceptions  which  it  binds  together. 

§  311.  1.  The  simplest  relation  whether  of  words  or 
clauses  denoted  by  Yav  is  when  one  thing  is  simply 
added  to  another,  as  in  English  by  the  Conjunction  and, 


380  SYNTAX.  §  311 

y;kr;"  Dz-'^^H  i^^^  heavens  and  the  earth  Gen.  2:  1,  let  there 
he  ajinnuinent  ""'I  and  let  it  be  dividing  1 :  6. 

o.  In  enumerations  Vav  may  be  repeated  before  each  succissive  item, 
Ex.  35:  5-9  (so  Vav  consecutive  Num.  33:  5-49);  or  before  the  greater 
number  with  occasional  oaiissions  Josh.  15:  21-62;  or  the  several  particu- 
lars may  be  divided  into  pairs  or  groups  by  its  insertion  or  omission  Ex. 
35:  11,  12,  16-19,  Prov.  1:  2-6,  Isa.  5:  12.  Vav  is  commonly  inserted  be- 
fore the  last  term  of  a  series,  Gen.  1:  12,  14:  1,  Neh.  10:  29,  Joel  1:  14, 
thowgli  not  invariablj'.  Dent.  29:  22,  1  Kin.  6:  7,  Ps.  45:  9.  Sometimes  it  is 
omit;e(l  altogether  Neh.  10:  3-28,  2  Kin.  11:  13,  Ps.  150:  1,  2,  5,  6,  Isa.  1:  1, 
~i~3  3~y1  Dan.  8:  14,  especially  in  certain  familiar  phrases,  C'iiVr  bari  yester- 
day and  the  day  before  i.  e.  heretofore  Gen.  31:5,  r"'iVi-ri  ~irT2  to-morroio 
or  the  day  after  1  Sam.  20: 12,  ni'ba  D-^id  two  or  three  isa.  17:6,  Job.  33:  29. 

2.  "When  the  second  term  is  identical  with  the  first, 
or  restrictive  of  it  and  is  added  for  the  sake  of  explana- 
tion, Yav  is  equivalent  to  72(7.)>?(3/?/ or  to  ivit\  in  the  shejyherds' 
eququnent  which  he  had  'c'^b^l'ZI  and  to  speak  more  pre- 
cisely in  the  pouch  1  Sam.  17:  40;  in  Ramah  iS'^^r^  that 
is  to  satj,  in  his  city  1  Sam.  28:  3;  thy  hand  ?]3"'"::"'1  namely 
thy  riyht  hand  Ps.  74:  11,  Josh.  10:  7,  Judg.'lO:  10,  Isa. 
57:  11,  L)an.  8:  10.  When  it  limits  an  action,  Vav  may 
be  rendei-ed  and  that;  Jehovah  set  the  sword  of  each 
against  his  fellotv  niriiprrb^a^  a)id  that  in  all  the  camp 
Judg.  7:  22,  '^'pj.b)  1  cliron.  9:  27,  CV-^-an  2  Chron.  8: 
13,  Eccl.  8:  2;  so  often  before  an  infinitive,  he  tv ill  fulfil 
all  my  pleasure  '^'t^isb^.  and  that  so  as  to  say  Isa.  44:  28, 
2  Chron.  7:  17  (comp.  1  Kin.  9:  4),  Neh.  8:  13,  Jer.  17: 
10,  44:  14. 

a.  This  difTers  from  Isa.  1:  1  Judah  and  especially  Jerufalem,  where 
the  second  term  renders  prominent  something  included  in  the  Hrst,  but  does 
not  cover  all  that  is  intended  by  it;  so  Dan.  1:  3,  Num.  31:  6  sacred  ves- 
sels and  particularly  the  trumpets;  Josh.  9:  27  for  the  congregation  and 
especially  for  the  altar  of  Jehovah. 

3.  Vav  may  be  us'^d  in  an  emphatic  sense  for  even, 
also;  from  Israel  was  tvlH";  even  this,  other  things  and  this 
too  astonishing  it  is  Hos.  8:  C,  Dhi'IZ^  even  in  their  death 
2  Sam.  1 :  23,  "bs'CJ^  ask  also  1  Kui.  2:  22,  Isa.  32:  7,  49:  C. 


§  311  THE  CONJUNCTION  VAV.  38] 

When  one  noun  is  the  principal  and  the  others  subordi- 
nate or  less  adapted  to  the  verb  employed,  Vav  is  equiv- 
alent to  with',  they  used  to  come  up  Dri'Dpi;^  ivith  their 
cattle  Judg.  6 :  5,  2  Kin.  11:8,  Url^  with  fasting  Esth.  4 :  3. 
"ilbl  with  my  heart  Eccl.  7:25,  M^ny*!  with  wrath  Isa.  13:9, 
the  earth  with  its  issues  4:2:  h. 

a.  1  Sam.  14:  18  "^i^^i  with  the  children  of  Israel,  unless  as  seems  pro- 
bable there  is  an  error  in  the  text;  on  the  other  hand  DS'  ivith  is  used  for 
1  1  Sam.  16:  12,  17:  42. 

4.  When  the  relation  suggested  is  that  of  contrast, 
limiting  or  qualifying  what  precedes,  Yav  is  equivalent 
to  the  adversative  hut]  of  every  tree  thou  may  est  eat  XTl^ 
hut  of  the  tree  etc.  Gen.  2:  16,  17,  S?!"]  hut  know  Eccl.  11:  9, 
Job  14:  10,  Ps.  22:  7,  28:  3,  Eccl.  7:  4.  If,  however,  the 
contrasted  thought  does  not  hmit  but  completes  the 
sense,  Yav  should  be  rendered  by  and]  he  hath  torn 
^DSS")";!  and  he  will  heal  us  Hos.  6:1,  Gen.  1:  5,  Deut.  32: 
21,  39.  Yav  may  also  introduce  a  reason,  give  us  help 
J^liai.  for  vain  is  the  deliverance  of  man  Ps.  60:  13;  or  an 
opposing  consideration,  from  which  a  different  conclu- 
sion might  have  been  anticipated,  ^SbiJ"!  although  I  was 
their  hushand  Jer.  31:  32;  or  an  inference  ^n'lrr^l  where- 

•    T  ; 

fore  turn  and  live  Ezek.  18:  32;  or  a  consequence,  he 
withholdeth  the  waters  ^'^lin';'!  and  so  they  dry  up  Job  12 :  15, 
Ps.  42:  5,  91:  15,  103:  16;  or  after  a  negative  clause 
that  which  would  have  resulted  on  the  contrary  hypo- 
thesis, §  299.  a,  thou  desirest  not  sacrifice  ^I:^^^51  else  I 
would  give  it  Ps.  51 :  18,  perhaps  with  a  negative  under- 
stood Job  6:  14;  if  the  consequence  is  different  from 
what  might  naturally  have  been  expected,  ^n^5:r'1  and 
yet  they  prosper  (or  it  may  be  read  that  they  the  orphans 
may  prosp)er)  Jer.  5:  29,  Tn5<^1  and  yet  the  righteous  shall 
hold  on  his  ivay  Job  17:  9;  or  the  design  or  purpose, 
they  fasten  it  p^s^  J^bl.  that  it  move  not  Jer.  10:  4,  11:  21; 


382  eniTAX.  §  312 

or  a  comparison,  man  is  horn  unto  trouhle  t\^'}_  '33^  as 
sparks  Jly  upward  Job  5:  7,  11:  12,  12:  11,  Pro  v.  ch.  25- 
29,  or  if  the  comparison  precede,  waters  fail  1L'"IS!']  so  a 
man  Job  14:  12,  19,  Prov.  25:  3,  20,  25,  26:  14;  or  a 
coexisting  act  or  condition,  Noah  was  six  hundred  years 
old  b^^ni  when  the  flood  Gen.  7:6;  Vav  repeated  may- 
be equivalent  to  both  . . .  and,  si::i.  Ti;"jii1  both  sanctuary 
and  host  Dan.  8:  13,  Num.  9:  4,  Ps.  76:  7,  Nah.  1:  5. 

a.  Vav  is  never  precisely  equivalent  to  the  disjunctive  or,  which  is 
expressed  by  "ix.  The  passages,  in  which  it  apparently  has  this  sense,  are 
elliptical  or  are  to  be  otlierwise  explained;  there  was  not  found  sword 
n'^ini  or  spear  (prop,  and  there  was  not  found  spear)  1  Sam.  13:  22,  25:  31, 
Gen.  41:  44,  Ex.  21:  17,  2  Kin.  7:  10;  ye  shall  take  it  from  the  sheep  —{gn 
C^Trn  avd  from  the  goats  Ex.  12:  15,  these  together  form  tlie  mass  out  of 
which  it  is  to  be  taken;  pr]':i']  Mn";  not  whether  he  rage  or  laugh,  but  mora 
exactly  both  when  he  rages  and  when  he  laughs  Prov.  29:  9,  Ex.  21 :  16. 

b.  When  a  speaker  begins  with  1  there  is  a  tacit  allusion  to  something 
that  has  preceded,  or  to  a  thought  to  be  supplied,  you  rage  "'IN^  but  I  have 
established  my  king  Ps.  2:  6,  Num.  12:  14,  20:  3,  2  Sam.  13:  26,  18:  22, 
24:  3,  2  Kin.  2:  9,  4:  41,  5:  6,  17,  7:  13,  10:  2,  1  Chron.  17:  10,  Job  19:  25, 
Isa.  3:  14,  Jer.  40:  5,  Ezek.  13:  11,  13,  17:  22. 

e.  The  omission  of  the  conjunction  sometimes  adds  to  the  force  or 
vivacity  of  a  sentence,  Ex.  15:  9,  10,  Deut.  32:  10,  11,  Judg.  5:  27,  Ps.  19: 
8-10,  Isa.  10:  28-32,  21:  2-5,  Jer.  31:  21. 

§  312.  1.  Vav  serves  to  introduce  the  apodosis  or 
second  member  of  a  hypothetical  sentence,  §  306,  if  God 
will  be  with  me  and  keep  me,  nih"^^  *X*T,  then  shall  Jehovah 
be  my  God  Gen.  28:  20,  21. 

2.  It  may  also  connect  a  statement  of  time  or  a  noun 
placed  absolutely,  with  the  clause  to  which  it  relates,  Di'iia 
ri-::-nx  Dnnzs  Sib^::  ^ip^bia-  on  the  third  day  Abraham 
lifted  up  his  eyes  Gen.  22:  4;  ^'i'^1  Dni  '^^r^.^lpr?  thy  hope, 
(is  it  not)  the  integrity  of  thy  ways?  Job  4:  6.  Both  these 
uses,  which  are  wholly  foreign  from  our  idiom,  are  com- 
bined in  2  Sam.  15:  34,  thy  father's  servant  "^y^^^.  I  have 
been  so  hitherto,  but  now  ^is|i  I  will  be  thy  servant. 

a.  Exami)les  of  Vav  Conjunctive  after  a  nonn  at  the  beginning  of  its 
clause  whether  placed  absolutely  or  governed  by  a  preposition,  1  Kin.  6:  32, 


§  312  THE  CONJUNCTION  VAY.  383 

Job  19:  23,  23:  12,  25:  5,  36:  26,  Ps.  69:  33,  115:  7,  Prov.  9:  16  (comp. 
ver.  4),  Jer.  10:  23,  13:  10,  Ezek.  40:  42,  Dan.  11:  15,  (such  a  clause  gov- 
erned by  nk"n  2  Sam.  10:  12).  Vav  consec.  future  similarly  used,  Gen. 
22:  24,  1  Sam.  14:  19,  2  Sam.  22:  41,  1  Kin.  15:  13,  Job  36:  7,  Jer.  6:  19, 
Dan.  1:  20.  Vav  consec.  preterite,  Ex.  12:  15,  19,  30:38,  Lev.  7:  20,  17:  10, 
Num.  14:  24,  1  Sam.  25:  27,  2  Sam.  6:  21,  2  Kin.  11:  7,  Ps.  25:  11,  Jer. 
23:  33,  Ezek.  17:  19. 

b.  "Vav  Conjunctive  after  a  statement  of  time,  Ex.  12:  3,  Lev.  7:  16, 
Num.  16:  5,  Ps.  141:  5  (after  niSJ),  Jer.  8:  1  K'thibh,  Dan.  10:  4  (comp. 
ver.  1).  Vav  consec.  future,  Judg.  19:  5,  1  Sam.  11:  11,  Jer.  7:  25,  Dan. 
1:  18.  Vav  consec.  preterite.  Gen.  3:  5,  Ex.  16:  6,  7,  17:  4,  Prov.  24:  27 
(after  "inx),  Ezek.  33:  33,  Joel  4r  ^ 


INDEX    L 

8TJBJECT8  TREATED  FULLY  OR  INCIDENTALLY. 


TJie  numbers  in  this  and  the  following  Indexes  refer  to  the  Sections  of  the  Orammarm 


Abbreviations  9.  1. 

Absolute  infinitive.    See  Infinitive  abso- 
lute. 
Abstract  nouns,  feminine  200,  plural  203. 

1.  a,  c. 

Accents  28,  use  in  cantillation  28.  5,  forms 
and  classes  29,  mcaninfj  of  names  29.  b, 
like  forms  distinguished  30,  position  of 
32-35,  aid  in  distinguishinfi:  words  34, 
change  of  position  35,  effect  of  Vav 
consecutive  33.  4,  99.  2,  100.  2,  in  place 
of  Metlie^ih  39.  3.  a,  45.  5,  give  sta- 
bility to  vowels  60.  1.  a,  vowel  changes 
produced  by  64. 

Accent.s,  consecution  of  in  prose  36-39, 
poetic  31,  consecution  of  40-42. 

Accents,  pause  36.  2.  «,  position  of  35.  2. 

Accentuation  double  3y   4.  a. 

Addition  of  letters  50.  3. 

Adjectives  ill  place  of  participles  of  neuter 
verbs  90,  187.  n,  lormation  of  187.  2, 
express! iifj  permanent  or  variable  quali- 
ties 187.  h,  intensity  1S9. 1,  191,  defects 
189.  1.  b.  diminutives  of  color  190, 
declension  of  2U6,  qualifying  nouns 
252.  1,  qualifying  nouns  in  the  con- 
struct 259,  preilicate  263.  2,  compari- 
son 264,  emphatic  use  with  verbs 
281.  2.  b. 

Adjectives  numeral  224-228,  2.">3-255. 

Adverbial  idea  expressed  b3' a  verb  283. 0. 

Adverl)iiil  expressions  2S8. 

Adverbs  _'ii6,  with  suffixes  237,  as  the  sub- 
ject 244.  c,  numeral  255.  4,  position  of 
288. 

Affixes  33. 

Agreement  neglected  289-293. 

Alepli,  sound  ot.">.  4,  used  as  a  vowel-letter 
11.  1,  in  a  few  verbal  forms  120.  2.  122. 

2,  158.  3,  once  in  3  f  a.  suffix  219.  1. 
b,  otiant  16.  1,  with  Mappik  26,  with 
Daghesh  forte  (?)  121.  1,  substituted  for 
He  in  Aramaean  51. 3,  i\\  Kiphal  infini- 


tive 91.  b,  in  Hiphil  94.  a,  b,  in  Hith- 
pael  96.  a,  in  feminine  ending  of  verbs 
i>6.  b,  and  nouns  198.  d,  for  Vav  in  fem. 
plur.  of  nouns  201,  prosthesis  of  53. 1. 
a,  185.  c,  omitted  .53.  2,  3,  57.  2  (2)  a, 
111.  2.  b,  e,  153.  2,  166.  2,  quiescent 
57.  2,  after  prefixed  prepositions  232.  3. 
a,  i,  after  Vav  Conjunctive  235.  c,  pre- 
fers dijilitliongal  vowels  60.  1.  «,  110.  3. 
111.  2,  previous  vowel  rarely  short  if 
Daghesh  forte  omitted  60.  4.  a,  121.  1, 
230.  .i,  added  to  3  pi.  preterite  86.  b, 
prefixed  in  the  formation  of  nouns  191. 

Alphabet  2,  order  of  6,  Lepsius'  theory 
6,  a. 

Anacoluthon  294.  b. 

Animals,  names  of  199.  C 

Apocopated  future  97.  2,  272,  not  in  pas- 
sive species  97.  2.  b,  in  Ayin  Guttural 
verbs  119.  1,  Lamedh  Guttural  126.  1, 
Avin  Vav  and  Aj'in  Yodh  155.  5,  159. 
3,'  160.  2,  162.  3,  Lamedh  He  173.  1, 
174.  4,  175.  3,  176.  4,  177.  3,  178.  3, 
uses  of  272. 

Apocopated  imperative  98.  2,  173.  1. 

Apposition  of  nouns  256. 

Arabic  letters  3.  l.a,  currently  read  with- 
out vowels  10.  a,  svUables  18.  2.  c, 
Teshdid  23.  3.  b,  accent  33.  4.  a,  Elif 
prosthetic  53.  1.  a,  conjugations  83.  c 
(1),  comparative  or  superlative  191.  a, 
nouns  of  unity  200.  b,  case  endings 
201.  e,  dual  204,  article  2.H0.  1.  a,  con- 
junction with  the  accusative  284.  d. 

Aramaean  syllables  18.  2.  c,  words  modi- 
fied from  Hebrew  51.  3,  dual  204.  a. 

Article  definite  2.30,  use  of  248,  with  verbs, 
etc.  248.  6.  c,  300.  b,  witli  proper  nouns 
249.  1.  a,  before  nouns  with  suffixes 
249.  2.  a,  before  nouns  in  the  construct 
249.  3.  b,  when  omitted  250,  252.  1.  b. 
c,  252.  2.  b,  c. 

Article  indefiuite  230.  1.  b,  251.  m. 


INDEX  I. 


;85 


Aspirates  3.  1,  7.  2,  receive  Daghcsh  lene 
21,  their  original  sound  21.  b,  affected 
by  concurrence  of  consonants  or  doub- 
ling 54.  1. 

Athnahh  divides  verse  36.  1,  40.  2,  train 
of  38.  2,  41.  b  (1). 

Augment,  Greek  and  Sanskrit  99.  1.  a. 

Ayin,  sound  of  3.  4,  Aramaean  substitute 
for  Tsadhe  51.  3,  elided  53.  3.  «,  128, 
previous  vowel  sometimes  short  when 
Daghesh  omitted  60.  4.  a,  230.  3. 

Ayin  doubled  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3, 
their  peculiarities  133-137,  remarks 
139-142,  paradigm  VIII. 

Ayin  Guttural  verbs  116,  remarks  118- 
122.  paradigm  V. 

Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Todh  verbs,  origin  of 
term  76.  3.  tlieir  peculiarities  154-156, 
remarks  158-163,  paradigm  IX. 

Biliteral  roots  68.  b. 

Bohemian  accent  33.  4  a. 

Cardinal  numbers  224-227,  with  dual  end- 
ing 224.  1.  a,  position  and   agreement 

253,  254,    with    suffixes  253.  2   (2)  b, 

254.  4.  a,  with  the  article  254.  4. 
Changes  of  person  294. 
Circumstantial  clauses  309. 

Cities  names  of,  feminine  199.  d. 

Collectives  with  feminine  ending  200, con- 
strued with  the  plural  289.  5. 

Commutation  of  letters  50.  1,  Aleph  for 
He  86.  b,  91.  b,  94.  a,  96.  a,  198.  d,  He 
for  Aleph  191.  b,  Aleph  for  Yodh  56. 
4,  or  Vav  56.  4.  a,  201,  Vav  for  Aleph 
57.  2  (2)  a.  111.  2.  b,  d,  Yodh  for  Vav 
56.  2,  Teth  for  Tav  54.  4,  82.  5. 

Comparison,  how  expressed  264. 

Compound  numbers  225,  226.  2,  with 
nouns  254.  3,  with  the  article  254.  4.  b. 

Compound  predicate  289.  1.  a,  289.  5.  b. 

Compound  sentences  243,  2,  300. 

Compound  species  83.  c  (2). 

Compound  subject  247.  1,  290.  1. 

Conjugations  76.  1. 

Conjunctions  241,  formed  from  relatives 
305,  from  prepositions  305.  e,  uses  of 
305.  a,  b,  307. 

Consecution  of  accents  in  prose  36-39,  in 
poetry,  40-42. 

Consonant  changes,  53-56. 

Consonants  changed  to  vowels  57,  vowel 
changes  occasioned  by  contiguous  con- 
sonants 60,  by  concurrent  consonants,  61. 

Construct  infinitive.  See  Infinitive  con- 
struct. 

Construct  state  of  nouns  214-218,  rela- 
tions denoted  by  257,  resolved  by  pre- 
position Lainedh  260. 

Constructio  praegnans  286.  3. 

Contraction  of  two  similar  letters  61.  3, 
134.  1. 

Contracted  verbs  107. 

Copula  261.  2,  3. 

Countries  names  of,  feminine  199.  d. 

Daghesh  meaning  of  word  21.  2.  a. 

Daghesh-forte  23,  distinguished  from  Da- 
ghesh-lene  23.   2,   from   Shurek  23.  3, 


diiferent  kinds  of  24,  conjunctive,  in- 
stances of  24.  a,  75.  1,  separative  24.  b, 
192.  a,  218.  2.  a,  220.  5.  a,  231.  2.  a, 
emphatic  24.  c,  86.  a,  150.  1,  orthopho- 
nic  24.  d,  omission  of  25,  resolved  by 
the  insertion  of  a  liquid  54.  3,  220,  6. 

b,  or  Yodh  141.  1,  or  by  prolonging 
the  previous  vowel  59.  a,  never  in 
gutturals  60.  4,  108,  rarely  in  Eesh  23. 
1,  60.  4.  a,  121.  1,  omitted  from  Ilith- 
pael  96.  a,  in  suffixes  of  verbs  104.  a, 
105.  b. 

Daghesh  lene  21,  22,  omitted  from  Kal 
imperative  89  (f.  s.  and  m.  pi.),  from 
gu  tiiral  forms  109.  3.  a,  from  construct 
plural  of  nouns  218.  2  a,  after  prefixes 
101.  2.  6. 

Daleth  assimilated  to  the  feminine  ending 
Tav  54.  2,  149.  2,  207.  b. 

Day  of  the  month  255.  2.  b. 

Declension  of  noun.s,  adjectives  and  parti- 
ciples 221,  paradigms  XIV— XVI. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  73,  qualifying 
nouns  252.  2,  qualifying  nouns  in  the 
construct  259,  predicate  263,  used  for 
relative  303. 

Dental  letters  7.  1. 

D'hhi  41.  b  (2). 

Dialects,  effect  upon  words  51.  S. 

Diphthongal  vowels  15. 

Distributive  numbers  255.  4. 

Distributive  sense  expressed  by  repetitior 
255.  4,  296.  1. 

Division  erroneous,  of  words  43.  c. 

Divisions  of  Grammar  1. 

Dual,  ending  of  202,  signification  of  204^ 
superadiled  to  the  plural  204.  5.  b, 
nouns  -with  suffixes  220.  4,  joined  with 
the  plural  292. 

Ellipsis  295. 

Emphasis  expressed  by  repetition  281, 
296.  3,  297. 

English  accent  33.  4.  a. 

Excess,  how  denoted  264.  2  (2)  b. 

Feminine  endings  198,  how  related  55.  2. 

c,  198.  b.  compared  with  Indo-European 
endings  198.  e,  used  to  form  abstracts, 
collectives,  official  designations  200,  and 
nouns  of  unit3'  200.  b,  appended  to  in- 
finitive.   See  Infinitive  construct. 

Feminine  nouns  without  fem.  ending  in 
the  singular  199.  a,  with  masc.  ending 
in  plural  202.  b,  with  two  plural  forma 
202.  r,  with  suffixes  220.  2,  declensions 
of  221.  B. 

Feminine  sign  of,  duplicated  88  (3  f.),  169. 
3,  171.  1.  a  (?),  neglected  88  (2  f.  s, 
3  f.  pi.),  199.  a. 

Final  forms  of  letters  4,  in  middle  of 
words  4.  a. 

Flexil)ility  various,  of  different  languages 

Formative  syllables  differ  from  prefixes 
and  suffi-xes  33,  69.  c,  101.  2.  b,  123.  4 

Fractional  numbers  228.  3,  255.  3. 

Future,  formation  of  84.  3,  its  personal 
endings  and  prefixes  85.  1.  a  (2),  vrith 
25 


38G 


INDEX  L 


suffixes  10.'),  uses  of  267,  sliortened 
form,     i^ee  Aj>ocopat<  d  future. 

Ciiililean  pronunciation  51.  4.  a. 

Grammar,  function  au't  divisions  of  1. 

Grammatical  suliject  '247.  2. 

Grave  suftixes  7'J,  220.  1. 

Greek  alpliabet  .").  a,  6.  b,  7.  2.  a,  accent 
'^'^.  4.  a,  RUg-ment  99.  1.  a,  feminine 
198.  e,  numerals  224  2.  a,  construction 
of  neuter  plurals  281'.  4.  a. 

Guttural  letters  7. 1,  tlicir  peculiarities  60, 
1m8,  attract  or  preserve  vowels  60.  3.  c. 

Guttural  verl)S  1U7. 

lie  and  Hheth  S.  3. 

lie  as  a  vowel  letter  11.  1,  57.  2  (2)  b, 
with  Mappik  26,  prcsthesis  of5.S.  I.  a, 
rejection  of  53.  2,  3,  85.  2.  a  (1),  95.  b, 
211.  a,  230.  5,  233.  5,  preceding  vowel 
often  short  when  Dafjhesh  omitted  60. 

4.  a,  121.  1,  2o0.  3,  added  to  2  m.  a. 
and  2  f.  pi.  preterite  86.  b,  to  2  m.  s. 
suffix  104.  b,  219.  1.  b,  to  2  f.  s.  suffix 
219.  2.  c,  to  2  and  3  f.  pi  suffix  104.  g, 
219.  1.  b,  219.  2.  c,  for  3  m.  s.  suffix 
1'  4.  (/,  219.  1.  b,  omitted  from  f.  pi. 
future  88  and  imperative  89,  omitted 
after  prefixes  85.  2.  a  (1),  91.  b,  94.  b, 
95.  b,  113.  2,230.5,  retained  in  excep- 
tional cases  95.  e,   143.  3,    151.  2,  232. 

5.  a,  for  Aleph  167.  1,  prefixed  la  the 
formation  of  nouns  191.  b. 

He  directive  223.  1. 

He  intorrojrative  231. 

He  paragogic,  effect  on  accent  83. 1,  with 
Methegh  35.  2.  fl,  examples  of  61.  6.  a, 
223.  2,  distinguished  fi-om  feminine 
ending  198.  c.  added  to  preterite  93.  c, 
to  future.     See  Paragogic  future. 

Hhatepli  Seghol  in  1  sing,  future  Piel  92.  e. 

Hheth,  preceding  vowel  mostly  short, 
when  l)aghesh  omitted  60.  4.  a,  121.  1, 
230.  3. 

^liirik,  quantity  of  14,  29.  1,  between 
concurring  consonants  61.  1,  85.  2.  a, 
218.  2,  232.  2,  235,  in  Segholates  61.  2, 
186.  b,  never  in  the  ultimate  of  Kal  ac- 
tive participles  90,  in  1  sing.  Niphal  fu- 
ture 91.  c,  150.  2,  in  Pi<  1  before  suffixes 
li4.  h,  in  jienult  of  Piel  infinitive  92.  rf, 
in  Hiphil  infinitive  94.  b,  njected  from 
Hii)hil  future  94.  c,  and  participle  94  c, 
in  the  inflected  preterite  of  Kal,  Hiphil 
119.  2,  and  Hithpael  96.  &,  retained  in 
Hiphil  before  suffixes  104.  A,  in  the  ul- 
timate of  nouns  209.  1.  c,  211.  2. 

liholem,  stability  of  60.  1.  a  (4),  in  in- 
flected verbs  Ayin  doubled  61.  3,  136. 
2,  141.  2,  and  Aj'in  Vav  and  Ayin 
Yodh  155.  4,  161.  1,  102.  2,  shortened 
to  Kamets  Hhatuph  in  Kal  infinitive 
construct  87,  future  88,  and  imperative 
89,  once  retained  in  Kal  future  before 
Makkeph  88,  in  intensive  species  92.  b, 
rejected  from  Kal  future  before  suffixes 
I'.iS.  (/,  in  the  ultimate  of  nouns  209.  1. 
c,  d,  209.  2.  c,  217.  1.  c,  211.  3,  in  the 
penult  212.  d,  2ia  1.  e. 


Hiphil,  signification  of  79,  relation  to  Piel 
60.  2.  a  (1),  formation  of  82.  4,  origin 
of  prefixed  He  82.  5.  b  (2),  nouns  de- 
rived from  1S9,  2.  a,  191. 

Hithpael,  signification  of  80,  relation  to 
Niphal  80.  2  a{2)j  formation  of  82  5, 
origin  of  i)refixed  s^dlable  82.  5.  b  (1), 
verbs  having  two  forms  of  122.  2, 142.4. 

Hoplial,  signification  of  79.  3,  formation 
of  82.  4,  origin  of  prefixed  He  82.  5.  b 
(2),  no  imperative  84,  except  in  two  in- 
stances 95.  (i,  in  Ayin  doubled  verbs 
140.  6,  in  Pe  Yodli  verbs  150.  5,  in 
Ayin  Vav  verbs  162.  5,  in  Lamedh 
Aleph  verbs  169.  2,  in  Lamedh  He 
verb.s  177.  5. 

Hypothetical  sentences  306-.308. 

Imperative,  formation  of  b4.  4,  its  per- 
sonal en. lings  85.  1.  a  (3),  Kal  with  suf- 
fixes lul,  3.  106.  b,  paragogic  98.  1, 
111.  3.  a,  125.  1,  132.  1,  149  3,  159.2, 
apocopated  98.  2,  173.  2,  twice  in  Ho- 
phal  95.  d,  uses  of  273. 

Imperfect,  see  Future. 

Imperfect  verbs  classified  107. 

Impersonal  subject  245.3,  construction  of 
passive  and  neuter  verbs  284.  e. 

Inanimate  objects,  names  of  200.  c,  in  plu- 
ral 205.  5.  a,  plural  with  feminine  sin- 
gular 289.  4. 

Indefinite  pronouns  75,  304. 

Indefinite  subject  245.  2,  article  230.  1.  b, 
251.  a. 

Indo-European  roots  69,  a,  feminine  and 
neuter  198.  e,  dual  204.  a,  numerals  224. 
2.  a,  conception  of  time  2G5. 

Infinitive,  a  verbal  noun  279,  as  the  sub- 
ject 244.  b,  279.  a,  does  not  admit  the 
article  248.  6.  c,  except  in  a  special 
case  279.  d,  with  prepositions  244.  b, 
279.  a-c,  governed  by  verbs  or  nouns 
279.  b,  construction  changed  to  pret- 
erite or  future  282. 

Infinitive  absolute,  formation  of  84.  1, 
with  feminine  ending  162.  4.  as  an 
exclamation  280. 1,  explanatory  280.  2, 
for  preterite  or  future  280.  3,  for  im- 
perative  280.  4,   emphatic  use  of  281. 

Infinitive  construct,  formation  of  84.  2.  in 
Kal  usually-  without  Vav  87,  with  femi- 
nine ending  in  perfect  verbs  87,  in  Piel 
92.  d,  in  Pe  Guttural  111.  3.  a,  in  Ayin 
Guttural  119.  3,  in  Lamedh  Guttural 
125.  2,  in  Hiphil  128,  in  Pe  Kun  131. 
4,  in  Ayin  doubled  139.  2,  in  Pe  Yodh 
149,  in  Hophal  151.  5,  in  Lamedh 
Aleph  verbs  168.  2,  in  Lamedh  He  170, 
with  suffixes  101.  3,  106.  n,  following 
noun  or  suffix  denote  subject  or  object 
102.  3.  257.  9.  b,  279.  d,  emphatic  use 
of  281.  1.  c. 

Inseparable  prepositions  232-234. 

Intensity  expressed  by  repetition  281,2963. 

Intentional,  see  Paragogic  Future. 

Interjections  242. 

Interrogative  and  indefinite  pronouni  75, 
trace  of  neuter  in  198.  a. 


INDE,^  L 


!87 


Interrogative  lentences  293. 

Intransitive  verbs  construed  transitively 
285. 

Irrational  objects,  plural,  with  feminine 
singular  289.  4. 

Jews  modern,  use  Rabbinical  letter  2, 
their  pronunciation  of  Ayin  3.  4,  use 
abbreviations  9.  1. 

Jussive,  see  Apocopated  Future. 

Kal,  meaning  of  term  76.  2,  formation  in 
perfect  verbs  82.  1,  remarks  upon  86-90. 

KametsandKamets-Hhatuph  distinguish- 
ed 19.  2. 

Kamets  in  the  ultimate  of  nouns  209. 1.  i, 
209. 2.  b,  217. 1,  in  the  penult  212,  218  1. 

Kamets-Hhatu]]h  in  Kal  infin.  constr.  be- 
fore Makkeph  87,  before  suffixes  106, 
in  future  88,  in  imperative  89,  106,  in 
passive  species  93.  a,  95.  a,  in  Hitli- 
pael  96.  a. 

Kaph  and  Koph  3.  2. 

Kaph  initial  rejected  53. 2.  a,  assimilation 
of  54.  2.  a. 

Karne  Phara  38.  10. 

Kibbuts,  quantit}'  of  19.  1,  in  passive  spe- 
cies 93.  a,  95.  a,  in  Hithpael  96.  a. 

K'ri  and  K'thibh  46-48,  number  of  46.  a. 

Kushoi  21.  2.  a. 

Labial  lette^-d  7.  1. 

Lamedh  initial  rejected  53.  2.  a,  132.  2, 
medial  rejected  5.3.  3.  h,  88  (1  c),  assim- 
ilated to  followiar  "onsonant  54.  2,  132. 
2,  appended  in  fo.  Nation  of  nouns  195. 
2.  c. 

Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  164,  remarks  166-169, 
paradigm  XI. 

Lamedh  Guttural  verbs  123,  remarks 
125-128,  paradigm  VI. 

Lamedh  He  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3, 
their  peculiarities  170,  171,  shortened 
future  and  imperative  173,  remarks 
174-179,  paradigm  XII. 

Latin  alphabet  6.  b,  accent  33.  4.  a,  fe- 
minine and  neuter  198.  e,  numerals 
224,  2.  a. 

Lazian  accent  33.  4.  a. 

Letters,  sounds  of  3,  double  forms  of  4, 
of  unusual  size  or  position  4.  a,  names 
of  5,  order  of  6,  classification  of  7,  nu- 
merical use  of  9.  2,  commutation  of  50. 
1,  transposition  of  50.  2,  addition  of 
50.  3. 

Lettish  accent  33.  4.  a. 

L'gharmeh,  clause  divided  by  40.  2,  train 
of  41.  g. 

Light  suffixes  72,  220.  2-4. 

I.inguals  7.  1,  substituted  for  sibilants  in 
Aramaean  61.  3. 

Liquids  7.  2. 

Logical  subject,  247.  £. 

Makkeph  43. 

Manner  288.  2.  e. 

Mappik  26,  omitted  from  3f.  s.  suffj-  104. 
e,  219.  1.  b. 

Masculine  for  feminine,  suffixes  104  g, 
220.  1.  b,  future  88  (3  i.  pL),  105.  e, 
predicate  and  prcoouns  28*.  6. 


Masculine  not'  js  with  suffixes  220, 3,  with 
fern,  ending"  in  plural  202.  a,  with  two 
endings  \i  plural  202.  c,  declensions 
of  221.  /.. 

Matres  lectionis  11.  1. 

Measure  288.  2.  c. 

Medial  letters  for  finals  4.  a. 

Medium  strength,  letters  of  7.  2. 

Mem  dropped  from  Pual  participle  53.2.0, 
93.  e,  final  rejected  55.  2,  216.  2,  ap- 
pend©! to  3  m.  pi.  future  (?)  88,  pre- 
fixed in  formation  of  nouns  193,  affixed 
195.  2.  c,  omitted  from  plural  ending 
(?)  201.  b. 

Methegh  44,  45,  aid  in  distinguishing 
doubtful  vowels  19,  45.  2.  c,  with  He 
paragogic  35.  2.  a,  in  place  of  an  accent 
shifted  in  position  35.  1,  or  removed  by 
Makkeph  43,  44.  a,  64.  1.  a,  after  He 
interrogative  231.  2.  a,  its  place  sup- 
plied by  an  accent  39.  3.  a,  45.  5. 

Modal  forms  of  verbs,  uses  of  270-274. 

Modern  Hebrew  read  without  vowel  points 
10.  a. 

Monosyllabic  nouns  185. 

Mountains,  names   of,  masculine  199.  d. 

Multiliteral  nouns  197. 

Mutes  7.  2,  a  p-mute  missing  (?)  7.  2.  a. 

Names  of  letters  5,  their  antiquity  5.  a, 
their  origin  and  signification  5.  b. 

Nations,  names  of  199.  d,  289.  5.  c. 

Negative  particles  271.  6,  272.  c,  273,  273. 
d,  27b.  2.  c,  278.  4.  b,  279.  c,  281.  1.  b, 
sentences  299,  ambiguity  of  299.  c. 

Neuter  gender,  trace  of  198.  a. 

Neuter  verbs  rarely  have  participles  90, 
with  suffixes  102.  2. 

Niphal,  signification  of  77,  relation  to 
Hithpael  80.  2.  a  (2),  its  formation  82. 
2,  origin  of  the  prefixed  Nun  82.  5.  b 
(1),  participle  from  a  noun  91.  e,  from 
an  adverb  80.  2.  b,  nouns  derived  from 

187.  2.  a. 

Nouns,  formation  of  183,  Class  I  184-188, 
Class  II  189,  190,  Class  III  191-194, 
Class  IV  195,  196,  multiliterals  197, 
from  imperfect  roots  186.  b,  187.  2.  d, 

188.  2.  c,  189.  1.  d,  e.  189.  2.  b,  c,  192. 
b,  plural  from  quiescent  roots  209.  1,/. 
210.  3.  c,  with  suffi.xes  220.  5.  b. 

Nouns,  gender  and  number  of  198-213, 
construct  state  of  214-218,  with  suffixes 
219,  220,  declension  of  221,  paradigms 
XIII-XVI. 

N  Duns,  feminine,  without  fem.  ending  199. 
a,  with  masc.  ending  in  plural  202.  6, 
masculine  with  fem.  ending  in  plural 
202.  a,  with  either  ending  202.  c,  of 
doubtful  gender  199.  b,  202.  c,  having 
but  one  number  203. 1,  definite  without 
the  article  249,  in  loose  subordination 
256.  3,  used  for  adjectives  257.  6.  b, 
in  construct  before  adjectives  253.  1. 
a,  257.  6.  c,  in  construct  before  pre- 
positions 258.  1,  in  construct  before  a 
clause  258.  2.  predicate  262,  placed 
absolutely  284.  d,  288. 2,  repetition  of  294 
25* 


388 


INDEX  I. 


Nouns,  primitive  183.  a,  derivative  183.  6, 
of  unitv  '-'00.  b. 

Nuiiihi-r,  ■relnlii>ns  of  288.  2.  d. 

Kumfi-al  adjectives  224-2.'8,  253-255,  »d- 
verlis  'lUh,  4. 

Numerical  use  of  letters  9.  2. 

Nun  rejected  53.  2.  n,  h,  55.  2,  from 
verbs  129.2,  131.3,4,  from  nouns  ISrt. 
b,  U'6.  2.  f/,  assiiiiilateil  to  a  followinor 
consonant  54.  2,  in  verbs  129.  1,  I'U.  2, 
132.  1,  in  nouns  186.  b,  192.  a,  207.  b, 
to  initial  Mem  (?)  55.  1,  88  (m.  pl.^, 
inserted  in  lieu  of  reiluplication  54.  3, 
220.  6.  b,  epentlietic  56.  1,  101.  2,  105. 
b,  added  to  3  pi.  preterite  86.  b,  to  fu- 
ture 8S  (2  f.  8.,  m,  pi.),  before  suffixes 
105,  c,  in  Niphal  absolute  infinitive  91.  Z/, 
131.  5,  168.3,  175.2,  in  Nijdial  impera- 
tive (?)  91.  (I,  appended  in  formation  of 
nouns  195,  in  niasc.  plur.  ending  201.  a. 

Oath  ;i05.  a. 

Object  definite,  sign  of  240,  284,  of 
transitive  verbs  284,  of  in  transitive  verbs 
285,  indirect  '2i<6,  multiple  287. 

Occupations  188.  2.  a,  189.  1.  a. 

Office,  names  of  200.  a  (2). 

Olficial  designations  200. 

Olev'3'oredh  divides  verse  40.  2,  train  of 
41.  c  (1). 

Ordinal  luimbers  228,  255. 

Orthograpbic  symbols  1-40,  changes  50-66. 

Orthograiibv,  various  11.  1.  b,  51.  4.  a. 

Palatal  letters  7.  1. 

Paradigm,  see  Verbs  paradigms  of,  and 
Nouns. 

Paragogic  future  97. 1,  271,  not  in  passive 
species  97.  2.  b,  in  Lamedh  He  verbs 
174.  3,  uses  of  271,  imperative  98,  1, 
273. 

Paragogic  letters,  effect  on  accent  33.  1, 
instances  of  61.  6.  a,  222,  223. 

Participles,  formation  of  84.5,  of  neuter 
verbs  90,  with  personal  inflections  90, 
qualifying  nouns  252.  1,  qualifying 
nouns  in  the  construct  259,  in  tlio  con- 
struct before  nouns  and  infinitives  257. 
9.  b,  signification  of  278,  emphatic  use 
of  281.  2.  b,  construction  changed  to 
preterite  or  future  282,  as  circumstan- 
tial clause  3(19.  2. 

Particles  prefixed  229-235,  separate  236- 
242. 

Parts  of  speech  70. 

Passive  species  with  suffixes  102.  2,  of 
doubly  transitive  verbs  287.  5. 

Pattahh  preferred  by  gutturals  60.  1,  108, 
changed  to  Segbol  63.  1,  assimilated  to 
Seghol  61.  1.  b,  63.  2,  to  Kamets  or 
T.sere  63.  2,  in  Segliolates  61.  2,  with 
pause  accents  65.  «,  in  Kal  constr.  infin. 
87,  in  f.  pi.  future  Nijdial  91.  c,  and  Piel 
92.  e,  in  preterite  and  imperative  Piel 
92.  c,  in  Hitbpael  96.  b,  in  the  ultimate 
of  nouns  209.  2.  a. 

Pattahh  furtive  17,  60.  2,  109.2,  114(7), 
123. 

Pausal  forms  with  inferior  accents  65.  b. 


Pause  accents  36.  2.  a,  position  of  35.  2, 
occasion  vowel  changes  6.'>,  with  the 
l)retorite  86.  n,  with  tlie  future  88,  with 
the  imperative  89  (f,  s.  and  m.  pi.),  with 
2  m.  s.  suffix  104.  b,  219.  1.  b,  witli  Pe 
Guttural  verbs  1 12.  4,  with  Aj'in  (iuttu- 
ral  119.  1,  121.  3,  with  Lamedh  Guttu- 
ral 126.  1. 

Pazer,  clause  divided  by  36.  2,  40.  2, 
train  of  .18.  7,  41.  e. 

Pe  Alejih  verbs  110.  3. 

Pe  Guttural  verbs,  origin  of  term,  76.  3, 
their  j)eculiarities  108,  109,  remarks 
111-115,  paradi^rm  IV. 

Pe  Kuii  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3,  their 
peculiarities  129,  remarks  131,  132, 
paradigm  VII. 

Perfect,  see  Preterite. 

Perfect  verbs  81-85,  remarks  86-96,  with 
suffixes  101,  lu2,  remarks  104-106, 
paradigms  II,  HI. 

Periods  of  human  life  203.  1.  b. 

Persian  construct  state  61.  6.  a. 

Personal  endings  and  prefixes  of  verbs  8.5. 
1.  a,  before  suffixes  101.  1,  more  closely 
attached  than  suffixes  or  prefixed  prepo- 
sitions 101.  2.  b. 

Personal  pronouns  71,  not  expressed  in 
the  subject  unless  emphatic  246,  third 
person  adiled  to  subject  246.  2. 

Pe  Yodli  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3,  pe- 
culiarities 144-146,  remarks  148-153, 
])arHeUgm  X. 

Piel,  signification  of  78,  relation  toHiphil 
bO.  2.  rt  (1),  formation  of  82.  3,  unusual 
forms  of  92.  a,  b,  verl)s  with  two  forms 
of  122.  2,  142.  4,  nouns  derived  from 
189.  2.  a. 

Pile),  Pilpel,  Poel  not  distinct  species  from 
Piel  83.  C  (1). 

Place  where  or  whither  288.  2.  b. 

Plural  endings  201. 

Plural  for  singular  in  verbs  (?)  88  (3  f.  pi.), 
of  majesty  203.  2,  289.  3. 

Pluralis  inliumanus  289.  4.  a. 

Pluralitj'  expressed  by  repetition  296.  2. 

Points  extraordinar3'  4.  a. 

Points  Masoretic  10,  accuracy  of  49. 

Polish  accent  33.  4.  a. 
i   Precative  particle  274. 

Predicate  261,  comjOTund  289.  1.  a,  289. 
5.  b,  agreement  witli  nouns  in  the  con- 
struct relation  293. 

Prefi.xed  particles  229-235,  two  constitut- 
ing a  word  229.  2.  a. 

Prepositions  inseparable  232-234,  separate 
2;-!8,  with  suffixes  239. 

Preterite,  personal  endings  of  85.  1.  a  (1), 
with  suffixes  101.  1,  104,  Kal  before 
suffixes  101.  3,  uses  of  266,  and  future 
in  combination  268,  269. 

Pretonic  vowels  64.  2,  in  Kal  preterite 
82.  1,  not  rejected  from  Miphal  91.  6, 
106.  a. 

Primary  preferred  toa  secondary  form  289. 

Primary  Tenses  266,  267,  with  Vav  Con- 
junctive 275. 


INDEX  L 


389 


Pronominal  ideas  expressed  by  nouns 
246.  2.  b. 

Pronominal  roots  68,  the  basis  of  adverbs, 
prepositions  and  conjunctions  236.  1.  a. 

Pronominal  suffixes  72.     Ste  Suffixes. 

Pronouns,  personal  71,  as  subject  246, 
repetition  of  297,  demonstrative  73, 
252.  2,  2o9,  26o,  relative  74,  300-303, 
interrogative  and  indefinite  75,  198.  a, 
298.  3,  304. 

Proper  nouns  with  the  article  249. 1.  a,  in 
loose  apposition  256.  3.  a. 

Pual,  signification  of  78.  3,  formation  of 
82.  3,  no  imperative  84,  in  perfect  verbs 
93,  Ayin  Guttural  verbs  121.  1,  Ayin 
doubled  verbs  142,  143.  1,  Ayin  Vav 
verbs  163.  4,  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  169. 

1,  Lamedh  He  verbs  176.  6. 
Pure  vowels  15. 

Quadriliteral  roots  68.  a,  verbs  182,  nouns 
197.  1,   Segholates   plural  of  210.  3.  a. 

Question,  direct  and  indirect  298.  1,  dis- 
junctive 298.  2. 

Quiescent  letters  11. 1,  their  two  uses  dis- 
tinguished 13,  softened  to  vowels  57.  2. 

Quiescent  verbs  107,  144. 

Quinqueliteral  roots  68.  a,  nouns  197   2. 

Quotation,  direct  for  indirect  305.  a. 

Eadical  letters  7.  3. 

Rai)he  27. 

R'bhia,  clause  divided  by  36. 2,  40. 2,  train 
of  38.  6,  41.  d. 

E'bhi*  Mugrash  41.  a  (2). 

E'bhi'',  small  41.  c  (2). 

Keduplication  of  second  radical  in  verbs 
b2.  3.  in  nouns  189,  of  third  radical  in 
verbs  92.  «,  115,  122.  1,  156.  2,  163.3, 
176.  1,  178.  1,  in  nouns  189.  1.  d,  189. 

2.  c,  of  two  radicals  in  verbs  92.  a,  115, 
122.  1,  137,  142.  2,  156.  3,  163.  2,  in 
nouns  189.  1.  e,  189.  2.  h,  190,  of  a 
short  word  132.  1,  234.  a. 

Relative  clauses  300-304. 

Kelative  pronoun  74,  its  government 
300,  antecedent  300.  a,  antecedent  not 
expressed  301,  omission  of  302. 

Repetition  of  verbs  281,  nouns  296,  pro- 
nouns 297. 

Re.sh,  sound  of  3.  3,  assimilated  to  a  fol- 
lowing consonant  54.  2,  inserted  in  lieu 
of  reduplication  54.  3,  jjrefurence  for 
Pattahh  60.  l.«,  withPattahh  furtive  (?) 
60.  2.  ft,  114,  with  simple  or  compound 
Sh'va  60.  3.  a,  120.  3,  with  Daglusli- 
forte  23.  1,  60.  4.  a,  previous  vowel 
lengthened  on  the  omission  of  Da^hesli, 
60. 4.  rt,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs  1 14, 
as  the  second  radical  118.  1,  120.  3,  as 
the  third  radical  125.  3,  126.  2,  127.  2. 

Rivers,  names  of,  mascoUne  199.  d. 

Roots  of  words  67,  68. 

Rukhokh  21.  2.  a. 

Samaritan  Pentateuch,  its  negligent  or- 
thography, 51.  4.  a,  99.  1.  a,  and  va- 
riant Ibrms  156.  2. 

Samekh,  Shin  and  Sin  3.  1,  3.  1.  a. 


Sanskrit  laws  of  euphony  21.  2.  5,  55. 1.  a, 
accent  33.  4.  a,  augment  99.  1.  a,  femi- 
nine and  neuter  198.  e,  numerals  224. 
2.  a. 

Scriptio  plena,  defectiva  14. 

Seasons,  names  of  187.  2.  a. 

Seghol  inserted  between  concurring  con- 
sonants 61.  2,  173.  1,  in  Ayin  doubled 
verbs  61.  3,  136.  2,  141.  2,  in  Ayin 
Vav  verbs  155.  4,  159.  3,  162.  3,  final 
rejected  66.  1  (1),  173.  1,  with  pause 
accents  65,  in  Kal  active  participle  90, 
in  Niphal  91.  ft,  b,  in  Piel  92.  c,  d,  126. 

2,  before  suffixes  104.  A,  in  Hiphil  94. 
a,  b,  in  Hithpael  96.  b,  in  the  ultimate 
of  nouns  210,  211.  1,  217.  2,  in  the 
penult  of  feminine  nouns  209.  1.  e. 

Segholate  forms  from  triliteral  mono.S3']l- 
ables  or  final  syllables  61.  1.  b,  185,  186. 
a,  in  feminine  207,  construct  216.  1.  b. 

Segholate  nouns  185,  signification  of  186, 
their  feminine  210.  2,  plural  210.  3, 
dual  210.  4,  construct  218.  2,  with  suf- 
fixes 220.  5,  with  He  paragogic  223.  1. 

Segholta,  verse  divided  by  36.  1,  train  of 
38.  3. 

Sentence,  simple  or  compound  243.  2, 
elements  of  243.  3,  subject  of  244,  pre- 
dicate of  261.  1. 

Separate  particles  236-242. 

Septuagint,  equivalents  for  Ayin  3.  4, 
mode  of  writing  Hebrew  words  49.2,3. 

Servile  letters  7.  3,  anagrams  of  7.  3.  a. 

Shalsheleth,  when  used  38.  9,  Great, 
clause  divided  by  40.  2,  train  of  41./! 

Shin,  Sin,  anj  Samekh  3.  1,  3.  1.  a. 

Shurek,  quantity  of  14,  19.  1,  in  the  ult- 
imate of  Segholates  61.  2,  in  the  penult 
of  Stgholates  61.  4.  a,  207.  c,  in  Kal 
future  of  perfect  verbs  88,  before  suffix- 
es 105.  f/,  in  Kal  active  participle  90,  in 
the  ultimate  of  nouns  209.  2.  d,  211.  3. 

Sh'va  16,  silent  and  vocal  16.  2,  20.  1, 
simple  and  compound  16.  3. 

Sh'va  compound,  with  gutturals  16.  3,  60. 

3,  108,  witli  Resh  60.  3.  «,  120.3,  with 
strong  letters  16.  3.  b,  before  gutturals 
120.  2,  127.  3,  in  construct  plural  of 
nouns  216.  2.  a,  after  He  interrogative 
231.  2.  a,  after  Vav  Conjunctive  235.  a, 
which  is  selected  60.  3.  b,  109.  3,  112, 
changed  to  a  short  vowel  60.  3.  c,  with 
pause  accent  to  a  long  vowel  65. 

Sh'va  simple  with  gutturals  60.  3.  a,  in 
Pe  Guttural  verbs  112.  2,  5,  in  Lamedh 
Guttural  verbs  123.  4,  127,  1,  changed 
to  Seghol  by  pause  accent  65. 

Sibilants  7.  2. 

Silluk,  position  of  36.  1,  40,  2,  train  of 
38.  1,  41.  a  (1). 

Singuhir  predicate  or  pronoun  with  plural 
subject  289.  1-3. 

Sounds  of  the  letters  3. 

Species  of  verbs  76-80,  mutually  supple- 
mentary 80.  2.  a  (3),  what  number  in 
use  in  different  verbs  8U.  2.  a  (4),  forma- 
tion of  82,  with  double  forms  in  distinct 


390 


INDEX  L 


senses  83.  c  (1),  122.  2,  142.  4,  com- 
pound 83.  c  (2). 

Stroiifj  letters  7.  2. 

Subject  244,  omitted  245,  indefinite  245. 
2,  impersonal  245.  3,  compounil  247.  1, 
2S'0.  1,  {grammatical  and  logical  247.  2. 

8ufti.\fs,  pronominal  72,  of  verbs  101.  2. 
ot  nouns  219.  8,  relation  denoted  by 
257,  more  loosely  attached  than  affixes 
101.  2.  b,  witli  neuter  verbs  and  passive 
species  102.  2,  with  infinitives  and  parti- 
ciples 102. 3,  with  cardinal  numbers  224. 

1.  a,  253.  2  (2)  b,  with  nouns  in  the 
construct  25ii,  jilcoiuistic  use  of  297.  c. 

Su]ierlative  de!.'ree  2t>4. 

Syllables  18,  intermediate  20.  2,  mutations 
in,  a  source  of  vowel  chang'es  59. 

Syriac  currentl3'  read  without  vowels  10. 
a,  aspirates  21.  a,  doubling  of  letters 
23.  3.  b,  words  modified  from  Hebrew 
51.  3,  dual  204.  a. 

Svstema  morarum  18,  h, 

Tav  and  Teth  3.  2. 

Tav  unites  with  Tav  of  personal  affixes 
8t3,  b  (2  m.),  or  feminine  ending  54.  1, 
2U7  b,  prefixed  in  anomalous  verbal 
forms  94.  n,  1(5;..  5,  in  the  formation 
of  nouns  192,  194.  2,  in  Hitlipael  :issi- 
niilated  54.  2,  54.  4.  a,  82.  5,  131.  6, 
trans]iosed  54.  4,  82.  5. 

Tav  of  feminine  ending  rejected  55.  2.  c, 
198.  b,  origin  of  198.  e,  added  to  verbs 
86.  b,  11)8.  1,  171.  1,  174.  1,  in  nouns 
196.  a,  198.  b,  207. 

Tenses,  primary  84,  266,  267,  secondary 
99,  276,  277,  subjective  use  of  265.  3, 
past  and  future  not  promiscuously  used 
268.  a. 

Time,  conception  of  265. 

Time,  when  and  how  long  288.  2.  a. 

T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  clause  divided  by  36.  2, 
train  of  38.  8. 

Transitive  construction  of  intransitive 
verbs  285. 

Transposition  of  letters  50.  2,  54.  4. 
82.  5. 

Tsere  rejected  from  the  ultimate  of  verbs 
66.  1  (1),  173.  2,  in  Kal  jjreterite  86.  a, 
166.  1,  in  fem.  plur.  future  lSiph:il  91. c, 
and  Piel  92.  c,  in  I'iel  inf.  abs.  92.  U,  in 
Hiidiil  94.  b,  e,  in  Hophal  inf  abs.  9.5.  c, 
with  Aieph  in  jilace  of  Sh'va  60.  3.  c, 
92.  e,  112.  1,  184.  b,  as  union  vowel 
with  the  preterite  104.  a,  in  the  ulti- 
mate of  verbs  before  suffixes  104.  h, 
of  Lamedh  Guttural  verbs  126.  1,  of 
Lamedh  Aleph  verlis  Kit).  5,  in  the  ult- 
imate of  nouns  209,217.1,  in  the  penult 
of  nouns  212,  218.  1, 

Tsiunor  41.  c  (3). 

Vav  rejected  alter  vowelless  consonants 
53.  3.  a,  186.  b,  initial  chaiigeil  to  Yodh 
56.  2,  145.  1,  rarely  reduplicated  56.  3, 
in  verbs  156.  1,  l(i3.  1,  or   nouns  189. 

2.  r,  softened  or  rejected  57.  2,  154, 
18(!.  b,    188.  2.  c,  192.  b,  209.  1.  J]  2W. 

3.  c,  213.  a,  218.  1.  d,  preceding  a  vow- 


elless consonant  61.  1.  a,  235,  paragogio 
61.  6.  «,  222,  omitted  from  3.  pi.  pre- 
terite 86.  b,  in  Kal  infinitive  87,  in  Kal 
future  88,  in  Kul  imi)erative  89,  in  Kal 
passive  participle  9U,  in  I'ual  93.  6, 
added  to  3.  m.  pi.  suffix   lU4.  /. 

Vav  in  K'thibh,  whero  K'ri  has  Kameta- 
Hhatuph  13.  a,  88,  105.  d,  217.  1.  c, 
Pattahh  125.  1,  or  Hhateph-Kamets  13, 
a,  89  (f.  s.),  216.  2.  a. 

Vav  Conjunctive  235,  306.  b,  310-312. 

Vav  Consecutive  of  the  future  33.  4,  99, 
with  A^'in Guttural  verbs  11 9. 1, Lamedh 
Guttural  126.  1,  Avin  doubled  140.  1,  5, 
I'e  Yodh  149.  5,  'l.JI.  3,  152.  2,  Ayin 
Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  155.  5,  159.  3, 
160.  2,  162.  3,  Lamedh  Aleph  168.  4, 
Lamedh  He  173.  1,  174.  4,  175.  3,  176. 
4,  177.  3,  178.3,  time  denoted  by  276. 

Vav  Consecutive  of  tlie  preterite  33.  4, 
100,  with  I'e  Guttural  verbs  112. 3,  time 
denoted  by  277. 

Vav  Conversive,  see  Vav  Consecutive. 

Verbs,  their  species  76-80,  occurring  in 
all  the  species  80.  2.  a  (4),  denouiina- 
tives  ^0.2. b,  perfect  81-lUU,  wiUisulfix- 
es  101-106,  imperfect  107-17i>,  doubly 
imperfect  180,  defective  181,  quudrilite- 
ral  182,  syntax  of  265-282,  coordinated 
283,  oliject  of  284-286,  with  more  than 
one  object  287,  passive,  object  of  287.  5, 
agent  of  287.  5.  b,  repetition  of  281. 

Verbs,  paradigms  of,  perfect  n,  with 
suffixes  HI,  I'e  Guttural  IV,  Ayin  Gut- 
tural V,  Lamedh  Guttural  VI,  Pe  Nun 
Vll,  Ayin  doubled  VllI,  Pe  Yodh  X, 
Avin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  IX,  Lamedh 
Aleph  XI,  Lamedh  He  XII. 

Verbs,  personal  endings  and  prefixes  ot 

85.  1.  a,  85.  2.  «,  suffixes  of  101-106. 
Verbs,  middle  e  and  o  82.  l.a,  have  Pat- 
tahh in  Kal  future  84.  3.  b  (1),  inflected 

86.  a,  before  suffixes  104.  /i. 

Verbs  with  Pattahh  in  Kal  future  84.  3.  b, 
111.  1,  116.  1,  123.  1,  140.  1,  145.  2, 
with  Tsere  in  Kal  future  84.  3.  c,  130. 
145.  2,  148,  174.  3. 

Voluntative  forms  of  the  future  97.  2.  b, 
275.  2.  c. 

Vowel  changes  58-66,  significant  58.  1, 
euphonic  58.  2,  causes  of  59,  due  to 
mutations  of  syllables  59,  to  contiguous 
gutturals  60,  to  concurrent  consonants 
61,  to  concurring  vowels  62,  to  prox- 
inuty  of  vowels  63,  to  the  accent  64, 
to  pause  accents  65,  to  the  shortening 
or  lengthening  of  words  66,  of  short 
vowels  in  mixed  penult  58.  2,  212.  e, 
218.  2.  b. 

Vowel  letters  7.  2,  use  of  11.  1,  distin- 
guished from  their  consonantal  use  13. 

Vowels  10-17,  Massoretic  signs  for  12, 
different  modes  of  dividing  them  12.  a, 
meanings  of  their  names  12.  b,  mutual 
relations  of  their  notation  by  letters  and 
by  pciints  13,  14,  mutable  and  immuta- 
ble  14,  58.  2,  pure  and  diphthongal  If^ 


INDEX  L 


191 


ambiguity  of  certain  signs  19,  20,o  and 
u  more  stable  than  i  and  e  60. 1.  a,  in- 
serted between  concurrent  consonants 
61.  1,  2,  e  and  o  preferred  before  con- 
current consonants  61.4,  I  and  u  before 
doubled  letters  61.  5,  paragogic  61.  6, 
222,  223,  concurring  62,  proximity  of, 
a  source  of  changes  63,  pretonic  64.  2, 
rejected  or  shortened  66.  1,  2,  of  union 
before  suffixes  101.  2,  e  witti  pretc  rite 
104.  a,  sometimes  a  with  future  10."). 
a,  final!  of  verbs  before  suffixes  104.  k, 
I,  vowe  a  retained  in  ultimate  before 
suffixes  105.  (/,  118.  3,  166.  5. 

Weak  letters  7.  2,  effect  of  upon  syllables 
18.  2.  c. 

Words  not  divided  in  writing 8,  ambiguity 
when  unpointed  10.  a,  sources  of  change 
in  51,  thre  estages  in  the  formation  of  67, 
changes  in  formation  and  inflection  69. 

Written  symbols  of  two  sorts  2. 

Yodbas  a  vowel  letter  11. 1,  in  Kal  active 


participle  90,  in  Niphal  future  113.  1, 
before  suffix  105.  a,  219.  \.b,  initial  re- 
jected 53.  2.  a,  b,  145.  3,  149,  152.  1, 
186.   b,    190.   b,   medial   rejected   53.   3. 

a,  b,  152,  170,  171,  softened  or  rejected 
57.  2,  154,  186,  b,  188.  2.  c,  192.  6,  209. 
1./  210.  3.  c,  213.  a,  218.  l.d,  changed 
to  Aleph  56.  4,  paragogic  61.  6.  o, 
222,  added  to  2  f.  s.  preterite  86.  b, 
to  2  f.  s.  suffix  104.  c,  219.  1.  b,  219. 
2.  c,  oniitteii  from  1  sing,  preterite  86. 

b,  from  Hiphil  94,  in  Lamedli  He  verbs 
171,  174.  1,  prefixed  in  formation  of 
nouns  192,  194. 1,  appended  in  forma- 
tion of  nouns  196,  quiescent  after  pre- 
fixed prepositions  232.  3.  b,  after  Vav 
Conjunctive  235.  c. 

Zakeph  (iadhol,  clause  divided  by  36.  2, 

when  used  38.  5. 
Zakeph  Katon,  clause  divided  by  36.  2, 

train  of  38.  4, 
Zeugma  286.  3. 


i:n^dex  II. 


TEXTS  OF  SCRIPTUEE  EXPLAINED  OR  REFERRED  TO. 


GENESIS. 

1  :    !....§  21.  1,  248. 

5,  250.  b,  258.  2. 
a,  266.  1,  276.  f, 
284.  rt,  289.  3.'«, 
302.  a 

1,21.... 284.  a 
2.... 21.    1,      235, 

261.  3,   266.  2.6, 

284.  a,  296.  3.  a, 

309.  1 
2,5,10,27.... 276,/ 
3.... 270.  1.  a 
3fl....245.  1.  a 
3,  6.... 272.  a 
4....284,6,287.4.« 
5.... 35.1,  255.1.6, 

284.  a,  311.  4 

5,  6.... 284.  a 
5,8,  10.... 284.  a 
6. ...311.  1 

6,  7.... 248.  1 
8.... 284.   a 

9,  20.... 284.  a 
11....24.a,45.2,257. 

6,  272,  285.  3.    a 
12.... 219. 1.6,  311. 

1.  « 
14.... 277.  a 
16....  248.2,2.53.2(2) 

«,  257.  9 
17,23,  29.... 284.  a 
18.... 45.  2.  c 
21.... 252.  1.  c 
22.... 38.  1.  a 
24.... 222 
24,  26.... 38.  1.    a, 

284.0! 
26....289.  3.  a 
28.... 252.1.C?,  275.1 

28.  29.... 286.  1.  c 

29.  ..267.  1.  a,  284. 
e,  286.  1.  c(2) 

30.... 257.  2.  a 

31....255.].ff,28S.l 

2:     1....276.  rf,  311.  1 

2.... 266.  1,  276.  d 

3  ...255.1. a,  279.f 

(2) 
4....4.«,24.a,  250. 

a,  279.  d 
5.... 261.  3.6,266. 

l.c 
5,  18  . .  299.  6 
6  . .  .267.  4,  277.  a 
7....  148.  5,287.3 
7-9,15  ...276.  d 
7,10,  84.... 286. 1. 

c(3) 
8.... 266.  l.c 


2:  9....  §  235,248.6.  c, 
e,  279.  d,  284.  g 
10....  269.  2.  6 
11.... 248.6,253.1. 6, 
255.  1.  6,  263.  6 
12....  16.  3.6,  235.rt 
14.... 261.  2 
16... .267.  l.tf,  281. 

1.  a  (1) 
16,  17... 311.  4 
17....]06.a,  267.  1. 

e,  281.  1,  297.  6 
18.... 244.    6,   267. 

1.  a,  279.  a 
19....148.5,256.2.«, 
276.  d,  284.  «,/, 
287.  3.  a 
20,  21.... 284.  a 
21.... 239.  6 
23,...  16.    3.  6,24. 
a,  127.  3.  284.  e 
24. ...267.  1.  <? 
25.... 269.  2.  6 
3:    1....266. 2.«,299.c 
1,3,  17.... 267.1.  « 
2,  3...  267.  1 
4. ...281.  1.6 
5....  106.a,  312.2.6 
5, 14, 17.... 262.1. « 
6....241.1.287.4.rt 
8....284.«,  287.4. 

a.  290.  1.  a 
8,  14.... 284.  a 
1(»,  15,  18.... 284.  a 
11...  279.  6,  e 
12.... 297.  6 
13.... 266.  1,  2S4.  « 
14.... 24.  a,  284.    a 
14,16,18.... 267.  l.« 
15.... 30.   2,250.  6, 

287.  2.  a 
16.... 53.  3.  a 

16,  17.... 284.  a 
17....  16.  3.6 

17,  23.... 266.  l.c 
19.... 266.  l.«,  267. 

l.e,  284.  a 
20.... 284.  a 
21.... 284.  a 
22.... 21.  1,   179.2, 
258.  1.  a,  266.  2. 
6. 267.  1  ./,  277.  a 
23,  23 . . .  294.  6 
24....257.2.a,  284.a 
4:    3.... 232.  3.  a 
4.... 219.  2.  6 
4,5  ...284.  a 
6....  245.3.  a,  266. 

3.6 
7....267.  l.a,  298. 
l.a 


4:    9....  §266. 2.6,298. 
1.  a 
10.... 278.2,  287.4.a 
12.... 279.  d 
13.... 264.  2(2)6 
14....245.3.  ff,  248. 

3.  c,  266. 2.  c 
15.... 259.  a,  284.  a 
15,  25.... 284.  a 
16.... 148.  5 
17.... 35.  1 
18.... 284. e 
23.... 88     (f.    pL), 
89  (f.  pi.),  98.  2, 
127.  1 
24.... 267.1.6,  2&4.a 
26....245.  3,  297 
5:    2....284.a 
3  ...288.  2« 
4.... 279.  d 
5....179.2,254.2.a 
8.... 293.  a 
14,17,27...  284.6 
17.... 38.  l.a 
18.... 226.  2 
20.... 39.  4.  a 
23,  31.... 284.  e 
29.... 267.  1.  a 
6:    2....300.  c,  .304 
3.... 74.  a,  139.2, 

159.  3,  160.  2 
4.... 266.2.6,267.4. 
a,  277.  a,  300.  c 
6.... 266.  l.c 
7.....300.  c 
9.... 96.  6,  266. l.a 
10,  11.... 276.  d 
13....266.  2,  3.  6 
14-16.... 267.  l.c 
16.... 255.  1.  a 
17.... 267.1.a,  278.2 
18....  100.  2.  «(]) 
19....45.2.c,230.3.a 
21.... 267.  4.  6 
22.... 287.  2 
7:    1....366.  1,  287.  4 
3.... 255.  4,  367,1. 

C,  296.  1,  300 
4....254.2,262.1.a, 

278.2 
5.... 266.  l.c 
6....356.2.a,309.3. 

a,  .311.  4 
7.... 358.  3.  C,  290. 

1.  a 
9.... 255.  4 
11  ...266.  1.  a 
13.... 202.  c,249.3, 

254.  1.  a 
14.... 248.  6.  e 
16.... 245.  2.  a 


7:  19.. 

§  296.  3 

22.. 

.304 

23.. 

.175.  3 

8:    1-3 

...276.  d 

3,7 

....281.2 

4.. 

.291.  a 

5... 

.260.  1,281.2.6 

5, 14.... 266.    1.  a 

6... 

.266.  l.c 

8.. 

.298.  l.a 

10.. 

.283.  a 

11.. 

.266.  1.  c 

12.. 

.  150.  2 

17.. 

.151.  1 

18.. 

.148.5 

21... 

.284.  c 

22... 

.235,  267.  1.  a 

9:      2.. 

.290.  1.  a 

3... 

284.  c,  300 

4... 

.266.  2.  a,267. 

1. 

e 

5... 

.267.1.«,300.6 

6... 

.245.  l.a,  267. 

1. 

e 

9... 

297.  a 

13... 

.277.  6 

14... 

.1:^9.1.282.0 

17... 

.366.  3.  c 

18... 

.278.  2.  a 

20... 

.249.3.  «,  261. 

3. 

a 

83... 

.290.1.  a,  309. 

1. 

a 

24... 

.  148.  5,  284.  c 

26,  27.... 272.  8 

10:    5... 

.219.  2.  6 

9... 

264.  3  (2)  d. 

26 

7.  4.  6 

12... 

.290.  l.« 

19... 

.56.  4,  126.  2 

19,  3C 

....245.  2.d 

21... 

.259.  a,  297 

25... 

.2.53.2(2),384.c 

36... 

.2:30.  1.  a 

11:    1.. 

.2-24.  l.a,  362. 

2. 

a 

3... 

.271.  a 

4,5 

...248.  1 

5... 

.265.3.  a  (6) 

5,8 

...2G6.  1.  c 

6... 

.267.1.c,299.c 

6,7 

...141.1 

7  .. 

.86.  «,267.1./-, 

239.  3,  a 

9.. 

.57.  1.  245.  2 

10... 

.376.  6 

16... 

354.  2 

29... 

.258.  3.  6,  290. 

1. 

a 

30... 

.56.2,261.3.1 

31... 

.22.6 

394 


INDEX   II. 


11:  32-12 

:  l....S2T6.rf 

12:    2... 

.2t;2.     2.      fl, 

2t5 

7.  1,  275.  2.  (/ 

3... 

.10.  8.  b 

4... 

.10.  a,2(>6.  l.c 

5... 

.257.    1.    bis, 

266.  1.  c 

6... 

.309.  1.  a 

7... 

.2o2.1.f/,  266. 

2. 

c 

8... 

.219.1.6,309. 

1. 

b 

9... 

.281.  2 

11... 

.245.3.  fl.  266. 

2.6,  283.  a 

IS... 

.277.  ft 

13... 

.267.1.^277.0 

14... 

287. 4'.  a 

15... 

2»7.  5.  a 

19... 

.235 

20  .. 

M 

IS:    2... 

.248.  6./ 

4.. 

.248.    1,   266. 

l.c 

5.... 252.  l.rf 
6.... 289.  4.  a 
7... .309.  l.rt 
9....  119.  1,  182.a, 

271.  a 
10....245.  2.(/,  279. 
d,  285.2,  287.4.« 
12.... 291.  a 
14. ...276./ 
16....  24.5.  2.a,  267. 

1.  e,  300.  b 
1....31I.  1.  a 
2....71.  (7.  3,245. 

l.a 
4.... 2.5.5.  2,  2G5..3. 
a  i6),  288.  2.  a 
6.... 266.  1.  a 
6...  220.  6.  b 
8.... 290.  1.  « 
9. ...253.2(1) 
10.... 63.].ff,  22:^.1. 
6,258.3. ft,  262. 2, 
296.  2 
11,19.... 258.  3.  ft 
12.... 2,56.  2.  a 
13....248.6.  ft,  258. 

3.  rt,  ft 
14...  2<;6.  1.  c 
15.... 290.  1.  a 
18....2(;6.  \.a 
19....10.a,  287.5.6 

19,  -iZ 250.  a 

20.... 266.    1.    6 
22.... 266.  2.  a 
2:^,24.... 266.    1.6 
24.   ..267.  1.  e 
1....249.  :^,  2.'>2. 1. 
/",  276.  f,  2K8.  1 
2.  ...47,  '256.  2.  a, 

30".).  1.  a 
3... 266.  1.  ft 
4....267.  l.c,301.ft 
7.... 266.  1.  a 
10.... 300.  ft 

11  ...2.i().3,248.6.  ft 

12  ...248.5,  279.  c 
(4) 

13....245.  l.ff.260. 

5.  281.  1.  n  {■>), 

302.  a 
14.... 246.  1.  a 
15.... 246.  1.  ti 
17....2ftl.  c 
18....256.3.ff,r!57.3, 

266.  1.  n,  2.  c 
18-21..  .284.  ft 
21....848.  6.  6 


19: 


...J302.C 
...•.;66.1.ft,  279.ft 
...4.  a.  246.    1. 
(J,  257.  9.  a 
...245.  1.  a 
...266.  2.  d 
...90  (2  f.  8.), 
266.  1.  ft 
.   .3.57.  2.  a 
...  60.  3.   6   (2), 
252.  \.(i 
15..    .43.6 
....266.  1.  c 
.... 297.  a 
5....217.1.« 
....284.  « 
6,  16.... 277.  6 
...60.  2,  257.  5 
....267.  1.  e 
...280.3.6 
...287.5 
...257.6.6,300 
...65.  a 

... 267. l.f.  .305.6 
...24.  6,2:31.2.a, 
257.  6.  ft,  289.2.0 
....267. 1.6-,  307 .6 
....90  (f.  8.) 
...277.6 
...266.  l.c 
...266.  l.a 
..  266.  l.c,  288. 
2.  6,  309.  1.  a 
. .  .257.2.a,274.a 
...269.  1,271 
...256.2 
...266.  1.  a 
...245.2.6 
...  290.  2 
...266.  1.  e 
...266.     2.      6, 
309.  1 

...267.1.  rt, 264. 
2(2)6 

...286.  l.c  (3) 
...267.1./,  277. 


a 


20 


.39.  3.  or,  257. 
9.  o,  258.  3.  6, 
266.  2.  6 
...24.  6,  2;M.2. 
(/,  248  6.  c,  256. 

2.  o,  271.  a 
...254.2.6,261. 

3.  a 

...296.  3.  6 
29..     254.  4 
...274,  275.2.  c 
...266.  l.c,  279.6 
...250.  6,  278.3 
...24.  a,  305.6 
...309.  3.  a 
34,.35....266.1.rt 
...l:n.3,  2.-)3. 1. 
6,  264.   2  (2)  «, 
281.  2.  a 
...209.  l.a, 245. 
l.a,  5,  248. 3.  «, 
206.  1.  a 
...304bis,  2.50.r 
...266.2.6.278.2 
...24.a,  278.  2.a 
...278.  2.  a 
...258.  3.  6 
...272.    c,    245. 
2.6 

...86.   6   (2in.) 
105.  a,  </,246. 1. 
a,  266.  1.  ft 
...2.58.3.6,271. a, 
275.  2.  c 


19:  21 
22 


a5 

20:    5 


9. 
12. 

14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
25. 
26. 
28, 
30. 

31. 
22:    1. 

2. 

4. 

5. 

8. 
11. 
12. 
14. 


16 
23 
24 
23:  1 
4 


24 


,...§266.  2.  c 

..  245.  2.  ft,  266. 

2.  a 

...266.  1.  c 
....248.  6./,  266. 

1.  c 

....276,  f/,  291.  a 
. ..  248..3.a,254.4, 

279.  ft 

....261.3.  6 
....252.  2.  6 
,  35.... 106.  a 
....38.  1.  a 
....71.a.3.  297.a, 

29a  1.  a 

...166.     2,  246. 

1.  a 

.    ..275.  2.  fJ 

....22.  6,    75.  1, 
267.  1 

....2.57.  9,  305.  a 

....289.  3.  a 

....273 

. . .   127.  1 

....266  l.a, 276./ 

....248.  6.  c 

. . .   120.  2 

....266.1.f,  291.a 

....65.  a 

....287.4.  a 

....-Mb.  3 

....216.  1.6 

....251.  a 

....119.  1,  176.  1 

. ...  39.  3.  6 

....27.5.    1.    a(l) 

....246.  1.  a 
29.... 219.    1.   ft 
..  245.  3.  ft,  267. 

!•/ 

...245.  2.  6 

..  266.  l,276.rf, 
284.  6,  309.  3.  a 

...251.a,266.2.  ft 

...276.  6,312.  2 

...271.  a 

...19.     1.  a,  44 

...206.  3.  a 

...272.C 

...126.2,245.3.a, 

300.  <■ 
....266.  2.  a 

...2.54.4.  a 

...312.  2. rt 
,.   .254.  2,  3 

...27.3,  275.  2.  c, 

289.  6.  rt 
....167.3,245.2.  a 
, . . .  105.  d 

.   .2.57.  9.  6 

...105.  rf,  125.  1 

13...  266.    2.  c 

...257.   9,     273. 

a.  294.  h.  307.  6 

20...  276.  d 

...249.3 

...119.  1,266. l.c 

2....309.  3.  rt 

...25j<.  3.rt,  275. 

2.  f 

.    267.  1.  e 

...252.6,  272.  c 

...a5.  1.  o 
...2.50.6 

...39.4 

...267.  \.h 

...273 

33.... 266.   1.  d 

. . .  248.  3 
....298.2,309.1.0 
.254.2.c,257.4 


24:  23 

32 
ZA 
35 
38 
41 
42 
42, 
42, 
45 
48 
51 
.55 
58 
63 
65 

67 

25:    5 

8 

12 

16 

18 

2:3 

25, 

27 

31 

34 

26:    3 

4 
6 
8 

10. 

13. 


28 


29 
27:     1 


4.. 

4, 
6. 

9. 
12 
13, 
16 
19. 
21 
23. 
25 
26 

27 
29 
30 

33 

34 

36 
37 
38 

41 
42 
44 
45 
28:  6, 
9 
12 
15 
16, 

17 


...5160.3 

...245.  4.  a 

...111.2.6 

...246./ 

...305.  a 

. . .  307 

..  21.  1 

48,  65.... 89.  4 

49  ...  306.  o 
....246.  l.a 

131.  1 
....27.5.  l.c,2.  c 
....290.  2 
....298.  1 
....279.  c(3) 
....73.  2.  a,  178. 

3,  248.  3.  6 

..  249.3.6, 259. c 
....43 

...38.  1.0 

...2.57.  1 
....246.  2 
. ...  245.  2.  d 

.  .  296.  2.  a 

26.... 24.5.  2.  b 

...2:».  4.  6 
...  98.1.a,  125.1 
,...65.  a 

...202.  1.  6,266. 

2.  c 

...30.  2,249.3 

...36.  1 

...248.3 

...266,1.«,277.6 

..  266.  1.  c,281. 
2.  6 

18.  ...104.  g 

...1.58.4,276./, 
277.  ft,  305.  a 

..254.  2.  ft,  266. 
l.a,  272.rt,  281.1 

...60.  3.0 
....88   (f.   pi.), 
279.6 

267.  1.  /,  h, 

275.  2.  c 

41....271.a 

...287.  4.  a 

...273.  c 

...119.  1,278.3 

...142.  6 
19,2(!....275.  l.c 

...36.2 

...  105.  6,  273 

. . .298.  2 

.  ..276. /• 
..267."l 
...24.  a,  131.  3. 

274.  a 

...120.3 
,...179.  1 

...266.  l.c,  281. 

l.a  (2),  309.  3.0 
...  267.  l.A,278. 
2.  a.  282.  a 

...28.5.3.rt.  297.0 

...255.4,266.1.6 
....287.  3.  rt 
...   16.  3.6,231. 

2.  a 
....2.57.9,285.3.0 

...278.  2,284.  e 
....234.  l.a 

...285.  1 

. .  275.  1.  a  (1) 
....89.4 
,...55.  1 

...300.  C 

...246.  1.0,266. 
2.6 

...305.6 


INDEX   II. 


395 


28:  20,21.... §277,312.1 

20-22...  306.  6 
29:     2.... 267.  4 

fi,  3....139.1,27r.a 
3.... 245.  1.  a 
5.... 22.  «,  231.2.a 
6....  34,  262.  2.  a 
8....  139.1,  267.1.C 
9.... 64,  260 
10.... 10.  a 
17....2CI2 
20.... 234.  1.   a 
21. ...35.  2 
23....10.  « 
26.... 267.  4.   b 
32....  105.  ff,  118.3, 

805.  a 
34,  .35....  248.  3.  c 
30:    1... 24.  a,  34 
6....  104.  a 
13.... 266.  4.  a 
15....127. 1,  248.3.C 
16.... 252.  2.6 
19.... 217.  1.6 
24  ...272.  a 
27.... 131.  3 
29.... 300.  c 
31....43,  306.  6 
32.... 280.  2 
34.... 272.  a 
38....45.2,88.(f.pl.) 

bis,  218.  2.  a 
39.... 60.  3.6(2) 
41....  105.  6,275.1. 
«(4) 
31 :    1 . . . .  266.  1.  6 
4.... 45.  2.  c 
5. ...311.  1.  a 
6.... 71.  a  (2) 
8.... 306.  a 
9.  ...219.  1.  6 
13....  19.  2.  6,  249. 

3.6 
15....281.2.a,  287. 

5.  6 
20.   ..278.  3,     279. 

c(4) 
21....288.  2.  6 
27....126.  1,276.  e, 

283.  a 
28....258.  3.  c 
29....261.3.  6 
30...  86.  b.  (2  m.), 

91.  b 
31. ...267.  1./ 
32....104.  i,  301.  6 
34.... 266.  l.c 
35....  266.2.6, 272.  c 
36.... 75.  1 
39. ...61.  6.  a 
42...  306.  6,  307.  a 
44.... 271.  a 
49. ...272.  a 
82:    1....284.C 
5  ...111.2.  b 
6.... 276.  A 
8....245.  3.  6 
11 ....  22.   6,  264.  2 

(2)  a,  266.  2.  6 
12.... 277.  a 
16...  235.    c,    253. 

2(3) 
18....  19.  2.  a,  266. 

2.  d 
20.... 55,  2.  a,  61. 

l.c,  88  (pi.) 
22.... 45.  3 
23....2,52.  2.  6 
29.... 305.  6 
31 ... . 250.  6 
33:    4....4.a 


33:    5....S24.  «,  219. 
1.  6 
6....  88    (f.    pi.), 

297.  rf 
7  ...290.  \.a 
9.... 272.  a 
11.... 43,    168.    1, 

284.6 
13.... 308 
14.... 246.  1.  a 
17.... 245.  2.  6 
34:    7....267.  l.«,  279. 
C.  (2) 
11....267.  l.e 
16...  86.  6  dpi.) 
17  ...100.  2;rta) 
21.... 246.  2.261.2 
30.... 257.  5 
31.... 231.  2 
35:    7....289.  3.  a 

13,  14...  300.  C 
14.... 996.  3.  a 
15.... 284. 6 
18.... 34 

22.. ..39.  4.  a 
26.... 284. e 
27.... 256.  3.  a 
29.... 22.  6 
36:    2.... 266  \.  a 
6.... 258.  3.  c 
31,  32.... 276.  d 
37:    2....  252. 1.6,276. 
/,  278.  4.  a 
3.... 264.  2  (2)  a, 

275.2 
4.... 279.  6 
7.... 267.1.6, 276.6 
8.... 281.  \.a  (3), 

291.  a 
9.... 285. 3 
12.... 260 
14....10.  « 
15....245. 1.  a,266. 

2.  d 
17.... 271.  a,  287. 

4.  a 
19.... 73.  2.  a,  257. 
6.  6,  259.  6,  262. 
1.  a 
20....  104.  2,251.  a 
21....287.  2.  a 
22.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 

250.6 
23.... 284.  6 
24... 105.  d 
26.... 298.  3.  a 
27.... 272.  c 
32.... 24.  6,298.2 
33.... 105.   a,  281. 
1.6 
38:    9. ...131. 4 

11.... 261.    3.      a, 

288.  2.  6 
16.... 267.  1./ 
25....  71. a(3),  309.3 
28.... 245.  l.rt 
29.... 278.  4.  a 
39:    1.... 276,  276./ 
4....  119.    1,   245. 

1.  a 
4,  5.... 302.  a 
7,  12.... 98.  1 
9.... 305.  6 
10.... 296.  1.  a 
11.... 232.  5.  a 
12.... 22.  a 
14.. ..119.  1 

14,  17..    .92.  fij 
20.... 258.   2,    300. 

c,  302.  a 
23.... 278.  1 


40:    l....§256.    2.    a, 
258.  3.  c 
3..   .302.  a 
5.... 260,  291.  a 
7.... 22.  6 
8....261.  3.  6 
10....  278.4.a,  28.5.1 
14....  245.  3.  «,  266. 
1.  d,  /,  277.  6, 
305.6 
15.... 93.  d,  158.  4 
16.... 39.1. «,  254.1 
20.... 151.5,258.  3.6 
41:    1....256.  2.  a 
2-4  ...259.  6 
2, 18.... 262.  1.  a 
5...   16.  3.  6,  255. 

4.  6 
8.... 119.    1,   278. 

4.6 
10....258.  3,297.  (^ 
11.... 99.     2,     235, 

276.  h 
12....260.  2,  300.  6 
14....245.  l.a,2.  6 
17.... 278.  3 
19.... 257.  3 
21.... 219. 1.6,245. 

3.  a 

25,  26.... 246.  2.  a 
26.... 252.  1.  c 
32...  262.  1.  a 
33.... 35.  2 
33,  34.... 272 
35.... 252.  2 
39.... 279.  c? 
40.... 264.  2  (2)  a, 

285.  4 
43.... 94.6,  280.  3.a 
44.... 245.  2. «, 311. 

4.  a 

48.  56.... 284.  C 
51....92. c 
57.... 289.  5.  c 
42:    7....266.  2.  (i 
9, 23.... 262.  1.  a 
11....71.a(l),278. 

4.  a,  297.  6 
12.... 305.  6 
13.... 38.  1.  a,  253. 

1.6 
16.... 305.  a 
18.... 275.  ■i.d 
19....253.1.«,257.9 
21.... .39.  4 
23...  248.3.a, 278.3 
25.... 287.  1.  a 
25,  35.... 218.  2.  a, 

300.  6 
27....253.  1.  6 
32.... 253.  1.  6 
35.... 257.     10.     6, 

300.  6 
36.... 219.  1.  6 
37....  267.1.6,306.6 
43:    2, 11.... 257.  2.  a 
4,  5,  8.... 271.  6 
7.... 45.  1,  267.  1. 

6,  e,  281.  1 
8  ..   125.  1,297 
9.... 266.     1.     d, 

277.  6,  306 
9,  10.... 307.  a 

10.  ...266.1. «, 306.6 
12.... 257.     10.    6, 

262.  1.  a 
14.... 65.  fl,  82.  1. 

a  (3),  252.  1.  6, 

266.   1.  d,   296. 

3.  a 
15.... 24.  a 


43:  16....  §125.  1,273. 
c,  285.  3.  a 
18...  288.2.6 
21.... 300.  6 
25.... 267.  1.  6 
26.... 26 
27.... 262.     2.      a, 

298.  1.  a 
28.... 256.  2.  a 
29.... 141.  3 
32... 245.  2.  6 
44:     1....273,    300.    6, 
301 
2.....%.  2.  a 
3.... 266.  1.  a 
4.... 114,    285.   2, 

286.2 
5. . .  .267.  4.  6 
7.... 267.  2.  a 
9....246.1.«,304.a 
9,  22,  31.... 235.  d 
17. . .  .30.  2 
18....2ti7.1.(7,274.a 
22.... 245.  1'.  a, 308 
24.... 256.  2.  a 
28.... 253. 1.6,281. 

1.  a  (2) 
29.... 284.  c 
32....266. 1.  rf,  306 
33.... 272.  a 
45:    4.... 300.  6 
5....272. c 
8.... 305.  b 
12.... 263.  6 
20.... 272.  c 
22.... 248.4, 254.2.C 
25.... 4.5.  3 
46:     1...  259.  c 

2.... 38.  1.  a,  296. 

3.  « 
3....149.  2,  279.  6 
4....281.  2.  a 
7.... 2.58.  3.  6 
15.... 291.  a 
26.... 289.  5.  6 
26,  27.... 2.54.  2.  6 
27....248.  6.  c 
28.... 22. 6 
30.... 271,  279.  d 
31.... 266.  1.6,275. 

2  c 
32..'..266.  2.  6 
47:    9  ... 252.1. /,258.3 
14.... 259. c 
18.... 305.  6 
24....286.  1.(7.  (2), 

301 
29....273.  <i 
48:    6....2r,6.  1.  (? 
16.   ..278.  2.  a 
17.... 267.  1.6 
19...  246. 1. a, 281. 

l.c 
20.... 284.  c 
21.... 2^8. 2 
22....224.  1.  a 
49:    3.... 65.    a 
5.... 218.  1.  6 
8.... 297 

10....  24.6,309.1.  a 
11.... 53.  2.  a,  61. 
6.  a,  219.  1.  6, 
220.  5.  6,  222 
12. ...217.  l.a 
14,  15.... 276.  c 
17...  24.6,  218.  2. 

rt,  272.  a 
19.... 140.  1 
22....289.  4.  a 
23..   .139.  1 
24.... 302.  o 


396 


INDEX   IL 


40:  25  ...§104.  A,  284. 

6:    1....S275.     2.  c. 

rf,  287.  2.  a 

290.  l.a 

28....2.V1.  4.  a 

3.... 267.  1./ 
5.... 86.  6(2in.) 

29.... an*.  3.  a 

30  ...300.  b 

7....  153.  2,277.  a 

31.... 34.  a 

8.... 39.  1.  a 

50:  10...  28.-J.  3 

10,  16....278.  4.  6 

13.... 300. 6 

14.... 266.  l.c 

14.    ..279.  (/,297.(/ 

15....2(;6.  2.  rf 

15....207.  l.r/,28;. 

16.... 108.    1,    261. 

2.  «,  307.  6 

3.  6,  278.  2.  a, 

17.... 274 

289.  5.  c 

19....29S.  1 

21.... 272.  a 

23 2J.a,  2o7.3.  a 

23  ...302.  a 

26. ...148.  5 

6:     1.... 267.  l.a 

3  ...2S5.  4.  a 

EXODUS. 

10,  29.... 24.  a 

14.... 258.  3 

1:    l....§21.1 

16.... 254.  3 

6.... 290.  1.  a 

29....  10.  a 

7....276.(/,  287.5 

7:    9..   .275.2.  c 

10.... S8  (3/-.  pi.), 

10.... 266.1,  290.1.a 

an.  a,  277.  a. 

U  .....53.2.«,  297.6 

289.  5.  a 

11,  12.  ...276.  d 

14.... 284.  d,    286. 

17.... 294.  a 

l.fl(3) 

20.... 290.  l.a 

16....  179. 2, 235,  rf, 

22.... 53.  2.  a 

306.  i 

2o....2T9.d 

21  ...2,S9.  6.  a 

28.... 285.  l.a 

a2....248.  6.  e 

28,  29.... 288.  3.  a 

2:    3.... 24.  6,  104.?, 

8:     1   ...131.3 

279.6 

1,2  ...2.30.2.  a 

4... 53.  3.  6,  149. 

4....275.  2.  c 

2,  152.  3 

11....280.  3.  a 

6...  297.  c 

16...  275.  2.  c 

7.... 231.3,275.2.  C 

17.... 261. 3.  6, 305. 

9....1,'>1.2,  153.1, 

6,  306.  a 

163.5 

20.... 269.  2.6 

10....  104.  X- 

22....2;i8.  3.  a 

15...  ^48.  3.  a 

2:1....  100.  2.  a(l) 

17....  104.   (/,    105. 

25....272.  c 

O,  289.  6.  a 

9:    3.... 10.  a,  179.  1, 

80.... 60.  3.  c,  98. 

261.  8,  288.  3.  a 

2,  loli.  3 

5.   ..267.  l.a 

23. ...51.  2 

14.... 267.  1./ 

8:    1....27S.  4 

15....  119.1,  266.2.C 

2....53.2.  fl,93.  f, 

18.... 27,     104.    e, 

248.3.  ff,  261.3.6 

244.  a,  248.  2.  a, 

3.... 271.  a 

249.  3.  6 

4....39.  1.  a,  296. 

19.... 290. 2 

3.  a 

20.... 284.  J 

5....  131. 3,  246.2. 

21.... 304.  a 

a,  300 

22....27.5.  2.  c 

6.. ..2:9.  6 

25.... 126.  2 

6,  15.... 2.58.  3.  6 

27  ...263.6 

8....  257. 9.  6,  258. 

29.... 88  (pi.) 

3.  b,  285.  1 

31.... 26-2.  2.  a 

9....287.  2.  a 

10:     1....2.52.  2.  6 

13....  7.5. 1,309. 3.a 

3.... 91. 6,  290.  l.a 

14....2l5.2.a,300.d. 

5.... 245.  l.a 

15.... 296.  2.  a 

5,  21.... 245.  2.  6 

16...  258.3.6 

6....258.  3.  6 

18. ...271. a 

7,... 267. 1. A,  286. 

4:    2..     24.  ff,  75.  1 

l.c(2) 

3,4...  286.1. c  (3) 

8.... 278.  2,284.<', 

5.... 267.  1./- 

296.  2.  a 

8.  9  ..  306.'6 

9....2S6.  1.  a  (3) 

10....  2.57.6.6, 302.a 

14.... 265.  3.  a  (3) 

11.... 160.  2 

24.   ..151.5 

13....2.58.2,  245.2. 

26  ...266.2.6 

a,  302 

28....2;-2.  c 

14  ..  246.1. a,  267.1 

11:    5....2.52.  1.  rf 

16....2.S6.  l,<-(2) 

6....214.a,289.6.a 

18.... 271.   a,    298. 

8.... 252.  2.  6 

1.  a 

12:    2.... 260.  1 

28. ...126.  1 

3.... 248.4, 312.2.6 

25.... 305.  a 

4..    .297.^/,  300.6, 

2H....287.2.n,.3O0.r- 

30().  6 

29.... 112.3, 290.1.<j 

5-8.... 277.  a 

31.... 270.   d,    289. 

7.... 45.  2 

5.6 

11. ...309.  1.  6 

12:  15. 


1.5, 
16 

18 
21 
89 
40 
42 

43 

48 

49 

13:    1 


8 

9 

14 

16 

21, 

22 

14:     1 

2 

4 

9.. 
13.. 

14 
17 
27, 
30 
15:    1 


§25.5.1.n,311. 
4.  a 

19.... .312.  2.  a 
...248.6.  f,284. 
e,  287.  5.  6 
...254.  4.  6 
...89lf.8,m.  pi.) 
...142.6 
...266.  1.  a 
....246.2.  a, 2.52. 
2.  a 

45.... 286.1.  a  (4) 
....267.  l.e 
....2S4.e 
...24.  a 
...92.  c 
...280.4 
5....245.  2. rf 
7.... 288.  2.  a 
..284.  e 
. . .  302.  a 
..257.7 
...267.  1.  a 
..  219.  1.  6,286. 
l.c(2) 
22.... 248.  1 
...267.4,269.2.6 
...24.  « 
....275.  2.C 
....22.  6,  271.  a 
258.  3.  c 
275.      2.     d, 
300.  c 
...119.1 
...22.  6,  297.  a 
...279.  c(3) 
...287.  4.  a 
...22  6,  267.  5, 
276.6 

...56.  1.  105.  6, 
1:31.  1,  258.  3.  c 
...293.  a 
...61.  6,  104./, 
269.1 

...60.3.a,  61.6.a 
...104./ 
10...  :5ll.4,  c 

..11.  1.6,61.6, 
139.  1 
13.... 22.  6 
...269.2,6 
16.... 303.  a 
15.... 269.  2. c 

..22. 6, 61. 6.  a, 
257.  2.  a 
...24.6,  192.  a 
...293.  a 
...22.6 
...112.3 
...2.54.2.6 
...38.  1.  a 
7...  312.  2.  6 
8.... 71.  (Id) 
...305.  6 
...182.  a 
...39.3.6 
...272.  c 
...275.  l.a  (4) 
...254.2.6 
...38.  1.  a,  112. 
1,  245.  2.  a 
...244.  a 
...272.  c 
...273.6 
,...279.  rf 
...312.2.6 
...245.2.  6 
10. ...119.  1 
...285.2, 290.  l.a 
.     275.  1.  a  (4), 
289.  5.  c 


17:  12.... J  246.  2.  6, 
255.  1.6 

288.  2.  a 
4...  246.2.6 
6.... 297.  d 
..104.  i 
...266.2. 
...278.  1.2 

174.2 

246.  l.a, 266. 


16. 
3, 
5, 
8. 

11. 

14 

18 

19. 


28 
29 
30 
31 
35 

36 
22:    1 

1, 
2 
3 
4 
8 
11, 

n, 
20 
21 
21, 
22 

25 
26 
30 
1 


23 


2.  a 
....302.  a 
....246.  l.a 

25.... 246.  1.0 

...306.6 
,...88 
...94.C 

....281.  l.a  (2) 
,...217.  l.a 
,...257.3 

15....278.  4. a 

...281.  1.6 

13...  281.1.a(5) 

...1.50.2,281.1. 
6.  306.  c 

34.. ..111.  1 

...300.6 

17....39.  4.  a 
ff....2?2.  d 

...27,245.2 

5,  7.... 267.  l.« 
,...111.3.a 

...2,80.4 

...355.  1.  a 

...43 
,..270.  l.a 

...27 

...271. a 
279  e 

7,18  !..307.  O 

4,  5.... 807.  a 

...290.  l.a 

...98.  1.  a,  245. 
2.  a 

...79.  l.a 

...217.  l.f,  254. 
4.  a 

.   .279.  c(l) 

...267.  l.« 
.311.4.0 

...311.  4.  a 

...92.  d 

...19,2.  6,39.3. 

6,  281.1.6,291.0 
...284.  c,e 
...289.  3.  a 
...55.  1 

...24.  a 
...19.   2. 
3.6 
...92.  rf 

,...248.6,267.1. 
a,  306.  a 
2....269.  2.  a 
...218  1.6,306.6 
...16,S.  3 
...219.  1.  6 
. .  .43,  289.  3.  a 
12....2S1.  1.6 
21.... 79.  l.a 
. .  245.  2.  d 
...270.  1.  a 
30.... 245.  2.  d 
...30.5.6 
...289.  6.  a 
...219.  1.6 
...256.  2.  a 
...245.2,270.1. 
o,  272.  r  bia 
25  ...245.  2.  d 
. . .257.  2 


6,39. 


INDEX  II. 


397 


23: 


24: 


25: 


26; 


27 


28: 


29 


30 


32 


14.... §255.  4 
15.... 270.  1.  a 
17.... 288.  2.  & 
24. ...111.  3.  a 
26.... 209.  1.  a 
27....2S7.S.a 
30...  296.  1 
31....  104./ 

1....297.  d 

4.... 249.  3 

5....287.  3.  a 
14.... 304 
12,  32.... 255.  1.  b 
28.... 284. e 
31....11.  1.  &,  113. 

1,  287.  5.  a 
33.  ..2.53.  2  (2)  a 
35.... 296.  3.  c 
39.... 287.  3.  a 

5.... 309.  1.6 
16. ...255.  3.  a 
18,  19.... 254.  2.  a 
19.... 254.  2.  b 
21,  25.... 296.  2.  a 
23.... 218.  2.  « 
24  . .  53.  3.  a 
27.... 259.  a 
30  ...287.  5.  a 
31.... 287.  3.  a 
33....  100.  2.  a  (1), 
(2),  2.30.  4.  b 

1....288.  2.  c 

3,  19....284.  cJ 

7....284. e 
18....250.&,296.1.a 

1....119.  1 

2.... 257.  6.6 
10.... 25k  2  (2)  a, 

254.  4.  a 
17.... 255.      1.     6, 

256.  2 
21  ...300.6 
24  ...256.2.  a 
33....267.1./,284.e 
34....296.  2.  « 
35,  43.... 267.  1./ 
39.... 249.  3.  6 
40....209.  1.  a 
:    3.... 251.  a 

9.... 287.  3 

20.... 38.  4.  a,  267. 
10.6 

29.... 87 

30....  105.  a,d 

35.... 65.  a 

37....230.  4.  6 
:  18. ...119.3 

23.... 217.  1.  c 

32....106.a 

33,  38.... 304.  a 

34.... 38.  1.  a 

36.... 280.  2 

38.... 312.  2.  a 
:    6- •■■277.  6 

13.... 104. A 

14.... 289.  2.  a 

15.... 284.  e 
1....75.  1,119.  1, 

252.  2.  a 
2.... 258.  3.  6,  C 
4,  8.... 289.  3.  a 
6...  280.  3.  a 

10.... 273. c 

19.... 219.  2.  6 

22.... 272. c 

25....  104.  (?,  158.  2 

26.... 304.  6 

28,  29.... 276.  d 

29....279.  c(l) 

30...  272.  a 

31. ...274.  6 


32:  32....§306.  c 

33.... 304.  6 
33:    1....288.  3.  a 
2.... 284.  6 
3.... 63. 1.6,  176.4 
4,  6.... 276.  d 
5.... 308.  a 
7....  248. 3.  a,  267. 

5.  a 
8-11.... 277. a 
11. ...267.  4.  6 
13.... 219.  2.  6 
19.... 245.  2.  a 
20.... 105.  a 
34:    3....272.  C 
13.... 279.  6 
15.... 245.  2.6,267. 

1./ 

22.... 288.  2.  a 
23.... 288.  2.  6 
24.... 91. 6,  245.2. a 
28... 245.  1.  a 
30.... 279.  6 
34.... 287.  5.  a 
35:    5....297.  c 

5-9... 311.  1.  a 
11,  12.... 311.  1.  a 
11-19.... 284.  6 
16-19.... 311.  1.  a 
21,  23,  24.... 304 
22.... 250.  c 
36  :    1   . . .  248.  6.  a 
2.... 87 
3.  ...38.  l.ff 
4....252.1.  rf,296. 

1.  a 
5.... 264.  2 (2)  a 
23-25.... 254.  2. « 
28.... 218.  2.  a 
38.... 275.  1.  a(l) 
37:    9.... 278.  4.  a 
10.  ..287.  3.  a 

38  :   3...  287.  3.  a 

21. ...256.  3.  a 
27.... 253.  2(2) 
28....254.4.a,275. 
1.  a(l) 

39  :    1 . . .  .287.  3.  a 

10.... 255.1. 6,  257.4 
17.... 256.  2.  a 
23.... 269.  2.  6 
27.... 249.  3.  6 
30....287.  3.  a 
40...  258.  3.  c 
40:26.   ..259.6 

31,  32....275.1.a(4) 
36  ff.... 267.  4.  a 


LEVITICUS. 

1  :    2.... §267.1. a.  273 

2,3,  10.... 307.  a 

2  :    1,  4,  5, 7.... 307.  « 

8.... 284.  e 

3  ;   1....290.  2,  306.  c 
4:   2....253.  l.e,267. 

1.  e 
9.... 245.  l.« 
13.... 60.  3.  a 
13, 14.... 306.  6 
13-21.... 277 
22.... 300.  rt,  c 
23,  28.... 151.  5 
24.... 245.  2.6 
5:    1....269.2.a,  306.6 
2.... 304 
8....255.  4.  6 
13....2r.3.  1.  c 
15.... 245.  2.  d 
16,  24.... 270. 1.  a 


5:  21....§61.4.a,207.c 
22. . .  .119. 1 
24!!!!219!  2.a,255. 
3.  a 
6  :   3....256.2.a,300.c 
7....280.  3.  6 
8....289.  6.  a 
9.... 287.  5.  a 
13.... 252.1./,  258. 

3.6 
14.... 114 
15.... 95.  a 
7:    2....245.  2.  6 
2,  3.... 245.  2.6 
3, 4.... 284.  6 
8.... 256.  2.  a 
8,  19,  27... .297.  6 
11.... 245.  2.6 
16.... 312.  2.  6 
20....312.  2.  a 
20,  21.... 277.  a 
21.... 286.  1.  a  (4) 
23.... 235.  d 
25.... 297.  6 
26.... 260.  1 
29....270.  1.  a 
38.... 218.  1.  a 
8:    3.... 119.1 
26.... 257.  2 
■  32....287.  3.  a 
9:    6....275.  2.  c 
7.... 98.  1.  a 
10:    3.... 279.  c (2) 
4.... 39.  4.  a 
6....272.  c 
7. ...267.  1./ 
9.... 270.  1.  a 
10,  11....279.  c(l) 
11.... 287.  2 
12....39.3.6,287.4.a 
14...  2,58.3,287.5.0 
18. ...284.  e 
19....2:il.2.  6 
11:    3.... 250.  6 
4.... 259.  6 
7. ...126.  1 
9. ...284,  c 
18. ...2:30.  4.  6 
32.... 257.  4 
39.... 71.  a  (3) 
42. ...4.  a 
43.... 166.  2,  272,  c 
44.... 96.  6 
47.... 278.  1 
13:     2,  12.... 248.  3.  a 
3. ...261.  3.  a 
4.... 27 ,57.  2  (2)  6 
219.  1.  6,  264.  1 
10,21....71.  a(3) 
35.... 306.  a 
36.... 306.  6 
38.... 290.  1.  a 
49.... 287.  5.  a 
51,  52.... 139.  3 
55,  56...  96.  a 
56.... 277.  6,  284.  e 
57.... 297.  C 
14:    8  ...126.  1 

22  ...253.1.6,255. 

1.  a 
34.... 249.  3.  a 
35.... 244.  a 
38.... 288.  2.  a 
40.... 215.  2.  6 
42.... 158.  2 
43.... 92.  d,  94.6, 

177.2 
48.... 284. « 
54-56.... 248.  3.  a 
15:  15.... 253. 1.  6,255. 
1,  a 


15;  20.... §100. 2.  a  (2) 
24.... 87 
32.... 87 
16:    1....279.d 
2.... 299.  c 
4,...  104.  h 
8....11.1.«,  190.a 
27.... 245.2.6,  2&4.e 
29.... 279.  6 
31....71.  a(3) 
32.... 24.5.  2.  6 
17:  10 . . . .  248.  6.  e,  312. 

2.  a 
18:    4....267.  1 
5.... 235.  d 
6... 296.  1.  a 
7fE...  174.3 
28.... 158.  4 
19:     2fl....245.  2.  <i 
6.... 25.5.  1.  a 
9.... 106.  a 
15,  19.... 245.  2.  d 
18.... 246.  2.  6 
20.  ..177.5,281.1.6 
36... .270.  1.  a 
20:    2....296.  1.  a 
3.... 2.59 
7. ...96.6 
7,  8.... 24.5.  2.  d 
14.... 284.  6 
16. 


7.... 71.  rt  (3) 
:7....245.  2.6 


21:    1....96.  a 
4.... 140.  4 
5. ...97.  1.  a 
9...  71.  a  (3),  140. 

3,  279.  c  (2) 
14...  305.  6 
22.... 267.  l.e 

22:    4,  18.... 296.  1.  a 
6...  304.  a 
11.... 286.  1.  a  (4) 
23.... 267.  l.e 
27.... 255.  1.  a 

23:     3....296.  3.  6 
7  ...270.  1.  a 
13.... 219.  1.  6 
14  ...246.2.6 
17.... 26 
18  ...218.2.  a 
22.... 106.  a 
30...  112.  3 
39.... 22,  a 

24:    5....100.  2.  o(l) 
15.... 296.  l.a 
22...  253.  1.  a 
23.... 287. 3 

25:    5,..,218.  2.  a 
10,  11... 2.54.  4.  a 
14  ...280.  3.  a 
21   ...174.  1 
33...  246,  2.  a 
34. ...16.  3.  6 
46.... 39.  3.6 
48.... 266.  1.  d 
53  ...22.  6 

26:    9.... 100.  2.  a  (1) 
bis 
15. ...141. 3 
18....92.  r; 
18,  21.... 255.  4 

24 246.  1.  a 

25.... 133.  1 
33...  92.  e 
34.... 174.  1 
34,  35....  65.  a,  288. 

2.  a 

34,  43  ...140. 6 
36.... 261.  3.  6,285. 

3.  a 


398 


INDEX   II. 


.b 
.a  (3) 


.257. 


88:  87...  §261.3.* 
42.... 256.  3.  a 
43....2?Z  a, 290.  3 
27:     2ff....245.  2.  (/ 
7.... 254.  2.  a 
8....  112.   3,    245. 

2.6 
9....289.  6.  a 
9,  11....245.  2.  6 
14. ...94.  a 
28...  249.2.  a 
81.... 270.  1.  a 


NUMBERS. 

4.... §206.  1.  a 
10....13.  ^» 
17.... 96.  a 
16,  24...  255.  1.  a 
33....96.  rt 

4.... 290.  l.a 
26....-«4.  d 
27,  33.... 289.  6.  a 
47....  291).  1 
49.... 5.5.  1 
12.... 279.  d 
16. ...252.  1./ 
19,  49.... 296.  1.  a 
2:j....22.  a 

7. ...270.  l.a 

8.... 252.  l.tl 
10.... 284.  e 
10,  12...  30 
13,  14. ...71 
15... 259.  6 
18,19.23,24. 

6.  c 
19,  20.... 307 
22....  1.31.  2 
29. ...300.  a 
30,31   ...304.  rt 

3.... 270.  1.  a 

.245.2.^258.3 
.]20.3,279.c(2) 
.255.  4.  a 
.290.  2.  a 
.230.  4.  b 
85  ...256.  2.  a 
89  ...287.  4.  a 

7.. ..121.  3 
24.... 22.  a 

4....3IJ.4 

6  ...284.  « 
l.V23....-i67.  4.  a 
17... .302.  a 
20.... 256.  2 
20,21....:»4 
21.... 277.  a 
23.... 206.  1.  a 

2... 287,  3.  a 

3,  4. ...245.  2.6 
3-6...  245.  2.  (/ 
6.... 2.55.  4.  b 

...45.5 
...21.  1 
...309.  l.a 
...4.  a 

...16.  3.  6.267. 
4.  a 
3, :«.... 24.5.   2,  6 

4.  ..57.  2(2)a,230. 
8.  a 

5.... 266.  2.6 
6,  9... 267.  4 
7....218.  l.e 
8....  266. 1.0, 275. 
1.  a  (4) 

10.... 287.  4.  a 

11  ...160.  2 

12.... 207.4. 6,  298.2 


13. 
23. 
7:  3. 
11. 
15. 


8: 


85 


II:  13...  §267.2.  rt 
15... 71.      a     (2), 

281.  2.  a 
16. ...111. 3.  O 
20....  198.  il 
23.... 298.  2 
25  ...111.  2.  c,  252. 

1.  c 
27....248.  3.  a,  6.  6 
32.... 281.  2.  a 

12:     1 . . .  248.  3.a,  290. 
l.a 
2.... 260.  1.  rt 
4....2&3.  2.(2)6 
6....249.  2.  a 
8.... 250.  6 
13  ...274.  « 
14.... 281.   1.  a  (2), 
309.  3,  311.  4.  6 
13:    2.... 290.  1.  rt 
18.   ..231.  4, rt, 298. 

2.  rt 
22.... 256.  3.  a 
27.... 300.  c 
32.... 158. 4 

14:     1....289.  5.  6 

2.... 266.  1,307.6 
4.... 271 

16.... 279.  e 

21        284.  e 

24 .'.'.'!  297.6,312. 2.a 

28....305.  rt 

32.... 297.  rt 
15:     5....255.  4.  rt 

21.   ...39.3.6 

28.... 27,  219.  1.  6 

29.... 294.  6 

30...  297.  6 

35....280.  3.  6 
16:  3....289.  5.  rt 
5  ...312.  2.6 
5,  7.... 300. c 
6.... 294.  a 
9.... 204.  2(2)6 

13.... 281.  1.6,2.rt 

14.... 299 

10  ...2;i5 

IS,  27.... 297.  </ 

22....231.3.fl,2o3. 
1.  rt,  200.  4 

27.... 309.  2 

35.... 2.54.  4.  rt 
17:    2,25....27.5.  2.  e 
3.... 245. 2.  6,287. 

3.  a 

3, 4....  104.  (7 
5.... 267.  1./,  300 
10....  140.  4 
12. ...271.  4 
17.... 290.1.rt,  300.6 
21.... 290.  2.  a 
23.... :W.  1.  rt 
28....125.2,298.1.rt 
18:  23.... 240.  2.  a 
28.... 246.  1.  rt 
19:     2....27.5.  2.  c 
2-7.... 277.  rt 
3,  5.... 245.  2.6 
14.... 248.  1 
16... 288.  .3.  rt 
16-19.... 277.  rt 
18.... 206.  1.  d 
18,  19.... 288.  3.  a 
20:    3...  125. 2,  307. 6, 
311.  4.  6 
5....  104./,  261.8.6 
8.... 290.  2 
14. ...104.  i 
17...   16.  1 
21..  .131.  4 
22.,.. 260.  l.a 


20:  26 
21:    5 

7 


14 
17 
22 
30 
83, 
35 
22:    6 

8 
11 

13 
17 
18 
19 
25 
29 

.30 
32 

33 

34 

23:    2 


27 

31 

24:    3 

4 

5 

8 
9 

10 
11 
13 
15 

n 

21 
22 

25:  4 
12 

26:  8. 
30 
53 
54 
59 
62 
04 

27:    3 

28:  4 
6 


14 

17 

26 

29:  10 

15 


...§287.1 

...  104.  / 

...275.  2.  c 

...275.  1.  a  (4), 

284.  f,  306.  6 

...256.3.  rt 

...207.  5.  6 

.   .271 

...105.  a,  140.5 

35....44.rt 

...279.  e 

...28.3.    6,   287. 

4.  rt,  304 
....288.2.  a 
....19.  2.  rt,  141. 

1,  279.  6 
....  102.  3.  a 
...  141.1,281.1.6 
....207.  1.  d 
....94.C 
....119.  1 
....20»).  1.300.6, 

307.  rt 
....300.  6 
....246.  l.a, 248. 

3.6 

....105.rt,266.1.« 
....262.  1.  a 
. . . .248. 4 
....304.  rt 
,15....273.  c 
....19.2,  119.3, 

141.  1,267.5 

...267.  l.e 
..206.     1.      rt, 

272.  a 
...281.2.  rt 

.   .141.3,207.1. 

e,  299.  c 

. .  61.  0.  a 
....121.3,207.1. 
/,  275.  2.  6 
...248.  3.  c 
....108.  5 
....16.  3.6,  139. 

1,  2,2r3.  rf,281. 

1.6 

....104.J 
....287.  4.a 
....61.  6.  rt 
....278 

200.  2.  6 
19.2.C,  131.  6 
....287.  3.  a 

...289.  2.  a 

...281.2.  rt 

...127.2 

..  207.  1.  d 

...01.  0.  rt 

...163.2,284./' 

...160.3 

...a5.  1,305.6 
....275.  2.  c 
....256.  3.  rt 
,   ..291.  rt 
....249.  .3.  c 
,  55.... 284. « 
....300.  6 
....245.  1 

96.  a,  284.  e 

....258.3.  6 
....289.  5.  rt 
....253.  1.  a 

...257.  6.  c 

...104.  d 
20....  248.4,255. 
3.  rt 

,...284. « 
,....39.8.6 

...255.4.  a 
.,..254.  1 


80:    8....|280.  8.  o 
11....288.  2.  6 
15,16... 281. l.rt(l) 
16.... 279.  (7,306.4 

31:    2.. ..131.  3 
6...  811.2.  a 
12.... 45.  2 
25. ...24.  a 
40,  46...  254.  2.  6 

32:    5....284.« 

17....113.1,266.1.cl 
21.... 257.  9.  6 
28.... 260.  4 
80...  111.2.  d 
32.... 71.  a(l) 
33.... 249.  1.  o 
42. ...27 

33:    5-49  ...311.  l.O 
38.... 2.55.  2 

34:    2....257.  3.  a 
5. ...61.  6.  a 
6,  7,0.... 24.  a 
18. ...131.  1 
28.... 57.  2(2)6 

35:    4...  254.  2.  a 
16.... 202.  l.rt 
10-23.... 300.  rt 
19....  125.  2,259.6 
20  . . .  105.  d 
23.... 245.  1.  a,  2. 

6,294.6 
24. ...306.6 
25.... 289.  5.  rt 
25,  30.... 245.  2.  6 
30.... 297.  6 
31.... 300 

36:    1....2e0.  4 
6....289.  6.  a 

DEUTERONOMY. 

1:  2. ...§38.  l.a 
4....279.d 
5. ...283 
9....206.  2.  6 
14. ...263 
15.... 226.  l.a 
16.... 280. 4 
18.... 287.  2.  a 
19.... 285  2 
22....99.2.fl,287.1.a 
28.  ...38.  1.  a 
31.... 300.  c, 
81,44....267.  4,  6 
35.... 38.  l.a,  252.1 
38  ...287.  1 
41     ..259.6 
44.... 248.  6./ 
•45. ...112.  3 
2:    4.... 262.  l.a 
9.... 60. 4.  rt,  272.6 
10.... 266.  l.rt 
10,  21 . . . .235.  d 
12. . . .209.  2.  6 
24. ...131.  3 
27.... 285.2, 296.3.a 
32....a97.  </ 
35. ...139.  1 
3:     1....297.rf 
3.... 279.  e 
4.... 253.  2(1) 
5....250.  r,252.  1. 

/,  256.  3.  6 
6.... 280.  2 
9.... 267.  4.  6 
13... 249.  l.rt 
17.... 218.  2.  rt 
24....287.1,298.3.a 
26.... 21.  1,  153.  2, 
245.3.  a 


INDEX   II. 


399 


4:    l....§  267.    1.  /, 
277.  a 
1,  9, 23.... 270. 1. a 
3....348.6.«,  297.& 
4.... 297.  a 
5,  6,  39.... 277.  b 
9.... 275.  l.e,288. 

2.  a 
10....  119.  1,288.2. 

a,  .302.  a 
11.... 99. 2 a,  978.3 
14.... 279.  d 
15.   ..258.     2.     a, 

277.6 
21.... 279.  « 
26.... 44.  b,  91.  b, 

266.  a.  a 
32.... 298.  2.  a 
33.... 35.  1,276.  «, 

287.  4.  a 
37....266.  2.  6 
38....279.  cU) 
40....267.  1./ 
41    ...223.      1.     b, 
259.  C,  267.  5.  6 
42.... 267.  1. c 
^..    .250.  & 
5:    1....270.  \.a 
3..    297.  a 
5....309. 1.  6 
6-21....39.  4.  a 
8.... 27 
9....111.  3.  a 
12.... 280.  4 
13,  15....277.  ffl 
14....255.1.a,297.rf 
16.... 270  1.  a 
17.... 27 
23....  287. 4.  a,  289. 

3.  a 
24...  71.  a  (2),  246. 
1.  a 
6:    1,  2....245.  2.  rf 
2....297.(i 
4. ...4.  a 
17.... 281.  \.b 
25.... 45.  1 
7:    2. ...119.1 
5.... 126.  1 
7....264.  £(2)« 
9,  12.... 250.  d 
10.... 92.  c 
13.... 104.  A 
15.... 105.  a 
17.... 257.  9.  & 
19.... 250.  <Z,  300.  C 
23.... 287. 2 
24  ...94.  &,  112.3 
25.... 302.  a 
8:    3... 86.  b  (3pl.), 
305.6 
9.... 209.  2.  a 
13.... 290.  1.  a 
15.... 209.  2.  b 
16.... .55.  2.  a.  86.  ft 
(3  pi.) 
8:    3... 112.  3 

6.....38.  4.a,  252.2 
7.... 245.  2.  d 
14.... 98.  2 
16.... 266.  \.C 
21...  280.  2 
23.... 276.  & 
25.... 245. 2.  «,  254. 

4,  288.  2.  a 
26.... 119.  1 
10:    1....24.  a 
15....  119.  3 
17....30.  2,252.  1, 
257.  2.  a 
11:    2.... 295 


11:  10.... §267.    4.    a, 
277.  a 
12.... 250.  & 
14.... 284.  b 
18....2.52.  2.  6 
19....279.  c(2) 
22.... 87,    88  (pi.), 

281.  1.  b 
24..    256.  3.  a 
25.... 245.  2.  a 
12:    5....300.  c 

6....258.3.C,  284.& 
7,12,  18....297.(? 
10....288.  2.  e 
14.... 305. 6 
20.... 271 
20,22...  267.  1.  e 
22.... 284.  e 
23.... 246.     2.     a, 

279.  « 
30.... 279.  d 
31  ...45.5,266.  l.a 
13:    3....111.3.  « 
4.... 298.  1 
6.... 65.  6,249.2.6 
7.... 290.  1.  a 
10.... 281.  1.  a(l) 
14.... 257.  6.  b 
16.... 280. 2 
14:    5....57.  2(3)a 
17....198.c,230.4.6 
20.... 277.  a 
21.... 280.  3.  a 
22.... 296.  1 
26.... 287.  2.  a 
15:    3.... 272.  a 
6,  7.... 277.  6 
7.... 253.  1.  c 
9.... 255.  2.6,256. 

3.6 
14.... 287.  3.  a 
16. ...119.1 
18.   ..126.1,245.3.a 
16:    1... .22.  6,  280.  4 
Iff.... 245.  2 
3.... 30.  2 
20.... 296.  3 
21.... 256.  2 
17:    2,  3.... 276.  c 
8.... 256.  2.  a 
13  ...275.  2.6 
14.... 271.  a 
17. ...267.  1./ 
20.... 279.  e 
18:    3.... 289.    2.     a. 
306.  C 
15.... 245.  2.  d 
18.... 267.  1.  a 
19.... 248.  2.  a 
22.... 301.  6 
19:  1-3..  ..245.2.  d 
5.... 232.  3.  a 
6. ...114 
9.... 254.  4.  a 
13.... 257.  6.  c 
14.... 270.  1.  a 
15...  43 
20.... 275.  2.  b 
20:    2  ...19.  2. a,  119. 3 
5.... 267.  1.  e 
5,  8.... 272.  a 
7.. ..119.  1 
8.   ..259.6,284.6, 

304.6 
15.... 300 
16.... 79.  1.  a 
19....231.  3.  fit 
21:    1....309.2 
3....284.e 
7....13.  6,86.  6(3 
pi.) 


21:    8....§83.  c(2) 
8,  9.... 257.  6.  c 
11.   ..216.  1.6. 
22:    1,4.... 290.  1.  a 
4,  5.... 267.  1.  e 
7....  126.  1 
8.... 245.  2.  a 
19.... 249.  3.  a 
21 . . .  245.  2.  d 
24...  258.  2,  302.  a 
26.. ..287.  2.  a 
23:    5....256.3.a,302.a 
11.... 24.  6 
12....279.  c(3) 
24:    1....24.  a 
3. ...104.  A 
4.... 96.  a 
25:    1....245.  2.  6 
4....  160.  3 
7.... 60.  3.  a,  102. 

3.  a 
13.... 296.  2 

26:    1....277.  6 
2.... 39.  4 
3.... 266.  2.  a 
5...  257.  fi.  c,262. 

1.  a,  309.  3.  a 
12.... 94.  6,  113.  2 
14.... 286.  1.  «(4) 
27:    2,  5.... 289.  6.  a 
4....106.a,245.2.(Z 
8.... 280.  2 
28:    Iff.... 245.  2 
8... 277.  a 
8,  21,  36.... 272.  a 
20.... 106.  a 
24....  104.6,  287.3.a 
27.... 248.  3.  a 
29....  267.  4.  6,278. 

4.  fit 
43.... 296.  3.  a 
45.... 104.  6 
48  ...94.6 
52  ...126.  1 
53.... 285.  3.  a 
54.... 297.  6 
57.... 106.  2 
58.... 252.  1,  259.  rt 
59....167.2,219.2.fi< 
64.... 256.  2.  fit 
66.... 179.  3 

29:     5....267.  1./ 
8.... 277.  6 
11....  106.  a 
15.... 300.  c 
22. ...311.  1.  fit 
30:    3...  92.  c 
3,4...  104.  h 
11.... 168.  1,207.  c 
16..   .300.  6 
18....  266. 2.  a,  281. 

1.  fil(l) 
19.... 277.  6 
20...  39.  4 
31:    2....266.  2.  6 
6..   .275.  \.c 
9.... 276.  d 
11. ...91.6 
12. ...283 
16.... 2,58.  -3.  a 
18... 266.  \.d 
19. ...105.  a 
26.... 280.  4 
28.... 22.  6 
29  ...168.  1,267.1. 
«,  281.  1.  rt(4) 
32:     1....248.  6.  d 
1,  7.... 276.  2.  c 
6.... 229.  2.  a 
7  ...104.    h,  235 
296.2 


32:    8  ...§11.  1.6,94. 
6,  276.  g 
10.... 60.  3.  c,105.6 
10,  11.... 311.  4.  c 
10,  12.... 207.  5.  a 
11.... 267.  3.  a,  4.6 
13. ...13.  a 
15.... 302 
17.... 302.  fit 
18.... 174.  4,  276.  qr 
21..    .299.  6 
21,  39.... 311.  4 
22.... 148.  4 
24....257.  9.  6bi8 
26...  104.  /;  174.  3 
27....266.2.6,307.a 
28.... 90,  217.  1.  6 
29.... 266.   1  ,267. 

1.  e 
32.... 24.  6,   57.  2. 

(2)  fit 
34  ...90  (pass.) 
36.... 35.  1,  86.  6 
37....  174.  1,308.  a 
37,  38.... 219.  2.  c 
38...  272.  fit 
39....246.  2.  6 
41.... 141.  2,306.  a 
49,  50.... 275.  1.  c_. 
2.... 275.  1.  a(l) 
6.... 299.  a 
9.  ...131.  2 
11....279.6,287.2.a 
12.... 245.  \.a 
16....61.6.a,88(3f.) 
21.... 111. 2.  6,179.3 
23.... 98.  1 
24  ..278.  A.  a 
25.... 262.  2 


JOSHUA. 

1:    l....§276./ 

2.... 256.     2.     a, 

297.  c 
4....288.  2.  6 
5,  9.... 299 
7...  272.  6',  275. 1. 

c,  .300.  (■ 
8.... 36.  2,259.  a 
14.... 259 
16.... 267.  1 
2:    3....278.  2.  a 
3,  4....276.  <« 
4.... 289.  2.  a 
5  ...279.  c  (4) 
8.... 88  (pi.),  309. 

3.  a 
10.... 301.  6 
14....252.  2.  6 
16.... 159.  1.  166.  2 
17,  18,  20....  104.  k 
18....112.  3,  309.  3 
19.... 257.  10.6 
20.... 252.  2.  6 
22.... 276.  d 
24.... 305.  a 
3:    3...  249.  3 
4.... 267.  1./ 
5.... 267.  1.  a 
9. ...131. 3 
11.... 249.  3.  6 
12.... 296.  1 
13.... 249. 3 
14.... 256.  3.  a 
16.... 280.  2.  a 
4:     2....296.  1 
4.... 254.  4.6 
5.... 258. 3 
6.... 88  (pi.) 


400 

INDEX    II. 

4:    8.. ..§104.5' 

18:  12, 14, 19...  §86.  6 

5:  27....§311.4.  c 

10:  10.... §  266.    1.   6, 

10....'J8!).  .'i.  rt 

(3  pi.) 

28  ...60.   3.   6  (2), 

311.2 

2:i....l27.  2 

19.... 297.  c 

121.  2 

12    ..266.  l.a 

24....1(>ti.  1,2C6.  1, 

20...  88 

30.... 296.  3.6 

14.. ..119.  4 

2GG.  1.  (I 

19:  29, :«.... 2*4.  e 

31...  207.  1 

11:    1....257.  6 

5:    5,...278.  4.  a 

43.... 61.  6.  a 

0:     3....275.  1.  rt(2) 

7.... 206.  1.6 

6:     ].   ..278.3,309.1.0 

49,51.... 279.  6 

4.... 245.  2.  d 

8.  ...277.  6 

5.   ..125.2 

50. . . . 174.  4 

5...  311.3 

9.  ....306.  a 

6....257.  10.  ft 

51....39.1.«,  260.4 

9.... 99.  2.6 

13.... 268.  o 

7.. ..46 

21:    1....260.  4 

9.  10.... 276.  A 

18....99.  2.  a 

8....27.'J.  1.  rt(4) 

10.... 228.  1.  a 

11....249.  3.  c 

19. ...271.  0 

13....281.2  6,282.a 

3:J....254.  2.  a 

13.... 201.  3.6 

25.... 91.  6,119,  1, 

17....  168.  1 

40.... 296.  1.  a 

14....2!J2.  2.  6 

281.    1.    a    (3), 

21....2o0.c 

22:     1....267.  5.  6 

15....2.->3.  2(2)6 

296.  3.  a 

7:    8....299.  c 

8.... 252.  1./ 

17.... 74.  0 

33.... 245.  2.  d 

7.... 60.   3.   b  (2), 

12.... 45.  5 

20.... 73.  2.  « 

34....289.  6.  o 

94.6.112.2,276. 

14....296.  1. a 

20,  21.... 249.  3.  a 

35....1&4.X%246.  1. 

a,  281.2.  a 

16. ...119.  3 

25... 255. 1.0,256. 

a,  266.  2.  6 

8....272.C 

17.... 284. « 

3.6 

37....  98.  2, 275.  2.  C 

9.... 174.  3 

20....285.  3.  a 

26,28....230.  4.  6 

39... 245.  3.6 

15  ...284.  « 

25.... 147.  1 

28.... 266.  \.c 

40.... 253.     2    (2), 

19  ...274.  a 

27.... 44.  6 

31....  2:J1. 3.0,272.0 

267.4 

20,  21.... 276. rf 

23:    7,  12.... 252.  2.  a 

a4  ...119.  1 

12:    4. ...286.2 

21....  249.  2.  0,254. 

12..... 305.  6 

36....  261 .3.6,306.0 

5....2;J1.3.  0,275. 

2.6 

16.... 282.  a 

37.... 306.  a 

1.  o  (4),  276.  6 

8:  1.2.  ...277.  6 

24:  10.... 92.  c/,  281.  1. 

39....  272.  0,274.0, 

6.... 3.  1.  o 

4... 277.   a,    278. 

6,2.  a 

275.  2.  c 

7.... 291.  a 

4.  a 

14.... 16.1,  275.  l.c 

7:     3....272.  o,  304.  6 

14  ...254.  2.  b 

11....  249.  3. 6,  258. 

15....88(pl.),306.  c 

6.... 22.0,257.  10.6 

13:    2....251.0 

1.  a 

19.... 289.  3.  a 

7.... 289.  5.0 

3. ...16.  1 

19.... iM8.6.  6,285.2 

30. . .  .245.  2.  6 

7,22  ...254.4 

5, 7.... 90  (2.  f.  8.) 

22  . .  279.  e,  28G.  2 

8.... 284.  6 

6.  ...119.  2 

23....287.  4.  a 

JUDGES. 

12....74. o 

8.... 93. 6,  248. 6. C 

24  ...22.6 

16....287.  3.  0 

9...  261.3.6,278. 

30.... 267.  5.  6 

1:     4....§289.  5.  6 

19.... 280.  3,281.1. 

3,  309.  1.  a 

33....240.  2.  a 

6,  7.... 258.  3.  6 

o  (2),  288.  2.  0, 

12.... 289.  l.a 

9:    4....163.  1 

7....254.2.6,278. 

297.  d 

14... 272.  c 

6.. ..119.  4 

4.  a 

22.... 311.  2 

10.... 286.  1.  0(4), 

8.... 266.  i.d 

15.... 286.  \.d 

25,...258.  3.  6 

306.  0,  c 

12....  163.  1,252.2. 

24...  287.  1 

8:    1... .168.2 

19... 245.  1.0,309. 

a,  287.  4.  a 

24,  25... 248. 1 

2.... 2,5,  23.3.  a 

1.0 

13.... 126.  1 

28.... 281.  1.  a(l) 

4.... .309.  2 

23....248.  3.C,  266. 

20.... 280.  3.  a 

2:    1....267,  5.  a 

10....2.i5.  o 

l.f,  287.1,307.0 

24.... 95.  c,  174.3 

7. . . .259 

11.... 230.  4.6,249. 

14:    1... .61. 6.0 

37  ...311.  2.  a 

9.  ...258.  l.a 

3.  6,  258.  1.  0, 

5  ...291.  o 

10:    7. ...311.  2 

15,  10.... 276.  a 

261.    3,    262.   2, 

6.... 248.  6./ 

11.... 38.   4.  a,  39. 

15,17, 18... 266.1.0 

.309.  1 

9....2S1    2.  a 

1.  «,  287.  3.  a 

18.... 275.  1.  0(4) 

12.... 290.  1.  a 

10.... 267.  4.  o 

12.... 207.  5.6 

.19.... 264.  2  (2)  0, 

15....2.30.2.  0 

11....2.54.  2.  6 

13....  2.50.rf,  267.1./ 

277.  o 

19. ...111.  3.6,307 

12.... 281.  1.0(2) 

20.... 22.  6 

22.... 298.  2 

24....285.  3.  a 

12,  13.... .306.  6 

24.... 86.  6  (3  pi.). 

3:  15.... 249.  3.  c 

26....74.0 

15....  275.  2.  c,  298. 

284.  6.  c 

24....  140.5,309.3.0 

34....266.  2.  6 

2.0 

26.... 56. 4 

25.... 159.  1 

9:     2....231.2.  a 

16....267. 1.  e,298. 

27....245.2.6,276.e 

27....286.  2.  6 

8....98. 1.  a 

3.0 

29,31,38...  286.2 

30.... 288.  2.0 

8, 14.... 273.  <; 

18.... 61.  6.  a,  266. 

30. ...21.  1 

4:    5.... 309.  3.  a 

9.... 53.  2.6,63.1. 

1.  e,  307.  a 

H:    4...  290.  1.  a 

8.... 306.  6 

0,  95.  6.  208.  0. 

15:    2.... 272.   0,   281. 

8.  ...21.  1,279.  « 

14.... 260.  4.  o 

10.... 89  (f.  e.,  m. 

1.  0  (4) 

14....'.)4.  6 

18....35.  2.  273.  c 

pi.) 

7.... 305.  6 

18.... 2(16.  1.  a 

19...  .66.2,  206.2 

11 . . .  .53.  2.  6,  95.  6 

8....2S7.  2.  o 

12:  21. ...55.  2.  a 

20.... 104.  0,  127.  2 

12.... 89  (f.  B.,  m. 

11.... 262.  1.  o 

13:     1....266.  2.  6 

21.. ..11.  1.0, 158.3 

pi.) 

12.... 246.  1.  a 

13....UI8.  6 

22... 278 

13.... 9.5.  6 

16.   ..296.3.6 

;i3...  2,'-)0.  h 

23....  126.  1 

14.... 89 

16:     5....130.  1.  6 

14:    8....62.  2,  177.  1 

24...  281.2.  6 

15....  27.5.1. c,30C.o 

6,  13.... 267.  1.  e 

15.    3-11.... 275.   1.   a 

5:     5.... 86.  0,  141.  1, 

16.... 283 

7,  11.... 245.  2.  6 

(4) 

252.2.0 

16,  19....296.  3.  a 

13. ...112.  3 

16.... 304.  a 

7 24.  c,  74.  a. 

19..   .273.  a 

14....24S}.  3.  6 

21  ...258.  1.  a 

281.  1.  c 

28... 246.  1.0,267. 

16.... 25 

21-62....:ill.l.  a 

8....92.  d,  121.  1, 

I.d 

25... 51.  2 

36.... 205.  5.  6 

267.  5.  a 

29  ...166.5,  174.3, 

26. ...151.  1 

as.... 22. 6 

10. ...258.  1.  a 

176.5 

27.... 285.  1 

56.... 22.  6 

12....45.2.  c 

3.5....2&S.  2.  6 

28.... 22.  6, 234.  l.a 

17:     1....30.  2 

13....  149.3, 256.3.0 

37.... 278.  2 

30.... 272.  0 

11....2H4.  rf,  « 

14.... 302.  6 

38. ...91.  6 

17:    2.... 71.  0  (2) 

18. ...286.  l.c(l) 

15....201.r,200.2.o 

48.... 75.  1 

8,  4.... 276. d 

18:    4.... 275.  1.6 

22....24.  6,290,  2.0 

53.... 140.  5 

6....267.  4.  0,  269. 

8....275.1.c,276.d: 

2:i....2,Sl.  2.  o 

10:     2....60.  3.  6(1) 

2.6 

8,  9.... 276.  t/ 

26.... 88  (3  f.  pi.), 

4.... 209.  1.  f 

7.... 256.  3.0 

12.... 284.  < 

105.  6 

9....245.  3,3.  6 

8. ...267.  1./ 

INDEX   II. 

401 

18:    7....§289.  5.  c 

3:  12....§261.3.  6 

3:     7....§267.  1.  A 

13:  17,  18....§  253.  6. 

12.... 245.  2.  b 

13.  ...119.  3 

8....257.  9.6,  255. 

a,  269.  2.  6 

■  16....254.2.<^,259.& 

15.... 60.   3.  6  (2), 

4.  6 

19...  86.  6  (3pl.), 

17.... 254.     2.     d. 

120.    1,    166.   2, 

12.... 280. 2 

267.  1.  e 

254.4 

254.  2.  c 

17.... 248.  6.  e 

21....19.  2.c,65.a, 

29.... 93. 6 

17....254.  4.  a 

4:    8....2r8.  2.  a 

2.32.  5.  a 

30. ...4.a 

18.... 266.  1.  rfbis 

12.... 249. 3.  a, 278. 

21,  22...  276./ 

19:    5.. ..19.  2.  b,  89, 

4:    1....148. 5 

3,  .309.  1.  a 

22.... 244.  6, 275.1. 

312.  2.  b 

3....248.6.  c,  266. 

12,13  ...276.  d 

a.   (4),  276.    d. 

9.... 297.  a 

2.  c 

13.... 276./ 
14.... 75.  1 

311.  4.  a 

10.   ..276.  a 

4.... 246.  l.a,267. 

39.... 256.  1.  a 

11. ...152.  1 

1.  g,  294.  a 

15.     .289.  4.  a 

14:    1....73.  2.  a,  248. 

11,    13....  271.     a. 

7....266.1.  a,275. 

18....266.1.c,276/ 

6./ 

277.  a 

1.  a  (4) 

19....  149.  2,  282.  a 

8.... 262.  l.a 

13.... 86.  6  (1  pi.), 

15....  104.  e,  i 

5:    1....276./ 

14....255.3.a,256. 

251.  a 

5.... 267.  4.6 

2.  a 

17,  18...  266.2.  d 

7....276. /• 

15.... 264.  2  (2)  d, 

18.... 285.  2 

I  SAMUEL. 

11....275."2.  cbis 

288.  3.  a 

20.... 272. c 

12....288.  2.  6 

16...  259 

22....82.5.  a,  257. 

1:     l....§251.«,  276./ 

6:    4.... 294.  a 

18....311.  3.  a 

3.  a 

3  ...223. 1.  a,  256. 

7.... 289.  6.  a 

19....312.  2.  a 

24.... 219.  1.&,  289. 

3.  a,  276./,  279. 

10....  104.  7,  167.3 

21....279.  c(4) 

6.  a 

c(l) 

12.... 88  (3  f.  pL), 

22.... 94.  c 

30.... 275.  1.  a(4) 

3, 4.... 275.1.  a  (4) 

148.  4,  281.  2 

24....111.2.rf,299.c 

20:    2.... 350.    c,    254. 

4...  248.6./ 

14....249.  3.  c 

25.... 289.  5.6- 

2.d 

5.... 266.  1.  c 

15.... 276./ 

28.... 281.  1.  «(4) 

5, 43.... 276./ 

5,  7...  267.4.  a 

19....266.1.c,276.d 

29.... 252.  2.  c, 266. 

13  ...46 

6.... 24.  6,  94.  a, 

7:    3....275.2.o,306.a 

1.  a 

15, 17.... 96.  a 

104.   «,    277.    a, 

8....119.1,275.2.f 

30....  266.1.  «,306.6 

25.... 225.  a 

287.  2.  a 

16.... 275.  l.a  (4) 

32  . .   159.  3,  174.  4 

28.... 298.  2 

7....94.  a,  276,  6, 

8:    1....287.  4.  a 

33.... 57.   2   (3)   a, 

31. ...131.2 

296.  1.  a 

3. ...276.  d 

166.3 

32.... 24.  6 

8.... 232.  4.  a,  266. 

5....273.  c 

36.... 94.  c,  97.  2. 

39.... 131.  5 

2.  d,  267.  2 

19.... 24.  a 

a.  141.  1 

43....24.  & 

9....104.rf,  174.4, 

9:    2  ...261.3.6 

38. ...131.  3 

44....284.  (? 

257.  1,  279.  6 

3....284.  c 

40.... 290.  2 

21:    8....298.  3.  a 

13....  267.  1.6,269. 

4.... 261.  3.  6 

44  . .  305.  a 

9.... 96.  a 

2.6 

7....261.  3.  6 

45 305.  a 

12,  22.... 289.  6.  a 

14....88(2f.) 

9.... 248.  2.  «,  3, 

47.... 267.  4.  a 

21....39.  3.6,  :W6.6 

17.... 5:^.2.  a 

267.  4.  a 

15:    l....]25.2,256.2.a 

22....160.  .3,  248.3. 

20.... 119.  2 

9,  10... 271.  a 

3.... 277 

C,286.  l.rf,  300.& 

22  ...277.  a 

11.... 309.  3 

5....111.2.C 

25....261.  3.  6 

23.... 272 

12.... 273.  c 

6. ...153.2 

24.... 104.  i 

13.... 297.  a 

7.... 245.  2.  d 

RUTH. 

28....  119.  2,246.  1. 

15.... 266.  1.  c 

9.... 91.  e,  252.  1. 

a,  268.  a 

16.... 277.  a 

6,299 

1:    l....§276./ 

2:    1.... 266.  2.  6  bis 

23...  273. c 

13,... 287.  5.  6 

8.... 289.  6.  a 

3.... 283.    a,    287. 

24....  248.  6.  c,  287. 

17.... 276.  a! 

9  ...89    (f.    pi.), 

5.  6,  299 

5.  6 

19....  159. 3, 174.  4, 

275.  2.  d 

3-5...  266.  3.  a 

10:    1-8.... 100.  1 

298.  1.  a 

10  ...305.  a 

5....24.C 

4.... 254.  2.  c 

20.... 30.5.  a 

12.... 264.   2  (2)  b, 

6.... 276.  c,  282.  a 

5....272.6,  278.  3 

23.... 126.  1 

308.  a 

6-8. ...278.  1 

6. ...167.3 

30...  100.  2.  a(l) 

13.... 25,  71.  a  (3), 

8.... 267.  3.  « 

8.... 272 

16:    4.... 298. 3 

88  (f.  pi.),  91.  c, 

10....  119. 1,  272. a, 

13...  167.3,279.6 

7....267.  3.  a 

245.    3.   a,   267. 

275.  1.6,297.6 

14....261.3.  6 

11.... 273.  c 

l.d 

11.... 278.  4.  a 

18.... 289.  6.  a 

12.... 311.  3.  a 

15.... 205.  3.  a  (6) 

13.... 205.5.a,  256.3 

18,  19.... 246.  1.  a 

15. ...119.  1 

17 305.  a 

15,  19,  20.... 277.  a 

19.... 253.  2  (2)  6, 

16.... 283. a 

19.... 104.  ff 

16....266.  2.C,  267. 

300,  305.  a 

18.   ..249.3.<-,257. 

20.... 60.   3.   c,    89 

1.  ebis,  281.  1. 

24.... 24.  6 

6.  6,  260.  2 

(f.  pi),  198.  d 

6  bis,  306.  6 

11:    1....273.  c 

23....  245.  3.  a,  248. 

23....248.  6.  c 

19.... 267. 4 

4.... 257.  l.a 

3,  6,  275.1.  fl  (4) 

2:    2.... 301 

20  ...245.2.  c,  289. 

5.... 266.  2.d 

17:    5....276.«,287.5.a 

2, 7.... 16.  3.6 

6.  a 

11....312.  2.  6 

8....267.  2.  a 

6.... 248.  6.  c 

22.... 88  (pl.).  267. 

12:    2....275.  l.a(2) 

12....  252. 2.  c,  256. 

7.... 302.  a 

4.  a,  276./ 

3.... 38.  l.a,  267. 

3.  a 

8.... 88,  88(2  f.), 

23.... 266.  2.  d 

!•/ 

13...  281.  l.C 

97.  2.  b,  127.  1 

26.... 269.2.6,  306.6 

7....91.  c 

14....246.  2,  254.  4 

9.... 88  (pl.),  167. 

26.... 281.  2.  6 

13..   .119.2 

16,  17.... 276.  d 

3,  279.  b 

27.... 91.  6,  281.1. 

14.... 306.  c 

18....254.4.rt,259.a 

13.... 266.  2.  b 

a  (3),  298.  1.  a 

15,20..   .299 

21.... 289.  5.  c 

14.... 151.  3 

28.... 280.  3.  a 

21....289.  5.  a,299 

25...  24.  6,  104. /t. 

16.  ...139.  2,  281.  1. 

29....260.  l.a,  276. 

23.... 233 

245.  1.  a,  248.  2. 

a  (5) 

6,  288.  2.  6 

24... 94.  a 

a,  252.  2 

17.... 256.  2 

29,  32.... 2.50.  a 

25.... 281.1.  a  (2) 

26....73.  2.  a 

21.... 266.  1.  d 

34.... 256.  2.  a 

13:     5....253.  2.  (1) 

26,  36.... 289.  3.  a 

8:    2. ...219.  1.6 

3:    1....256.  1.  a 

6.... 289.  5.  a 

28....  257. 2.  a,  289. 

3....86.  6(2f.) 

2.... 261.  3.  a,  266. 

8....150.  2,  295 

5,  a 

4.... 16.  1,  55.  2. 

1.  c,  269.  2.  6 

13.... 266.  1.  e 

34....248.6/,284.d 

a,88{3f.),106.a 

4....267.  l.A 

17....248.  6.  6 

34,35....275.1.a(l) 

402 

INDEX   IT. 

17:  35....S  14.0,112.8 

24:    7.... 1  305.  a 

11....  19.  2.  rt,245. 

1:  26. ...8  168 

12:    4. ...$252.  l.c 

40.... 257.    2,   260, 

2:    6.... 246.  1.  a 

14.  ..92.  t/ 

311.2 

l.a 

i9....Vi.  b 

16.... 275.  1.  oH), 

42....174.4,311.3.f/ 

14... 248.  0.6 

22.... 273.  c 

285.  3.  0 

43... 291.  a 

15...  251.a,298.3.a 

27....65.  a,  306.  6, 

21 ... .  309.  2.  a 

47.... 151. 2 

16.... 272,  a 

307.  a 

30....302.  c 

48....2«:J.  a 

17.... 264.  1 

28....269.  2.  6 

13:    4.... 296.  1 

62....24.').2.d.249. 

18...  287.  2.  a 

32....  245.  3.  a,  288. 

7... 275.  1.  c 

1.  a,  258.  3.  b 

19...  71.0(2) 

2.6 

12....  174.3, 267.1.< 

55,  56 . . .  2.12.  2.  a 

20.... 245.  2.  a 

3:    2....260.  1 

15.... 275.  1.  c 

66.58  ...298.  3. a 

21.... 281.  l.a  (4) 

6.... 278.  4.  a 

16....2&1.  1,  279. a 

18:    1....10:i.  r/ 

25:    7...94.a 

8....  107.  3,207.2. 

18....207.  4.  o 

6.... 100.  3 

8.  ...106.  2,  274.  J? 

a,  300.  6 

19.... 281.  2.6 

7.... 253.  2(2)6 

10....2.-)2.  1.  d 

12.... 273.  c 

20. ...309.  1.  a 

9..   .158.  1 

11...  277.6 

13...  278.  2 

22.... 302.  a 

17..  ..119.  l,272.c, 

14.... 159.  3 

21.... 275.  1.6 

25....  274. 0,296.3.0 

299.  309.  1 

15.... 302.  a 

22  ...2'jO.  l.a 

26...  311.  4.6 

20.... 245.  2 

18  ...174.5,211.3.0 

31....2,->6.  1.  a 

31.... 2.57.  10 

21.... 275.  2.  c 

20... 275.  1.  a  (3) 

33.... 267.  l.e 

32.... 160.  3 

22....219.  2.  6 

24... 297.  a 

34.... 282.  a 

33.... 272.  c,  305,  6 

23.... 279.  a 

26,  ;?3....280.  3.  a, 

35.... 305.  a,  6 

:i9  ...24.5.  3.  6 

26....206.  2.  6 

285.  4.  a 

37.... 279  a 

14:     2,  3....10.  1 

28  ..  104. i 

27.... 312.  2.  a 

38....266.  2.  6 

5.... 276.  d 

29....  149.  1,  153.2 

28.... 281.  l.a  (4) 

4:    2.... 255.  1.6,2.56. 

6....255.1.6,297.c 

30  ...264.  2  (2)  a 

29....289.C.f/,297.6 

3.  6,  207.  4.  a 

7  ...38.4.0,160.3 

19:    3.... 271.  a 

29,  31.... 308.  6 

9,  10.... 305.  a 

10.... 104.  * 

5.... 279.  c(2) 

31....279.a,311.4.« 

10.... 297.  6 

13....279. rf 

9....2.->0.  b 

32.... 104.  a 

11.... 284.  b 

14....2i;7.  1,207. 1. 

10.... 2.52.  2.6 

33....  167.  3 

5:     2.... 106.  2 

e,  279.  e,  299 

11... 306.  a 

34  ...88(3  f.),276. 

4.... 260.  1.  a 

15.... 271.  o 

13,  16... 203.  2 

a,  305.  a,  307.  a 

10....  250.  3. 0,281. 

16....  249. 3.0,279. 

17.. ..104.  A 

42....  254. 4.  a,  290. 

2.6 

c(4) 

21....25.5.1.a,283.a 

l.a 

13....279.  </ 

17.... 274.  0,294.0 

22.... 252.  l.c 

43.   ..253.2(2)6 

17.... 245.  2.  0 

19....57.2(l),182.o 

23.... 297.  a 

26:     9.... 275.  1.  a  (4) 

20....iM5.  2.6 

26....2S8.  2.  c 

30:    2....267.  l.rf,269. 

12....216.  2.  a 

23....273.  <i 

30.... 150.  1,  151.4 

2.b 

13  ...309.  1.  6 

24....266.1.r/,272.o 

32....  125.  1,306.  6 

3. ...305.  a 

16..   .284.  (/,305.a 

6:     1    .  .   153.  2 

15:     2....  275.1 .0(4) 

4....:^04.  a 

19.... 272.  a 

2  ...296.  3.  a 

4.   ..277.0 

5.... 267.  l.e 

20.... 245. 2. 6,  248. 

3.... 252.  1.6 

8. ...281.  1.  C 

6. ...119.  1 

6.6, 251.  a,  284. 6 

5....  16.  3.6,288. 

12.... 125.  2 

9.... 305.  b 

22.... 249.  3.  6 

3  0 

20.... 245. 2.  0,298. 

10.... 287.  2.  a 

27:    4  ...269.2.6 

16.... 27.5.  1.0(3) 

3.  a 

12. ...311.  1.6 

8....245.2.d:,288. 

18.... 279. 6 

21....:«5.  6,  306.  c 

13....207.1.«,284.f 

3.  a,   289.  5.  c, 

19.... 248.  4.  a 

23.... 289.  5.  c 

21. ...39. 4 

290.  1.  a 

20. ...281.  1.  c 

25....  287.1.0,306.6 

23.... 290.  2 

10. . .  298.  3.  a 

21....  256. 2.  0,312. 

30.... 281.  2.  6 

28. ...119.  1 

12.... 119.1, 275.2.a 

2.0 

32.... 245.  2.6,267. 

29. ...297.  b 

28:     3. ...311.  2 

21,  22.... 264.2(2^0 

1.6,287.5.0 

31....257.6.  6,273. 

7.... 216.  1.6.257. 

22....  289. 6.0,297.6 

33...  277.6 

c,  275.  1.  c,  290. 

3.  a,  275.  2.  c 

23.... 56.  2 

34   ...312.  2 

1.  a 

8... 89  (f.  s.,  m. 

7:    5.... 298.  1.0 

37.... 217.  l.e, 267. 

88. ...201. 6 

pl.) 

7.... 304 

1.6 

42....2.-)3.  2(2)rt 

10.   ..24.  6 

9-11....  275.1. 0(2) 

16:     1.... 2.53.  2(1) 

21:    2....223.  1.  6 

14.... 60.  3.  6(2) 

10.. ..114 

5.... 281.  2.  6 

3....92.  6,220.3.a 

15... 63.   1.  c,  97. 

23...  289. 3.  a,  298. 

9....267.1.d,271.o 

5....250.C 

1.  6.  166.  5 

3.  o 

10.... 266.  2.  d 

7. ...44 

22....246.1.a,271.a 

28. . .  .246.  2 

13  ...281.2.6 

8....2(i0 

24. ...111.  2.6 

8:    2....2S0.  2 

10....217.1.  e,  296 

9....261.  3.  6 

29:    4....275.  2.  c 

8.... 252.  1./ 

3.  a 

12,... 267.  4.  (I 

6.... 30.  2,305.  a 

10.... 258.  3.  0 

18. ...290.  1.  a 

14. ...66.1  (1).105. 

9. ...249.3.  a 

18.... 201.  6 

19  ..  255.4.6 

a,  170.  4,  297.  c 

m-.    1....14.  0 

9:     3.... 257.  10 

2:3....245.  2.  0,  6 

15.... 120.1, 2U7.2.a 

31:     1....276.  6 

10....254.  2.  6 

17:     1-3.... 275.  1.6 

22:    2       107.  2 

2....94.  c 

10:     9. ...258.1.0 

5.... 297.  0 

7.   ..257.    10.    6, 

7...  290.1.  a 

11.... 289.  5.C 

8.... 240.  1.  o  bis 

298.  3.  a 

9,  10....2,'57.  10.  b 

12....312.  2.  0 

9.... 24.5.  2.  0 

13....280.  3.  a 

17....289.  5.  c 

10...  140.  4, 248. 6. 

15.... 298.  3.  a 

11:    1....11.1.6 

/•.  297.  6 

18....254.  2.  </ 

II  SAMUEL. 

4....309.  3.  o 

10,"  11.... 281.  1.6 

22.... 267.1.6,^,281. 

11.... 305.  0 

11.... 260.  2.0 

1.  a  (4) 

1:    l....§276.  a 
2.   ..309.  1.  rt 

12..    .104.  A 

12.... 71.  0(1),  97. 

23:    1....276.  f/ 

13...   245.  1.  o 

2.  0.  266.  1.  d 

11....94.  rf 

4.... 244.  c 

20....24.5.  2.  6 

13.... 266.1. r/,300.d 

15.... 245.  2.  a 

6.... 91.  6,  168.3 

22.... 300.  c 

16....  245.  3.  0,275. 

21....2S7.  5.  6 

9  ....2.59.  a 

24.  ...179.  S 

l.c 

22... 281.  1.  6 

10  ...99.  2.6,106.a 

25.... 248.  6,284.6 

17.... 91.  6.277.0 

22,  23.... 275.  l.c 

13... 278.  3 

12:     1....255.  1.  6 

17. 19.... 248.  3.0 

27.... 27;?.  f 

15...  131.3,258.1. a 

1,4....  158.  3 

22  ...224.  1.0 

28....2I5.  2.  6 

21.... 2.58.  1 

2.... 252.  l.f 

23.... 113.  1 

34:     8....230.  2.  a 

23. ...311. 3 

3,  31.... 267."  4.0 

88....2M.  0 

INDEX   II. 


403 


18:    3....§113.  2 
5....-J88.  3.  a 
13.... 304.  6,307.  a 
14.... 309.  1.  a 
18.... 266. l.C,  284.6 
22.... 246. 1.  a,  272. 
a,  304,  311.  4.  b 
23...  273.  a 
29.... 279.  c(3),  d 
29,  33....  298.  3 
32.... 3.56.  2.a, 262. 
2.  a 
19:     1....297 
2....276. C 
8.... 264.    2    (1), 

308.  a 
14. ...111.  2.  b 
18.... 2-25.  a 
19. ...113.  3 
23.... 298.  3.  a 
25.... 249.3.6, 300.C 
,      38  ...273.  a 
41.... 257.  3 
43.... 231.  4 
20:     1....260  2 

4....119.1,288.2.a 

5  ...111.  2.  d 

6  ...264.  2  (2)  a, 
266.  (/,  277.  b 

9....lil.2.6,263. 

2.  a 
10.   .  345.  l.a,290. 

i.a 
11.... 304.  6 
13.... 231.  4.  a 
19.... 258.  3.  c 
20....296.3.a,305.a 
21 . . .  95.  « 
21:     1....296.  l.a 
2  ...168.2 
3.... 375.  3.  d 
6....60.3.fl.  137.2 
9.   ..162.5,341. 1. 

a,  253.  2  (3)  b 
11,  22.... 284.  e 
12.... 179.  3 
23:     3....357.  6.  a 
7  ...143.  3 
12....276.  g- 
14.... 276.  0- 
24.... 45.  1,376.  A 
33....  162.1.256.3.0! 
37,  40,  48.... 239.  6 
40..   .53.  3.  a,  111. 

2.C 
41.... 53.  2.  6,132. 

1,  312.  2.  a 
43....118.  3,  141. 3 
44.... 201.  b 
23:    1...  163.5,358.3.a 
3.... 388.  2.  e 
5  ...2.58.  3.  C 
6.... 33.  3,  140.6, 
219.  1.    6,    245. 
2.6 
7. ...281.  1.  6 
8.... 201.  6 
10.... 369.  3.6 
22,  23 ... .  254.  4 

27 24.  6 

24:    3....  298. 3.  a,  311. 
4.6 
5.... 256.  3.  a 
11.... 309.  3.  a 
12.... 380.  4 
13.... 356.  3 
17.... 246.  l.a,  257. 
9.  6,  372.  a,  387. 
4.  a,  389.  5.  a 
24.... 353. 1./,  381. 
1.  a  (1) 


4: 


5: 


I.  KINGS. 

!....§ 269.  3.6 
1,2.... 245.   3.  a, 

273.  a 
2.... 277.  a 
5....246.  l.a,  254. 

2.d 
6....245.1,266.1.c 
9.... 286.  2.  a 
11,13,  18.... 265.3. 

a  (6) 
12,  40. . .  285.  3.  a 
13....266.3.  a,  267. 

l.a 
14.... 309.  3.  a 
15....54.  1,207.  6 
17.... 316.  1.  a 
17,27.   .  294.  a 
21. ...87 
24.... 398.  3.  a 
36.... 297.  a  , 
27.... 398.  3.  6 
40....3&1.  (7 
41.... 246.  l.a, 266. 
l.c,287.4.a,290. 
1.  a 
44.... 284.  6 
46....365.  3.  a(6) 
47...  248.  3.  6 
3,4  ...267.   1.  /, 

279.  c  (2) 
5.... 256.  2.  a 
6.... 373.  c,  377.  6 
7.... 357.  9.  6 
16,  30.... 385.  3.  a 
31.... 284.  e 
22.... 273.  a,  297. 

d,3n.  3 
23...  305.  a 
24.... 105.  a 
31....257.  6.  c 
.283.  a 
.126.  1,278.1 

367.  4.  a 

7.... 379.  6 
13,  13     ..266.2.  c 
14.... 306.  b 
15.... 148.  4 
16.... 267.  5.  a 
17,22...  255.1.6 
18.... 253.  2(2)6 
22,  23.... 263.  6 
23,-25....246.  2.  6 
28.... 285.  3.  a 
5...*.217.  1.  ^ 
7....255.  4.a,  267. 
4.  a,  275. 1.  a  (4) 
13....254.2.6,  256. 

3.6 
20... 278.  1 
3.... 2.56.  3.  a 
7.... 269.  2.6 
8.... 290.  1.  a 
10....  257.  8,  264. 2. 

(2)  a 
11.... 264. 2  (2) a 
15.... 266.1.0,278. 

4.  a 
17.... 289.  5.  a 
20. ...119.  1 
25.... 53.  2.  a 
25,  28.... 267.  4.  a 
;     3.... 248.  2 
4.... 2.57.  6,  c 
5....260.1.a,284.d 
7....  256.  3,  287.  5. 
rt,  290.  l.a, 311. 
1.  a 
8.... 267.  4.  a 
12.... 278.  3 


37... 
3  .. 
4... 


11: 


16.... §10.  a 
19 ... . 132.  1 
21.... 209.  1.  c 
21,  22.... 287. 3.  a 
26,   27,    34.... 255. 

1.6 
27.... 296.  2.  a 
32.... 312.  2.  a 
32,35....275.1.a(l) 
36.... 257.  4 
38.... 254.  4.  6 
1....366.  1.  a 
7,  8.... 267.  1.6 
12.... 253.  l.c 
14.... 248.  6.  a 
15,  26.... 267. 1.  e 
31,  32.... 255.  3.  a 
37.... 219.  1.  6 
41-44.... 254. 4 
42  ...256.2 
44...  254.  4.6 
48-50...  287.  3.  a 
1....94. c 
3....289.  6.  a 
6,  27....267.  l.e 
8.... 269.  2.6 
9.... 300.  c 
26,  28,  30.... 277.0 
27.... 257.  2.  a 
30.... 256.  2.  a 
31.  ...300.  a 
33..    246.  l.a 
33,35...  267.  1.  c 
35.... 282.  a 
39.... 266.  3.6 
43.... 288.  2.6 
48.... 86.  6  (Ic.) 
57.... 272.  a 
:    4  ...311.2 
8.... 255.  3.  a 
8,  9.... 245. 1.  a 
11....167.2,267.5.a 
22.... 300.  a 
25....275.2.a,280. 

3.  a,  300.  a 
:    3. ...112.3 

5,  28,   29.... 267. 

4.  a 
9.... 2.57.  8 

12.... 289.  l.a 
15.... 257. 3 
19. ...248.  6.  c 
23.... 285.  4.  a 
27.... 248.  6 
1....212.  d 
7.... 267.  5.  a 
8.... 252.1.6?,  266. 

1.  a 
9....248.  6.C,  266. 

l.c 
10.... 266.  l.c, 279. 

6,c 
13.... 299.  c 
14....302.  c 
.287.  4 
.24.  d 

.284.  d,  295 
.300.  c 
.57.  2(2)  a 
.266.  1.  c 
.300.  c 
8....287.  2.  a 
9.... 267.  1./ 
10.... 220.  5.  a 
12...  166.2 
32.... 260.  3 

1,4 249.  3.  a 

6.... 275.  2.  c 
7.... 98.  1,  235.  a 
11....251.a,309.3.a 
12.... 75. 2 


12: 


13: 


19.. 
22.. 
25.. 
27.. 
39.. 

1.. 

2. 


13:  20....§60.  3.  6(2) 
31.... 279.  d 
33.... 275.  2.  C 
14:    2....71.  a(2) 

3.... 60.  2.a,127.1 
6  ...252.1. «, 287.5 
8....279.  c(2) 
9.... 264.  2  (2)  a, 

283.  a 
10.... 24,5.  2.  6 
17...  309.  3 
19.... 300.  c 
20.... 254. 2 
24.... 249.  3.  6 
25.... 360.  3 
15:   13.... 379.     C    (4), 
313.  3.  a 
16.... 60.  3.  a 
19.... 4.  a 
20.... 260 

23.... 260.  4,  285.4 
29.... 94.  6 
33  ...360.  3,  4 
16:  10.... 255.  2 

16.... 250.6, 289.5.6 
17....  174.  4,  177.3 
21....255.  3,  207.  5 

a,  279.  d 
24.... 256. 2. a 
25.... 174. 4 
26.... 257.  9.  a 
26,  27.... 258.  3.  c 
39....254.2,255.2.a 
31.... 298.  1.  a 
32... 288.  2.6 
34.... 349.  3.  c 
17:     3...   100.  1 
12.... 257.  2.  a 
13. ...16.  1 
14....  132.  1,179.3 
16.... 293 

21..   .43,  273.a,374 
18:     1....375.  2.  c 

10....  104. 6, 261. 3. 
6.  267.  1.  e,  275. 
1.  a  (4) 
12...,100.3.  a  (1), 

246.  l.a 
13.... 248. 4. 
23. . . .277.  6 
23,  28.... 245.  2.  6 
35.... 36.3.  6 
30. ...131. 3 
33.... 387.  3 
39....346.3,396.3.a 
42.... 177.3 
43.... 357.  9.a,288. 

2  d 
44.. '..104.  6,249.3. 

a,  275.  2.  c 
46....245.  2.  (« 
19:    2  ...289.  3.  a 
4...  288.  2.  c 
4,  5.... 251.  a 
7.... 38.  l.a 
8.... 288.  2.  a 
10.... 93.  d 
11.... 289.  6.  a 
15.... 66.   2  (2)  6. 

223.  1,  359.  c 
19.... 3.54. 4.  b 
20.... 98.  l.a 
21.... 287.  2.  a 
20:  5,  6.... 305.  6 
9.... 39.  4 
13.... 230.  1.6 
16....254.  2.  <? 
27.... 96.  a,  163. 4 
30.... 254.  2.  d 
oo        272   ci 
33.  ".'.'.267.1.6,276.6 


404 

INDEX   II. 

80:  85....S174.  3 
37....28«J.  2 

4:  35. ...8246.  2.6 

10:  30.... §.39.  4,  25.5. 

23:    4,  5. ...§275.  l.a 

40....309.  3.  o 

1.0 

(4),  288.  3.  a 

39  ...91./> 

41...  311.  4.6 

11:    4. ...201. 6 

5....276.  e 

40.... 278. 4.  a 

43.... 280.  2 

5. ...252.  l.e 

9.... 267.  l.e,  2691 

SI:     1...  45.  1 

5:    1....39.  1.  a 

7.... 812.  2.  a 

2.  d 

2,  10. . .  275.  2.  c 

2.... 288.  2.e 

8. ...311.3 

10.... 279.  e 

C... 267.  4.0,276, 

3. ...112.3 

13.  ...201.0,2.50.3. 

13.... 258.  1.  a 

b,  306.  I> 

6.... 104.  ;.  277.  6 
6,  17....311.  4.  b 

0,  311.  1.  o 

17....7:j.  2.0,249. 

7.... 246,1.  a, 207. 

18.... 248.  6./ 

3.  6  bis 

l.e 

7....257.9.6,2;5. 

12:     1.... 2.55.  2.  6 

83.... 279.  6 

8.... 46 

1.  c,  279.  d 

8.... 218.  1.  o 

25:     1....255.  l.o 

15.... 305.  6 

8  ...275.  2.C 

9...  60.  3. c,  132.2 

10.... 295 

19.... 265.  3.  a  (3), 

9.... 2(^0 

10.... 253.  1.  0 

17....254.2.  6 

297.0,298.  l.a, 

10.... 275.  2.  c,  d, 

10-12.... 275.1.0(4) 

24...  273 

302.  a 

280.  4 

18-10....269.  2.  6 

29.... 179.  3. 

29...   106.2 

11...  277.    o,   281. 

14....  267. 4.  0,289. 

22:    5....274.  « 

1.  a,  (4),  2.  a 

6.  a 

6...  .267.1. «,  298.2 

13....275.2.f/,:M8.o 

18.... 267.  5.  a 

I.  CHRONICLES. 

9. ...251.  a 

17.... 2.56.2.0,274.0 

13:    6. ...166.2. 

10.. ..287.  5.  a 

18.... 46,  178.  1. 

7....254.  2.  6 

2:  13.... §57.  2(1) 

12.... 126.1 

20....877.  6,  305.  6 

14  ...267.  1 

16... 13.  6 

13.... 272.0.289.6.0 

2y....256.  2.  a 

19.... 266.  l.e, 279. 

48...  289.  6.  a 

15.... 273. c 

6:   3-5.... 253.  1.6 

e(4) 

54... 249.  8.  c 

28.... 252.  2.6 

5.... 284.  d 

20....  267. 4.  0,289. 

3:     5...   150.  1 

25.... 167.1 

5,  26.... 309.  3 

6.  0 

4:  10....  100.  2.0  (1), 

27....2-)6.  3,256.3. 

8  . .  219.  2.  a 

25.... 266.  1.  a 

102.  3.  a 

a,  284.  c 

10.... 255.    4,   275, 

14:     7.... 22.  6,  275.1. 

42...  256.2.  a 

28.... 294. « 

1.  a  (4) 

0(1) 

5:    1....279.  c(4) 

35. ...148.  4 

11.... 74.  a 

8,  11.... 285.  4 

20.... 74.  o,280.3.a 

36...  289.  6.  a 

18.... 98.  2,209.1.0 

22.... 279.  d 

26....286.  2.  o 

41,52..     265.3.0(6) 

19.... 88  (pi.),  275. 

15:     1....255.  2.  o 

6:  55.... 258.  1.  a 

42.... 265.  3.  0(6; 

2.C 

10....19.  2.  0 

7:    4...  2.57.  10.6 

54. ...119.  1 

22.... 2.31.  3 

12.... 2.55.  l.o 

5.... 257.     10.    6, 

23. ...174.  4 

16.... 249.  2.  0,267. 

260.5 

25.... 255.  3.  a 

5.  0 

14.... 245.  1 

11.  KINGS. 

27..   .308.0 

20...  254. 2.  6,255. 

9:  13.... 2,56. 3.  6 

32.... 24. 6 

4.  o 

22.... 297. o 

1:     2.. ..§252.    2.     c. 

7:     1....256.2 

29.... 198.  C 

25....279.  e(4) 

298.  1 

2.   ..808.  a 

16:     5...  267.5.0,276.6 

27.... 296.1.  0,811.2 

6  ...36.2,39.4 

4.... 235.  d 

7....  1.58.  2 

32....258.  2.  o 

7.... 75.  1 

10.... 246.  6.  6,289. 

14  ...249.3.  6 

10:  13..   .279.  e  (2) 

9,  11,  15.... 273.  c 

5.  fl,  311.  4.  a 

17....  249.3.6,256.2. 

11:    7....245.  2.  6 

10  ...174.  4 

11. ...289.  1.  o 

17:    6.... 2.55.  1.  0 

8.... 267. 1.6 

10,  14....  253.2  (2)6 

12....  167.1,  275.2.6 

7,13.23.... 266.1.0 

9....281.  2.  6 

12,  13.... 276.  d 

13...  249.  3.6,275. 

13.... 39,  4.  a 

23.... 248.  3.  o 

13.... 255.  1.  a 

1.  6,  311.  4.  6 

15...  279.6 

12:     1....14.  0.257.  9. 

16...  39.  4 

19.... 244.  a 

28.... 278.  4.  a 

6,  309.  2.  0 

2:     1....16.  3.  6 

8:     1...  71.0  (2), 245. 

29....  2,57.  10.6 

2. ...151.  1,  182.0 

9.... 272.0,311.4.6 

2.0 

36.... 39. 4 

8...  248.6./" 

10.... 93.  f,  272.  0, 

4.... 274.  a 

18:     4  ...275.  1. 

14...  264.2(2) 

283.  0,  287.  4.  a 

5.... 309.  3.  0 

5,  19....206.  2.  6 

17.... 872.  o 

11....  16.  3.  6,  281. 

8....252.  2.  e 

7...  275.  2.  a 

20....14.O 

2.0 

10. ...281.  1.6 

13. ...104.7 

22  ...267.4.0,296. 

18.... 258.  3.  c,309. 

12....  126.   1,    266. 

19,  28.... 256,  3.0 

1.0 

1.  a 

2.  f/,  287.  4.  o 

23. ...119.1 

13:     3. ...104./ 

16....210.  3.<-,  266. 

13.... 75.  l,287.4.a 

28.... 276.  d 

6....300.e 

l.(7,275.2.c,276.o 

21. ...11.  1.6,90 

28,  31.... 27.3.  d 

12.... 51. 2 

21.... 107.  2 

.       28....249.  1.  0 

30.. ..126.    1,   281. 

14:  11.... 245. 2.  6 

22.... 167.  3 

■^       29.... 266.  l.e 

1.  a  (4),  284.  e 

15.... 272.  0 

23.... .309. 3 

9:  11....2:30.  2.  a 

32.... 273.  0,282.0 

15:  12.... 302. 6 

24.... 254.  2.  6 

13.... 265.  3.  a  (6) 

3:J....281.  1.  6 

18  ...2.56.  3.  C 

3:     4....2.')6.  3.  0 

16.... 266.  l.e 

19:     6...  300.  e 

19.... 256.  2 

14.... 305.  0,307.0 

17.... 198.  6 

8.... 287.  4.  o 

24.... 94.  e.  182.0 

16.... 280.4,296.2.0 

21.... 24.5.  2.6 

23.... 257.  2.  a 

27...   182.0.249.3.6 

23. ...119.1,281. 1.6 

25.... 219.1.6,275.1. 

25....177.2,275.2.c 

29.... 287.  4.0 

25. ...65.  6,  111.  1, 

c,  287.  4.O.309.  3 

29.... 131. 3 

16:    2.... 279.  6 

2G7.  4.  o,  277.  a 

27.... 297.  a 

20:     3.... 274. 

81. ...272.0 

86.... 289  6.  a 

29.... 255.  2.  a 

4.... 252.  l.e 

37....2S6.  2.  a 

27.... 267.1 

37....  174.  1 

9....207.1.*,  268. 

42.... 297.  c 

4:    2....2.-.6.  2 

10:    1.... 2.54. 2.  6 

0,  298.  2.  6 

17:    4.... 278. 4 

5.... 151.  4. 

2.   ..309.1.0,311. 

10.... 266.  2.6 

10.....311.4.  6 

7.... 219.  1.6,290. 

4.6 

19.... 298.  1.  a 

11....266.  l.rf,8.6, 

1.  a 

5.... 94.  a,  248.5 

21:     6.... 275.  1.  0(2) 

277.6 

8.... 248.  6./,267. 

6....252.  l.rf,257 

13....  245.  2. 6,  267. 

20:     2.... 2.57.  5. 

4.  o 

3.  0,  258.  3 

4.  6,  281.  2.  6 

8.... 73.  1,  150.  1 

16,  2.3.... 71.  o  (2) 

9...  112.  5.  c 

16.... 296.  2.  o 

21:    3....267.  2.  0 

22..     253.  2  (2)0, 

10...  244.  rt 

26.... 245.  2.  6 

12.... 2.56.  2 

275.  2.  c 

12,  13....:W9.  3.  0 

22:     1....254.  2.  6 

17.... 246.  1.  fl,  2. 

24. ..131.1 

14.... 118.  3 

18.... 278.  2.  0 

0,281.  1,  300.6 

25....7;l.  2.  a 

15... 261.  3.  6 

19.... 106.  a 

301.  6 

82. ...95.  a 

24,  29.... 297.  6 

23:     4....256.  3.  c 

17,23.   ..272.  a 

INDEX   11. 

405 

31:  23....§266.  2.  tf 

13:  11.... §240.1  ftbis, 

31:  14. ...§233.  l.ft 

3:  33.,.. §288.1 

24.... 280.  3.  a 

296.  1 

33:     5.... 3,56.  3.  ft 

34.... 212. c 

22:    7.... 297.  a 

15.... 309.  3.  a 

15.... 348.  &.e 

4:    7. ...218.  2.  a 

11.... 277.  a 

14:    6....287.  3.  ft 

30....  153.  3,  297. 

5:    2,4  ...304 

12.... 267.  I.e. 

7....250.  c 

30,  31.... 259.  ft 

5.... 244.  ft 

14. ...253.  2(3) 

10  ...86.  6  dpi.) 

33:  19.... 201.  c 

7,8,  13.... 276.  A 

19....278.  2.a 

15:    8....249.  3.6,  256. 

34:    4.... 126.  1 

8.... 258,  1 

23:    6....59.a 

3.  ft 

5.... 219.  1.6 

11....  255. 3,258.3.6 

28.... 250.  l.a 

16:    7.... 282.  ft 

6....43. c 

14... 65.  ft 

24:    3.... 59.  a,  113.  1 

7,  8.... 119.  1 

19.... 279.  d 

16  ...112.  3 

25:  19.... 254.  4.  b 

9....297.  6,  302.  6 

22.... 295 

6:    1,7....287.  5.  6 

25.... 250. 6 

13....  179.  3,285.  4. 

35:  13.... 57.  1 

6  ...179.1 

26:    8.... 2.50.  c 

ft,  286.  2.  a 

21.... 297.  ft 

8.... 57.   2  (3)  ft, 

26....2a0.4 

14.... 291.  ft 

36:  15.... 380. 2 

166.  3 

28.... 248.  6.  c 

17:  11.... 62.  2.  6,211. 

16.... 258.  3.  a 

9...  267.1./ 

27:  14,  15.  ...255.  2 

2.  ft,  278.  1 

19... 279.  c(4) 

11....231.  3.  ft 

15...  254.  4.6 

12....281.2.  6 

23.... 272.  ft 

12...  290.  1.  a 

28:    1.... 36.  1.258.  3.6 

18:  ia....272.  ft,  277.  ft 

13.... 267.  l./,275. 

3....  105.  rf,297.  a 

19.... 275.  2.C 

2.  6,  277.  ft 

5.... 252.  l.a 

22.... 25%  2.  b 

EZRA. 

17.... 260.  1 

14-17.... 296.  2.  a 

23.... 38.  4.  ft 

7:    3....245.2.c,280.4 

15.... 2.56.  2.  a 

19:     2....112.  5.e,  279. 

1:    l....§255.  2.  6 

34.... 254.  3 

18.... 356.  3.  a 

C(4) 

3.... 272 

64....256.  3.  ft 

21  ...258.3.6 

6.... 245.  1.  ft 

5....260.  4.  302.a 

8:    2....  168.  4 

29:    2, 18.... 258.  3.  6 

7.... 372.  ft 

8.... 308.  ft 

5  . . .  106.  a,  125.  2 

3.... 302.  a 

11.... 260.  1 

2:  62....256.3.«,286.3 

8  ...380.  3.  ft 

8  ...256.  2.«,289. 

20:     6....279.c(4) 

63.... 286.  1.  ft  (4) 

10....;303.  6 

2.  a,  300.  6 

7. ...105.  ft 

68.... 244.  ft 

13. ...311.    2 

12,  22.... 286.  2.  a 

11  ...2:«.  ft 

3:  11....95.  c,  1.51.5 

9:3.   .2.55.  3 

17....248.  6.  c 

15.... 246.1.  ft.  252. 

12....288.3.ft,297.c 

5....103.  4,  2.57  6. 

18. ...125.  1 

3,  305.  6 

5:  11.... 246. 2 

6,  258,  1.  ft,  275. 

20.... 286. 2.  a 

20...  275.  2.  d 

7:     8. ...255.  1.  ft 

l.c 

35  ...96.  ft 

25.... 39.  4 

6.... 71.      ft      (2), 

21:  17.... 125.   1,    264. 

8:     6-14....254.  2.  6 

246,   2 

2.  CHRONICLES. 

2.(2) 

15.... 276. A 

8,  13....280.3.  a 

22:    5.... 53.  2.  ft,  249. 

18.... 26 

18  ..  63.  1.  a,  289, 

1:    4.... §248.    6.    c, 

1.  ft 

21..  ..256.  1.  a 

3,  a 

302.  6 

11   ...39.  1.  ft 

23....266.  2.  6 

19  ,..232.5.ff, 252.1 

10....  166.  5 

23:  10.... 300.  6 

23.... 99.  2 

26.... 63.  1.  a 

12.... 248.  6.  a 

19.... 267.  1./ 

24 386.2.  ft 

28  ...252. l.ft 

2:    7.... 14.  ft.  257. 3 

24:    8...  276.  « 

25.... 98.  l.ft,  209. 

29.... 297.  6 

9.... 266.  2.  c 

11....266.1.ft,267. 

1.  6,  248.  6.  c 

32.... 284.    e,   286. 

12  ...366.  2.« 

4.  ft,  302.  ft 

2a,  26.... 276.  d 

2.  ft 

3:    3.... 250.  6 

12.... 249.   3,    258. 

26.... 98.  l.ft 

35.... 252.  l.c 

11....259.ft,289.6.a 

:3,3r8.  4  a 

29....249.  3.  6 

10:     3-38.... 311,   1,  a 

11,  13  ...255.  1.6 

18.... 353.  2.  6 

31. ...99.  2 

29.... 311.  1.  ft 

4:    1....249.  3.  ft 

23.... 373.  ft 

9:     1....356.  l.«,260. 

33.... 112.    3,   255. 

3.... 296.  3.  a 

25:    4.... 2.57.  7 

1.  ft,  297.  C 

3.  a 

3,13  ...2.56.2 

9.... 2.54.    4,   264. 

3.... 276.  h 

39.... 94.   6,  113.  2 

15....253.  l.«,  254. 

2  (2)  ft 

4....269.  2.  6 

11:    9....256.  3.  c 

4.6 

10....232.  5.ft,286. 

6.... 266.  2.  6 

17. ...151.  2 

5:     2....94.C,  267.5.6 

2.  ft 

10:     1....  257.9.6,309.2 

12:  38. ...2.32.  5.  ft 

12.... 183.  a 

14.... 367.  4.  ft 

3.... 271.  ft 

44....:39.  3.  6 

13.    ..296.  3.  ft 

19.... 275.  2.  ft 

6.... 276.  (/,309.2 

13:    4.... 257.  6.  c 

6:  38.... 387.  2.  a 

26:  14  ...256.2.ft,297.c 

9.... 255.  1.  a 

7-13,  21.... 276.  h 

42...  98.  1 

15.... 149.1,  179.3, 

13...  263.  2.  ft 

lS....111.2.d 

7:    3...  258.3.6,280. 

283.  ft,  286.2.  6 

14.... 248.  6.  c,249. 

16. ...11.1.  ft 

3.  ft 

17....2.54.  2.  6 

2.  ft,  360.  5,  396. 

19..     267.    1.    /, 

6 94.  e 

18.... 244.  6.  305.  b 

3.  ft 

276.  e 

7....249.  3.  ft 

19....119.3,309.3.« 

16.... 132.  2,  141.  1 

23.,., 213,  d 

12.... 275.  2.  ft  ■ 

21.... 200.  ft  (4) 

17....  248.  0.  c,256. 

26.... 28;'.  5.  6 

14.... 275.  1.  6 

28:     7....256.  3.  C 

2.6 

17.... 280.3.ft,  311.2 

10.... 279.  ft 

21....284.  rf 

15.... 276.  rf 

ESTHER. 

8:     5....256.  3.  6 

19.... 280.  3.  ft 

NEHEMIAH. 

7....2S8.  3.  ft,  300 

22 2.52.  2.  ft 

1:    7.... §379.  ft.  296. 

9...  300.  ft 

23....94.  e 

1:    4....§12.5.2,276./t 

2.  ft 

13....  248.  4, 288. 3. 

29:  10.... 275.  2.  c 

5.... 2,50.   d,  259. 

19.... 245.  3.  ft 

a,  311.  3 

18,  19.... 284. 6 

6,  274.  6 

2:     3....280.  3.  a 

16.... 249.  3.  6 

19.... 275.  l.ftd) 

6,  11.... 272.  a 

8.... 136.  1 

18.... 13.  ft 

27....  2:32.5.  a,  258. 

7.  ...281.  l.c 

9....309.  2.  c? 

9:  15... 254.  2.  ft 

2.  a 

•8. ...246.  l.ft 

10.... 267.  l.f 

18...  248.  6.  c 

31.... 65.  6 

11.... 273. c 

11.... 296. 1.  ft 

10:     7....232.  5.  a 

34.... 264.  1 

2:    5.... 306.  a 

12,  13.... 267,  4,  a 

10.... 19.  2.  ft 

36.... 248.  6.  c 

7. ...111.  2.  6 

13,... 284.  e 

11:  12....296.  2.  ft 

30:     6....258.  3.  6 

12.... 39.  4 

14.... 255.  l.ft 

14.... 290.  l.a 

6,  8.... 275.  2.  c 

13...  4.  ft,  166.  5 

15.... 305.  6 

22.... 279.  c(4) 

18.... 253.  1 

3:  13.... 53.  2.  6,62.1 

16.... 2.55.  2.6 

12:  10....276. /• 

18,  19.... 303.  h 

13,14,15...  267.1.6 

3:    4....298.  1.  ft 

11....266.'1.  ft 

31:    7.... 14.  a,  149.  1 

19.... 256.  3.  ft 

8.... 297.  c 

12.... 279.  c  (4) 

10.... 380.  1 

20.... 94,  ft 

12.... 296.  2.  o 

406 


INDEX   II. 


8-  13. ...§280.  3.  n 
4:    3.  ...151.5,207.  1. 
h,  2.  6,  287.  5.  b, 
2«0.    1.  «,  311.3 
4....1M.    3 
13  ...2'.Hi.  2.  (I 
14....  127.  1,290.2 
10  ...2(Hi.  \.(t,  '-'!«.). 

1.  a,  2«6.  3.  a 
5:    3....24.S.  6.   d 

8.... 279. a 
13....2«7.  4.  a 
6  :    1 ...  249.  3.   b, 
278.  4.  a 
9.... 280.  3.  a 
7:    4.... 307.  a 

5.... 82.  I.  a  (It, 

298.8.  o 
6.... 252.  1.  d. 
8.... 279.  c(4) 
8:    6. ...283 
15....  2.59 
17.... 295.  2.  a 
9:    1....280.  3.6 
4.... 281.  2.  b 
6,12,  16-18.... 280. 
3.  a 
21.... 278.  4.  rt 
2:J....289.  1.  a 
27.... 80.  6(3  pi.), 

275.  1.  a  (2) 
30.... 2,56.  2 

JOB 

1  :     l....§27f).  f 

3...2.5:j.  2(ii),264. 

2(1) 
4.5  ...275. 1.  rt(4) 
5.... 267.  4,288. 

2.  d 
7...  45.  1 
8.... 36.  1.  a 

10.... 71. «  (2) 
11. ...131.  3,  274. 

rt,  :i05,  rt 
14...  219.    1.    b, 

261.  3,278.4.  a 
15  fif  ...246.  l.rt 
16.... 206.     1.  c, 

309.  3 
21....  166.  2,  266. 
1.  a,  278.  4.  a 
2:    3....276.  « 

7...  16.  3.  6,46 
10....251.rt 
11.... 248.  0.   c, 
254   4.  a 
8:    3.   ..207.5 
5....  10.5.  d 
8.   ..279.  6 
9....272.  c 
11.... 207.  5 
13.... 245.     3.     «, 

267.  1 
16.... 267.  1.  d 
17.... 266.    2.     6, 

209.  1 
18...  266.  2.  6 
19.... 246.  2.  rt 
20.... 267.  2.  rt 
21...  264.2(2)  a, 

282.  rt 
2J....289.  6.  a 
25....  170.  a,  174.3 
aK....276. rf 
4:    2..2.-».  c.  298.1.  a 
4... 202.  e 
5...  24.5.  3.  b 
6  .276.    c,  299, 
312.  2 


5:  10. 
12, 
16. 
17 
19. 


6(2), 


...§2S6.  3.  rt 
15, 10. 267.  5.rt 
...235 
-20   ...207.  3.  a 

245.     2.    c 
300,  31)2.  a 
....9  6,  311.4 
...267.  1 
13. . .  278.  1 
...279.   c  (1) 
...267.  4.  rt 
...61.  6.  a 
...167.  3 
20.... 209.   2.  (/ 
...266.  4.  a 
...245.  2.  c,267. 
1,  267.  1.  ^,281. 

1.  6,  307.  6 
...204.  2  (2)  a 
...267.  3.  rt 
..245.3.  n,301.6 
...272.   rt,   275. 

2.  c,   283 
...250.  a 
...298.  l.a 
...311.  4 
...96.  6 
...302.  a 

..289.  2.   rt 
...299.  6 
...60.   3. 
119.4 
...  279 
...126.     1 
...207.    \.d 
...24,5.  2.   c, 
287.  5.  rt 
...306.6 
..119.  1,139.3 
...283.a 
...271.  a, 6 
. .  298.  2 
...260.  l.a 
...104.  j,  105.6 
.     206.      2.     6, 
299.   c 

...105.6.276.   c 
..  308.  a 
...306.  6 
....306.  6 
....57.   2.  (2)  rt, 
228.  1.  a 
...262.  2.rt,266. 
2.6 

...167.  1 
...287.  2.  a 
....88  (pi.) 
...92.  6 

...276. rt,  306. a 
20.... 267.  1.  (/ 
...24.6,  105.  u, 
192.  rt 
...3()6.  6 
...307.6 
23  ...306.  b 
...267.  \.e 

. . 309.  2 

...279.  (/,306.a 
...121.  1 
...267.  1./ 
...272.  6 
. . . 105.  6,  272. a 
...27.3.  d 
...269.  2.  a 
...276.  d,« 
11.... 267.  5.  a 
...19.2.rt,  280.3. 
...:106.  6 
. .  ..308.  a 
...01.6.a,  276,r, 
299.6 


16: 


3....6  94.a,  276.  <> 
5. ...282.  rt 
9... 285.  4.  rt 
14....275.1.6,306.f/ 
12....  1.39.  3,311.4 

13  ...200.  l.rf,277. 
6,  294.  6,  30().  a 

14.... 306.  6 
15.... 151.  5 
17.... 97.  I.  a,  264. 

2  2)c,  308.  a 
20....260.4.  rt,  209. 

2.  d 
2.... 248.     6.     rt, 

305.  a 
4.... 294.  a 
7.... 275. 2.  c, 289. 

4.  rt 
9.... 266.  1.  a 
11. ...311. 4 

14  ...111.  1 
15. ...311.  4 
17. ...282 
22-24.... 276. c 
24.... 2.58.  3 

8.... 279.   6 

5.... 281.  1.  a  (5) 

9....24.  c 
13. ...304 
15.... 83.  6 
17..   .281.  2.  a 
19....298.3.a,302.rt 
21. ...119.  1 
25.... 231.  4,  284.  6 
26,  27...  275.  1.6 
27.... 272.  6 
as.... 294.  a,  302. a 

1....257.  9.6 

8,  9.... 306.  6 
10. ...276.  rf,  311.4 
12,  19...   311.4 
14.... 306.  6 
14,  15.... 267.  \.d 
18.... 309.  2.  a 
19.... 112.    3,   289. 

4.  a 
20.... 276.  c 

8.... 280.  2 

7....16.],228.1.a, 
207.  5.  n 

8.... 248.  6.  rt 

9.... 200.  2.  6 
10.... 285.  4.  « 
11.... 204.  2(2)6 
18....  121.  2 
22.... 174.  5 
20.... 2.57.  2.  rt 
31.... 272.  c 
33....272.  rt 
35.... 280.  1,282.  a 

4.... 275.  1.6 

4,5...  267.  6.  1 

5....  104.  /( 

6.... 300.  a,  308. rt 
11.... 148.  3 
12.... 163.  2 
13.... 126.1,218.1.6 
10.... 60.  3.  6(2) 
19....  19.  2.  a 
21.... 275.  2.  c 
22.... 289.  6.  a 

2.... 24.  6,  272.6, 
305.  a 

3....  120.  1 

6.... 245.  l.rt 

9....217.1.c,311.4 
10.... 294.  a 
16.... 88  (3.  f.  pi.) 

2...  54.3,  2.58.1.  a 

4....91.  6,  231.  2, 
294.  a 


18:    5,  6.... §269.  2.  d 

6.... 260.  4.  a 

9,  12.... 272.  a 
14.... 245.  3.  6 
15....:i02.  6 
18  ...245.  2.  c 
21....258.2.a,302.6 
19:     1...  291.  a 

2.... 105.  c 

3....94.  c,  255.4, 
206.  2.  6.  283 

4.... 308.  a 

6.... 45.  4 

6-16....269.  2.  c 

7...  113.  1 
14. ...11.  1.  6 
]5....105.e.290.1.a 
17....  1.39.  2 
18.... 308.  a 
19....30:la 
23.... 88  (pi.),  141. 

1,  312.2.  a 
24.... 288.  3.  a 
25....  311.  4.  6 
26.... 245.  2.  c 
27....2(i6.  1.  d 
28  ...  294.  a 
29....74,  74,a,268. 

2.  a 

20:    2....295.  rt 

4....  160.3,298.1.0 
6.... 307.  rt 
8....139..3,245.2.c 
17...  258.3.c,272.c 
23.... 245.  1.  a 
24. ...112.  .5,308.a 
25....269.  2.  a 
26....60.  3.e,  93.a, 
111.  2.  f,302.  a 
27....  278.  1 
28...   140.  2 
21:    4....2:M.  4 
5.... 140. 5 
6.... 306. 6 
13.... 24.  c 
15.... 267.  1.  d 
16.... 266.  ]./ 
17.... 2 15.  1.  a 
18  ...104.  i 
19....245.1.a,294.a 
21        293 
22!!!. 245.  l.a 
24  ...&S(pl.) 
27.... 302.  a 
32.... 291.  a 
22:     2.... 305.  6 

3.... 231.  3,298.2 
6,  7.... 267.  4.  a 
9....284.« 
12.... 24.  r,  288.2.6 
17.... 294.  a 
18...  206.  1./ 
20.  ...219.1. 6,305.a 
21.... 88  (3/.),  94. 

d,  2T5.  2:  d 
23  ...2{»5.  a 
23:     1.... 262.  2.  a 
2.... 257.  9.  a 
3....245.1.rt.283.6 
9  ...  84,  97.  2.  a 
10.... 308.  o 
11.... 79.  3.  a,  97. 

2.  a 
11,  12.... 276.  (7 
12....312.  2.  a 
17.... 86.  6(2  m.), 
299 
24:     1....287.  5.  6 
2.... 269.  l.a 
2flf....245.  2.  6 
4.... 269.  2.  a 


INDEX   II. 


407 


24: 

5....§2.58.  l.a 

9.... 302.  6 

9-16....209.  2.  (^ 

14.... 83. 6 

14,  25.... 272.  b 

16  ...246.  3.6 

19.... 302 

20.... 276. C 

31.... 151.2 

23....219.  2.  c 

24.... 189.  1 

25.... 299. 6 

25: 

3.... 219.  1.6 

5.... 312.  2.  a 

36: 

2  ...299.  b 

9  ...182. a 

11. ...163. 4 

13....262.  2.a 

14.... 298.  3.  a 

27: 

3  ...259.  a 

4....92.« 

8,  22.... 272.  6 

12  ...285.  3 

14.... 295.  fl,306.6 

19,  20.... 209.  2.  d 

20.... 289.  4.  a 

22.... 281.  1.  a  (4) 

23....  219, 2.  c,  245. 

2.  b 

28: 

1.  ..302.  a 

3.... 245.  2.  a,  6, 

258.  3.  b 

4....  245. 2.  6,  287. 

5.  & 

7. . .  303.  a 

11  . .  269.  2.  &,287. 

1.  a 

12.... 248.  6 

18....  248.  6.  a,  290. 

1.  a 

24,  25.... 269.  1.  a 

29 

2....258.2.a.302.« 

2,  3....2(i7.  4.  a 

3....139.  2,  285.2. 

297.  c 

6.... 53.  3.6 

10.... 293 

13.  ..278  4.  a,309. 

2.  a 

14.... 105.  d 

31....24.C 

30 

3  . . .  296.  3.  a 

6.... 279.  <;(4) 

13fE...  369.  2.C 

25.... 299 

26....99,2.6.308.a 

31 

5....  159.  3 

7,16-18...  269.2.C? 

13, 14.... 306.  6 

15.... 61.  3,  105.6, 

163.  3 

18.... 286.  \.d 

22.... 27 

24.... 00.  l.a 

27.... 276.  6 

36  ...305.  a 

37.... 286.  1.  d 

32 

3....27G.  ^299.  a 

4.... 266.  1.  f 

7,...248.6.a,293.a 

9.... 267.  3.  «,  299 

10... 125.  1 

11. ...53.  2.  a.  111. 

2.  c 

11,  13...  267.  1.6 

18.... 106.  3 

19...  267.2.6 

20  ...275.  2.  c 

23.... 267.1.  c?,283.6 

33 

2,3....266.  2.  a 

5...  111.3.  a,273.c 

34: 


35: 


36: 


40 


9.... 71.  a(l) 

11.   ..272.6 

13  ...100.  1 

17.... 282.  a 

21....  26,  121.1,276. 
g.  393.  a 

23,'24  ...306.  a 

25.... 183.  a 

36.... 276. c 

27.... 160. 2 

29....367.  4.  6,  311 
1.  a 

30... 161.   3,    879. 
C(\) 

31.... 373. 6 

33.... 279.  6 
5.... 65.  a, 366. 3.6 

10....288.  3.  a 

13....61.  6.  a 

14.... 307.  a 

16.... 273. a 

18.... 113.  1 

20.... 245.  2.  c 

22.... 91.  6,  359.  a, 
279.  d 

34.... 276. c 

25.... 218.  1.  a 

29....30S.  a 

.30....  279.  6,  c  (4) 

31. ...113.  1 

32.... 303.  6 

37.... 273.  6 
3.... 364.  3  (2)e 
3.... 394.  a 
6,  7.... 306.  6 

11.... 53.  3.  a.  111. 
3.  c 

15..!.361.3.  6 
7...  312.  2.  a 

10.... 267.  1./ 

14,  15.... 272.  a 

20.... 279.  c(4) 

26.... 312.  2.  a 
2.... 281.  2.  a 
6.... 179.  1 

12...  61.  6.  a 
IS.... 298.  3.  a 

24.... 104.  h 
1....4.  a 
2.... 298.  3.  a 
12.... 86.  6  (2m.), 

266.  1.  a 
14,  15.... 275.  1.6 
18.... 298.  3.  a 
19,  24.... 302.  a 
21....367.  5.  a,  293 
24  ...60.  4.a,113. 1 
35....231.2.  a 
36.... 348.  6.  a 
2....104.(7,298.3.a 
3. ...163.  2 
4. ...112.  5.  c 
15.... 276. c 
19,  21.... 289.  5.  a 
24....  167.  2 
26.... 272.  6 
27.... 295.  a 
2....280.  3.  6 
5 . . .  255. 4 
8,  9.... 298. 2 
10.... 273.  a 
21,  22.... 210.  3.  a 
22....230.  6.  6 
23.... 349.  l.a 
34. ...131. 3 
35.... 398.  .3.  a 
30....298.  3.  a 
32  ...272.  c 
1....162.  5 

2.  ...105.  6 

3,  5.... 266.  1.  a 


41:  17....§  131.4,166.2 
35.... 174.  5 
26....43,  43.  6 
42:    3.... 86.  6(1  c.) 
3....  366.  3.  6,395. 
a,  302.  c,  309.1. a 
5.... 366.  3.  a 
7.... 254.  4.  a 
8  ...305.6 
13.... 324.  1.  a 
15....389.  6.  a 


PSALMS. 

1:    l....§348.  3,  266. 
1.  a 

1,2.... 269.  1.  a 
2,  3.... 267.  l.a 
2, 4.... 305.  6 
4....267.  3.  a 
6...  284.  a 
2:    1,  2,  10.... 284.  a 
2.... 250 

3.... 45.   4,   97.1, 
271.  a,  275.  1.  6 
5.... 267.  1.  a 
6.... 2.57.  9.a,259. 
6,266.1.6,311.4.6 
6,7  ...246.  1.  a 
7....71.a(2) 
8.... 284.  a 
12....35.1,2.58.1.a, 
267.1./",  275.  2.6, 
285.  4.  a 
3:    2.... 141. 1.266.2.6 
3.... 61.  6.  a 
5....276.6,285.4.a 
5,  7.... 267.  2.  a 
6  ...367.4.6,376. 

h,  284.  a 
8.... 266. 1.6,284. 
a,  287.  2 
4:    2  ...259.    6,    266. 

3.... 111.  2. «, 309. 

1.6 
4,  7.... 284.  a 
5....373.  ci 
6....257.  6.  6 
7... 3.1.  a,  131.3, 

167.  1 
8.... 264.  3  (3)  «, 

302.  a 
9.... 267.  1.  a 
5:    3....257.  9.  a 
4.... 267.  l.a 
5....286.  l.c? 
8.... 257.  2.  a 
9....  1.51.  1 
10....  257.  10.6 
11.... 42 
13...   112.  5.  c,257. 

9.  6,  275.  1.  6 
13.... 287.  3.  a 
6:     3.... 42,     105.     d, 
294.  a 
4....71.a(2) 
7...  367.4.6 
7:    2....266.  2.  6 
3.... 309.  3 
4,  5.... 306,  .306.  r 
5.... 376.  h,zm.a 
6.... 60.  2.  a,  114 
9  ...2.52.  1./ 
10.... 267.1. gf,274.a 
11. ...257. 10 

13,  14.... 269.  2.  c 

14,  15.... 267.  2.  a 
16....267.1.6,302.a 
18.... 271 


8:    2....§  132.1,300.6 
3.... 94.  6 
4.... 266.  l.a 
5.... 367.  1.  a 
5,  6.... 276.  c 
6.... 387.  1.  a 
9:    5,  6  ...266.  1.6 
7... 297. a 
8.... 269.  1 
10.... 272.  a 
14.... 141.  1 
15...  219.  2.  a 
16....  2.57.    10.    6, 

302,  303.  a 
17..   .150.  1 
18.... 220.  1.  a 
19...  126.  1,299.  c 
10:    2.... 303 

3 . ,    369.  3.  a 
8, 10.... 311.  1.  a 
11.... 366.  1.  g,  3. 

a,  399.  c 
13.... 131.  3 
16.... 266.  4.  a 
18...  253.1./,  367. 

1./ 
11:    1... .260.1 
3....369.  3.  a 
3.... 368. a 
4.... 397.  6 
6.... 372.  a 
7  ...219.  2.  c,  289. 
3.  a 
12:    2...  250.  c 
3.... 296.  3 
4. ...119.  1 
5.... 357.  10.6 
8.... 7.3.1, 352.  2.  6 
13:    4.... 285.  3 

5....  104.  A,  286. 

\.d 
6.... 272.  a 
14:    1....266.  1.  a 
1,3.... 266.  3.  a 
5.... 285.  3.  a 
7.... 272.  a 
15:    2,  3.... 282.  a 
3-5....;i01.  a 
5.... 299.  c 
16:    2....86.  6(1  c.) 
3....  258.  2.  a,  300, 

302.  a 
4.    ..252.  1. /• 
5..  ..t9.  2.    6,  90, 

153.  3 
8.... 245.  l.a 
9....276. rf 
17:     3....  139.  2 
5.... 280.  3.6 
9.... 252.  l./,269. 

1.  a,  303.  a 
10,  13.... 285.  4.  a 
11....287.  2.  a 
12....:B02.  a 
14     ..277.  a 
18:     5ff....265.3.a(4) 
6. ...104.  I 
7.... 267.  5.  a 
8.... 276.  d 
9,12,13.... 269.2.0? 
10...   148.  5 
12... 276.  g- 
14.... 376.  <7 
15.... 82.  l.a  (.3) 
19,  24.... 276.  6 
21.. ..21.  1 
27.... 143.  2 
33....376.<;,387.3.a 
34.... 364.  3(3)e 
35.... 389.  4.  a 
37-46....369.  3.  cf 


•i08 

INDEX   11. 

18:  40.... §  257.9.6 

31:    8.... §300.0 

42:    9. ...§219.  1.6 

57:     5.... 8  271. O 

41.   ..132.    1,    278. 

24. ...119.4 

10...  111.  2.6 

7....260.1.o,27Sl 

3.  a 

25....272.  rt 

43:    5....296.  aa 

2.0 

42.... 295.  a 

32:     1....  167.  3,  257.10 

44:    3.... 285.  4.  a 

9....250.C 

48,  49.... 294.  rt 

4.... 2.57.  9.  a 

3,10-16....267..5.a 

58:    2.... 88  (pi.) 

51.... 94.  a,  256.  2. 

5....269.  2.  rf 

5.... 246.  2,  261.2 

4. ...158.2 

0,  2<»4.  a 

7.... 287.  3.  rt 

9  ...269,1.  o 

5.... 25.8.1.0,302.0 

19:    2....27S.  1 

8....285.4.rt,303.o 

10.... 266.  1.6 

7. ...131. 3 

3.... 24.  a 

10.... 252.  l.rt 

18,  21. ...127. 2 

8. ...139.3 

C.     .252.  1 

33:     3....283.0 

19.... 289.  4.0,299 

9....  24. 6, 216. 1.6 

7.... 296.  3.  b 

5.   ..278.1 

21.... 306 

12....  275. 2.  a,  289. 

8...  257.9.6 

9....276.  e 

21, 22.... .306. 6 

3.  0 

8-11....311.4.  c 

13,  14....266.  3.  rt 

22.... 267.  1.  d 

59:    2.... 2.57.  9.  6 

11....2.-)0.  rf,263.6 

20.... 266.  2.  6 

24.... 299. c 

4  ...269.  l.a 

14. ...11.  1.  6 

22.... 272 

26.... 273.  c 

.5,  8.... 267.2.  o 

20:     4.... 63.  1.   c,  97. 

34:       ....6,  7.  2.  rt 

27. ...01.  6.  o 

6...  256. 3.  0,257. 

1.  (7,  6 

1..  ..215.1.  a 

45:    3.. ..92.  rt 

6.0 

7....2r,fi.  4.  a 

5,  6.... 275.  2.0 

5.... 24.  rt,287.  1 

14....250.  o 

8.... 29.'-).  a 

6....272.C 

6....302.  c 

18.... 259.  6 

9  ...246.  1 

7....252.  2.  o 

7....256.  3.rt.264. 

60:    2.  ...4.3.  6 

21:     4....287.  2.  a 

8....276.  c 

2.  (2)  e,  288.  2-  rt 

4....167.  1 

7....2S7.  3.  a 

9.... 275.  2.  d 

9. ...201.6,309.1.6 

5.... 256.  3.  a 

9.... 286.  2.  a 

11....  266. 3. 0,275. 

10.... 14.  a,  24.  6, 

7....285.  4.  o 

]2....30'.t.  2 

1.  rt  (4) 

273 

11....2f>8.  o 

13....287.  3.  a 

13.... 250.  d 

11.... 275.  l.c 

13. ...311. 4 

22:    2....104.;.266.1.6 

15.... 275.  1.  c 

14.... 309.  1.6 

61  :    1. ...198.6 

5....26(i.  1.  a 

22.... 284.  o 

46:  5.... 257.2. a, 297.6 

62:   4.... 93.    a     bl8, 

6....275.  2.  a 

35:    5,  6....:M9.  1.  rt 

47:    5.... 43.  6 

252.  1.  d 

7. ...311. 4 

8....105.  a,  309.  2 

7.... 286.  2.  rt 

5.... 289.     2.     0, 

9.... 42.  308.  a 

10....  19.  2.6,217. 

10....  112. 5. c,  288. 

309.  1.  6 

10....1.^9.  1 

l.c 

l.a 

10.... 264.  2  (2)  c 

12.... 272.  c 

13.... 297.  a 

48:    6...  275.2.0 

63:    4....105.  c 

l?....!.^.  3,  201.  6 

15,  16.... 280.  2 

15.... 2,52.  2.  a 

6.... 235 

2-3...  261).   1.  6,/, 

19.... 102.  3 

49:     6.... 302.  a 

6,  7.... 306.  6 

269.  2.  0,  286.  3 

25.... 127. 2 

7.   ..282.0 

8.... 61.6.0,306.0 

25.... 299 

36:     6....2:32.  5.  rt 

8. ...281. 1.6 

64:    7.... 54.  3 

28.. ..275.  1.6 

13.... 121. 1,266.2.6 

8,  17  ...245.  2.  a 

8....2r6.  c 

29....245.1.a,278.1 

37:       ....6 

9. ...55.  1 

65:    5....  257. 2.  a,  258. 

30..  .276.   a,  278. 

2....257.  2.  a 

10... .275.  2.  c 

2.  rt,  303.  6 

4.  6,282.  rt,  302.6 

3,  8.... 275.  l.c 

13,21..   .302.  a 

7  ...112.5.0,294.0 

32.... 278. 3 

4....275.  2.  6 

15....2fi9.2.rf,276.c 

10....104.  ^,105. 6 

23:     ],4....267.  l.rt 

5,  6..  ..277.  a 

19  ...246.  2.6 

66:    4...  289.  5.  c 

2-6.... 267.  1.  a 

7.... 283.  a 

19,  20.... 294.  0 

6.... 269.  2.  6 

6....149.  2,279.  (? 

9. ...91. 6 

20  ...299.  c 

12. ...114 

24:     2....2«9.  1 

14.... 275.  l.a(2) 

50:     3....245..3.6,272.c 

13....286.  l.rt(3) 

3.... 267.  \.e 

15.... 24.  6 

6...  246.2.rt.276.c 

16....275.  2.  c 

8....298.  .3.  a 

•  16.... 248.  6.  6 

7....275.  2.  c 

18  ...267.1. (/.306.6 

10...  298  3.  rt 

20.... 269.  2.  a 

10.... 253.  l.a 

68:     3.... 91.  6,  131.2, 

14. ...131. 3 

23....  163.4. 287.5.6 

12....267.1.rf,307.a 

140.4 

25:       ....6.  7.  2.  rt 

28.... 206.  1.  g 
29.... 275.  1.6 

16.... 282.  a 

5.. ..111. 3.  a 

2.. ..271. 6 

17.... 309.  1 

8. ...119.3 

4....287.  1 

31....289.  4.  a 

18....306.  6,  311.  4 

15...  245.3.6,276.(7 

5,16,18  ... 275.1. c 

33.... 106. a 

21....112.  3.27.^.  1. 

18. ...21.  1 

9....272.  rt 

38:    2.... 299 

6,  2.  a,  281.  1.  c 

21.... 2.32.  3.  rt 

11....312.  2.a 

3.. ..131.  1 

23....  10.5.  6 

22.... 256. 3.  6,287. 

12.... 259.    6,  298. 

8.... 261.  3.  6 

51:    4....2S.3.  a 

2.  rt 

3.  rt,  302.  rt 

9....266.  2.  rt 

6.... 267.  1 

28  ...2.52.  1.6 

20  ...273 

11. ...92.  rt 

7... .121.  2 

29.... 303.  a 

27....71,rt(2) 

12.... 257.  9.  rt 

10  ...302.  rt 

69:     4.... 252. 1.*',  309. 

26:     2....98.  l.rt 

16.... 266.  2.6 

11-13.... 273 

2.  o 

4....  112. 3, 266.  1. 

17.... 267.  1./ 

18..   .275.2.6,299.a 

5.... 252.  1./,  267. 

rt,  209.  1 

20.... 2.56.  3.  a 

.52:    9.... 276.  6 

l.e 

6  ...275.  2.  <• 

21.... 19.  2.  6 

53:    6.... 219. 1.6.286. 

6.... 286.  2.  a 

27:    2..   .266.1.  a,  27.-). 

39:    2.... 97.  1 

\.d 

6,  20.... 246.  1.  a 

l.«(4) 

5.... 75.  1 

54:     9....269.  2.  a 

10.... 22.  a.  104.  i, 

9....266.1.a,272.c 

8  . .  268.  a 

55:    6.... 290.  2 

218.  2.  a 

10.... 112.  3 

11.... 257.  9.  rt 

10....92.  c 

11.... 245.  3.  6 

13  ...4.  rt 

12.... 276.  rt 

13....275.2.6.299.a 

11,  12.... 276. e 

14....272.  rt 

14.... 35.  2,177.4 

16....  166.  2,285.  2 

13,  22.... 276. 7 

28:     3. ...311. 4 

40:    5.... 257.  9.6 

18....2:i5,   276.    c. 

14  ... 257.6. rt,297.a 

7....  151.2,275.2.0 

13.... 266.  2.  6 

288.  2.  a 

15. ...271.  6 

9... 275.  l.c 

18....71.rt.  (2) 

19-22....19.  2. 6 

19...  98.1.0,105.0 

29:     9. ...111.1 

41:    3....272.  r 

20....309.  1.  a 

21.... 276.  h 

10.... 276.  a 

5.... 98.  1,  119.  3. 

22.... 141.  1 

24. ...119.  1 

30:     4....13.fl 

166.  .5,  246.  1.  rt 

2:3.... 299.  c 

26  ...278.4 

7....299.  <• 

11....27,5.  2.  c 

50:     4.... 302. a 

27.... 300. a 

8.... 220.  6.  6 

13.... 297.  a 

4,  10...  258.2.  rt 

32...  245.3.6.264. 

13 ... .  10.->.  6 

42:   2...  267.  -i.  a 

5,11.12....296.3.a 

2(2)  a 

31:     2,  18.... 271.  6 

5.... 271.  a. 311. 4 

5,  12.... 309.  2 

33....  269.  2.  6.278. 

3.... 273 

6,12.     .296.  3.  rt 

13....2.57.  9.  rt 

a,30S.  a.  312.2.0 

5.... 303.  a 

7.... 249.  1.0 

57:     2....  174.1,289.6.0 

34... 266.  3.  0 

INDEX   II. 


409 


78 


36.... §275.  i.b 
6.... 71.  a  (3) 
1...  271.6 
6....  1.^9.  1 
7....2!56.  3.  a 
12.... 160.  2 
21        272 
23;;i'88(f.  pi.) 
....250. a 
2-7.... 275.  I.b 
5....296.  2.  a 
8. ...306.  b 
8,  15,  17.... 272.  a 
10.... 258.  3.  b 
15.... 105.  6 
17....  161.  3,250 
18.... 256.  3.  a 
19.... 284.  e 
20.... 93.  a 
2       174.1,289.4. a 
3.... 270.  1.  b 
10....257.  6.  c 
11.... 298.  l.a 
14  ...257.9. «,  276. 

e,  278.  4.  a 
15.... 306 
16....99.2.  6,  308.rt 
16,  17.... 276.  g' 
17. ...267.  i.b 
22.... 269.  2.  b 
27.... 86.  &(2m.) 
1....298.  l.a 
2.... 287. 3.  «,  288. 

2.  a,  303.  a 
4.... 219.  2.  a 
5....19.2.6,  244.  a 
7.... 286.  3 
8.... 105.  a 
10. ...119.  1 
11. ...311. 2 
14.... 256.  2.  a 

15 257.  6.  c 

17.... 11.  1.  b 
19.... 198. 6 
23. ...35.  2 
:     6.... 299 

11.... 163. 4 
:     3....205.  5.  c 
4  ...22.  a,  126.  2, 

218.  2.  a 
6.... 96.  a 
7  ...311.4 
8.... 297.  «,  302. a 
:     2.... 112.  3,  125.  1 
4....  174.  3,275.1.6 
7.... 276.  C 
10.... 139.  2 
17.... 269.  2.  b 
18.... 92.  b 
30. ...24.6 
6....267.1./",302.a 
9....2.58.  3.  c 
15,  26,  45.... 276.  6 
15, 29,45....  267.5.ffi 
15,  29,  72.... 276.  9- 
19.... 276./ 
20.... 276.  e 
26.... 276.  (f 
30,  31.... 309.  3.  a 
34.... 275.  l.a  (4), 

306.  6 
40.... 267.  4.  « 
40,  41.... 276.  6 
44.... 269.  2.  6 
49. ...2.57.  6.  c 
54....258.2.a,303.rt 
63.... 93.  6 
65  ...142.  5 
3.... 61.  6.  a 
5,8,  15,  20.... 256. 
3.  a 


81: 


83; 


10 

14... 
15... 
16. 


91: 


92: 


6.... §112.  3,286. 

1.  a  (4) 
9.... 267.  5.  a 
9-14 ....  269.  2.  d 
11. ...93.  a 
..375.  2.  a 
..4.  a,  182.  a 
..253.3.  c 
.  .4.  «,  139.  2 
.  .272.  a,  302.  a 

159.  3 

6....258.2.a,302.a 
7,8,  13.... 276.  g 
9.... 307.  b 
11....119.1,249.2.a 
14.... 307.  a 
15-17.... 294 
16....  272.0,275.1. 6 
12.... 297.  c 
2.... 202.  e 
4.... 24.  a 
7... 258.  1.  a 
9.... 256.  3.  a 
14.... 275.  2.  c 
2....19.2.a,126. 1 
9.... 286.  2.  a 
3.... 284.  e 
2....258.2.a,302.a 
5,  6.... 257.  9.  6 
266.  1.  a 
.269.  1 
.267.  2.  a 

271.  a 

17.... 24.  6,  92.  a 
2....218.  2.  o 
8. ...111.  3.  6 
10.... 131.  4 
40.... 286.  3 
44.... 104.  i 
45.... 86.  6  (2  m.) 
48.... 298.  3.  a 
49.  ..298.  3.  a 
51.... 252.  l.a 
51,  52.... 285.  3.  a 
53.... 24.6,  318.2. a 
1.... 266.  l.a 
2...  267.  1.  h 
3.... 276.  (/ 
. .  269.  2.  6 
...22.  a 
. .  275.  2.  c 
...302.  a 
...272.  a 
5,  6.... 302.  a 
6. ...140.  1 
7....267.1.  e 
12.... 105.  c 
13,  14.... 294. a 
15...  311.  4 
2  ...344.  6,379.  a 
6.... 266.  2.  6 
7....384.  C 
8.... 282.  a 
10.... 296.  3.  a 
.61.  6.  a 
.  126.  3 
.296.3.  a 
.176.1 
.94.  a 
126.  1 


102: 


103 


104: 


5. 
10. 
14. 
15. 
17. 


16.. 
1  . 
3.. 
5.. 
1. 
9... 


96: 


9,  10.... 298. 1.  a 
17. ...61. 6.  a 
19. ...142.  6 
20....93.n,111.2.< 

1,2,  6.... 271.  a 

7.... 307.  6 

10 267.    4.    a. 

276.6 
11.... 805. a 
11.... 272.  a 

1 . . .  273.  a 


105: 


106: 


107: 


109: 


110 


116 


4....§276.  e 
3,  3...  371.  6 
4.... 267.  1.  e 
5.... 92.  6,93.  a 
3.   ..258.2.  a 
5.  ...14.  a 
7.... 266. 2.  6 
8-10.... 266.2.  a 
14.... 139. 2 
19.... 278.  3 
25.... 296.  2.  a 
28.... 346.  2.  6 
3,  4.... 219.  3.  c 
3-5.... 3.52.  1.  d 
4....104.  c.  349. 

2.6 
5.... 289.  3.  a 
7.... 267.  5 
9....299.  6- 
11, 13.,.. 266.3.  a 
13....119.1,2li6.3 

16 369.   2.6. 

311.4 
20.... 279.  c(2) 
5-9.    ..269.3.6 
6.... 287.  3.  a 
8....258.2.a,303 

a,  303 
15.... 367.  3. a 
17. ...16. 3.6 
18.... 253.  l.c 
20,22,28  ...308.6 
25....252.1.6,2.a 
26....  119.  1,267. 

4.  6,  303.  a 
28.... 88  (pi.) 
29.... 111.   2.    6, 

153.  2 
31.... 272.  a 
32  ...275.   2.    6, 
276.  c,  282.  a 
22.... 2.32.  3.  a 
28.... 35.1. 0,99.2 
44.... 269.  2.6 
45.... 267.  1./ 
12,  13....269.2.d 

17,  19.... 276.  6 

18,  19....  276.5.0 
35.... 114 
47.... 126.  1 

5....269.  2.  6 
6,  13,14...  269. 
2.6 

10.... 258.  3.6 

20-22.... 275. 1.6 

27.... 126.  1 
58-30....  276.  c 

29,  33....  276.  g- 
4...  263.  2.  a 
8.... 2.52.  1./ 

13.... 175.  3 

17.... 276.  e 

19.... 302.  a 

23. ...112.  5.  C 
2.... 273.  a 
3.... 262.  2.  a 

4.  ...61.  6.  a 

5,  6.... 266.  4.  a 
5-7.... 269.  2.  d 

....6 

:       ...6 

:      5,  6.... 295.  a 

5-9.... 61.  6.  a 
6 . .     322 
:      8....61.  6.  o 
:      7....312.  3.  o 

14.... 397.  d 
:      4.... 274.  6 
6.... 141. 2,151.2 

10.  11.... 246. l.a 

12.... 219.  2.  c 


116-.    14.... §2.57.  9.  a 
15.... 61.  6.  a 
16.... 366.    1.  /, 
274.  6,  286.2.a 
19.... 219.  1.6 
118:      8,  9.... 279. 6 
10.... 105.  a 
11.... 139.  1 
13,  18.... 281.   1. 

a(l) 
14.... 2.58.  3.  c 
18....92.rf,  104.a 
23. ...168.1 
25.... 274.  6 
119:         ....6 

2.... 250.  6 
2,  3.... 269.  l.a 
9.... 267.  l.e 
18,... 98.  2 
22....  1.39.  2 
43. ...60.  4.  a 
46. ...271.  6 
47.... 142.  6 
55...   276. A 
75  ...262.2.  a 
76.... 272.  a 
80,  172.... 273. a 
86.... 114 
90.... 276.  a 
101. ...167.  2 
103.... 289.  5.  a 
117.... 174.  3 
129... 104.  i 
133.... 97. 2 
137.... 389.1. a,6.a 
139.... 34.  6 
146....275.  3.  C 
161-168.... 3.  l.a 
171 ... . 126.  a 
120:    2....256.  3.  a 
7.... 262.  2.  a 
122-124.... 74.  a 
122:    2....278.  4.  a 
4.... 288.  2.  e 

123-  1...  61.  6.0,248. 
6.  d 

4.... 249.  3.  6 

124-  4....61.6.  O 
125:     3....61.  6.  a 

5  ...  79.  3.  a 
136:     2.... 267.     5.    a, 
283.  O 
6.... 281.  l.a(l) 
127:     1....306.  6 

2.    ..198.  d,  257. 

9.  6,  283.  a 
3...  295.  a 
129:       ....74.  a 

1-3     ..266.  l.a 
3.... 245.  2.  a 
8  . .  266.  2.  a 
1.30:     6  ...296.  3.  a 
131:    2. ...305.  a 
132:     1....176.  6 
6.... 127.  2 
12     ..65.  0,  219. 
2.    o,   303.  o, 
306.O 
133-137.... 74.  o 
133-     1.... 34.  o,  244.  6 
134:    2.... 219.    3.     6, 

287   2 
135:     7.... 94.  ^,  167.  2 
15.... 262.  2 
17.... 261.  :j.  6 
137:     4....267.  l.rf 

6....104. e 
138:     6.... 148.  2 
139:     1....  104.^,148.5 
2.... 160.  1 
5... 219.  1.6 


410 

INDEX   II. 

139:    8.... §53.  3.  6.88 

6;     8  ..  §49 

17:    5... 

.§269.  2.  rt 

25:  ir....|127.  a 

(lc.).2t;7.  l.f/, 

8.... 266.  3.0,269. 

10.. 

.131.  1 

19  ...90 

288.  2.  6,  307. 

2.  a 

12... 

2«0.  3.  6 

20.... 286.  2.6 

a,  308.  « 

10.... 257.  2.  a 

14.. 

.126.  1,  131.3 

24.... 279.  0 

15  ..  »K).f 

ll....ll.l.a 

16   . 

.2(il.3.  6,309. 

27.... 279.  0 

18....3<W.  a 

21.... 104.  7 

1. 

a 

26:     1   .2,52.  1./ 

19.... KJ.  6.307.6 

24 . . .   257.  6.  c 

26.. 

.244,244.6 

7. ...141.  1,  174.1 

30.... 57.  2  (3i  u. 

27....  118. 4 

27... 

.285.  3.  a 

13,  15....266.8.  a 

86.  6    (3     pl.i, 

27,  2-1.... 245.  2.  rt. 

18:     5.. 

.244.6,  279.  of 

14. ...311.  4 

IM.  3 

309.  1 

22.. 

.308.  rt 

14,  20.... 267.  3.  a 

22...  285.  3.  a 

r:     7.... 276.  5- 

24... 

.279.  c(4) 

17.... 302. a 

140:    9....21t9.  a 

13. ...141.  1 

19:     6... 

.248.  6.  e 

18... 142.  6 

10.... 174.  3 

25     .  272.  c 

7 ... 

.19.2.6,  217. 

21... 142.  6 

11....30!t.  2 

8:    3....97.  1.  a 

1. 

c 

27:    2....372.  c 

13....8ti.  6(1  c.) 

9.... 278.  1 

13. 

.218.  1.  d 

9. ...390.2 

141:     8....24.6,98.  l.rt 

11. ...264.  1 

19... 

.217.1.C,  305.6 

10....  112.3,  217.1.C 

4.... 286.  1.  a  (4> 

13.... 168. 2 

24.. 

57.  1 

12..   .266.  3.  rt 

5  ...111.1.166.2, 

15. ...88 

25... 

.94.d,245.2.rf 

15.   ..83.  c(2) 

273.  c.  312.  2.  6 

17.... 5:5.  2.  a.  111. 

20:     9.. 

.266.2.6,267. 

17.. ..140.  1 

6  ..  277.6 

2.6 

1. 

e 

24....296.2.o,'i98. 

8.... 60.  4.  a 

25.... 267.  1.  A 

13.. 

.275.  2.  d 

2.  6,  299.  c 

142:    4....30;i.  a 

27,29  ...141.  3 

14.. 

.309.  2.  o 

25...  34.6,218.2.0 

143:     3.... 167.  2 

32.... 302.  6 

16.. 

.111.3.  0 

28:     1....  21.6.  3.0. 269. 

6.... 272.    2.    b. 

9:     4....3<>4.6,312.2.rt 

25.. 

.279.  c(4) 

1.  0,  289.  5.  0 

286.  2.  b 

5...  275.  l.C 

26.. 

.276.  c 

6.18.    ..205.3 

8.... 3' 3.  a 

6....  275. 2.  <^.  286. 

21:     7.. 

.269.  2.  a 

10.... 297.  6 

144:       .   .  74.  a 

1.  a  (4) 

8.. 

.56.2 

21....94.  6,  244.  6 

2. ...201.  6 

9.... 275.  2.  c 

9.. 

.279.  a 

29:     6....140.  1 

3....276.  c 

11.... 245.  2.  c 

9,  19.... 244.  6 

9.... 311.  4.  a 

6.... 285.  3.  a 

12. ...306.6 

13.. 

.257.  9.  a 

9,13...  266.  3.  a 

12....288.  2.  « 

16....3)2.  2.  « 

15  . 

279.  a 

30:     3... 299 

145:       ...6 

10:     1  ff....267.  3.  a 

16.. 

.279.  6 

4....65.6,266.1.a 

2....275.  1.  6 

3. ...111.  1 

22.. 

.63.  l.rt,  266. 

6  ...66.    1  (2)    0, 

7...  257.  2.  a 

4. ...11.  l.a,  158. 

3 

a,  276.  a 

153.3 

8. ...217.  l.C 

3,  28S.  2.  e 

23.. 

.278.  1 

8. ...11.  l.o 

10  ...104.6 

11.... 252.  1 

22:     3.. 

.275.2.0 

9.... 65.  a 

146:     4....26'J.    2.     a, 

22,24   ...297.6 

11.. 

.217.  1.  c 

17... 14.  0,  24.  b. 

308.  6 

31.... 285.  1.  « 

12.. 

.266.3.0,276.0 

57.  2  (3)  rt 

147:     1....  02.  f/,  244.  6 

11:    2....276.  « 

15... 

262.  1.  a 

25....202.  «' 

10...  248.6 

7....CJ0.  3.c,269. 

17.. 

.267.  1.  e 

31. ...230.  l.rt 

148:    9,  10...  250.  a 

2.  a 

19.. 

297.0 

31:     1.... 256. 1.0,  287. 

IS 2.'50.  a 

14.... 350.  c 

21.. 

.256.    2,    256. 

2.  rt 

149:     5....112.  5.  c 

21...  23.  l.a 

2. 

o 

3....201.  o 

150:     1,2,5,6... 311. l.rt 

25....  1.51.  5 

24.. 

.60.  4.  0 

10-31.... 6 

6.... 248.  6.  e 

12:     6.... 279.  a 

27.. 

.245.  2.  6 

12.... 104.  i 

13.... 276.  d 

23.. 

.270.  1.  rt 

14.... 300.  6 

29.. 

.308.  a 

PROVERBS. 

19.... 271.  a 

23:     1.. 

.160.3 

ECCLESIASTES. 

25.... 199.  6 

12.. 

.245.  2 

l:     2-6....§311.  1.  rt 

13:     1,8....266.  3.  « 

15.. 

.297.  rt 

1:     2... §257.  2.0 

3.... 279.  6 

2.... 300.  6 

17.. 

.295.  a 

4....278.1,2%.2.o 

5....272.  rt 

4.... 297.  c 

22.. 

.303.  rt 

7.... 302.  « 

10  ...111.2.6,179.3 

13.... 287.  5.  b 

24.. 

.  160.  2,  3 

8....245.  2.  o 

12....2'*7.  4.  « 

19.... 279.  a 

27.. 

.309.  l.C 

9....  248.  6.  «,  265. 

15.... 273.  c 

23.... 158.  3 

35.. 

.266.1.  rt,283 

3.  a  (3K  304.  6 

19...  285.  .3.0 

21  ...2S7.  2.  a 

24:    2  . 

.92.  « 

11.... 297.  6 

20.... 97.  1.  a 

14:     1....289.  2.  a 

7. . 

.158.3 

13....2.57.  6.  c 

22.... 60.  3.  c,  111. 

3.... 10.5.  d 

9.. 

.258.  l.rt 

15.... 163. 4 

2.   <-,    266.  2.  6, 

6,  19....266.  3.  a 

10. 

.308.  a 

16. ...346. 1.0,275. 

269.  1.  a 

10  ...2:5.  1,  60.   4. 

11.. 

.307.  6 

1.  o(2) 

2S       . 105. r 

fl,  119.  1 

14.. 

.97.1.6,149.3 

17.    ..3.  l.rt 

2:     Iff..   .245.2 

13....297.  c 

16.. 

.235.  d 

18.... 90 

3....:W5.  6 

14....:J02.  6 

17.. 

.91.  6,  232.  5. 

2:     1,  llfl....246.1.a 

11..    .1(U.  6 

18  ...269.  1.  a 

a 

272.  c 

5. ...309.  1.0 

3:     3....12.-).  1 

20. . .  .287.  5.  6 

21.. 

.235 

6  ...285.  1.  rt 

9,  10  ...27.5.2.6 

31 . . .  2<;9.  2.  a 

23.. 

.94.6 

7.... 356.2.0, 284.« 

10. ...285.  1 

34  . .  267.  3 

85.. 

.245.  3.  0 

8.... 296.  3.  6 

11....257.  9.  fit 

15:     1   ..  2J.  1.  a,  60. 

27.. 

..312.  2.  6 

13  .57.    2  (3)   rt, 

12...  43.6.266.2.6 

4.  a 

31.. 

.93.  rt,  209.  2. 

2:52.  3.  6,  248.  6 

14....264.  2(2)« 

9.  ...112.  5.  c 

(/ 

285.  1 

14.... 297.  6 

17. ...261.1 

16  ...309.  l.a 

82... 

.267.  1.  6 

15...   2&1.   2  (2)0, 

25        2<'2.  c 

30.... 257.  2.  rt 
25....272.rt,275.1.6 

25:-89-  . 

. ..  .311   4 

297  0 

4:     1....248.  6.  d 

25:    3. . . 

.2.35 

19...  2.31.4.298.2.0 

4....275.  2.  r/ 

16:     3....275.  2.  6 

3,  20,  25.... 311.  4 

22.... 74,  179.  1 

5,  13,  27.... 273.  <■ 

4....349.  2.  rt 

6... 

.  126.  2 

3:     2ff... .279.6 

6.. ..118.3 

12-15.... 2.50.  r 

7... 

.60.  3.  6  (1), 

4. ...279.  6 

6,8,  in.... 275.2.  6 

16..   .278.1,298.3.0 

244.  6 

13.... 277.  a 

13.... 24.  6,  106.6 

33.... 284. 6 

9.. 

.176.  4 

14  ...279.     c     (4), 

16.... 88 

17:     1...  309.  1.  a 

11.. 

.10.0 

301.  c 

25....  1.51.  1 

4.... 53.  3.  rt,  111. 

13... 

.235 

15.... 279.    c     (4), 

6:  22....  105.  c,  297.  c 

2.  c  140.  5 

16... 

.308.0 

304.6 

8:  ir....§248.  6.6 
18....  74,  139.2 
4:     1....296.  3.  « 
1.  7....  280.  3.  « 
2... 280.  3.6 
6...  256.2.  rt 
7.... 283.  a 
8.... 235 
9.... 253.  1.6,254. 

4,  264.  1 
10.... 252.  l.e 
12....  105.  a 
14.....53.  2.  a,  111. 

2.  c 
15.... 267.  1.6 
17.... 279.  a,  6 
5:     1....2.'52.  1./ 
5....  113.  2 
7.... 38.  l.a,203.2 
8. ...112.  5.C 
9.... 301.  a 
12.... 287.  5.  6 

14,  15.... 269.  1 
6.     4....269.  1 

5  . .  246.  2.  6 
6.... 306.  6,307.  a 
12.... 258.  3 
7:    1...  215.  2.  a,  6 
4. ...311. 4 
5.... 244.  6 
7.... 267. 3.  a,  284. 

6,  289.  6.  a 
12,  19.... 248.  6.  rt 
16.... 82.  5.  a 
22.... 71.  a  (2) 
24....296.  3,  300.  a 
25.... 287.  4,  311.3 
2b.... 91.  6,  167.  2 
8:     1....  179.  3, 232.  5. 
a,  267.  3.  a 
2. ...311.  2 
9.... 280.  3 
11.... 289.  6.  rt 
12....  167.  2 
17.... 229.  2.  rt 
9:     1....  139. 2,  218.1. 
a,  279.  c  (4) 
4....284.  rf,  304.  6 
5....248.  6.  6 
11.... 280.  3.  rt 
12.... 59.  rt,  93.  « 
14.... 252.  1./ 
18  ...167.2 
10:     5.... 166. 3 
8.... 267.  3.rt 
10....121.1,245.2.rt 
12.... 262.  2.  rt 

15,  ..289.6.«,300.rt 
16....267.  4.  6 

16,  17....248.  6.  rf 
17.... 219.  2.  c,  300 

11:     1....245.  2 

2.... 267.  1.  e 

3.... 179.  1 

6.... 75.  2 

9.... 311.  4 
12:     1....203.  2 

4. ...87 

5  ...11.  1.  rt.  122. 
2,  140.  5,  259.  6 

6  ...140.1,2,275. 
1.  6 

11....19.  2.C,  65.rt, 

287.  5.  6 
13. ...256.  2.  6 


CANTICLES. 

1:     4.... §275.1.6,  287. 
1.  rt 


INDEX   II. 

411 

1: 

6... 

.§105.e,141.1. 

1:  24.... §248.5,  271. rt 

6:    3,5,13.... §262.1.a 

209.  1-.  «,  297.  c 

24-26.... 275.  1 

5.. 

.257.10,266.1. 

7. . 

.74,211.  1.  rt 

28.... 257.  9.  6 

6 

4 

8.. 

.264.  2  (2) 

29.... 245.  2.  6,294 

6.. 

.309.  1.  rt 

10.. 

.176.  1 

29,  30.... 267.  1.  a 

7. . 

.265.  2.  rt,269. 

15.. 

.264.2(2)6 

30.... 257.  10 

i 

275.  2.  rt 

2- 

3  . 

.283 

31.... 60.  3.  6(2) 

8.. 

.267.  l.rt,287. 

5.. 

.257.  7 

3:     2....277.6,278.4.rt 

4. 

a,  2S9.  3.  a 

7.. 

,296.3.«,305.a 

3. ..267.  1.  a 

9.. 

.177. 4,281. 2.a 

10.. 

.220.  2.  6 

4....209.1.rt,277.rt 

10.. 

.235.(^,245.2. 

15.. 

.60.   3.   6  (2), 

6.... 266.  1.6 

c, 

273 

119.4,262.2.  rt 

6,  8.... 267.  4.  6 

11.. 

.266.  1.  dbis. 

3 

5.. 

.296.  3.  rt 

6-9.... 276.  a 

285.3 

7.. 

.297.  c 

7,  8.... 287.  5.  rt 

12  . 

.119.  1 

8.. 

.300.  6 

9.... 273.  6,276.  e 

13.. 

.92.^/,  257.6.rt 

11.. 

.149.3,166.  3 

11.... 266.     4.      rt, 

7:     2.. 

.1.59.  1 

4 

1.. 

.257.  4 

277.  6 

4.. 

.91.  6 

2.. 

.219.  1.  6 

11,  17.... 296.  3.  rt 

7. . 

.266.  2.  rt 

4.. 

.254.  2.  rt,  d 

20.... 43.  6,209.  1. 

8.. 

.279.6(4) 

5.. 

.218.  1.  c 

rt,  259,  267.  1.  rt 

8,18,20....267.1.a 

9.. 

104.  k 

22....262.1.a,278.1 

9.. 

.306.  6 

5: 

2.. 

.23.  1,  57.  2(3) 

3:     1....362.1.  f«,278. 

11.. 

.119.    3,    126. 

a 

60.  4.  rt,  287. 

2,  296.  3.  6 

1, 

280.  2.  rt 

4. 

rt 

3.... 257.  10 

13.. 

.264.  2(2)6 

3.. 

.105.   d,    265. 

4....267. 1.  rt 

14.. 

.168.  1,  246.  S 

3. 

rt(3) 

7.... 278.  4.  rt 

15.. 

.267.  l.rt, 279. 

4-7 

...266.  l.rt 

8... 94.  6 

6, 

6(2) 

5.. 

.246.  l.rt 

8,9, 12.... 266.  3.rt 

17.. 

.267. 1.  a 

9.. 

.104.  k 

13.... 262.  l.rt 

19.. 

.158.4 

12.. 

57.  2  (.3)  a 

14.... 266.  1.6,311. 

23.. 

.267. 1.  c 

6 

6.. 

.219.  1.6 

4.  6 

24.. 

.345.2.6,262. 

8  . 

.309.1.6 

15...  24.  rt,  75.  1, 

2 

rt 

9  . 

.105.6,289.6.  rt 

267.  2.  rt 

25.. 

.245.2.<?,267. 

11.. 

.141.1 

16....  174.  5,211.3. 

4 

6,  288.  2.  e 

7 

2 

.266.  2.  6 

rt,  267.  4.  6,281. 

8:    2.. 

.22.  6 

S.'. 

.220.6.6,259. 

2.  rt 

4.. 

.245.2.6 

6 

a 

17...  3.  1.  rt 

6.. 

.280.3.  rt 

4  . 

.218.  l.c 

18.... 267.  1.  a 

8.. 

284.6 

8.. 

.212.  e 

24.... 53.  3.  rt 

9.. 

.275.  3.6?,  396. 

9.. 

.274. rt 

26.... 28.3.  rt 

3 

rt 

10.. 

.257.  6.  c 

4:     3....248.  6.  6 

10.. 

.375.2.6,385. 

13  . 

.141.  1 

3,4,. 306.  6 

3. 

rt 

8: 

2.. 

.201.  6 

4.... 266.  1,266.1. 

11.. 

.104.  rt,  275.1. 

5.. 

.  104.  i 

d,  306.  « 

rt 

(4) 

6.. 

22.  rt,218.2.rt 

5:     1....257.  6.  6 

12.. 

.267.1.6,300.6 

7 

.245.2.rt,307.rt 

1,5. .274 

13... 

.267.1.6,297.6 

8!. 

.245.  3.  rt 

1,6.. .285.  3.  a 

17.. 

.100.  3.  a  (1) 

11.. 

.267.  1.  e 

4,  5... 279.  6(4) 

19.. 

.248.  6.  6,267. 

13.. 

.248.  6.  d 

4,  24.... 266.1.  6 

1. 

6 

5....378.  3,  280.  1 

23.. 

.61.6.  rt 

6.... 279.    6,    285, 

9:     1... 

.258.  l.a 

ISAIAH. 

285.  1 

1-5. 

.266.  4.  rt 

7.... 257.     6.     a, 

2.   . 

.245.2.6,258. 

1: 

1... 

§266.  l.rt, 311. 

262.1. rt,296.  3.6 

1. 

a 

1. 

a,  2.  a 

8....267.4.  6,  282. 

3.. 

.24.  6,220.5.a 

2.. 

.266.2.  rt,  275. 

a,  294. a 

4  . 

.  143.  1 

1. 

rt(2),  c 

9.... 305.  a 

5,  6 

...276.  rt 

2,4 

...266. 1.  6 

10....22.  rt,218.2.rt 

6.. 

.4.  rt 

3... 

.266.  3 

11   ...258.1.  rt,  309. 

7.. 

.275.  1.  rt  (2) 

5.. 

.248.6.6,263. 

1.  6 

7-ir 

....276.  a 

a 

309.  1.  6 

12.... 262. 2.  a, 269. 

11, le 

,20..296.3.  rt 

6.. 

.158.2,250.  6 

l.rt,  311.  l.rt 

12... 

.249.  2.  6 

9... 

.266.  l,307.rt 

13.... 266.  4.  rt 

13.. 

. 250. 6 

11... 

.266.  2.    rt,   6 

14.... 275.  1.  rt   (4) 

17... 

.45.2 

b 

s,  285.  1 

14-16.... 276. a 

lo:   1... 

.209.  2.a,350. 

12... 

.91.  6,  266.  1. 

17.... 277.  6 

c, 

302.  a 

rt 

279.  rt 

19.... 97.  1,97.  l.rt. 

2... 

.282 

13.. 

.262. 1.  a,267. 

267.  1.6,/,  275.2 

4... 

.  296.  3.  rt 

1. 

e.  285.  3.  a 

20.... 10.  n 

5... 

.294.  a 

14... 

.266.  2.  6  bis 

23.   ..289.  2.  a 

7. . . 

.252.1./,.305.6 

15... 

.104.^,119.1, 

24.... 259.  rt 

9.'.'. 

.22.  6,  298.   2 

26 

7.  1.  rt,  282.  rt 

28.... 24.  6.262.  1. 

10.   . 

.264.  2(2)6,  e 

16... 

.54.   4.  rt,  82. 

rt,  266.  2.  a 

12  .. 

.258.  3 

5. 

rt 

29.... 264.  2(2)6 

13... 

.11.  1.  6,  57.2 

17... 

.187.2.6,279.6 

30.... 266. 2. 6,  269. 

(3>  6^92.6,176. 1, 

18... 

.248.6./,307.6 

2.  rt 

232.  3.  6 

20... 

287.5.rt,306.  6 

6:     1.... 2.57.  6.  rt 

14... 

.248.  6./ 

21... 

.33.  1,  61.  6.rt 

2.... 205.  5,  rt 

15... 

.299.  6 

22 

2,   267.    4.    «, 

2,  4.. 267.  1.6 

16... 

.148.  4 

286.  l.c(3) 

3... 275.  l.rt  (4), 

17  .. 

.220.  5.  6 

23... 

.267.  4.  6          1 

296.  3.  6 

22... 

.30.5.  6,307.  ft 

412 


INDEX   IL 


10 


:  27. ...§34.6 

528-32  ..2fi9.  2.  r, 
311.  4.  r 

30....2T3.ff,28.5.4.a 

34. ...IH.  1. a,  45.2 

:     2 ...   100.  2.  «  (2), 

1.58.  4,  258.  3.  b 

8.    ..142.  G 

9....26a.2.  a,  286. 
2.  ff 

10.... 262.  2.  a 

12....2.->r.  2 

]3....2.'J7.  9.  b 

14....2.J0.  6 

15.... 60.  3.  a 

2.... 258.  3. c 
,     3.... 259. 6 

6....27;i.a 

8.... 65.  6 

9  ...311.3 
10.... 269.  2.  d 
16.... 91.  c 
18....92.  e 
19.... 284.  (I 
20....53.3.//.111.2.C 

6....  114.  257.  6.  c, 
2S7.  2.  a 

9. ...289.  6.  a 
11. ...151.  5,289.5. 

a,  6.  a 
13,14,16  ...275.1.6 
16....2.'j2.  1.  d 
19...  95.  a, 258.1. a 
21.... 299 
23.... .57.  2  (2)    a, 

94.  6,  163.  2 
24  ...305.  rt 
25.... 24.  6 
27.... 263.  6 
31. ...119.4 

5.  ...163.  2 

7.... 302.  a 

8....2>^8.  3.  a 

8....-i03 

9.... 56.  3.  a,  170. 

a,  176.  4 
10.... 8t).   6  (2m.), 

163.  4 
12....2(;6.1.(/,277.6 

1 . . .  279.  f (4) 

6.... 255.  4.0,297. 
e,  311.  \.a 

8.... 2.30.  3. a 
10.... 257.  6.  a 
11...  158.  2,163.  2 
14...   13.9.  2 

2...  1.39.  3 

4....9S.  l.fl,271.rt 

5  . .  65.  n,  269.2.a 

3. ...141.  1 

4....2>9.  3.  a 

6..   .24.  C-,  94.  rt, 
182.  a 

7....266.  4.  a 

8....2,59.a,266.2.6 

9.... 201.  c 
17. ...11.  l.rt,  198. 

rf,  304 
21...  92. c 
22.... 280.  2 

1....2:9.6 

4....201.C 

2...  284..' 

2-5... 311.  4.  c 

8.... 209.  1.  a 

5. ...280.  1 

9.... 266.  4 
12...   112.1,174.1, 
179.  3,  250,  275. 
l.c,  306.  6 
H....111.  2.  c 


10. 
11. 
12.. 
13.. 
14.. 
16.. 
17.. 
18.. 
19. 


24: 


25: 


27: 


28: 


29: 


1.... J  257.6 
2....2.-.7.  7,284.  jr 
5. ...163.  2 
7...  293.  a 
..25 

..220.  7.  a 
..248.  6.  d 
.. 267.1. a,280.1 
..305.  a 
..294.  rt 
..163.2,287.2.a 
..281.  1.  c 
..45.3,111.  1 
21.... 220.  3.  rt 
24.... 257.  6.  c 
1....245. 1.  a 
1,4.... 273.  rt 
4.... 299 
9,... 2.57.  2 
11.... 54.  3,  94.   6, 

220.  6.  b 
13.... 252.  2.  rt 
17,  18.... 219.  1.6 
18. ...113.  1 
1,3,  4.... 296.  3.6 
2....  167,  2,248.6. 

/,  249.  2.  rt 
3.... 140.  3,  4 
10....248.  6.  e 
12.... 287.  .5.  a 
19....  139.2,281. 1.6 
20.  ...82.  1.  rt  (1) 
1....104.  A 
2....279.  c(4) 
6. ...211.  1.  a 
10....161.  2 
11...   119.  1 
5....  105.  rt,  6 
9...  269.1,285. 4.rt 
10....2{i9.2.«,308.rt 
11.... 257.  9.  rt 
16.... 86.  6  (3  pi.) 
19....220.2.6,235.(; 
20.... 174.  3 
1,5.... 296.  3.  rt 
3....  16.  3.6,10.5.rf 
4....  19.  2.  e,127.3 
6....272.  rt 
8.... 24.  rt 
11.... 88  (3  f.  pi.) 
12.... 224.  1.  rt 
1....256.  3.6 
1,3,  4.... 296.3.  rt 
2....2li6.  4.  rt 
3.... 88  (3  f.  pi.), 

91.  r,289.  5.  a 
4.... 245.  2.0,267. 

6.... 60.  3.  rt 
7. ...248.6 
9.... 2.58.  1.0 

10,  13.... 296. 2 
12.... 86.  6  (3  pi.) 
16....  151,  5,  294.  a 
19 ... . 296. 1 
21.... 2.52.1.  rt 
25.... 306.  a 
27.... 113.  1 
28.... 281. 1.6,299.  c 

1... .131. 2, 258, 2. 

o,  302.  rt 
2,  6.... 296.  3.  6 
7....  167.  3 
9....  142.6,281. l.c 
11.... 300. c 

11,  12  ...245.  2.  f 
12..     .301.6 

13. ...279.  d 
14.... 90,  294.  rt 
16.... 298.  2.  6 
21.... 86.  6(3  pi.) 


29:  22.... §158.1, .300.0 
30:     2....159.  1 

5....1N3.  3 

6....;}02.  rt 

8....  105.   rt,   27.5. 

2.  c 
11....79.  3.rt,233.rt 
12  ...19.  2.  rt,  119. 

3,  282.  rt 
14. ...280.  2 
18.... 106.   rt,    119. 

1,  139.  2 
19....  104.    6,    106. 

rt,  141.  3 
21. ...182.  rt,  201.1 
23.... 257.  9,287.3 
28....  162.  4 
29.... 96. 6 
31:     1....282.  o 

4...  22.  0,43,248, 

207.  4.  6 
5.... 280.  2.  o 
6....300.  (■ 
7.... 294.  rt 
8.   ..299.6 
32:     1....88,  284.  rf 
7. ...311.  3 
9.... 248.  6.  d 
11.... 289.  1.0,6.0 
13.... 256.  3.  6 
14....266.  4.  rt 
17....279.  rt 
33:     1....24.6,  87, 131. 
2,  141. .3,  261,3.0 
6.... 2.58.  2 
9.... 82.  1.  rt  (1), 

289.  6.  rt 
10....82.  5.  a,  267. 

\.e 
12....24.  c,  150.  1 
15. ...285. 2 
20....294.  rt 
21...  56.  1 
24....  2.57.  10 
34:     4....  140.2,248.6./ 
6.... 96.  rt 
11. ...21. 1,2.30.4.6 
13.... 289.  2.  a 
16.  ...104.  g 
17....104.t,289.6.rt 
35:     1.... 55.1,  88  (pi.), 
160.   2,   272.    rt, 
286.  1.  d 
2.... 258.  2 
4.... 126.  1 
7  ...289.  4.  a 
36:     2... 2.57.  6.  c 
6.... 245.  2.  rt 
8...  249.  3.6,  271 
9.... 2,53.  1.  a 
15.... 272.  c,  284.  e 
19.... 2.58.  3.  6 
37:     3....261.3.  6 
6...  287.  3.  a 
13... 258.  3.  6 
16.... 246.  1.  rt,  2 
22....250.6,257.3.rt 
2:}  ..  284.  <; 
26.... 275. 2.  r.279. 

C  (4),  287.  3.  rt 
30.... 273.    rt,   275. 

2.  f/,  280.  4 
32.... 2.57.  9.  rt 
38.... .309.  3 
38:     3.... 274.  6 
5....90,  294.  a 
10.... 246.  1.  0,271 
12,  13.... 245.  l.rt 
14....19.  2.  rt 
16.... 259.  rt 
18.... 299 


38:  20.. ..8  279.  c  (4) 

21.... 267.  1.  e 
39;     3....266.  2.  rf 
40:     1....  260.2.0,267.3 
7.... 22.  6,  .35.  1 
12.... 217.  1.0,275. 

l.rt  (4) 
12-14...   266.  1.  a 
]4....245.1.a,276.< 
17.... 264.  2(2)c 
20.... 285.  4.  a 
21....  266. 2.6,267.2 
24..   .92.  6,299 
25..   .2.50.  rt 
27.... 266.  2.  rf,276 

1.6 

30  ...148.4 

31.... 248,  6 

41:    2...  287.  -A.  a 

4.... 246.  2.6,275. 

1.  a  (2) 
7.  ...90,  267.  1./, 

284.6 
8.... 300 
9....302. c 
10  ...272.  c 
11.. ..275.  1.  6 
14.... 2.57.  3 
15.... 275.  2.6,287. 

3.  a 
17.... 24.  c 
20... 275.  1.  b 
22  ...275.  2.  c 
2:j....l74.  3 
23,  28...   97.  2.0 
24.... 264.  2.  (2)c, 
302.  6 
4a:     1....302.  c 

4...   140.1, 267.1.C 
5....126.  1,220.  7. 

rt,  311.3 
6....94.  c 

6,  21.... 275.  1.6 
11....  1.58.  1 
14.... 267.  1.6,275. 

1.6 
16.... 302.  a 
17....285.  3.  a 
18....248.  6.  d 
19.... 305.  6 
21....28;3 
22....  65.0,257.10.6 
24....279.  6,303.  o 
a5....a87.  4 
43:     5.... 105.  6 

7.... 248.  6.  e 

8.... 94.//,  309.1.0 

9. ...91.  d 
10.... 240.  2.  6 
11. ...297.  a 
12.... 275.  1.0(2) 
14....277.  6,302.  a 
17.... 269.  2.  a 
23. ...112.  3 
25.... 246.  2 
26  ...106.  6 
44:     2.... 105.  6 

7  ...112.  .5.  <; 

7,  17.... 275.  1.6 
8....  148.   3,    275. 

1.  a  (2) 
11.... 27.5.  1.  6 
13.... 19.  2.  a,  60. 

3.  6  (2),   120.1, 

269.  2.  6 
14.... 279.  r(4) 
14,16,17.... 269. 2.C 
15.... 209.  2.  o 
16...   141.  2 
17.... 13.  rt 
18....  15.8.2,269. 1.0 


INDEX  IL 

44:  21  ...§102.2 

54: 

10.... §240 

JEREMIAH. 

22.... 35.  2 

12.... 33.  6 

24,  25.... 294.  a 

17.... 399.  e 

1:    5.... §105.  d 

27.... 111.  3.  a 

55: 

2  ...299.6 

6,  7... 346.   1.   a, 

28. ...311.  2 

3....271.«,275.2.c 

263.  1.  a 

45:     1....139. 2 

4.... 2.58.  3.  c 

11.... 278.  2 

2. ...151.  1 

5.... 104.  b 

15....257.  6.  c 

3.... 252.  1.  d 

7.... 272.  a 

18....287.  3.  a 

10....88(2f.) 

9... 266.  2.  b 

2:     2.... 280. 4 

11....118.3,287.2.« 

10....267.  4.  6 

8,  11.... 302.  6 

22.... 275.  2.  (/ 

11.... 387. 3 

11.... 11.  1.  ft,  231.3 

23.... 246.  2.  b 

56: 

3....105.a,248.6.c 

12.... 111.  3.  a 

46:  10.... 250.  h 

6.... 279. 6 

16.... 387.  3.  a 

12.... 2.53.  \.c 

7....257.  9.  a 

17....278.4.rt,279.a 

47:     1....257.  3.  a,  273 

10. ...358.  l.a 

19....105.<>,257.  9. 

1,  5....§35.  2.  a, 

12.... 166.  5 

a,  379.  a 

283.  h 

57: 

3.... 385. 3 

30.... 305.  ft 

2....89(f.s.),  111. 

3... 302. 6 

21.... 219.  1.  ft,  252. 

3.  a 

5.... 140. 2 

1.  ft 

8.  ...261.  3.  a 

6.... 24.  ft,218.2.a 

24.... 105.  c 

10.... 102.  3,  104.  c 

8.... 88  (2  f.), 289. 

27....104. /t,  250.  ft 

11.... 289.  6.  a 

6.  a 

28.... 262.  2.  a 

12.... 273.  a,  301.  h 

11  ...311.3 

32.... 309.  1.  ft 

13. ...219.  2.  a 

13. ...119.  3 

34....104.  i-,  293 

14....104.  i 

15....257.  6.  6 

36...   111.  2.  ft 

48:     1....294.  a,301.  a 

17.... 380. 2 

3:     1....277.  ffi,  281. 

3.... 269.  2.  h 

20.... 279.  & 

1.  ft,  306.  ft 

7....  104.  g 

21....296.  3.  ffl 

3  . . .  279.  6 

8. ...87 

58: 

3.... 24.  ft,  131.  2, 

5...  86.    ft   (2f.), 

9,  11.... 295.  a 

318.  3. a 

131.  2,  289.  6.  a 

11.... 39.  1.  a 

5-7.... 382.  a 

6.... 174.  3 

13.... 262.  1.  a 

6,  7.... 280.  1 

6,  7.... 249.  1.  a 

14.... 302.  6 

9...  125.2,275.3.  ft 

8.... 60.   3.  ft  (2), 

18.... 266.  1./ 

10.... 218.  1.  ft 

209.  1.  a 

21.... 302.  « 

12.... 244.  a 

9.... 275.  1.  a  (3) 

22.... 296.  3.  a 

13.... 279.  ft 

11.... 209.  1.  a 

49:     3,  33.... 300.  6 

59 

3.... 63.     C     (2), 

12  ...299.  c 

6.... 264.   2  (2)  6, 

122.3 

22... 179.  3 

266.  2.  6,  275.  2. 

4,  13.... 280.  1 

25... 22.  6,271.  « 

a,  311.  3 

5.... 112. 3, 158.4, 

4:     3. ...160.  2 

7.... 35.  1.  a 

198.  d 

7...  24.6,220.5.a 

8....209. 1.  a,257. 

10  ...191,371 

11.... 259.  a 

6.  a 

12...  127.2,289.1. a 

13  ...141.  1 

15....246.  l.a,267. 

13....92.ft,f/,  176.1 

14. ...289.  l.« 

1.  e 

16.  ...104.  i 

19.... H6.  6(2f.) 

18....65.  ft,  305.a 

17.... 174. 4 

19,  21.... 271.  a 

26.... 112.  3,  287.  1 

60: 

1....159.  2,  273.  a 

39.... 248.  6.  e 

50:    2.... 212.  a, 281.1. 

4  ...88(f.  pi.) 

.      30.... 71.  a  (2) 

a  (3) 

7....105. e 

31. ...158.  1,  2 

8.... 304.  h 

9....104.C 

5:     1....275.1.C,  306.6 

51:    2... 267.  1./, 5. a 

10. . . .  105.  c 

6....  141. 1,269.1. « 

8.... 296.  2.  a 

14.... 257.  1.  a 

7.... 75.  2,  125.  1, 

12.... 246.  2,  276.  c 

61: 

1....43.C 

299.6 

14.... 126.  1 

2.... 257.  6.  a 

13... 248.  6.  c 

15.... 126.  1,276.6 

7.... 288.  3.  a 

15.... 302.  c 

20... 57.  2  (3)  a 

10.... 273.  a 

18.... 287.  3.  a 

21....2.-.8.  2 

63: 

2... 105.  d 

22....56. 1,105.6,  c 

52:    1....283 

3...   16.  1 

26.... 139.  2 

5.... 96.  ff,  6,  122. 

5....10.5.rf 

28....285.1.a,299.a 

2,  131.  6,  151.  2 

63. 

3....94.  «,  119.  1, 

29.... 311.  4 

7.... 176.  1 

267.  5.  a,  275.2.C 

31.... 266.  l.a 

11.  ...140.  4 

16.... 105.  a 

6:     2....230.  2.  a 

14.... 60.  3.  &  (2) 

18.... 295.  a 

10  . .  275.  2.  6 

53:     2....  111.  1,267.1./ 

19.... 86.  0,266.  1. 

19.... 312.  2.  a 

3....94.  e 

/,  302.  ft,  307.  ft 

20.... 252.  l.c 

3,  4.... 258.  3.  c 

64 

2. ...86.  a 

27....187.  2.  c 

4...  246.  l.«,257. 

3.... 245.  2.6 

28.... 257.  2.  a 

9,  266.  4 

5.... 132.  3 

29.... 281.  2.  a 

4-10.... 266.  4.  a 

6.... 163.  3 

7:     4....3!)6.  3.  a 

5....143.1,245.3.a 

8...  94.  f?,  274 

9.... 280.  1 

7.... 296.  3.  a 

10.... 139.  1 

10  ..  65.  a 

9.... 245.  2.  c 

65: 

1.... 302.  ft 

13  ...281.2 

10....  177.  1,267.1. 

5.... 286.  1.  d 

19.... 246.  2.  6 

c,  306.  h 

17.... 235 

23...  305.  6 

11... 252.1.  a, 286. 

18.... 273.  a 

25....296. 1.  a,312. 

2.  a 

20. . .  167. 3 

2.  6 

M:    1.... 209. 1.  a,  248. 

34.... 267.  1.  h 

27.... 104.  6 

6.  d,  294.  a 

66 

3... 35.  1.  05 

29.... 141.  1 

5.... 203.  2 

13... 143.  1 

31.... 245.  3.  6 

6....104.  c 

13.... 45.  5 

8:     1....258.3.6,312. 

9.... 185. 3 

20.... 39.  1.  a 

2.6 

413 

8:  3...  §287.5,6,289. 


4 
5 

6 

11 

13 

16 

19 

21 

22 

23 

9:  1 

2 

3 

4 

7 

9 

11 

14 

17 

19 

23 

24. 

10:  2 
3 
4 
5 


7 
10 

13 
17 
23 

25 

11:  7 

15 

17 

21 

12:  4 

5 

6 

9 

10 

13 

17 

13:  4 

5 

7 

10 


11. 
13 
13 

13 
17 
19 
31 

35 
1 
4 
5 
7, 
15 
17 

18 
33. 
15:  1. 

3. 

3 

10. 
15. 


5.  a 

...245.2.6 

...256.  3.6,289. 
5.  c 

...276.  a 
....167.  3 
....281.1.6,302.i 
....2,58.  1.  a 
....331.  3.  a 
...266.2.  ft 
....231.  2 
....375.  2.  c 
....375.  2.  c 
....94.  c,  287.  4 
....367.  4.6 
. . .  .279.  6 
....245.  2.  6 
,...244.  a 
...,272.  6 
....297.  c 
...118.4 
,...219.  1.  6 

...245.2.  a, 279. 

«,  280.  1 

25....288.  3.  a 

88 
';.'."246.3.a,397.6 
....367.1./,311.4 

...57.  3  (3)  a, 
8G.6(3pl.),  166.3 
....245.  3.6 
..,.256. 3.  a,  289. 
3.  a 

...302.  a 
....89  (f.s.) 
....312.  2.  a 
....275.  1.  a  (2), 
281.  1.  c 
....380.3 
.  ..219.  1.6 
....279.  c (2) 
....311.  4 

...289.  l.a 

...94.  a 
....297.  6 
....  230.  3 
....121.  2 

...294.  a 
....92.  (/,  280.  2 
....249  3.rt,273.C 
,...127.  1 
..,.266.  1.  c,269. 

2,  6 
,...252. 2  a.  272. 

a,  383,«,  289.  5. 

«,  312.  2.  a 
,  12,...367.  4.  6 
....381.  1.  ft 
.  13.... 277.  6 

...36.1,287.  l.a 
....105.  </,  148.3 
,,.. 174.1,  289.5.C 
,...60.  3.  ft  (1), 

86.  ft  (2  f.) 
..  .,60,  2.  « 
,...300.  a 
....309.  2.  a 
...,2^0.  3,  a 
...  .306.  6,  307.6 

... 290.1. a,309.1 

...257.  3.  rt,  287. 
5.  a 

...306.  a 

...346.2 

...307.  a 

...301 

...119.  1 

...90(3pl.)104./it 

...106.  6,  275. 

1.  c 


414 


INDEX   II. 


18: 


19: 


ao: 


24: 


» 


17....S112.  5.  C 
e,  7....245.  2.  c 
8.... 285.  2 

16....  160.  1,252.  1 
3....280.  6.  6 
4.... 86.  6  (2  m.), 

112.3 
5....302.  f 

5,  r....266.  2.  6 
8. ...271. 6 

10.... 279.    c     (4), 

311.2 
17....174,.S,24n.l.n; 
18.... 94.  rf, -ilb.  1. 
a,  285.  3.  a 

2,  3.... 285.  2 

4. ...275.  l.a(4) 

7,  9.... 288.  2.  rt 

7-10.... 277.  a 
14. ...298.2 
18. ...271. 6 
23... 46.    174.     3, 
177.3 

1....280.  4,297.  (i 

2.... 3.  1.  a 

4.... 297.  cl,  300.  c 

4,  5.... 275.1.  rt  (2) 
11....  167. 1,245.2. 6 
13....2.J8.  3.6,280. 
3.  a 

4....201.<? 

7.... 286.  1.  d 

9.... 277.  a 
10....275.  2.  6 
14.... 302. a 
15....281.1.a(4) 

3.... 209.  1.  a 
12....112.  1,174. 1, 

J  79.  i,  250 
14. ...111. 2.6' 

3....187.  2.  c 

6.  ...13.  b 
7.... 257.  2.  a 

10.... 281.  2.  a 

12 300.  c 

14.... 163.  4,  201.  c 
15.... 94.  a 
19.... 280.  2.  a 
20  . .  19.  M.e,  2:i5.rt 
23. ...61.  6.  rt.  86. 

6(2f.),90(2f.s.), 

140.2 
24.... 23.  «,  10.5.6, 

267.  1 .  </,  :W7.  a 
26....104.  i,252. 1. 

by  290.  2 
29.... 296.  3.  « 
5....245.  2.  a 
13.. ..131. 6 
14....27f>.  a,«,280. 

1,282.  a 
17.... 281.  2.  a 
18.... 275.  2.  c 
20....2a5.  3.  a 
22.... 2.57. 2. «.  287. 

1.  306.6,307.  a 
23.... 2.57.  6.  c 
26....  2.58.  2.  a,  259. 

6,  29S.  1.  a 
29. ...163. 2 
3J....284.e,312.2.a 
36....289.  :i.  a 
37.... 104.  6 
■39....  179.  3 
1....279.  d 
2.... 91.  c,  253.  2. 

a,257.3.a,262.2.a 
2,  8... 267.  l.« 
3.... 94.  6 
14... 297.  a 
15....256.2.«,259.« 


25:  16 
26 
27 
29 
3» 
36 

26:     9 

14, 

15, 

21, 

27:    3 

is! 

20 

28:  1 
6 

12, 
16 

29:  2, 
8 
17 
18 
19 
25 
27 

30:  6 
12. 
14 
16 
19 
21 

31:  2 
5 

12 

18 
20 
21 

29 
32 

32 
33 

.38 

32:     1 

4 

9 

11 

12 

14 

16 

19 

29 

33 

45 

37 

44 

33:     8 

20 

22 

24 

26 

34:     1 

8 

9 

85:    8 

14 

14 

.36:    8 

16 

23 

27 

37:     4 

8 

9 

10 


....§96.0 
....249.3.6,259.0 
....167.  3 
.  ...2<»8.  3.  a 
. . . . 163. 5 
....57.   2   (3)   a, 
235.  c 
....Ifi7.  3 
....273.  a 

...305.6 
,...44.6 

...2.52.  1.  c 
....297. a 
....1.58.  2,279.  c 
....13.  a 
....255.  1.  a 

...267.  l.e 
....279.  </ 
,  ...248.  3.  <-,278. 
2,  288.  2.  rt 
....258.3.6,279.d 
....94.  e,  112.5.C 
....267.  1.  e 
....288.  3.  a 
....281.2.  a 
....219.  1.  6 
....24.6 
....309.  1.  6 
,...285.4.  a 
....285.  3.  a 
....139.3 
....290.2 
...298.  3.  a 
....280.2.a,297.c 
, . .  .245.  2.  rt 
....288.  2.e 
....87,119.3 
....287.4 
....266.2.6 
....252.2.6,311. 
4.  c 

....267.  3.rt 
....112.   3,    300. 

6,  :^11,4 

,3:3....  265.3.  rt(3) 
.  ...]6.3.6,105.d, 

266.  2.  c 

...46 

.   .255.  l.rt 
....91.  6,  131.5 
....98.  1.  rt 
....288.  2.e 

...249.  3.  6 
....252.  1.  c 

...279.  d 
....300.  6 
....266.  l.rt, 
....92.  d,280.2.rt 

...166.2 
. . . .  10.  rt 
....280.3 
. . . .  13.  rt 
....256.  3.  a 
..257.9.6 
.45.  1 
..11.  1.6 
.  44.  rt,  2.58.  3 
..279.  t/ 
....2.59.  a 

...279.  «',297.  d 

...279.6 

16.... 284.  « 

...267.4.  a 

. .  .286.  3 

...2.54.1 

...279.  d 

...278.  1 
,  9....249.  1.  a 

...281.1.  «  (4) 

...252.  1.  d,277. 

a,  307.  a 


39: 


42: 


49 


ll....§275.  l.a(3) 

12.. ..113.  2 

14.... 278 

15.... 275.  1.  a(l) 

16.... 211.  3. rt 

21.... 280.  3.  rt 
4.... 274.  rt,  284.  e 
5.... 261.  3.  6 
6....  2.56.  3.  rt 
9.... 276.  e, 284.  c, 
301.  6 

12.... .56.  4 

14.... 2.5.5.  1.  a 

20....27.5.  2.  c 

26....2;D.  e 

28.... 302.  a 
1,4....290.  l.a 
4....276.  d 

12.... 2:3.  l.a 

18....92.  (/ 
1....57.   2  (2)  a, 

279.  d 
2.... 286.  2.  rt 
3....  2.52.  2.  c,  275. 

2.  a 
4.... 2.50.  d 
5. ...311.  4.  6 

14.... 287.  2.  a 
16..   .272. c 

3....297. c 

.5.  6.... 309.  2 

6....281.2.  6 

8.... 256.  2.  a 
16.... 290.  1.  a 

2.   ..177.2,252.1./ 

5....3()0.  c 

6....46,  71.a(l) 
10.... S3. 2.  6, 149.2 

2. ...290.  1.  a 

5....272.  rt 

2.... 262.  l.a 

7....250.C 

9  ...289. 2.  rt,  296. 

3.  a 
14....2a5.  2,  311.2 
15,... 262.  1.  a 
17,.     266.  l.a,  279. 

c(2) 
18.... 285.  1,302.  a 
19.... 94.  6,  104.  e, 

280.  3.  a 
23.  ..168.  1 
25....162.4,290.1.a 

1 . . . ,  ;300.  a 
2.... 2.55.  1.  a 
6....272.  c 
7.... 298.  3.  a 
7,  8,... 122.  2 
8...  96.a,111.2.rf 
11....86.  6(2f.) 
20....43.  c 
28....287.  3.  a 
1....300.a 
2....279.  <;(4) 
9. ...281.  1.6 
11   ...161.  1 
15....289.  5.  c 
19.... 296.  3.  6 
27.... 298.  2.  6 
32....249.  3.  6 
36  ...258. 2. a, 289. 

5.  a.  .302.  a 
41.... 289.  2.  a 
44....2<)7.  c 
3,...54.4.rt,82.5.rt 
8  ...95.  (/,  275.1. c 
10....  167.  1,  26ti.4 
11....88(3f.pl.),98. 

1,  273.  rt 
12.... 246. 2 
17....289.  5.  c 


49:  18 

...$  45.  4,66.  » 

20. 

...  140.  5 

24. 

..104.  j,  289.4. 

a,  290.  1.  a 

28 

...141.  1 

31, 

...302.  c 

34, 

...300.  a 

36. 

...248.  6./ 

37 

...86.  6  (2m.), 

112,3,5.0,139.8 

50:  3. 

...158.  2 

4. 

...281.2.  a 

5. 

...71.a(3),91.d 

6. 

...289.  5.  a 

11. 

...198.  d 

20. 

. . . 167.  2,  284. e 

23. 

...91. a 

25. 

...261.2 

27. 

...111.3.a 

34. 

..,94.  6,  114, 

160.  3 

39. 

...299.  c 

44. 

...105.6 

51;  3. 

...302.6 

9. 

...167.2,  3 

13. 

...90(2f.8.) 

14. 

. .  305.  6,  307. b 

26 

...245.2.6 

27, 

28.... 275.  l.c 

3:3. 

...94.6,345.2.* 

34. 

...167.2 

46. 

...289. 6.  a,  296. 

2.  a 

43. 

...289.  1.0 

50. 

...15:3.  1 

58. 

...24  r,  150.  1 

59. 

..  2.55.  1.  a 

52:  7. 

. .  269.  2.  6 

13. 

...257.  6.  c 

14. 

...295 

20. 

...253.  l.a,  297  .C 

29, 

30....254.  2.  6 

30. 

...248.  6.  « 

LAMENTATIONS. 


1. 

.§6 

1: 

1.. 

.33.  1,  61.  6. 

a 

222 

4.. 

.1.50. 1,201.  a 

8.. 

.59.  a,  141.3 

9.. 

.288.2.6 

12.. 

.143.  1 

14  . 

.302.6 

16.. 

.209.  l.a, 211. 

1. 

a,  285.  1,  296. 

3. 

a 

17.. 

.286.  2.  6 

19.. 

.267.  1./ 

20.. 

.«0.  3.  6  (2), 

9-, 

.  a 

2 

.6 

2: 

"s".'. 

. 126.  1 

11.. 

.92.  a,  113.  1, 

2 

115 

13.. 

.257.  3.  a 

15,  16.  ..74.  a 

18.. 

.258.  1.  0 

3 

.6 

3 

7. . 

.267.  1.  « 

8.. 

.269.  2.  a 

12  . 

.198. d 

14.. 

.201.6 

22.. 

.54.3,218.2.0 

31.. 

.299.  c 

32.. 

.305. 6 

33.. 

.  1,52.  2 

42.. 

.71.rt  (1) 

45.. 

.279.  6 

48.. 

.148.2 

INDEX   11. 

415 

3:  50....§272.  S 

12:  25,28.   ..§245.3.  6 

17    19. . . .  §  312.  2.  « 

27:  1.5.... §  13.  a 

62.... 252.  1./ 

13:     2.... 209.1.6, 2.56.1 

19,  20.... 277.  6 

17.... 235.  f/ 

53,... 53.3.«,  152.2 

3.... 279.  #,.302.6 

21   ..  284.  a 

19....24.C,  93.  b 

66-61.... 266.  1./ 

4.... 248.  6./, 266. 

22.... 246.  l.a,  311. 

23...  54.  2 

57.... 308.  a 

2.6 

4.6 

26.... 104.  a,  158.3 

58.... 160.  1 

4-7.... 294. a 

23.... 88     (f.    pi.). 

31....11.1.a,  198.d 

61-63.... 3.  l.a 

8.... 282.  a 

257.6.  «,289.5.a 

34....278.  4.  a 

4 6 

10....287.  3.  a 

18:    2.... 267.  3.  a 

35.... 285.  3.  a 

4:     1....96.  6, 179.  3 

10,15,16.... 261. 3.6 

3....244.6,285.3.a 

36.... 262.  2.  a 

3....43. c 

11.... 71.  fl(2) 

4.... 246.  2.  ffl 

28:    8...  80.  6  (3  m.) 

5.... 286.  2.  a 

11,  12.... 269. 2. c 

6,  9.... 269.  l.a 

9.... 231.  4 

9.. ..39.  3.  a 

11,  13....311.4.6 

7....  256. 3.  «,  287. 

13....  19. 2.  c,  163.4 

14....83.C(2),  122. 

11,  19.... 257.  9.  6 

3.  a 

14.... 71.  a (2), 258. 

2,283 

13-15.... 277. 6 

10.... 217.6,253.1. c 

3.  a 

17....237.  2,  256.  2 

17.... 219.  1.6 

22.... 299. c 

15....61.6,a,104.6 

6:     5.. ..162.  5 

18.... 201. c 

26.... 2:20.  5.  6 

16.... 53.  2.  a.  111. 

6.... 288.  2.  b 

19  ...159.3 

2T....276.  C 

2.  c,  167.  3 

22. ...281.  1.  a  (1), 

20.... 24.  6,  71.  a 

28....276.  rf 

17....  170.  rt,  174.2 

305.6 

(2),  219.  2.  c 

32  ...245.2.a,311.4 

18.... 104.  4,186.6, 

22....279.  e,287.3. 

19:     2....198.  c? 

218.  1.  a 

a,  302.  c 

20:     9.... 140. 4 

23.... 92.  a 

EZEKIEL. 

14:     1.... 289.  l.a 

16.... 284.  d 

24.  ...139.  3 

3. ...53.  1.  a,  91. 

17...  287.  3.  a 

24,  26.... 158. 3 

1:     4....§.'i3.  2.  « 

6,  c,  119.  1,  281. 

21  ...65.6 

29:     3.... 102.  l.a 

6.... 205.  5.  a 

I.ffi3) 

26.... 267.  1./ 

15....1C8.  5 

11  ...219.2.  c 

4.... 296.  1.  a 

27.... 119.  3 

18.... 95.  a 

14  ...181.1.a,280. 

5.... 2.56.  2.6 

36....91.C 

30:   16..   .2.57.  6.  c 

3.6 

7....275.  2.  c 

37....53.2.  a 

25. ...112.  3 

16.. ..267.1./ 

8.. ..141. 3 

21:     5.... 285.  3.  a 

31:  2,8,  18.... 266. 2.  6 

2:     5....306.  c 

9.... 277. 6 

15.... 179.  1 

3.... 140.  5 

10....53.  2.  a,  3.  a 

11.... 267. 1.  f 

15,  16..   .24.c,93.e 

5...  11. l.a,  86.6 

3:    3.... 272.  a 

13.... 279.  c  (2) 

18.... 121.  1 

8.... 11.  l.«,  201 

6.... 305.  «,  308 

13-15.... 277.  a 

19.... 252.  l.c,255. 

15.... 93.  c 

7.... 257. 10 

15, 17.... .308.  « 

4.6 

15-18  ...266.  4.  a 

15.... 139.  3 

16,  18,20...  305.  a 

21.... 182.  a 

16.... 258.  3.  c 

17.... 277.  6 

18...  305.6 

26,  28.... 87 

32:  16.... 88  (f.  pi.) 

20....88(f.  pi.) 

22.... 284.  (^, 289 .5. 

29.... 91.  6,  106.  a. 

18... .11.  1.  6 

21.... 297. c 

a,  296.  3.  a 

126.  1 

19.... 95.  a,  a 

4:    3.... 54.1, 287.3.  a 

15:     3.... 245.  2.  c 

31.... 94.  6,  198.  c. 

20.... 89  (f.  6.,  m. 

9.... 201.  a 

5....104.  i 

280.1.  a 

pi.) 

12  ...1.59.  3 

6,  7.... 277.  6 

32.... 296.  3.  c 

30.... 2.33.  a 

5:    7....220.  3.  « 

16:     4.... 23.  1.  a,  60. 

33....111.2.C 

32.... 95.  a 

12.... 219.  1.* 

4.  a,  93.  a,  95.  c, 

34... 87 

a3:     2,3  ...277.  a 

13.... 121.  3,  131.  6 

121.   1,    126.    1, 

22:     4....289.  6.  a 

4....245.2.a,276.a 

16.... 119.  1 

127.   1,    151.   5, 

18  ...256.3 

5....301.6,309.2.a 

6:    3....210.  3.  c 

220.  6.  6,  281.  1. 

20. ...131.  2 

12...  168.  2 

6.... 148. 4 

a  (1),  6,  284.  e 

29.... 285.  3.  a 

13.... 220.  5.6 

7....250.  c 

5.... 87, 95. a.  111. 

23:     5. ...111.1 

15.... 269.  2.  a 

8.... 175. 2 

3.  a,  151.  5 

14.... 257.  8.  c 

29.... 296.  3.6 

9....24.C 

6....113.4,296.3.a 

16,  20.... 97.  1.  a 

30.... 53.  2.  6,  224. 

11....98.  2,  259. a 

7....257.  2.  a 

19. ...177.3 

1.  a  bis 

14  ...296.  3.6 

8,  10.... 99.  2.  6 

28.... 301 

a3....312.  2.6 

7:  14.... 248.  6.  (• 

15.... 276.  q 

42. ...21.  1 

34:     9....248.  6.  rf 

17....205.5.M,285.1 

16....267.  l.e 

48  ...83.r(2),152.3 

12...  252.1.6,284.^ 

24,...141.1,218.2.rt 

19,  58....  104.  A 

49....  16.  1,  167.2, 

14.... 258.  3.  a 

25.... 198.  c 

22.... 86.  6  (2f.) 

219. 1.  6 

17  ...71.  a (2) 

27. ...118.4 

27.... 256.  3.  a 

24:  10.... 199. 6 

:31....71.  ff  (2) 

8:    2... 65.  2(2)6 

28....  127.  1,279.  « 

11. ...140.  1 

35:     6....105.  ^ 

3. ...167.3 

31.... 175.  2,  282.« 

12.... 174.  1 

8.... 218.  l.rf 

6....75.  1,119.  3 

32.... 284.  6 

26...   128,  191.6 

9.  ...148.  2 

16.... 90  (2  m.  pi.) 

33.... 60.  3.  6   (2), 

25:     6.... 57.  2  (3)   a, 

10.... 284.  d 

17...  264.2(2^6 

120.  1,  246.  1.  a 

106.   a,  125.    2, 

11   . .  219.  2.  a 

9:     2....252.1.c,259.6 

.34... 14.  a,  93.  6 

250.  6 

12.... ()3.  1.  n,  86. 

5,  7  ..  275.1.  c 

36.... 91. 6 

13.... 225.  1.6 

6  (3  pi.) 

7.... 275.  l.a  (1), 

50.... 128 

15.... .57.    2  (3)  a. 

36:     3....l;39.  2,  141.1 

287.  1.  a 

.52....92.rf,219.2.a 

282.  a 

5.... 219.  1.6 

8.... 120.  2 

53.... 219.  1.  6 

26:     2  ...140.  2,245.1. 

8.   -.220.  5.  c 

11   ..  2.^7.9.6,259.6 

57...  158.3 

a,  271. c 

11. ...163.  5 

10:    3. ...258.  l.a 

59...  86.6(1  c.) 

3....286.  2.  a 

13.... 71.  a  (2) 

9.... 253.  l.a 

17:    2....275.  1.  c 

7.... 257.  2.  a 

27-31  ...277.  a 

17.... 159.  1 

3....246.  1.  a 

9....19.  2.  (;,  220. 

28.... 71.  a(l) 

11:     3.... 244.  6 

5.... 132. 2 

5.  n 

30.... 267.  1./ 

6....11.1.a,  250.  c 

8.... 24.  a 

10.... 258.  2 

.3.5... 73.  2.0 

7.... 280.  3. a 

9.... 168.  2,    193. 

15....  113.  1,2 

35,  38....  19.  2.  « 

8-10.... 277.  a 

4,  218.  2.  a 

17....248.  6.  ^ 

37:     2. ...112.  3 

11.... 299.  a 

12  ...285.2 

18.. ..112.  5.C 

2,7,8,  10.... 275. 

12.   ..300.  b 

14....279.c(l),  (> 

21....16.3.  6,235.a 

1.  a.  (4) 

13.... 287.  3.  a 

15....65.  6,  249.  3. 

27:     3....90  (2f.  s.) 

4,  9.... 248.  6.  d 

21.... 302. 6 

6,298.  l.a 

8.... 158.  3 

7.... 8S  (2f.pl.) 

12:  23.... 245.  2.  6 

15,  18.... 279.  c  (2) 

9.... 218.  1.  a 

8....261.  3.  6 

25...,245.2.a,300.a 

16.... 305.  a 

13....22.a 

9.... 131.  3 

41G 

INDEX   II. 

37:  10....$  181.  6 

1:  18.... §312.  2.6 

3:    2. ...§24.6 

JOEL. 

11.... 275.  1.  o(2), 

20...  312.2.  a 

4:     2....280.  1 

286.  1.  c 

2:     1.... 99 .2.  0,119.1 

4....35.2.«,272.c 

1:     2....§2.31.4 

17....119.1.2'il.l.a 

3:     3.... 22.  6 

6.  ...11.  1.  0,  104. 

7.... 281.  l.o  (4) 

28     ..202.  \.a 

25. ...94.  e 

6,  246.  1.  0 

8.... 257.  9.  6 

38:    2  ...2.58.  3.  6 

5:     9.... 205.  5.  r 

11... 267.  3.0, 290. 

9....266.  2.  6 

8....1G.S.  4 

8:     1....  248.  6.  r,  265. 

1.0 

9,  13  ...290.  2 

23. ...96.  h 

2.  6,  297.  a 

12,  13....267.  4.  6 

11....248.  6.  rf 

39:     1....2:)8,  3.  ft 

5  ...261.3.6 

13. ...118.  4 

12.  20.... 266.  2.  6 

4 257.  2.  (( 

6        248.2 

14....24().  2.  6 

14.... 311.  1.  a 

H....2.-)0.  c 

10  ...311.2 

17. ...281.  l.o(l) 

17.... 24.  6,  192.  u 

15....iM5.  2.a,289. 

11.... 95.  «.  287. 5.6 

18.... 43.  c.  92.  a, 

20.... 289.  4.  « 

2.  « 

12.... 272.  6 

122.  1,  140.  3 

2:     1  ...24.5.  1.  a 

86  . . . 167. 3 

13     .98.1.(7,250, 

5:     2.... 87,  119.  3 

3.... 269.  1.  « 

27....2.V2.  1.6 

2.51.  «,  2.52.  1.  6, 

8....280.  2.  6 

5.... 60.   3.  6  (1), 

40:     3.... 168.  4 

256.  3,  311.  4 

11.... 2^3 

257.  9.  6 

4....&">.  6,  104.6 

14. ...311.  1.  a 

13.... 249.1.  0,256. 

6.... 269.  2.  a 

5.... 296.  3.  a 

16.... 73.  2.  a,  232. 

1.0 

20. ...283.  a 

16... 219.  2.  c 

6.  rt 

6:     1....276.  7 

23....276.  rt 

22....2.T3.  2(3) 

19. ...301.  6 

2....174. '3,  311.  4 

23-27.... 277. 6 

25.... 232.  5.  a 

22....88  (3f.pl.) 

4....2&3 

26....2S0.    2,  283. 

81....2.V2.  l.c 

25.... 257.  2.  a 

9. ...176.  3 

0,  299.  c 

41....296.  2.  a 

9:     1,2.... 2.55.  2.  6 

7:     4....  100.  0,111.3. 

4:     2. ...312.  2.6 

42.... 312.  2.  a 

2....160.  1 

0,  160.  3,  198.  c 

4.... 262.  l.rt 

43....1il.  2.  c 

4.... 259.  6,274.6, 

5.... 258. 1.0, 288. 

11.  ...91.  d,  131.  1. 

41:    4. ...16.  3.  6 

294.  « 

2.  a 

273  0 

7. ...141.  1 

5.... 275.  1.  0(2) 

6.... 22.  0,263.6 

14....296.  2.  a 

9,  11.... 162.  5 

5,  11.... 260.  3.  a 

12. ...151.  1 

15.... 266.  4.  a 

15.... 219.  2.  (• 

6.... 288.  3.  a 

8:     2.... 60.  3.  0,289. 

18.... 285.  1 

21.... 257.  6.  c 

11.... 279. e 

5.  e 

22....  262.2,  288.2.C 

13.... 284.  d 

3.  ...105.  o 

24. ...255.  1.6 

16.... 272. a 

4....246.1.  0,266. 

AMOS. 

25. ...19.  2.6 

18.  ...16.  3.6 

2.  6 

42:     5.... 45.    1,   57.   2 

19.... 119. 3, 125.1, 

6....311.C 

l:     4....S2S4./' 

(2)  fl,  in,  2.  6 

273 

12  .    .88,  308.  6 

ll....U)4.«,"289.5.C 

43:    7.  ..284.  d 

21.... 309.  3.  a 

12,  13.... 267.  5.  a 

13....  12.5.  2 

13.... 199.  6 

23....262.  2.  obis 

9:    2. ...119.1 

2:     4. ...119.3 

18. ...113.  1 

24..  .284.  e 

4.. ..210.  3.  c 

3:     5.... 281.  l.rt  (2) 

20....104.  ?■ 

25... 97.  2.226,  2, 

6.... 2.58.  1.  a 

5,  6.... 298.  2 

23.... 279. 6 

272.  0,  287.  5.  a 

9..     283.  o 

11.... 86.  0,  140.2 

24....  100.  2.  a  (2) 

26.... 252.  \.d 

10.... 119.  3 

15.... 158.  4 

27.... 179.  3 

10:     1....160.  1 

12.... 306.  6,307.  6 

4:     2....  167.  2,284.  ^ 

44:     3....2S4.  rf 

1,  4  .     312.  2.  6 

13.... 279.  e(4) 

3.... 86.  6  (2  pi.) 

19.... 2%.  3.  a 

3.... 256.  2.  rt 

10:     4....285.  3.  o 

4.... 2,5.5.4.0,283.0 

45:     1....2.-i4.  2.  6 

11,  19.... 262.  2.  a 

5.... 286.  l.c 

5. ...280.  3.  a 

10...  270.  1.  a 

14....179,  3,  301 

6....  2.56.1. «,284.<- 

7  ..  245.3.6,267. 

13....255.  3.  a 

16, 18.... 244.  a 

10...  105.  d 

4.  a 

15,  21.... 248.  4 

17. ...51. 2 

11.... 61.  6.  a 

8.... 25.5.  4.  o 

16.... 219.  3.6,256. 

11:     1....279.  (/ 

12.... 160. 2 

5:     1....287.  4 

3.  a 

4,  10.... 272.  6 

13....61.  6.  0 

3.... 260.  1 

46:   13.... 248. 4 

5.... 244.  0 

14. ...11. 1.0,158.3 

5...  281.  l.rt  (4) 

14.... ^55.  3.  a 

6. ...11.  1.6,  249. 

15.... 266.  4.  a 

6.   ..275.  2.  d 

17.... 86.  6 

2.6 

11:     2....275.  2.  o 

7,  8.... 282.  a 

19...  249.3.6 

10. ...281.  2.  a 

3.... 94.  0,  132.2 

11.... 92.  6,  163.3 

22..   .95.  e 

12....19.  2.  6 

4  ...57.   2  (2)  a. 

12.... 257.  9.6 

47:     4.... 256. 3 

14.... 131.  6 

111.2.  d 

15....  139. 3. 275.  l.c 

5.... 267.  \.e 

15.... 312.2.  a 

7....  179 .3,257.9.0 

]9....248.6./,277.a 

7.... 102.  3.  a 

23....96.f,  257.2.0 

7,  8     .   56.  4 

21.... 269.  l.rt 

8....1()6.  3 

29,  30.... 377.  a 

8... 298.  l.o 

21,  25... 24.  6 

11. ...11.  1.  «,201 

30. ...11.  1.6 

12:     1....104. /,  2(13.  2 

6:     2.... 54.  2.  245.  1. 

15.... 249.  3.  6 

31... 252.  1.  6 

3....279.  c(4) 

0,257.1.0.298.2 

16.... 2.52.  l.c 

31. ...91. 6 

4....2S8.  2.  6 

8.... 262.  1.  0 

22....2.32.  5.  a 

35.... 94. 6 

5.... 105.  6 

8,  9.... 277.  6 

48:  10....:«i.  4.  a 

36....82.  5.  0 

9....  245.  2. 6,  236. 

9.... 306.  6 

14....245.  2.  6 

38.... 286.  2.  a 

2.  6 

10.... 245.    1,   279. 

16.... 46 

40.... 126.  1 

11.... 246.  1.  rt 

c(4) 

18.... 219.  1.6 

44.... 198.  d 

12....208.  2.  6 

12.... 245.  2.6 

12:    2....2:^3.  a 

15....2.><8.  2.  f 

7:     1... .201.0 

3.... 295.  a 

13:     2.... 257. 2.  0,9.6 

4.... 262.  1.  rt 

DANIEL. 

6,  7... .259.  6 
13. ...201.  a 

3.... 92.  6 
11...   19.2.  a,  220. 

7.... 309.  l.rt 
17.... 246.1.  0,281. 

5.0 

1.  0  (5) 

1:     l....§26r).3.a(6) 

15.... 179.  3 

8:     4...  94.  6,232.5.0 

3....;5ll.  2.  a 

HOSEA. 

14;     1....88   (3f.  pi.), 

8  ...,53.  2.0,3.0, 

4....2-)8.  3.  c 

211.    1.    «,   2S9. 

128 

5...  267.  1./ 

5.C 

9:     1....  105.  0,125.1, 

8. ...119.  1 

l:     2....  §2.58. 2,302.0 

3.... 259.   0,   275. 

245.  2.  o 

13.... 174.  3 

fi....283 

2.  c,  287.  4 

2-1.... 267.    1.   d, 

15.... 289.  6.  a 

2:     4.... 275.  2.  c 

5  ...288.2.  e 

306.  c.  307.  a 

17.... 2.53.   2  (2>6, 

14  ...104.(7 

6.... 272.  a 

3.... 277.  a 

254.  4.  a 

16.... 220.  7.  a 

10.... 272.  6,  804.  a 

5....276.  « 

INDEX  II. 

417 

»:    8.... §94.  6,281.1, 

5:     l....§279.  6 

3:    3,7,ff....§269.2.<; 

6:  14.... §289.  1.  a 

1.6 

2.... 266.  1 

6....99.2.a,276./ 

r.    1....255.  2.  6 

9.... 245.  3.  a 

7.... 275.  1.  a  (4), 

8.... 256.  3.  a 

2.... 276.  d 

306 

9.... 281.  \.c 

3.... 280.  2 

8.... 272.  a 

10.... 219. 2. c,  269. 

5....  102.  2,  104./. 

OBADIAH. 

6:    6.... 267.  1.  e 

2.6 

255.  2.  6,  280.  3. 

8,  13.... 283.  a 

13.... 280.  2,284.  g 

a.  281.  \.a  (3), 

Ver.  3....§294.  a 

10.... 57.  2(1) 

14  ...267.  1.  6 

297.  a 

3,  20.... 257.  2.  a 

12.... 266.  1.  a 

15....2&5.4.a,288. 

7.... 295 

4....  160.    3,   280. 

13.... 139.  3 

3.  a 

9....89(ra.  pi.) 

3.  a,  307.  a 

13-15.... 246.  1.  a 

16....  140.  1,  276.6 

10.... 300.  6 

6.... 289.  5.  c 

7:     3.... 297.  6 

19.... 47 

14  ...45.  5,  60.  3. 

9.... 185.  a 

4....264.2(2).(2)c 

C,  92.  e 

11.  ...19.  2.  a,  45. 

10.... 35.  2,174.3, 

8:     2...  285.  3 

2,  106.  a 

272.  a 

ZEPHANIAH. 

3.... 277.  6 

13....  105.6,246.1. a 

11,  12....252.  2.  c 

6.... 298.  3.  a 

16....158.  4,2.:9.  6, 

12....  245.  2.  6, 288. 

l:    2. ...§281.  1.6 

14,  15....  1.39.  1 

281.  1.  c,  302.  6 

3.  a 

3.... 250.  a 

17.... 111. 2. e,  284. 

16.... 250.  6 

15.... 296.  3.6 

rf,  300.  6 

17.... 257.  9.  6 

17....  100.  2.  «(1) 

23...  271 

JONAH. 

2:     1....281.  1.  c 

9:     5...   3.5.2,272.0, 

2.... 267.  1.  h  bis 

275.  2.  6 

1:     5....§  114,  266.1. 

NAHUM. 

4. ...126.2 

9.... 291.  a 

c,  276.  a 

9.... 219.  1.  c 

11. ...297.  a 

10,  16.... 285.  3.  a 

l:    3.... §13.  a,  174. 

12  ...246.2 

17.... 295.  a 

11...  267. 1./, 281. 

3,217.1.  f,  297.  6 

13.... 272.  a 

10:     6.... 153.  3 

2.6 

4....152.  2,  276.  e 

14....230.  4.  6 

7.... 272.  a 

14.... 271.  6,274.6 

5.... 250.   «,  258. 

15.... 39.  4.  a 

11:     4.... 257.  6 

2.     1....125.  2 

1.  «,  311.  4 

3:    7.... 283,  304 

5.... 57.   2  (3)   a. 

4....276.  cJ 

8.... 287.  2.  a 

9.... 288.  2.  e 

104.  (7,  111.  2.  c. 

10...  61.  6.  a 

12.... 140.  2 

11 . . .   125.  3 

2.3.3.  c,  289.  2.  a 

3:     3.... 257.   5,    264. 

13.... 219.  1.  6 

14....89(f  s.),lll. 

7.... 224.  l.a 

2  (2)  d 

2:     1....289.  5.  c 

3.  a 

8. ...119.  1 

4.... 309.  3.  a 

4.... 219.  2.  c 

18.... 150.  1 

10.... 140.  5 

4:     1,  6...  285.3.  a 

6.... 285.  2 

19.... 200,  249.3.  6 

13...  254  4.  a, 257. 

2....274.6,  283.a 

8.   ..245.3.  a 

20....279.  tZ 

2.  a 

5...  267.  1. /• 

9.... 89  (m.  pL), 

17.... 61.  6.  a,  281. 

6.... 286.  2.  a 

219.  1.  a 

1.  a  (5) 

11.... 23.  6 

11....296.  3.  6 

HAGGAI. 

12:    4..   .248.  3.  a 

14....219.  2.  c 

7,... 267.  \.f 

3:     5.. ..114 

l:     1,15....§255.2.  6 

10....280.3.a,  300 

MICAH. 

7...  93.  «,289.2.a 

4.... 231.   3,    252. 

a,  301.  6 

8....  148.  4,300.  c 

1.  6,  297.  a 

11....55.  2.  a 

1:     2.... §256.    2.    6, 

11.. ..112.  3,  179.  1 

2:    5.... 284.  d 

12-14....296.  3.  a 

294.  a 

12  ...277.  «,  306.  « 

11.... 287.  2.  a 

13:     1-6.... 277.  a 

7....92.  c 

17.... 24.  6,  143.  1, 

15... 267.  1.  h 

4.... 168.  2 

8....  151. 2,153.1, 

201.  f,  296.  3.  6 

17.... 284.  e 

6.... 285.  3.  a 

271.  a 

14:     2....45.  2,  91.  c 

9.... 289.  1.  a 

5....201.C 

10..., 53.  3.  a 

IIABAKKUK. 

ZECHAEIAH. 

10....  158.3,255.1.0 

11-16.... 273 

12.... 289.  2.  a 

14.... 256.  3.  a 

l:    5....§28l.  1.  c 

1:    2....§285.3.a 

15.    ..166.  2 

6...  302.  a 

3.... 277.  6 

16.... 89  (f.  s.,  m. 

8.... 100.  2.  a  (2) 

8.... 288.  2.  a 

MALACHI. 

pi.),  266.  4.  a 

bis 

9.... 75.  1 

2:    3....288.  2.  e 

10....  199.  6.  276.  c 

10.... 252.  1.  d 

1:     6.... §248.   6.    d. 

4.... 141.   2,    245. 

11....73.1,252.2.a 

13.... 256. 2 

257.   9.   6,    267. 

3.  a,  269.  2.  a 

12.... 104. 7 

17.... 159.  3 

3,  3.  a 

6.... 245. 1.  a,  289. 

13....  126.  1 

2:     5.... 309.  1.  a 

7.... 106.   «,   127. 

6.  a 

15.. ..112.  2 

8....73.  2.  ff,  288. 

2,  309.  2 

7....230.  4.a,252. 

16.... 199.  6 

2.  e 

7,  12.... 246.  2 

1.  (/ 

17.... 279.  c(4) 

13-15.... 294.  a 

11....9.5.  «,245..3.a 

8.... 88  (pi.),  2.57. 

2:     1,  2....276.  c 

3:     1....106.  « 

13...  24.  a,  75.  1, 

9.6 

6....2S9.2.a!,302.6 

4. ...280.  3.a 

298.  3.  a 

11.... 307.  a 

7. ...163.2 

7....94.  e,  153.  1 

14.... 54.  1,207.6 

12....92.f/,  249.2.a 

8.... 293.  a 

9.... 205.  5.  a 

2:     7....245.  2.  6 

13....266.4.«,276.a 

10.... 309.  1.  a 

4:    2....296.  1 

13....280.1.a,  287. 

3:     1....244.  6 

15.... 257.  9.6,280. 

5.... 261.  2 

3.  a 

4.... 272.  a 

3.«,294.a,309.2 

7...  249. 3.  6,  252. 

14...  86.  6  (2m.) 

12.  ..201.   a,  248. 

17....  104.  7,  141.3 

1.  C 

15.... 245.2. rf,  298. 

5,  287.  5.  a 

19.... 257.  6.  c,  287. 

10....158.2,  254.4. 

3.  rt 

4:    6.... 153.  2 

5.  a 

a,  256.  3.  a,  283 

15,  16.... 277. 6 

8.... 111. 2.  6,258. 

3:     2....275.  2.  a 

14.... 2.59.  6 

16.... 279.  6 

1.  a 

3... 250.  a 

5:     4. ...158.4 

3:    7.... 27.5.  2.  c 

10.... 160.  2 

3fE....265.3.  a(4) 

11.... 162.  5 

9.... 140.  2 

10,  13...  159.  2 

3,4, 12, 13....  269. 

6:     6.... 250.  a 

19. ...119.  1 

12....248.  6.  6 

2.  a 

7.. ..96.6 

20. ...158.  2 

INDEX    IIL 


EEBKEW  GRAMMATICAL  TEEM3. 


•»'',n»  13. 
rriiinj  nix  7.  1. 

ni-^rix  2. 

ri^Trr;  ni'^nis  7.  3. 

nTcn©  nvnix  7.  3. 

D.\^D^  ntTs  )n^x  7.  3. 

rrs  31. 

nmD  n^bT»i;x  7. 3.  a, 

nE3  -^3  21.  1. 

■':i3''3  85.  1.  a. 
Di^sa  76.  1. 
N^:-3  45.  4.  a. 

pTH  c;\^^  23.  1. 
b'p_  tji'i  21.  1. 
ny''"i"'.n  sn  230.  l. 
nbsTrn  xn  231.  1. 
I'^n-.rsJH  7.  3. 
nisir  9.  1. 
ty^En'ii  99.  1. 
n:T  198. 
r.i'n  16.  3.  a. 
pi-T^n  45.  4.  a. 
crt:  28. 
D'^-DS  76.  2. 
O'l'^lSS  71.  c. 


p^n  nx  b-TiCD  7. 3.  a. 

n-^ns  46 

''np  sibi  n-'ns  46. 
^in-;  ]itjb  201, 
D'^an  pTiJb  201. 

Q-^.^TT  ■jiTTJb  201. 

nK-ii]i)n  nnxEnb  24. 

i\'''[i<_'D  45.  4.  a. 

-i3'7Ta  71.  c. 

r,np^^  214. 

O'^V'3  70.  a. 

n^Db-q  28. 

b^ybr  32. 

5>-ibT2  32. 

rrnicT?  10.  46. 

p'^ETS  26. 

nipr  85.  1.  0. 

5lpT2  43. 

irbs  2nD  niria  7.  3.r/. 

anT?  44. 

nis^w  28.  b. 

n3  16.  2. 

N2T2:  71.  C. 

i\io:  214. 
npp:  71.  c. 


yp  16.  2. 
nnp:  198. 
D'i'iip:  2. 
p'lDE  riio  36.  1. 
tjiao  214. 

D'lnay  28. 
"iny  85.  1.  a. 
"Tin::?  85.  1.  a. 
SSi-^'  bys  284.  /•. 
ic^brb  ssii  bys  284./. 
•'sirb  s:i;ii  bys  2«4.  /. 
^•crj  bys  284.  /. 
D'^bys  70.  a. 
"^m  85.  1.  a, 
inp  46. 

a^ns  ijb"!  ^np  46. 
nEn'27." 

''lnD)2  -jin  bsTZj  7. 3.  a. 
xn-iT,  sniij  16.  1. 
n:nn  ^x  •'laibr  7.  3.  a. 
nn32  in^bs  do  7. 3.  a. 
ni^o  70.  «. 
iBciin  niiar  224.  1. 
nra  ir^xbi:©  7. 3.  a. 
nii^:n  12. 


Names  of  the  letters  §  2,  their  signification  §  5.  h. 
Names  of  the  vowels  §  12,  their  sijinification  §  12.  6. 
Names  of  the  accents  §  29,  their  signiticatiou  §  29.  6. 
Names  of  the  verbal  species  §  76.  1.  2. 
jDesiguatious  of  imperfect  verbs  §  76.  3. 


I.  Paradigm.   Personal  Pronouns,  §  71. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL 


1.  I            ^Db5<,  ^a« 

•       IT   '  •  -! 

2      I                                               T-'  r- 

iThou/.     m,  ^r\i$ 

jHe  5<^n 


3. 


We  !l3n35<,    ilDHD,  il35< 

.  -  -.  7  .  _  7  ^ 

Ye      m.  nm 

Ye    /.    ins,  npn^ 

They  m.     Dn,  ri'm 

They/,     in,  ran 


Suffixes,  §§  72,  101,  219. 


With  Dual  and 
Simple         With  union  Vowels  of  Verbs    With  Sing.  Nouns        p,       -j^ 


1  ^-  '?j\     ^5- 

'?..       '5._.  (^^ij 

1 
• 

•• 

pl  ilD            ^D^ 

^3..         ^3.. 

«.  (^\) 

«'. 

2^-  ^(n?)(l) 

(1.)      tT..  (3?...) 

1.  (^.) 

T. 

i^i.DS 

D?\ 

2/-  ^0:?)   ^ 

^.^. 

^- 

^:. 

-pM? 

1?. 

r/.. 

3  wj.  !in        ^n  ,  i 

T    ' 

Sin..      512..  (n,) 

i  (n',  !in 

..)  i\On',r.i) 

i?/.  n  (V2)     D^ ,  D. 

D„ 

D 

T 

o^\.  (ia'.) 

3/.  n         n^ 

n       ns 

TV                              T » 

T      » 

^^-   U^)    It 

I. 

T. 

\T. 

Demonstrative,  §  73. 

Masc.  Fern.  Common. 

Sing,  mt  (^t)    nj^T  (IT,  nt)  ^/iiff,  Plub.  b}^,n\)^,  these. 


Relative,  §  74. 
Vujs  ivlio  or  which;  abbreviated  form  • 'UJ  (•  T? ,  ^ ,  113) 


{  Interrogative  and  Indefinite,  §  75. 

J      ''53  who?  or  whoever,        tT2  (n^J,  n'^)  what?  or  whatever. 


r 

-   J 

r 

0                           .-^     "■ 
n.-^  PARAIlIfl^^'  OP 

K 

AL.               NIPHAL.               PIEL 

PDAL. 

Pret. 

8  m. 

^^?r 

^PI?? 

'^^^^ 

bt:p 

(Pebf.) 

3/. 

^^M 

nbtppD 

nbiop 

*^^^K 

2  m. 

^)^?r 

nbbp3 

T  :    -':  • 

i^r^p 

nbtop 

T  :       l\ 

2/ 

rbbp^ 

^T^i?? 

r'r^'P 

^?'^P 

1  C. 

'^t'^i? 

'rnbbpD 

^rl-'^p 

"j^t^P 

Plur. 

3  C. 

^^'^:p? 

^btip 

iibiop 

2  m. 

Dnb'jp 

t2rbt:i:5 

Dnbiap 

Dnbt^p 

2/ 

K'^^i? 

1^^"^!?? 

IJilV^P 

l^r^R 

1  c. 

^:'^PP 

^Jrt2p? 

^2bap 

^5t^p 

Infin. 

ahsol. 

bibp 

btipn 

blip 

bt:p 

constr. 

blip 

bt^P 

(b'^i^) 

Fdt. 

3  w. 

^^F?"! 

■^^^r^: 

b^PI 

btop-; 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

btpn 

bbpn 

•■  It    • 

-^pJ=) 

^p^ 

2  m. 

bbj^n 

^fep.^ 

-'^pi\^ 

-^pi\i 

8/ 

^<'^PP} 

'^PP.^ 

^'^^)~ri 

^<'^p5^ 

1  c. 

^^I?^ 

^^P^ 

-^.r^^ 

bfeps; 

Flur. 

3  m. 

^^"^p: 

sibtpp^: 

^bisp"; 

"^W: 

1 

1 

3/ 

nrbtipn 

HDbbpn 

n:bt:pn 

T  :   •■  1-    : 

n:bibpn 

2  m. 

tepn 

^bcpn 

:  liT   • 

^biipn 

iibtppn 

2/. 

nibrbpn 

T  ;       •:     • 

^rt'^)?f? 

nrbtopn 

n:b^pn 

1  c. 

^tip? 

^^P? 

-"^P? 

b^I<3 

Imper. 

2  w. 

blip 

bbpn 

"It    • 

^^P. 

2/. 

^bi:p 

^^^EH 

^"^^P 

Plur. 

2  m. 

ilbtpp 

^^^i^n 

sibi:p 

wanting 

2/ 

n:btbp 

n:bi:pn 

T  :  ■•  It    • 

^:-?^p 

Pabt. 

act. 

^^P 

'•^p-9 

L, 

j?as». 

.•,up 

-°i?5 

bibp^a 

lX-<^A-VI 


■•^ 


V^ 


r^ 


ill- 


i»: 


■     HIPHIL.  ^C^'^HOPHAL. 


1^T 


ll^ 


\y" 


HPAEL. 


KAL  {mid.  e).    kal  (mid.  o). 


nb-tbpn 
rbbpn 

T  :    -  ';     • 

■pbDpr; 
Dribupr; 


-  *;     T 

nbibpn 
nbtiprt 

:  :    - ':    t 

^btopn 

:  ':    T 

Dnbt:p- 


1 1 


f^^-^T-!' 


"ribt:pri     'f!^t:pn 
^Dbbpn      ^Dbbpn 


bi^prin 
nbtipnn 

T    :  '-    :     " 

nbiipnn 

nb^pinn 
"nbiapt^ri 

fepnn 
Dnbiipnn 
•jFibt^pnn 

^^btopnn 


lis 

••    T 

T   :  IT 

r-23 

:  IT 

Dri"in3 


bid 

T 

nbD'j: 


^nbbTfl 

•   :        T 

:    IT 

(Dnb^'ij) 


b-bpn 


bbpn 


(b'lDpnri) 

btoi:nn 


ni23 

T 

lids 


bib  id 


-'PP- 
b'tipri 

b'Ppn 

^b^ppn 

^  n^bbpn 
^b^-jpn 

b-bp; 


bi:pn 
bijpFi 
'bt:pn 

•     :  *;     T 

bi:p^5 
^btip^ 

;  ';  T 

M3b^pn 

T  :      I;     T 

^bi:pF! 
n:bt:pn 

T  :   -•:    T 

bropD 


^^pf?": 
btiptnri 
btDpnn 
^btcpnn 
bt^pn^^ 
^bt^pn^ 

n;bDprri 
^b-^pnn 

r;:bi?pnn 
btapn] 


nrnrn 

T    :  '   ;     • 

nrarn 

T    ;   -  :      • 


bs-^"; 
biDicn 
bb'cjri 

^^^■^'^ 
bsirs 

^b3i2?^ 
n:b3-^rn 

^bs^rn 
rijbbTn 

'bi'iD 


"b^^pn 

iib-ppn 

HDbtbpn 


wanting 


b^pt^n 

^biaprin 

^btopnn 

nDbiipnn 


bibpis 


bbpi3 


^P-i;^52 


UI 

.  Paradigm  of  the 

Perfeci 

SiNOULAE. 

1  com.        2  wase. 

2 /cm. 

3  masc. 

8 /em. 

Kal  Preterite 

OR  Perfect. 

Swa.  3  masc. 

^:bi:p      irjbt^p 

^^^^ 

^r;bi:p  1 
fepf 

nbt:p 

T  t': 

8 /em. 

^rinbt^p    ^f^^^i? 

l^^^l? 

^nrbiip  1 
sinbt:p{ 

nnbi:p 

T  -    tI; 

2  masc. 

^3nbt:p|    

^:Fibt:pj 

^nnbppi 
inbpp  1 

nhbpip 

%fem. 

^3^ri^t:p      

^r;"nbt:p| 
Tnbpp  j 

rii'^i^pp 

1  com. 

?;-nbt2p 

■^'I^^Pi? 

rnbpp 

n-'ribtip 

T      •   ;    -1 : 

Plur.  3  com. 

^3^bt2p     "rj^btpp 

t^^bt:p 

^-^b-jp 

r-^bt:p 

2  masc. 

-:^nbt:p 

. . .' » 

.  . '  ? . 

^n^nbtsp 

1 » 

1  com. 

!r|^ibt:p 

•q^ibpp  ^n^ibpp 

"^3^t:p 

Infinitivb. 

^bt:p|    ^b^i^ 

^^^P       ^^^^P 

nbt:p 

T   :  't 

FcTTrBE  OR  Imperfect. 


Sdjo.    3  masc.      ^btpp^  |    "^^^P^  \     "^^^PP"!    ^i^^Pp"!  \         rj^PP". 

^sbtpp":  j  ;|bt:p':  j  ^sbtpp:  J    nrbpp- 


Pldb.  3  masc. 

^V^^T. 

A^W 

Tj^btpp-: 

^n^bpp"; 

nibtsp^ 

Imperatitb. 
SnfQ.   2  masc. 

^3bt2p 

...    .It 

!inbt:p 

^>m 

Putt  Preterite  or  Perfect. 

siNo.  3  masc.     ^Dbi[2p      Tjbpp       T]bpp       ibpp        nbtop 


HiPHiL  Preterite  ou  Perfect. 

siNQ.  3  masc.  ^sVp;:^  ?jb^t:pr!    T]b-ppn   ib^ppri     nVppn 


Veebs  with  Suffixes,  8  101. 


1  com. 


2  masc. 


Plural. 
2  fem. 


3  masc. 


^rnbt:p  — 


3  fem 


^:bt2)^         ubb'Q])         -jibpi^         dbtip  -jbtip 

^3nbt:ip       Dir^bt^ip       p.t;»bt:j:       Di^btiip       inbt^p 


Dtnbtip        :nbt:p 


D^nbt:p      rribw 


Drrbt:]: 

•jrnbpp 

Q^nbt:]^ 

r^f^i? 

Ji5^bt:p 

Dp.^btijp 

■|5^bt:p 

n^bt:p 

i^^^i? 

?.;^Fibt:p 

D^ifnbpp 

■,^nbt:p 

D?.^2bt:p 

"i^^rPi? 

D^ibpp 

l^ibpp 

^2??P)^ 

Dibtop 

l^-t^I? 

^)^Pr 

't^Pr 

iiDbtppM      DiDbt:]:':       l^.f^i?^       Q^^i?':        i??pp: 
^sbpp:  j 
iiD^bt^jp';        DD'ibt:p^       ]^fi^T'       ^^^^1?''.       l^^PPt 


D^^l? 


iiDbtip         nbbtop 


DbtDp         "jbtop 


!iDb^t2pn      Dib^tipn      -iVtspn     Db^t:pn      ib^tipn 


IV.  Pahadigm  of  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §  108. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAIj.     ] 

KAL  (fut.  0) 

Prrt. 
(Perk. 

3  m. 

"    T 

"^^53 

nr^yn 

T-brn 

pi" 

'3/. 

T     :  IT 

•^T-^^?- 

rriT^^n 

m""n 

2  m. 

T   :  -  T 

rT:>:D. 

T    :  -v:  IV 

T    :    -   t:   IT 

2/ 

:    :  -  T 

riT^js 

DTjyn 

:    :    -  t:  .T 

1  c. 

-n--;?:. 

""^T-^'n 

TiT-^n 

Phir 

3  C. 

:  IT 

^n':):?] 

^iriiyn 

:    r  IT 

2  m. 

Dri152? 

DFIT^J^D 

anT;:;ri 

Dn"52:Ti 

2/ 

l^T'?? 

■jnT;<3 

•,nTi^r; 

)   V    :    -  t:  it 

1  c. 

^5-'by 

^DTJg. 

r.TZ'jn 

i   -  t:  IT 

Ihfin. 

Absol 

T 

T    1" 

~^"n 

ta.«'«i,.l-» 

"'-•♦    1 

•  t:  it 

* 

Constr. 

-"t^ 

"'r?C! 

■i-"!:?n 

-t:  it 

FUT. 

(Impf.) 

3  W. 
3/. 

..    T  .■ 

T'2Sr\ 

-  t:it 

ihyn 

PI"' 

pt"^. 

2  w. 

■"^?:'^ 

••   T     J" 

■'''r?ID 

r2'jr\ 

pirr 

2/ 

^i"i:''n 

^1'2^T\ 

•   :  IT   •• 

^i^-!::5?n 

•    :  T    T 

"P.'^i^. 

1  c. 

itsin, 

-I'n-sii 

rtjys 

-  t:  it 

PI"^ 

Plur 

3  rn. 

^ri'2T 

*lT2y^ 

•  -1  r 

^r2T 

:  TIT 

"Pvi:. 

3/. 

^r:*^'?^ 

T    ;  ••  T   1" 

•^?"^3^^ 

•^r"^?.^ 

tI;  -  v:  IV 

2  m. 

^-•i5n 

^I'zyri 

^Ti2:'Fl 

^n'2'jr\ 

:     r    'T 

^PI"J^. 

2/ 

.1 

T    :   •    T  I- 

I^?"^.?^ 

n:-:b:r 

T     :    -  t:   IT 

riDpirn 

i 

1  c. 

rzv: 

-'DTj 

rtyj 

lty'2 

T-.ir 

pTFI]. 

Impkr 

2  m. 

ity 

••  T     I" 

-r?n 

pjn 

2/. 

'Yt? 

•   :  IT  ■• 

^T^^n 

wanting 

"fell 

Flur 

2  m. 

^nry 

iir-jri 

:  IT   " 

^"'"■?^n 

^P!" 

1 

2/ 

T   :       ■: 

1    IJ     '7J^»    1 

T    :   ••  T   r* 

ni"/Difn 

^'}tM 

Part. 

Act. 

1^35 

Tt)r2 

Pass. 

liny 

T 

T  .•:  V 

T  t:  IT 

Y.  Paradigm  op  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  § 

116. 

KAIi. 

NIPHAD. 

PIEL. 

POAL. 

UlTHPAEL. 

Pret.      3  m. 

bk-i 

bkriD 

'^^>. 

bs<3 

bj^Bnn 

(Peuf.)       ^ 
^               3/. 

nbj^-i 

nb^ro 

nbss 

nbi^b 

nb!j5rinn 

2  m. 

rbkj 

nbk.-3 

nbj<3 

nb«3 

T  ;    " 

mbjiiinn 

2/. 

nbkri 

nbji::iD 

r)^^5 

nbsb 

vf:kiT\r] 

1  c. 

^nbks 

^nbi^ro 

'r?<^?^ 

^nbi«-» 

■^nbkr^rn 

P^M>-.     3   C. 

^b>53 

^^vs:o 

^bv^3 

^bi^b 

"^^W^- 

2  m. 

Dribi«3 

Dnbj^r^D 

Dnbss 

Dpbi5":» 

DFibjiyn" 

2/. 

1^:'^^^ 

1^^^^"*? 

■|P)b«3 

-|F)b5?3 

•rib^5;ynn 

1  c. 

^Dbi^-i 

:   ~  T 

^Dbi?:? 

^^bsj^s 

il3b^3 

^DbN^nn 

Infin.  J6soZ. 

bii^a 

bbir.n 

bxs 

••   T 

Cows^r. 

bii3 

bx^n 

••  T       • 

b^5•i 

-^.5^n 

FuT.       3  m. 

^k's' 

bxii^ 

bxrr 

bkr 

bj^sn-'  J 

•*  T    ;  "  / 

(IMPF.)^^^ 

b.^^n 

b^i-in 

bk»n 

b^'jri 

^i<?nn 

2  m. 

bs:»n 

bsiin 

bs:»n 

bwSjn 

bii-inr 

2/ 

^bxjn 

^bj^^n 

^bi<:n 

^bs'jn 

^bi«-inn 

1  c. 

bi<:.i< 

b>5:ij« 

bi*:^ 

b«3!S$ 

b^Bn^5 

P/n?-.    3  m. 

^"^^.^^ 

^b^r^^ 

-:iT  • 

-:iT  : 

^b5^> 

^bs^-in^ 

-:iT    :    • 

3/ 

HDb^jn 

njb^<-.n 

nsbj^jp 

n^bs^bn 

T  :    -        ; 

rijb^rinn 

T  :  -   T    :     • 

2  «i. 

^bj?:n 

^b.v:*pi 

-IT    : 

^bui'^n 

^b.s^Bnn 

-;iT    ;     • 

2/ 

n:bk:n 

T  :    -  T    • 

n:bxjFi 

rijbkin 

T  :   ~       : 

n:bj5:inn 

1  c. 

bj^:;*? 

bN33 

••  T  • 

bi^ro 

"t; 

bi<:o 

^'^.^J^? 

IsiPEPv.    2  m. 

bks 

bx-ir; 

bk!i 

••  T 

b.^:.nn 

2/ 

^b^i-i 

^b^iBn 

^bs-i 

wanting 

•bsr^nn 

P/ttr.    2  m. 

^bi^-i 

^b^^r.n 

^bji-i 

:  ;T    ;      • 

2/. 

njbi^ii 

npbisBn 

r;:bi<3 

T  ;    ■  T 

n:b!;:»rn 

T  ;    -  T     ;      • 

Paet.    J^<?f. 

bN3 

bivP 

b^sn^j 

Pass. 

b\s5 

T 

bx:.: 

T      : 

VI. 

Paradigm  oi 

Laatkdh 

Guttural  Verbs,  §  123. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

HIPHIL. 

HIITIPABL. 

PUET. 

3  m. 

ni'jj 

nbiTD 

r^ir> 

n^bzn 

nbriTcn 

(PEliF. 

3/. 

nnbuD 

nnb-*r: 

nniin 

nn^birn 

nnbnirn 

2  m. 

nnb'jj 

nnbuiD 

nnbizj 

nnbTiin 

nnbp;rn 

2/. 

nnb'j: 

rnbiTD 

nnbuj 

nnb^n 

nnbn'an 

1  C. 

^nnbd 

^nnbtD 

^nnb^Jj 

•^nnbujn 

^nnbn-rn 

riur. 

3  c. 

:    rr 

^nb"^? 

iinbuj 

^n^b'^EH 

^inbrTrn 

2  »«. 

DFrb"^ 

Dn-bTiia 

DnnbTS 

Dririb'iTn 

Dri:^bru:n 

2/ 

iri^bii: 

■jnnb'^j 

]tr^-^ 

"|jnr;bTn 

■(i^inbnTijn 

1  c. 

^iDrbo: 

;  ~  T 

siDrib'vr: 

sisnbuj 

^Dnbirrj 

^iDnbn'jJn 
,  -  - .  , 

Infin. 

Absol. 

nib'jD 

~               T 

in'bcD 

^^'^ 

n^'^n 

( 

'Jonstr. 

r:b'j5 

nbisn 

~     T      • 

nbTD 

n^"bu;n 

nbn'CT 

Fdt. 

3  »n. 

nbia': 

nbuj'' 

nbia^ 

rry^^ 

nbrTiT^ 

(L&IPF.) 

3/ 

nbu:n 

nbujn 

nbtri 

D'b-^'^ 

ribriain 

2  m. 

nb'jpn 

nbujn 

nb'in 

n^b'jjn 

nbrriin 

2/. 

'nV^JTi 

^hbirn 

^nbirn 

^n^rdn 

^nbrrcn 

1  c. 

J^^"^^ 

nb-ijs 

nb-^rx 

n^b'i5< 

nbn-is 

Plur. 

3  m. 

^nb'oj': 

^fiblZD^ 

iinbiT": 

sin^b"^! 

^nbnaj" 

3/ 

niiriDaiPi 

T   :  -   T    •        T   :    -   -    : 

n"nb"irn 

n"bntn 

2  »». 

^nb'i-n 

^nb^rn 

:    IT     • 

^nbiri^ 

^n^bOT 

nnbr-jin 

2/ 

njMD'iTFi 

riDnb^n  HDnbirn 

T   :  -    T    .         T    :  -   -    : 

HDnb^rn 

nrnbriiip  i 

1  c. 

nbzD 

nb-i'D 

n^b'ij] 

nbnip? 

Imper. 

2  »». 

nb-j; 

T       " 

nb'jj 

nb'jDn 

rbrirn 

2/. 

^nbd 

^nbirn 

•TlblD 

^n^b'^u 

^libntn 

Plur. 

2  »n. 

^nbuj 

^nbTiin 

^nb^ 

iin^byjn 

^nbn-in 

•^z 

n:nbT2: 

T   :  -    : 

rijnb^n 

T  :  -   T    • 

n:nb^ 

T   :  -    - 

n:nb;i'n 

n:nbFnrn 

Part. 

Acf. 

nb'jj' 

nb^-^ 

n^buja 

nbriTs:: 

J 

^'as8. 

n^ibib 

T 

nb'jJD 

T    ;  ■ 

vn. 

Paeadigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  129 

! 

KAL. 

NlPHATi. 

HIPHIL,. 

HOPKAL. 

KAU 

Pret.      3  m. 

Ta;3 

^^3 

^^^n 

mri 

n 

(Pkef.)       ^ 
^           ^3/. 

T  ;rT 

nizJSD 

T  ;  • 

T       •       • 

T  :    \ 

M3n3 

2  m. 

T    :  -T 

T   ;  -• 

T    :  -    • 

r    :  -    \ 

T      -T 

a/. 

:    :  ~T 

niraa 

niTsn 

niran 

:    :  -   \ 

nn3 

1  e. 

^ni2:33 

^nidaD 

^pirin 

T'i^5 

P/Mr.    3  c. 

:rr 

^iz:3i3 

^TT^^n 

^3n3 

2  m. 

Dfnir52 

dnu??? 

Dpiirsn 

Drioian 

C3pir>? 

2/. 

l^'^^? 

1$^53 

l^^^^n 

ife^^n 

1^^? 

1    0. 

^Dirb 

iis-iisn 

ii3'i^iri 

il3h3 

Infin.  ^ftsoZ. 

T 

T      • 

mn 

^^r^ 

■jin3 

Cowsfr. 

nira 

"T      • 

t^hti 

nn 

FuT.        3  m. 

ujr 

•T   • 

^"^^ 

in: 

(I^PK.)     ^^^ 

irsn 

•T      • 

izj^an 

^iin 

'\^^ 

2  m. 

iiisn 

••T      • 

^^an 

iriin 

"pn 

2/. 

^bsn 

^Tzjjsn 

"^^BH 

"ijsn 

^irin 

1  c. 

^5^ 

ti3i< 

^^iii< 

iriii^ 

1^^ 

PZ«r.    3  m. 

siiir 

:iT  • 

siu:-'^ 

fe" 

siin^ 

3/. 

ns^sri 

T    :  "T    • 

nsT^ri 

(^sfern) 

2  m. 

^tjsr: 

^iii^^n 

^'i;3Fi 

^3Pin 

«/. 

T    :  -    ■ 

T    :  --T    • 

n3^iin 

T    ;  ••    - 

(risinn) 

1  c. 

IL'i] 

••T  " 

Ti;^a3 

123^3 

13^^ 

Imper.    2  m. 

Ilia 

■•T      • 

mri 

1^ 

2/. 

■nD'a 

^izj^iin 

wanting 

^SFl 

P^Mr.   2  m. 

^"i'a 

:iT    • 

^uj^n 

!13P 

2/. 

T   :  - 

•^?^^?n 

n3a.'^n 

(nsn) 

Part.  Act. 

Tziib 

^^hi2 

ir)3 

Pass. 

T 

T  • 

T      \ 

l^ns 

vm. 

Paradigm  of  Ayin 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

Tket.      3  w». 

~    T 

^0 

-T 

nnio 

(I'tRF.) 

3/ 

nn^D 

nno 

T    - 

T    -T 

nnnio 

T    ;       1 

2  m. 

(J?^i^) 

T                - 

ninc3 

T           ~ ; 

nnnio 

T   ;   - 

2/. 

^Pt^ 

niio 

nizcD 

nnnio 

:   1  - 

1  e. 

^riiiio 

^niioD 

^nnnio 

Plur.   3  c. 

!CQD 

:  IT 

sao 

iinnip 

2  m. 

(Djhnnc) 

Dfiinp 

nnincD 

t^nnnio 

2/. 

(1^7-?) 

"p'i^P 

■j^.incD 

",nnniD 

1  c. 

^Diiip 

iijiicD 

Ji:nnio 

Infin.  i46so?. 

niio 

T 

nb 

nibn 

nnio 

Constr. 

Dio 

nb 

^pn 

nnio 

Fdt.        3  W. 

nb; 

nb: 

:^?: 

'^%y^\ 

(iMl'F.) 

3/. 

Dtin 

nbn 

nbn 

nnioi^ 

2  m. 

T 

nbn 

nbn 

nnicn 

2/. 

•            T 

^asn 

'^nbn 

"inicn 

1  C. 

T 

n% 

np^ 

^biDi«^ 

Plur.    3  m. 

T 

iiis: 

^ib: 

^nic"; 

3/. 

nrncn 

T     V  •..  : 

riDnbn 

T   :        • 

nsnbn 

T   ;   -    • 

nrnnion 

T    ;   ••            ; 

2  m. 

iinbn 

i^isn 

^nbn 

^nion 

:      1     : 

2/. 

T     V  •.   : 

n:ibn 

T  : 

nsnbn 

T  :  -    • 

n:nnicn 

1  c; 

2b] 

T 

nb? 

nb? 

^nio: 

lUPER.    2   Wt. 

lb 

nbn 

nnio 

2/ 

^nb 

^nb- 

'b^i^ 

P^Mr.    2  m. 

1 

nb 

iinbn 

^nio 

2/ 

T 

^no 

n:nbn 

T    :    ■     • 

nrnnio 

Part.  ^Ici. 

I 

~b 

nnio-2 

Fas8. 

^ 

•GO 

T 

noD 

TT 

10 


Doubled  Veebs,  §  133. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAIj. 

HITHPABIi, 

PIEL. 

=i?D 

np^n 

niiincn 

rppD 

ns6n 

T    - 

nnnincn 

r  :       1    :    • 

T   :    :    • 

T               •     -1 

nnnincn 

n-c::D 

•     -! 

nnnirpn 

r^rPP? 

^nizipn 

^nniinpn 

'^rPPP 

^^on 

^no^n 

^ininon 

^DOiO 

D^inpn 

Dnnninon 

Drijcpp 

Tni:^cn 

■jnnnincn 

■jnpprp 

ii3i3cn 

^Dniinpn 

^Dppsp 

=^^^! 

■^P?? 

••      T 

nninon 

^P^'P 

ID'' 

■•r 

nor 

nninp: 

^P^PI 

nfcn 

••      T 

np^n 

nnipon 

^P?^Pi 

■•     T 

np^n 

sninpn 

■npppri 

''men 

•     ••     T 

^np^n 

^ininpn 

"PvP?!^ 

••     T 

np^5< 

siinpi]^ 

^P5P^, 

iinpr 

^nnino^ 

^ippP' 

nD"3Dn 

T     V  •    : 

n^nnircn 

rarcDcn 

••     T 

sisbn 

^nnincn 

^iprpn 

T     V  •    : 

riDniircn 

nDSbrcn 

T  :  •■  :   -    : 

30] 

•■T 

np^D 

^i'ir^v? 

^PPP? 

nbn 

niinpn 

■^y.^P 

•     ••     T 

-     T 

wanting 

^ip.pp  1 

T     V  .   -; 

nsnzinon 

n^rpPP 

^0^ 

T 

niino-a 

t(P9P53 

11 


IX.  Paradigm  op 

Ayin  Vav 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEIi. 

PUAIi. 

Pret.     3  m. 

Dt5 

n^ipD 

D-jip 
ni2^ip 

DiQip 

2  m. 

i^'tP 

nib^p3 

n7j7jip 

nriDip 

2/ 

^'rl^ 

nTb^p5 

^^^ip 

p'^^ip 

1  c. 

^I^'Tfe 

^^i'-'ip? 

^n7^?bip 

^n52i?ip 

Plur.   3  e. 

*»'JI? 

^7jipD 

si7b53ip 

^b7jip 

2  m. 

O^n^^P 

nhi7jip3 

Dh-:]^ip 

Dni27jip 

2/ 

feP 

"i^ii^jipD 

■jTirTsip 

li^'^'-^ip 

1  0. 

^D^jjb 

iiDii^^pD 

ii:53^ip 

siDa^Dip 

Infin.  ^ftso?. 

Dip 

Diprj 

Constr. 

n^p 

Dijsn 

DTJip 

FuT.       3  »». 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

nip': 
Dipn 

D^^ip^ 
DiDipri 

Bbip"; 

D7jipri 

2  »w. 

D^jbn 

fiipn 

Dt;ipri 

D7bipri 

2/ 

^52^pn 

''7;]ipr} 

"^^'ripPi 

"t7jipri 

1  C. 

D^pi< 

DIpX 

Dhips 

D7jipN!_ 

P?«r.    3  m. 

TJ^p; 

^7jip-: 

ii7b7;ip^ 

^^'rip^ 

3/. 

ns't-pn 

nr^ipn 

riDrhipn 

nr^bipn 

2  tW. 

^■^^.pn 

si7jipn 

^txpipri 

^7j7jipri 

«/ 

HD^i^^pn 

nD72ipn 

nD7j7jipn 

n:7j-;ipn 

1  e. 

D^pD 

Dip? 

I3'^ip? 

Di2ip3 

Imper.    2  w. 

D^p 

Dijsn 

D7jip 

2/ 

^5^^)b 

"'^ipn 

^'•37;2ip 

wanting 

Pi'«r.    2  m. 

il^^^p 

^7jipri 

ii7i7;ip 

2/ 

T     ; 

nrjipn 

T    :     1 

Hi'fbip 

Pabt.    ^cf. 

°l? 

D7jip;a 

Pass. 

D^ip 

DipD 

Di3ip7J 

12 


AND  A  YIN  YODH  VeEBS,  §  154. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAIi. 

HJTHPABIi. 

KAD. 

i=i'f?n 

Djb^n 

Dt:ipnn 

nn 

T 

^'^'i^^. 

n-bpn 

ni27^ipnn 

T   T 

K'^^v^. 

(n52p^n) 

p^^igipnn 

nnn     nih^^. 

niti^pn 

(rap^n) 

n:;7bipnn 

ri^^ 

-Tfihyn 

(^n::p^n) 

-r\/2i2yT\n 

^nnn     ^nin^n 

^■^'pn 

^:jj:^ri 

^b^iprin 

T                                           • 

uhrcyn 

(DF]-jp!in) 

Dri'::-;ipr\n 

Dnnn 

l^^'-^K 

(]tf^J^V) 

ina'^ipi^n 

■jns'i 

iiDib'pn 

(^D^jp^n) 

JiD^j^ipnn 

^Dnn 

Qfen 

ni-i        n^-] 

^tPr 

D'bipnn 

=i'1 

Qt<: 

Dp^^ 

D'^'ip'f;*^ 

•r 

D-jbn 

Dp^n 

Dt^ipnn 

•    T 

D^lbn 

Dp^n 

Dtiipnn 

•     T 

'^Ti^ 

^bp^n 

^b/^iprn 

^rnn 

^y.^ 

np^55 

Q^Ti?^ 

•    T 

ray- 

^^v 

^b?jipn: 

•T 

np^ibn 

(HD-^p^n) 

nD'^bipnn 

T   :  ■•    T 

ii7j^)br! 

^7bp^r) 

feiprn 

•     T 

T   :•••   T 

(HDrp^n) 

riDrbipnn 

T    :    ••    1      :    • 

HDnnn 

D^P3 

Dp^3 

Di]ipnD 

n^^3 

•t 

t=fen 

DiQipnn 

2-1 

"^^pn 

wanting 

^7j-;ipnn 

^T^. 

ii7j^j6n 

^:jriprn 

iQ^n 

T    :'••   T 

n37fjipnri 

(n^^i) 

Q't?"? 

ODipn^ 

T 

Dp^7:3 

n^-i 

13 


1 

X. 

Pakadigm  of  Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  §  144 

KAU 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAI,. 

Pret. 

3  m. 

niij^ 

niri] 

n^irin 

ni'^n 

"T 

(PlCRF. 

'3/. 

j-it::" 

T    :     1 

T          • 

niiT^n 

nijz^ 

2  m. 

T  :    - 

pairin 

rrc^n 

T\tbr 

2/ 

nz'jj^ 

nnii] 

rini:in 

nzir^n 

:    :    -T 

1  C. 

^nr^^ 

^nn':ri3 

^nz-iin 

^riu'ij^n 

riur. 

3  C. 

^ih'^io 

^i^izjin 

^n-oj^n 

2  m. 

nrii'i:": 

DfiniriD 

Dniizjin 

nnn-c^n 

Dnirn": 

2/. 

1^'^^^ 

iri^'^'i? 

IPi^^'iri 

■jm-i^n 

■^n-^n^ 

1  e. 

^DnU513 

iiDnirin 

^D3"j:^n 

Infin.  Absol 

T 

ms'in 

T 

Constr, 

^'^. 

^^iin 

n'^irin 

nuj^n 

^i": 

FUT. 

3  m. 

^■^.■: 

"T  • 

n-izjS"' 

n-i:r 

iiji"''^ 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

^^f) 

••  T      • 

n'iziin 

mii^in 

iri-^n 

2  m. 

niijri 

nir-in 

n^iiiin 

Dibin 

^n^n 

2/. 

^i'in 

^'k'^^^ 

•^s^-jjin 

^iiirin 

^irzTi 

1  C. 

^"^:^ 

^"^:5^ 

n^'lr'i^ 

iiij^i^ 

^i^si 

Flur. 

3  W. 

^i'l;^ 

ii'i>v 

SQ^TIJi^ 

"t-t^^ 

ii-iar;: 

3/ 

T   :    ••  T    • 

riDZ-iJ^n 

1        T     :  -       • 

2  wi. 

^i'in 

^n^ic'in 

^n-^^n 

^■izjn-n 

2/ 

T    ;          •• 

n:n-cw 

T  :    •• 

T   :    - 

T    :    ~ 

1  c. 

-^5 

■•T  • 

n^izJiD 

2u:^D 

ilJi^D 

Imi'ER. 

2  m. 

^^ 

-•T       • 

mbin 

iai"j 

2/ 

^iir 

^n^ipin 

-•^zjn^ 

Flur. 

2  m. 

iiip 

^n^itiin 

wanting 

iiizjn: 

2/. 

T    ;    ■• 

^5r^ll" 

T    ; 

T  :  -  : 

Part. 

Acfc 

nii;"' 

a^i?j 

TZJL" 

Pass. 

T 

T 

T 

T 

u 


XI.  Paradigm  op  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs, 

§  164.        1 

KAL 

NIPPIAIj. 

piKh. 

HIPHIL. 

HITHPAEL.     ! 

Pret.    3  m. 
(Perf.) 

T     T 

tik-i-^ 

T       ■     ;     • 

2  m. 

T        T    r 

T       ■•    ;  • 

T           ••     • 

nj<:i-::n 

T               •     -      »       • 

2/ 

T     T 

ni<r:3D 

f>^22;7j 

J^^^'-n 

riS,ir2T\ri 

1  c. 

•            T      T 

.. . . 

T^'4^ 

^mi^-cri 

^n«k"^inn 

Plur.   3  c. 

sis::'^ 

fc5;5 

^ikTQ 

^i<±i2r} 

^kp2m 

2  m. 

Dihi^rj 

C3^.!^^'^? 

tt:^-l'2 

tihi^^'cTi 

tt'^'2:2m 

2/. 

W^'^ 

■p.^^^? 

"ft!^^52 

■jn^^r^r^ 

"|inwS'4"2nri 

1  e. 

^'ii^tZ 

^5^^"t? 

^135^22?^ 

^^i^^'^n 

^D^^rnn 

Infin.  Absol. 

T 

aaro^ 

&<ik/J 

s^fe^n 

Constr. 

^tq 

^%??1 

^^■^ 

j^^rin 

Kii'^nn 

FuT.     3  m. 

T    ;  • 

••      T  • 

^^■^^ 

^"^'r' 

^k'2'n^. 

(iMPr.)^^^ 

••     T      • 

..  -  J 

i^^ii^an 

mi2T\T] 

2  m. 

5^i2-:n 

••     T      • 

fc^k'^n 

t^^ran 

^k2T\7\ 

2/ 

'^'•^r^ 

^kii2r\ 

"i^^^tn 

^^'i'-rli! 

^N;2252rin 

1  c. 

T    :  V 

J^^'rSS! 

5^^itl5$ 

^^^r>^ 

Plur.  3  m. 

^xr;: 

:   IT  • 

^^iS^j^ 

^^^^i?^:: 

^kl'2T)^, 

3/- 

T        X"  :     ' 

r;3^d"/2n 

ns^^sirn 

nibd/jn 

ti^m^hn 

2  m. 

'^kp2r\ 

^^^::^n 

si^i2i:an 

!ijj^^i;"^n 

^k^'2t\T} 

2/. 

T      v   :    • 

T           V      T       • 

T       V  "    : 

T        V    ;    ~ 

r]':m12t^^\ 

1  c. 

T    :  • 

•*     T  • 

^k'^'?_ 

i5^^i:s]D 

^kl2T\2 

Imper.  2  m. 

T   : 

•■      T      • 

i!(k'2 

^^^^n 

iXkl2T\ri 

2/. 

^krq 

'"ki'an 

^k-112 

^i^'ii"rn 

^k-i^T\ri 

Plur.   2  m. 

^'kT2 

^kiizri 

^kl'2 

^i5<^i2rn 

^kll-2T)T} 

2/ 

T          V      ;               T          V     T     • 

T]:mi2 

n3^<ran 

T       V    :    ~ 

npsj^k^ainn 

Past.  Act. 

^^^ 

^a^^^a 

i<"2"ai5 

j^fi-jn^j 

Pass. 

iitrCll2 

i^l-2^ 

15 


r 

XII. 

Paradigm 

OP  Lamedh 

KAIi. 

NIPHAIi. 

PIEL. 

Pret.      3  m. 

-^3 

r^r-i; 

T    • 

(Pebf.) 

^              3/. 

nnbs 

nn't^? 

2  m. 

T       •    T 

T     •*  ;  • 

T        '     • 

2/ 

•    T 

^"Y-^^ 

n-'ba 

1  e. 

•        •   T 

■^t^'fe? 

T'^3 

P/wr.   3  ff. 

T 

^'5:o 

ii^a 

2  m. 

Dn;bs 

cin;^33 

C5i^;>3 

2/ 

Tb'^^ 

"R'^^<3 

",n;b3 

1  c. 

'    T 

^2"'^^? 

^]^35 

Infin.  ^6so/. 

ribs 

riv^D 

rrbs 

Co»wfr. 

ni^B 

nibsn 

nibs 

FuT.       3  m. 

"-'^t 

ni3^ 

nbs^ 

(Lmpf.)   ^^^ 

n^:*r} 

-/   T       • 

♦"ib:ri 

2  m. 

♦i^^p} 

n>3n 

nb^n 

2/. 

^^^ri 

•     T       • 

''barn 

1  c. 

n53i< 

V  T    ••• 

nbjS 

PZwr.    3  m. 

^: 

r  • 

^b: 

3/ 

T    V :    • 

T       V  T       • 

ns'fep 

2  m. 

^:3ri 

T      • 

'4n 

2/ 

♦^r?^^ 

T     V  r     • 

ns-b^n 

1  c. 

n33D 

•-•  r  • 

•^^^'? 

Imper.    2  m. 

n?!3 

'•   T      • 

nb? 

2/. 

-53 

■'bsn 

4 

P/ur.    2  m. 

^y^ 

T      • 

^b? 

2/ 

T      ■.•    ; 

riD-'bsn 

T      V   T     • 

s^r!^ 

Part.    Act 

^)> 

Pass. 

4-^ 

T 

f^??"'? 

He  Vekbs,  § 

170. 

PUAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL, 

-IB 

T  ;    • 

T  :    T 

T  -    :     • 

nn53 

ninbjn 

nnbjH 

T  :  :    T 

nnbsnn 

T  :  "    :     • 

KM 

T     •  :    • 

T    •• :    T 

T     •  -    :    • 

n'|3 

n^lisn 

•■  :    T 

n^bBnn 

'rila 

T'^^»n 

•     •  ;    T 

''ri^b^nn 

^%3 

*i^?n 

:    T 

^bsnn 

Dt'^S 

Cln^b:n 

fi^.'b^n 

th-bBlnn 

iD'V.? 

ir!'-?n 

■jh^br^n 

■jn^bBnn 

^=i3 

siD^bsn 

sirb^n 

•■  :    T 

iirbsnn 

(n^O 

5^??:?n 

••  :    T 

(rrb^^n) 

n-'b 

riibsn 

(nibjri) 

nibsnn 

n|:^ 

s^^^- 

nb3^ 

V  :T 

nb3^: 

^^^^ 

J^b^n 

nbsnn 

^ 

n^^n 

rib:n 

nbsnn 

l^s? 

^^?F) 

^b:*n 

"bBnn 

"I^*? 

n^3fc$ 

nb3j^ 

V  :  T 

»^b3n^5 

fe;, 

^V^ 

:  r 

^Bn: 

™1?i^ 

^5i^^ 

nrb:;n 

T     V  ;     T 

riD^b^nn 

=i33n 

'ii^^n 

^b^n 

^banp 

nj'wn 

^5l?^ 

nrb:;n 

T     V  :     T 

np-'bsnn 

"l<= 

^^?5 

nb:; 

J^bsnD 

J^???n 

*^i'^^^ 

wanting 

'^^n 

wanting 

^bsnn 

^b?n 

iibann 

^5i?n 

?^5i5t:n 

^^?^ 

n5:53 

nb:;53 

17 


Xin.  Paradigm  of  the 


Class  I. 
1.  Monosyllables  and  Segholates;  Abstract  Nouns. 

Vowel  with  Perfect  Roots  i^g  ^  ijg       «jl^      "jj  ^  >^^  J^^^ 

lit.  Radical  2d. Radical     Segholates  Guttural 


M^5      "ar*      r\)t     -^^'n  p5a      b^b  i^'n 

cjp;^'      P1^    ^'^^     t-.tjnc)  n:!n   n±i  ^ps 


tpirp     biiir     Y?^n     '^^ii  • 
b^i23i  nna. 

^^  prosthetic:  3>il5:^^,  ni^ii,  t:iinsi,  btbnx. 
N3  unessential  long  vowel:  "iiT!J< ,  ]^'hi^. 

2    Long  ultimate  with  pretonic  ~  or  -^. 
Adjectives:  «,  e,  0  intrans.  "bp,  "ibp,  'IDl. 
t,  u  passive  ^^n^ ,  ir^nD ,  b^bp. 
f::? :  "q^ ,  ori ,  nb.        'ly  and  ^3? :  ^n ,  ^T ,  p^';] ,  nit3. 
nb:  nr,nx3,^p5,i5|05^- 

a,  0  quahties  existing:  ^Hj,  pTH,  ^i'Sp,  p'^n'l. 
e  „        becoming:  biS,  pin,  1^)^,  pn'i. 

0  ^permanent,  as  figure  tl'^n^j,  b"d:?,  nia,  p'sby,  npJ. 

colour  DIN,  n'ln,  piv,  "in^,  nniD. 

character  D'-^J^J,  pilh^^,  Tnt3,  irilp. 
e  variable  states  of  body  C,?^,  iJ^tl^,  n5>'i ,  V^iy^. 

mind  biiij ,  yiM ,  inn ,  j^V ,  Tb:j. 
Concrete  Nouns:  niir  M^),  't^,  n?jD,  rri:2,  ninS. 
Names  of  seasons:  n^iisj,  CfDS,  n^isn,  nr;7,  ir^in,  n-^kg. 

3.  Long  immutable  penult,  -;-  or  —  in  ultimate. 

Agents:  bbp,  Dhin,  bi'^UJ,  -^s,  bb^H. 
Occupations:  npin,  bin,  ^iin,  niv,  cfiis,  inb. 

18 


FOEMATION  OF  NOXINS,  §  183. 


Class  II.    Eeduplicated. 

Intensive:  U5^n,  njpG,  p^"iii2,  ninri,  •)^3n,  D^nn. 
Daghesh  resolved:  ^'^-^\^,  ^"i^'p,  ^i^'?- 

yy:  nhnn,  ip^ip,  nl^rtn,  n3t:bt:,  nbsbs. 

do.  vowel  inserted  biblS ,  ^3?i^^ ,  bjbibp. 

do.  consonant  softened  IDli) ,  "pbp^p ,  133 ,  n;^"id. 

■^3:  D^innnn,  n^^?^r^^:2(^).       rib:  ni^5D. 
Occupations:  n3j<,  nh,  jj'n,  "j^'n,  iiinn,  nnt3. 
Defects:  Dbi5,  "zis,  tin,  1-t:?,  iijp^,  nos,  nip. 
Abstracts:  mblij,  n^^£3,  D^^bTIj.       i^:  "innn,  D^^ipy^z:. 
Keduplicate  3d.  Radical:  with  a  r\'h''^Q,  ■jis'n,  bb'^Jj^. 
^  Ti;^3,  Tino.    5  bbriD,  nn^D.    %  y^i:?:,?,  ^^iiSB. 
Red.  two  Radicals:  nip-npB,  niiibzn,  biu^i:?. 

-   I  '-  :  '         T  :    I  -:  '      ••     t  -: 

repetition  ^spiH,  pbpbn,  bihbns,  sTCSp^J;. 
diminutives  of  colour  DT.:"lS,  pipi%  irTiniS. 

Class  III.    With  Prefixes. 
&5 :  superlative  nbs ,  nipx ,  "^n^^^. 
53 :  agent  b^^WIQ ,  bb'^2 ,  participles  with  53, 

instrument  nr£53,  Tbb'-?,  'niiaa. 

place  or  time  r±V2,  y^^^,  "jilbr ,  mbVJ. 

action  or  condition  n3t2":2,  nbL)2,  fi^l12,  ^"115^53. 

object  or  subject  bix"^ ,  TOT7J ,  ^^:I7^,  pn^^J.    ■ 
''I  names  pni?",  nn2';  appellatives  ti^pb",  %'nii\ 
fi:  abstracts  ri^i^ri,  H/b^'^r!;  concrete  *ilnir>,  T^jbri. 
Class  IV.     With  Affixes.    Denominatives, 

■ji  or  "j^:  adjectives  liinx,  "jri'irnD,  i^b^. 

abstracts  lii^:?,  '\V^^..,  ]'^^^^.,  tl?^- 
augmentative  "jilh^ir;  diminutive  ']'ilI3''Nl. 

1 ,  D  or  b :  "ns ,  Dbc ,  Q^nn ,  b-^^3. 

". :  relation  ^iny,  ^to";,  ^iis:?,  ^ipi. 

"_:  ^Tn,  ^i^^.^b^bj-'ys. 

19 


^-^— 

XIV. 

Paradigm  of  thf, 

kiiif? 

covert 

1. 

drought 

boy 

Smo. 

ahs. 

^^^ 

■^r^fa 

V 

n?3 

const 

tn 

nno 

^T 

■^^i 

Pldb 

.  aba. 

•  T  t: 

D^n>3 

const. 

^5f^ 

^^'^'0 

••   :  T 

^53 

SrNQ. 

I.  suf. 

^3b7J 

^■nnp 

^inn 

*^i??. 

gr.  suf. 

C)i3b'^ 

ci3";f;^P 

Dbn-in 

■■•    :    ;  T 

D5"]>'3 

Plub 

I.  suf. 

"^^p 

-  T  t: 

^n>"3 

gr.  suf. 

D^'5r^ 

Drnnp 

V     ~  :  T 

*But  T]-}?3 

feet 

knees 

loins 

shoes 

Du. 

aba. 

o:^?^ 

D"3":4 

D^3n7j 

D^bn 

const 

^)^ 

2. 

^3n:j 

^b^3 

lord      vengeance            cloud 

old  man 

heart 

Sing. 

ahs. 

"P15< 

□pD 

p. 

tl 

nib 

T    " 

const 

I'ii^ 

t^fes 

n 

tl 

nib 

Plde. 

aba. 

DilNI 

Tap:        D-DD5 

•  It  :                         •  T  -! 

0^121 

D^nnb 

•   T  ; 

comt 

i^^. 

^i:p? 

i.\ii 

^^^) 

Sma. 

I.  suf. 

^v^, 

^'^1?? 

^5r4 

^nnb 

gr.  suf 

D5:ns<     Db-^i^D 

^^.^^) 

Plub. 

I.  suf. 

i^^ 

TjpD 

iPl 

-nnb 

gr.  suf. 

... .. ,  -.      ...  ..). . 

O^'lil?! 

nrnnb 

great 

strong 

dry           l": 

►'  Hiph.  part 

SiNO. 

maae. 

biia 

T 

Pl^. 

^5: 

^y.'^. 

fern. 

nbiia 

^un 

T  ••  : 

ni2^p:a 

Plub. 

masc. 

n^bnsk 

^tn 

n^ujn'; 

DTi]-p:j 

fern. 

nib'-3 

ripjn 

ni'jjn^ 

nib^p:j 

20 


Declension  of  Masculine  Nouns 

§221  A 

• 

perpetuity 

deed 

1. 

death 

olive 

sickness 

n:2i 

b^h 

V    T 

n:i 

-bn 

•  t: 

nsD 

b?s 

ni7j 

f^'! 

-bn 

n^n:2D 

n^ni7j 

D^^7. 

D^^bn 

•T  t: 

^ri^? 

^by-B 

^ni:a 

^h^T 

-bn 

••  T  t: 

^^2?? 

*^b2?S 

^ni7j 

^n^T 

^^bn 

"  :    T 

c^iri^?? 

DDb:?© 

Drri'j 

Din"'! 

DD^bn 

~  t: 

^bys 

^ni-j 

''^'I 

-bn 

~  T  t: 

Drb:'"© 

♦But  Tjbra 

V      "       " 

V       "•  1" 

DD^^bn 

V    "IT  t: 

noon 

eyes 

cheeks 

•  -   TJIT 

D^iinb 
"^nb 

••    T  t 

3. 

4. 

(rib) 

tree 

name 

potter 

seal 

work 

field 

F 

Q^ 

^i" 

T 

•^^?^ 

V     T 

F 

nisi-' 

Dhin 

r\by)2 

•^i'^ 

^'^? 

D^nsz'-' 

•      T 

n^VjTQ 

•     T 

^25 

''i:!''' 

i2T\n 

^'•(1:^)2 

""i'^ 

'^? 

*^^^ 

*^^^^ 

•      T      1 

^ll]'J-2 

•  —.  1- 

•      T 

Db:sy 

Din^:'-' 

Qi-ann 

''^? 

■I'nnj'i 

-     T 

^'bT2 

-     T 

2^^^^ 

*But  T(0'S 

V     "-:  1- 

dead 

Kal  act.  part. 

Niph.  part. 

ri'b  part. 

fair 

f^^ 

^^P 

^^ap? 

nba 

ns^ 

T    ~ 

nba 

r 

TT 

n-ir\^2 

ti'bpp 

D^bt:p] 

D^ba 

D-k* 

nih-^ 

nibipp 

nibt:pD 

niba 

T 

21 


XV.  Paradigm  op  Masculine 

Nouns  (continued). 

5  (ih 

and  tlie  like). 

camel 

garden 

goat 

statute 

SiNQ.   ab8. 

T  T 

|5 

T? 

ph 

con$t. 

b^a 

15 

T? 

pn 

Plur.  abb. 

D^^aa 

D^i5 

ci't:? 

D'pri 

const. 

"f'^ 

i? 

^:t? 

^)5^. 

SiNQ.    I.  suf. 

i'-?3i 

^i? 

i? 

t^^. 

gr.  suf. 

DiV-r^ 

Oi.25 

Di-T? 

Di):n 

Plde.  /.  suf. 

i"r^ 

^h 

^•i? 

"P" 

gr.  suf 

c^i^^l 

cii'ia 

dd;:T? 

Drpn 

small 

much  or  many        deep 

fresh 

SiNo.  masc. 

m 

nn 

p-^? 

•     T 

fern. 

nrL:p 

T   — 

^^ 

Plur.  masc. 

D^st:]^ 

D-in 

^'Pt? 

cii":t? 

fern. 

nisi:)^ 

ninn 

f^'^p^? 

•  s 

Nouns 
horse 

WITH  Suffixes. 

horses                  mare 

mares 

Als. 

So.  C^D 

PL.    D-C^O 

So.     mC^D 

T 

PL.  nii^o 

Const. 

D^O 

"C^D 

nc^o 

nic^o 

SixG.    1  c.    my 

^P^D 

^6^0 

•     T         1 

^nic^o 

2  m.  thy 

TjC^O 

irjt^D. 

?jrciD 

^"hic^D 

2/    thy 

tlD^D 

Tj-C^O 

^^^^9 

TCnic^D 

8  tn.  his 

ic^iD 

T 

T         1 

T                    1 

3/    her 

r 

T  r       1 

M-f;)io^o 

Plub.  1  c.     our 

^JC^D 

^rc^o 

••    T         1 

^;-riiD^o 

2  m.  your 

DD*5^p 

d5;c^d 

Dirc^D 

ornic^o 

2  /.    your 

ti;?^? 

k;?^P 

12f??^9 

"rnic^o 

3  tn.  their 

Di:io 

D"^^^9 

T    T         1 

1 

3/    their 

p.D 

'!l'v^? 

1    T    T         1 

1     V        "        1 

22 


XVI.  Paradigm  of 

Feminine  No 

[JNS,   §    221  B. 

1 

queen 

1 

covert 

desert 

girl 

Sing.    abs. 

-|b7J 

T    :    • 

T    ;    T 

rn?3 

const. 

n:Db7^ 

n^pp 

-    :  T 

nn^3 

Plur.  abs. 

T     • 

nii^n 

T  ; 

const. 

nisba 

ninrp 

:  T 

Sing.    /.  sicf. 

T3^'^ 

"f^'^t^'P 

■   T   :  T 

gr.  suf. 

Dbrsb-j 

D?r?"!PP 

V    :    "    ;  T 

^^"??- 

Pldr.  I.  suf. 

^ihir^b^ 

^i^innp 

^fiinnn 

"^"i^?;] 

gr.  suf. 

Di^nbb72 
.. , .  - 

Drn'";np 

D5"nh~n 

V        "1       IT 

sides 

louble  embroidery 

Du.      abs. 

D-rDI^ 

°t-.r. 

const. 

'^T^ 

2. 

3. 

counsel 

vengeance 

ciy 

sucker 

Sing.   ahf. 

T    •• 

ni2)DD 

-pn 

•t  t: 

^I^r' 

const. 

^%^, 

r^^I?? 

np?T 

^K-"^^ 

Plur.  abs. 

nii:? 

ni53iD3 

nip^T 

ripDi-; 

const. 

nii::^ 

nibpD 

nip3?T 

nip3i^ 

Sing.    I.  suf. 

"^^? 

'P^P? 

^hpyj. 

'r}jp3i^ 

gr.  suf. 

D^P^? 

D^.I^'-Sp? 

DinprT 

Dpnpji'; 

I'LUR.    I.    suf 

"ni:2? 

^niTjpD 

^nlp?] 

^nipr 

gr.  suf. 

lips 

DD-nbp3 

DDTp:?T 

twofold  sloth 

Do.      abs. 

D';hs'"ffl 

D'nb:;? 

const. 

V.^^ 

23 


(m^  u^^-  r'^^^ "      i"  5  ^  y /"^^  ^ 

";  '     ; 

'   <C-»      /'-  /.^^«^."0         /'-<'»^  /^^(   1^     l^^f  "H^i^l     , 


Date  Due 

fAClLTY 

■■  3  8  '4? 

DAr  22  4; 

\ 

Xcx 

W  3     *4! 

5 

f) 

■■■:■■  r^^^W^" 


K:ii^ 


l«nv^- 


PJ4564  .G79  1892 

A  grammar  of  the  Hebrew  language. 

Princeton  Theological  Seminary-Speer  Library 


1    1012  00076  3112 


